2022 Scrra Standard Specifications
Uploaded by
Bryan Garcia2022 Scrra Standard Specifications
Uploaded by
Bryan GarciaSCRRA
STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS
FINAL
February 2022
Design Criteria i February 2022
SCRRA
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGES ISSUED
NO. DATE
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 13 Work Covered by the Contract Documents 3 02.2022
01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Referenced Standards 16 02.2022
01 11 16 Work by SCRRA 4 05.2022
01 14 00 Work Restrictions 11 02.2022
01 14 16 Coordination With SCRRA 5 02.2022
01 14 19 Coordination with Utilities 6 02.2022
01 21 00 Allowances 3 02.2022
01 22 00 Unit Prices 2 02.2022
01 22 05 Lump-Sum Prices 1 02.2022
01 23 00 Options 2 02.2022
01 23 50 Time-Related Overhead 4 05.2022
01 24 13 Value Engineering Change Proposals (VECP) 3 02.2022
01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 5 02.2022
01 26 14 Request for Information 3 02.2022
01 29 73 Schedule of Values 4 02.2022
01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 7 02.2022
01 31 19 Partnering 1 02.2022
01 31 99 Period of Performance (2 Step NTP) 5 02.2022
01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule 15 02.2022
01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 4 02.2022
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 17 02.2022
01 35 15 Maintenance and Protection of Railroad Traffic 2 02.2022
01 35 23 Site Safety Requirements 6 02.2022
01 35 44 Environmental Safety and Health Program 5 05.2022
01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures 15 02.2022
01 40 00 Quality Requirements 13 02.2022
01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements 19 02.2022
01 55 26 Maintenance and Protection of Roadway Traffic 3 02.2022
01 56 37 Worksite Security Requirements 3 02.2022
01 56 38 Bird Protection 2 02.2022
01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection 8 02.2022
01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls 5 02.2022
01 60 00 Product Requirements 4 02.2022
01 64 00 SCRRA Furnished Material and Equipment 2 02.2022
01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls 12 02.2022
01 71 23 Field Engineering 4 02.2022
01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal 3 02.2022
01 77 00 Substantial Completion 5 02.2022
01 77 19 Project Closeout 3 02.2022
01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 8 02.2022
01 78 36 Warranties and Guarantees 4 02.2022
01 78 39 Project Record Documents 4 02.2022
01 79 00 Demonstration and Training 9 02.2022
SCRRA Standard Specifications TOC - 1 UPDATED: May 2022
SCRRA
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGES ISSUED
NO. DATE
01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements 4 02.2022
Division 03 – Concrete
03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel 13 02.2022
03 31 00 Structural Concrete 25 02.2022
Division 04 – Masonry
04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 8 02.2022
04 22 10 Environmental Paving 10 02.2022
Division 05 - Metals
05 12 23 Structural Steel 9 02.2022
05 52 00 Hand Rails and Railing 7 02.2022
05 52 10 Pedestrian Swing Gates 4 02.2022
05 53 00 Metal Grating 6 02.2022
05 55 00 Miscellaneous Metals 6 02.2022
Division 09 – Finishes
09 61 50 Detectable Warning Tactile 9 02.2022
09 90 00 Painting and Coating 5 02.2022
09 96 23 Graffiti-Resistant Coating 3 02.2022
Division 10 – Specialties
10 14 53 Roadway Signage 10 02.2022
10 14 55 Railroad Signage 4 02.2022
Division 12 – Furnishings
12 67 23 Benches and Trash Containers 3 02.2022
Division 26 – Electrical
26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 10 02.2022
26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground 12 02.2022
26 05 50 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination 10 02.2022
26 06 00 Grounding and Bonding 10 02.2022
26 07 10 Seismic Controls for Electric Works 7 02.2022
26 07 50 Electrical Identification 4 02.2022
26 08 00 Electrical Testing 3 02.2022
26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage 15 02.2022
26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes 12 02.2022
26 14 00 Wiring Devices 5 02.2022
26 28 00 Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices 8 02.2022
26 28 16 Safety Switches 6 02.2022
26 28 90 Transient Voltage Suppression 10 02.2022
26 41 00 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 5 02.2022
26 42 00 Enclosed Controllers 8 02.2022
26 44 10 Switchboards 9 02.2022
26 44 20 Service Pedestals and Panelboards 7 02.2022
26 46 00 Dry Type Transformers (600V and Less) 4 02.2022
26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting 12 02.2022
Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security
28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS) 23 02.2022
SCRRA Standard Specifications TOC - 2 UPDATED: May 2022
SCRRA
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGES ISSUED
NO. DATE
28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS) 34 02.2022
Division 29 – Customer Information System (CIS)
29 00 00 Summary of Customer Information System (CIS) 5 02.2022
Work
29 00 20 Standards, Abbreviations, and Definitions for CIS 4 02.2022
29 10 60 Power Distribution Testing and Commissioning 3 02.2022
29 20 20 Communications Services 19 02.2022
29 20 60 System Testing and Commissioning 2 02.2022
Division 31 - Earthwork
31 11 00 Site Clearing 6 02.2022
31 11 50 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching 9 02.2022
31 20 00 Earthwork 27 02.2022
31 20 50 Removal and Disposal of Contaminated Soils 15 05.2022
31 50 00 Excavation Support 11 02.2022
Division 32 – Exterior Improvements
32 12 00 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement 8 02.2022
32 16 00 Curbs, Gutters, and Sidewalks 3 02.2022
32 17 23 Pavement Markings 3 02.2022
32 31 13 Chain Link Fencing and Gates 8 02.2022
32 31 16 Welded Wire Fencing and Gates 4 02.2022
32 31 19 Tubular Steel Fencing and Gates 5 02.2022
32 31 32 Vehicular Gate Operator System 10 02.2022
32 32 16 Gravity Block Retaining Walls 5 02.2022
32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls 21 02.2022
32 80 00 Irrigation System 10 02.2022
32 90 00 Landscaping 6 02.2022
32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling and 18 02.2022
Seeding
Division 33 – Utilities
33 05 23 Steel Casing 7 02.2022
33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe 17 02.2022
33 46 00 Underdrains 5 02.2022
Division 34 – Transportation
Track Materials
34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail (CWR) 25 02.2022
34 11 15 Other Track Materials (OTM) 9 02.2022
34 11 23 Special Trackwork 9 02.2022
34 11 26 Ballast 6 02.2022
34 11 27 Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base 3 02.2022
34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties 30 02.2022
34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties 13 02.2022
34 11 36 Elastic Rail Fasteners 8 02.2022
34 11 40 Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels 7 02.2022
Railroad Signals
SCRRA Standard Specifications TOC - 3 UPDATED: May 2022
SCRRA
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGES ISSUED
NO. DATE
34 42 00 General Signal Requirements 18 02.2022
34 42 10 Coordination with SCRRA Procurement Contractor 2 02.2022
34 42 16 Signal Wires and Cables 9 02.2022
34 42 18 Conduits and Pull Boxes 7 02.2022
34 42 25 Signal Fiber Network 25 02.2022
34 42 38 Interlocking Controls 6 02.2022
34 42 40 Solid-State Coded Track Circuits 5 02.2022
34 42 42 Signal Layout, Structures, and Foundations 7 02.2022
34 42 43 Electric Switch Lock Layouts 4 02.2022
34 42 44 Relays 5 02.2022
34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses 15 02.2022
34 42 48 Power Switch and Lock Movement 5 02.2022
34 42 50 Switch Circuit Controller 5 02.2022
34 42 52 Rectifiers, Batteries, and Battery Charging 4 02.2022
Equipment
34 42 54 Rail Bonding 3 02.2022
34 42 56 Signal Grounding 4 02.2022
34 42 58 Signal System Testing 13 02.2022
34 42 60 Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products 9 02.2022
34 42 62 Service Meters 4 02.2022
34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems 13 02.2022
34 42 66 Dragging Equipment Detector Systems 3 02.2022
34 42 70 Wayside Signal Assemblies 7 02.2022
34 42 75 Positive Train Control Wayside Equipment 6 02.2022
Railroad Communications
34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements 14 02.2022
34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials, and 10 02.2022
Methods
34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter 8 02.2022
34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable 11 02.2022
34 44 50 Customer Information Systems 11 02.2022
34 44 70 Wide Area Network 14 02.2022
34 44 95 Data Radio Network 9 02.2022
Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
34 71 50 Highway-Rail Grade Crossings 9 02.2022
Track Construction
34 72 00 Trackwork 18 02.2022
34 72 20 Track Shifting, Relocation, and Resurfacing 8 02.2022
34 72 30 Field Welding Rail 7 02.2022
34 72 40 Track Collector Pan System 4 02.2022
Railroad Bridges
34 80 11 Stone Revetment (Riprap) 9 02.2022
34 80 21 Piling 19 02.2022
34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles 27 02.2022
SCRRA Standard Specifications TOC - 4 UPDATED: May 2022
SCRRA
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGES ISSUED
NO. DATE
34 80 23 Subdrainage System for Railroad Bridges and 8 02.2022
Retaining Walls
34 80 24 Augercast Pile Headwall and Wingwall 9 02.2022
34 80 31 Bridge Deck Drainage System 5 02.2022
34 80 32 Adhered Elastomeric Waterproofing for Railroad 8 02.2022
Bridges
34 80 33 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) for Track and Bridges 6 02.2022
34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete for Railroad 11 02.2022
Bridges
34 80 51 Structural Steel for Railroad Bridges 16 02.2022
34 80 52 Metal Fabrications for Railroad Bridges 13 02.2022
34 80 53 Steel Handrails for Railroad Bridges 8 02.2022
34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coating for Bridges 25 02.2022
SCRRA Standard Specifications TOC - 5 UPDATED: May 2022
SECTION 01 11 13
WORK COVERED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This section summarizes requirements and provisions for the Contractor’s execution of
the Work under this Contract.
1.02 DESCRIPTION
Refer to the Project Specifications for a summary of the Work. The general intent of the
Contract, Specifications, plans, and all other Contract Documents and provisions thereo4f
is that the Contractor shall:
A. Furnish all tools, qualified labor, materials, equipment, qualified superintendence
and all services, other incidentals, assurances and guarantees, assumptions of
risk, and responsibility for the performance of the Work as set forth in the Contract
Documents unless otherwise specifically provided.
B. Begin Work promptly and proceed expeditiously and continuously without
cessation or shutdown of Work unless otherwise specifically approved in writing
by the Authority, or directed by the Contract.
C. Perform, complete, and make ready for its intended purpose, within the times
specified, including additional times provided for certain conditions, the Work or
parts thereof covered by the Contract, all in accordance with plans, specifications,
and any addendum thereto and such direction or instructions as the Authority may
give to supplement the plans and specifications. The Contractor shall retain sole
responsibility and expense for Quality Control of their work products.
D. The Work of the Project requires that the Authority and all its Contractors maintain
an active working railroad signal and highway warning system in accordance with
Federal regulations and CPUC orders at all times. The Contractor, shall integrate,
coordinate, and stage the work in order to ensure that the active railroad signal
and highway warning systems are maintained.
E. Any construction staging plans or details are not meant to be contradictory to the
requirements set forth in the contract documents. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor to schedule and coordinate the construction activities at each site, using
the Site- Specific Work Plan (SSWP) process. Tracks may be taken out of service
for planned activities through the SSWP process. The Contractor shall incorporate
into its SSWP the necessary Authority provided signal maintenance support. No
red or other restrictive signals or signal-related train bulletins shall be allowed
outside of the approved work windows and as approved in the SSWP (see also
Section 01 14 00 “Work Restrictions”).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 13 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 13 Work Covered by the Contract Documents
1.03 INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The intent of the Plans and Specifications is to prescribe the details for the
construction and completion of the Work that the Contractor undertakes to perform
in accordance with the terms of the Contract. Where the Plans or Specifications
describe portions of the Work in general terms, but not complete detail, it is
understood that only commonly accepted industry practice is to prevail. Unless
otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and incidentals, and perform all the Work involved in executing the
Contract in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.
B. The Authority will determine whether the Work has been completed in accordance
with the Contract, Plans, Specifications and reference Specifications. The
Authority will decide all questions that may arise as to the quality or acceptability
of materials furnished and Work performed, and regarding the interpretation of the
Plans, Specifications, and reference Specifications.
C. Plans, Standard Specifications, and Project Specific Specifications are essential
parts of the Contract, and a requirement indicated in one is binding as though
indicated in all. They are intended to be cooperative and to describe and provide
for the complete Work. If there is a conflict between documents the most stringent
applies.
D. Words and abbreviations that have well-known technical or trade meanings are
used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.
E. The word "Furnish" or the word "Install" or the word "Perform" or the word "Provide"
or the word "Supply," or any combination or similar directive or usage thereof, shall
mean furnishing and incorporating in the Work including all necessary labor,
materials, equipment, and everything necessary to perform the Work indicated,
unless specifically limited in the context used.
F. The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections, parts, and
paragraphs, and the arrangement of the Plans, shall not control the Contractor in
dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to
be performed by any trade. Study and compare the Contract Documents and
immediately report to the Authority any error, inconsistency, or omission that may
be discovered. The Contractor shall be liable to the Authority for any damage
resulting from any such unreported errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the
Contract Documents.
G. The Specifications may vary in form, format and style. Some specification sections
are written in varying degrees of streamlined or declarative style and some sections
may be relatively narrative by comparison. Omissions of such words and phrases
as "the Contractor shall," "in conformity with," "as shown," or "as specified" are
intentional in streamlined sections. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied
by inference. Similar types of provisions may appear in various parts of a section
or articles within a part depending on the format of the section. The Contractor shall
not take advantage of any variation of form, format or style in making claims for
extra Work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 13 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 13 Work Covered by the Contract Documents
H. The cross referencing of specification sections under the subparagraph heading
"Related Requirements” and elsewhere within each specification section is
provided as an aid and convenience to the Contractor. The Contractor shall not
rely on the cross referencing provided and shall be responsible to coordinate the
entire Work under the Contract Documents and provide a complete Project
whether or not the cross referencing is provided in each section or whether or not
the c ross referencing is complete.
I. The Work herein covered is to be completed in accordance with the Specifications,
the accompanying plans, and such instructions or directions as the Authority may
give to supplement Plans and Specifications. Wherever the words "directed,"
"permitted," "approved," "acceptable," "satisfactory to," or similar words or phrases
occur in the Contract Documents, they shall be understood to be functions of the
Authority.
J. The Authority shall not be responsible for and shall not have control or charge over
the acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their agents or
employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work.
K. The word “Vendor” used in the Material Specifications shall mean the Contractor.
1.04 REFERENCE MATERIAL
Reference Specifications or Standards referred to in the plans, Standard Specifications,
or Project Specific Specifications shall be the most recent version in effect as of the bid
due date of this Contract. Where referenced standards refer to the “Specifications,” this
shall mean Standard Specifications, the Contract Drawings, and the Project Specific
Specifications of this Contract. Where referenced standards refer to the “special
provisions or conditions,” this shall mean the Contract Drawings or the Specifications of
this Contract. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining all reference material at its own
expense, and for making itself familiar with the requirements therein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 11 13
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 13 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
SECTION 01 11 15
DEFINITION OF TERMS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section provides definition of terms, abbreviations and reference standards cited in the
Contract Documents. The following definitions supplement definitions provided throughout
the Contract Documents including General Conditions Section 2.
1.02 DEFINITION OF TERMS
A. Wherever in the Specifications and other Contract Documents, the following terms
and abbreviations or pronouns in place of them, are used, the intent and meaning shall
be interpreted as provided in this section unless the context otherwise requires.
1. Active Track: Any track within the Operating System on which trains and/or on-
track equipment operate or may potentially operate. All tracks shall be
considered by the Contractor to be Active unless otherwise instructed by the
Authority.
2. Adjacent Track: a controlled or non-controlled track whose track center is
spaced less than 25 feet from the track center of the occupied track.
3. Adjusted Rail Laying Temperature: The actual average rail temperature
achieved at the time of rail installation.
4. Amtrak: The current Authority Contractor for the train and engineer service.
The National Railroad Passenger Corporation (Amtrak) also is the nationwide
intercity passenger service. Amtrak’s Surfliner trains operate over the River,
Ventura, and Orange Subdivisions.
5. Authority: The Authority is the Southern California Regional Rail Authority
(SCRRA), a five-county joint powers authority, created pursuant to California
Public Utilities Code Section 130255 and California Government Code
Sections 6500 et seq., to build and operate the “METROLINK” commuter train
system. The five-county member agencies are: Los Angeles County
Metropolitan Transportation Authority (LACMTA), Orange County
Transportation Authority (OCTA), Riverside County Transportation
Commission (RCTC), San Bernardino County Transportation Authority
(SBCTA), and Ventura County Transportation Commission (VCTC).
6. Automatic Block Signals: A signaling system where the track is broken up into
segments called “blocks,” and the presence of a train on a given block will
activate signals preventing other trains from entering that block, except as
prescribed by the General Operating Rules.
7. Auxiliary Track: Any track not otherwise specified that directly connects to any
main track, siding or industrial lead where cars or locomotives are left standing
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
8. Bad Order: A defective rail car or any other rail equipment, track or structure,
which is in need of mechanical attention or repair.
9. Ballast: Material selected for placement on the roadbed for the purpose of
holding the track in line and at surface.
10. Centralized Traffic Control: A signaling system where a Train Dispatcher
monitors the movements of all trains over a large territory on a display panel,
and remotely controls the throwing of switches and the clearing of signals. CTC
is a block system that uses block signal indications to authorize train
movements.
11. Clearance Diagram: An outline or cross section drawing representing the
minimum clearance that must be maintained from the Authority’s track to allow
for the operation of trains and rail mounted equipment. Specific limiting
dimensions have been established and are shown on standard clearance
diagrams known as “plates.”
12. Clearance Point: the location closest to a switch where it is safe for equipment,
and a person riding the side of equipment unless prohibited, to pass equipment
on an adjacent track. Away from turnouts, the clearance point is designated as
13 feet center to center of two tracks.
13. Coach: A passenger carrying rail car, usually with a center aisle and two rows
of twin seats.
14. Common Carrier: One who holds himself out to the general public to transport
property and passengers, intrastate, interstate or in foreign commerce for
compensation. Common carriers must operate from one point to another over
routes or in territory prescribed by the Surface Transportation Board
(interstate) and by a Public Service or Public Utilities Commission.
15. Conductor (Train Operations): The individual in charge of the train crew.
16. Contaminated Soils: All material excavated from the project site that meets the
definition of contamination, regardless of material, gradation or other material
property classifications.
17. Continuous Welded Rail (CWR): Rail length that is 400 feet or longer. Rail
installed as CWR, remains CWR, regardless of whether a joint or plug is
installed into the rail at a later time.
18. Contract Documents: The complete set of documents, describing the specific
Work to be performed by the Contractor as part of the Contract.
19. Coupler: A device located at both ends of all cars and locomotives in a
standard location and configuration to provide a means for connecting one rail
vehicle to another.
20. Creosote: A tar distillate produced by high-temperature carbonization of
bituminous coal and used in wood treatment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
21. Crossing Protection: Signs, signals, aspects, and other objects governing
movement of trains, track equipment, and highway vehicles over railroad
crossings or grade crossings.
22. Cross Level: The difference in elevation between the tops of both rails
measured along a line perpendicular to the track centerline.
23. Crossover: Two turnouts in which the track between the frogs is arranged to
form a continuous passage between two adjacent and generally parallel tracks.
24. Cross Tie: The transverse member of the track structure to which the rails are
spiked or otherwise fastened to provide proper gage and to cushion, distribute,
and transmit the stresses of traffic through the ballast to the roadbed.
25. Current of Traffic: The movement of trains on a main track, in one direction,
specified by the General Operating Rules.
26. Departure Track: One of the tracks in a rail yard on which outgoing cars are
placed.
27. Derail: A safety device attached to one rail of a siding or storage track, that will
cause derailment of a car, engine or on track machinery, in order to prevent
unintended and undesired movement to other tracks.
28. Derailment: Anytime the wheels of a rail car engine or on track machinery
come off the head of the rail.
29. Dispatcher: Person stationed in the Operations Control Center who monitors
and directs movement of trains.
30. Dynamic Stabilizer: The dynamic stabilizer is a machine that sets the track in
horizontal oscillation while applying a static vertical load at the same time.
Dynamic track stabilization is to achieve improved anchoring of the track in the
ballast bed. After dynamic stabilization, the condition of the track offers greater
operating safety and enables travel at the maximum subdivision speed on
newly laid track or after full track maintenance.
31. Emergency: Any sudden generally unforeseen occurrence such as a fire, flood,
storm, earthquake, epidemic, civil disorder or other natural and/or man-made
disaster that has the potential to adversely affect the safety of life, the Work,
and/or adjacent property; to interrupt contracts essential to the provision of
railroad passenger and/or freight service; and/or to cause catastrophic failure
of revenue-producing equipment and/or facilities.
32. Employee-in-Charge (EIC): When used in these specifications, Roadway
Worker in Charge (RWIC) will replace all locations where Employee-In-Charge
(EIC) is stated. See RWIC
33. Engineer: The designer of the contract documents.
34. Engineman: The driver or operator of a locomotive. Also called a locomotive
engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
35. Embankment (fill): the material placed on a prepared surface
36. Excavation (Cut): the material removed to expose the ground surface upon
which the roadbed, embankment fills, or other proposed improvements, will be
placed.
37. Federal Agencies: Whenever, in the Contract Documents, reference is made
to any Federal agency or officer, such reference shall be deemed made to any
agency or officer succeeding, in accordance with law, to the powers, duties,
jurisdiction and authority of the agency or officer mentioned.
38. Field Side: The side of rail opposite the gage side or on the outside of the
running surface of any rail.
39. Field Weld: A weld joining two rails together after rails are installed in track.
40. Foul: A condition of placement of personnel, material, or equipment in such a
proximity to a railroad track that the individual or equipment could be struck by
a moving train or on track equipment or in case is within eight (8) feet of the
field side of the nearest running rail.
41. Guard Rail: A rail or other structure laid parallel with the running rails of a track
to prevent wheels from being derailed; or to hold wheels in correct alignment
to prevent their flanges from striking the points of turnout or diamond crossing
or the points of switches. A rail or other structure laid parallel with the running
rails of a track to keep derailed wheels adjacent to running rails.
42. Insulated Switch: A switch in which the fixtures, principally the gage plates and
the switch rods, connecting or reaching from one rail to the opposite rail, are
provided with insulation so that the electric track circuit will not be shunted.
43. Interlocking: An arrangement of signals and signal appliances so
interconnected that their movements must succeed each other in proper
sequence and for which interlocking rules are in effect. It may be operated
manually or automatically.
44. Job Briefing: A meeting among all of the employees who are involved or will
be involved in a particular task or a job at the same work site. The briefing must
be conducted before conducting any task and/or any employee fouls the track.
45. Ladder Track: A track connecting successively the body tracks of a yard.
46. Lead Track: An extended track connecting to a series of yard tracks
47. Live Track: See Active Track.
48. Locomotive: A self-propelled unit of equipment, or combination of units
operated under a single control, and designed solely for moving other
equipment.
49. Maintenance of Way Operating Rules (MOWOR): When used in these
specifications, MOWOR will replace SCRRA General Code of Operating
Rules.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
50. Maintenance-of-Way Safety Rules (MOWSR): When used in these
specifications, SCRRA Maintenance-of-Way Safety Rules (MOWSR) will
replace all locations where SCRRA Maintenance-of-Way Safety Instructions is
stated. If a particular section of the old MOWSI was called out, Contractor shall
review the new MOWSR for the updated section reference.
51. Main Track: A term referring to the primary or most heavily used tracks of a
railroad. A track extending through yards and between stations, upon which
the operation of trains is controlled and authorized by the Train Dispatcher.
Note that sidings on Authority property are operated under the same rules as
the Main Track(s).
52. Milepost: Designated location(s) along the main and branch lines normally
sequentially one mile apart and indicated by nearby numbered sign
corresponding to the “mile” location.
53. Operating Envelope: An imaginary line, measured 20 feet horizontally from the
rail on the track on which trains or “on-track” equipment operate or may
potentially operate. The Operating Envelope also includes the width and length
of any active station platform. This imaginary pair of lines, which define the
outside boundaries of the Operating Envelope, extend vertically up and down
infinitely.
54. Operating System: Includes but is not limited to the tracks on which trains and
on-track equipment operate or may potentially operate, and in addition any
facilities closely related to the operation of the railroad system including signal
and communication masts, bridges, poles, cables, and houses, track bridges,
tunnels, culverts, grade crossings and station platforms.”
55. Overexcavation: Removal of material beyond the outermost limits of the
proposed improvements or embankment fills to replace poor quality native
material in order to establish competent subgrade. See “Subgrade
Preparation”.
56. Passing Track: A track connected to the main track for meeting or passing
trains. Today this is called a siding.
57. Preferred Rail Laying Temperature: The temperature that the rail is to be
installed at, or adjusted to, in order to balance the thermal expansion and
contraction forces for optimum track maintenance practices. The Preferred Rail
Laying Temperature (PRLT) is defined in the SCRRA Track Maintenance
Manual.
58. Qualified: A designation by the Authority of personnel who have demonstrated
an understanding of a specific subject matter through oral interview and/or
attainment of a score of at least 85% on a written test. Testing will be
conducted by the Authority or its designee. Personnel required to be qualified
by these Specifications must achieve this designation within 45 days after
Limited NTP.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
59. Quality Assurance (QA): The process by which the Authority elects to monitor
and assure that it receives proper construction related documentation from the
Contractor. QA procedures measure the setting of schedules for the receipt
and review of documentation and the quality of the information contained within
the documentation.
60. Quality Control (QC): The process by which the Authority receives
documentation from the Contractor that proves that the Contractor is providing
the contractually mandated services, such as training, testing and inspection.
The Contractor must show evidence of internal procedures demonstrating how
he will perform these mandated functions and submit documentation that QC
verifications have been completed. QC is the responsibility of the Contractor.
61. Rail: In track, a rolled steel shape, commonly a T-section, designed to be laid
end to end in two parallel lines on crossties or other suitable supports to form
a track for railway rolling stock.
62. Rail Anchor: A device attached to the base of a rail bearing against a crosstie
to prevent the rail from moving longitudinally under traffic.
63. Rail Joint: A fastening designed to unite the abutting ends of contiguous rails.
Often referred to as angle bars or joint bars. When rails of different sections
are joined, a compromise rail joint is used.
64. Railroad Operators: Any passenger or freight related railroad companies,
including Southern California Regional Rail Authority (SCRRA), also referred
to as Metrolink, BNSF Railway Company (BNSF), Union Pacific Railroad (UP),
the National Railroad Passenger Corporation (Amtrak), or any railroad
operating over the SCRRA track(s).
65. Rail Section: Designates and describes a specific size and shape of steel cast
and rolled into railroad rail. The rail mills identify the different shapes and types
of rails by code numbers, which typically indicate the nominal weight,
measured in pounds per yard (3 lineal feet of rail). As example: 136-pound RE
section.
66. Relay Rails: Rails taken up from tracks where formerly used, suitable for
relaying in other tracks.
67. Railroad Tie: The transverse member of the track structure to which the rails
are spiked or otherwise fastened to provide proper gage and to cushion,
distribute, and transmit the stresses of traffic through the ballast to the
roadbed. Also referred herein as a crosstie.
68. Relocate: Change the location, position or station of an item through removal
from existing location and reinstallation of existing equipment to new location.
Relocation may involve installation of new connections or accessories.
69. Restricted Speed: A speed that allows stopping within half the range of vision
short of: Trains, Engine, Railroad Car, Maintenance of Way Equipment, stop
signal, or derail or switch not properly lined.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
70. Reverse Curve: Adjoining or nearby curves on a track that turn in opposite
directions.
71. Right-of-Way: The real property, inclusive of all estates and interests therein,
that is necessary for ownership and operation of the Project. Right-Of-Way, as
the term is used in the Contract, specifically excludes:
a. Utility easements outside of SCRRA ROW and,
b. Any temporary easements or other real property interests which the
Contractor deems necessary or advisable in connection with
construction of the Project or Relocations.
72. Roadbed: The foundation upon which the ballast, ties and rails of a railroad
are laid.
73. Roadway Maintenance Machine: Any device which is powered by any means
of energy other than hand power which is being used on or near railroad track
for maintenance, repair, construction or inspection of track, bridges, roadway,
signal, communications or electric traction systems. Roadway maintenance
machines may have road or rail wheels or may be stationary.
74. Roadway Worker: Any employee of Authority or the Contractor to the Authority,
whose duties include inspection, construction, maintenance l or repair of
railroad track, bridges, roadway, signal and communications4 systems,
roadway facilities or roadway machinery within the Authority right of way.
75. Roadway Worker in Charge (RWIC): The Roadway Worker in Charge
designated by the Authority to provide train protection for one or more work
groups as per the SCRRA On-Track Safety Manual for Roadway Workers.
76. Roadway Worker On-Track Safety Manual (or Instructions): When used in
these specifications, SCRRA On-Track Safety Manual for Roadway Workers
(OTSM) and Roadway Worker Protection (RWP) Safety Manual will replace all
locations where SCRRA Roadway Worker On-Track Safety Manual (or
Instructions) is stated. If a particular section of the old Roadway Worker On-
Track Safety Manual (or Instructions) was called out, Contractor shall review
the new OTSM & RWP manuals for the updated section reference.
77. Salvage: To save any removed item. The salvaged item shall be reused in the
contract or delivered and stockpiled for the Authority as specified in the
Contract Documents.
78. Shoofly: A temporary detour track to bypass an obstruction or construction site.
79. Site Specific Work Plan (SSWP): A program, plan, and schedule prepared and
submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Authority that accurately
describes and illustrates the manner in which Work within the Operating
Envelope will be accomplished, the impacts on any elements of the Operating
System and the manner in which Work will be accomplished with the Authority
allotted Work Windows.
80. Side Track: A track auxiliary to the main track.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
81. Siding: A track auxiliary to the main track for meeting or passing trains. See
“Passing Track”.
82. Special Trackwork: Any trackwork consisting of more than two rails and ties.
Examples are turnouts, switches and diamond crossings.
83. Specifications: When this document makes reference to “These
Specifications”, or to “Site Specific Specifications”, or to “Project
Specifications”, or to “Project Specific Specifications”, these terms shall be
taken to mean the Project Specifications that describe, in detail, the products,
materials, performance and administrative requirements, to execute the work
shown in the Contract Documents.
84. Spur Track: As distinguished from a Side Track, a Spur Track is of indefinite
length, extending out from the main line.
85. Standard Gage: The standard distance between rails of most North American
railroads, being 4’ 8-1/2“ measured between the inside gauge faces of the rail
heads, 5/8 inch down from the running surface.
86. Storage Track: A track on which cars are placed when awaiting disposition or
when not in service.
87. Stub Track: A form of sidetrack connected to a running track at one end only
and usually protected at the end by some form of bumping post or other solid
obstruction.
88. Subballast: Any material spread on the finished subgrade of the roadbed below
the ballast to provide better drainage, prevent upheaval by frost, and better
distribute the load over the roadbed.
89. Subgrade: The finished surface of the roadbed below the ballast and track.
90. Subgrade Preparation: Preparing the earth surface upon which the subballast
and roadbed or other proposed improvements will be placed.
91. Subgroup Coordinator: The Subgroup Coordinator assists the RWIC by
overseeing a subgroup of 10+ workers are in a different area or if workers are
spread out. The Subgroup Coordinator must have a job safety briefing with the
RWIC before any member of the subgroup fouls the track and each time the
condition change. The Subgroup Coordinator must use the information
received during the job safety briefing with the RWIC to job brief each member
of the subgroup. The Subgroup Coordinator must job brief each member of the
subgroup before fouling the track and each time conditions change.
92. Superelevation: The intentional difference in elevation between the top of the
outer rail and the top of the inner rail measured along a line perpendicular to
the track centerline.
93. Switch: A track structure with movable rails to divert rolling stock from one
track to another.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
94. Switch Angle: The angle included between the gauge lines of the switch rail at
its point and the stock rail.
95. Switching: Switching service consists of moving cars from one track to another
track or to different positions on the same track. It includes the moving of cars
in the make-up and break-up of trains; also moving of cars on industrial
switching tracks or interchange tracks, and the general movement of cars
within terminals or at junctions.
96. Tamper: A power-driven machine for compacting ballast under ties.
97. Tangent: Any straight portion of a railway alignment. Tangent track means a
section of track that connects two curves.
98. Ticket Vending Device (TVD): a vending machine that produces paper or
electronic tickets or recharges a stored-value card or smart card or the user’s
mobile wallet. Also referred to as a Ticket Vending Machine (TVM).
99. Timetable: A publication with instructions on train, engine, or equipment
movement. It also contains other essential information.
100. Track: An assembly of rails, ties, rail fastenings, hardware and roadbed over
which cars, locomotives and trains are moved and the space between the rails
and space of not less than four feet outside of each rail.
101. Track Maintenance Manual: When used in these specifications, SCRRA Track
Maintenance Manual (TMM) will replace all locations where SCRRA Track
Maintenance and Engineering Instructions is stated. If a particular section of
the old TMEI was called out, Contractor shall review the new Track
Maintenance Manual for the updated section reference.
102. Track/Ballast Stabilizer: A machine that stabilizes the track by inserting
controlled and accurate force directly into the track structure.
103. Truck: The complete assembly of parts, including wheels, axles, bearings, side
frames, bolster, brake, rigging, springs and all associated connecting
components, the function of which is to provide support, mobility and guidance
to the railroad car.
104. Train: An engine or more than one engine coupled, with or without cars
displaying markers. For practical purposes, a train is a group of coupled cars
hauled by a locomotive.
105. Turnout: An arrangement of a switch and a frog with closure rails by means of
which rolling stock may be diverted from one track to another. Also referred to
as “track switch.”
106. Walkway: A portion of the railroad embankment or ballast section shaped4 and
finished to conform to SCRRA ES2001, ES2002, and CPUC requirements for
train employee walking surfaces.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
107. Watchman: An Authority or employee contracted with the Authority who has
been annually trained and Qualified to provide warning to Roadway Workers
of approaching trains or on-track equipment.
108. Wheel: The cast or forged steel cylindrical element that rolls on the rail carries
the weight and provides guidance for rail vehicles. Railway wheels are semi-
permanently mounted in pairs on steel axles and are designed with flanges
and a tapered tread to provide for operation on track of a specific gage. The
wheel also serves as a brake drum on cars with on-tread brakes.
109. Wheel Set: The term used to describe a pair of wheels mounted on an axle.
110. Work: The Work, as stated in this document shall be taken to mean the total
effort put forth by the Contractor to construct the improvements shown on the
Contract Documents.
111. Work Window: A period of time with specific beginning and ending time and
durations for which the track, signals, bridges and other Operating System
elements within the Operating Envelope are temporarily removed4 from
service or modified in some other manner and train and other operations
suspended or modified to allow construction or maintenance work to occur.
Written Authority from the Authority and an approved Site Specific Work Plan
(SSWP) is required before the Contractor is granted a Work Window. The
Contractor’s Work Window shall have specific geographic limits, which are
defined in the approved SSWP. Modifications or suspension of train and on-
track equipment movements resulting from a Work Window involves written
changes to the Railroad’s Rules of Train and On-Track Equipment Operations.
These written changes are known as Track Bulletins and are categorized as
follows:
112. Exclusive Track Window: An approved Work Window in which no train
movements (except the Contractor or Authority work trains or equipment under
control of the RWIC, per the SSWP) will operate on any track within the
window limits. The Contractor may dismantle, remove, reconstruct, or
otherwise obstruct tracks within the limits of such a window. This Work may be
protected by track out of service, track and time limits, or by Form B Track
Bulletin.
a. Limited Track Window: An approved Work Window for some, but not
all tracks within a general Work area (e.g. one track remains for
operation of trains, other tracks are available for the Contractor’s
Work). Movement of trains over the track(s) of a Limited Track Window
is under the control of the RWIC who will not authorize train movement
unless and until the Contractor personnel and equipment are clear of
the operating track. The Contractor may remove, construct, or obstruct
only the track designated by the SSWP and must arrange the Work so
that trains can operate without delay on the remaining track(s) in the
Work area. This Work may be protected by track out of service, track
and time, or by Form B Track Bulletin.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
b. “Form B” Work Window: An approved Work Window in which
passenger, freight and all other trains and on-track equipment
movements can be prohibited from entering the defined limits of a
segment of track. The “Form B” Work Window does not allow the
Contractor to remove from service or modify the tracks, signals,
bridges, stations or other elements of the Operating System in a
manner, which will delay or in any way affect the safe operation of the
trains. The “Form B” Work Window allows the Contractor the ability to
enter the Operating Envelope and perform construction activities
subject to the conditions above. A Roadway Worker in
Charge/Flagman from the Authority will exercise strict control over the
Contractor’s construction activities in conjunction with Roadway
Worker Protection requirements, to assure that the Contractor’s
activities do not delay or impact train service.
c. Track and Time: An approved Work Window in which the Dispatcher
will authorize men and equipment to occupy a track or tracks within
limits for a certain time period. The Dispatcher authority shall include
authority number, track designation, limits and time. Movements may
be made in either direction within the specified limits until the limited
are released.
113. Work Train: A train engaged in services for the Authority for which no revenue
is received, such as trains distributing ballast, bridge material or other material
and supplies for maintenance or for additions and improvements.
114. Yard: A system of tracks within defined limits provided for the making up of
trains, storing of cars and other similar purposes.
115. Yard Lead: An extended track connecting either end of a yard with the main
track.
116. Yardmaster: The person designated as being in charge of all operations in a
yard.
117. Yard Office: A building in terminal yards to provide office accommodations for
the yardmaster and office personnel.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. Association Abbreviations:
AA Aluminum Association
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AIEE American Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AAN American Association of Nurserymen
AAR Association of American Railroads
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
ADC Air Diffusion Council
AGA American Gas Association
AGC Associated General Contractors
AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute
AI Asphalt Institute
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association, Inc.
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APA American Plywood Association
APWA American Public Works Association
AREMA. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way
Association
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWPA American Wood Protection Agency
AWPB American Wood Preservers Bureau
AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BNSF Burlington Northern & Santa Fe Railway
Caltrans California Department of Transportation
CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers
CCR California Code of Regulations (formerly California
Administrative Code)
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
CISPI Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSI Construction Specifications Institute
CS Commercial Standard, US Department of Commerce
CTIOA Ceramic Tile Institute of America
DHI Door and Hardware Institute
DOD Department of Defense (leading symbol
ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
Fed Spec Federal Specification or Standard
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association
FHWA Federal Highway Administration
FIA Factory Insurance Association
FSFRA Federal Specifications Federal Railway Administration
GAFTA Gypsum Association Federal Transit Authority
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
IEEEICBO Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers International
Conference of Building Officials
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
IESIEEE Illuminating Engineering Society Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers
ISOIES International Standards Organization Illuminating Engineering
Society
MIAISO Masonry Institute of America International Standards
Organization
MILMIA Military Specification or Standard (leading symbol)Masonry
Institute of America
MLMAMIL Metal Lath Manufacturers Association Military Specification or
Standard (leading symbol)
ML/SFAMLMA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association Metal Lath Manufacturers
Association
MSML/SFA Military Specifications Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NBSMS National Bureau of Standards (now NIST, q.v.)Military
Specifications
NECNBS National Electrical Code National Bureau of Standards (now
NIST, q.v.)
NEMANEC National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Electrical
Code
NFCNEMA National Fire Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPANFC National Fire Protection Association National Fire Code
NISTNFPA National Institute of Standards and Technology (formerly NBS,
q.v.)National Fire Protection Association
NLMANIST National Lumber Manufacturers Association National Institute of
Standards and Technology (formerly NBS,
q.v.)
NPDESNLMA National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System National Lumber
Manufacturers Association
OSHANPDES Occupational Safety and Health Administration National Pollutant
Discharge Elimination System
PCAOSHA Portland cement Association Occupational Safety and Health
Administration
PSPCA Product Standard, US Department of Commerce Portland
cement Association
RISPS Redwood Inspection Service Product Standard, US Department
of Commerce
SDISAE Steel Deck Institute Society of Automotive Engineers
SDI Steel Deck Institute
SFM State Fire Marshal
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
SJI Steel Joist Institute
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
SPR Simplified Practice Recommendations, U.S. Dept. of
Commerce
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
SSPWC Standard Specifications and Plans for Public Works
Construction
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
TCA Tile Council of America
UBC Uniform Building Code
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WIC Woodwork Institute of California
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
B. Railroad, Agency, and Organization Abbreviations:
ACTA Alameda Corridor Transportation Authority4
Amtrak/LOSSA San Diego – San Luis Obispo Rail Corridor
N
BNSF Burlington Northern Santa Fe Railway
LACMTA or Los Angeles County Metropolitan Transportation Authority
MTA or
METRO
NCTD North County Transit District
OCTA Orange County Transportation Authority
RCTC Riverside County Transportation Commission
SBCTA San Bernardino County Transportation Authority
SCRRA Southern California Regional Rail Authority
SDNR San Diego Northern Railway
UPRR Union Pacific Railroad
VCTC Ventura County Transportation Authority4
C. Text Abbreviations:
AL Allowance
AMP or amp Ampere
AWG American Wire Gage
CDF Controlled Density Fill
CF Cubic foot or feet
CFM or cfm Cubic feet per minute
CY Cubic Yard
EA Each
FPM or fpm Feet per minute
FPS or fps Feet per second
Ft. or ' Feet
GPM or gpm Gallons per minute
in. or " Inches
Kip or kip thousand pounds force
Ksi or ksi thousand pounds per square inch
Ksf or ksf thousand pounds per square foot
KV or kV Kilovolt
KVA or kva Kilovolt amperes
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
KW or kW Kilowatt
KWH or kwh Kilowatt hour
LBS Pounds
LF or lf linear foot or feet
LS Lump Sum
MPH or mph Miles per hour
PCF or pcf Pounds per cubic foot
PSF or psf Pounds per square foot
PSI or psi Pounds per square inch
SF or sf Square foot or feet
SY or sy Square yard
TF Track Feet
TON Ton
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards,
the Contractor shall comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid
requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. The Contractor shall conform to reference standards by date of issue current as of
date of Agreement between the Authority and the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall maintain the latest copy of applicable sections of standards at
jobsite during submittals, planning, and progress of specific Work, until substantial
completion, and shall make the standards available for Engineer's use upon request.
D. Should specified Reference Standards (those standards listed in the Schedule of
References in addition to those codes and regulations specified elsewhere in the
Specifications) conflict with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall request
clarification from the Authority before proceeding. If conflict exists, the Specification
as determined by the Authority shall apply.
1.05 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES
A. AAR Association of American Railroads
B. ACI American Concrete Institute
C. AGC Association of General Contractors
D. ANSI American National Standards Institute
E. AREMA American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way
Association (Formerly AREA - American Railway Engineering
Association) All AREA standards and Manuals not superseded by
AREMA standards will remain in effect.
F. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 11 15 Definition of Terms and Reference Standards
G. AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association
H. CALOSHA California Office of Safety and Health Administration
I. CALTRANS State of California Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications and Standard Plans
J. CA MUTCD California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
K. CPUC California Public Utilities Commission General Orders
L. CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
M. FHWA Federal Highway Administration
N. FRA Federal Railroad Administration
O. MSHA Mine Safety and Health Administration
P. NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
Q. OSHA Office of Safety and Health Administration
R. RTA Railway Tie Association
S. TMM Southern California Regional Rail Authority – Track Maintenance
Manual
T. SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction
U. USDOT United States Department of Transportation
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 11 15
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 15 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 11 16
WORK BY SCRRA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This section describes the Authority furnished labor necessary to support the Contractor’s
construction operations. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to furnish any and all other
labor, materials, and equipment required to complete the work set forth in the Contract
Documents, specifically excepting those Authority furnished resources described below
and in the Specifications. Authority furnished materials and equipment is shown in Section
01 64 00, SCRRA Furnished Material & Equipment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions
B. Section 01 14 16, Coordination with SCRRA
C. Section 01 64 00, SCRRA Furnished Material and Equipment
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FRA: Federal Railroad Administration, 49 CFR Part 213, Track Safety Standards,
and 49 CFR Part 214, Railroad Workplace Safety
B. SCRRA: On-Track Safety Manual for Roadway Workers
1.04 AUTHORITY FURNISHED LABOR
A. Authority will provide an Roadway Worker in Charge (RWIC), and 49 CFR Part
213.7 qualified personnel to monitor the interface between the Contractor’s work
and train movements and facilitate temporary rearrangements or tracks out of
service. The Contractor shall include requests for Authority furnished labor in his
Site Specific Work Plan (SSWP), which shall be prepared and submitted in
accordance with Section 01 14 00 which identifies “Work Restrictions,” the
Contractor’s Responsibilities and Key Definitions for “Operating Envelope,”
“Operating System,” and “Work Windows” to determine the conditions for which
Authority furnished labor is utilized. The allocation of the number of Authority
furnished RWIC's is subject to the following:
1. Roadway Worker Protection (RWP)
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 16 - 1 UPDATED: May 2022
Section 01 11 16 Work by SCRRA
a. RWP within the Operating Envelope: The Authority will furnish an
Roadway Worker-in-Charge (RWIC) for 10.5 hours per day, five
calendar days per week, unless specified otherwise in the
Specifications, to provide RWP against the movement of any
passenger/commuter, freight, work, and all other types of trains and
on-track equipment. Refer to paragraph 4.02B herein for the
maximum number of RWIC’s to be provided by the Authority.
b. The maximum shift duration for one RWIC is 10.5 hours. Under
“Form B” protection, the 10.5 hours includes 8 hours of the
Contractor work (excluding train interruptions) and 2.5 hours to
install and remove Form B flags and provide daily job briefings. The
Contractor shall not be allowed to work within the Operating
Envelope during the 2.5-hour flag installation and removal. The
minimum shift duration for flagging services is 4 hours. If the
Contractor desires to perform activities requiring an RWIC that are
longer than 8 hours’ duration, then the Contractor shall coordinate
with the Authority to schedule multiple RWIC’s for said Work.
c. The Contractor shall schedule and establish its work limits within
the range of vision of the assigned RWIC. If the Contractor’s
requested work limits are outside the normal range of vision of the
RWIC due to curves, topography, or distance, multiple Subgroup
Coordinators will be needed. One Subgroup Coordinator is needed
for every 10 roadway workers. The Contractor shall include in the
SSWP how many RWIC and Subgroup Coordinators are needed.
d. RWP outside the Operating Envelope: The Authority will furnish an
RWIC to provide RWP for the Contractor’s construction operations
that are outside of the Operating Envelope, but within the railroad
right-of-way.
2. The Authority does not expressly or by implication agree, warrant, or
guarantee that the Contractor’s request for additional RWICs will be
approved, or that the resources will be available.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ARRANGEMENTS FOR AUTHORITY FURNISHED LABOR
A. As further described in Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions, the Authority will
arrange for an Authority furnished RWIC based upon the approved SSWP.
B. Contractor shall provide notice of required RWIC’s to be provided by SCRRA 15
days in advance of the Work
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 16 - 2 UPDATED: May 2022
Section 01 11 16 Work by SCRRA
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Authority provided RWIC will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by
the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans
will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
Unless provided for otherwise in the Specifications, the Authority shall provide the Contractor
the services of RWIC(s) for up to 10.5 hours per day, 5 days per week, at no cost to the
Contractor as noted below.
A. The Authority has determined the RWIC services based on its own calculations
and schedule. Authority will provide a maximum of [TBD] days’ worth of RWIC. An
RWIC day is considered to be one 10.5 hour day, Monday through Friday during
the day for up to 10 roadway workers. Work that is additional hours above this, at
night, on weekends, or with more than 10 roadway workers will count as additional
RWIC’s accordingly. The Contractor shall prepare the SSWP based on this
information and Authority and Contractor shall agree to the SSWP, including the
RWIC shift times and number of RWIC’s needed. If the Contractor requires
additional RWIC services, the Contractor shall pay for these flagging services. In
such a case, the Contractor shall pay for the actual costs of flagging services, as
shown in the rate sheet in the link below. RWIC rates are subject to change at any
time and may be found on the Metrolink website at:
https://metrolinktrains.com/globalassets/about/engineering/scrra_schedule_of_fe
es_for_third_party_construction.pdf
B. If the Contractor cancels scheduled RWIC work and does not make arrangements
with the RWIC 48 hours in advance for cancellation, the Contractor shall reimburse
SCRRA for the cost of the RWIC. If the Contractor sets up a Form B or other type
of protection required to be in the next day’s SCRRA Railroad Bulletin, and the
Contractor does not work or cancels the RWIC for reasons other than Force
Majeure, the Contractor shall reimburse SCRRA for the cost of the RWIC.
C. SCRRA railway flagging cannot be scheduled until the Temporary Right of Entry
Permit has been issued and the SSWP has been agreed upon by SCRRA. SCRRA
recommends scheduling SCRRA railway flagging a minimum of 15 working days
in advance of work. Work that impacts the SCRRA right of way will not be allowed
to be done without SCRRA railway flagging.
The items E-H below are in connection with the below fee schedule posted on
SCRRA’s website:
https://metrolinktrains.com/globalassets/about/engineering/scrra_schedule_of_fe
es_for_third_party_construction.pdf
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 16 - 3 UPDATED: May 2022
Section 01 11 16 Work by SCRRA
D. SCRRA fees associated with obtaining Roadway Worker Protection (RWP) Safety
training class will be paid by [the Project Sponsor] for up to [TBD] classes
maximum.
E. SCRRA fees associated with Signal and Communications line location markouts
will be paid by [the Project Sponsor].
F. SCRRA fees associated with SCRRA standard plan review, SCRRA
administration, SCRRA staff time contingency, and SCRRA inspection will be paid
by [the Project Sponsor].
G. Related costs for compliance with all other SCRRA requirements, including but not
limited to additional insurance, labor hours related to preparing/obtaining permits,
attending training, re-submitting documents if required, delays in obtaining the
right-of-entry, shall be considered as included in the prices in the Bid for the various
items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed.
END OF SECTION 01 11 16
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 11 16 - 4 UPDATED: May 2022
SECTION 01 14 00
WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section outlines requirements and provisions for rules and hours of operation for the
Contractor execution of the Work under this Contract.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 11 16, Work by SCRRA
B. Section 01 14 16, Coordination with SCRRA
C. Section 01 35 15, Maintenance and Protection of Railroad Traffic
D. Section 01 35 23, Site Safety Requirements
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
Comply with the provisions of all local, State, and Federal codes, specifications,
standards, industry recommended practices and Authority policy including:
A. SSPWC: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction
B. FRA: Federal Railroad Administration Track Safety Standards, 49 CFR Part 214
C. SCRRA: Track Maintenance Manual and On-Track Safety Manual for Roadway
Workers
D. SCRRA: Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria
E. Caltrans: Trenching and Shoring Manual
F. CPUC: California Public Utilities Commission General Orders
G. CALOSHA: California Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations
H. OSHA: Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations
1.04 KEY DEFINITIONS
Some key definitions that pertain to this Section are listed below. Refer to Section 01 11
15 and the Contract General Conditions for more key definitions.
A. Operating Envelope – A well-defined area determined by the Authority in which
Work must be performed with permission.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
B. Operating System – The components of an operating system all exist in order to
make the different elements of the system work together.
C. Work Window – See Section 01 11 15. 1.02 Definition of Terms.
D. Site-Specific Work Plan (SSWP) – See Section 01 11 15. 1.02 Definition of Terms.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
Provide submittals such as the Site Specific Work Plan (SSWP) in accordance with
Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
1.06 PROJECT COORDINATION
A. Cooperate with the Authority in all matters requiring coordination for execution of
the Work including eliminating or minimizing to the greatest extent possible
interference and delays to all scheduled passenger and freight trains movements.
Information regarding train movements is available to the Contractor, upon
request. A sample activity report of train movements for one week may be obtained
from the Authority.
B. The Contractor shall keep the Authority fully informed regarding any night or
weekend Work.
C. The Authority may require the Contractor to finish a section on which Work is in
progress before Work is started on any additional section.
D. Authority will be conducting work on other contracts at the same time as the
Contractor’s Work. The Contractor shall coordinate with other contractors and use
the same Form B used by other contractors.
1.07 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
A. The Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with the Contract and all
applicable codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders, and other legal
requirements of governmental bodies and public agencies having jurisdiction,
including the Authority.
B. Any damage caused by the Contractor to rails, ties, structures, embankment, third-
party property, signal and communications equipment, or any other facilities shall
be repaired at the Contractor's expense to a condition equal to or better than the
condition prior to the Contractor entry, and as accepted by the Authority. At the
sole discretion of the Authority, the Authority may direct that repairs be performed
by other Contractors. The charges for such repairs shall be deducted from the
Contractor’s payment due under this Contract.
C. Items shown on the plans to be protected in place shall be protected in place in
accordance with SSPWC, Protection and Restoration of Existing Improvements,
at no additional cost to the Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
D. The Contractor shall not perform any work on or adjacent to the Main Track without
prior written approval of the Authority. Perform work within the Operating Envelope
or which affects the Operating System only after submitting a Site-Specific
Work Plan (SSWP) and receiving written approval of the SSWP from the Authority.
E. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and other incidentals as required to perform
and complete the Work within the Work Windows, in accordance with the approved
schedule in the SSWP.
1.08 CONTRACTOR USE OF WORKSITE
A. The Contractor shall coordinate access, use, and preparation of facilities adjacent
to the Project areas with owners and agencies. Coordination shall include but not
be limited to the following:
1. The Contractor shall arrange Worksite access with adjacent property
owners for the use of private property, as the Contractor deems necessary
for operations.
2. Construction staging plans included in the Contract Drawings represent an
Authority approved work plan. The Contractor may submit an alternative
staging plan for review by the Authority. The alternative staging plan must
be accepted by the Authority prior to the Contractor undertaking any Work
in accordance with the alternative staging plans.
3. Fences, walls, signs, and gates affected by the Contractor’s access to the
Right of Way shall be restored to full serviceability prior to demobilization.
B. Right-of-Way: All contract work shall be performed within SCRRA right-of-way
unless otherwise stated in the contract documents.
C. Work on Private Property Other Than Railroad: Any additional easement areas
requested by the Contractor shall be obtained by separate contract between the
Contractor and the property owner and shall be solely at the Contractor's own risk
and expense. The Authority will not be a party to nor assume any liability for those
separate contracts. The Contractor shall transmit copies to the Authority of all
executed property agreements, easements and contracts with third parties within
3 working days of the execution. The Contractor shall coordinate scheduling of
Work to be performed on private property with property owner and property tenant
so as to minimize inconvenience to the property owner and property tenant.
Contractor can secure additional areas with respective owners at Contractor’s own
expense and responsibility. The Contractor shall make arrangements, pay for, and
assume all responsibility for acquiring, using, and disposing of Work areas and
facilities temporarily acquired by the Contractor in addition to those provided by
the Authority. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Authority harmless for
all claims for damages caused by such actions.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
D. Property Rights in Land and Improvements: The Contractor shall make no
arrangements with any person or entity to permit occupancy or use of any land,
structure, or building within the limits of the Work, for any purpose whatsoever,
either with or without compensation, in conflict with any agreement between the
Authority and any third-party owner, former owner, or tenant of such land,
structure, or buildings.
E. The Contractor shall confine Worksite operations to areas permitted by law,
ordinances, permits, and the Contract.
F. The Contractor shall consider the safety of the Work, train operations personnel,
and property on and adjacent to the Worksite when determining amount, location,
movement, and use of materials and equipment on Worksite. The Contractor shall
not load Worksite with excessive amounts of material, equipment, or other items
that have the potential to interfere with the Work or with train operations. The
Contractor shall relocate stored products, equipment, and materials that interfere
with train operations, public and private utilities, or visibility at railroad crossings.
Materials and equipment shall not be so piled, stored, or parked when not in use.
G. The Contractor shall adhere to the noise levels and hours of Local Ordinances,
except as provided and approved in the Site-Specific Work Plan (SSWP).
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating its Work with all property
owners affected by the Contractor’s operations. The Contractor shall protect the
general public and residents within Worksite boundaries from Work-related
activities, and shall not unnecessarily inconvenience those persons by Work
activities.
I. The Contractor shall submit the proposed location of staging areas for the
Authority’s approval.
J. As necessary, the Contractor will preserve and relocate railroad signs (mileposts,
speed limits, “no trespassing” signs, station signs, crossing whistle signs, etc.)
during the full period of construction. Signs shall be maintained during construction
or restored upon completion of the Work, in accordance with the requirements of
Section 01 35 23, SCRRA Site Safety Requirements. The Contractor shall protect
at-grade crossing warning signs and shall coordinate the schedule for relocation
or revision of Crossing warning signs and signals by Others, if necessary.
K. The Contractor will preserve drainage facilities throughout the duration of the Work
so that there is no pending or accumulation of water in any Worksite area, there is
no flow of water diverted toward the track or out of normal drainage channels, and
all culvert inlets and outlets are kept free of debris.
L. Except where specifically designated in the design of the Work, the Contractor will
preserve the ability of maintenance Contractors to access the Right of Way using
highway vehicles. If the original right-of-way roads become blocked with the
Contractor’s materials, equipment, or excavations or spoils, alternate routes must
be arranged.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
M. The Contractor will preserve existing right-of-way fences and walls, and will
replace any such fences or walls damaged during the work to the satisfaction of
the owner(s) of the fences or walls.
1.09 WORK ZONE LIMITATIONS OF SITE
A. In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements indicated on Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall coordinate available space with the Authority and
other entities needing access and space so as to produce the best overall
efficiency in performance of the total Work of the Project.
B. The Contractor shall schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time
requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site, with minimal
disruption to the adjoining site owners and operations. Pick-up and delivery
requiring vehicular traffic adjacent to tracks shall be performed only during normal
working hours, and as approved by the Authority.
1.10 WORK WINDOWS
A. The time limits for all types of Work Windows include the time for the Contractor to
restore and test the signal and communication system before the operation of
trains; therefore, the full duration of the Work Window is not available for the use
of the Contractor. The SSWP shall designate both the time at which the Contractor
must make the track ready (in full compliance with the FRA Track Safety Standards
and with the Authority’s Track Maintenance Manual) for the passage of trains, and
the remaining time within the Work Window that will be required for the signal and
communications system restoration. The SSWP shall be prepared and submitted
in accordance with the Work Window requirements shown in the Project Specific
Specifications.
B. The Contractor’s Railroad Construction Project Manager or the Railroad Track
Construction Manager shall personally inspect the track within the Work Window
prior to the restoration of train service; confirm with the Authority that the track is
in full compliance with the above standards and establish the speed at which trains
will operate upon restoration of the service.
C. The Contractor does not have exclusive rights to the Work Windows. The
Contractor may have to share these Work Windows with other Contractors and the
Authority’s maintenance forces as described in the General Conditions.
D. The Contractor shall not perform any fieldwork during three annual designated
holidays. Fieldwork shall not include receipt or delivery of materials or equipment
or work performed in field offices. The designated holidays are Labor Day,
Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day.
E. Contractor shall not work on state holidays, federal holidays, nights, or weekends
without prior approval of the Engineer.
During these periods, the Authority will not have the resources (labor and equipment) or
construction management personnel to issue track bulletins or to support, inspect, or
oversee the Contractor’s Work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
1.11 SSWP – GENERAL CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. All work with the potential to impede the normal functioning of any part of the
Operating System shall include a detailed SSWP’s showing schedule of events,
indicating the expected hourly progress of each activity that has duration of one
hour or longer. The schedule shall include a time at which each activity planned
under the SSWP and the requested Work Window will be completed, and the total
duration of all the construction activities shall be less than the approved Work
Window. Failure of the Contractor to complete the scheduled activities by the
planned time or to put in place an approved contingency plan may adversely affect
the operations of scheduled trains.
B. The Contractor shall refer to SCRRA’s Site Specific Work Plan Scope of SSWP
prior to submitting SSWP. The Contractor shall submit SCRRA’s SSWP Checklist.
C. The SSWP shall include at minimum the information specified below.
1. The SSWP shall include scope, brief schedule, location, equipment,
material and staging, schedule, haul routes, safety plan, contingency plan,
worksite representative, emergency response plan, excavation plan, boring
and jacking plan, drilling and pile driving plan, falsework plan, and
temporary traffic control plan.
2. All activities necessary to perform construction activities within the
Operating Envelope, including use of stations, tracks, signals, proposed
storage areas and any other railroad facility.
3. A description of any proposed changes in the Operating System between
start and finish of the work, including any requested Work Windows.
4. A schedule of the work, showing each activity and where and how it affects
normal operation of the Operating System. This schedule shall integrate
and allow for the necessary work of the Signal and Communication forces.
Each activity in the plan shall include all labor, materials, and equipment
required to complete the activity within the Authority allotted time period.
The Contractor shall identify on the schedule all Authority furnished labor,
equipment and materials.
5. The Contractor shall have Authority approved Contingency plans for
putting the Operating System back in operation in case of an emergency,
or in case the Contractor fails to perform and complete the work on time.
The contingency plans shall address the various stages of activities
necessary to restore the System.
6. List all of the approved proposed work plans to be performed under the
SSWP and provide the name(s) and number(s) of the Contractor’s
supervisor(s) in charge of the SSWP tasks.
D. The SSWPs must be of sufficient detail, clarity, and organization to permit easy
review and approval by the Authority before the proposed work is performed.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
The SSWP shall be submitted and approved prior to starting work.
Th
e Contractor shall anticipate obtaining approvals from the Authority as follows:
1. At least 14 calendar days prior to start of the work within the Operating
Envelope for work other than signal or third-party activity.
2. At least 30 calendar days prior to the start of work for work involving signal
or third-party installation.
E. The Authority may request explanations and changes to the SSWP to conform the
SSWP to the requirements of the Contract Documents. If the SSWP is not
acceptable, the Contractor shall revise the SSWP to make it acceptable. The
Contractor is responsible for submitting a revised SSWP that can be reviewed and
approved by the Authority at least seven days in advance of any work that affects
the Operating System.
F. The Contractor will be informed if the SSWP is acceptable not less than seven
calendar days prior to the scheduled start of work within the Operating Envelope.
Once the plan is accepted, the Contractor shall assemble the resources necessary
to perform the work represented by the SSWP, so that necessary resources are
available one calendar day before the work is to be accomplished, thereby
demonstrating to the Authority the readiness of the Contractor to perform the Work.
At this time, the Authority will make a final decision as to whether or not the Work
is to proceed as planned or be canceled.
1.12 SSWP – SPECIAL CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor’s construction activities that affect the Operating System including
tracks, grade crossings, bridges, stations, public highways, and related facilities in
active service shall be subject to the following requirements:
1. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel, equipment, materials,
and all other resources necessary to return the affected facilities to full
service upon the conclusion of the approved “Work Window.”
2. The Contractor shall perform the Work expeditiously and continuously, with
no gaps or breaks in the work activities or substantive reductions in the
labor force, equipment, and materials necessary to construct, reconstruct,
or repair the affected facility to full service upon the conclusion of the
approved “Work Window.”
3. The size and scope of the affected facilities within the Operating System,
(e.g., tracks, bridges) removed shall not exceed the Contractor’s capacity
to conservatively return the facility to the required level of service within the
approved “Work Window.”
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
4. The Contractor shall take all appropriate and reasonable measures to
perform work activities and tasks located outside of the Operating System
to effectively reduce the amount of time and effort required during the
approved “Work Window.” These appropriate and reasonable measures
shall include but not be limited to preconstruction and preassembly of track
turnouts, panels, and pre-staging of track materials and equipment at work
sites.
5. Backup or Emergency Plan: The Contractor shall include in the SSWP a
“backup or contingency” plan and the necessary resources (labor,
equipment, materials, etc.) to assure the Authority that all appropriate and
reasonable measures are available for the return of the affected facility to
full service upon conclusion of the approved “Work Window.”
6. When not in use, materials and equipment shall not be piled, stored, or
parked, closer than 20 feet horizontally from the centerline of the nearest
operating track, or within 250 feet of an open public grade crossing.
7. The placement of piles, forms, braces, shoring, false work, excavation, or
other construction supports shall be in accordance with the current
Authority shoring requirements. Temporary overhead structures shall be a
minimum of 22 feet 6 inches above top of rail in accordance with CPUC
requirements. Temporary overhead structures less than 22 feet 6 inches
above top of rail must have an exemption, in advance from the CPUC, and
approval of the Authority.
8. In general, open excavation areas shall be protected per Cal/OSHA
regulations and by walkways with handrails no closer than 8 feet 6 inches
horizontally from the nearest operating track, if tangent, and 9 feet 6 inches
if the track is curved. Furthermore, the walkways shall be no less than 3
feet wide, and the handrails shall be no less than 3.5 feet high and capable
of withstanding 250 pounds of lateral force.
B. Specifically, with regard to track construction, reconstruction, and rehabilitation
activities involving active tracks, the Contractor shall be subject to the following
requirements:
1. Track construction and reconstruction activities involving main track
Operating System shall be limited to what the Contractor could reasonably
accommodate, given the Contractor’s capability and Authority furnished
resources. The Contractor must fully complete all work within an approved
SSWP segment, including all spiking, anchoring, surfacing to final line and
grade, dynamic stabilizing, distressing, and welding before initiating Work
on another location within the Project limits.
2. All turnouts installed on active tracks shall be constructed and installed as
panels. All turnout panels shall be fully complete and inspected and
approved for installation by the Authority two weeks prior to the scheduled
installation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
3. At all times, the Contractor shall maintain an adequate quantity of ballast
to finish the next two weeks of track construction activities requiring ballast.
This stockpile shall be provided as approved in the Contractor staging plan
so that it is in close proximity to the Work site, or in rail cars under load.
4. The Contractor shall use a dynamic track stabilizer on all tracks that have
been significantly disturbed (i.e., ties or ballast removed).
1.13 TRACK BACK IN SERVICE
A. At the end of each Work Window shown in the approved SSWP, the Contractor
shall return all tracks to Class 5 as defined by FRA guidelines. If the track does not
meet Class 5 specifications, a slow order (Form A) will be issued. It is the intent of
the Contract Documents that Main Line Slow Orders only be allowed on a very
limited basis. See Section 01 35 15, Maintenance and Protection of Railroad
Traffic, or the Specifications for the number of allowed speed restrictions.
B. The time of train delays caused by the Contractor’s operation will be calculated as
in Section 01 35 15, Maintenance and Protection of Railroad Traffic. The
Contractor shall include all slow order (Form A) requests in his proposed SSWP.
All slow orders shall be subject to the approval of the Authority.
C. The Authority will require final inspection before train service can resume on tracks
previously taken out of service.
D. Allowing train service on reconstructed or shifted track at the end of each approved
Work Window is not considered beneficial occupancy or final acceptance. The
Contractor shall remain fully responsible for any loss or damage arising from the
Contractor’s activities under this Contract.
E. If further adjustments or repairs are required to provide the appropriate track
standards as defined herein, the Contractor shall, immediately perform the
necessary work at no additional cost to the Authority. In the event the Contractor
is not available to make the appropriate adjustments or repairs, SCRRA
Maintenance Forces will complete the Work and the Contractor will be responsible
for all associated direct and indirect costs, as well as any time associated with such
adjustments or repairs.
F. Rail Service Interruptions shall be considered an unauthorized delay to the
Authority’s train operations, and Rail Service Interruption Assessments will be
made in accordance with the Special Conditions when any of the following occurs:
1. The Contractor’s construction operations exceed the approved Work
Window time limits specified in an approved SSWP.
2. The Contractor exceeds the total allowable Slow Order Delay Time
described in Section 01 35 15, Maintenance and Protection of Railroad
Traffic.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
3. The Contractor exceeds the maximum number of Slow Orders as
prescribed in Section 01 35 15, Maintenance and Protection of Railroad
Traffic.
4. The Contractor’s construction operations working under an approved Form
B Work Window result in the stoppage of a scheduled train. In this case,
the delay shall be calculated from the time the train is stopped at the
working limits until the train has completely passed through the working
limits.
5. The contractor has not restored the track to Class 5 standards
1.14 INSPECTION PRIOR TO PLACING TRACK BACK IN SERVICE
A. The Contractor shall have qualified personnel at each distinct work site to ensure
that all tracks are constructed to the required specifications. The Contractor shall
perform a track inspection and determine its classification and conformance with
the approved SSWP.
B. The Authority shall furnish staff for the final inspection required in order to place
track and bridge facilities in service for the Authority’s use at the end of the Work
Window.
C. The Contractor shall schedule his operations to allow for the necessary inspection
and any remedial work required in order to place the tracks and signal system back
in service at the prescribed time.
D. If the track does not meet Class 5 standards due to track or bridge construction
irregularities (e.g. gage, distressing, cross level, surface, profile, alignment,
improper CWR temperature, loose fasteners, missing components), the track will
be slow ordered to the next lower class with which it complies (according to the
FRA guidelines).
E. The Authority reserves the right to have its Maintenance Contractor perform
remedial work to return the track to Class 5. In addition to the assessment cost
noted in the paragraphs above, the costs to perform the remedial work will be
deducted from the Contractor’s progress payment.
F. No additional time will be allowed for completion of the work in the event that the
Authority is required to perform the remedial work to return the track to Class 5.
1.15 WORKS BY OTHERS
The Contractor may be required to interface with other contractors, utility companies,
public agencies, private companies, and railroad forces. This interface shall be provided
in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01 14 16, Coordination with
SCRRA. In addition, routine or emergency maintenance of existing Authority facilities may
occur during the progress of the Work. Such activities shall have priority and the Authority
shall make efforts to minimize interference where possible.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions
1.16 RULES FOR WORKING WITHIN RIGHT-OF-WAY
A. The Contractor’s and SubContractor's employees must be qualified under the
current SCRRA Roadway Worker Policies and 49 CFR 214, Railroad Workplace
Safety, before being permitted to work on the right-of-way.
B. The Authority RWIC will conduct job briefings as required under the Roadway
Worker Policy Manual at the following intervals:
1. Start of every work shift
2. Every change of conditions affecting Roadway Worker safety during a work
shift
C. The Contractor shall immediately execute all verbal and written directives of the
Authority or the Authority RWIC.
D. Refer to Section 01 14 16, Coordination with SCRRA, for rules governing Work
adjacent to active tracks.
E. Unless otherwise specified in the Specifications, Authority RWIC services are
required for all Work on railroad right-of-way.
F. Refer to Section 01 35 23, Site Safety Requirements, and the SCRRA Roadway
Worker Protection Regulations, incorporated as Section 214.3 of the SCRRA On-
Track Safety Instructions, for any clarifications or additional requirements.
1.17 HOURS OF OPERATIONS
A. Refer to Project Specific Specifications for allowable Work Windows with the
Operating System.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 14 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 14 16
COORDINATION WITH SCRRA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section outlines the requirements for coordination with the Authority and related
railroads for Work performed on the railroad right-of-way.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 11 16, Work by SCRRA
B. Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions
C. Section 01 35 15, Maintenance and Protection of Railroad Traffic
D. Section 01 35 23, SCRRA Site Safety Requirements
1.03 REGULATIONS FOR WORKING WITHIN RAILROAD RIGHT-OF-WAY (ROW)
A. Upon award of this Contract Work, the most current edition of each of the following
publications shall apply to the Contractor’s work. The Contractor shall comply with
all requirements from the Railroad Operators, CPUC, FRA and all other governing
entities. These requirements may include the following:
SCRRA Safety and General Rules for All Employees
SCRRA Roadway Worker Protection (RWP) Safety Manual
SCRRA On-Track Safety Manual for Roadway Workers
SCRRA Bridge Worker Safety
SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual
SCRRA Engineering Standards
SCRRA Regulation Governing Contractors and Others Working on
SCRRA Property
SCRRA Maintenance of Way Operating Rules
SCRRA Maintenance of Way Safety Rules
SCRRA Current Timetable
SCRRA Current Schedule of Trains
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 16 - 1 Issued: February 2022
Section 01 14 16 Coordination With SCRRA
SCRRA Form 37, Rules and Requirements for Construction on SCRRA
Property
SCRRA Excavation Support Criteria
AMTRAK Current Schedule of Trains
CPUC General Orders 26D and 118
FRA Track Safety Standards: Title 49 CFR 2134
FRA Roadway Worker Standards: Title 49 CFR 214
GCOR General Code of Operating Rules
B. In addition, the Contractor shall comply with the most current edition of the AREMA
Manual for Railway Engineering for standards of construction not fully explained by
the above regulations or these Specifications. Possible conflicts between
publications identified in this Section shall be brought to the attention of the Authority,
who will make a determination as to the direction that the Contractor should follow.
C. In the event additional Work is being performed by others, on or adjacent to the
Worksite for this Contract, the Contractor shall coordinate the Work with other
activities in order to avoid conflicts.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. All Work within or adjacent to the Authority’s Right-of-Way shall, at a minimum, meet
the above regulations and be coordinated through the Authority. The Contractor shall
cooperate and coordinate the Work as necessary in the most efficient manner for the
execution and completion of the Work. If there is a conflict between SCRRA and
other railroad’s Rules and Regulations, the Contractor shall follow the Authority’s
direction as to which set of rules shall prevail. The Contractor shall coordinate its
work, so it does not interfere or otherwise delay the work performed by SCRRA’s
forces.
B. Track will be used both for passenger and freight operations. The Authority
dispatches all train traffic. The Contractor's Work shall be scheduled to provide
minimal interference with all train traffic; in particular, Work will not be permitted to
delay any trains. Requirements for slow orders through Work zones are contained
elsewhere in these Specifications.
C. The Contractor activities shall not delay any trains except as approved in advance
by the Authority.
D. The Contractor should participate in the jobsite visit prior to submittal of bids to
assess the level of train activity. Some schedule variations should be anticipated
during the Project due to normal growth and train schedule refinement by the
Authority and other operators.
E. Authority RWIC will obtain track Authority directly from the Authority dispatcher. The
Contractor shall not coordinate with the Authority dispatcher.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 16 - 2 Issued: February 2022
Section 01 14 16 Coordination With SCRRA
F. Signal cutover work, if any, will be performed by the Contractor.
G. The Contractor's work shall be coordinated with the Authority in accordance with
Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions, which establishes procedures and lead times
required for Authority provided labor, including RWIC.
H. The Contractor must make arrangements to remove all on-track equipment from the
Main Track in order to pass trains as specified in Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions.
The Contractor may not assume that its equipment can be placed or stored in spur
tracks or sidings unless approved in advance by the Authority.
1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall obtain permission in writing from the Authority for movement of
equipment on track or across tracks at locations other than public crossings. Such
permission may not necessarily be granted. If it is granted, the Contractor shall
comply with any condition required such as, but not limited to, the bridging of rail and
protection of ballast section. Damages to the track structure will be repaired at the
Contractor’s sole expense.
B. The mainline tracks, within the limits of Work, are under direct control of the Authority
Dispatcher. No track shall be fouled without authorization and presence of an
Authority RWIC on the scene.
1. For all Work with the potential to foul the track, the Contractor shall allow
sufficient time in his work schedule for the RWIC to clear trains. Up to 15
minutes may be required for the RWIC to clear each train, during which time
the Contractor must not foul the track. Such time required to clear scheduled
trains shall not be an acceptable reason for submitting contract change
requests or delay claims to SCRRA.
2. Scheduled trains may run behind schedule, and such tardiness will not be an
acceptable reason for submitting Contract change requests or delay claims
to SCRRA.
1.06 WORK AFFECTING THE EXISTING COMMUNICATIONS AND SIGNAL SYSTEMS
A. Track within the Work limits will be in use for high-speed freight and passenger train
operations throughout the construction period. Train movements are governed by
signal systems and the Contractor shall take no action which would:
1. Directly or indirectly result in an unsafe condition (e.g., false clearing of a
signal, failure to detect train occupancy or an open switch point, unauthorized
unlocking of a switch, failure to activate a highway grade crossing warning
system, or any degradation of signaling system).
2. Cause delay to any train (e.g., display of a signal aspect less permissive than
track conditions allow, obstruction of right-of-way).
3. Cause an improper activation or deactivation of a highway grade crossing
warning system.
4. Be contrary to directions given by the Authority or the Authority Dispatcher.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 16 - 3 Issued: February 2022
Section 01 14 16 Coordination With SCRRA
B. Existing overhead and buried communications and signaling cables and track wires
are located at various locations along and across the Right-of-Way. The Contractor
shall take all steps necessary to protect active cabling from damage during the Work.
Specific utilities associated with the Work of this Contract are detailed in the Plans
and Specifications. The minimum precautions to be taken by the Contractor to
protect communications and signaling cables are as follows:
1. All personnel working in the vicinity of communications and signaling
equipment and cabling shall be instructed by the Authority in proper
procedures for working around such equipment. Any Contractor personnel
found not to be taking proper precautions will be barred from the Work site.
2. At least 14 days before performing any excavation Work, the Contractor shall
contact the Authority to schedule a signal department mark-out. The
Contractor shall call the SCRRA's "Call Before You Dig" number prior to
commencing work at (909) 592-1346 during normal business hours. In case
of emergencies involving SCRRA signal or communication facilities, the
Contractor shall call (888) 446-9721. The exact location of communications
and signaling cables shall be determined by a careful examination of site and
hand potholing. The Contractor may utilize a search coil to determine the
general vicinity of buried cabling. All such aforementioned locating activities
shall be performed in the presence of the Authority.
3. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to make arrangements directly with
utility companies involving the protection, encasement, reinforcement,
relocation, replacement, removing or abandonment in place of non-railroad
facilities affected by the Project. SCRRA has no obligation to supply
additional SCRRA right-of-way for non-railroad facilities affected by this
Project, nor does SCRRA have any obligation to permit non railroad facilities
to be abandoned in place or relocated on SCRRA's right-of-way. Any facility
or utility that crosses SCRRA right-of- way must be covered under an
agreement or license obtained through SCRRA including, without limitation,
any relocation of an existing facility or utility.
4. SCRRA will, if required, rearrange its communications and signal lines, grade
crossing warning devices, train signals, tracks and facilities that are in use
and maintained by SCRRA forces in connection with its operation. This work
by the SCRRA will be done by its own forces or by contractors under a
continuing contract and is not a part of the work under the Contract for the
construction of the Project. The Contractor must allow sufficient time in its
schedule to permit SCRRA to issue the necessary task orders to its
contractors order material, and perform any necessary work.
C. All communications and signaling cables proximate to the Work shall be physically
located by means of potholing with hand tools. Excavation by hand tools shall be
done by skimming soil in small increments, rather than by digging straight down with
the point of a shovel.All such locating activities shall be performed in the presence
of the Authority. Excavation by machinery will be allowed only where the preceding
precautions have been taken, as approved by the Authority, to ensure that existing
cabling is not at risk of being damaged.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 16 - 4 Issued: February 2022
Section 01 14 16 Coordination With SCRRA
D. Where the placement of existing cabling interferes with placement of track work, or
where cabling is at risk of damage from track work, the Contractor shall request such
cabling be relocated or protected by Authority forces.
E. The relocation of cables may require delays of up to 72 hours after the Authority has
been notified of conflicts. Such delays will not be grounds for the Contractor
submitting a claim for extension of the Contract Time. The Contractor shall
coordinate its work so it does not interfere or otherwise delay the work performed by
SCRRA’s forces.
F. The relocation of active cable will be performed by Authority forces.
1.07 WORK AFFECTING EXISTING POSITIVE TRAIN CONTROL (PTC)
A. Train movements are governed by Positive Train Control (PTC), which are GPS-
based safety systems that combine wireless radio and computing technology.
Onboard technology will active safety features that interact with a Back Office Server
(BOS) System.
1. Contractor shall perform all work described within these Specifications and
Contract Plans in accordance with SCRRA’s Positive Train Control
Configuration and Change Management Policy (CCMP). The Contractor shall
coordinate all CCMP requirements with the SCRRA Engineer.
2. All project related work requiring CCMP compliance shall be scheduled by
the Contractor at least sixty (60) calendar days prior to the Contractor
performing the work. Once CCMP related work has been scheduled, any
schedule changes will require that the initial sixty (60) calendar day
requirement be met from the time the work is rescheduled. Any schedule
delays incurred through the Contractor’s actions will be at the sole expense
to the Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 14 16
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 16 - 5 Issued: February 2022
SECTION 01 14 19
COORDINATION WITH UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section outlines requirements and provisions regarding the Contractor responsibility
for coordination with all utility companies to ensure that all utilities are clearly marked,
protected for the duration of the construction activities or relocated. The exhibit to this
Specification Section entitled Project Utility Responsibilities when included in the Project
Specific Specifications shall identify each of the utilities affected by the Work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Where required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall prepare Shop
Drawings showing existing utility information and the installation of any utility
protection facilities or features to be established on the site prior to initiating
construction, maintained for the duration of construction and removed upon
completion of construction. This submittal information to the local utility and to the
Authority shall identify all necessary Work to adjust, move, or relocate existing
utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located
in or affected by construction.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate with all Utilities and authorities having jurisdiction
over these facilities and shall remove and relocate existing utilities and equipment
whenever an existing installation interferes with new construction. Carefully
examine each location and make arrangements in advance with the Authority to
ensure that construction has a minimum impact on the daily operations of the
Authority.
C. Where required by a utility owner or an authority having jurisdiction over an
underground facility, within 15 calendar days of the effective date of the Limited
Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a "Potholing Plan" consisting of a
plan, schedule, and sequencing to identify and investigate by vacuum potholing all
underground utilities and facilities. The Authority will review and comment on the
plan within 10 calendar days of receipt.
D. The relocated utilities shall be specifically identified in the record documents. The
types of material and methods of relocation and reconnection of utilities shall
match the existing unless otherwise noted.
E. The Contractor shall furnish the Authority copies of all utility required permits or
approvals obtained prior to starting Work at or adjacent to the utility facilities.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 19 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 19 Coordination with Utilities
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
Prior to the start of Construction, the Contractor shall engage an underground utility
detection company to detect and locate all existing underground utilities within the Work.
All underground utility information, including the approximate depth, shall be clearly
marked on surface and existing pavement for reference. The information shall also be
recorded in the Project files. Before commencing work, the Contractor shall notify Dig Alert
at 811 or 1-800-422-4133, 72 hours in advance of excavation and advise the Authority of
Dig Alert Identification number two working days before excavation begins. Before
commencing work, the Contractor shall also notify utility companies which have
underground facilities within the limits of the Work, but which do not participate in Dig Alert
(e.g. UPRR Dig Ticket, CBUD 1-800-336-9193), in accordance with each utility's
notification requirements, and have them locate and mark the facilities within the area of
excavation. The Contractor shall keep marking current in accordance with the
requirements of Dig Alert and the other utility companies.
SCRRA is not a member of Underground Service Alert (DigAlert) and SCRRA signal and
communication lines must be located by contacting the SCRRA Signal Department. Refer
to Section 01 14 16, Coordination with SCRRA for additional details.
3.02 POTHOLING FOR SUBSURFACE UTILITIES AND FACILITIES
Where required by a utility owner or an authority having jurisdiction over an underground
facility, within 30 calendar days of the effective date of the Limited NTP and after
Authority's approval of the Contractor's "Potholing Plan", the Contractor shall mobilize not
fewer than two (2) separate potholing crews. These two or more potholing crews will work
on a continuous basis to identify, locate and verify the location of underground utilities at
all project locations. It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit the Potholing Plan and
obtain the Authority's approval within this time period.
Potholing and subsurface utilities and facilities verification work shall be completed at least
30 days in advance of any excavation work within the limits of any construction. The intent
of performing potholing and field verification of underground utilities well in advance of any
relocation, protection or modification of utilities is to preclude any delays or disruption
arising from utility relocation and allow for redesign and reissuance of plans and related
Contract Documents. Accordingly, any failure on the Contractor's part to perform the
potholing and field verification of utilities within the time frames listed above shall be
sufficient cause to reject any claims by the Contractor for delays associated with utility
relocations.
3.03 CONTRACTOR FIELD WORK REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall provide personnel, equipment, temporary facilities,
construction materials, tools, and supplies at the Work site at the time they are
scheduled to be required for general utility location and protection requirements
subject to the following requirements:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 19 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 19 Coordination with Utilities
1. The Contractor shall pothole and physically locate all utilities under
Traffic/Pedestrian gate footing or within 2 feet of Traffic/Pedestrian gate
footing.
2. The Contractor shall notify the Gas Utility when excavating within 5 feet of
any natural gas pipeline and schedule Utility personnel if required. The
Contractor shall hand-dig within 5 feet of any natural gas pipeline.
3. The Contractor shall notify pipeline owner when excavating within 5 feet of
any oil pipeline and schedule standby personnel if required. The Contractor
to hand-dig within 5 feet of any oil pipeline.
4. The Contractor shall notify the Utility providing electrical service when
excavating within 5 feet of any energized electric facilities and schedule
utility personnel as required. The Contractor to hand-dig within 5 feet of any
energized electric facilities.
5. The Contractor shall hand-dig within 3 feet of any telephone, cable
television or fiber optic facilities.
6. The Contractor shall pothole all utilities under or within 2 feet of a
Traffic/Pedestrian gate to confirm depth and lateral location.
7. Contractor is to comply with all requirements by Utility which may be more
stringent than described herein.
B. Utilities and pipelines, unless otherwise indicated, shall be in operation during the
construction work. The safe and proper handling of the utilities and pipelines is the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be liable for any injuries, line
breakage, damage to the line and damage to property. In addition, Contractor shall
be responsible for and shall reimburse Authority or owner of the utility, or pipeline
for all damages during construction and for any product (gas, oil or service) lost
there from. Precautions must be taken to contain any possible oil spills. Any
spillage of gas or oils shall be contained and if the material is not contained and
causes damages or gets into natural drainage courses, the Contractor shall be
solely responsible. Failure to respond within a reasonable time frame (herein
defined as a maximum of four hours or sooner for emergencies as determined by
the Authority or the Utility) will constitute cause for Authority to restore such utility
damages and to deduct all costs of restoration from the next Progress Payment to
the Contractor.
C. At Limited NTP or the project kick-off meeting, the Authority shall provide contact
numbers for all entities to be contacted in case of emergency including signal and
grade crossing problems and signal and communications cable locations. This will
include the Authority’s Chief Dispatcher and the Metrolink Sheriff's Dispatcher. The
Contractor shall ensure that Work Site personnel have immediate access to these
contact numbers.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 19 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 19 Coordination with Utilities
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 19 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 19 Coordination with Utilities
EXHIBIT
PROJECT UTILITY RESPONSIBILITIES
UTILITY RELOCATIONS/REARRANGEMENT
REFERENCE SPECIFICATION SECTION: _____________
CONTACTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Name of Utility:
Contact Person:
Address:
Phone:
Email:
PERFORMANCE RESPONSIBILITY PAYMENT RESPONSIBILITY
Design done by: ______________________ __________________________
Construction by: _______________________ ___________________________
Inspection by: _______________________ ____________________________
Yes No – Third Party Coordination and paid by:
NOTES:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 19 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 14 19 Coordination with Utilities
END OF SECTION 01 14 19
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 14 19 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 21 00
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances which are
established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials,
products or equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to the Contractor. If
necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. Allowances may be
stated as unit prices or as lump sum amounts, as noted herein. Approval of final quantities
required and the basis for acceptable pricing for items specified by an allowance shall be
the sole responsibility of the Authority prior to payment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 22 00, Unit Prices
B. Section 01 22 05, Lump-Sum Prices
1.03 SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise the Authority of the
date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an
allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B. When specified or at the Authority's request, obtain proposals and prepare detailed
pricing for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include
recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C. Purchase products and systems selected by the Authority from the designated
supplier
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
Submit proposals for purchase of products, equipment, facilities, systems or for payment
of services included in allowances, in the form and detail specified for Change Orders.
The Authority will review the Contractor’s information relevant to the proposed price
including all pricing documentation supporting quotations from vendors, calculations,
estimating factors, risk analyses, equipment rates, productivity, as well as any other items
reasonably required by the Authority to satisfy itself as to the reasonableness of the
Contractor’s assumptions used to determine price.
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to
the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 21 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 21 00 Allowances
B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for
installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.
C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in the same manner as for
other portions of the Work.
1.06 LUMP SUM, UNIT COST, AND QUANTITY ALLOWANCES
A. Allowances shall include the cost to the Contractor of specific products and
materials ordered or selected by the Authority under the allowance, and shall
include taxes, freight, and delivery to the Project site.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at
the Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to
products and materials ordered or selected by the Authority under the allowance
shall be included as part of the Contract Price and not part of the allowance.
C. Whenever the actual cost of the materials, products, or equipment selected by the
Authority is more than or less than the allowance amount, the Contract Price will
be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.
D. Unused Materials: After installation has been completed and accepted, return
unused materials purchased under an allowance to the manufacturer or supplier
for credit to the Authority or if requested by the Authority, retain and prepare
unused material for storage by the Authority. Deliver unused material to the
Authority's storage space as directed.
E. Quantity allowances include all costs of materials, labor, equipment, overhead,
profit, all taxes, and all other charges for the work. In the event a lesser or greater
quantity of the item or work described is used in the Work, the Contract Price shall
be adjusted in accordance with the unit prices described in the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices.
1.07 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by the Authority for the Authority's
purposes, and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the
allowance.
B. The Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment
ordered by the Authority under the contingency allowance are included in the
allowance and are not part of the Contract Price. These costs include delivery,
installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs.
C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will
include the Contractor's related costs in accordance with the Changes Section of
the General Conditions.
D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency
allowance to the Authority by Change Order.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 21 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 21 00 Allowances
1.08 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES
A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order
proposal based on the difference between the purchase amount and the
allowance, multiplied by a final measurement of work-in-place (where applicable).
If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing
wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
B. Include installation costs in the purchase amount only where indicated as part of
the allowance.
C. If requested, prepare an explanation and documentation to substantiate the
distribution of margins claimed.
D. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change
Orders related to unit cost allowances. The Authority reserves the right to establish
the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.
E. Submit requests for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the
allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order
amount or the Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit in
accordance with the Changes Section of the General Conditions. Do not include
the Contractor's or Subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed
from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
No change to the Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher
or lower priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects.
Return damaged or defective products to the manufacturer for replacement.
3.02 PREPARATION
Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced
with related Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 21 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 21 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 22 00
UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Unit Prices. Unit
Prices are amounts stated on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices that represent full
compensation for furnishing all necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment and ancillary
services necessary to complete all the Work covered by each item as required in the
Contract documents.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 21 00, Allowances
B. Section 01 22 05, Lump-Sum Prices
1.03 PROCEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary submittals, shop drawings, materials, labor,
delivery or shipping charges, unloading or handling, insurance, installation costs,
profit, all applicable taxes, and other direct and indirect expenses. Where Unit
Price items require related Work specified in other sections of the Contract
Specifications, but which is not specifically mentioned in the Unit Price description,
the Contractor shall be responsible for and include all related work that is normally
required for Work similar to the Unit Price item. Detailed descriptions and other
provisions concerning Unit Price items are contained in other sections of the Plans
and Specifications.
B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that
requires establishment of Unit Prices. Methods of measurement and payment for
Unit Prices are specified in those Sections.
C. The Authority reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of work-
in-place that involves use of established Unit Prices, and to have this work
measured by the Authority or an independent surveyor acceptable to the
Contractor. If the Contractor’s measurement is determined to be inaccurate, the
Contractor shall bear the cost of this Authority quantity survey. If the Contractor’s
measurement is confirmed as accurate, the Authority shall bear the cost of the
quantity survey.
D. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices for
each Unit Price describe requirements for materials, installation, and quality.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 22 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 22 00 Unit Prices
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 22 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 22 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 22 05
LUMP-SUM PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for lump sum prices
which are amount(s) proposed by the Contractor and stated on the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices for contracted amounts for materials, products, and operations to be provided
in the envisioned scope of the Work. Lump sum prices include all necessary materials,
labor, delivery or shipping charges, unloading or handling, installation costs, profit, all
applicable taxes, and other direct and indirect costs.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 22 00, Unit Prices
B. Section 01 23 00, Options
1.03 PROCEDURES
Contactor performance of Work for which Contract lump sum payments will be made shall
be listed in the approved Schedule of Values. Payment for each lump sum item provides
full compensation for furnishing the labor, materials, tools, and equipment, and for
performing all of the Work involved to complete the Work covered by each item and
included in the Contract Documents.
Where lump sum price items require related Work specified in other Sections of the
Contract Specifications, but which is not specifically mentioned in the lump sum price
description, the Contractor shall be responsible for and include all related Work that is
normally required for work of a similar nature to the item.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 22 05
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 22 05 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 23 00
OPTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for OPTIONS which are
amount(s) proposed by the Contractor and stated on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices for specific Work defined in the bidding requirements. Options may be added to or
deducted from the base bid amount if, at its sole discretion, the Authority decides to accept
an option, either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products,
materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract
Documents.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 22 00, Unit Prices
B. Section 01 22 05, Lump-Sum Prices
1.03 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely
integrate work of the option into the Project.
B. As part of each option, include miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and
similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation, whether or not
indicated as part of the option.
C. Immediately following award of the Contract, notify the Authority in writing, of the
status of each option. Indicate if options have been accepted, rejected, or deferred
for later consideration. Notification shall include a complete description of
negotiated revisions to alternates.
D. Authority reserves the right to accept or reject any option, in any order, and to
award or amend the Contract accordingly.
E. Execute accepted options under the same conditions as other work of the
Contract. The cost or credit for each option is the net addition to or deduction from
the Contract Price to incorporate an option into the Work. No other adjustments to
the Contract Price relating to options shall be allowed.
F. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices contain
requirements for materials, installation and quality necessary to achieve the Work
described under each option.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 23 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 23 00 Options
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 23 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 23 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 23 50
TIME-RELATED OVERHEAD
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements relative to the
payment for Time-Related Overhead associated with monthly progress payments
and Contract change orders.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 01 24 13 Value Engineering Change Proposals
2. Section 01 31 99 Period of Performance
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Time-related Overhead: Time-related overhead shall consist of those overhead and
indirect costs, including field office, regional office, and home office overhead,
incurred as a result of performing Work during the contractual Period of Performance,
and the Authority authorized additional time added to or deducted from the Period of
Performance required to complete the Work. Time-related overhead and indirect
costs excludes costs that are not related to time, including but not limited to
mobilization, insurance premiums, licenses, idle and active equipment, and permits.
Time-related overhead shall not apply to non-compensable time extensions,
Subcontractors of any tier, suppliers, fabricators, manufacturers, or other entities
associated with the Contractor.
B. Field Office Overhead: Time-related costs of field office overhead include, but are not
limited to, salaries, benefits, and equipment costs of project managers, general
superintendents, field office managers, and other field office staff assigned to the
Project, as well as rent, utilities, maintenance, security, supplies, and equipment
costs of the field office.
C. Regional and Home Office Overhead: Regional and Home office overhead refers to
the costs of operating the Contractor’s business. These costs include, but are not
limited to, salaries, benefits, and equipment costs of general administration, new
business development, marketing, insurance, personnel and subcontract
administration, purchasing, accounting, and project management and estimating.
D. Contract Time: As defined in the Contract, the Contract Time is the original duration
of the Contract in calendar days plus Change Order(s) adjustments.
1.4 PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 23 50 - 1 UPDATED: May 2022
Section 01 23 50 Time-Related Overhead
A. The first calendar day for the purpose of measuring time-related overhead shall be
the effective date of the Notice to Proceed authorizing job-site mobilization.
B. The last calendar day for the purpose of measuring time-related overhead shall be
the Date of Substantial Completion.
1.5 INCREASE AND DECRESES IN TIME-RELATED OVERHEAD
A. One day of time-related overhead will be paid for every calendar day designated in
Specification Section 01 31 99 Period of Performance. Calculation of time-related
overhead costs will be based on working days with a corresponding adjustment in
calendar days for Contract Time. Any adjustments must satisfy at least one of the
following criteria:
1. Suspensions of work ordered in conformance with the Contract except:
a. Suspensions of work prior to NTP.
b. Suspensions ordered due to the failure on the part of the Contractor
to carry out orders given, or to perform the provisions of the
Contract.
c. Suspensions ordered due to factors beyond the control of and not
caused by the Authority or the Contractor, for which the Contractor is
granted extensions of time in conformance with the provisions of the
Specification Section 01 31 99 Period of Performance.
d. Other suspensions that mutually benefit the Authority and the
Contractor.
2. Adjustments of Contract Time granted by the Authority in conformance with
the provisions and set forth in approved contract change orders.
B. In the event an early completion progress schedule proposed by the Contractor and
approved by the Authority, the quantity of time-related overhead days eligible for
payment will be based on the reduced number of calendar days for the Project as
approved by the Authority.
1.6 VECP AND TIME-RELATED OVERHEAD
A. The quantity of time-related overhead associated with a reduction in Contract Time
for cost reduction incentive proposals accepted and executed in conformance with
Section 01 24 13 Value Engineering Change Proposals (VECP) shall be considered
a construction cost attributable to the resultant estimated net savings.
1.7 EXCESS TIME-RELATED OVERHEAD AND AUDIT
A. If the final quantity of time-related overhead days exceeds the original bid quantity
by more than 50 percent, the Contractor shall, within 60 days of the Authority's
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 23 50 - 2 UPDATED: May 2022
Section 01 23 50 Time-Related Overhead
written request, submit to the Authority an audit examination and report performed
by an independent certified public accountant of the Contractor's actual overhead
costs. The audit examination and report shall depict the Contractor's project and
companywide financial records and shall specify the actual overall average daily
rates for both field office and home office overhead for the entire duration of the
project, and whether the costs have been properly allocated. The rates of field office
and home office overhead shall exclude unallowable costs as determined in the
Federal Acquisition Regulations, 48 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 31.
B. Independent audit examinations by a certified public accountant shall be performed
in conformance with the requirements of the American Institute of Certified Public
Accountants Attestation Standards. Audit examinations and reports shall determine
if the rates of field office and home office overhead are
1. Allowable in conformance with the requirements of the Federal Acquisition
Regulations, 48 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 31.
2. Adequately supported by reliable documentation.
3. Related solely to the project under examination.
C. The actual rate of time-related overhead specified in the audit, and submitted by the
Contractor, will be subject to approval by the Authority.
D. When requested by the Authority, the cost of performing an independent certified
public accountant audit examination and submitting the report will be borne equally
by the Authority and the Contractor. The cost of performing an audit examination
and submitting the independent certified public accountant audit report for overhead
claims other than for the purpose of verifying the actual rate of time-related
overhead shall be entirely borne by the Contractor. The cost of performing an audit
examination and submitting the independent certified public accountant audit report
to verify actual overhead costs incurred prior to the first working day shall be entirely
borne by the Contractor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (not used)
PART 3 – EXECUTION (not used)
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 23 50 - 3 UPDATED: May 2022
Section 01 23 50 Time-Related Overhead
PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. For the purpose of progress payments, the number of Calendar Days to be paid
for TIME-RELATED DAILY OVERHEAD RATE contract item in each monthly
payment cycle will be the number of working days for that month.
B. Provisions relating to increased or decreased Unit Price quantities shall not apply
to the TIME-RELATED DAILY OVERHEAD RATE contract item.
C. The remaining balance of TIME-RELATED DAILY OVERHEAD RATE days, as
adjusted by change order, shall be paid to the contractor upon completion of all
work if the contractor achieves Substantial Completion and acceptance of the
Work prior to the current Contract Completion date.
D. General Conditions GC-30.G Increased or Decreased Quantities, does not apply
to the TIME-RELATED DAILY OVERHEAD RATE bid item.
END OF SECTION 01 23 50
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 23 50 - 4 UPDATED: May 2022
SECTION 01 24 13
VALUE ENGINEERING CHANGE PROPOSALS (VECP)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Value Engineering
Change Proposals (VECPs) by the Contractor. The Authority encourages the Contractor
to submit VECPs whenever the Contractor identifies areas or instances in which
improvements can be made, in order to achieve Project cost savings.
1.02 VECP REQUESTS
A. This Section applies to the Contractor-developed and documented VECP that
1. Requires a change to the Contract.
2. Reduces the total Contract Price without impairing essential functions or
characteristics of the Work, providing that it is not based solely on a Change
in specified quantities.
3. Results in an estimated total saving to the Authority equal or greater than
$2,500.
B. At a minimum, the following information shall be submitted by the Contractor with
each VECP:
1. Description of the existing Contract requirements that are involved in the
proposed Change.
2. Description of the proposed Change, and all Specifications or Plans
necessary for the complete evaluation of the proposed Change.
3. Discussion of differences between existing requirements and the proposed
change, together with advantages and disadvantages of each changed
item.
4. Itemization of the Contract requirements that must be changed if the VECP
is accepted (e.g., drawing numbers and specifications).
5. Justification for changes in function or characteristics of each affected item,
and the effect of the Change on the performance of the end item.
6. Date by which a Change Order adopting the VECP must be issued in order
to obtain the maximum cost reduction, noting any effect on Contract
completion time or delivery schedule.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 24 13 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 24 13 Value Engineering Change Proposals (VECP)
7. Cost estimate for existing Contract requirements correlated to the
Contractor's Unit Price or lump-sum breakdown and the proposed changes
in those requirements, including costs of development and implementation
by the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall submit VECPs to the Authority. The Authority will process
proposals expeditiously, but shall not be liable for any delay in acting upon any
proposal submitted pursuant to this Section. The Contractor may withdraw all or
part of any VECP at any time prior to acceptance by the Authority, but will, at the
sole discretion of the Authority, be liable for costs incurred by the Authority in
reviewing the proposal. The decision of the Authority as to the rejection or
acceptance of any VECP shall be at the sole discretion of the Authority.
D. At its sole discretion, the Authority may accept, in whole or in part and by Change
Order, any VECP submitted pursuant to this Section. Designs for accepted VECPs
will be accepted by the Authority for incorporation into the drawings and
specifications. Until a Change Order is executed authorizing the VECP, the
Contractor shall remain obligated to perform in accordance with the Contract.
E. If a VECP submitted by the Contractor pursuant to this Section is accepted, the
Total Contract Price shall be adjusted based upon an equal sharing of the net
savings by the Contractor and the Authority (50% Authority, 50% Contractor).
1. Net savings are defined as gross savings less the Contractor's costs and
less the Authority's costs.
2. Estimated gross savings to the Contractor means the difference between
the cost of performing the Work according to the existing requirement and
the cost to perform the Work according to the proposed Change. In each
instance, the Contractor's profit shall not be considered part of the cost
3. The Contractor’s costs means reasonable costs incurred by the Contractor
in preparing the VECP and making the Change, such as cancellation or
restocking charges.
4. The Authority's costs means reasonable costs incurred by the Authority for
evaluating and implementing the VECP, such as testing, redesign, and the
effect on other contracts.
5. The Contractor is not entitled to share in concurrent, collateral, or future
contract savings. Collateral savings are those measurable net reductions
in the Authority's costs of operation that result from the VECP, including
maintenance, logistics, and Authority furnished property. Concurrent
contract savings cover the reductions in the cost of performance of other
contracts the Contractor is participating in, for essentially the same item
resulting from a VECP submitted by the Contractor.
6. The Contractor's profit shall not be reduced by application of the VECP.
F. The Contractor shall include appropriate VECP provisions in all Subcontracts of
$25,000 or greater, and may include those provisions in any subcontract.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 24 13 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 24 13 Value Engineering Change Proposals (VECP)
G. Within the limits stated in the Contract, the Contractor may restrict the Authority's
right to use any part of a VECP or the supporting data thereof in accordance with
the terms of the following:
1. Data supplied pursuant to the Section entitled VALUE ENGINEERING
CHANGE PROPOSALS (VECP) in this Contract shall not be disclosed to
any outside person or agency, or duplicated, used, or disclosed, in whole
or in part, for any purpose other than to evaluate a VECP submitted under
said Section.
2. This restriction does not limit the Authority's right to use information
contained in this VECP if it is or has been obtained, or is otherwise
available, from the Contractor or from another source without limitations.
3. If a VECP is accepted by the Authority after the use of the data in an
evaluation, the Authority may duplicate, use, or disclose any data
reasonably necessary to the full utilization of the VECP, as accepted, in
any manner and for any purpose whatsoever; the Authority may allow
others to do so as well.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 24 13
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 24 13 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions which
are the Contractor proposed changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of
construction from those required by the Contract Documents.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 23 00, Options
B. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
C. Section 01 40 00. Quality requirements
D. Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements
1.03 SUBSTITUTION FOR SPECIFIED PRODUCTS
The Contract Documents, including Contract Drawings, and Specifications have been
prepared to complement and accommodate certain specified equipment, products or
systems, and any modifications, adjustments, or redesign required to assimilate any
Authority approved substitution of “or equal” equipment, products, or systems shall be at
the Contractor’s sole expense. The Contractor shall provide a complete and workable
application and shall satisfy design criteria and aesthetic values to the sole satisfaction of
the Authority. The Contract Time for completion of the Work specified in the Contract
Documents shall not be affected by any circumstances whatsoever arising from the
provisions of this Specification.
1.04 EQUALS
Except as may be provided in the Special Conditions, or stated otherwise in the various
sections of the Specifications, whenever any material, product, thing, or service is
specified or indicated in the Contract Documents by brand, trade, patent, or proprietary
name or by the name of the manufacturer, the item so specified or indicated shall be
deemed to be followed by the words “or equal.”
During the Contract Bid Period, the Contractor may at its own risk, submit an item not
specified in the Contract Documents as an “or equal” for consideration by the Authority.
Failure to do so within the time frame described in the Instructions to Bidders shall bar the
Contractor from proposing or substituting an “or equal” item for an item specified in the
Contract Documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 25 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures
If the Contractor submits an “or equal” item, the Contractor must submit sufficient data to
the Authority to substantiate the specific characteristics and qualities that make the “or
equal” item the equivalent, as described in the paragraph below. The Contractor shall
furnish such substantiating data or arrange for any necessary tests to verify the equivalent
qualities of the “or equal” item at the Contractor’s sole expense.
The Authority, in its sole discretion, shall determine whether the substantiating data
demonstrates that an “or equal” item is equivalent in all respects to the item specified in
the Contract Documents. If the Authority determines that the “or equal” item has not been
substantiated to be equivalent in all respects, the item specified in the Contract Documents
shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor, without modification of the cost proposal
amount or Contract Documents.
1.05 SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS
A. The Contractor shall submit request for consideration identifying product or
fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number, sub-section if applicable, and title and Contract Drawing numbers and
titles. Indicate type of substitution:
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by the Contractor that are
required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of
product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions Required Because of Federal Government Restrictions:
Changes proposed by the Contractor that result from Federal Government
restrictions or other causes growing out of the national defense or war
programs.
3. Substitutions for Lack of Availability: Changes proposed by the Contractor
because certain materials or equipment specified are entirely unobtainable
or not obtainable in sufficient quantities or within a reasonable time.
4. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by the Contractor or the
Authority that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements
but may offer advantage to the Contractor or the Authority.
B. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
following, as applicable:
1. A statement indicating why the specified product or fabrication or
installation cannot be provided, if applicable.
2. Coordination information including a list of changes or revisions needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Authority and
separate Contractors—that will be necessary to accommodate the
proposed substitution.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 25 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures
3. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution
with those of the Work specified. Include an annotated copy of the
applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include
attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect,
sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and
requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
4. Product data, including drawings and descriptions of products and
fabrication and installation procedures.
5. Samples, where applicable or requested.
6. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
7. A list of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and
addresses and the names and addresses of pertinent Engineers and
Authorities.
8. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and
interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
9. Research reports demonstrating compliance with building codes in effect
for the Project, from recognized testing laboratories or agencies, technical
trade associations, and code authorities.
10. A detailed comparison of the Contractor's construction schedule using the
proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including the
effect on the overall Contract Time. If the specified product or method of
construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include a letter
from the manufacturer, on the manufacturer's letterhead, stating the date
of receipt of the purchase order and attesting to the lack of availability or
delays in delivery.
11. Cost information, including a proposal of change (if any) in the Contract
Price.
12. The Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in the
substitution request; is compatible with related materials; and is appropriate
for the indicated applications.
13. The Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
subsequently become necessary because of any failure of the proposed
substitution to produce indicated results.
C. Authority’s Action: If necessary, the Authority will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for
substitution. The Authority will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of a
proposed substitution within 14 days of receipt of request, or within seven days of
receipt of additional information or documentation (whichever is later).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 25 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures
1. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Engineer’s Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
2. Use the product specified if the Authority does not issue a decision on use
of a proposed substitution within the time allocated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause, Federal Government Restrictions or due to Lack of
Availability: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to the time required for preparation and
review of related submittals.
The Authority will consider the Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the
Authority will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
1. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce the indicated results.
2. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that
specified product provided.
3. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
4. Requested substitution will not adversely affect the Contractor's
construction schedule.
5. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
6. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
7. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
8. Requested substitution provides the specified warranty.
9. If the requested substitution involves more than one Contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all Contractors involved.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 25 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures
B. Substitutions for Convenience: The Authority will consider requests for substitution
if received within 45 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that
time may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Authority. The Authority
will consider the Contractor's request for substitution when the conditions below
are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Authority will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Authority a substantial advantage in cost,
time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting
additional responsibilities Authority must assume. The Authority's
additional responsibilities may include compensation to the Authority for
redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by
the Authority, and similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce the indicated results.
4. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that the
specified product provided.
5. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
6. Requested substitution will not adversely affect the
Contractor's construction schedule.
7. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
8. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
10. Requested substitution provides the specified warranty.
11. If requested substitution involves more than one Contractor, the requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all Contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 25 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 25 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 26 14
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section covers the general requirements for the Contractor’s Requests for
Information and pertains to all portions of the Contract Documents.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 11 13, Work Covered by the Contract Documents
B. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
1.03 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A. The Contractor shall examine all Contract Documents; shall verify all figures in the
Contract Documents before laying out the Work; shall promptly notify the Authority
of all errors, discrepancies, inconsistencies, or omissions that it discovers; and, in
instances where such nonconformities are discovered, shall obtain specific
instructions in writing from the Authority by utilizing the RFI process before
proceeding with the Work.
B. When the Contractor is unable to determine from the Contract Documents the
exact material, process, or system to be installed, the Contractor shall ask the
Authority to clarify the indeterminate item. Wherever possible, such clarification
shall be requested at the next appropriate project meeting, with the response
entered into the meeting minutes. When clarification at the meeting is not possible,
either because of the urgency of the need or the complexity of the item, the
Contractor shall prepare and submit a written RFI to the Authority in the form and
format established by the Authority.
C. The Contractor’s performance of work affected by such nonconformities prior to
the Authority’s response shall be at the Contractor’s risk; however, the Contractor
shall continue to perform any incidental work not affected by the nonconformity
D. In the event of any doubt or question concerning the true meaning of the Contract
Documents, or should it appear that the Work to be done or any of the matters
relative thereto are not sufficiently detailed or explained in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall submit a RFI to the Authority for such further
written explanations as may be reasonably necessary, and shall conform to the
written explanation given as if it were part of the Contract Documents. The decision
of the Authority in such cases shall be final.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 26 14 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 26 14 Request for Information
E. RFIs shall be submitted on the latest SCRRA RFI form provided by the Authority.
Forms shall be completely filled in, and, if prepared by hand, shall be fully legible
after photocopying. Each page of attachments to RFIs shall bear the RFI number
in the lower right-hand corner. Each RFI shall reference a drawing number or a
Specification Section. RFIs from Subcontractors or Material suppliers shall be
submitted through, reviewed by, and signed by the Contractor prior to submittal to
the Authority.
F. The Contractor shall submit RFIs in a timely manner to avoid delays to the progress
of the Work. RFIs prepared and submitted by the Contractor shall be complete and
shall include all information or references necessary for The Authority to respond.
G. The Authority will respond to RFIs in a timely manner. The target response time
for RFIs will be 10 working days but will be no longer than 20 working days. In the
event that there are numerous RFIs pending, the Contractor shall cooperate with
the Authority in establishing a priority for responding to the RFIs.
H. In the event that an RFI is reviewed by a third-party (including Railroad Operator4s
and authorities having jurisdiction), allow up to an additional 10 working days for
the Authority’s response.
I. Authority’s response to RFI may include a request for additional information in
which case Authority’s time for response will date from time of receipt of additional
information.
J. The Contractor shall not assert any claims for delay or interference against the
Authority if the Contractor fails to submit any RFI in a timely manner to the Authority
(taking into account the time allowed for a response period allowed for the
Authority).
K. The response to an RFI shall not, by itself, constitute authorization for the
Contractor to perform any Change Work that causes an adjustment to either the
Period of Performance or the Contract Amount.
L. RFIs shall not be used for the following purposes:
1. To request approval of submittals
2. To request approval of substitutions
3. To request changes that entail additional cost or credit
4. To request different methods of performing work other than those drawn or
specified
5. Such RFIs shall be discarded and not counted or recorded.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 26 14 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 26 14 Request for Information
M. In the event the Contractor believes that a clarification by the Authority results in
additional cost, the Contractor shall not proceed with the Work indicated by the
RFI until a Change Order is prepared and approved. Neither answered nor
unanswered RFIs shall be construed as approval to perform extra work or
entitlement to adjust Period of Performance or the Contract Amount.
N. Unanswered RFIs will be returned with a stamp or notation indicating “Not
Reviewed,” and not counted or recorded.
O. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain a log of RFIs and, at any time so
requested by the Authority, the Contractor shall furnish copies of the log showing
all outstanding RFIs. The Contractor shall note all unanswered RFIs in the log.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 26 14
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 26 14 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 29 73
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare
and process the Schedule of Values
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 22 00, Unit Prices
B. Section 01 22 05, Lump-Sum Prices
C. Section 01 23 00, Options
1.03 DEFINITIONS
Schedule of Values: A tabulation furnished by the Contractor and approved by the
Authority, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work which
shall be used as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's applications for payment.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES DEVELOPMENT
A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the
Contractor's construction schedule.
B. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative
forms and schedules, including the following:
1. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets
2. Submittal schedule
3. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in the Contractor's
construction schedule
C. Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments,
provide values correlated with each phase of payment. Where the Contractor's
construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide values
correlated with each element.
D. Format and Content: Use the Specification sections as a guide to establish line
items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each
Specification section.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 29 73 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 29 73 Schedule of Values
E. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of
Values:
1. Project name and location
2. Authority’s project number
3. The Contractor's name and address
4. Segment and Phase of project
5. Date of submittal
F. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a manner consistent with the format of CSI
Master Format 2004.
G. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form, with separate columns to indicate
the following for each item listed:
1. Related Specification Section or Division
2. Description of the Work
3. Name of Sub-Contractor
4. Name of manufacturer or fabricator
5. Name of supplier
6. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value
H. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Price in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of applications for payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line
items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of one half of one percent of the
Contract Price.
I. Include separate line items under the Contractor and principal subcontracts for
project closeout requirements in an amount totaling one half of one percent of the
Contract Price and five percent of the subcontract amount.
J. Each item of the Schedule of Values shall include its proportionate share of profit,
and all other expenses involved.
1. The summation of extensions of quantities and unit prices and related costs
shall equal the amount of the lump-sum price of the applicable Contract bid
item indicated in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
2. Round amounts to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the
Contract Price.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 29 73 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 29 73 Schedule of Values
3. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for mobilization and
demobilization for each time and part and phase of the work where the
Contractor is required to mobilize and demobilize its operations.
4. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the
Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment
purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
5. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If
required, include evidence of insurance.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for the preparation
of submittals, initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of
completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each
allowance. Show line item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of
the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in
the Contract Documents to determine quantities.
8. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values
for each purchase contract. Show the line item value of each purchase
contract. Indicate Authority payments or deposits, if any, and the balance
to be paid by the Contractor.
9. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be
complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general profit for
each item.
10. Mobilization and Demobilization and other major cost items that are not
direct cost of actual work in place may be shown either as separate line
items in the Schedule of Values or distributed within the costs allocated to
the values of Time-Related Overhead, at the Contractor's option.
K. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the quantities and values
used in the Schedule of Values. No adjustment in compensation will be made due
to differences between the quantities shown in the Schedule of Values furnished
by the Contractor and the quantities required to complete the Work as shown on
the Contract Drawings and as specified in these Contract Documents.
L. The Authority will not approve the Schedule of Values if the amounts are
unreasonable and unbalanced. The Contractor shall provide any supporting
documentation necessary for the Authority to determine acceptability.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 29 73 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 29 73 Schedule of Values
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
At the Preconstruction Meeting or within 7 days after the effective date of the Notice to
Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Authority a detailed Schedule of Values that
must be approved by the Authority prior to the Contractor’s first application for progress
payment.
3.02 APPROVAL
Upon approval by the Authority, the Schedule of Values will form a basis for determining
the compensation payable to the Contractor based on actual progress of Work, in
accordance with the approved progress schedule, with respect to each Contract bid item
to be paid by lump sum. No progress payment for Contract bid items to be paid by lump
sum shall be made without an approved Schedule of Values.
3.03 REVIEW AND RESUBMITTAL
If review by the Authority indicates that changes to the Schedule of Values are required,
the Contractor shall revise and resubmit in the same manner as the original Schedule of
Values was approved.
3.04 SCHEDULE UPDATING
Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before each application for payment when
Change Orders or Work Authorization Change Notices result in a change in the Contract
Price.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 29 73
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 29 73 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 31 00
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This section contains administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations
and general project coordination procedures under this Contract.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 11 16, Work by SCRRA
B. Section 01 14 16, Coordination with SCRRA
C. Section 01 43 23, Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
1.03 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction operations and Work included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on
each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. Schedule
construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results, where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components
(before or after its own installation). Coordinate installation of different components
to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance,
service, and repair. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled
for later installation.
B. Each Contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other
contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of
the Work.
C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices,
reports, and list of attendees at meetings. Prepare similar memoranda for the
Authority and for separate Contractors if coordination of their Work is required.
D. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other
construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work.
Such administrative activities include but are not limited to the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor’s construction schedule.
2. Preparation of Contractor’s Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Pre-installation conference.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems (commissioning).
E. Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water and materials. Coordinate
use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not
actually incorporated into, the Work. See other sections of these
Specifications for disposition of salvage materials that are designated to be
owner’s property.
1.04 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: CM or Contractor will schedule and conduct weekly meetings and
conferences at the Project site, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Preconstruction Conference: The Authority will schedule and conduct a
preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to
the Authority, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.
1. Conference will review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Authority and their consultants;
the Contractor and its superintendent; major Subcontractors; suppliers;
and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude
matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress,
including the following:
a. Tentative construction schedule, Critical work sequencing and long-
lead items
b. Emergency Procedures and Contact Information
c. Phasing
d. Site access and the Contractor’s ON-SITE laydown, storage, and
staging area
e. Designation of key personnel and their duties
f. Lines of communications
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination
g. Procedures for processing field directives and Change Orders
h. Procedures for RFIs
i. Procedures for testing and inspecting
j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment
k. Distribution of the Contract Documents
l. Submittal procedures
m. Sustainable design requirements
n. Preparation of record documents
o. Use of the premises [and existing buildings]
p. Work restrictions
q. Working hours
r. Worksite safety and first aid requirements
s. Authority's occupancy requirements
t. Responsibility for Mobilization and Demobilization and controls
u. Procedures for moisture and mold control
v. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns
w. Construction waste management and recycling
x. Parking availability
y. Office, work, and storage areas
z. Equipment deliveries and priorities
aa. Security
bb. Progress cleaning
C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at the Project
site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other
construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators
involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration
with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall
attend the meeting. Advise Authority of scheduled meeting dates.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations
for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for
the following:
a. Contract Documents
b. Options
c. Related RFIs
d. Related Change Orders
e. Purchases
f. Deliveries
g. Submittals
h. Review of mockups
i. Possible conflicts
j. Compatibility requirements
k. Time schedules
l. Weather limitations
m. Manufacturer's written recommendations
n. Warranty requirements
o. Compatibility of materials
p. Acceptability of substrates
q. Mobilization and Demobilization and controls
r. Space and access limitations
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction
t. Testing and inspecting requirements
u. Installation procedures
v. Coordination with other work
w. Required performance results
x. Protection of adjacent work
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination
y. Protection of construction and personnel
z. Safety requirements
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and
disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present, the
Authority, and to other parties requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments
to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest
feasible date.
D. Project Closeout Conference: Authority will schedule and conduct a Project
closeout conference, at a time convenient to all attendees, but no later than 90
days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.
1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related
to Project closeout.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Authority, the Engineer,
Authority Commissioning personnel, and their consultants; the Contractor
and its project manager; major Subcontractors; Suppliers; and other
concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting
shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters
relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project
closeout, including the following:
a. Preparation of record documents
b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion
and for final inspection for acceptance
c. Submittal of written warranties
d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data
e. Requirements for demonstration and training
f. Preparation of the Contractor's punch list
g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial
Completion and for final payment
h. Submittal procedures
i. Coordination of separate contracts
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination
j. Authority's partial occupancy requirements
k. Installation of Authority's furniture, fixtures, and equipment
l. Responsibility for removing Mobilization and Demobilization and
controls
4. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes to Authority and all
attendees.
E. Progress Meetings: Authority will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Authority, each Contractor,
Subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress
or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities
shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall
be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
the Work.
3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress
meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress.
Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project.
a. The Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since
the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead
of schedule, or behind schedule in relation to the Contractor's
construction schedule. Determine how construction that has fallen
behind schedule will be remedied; secure commitments from
parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are
required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be
completed within the Contract Time.
b. Review the schedule for the next period.
c. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including
the following:
1) Interface requirements
2) Sequence of operations
3) Status of submittals
4) Deliveries
5) Off-site fabrication
6) Access
7) Site utilization
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination
8) Mobilization and Demobilization and controls
9) Progress cleaning
10) Quality and work standards
11) Status of correction of deficient items
12) Field observations
13) Status of RFIs
14) Status of proposal requests
15) Pending changes
16) Status of Change Orders
17) Pending claims and disputes
18) Documentation of information for payment requests
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 31 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 31 19
PARTNERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
The Authority will promote the formation of a “Partnering” relationship with the Contractor
to effectively complete the Contract to the benefit of both parties. This partnering
relationship will be structured to draw on strengths of each organization to identify and
achieve mutual goals. The purpose of this relationship will be to maintain cooperative
communication and mutually resolve conflicts in accordance with the terms of the
Contract.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 21 00, Allowances
1.03 PARTNERING FACILITATION
To implement this partnering initiative, prior to starting field Work, the Contractor’s
management personnel and the Authority will initiate a partnering development Team-
building workshop. Project personnel shall work with the assistance of a Facilitator to
make arrangements and to determine attendance, agenda, duration, and location of the
workshop. Persons required to be in attendance will be the Authority’s management staff
and key project personnel representing the Authority, the Contractor’s management staff
and key project supervision personnel of both the Contractor and principal Subcontractors
and suppliers, and representatives of respective utility companies. The project design
engineers and other key personnel will also be invited to attend, as necessary.
If mutually agreed, follow-up workshops may be held periodically throughout the duration
of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
The Contractor shall be responsible for making all the necessary arrangements to provide
a Facilitator, associated materials and a workshop site. Such arrangements shall be
mutually agreed upon in advance by the Contractor and the Authority.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The Authority shall approve all direct costs, and each party will be assessed for 50% of
such costs. The reimbursable portion of the Contractor’s costs associated with Partnering
will be made by modification to the contract and payment will be made under the allowance
item for Partnering in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
END OF SECTION 01 31 19
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 19 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 31 99
PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE (2 STEP NTP)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for a two-step Notice-to-
Proceed process, and defines allowable conditions for Contract Time extensions.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 29 73, Schedule of Values
B. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
C. Special Conditions Section – Commencement of the Work
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Limited Notice to Proceed: SCRRA written authorization to commence the
performance of specified activities within the Work.
B. Notice to Proceed: SCRRA written authorization to proceed with all or portions of the
Work, as specified.
C. Contract Time: As stated in the Contract, the original duration of the Contract in
calendar days plus Change Order adjustments
1.04 COMMENCEMENT OF WORK
The Authority will employ a two-step Notice to Proceed. As specified in the Contract Special
Conditions, the Authority will issue a “Limited Notice to Proceed,” no later than 20 days after,
or as early as one day after, execution of the Contract. The Contractor is not authorized to
perform any work until the Contractor has received the Limited Notice to Proceed from the
Authority. Should the Contractor begin Work in advance of receiving the Limited Notice to
Proceed, such Work shall be considered as having been done at the Contractor’s own risk.
The Limited Notice to Proceed will initiate the Contract Time and will constitute a notice to
proceed with specified Work tasks and deliverables.
The full “Notice to Proceed” will not be issued prior to the Authority’s acceptance of
completion of all activities initiated by the “Limited Notice to Proceed,” above. The issuance
of the full “Notice to Proceed” will be a notice for the Contractor to proceed with all remaining
Work and diligently prosecute the same to completion within the Contract Time.
1.05 PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE
The date of the Limited Notice to Proceed is the start date for the Contract Period of
Performance.
SCRRA Supply Specifications 01 31 99 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 31 99 Period of Performance (2 Step NTP)
1.06 DELAYS AND TIME EXTENSIONS
A. Delays beyond the Contractor’s control: The Contractor will be granted an extension
of time and will not be assessed with liquidated damages for any delay in
substantially completing the Work (or parts thereof) beyond the time set forth in the
Contract, provided that such delay was caused by unforeseeable causes beyond the
control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Examples of such
causes include acts of a public enemy, fire, floods, adverse weather, tidal waves,
earthquakes, hurricanes, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, labor disputes
and freight embargoes, or negligent acts of the Authority.
B. Authority caused delays: In the event the Contractor is actually and necessarily
delayed by any act or omission on the part of the Authority (as determined by the
Authority), and provided that the Contractor notifies the Authority in writing within 5
days from the beginning of any such delay, specifying the act or omission causing
such delay, the time for completion of the Work may be extended at the sole
discretion of the Authority. In all cases, any extension of time is contingent on all of
the following:
1. That the cause is not due to the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and the
Contractor has taken reasonable precautions to prevent the delays and
minimize the effects thereof.
2. That the Contractor submits a Request for Change (RFC) specifying the
nature of the delay and the measures that have been or will be taken to
prevent or minimize the delay. Failure to submit written notice within this time
period shall constitute an absolute waiver of any claim for a time extension.
The RFC submitted by the Contractor shall also include a Time Impact
Analysis as required in the Specification.
3. No extension of time will be granted under this Section for any Authority
caused delay in which (1) the performance of Work would have been
concurrently delayed by the Contractor induced causes, including an act or
omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractors, or (2) remedies are included
or excluded by any other provision of the Contract. Only the actual delay
necessarily resulting from the causes specified in this Section shall be
grounds for an extension of time. In case the Contractor is delayed at any
time or for any period by two or more of the causes specified in this Section,
the Contractor shall not be entitled to a separate extension for each one of
the causes; only one extension will be granted for the entire delay.
4. No extension of time will be granted for a delay caused by a shortage of
materials unless the Contractor furnishes to the Authority (a) documentary
proof that the Contractor has diligently made every effort to obtain such
materials from all known sources within reasonable reach of the work site(s),
and (b) further proof, in the form of schedule data as required under Section
01 32 17, Construction Project Schedule, that the inability to obtain such
materials when originally planned did in fact cause a delay in Substantial
Completion of a portion of the Work or the entire Work, one that could not be
compensated for by revising the sequence of the Contractor’s operations.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 99 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 31 99 Period of Performance (2 Step NTP)
5. The term “shortage of materials,” as used in this Section, shall apply only to
materials, articles, parts, or equipment that are not custom items; it and shall
not apply to equipment, materials, parts, or articles that are processed, made,
constructed, fabricated, or manufactured to meet the specific requirements of
the Contract Documents. Only conditions not in the control of the Contractor
that result in the physical shortage of materials will be considered as a cause
for extension of time, and no consideration will be given to any claim that
material could not be obtained at a reasonable, practical, or economical cost
or price, unless it is shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that such
material could have been obtained only at exorbitant prices entirely out of line
with current rates, taking into account the quantities involved and the usual
practices in obtaining such quantities.
C. When inclement weather at the Project site affects Critical Path activities, the
Contractor may provide the Authority with a written request for a weather impact day
that fully describes the inclement weather delay on the Critical Path activities.
Excusable, non-compensable Contract time extensions for weather delays will only
be considered for such delays that affect activities on the critical path of the Contract,
as defined by the schedule current at the time of the delay. Such time extensions, if
approved, will be non-compensable and shall be requested by the Contractor in
accordance with Contract Change Order procedures subject to the following:
1. A weather delay day is defined as a day on which the Contractor is prevented
by inclement weather or conditions resulting immediately therefrom, as
determined by the Authority from proceeding with at least 75 percent of the
normal labor and equipment force engaged on Critical Path activities for at
least 60 percent of the total daily time being currently spent on the Critical
Path activities. Weather delays may consist of days lost to inclement weather
conditions, days lost to dry out of exposed soil, or days lost to site clean-up
due to inclement weather but only after the weather impact area affecting the
Critical Path activities has exhausted the allotted cumulative Rain Day Impact
Allowance.
2. The table below lists the typical number of inclement weather days per month.
Only days lost due to weather in a given month in excess of the number listed
for that month will be considered for a time extension. Weather delay days
are not cumulative from month to month.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 99 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Typical Number of Days of Inclement Weather
Month No. of Month No. of
Days Days
January 5 July 0
February 5 August 0
March 5 September 0
April 4 October 0
May 3 November 3
June 0 December 5
3. Weather impact days will not be granted for inclement weather that occurs
on non-scheduled workdays. If the effects of inclement weather from a non-
scheduled work day carry forward to a scheduled work day and affects the
Critical Path as noted above, then the scheduled work day will be
considered affected by weather.
4. If the Contractor asks to work a specific weekend or holiday and gives the
Authority advance written notification of critical-path work to be performed,
and if a substantial amount of precipitation occurs that prevents the work
from being performed, that day can be claimed as a weather impact day.
Any unused rain day allowance at the end of the project will be shown as
available float to the Substantial Completion milestone.
D. Time Extensions for Critical Path activities only: No extensions of time will be
granted for delays that have no measurable impact on the completion of the Work
(or parts thereof) under the Contract Documents. When extensions of time are
granted, they shall be limited to the period equivalent to the actual number of days
lost on the Critical Path or controlling operations of the Project Baseline Schedule
or other applicable construction schedule, taking into account the extent to which
that delay could be decreased by reasonable mitigation measures by the
Contractor. All requests for extensions of time shall be supported with a critical
path analysis showing the critical path and impacts on it. The Contractor’s failure
to submit this analysis will be sufficient cause for denial of any request for a time
extension.
E. An extension of time granted shall not release the Contractor's Surety from its
obligations. Work shall continue and be carried on in accordance with all provisions
of the Contract. The Contract shall remain in full force and effect during the
continuance and until completion and acceptance of the Work covered by the
Contract, unless formally suspended or terminated in accordance with the terms
of the Contract. Permitting the Contractor to finish the Work, or any part thereof,
after the time fixed for completion (or after the date to which the time for
completion may have been extended), and/or making payments to the Contractor
after any such periods, shall not constitute a waiver on the part of the Authority of
any rights under the Contract.
SCRRA Supply Specifications 01 31 99 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 31 99 Period of Performance (2 Step NTP)
F. Neither the granting of an extension of time beyond the date fixed for the
completion of any part of the Work nor the performance and acceptance of any
part of the Work after the time specified for the completion of the Work shall be
deemed to be a waiver by the Authority of the Authority's right to terminate the
Contract for abandonment or failure to complete within the time specified, or to
impose and deduct damages as may be specified.
G. In all cases in which the Contractor either Claims or intends to Claim a delay, the
Contractor shall comply with those provisions contained in the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 31 99
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 31 99 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 32 17
CONSTRUCTION PROJECT SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
Section includes requirements for preparing, submitting, revising, and updating project
scheduling information. The purpose of this section is to ensure adequate planning and
execution of the Work by the Contractor and to establish a standard against which
satisfactory completion of the Project can be measured by the Authority and provide
justification for progress payments.
1.02 GENERAL
A. The scheduling and execution of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents are the responsibility of the Contractor. Schedules shall represent a
practical plan to complete the Work within the Contract Time and shall convey the
Contractor’s intent in the manner of prosecution and progress of the Work. The
submittal of schedules shall be understood to be the Contractor’s representation
that the schedule meets the requirements of the Contract Documents and that the
Work will be executed in the sequence and duration indicated in the schedule.
B. Schedules shall be consistent with the time and work requirements of the Contract.
The Contractor shall execute the Work in the sequence indicated on the current
approved schedule.
C. The Contractor shall involve and coordinate with all Subcontractors, third parties,
and material suppliers in the development and updating of schedules.
D. Review or acceptance of schedules by Authority shall not waive any contract
requirements and shall not relieve the Contractor of any obligation or responsibility
for submitting complete and accurate information.
E. If after a schedule has been accepted or approved by the Authority, either the
Contractor or the Authority discovers that any aspect of the schedule has an error
or omission, the Contractor shall correct it on the next Progress Schedule.
F. Errors or omissions on schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from finishing all
work within the Contract Time.
G. The Contractor shall adjust, add to, or clarify any portion of a schedule which the
Authority determines to be insufficient for monitoring the Work or to be impractical
for any reason.
H. Use of float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing or logic,
special lead/lag logic restraints and extended activity durations will be cause for
rejection of schedule submittal.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 29 73, Schedule of Values
B. Section 01 31 99, Period of Performance
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A task, event or other project element on a schedule that contributes to
completing the project. Activities have a description, start date, finish date, duration
and one or more logic ties.
B. Actual Dates: The actual start or finish date of an activity which occurs prior to the
data date. Dates occurring after the data date are forecasted dates and are not
actual dates.
C. Bar Chart (Gantt Chart): A graphic display of schedule-related information in which
activities or other project elements are listed down the left side of the chart, dates
are shown across the top, and activity durations are shown as date-placed
horizontal bars.
D. Baseline Schedule: The initial schedule representing the Contractor's work plan on
the first working day of the project as approved by the Authority.
E. Contract Completion Date: Contracted original completion date defined by the
duration of the project.
F. Controlling Operation: The activity, within that series of activities defined as the
applicable critical path, which if delayed or prolonged will delay the scheduled
completion date of the Work.
G. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities for the project that has the
least amount of total float of all chains. In general, a delay on the critical path will
extend the scheduled completion date.
H. Critical Path Method (CPM): A network-based planning technique using activity
durations and the relationships between activities to mathematically calculate a
schedule for the entire project.
I. Data Date: The day after the date through which a schedule is current. Everything
occurring earlier than the data date is "as-built" and everything on or after the data
date is "planned."
J. Day: Refers to working days, which are any days other than any days declared
holidays by the Authority.
K. Early Completion Date: A scheduled completion date which is earlier than the
contract completion date.
L. Free Float: The amount of time an activity can be delayed before affecting a
subsequent activity.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
M. Hammock Activity: An activity added to the network to span an existing group of
activities for summarizing purposes.
N. Milestone: A marker in a network which is typically used to mark a point in time or
denote the beginning or end of a sequence of activities. A milestone has zero
duration but will otherwise function in the network as if it were an activity.
O. Narrative Report: A document submitted with each schedule that discusses topics
related to project progress and scheduling.
P. Near Critical Path: A chain of activities with total float exceeding that of the critical
path but having no more than 10 working days of total float.
Q. Open Ended Activity: An activity without at least one predecessor and one
successor.
R. Out of Sequence Activities: Any activity which actually starts in a sequence other
than shown in the current approved schedule.
S. Progress Schedule: A current schedule developed from the baseline or
subsequent schedule through regular monthly review to incorporate as-built
progress and any planned changes.
T. Revision: A change in the schedule that modifies logic, adds or deletes activities,
or alters activities, sequences, or durations.
U. Scheduled Completion Date: The planned date of completion of the Work shown
on the current approved schedule.
V. Time Impact Analysis: A schedule and narrative report developed specifically to
demonstrate what effect a proposed change or delay has on the current scheduled
completion date.
W. Total Float: The amount of time that an activity or chain of activities can be delayed
before extending the scheduled completion date.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Baseline Schedule: Submit Baseline Schedule to the Authority within 28 calendar
days following the date of the Limited Notice to Proceed for review and approval
or within 15 working days from the Notice to proceed when a separate LNTP is not
issued.
B. 90-Day Preliminary Schedule: Submit 90-Day Preliminary Schedule to the
Authority within 14 calendar days following date of the Limited Notice to Proceed
for review and approval.
C. Progress Schedule: Progress Schedule is due as part of the submittal of progress
payment application for review and approval. The data date shall be set one day
after the period in that month’s progress payment application period.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
D. Final Progress Schedule shall be submitted within 14 calendar days following
Substantial Completion for review and approval.
E. Subcontractor Documentation:
1. Submit with the Baseline Schedule all Subcontractor schedules utilized in
the development of the Baseline Schedule.
2. Submit with the Baseline Schedule, a statement on Subcontractor’s
letterhead, certifying that Subcontractor has reviewed and concurs with the
Baseline Schedule and that Subcontractor’s related schedule has been
reasonably incorporated, including activity duration
F. Scheduler Qualifications: At Pre-Construction meeting, submit for the Authority’s
acceptance a resume of the individual proposed to perform scheduling. If the
accepted individual leaves the Project or is assigned duties which no longer permit
the individual to perform scheduling, notify the Authority and submit for acceptance
the resume of the proposed replacement. Proposed individual must have a
minimum of 5 years of verifiable scheduling experience.
G. Submit for Authority’s use two (2) Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio
Management Scheduling Software licenses (registered to the Authority).
H. Three Week Look Ahead Schedule: Submit first Three-Week Look Ahead
Schedule at Pre-Construction Meeting. Submit three hard copies of the weekly
thereafter at Construction Progress Meetings until Substantial Completion.
1.06 SUBMITTAL DETAILS
A. Each submittal of Baseline, Preliminary and Progress Schedules shall include the
elements listed herein.
B. Electronic Data: Electronic transmittal containing schedule, schedule data, and
narrative. Schedule data shall be saved in P6 (.xer) format and shall contain all
files of the schedule that can be restored by the Authority for its evaluation and
analysis.
1. Tabular Reports: Electronic data submitted shall be sufficient to enable the
Authority to generate the following tabular reports: Report sorted by activity
number, report sorted by early start, and report sorted by total float. Data
shall include the following items for each activity: activity number,
description of what is to be accomplished and where, codes, duration,
milestones, predecessor and successor logic, early start, early finish, late
start, late finish, total float and free float.
C. Gantt Activity Bar Charts: Show activities grouped by work areas and sorted by
early start. Submit six (6) hard copies, 11 by 17 inch, and two (2) color E-size plots,
34 inches by 44 inches.
D. Narrative Reports: Submit three hard copies.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
1.07 BASELINE SCHEDULE
A. Baseline Schedule shall utilize computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) network
scheduling.
B. Software: Utilize latest version of Primavera P6 Professional Project Management.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
C. Baseline Schedule shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry
out the work with logical links between work activities, and calculations made using
the critical path method to determine the controlling operation or operations.
Ensure that activity sequences are logical and that schedule shows a coordinated
plan for complete performance of the work.
D. Baseline Schedule shall include the entire scope of work through the end of
Contract Time. Show how the Contractor plans to complete the Work. Show the
activities that define the critical path. Show float on other activities. Keep multiple
critical paths and near-critical paths to a minimum. A total of not more than 30
percent of the baseline schedule activities shall be critical or near critical, unless
otherwise authorized by the Authority.
E. The data date for the Baseline Schedule shall be the date of Limited Notice to
Proceed (LNTP) and shall include actual dates and durations for work completed
prior to Notice to Proceed (NTP). Baseline Schedule shall not attribute negative
float or negative lag to any activity.
F. Baseline Schedule shall define non-working days as the following 9 holidays: New
Years Day, Martin Luther King Day, President’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence
Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Day after Thanksgiving Day and Christmas
Day.
G. Float: Float shall not be considered as time for the exclusive use of or benefit of
either the Authority or the Contractor, but shall be considered as a jointly owned,
expiring resource available to the project and shall not be used to the financial
detriment of either party. Use of float suppression techniques such as preferential
sequencing, special lead/lag logic restraints, extended activity durations or
imposed constraints will be cause for rejection of the Baseline Schedule and
subsequent Progress Schedules. The Contractor shall not create artificial activities
that eliminate any or all float in the project schedule.
H. Calendar: Utilize multiple schedule calendars to identify and differentiate between
day and night shift work and any weekend activity work.
I. Autocost rules: Autocost rules shall link the remaining duration and the schedule
percent complete. The updated percent complete against the budget shall be used
to estimate Actual Cost to Date, and Actual to Date shall be linked to Actual This
Period. Other automatic cost/resource calculation rules shall be in a format
acceptable to the Authority.
J. Retained Logic: When schedule calculations are performed, the “Retained Logic”
setting shall be used.
K. Early Completion: The Contractor may submit a Baseline or Progress Schedule
showing an early scheduled completion date provided that the requirements of the
Contract are met.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
1. The difference between the early completion date and the contract
completion date is considered float. Float time shall not be for the exclusive
benefit of either the Authority or the Contractor. Float shall be a resource
available to both parties.
2. Authority is not required to accept or approve a schedule with an early
completion date.
3. The Contractor shall not be entitled to extra compensation in the event an
agreement is reached on an early completion date and the Contractor
completes the Work, regardless of the reason, beyond the early completion
date but within the Contract Time.
4. Changes to Contract Time or contract completion date shall be by Contract
Change Order.
L. Baseline Narrative Report: Submit a narrative report with the Baseline Schedule
describing the schedule development process, activity coding structure, basis of
proposed durations, work sequence, approach or methods the Contractor intends
to employ in the Work, and explanation of early scheduled completion date, if
proposed.
1.08 BASELINE SCHEDULE ACTIVITIES
A. Activity Coding: The Contractor shall develop its own activity coding structure.
Activities shall be coded to a level sufficient to allow for multiple sorting such as
that specified for tabular reports under “Tabular Reports” and “Gantt Activity Bars”
in the Section entitled “Submittal Details” (1.06) herein.
B. General Activity Requirements: Baseline schedules shall include activities to
show the following, as applicable:
1. Project characteristics, salient features, or interfaces, including those with
outside entities that could affect time of completion.
2. Project start date, scheduled completion date and other milestones.
3. Work performed by the Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers and Third
Parties.
4. Submittal development, delivery, review and approval, including those from
the Contractor, Subcontractors, third parties, and suppliers which impact
the critical path.
5. All submittals as listed in the Schedule of Submittals.
6. Procurement, delivery, installation, and testing of materials, plants, and
equipment.
7. Required delivery of Authority furnished materials and periods of use of
Authority-furnished equipment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
8. Acquisition of permits.
9. Utility notification and relocation noted to be performed by others.
10. Installation and removal of falsework and shoring.
11. Major traffic routing switches.
12. Final cleanup.
13. Work performed by other Contractors and entities.
14. Demobilization, punchlist and project closeout activities.
C. The number of activities shall be sufficient to assure adequate planning of the
project, to permit monitoring and evaluation of progress, and to do an analysis of
time impacts.
D. Each schedule activity shall include the following:
1. A clear, legible and unique description, including the location of work.
2. Start and finish dates.
3. Duration not less than one full day, except for milestone activities, and not
more than 15 working days, with the exception of submittals, fabrication,
procurement, and summary activities, unless otherwise approved by
Authority.
4. At least one predecessor and one successor activity, except for project
start and finish milestones.
5. Contractually required constraints. Use of any other types of constraints is
not allowed without prior approval by the Authority.
6. Activity codes for responsibility, phase, area, stage, work shifts, and
contract bid item numbers. Code for responsibility shall denote the entity
performing the activity, i.e. Authority, Contractor, Subcontractor, or utility.
7. Cost-Loading: Cost loading shall be made to the activities in accordance
with the detail requirements set forth in this Section.
1.09 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE
A. Preliminary 90-Day Construction Schedule shall be submitted to the Authority at
Pre-Construction meeting. The Schedule shall contain all procurement,
construction activities and the Contractor's intended sequencing of work for first 90
calendar days following LNTP or NTP, whichever occurs first. Accepted
Preliminary 90-Day Schedule shall be updated monthly and submitted until the
Contractor's Baseline Schedule is developed and accepted by Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
B. Updates to Preliminary 90-Day Schedule are basis for payment to the Contractor
during the first three-month period. Timely submittal and acceptance of such
updates shall be a condition precedent to payment by Authority.
C. Preliminary 90-Day Schedule shall also identify activities and milestones that will
or may affect or be affected by activities of the Authority, Utilities, Railroads and
other third parties.
D. Partial cost loading for purpose of Progress and Earned Value Measurement as
described in Section 1.11 covering the Work for first 90-Days after the LNTP or
NTP shall be submitted with the Preliminary 90-Day Schedule.
1.10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Progress Schedule shall consist of an updated schedule based on the Baseline
Schedule.
B. Release of Progress payments will be dependent on receipt of an acceptable
Progress Schedule.
C. Preliminary Progress Schedule: A Preliminary Progress Schedule for purpose of
monthly progress review meeting is required 3 working days prior to the monthly
status data date.
D. For the detail procedures for Monthly Progress Review Meeting and the required
formats for Preliminary Progress Schedule, refer to Section 1.11-A.
E. Include the following information in the Progress Schedule: Status of work actually
completed to date and the work yet to be performed as planned; actual activity
start dates, and finish dates, as applicable; and durations for work that has been
completed as the work actually occurred, including Authority submittal review and
Contractor resubmittal times. Show approved time adjustments and project
completion dates. Show approved Contract Change Order work. Show weather
delay days which have already occurred and have been acknowledged by the
Authority in writing.
F. Modifications shown in Progress Schedule: The Contractor may include
modifications such as adding or deleting activities or changing activity constraints,
durations or logic that do not (1) alter the critical path(s) or near critical path(s) or
(2) extend the scheduled completion date compared to that shown on the current
accepted schedule. The Contractor shall state in writing the reasons for any
changes to planned work. If any proposed changes in planned work will result in
(1) or (2) above, then the Contractor shall submit a time impact analysis as
described herein.
G. Change logic relationships of out-of-sequence activities to reflect actual work
sequence.
H. Progress Narrative Report: Submit Narrative Report containing detailed
comprehensive descriptions of the following information with every Progress
Schedule submittal:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
1. Description of work completed during the reporting period, including
progress made on activities on the current critical path.
2. Explanation of any lack of work on activities on the critical path during the
reporting period.
3. Description of the current critical path.
4. Explanation of changes to the critical path, including changes to logic or
activity durations, and scheduled completion date since the last schedule
submittal. Include explanation of work activities performed out of sequence
from the approved schedule.
5. Status of major activities on the current critical path, including percent
complete, and amount of time ahead or behind schedule. Provide
description and explanation of any delays encountered during the reporting
period, including impacts on other activities, milestones, and completion
dates.
6. Description of proposed corrective actions and schedule adjustments to
mitigate delays and bring the project back on schedule.
7. Status of permits, change orders, submittals, potential claims, time
adjustments, material and equipment procurement, non-conformance
reports, and any other pending items on the current critical path.
8. Description of activities on the critical path to be performed in the next
update period.
9. Any other information pertinent to the status of the project as determined
by the Contractor or requested by the Authority.
I. Final Progress Schedule: Prepare and submit an updated, as-built Progress
Schedule with actual start and finish dates for all activities and documented
changes from the Preliminary Progress Schedule. Include a narrative report. The
Contractor shall provide a written certificate with this submittal signed by the
Contractor's project representative and an officer of the company stating, "To my
knowledge and belief, the enclosed final update schedule reflects the actual start
and finish dates of the actual activities for the project contained herein.” An officer
of the company may delegate in writing the Authority to sign the certificate to a
responsible manager.
1.11 PROGRESS AND EARNED VALUE MEASUREMENT
A. As a part of the monthly update cycle, a progress review meeting utilizing the
Preliminary Update Schedule, will be held at least 3 working days prior to the data
date between the Contractor and the Authority.
1. The schedule shall be based on the approved Progress Schedule from the
previous month.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
2. The format shall include added blank columns in which the Contractor will
pencil in the updated information including start dates, finish dates, percent
completes, and remaining durations. The Contractor shall indicate activities
for which Physical Percent Complete is used. The anticipated actual
progress between the meeting date and the data date shall also be
projected and included in the Preliminary Update Schedule. The format for
the draft update schedule is shown below.
3. Any logic revisions that need to be incorporated into the Progress Schedule
shall be brought to the Authority’s attention in the monthly progress review
meeting for Authority’s initial review, including, but not limited to, fixing the
logic of out-of-sequence activities, adding any approved time impact
fragnets, reflecting the Contractor’s work plan changes, and any other
minor logic revisions.
B. Except as otherwise specified, only construction and general requirement activities
shall be cost loaded. The sum of the budgeted costs of all activities in the project
schedule shall equal the contract price. Activity costs shall not be input as
resources.
1. Each construction activity shall have a nonzero budgeted cost that
represents the direct cost of the work. Front-end loading of costs is not
permitted and shall result in rejection of the schedule.
2. In the scheduling software, cost account numbers shall be defined to
exactly mirror the contract bid item numbers. All activities shall be assigned
with a cost account number which corresponds to the contract bid item
number whether or not the activity has a dollar value assigned. The sum of
the budgeted cost of all activities coded with a particular cost account (i.e.,
sub-level activities under a particular bid item) shall equal to the amount of
the matching bid item.
3. Each activity’s cost loading should be made based on the predefined cost
account numbers so that a Schedule of Value report can be generated from
the scheduling software after the entire cost loading is done. The format of
the Schedule of Value shall be the same as the Schedule of Quantities of
Price in the contract document.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
4. Activity’s percent complete shall be determined by estimating percent of
Work in place. Autocost rule shall link Remaining Duration and Percent
Complete. If the Contractor elects to bypass the said autocost rule for any
cost loaded activities by using Physical Percent Complete or any other
variations, a prior approval from the Authority shall be obtained.
C. The amount of monthly progress payment shall match the sum of the Earned
Values generated from the cost loaded activities as a result of updating the
Progress Schedule.
1. The organization of Earned Value Report shall be the same as the
breakdown of Schedule of Value submitted during the initial schedule
development which was developed according to predefined cost account
numbers corresponding to the contract bid item numbers.
2. The Schedule of Value shall be the base from which an Earned Value
Report will be generated each month. The Earned Value Report shall be
attached to each monthly payment application submittal package.
D. After the monthly progress review meeting, the Contractor shall formally update
the monthly Progress Schedule based on the agreed-upon schedule update data.
Then the monthly Earned Value Report shall be generated and included in the
monthly Progress Schedule submittals, which shall be submitted no later than 5
working days after the data date. The Earned Value Report shall be a direct output
from the scheduling software which shows subtotal for each Schedule of Value
grouping category and grand total for the entire project. The Earned Value Report
format is shown below.
1.12 THREE-WEEK LOOK AHEAD SCHEDULE
A. Three-Week Look Ahead Schedule shall contain one week of historical information
and three weeks of planned activities in support of and consistent with the Baseline
Schedule or current Progress Schedule.
B. Format: An electronic spreadsheet or other format acceptable to the Authority.
Label each activity to match the Activity ID number on the current Progress
Schedule. Highlight the critical path. Data date shall be within current week.
C. Level of Detail: Greater than in the Baseline Schedule or Progress Schedule.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
D. Clearly show each activity requiring track access during specified work windows;
schedule activities performed during single or multiple track outage work windows
utilizing an hourly time scale.
E. Show weather delay days which have already occurred and have been
acknowledged by the Authority in writing.
F. Show demobilization and punchlist activities through to Final Completion.
1.13 REVIEW AND RESUBMITTALS
A. The Authority will review and return the Contractor’s schedule submittals and
deliverables with a written response according to the following schedule from the
date of receipt from the Contractor.
1. Baseline Schedule: within 15 working days.
2. Progress Schedule: within 10 working days
B. The Authority will review and return resubmittals to the Contractor with a written
response according to the following schedule from the date of receipt from the
Contractor.
1. Baseline Schedule: within 15 working days
2. Progress Schedule: within 10 working days
C. If the Contractor does not agree with the Authority’s comments, provide written
notice of disagreement within 5 working days from the receipt of the Authority’s
comments. Resolve any Authority’s comments with which the Contractor
disagrees in a meeting held for that purpose.
D. The first of each type of submittal and deliverable submitted by the Contractor will
be reviewed for format, as well as content. The Authority may require format
changes. Once the format has been approved, submit subsequent submittals and
deliverables in the approved format.
E. Baseline Schedule Review Meeting: Within 10 working days after the submittal of
the Baseline Schedule, the Authority will conduct a Baseline Schedule Review
Meeting with the Contractor.
1. The Contractor shall have its Project Manager, construction management
personnel, individual performing scheduling and major Subcontractor
representatives, in attendance.
2. Meeting topics will include the following:
a. The Contractor’s presentation of Baseline Schedule submittal
including explanation of critical path, critical path activities,
resources and production rates of work activities, and other items
related to scheduling of work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
b. General review and discussion of schedule format, activities and
information potentially missing from the schedule.
F. Recovery Schedule: If Contractor’s actual progress of the Work falls ten (10)
working days behind the approved Baseline Schedule for the Contract completion
date, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Recovery Schedule within five (5)
working days to explain and display how the Contractor intends to regain
compliance with the Contract completion date. The Recovery Schedule shall detail
the Contractor’s plan for bringing the work back on schedule. The Contractor’s plan
for recovery shall conform to all other Contract requirements. Incorporate revisions
accepted by the Authority in the next Progress Schedule. Do not incorporate
proposed revisions in the Progress Schedule prior to their acceptance.
1.14 TIME IMPACT ANALYSIS
A. If the Contractor requests an extension of time for the completion of an interim
milestone date or Contract completion date, justification in the form of a Time
Impact Analysis (TIA) for such extension shall be furnished. The Authority will
determine whether or not the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under
the provisions of the Contract. Submission of a TIA based on revised activity logic,
duration, and a cost is required for approval of any time extension. The cost of
preparing time impact analyses or subsequent schedule revisions shall be borne
solely by the Contractor.
B. Illustrate the impacts of each change or delay on the current Contract completion
date or interim milestone, as appropriate. Use the approved Progress Schedule
which has a data date closest to and prior to the event for which an extension is
being requested.
C. Include a schedule showing all schedule logic revisions, duration changes, cost
changes, and additions or deletions of activities for the work in question and its
relationship to other activities on the Progress Schedule. Provide additional
supporting evidence if requested by the Authority.
D. The Authority’s determination as to the total number of days of time extension will
be based upon the current schedule for the time period in question, and all other
relevant information. Actual delays in activities which, according to the Progress
Schedule, do not affect the critical path or the Contract completion date will not be
the basis for a time extension.
E. The Authority will review the facts and advise the Contractor in writing of the
Authority’s decision. If the Authority determines that the Contractor is entitled to an
extension of time to an interim milestone, the Contract completion date will remain
the same, unless the Authority specifies another date. Any change to Contract
milestones or to the Contract completion date will be made by Change Order.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 17 Construction Project Schedule
F. If the Authority has not yet made a full determination as to the amount of time
extension to be granted and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of
extension to be reflected in the Progress Schedule, reflect that amount of time
extension in the Progress Schedule as determined to be appropriate by the
Authority for such interim purpose. It is understood and agreed that such interim
determination by the Authority for the purposes of this Section will not be binding
upon either party for any other purpose, and that, after the Authority has made a
final determination as to any time extension, revise the Progress Schedule in
accordance with the final decision.
1.15 INCLEMENT WEATHER CONDITION
The Contractor shall allow for inclement weather in the Baseline Schedule by incorporating
an activity titled “Rain Day Impact Allowance” as the last activity prior to the Substantial
Completion milestone. No other activities may be concurrent with it. The duration of the
Rain Day Impact Allowance activity will be based on Section 01 31 99, Period of
Performance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 32 17
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 17 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 32 33
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
A. Preconstruction photographs
B. Periodic construction photographs
C. Final completion construction photographs
D. Preconstruction video recordings
E. Periodic construction video recordings
F. Web-based construction photographic documentation
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENT
A. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 77 00, Substantial Completion
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Key Plan: Submit a key plan of the Project site and any buildings, with notation of
vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph and video
recording. Indicate the elevation of construction. Include same information as
corresponding photographic documentation.
B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within 7 days of taking photographs.
1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 5 megapixels.
2. Format: Minimum of 1,600 by 1,200 pixels and 400 dpi, in unaltered JPG
format original files having the same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped,
date- and time-stamped, in a folder named by the date of the photographs,
and accompanied by a key plan file.
3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description
using file metadata tags:
a. Date stamped by digital camera
b. Description of the vantage point, indicating location, direction (by
compass point), and elevation or story of construction
c. Unique sequential identifier keyed to the accompanying key plan
C. Video Recordings: Submit video recordings within seven days of recording.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 33 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation
1. Submit video recordings in a digital format acceptable to the Authority.
2. Identification: With each submittal, provide the following information:
a. Name of the Project
b. Name of the Contractor
c. Date video recording was recorded
d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by
compass point), and elevation or story of construction
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with
a minimum sensor size of 10 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less
than 1,600 by 1,200 pixels and 400 dpi.
B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide a high-resolution, digital video in a format
acceptable to the Authority.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, producing
images that are in focus so as to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry
or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.
B. Maintain a key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital
camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or any modifications using
image-editing software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field
office at the Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images
in the same manner as used for those submitted to the Engineer.
D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of construction, take
photographs of the Project site and surrounding properties including existing items
that are to remain during construction. These photographs shall be taken from
different vantage points, as directed by the Authority.
1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 33 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation
2. Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to the property
before starting the Work.
3. Take photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining the property
to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction.
4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking
of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements.
E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs at a minimum weekly, with
the timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with
each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show the status of
construction and progress since the last photographs were taken.
1. Commencement of the Work, through completion of clearing of site,
demolition, and dismantling and removals
2. When excavation is complete
3. When utility pipes, conduits, and ducts are installed but not covered
4. When footings and foundations are complete
5. When the subgrade is complete
6. When geomat and ballast are placed
7. When rail and special track is installed
8. Earth box and switch excavation and installation
9. TPSS and C/S prefab building installation
10. All above-grade structural framing
11. Exterior building enclosure
12. Interior Work, through the date of Substantial Completion
13. When finish grade is complete
14. Site improvements through date of Substantial Completion.
15. Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which
establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as
damage caused by construction activities.
F. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take color photographs after the date
of Substantial Completion for submission as Project record documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 33 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation
3.02 CONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. Recording: Mount the camera on a tripod before starting recording, unless
otherwise necessary to show the construction area. Display continuous running
time and date.
B. Narration: Describe scenes on the video recording by audio narration, using a
microphone while the video is recorded. Include a description of items being
viewed, recent events, and planned activities. At each change in location, describe
the vantage point, location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of
construction.
1. Confirm date and time at beginning and end of recording.
2. Begin each video recording with the name of the Project, the Contractor's
name, the videographer's name, and the Project location.
C. Preconstruction Video Recording: Before starting construction, make a video
recording of the Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage
points.
1. Flag construction limits before recording construction video recordings.
2. Show existing conditions adjacent to the Project site before starting the
Work.
3. Show existing buildings, structures, and peripheral improvements either on
or adjoining the Project site to accurately record physical conditions at the
start of construction.
4. Show protection efforts undertaken by the Contractor.
D. Periodic Construction Video Recordings: Make video recordings monthly,
coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment.
Select vantage points to show the status of construction and progress since the
last video recordings were made.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 32 33
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 32 33 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, administrative and
miscellaneous (non-administrative) work-related submittals.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures
B. Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements
C. Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that
require the Authority’s responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals
indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals.
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples
that do not require a response from the Authority. Submittals may be rejected for
not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals so
described in individual Specification Sections.
C. Plans and Procedures: Shall include, but are not limited to, narrative descriptions,
diagrams, equipment, procedures for excavation, demolition, site clearing,
maintenance of traffic, etc.
D. Certificates: Shall include, but are not limited to, certified material test reports,
certification of proper disposal of demolition materials, or tickets demonstrating
compliance with materials, tests or Specifications indicated.
E. Equipment: Shall include, but is not limited to, equipment Specifications,
manufacturer information and demonstration of suitability of equipment for
intended use.
F. Product Data: Shall include, but is not limited to, standard printed information on
materials, products and systems to be furnished by the Contractor for this Contract.
G. Shop Drawings: Shall include, but are not limited to, detailed manufacturing and
layout information, demonstrating the Contractor’s approach to meeting the intent
of the Plans and Specifications.
H. Samples: Include physical examples of materials either for limited visual inspection
or (where indicated) for confirmation, testing, and analysis by the Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
I. Miscellaneous Submittals: Such submittals shall be related directly to the Work,
but not necessarily administrative related. Include Work schedule, phasing plans,
warranties, guarantees, maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, survey
data and reports, physical work records, quality testing and certifying reports,
copies of industry standards, record drawings, field measurement data, operating
and maintenance Materials, overrun stock (and similar information) and, devices
and Materials applicable to the Work but not processed as Shop Drawings, Product
Data or samples.
1.04 PATENTS
In the event that any patented article, material, or process is to be installed or used in the
performance of the Work as shown on the drawings or particular specifications thereof,
the Contractor shall pay the royalty chargeable and shall save, keep, and bear the
Authority harmless from (a) all damage, costs, and expenses by reason of any
infringement of the patent or any failure to pay the royalty chargeable for use thereof, or
(b) any loss to the Authority in the event that the Authority is enjoined from using such
patented article or material, or (c) the incidental damage caused by the loss of use and
damage to Authority property in removing same, and (d) the cost of replacing the article
or material the use of which is enjoined. It is further provided that the Bond for faithful
performance shall be deemed to expressly apply to this provision of the specifications.
1.05 CONTRACTOR PREPARED DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES
The Contract Documents shall be supplemented by shop drawings, working drawings,
equipment layout drawings, coordination drawings, lift drawings, product data, samples,
and similar submittals prepared by the Contractor or its Subcontractors or Suppliers, of
any tier. These materials and similar submittals shall be furnished as required for
coordination of the Contractor’s work, as required for the coordination of the work with
forces of the Authority or other Contractors working for the Authority, as required by the
various sections of the specifications, or as requested by the Authority. The purpose of
the submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of Work for which submittals are required
the manner in which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the
design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
When shop drawings, working drawings, equipment layout drawings, coordination
drawings, lift drawings, product data, samples or similar submittals are required by any
section of the specifications or have been requested by the Authority or the Engineer, the
Contractor shall coordinate all Work under the various sections of the Specifications to
ensure that no interferences occur in the areas, structures, or rooms for which such
drawings have been required, and that necessary clearances are provided.
1.06 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by the
construction schedule. When establishing dates, include the time required for review,
ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery. Include additional time required for
making submittal corrections or modifications noted by the Authority, and additional time
for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
A. The Contractor may not begin the work prior to delivery of the submittal schedule.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
B. Coordinate the submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, the Schedule of
Values, and the Contractor's construction schedule.
C. Submit Initial Submittal Schedule 15 days after issuance of Limited Notice to
Proceed. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List
those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work, and those
required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. Indicate if
a submittal is on the critical path for project completion.
D. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of the
Contractor's construction schedule. Submit a revised submittal schedule to reflect
changes in the current status and timing for submittals.
E. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal
2. Specification Section number and title
3. Submittal category (action or informational)
4. Name of Subcontractor
5. Description of the Work covered
6. Scheduled date for the Authority’s final release or approval
7. Scheduled dates for purchasing
8. Scheduled dates for delivery and installation
9. Activity or event number
10. Float
1.07 PROCESSING REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTALS
A. General: Electronic digital copies of CAD drawings of the Contract Drawings
(Plans) will be provided by the Authority for the Contractor's use in preparing
submittals, subject to completion and return of the Authority’s release form.
1. Each submittal shall only contain items from one specification section, and
duplicate submittals will not be accepted.
2. Any submittal returned as incomplete, or improperly formatted shall not be
counted as starting Processing Time.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with the
performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in
advance of related construction activities to avoid delay (no less than 14 days).
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery,
other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section
concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated
on an approved submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same
Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate the transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts
of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of the need to review
submittals concurrently for coordination.
5. The Contractor shall show his executed internal review and approval
marking. Submittals, which are received from sources other than through
the Contractor’s office or which have not undergone Contractor review, will
be returned marked "without action."
6. The Authority reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals,
as follows. Time for review shall commence on the first full working day after the
Authority receives the submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be
authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work
to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. In the
event that Submittal is reviewed by a third party (including Railroads
Operators and authorities having jurisdiction), allow up to an additional 14
working days’ time for Authority’s response. The Authority will advise the
Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in
the same manner as an initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow seven days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Concurrent Consultant and/or Agency Review: Where concurrent review of
submittals is required, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
5. Submittals received after 2 PM will not be processed until the following
working day which will be recorded as the receipt of submittal date.
D. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal
and handling. Transmit each submittal using transmittal form. The Authority will
return, without review, any submittals received from sources other than the
Contractor.
1. Transmittal Form provided: Populate locations on the form with the
following information:
a. Project name
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
b. Date
c. Source (From:)
d. Names of Subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier
e. Category and type of submittal
f. Submittal purpose and description
g. Specification Section number and title, sub section
h. Indication of full or partial submittal
i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Absence of
drawing number will be cause for rejection of submittal.
j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively
k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record
l. Remarks
m. Signature of transmitter
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on the Contractor's letterhead,
record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those
requested by the Authority on previous submittals, and deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and
limitations. Include the same identification information as on the related
submittal.
3. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file
metadata:
a. Project name
b. Project Identification Number
c. Number and title of the appropriate Specification Section
d. Manufacturer name
e. Product name
E. For electronic submittal Identification and Information, incorporate in each file as
follows:
1. Assemble the complete submittal package into a single bookmarked file,
relevant bookmarks to sections and subsections.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
2. Name the file with its submittal number or another unique identifier,
including revision identifier. The file name shall use a project identifier and
the Specification Section number, followed by a decimal point and then a
sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an
alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide a means for insertion to permanently record the Contractor's
review and approval markings and action taken by the Authority.
F. Identify Applicable standards, ASTM, ACI, OSHA, etc. and identify options
requiring selection by the Authority.
G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in the same form and with the same number of
copies as the initial submittal.
1. Note the date and content of the previous submittal.
2. Note the date and content of the revision in the label or title block, and
clearly indicate the extent of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are stamped with action by reviewer.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, Subcontractors,
suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as
necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on the
transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Retain full copies of approved submittals on the Project Site.
Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from the
Engineer’s action stamp.
1.08 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMISSIONING
A. Normal Submittals:
1. Submit copy of normal submittals for equipment to be commissioned to the
Authority.
2. Authority will review and approve normal submittals applicable to systems
being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs, concurrent
with the Authority’s review.
B. Data for Commissioning: Authority will request specific information needed about
each piece of commissioned equipment or system. Information requested
includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Detailed manufacturer’s installation and start-up procedures
2. Operating, troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures
3. Full details of Authority-contracted tests, if any
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
4. Fan and pump curves
5. Full factory testing reports, if any
6. Full warranty information, with responsibilities of the Authority to keep
warranty in force clearly defined
7. Installation and checkout materials actually shipped inside equipment and
actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by factory or field technicians
C. Authority may request additional documentation necessary for the commissioning
process. Requests by Authority may precede, be concurrent with, or follow normal
submittals.
D. The Contractor’s responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of
Contract Documents is not relieved by Authority’s review.
1.09 CONFORMANCE OF SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor is responsible for conformance of all submittals prepared by the
Contractor or its Subcontractors or suppliers, of any tier, with all requirements of
the Contract Documents. Where required by California law, or as specified in the
Contract Documents, submittals shall be signed and sealed by a Professional
Engineer licensed in the State of California, or Land Surveyor licensed in the State
of California as applicable.
B. The Contractor shall show his executed internal review and approval marking.
Submittals, which are received from sources other than through the Contractor’s
office or which have not undergone Contractor review, will be returned marked
"without action."
C. Acceptance of shop drawings, working drawings, equipment layout drawings,
coordination drawings, lift drawings, product data, samples, and similar submittals
shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Contract
Documents, nor from responsibility for errors or omissions of any sort with such
drawings and data. Neither shall the acceptance of such drawings and data by the
Authority relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the correct installation, or for
the proper operation in service, of items requiring submittal of such drawings and
data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SUBMITTAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Any Work performed without an approved submittal will be done at the Contractor’s
own risk
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
B. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from
requirements of the Contract Documents by the Authority’s review of Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals unless the Contractor has
specifically informed the Authority in writing of such deviation at the time of the
submittal and given written acceptance to the specific deviation. The Contractor
shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,
Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals by the Authority’s review thereof.
C. Direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples, or similar submittals to revisions other than those requested by the
Authority on previous submittals.
2.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals
required by individual Specification Sections. The required types of submittals
are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Submit electronic submittals via e-mail as PDF electronic files. The
Authority will return a response via e-mail. Contractor shall retain a copy of
file as an electronic Project record document file.
2. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 01 77 19, Project Closeout.
3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that
includes the signature of the entity responsible for preparing certification.
Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other
individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity who is an
Engineer or Architect recognized to practice engineering or architecture in
the State of California.
4. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 01 40 00, Quality Requirements.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of
construction and type of product or equipment. A Material Safety Data Sheet shall
be submitted for each product.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard
published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as
Product Data.
2. Mark each submittal clearly to show which products and options are
applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts
b. Manufacturer's product specifications
c. Standard color charts
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards
e. Testing by recognized testing agency
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals
g. Notation of coordination requirements
h. Availability and delivery time information
i. Manufacturer's written recommendations
j. Manufacturer's installation instructions
k. Mill reports
l. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals
m. Approval number of organizations or agencies as required by
agencies having jurisdiction
n. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurements
o. Notation of coordination requirements
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring
b. Performance curves
c. Operational range diagrams
d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on
accompanying Shop Drawings
5. Submit Product Data concurrent with Samples, identify Sample and
indicate location of installation.
6. Submit Product Data as a PDF file.
C. Shop Drawings, Working Drawings, Equipment Layout Drawings, and
Coordination Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to
scale. Do not base Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or
standard printed data, unless submittal based on the Engineer’s digital data
drawing files is otherwise permitted. Unless otherwise approved by the Authority
or indicated in specific sections of the Specifications, Shop Drawings shall be
scaled sufficiently large to accurately show all pertinent aspects of the item and its
relationship to the Work. The Contractor shall additionally submit the shop drawing
on electronic media in MicroStation Intergraph Format version acceptable to the
Authority.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.
Include the following information, as applicable:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
a. Identification of products
b. Product Schedules
c. Compliance with specified standards
d. Notation of coordination requirements
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly
indicated
g. Seal and signature of California registered professional engineer if
specified
h. Dimensions and clearances
i. Fabrication and installation drawings
j. Roughing-in and setting diagrams
k. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power,
signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring
l. Templates and patterns
m. Design calculations
n. Approval number of organizations or agencies with jurisdiction for
the Work.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings,
submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 11 by 17 inches but no larger
than 24 by 36 inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings as a PDF file.
D. Samples: Submit full-size units or Samples of the size indicated, prepared from the
same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in the manner specified,
physically identical with the material or product proposed for use, and showing
the full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are
not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated
components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively
used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets;
and components used for independent testing and inspection.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components (such as
accessories) together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach a label on the unexposed side of Samples that
includes the following:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
a. Generic description of Sample
b. Product name and name of manufacturer
c. Sample source
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at the Project site,
available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of
construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final
acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in
individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an
undamaged condition at time of use.
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated
as Authority's property, are the property of the Contractor.
4. Detailed Work drawings for Samples shall be submitted by the Contractor
for temporary structures and for such other temporary Work that may be
required for construction of other permanent work. Submittals shall include
back-up calculations or any information needed to explain the structure or
system or its intended use.
5. Where a submittal involves engineering computations or original design
Work is depicted, the submittal shall show the name, the State of California
registration number, seal, and signature of the Professional Engineer
certifying that such computations or design Work are correct and in
conformance with standards, codes, and acceptable engineering practice.
6. Number of Initial Selection Samples: Submit four full sets of available
choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required
to be selected from a manufacturer's product line. The Authority will return
the submittal with options selected.
7. Number of Verification Samples: Submit four sets of Samples. Mark up and
retain one returned Sample set as a Project record sample.
a. Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship,
fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar
characteristics are to be demonstrated.
b. If variations in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristics are
inherent in the material or product represented by a Sample, submit
at least four sets of paired units that show the approximate limits of
the variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a
written summary indicating the types of products required for the Work and their
intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
1. Type of product. Include a unique identifier for each product.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Number and name of room or space.
4. Location within room or space.
5. Submit the product schedule as a PDF file.
F. Certificates of Compliance: Certificates of Compliance shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Authority for those Materials and products for which no samples
and test results are specified. The certificates shall:
1. State that the product complies with the respective Contract Specification
and Contract Drawing requirements.
2. Be accompanied by a certified copy of test results pertaining to the product.
All test equipment used shall be verified to be in calibration at the time of
each test and test reports shall so indicate. No test shall be made without
such verification. When required by the Contract Documents or by law,
certified test results shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed to
practice in the State of California.
3. Show product represented and its location in the Contract, producer's
name, product trade name and catalog number as applicable, place of
product origin, test date, testing organization's name and address, quantity
of the product to be furnished, and the related Contract Drawing and
Specification section numbers.
G. Where required by the Specification or if requested by the Authority, submit the
following written statements on the manufacturer's letterhead:
1. Certification that the manufacturer, its products or materials complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
2. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency,
on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results
verifying the material’s compliance with requirements in the Contract
Documents.
3. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating the current product
produced by the manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract
Documents. Base reports on an evaluation of tests performed by the
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on
comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
4. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code
organization acceptable to jurisdictional authorities that the product
complies with the building code in effect for the Project. Include the
following information:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
a. Name of evaluation organization
b. Date of evaluation
c. Time period when report is in effect
d. Product and manufacturers' names
e. Description of product
f. Test procedures and results
g. Limitations of use
5. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing
agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting
results of tests performed before installation of the product to determine
compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
6. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing
agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting
results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product.
Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
7. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field
tests performed either during installation of the product or after the product
is installed in its final location to verify compliance with requirements in the
Contract Documents.
8. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information,
including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, a list of
applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include a list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria, and a summary of
loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of
software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
9. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that
documents the manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and
procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include the
name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of the
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
a. Preparation of substrates
b. Required substrate tolerances
c. Sequence of installation
d. Required installation tolerances
e. Required adjustments
f. Recommendations for cleaning and protection
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
10. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting the
factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include
the following, as applicable:
a. Name, address, and telephone number of the factory-authorized
service representative making the report
b. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for
installation of product
c. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements
d. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they
comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was
taken
e. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether
observed performance complies with requirements
f. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect
warranty
g. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract
and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field
dimensions. Mark with an approval stamp before submitting to the Authority.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in
Section 01 77 19, Project Closeout.
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform approval stamp. Include
Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and
number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying
that the submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with
the Contract Documents.
3.02 AUTHORITY’S ACTION
A. The Authority will not review submittals that do not bear the Contractor's approval
stamp, and will return such submittals without action.
1. The review is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy
and completeness of other details, such as dimensions and quantities, or
for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment
or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
2. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility;
it is not considered part of the Authority’s review and indication of action
taken.
3. Acceptance of submittals with deviations shall not relieve the Contractor
from responsibility for additional costs of changes required to
accommodate such deviations. Deviations included in submittals without
prior acceptance are excepted from review of submittals, whether noted or
not on returned copy.
4. Review of a separate item shall not indicate acceptance of the assembly of
which the item is a part.
5. Make only those revisions required or accepted by the Authority.
6. Notations by the Authority which increase Contract Cost or Contract Time
shall be brought to the Authority’s attention, in writing as a Request for
Change, before proceeding with Work.
7. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials,
systems, or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the
Authority shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy and completeness of such
calculations and certifications.
B. Action Submittals: The Authority will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or modifications required, and return it. The Authority will stamp each
submittal with an action stamp and mark the stamp appropriately to indicate the
action required.
C. Informational Submittals: The Authority will review each submittal and will
generally not return it (it will be returned it if it does not comply with requirements).
The Authority will forward each submittal to the appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of
partial submittals has received prior approval from the Authority.
E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable; they will be considered nonresponsive,
and will be returned without review.
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may
be discarded.
3.03 SUBMITTAL STATUS
A. Submittals reviewed by the Authority and returned to the Contractor will be marked
with one of the following designations:
1. No Exceptions Taken.
2. Approved as Noted.
3. Revise and Resubmit.
4. Rejected.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
5. No Action Taken.
B. The Contractor shall not proceed with procurement, manufacture or fabrication of
items submitted for review, until such submittals have been designated by the
Authority as "No Exceptions Taken" or “Approved as Noted." Until submittal items
receive such designation by the Authority, any costs associated with procurement
for these items shall be at the Contractor’s risk.
3.04 SUBMITTALS DESIGNATED AS "CONFORMS" OR "CONFORMS WITH
CORRECTIONS AS NOTED"
A. The submittal so designated by the Authority will be identified accordingly by being
so stamped and dated and returned to the Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall take responsibility for and bear all cost of damages, which
may result from the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of
the Work prior to being marked "No Exceptions Taken" or "Approved as Noted" by
the Authority.
C. Where drawings are stamped "Approved as Noted”, the Authority shall indicate the
corrected detail or information as required.
D. Submittals stamped “NO Exceptions Taken” do not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of performance of Work as intended in the Plans and Specifications.
3.05 SUBMITTALS DESIGNATED AS “REVISE AND RESUBMIT,” OR “REJECTED.
RESUBMIT”
A. The submittal so designated by the Authority will be identified accordingly by being
so stamped and dated and returned to the Contractor.
B. If corrections to the submittals are required, the submittals will be returned to the
Contractor will be marked "Rejected, Resubmit”, or "Revise and Resubmit“ and the
required corrections shall be made on the re-submittal.
C. Re-submittals will be processed in the same manner as first submittals. On every
re-submittal, the Contractor shall note any revisions other than the corrections
requested by the Authority on previous submittals. Re-submittals shall use the
same number as original submittal but will be modified by R and number of re-
submittals in the suffix.
D. The Contractor shall notify the Authority prior to execution of any correction, which
constitutes a change of the Contract requirements indicated on the submittals.
3.06 SUBMITTALS DESIGNATED AS “NO ACTION TAKEN”
A. The submittal so designated by the Authority will be identified accordingly by being
so stamped and dated and returned to the Contractor.
B. Submittals made by the Contractor that are not required by the Contract
Documents or were not otherwise requested shall be designated “No Action
Taken.”
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 33 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 33 00 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 35 15
MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF RAILROAD TRAFFIC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section sets forth the procedures for Contractor work on or near track and track
structures.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions
B. Section 01 14 16, Coordination with SCRRA
C. Section 01 35 23, Site Safety Requirements
1.03 WORK ON TRACK AND TRACK STRUCTURES
A. The Contractor’s work on the track structure prior to returning the track to full
service, shall be protected by speed restrictions for train traffic consistent with the
direction of the Authority, who will interpret the current issue of the SCRRA Track
Maintenance Manual, and the Track Safety Standards of the FRA. The Contractor
shall comply with the SCRRA interpretation of all requirements relating to work on
track and track structures.
1. In order to minimize impacts to the SCRRA quality of passenger service,
the Work will be arranged so that there are not more than two locations
with speed restrictions due to the Contractor’s work at any time on any
passenger route, and the cumulative amount of such delay is not to exceed
4 minutes per train at any time for each passenger route. Such speed
restrictions are to be computed compared to the speeds contained in the
latest effective SCRRA Timetable.
2. If the number of locations with speed restrictions or the amount of delay
exceeds these limits, the Authority will prohibit the Contractor from
beginning any additional Work. The Contractor will not be entitled to any
payment for failure to obtain access to the track for Work on occasions
when the Authority denies new Work locations due to excessive speed
restrictions at existing Work locations
1.04 WORK ADJACENT TO LIVE TRACK
A. Safety and Delay of Trains
1. The Work shall be coordinated so that there will be no delay to trains, or
interference in any manner with the operation of trains. If it is deemed not
feasible to perform the Work in such a manner, the Contractor shall request
approval from Authority of an alternate method before starting the Work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 15 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 15 Maintenance and Protection of Railroad Traffic
2. Only as permitted by the Authority’s Operating Department will the
Authority allow the Contractor to take more than one adjacent mainline or
controlled siding track out of service.
B. The Contractor shall abide by the instructions of the Authority, its authorized
inspectors, RWICs, watchmen, and other designated Authority work forces.
Returning the track to service after the Contractor’s work near an operating railroad
track, during construction on an interim basis only, shall be the sole responsibility
of the Authority at the end of the work window.
C. If damage is sustained by any of the existing or new communications or signal
equipment, underground or aboveground, as a result of the Contractor's
operations, whether the damage sustained was intentional or not, the Contractor
shall be liable for the following incurred costs:
1. Replacement of the damaged equipment
2. Any necessary inspection and testing of the system, before and after
replacement of the damaged equipment
3. Any other costs incurred as a direct, or indirect, result of disruption to
normal train operations
D. If the location of underground signal equipment interferes with the work, refer to
Section 01 14 16, Coordination with SCRRA, for coordination requirements.
1.05 WORK WINDOWS
A. Refer to Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions, for designated work windows for
each project location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 35 15
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 15 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 35 23
SITE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
Work specified in this Section consists of initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety
precautions and programs and assuring a safe Work Site and safe operations around
active tracks. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for ensuring that all Work
performed under the Contract is performed in strict compliance with all applicable Federal,
State, local occupational safety regulations and SCRRA rules and requirements adopted
to protect all operations. This includes the proper manner of protecting the tracks, signals,
fiber optic cables, pipe lines, other Property, and tenants or licensees upon, adjacent to,
across (under or over), and along SCRRA and Member Agency Property during the
construction or maintenance activities on or adjacent to Railway Property. This Work
includes furnishing, operating, maintaining, and utilizing safety equipment and providing
protective equipment, safeguards, and safety devices on construction equipment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions
B. Section 01 14 16, Coordination with SCRRA
C. Section 01 43 23, Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
D. Section 01 35 44, Environmental Safety and Health Program
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS & REQUIREMENTS
Comply with the provisions of all local, State, and Federal regulations; with all applicable
Specifications, standards, and recommended practices; and with Authority and Authority-
adopted policies, procedures and requirements. Where the State and Federal regulations
have differing requirements, the Contractor shall comply with that which is more stringent.
These requirements include but are not limited to:
A. CalOSHA: California State Occupational Safety and Health Administration
B. CPUC: California Public Utilities Commission General Orders
C. FRA: 49 CFR Part 214
D. General Code of Operating Rules (GCOR) Committee: GCOR
E. SCRRA: Track Maintenance Manual, On-Track Safety Manual for Roadway
Workers, Rules and Requirements for Construction on Railway Property (SCRRA
Form No. 37). See SCRRA website for more information.
F. California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 8, and Code of Federal Regulations
(CFR), Title 29.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 23 Site Safety Requirements
1.04 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall submit to the Authority for review and approval the submittals listed
below. The Contractor shall obtain SCRRA approval of the following submittals prior to the
start of construction, or as specified in a Limited Notice to Proceed:
A. Site Specific Injury and Illness Prevention Program (IIPP) including a Site Specific
Emergency Action Plan, to be revised and resubmitted as conditions warrant. This
Program shall include details of procedures, equipment and training in accordance
with Cal OSHA requirements including work in confined spaces, lock out/tag out
and fall protection procedures to ensure that the Contractor's and sub-Contractor's
workers are properly protected. An Environmental Health and Safety Plan per
Section 01 35 44 may also be required prior to beginning Work.
B. Qualifications and certifications of designated lead and other safety
representatives, and other first aid providers. This includes the qualifications and
certifications of individuals who will serve as qualified or competent persons as
defined in CCR Title 8. These supervisory individuals are designated by the
Contractor to supervise special high risk/high hazard safety programs such as fall
protection, excavation, hazardous substances operations and confined space
entry.
C. Work Plans for all excavation for which a protective system is required by CCR
Title 8 Article 6. This includes plans and drawings for any ground support system
to be used during the excavation and the slopes and configurations of sloping or
benching systems. Any engineered shoring within the railroad load influence zone
shall be designed by a Professional Engineer, Structural or Civil, licensed in the
State of California.
D. Material Safety Data Sheets and other records as required by jurisdictional
agencies.
E. Immediate notification to the Authority’s Dispatch and Operations Center (DOC) is
required for injury to any individual; the Contractor shall submit an injury report to
the Authority within 24 hours of said injury.
F. All cranes and on-track equipment operated on the Project Site by the Contractor
and or Sub-Contractors of any tier require annual and four-year certifications. Any
crane subjected to upset, overloading, side pulling, shock loading or support
failure, shall be re-certified to allow further use.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 23 Site Safety Requirements
1.05 SAFETY AND HEALTH PERSONNEL
A. Provide a Safety Representative, as described in Section 01 43 23, Contractor
Qualifications and Requirements, who shall coordinate and supervise on-site
safety and health, including training and testing the Contractor's personnel so that
they may become qualified in Authority Roadway Worker Protection (RWP)
requirements. The Contractor shall ensure that only those Safety representative(s)
accepted by the Authority for employment on the Site is/are present at the Site
whenever work is in progress at the Site. The absence of the required Safety
Representative shall result in the immediate stoppage of all work at the Site. In
order to avoid Work stoppages in the event of an expected or unexpected absence
due to vacation, illness, personal emergency, resignation or termination of the
assigned Safety Representative(s), the Contractor shall ensure adequate safety
personnel, whose qualifications have been submitted to and approved by the
Authority are available. The Safety Representative(s) shall have the Authority to
direct immediate correction of any unsafe or unhealthful condition and, as
necessary, to stop Work until appropriate corrective measures have been
completed, attend required meetings, be fully cognizant of all Project-specific
safety practices, processes, rules and procedures, and maintain regular contact
with Authority-designated safety personnel.
B. The Contractor’s Safety Representative shall have no other duties unless those
duties are specified elsewhere or approved by the Authority. The Safety
Representative shall not be utilized in any other Authority Contract or any other
project without prior written consent from the Authority.
C. The Contractor’s Safety Representative shall be responsible for overseeing safety
procedures for Work performed around active tracks and shall be qualified under
the Roadway Worker-In-Charge (RWIC) part of the SCRRA Roadway Worker
Protection training before any Work begins.
D. At Limited NTP, or the project kick-off meeting, the Authority shall provide contact
numbers for all entities to be contacted in case of emergency. This will include the
Chief Dispatcher, the Metrolink Sheriff's Dispatcher, signal emergencies and grade
crossing problems, and signal and communications cable locations.
1.06 ROADWAY WORKERS AND WATCHMEN
A. Before starting Work on Authority property, all Contractor or Subcontractor
personnel working within Authority right of way must be qualified, trained, and
currently certified under SCRRA’s Roadway Worker Protection (RWP).
1. Required training and testing of personnel to be qualified under RWP may
be conducted by the Authority or by the Contractor’s Safety
Representative, at the Authority’s discretion. All training for Contractor
personnel shall be renewed annually.
2. The Contractor shall reproduce, and distribute to each employee during the
training session, the SCRRA On-Track Safety Manual for Roadway
Workers.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 23 Site Safety Requirements
B. Watchmen, equipped with suitable Authority approved safety equipment, shall be
furnished by SCRRA for protection of workers as requested by the RWIC or
required in the approved SSWP.
1. .
1.07 CONSTRUCTION AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall conform to requirements of the Authority, CalOSHA, CPUC,
and to applicable codes and regulations of Federal, State, and local authorities
having jurisdiction over job-site safety including compliance with the safety
standards of the FRA for roadway worker protection per 49 CFR, Part 214,
Railroad Workplace Safety. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such lights,
protective devices, barricades, Type K railing, changeable message signs (CMS),
and warning signs as are necessary for the safety of personnel and the public, or
as otherwise required by SCRRA. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for
the timely erection, maintenance, repair, replacement, and removal of such
safeguards, without necessity of receiving specific instructions from SCRRA, or
any other authority having jurisdictional.
B. As identified in the IIPP, the Contractor shall provide job specific fall protection
from hazards such as: skylights (at any angle), floor and wall openings, leading
edges, and steel erection. Methods of protection may include: fixed systems
(guardrails, covers, nets, etc.) and personal fall arrest systems.
C. All equipment, tools and or other items used to complete the Work shall be
inspected by the Contractor to ensure compliance with applicable regulatory
standards. Equipment shall be used in accordance with the respective
manufacturer‘s design, directions, and intended use.
1.08 TESTING EQUIPMENT
Testing equipment, as applicable to Work Site safety, shall conform to the requirements
of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Division of Industrial Safety, unless indicated
otherwise.
1.09 IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR PERSONNEL
A. All construction personnel Contractor personnel shall be identified with the
employee's company name or logo affixed to the employee's hardhat, identification
badge, or other identification acceptable to the Authority. All Contractor personnel
shall wear hard hats affixed with the Authority Roadway Worker Protection trained
sticker, denoting current certification. Failure to comply will result in revocation of
employee’s permission to access Work Site.
B. Contractor personnel shall wear hard hats, orange safety vests or orange T-shirts
with reflective strips, safety glasses, and safety shoes at all times while on the
Project.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 23 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 23 Site Safety Requirements
1.10 CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
During operations adjacent to live track, all Work within the foul zone of the live track or
adjacent track, or as directed by the RWIC must be stopped when trains are approaching
and equipment and employees moved to a safe distance from the tracks unless otherwise
approved. All Contractor equipment within the Authority Right of Way will stop Work when
trains are approaching.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION AND METHODS
The Contractor is solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, and
procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. This shall
include the following:
A. The Contractor shall establish, implement and maintain an effective IIPP in
accordance with CCR Title 8 Section 3203. Contractor shall at all times conduct
its operations in accordance with the IIPP and in such a manner as to avoid risk of
bodily harm to persons or damage to property and shall promptly take all
reasonable precautions to safeguard against such risks and shall make regular
safety inspections of its operations. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
discovery, determination and correction of any unsafe conditions related to
Contractor‘s performance of the Work.
B. The Contractor shall secure all Work areas by barricade in accordance with local
and State requirements as applicable at the end of each day. All excavations shall
be covered to prevent tripping hazard.
C. In the event the Authority discovers that the Contractor has created an unsafe
condition or has failed to restore the track to service at the specified time, the
Authority with its own forces may perform the remedial Work to secure the required
safety and train performance. Such remedial Work will be at the sole discretion of
the Authority; however, Contractor may perform such Work if agreed to by
Authority. If this action is required, the Authority may unilaterally terminate Work
under the Contract, and will pay only for the quantities of Work actually performed,
less the cost of Authority’s remedial Work. In the event Work is halted under this
circumstance, the Mobilization line item will not be paid. In the event that Work is
not halted, the Contractor must take immediate steps to correct the situation. There
will be no extra payment for Work required to correct unsafe conditions or to
promptly restore track to service. For purposes of this Section, an unsafe condition
is defined as creating a track condition which does not meet the FRA Track Safety
Standards for Class of Track, willful damage to facilities or material, or any other
unsafe condition for trains, employees, passengers or the public, at the sole
determination of the Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 23 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 23 Site Safety Requirements
D. Prior to operating cranes on the Site, all crane operators shall have successfully
completed testing that verifies the crane operator's ability to read and understand
the load chart for the equipment to be operated. This testing may be performed by
an independent certifying agency or a qualified member of the Contractor‘s
supervisory staff who is acceptable to the Authority, has a minimum of five years
heavy civil construction experience, and can satisfactorily demonstrate the ability
to read and understand load charts and rigging tables to the Authority when
requested, without prior notice. Written records of this testing shall be maintained
on the Site and made available to the Authority for review without prior notice. Re-
certification is required for any crane involved in an incident involving upset,
overloading, side pulling, shock loading, or support failure. Re-certification and
written acceptance by the manufacturer is also required for any modification to a
crane. All crane operators shall be licensed by the Authority having jurisdiction for
the equipment type to be operated and copies of said licenses shall be submitted
to the Authority. All crane operations where the load is beyond the direct view of
the operator shall be observed by a signal person who can directly observe the
load and be observed by the operator. The Contractor shall stop load movement
in the event the signal Person is unable to observe the load or fails to continuously
observe the load and signal the operator.
E. All excavation operations shall be under the immediate supervision of a competent
person, as defined in CCR Title 8, who is fully familiar with the requirements for
safe excavation procedures and capable of enforcing strict compliance with the
ground support system plan.
F. If required by regulation, the Contractor shall provide air monitoring including
operating and maintaining a gas monitoring system with equipment capable of
providing printed logs of gas tests. Begin testing for toxic and explosive gases as
soon as the excavation or drilled hole has progressed to a level of five feet below
surface level. Test air quality in the most stagnant portions of excavation to ensure
there is no accumulation of explosive or other dangerous gases. The Contractor
shall provide training to construction personnel, subject to exposure during the
course of excavation, prior to entering any excavation sites and provide necessary
yearly refresher training.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 35 23
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 23 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 35 44
ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY AND HEALTH PROGRAM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
Contaminated and Hazardous Soils may be encountered during the Work. The Contractor
shall be solely responsible for ensuring that all Work performed when these Soils are
present complies with all applicable Federal, State, local occupational safety regulations
and SCRRA rules and requirements. In order to properly handle these types of soil, the
Contractor shall prepare and implement an Environmental Safety and Health Program and
require that all its Subcontractors perform excavation and handling of soils in full
compliance with the requirements of the Environmental Safety and Health Program.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions
B. Section 01 35 23, SCRRA Site Safety Requirements
C. California Code of Regulations (CCR) Titles 4, 8, & 22, the Code of Federal
Regulations (CRF) Title 29 and all applicable Code of Federal Regulations Titles.
D. CalOSHA: California State Occupational Safety and Health Administration
E. OSHA: Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration
F. Section 31 20 50, Removal and Disposal of Contaminated Soils
1.03 PROCEDURE
If the Contractor encounters substances during performance of the Work that are
reasonably believed to be potentially chemically-impacted as defined in Section 31 20 50,
the Contractor shall notify the Authority immediately, submitting written documentation of
the incident and notification within 24 hours. Contractor will proceed with work in
accordance with Section 31 20 50, Removal and Disposal of Contaminated Soils.
Excavation in the immediate area of the potentially chemically-impacted soil shall be
suspended, and work shifted to another location until authorization to resume is received.
Equitable adjustments, if any, for time lost or costs incurred due to the inability to relocate
the work as a result of such encounters will be made in accordance with Contract Change
Order Procedures. The Authority reserves the right to use other labor forces for
exploratory work to determine the nature and extent of the potentially chemically-impacted
soil and to remove the substances from the area.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 44 - 1 UPDATED: May 2022
Section 01 35 44 Environmental Safety and Health Program
For chemically-impacted and hazardous waste soils as defined in Section 31 20 50,
Authority’s involvement will be limited to coordination with regulatory agencies, sampling
oversight, and ensuring proper disposal of the chemically-impacted and/or hazardous
waste soil. The Contractor shall be responsible for sampling and proper disposal of the
chemically-impacted and/or hazardous waste soil by loading, unloading, and transporting
to a designated site for testing and to a stockpile with proper protection as described in
Section 31 20 50. The Contractor shall also be responsible for loading chemically-
impacted and/or hazardous waste soils for hauling off, with oversight by the Authority. All
import and backfill with suitable material shall be done by the Contractor to restore the site
as directed by the Authority.
For lead-containing materials, the Contractor shall submit a Work plan to the Authority for
review and approval prior to any demolition work. All Work shall be done in full compliance
with requirements of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8 specifically Section 5192,
Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER).
Existing wood railroad-tie materials, where designated to be demolished/removed shall be
considered hazardous treated wood waste and should be managed and disposed of in
accordance with CCR Title 22, Division 4.5, Chapter 34, Section 67386.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. An effectively written and coherent Site-Specific Safety and Health Plan, as
defined in CCR Title 8, prior to the start of construction, or as specified in the
Limited Notice to Proceed.
B. Certificates of training for personnel potentially working with chemically-impacted
and/or hazardous waste soil: minimum initial 40-hour HAZWOPER training and 8-
hour annual refresher, respiratory protection, and fit-testing, and medical
clearance, before start-up of excavation and drilling activities if required.
C. Certificates of training for the Site Safety and Health Officer: minimum initial 40-
hour HAZWOPER training, 8-hour annual refresher, 8-hour Site Supervisor
training, respiratory protection and fit-testing, medical clearance, experience, and
credentials.
D. Monthly status report of chemically-impacted and/or hazardous waste soil
management, including excavated quantities of each soil category and work
performed using Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). This report must include
updated quantities of excavated chemically-impacted and/or hazardous waste
soils, and the date, time, number of affected workers, and total number of hours
the Contractor performed work in Level C Protection.
E. The Work Plan for removal of lead-containing material shall include the following:
1. A state lead-licensed Contractor and persons shall perform demolition,
handling, removal, and monitoring of lead-contained materials.
2. Air monitoring shall be performed before and during each lead-related
activity. The Contractor performing demolition work shall not conduct
monitoring work, during or after the completion of all lead-related activities.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 44 - 2 UPDATED: May 2022
Section 01 35 44 Environmental Safety and Health Program
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
PPE and monitoring equipment shall conform to requirements set forth by CAL/OSHA,
Federal-OSHA, and the Contractor’s Environmental Safety and Health Program.
2.02 HEPA FILTERS
Contractor shall provide high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters for persons working
on lead-containing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Implement an Environmental Safety and Health Plan for removal of lead-
containing material, and excavation and handling of chemically-impacted and/or
hazardous waste soil (aka California Hazardous Soils) certified by a Certified
Industrial Hygienist (CIH) licensed by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene.
B. The Contractor will be responsible for performing soil monitoring and sampling for
disposal purposes, with oversight by the Authority, as specified in Section 31 20
50. The Contractor shall be responsible for loading, unloading, and transporting all
soils to the designated area. The contaminated and clean soils shall be stored in
separated piles. The designated area shall be protected with visqueen sheets
covering the ground and fenced off to prevent trespassing. The soils shall be
covered with visqueen sheets prior to legally disposing of them from the site. The
Contractor will be responsible for analyzing soil, as well as for trucking and
disposing of the contaminated soil accordingly. The Contractor shall be
responsible for loading contaminated soil into trucks furnished by the Contractor.
C. Designate a full-time Site Safety and Health Officer to recognize hazards and
implement and manage the Environmental Safety and Health Program. The Safety
and Health Officer can be a Safety Engineer, provided the individual is qualified to
conduct air monitoring and identify environmental hazards, and meets all training
requirements set forth in 8 CCR 5192 (e), in addition to the qualifications set forth
in the Construction Safety and Security Manual. As a minimum, the Safety and
Health Officer shall (a) monitor air quality and hazards to personnel and the Work
area during removal of lead-containing material and excavation and handling of
chemically-impacted and/or hazardous waste soil and groundwater, and (b) assign
PPE and other equipment necessary for the implementation of the Safety and
Health Program.
D. Supply a direct reading Organic Volatile Analyzer equipped with a Photo-
ionization Detector (PID) and an initial supply of PPE readily available for use by
the team. Replenish the PPE to ensure a supply of PPE is always available to
prevent any delays.
E. Supply high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters for persons working on removal
of lead-containing materials.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 44 - 3 UPDATED: May 2022
Section 01 35 44 Environmental Safety and Health Program
F. The Contractor is responsible for any delays associated with lack of preparation,
PPE, trained and qualified personnel.
3.02 PERFORMANCE
A. Provide, without delay to Work, HAZWOPER–trained, medically qualified, and
respirator-fitted workers, and PPE and other equipment, as necessary for
implementation and maintenance of the Environmental Safety and Health
Program.
B. The Contractor will be responsible for performing soil monitoring and sampling for
disposal purposes, with oversight from the Authority, as specified in Section 31 20
50. If the sampled soil is found to be clean, the Contractor shall dispose of it in the
same manner and location as used for other clean soil removed from the site. The
Contractor shall be responsible for loading, unloading, and transporting all soils to
the designated area. The contaminated and cleans soils shall be stored in separate
piles. The designated area shall be protected with visqueen sheets covering the
ground, and fenced off to prevent trespassing. The soils shall be covered with
visqueen sheets prior to legally disposing of them from the site. The Contractor will
be responsible for analyzing the soil, as well as for trucking and disposing of the
contaminated soil accordingly. The Contractors shall be responsible for loading
contaminated soil into trucks furnished by the Contractor.
C. In the event the Contractor encounters or suspects potentially chemically-impacted
soil, Contractor shall promptly implement measures described in the Contractor
Site-Specific Safety and Health Plan, and immediately notify the Authority or its
designee.
D. Ventilation shall be modified, if necessary or if directed by the Authority, to increase
airflow and effectively reduce air contaminants prior to and during removal of lead-
containing materials, excavation, and handling of chemically-impacted and/or
hazardous waste soil. If Excluded Hazardous Waste Operations are required, the
Contractor shall adequately protect the safety and health of its employees, and
Subcontractors’ employees while working in areas not affected.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for legal removal of lead-containing materials.
The Contractor shall employ a state lead-licensed Contractor for performing such
work including demolition, handling, removal, and monitoring of lead-contained
materials. All work shall be done in full compliance with requirements of the
California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Sections 1532.1 and 5198.
F. The wet method for removal of lead-contained materials shall be used to prevent
dust. Lead dust shall be properly disposed of. Air monitoring shall be performed
before, during, and after each lead-related activity. A third party without conflict of
interest with the Contractor shall conduct the air and clearance monitoring. Surface
clearance monitoring shall be conducted after completion of the removal of lead
materials. The purpose of the air monitoring is to ascertain that the building air
quality is maintained during and after the completion of the Project. All air
monitoring results shall be submitted to the Authority’s Corporate Safety
representative for review within 24 hours of receipt from the laboratory.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 44 - 4 UPDATED: May 2022
Section 01 35 44 Environmental Safety and Health Program
G. The Contractor is responsible for the safety and health of its employees and its
Subcontractors. The Contractor shall conduct air monitoring to ensure compliance
with monitoring requirements under the Environmental Safety and Health
Program, the Site-Specific Safety and Health Plan, CAL/OSHA, and any other
local, state, or federal requirements.
H. Dust control and suppression mitigation measures shall be employed by the
Contractor. The Authority reserves the right to conduct air sampling and monitoring
to determine the required minimum level of protection.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 35 44
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 44 - 5 UPDATED: May 2022
SECTION 01 35 91
HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes general protection and treatment procedures for designated historic
spaces, areas, rooms, and surfaces in the Project and the following specific work:
A. Historic removal and dismantling
B. Bird-excrement removal
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 35 23, Site Safety and Health Program
B. Section 01 35 44, Environmental Safety and Health Program
C. Section 01 74 19, Construction Waste Management and Disposal
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. "Preservation": To apply measures necessary to sustain the existing form,
integrity, and materials of a historic property. Work may include preliminary
measures to protect and stabilize the property.
B. "Rehabilitation": To make possible a compatible use for a property through repair,
alterations, and additions while preserving those portions or features that convey
its historical, cultural, or architectural values.
C. "Restoration": To accurately depict the form, features, and character of a property
as it appeared at a particular period of time by means of the removal of features
from other periods in its history and the reconstruction of missing features from the
restoration period.
D. "Reconstruction": To reproduce in the exact form and detail a structure or artifact
as it appeared at a specific period in time.
E. Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place.
F. Dismantle: To disassemble and detach items by hand from existing construction
to the limits indicated, using small hand tools and small one-hand power tools, so
as to protect nearby historic surfaces; and legally dispose of dismantled items off-
site, unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
G. Existing to Remain: Existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
H. Historic: Spaces, areas, rooms, surfaces, materials, finishes, and overall
appearances that are important to the successful preservation, rehabilitation,
restoration, and reconstruction as determined by the Authority. Designated historic
spaces, areas, rooms, and surfaces are indicated on the Contract Documents and
generally described below.
1. Restoration Zones: Areas of greatest architectural importance, integrity,
and visibility; these areas are to be preserved and restored to the original,
design and finish as shown on Contract Documents.
2. Renovation Zones: Areas of significant architectural importance, integrity,
and visibility; these areas are to be preserved and restored consistent with
the remaining historic fabric and to the extent shown on Contract
Documents.
3. Alteration Zones: Areas of slight architectural importance, integrity, and
visibility; goal is to leave any remaining original fabric untouched insofar as
is consistent with accommodating modern uses for the structure as shown
on Contract Documents.
I. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in
material type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish as approved
by the Authority.
J. Reconstruct: To remove existing item, replicate damaged or missing components,
and reinstall in original position.
K. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply a new finish to
match the original, or as otherwise indicated.
L. Reinstall: To protect a removed or dismantled item, repair and clean it as indicated
for reuse, and reinstall it in original position, or where indicated.
M. Remove: Specifically for historic spaces, areas, rooms, and surfaces, the term
means to detach an item from existing construction to the limits indicated, using
hand tools and hand-operated power equipment, and legally dispose of it off-site,
unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
N. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and
finishes while employing as little new material as possible. This includes patching,
piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading materials.
O. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The
original item is the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated.
P. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish, unless otherwise
indicated.
Q. Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and in either
the same or a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated.
R. Restore: To consolidate, replicate, reproduce, repair, and refinish as required to
achieve the indicated results.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
S. Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.
T. Reversible: New construction work, treatments, or processes that can be removed
or undone in the future without damaging historic materials, unless otherwise
indicated.
U. Salvage: To protect removed or dismantled items and deliver them to the Authority
ready for reuse.
V. Stabilize: To provide structural reinforcement of unsafe or deteriorated items while
maintaining the essential form as it exists at present; also, to reestablish a weather-
resistant enclosure.
W. Strip: To remove the existing finish down to base material, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.04 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects—including but not limited to cornerstones
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items
of interest or value to the Authority that may be encountered during removal and
dismantling work—remain the Authority's property. Carefully dismantle and
salvage each item or object.
B. Coordinate with the Authority's archaeologist or historical adviser, who will
establish special procedures for dismantling and salvage.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Construction Schedule for Historic Treatments: Indicate for the entire Project the
following for each activity to be performed in historic spaces, areas, and rooms,
and on historic surfaces:
1. A detailed sequence of historic treatment work, with starting and ending
dates, coordinated with the Authority's continuing operations and other
known work in progress.
2. Utility Services: Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
Coordinate shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
3. Coordination of Authority's and others' continuing occupancy of portions of
the existing structure and of the Authority's partial occupancy of completed
Work.
4. Equipment Data: List gross loaded weight, axle-load distribution, and
wheel-base dimension data for mobile and heavy equipment proposed for
use. Do not use such equipment without the Contractor's professional
engineer's certification that the structure can support the imposed loadings
without damage.
B. Qualification Data: For historic removal and dismantling, provide a bird-
excrement-removal specialist and an industrial hygienist.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
C. Preconstruction Documentation: Show preexisting conditions of adjoining
construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by historic treatment operations.
D. Historic Treatment Program: Submit before Work begins.
E. Fire-Prevention Plan: Submit before Work begins.
F. Inventory of Salvaged Items: After removal or dismantling work is complete, submit
a list of items that have been salvaged.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Historic Treatment Specialist Qualifications: This term describes an experienced
firm or group of individuals regularly engaged in historic treatments similar in
nature, materials, design, and extent to this work as specified in each Section, and
that has completed a minimum of four recent projects with a record of successful
in-service performance that demonstrate the firm's qualifications to perform this
Work.
1. Field Supervisor Qualifications: Full-time supervisors experienced in
historic treatment work similar in nature, material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project. Supervisors shall be on the Project site when
historic treatment work is in progress. Supervisors shall not be changed
during the Project, except for causes beyond the control of the specialist
firm.
2. Worker Qualification: Persons who are experienced in historic treatment
work of the types they will be performing.
B. Historic Removal and Dismantling Specialist Qualifications: A qualified historic
treatment specialist. General selective demolition experience is not sufficient
experience for historic removal and dismantling work.
C. Bird-Excrement-Removal Specialist Qualifications: A firm or group of individuals
experienced and skilled in the processes and operations indicated.
D. Industrial Hygienist Qualifications: Certified as Industrial Hygienist by the American
Board of Industrial Hygiene; having a bachelor's degree in industrial hygiene,
public health, biological science, occupational health, or environmental and safety
discipline; and experienced in work of the types specified.
E. Historic Treatment Program: Prepare a written plan for historic treatment for the
whole Project, including each phase or process and protection of surrounding
materials during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods, and equipment
to be used for each phase of Work. Show compliance with indicated methods and
procedures specified in this and other Sections.
1. Dust and Noise Control: Include the locations of proposed temporary dust-
and noise-control partitions and means of egress from occupied areas
coordinated with continuing on-site operations and other known Work in
progress.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
2. Debris Hauling: Include plans clearly marked to show debris hauling routes,
turning radii, and locations and details of temporary protective barriers.
F. Fire-Prevention Plan: Prepare a written plan for preventing fires during the Work,
including placement of fire extinguishers, fire blankets, rag buckets, and other fire-
prevention devices during each phase or process. Coordinate the plan with the
Authority's fire-protection equipment and requirements. Include each fire watch's
training, duties, and Authority to enforce fire safety.
G. Mockups: Prepare mockups of specific historic treatment procedures specified in
this Section to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
materials and execution.
1. Typical Removal Work: Remove an approximately 50–square foot area of
typical wall, ceiling, floor or deck, or paving, but not less than 10 adjacent
whole masonry, stone, ceiling tile units.
2. Typical Dismantling Work: Dismantle an approximately 50–square foot
area of typical substrate, but not less than 10 adjacent whole masonry,
stone or ceiling units.
3. Bird-Excrement Removal: Remove excrement from an area approximately
25 square feet for each type of structure cornice, coping, wall, or other
substrate material.
a. Test chemicals and methods on samples of adjacent structure
materials for possible adverse reactions. Do not use chemicals and
methods known to have a deleterious effect.
b. Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion
of removal work to permit a study of mockup for deleterious effects.
4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless the Authority specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
H. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations
before beginning removal and dismantling Work. Comply with hauling and disposal
regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6.
J. Historic Treatment Preconstruction Conference: Conduct the conference at the
Project site.
1. General: Review methods and procedures related to historic treatment
including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Review manufacturer's written instructions for precautions and
effects of historic treatment procedures on materials, components,
and vegetation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
b. Review and finalize historic treatment construction schedule; verify
availability of materials, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
c. Review qualifications of personnel assigned to the work and assign
duties.
d. Review material application, work sequencing, tolerances, and
required clearances.
e. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires
protection.
2. Removal and Dismantling:
a. Inspect and discuss the condition of construction to be removed or
dismantled.
b. Review requirements of other Work that relies on substrates
exposed by removal and dismantling work.
1.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF HISTORIC MATERIALS
A. Salvaged Historic Materials:
1. Clean only loose debris from salvaged historic items unless more extensive
cleaning is indicated.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning; cushion against damage during
handling. Label contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to the Authority.
4. Transport items to the Authority's storage area off-site designated by the
Authority.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
B. Historic Materials for Reinstallation:
1. Repair and clean historic items as indicated and to functional condition for
reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing; cushion against damage
during handling. Label contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in the locations indicated. Comply with installation
requirements for new materials and equipment unless otherwise indicated.
Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials to make item
functional for use indicated.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
C. Existing Historic Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain
against damage and soiling from construction Work. Where permitted by the
Authority, items may be dismantled and taken to a suitable, protected storage
location during construction Work and reinstalled in their original locations after
historic treatment and construction Work in the vicinity is complete.
D. Storage and Protection: When taken from their existing locations, catalog and store
historic items within a weather-tight enclosure where they are protected from
wetting by rain, snow, condensation, or ground water, and from freezing
temperatures.
1. Identify each item with a nonpermanent mark to document its original
location. Indicate original locations on plans elevations, sections, or
photographs by annotating the identifying marks.
2. Secure stored materials to protect from theft.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General Size Limitation in Historic Spaces: Materials, products, and equipment
used for performing the Work and for transporting debris, materials, and products
shall be of sizes that clear surfaces within historic spaces, areas, rooms, and
openings, including temporary protection, by 12 inches or more.
B. The Authority will occupy portions of a structure immediately adjacent to the
removal and dismantling area. Conduct removal and dismantling work so the
Authority's operations will not be disrupted.
C. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained
by the Authority as far as practical, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract
Documents.
D. Notify the Authority of discrepancies between existing conditions and the Contract
Documents before proceeding with removal and dismantling Work.
E. Exterior Cleaning and Repairing:
1. Proceed with the Work only when forecasted weather conditions are
favorable.
a. Wet Weather: Do not attempt repairs during rainy or foggy weather.
Do not apply primer, paint, putty, or epoxy when the relative
humidity is above 80 percent. Do not remove exterior elements of
structures when rain is forecast or in progress.
b. Do not perform exterior wet work when the air temperature is below
40 F.
c. Do not begin cleaning, patching, or repairing when there is any
likelihood of frost or freezing.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
d. Do not begin cleaning when either the air or the surface
temperature is below 45 F unless approved means are provided for
maintaining a 45 F temperature of the air and materials during, and
for 48 hours subsequent to, cleaning.
2. Perform cleaning and rinsing of the exterior only during daylight hours.
F. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be
encountered in the Work.
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by the Authority before the start of
the Work.
2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered,
do not disturb them; immediately notify the Authority and the Authority. The
Authority will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.
3. If asbestos is encountered, stop Work in the area of the potential hazard,
shut off fans and other air handlers ventilating the area, and rope off the
area until the questionable material is identified. Reassign workers to
continue Work in unaffected areas. Resume Work in the area of concern
after safe working conditions are verified.
G. Storage or sale of removed or dismantled items on-site is not permitted unless
otherwise indicated.
1.09 COORDINATION
Coordinate historic treatment procedures in this Section with public circulation patterns at
the Project site. Some Work is near public circulation patterns and active railroad tracks.
Public circulation patterns cannot be closed off entirely, and in places can be only
temporarily redirected around small areas of Work. Railroad traffic will not be stopped.
Plan and execute the Work accordingly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 NOTIFICATION
All things of historical, archaeological, paleontological, or scientific interest encountered
by the Contractor during progress of the Work shall be reported immediately to the
Authority. Construction in the vicinity of the discovery shall be halted in order to preserve
and protect it until its significance can be determined by the Authority. The Authority will
issue instructions to the Contractor with respect to the disposition of the discovery.
3.02 HISTORIC REMOVAL AND DISMANTLING EQUIPMENT
A. Removal Equipment: Use only hand-held tools except as follows or unless
otherwise approved by the Authority on a case-by-case basis:
1. Light jackhammers are allowed, subject to the Authority’s approval.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
2. Large air hammers are not permitted.
B. Dismantling Equipment: Use manual, hand-held tools, except as follows or
otherwise approved by the Authority on a case-by-case basis:
1. Hand-held power tools and cutting torches are permitted only as submitted
in the historic treatment program. They must be adjustable so as to
penetrate or cut only the thickness of material being removed.
2. Pry bars over 18 inches long and hammers weighing over 2 pounds are not
permitted for dismantling Work.
3.03 EXAMINATION
A. Preparation for Removal and Dismantling: Contractor shall examine construction
to be removed or dismantled to determine the best methods for safely and
effectively performing removal and dismantling Work. Examine adjacent Work to
determine what protective measures will be necessary. Make explorations,
probes, and inquiries as necessary to determine the condition of construction to
be removed or dismantled, and the location of utilities and services to remain that
may be hidden by construction that is to be removed or dismantled.
1. Verify that affected utilities have been disconnected and capped.
2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and dismantled
for reinstallation or salvage.
3. Before removal or dismantling of existing structure elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make a permanent record of
measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact
reproduction.
4. Engage a professional engineer to survey the condition of the structure to
determine whether removing any element might result in structural
deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent
structures as a result of removal and dismantling Work.
B. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured
drawings, preconstruction photographs, and preconstruction videotapes as
appropriate and approved by the Authority. Comply with requirements specified in
Section 01 32 33, Photographic Documentation.
C. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from historic
treatment procedures.
3.04 PROTECTION, GENERAL
A. Ensure that supervisory personnel are on site and on duty when historic treatment
Work begins and during its progress.
B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of the structure, the
structure site, plants, and surrounding structures from harm resulting from historic
treatment procedures.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
1. Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface
being protected.
2. Provide barricades, barriers, and temporary directional signage to exclude
the public from areas where historic treatment Work is being performed.
3. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of
pedestrian and vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service
during the course of historic treatment Work.
4. Contain dust and debris generated by removal and dismantling work and
prevent it from reaching the public or adjacent surfaces.
5. Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload
structural elements.
6. Protect floors, paving, and other surfaces along haul routes from damage,
wear, and staining.
7. Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate removal and
dismantling Work from other areas of the structure and site.
C. Temporary Protection of Historic Materials:
1. Protect existing historic materials with temporary protections and
construction. Do not deface or remove existing materials.
2. Do not attach temporary protection to historic surfaces except as indicated
as part of the historic treatment program and approved by the Authority.
D. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and
precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people
and adjacent materials, components, and vegetation.
E. Utility and Communications Services:
1. Notify the Authority and other authorities having jurisdiction, owning or
controlling wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by the historic
treatment Work before commencing operations.
2. Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having
jurisdiction, as required for the historic treatment Work.
3. Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep them in service
and protect against damage during operations. Provide temporary services
during interruptions to existing utilities.
F. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of Work in an area, test the drainage system to
ensure that it is functioning properly. Notify the Authority immediately of inadequate
drainage or blockage. Do not begin Work in an area until the drainage system is in
working order.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
1. Prevent solids such as stone or mortar residue from entering the drainage
system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked
by sand or other materials resulting from historic treatment work.
2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing
only clean water to pass.
G. Existing Roofing: Prior to the start of Work in an area, install roofing protection
where indicated on the Contract Documents.
3.05 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS
A. Protect motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of structure being restored, structure
site, plants, and surrounding structures from harm or damage resulting from
applications of chemical cleaners and paint removers.
B. Cover adjacent surfaces with protective materials that are proven to resist
chemicals selected for the Project unless chemicals being used will not damage
adjacent surfaces, as indicated in the historic treatment program. Use covering
materials and masking agents that are waterproof and UV-resistant, and that will
not stain or leave residue on surfaces to which they are applied. Apply protective
materials according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid
masking agents or adhesives to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer
needed, promptly remove protective materials staining.
C. Do not apply chemicals during winds of sufficient force to spread them to
unprotected surfaces.
D. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes and legally dispose of them off of
the Authority's property.
E. Collect and dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a
manner that prevents soil contamination, soil erosion, undermining of paving and
foundations, damage to landscaping, or water penetration into structure interior.
3.06 PROTECTION FROM FIRE
A. General: Follow the fire-prevention plan and the following:
1. Remove and keep the area free of combustibles, including, rubbish, paper,
waste, and chemicals, except to the degree necessary for the immediate
Work.
2. If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fire blankets to cover
such materials.
3. Prohibit smoking by all persons within the Project Work and staging areas.
B. Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following
procedures while performing Work with heat-generating equipment or highly
combustible materials, including welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, paint
removal with heat, or other operations where open flames or implements utilizing
high heat or combustible solvents and chemicals are anticipated.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
1. Obtain the Authority's approval for operations involving use of open flame
or welding or other high-heat equipment. Notify the Authority at least 72
hours before each occurrence, indicating the location of such Work.
2. As far as practical, restrict heat-generating equipment to shop areas or
outside the structure.
3. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or
in areas where flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or
thought to be present. Use a combustible gas indicator test to ensure that
the area is safe.
4. Use fireproof baffles to prevent flames, sparks, hot gasses, or other high-
temperature material from reaching surrounding combustible material.
5. Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open
windows, doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other
openings.
6. Fire Watch: Before working with heat-generating equipment or highly
combustible materials, station personnel to serve as a fire watch at each
location where such work is performed. Fire watch personnel shall have
the Authority to enforce fire safety.
a. Train each fire watch in the proper operation of fire-control
equipment and alarms.
b. Prohibit fire-watch personnel from other work that would be a
distraction from fire-watch duties.
c. Cease work with heat-generating equipment whenever fire-watch
personnel are not present.
d. Have fire watch perform final fire-safety inspections each day.
beginning no sooner than 30 minutes after conclusion of work at the
Project site to detect hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that
proper fire-prevention is maintained.
C. Fire Extinguishers, Fire Blankets, and Rag Buckets: Maintain fire extinguishers,
fire blankets, and rag buckets for disposal of rags with combustible liquids.
Maintain each as suitable for the type of fire risk in each work area. Ensure that
nearby personnel and the fire watch are trained in fire-extinguisher and blanket
operation.
3.07 GENERAL HISTORIC TREATMENT
A. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when historic treatment work
begins and during its progress.
B. Halt the process of deterioration and stabilize conditions, unless otherwise
indicated. Perform work as indicated on Contract Documents. Follow the
procedures in subparagraphs below and procedures approved in historic treatment
program.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
1. Retain as much existing material as possible; when circumstances allow,
repair and consolidate rather than replace.
2. Use additional material or structure to reinforce, strengthen, prop, tie, and
support existing material or structures.
3. Use reversible processes wherever possible.
4. Use historically accurate repair and replacement materials and techniques
unless otherwise indicated.
5. Record existing work before each procedure (preconstruction) and
progress during the work with digital preconstruction documentation
photographs or videos. Comply with requirements in the Specifications
Section 01 32 33, Photographic Documentation.
C. Notify the Authority of visible changes in the integrity of material or components,
whether due to environmental causes (including biological attack, UV degradation,
freezing, or thawing), or due to structural defects (including cracks, movement, or
distortion). Do not proceed with the work in question until so directed by the
Authority.
D. Where missing features are indicated to be repaired or replaced, provide features
whose designs are based on accurate duplications rather than on conjectural
designs, subject to the approval of the Authority.
E. Where Work requires existing features to be removed or dismantled and
reinstalled, perform these operations without damage to the material itself, to
adjacent materials, or to the substrate.
F. Identify new and replacement materials and features with permanent marks hidden
in the completed work to distinguish them from original materials. Record a legend
of identification marks and the locations of the items on Record Drawings.
3.08 HISTORIC REMOVAL AND DISMANTLING
A. General: Have removal and dismantling work performed by a qualified historic
removal and dismantling specialist. Ensure that the historic removal and
dismantling specialist's field supervisors are present when removal and
dismantling work begins and during its progress.
B. Perform work in accordance with the historic treatment program and approved
mockups.
1. Provide supports or reinforcement for existing construction that becomes
temporarily weakened by the work, until the work is completed.
2. Perform cutting by hand or with small power tools wherever possible. Cut
holes and slots neatly to size required, with minimum disturbance of
adjacent work.
3. Do not operate air compressors inside structure, unless approved by
Authority in each case.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
4. Do not drill or cut columns, beams, joints, girders, structural slabs, or other
structural supporting elements, without having the Contractor's
professional engineer's written approval for each location before such work
is begun.
5. Do not use explosives.
C. Unacceptable Equipment: Keep equipment that is not permitted for historic
removal or dismantling work away from the vicinity where such work is being
performed.
D. Removing and Dismantling Items On or Near Historic Surfaces:
1. Use only dismantling tools and procedures within 12 inches of the historic
surface. Do not use pry bars. Protect the historic surface from contact with
or damage by tools.
2. Unfasten items to be removed, in the opposite order from which they were
installed.
3. Support each item as it becomes loosened to prevent stress and damage
to the historic surface.
4. Dismantle anchorages.
3.09 BIRD-EXCREMENT REMOVAL
A. General: Before disturbing accumulated bird excrement, employ a qualified
industrial hygienist to oversee the work. Follow procedures required by authorities
having jurisdiction and recommended by industrial hygienist.
B. Removing Bird Excrement: Have bird-excrement removal work performed by a
qualified bird-excrement removal specialist. When removing exterior bird-
excrement accumulations, ensure structure windows and other openings in the
structure are closed or sealed off. Remove interior bird excrement with other parts
of the structure sealed off from the work area, and with windows and other
openings to exterior areas that are accessible to the public closed or sealed off.
1. Before removal, treat bird excrement to kill pathogens; dampen excrement
to prevent particles becoming airborne.
2. Use only nonmetallic tools such as plastic spatulas and brushes with
natural fiber or nylon bristles.
3. Collect excrement debris as it is removed and legally dispose of it off-site.
4. Repeat the removal procedure above where required to produce the
cleaning effect established by the mockup.
C. Removing Bird-Excrement Stain: Clean as required in the Section pertaining to
cleaning substrate material from which bird excrement was removed.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 35 91
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 35 91 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality
assurance and quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with specified or
indicated Work requirements. These services do not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for compliance with Contract Documents requirements.
C. Specific tests and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section but
rather indicated or included elsewhere in the Contract Drawings (Plans) and
Specifications.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Specific quality assurance and quality control requirements for individual
construction activities are specified in the Specifications Sections that specify
those activities and may also cover production of standard products.
B. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality assurance and quality control
services required by the Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction, are not limited
by provisions of this Section.
C. Specified tests, inspections and related actions do not limit Contractor’s other
quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the
Contract Documents requirements.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality Assurance: Activities, actions, and procedures performed prior to and
during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and
substantiate that proposed construction will comply with the Contract Documents’
requirements.
B. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions
during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products
incorporated into the Work and that completed construction comply with the
Contract Documents’ requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement
activities performed by the Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies constructed on-site to verify selections
made under submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, the expected
qualities of products and materials, and to review details of construction,
coordination, testing, or operation; mockups are not Samples. Approved mockups
establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for
the Project, before products and materials are incorporated into the Work in order
to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), a National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or other testing agency qualified to conduct
product testing and acceptable to the Authority and all other authorities having
jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified
requirements.
F. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the
source (e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop).
G. Field Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for
installation of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.
“Testing laboratory” shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: The Contractor or another entity engaged by the
Contractor as an employee, or Subcontractor, to perform a particular construction
operation, including installation, erection, application, or similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not
require that certain construction activities be performed by an accredited or
unionized individual, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to
specific trade(s).
J. Experienced: When used with an entity of individual, ‘experienced’ means having
successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size,
and extent of the Work; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and
having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.04 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and
the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities
or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. The Contractor shall
refer conflicting requirements to the Authority for a decision before proceeding.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or
specified shall be the minimum provided or performed by the Contractor. The
actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality
specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. The Contractor
shall refer uncertainties to the Authority for a decision before proceeding.
C. Items indicated on the Contract Drawings (Plans) but not included in the
Specifications, or included in the Specifications but not indicated on the Plans,
shall have the same effect as if indicated or included in both the Plans and
Specifications.
D. In case of conflict or inconsistency between the Plans and Specifications,
Contractor shall request additional information or interpretation; any adjustment by
Contractor without such official determination shall be at Contractor’s own risk and
expense.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with all applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances, and
regulations of Federal, State, and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction, and
obtain necessary approvals from all such authorities.
1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor Quality Control (CQC) Plan: Submit a formal plan detailing Contractor’s
quality assurance and quality control activities and responsibilities. Submit in a
format acceptable to the Authority. The CQC Plan is due within 15 calendar days
following receipt of Award.
1. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and
forms to be used to carry out the Contractor’s quality control
responsibilities.
2. Coordinate this Contractor’s Quality control (CQC) Plan with the
Contractor’s construction schedule.
3. Engage qualified full-time personnel adequately trained and experienced
in managing and executing construction quality control procedures similar
in nature and extent to those required for this Project.
a. Contractor’s assigned project quality control manager may not
serve as project superintendent, project manager, project engineer,
or any other supervisory duties related to production.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
4. Include a comprehensive listing of Work which delineates required tests
and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections, including (a)
Contractor-performed tests and inspections, as well as Subcontractor-
performed tests and inspections, (b) and tests and inspections required to
be performed by the Authority.
5. Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with the Contract Documents
requirements conducting iterative reviews and effectively managing the
submittal process.
6. Describe processes for continuous inspections and non-destructive testing
to identify and correct deficiencies in the Work, in addition to specified
testing and inspecting.
7. The CQC Plan is required to include a listing of Quality Control Check
Points with a description of the work items that will be inspected and
approved by the CQC Inspectors at each Quality Control Check Point prior
to subsequent work proceeding. Submit with the CQC Plan copies of the
Inspection Checklist blank forms that the Contractor intends to use for
Checkpoint inspections. The partial listing below contains examples of work
elements or conditions that the Authority would expect to be included in the
CQC Plan as Quality Control Check Points. The Authority may at any time
require that the Contractor add Quality Control Check Points and
corresponding Inspection Checklists to the CQC Plan.
a. Pre-activity meeting agenda and meeting minutes prior to the start
of any major work activity.
b. At specified intervals of embankment construction.
c. At completion of bridge embankment or excavation, and before the
start of structure foundation.
d. Layout of structure piles, foundations, superstructure elements, civil
work, utilities or other work.
e. Prior to closing of any form work.
f. Prior to any concrete placement (formwork, reinforcing, embeds,
shaft conditions, joint lay out, post tension ducts, bearings, etc.).
g. Bearings prior to girder / beam erection.
h. Sub-grade verification prior to base material or sub-ballast
placement.
i. Sub-ballast verification prior to rail and ballast placement.
j. After falsework is completed and prior to loading.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
k. Sub-grade or base verification (as applicable) before surfacing
placement.
l. Verification of trench bottoms for underground utility work.
m. After placement of pipe or box culvert sections.
n. Prior to backfill operation at any structure, utility or facility.
o. Prior to post tension or pre-stress jacking operations.
p. Prior to welding.
q. Prior to directional boring.
r. Paving, prior to any traffic striping.
s. Substrate, prior to any specialized work (e.g.: fiber wrap, water
proofing, tie-downs, etc.)
8. Maintain testing and inspection reports, including a log of approved and
rejected results. Indicate corrective actions either proposed or taken to
bring non-conforming portions of the Work into compliance. Comply with
requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.
a. All test and inspection results shall be reviewed by the CQC
Manager.
b. Any results which are not in compliances should result in the
issuance of a Non-Conformance Report (NCR) by the CQC
Manager.
c. The NCR should be filed by the CQC Manager within 7 calendar
days of the results being issued.
d. The CQC Manager shall maintain the NCR Tracking Log.
B. Contractor Quality Control Manager Qualifications
C. Contractor’s Statement of Responsibility
D. Contractor’s Testing Agency Qualifications
E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections
1.08 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Tests and Inspection Reports
B. Manufacturer Technical Representative Field Reports
C. Factory-authorized Service Representative Field Reports
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates
1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Section establish the minimum
qualification levels required: individual Specifications sections specify additional
requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications
C. Fabricator Qualifications
D. Installer Qualifications:
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications
F. Specialists
G. Testing Agency Qualifications
H. Manufacturer Technical Representative Qualifications
I. Factory-authorized Service Representative Qualifications
J. Pre-construction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform
preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for
performance and test methods, comply as follows:
K. Contractor’s responsibilities include all of the following:
1. Provide test samples that are representative of proposed products and
construction.
2. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and
analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
3. Provide sizes and configurations of site-assembled test assemblies and
mockups, as well as laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate the
capability of products to comply with specified performance requirements.
4. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform the same tasks for the completed Work.
5. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, mockups and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
6. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and
mockups. Do not reuse such products on the Project.
L. Mockups: Before installing portions of Work requiring mockups, build mockups for
each form of construction and finish required to comply with following
requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer.
2. Notify Resident Engineer seven (7) days in advance of dates and times
when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Resident Engineer's approval of mockups before starting Work,
fabrication, or construction.
5. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in undisturbed condition as standard
for judging completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
1.10 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Quality Control tests and inspections shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall perform additional quality
control activities necessary to verify that the Work complies with specified
requirements.
1. Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents,
Contractor shall provide quality control services required to verify that the
Work complies with the Contract Document requirements, whether
specified or not, in addition to testing and inspections required by
authorities having jurisdiction (e.g. fire marshal, building official, Caltrans,
SCRRA, BNSF, etc.).
2. Where quality control services are indicated as the Contractor’s
responsibility, the Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to
perform the required quality control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Authority for
testing and inspection unless agreed to, in writing, by Authority.
b. Contractor shall notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance
of time when the Work that requires testing or inspecting will be
performed.
c. Contractor shall submit a certified report, in duplicate, of each
quality-control service performed.
d. Contractor shall submit additional copies of each written report
directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
3. Any testing or inspecting requested by Contractor but not required by the
Contract Documents shall be Contractor’s responsibility and sole expense.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
B. Manufacturer Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized
service representative to observe and inspect field-assembled components and
equipment installation, including connections to utilities/services. Report all results
in writing.
C. Manufacturer Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer’s
technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Such services include
participation in pre-installation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials used, observation of installer’s activities,
inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submission of written reports.
D. Re-Testing and Re-Inspection: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections
were Contractor’s responsibility, Contractor shall provide quality control services,
including re-testing and re-inspection, for any construction that replaced portions
of the Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Testing Agency shall cooperate with all parties in
performance of Testing Agency’s duties. Testing Agency shall provide qualified
personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify the Construction Manager and Contractor promptly of irregularities
or deficiencies observed in the Work during the performance of Testing
Agency’s services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which
in-situ tests are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections, and state in each report
whether the tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the
specified requirements.
4. Submit a certified test report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and
similar quality-control service through the Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Documents
requirements, or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not, in any way, perform any duties of the Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with testing agencies performing required tests,
inspections, and similar quality control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary
services as requested.
1. See also Quality Coordination procedures for further description of
associated quality-control services.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
1.11 QUALITY COORDINATION
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized
service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment
installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in
Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
B. Notify the Authority at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed. Also provide the following in support of
testing and inspection services:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require
testing and inspecting. Assist testing agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that may
require production control by testing agency.
6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting
equipment at Project site.
C. Coordination: The Authority may engage a qualified testing agency to perform
certain testing and inspection services for purposes of verifying quality and
accepting completed portions of the Work. Contractor shall coordinate the
sequence of activities to accommodate required quality assurance and quality
control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid the necessity of removing
and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. Cooperate with
agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality control
services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.
D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents, which shall
be submitted for information purposes. Submit the schedule within 30 days of the
Authority’s Limited Notice to Proceed.
1.12 SOURCE OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY OF MATERIALS
A. The Authority shall approve the source of supply of each type of the materials
supplied by the Contractor before the Contractor or subcontractor purchases or
delivers these materials to the Project. Promptly after receiving the Contract award,
the Contractor shall notify the Authority of all proposed material sources. If it is
found after trial that sources of supply previously approved do not produce uniform
and satisfactory products, or if the product from any source proves unacceptable
at any time, the Contractor shall furnish materials from other sources as approved
by the Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
B. Only materials conforming to Specifications and approved in advance by the
Authority shall be used in the Work. All material being used shall be subject to
inspection or test at any time during their preparation or use. NO materials or
products determined to be unsatisfactory can be used in the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION AND TESTING PROCEDURES
The Contractor shall provide the Authority with full access to the Work and reasonable
time for inspection for ascertaining whether or not the Work is performed in accordance
with the requirements and intent of the Contract. No Work shall be covered or materials
used without making the Work products or materials available for inspection by the
Authority and any Work that is required to be uncovered, removed or replaced shall be at
the Contractor's expense. Inspection will not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility
of the quality of this Work and obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the
requirements of these Contract Documents.
A. All materials and every process of manufacture and construction shall be subject
to inspection at all times. The Authority and his designated representatives shall
have free access to all such operations. The Contractor shall furnish necessary
materials and the Authority shall have the right to select suitable samples of
materials for testing or examination which the Contractor shall supply without
charge. In case such samples must be shipped to some other point for inspection
or testing, the Contractor shall box or crate samples as necessary and shall deliver
them to points designated for shipment without charge. Omission of inspection
shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligations to perform the Work required by
the Plans and Specifications. Non-conforming or defective materials not in
compliance with Contract requirements shall be removed promptly from the vicinity
of the Worksite, and the Contractor, at its sole expense, shall promptly remove,
reconstruct, replace, and make good any defective Work. Oversight or error in the
judgment of inspectors, or previous acceptance of the Work shall not relieve the
Contractor from the obligation to correct any defects whenever discovered at the
Contractor’s sole expense. Authority and the other authorized agencies may
inspect at any time the Contractor’s production of Goods at off-site facilities,
including any manufacturer's plant.
B. Adequate facilities shall be made available for the necessary inspections and free
access to all parts of the Work shall be available at all reasonable times. The
Contractor shall have appropriate provisions inserted into each Subcontract it
enters into providing for document, facility or in-plant Inspection by the Authority.
C. In the event the Contractor does not correct nonconforming Work or remove
rejected materials within a reasonable time fixed by written notice, the Authority
may direct removals and corrections be performed by other Contractors. The
charges for such removals and corrections shall be deducted from the Contractor’s
payment due under this Contract or may be paid for by the Contractor’s bonds held
for this Contract.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
D. All inspection by the Engineer is for the protection of the Authority and its interest
and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performing work in
accordance with the Contract Documents. After completing the Work, a final
inspection will be made and any previous inspection or acceptance will not
preclude rejection at the time of final inspection for any item that is not satisfactory
to the Authority or not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
E. In the event, within such period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms
of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Document, whichever
is longer, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a
written notice from the Authority. This obligation shall survive acceptance of the
Work or termination of the Contract. In the event the Authority prefers to accept or
not require correction of defective or nonconforming Work, the Authority may do
so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Authority shall
determine an appropriate sum to be deducted from the Contract price or
otherwise charged against the Contractor, which determination shall be final and
binding upon the Parties. Such monetary adjustment shall be effected whether or
not final payment has been made.
F. All defective Work, which has been rejected, shall be remedied or removed and
replaced by the Contractor at its own expense in a manner acceptable to the
Authority.
G. The Authority may charge the Contractor for any additional costs it incurs for tests
and Inspections, wherever and whenever Work is not ready at the time indicated
by the Contractor’s notice or when an additional reinspection is necessitated by
prior rejection.
H. The Authority will have access, at all reasonable times, to the Contractor's
documents, calculations, supporting materials, data, and information concerning
the Work, including computer programs and printouts, which supportive
information Authority may determine is required to review the Work properly and
expeditiously.
3.02 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Contractor shall prepare a record of tests and inspections, and shall include the
following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected
3. An Inspection Checklist appropriate to the portion of Work
4. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Authority
5. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting the
particular test or inspection service
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
B. Maintain log at Project site. The Contractor shall post changes and modifications
as they occur. The Contractor shall provide access to the test and inspection log
for the Authority's reference during normal working hours. No notice will be
required for Authority’s access to Contractor’s test and inspection the logs and
associated documents.
3.03 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services,
the Contractor shall repair damaged construction and restore substrates and
finishes.
B. The Contractor shall provide materials and comply with installation requirements
specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend
restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as nearly invisible as
possible.
C. The Contractor shall protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service
activities.
D. Repair and protection are the sole responsibility of the Contractor, regardless of
the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
3.04 AUTHORITY’S REMEDIES FOR DEFICIENT WORK
If any Work provided by the Contractor is determined to be deficient, the Authority shall
provide written notice to the Contractor of enumerating such deficiencies, and may
thereafter do one or more of the following:
A. Require the Contractor to promptly segregate and remove rejected Work from the
Project at Contractor’s own expense and without any extension of Contract Time.
B. Require the Contractor re-perform repair or replace Work, products, materials or
other items or items at Contractor’s own expense.
C. Withhold payments otherwise due to Contractor hereunder.
D. Have remedial Work performed and products or materials provided by others at
the sole expense of the Contractor.
E. Terminate the Contract and obtain the remedies provided for therein.
F. Corrected or remedial Work and replaced or repaired products or materials shall
be subject to all of the Contract Documents requirements, including without
limitation all standards of performance set forth in this Contract.
G. Costs for re-testing and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated
by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to
Contractor and the Contract Price will be adjusted by Change Order.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items
and no separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work
of this Section;
B. The Testing Agency engaged by Authority for testing and inspection will be
provided and paid by the Authority. All other services of this Section will be paid
by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 01 40 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 40 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 43 23
CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section outlines requirements and provisions to which the Contractor shall provide
professional construction staff and equipment capable of safely executing the Work
required by these Contract Documents part of which are on an operating railroad system,
with little or no disruption to the passenger/commuter and freight operations, as well as
other public facilities.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 14 16, Coordination with SCRRA
B. Section 01 31 00, Project Management and Coordination
C. Section 01 35 23, Site Safety Requirements
1.03 GOVERNING REGULATIONS
A. SCRRA: Maintenance of Way Operating Rules
B. SCRRA: Track Maintenance Manual, FRA: Title 49 CFR Part 213 and Part 214
C. Cal/OSHA: California Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations
D. CPUC: California Public Utility Commission General Orders
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit the resumes for all personnel listed herein to the
Authority within 15 days after the Limited Notice to Proceed. Each resume shall
provide sufficient detail to demonstrate compliance with the appropriate
specifications. Submit the number of each classification of employee to be
assigned to the Work and the duration of their assignments.
B. The Authority will review the submitted personnel resumes to determine
compliance with all specified requirements. The Contractor shall not substitute or
remove Authority approved personnel from the Contract without prior approval
from Authority and shall not resubmit personnel that are deemed unacceptable by
the Authority. The Authority must be notified and approve thirty (30) Days in
advance, Contractor’s planned substitution or removal of key personnel. Any
removal or substitution of personnel without SCRRA consent shall be identified as
contractual noncompliance. The Contractor shall submit a list of the equipment
proposed to be used to the Authority for approval. This list shall have sufficient
detail to demonstrate compliance with the appropriate Specification Sections.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
C. The Contractor shall submit a list of the equipment proposed to be used to the
Authority for approval, within 15 days after the Award. This list shall have sufficient
detail to demonstrate compliance with the appropriate Specification sections,
regulatory authorities, and Railroad Operators.
D. All equipment other than railroad track and ballast equipment shall be equipped
with multi tonal directional “white noise” backup alarm that complies with OSHA
Regulation 1926.601(b)(4). The Contractor shall submit a list of the equipment
proposed to be used to the Authority for approval prior to NTP.
E. Contractor Qualifications: The Contractor shall submit a company resume of all
projects the Contractor has performed within a live railroad operating environment.
Project experience shall include Class 1 railroads or Commuter and Passenger
Rail. The Contractor shall submit a resume of performing Contract Work as a prime
contractor on live active railroads for a minimum of 3 projects.
F. The Contractor or their designated on-site personnel shall have attended a South
Coast Air Basin Fugitive Dust Control Class within the last two years (SCAQMD
Rule 403).
1.05 RAILROAD CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER
A. The Contractor shall have a Railroad Construction Project Manager who will
manage and coordinate the overall aspects of the track, station, grade crossing,
site civil, systems, and bridge construction. The Railroad Construction Project
Manager’s qualifications and experience must include the following:
1. At least five years of progressively more responsible engineering,
construction, and maintenance experience on a wide variety of Railroad
projects for a Class 1 or Commuter Railroad. The Project Manager shall
have experience on at least three (3) Class 1 or Commuter Railroad
projects, managing construction related activities in an active railroad
operating environment with moderate to heavy traffic and limited work
windows.
2. Knowledge of FRA standards and qualified under FRA Track Safety
Standards, Part 213.7, applicable CPUC General Orders, the General
Code of Operating Rules, SCRRA Track Maintenance, Right-of-Way, and
Structures Engineering Instructions, SCRRA Standard Plans, and Railroad
Roadway Worker Protection rules and regulations.
3. A demonstrated ability to work safely and supervise individuals in safe
work.
4. Previous positions and experience supervising and planning work activities
of construction superintendents, project engineers, and support personnel
foreman and crews.
5. The ability to read and understand track, bridge, station, construction plans
and specifications, and SSWPs, and to develop and work from construction
schedules.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
B. The Railroad Construction Project Manager must be located at the Contractor’s
construction field office; and be able to respond immediately to emergency or
problem calls, seven days a week, 24 hours a day.
C. This Railroad Construction Project Manager shall have the necessary authority to
receive and promptly execute instructions and orders from the Authority or its
authorized representatives. The Project Manager shall not be replaced without
advance approval by the Authority. Any replacement Project Manager shall be
subject to the approval of the Authority.
1.06 RAILROAD TRACK CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS
A. The Contractor shall have at least one Railroad Track Construction Manager who
will direct the day-to-day operations of the Track Foreman and assist in managing
and coordinating the overall aspects of the track, station, grade crossing, and
bridge construction. The Railroad Track Construction Manager’s qualifications and
experience must include the following:
1. Thorough knowledge of railroad methods of track construction and
maintenance under traffic.
2. Knowledge of FRA standards, and qualified under FRA Track Safety
Standards, Part 213.7, applicable CPUC General Orders, the General
Code of Operating Rules, SCRRA Track Maintenance, Right-of-Way and
Structures Engineering Instructions, SCRRA Standard Plans, and Railroad
Roadway Worker Protection rules and regulations.
3. The ability to work safely and supervise individuals in safe work.
4. Previous positions/experience that include supervising and planning work
activities of foreman and crews.
5. The ability to read and understand track, site civil, systems, and
construction plans.
6. Five years’ railroad track construction experience, with a minimum three
years of railroad management experience. Must have at least three years’
experience as a Roadmaster or equivalent position for a Class I Freight or
Commuter Railroad in the last 15 years.
7. The ability to identify FRA or other defects in track for the given class, and
to prescribe appropriate remedial measures.
B. The Railroad Track Construction Manager(s) must be located at the Contractor’s
construction field office and must be on the job during any track or associated
construction work. The Railroad Track Construction Manager shall be able to
respond immediately to emergency or problem calls on a seven-day-a-week, 24-
hour basis. The Railroad Track Construction Manager will manage and directly
oversee the safety, condition, and quality of track that has been modified by the
Contractor, and shall direct corrective and maintenance measures to keep the
track operating safely at the designated class.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
C. The Railroad Track Construction Managers shall be solely dedicated to this Project
and not permitted to work on other projects during any track or associated
construction work.
1.07 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT MANAGER (MCM)
A. The Contractor shall have a MCM to plan, direct, and coordinate the activities of
the Contractor (including all Subcontractors) in performance of the Work to assure
compliance with Contract terms and conditions, applicable regulations, SCRRA
standards, , coordination with other Authority Contractors and public agencies, and
provision of quality railroad service by the Authority. Serves as the point of contact
for Authority staff for all matters relating to the Agreement and performs regular
consultation and planning meetings with the Authority's Manager of Maintenance.
The MCM shall review, revise, and develop contract submittal documents including
annual budgets and work plans, training schedule and curriculums, CTOs,
inspections, and invoices. The MCM shall assist training managers in developing
training schedule and curriculum and shall supervise, promote, manage, transfer,
and discipline Contractor staff and arrange with Authority for replacement
personnel in the event of vacancies. The MCM is required to respond immediately
to extraordinary conditions and to initiate inspections or repairs to track or facilities
as required to maintain Authority facilities and operations.
B. MCM qualifications and experience shall include the following:
1. Twenty years of progressively responsible experience in railroad track
maintenance or construction in an operating railroad environment including
at least 10 years’ experience in supervising or directing the work of others
engaged in railroad track maintenance and five years’ experience in
managing construction or maintenance contracts.
2. A minimum of ten years of supervisory skills in a similar position
supervising and managing employees engaged in railroad track
maintenance in an operating railroad environment.
3. Desirable to have an associate degree from a College in Business,
Construction or a related field.
4. Knowledge of the safe and proper procedures for operating railroad
maintenance hand and power tools and railroad maintenance equipment.
5. Must be able to demonstrate ability to communicate in written and verbal
English language with prior record keeping experience.
6. Must possess strong leadership interpersonal skills.
7. Detailed knowledge of FTSS and FRWS and the ability to be Qualified on
Authority's examinations for 49 CFR Part 213.7 of FTSS and the GCOR
related to these regulations at NTP.
8. Previously qualified with a railroad to provide workplace protection under
FRWS and to inspect track and supervise restoration of track under FTSS.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
9. Knowledge of the physical layout and operation of a commuter rail system
similar to Authority's.
10. Knowledge of the time for completion and the cost of repair for track and
Right-of-Way facilities, and the ability to make value judgments regarding
economic repair and/or replacement of these facilities.
11. Knowledge of the adjustment of thermal stress in continuously welded rail
per 49 CFR Part 213.119 of the FTSS.
12. Ability to read and interpret drawings, plans, and specifications for railroad
track and civil construction and to inspect track and supervise the work of
others for compliance with these documents.
13. Ability to complete work under time pressures and to maintain composure
under the stress of emergency situations.
14. Ability to perform scheduled and unscheduled repair or construction work
at any time on any day of the week.
15. Must have, or obtain within six weeks of Limited NTP, a valid California
driver license with no more than three moving violations and no Driving
Under the lnfluence (DUI) in any state within the last three years.
16. Must pass a pre-employment physical examination including a drug and
alcohol test.
17. Ability to work outdoors in all weather conditions, to lift objects weighing a
minimum of 50 Ibs. and must have the ability to distinguish colors and to
hear warning signals and radio and telephone devices.
18. Shall be on-call 24 hours each day, 365 days a year, with allowances for
vacations, sick leave, and related time off with duties assigned to the
Assistant Contract Manager when off duty.
1.08 RAILROAD BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
A. The Contractor shall have at least one Railroad Bridge Construction Manager who
will direct the construction of all railroad bridges and culverts and assist in
managing and coordinating the track and other work in the immediate vicinity of
the bridge and culvert work. The Rail Bridge Construction Manager’s qualifications
and experience must include the following:
1. Knowledge of railroad methods of railroad bridge construction and
maintenance under traffic.
2. Knowledge of FRA standards, and qualified under FRA Track Safety
Standards, Part 213.7, applicable CPUC General Orders, the General
Code of Operating Rules, SCRRA Track Maintenance, Right-of-Way and
Structures Engineering Instructions, SCRRA Standard Plans, and Railroad
Roadway Worker Protection rules and regulations.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
3. The ability to work safely and supervise individuals in safe work.
4. Previous positions/experience supervising and planning railroad bridge
work activities of foreman and crews.
5. The ability to read and understand bridge construction plans.
6. Five years’ railroad bridge experience, with a minimum of three years of
Class I Freight or Commuter Railroad management experience within the
last 15 years.
B. The Railroad Bridge Construction Manager must be located at the Contractor’s
construction field office and must be on the work full time during the workweek for
the full duration of any bridge or associated construction work. The Railroad Bridge
Construction Manager will manage and directly oversee the safety, condition, and
quality of any bridges modified by the Contractor, and shall direct corrective and
maintenance measures to keep the track operating safely at the designated class.
The Railroad Bridge Construction Manager must be able to immediately respond
to emergency or problem calls, seven days a week, 24 hours a day.
1.09 RAILROAD BRIDGE REPAIRER
A. The Contractor shall have a Railroad Bridge Repairer to perform maintenance,
adjustment, inspection, and repair tasks to railroad structures using hand and
power tools, construction equipment, and railroad maintenance equipment,
performs work in accordance with the FRWS regulations, and additional duties
within the general scope of the Services. The Railroad Bridge Repairer may work
as a member of a crew, independently or under the direction of a Railroad Bridge
Repair Leader and may direct the work of Railroad Track or Bridge Repairer
Helpers.
B. RBR qualifications and experience must include the following:
1. Three years experience in railroad bridge construction and/or maintenance
with two years experience as a bridge maintenance worker using various
machines for railroad bridge construction or maintenance work in an
operating railroad environment.
2. Familiar with the inspection, construction, and repair of structures
constructed of pre-stressed and cast in place concrete, steel, timber, and
combinations of these materials.
3. Knowledge of safe and proper procedures for operating this equipment.
4. Knowledge of safe and efficient manipulation of equipment and tools to
perform construction and maintenance tasks.
5. Knowledge of FRWS (including fall protection and rescue measures) and
the ability to be Qualified on Authority's examinations for the GCOR related
to these regulations within four weeks of Limited NTP.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
6. Ability to complete work under time pressures and to maintain composure
under the stress of emergency situations.
7. Ability to perform scheduled and unscheduled repair or construction work
at any time on any day of the week.
8. Must have, or obtain within six weeks of Start Date, a valid California Class
"A" driver’s license with no more than three moving violations and no DUl’s
in any state within the last three years.
9. Must pass a pre-employment physical examination including a drug and
alcohol test.
10. Ability to work outdoors in all weather conditions, to lift objects weighing a
minimum of 50 Ibs and must have the ability to distinguish colors and to
hear warning signals and radio and telephone devices.
1.10 RAILROAD MACHINE OPERATORS
The Contractor shall provide qualified Railroad Machine Operators and the Contractor will
not be allowed to operate any equipment within the Authority Right-of-Way until the
following requirements are met:
A. Railroad Machine Operators qualifications and experience must include the
following:
1. Knowledge of railroad methods of track construction and maintenance
under traffic,
2. A Production/Switch Tamper Operator with at least two years of experience
operating the make and model of the production/switch tamper assigned to
this Contract Work. The tamper operators must fully understand the
principles and practices of lining horizontal, spiral, curves, and tangents
and vertical curves, and know how to read and utilize “cut sheets” and
“alignment sheets” provided by a survey crew.
3. At least one full-time production/switch tamper operator shall be assigned
to each tamper, with three years’ experience in railroad track construction
and/or maintenance, two years’ experience as a machine operator, and
one year of experience operating machinery in use on this Contract Work,
specifically including the following:
a. Ballast Regulator
b. Backhoe Tractor
c. Ballast Stabilizer
d. Pettibone Speed Swing
B. Railroad Machine Operators shall be qualified under SCRRA’s General Code of
Operation Rules (GCOR) and Roadway Worker Protection rules.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
C. Must have a valid California Class “CA” driver’s license with no more than three
moving violations and no DUI’s in any state within the last three years.
D. Must pass a pre-employment physical examination including a drug and alcohol
test.
E. Ability to work outdoors in all weather conditions, to lift objects weighing a minimum
of 50 lbs. and must have ability to distinguish colors and to hear warning signals
and radio and telephone devices.
1.11 TRACK FOREMAN
The Contractor shall have a Track Foreman with the following qualifications and
experience:
A. Knowledge of railroad methods of track construction and maintenance under
traffic.
B. Knowledge of FRA standards, and qualified under FRA Track Safety Standards,
Part 213.7, and SCRRA Track Maintenance, Right-of-Way and Structures
Engineering Instructions.
C. Previous qualification with a railroad to obtain track and time and working time; to
place and remove restrictions for train movement; and the ability to qualify under
all Authority requirements.
D. The ability to work safely and supervise individuals in safe work.
E. The ability to read and understand track and construction plans.
F. Five years’ railroad track experience, with a minimum two years’ track foreman
experience.
G. Track foremen shall be dedicated full time to the Project.
H. Must have a valid California Class “CA” driver’s license with no more than three
moving violations and no DUI’s in any state within the last three years.
I. Must pass a pre-employment physical examination including a drug and alcohol
test.
J. Ability to work outdoors in all weather conditions, to lift objects weighing a minimum
of 50 lbs. and must have ability to distinguish colors and to hear warning signals
and radio and telephone devices.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
1.12 RAILROAD TRACK EQUIPMENT REPAIRER
A. The Contractor shall have a Railroad Track Equipment Repairer to perform
inspection, analysis, repair and maintenance of several types of heavy equipment
including rail-mounted tamping and surfacing machines, ballast regulators,
compactors, and brooms, rail mounted all-terrain cranes, rail mounted heavy duty
trucks equipped with hydraulic cranes and log loaders, and all-terrain construction
equipment including end loaders, backhoe tractors, bulldozers, and road graders.
The Railroad Track Equipment Repairer shall lubricate working parts, change
engine and hydraulic oil and filters, clean and change air filters, tighten bolts,
inspect and adjust fluid levels, belt tension, and dimensioned measurements (e.g.
cross level of track), and perform safety inspections of equipment per FRWS using
wrenches, screwdrivers, and other small hand and power tools. The Railroad Track
Equipment Repairer shall performs heavy repair, analysis, and component
exchanges in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations using power and
hand tools, hydraulic booms and jacks, and electronic measuring and testing
devices and shall establish and implement a schedule of preventive maintenance
for equipment, order repair components and parts, and maintain an inventory of
consumable parts and supplies that minimizes the time equipment is out of service
for repairs and maintenance.
B. Railroad Track Equipment Repairer qualifications and experience must include the
following:
1. Five years experience in maintenance of heavy equipment and three years
experience in the maintenance of railroad track construction and/or
maintenance equipment including diesel engine, hydraulic system,
electronic control, surfacing tamping machine, and rail guide wheel
equipment.
2. Knowledge of safe and proper procedures for operating this equipment in
accordance with both the FRWS and the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Knowledge of FRWS and the ability to be Qualified on Authority's
examinations for the GCOR related to these regulations within two weeks
of Limited NTP.
4. Ability to complete work under time pressures and to maintain composure
under the stress of emergency situations.
5. Must have a valid California Class "A" driver’s license with no more than 3
moving violations and no DUl’s in any state within the last 3 years.
6. Must pass a pre-employment physical examination including a drug and
alcohol test.
7. Ability to work outdoors in all weather conditions, to lift objects weighing a
minimum of 50 Ibs and must have the ability to distinguish colors and to
hear warning signals and radio and telephone devices.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
8. Ability to communicate in the written and verbal English language.
1.13 RAILROAD TRACK EQUIPMENT REPAIRER HELPER
A. The Contractor shall have a Railroad Track Equipment Repairer Helper (Helper)
to work under the supervision of the Railroad Track Equipment Repairer. The
Helper may work independently or as a member of a crew as directed only for the
purpose of servicing and maintaining equipment.
B. Railroad Track Equipment Repairer Helper qualifications and experience must
include the following:
1. One to three years experience in the maintenance and repair of
construction equipment or small work equipment.
2. Knowledge of safe and proper procedures for operating this equipment in
accordance with both FRWS and the manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Knowledge of safe and efficient manipulation of equipment and tools to
assist in track, structures or right-of-way related maintenance tasks.
4. Knowledge of FTSS and FRWS and the ability to be Qualified on Authority's
examinations for the GCOR related to these regulations within two weeks
of Start Date.
5. Ability to complete work under time pressures and to maintain composure
under the stress of emergency situations.
6. Must have, or obtain within two weeks of Start Date, a valid California Class
"A" driver's license with no more than 3 moving violations and no DUls
within the last 3 years.
7. Must pass a pre-employment physical examination including a drug and
alcohol test.
8. 8, Ability to work outdoors in all weather conditions, to lift objects weighing
a minimum of 50 Ibs and must have the ability to distinguish colors and to
hear warning signals and radio and telephone devices.
9. 9. Ability to communicate in the written and verbal English language.
1.14 RAILROAD TRACK WELDERS
A. The Contractor shall provide Railroad Track Welder with the following
qualifications and experience:
1. Knowledge of railroad methods of track construction and maintenance
under traffic.
2. The ability to work safely and supervise individuals in safe work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
B. The Contractor shall provide Railroad Track Welder trained and qualified to
perform the following procedures:
1. Qualified in writing by the manufacturer of the thermite process rail welding
kits to install field welds
2. Weld cast manganese steel frogs
3. Grind, dress and trim frogs, points and stock rails
4. Weld and grind rail ends to correct mismatch
5. Perform light fabrication arc welding
6. Knowledge of FRA standards, and qualified under FRA Track Safety
Standards, Part 213.7
7. Five years’ railroad track experience with a minimum two years of track
welding experience
C. Railroad track welders shall be available as needed to the Project for the duration
of track-welding activities.
1.15 TRACK AND STRUCTURES LABORER/WELDER HELPER
The Contractor shall provide Mandatory Track and Structures Laborer/Welder Helper as
needed for the project with the following qualifications and experience:
A. Knowledge of railroad methods of track construction and maintenance under
traffic.
B. The ability to work safely at heights.
C. The ability to work safely on operating railroad right of way.
D. All Welder Helpers and 50 percent of the Track and Structures Laborers must have
a minimum of one year of general track construction or maintenance experience.
1.16 SAFETY REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Contractor shall provide a Safety Representative with minimum qualifications
as set forth in the Special Conditions, as well as knowledge of FRA standards and
qualified under FRA Track Safety Standards, Part 213, Railroad Workplace Safety,
Part 214, applicable CPUC General Orders, the General Code of Operating Rules,
SCRRA and railroad physical characteristics, SCRRA Track Maintenance, Right-
of-Way, and Structures Engineering Instructions, and Roadway Worker Protection
rules and regulations.
B. The Safety Representative must be located at the Contractor’s construction field
office and must be on the Work Site when construction activity is occurring. The
safety representative may be one of the other Authority approved positions
identified in Section 01 43 23. .
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
C. Must have a valid California Class “CA” driver’s license with no more than three
moving violations and no DUI’s in any state within the last three years.
D. Must pass a pre-employment physical examination including a drug and alcohol
test.
E. Ability to work outdoors in all weather conditions, to lift objects weighing a minimum
of 50 lbs. and must have ability to distinguish colors and to hear warning signals
and radio and telephone devices.
F. Ability to communicate in the written and verbal and Spanish language.
1.17 SIGNAL ENGINEER
A. Signal Engineer as used herein shall be understood to mean the Contractor’s
railroad signal engineer or engineers approved by the Authority.
B. Signal construction and installation personnel shall work under the Authority of the
Signal Engineer. The Contractor’s signaling construction forces shall work under
the Authority of a Signal Engineer.
1. Signal Engineer shall plan, direct, and oversee the adjustment, installation,
and testing of signal related work and shall coordinate signal work with
related track construction work and roadway work.
2. Signal Engineer shall be responsible for all work under his charge and must
have the Authority to remove any personnel from the project who are not
performing the work in a satisfactory manner. The Signal Engineer shall
obtain, review, and maintain documentation of the required minimum
experience, a copy of the Electrician’s license(s), and a record of wage rate
paid for each Signal Electrician that performs Signal or Crossing Warning
System work prior to that Electrician starting any Signal related work. This
documentation shall be available for review by the Authority at all times
upon request.
3. Signal Engineer shall be on site whenever signal related work or track
construction work is in progress in the vicinity of existing wayside signaling
equipment, highway grade crossings, and/or cabling.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
C. Signal Engineer shall direct and organize the performance of all tests on signaling
equipment and systems, prior to requesting the release of systems for service. The
Signal Engineer shall be responsible to ensure that all applicable test
documentation other than that documentation provided by the Authority, is
completed prior to, or immediately after, in-service testing is completed. The Signal
Engineer shall demonstrate experience in the philosophy, application, and testing
requirements of the various signaling systems. The Signal Engineer shall have a
minimum of 10 years signal supervisory or management related experience on a
Class I railroad, or commuter railroad comparable to SCRRA. The Signal Engineer
shall also demonstrate knowledge of the governing General Code of Operating
Rules, including CPUC and FRA regulations and procedures. This demonstration
shall be by interview of the Signal Engineer by the Authority prior to
commencement of any work that may affect the signal system. The Work of this
project includes working within tight windows on a live railroad consisting of freight
trains, inter-city passenger trains, and SCRRA commuter trains. Candidate shall
have a similar level of experience. The Authority's decision concerning the
candidate's qualifications will be final. The Contractor shall not begin any signaling
related Work prior to obtaining Authority’s approval of each Signal Engineer. The
Contractor shall obtain Authority approval of and provide additional Signal
Engineers as required depending upon the level and type of Work being
performed. Propose alternate personnel if the original candidate is found
unacceptable.
D. The Contractor shall propose alternate personnel if the original candidate is found
unacceptable. Previous qualification as a Signal Engineer on other SCRRA
projects does not constitute qualification as a Signal Engineer for this Contract.
E. The Authority reserves the right to disqualify any Signal Engineer, at any time
during the course of the Work. This right is at the sole discretion of the Authority
and is not subject to protest or appeal.
1.18 SIGNAL MANAGER
A. Signal Manager as used herein shall be understood to mean the Contractor’s
railroad signal manager or managers approved by the Authority. The Signal
Manager shall report to and work under the direct Authority of the Signal Engineer
and shall supervise and direct the work of all signal construction and installation
personnel.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
B. The Signal Manager shall demonstrate experience in the philosophy, application,
and testing requirements of the various signaling systems. The proposed Signal
Manager shall have a minimum of 3 years signal supervisory or management
related experience on a Class I railroad or commuter railroad comparable to
SCRRA. The Signal Manager shall also demonstrate knowledge of the governing
General Code of Operating Rules, including CPUC and FRA regulations and
procedures. This demonstration shall be by interview of the Signal Manager by the
Authority prior to commencement of any Work that may affect the signal system.
The Work of this project includes working within tight windows on a live railroad
consisting of freight trains, inter-city passenger trains, and SCRRA commuter
trains. Candidates shall have a similar level of experience. The Authority's decision
concerning the candidate’s qualifications will be final. The Contractor shall not
begin any signaling related Work prior to obtaining the Authority’s approval of the
Signal Manager. The Contractor shall obtain approval of and provide additional
Signal Managers as required depending upon the level and type of work being
performed.
C. The Contractor shall propose alternate personnel if the original candidate is found
unacceptable. Previous qualification as a Signal Manager on other SCRRA
projects does not constitute qualification as a Signal Manager for this Contract.
D. The Authority reserves the right to disqualify any Signal Manager at any time
during the course of the Work. This right is at the sole discretion of the Authority
and is not subject to protest or appeal.
E. Must have a valid California Class “CA” driver’s license with no more than three
moving violations and no DUI’s in any state within the last three years.
F. Must pass a pre-employment physical examination including a drug and
alcohol test.
G. Ability to work outdoors in all weather conditions, to lift objects weighing a
minimum of 50 lbs. and must have ability to distinguish colors and to hear
warning signals and radio and telephone devices.
1.19 SIGNAL ELECTRICIAN
A. Signal Electrician, as used herein, shall be understood to mean the Contractor’s
electrician(s) used to perform wiring and installation of railroad signal and grade
crossing warning system circuits, component, and control equipment and devices
including their primary and backup power supply systems.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
B. The Signal Electricians shall have a minimum 1,000 hours of experience in the
wiring and installation of railroad signal and grade crossing warning system
circuits, components, control equipment and associated devices including their
primary and backup power supply systems. Signal Electricians shall perform the
wiring, labeling and connection/continuity/resistance testing, as appropriate, of all
railroad signal and grade crossing warning system circuits, components, control
equipment and associated devices including their primary and backup power
supply systems. All Signal Electricians shall be licensed Journeyman or Inside
Electricians or equal. Signal Electricians shall be paid at the prevailing wage rate
for the locality of the construction.
C. The Contractor shall propose alternate personnel if the original candidate is found
unacceptable. Previous qualification as a Signal Electrician on other SCRRA
projects does not constitute qualification as a Signal Electrician.
D. The Authority reserves the right to disqualify any Signal Electrician at any time
during the course of the Work. This right is at the sole discretion of the Authority
and is not subject to protest or appeal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
A. Once personnel are deemed acceptable by the Authority, the Authority will make
arrangements to provide the training and testing required for personnel to be
qualified under subject areas described in Part 1 of this Specification Section.
1. The Authority will provide approximately 40-hours of various training. The
training course may cover parts of the Authority’s General Code of
Operating Rules, Maintenance of Way Operating Rules, Maintenance of
Way Safety Rules, Fire Prevention Plan, and Track Maintenance Manual.
Additional training will be determined by the Authority. The Contractor’s
managers and key personnel listed above in Subparts 1.5 through 1.7, 1.10
through 1.19 shall attend and successfully complete this course within 45
days after the Limited NTP. Successful completion shall be defined as
becoming Qualified under these subject areas.
2. The Contractor will be notified of test results in writing. The Authority will
make arrangements for retesting if personnel fail the initial test. Retesting
of the course material will be allowed one time within 55 days after the full
NTP.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
3. The Authority will provide an approximately 4-hour Roadway Worker
Protection (RWP) training course. The RWP training course will cover the
Authority’s Roadway Worker Protection rules and regulations. The
Contractor’s managers, key personnel listed above in Subparts 1.4 through
1.7, 1.10 through 1.19, and subcontractors shall attend and successfully
complete this course. All workers entering the Railroad right-of-way are
required to complete the RWP training course.
B. Substitutions. If the Contractor needs to replace any of the personnel described in
Part 1, the above procedure shall be used. This process, including proficiency
testing, shall be completed prior to the vacancy. The allowance of substitutions
does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide the personnel in
accordance with Part 1.
C. The Contractor shall provide the required personnel in accordance with Part 1. If
the Contractor fails to provide the appropriate personnel due to a substitution or if
the personnel described in Part 1 are not available within 30 days as specified in
these Contract Documents, and the Contractor has not acted in good faith to
secure replacement personnel, the Authority is entitled to implement one of the
following options, at his sole discretion:
1. Option 1: Suspend the portion of the Contractor’s operation, which was
under the direct supervision of the subject personnel, until the appropriate
personnel are provided. All costs relating to this suspension of the Work
will be the responsibility of the Contractor.
D. Option 2: Allow the Contractor’s operation to proceed and deduct $500 per day for
each operation that was under the direct supervision of the subject personnel. If
this option is used, this deduction shall be taken until the construction operation is
completed or until the appropriate personnel are provided.
E. Immediately remove from the Work, when so ordered by the Authority, and not re-
employ on any of the Work, without written permission from the Authority, any
Contractor or SubContractor employee doing unsafe, improper, and defective
Work; who, in the Authority’s judgment, refuses or neglects the direction of the
Authority given to the Contractor; who is deemed incompetent or disorderly; or who
commits any trespassing on any public or private property in the vicinity of the
Work.
3.02 RAILROAD CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Contractor shall make the railroad construction equipment available for
inspection a minimum of 30 days prior to its first use on the project, or as otherwise
agreed upon with the Authority.
B. The Contractor shall make arrangements for initial inspection of the equipment by
the Authority. The railroad construction equipment shall not be operated on the
Authority’s Operating System until the initial inspection and approval is completed.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
C. The Contractor shall inspect all railroad construction equipment daily to ensure
compliance with manufacturer instructions, FRA regulations, CPUC regulations,
and the Authority’s Operating and Safety Rules. The equipment not in compliance
shall not be used on the Authority’s Operating System.
D. The Contractor shall provide the required equipment described in Part 1 to perform
the work specified in these Contract Documents. Permission given by the Authority
to use any particular methods, equipment, or appliances shall not be so construed
to relieve the Contractor from furnishing other equipment or other appliances or
adopting other methods when those in use prove unsatisfactory or as to bind the
Authority to accept Work which does not comply with the Contract. Compliance
with determinations by the Authority shall not relieve the Contractor from other
obligations imposed by law or regulation nor serve as the basis of a Request for
Change Order to the Work. Once mobilization is paid, if the Contractor fails to
provide the appropriate equipment in accordance with Part 1, and if the Contractor
has not acted in good faith in providing and maintaining the equipment, the
Authority shall be entitled, at its own discretion, to implement one of the following
options:
1. Option 1: Suspend the Contractor’s operation until the appropriate
equipment is provided. All costs relating to this suspension of the Work will
be the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. Option 2: Allow the Contractor’s operation to proceed and deduct $500 per
day for each piece of equipment not on the job site. If this option is used,
this deduction shall be taken until the construction operation is completed
or until the appropriate equipment is provided.
3.03 RAILROAD CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall have roadway work equipment used to move other railcars or
equipment that is fully compliant with the FRA power brake, safety appliance, and
wheel requirements, and shall be fully stenciled to indicate such compliance. The
inspection and testing of the equipment, and the approval of the Contractor’s
operators, will be done by the Authority’s Manager, Rules, and Training as
scheduled by the Authority. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Authority that
the operator can make an initial brake test before moving any equipment or
railcars, and obtain approval by inspection from the Authority, that equipment
meets all safety appliance, maintenance, and clearance requirements.
B. Unless amended by the Specifications, the Contractor shall have on hand and use
the minimum equipment or approved equal listed below in performing the Work of
the Contract Documents.
1. A minimum of one Production/Switch Tamper—using models from the list
below that are no older than 10 years from manufacture date—with all
applicable attachments for construction surfacing:
a. Pandrol Jackson 6700 with Laser Liner
b. Tamper Mark IV with Laser Liner
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
c. Plasser American Roadmaster 2000 or equivalent with Laser Liner
2. One Unit Ballast Stabilizer, using a model of the Plasser PTS-62 Dynamic
Track Stabilizer or equivalent that is no older than 10 years from
manufacture date.
3. A minimum of one Ballast Regulator or equivalent from the list below, using
a model no older than 10 years from manufacture date:
a. Kershaw Model 26, or
b. Tamper Model BEB-15
4. A minimum of one dust control tanker capable of spraying water with dust
control additive in advance and during surfacing and brooming and
regulating activities. The water tank shall have a capacity of at least 3,000
gallons.
5. One Teleweld Series diesel or propane Fueled Heater Car.
6. Three High-Speed Rail Drills – Geismar PR-8.
7. Three Abrasive Rail Saws – Geismar MTX-50-S.
8. Four Portable Hydraulic Toe Tampers – Geismar Model TT-1.
9. Six Units Hydraulic Track Jacks – Simplex Model JJ1093.
10. Hydraulic Rail Puller 100 tons+.
C. The Contractor shall furnish all other on-track and off-track equipment necessary
to complete the work.
D. The Contractor shall maintain the equipment such that is operational and in proper
working order. Measures that may be necessary, include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1. Efficient scheduling and performance of required inspections,
preventative maintenance, and service
2. Promptly making any necessary repairs
3. Containing hydraulic and other spills
4. Keeping equipment owner’s manual on board at all times
E. Use of backup equipment not meeting the requirements listed above will be
permitted subject to the following conditions:
1. The Authority approves the use of the proposed backup equipment, in
advance.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 43 23 Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
2. The backup equipment is not used to perform contract work except as
needed to return the tracks to service following an unforeseen breakdown
of the required equipment. Use of backup equipment is considered a
temporary measure until such reasonable time that the main equipment is
repaired. This shall not exceed two consecutive workweeks.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 43 23
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 43 23 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 55 26
MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF ROADWAY TRAFFIC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section specifies provisions for the Contractor furnishing, erecting and maintaining
temporary barricades, changeable message signs, signs, flaggers, lights, road surfaces,
pavement markings for detours, object markers and other safeguards necessary to protect
the safety of the public during performance of the Project Work including but not limited to
automotive traffic, pedestrian traffic, and bicycle traffic.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 35 23, Site Safety Requirements
B. Section 01 56 37, Worksite Security Requirements
C. Section 01 71 13. Mobilization and Demobilization and Controls
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The Contractor shall comply with provisions of the most recent edition, including
all addenda, of the following codes, specifications, standards, and recommenced
practices, except as otherwise indicated:
1. CPUC - California Public Utilities Commission General Orders
2. CALTRANS - State of California Department of Transportation Current or
Latest Standard Specifications and Standard Plans
3. CA MUTCD - California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
4. SSPWC - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction of the
Joint Cooperative Committee
5. WATCH - Work Area Traffic Control Handbook, latest edition
6. Local Roadway Jurisdiction Requirements
1.04 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall comply with Local Agency Requirements including the preparation of
all traffic control plans for the Grade Crossing Work, any advance message signs required
by the local agencies. The Contractor shall coordinate approval for the traffic control plans
for each Grade Crossing and obtain the no-fee traffic control and encroachment permits.
The temporary warning devices shall be designed to minimize the inconvenience to the
general public and shall comply with the regulations of the California Public Utilities
Commission (CPUC) and governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 55 26 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 55 26 Maintenance and Protection of Roadway Traffic
1.05 PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish construction signs, barricades, delineators, warning
lights, CMS messages in advance of and during construction and all other devices
used to implement the plan shall comply with California Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices or WATCH Manual latest edition, and local agency permit
requirements. Providing all temporary warning devices in the incorporated areas
of the project, as necessary, to convey traffic through the Project and as required
by the permits.
B. Flashing yellow beacons shall be used on all W20-1 signs and all Type II
barricades guarding the work area overnight.
C. The Contractor shall have all signs, delineators, barricades, and other devices
properly installed prior to commencing construction. All signs shall be reflectorized
and standard size. All delineators shall be 28" minimum portable, reflectorized and
maintained erect in indicated position at all times, and shall be repaired, or cleaned
as necessary to preserve their appearance and continuity.
D. Additional traffic controls, signs, delineators or barricades may be required in the
field. The Contractor shall be responsible for the placement of any additional
devices necessary to assure safety to the public at all times during construction.
E. Post “Temporary No Parking Tow Away" signs defining the time and date of any
such restriction 72 hours prior to work.
F. A. The Contractor shall be responsible for location and protection of traffic signal
loop-sensors and signal and interconnect conduits. Where damage is caused by
the Contractor's operation, the Contractor shall replace damaged City facility at no
cost to the Authority or local jurisdiction.
1.06 DETOUR COORDINATION AND APPROVAL
Detour: In no case shall traffic be diverted from the existing traveled way without prior
approval of the Authority and appropriate municipalities and local agencies. The following
representatives of appropriate local agencies shall be notified 48 hours in advance of any
detour or construction activities:
City Civil
Engineer/Field
Inspector/Traffic
Engineer
Police Department (give location and duration)
Fire Department
Transit Buses
Detour striping will not be permitted on any finish course of asphalt concrete pavement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
All striping and marking shall conform to Section 310-5.6 of the Standard Specification for
Public Works Construction. Temporary removable striping tape (detour grade) may be
used in lieu of painted striping.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 55 26 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 55 26 Maintenance and Protection of Roadway Traffic
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. All traffic control devices shall be installed in accordance with Caltrans’ current
Standard Specifications and WATCH, Standard Plans; and CA MUTCD. In
addition to work included above, the Contractor shall furnish and install guide
markers and delineators at the locations indicated on the Contract Documents and
where directed by the Authority.
B. The Contractor shall provide for access to all adjacent properties during working
hours. Construction operations shall be conducted in such a manner as to cause
as little inconvenience as possible to abutting property owners/operators. The
Contractor shall provide access to pedestrian all times. Construction operations
shall be conducted in such a manner as to cause as little inconvenience as possible
to pedestrian. Pedestrian shall be protected as required by CA MUTCD, Part 6D-
1 or WATCH Manual Latest Edition, Section 11.
C. The Contractor shall maintain on a 24-hour basis all signs, delineators, barricades,
etc., to ensure proper flow and safety of traffic.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Traffic control work completed in accordance with the contract documents will be
paid for at the contract unit price, as listed in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and
equipment including furnishing, erecting, maintaining and removing barricades,
traffic flaggers, construction area signs, temporary railing (Type K), portable
changeable message signs, channelizers, supplies, supervision including
preparing traffic control plans and obtaining traffic control and encroachment
permits, and incidental materials and work necessary for controlling traffic during
construction as described by the Contract Documents or required by the local
jurisdiction.
B. Full Compensation for furnishing and installing construction area traffic control
devices as ordered by the Engineer, for the sole convenience and direction of
public traffic shall be considered as included in the prices and no additional
compensation will be allowed.
END OF SECTION 01 55 26
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 55 26 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 56 37
WORKSITE SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section addresses providing, operating, and maintaining security at the Work site
during construction. “Security” refers to the protection of both Authority property and the
property of the Contractor from theft, vandalism, pilfering or other destructive activities. It
is the Contractor’s sole responsibility to provide protection for any property (including
equipment and supplies) under the Contractor’s care, custody, and control.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 35 23 Site Safety Requirements
B. Section 01 71 13 Mobilization and Demobilization and Controls
1.03 REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall establish, implement, and maintain an effective, site-specific
Security and Loss Prevention Program (SLPP). The Contractor is solely
responsible for record keeping and for ensuring that Subcontractors are informed
of and comply with the SLPP.
B. The Contractor shall comply with CCR Title 8, as well as all other federal, state,
and local regulations, statutes, and codes applicable to security operations.
C. Compliance with all parts of this Section shall be considered entirely the
responsibility of the Contractor. No delays to the Contractor period of performance
relating to any Worksite Security requirements will be allowed by the Authority.
D. The SLPP shall comply with CFR 1926.800 (b) (3), which states: “The employer
shall control access to all openings to prevent unauthorized entry underground.
Unused chutes, manways, or other openings shall be tightly covered, bulkheaded,
or fenced off and shall be posted with warning signs indicating ’Keep Out’ or similar
language.” The SLPP shall include methods of protecting physical structures
above, below, or at grade from trespassers and malicious mischief.
E. The Contractor or subcontracted Security Firm(s), if utilized, shall coordinate with
local law enforcement and with the Authority Security Department for patrol
enhancement through the Authority’s representative.
F. The Contractor shall comply with the Authority requirements regarding the
protection of the public, group tours, site visitors, and office safety.
G. Prior to beginning work, Contractor shall contact local authorities to conduct a
sweep of any encampments on or near the job site that may impact the work.
Contractor shall work with local authorities to have periodic sweeps of
encampments throughout the duration of Construction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 37 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 56 37 Worksite Security Requirements
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit, for acceptance by the Authority, a written site- specific
SLPP that addresses both active and passive security measures to be
implemented by the Contractor for project-related Work sites. This SLPP will be
revised and resubmitted as conditions warrant and shall include at least the
following:
1. Lighting/illumination – The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate
lighting throughout each Work site. This includes staging, laydown areas,
and employee parking lots.
2. Office Security – All Contractor office facilities shall be secured to prevent
entry, and shall be provided with alarm systems.
3. Physicals barriers – The Contractor shall provide and install perimeter
fencing. Access areas shall be closed and locked at the end of shift or when
work is completed in the area. Temporary construction protection fencing
shall be required specific to job site activities.
4. Project warning signage – The Contractor shall provide signs such as
”Keep Out – No Trespassing.” Or safety signs for pedestrians and/or other
contractors and employees as required.
5. Encampments: SLPP shall include Contractor’s plan for controlling re-
establishment of encampments if they exist on or around the job site after
initial clearing.
B. Should conditions change, the Contractor will be required to resubmit an updated,
site-specific Security and Loss Prevention Program that reflects the changes in
conditions. Any required resubmittal shall be considered within the original scope
of this Contract, and shall be submitted in accordance with the Authority accepted
submittal schedule so as to not delay the performance of Work by the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall not perform Work on the Work site for this Contract or any
work order thereunder, until the Authority has returned the submittals marked "No
Exceptions Taken." Authority refusal to issue permission to perform Work on the
Work site, due to the Contractor's failure to submit listed safety submittals, or due
to Authority rejection of unacceptable submittals, shall not constitute a basis for
any claim of delay, interference, disruption, or other similar types of claims.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SECURITY SERVICES AND EQUIPMENT
A. Authority shall be contacted at the start of the project to determine the necessity
of a security services and equipment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 37 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 56 37 Worksite Security Requirements
B. Select, provide, and retain a reputable uniformed armed security guard service.
Security guards assigned by the security Subcontractor shall be assigned to only
Project Work sites for patrol and other security related activities.
C. Provide security guards with motor vehicles to enhance patrolling the entire Project
during construction work activities, including holidays and weekends. Personnel
assigned by the security Subcontractor shall perform only duties directly related to
the security function.
D. Security guards shall be equipped with cell phones to enhance their ability to report
incidents in a timely manner and allow direct contact with emergency
communications dispatchers.
E. Security guards shall be provided with all necessary personnel protective
equipment (PPE).
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 56 37
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 37 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 56 38
BIRD PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This work includes protecting migratory and nongame birds, their occupied nests, and
their eggs. Nesting or attempted nesting by migratory and nongame birds is anticipated to
occur but is not limited to March 15 through September 15.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 56 39, Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
B. Section 01 71 13, Mobilization and Demobilization and Controls
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The Federal Migratory Bird Treaty Act (16 USC §703-711.), 50 CFR 10, and Fish
& Game Code §3503, §3513, and §3800, protect migratory and nongame birds,
their occupied nests, and their eggs.
B. The Federal Endangered Species Act of 1973 (16 USC §1531,§1543) and
California Endangered Species Act (Fish & Game Code §2050-§2115.5) prohibit
the take of listed species and protect occupied and unoccupied nests of threatened
and endangered bird species.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PROCEDURE
A. When migratory or nongame bird nests are discovered which may be adversely
affected by construction activity, or when a bird is found injured or killed as a result
of construction activity, immediately stop work within 100 feet (500 feet for raptors)
of the nest or bird and notify the Authority. Work must not resume until the Authority
provides written notification that work may resume at that location.
B. When ordered by the Authority, use exclusion devices, nesting prevention
measures or remove and dispose of partially constructed and unoccupied nests of
migratory or nongame birds on a regular basis to prevent their occupation.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Exclusion devices, nesting prevention measures and nest removal that are ordered
by the Authority will be paid for by Change Order.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 38 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 56 38 Bird Protection
B. A delay to the controlling operation due to migratory or nongame birds or their
nests will be considered a temporary suspension of work. Adjustments will be
made for delays that the Authority determines are not due to the Contractor's failure
to perform the provision of the Contract in the same manner as for suspensions
due to unsuitable weather
END OF SECTION 01 56 38
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 38 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 56 39
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section concerns general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are
affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 32 33, Photographic Documentation
B. Section 01 71 13, Mobilization and Demobilization and Controls
C. Section 31 11 00, Site Clearing
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by the average of the smallest and largest
diameters at 6 inches above the ground for trees up to and including, 4- inch size;
and 12 inches above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch size.
B. Plant Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs,
or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and so indicated on
Drawings.
C. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be
protected during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree
with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated.
D. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification for each type of the following:
1. Organic Mulch: A 1-quart volume of organic mulch, in sealed plastic bags
labeled with the composition of materials by percentage of weight and
source of mulch.
2. Protection-Zone Fencing: Assembled samples of manufacturer's standard
size made from full-size components.
3. Protection-Zone Signage: Full-size samples of each size and text, ready
for installation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 39 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
C. Tree Pruning Schedule: A written schedule detailing the scope and extent of
pruning of trees to remain that interfere with or are affected by construction.
1. Species and size of tree
2. Location on site plan; include a unique identifier for each
3. Reason for pruning
4. Description of pruning to be performed
5. Description of maintenance following pruning
D. Qualification Data: For qualified arborist and tree service firm.
E. Certification: Certification from the arborist, certifying that trees indicated to remain
have been protected during construction according to recognized standards, and
that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged.
F. Maintenance Recommendations: Recommendations from the arborist, indicating
care and protection of trees affected by construction during and after completing
the Work.
G. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to
remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued
as damage caused by construction activities.
1. Use sufficiently detailed digital photographs or video.
2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage
conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Arborist Qualifications: Assign a Certified Arborist currently certified by ISA.
B. Tree Service Firm Qualifications: Use an experienced tree service firm that has
successfully completed temporary tree and plant protection work similar to that
required for this Project, and that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to
the Project site during execution of the Work.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct the conference at the Project site. Review
methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including,
but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel,
and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Means of enforcing requirements for protection zones.
3. The Arborist's responsibilities.
4. Field quality control measures.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 39 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material
2. Parking vehicles or equipment
3. Foot traffic
4. Installation of sheds or structures
5. Impoundment of water
6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated
7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless
otherwise indicated
B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.
C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near
protection zones and organic mulch.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Use natural or a cultivated top layer of the soil profile or manufactured
topsoil, containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable,
pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying
subsoil. Material should be reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and
other objects more than ½-inch in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and toxic
and other nonsoil materials.
B. Topsoil Source: Obtain topsoil only from well-drained sites where topsoil is 4
inches deep or more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.
C. Organic Mulch: Should be free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top
dressing for trees and shrubs, and consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Ground or shredded bark
2. Size Range: 3 inches maximum, ½-inch minimum
3. Color: Natural
D. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting one of the
requirements specified below. Previously used materials may be used when
approved by the Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 39 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
1. Wood Protection-Zone Fencing: Constructed of two 2-by-4-inch horizontal
rails, with 4-by-4-inch preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more
than 8 feet apart, and a lower rail set halfway between the top rail and
ground.
a. Height: 4 feet
b. Lumber: Compliant with requirements in the Division 06 Section
titled "Rough Carpentry."
2. Plastic Protection-Zone Fencing: Plastic construction fencing constructed
of high-density extruded and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch
maximum openings in the pattern and weighing a minimum of 0.4 lb/ft.;
remaining flexible from minus 60 F to plus 200 F; inert to most chemicals
and acids; minimum tensile yield strength of 2000 psi and ultimate tensile
strength of 2680 psi; secured with plastic bands or galvanized-steel or
stainless-steel wire ties; and supported by tubular or T-shape galvanized-
steel posts spaced not more than 8 feet apart.
a. Height: 4 feet
b. Color: High-visibility orange, nonfading
E. Gates: Single-swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing,
to allow for maintenance activities within protection zones; leaf width 36 inches.
F. Protection-Zone Signage: Shop-fabricated, rigid plastic or metal sheet with
attachment holes prepunched and reinforced; legibly printed with nonfading
lettering and as follows:
1. Size and Text: As shown on Drawings
2. Lettering: 3-inch-high minimum, using white characters on green
background
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary
erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water
redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not
enter or cross protection zones.
B. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by the arborist, listing conditions
detrimental to tree and plant protection.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be
relocated. Flag each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 39 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
B. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious
materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root
systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering
operations.
C. Tree Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree-protection zones and other areas
as indicated below Apply a 4-inch average thickness of organic mulch. Do not
place mulch within 6 inches of tree trunks.
3.03 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION ZONES
A. Protection Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection
zones before materials or equipment are brought on the site and construction
operations begin. Fencing should prevent people from easily entering the
protected area except by using the entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to
obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located
adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in proximity to street intersections, drives, or
other vehicular circulation.
1. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence
without concrete footings. Where a post is located on existing paving or
concrete to remain, provide appropriate means of post support acceptable
to the Authority.
2. Access Gates: Install a gate to provide access to the Protection Zone.
Adjust to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp,
excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption,
or malfunction, throughout its entire operational range. Confirm that latches
and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Protection Zone Signage: Install protection-zone signage in visibly prominent
locations in a manner approved by the Authority. Install one sign spaced
approximately every 20 feet on protection-zone fencing, but no fewer than four
signs with each facing a different direction.
C. Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash.
D. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be
relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by
Authority.
E. Maintain protection zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to
the Authority, and remove them when construction operations are complete and
equipment has been removed from the site.
1. Do not remove protection zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow
deliveries or equipment access through the protection zone.
2. Temporary access is permitted subject to pre-approval in writing by the
arborist if a root buffer effective against soil compaction is constructed as
directed by the arborist. Maintain the root buffer so long as access is
permitted.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 39 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
3.04 EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavate at the edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated
within protection zones according to requirements in the Specifications titled "Earth
Moving."
B. Trenching near Trees: Where utility trenches are required within protection zones,
hand-excavate under or around tree roots or tunnel under the roots by drilling,
auger boring, or pipe jacking. Do not cut main lateral tree roots or taproots; cut
only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots as required
for root pruning.
C. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral
roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them
without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to the location of new
construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches back
from new construction and as required for root pruning.
D. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide
temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and
maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage
until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil.
3.05 ROOT PRUNING
A. Prune roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune
roots as shown on Drawings and as follows:
1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with
sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do
not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
2. Cut Ends: Coat cut ends of roots more than 1½ inches in diameter with an
emulsified asphalt or other coating formulated for use on damaged plant
tissues and that is acceptable to the arborist.
3. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are
permanently redirected and covered with soil.
4. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune roots 12 inches outside of the
protection zone, by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation.
C. Root Pruning within Protection Zone: Clear and excavate by hand to the depth of
the required excavation to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine
spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to
excavation as possible.
3.06 CROWN PRUNING
A. Prune branches that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune
branches as shown on Drawings and as follows:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 39 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
1. Prune trees that are to remain to compensate for root loss caused by
damaging or cutting the root system. Provide subsequent maintenance
during the Contract period as recommended by the arborist.
2. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 (Part 1) and the
following:
a. Do not remove major branches that provide balance and shape to
tree. If required, tie up branches that are required to remain, but
extend beyond the tree protection zone.
b. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.
c. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
B. Chip removed branches and dispose of off-site.
3.07 REGRADING
A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below the existing grade
around trees, slope the grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades
within the protection zone.
B. Lowering Grade within Protection Zone: Where new finish grade is indicated below
the existing grade around trees, slope the grade away from trees as recommended
by the arborist, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed by lowering the grade. Do not cut main
lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots as required for root
pruning.
D. Raising Grade: Where the new finish grade is indicated above the existing grade
around trees, slope the grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades
within the protection zone.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspections: Engage a qualified arborist to direct plant-protection measures in the vicinity
of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain and to prepare inspection
reports.
3.09 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation that are indicated
to remain or be relocated if damaged by construction operations, and in a manner
approved by the Authority.
1. Submit details of proposed root cutting and tree and shrub repairs.
2. Have the arborist perform the root cutting, branch pruning, and damage
repair of trees and shrubs.
3. Treat damaged trunks, limbs, and roots according to the arborist's written
instructions.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 39 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
4. Perform repairs within 24 hours.
5. Replace vegetation that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth
status, as determined by the Authority.
B. Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 40
percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the end of the corrections period,
or that are so damaged during construction operations that the Authority
determines they are incapable of restoration to a normal growth pattern.
1. Provide new trees of the same size and species as those being replaced
for each tree that measures 6 inches or smaller in caliper size.
2. Provide two new trees of 6-inch caliper size for each tree being replaced
that measures more than 6 inches in caliper size. The species is to be
selected by the Authority.
3. Plant and maintain new trees as specified in the Division 32 Section titled
"Plants."
C. Soil Aeration: Where directed by Authority, aerate surface soil compacted during
construction. Aerate 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches to tree
trunk. Drill 2-inch- diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches deep at 24 inches on
center. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered soil and sand.
3.10 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash and debris, and
legally dispose of them off Authority's property.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 56 39
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 56 39 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 57 19
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
The Work specified in this Section consists of eliminating or minimizing air, water, and
noise pollution generated by construction activities, and of complying with all legal
requirements applicable to any construction generated hazardous wastes, including
preparation and implementation of waste and wastewater management plans.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 35 44, Environmental Safety and Health Program
B. Section 01 71 13, Mobilization, Demobilization and Controls
1.03 REGULATIONS
The Contractor shall comply with all pertinent regulations including the following:
A. State of California requirements relating to Air Resources Board (CARB), Code of
Regulations (CCR), Health and Safety Code (CHSC), Regional Water Quality
Control Board, and the Water Resources Control Board (SWRCB).
B. Federal Code of Federal Regulations (CFR),
C. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge
Elimination system (NPDES).
D. The Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and the California
Occupational Safety and Health Act (CAL/OSHA).
E. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall prepare and submit the following:
A. Certificates that materials provided comply with Standard Specifications for Public
Works Construction.
B. The Contractor Generated Waste Management Plan - Required within 30 calendar
days after the effective date of the Limited Notice to Proceed (LNTP) with required
documents to properly govern the Contractor Generated Hazardous Wastes in
accordance with Title 22, Division 4.5, CCR, and all other applicable laws and
regulations. The Authority or its designee will have the right to review, modify, and
approve this Waste Management Plan, and to provide quality assurance/quality
control monitoring on the Contractor's implementation of this Plan.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 57 19 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls
C. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan as required under the Clean Water Act and
related federal and state laws and regulations: Required within 30 calendar days
of effective date of LNTP. Authority or its designee will have the right to review,
modify, and approve this SWPPP, and to provide quality assurance/quality control
monitoring on the Contractor's implementation of this Plan.
1. Contractor shall be required to have a Qualified SWPPP (QSD) prepare
this plan.
2. Contractor shall implement this plan and provide a Qualified SWPPP
Practitioner (QSP) for the duration of this project. Authority will designate a
Legally Responsible Person (LRP) and will also provide a Data Submitter
for uploading information into the SMARTS system.
3. Contractor shall maintain site throughout all construction phases in a
manner compliant with required SWPPP rules and regulations.
D. Wastewater Management Plan - within 30 calendar days of the effective date of
LNTP, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Wastewater Management Plan
for the project to the Authority for review and approval prior to beginning any work
on the project site.
1. The Plan shall be prepared consistent with the provisions of the National
Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit No.
CAS000003 for Waste Discharge Requirements for Discharges of Storm
Water Runoff Associated with Construction Activity adopted by the State
Water Resources Control Board on September 2, 2012, as Order No. 2010-
0014-DWQ (CGP).
2. Submit monthly reports of daily monitoring wastewater discharges as
specified in Paragraph 3.5.B. The Contractor shall identify in the Plan the
specific Best Management Practices (BMP’s) it proposes to use in
connection with the execution of construction activity at the subject site.
The Contractor shall use the applicable BMP’s included in the Construction
BMP Handbook, a web-based Portal prepared by the California Stormwater
Quality Association (CASQA).
E. The Contractor shall prepare permit applications and obtain permits not provided
by Authority as necessary for performance of the Work under this Contract
including, but not limited to:
1. Maintenance and protection of vehicle traffic.
2. Excavation, dewatering and discharge of water and runoff into existing
drainage systems or surface waters.
3. Disposal of debris and soils.
4. Disposal of track and related material.
5. Removal of protected California Live Oak trees.
6. All other activities with potential to adversely affect the environment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 57 19 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls
7. Written permission from the property owner for right-of-entry work that
requires entering private property.
8. Submit copies of permit applications and permits to the Authority.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 AIR POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements for controlling fugitive dust
including specific impact mitigation measures contained in the latest version of
the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rules and
Regulations that include minimum procedures and techniques:
1. Cover loads of materials, debris, and soil transported from construction
sites. Trim or remove loose material from loads before leaving the Project.
Do not cause or allow emissions of fugitive dust to remain visible in
atmosphere beyond the property line of the emission source.
2. Daily or more frequently, if necessary, water down and sweep adjacent
streets, sidewalks, and bike paths that have heavy volumes of construction
vehicles carrying debris and excavated materials.
3. Establish regular cycles and locations for cleaning trucks that haul soil from
site.
4. Comply with dust control requirements identified in Section 01 71 13,
Mobilization and Demobilization and Controls and water down construction
sites as required for suppressing dust, during handling of excavation soil or
debris, or during demolition.
5. If conveyors are used, cover all transfer points along the conveyor system
that is moving soil. Minimize the drop height to the stockpile. Provide a
sprinkler system that will apply water to soil before it drops to stockpile.
6. Any adapted measures developed by SCAQMD on Best Available Control
Measures (BACM) for Fugitive Dust and Rule 403 will be incorporated into
the site operations for Fugitive Dust Control.
B. Burning of wastes is prohibited. Remove scrap and waste material and dispose of
it in accordance with laws, codes, regulations, ordinances and permits.
C. Use construction equipment designed and equipped to prevent or control air
pollution in conformance with the most restrictive regulations of the EPA, state,
and local authorities. Maintain evidence of such design and equipment and make
it available for inspection by the Authority or its designee.
D. Establish and maintain records of the routine maintenance program for internal
combustion engine powered vehicles and equipment used on the Project. Keep
records available for inspection by the Authority or its designee.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 57 19 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls
E. During excavation, gases may be released from soil and from underground
reservoirs. Gases may contain methane, other more complex hydrocarbons, or
hydrogen sulfide, and may present hazards due to flammability or toxicity. Safety
during construction is required by regulations of OSHA and CAL/OSHA. Although
the composition, quantity, and concentration of gases that might be released are
unknown, release of gases into the atmosphere may be subject to control by
SCAQMD and the California Air Resources Board (CARB). The Authority will
coordinate this issue with SCAQMD and CARB and will inform the Contractor of
further required actions.
F. In accordance with all regulations, perform a survey for asbestos containing
materials and notify regulatory agencies including SCAQMD prior to renovation or
demolition of any facility. Notify regulatory agencies prior to commencing Work on
bridges or structures. Provide a copy of all notices to the Authority.
G. Prevent or immediately remove “track-out” of material or dust onto public paved
roadways, sidewalks, and bike paths. Daily or more frequently, if necessary, water
down and sweep streets, sidewalks, and bike paths which have construction
vehicles carrying debris and excavated materials to remove deposited materials or
track out.
3.02 WATER POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. The Authority retains the sole right to determine whether discharged wastewaters
will be discharged to the sanitary or the storm drain system. The Contractor shall
treat wastewater, including storm runoff that is pumped from excavations and other
water encountered during operations; remove suspended particles, pollutants, and
hydrocarbons through settling basins or hydrocarbon separators in order to comply
with Authority direction and regulatory criteria for pollutants in water set by state
and local water agencies.
B. The Contractor shall monitor wastewater discharge to ensure it meets standards
set by appropriate laws, codes, regulations, ordinances and permits. Retain
records of measurements for inspection by the Authority or its designee. Perform
daily monitoring of wastewater discharges and record daily discharged quantities
according to NPDES permit guidelines. Submit certified monthly reports not later
than seven days after the end of the month.
C. The Contractor is responsible for preventing or mitigating potential chemical
releases, erosions and sedimentation impacts associated with storm water runoff.
D. The Contractor shall provide copies of the approved Wastewater Management
Plan to its Subcontractors and shall keep a copy available onsite at the project
office. The Contractor shall provide amendments to the Wastewater Management
Plan whenever there is a change in construction, operations, or where storm water
runoff conditions which may affect the discharge of significant quantities of
pollutants to surface waters, groundwater, or separate municipal storm sewer
systems.
E. An Authority approved Wastewater Management Plan does not relieve the
Contractor or its Subcontractors of their responsibilities to comply with other state,
county, and local governmental requirements, including those for storm water
management or non-point source runoff controls.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 57 19 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls
3.03 SOLID AND HAZARDOUS WASTE CONTROLS
This Section applies to the Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste.
A. The Contractor is responsible for, and shall indemnify, defend, and hold the
Authority harmless against any costs (including attorney's fees and costs),
demands, claims, damages, losses, delay costs ("Claims") arising from or
associated with the management, abatement, removal, remediation, clean-up,
transport, reuse, recycling, storage, and disposal of any Contractor Generated
Hazardous Waste, or associated with any noncompliance with the Contractor
Generated Waste Management Plan.
B. In the event that the Contractor or the Authority reasonably suspects that the
Contractor has generated, released, or discharged the Contractor Generated
Hazardous Waste, the Contractor is to bear all costs of sampling and monitoring
tests and other investigations to determine whether said waste is Solid Waste or
Hazardous Waste in accordance with all federal, state and local requirements,
including, without limitation, RCRA and Title 22, CCR Chapter 30, Article II (as
amended, modified, or replaced from time to time). The Authority reserves the right
(but not the obligation) to perform its own physical and chemical analyses and tests
on suspected Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste. The Contractor shall
furnish samples, at the Contractor's cost, as directed by the Authority.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the management, abatement, removal,
remediation, clean-up, transport, reuse, recycling, storage, and disposal of the
Contractor-Generated Hazardous Waste in accordance with laws, rules,
regulations, and orders, including, without limitation, Title 22, Chapter 30 et seq.,
California Code of Regulations, California Health and Safety Code Section 25100
et seq., Titles 23 and 26, California Code of Regulations, and regulations of the
waste disposal facility to be used. Haul routes for transporting solid or hazardous
wastes are subject to the approval of local jurisdictions, or other regulatory
agencies.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 57 19
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 57 19 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements relating to selection of
products, materials and equipment for the Work and their delivery, storage, and handling.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 14 16, Coordination with SCRRA
B. Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures
C. Section 01 64 00, SCRRA Furnished Material and Equipment
D. Section 01 78 36, Warranties and Guarantees
1.03 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS)
A. The Material Safety Data Sheet is prepared by manufacturers and suppliers of
products that contain hazardous materials. Hazardous material is defined as any
substance which is a physical, or health hazard, or is included in the Cal-OSHA
Director’s List of Hazardous Substances or is listed in Title 22 of the California
Code of Regulations, Section 12000, Chemicals Known to the State to Cause
Cancer or Reproductive Toxicity (Proposition 65 Substances).
B. No hazardous materials shall be delivered, stored, or used at any work site or
facility unless they are properly labeled, tagged or marked, and a copy of the
MSDS has been provided to the Authority. A copy of any updated MSDSs shall be
provided to the Authority immediately.
C. Hazardous materials shall not be stored within 25 feet of an Active Track without
written approval of the Authority.
D. The Contractor shall also maintain a file of relevant MSDSs at the work site. MSDS
files shall be kept current; new or updated MSDSs shall be added immediately,
and a copy provided to the Authority.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract
Documents, that are undamaged, and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at
time of installation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 60 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and
other items needed for a complete functional installation and indicated use
and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or
nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that
have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other
projects.
3. The Authority reserves the right to limit selection to products with
warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," the Authority
will make the selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the
Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.
6. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the
term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with
provisions in Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures to obtain approval for
use of an unnamed product.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer,
provide the named product that complies with requirements. Where
Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by
the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
2. Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with
requirements. Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements.
3. Basis of Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include
a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable
product by one of the other named manufacturers.
4. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with
provisions in Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures for consideration
of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.
5. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an
established sample, select a product that complies with requirements and
matches the Authority's sample. The Authority's decision will be final on
whether a proposed product matches.
6. If no product available within the specified category matches and complies
with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Section 01 25
00, Substitution Procedures for proposal of a product.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 60 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
2.02 LISTING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that electrical equipment, machinery
control panels and electrical components, and field installed devices and
components will meet all applicable codes and regulations of both local Authority
and the State of California, for "listing" of electrical equipment by an accredited
laboratory. Applicable provisions of all Underwriter's Laboratory standards, as
incorporated under the laws within the State of California, shall apply to the work
of this project, except as modified herein, and are hereby made a part of these
Specifications to the extent required.
B. The UL listing is acceptable; however, other certifications must be checked for
acceptance under the applicable laws and regulations of the State of California
and approved by the Authority prior to equipment purchase. Custom built control
panels and systems, wherein listing has not been established prior to manufacture,
will be accepted only if they are built under the UL self-certification labeling
procedures. Compliance with, the costs of, and any scheduling impacts associated
with the laws, codes and regulations of the state and local jurisdictions are the
responsibility of the Contractor and its suppliers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, UNLOADING, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall, at its own expense, deliver, unload, store, handle, and be
responsible for all materials, whether furnished by the Authority or by the
Contractor. All Authority furnished material, whether unloaded by the Authority or
by the Contractor, shall be moved by the Contractor, at its expense, from the point
where it is delivered by the Authority to the site of the Work.
B. Deliver, unload, store, and handle products using means and methods that will
prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. The unloading, storing, and hauling of all the
Authority’s or the Contractor's material shall be considered as incidental to
Contract pricing.
C. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the Project site, and to
prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation times to ensure minimum holding time
for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to
deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to the Project site in an undamaged condition in the
manufacturer's original, sealed container or other packaging system,
complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,
protecting, and installing.
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract
Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly
protected.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 60 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements
5. Track materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the SCRRA
Track Maintenance Manual and as per these specifications.
D. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or
counting of units. Store products with seals and labels intact and legible.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structures and
material shall not be placed nor stored within 25 feet of the centerline of
any active railroad track.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements under cover in
a weather-tight enclosure above ground, or with impervious sheeting
allowing for ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Comply with the
product manufacturer's written instructions regarding temperature,
humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
4. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area.
Prevent mixing with foreign matter.
5. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
6. Store foam plastic away from exposure to sunlight, except to the extent
necessary for a period of installation and concealment.
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
8. Building materials will be stored in a protected environment safe from sun,
rain, and excessive dust. Damaged or excessively dirty Materials will not
be permitted to be installed.
9. All electrical and mechanical equipment shall be stored to be protected
from rain, sun, wind, sand, dust, moisture, etc. The equipment shall be
stored on supports off the ground or on a concrete slab with all factory-
provided dust and moisture protection left in place until the equipment is
installed. Electrical and mechanical equipment shall be maintained in
accordance with the manufacturer’s operation and maintenance
instructions until the Contractor is relieved of the responsibility by the
Authority.
10. When permission to do so is given in writing by the Authority, the Contractor
may store materials and erect temporary buildings on Authority property,
provided such property is not required for the Authority’s use or is not under
lease to other parties.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 60 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 60 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 64 00
SCRRA FURNISHED MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
The Authority may elect to furnish without cost to the Contractor a portion of the materials
required for the Project. All materials that the Authority intends to furnish will be specified
in the Project Specific Specifications. This Section includes administrative and procedural
requirements for delivery, storage, and handling of Authority furnished products.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 11 16, Work by SCRRA
B. Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions
C. Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements
1.03 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE AUTHORITY
A. The material will be furnished at location(s) listed in the Project Specific
Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and equipment necessary to
load/unload, store, handle, and haul this material; to sort, as to type and size; and
to load any excess material at the completion of the Project. Upon notification of
the availability of material, the Contractor shall move the materials to the Project
site without delay.
B. The Contractor shall check all material upon receipt for quantity and condition, and
after acceptance shall be fully responsible for properly protecting the material from
loss or damage due to theft, fire, weather, or any other cause. For any of the
material lost or damaged beyond repair after delivery, or for any of the materials
not incorporated into the Work and not returned, the Contractor will be charged the
same amount that the original materials cost the Authority, or amounts equal to
replacement costs, whichever are higher. Any materials damaged after delivery to
the Contractor, that the Authority, at its sole discretion, deems can be repaired
satisfactorily, shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense and under the direction
of the Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 64 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 64 00 SCRRA Furnished Material and Equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ARRANGEMENTS FOR AUTHORITY FURNISHED MATERIAL
A. The Contractor shall submit with the SSWP what Authority furnished materials are
required and confirm with the Authority the location of the material. Unless
otherwise stated in the Specifications, Project Specific Specifications or Special
Conditions, all CWR and Crossties will be stored within the Project Right-of-Way
limits. The Contractor shall make arrangements to pick up and transport these
materials to the job site as needed.
B. Within ten days of the NTP, the Contractor and the Authority shall conduct a joint
inventory of the Authority furnished materials. The Contractor shall complete and
update on a weekly basis the inventory of the Authority furnished materials, based
on the use of the materials. Included in this inventory shall be information regarding
amount of material removed from each storage location and its current location. In
addition, the Contractor shall provide the Authority a log of all Authority furnished
materials installed, to include a listing of the type, size, kind, and date/location
where the material was installed, as well as a log of all Authority owned materials
released or removed from the property.
C. Authority furnished material of all types is to be protected from impact or being
driven over by vehicles or equipment, from being buried in ballast or soil, from loss
and theft, and from inefficient cutting and trimming.
D. Unused Authority furnished materials shall be returned to the Authority at the
location the material was made available to the Contractor by the Authority, or at
other locations as specified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall
legally dispose of all other unused material off-site.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this
Section.
END OF SECTION 01 64 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 64 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 71 13
MOBILIZATION, DEMOBILIZATION, AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes Worksite mobilization of personnel, equipment, supplies, and
appurtenances, all in ready and satisfactory working and operational order, which the
Contractor intends to use for the Work; for the establishment of all temporary offices and
Contractor-owned structures and other temporary facilities necessary to perform the Work;
proper safety training of project personnel; and for incidental Work and operations which
must be performed prior to beginning Work on the various Contract items. Also included
is the demobilization or removal of all personnel, equipment, supplies, appurtenances,
Contractor-owned structures, temporary facilities, materials, and debris from the Worksite
and restoration of site and surrounding properties, affected by the Contractor’s activities,
to specified conditions.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 35 23, Site Safety Requirements
B. Section 01 35 44, Environmental Safety and Health Program
C. Section 01 56 37, Worksite Security Requirements
D. Section 01 56 39, Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
E. Section 01 57 19, Temporary Environmental Controls
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking
areas for construction personnel.
B. Fire Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and
authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate the Contractor personnel responsible for
management of fire prevention program.
C. Moisture Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting
materials and construction from water absorption and damage.
1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to
water absorption or water damage.
2. Indicate procedures for discarding water damaged materials, and protocols
for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work and replacing water
damaged Work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
3. Indicate sequencing of Work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-
resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for
dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying
that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish
materials.
D. Dust Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the
dust control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time
frame for their implementation. Identify further options if proposed measures are
later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:
1. Locations of dust control at each phase of work
2. Watering duration and rewatering cycle, if watering is proposed as a dust-
control measure
3. Waste handling procedures
4. Other dust-control measures
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70 and the
requirements of jurisdictional authorities.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and
inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and
permits.
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S.
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines
and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and equipped
to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations and shall store
combustible materials apart from buildings and structures. Provide portable, UL rated; with
class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.
2.02 PROJECT SIGN
Project sign shall be as per Engineering Standard ES5201. The Project sign shall be one
32 square foot aluminum panel sign mounted on two 2¼” x 2¼” square posts embedded
in the ground. Bottom of the sign shall be 7’ above ground.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES
A. The Contractor shall maintain all utility facilities placed by the Contractor in
temporary locations and all utilities that are shored or supported by the Contractor
during construction. The cost of providing and maintaining all necessary or
required temporary structures, and of making any necessary repairs,
replacements, or similar operations, shall be paid by the Contractor; no separate
payment shall be made.
B. The Contract Price includes all costs that may be incurred by the need to remove
or relocate existing public utilities or other structures, including public utilities or
other structures identified at the time of the Bid due date. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to schedule its Work and labor and equipment to minimize the impact
of such delays and costs. Accordingly, except as provided in the California
Government Code in the case of existing main or trunkline utility facilities, the
Contractor agrees that its sole remedy resulting from any unreasonable delay or
removal or relocation of such utilities will be an adjustment in accordance with the
Change Order provisions of the Contract.
3.02 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY OR PROTECTION OF PROPERTY
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of public, private, and
Authority property adjacent to and within the Work site, and shall be responsible
for bearing the cost and performing the repair work necessary to restore or repair
damaged areas.
B. The Contractor shall supply all firefighting equipment, supplies, and personnel, and
perform all Work required by the laws and regulations pertaining to fire prevention.
C. Due care shall be exercised to avoid injury to existing improvements or facilities
on adjacent property. The Contractor shall provide and install suitable safeguards
to preserve and protect properties adjacent to the Work site from injury or damage.
If such properties are injured or damaged by reason of the Contractor’s operations,
they shall be restored at the Contractor’s sole expense. Damaged properties shall
be repaired and restored to a condition as good as when the Contractor entered
upon the Work site. The Authority may make or cause to be made such temporary
repairs as are necessary to restore to service any damaged property. The cost of
such repairs shall be borne solely by the Contractor, and the costs shall be
deducted from any payments due or to become due to the Contractor under the
Contract.
D. Place steel plates to cover trenches and excavation outside of fenced construction
areas at all times that Work is not ongoing. The steel trench plate shall be a
minimum of 1 inch thick, with anti-slip coating or treatment and having sufficient
bearing surface to support heavily loaded trucks and emergency equipment. The
steel traffic plate shall be anchored and have approach ramping against
movement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
3.03 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and a distribution system of
sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction
operations.
B. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate
illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic
conditions. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection
requirements without operating the entire system and install lighting for the Project
identification sign.
3.04 STAGING AND LAYDOWN AREAS
A. Staging and laydown areas for use in this Contract are as detailed in the Plans and
Specifications. Staging and laydown areas not covered in the Contract Documents
shall be requested in writing and approved by the Authority. This approval may or
may not be granted by the Authority. No equipment may be operated or materials
stored or placed for any period of time in unfenced areas closer than 25 feet from
live tracks unless an Authority RWIC is present. The Contractor shall provide a
fence to enclose each laydown or staging area within the right of way. The
Contractor shall furnish the Authority with photographs of all staging and laydown
areas to document their condition prior to the start of Work.
B. The Contractor shall confine Work site operations to areas permitted by law,
ordinances, permits, and the Contract.
C. The Contractor shall relocate stored products, equipment, and materials that
interfere with train operations, public and private utilities, or the visibility at railroad
crossings. Materials and equipment shall not be piled, stored, or parked when not
in use.
D. As needed for the proper execution of the Work, the Contractor shall coordinate
operations and secure additional storage/work areas from the property owners, at
no cost to the Authority. The Contractor shall adhere to the noise levels and hours
of local ordinances, except as provided and approved in the Site-Specific Work
Plan (SSWP) in accordance with Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions.
E. The Contractor shall submit the proposed location of staging areas for the
Authority’s approval. No use of proposed locations shall be allowed prior to
approval.
F. In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements indicated on Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall divide available space equitably among
Subcontractors and other entities needing access and space so as to produce the
best overall efficiency in performance of the total Work of the Project. The
Contractor shall provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.
G. The Contractor shall schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time
requirements for storage of Materials and equipment on site, with minimal
disruption to the adjoining site owners and operations. Pick-up and delivery
requiring vehicular traffic adjacent to tracks shall be performed only during normal
working hours, and as approved by the Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
3.05 ACCESS AND CONSTRUCTION ROADS
A. Access to the Work from existing public roads, private property, or along the right-
of-way of the Authority shall be arranged for and provided by the Contractor. No
payment will be made to the Contractor by the Authority for any work done in
constructing, improving, repairing or maintaining any road or structure thereon for
use in the performance of the Work. The Authority assumes no responsibility for
the condition or maintenance of any road or structure thereon that may be used by
the Contractor in performing the Work or in traveling to and from the site of the
Work.
B. Existing roads and trails shall be used whenever possible for access to the Work.
Construction of new access roads or use of existing roads shall be subject to
approval by the appropriate governmental agency, landowner, and Authority.
Temporary access roads shall be rehabilitated upon termination of the use of the
road. The roads shall be graded to conform to original topography to the degree
possible. Cut slopes shall be reduced to a grade consistent with adjacent
topography, protected from erosion, and re-vegetated.
C. The Contractor's haul or service road shall be located so that, upon the completion
of the Work, a continuous road, where possible, will remain on the right-of-way
throughout the entire length of the project. The Authority will designate the location
of the road.
D. Where it is necessary to place a portion of the haul or service road or occupy an
area off of the Authority's right-of-way, the Contractor shall obtain written release
from owner and tenant for the land involved. At the completion of the project, the
area used by the Contractor shall be returned to a condition satisfactory to the
landowner and duly constituted environmental agencies.
E. At locations where the right-of-way crosses existing roads, highways, or at other
locations where the Contractor’s equipment will cross-existing roads or highways,
the Contractor shall obtain the necessary approval and permits from the proper
agencies for such crossings and detours as may be required. The Contractor shall
maintain such crossings and detours in safe condition for passage of traffic; shall
provide flag persons and watchmen as required; and shall furnish and maintain
temporary drainage structures, guard fences, lights, warning signs, and other
facilities necessary to protect traffic. Public access to the Contractor’s road shall
be controlled by cable barrier or gate that is locked with a series of padlocks
including Authority and the Contractor locks. Such gates or barriers are to be
maintained in a closed configuration except when in use. This Work shall be
considered, as incidental to other items of the Contract, and no direct payment will
be made for any costs involved.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
F. The Contractor may, upon approval of the Authority, construct temporary private
railroad crossings for the purpose of performing the Work required. An Authority
RWIC shall be provided at all such crossings at all times during construction. A
physical barrier shall be provided to protect the crossing when not in use for
construction. Access across the crossing may be limited by the presence of trains
on the live track, as described in Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions. Temporary
crossings shall be removed upon completion of the Work. The Contractor shall
submit plans for the Authority’s approval. Any requirement for at- grade railroad
crossings (other than public at-grade railroad crossings) or use of the Right of Way
for the Contractor's equipment, vehicles, or materials shall be as approved by the
Authority.
G. All costs associated with the construction, maintenance, and removal of the haul
or service road, and restoration of any area off the Authority's right-of-way will be
considered, as incidental to other items of the Contract and no additional payment
for any of this Work will be made.
H. The Contractor shall provide dust-control treatment that is non-polluting and non-
tracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.
I. Upon completion of the Project, restore access and staging areas to a condition
that is equal to or better than that prior to the Contractor entry, and as accepted by
the Authority. All residual Materials shall be removed and all areas used shall be
bladed smooth upon completion of use. Drainage in all areas affected by the
Project shall be restored to a condition that ensures that no water ponds on the
Right of Way, and no water is diverted to drain to the track structure. The
Contractor shall photograph the project site(s) and submit the photographs to the
Authority to demonstrate that staging and access areas have been restored to the
pre-construction condition.
J. Fences, walls, signs, and gates affected by the Contractor’s access to the Right of
Way shall be restored to full serviceability prior to demobilization.
K. Maintain traffic controls, access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire
hydrants. Protect existing site improvements that are to remain, including curbs,
pavement, and utilities.
3.06 LIMITATION ON THE USE OF HEAVY EQUIPMENT
A. If the Contractor anticipates using any vehicles or equipment over 20,000 pounds
(loaded) during the performance of the Work, dimensions and weights of such
equipment shall be submitted to the Authority for approval prior to use.
B. Unless expressly permitted elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall not operate construction equipment or vehicles of any kind which, laden or
unladen, exceed the maximum weight limits set forth in Division 15 of the California
Vehicle Code over completed or existing base, surfacing, pavement, or structures.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
3.07 HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS, WASTES AND MATERIALS
A. Hazardous chemicals, wastes, and materials are defined as any product,
substance, chemical, or material whose nature, quantity or intensity of existence,
use, manufacture, disposal, transportation, spill, release, or effect, either by itself
or in combination with other chemicals or materials in, on, or about the Work site:
1. is or becomes potentially injurious to the public health, safety or welfare,
environment, or the Project site;
2. is or becomes regulated or monitored by any governmental Authority; or
3. may, according to statutory or common law theory, such as nuisance
(public or private), waste, trespass, negligence, strict liability, or tort, be a
basis for liability in tort, or be a basis for liability to third parties.
B. The Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 (Proposition 65)
prohibits employers from knowingly discharging or releasing a chemical or other
material known to the State of California to cause concern, birth defects, or other
reproductive harm into water or onto land where such chemical passes or probably
will pass into any source of drinking water. Notwithstanding any provisions in this
Act exempting the Contractor, the Contractor hereby agrees to comply with all
provisions of the Act relating to the discharge of hazardous chemicals and
materials on the Work site.
C. The Contractor’s employees and Subcontractors of any tier shall not discharge
such chemicals or materials on the Work site that will result in the discharge of
such chemicals, and shall, upon completion of performance of all other duties
under this Contract, remove all supplies, materials, and waste remaining on the
job site which if exposed, could result in the discharge of such chemicals,
materials, and wastes.
D. The Contractor, the Contractor’s employees, and Subcontractors of any tier shall
also comply with the State of California anti-smoking laws that, in part, prohibit
smoking in the workplace and in enclosed areas.
E. Should the Contractor, the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors of any tier, or
their employees fail to comply within 24 hours from receipt of written notice of
noncompliance from the Authority, or other Authority of competent jurisdiction, or
within the time of an abatement period specified by such Authority of competent
jurisdiction, whichever period is shorter, the Authority may give notice of default to
the Contractor. Failure of the Authority, or other Authority of competent jurisdiction
to issue notice to the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of its
responsibilities under this Section.
3.08 PESTICIDES, FUEL OIL, AND GREASE
A. The Contractor shall comply with all local, state, and federal rules and regulations
of the Department of Food and Agriculture, the Department of Health, the
Department of Industrial Relations, the Department of Toxic Substance Control,
and all other agencies that govern the use of pesticides, fuel oil, and grease
required in the performance of the Work. Fuel, oil, and grease include any crude
oil or any products, byproducts, or fractions thereof.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
B. Pesticides include but shall not be limited to herbicides, insecticides, fungicides,
rodenticides, germicides, nematocides, bactericides, inhibitors, fumigants,
defoliants, desiccants, soil sterilants, and repellents.
C. Any substance or mixture of substances intended for preventing, repelling,
mitigating, or destroying weeds, insects, diseases, rodents, or nematodes, and
any substance or mixture of substances intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant, shall be considered as a pesticide.
3.09 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS OUTSIDE THE WORK SITE
A. Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall make its own arrangements for disposing of materials outside the Work site.
The Contractor shall obtain written permission or permit from the property owner
on whose property the disposal is to be made. Prior to the disposal of any material
at the intended location, the Contractor shall submit said written permission or
permit to the Authority for approval, together with a written release from the
property owner absolving the Authority from any and all responsibility related to the
disposal of material on said property.
B. Disposal of all Hazardous Materials shall be done in accordance with all laws and
regulations. Copies of a required regulatory documentation, including copies of
final manifests, shall be submitted to the Authority. No payment will be made for
such work without proper and complete manifests.
3.10 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install a
site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily
entering the site except by entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose the entire Project site or that portion
determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting the number of keys and restricting distribution
to authorized personnel. Furnish one set of keys to the Authority.
B. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosures around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent
unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock
entrances at the end of each work day.
C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning
signs and lighting.
D. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as
indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
E. Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkways where identified on the
Plans or directed by the Authority for passage of individuals through or immediately
adjacent to the Project site. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and
obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and
requirements indicated on Drawings.
1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing.
2. Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails,
barricades, warning signs, exit signs, lights, safe and well-drained
walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage.
3. Paint and maintain appearance of walkway for duration of the Work.
F. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities
of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire
losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage the fire-prevention program.
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units,
and similar sources of fire ignition according to Contract requirements.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire prevention and fire protection
program for personnel at the Project site. Review needs with the local fire
department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in
methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses
with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only
and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip them
with suitable nozzles.
5. Review and update Fire Risk Assessment form for Work.
3.11 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE
A. The Contractor shall conduct its operations so as to offer the least possible
obstruction and inconvenience to the public and shall have under construction no
greater length or amount of work than can be prosecuted properly with due regard
to the rights of the public. The Contractor shall control temporary noise from
construction equipment by using work hour controls and maintenance of muffler
systems on machinery.
B. Construction shall be conducted so as to cause as little inconvenience as possible
to abutting property owners. Convenient access to driveways, houses and
buildings along the line of Work shall be maintained and temporary approaches to
crossing or intersecting highways shall be provided and kept in good condition.
When the abutting owner's access is to be eliminated and replaced by other
access, the existing access shall not be closed until the replacement access facility
is available.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
C. The Contractor, at its expense, shall provide adequate safeguards, safety devices
and protective equipment and take any other needed action both of its own volition
and responsibility or that which the Authority may determine is reasonably
necessary to protect property, life, health and public safety in connection with the
performance of the Work covered by the Contract.
D. The Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to maintain good will among
landowners, tenants, lessees, and members of the general public and shall not
knowingly violate any right of such persons in the performance of the Work
covered by the Contract. To this end, the Contractor specifically agrees to not:
1. Leave gates, gaps, or fences open, unattended or insecurely fastened.
2. Use private driveways or roadways without authority.
3. Use land beyond limits of the right-of-way without authority
4. Leave trash or debris on the land.
5. Permit the personal misconduct of its employees or any of its
Subcontractor’s employees.
E. In the event the Contractor's operations cause injury to any persons or damage to
public or private property, including above and below ground structures, the
Contractor shall immediately contact emergency services for the local Authority
and within twenty-four (24) hours, give notification in writing to the Authority of such
damage or injury. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for all damages
and injuries.
F. Unless otherwise noted, all construction operations shall preserve existing
drainage paths and vehicular and pedestrian access. The Contractor shall also
regularly attend to dust, mud, trash, noise, debris, etc., caused by construction
operations to prevent a public nuisance.
G. All paved areas, including asphalt concrete berms cut or damaged as a result of
construction, shall be replaced with similar materials of equal thickness to match
the existing adjacent undisturbed areas, except where specific resurfacing
requirements have been called for in the Contract Documents or in the
requirements of the agency issuing the permit. All temporary and permanent
pavements shall conform to the requirements of the affected pavement owner. All
pavement that is subject to partial removal shall be neatly saw-cut in straight lines.
H. In order to obtain a satisfactory junction with adjacent surfaces, the Contractor shall
saw-cut back and trim the edge of the surface so as to provide a clean, sound,
vertical joint before temporary or permanent replacement of an excavated or
damaged portion of pavement. Damaged edges of pavement along excavations
and elsewhere shall be trimmed back by saw-cutting in straight lines. All pavement
restoration and other facilities restoration shall be constructed to finish grades
compatible with adjacent undisturbed pavement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
I. Where sidewalks or bike lanes have been removed for purposes of construction,
or damaged, the Contractor shall place properly protected, suitable temporary
sidewalks including bike lanes, promptly after backfilling, and shall maintain them
in satisfactory condition until the final restoration thereof has been made.
3.12 DISRUPTION MITIGATION
A. The Authority, the Authority’s Contractors and other railroads will occupy the Work
site during the entire construction period for the conduct of the Authority’s and the
railroad’s normal operations. The Contactor shall cooperate with the Authority and
the railroads, through the Authority, in scheduling operations to minimize conflicts
so as to not interfere or impair the normal operation of the Authority or other
railroads.
B. The Contractor shall develop and submit for the Authority’s approval a Disruption
Mitigation Plan that identifies and establishes criteria for the performance of the
Work that requires coordination and sequencing based on the operational
requirements of the Authority and the other railroads, and to allow the free flow of
public traffic within the public rights-of-way. The Contractor shall incorporate
operational data and information and requirements given by the Authority, other
railroads, and local municipal transportation agencies in developing the Disruption
Mitigation Plan, and in planning and scheduling its work to prevent interruption or
impairment of the normal operations of the Authority, the other railroads, and public
traffic. The Contractor shall avoid disruptions to the normal operations of the
Authority, other railroads, and public traffic, and shall plan, schedule, coordinate
and construct the Work in such a way as to accommodate the normal operations
of the Authority, other railroads, and public traffic.
C. Upon the completion of each day’s Work, the Contractor shall make the railroad
tracks and facilities suitable for the passage of trains. The operation of trains over
portions of the Work not completed will be in accordance with the FRA
requirements. The operation of trains over such Work will not constitute Beneficial
Occupancy.
3.13 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security
and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
B. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its
service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent
facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore
permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with
a temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace
construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property
of the Contractor. The Authority reserves the right to take possession of
Project identification signs.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 13 Mobilization, Demobilization, and Controls
2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable
for integration into permanent construction. Where an area is intended for
landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply
with the requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated
with road oil, asphalt, other petrochemical compounds, and other
substances that might impair the growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair
or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. The measurement and payment for mobilization, maintenance, utilization, and
demobilization of required facilities, personnel, materials and equipment under this
Section shall be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the
basis for this measurement. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals
necessary for the Work of this Section.
B. The Contract Price(s) will be paid as follows:
1. When 10 percent of the Awarded Contract Price(s) is earned, excluding
mobilization and amount paid for materials on hand, 40 percent of the
amount bid for mobilization and demobilization will be paid.
2. When 75 percent of the Awarded Contract Price(s) is earned, excluding
mobilization and amount paid for materials on hand, 60 percent of the
amount bid for mobilization and demobilization will be paid.
3. 100 percent of the amount bid for mobilization and demobilization will be
paid after the Authority has determined that the project work is complete in
accordance with the Contract and technical specifications, and the
Contractor has left the wok site in a clean and acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION 01 71 13
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 13 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 71 23
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for field
engineering and surveying for the Work including, establishing and maintaining baselines,
design lines, grades and field control points as required for construction layout survey.
The Work of this Section also includes field survey of existing track and track grade to
verify final layout, point of switch stations, alignment, and grade for new turnouts and
bridges and other structures.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 77 19, Project Closeout
B. Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for the Authority’s approval the name and professional history of the land
surveying firm designated by the Contractor as its Project Surveyor. The Project
Surveyor or professional engineer selected must be a current California State
licensed land surveyor and have a minimum of five years of verifiable experience
performing field surveys of railroad, track, and bridge alignments and related office
engineering.
B. On request, the Contractor shall submit to the Authority all documentation that
verifies the accuracy of the survey work.
C. Certificates and Site Drawings: Prior to Completion and when requested by the
Authority, submit a certificate and site drawing signed by, a Land Surveyor, or
Professional Engineer, certifying that the location and elevation of improvements
are in conformance with Contract Documents.
D. The Contractor shall submit a complete copy of the baseline survey field notes and
final survey layout. The layout will include data and offset calculations.
1.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey
work as it progresses.
B. The Authority reserves the right to check the Contractor's survey measurements
and calculations. Whether the Authority exercises this right or not, the requirement
for accuracy will not be waived.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 23 Field Engineering
C. On completion of construction and major site improvements, the Contractor shall
prepare a final certified survey illustrating dimensions, locations, angles, and
elevations of the construction and the Work site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
The Contractor shall verify locations of survey control points prior to starting any Work on
the Project site. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Authority of any discrepancies
discovered.
3.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
A. The Contractor shall locate and protect survey controls, existing benchmarks,
control points, survey monuments, property corners and reference points and
preserve permanent reference points during construction.
B. The Contractor shall report to the Authority the loss or destruction of any reference
points or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.
C. The Contractor shall replace dislocated survey control points based on the original
survey control, and shall make no changes without prior written notice to and
approval by the Authority.
D. The Contractor shall report to the Authority the need to relocate permanent
benchmarks or control points before proceeding.
3.03 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Identification: The Authority will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and
property corners. Control datum for the survey is indicated on the Drawings.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks
per mile on the Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points.
Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for the type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project
Record Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked,
provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore
marked construction to its original condition.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 23 Field Engineering
3.04 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Before proceeding to lay out the Work, the Contractor shall verify layout
information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing
benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, the Contractor shall notify the
Authority promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work
using accepted surveying practices in accordance with the following:
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each
phase of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of
the Project. Establish limits on use of the Project site.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to
obtain required dimensions.
3. Inform Contractor of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, line and grade of every major element as the Work
progresses. Notify the Authority when deviations from required lines or
grades exceed allowable tolerances. Such notification shall include a
thorough explanation of the problem, and a proposed plan and schedule
for remedying the deviation. Remedial work shall not proceed without the
Authority’s concurrence of the remediation plan. Work progressed after a
deviation is noted shall be removed and redone at no cost to the Authority.
5. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard
established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including top of rail,
special track work, crossing panels, pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement,
utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,
building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for
mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use
with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more
locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record any deviations from
required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of
surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and
types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by the
Authority.
F. The contractor shall stake out location of the railroad warning devices and provide
horizontal and vertical control survey sheet prepared by a registered surveyor and
tied to the project survey control for grade crossings. This service is necessary to
coordinate street geometry and curb return layouts with railroad signal contractor.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 71 23 Field Engineering
3.05 SURVEYS AND RECORDS
A. Working from lines and grades established by baseline surveys as shown in
relation to the Work, the Contractor shall establish and maintain benchmarks and
other dependable markers to set lines and levels for Work on site as needed to
locate each element of the Project.
B. The Contractor shall calculate and measure required dimensions as shown on the
Contract Drawings (within recognized tolerances if not otherwise indicated and
immediately notify the Authority of any discrepancies. The Contractor shall use
written rather than scaled dimensions.
C. Where both dimensions relative to track and absolute dimensions (e.g.
coordinates, elevations) are given, the dimensions relative to the track shall govern
unless otherwise directed by the Authority.
D. The Contractor shall inform tradesmen performing the Work of marked lines and
grades provided for their use in layout work.
E. The Contractor shall provide a complete copy of baseline survey field notes and
final layout to the Authority prior to starting construction.
F. In areas scheduled for excavation or embankment, the Contractor shall be
responsible for a baseline cross-section survey suitable to document or verify
actual topography prior to the start of Work. No adjustments will be made to
earthwork quantities by means other than a sealed by licensed surveyor before-
and-after survey, suitable to calculate volume based on average end areas,
measured in either cut or fill areas. Load counts, truck weights, work duration,
representative area deviations from bid schedule quantities, or other means of
estimating earthwork volume will not be accepted, except for use in determining
progress payments.
G. The basis for dimensioning railroad track is the centerline between the rails and
elevation of the top surface of the rail unless noted otherwise in the plans or the
Specifications or by the Authority. On curved track with super-elevation, the
elevation specified is that of the low rail (inside of curve) unless noted otherwise in
the plans or the Specifications or by the Authority.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 71 23
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 71 23 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for salvaging
nonhazardous demolition and construction waste, recycling nonhazardous demolition
waste and disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 57 19, Temporary Environmental Controls
B. Section 31 11 50, Demolition, Cutting and Patching, for disposition of waste
resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid
waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations.
Construction waste includes packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from
demolition or selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent
sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing
in preparation for reuse.
E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or
reuse in another facility.
F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials to achieve maximum rates for
salvage/recycling by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated. Practice
efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use
all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and
incinerators.
B. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or
recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials,
including paper, cardboard, plastic, polystyrene packaging and wood crates.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 74 19 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 14 days of the Limited Notice to Proceed, submit a Waste Management
Plan according to ASTM E 1609, the requirements of the jurisdiction having
Authority, and requirements in this Section. Distinguish between demolition and
construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use the same units
of measure throughout the waste management plan. List each type of waste and
whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in a landfill or incinerator.
Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity
for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.
B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Submit a report concurrent with each
Application for Payment. The report shall cover the period of the application for
payment. Include the following information:
1. Material category
2. Generation point of waste
3. Total quantity of waste, in tons
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual, in tons
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual, in tons
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled), in tons
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage
of total waste
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as
required to implement the waste management plan during the entire duration of
the Contract.
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities. Designate specific areas on the Project site
necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused,
donated, and sold.
3.02 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other
incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to the Contractor.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 74 19 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal
C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according
to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt,
adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious
to the recycling process.
D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and
debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at the Project site to the maximum
extent practical, according to the approved construction waste management plan.
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable
waste until removed from the Project site. Include a list of acceptable and
unacceptable materials at each container and bin.
2. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated
materials (if found).
3. Stockpile processed materials on site without intermixing with other
materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.
Cover to prevent windblown dust.
4. Stockpile materials away from the construction area. Do not store within
the drip line of remaining trees.
5. Store components off the ground, and protect them from the weather.
6. Remove recyclable waste from Authority property and transport to a
recycling receiver or processor.
3.03 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise
reused, remove waste materials from the Project site and legally dispose of them
in a landfill or in another manner acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be
disposed of to accumulate on site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on
adjacent surfaces and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from the Authority’s property and legally
dispose of them.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 74 19
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 74 19 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 77 00
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section addresses administrative and procedural requirements for Substantial
Completion and beneficial occupancy.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 32 33, Photographic Documentation
B. Section 01 77 19, Project Closeout
C. Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data
D. Section 01 78 36, Warranties and Guarantees
E. Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents
1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit the following a minimum of 14 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining the date of Substantial Completion.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having
jurisdiction granting the Authority unrestricted use of the Work and access
to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates,
and similar releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Specifications Sections,
including Project record documents, all QC Material testing and special
inspection results, Final As-Built Schedule, operation and maintenance
manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation,
damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record
information, warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service
agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.
3. Prepare and submit a schedule of maintenance material submittal items,
including the name and quantity of each item and the name and number of
the related Specification Section that identifies tools, spare parts, extra
materials, and similar items, to be delivered to the location designated by
the Authority.
4. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
5. Submit changeover information related to the Authority’s occupancy, use,
operation, and maintenance.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 77 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 77 00 Substantial Completion
1.04 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor shall complete the following prior to requesting Substantial
Completion;
1. Provide a Final As-Built Schedule that is approved by the Authority.
2. Advise the Authority of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Make the final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to the
Authority. Advise the Authority of the changeover in security provisions.
4. Complete the start-up and testing of systems and equipment.
5. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial
Completion.
6. Instruct the Authority’s personnel in the operation, adjustment, and
maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.
7. Advise the Authority of the changeover in utilities.
8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from the Project site, along with
mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including areas adjacent to the
project site such as streets, curbs, gutters, swales and other drainage
facilities. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed
finishes to eliminate visual defects.
10. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to the location
designated by the Authority. Label with manufacturer's name and model
number where applicable.
B. The Contractor shall submit a written request for inspection to determine
Substantial Completion a minimum of 14 days prior to the date the work will be
completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of such request, the
Authority will either proceed with the inspection or notify the Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. The Authority will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion and a Final Punchlist for Final Completion after inspection, or will notify
the Contractor of outstanding items that must be completed or corrected before
the certificate will be issued.
C. The date of Substantial completion of the Work as allowed by the Contract
Documents, is the date certified by the Authority when work is sufficiently
complete, in accordance with Part A above and the Contract Documents, so the
Authority may occupy or use the Work, or a designated part or portion thereof, for
the use for which it is intended.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 77 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 77 00 Substantial Completion
1.05 BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY
A. Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions identifies requirements relating to Worksite
access by the Contractor, Authority, and other third parties. In addition to those
requirements, the Authority shall have the right to take Beneficial Occupancy of
any portion of the Work. The Authority may at any time notify the Contractor in
writing that it intends to take Beneficial Occupancy of any portion of the Work that
is not otherwise complete. At the time of taking Beneficial Occupancy, the
Contractor and the Authority shall make an inspection of that portion of the Work
to determine its status of completion and shall prepare a list of the Work items
remaining to be completed. During Beneficial Occupancy, the Authority shall allow
the Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct items on the list and to
complete the Work, but they shall have no tenancy. However, a failure of the
Authority to list any item of Work shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility
for complying with the terms of the Contract. The Authority’s possession or use
shall not be deemed an acceptance of any Work under the Contract.
B. Beneficial Occupancy shall not be deemed an acceptance of the Work. While the
Authority is in such possession, the Contractor shall be relieved of the
responsibility for maintenance, loss, or damage to that portion of the Work for
which the Authority has taken Beneficial Occupancy other than that resulting from
the Contractor's act or omission, negligence willful misconduct, or breach of
warranty. If such possession or use by the Authority unreasonably delays progress
of the Work or causes additional expense to the Contractor, an adjustment may be
made in the compensation or time to perform the Work, in accordance with
Contract Change Order Procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in
Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data and individual Specification Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations
to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and
antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning Procedures: Complete the following cleaning operations before
requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for the entire
Project, or for a designated portion of the Project:
1. Clean the Project site, yard, and grounds in areas disturbed by construction
activities—including landscape development areas—of rubbish, waste
material, litter, and other foreign substances.
2. Sweep paved areas broom-clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains,
and other foreign deposits.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 77 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 77 00 Substantial Completion
3. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-
textured surface.
4. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material
from the Project site.
5. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid
disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective
surfaces to their original condition.
6. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces, including
roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and
similar spaces.
7. Sweep concrete floors broom-clean in unoccupied spaces.
8. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
clean according to the manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or
stains remain.
9. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-
obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch
surfaces.
10. Remove labels that are not permanent.
11. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment,
and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar
droppings, and other foreign substances.
12. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including
stains resulting from water exposure.
13. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean
exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
14. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction, or if they display contamination with particulate matter on
inspection.
15. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full
efficiency.
3.02 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for
determination of Substantial Completion.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 77 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 77 00 Substantial Completion
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing
defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching
materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn
items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace
operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and
permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces,
and other damaged transparent materials.
D. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and
surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair
or restoration.
E. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels
and identification.
F. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
G. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective
and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with
requirements for new fixtures.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 77 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 77 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 77 19
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section specifies procedures and requirements for Contract close out, including but
not limited to final submittals, final acceptance, all required financial and legal
documentation, and release of final payment to the Contractor at completion of the
Contract Work.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 77 00, Substantial Completion
B. Section 01 78 36, Warranties and Guarantees
C. Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents
1.03 FINAL COMPLETION SUBMITTALS
Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final completion, the Contractor
shall submit the following:
A. Summary:
1. Request Substantial Completion per Section 01 77 00.
2. Provide final contract status report.
3. Submit final contract cost and schedule summary.
B. Closeout:
1. Submit Certificate of Final Acceptance for Authority approval.
2. Submit Notice of Final Completion.
3. Submit Authority confirmation indicating that all inspections are complete.
4. Submit Request for Final Acceptance.
5. Submit Final Release.
6. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance
coverage complying with Contract insurance requirements.
C. Compliance:
1. Consent of the surety to final payment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 77 19 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 77 19 Project Closeout
2. Provide all required Contract Compliance documents.
3. Provide all required Labor Compliance documents in accordance with
General Conditions.
D. Financial:
1. Submit Request for Release of Retention / the Contractor Final Release.
2. Submit Release of Retention Invoice.
3. Final liquidated damages settlement statement, if applicable.
4. Application for Final Payment shall include the following documentation:
a. Lien Releases from all Subcontractors and vendors that have filed
preliminary notice of liens.
b. Certificate – “All Claims Resolved”
c. Certificate – “No Claims for all Subcontractors and vendors that
have filed preliminary notice of liens”.
d. Certificate – “Warranties/Guarantees in Effect”
E. Construction:
1. Submit final quantities log.
2. Address and provide Authority documentation of completion of Punchlist
items.
3. Provide documentation of permit sign-off by third party agencies, as
required and provide Certificates of Release from jurisdictional authorities.
4. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and
similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion (or when the Authority
took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements
of Work), if applicable.
5. Provide final report for Material testing and special inspections.
6. As-Built Drawings.
7. As-Built Schedule.
8. Provide Warranties and Guarantees.
9. Maintenance and Operations Manuals
10. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage if specified in Contract
Documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 77 19 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 77 19 Project Closeout
11. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items for maintenance material
submittal items specified in other Sections.
1.04 ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK AND CLOSEOUT
A. When the Contractor determines that the Work is fully completed, the Contractor
shall submit the Authority a written Request for Acceptance of Work. Within 30
Days after receipt of the Contractor’s Request for Acceptance of Work, the
Authority shall review all requirements of the Work and either:
1. Reject the Contractor’s Request for Acceptance of Work, specifying
defective or uncompleted Work items
2. Accept the Work as complete by issuing to the Contractor a Certificate of
Final Acceptance and approving the final payment.
B. If the Authority rejects the Contractor’s Request for Acceptance of Work, the
Contractor shall promptly remedy the defective or uncompleted Work items.
Thereafter, the Contractor shall again give Authority a written Request for
Acceptance of Work. The foregoing procedure shall apply successively thereafter
until Authority has issued the Contractor a Certificate of Final Acceptance.
C. Authority reserves the right to direct any and all Punch List work prior to completion
of Work or Final Acceptance. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract
that could be interpreted to the contrary (including in Contract Documents of higher
precedence), it shall be the Contractor’s continuing responsibility to complete and
deliver every portion, and the integrated whole, of the Work in accordance with all
of the requirements of the Contract. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial
Completion by Authority shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor of this
responsibility, or any part thereof. If, after the issuance of a Certificate of
Substantial Completion, the Authority discovers any deficiency, or item not
completed or otherwise requiring correction or remedial action, whether or not the
item appears on any Punchlist or other list of clean up items, Authority may direct
the work to be performed and the Contractor shall correct the deficiency, complete
the item or otherwise remedy the condition to bring it into full compliance with the
Contract prior to Final Completion and Authority’s acceptance of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 77 19
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 77 19 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation
and maintenance manuals, including the following:
A. Operation and maintenance documentation directory
B. Emergency manuals
C. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment
D. Product maintenance manuals
E. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 79 00, Demonstration and Training
C. Section 01 91 13, General Commissioning Requirements
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by
regular interaction
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in
individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals.
Submit reviewed manual content, formatted and organized as required by this
Section.
1. The Authority will approve the contents of operations and maintenance
submittals.
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to
correspond to revisions and field conditions.
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
1. PDF electronic file: Assemble each manual into a composite electronically
indexed file, with functional bookmarks.
2. Name each indexed document file in the composite electronic index with
the applicable item name. Include a complete, electronically linked
3. Operation and maintenance directory. Enable inserted reviewer comments
on draft submittals.
C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit a draft copy for Authority approval of each manual
at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. The Authority will
comment on whether the general scope and content of the manual are acceptable.
D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting
inspection for Substantial Completion, and at least 21 days before commencing
demonstrations and training. The Authority will provide comments for revisions as
needed.
E. Correct or revise each manual to comply with the Authority's comments. Submit
copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of the Authority's
comments, and prior to commencing demonstration and training.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
In preparation of operation and maintenance data, use personnel thoroughly trained and
experienced in the operation and maintenance of the equipment or systems involved.
Where manuals require written instructions, provide technical writing that clearly
communicates essential data. Where maintenance manuals require drawings or
diagrams, prepare drawings clearly, in an understandable format. Where operation and
maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one
factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished
by those representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and
maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready
access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the
following:
1. List of documents
2. List of systems
3. List of equipment
4. Table of contents
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references
to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each
system.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by
system. For pieces of equipment that are not part of a system, list alphabetically in
a separate list.
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation,
and maintenance manual.
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and
maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
with the same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation
exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of
Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
2.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FORMAT REQUIREMENTS
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate
section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of
equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials,
in the order listed:
1. Title page
2. Table of contents
3. Manual contents
B. Title Page: Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual
2. Name and address of the Project
3. Name and address of the Authority
4. Date of submittal
5. Name and contact information for the Contractor
6. Name and contact information for the Authority
7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Engineer that
designed the systems contained in the manuals
8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance
manuals
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in the manual, identified by product
name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to the
Specification Section number in the Project manual.
D. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include a comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in
each volume of the set.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents
alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble
instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a
single binder.
F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple-file composite
electronic PDF file for each manual type required.
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by the manufacturer where
available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure the
scanned file for minimum readable file size.
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents
based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system,
subsystem, and equipment names used in the manual directory and the
table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into
individual composite bookmarked files. Then create a composite manual
so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment
names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure the electronic manual to
display the bookmark panel upon opening the file.
2.03 OPERATION MANUAL CONTENTS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required
in individual Specification Sections, as well as the following specific information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for
systems and equipment indicated on the Contract Documents.
2. Performance and design criteria if the Contractor has delegated design
responsibility.
3. Operating standards.
4. Operating procedures.
5. Operating logs.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Control diagrams.
8. Piped system diagrams.
9. Precautions against improper use.
10. License requirements, including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated
on the Contract Documents. Include manufacturer's name, equipment
identification, with the serial number of each component.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 23 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
2. Equipment function, operating characteristics and limiting conditions.
3. Performance curves, Engineering data and tests.
4. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Start-up procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Regulation and control procedures.
5. Instructions on stopping.
6. Normal shutdown instructions.
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and
diagram the controls as installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where
required for identification.
F. Condensed Operating Instructions: Condensed instructions for start-up, shut-
down, emergency operation, safety precautions, unusual features, and
troubleshooting instructions. In addition to including a copy in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual, permanently secure a laminated copy adjacent to the
equipment, where the copy can be easily read by operating personnel.
G. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error
messages, and similar codes and signals. Include the responsibilities of the
Authority's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and
manufacturer to maintain warranties.
H. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Instructions on stopping
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems
5. Special operating instructions and procedures
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 23 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
2.04 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL CONTENT
A. Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair
materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. List each product included in the manual, identified by product name and arranged
to match the manual’s table of contents. For each product, list:
1. Name
2. Address
3. Telephone number of the Installer or supplier and the maintenance service
agent
4. Cross-reference the Specification Section number and title in the Project
manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier (where
applicable).
C. Data may be taken directly from manufacturer’s standard catalogs. Information
shall be edited or marked to show only conditions pertinent to this Contract.
D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number
2. Manufacturer's name
3. Color, pattern, and texture
4. Material and chemical composition
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products
E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the manufacturer's written recommendations,
as well as the following:
1. Inspection procedures
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used, and methods of cleaning
3. A list of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning that could be detrimental
to the product
4. The schedule for servicing, lubrication, routine cleaning and maintenance
5. Repair instructions
F. Repair Materials and Sources: Manufacturer’s recommended special maintenance
tools and list of spare parts and recommended stock quantities for one year of
routine maintenance. Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 23 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect the validity of warranties or bonds.
Include the procedures to follow and the notifications required for warranty claims.
2.05 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL CONTENT
A. List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,
included in the manual, identified by product name and arranged to match the
manual's table of contents. Include source information, manufacturers'
maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service
schedules, a spare parts list, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and
bond information, as described below. For each product list:
1. Name
2. Address
3. Telephone number of the Installer or supplier and the maintenance service
agent, and cross-reference the Specification Section number and title in
the Project manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where
applicable.
B. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for
each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including
disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. If the
system's control drawing is not adequate, provide simplified, professionally
drawn, single line diagrams on minimum 8½–by-11 inch, 20-pound white
bond paper.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4. A list of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
C. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail
essential maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions
2. Troubleshooting guide
3. Precautions against improper maintenance
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement;
and reassembly instructions
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions
6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available
7. List of special tools required to service or maintain equipment
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 23 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data
D. Preventive Maintenance Instructions: Condensed excerpts from manufacturer's
instructions for weekly, monthly, quarterly, annual, and other regularly scheduled
maintenance prepared by a mechanical Subcontractor, with assistance from the
equipment supplier.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication
requirements, a list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules
for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly,
monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms
for recording maintenance.
F. Control Drawings: Include control drawings for equipment and components,
including sequence of operations included in the control section of the Operation
and Maintenance Manual submittal.
G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair
parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to the manufacturers'
maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and
related services.
H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements, with
the name and telephone number of the service agent.
I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect the validity of warranties or bonds.
Also include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
END OF SECTION 01 78 23
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 23 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 78 36
WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for all warranties and
guarantees necessary for Contract closeout.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements
C. Section 01 77 00, Substantial Completion
1.03 SUBMITTAL OF WARRANTIES AND GURANTEES
A. Compile digital files (PDF) of each required warrantee and guarantee properly
executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor and Subcontractor, Supplier, or
manufacturer. Collect and assemble all warranties and guarantees into PDF format
and provide to SCRRA for final review and acceptance. Prior to submission, verify
that documents are in proper form, contain all required information, and are
properly signed.
B. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of
contents of the Specifications and CSI Master Format 04 and the table of contents
of the Project manual.
1. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble the
complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed
electronic PDF file, with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide a
bookmarked table of contents at the beginning of the document.
C. Special Project Warranty and Manufacturer's Guarantee Forms: Forms for Special
Project warranties and for manufacturer's guarantees are included at the end of
this Section. Prepare document utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution
by the Contractor or the Contractor and Subcontractor, Supplier, or manufacturer.
Submit a draft to the Authority though the Engineer for approval prior to final
execution.
1. Refer to Specifications for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submittal of special Project warranties.
2. Prepare standard product warranties and product guarantees, excepting
manufacturer's standard printed warranties and guarantees, on the
Contractor's, Subcontractor’s, Material Supplier’s, or manufacturer's own
letterhead, and addressed to the Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 36 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Guarantees
3. Warranty and guarantee letters shall be signed by all responsible parties,
and by the Contractor in every case, with modifications only as approved
by the Authority to suit the conditions pertaining to the warranty or
guarantee.
D. Manufacturer's Guarantee Forms: Manufacturer's guarantee forms may be used
in lieu of special Project forms included at the end of the Section. Manufacturer's
guarantee forms shall contain appropriate terms and identification, ready for
execution by the required parties.
1. If proposed terms and conditions restrict guarantee coverage or require
actions by the Authority beyond those specified, submit a draft of the
guarantee to the Authority through the Engineer for review and acceptance
before performance of the Work.
2. In other cases, submit a draft of the guarantee to the Authority for approval
prior to final execution of the guarantee.
E. Signatures: The warranty and guarantee documents should be signed by persons
authorized to sign warranties and guarantees, on behalf of the entity providing the
warranty or guarantee. The Contractor shall co-sign all warranties, except the
manufacturers’ printed guarantees.
1.04 TIME OF WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE SUBMITTALS
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of the Authority for
designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties on other than
the date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of
warranties might limit the Authority’s rights under warranty.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of
completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or
used by the Authority during the construction period by separate agreement with
the Contractor.
C. Preliminary Submittal: Unless otherwise specified, obtain preliminary copies of
warranties and guarantees within 14 days of completion of an applicable item of
Work. Prepare and submit preliminary copies for review as specified herein.
D. Final Submittal: Submit fully executed copies of warranties and guarantees within
seven days of the date of Substantial Completion, but not later than three days
prior to the date of application for final payment.
E. Date of Warranties and Guarantees: Unless otherwise directed, the
commencement date for warranty and guarantee periods shall be the date of
Substantial Completion and acceptance of such Work. For warranties for Work
accepted before or after the date of Substantial Completion such as beneficial
occupancy, the commencement date will be the date of acceptance of such Work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 36 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Guarantees
1.05 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
A. All warranties and manufacturer's guarantees shall name SCRRA as the
beneficiary. For equipment, products, or components thereof bearing a
manufacturer's warranty of guarantee that extends for a period of time beyond the
Contractor's warranty and guarantee, so state in the warranty or guarantee.
B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product
warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of warranty on the Work that
incorporates the products, nor shall they relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and
installers required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has been
found defective, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a
result of such defect or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for
correction of the warranted Work.
D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has been found
defective and has been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the
warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the
original warranty, with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has been
found to be defective, replace or reconstruct the Work to a condition acceptable to
the Authority, complying with applicable requirements of the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs for replacing or reconstructing
defective Work, regardless of whether the Authority has benefited from use of the
Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
F. Recourse: Written warranties made to the Authority are in addition to implied
warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise
available under law; nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time
in which the Authority can enforce such other duties, obligation, rights, or remedies.
G. Rejection of Warranties: The Authority reserves the right to reject warranties and
disallow the use of products with warranties in conflict with Contract Document
requirements.
H. Warranty as Condition of Acceptance: The Authority reserves the right to refuse to
accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar
commitment is required until evidence is presented that those required to counter-
sign such commitments are willing to do so.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 36 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 36 Warranties and Guarantees
END OF SECTION 01 78 36
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 36 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section addresses administrative and procedural requirements for preparing project
As-Built drawings, specifications, product data and other miscellaneous documents
submitted as required by the Contract.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 77 00, Substantial Completion
C. Section 01 77 19, Project Closeout
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as
modifications are issued.
1. Preparation: Mark record prints digitally on PDF to show the actual
installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require the
individual or entity who obtained the record data, whether the individual or
entity is an Installer, Subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information
for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints as follows:
a. Provide complete information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed
installations.
e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive
photographic documentation.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to,
the following:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 39 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 39 Project Record Documents
a. Dimensional changes and revisions to details shown on Drawings.
The lines shall be located on the drawings dimensionally from a
fixed point, such as a street-curb line, centerline, permanent
structure, or an exposed part of a structure.
b. Depths of foundations below first floor
c. Locations and depths of underground utilities including horizontal
and vertical location of underground utilities affected by the Work.
This includes new utilities installed and utilities found and left in
place.
d. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits
e. Revisions to electrical circuitry
f. Actual equipment locations, duct size and routing
g. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive
h. Changes made following the Authority's written orders
i. Details not on the original Contract Drawings
j. Field records for variable and concealed conditions
k. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and
accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in
production of marked-up prints. Record new information and details that
are recognized to be of importance to the Authority, but that were not
shown on either the Contract Drawings or on shop drawings. Record
changes on whichever drawing is most capable of showing the “field”
condition fully and accurately; and when shop drawings are used for As-
Built drawings.
4. Mark the As-Built set digitally with red line annotation on the PDF. Use
other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the
Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically
or omitted from the original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, RFI numbers, option
numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where
applicable.
7. Each drawing sheet, marked or unmarked, shall be stamped “As-Built” in
red ink.
8. As-Built drawings shall require approval by the Resident Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 39 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 39 Project Record Documents
9. As-Built Drawings: Submit two complete sets of marked-up record prints
and a complete PDF electronic file. Include each drawing, whether or not
changes and additional information were recorded.
2.02 AS-BUILT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation
whenever the installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and
contract modifications.
1. Provide detailed information on concealed products and equipment
installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products,
materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product
options selected.
3. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, and Installer, and include
other information necessary to provide a record of the selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been
submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as
record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings
where applicable.
B. Format: Submit As-Built Specifications as paper copy and scanned PDF electronic
files of the marked-up paper copy of the Specifications.
2.03 AS-BUILT CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
The most current approved construction schedule shall be marked by red line annotation
on the PDF showing all deviations occurring since the schedule was approved. Submit the
final “As-Built” Project Schedule as paper copy and a scanned PDF electronic file of the
marked-up paper copy of the final Project Schedule.
2.04 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation
whenever the installation varies substantially from that indicated in the Product
Data submittal.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and
installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to the Project site, and
changes in the manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings
where applicable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 39 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 78 39 Project Record Documents
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy and scanned PDF electronic
file(s) of the marked-up paper copy of the Product Data. Include a record Product
Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically
linked to each item of the record Product Data.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for
miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance
of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for
continued use and reference.
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as paper copy and scanned PDF
electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals. Include a
miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section
number and title, electronically linked to each item of the miscellaneous record
submittals.
2.06 SUBMITTAL TITLE
Label each document "PROJECT AS-BUILT" in two-inch-high printed letters or a height
appropriate to document.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. The monthly progress payment application will not be processed by the Authority
until the Contractor is found by the Authority to have completely and accurately
recorded all as-built information for Work performed through the period of the
progress payment application.
B. Store any non-digital record documents and Samples in the field office. Provide
access to As-Built documents for the Authority’s reference.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 BASIS OF PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items
and no separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work
of this Section. As-Built drawings and photographs will be reviewed each month
and the monthly progress payment will only be approved and processed if the
Contractor is found by the Authority to be in conformance with the requirements of
this Section.
B. If the Contractor does not provide both the As-Built Summary and Record
Documents for Authority review, the Contractor’s final pay request or other
applicable progress payment request may be withheld until proper as-built and
record documents are provided.
END OF SECTION 01 78 39
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 78 39 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 79 00
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing the
Authority's personnel, including the following:
A. Demonstration of the operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment
B. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment
C. Demonstration and training video recordings
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 31 00, Project Management and Coordination
B. Section 01 78 23, Operations and Maintenance Data
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit an outline of the instructional program for
demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of
proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each
training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.
B. Indicate the proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced
demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and
products in lieu of video recording of a live instructional module.
C. Qualification Data for instructor and videographer (See Quality Assurance
Subsection 1.5, below).
D. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit a list of participants and
the length of the instruction time.
E. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit the results
and documentation of a performance-based test.
1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit the recordings within seven days
of the end of each training module.
A. Identification: label with the following information:
1. Name of Project
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 79 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
2. Name and address of the videographer
3. Name of the Engineer
4. Name of the Construction Manager
5. Name of the Contractor
6. Date of the video recording
B. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with the
same label information as the corresponding video recording, and a table of
contents with links to corresponding training components. Include the name of
the Project and the date of the video recording on each page.
C. Training Manuals: At the completion of training, submit complete training
manual(s) the for Authority's use, submit in PDF electronic file format.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative,
experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.
B. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced
photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct the conference at the Project site to review
methods and procedures related to the demonstration and training, including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
2. To avoid delays, review and finalize the instruction schedule and verify
the availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual
equipment, and facilities needed.
3. Review the required content of instruction.
4. When instruction must occur outside, review weather and forecasted
weather conditions and procedures to determine suitable conditions.
B. Coordinate instructors, providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction
time, and course content.
C. Coordinate the content of training modules with content of approved emergency,
operation and maintenance manuals. Do not submit the instruction program until
the operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by the
Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 79 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: The Contractor shall develop an instruction program that
includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part
of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. Instruction
programs shall be included for, but not limited to, the following systems with
minimum instructional program times as stated below:
1. Motorized doors, including overhead coiling doors, overhead coiling
grilles and automatic entrance doors: 4 hours each
2. Equipment, including but not limited to loading dock equipment and waste
compactors: 2 hours each
3. Fire-protectionsystems, including fire alarm fire pumps and fire-
extinguishing systems: 8 hours each
4. Smoke control system: 4 hours
5. Intrusion detection systems: 4 hours
6. Access control systems: 8 hours
7. Conveying systems, including elevators, wheelchair lifts, and escalators:
12 hours each
8. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems,
and terminal equipment and devices: 4 hours each
9. HVAC instrumentation and controls: 24 hours
10. Building automation systems and related material, including sequences of
operation: 40 hours
11. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards,
panel boards, uninterruptible power supplies, and motor controls: 4 hours
each
12. Packaged engine generators, including transfer switches: 8 hours
13. Lighting equipment and controls: 12 hours
14. Communication systems, including intercommunication, surveillance,
clocks and programming, voice and data and television equipment: 12
hours each
15. Exterior maintenance systems, including irrigation systems: 4 hours
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 79 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each
module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is
expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as
applicable to the system, equipment, or component:
1. Basis of system design, operational requirements, and criteria – Include
the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions
b. Performance and design criteria if the Contractor is delegated
design responsibility
c. Operating standards
d. Regulatory requirements
e. Equipment function
f. Operating characteristics
g. Limiting conditions
h. Performance curves
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals
b. Operations manuals
c. Maintenance manuals
d. Project record documents
e. Identification systems
f. Warranties and bonds
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing
commitments
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error
messages
b. Instructions on stopping
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating
limits
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 79 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems
f. Special operating instructions and procedures
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures
c. Routine and normal operating instructions
d. Regulation and control procedures
e. Control sequences
f. Safety procedures
g. Instructions on stopping
h. Normal shutdown instructions
i. Operating procedures for emergencies
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems
m. Special operating instructions and procedures
n. Noise and vibration adjustments
o. Economy and efficiency adjustments
p. Effective energy utilization
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments
b. Checking adjustments
c. Noise and vibration adjustments
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions
b. Test and inspection procedures
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 79 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used, and methods of cleaning
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning that are
detrimental to product
d. Procedures for routine cleaning
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance
f. Procedures for routine maintenance
g. Instruction on use of special tools
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions
b. Repair instructions
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and
reassembly instructions
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and
training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in
coordination with requirements in Section 01 78 23, Operations and Maintenance Data.
3.02 INSTRUCTION
A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare the instruction program and
training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between the
Contractor and the Authority for the number of participants, instruction times, and
location.
B. Provide manufacturer's instructors or instructors certified by the manufacturer as
being experienced in operation and maintenance procedures for each system,
subsystem, or piece of equipment to instruct the Authority's personnel on how to
adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a
system.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 79 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
1. The Authority will provide the instructor to the basis of system design,
operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.
2. The Authority will provide the instructor a description the Authority's
operational philosophy.
3. The Authority will provide the Contractor with names and positions of
participants.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that
requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each
season.
1. Schedule training with the Authority with at least seven days advance
notice.
2. Schedule training to conform to personnel availability at the Site, and to
conclude prior to the start-up of system.
D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the
completed and fully operational facility, using the actual equipment in-place.
Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals.
E. Evaluation: At the conclusion of each training module, assess and document
each participant's mastery of the module by use of an oral, written, or
demonstration performance-based test.
F. In addition to written technical descriptions, training shall detail the training
program itself to allow those who have completed training to provide training for
new employees, resulting in a self-perpetuating training program.
G. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and deliver to the
Authority. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to
the condition existing before initial training use.
3.03 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration
and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include
classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual
aids, but not student practice.
1. At the beginning of each training module, record each chart containing
the learning objective and the lesson outline.
2. Video shall allow self-training, so future employees may view it at their
own convenience and be able to comprehend the system without needing
to have an instructor in attendance.
B. Video: Provide minimum 1280 x 720 video resolution converted to a format file
type acceptable to the Authority, on electronic media.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 79 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
1. Electronic Media: Format digital video acceptable to the Authority, with a
commercial-grade graphic label.
2. File Hierarchy: Organize the folder structure and file locations according
to the Project manual table of contents. Provide a complete screen-based
menu.
3. File Names: Utilize file names based on the name of the equipment
generally described in the video segment, as identified in Project
Specifications.
4. The Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software,
create a file for inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training
videothat describes the following for each Contractor involved on the
Project, arranged according to Project table of contents:
a. Name of the Contractor/Installer
b. Business address
c. Business phone number
d. Point of contact
e. E-mail address
C. Recording: Mount the camera on a tripod before starting recording, unless
otherwise necessary to adequately cover the area of demonstration and training.
Display continuous running time. Film training session(s) in segments not to
exceed 15 minutes.
1. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per
segment.
2. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow the order
of the Project manual table of contents.
3. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15
minutes, stop filming and pause the training session. Begin the training
session again upon commencement of a new filming segment.
D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify
equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording. Furnish additional
portable lighting as required.
1. Narration: Describe scenes on the video recording by audio narration
using a microphone while the video is recorded. Include a description of
the items being viewed.
2. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and
running time captured from the video opposite the corresponding
narration segment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 79 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
3. Pre-produced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a
component of training modules in the same format as recordings of live
training.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this
Section.
END OF SECTION 01 79 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 79 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 01 91 13
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
Commissioning is the process by which the Contractor will demonstrate to SCRRA that it
has completed the project in conformance with the contract documents and that the
project will perform as specified in the contract documents. This Section includes
general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning for systems,
assemblies, or components. Authority will require the Contractor to perform facility
commissioning for the purpose of verifying compliance of the project to the requirements
of the contract along with any amendments approved by Authority during the
construction process. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing all test and
commissioning equipment, tools, software, programming, programming support and
incidentals and qualified technicians to start–up, calibrate, debug and verify proper
function of the systems and sub-systems as required by the Commissioning Plan.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 77 00, Substantial Completion
B. Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data
1.03 SCRRA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in
commissioning team activities.
1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
The Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its
behalf, and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process
activities including, but not limited to, the following:
A. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration
with the entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend
corrective action.
B. Resolve issues recorded in the test reports.
C. Organize and lead the commissioning team and convene the commissioning
team meetings held on a weekly basis. Integrate and coordinate commissioning
process activities with the construction schedule.
D. Review and complete construction checklists as provided by the Authority and as
Work is completed, and provide them to the Authority on a daily basis.
E. Complete commissioning process test procedures including specific construction
checklists and commissioning process test procedures.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 91 13 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements
F. Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component start-up. Compile test
data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual
and commissioning process report.
G. Verify the execution of commissioning process activities, using random sampling.
The sampling rate may vary from 1 to 10 percent. Verification will include, but is
not limited to, equipment submittals, construction checklists, training, operating
and maintenance data, tests, and test reports to verify compliance with the OPR.
When a random sample does not meet the requirement, the Contractor will report
the failure to the Authority.
1.05 START-UP, TEST AND ADJUST AND BALANCING
The Contractor shall have completed all start-up procedures and testing, all adjusting
and balancing required for all of the component systems and all systems and sub-
systems shall be fully functional and operating in normal operational mode before the
commissioning plan is implemented and completed. This includes the complete
installation of all equipment, materials, controls, etc. per the contract, scoping
documents and related directives, clarifications, approved changes, etc.
1.06 COMMISSIONING PLAN
The Commissioning Plan will be developed by the Contractor to complete the
commissioning in conformance the contract. The Commissioning Plan will be developed
prior to completion of the installation. The Contractor is obligated to provide all
necessary information pertaining to the actual equipment and installation necessary to
prepare the Commissioning Plan. If Contractor initiated system changes have been
made that alters the commissioning process, the Contractor will notify the Engineers of
record and the Authority. The Commissioning Plan will include the following:
A. The purpose of the commissioning
B. Detail of the commissioning process
C. Commissioning team members’ responsibilities
D. Describe Pre-functional Construction Checklist Procedures
E. Provide a guideline for acceptance of each piece of equipment or system
F. Systems to be commissioned
1.07 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES
In some systems, maladjustments, misapplied equipment, and/or deficient performance
under varying loads will result in a system that does not meet the original design intent.
Correction of work will be completed under direction of the design professional, with
input from the Contractor, equipment supplier and Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 91 13 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements
1.08 ADDITIONAL COMMISSIONING
Additional commissioning activities may be required after system adjustments,
replacements, etc., are completed. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and equipment
suppliers shall include a reasonable reserve to complete this work as part of their
contractual obligations.
Corrective work shall be completed in a timely fashion to permit the timely completion of
the commissioning process. Experimentation to render system performance will be
permitted. If Authority deems the experimentation work to be ineffective or untimely to
the commissioning process, Authority will notify the Contractor indicating the nature of
the problem, expected steps to be taken and the deadline for completion of activities. If
the deadline passes without resolution of the problem, Authority reserves the right to
obtain supplementary services and equipment to resolve the problem. Costs incurred to
solve the problems in an expeditious manner will be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
1.09 COMMISSIONING FIELD BOOK
The Commissioning Field Book will be created by the Contractor to identify and track all
pertinent commissioning documentation required during the installation start-up, check-
out and commissioning phases. The Field Book will be managed and maintained by the
Contractor in digital format and will be made available to all subcontractors for their use.
The Field Book provides a central location for the subcontractors and Authority to
identify, copy, and organize all pertinent information. The Field Book will at a minimum
include the following format:
A. Summary describing the Field Book contents and use.
B. Commissioning Plan for contractor field reference.
C. Listing of all specification documentation requirements listed by specification
section, with construction completion sign offs for appropriate parties. These
types of documents include piping pressure testing, flushing reports, electrical
circuit tests, factory start-up reports and any field testing relative to the project.
D. Tabs for each specification section with copies of pre-functional and functional
test check sheets provided by coordination of subcontractors and Authority for
Contractor completion and space for related contractor-supplied documents.
E. Commissioning project reports, resolution logs schedule information or any other
documentation.
1.10 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CONSTRUCTION CHECKLISTS
Using the Pre-functional Construction Checklists, the Contractor must verify that the
systems installed are in compliance with the Construction Documents and are fully
functional. Commissioning is not intended to be a testing or inspection function that
replaces any of the Contractor’s or subcontractors’ obligations for testing and proof of
performance. Functional testing will only begin when checklists are completed by the
appropriate subcontractors, initialed, signed and returned to the Contractor.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 91 13 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements
1.11 FUNCTIONAL TESTING
Functional testing is performed by experienced and qualified technicians of the
Contractors and subcontractor(s), responsible for installation as facilitated and
supervised by the Contractor and may be observed by Authority. Functional testing will
verify proper sequencing, operation and performance of installed equipment and
systems under realistic operating conditions. The functional testing will follow with
written Functional Test Procedures with test results documented for permanent record.
1.12 DOCUMENTATION
In addition to the Pre-functional Construction Checklists and Functional Test
Procedures, written documentation will be maintained for all other commissioning
activities. Project communication reports shall be issued by the Contractor to Authority
to document apparent deficiencies identified during examination of design and
construction documents, daily activities on-site, construction deficiencies and successful
or unsuccessful functional test results. At the end of the commissioning process, all
documentation will be assembled and summarized in the Final Commissioning Report.
1.13 DEFICIENCY RESOLUTION
When a Project Report is issued to address an identified deficiency, the Contractor shall
forward the reports to the appropriate parties to initiate corrective action in an
expeditious manner. The Engineers of Record are relied on for supplemental
instructions or design modifications and issuance of final design details and the
Contractor, subcontractors and equipment suppliers are relied on for implementation of
that design.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to Work under other payment items and no
separate measurement or payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this
Section.
END OF SECTION 01 91 13
SCRRA Standard Specifications 01 91 13 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 03 21 00
REINFORCING STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Reinforcing steel bar requirements for concrete construction.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. SP 66, ACI Detailing Manual.
2. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A1022, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Plain, for Concrete.
2. A1022, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Deformed, for Concrete.
3. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
4. A706, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Low-Alloy Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D1.4, Structural Welding Code – Steel Reinforcing Bars.
D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):
1. Manual of Standard Practice.
E. Current California Department of Transportation Standard Specifications Current
or Latest Edition.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
F. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA)
1. Chapter 8 – Concrete Structures and Foundations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and
administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Mill certificates for all reinforcing.
d. Manufacturer and type of proprietary rebar mechanical splices.
e. Manufacturer and type of rebar adhesive anchor including
installation instructions.
3. Qualifications of welding operators, welding processes and procedures.
4. Rebar number, sizes, spacing, dimensions, configurations, locations, mark
numbers, lap splice lengths and locations, concrete cover and rebar
supports.
5. Sufficient rebar details to permit installation of reinforcing.
6. Rebar details in accordance with ACI SP 66.
7. All mechanical splices
8. Locations where proprietary rebar mechanical splices are required or
proposed for use.
9. Shop Drawings shall be in sufficient detail to permit installation of
reinforcing without reference to Contract Plans.
a. Shop Drawings shall not be prepared by reproducing the plans and
details indicated on the Contract Plans but shall consist of
completely redrawn plans and details as necessary to indicate
complete fabrication and installation of all reinforcing steel.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
1. Welding operators, processes and procedures shall be qualified in
accordance with AWS D1.4.
2. Welding operators must have been qualified during the previous 12 months
prior to commencement of welding.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Support and store all reinforcing above ground.
B. Ship to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags with permanent mark numbers
which match the Shop Drawing mark numbers.
C. Handling of Epoxy-Coated Rebar:
1. Use padded or nonmetallic slings and padded straps to protect coated
reinforcement from damage.
2. Handle bundled bars to prevent sagging that could damage the coating.
3. Do not drop or drag rebars.
4. Store on wooden cribbing.
5. Coated rebars subject to rejection by Engineer if rebar coating has been
damaged. The rebars may be used for repair if approved by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable, or approved equivalent as a comparable product:
1. Rebar adhesive anchors:
a. HIT-HY200 System by HILTI FASTENING SYSTEMS, INC.
b. Red Head Adhesive Anchoring Systems
c. Pure 110+ by Dewalt
2. Rebar mechanical splices:
a. nVent Lenton Rebar Splicing by Erico, Inc.
b. Richmond dowel bar splicer system by Richmond Screw and
Anchor Co., Inc.
c. Bar-Grip Systems by Barsplice Products, Inc.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60, deformed.
B. Reinforcing Bars to be Welded: ASTM A706.
C. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185 or ASTM A497.
D. Smooth Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, grade 60 with metal end cap to allow
longitudinal movement equal to joint width plus 1 inch.
E. Epoxy-Coated Rebars: ASTM A775 and ASTM A615, Grade 60, meeting Annex
A1 for epoxy coating.
F. Epoxy-Coated Rebar Patching Material:
1. Compatible with the coating material.
2. Inert in concrete.
3. Meet requirements of Annex A1 of ASTM A775.
4. Obtained from the manufacturer of the epoxy resin that was used to
originally coat the rebars.
G. Proprietary Rebar Mechanical Splices: To develop in tension and compression a
minimum of 125 percent of the yield strength of the rebars being spliced.
H. Welding Electrodes:
1. E90 meeting requirements of AWS D1.4.
I. Rebar Adhesive Anchors:
1. Manufactured for the specific purpose of embedding and developing
125 percent of the yield strength of rebars in hardened concrete.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Chairs, Runners, Bolsters, Spacers, Hangers, and Other Rebar Supports:
1. Plastic-coated tips in contact with forms.
2. Plastic coating meeting requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Protective plastic caps at mechanical splices.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Tolerances:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
1. Sheared lengths: +1 inch.
2. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties and spirals: +1/2 inches.
3. All other bends: +0 inch, -1/2 inches.
B. Minimum diameter of bends measured on the inside of the rebar to be as indicated
in ACI 318 Paragraph 7.2.
C. Ship rebars to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags.
1. Place on each tag the mark number of the rebar corresponding to the mark
number indicated on the Shop Drawing.
2. Mark numbers on tags to be so placed that the numbers cannot be
removed.
3. For epoxy-coated rebars, use only plastic tags secured to rebars by nylon
or plastic ties.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Tolerances:
1. Rebar placement:
a. Clear distance to formed surfaces: +1/4 inches.
b. Minimum spacing between bars: -1/4 inches.
c. Top bars in slabs and beams:
1) Members 8 inches deep or less: +1/4 inches.
2) Members between 8 inches and 2 feet deep: -1/4 inches,
+1/2 inches.
3) Members more than 2 feet deep: -1/4 inches, +1 inches.
d. Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within +1 inches.
e. Lengthwise of members: +2 inches.
2. Minimum clear distances between rebars:
a. Beams, walls and slabs: Distance equal to rebar diameter or 1 inch,
whichever is greater.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
b. Columns: Distance equal to 1-1/2 times the rebar diameter or 11/2
inches, whichever is greater.
c. Beam and slab rebars shall be threaded through the column vertical
rebars without displacing the column vertical rebars and still
maintaining the clear distances required for the beam and slab
rebars.
B. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement, unless indicated
otherwise on Plans:
1. Three (3) inches for concrete cast against earth, 2 inches all other
locations.
C. Unless indicated otherwise on Plans, provide splice lengths for reinforcing as
follows:
1. For rebars: Class B splice meeting the requirements of Paragraph 12.15
of ACI 318.
2. For welded wire reinforcement:
a. Splice lap length measured between outermost cross wires of each
fabric sheet shall not be less than one (1) spacing of cross wires
plus 2 inches, nor less than 1.5 x development length nor less than
6 inches.
b. Development length shall be as required for the yield strength of the
welded wire reinforcement in accordance with Paragraph 12.8 of
ACI 318.
3. Submit in accordance with 01 33 00 splices of reinforcing not specifically
indicated or specified subject to approval of Engineer.
a. Mechanical proprietary splice connectors may only be used when
approved or indicated on the Contract Plans.
D. Reinforcing Steel Splices:
1. Splices of reinforcing bars shall consist of lap splices, service splices, or
ultimate butt splices.
2. Splicing of reinforcing bars will not be permitted at a location designated on
the plans as a "No-Splice Zone."
3. At the option of the Contractor, reinforcing bars may be continuous at
locations where splices are shown on the plans.
4. The location of splices, except where shown on the plans, shall be
determined by the Contractor using available commercial lengths where
practicable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
5. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, splices in adjacent reinforcing bars
at any particular section shall be staggered.
a. The minimum distance between staggered lap splices or
mechanical lap splices shall be the same as the length required for
a lap splice in the largest bar.
b. The minimum distance between staggered butt splices shall be
2 feet, measured between the midpoints of the splices along a line
which is centered between the axes of the adjacent bars.
6. Lap Splicing Requirements:
a. Splices made by lapping shall consist of placing reinforcing bars in
contact and wiring them together, maintaining the alignment of the
bars and the minimum clearances.
b. Should the Contractor elect to use a butt welded or mechanical
splice at a location not designated on the plans as requiring a
service or ultimate butt splice, this splice shall conform to the testing
requirements for service splice.
c. Reinforcing bars shall not be spliced by lapping at locations where
the concrete section is not sufficient to provide a minimum clear
distance of 2 inches between the splice and the nearest adjacent
bar.
d. The clearance to the surface of the concrete specified on the Plans
shall not be reduced.
7. Service Splicing and Ultimate Butt Splicing Requirements:
a. Service splices and ultimate butt splices shall be either butt welded
or mechanical splices, shall be used at the locations shown on the
plans, and shall conform to the requirements of these Specifications
and the Plans.
8. Mechanical Splices:
a. Mechanical splices shall not be used for any reinforcing steel in the
“Ultimate Splice Zone” as indicated on the Plans.
b. Any mechanical splices proposed by the Contractor shall be
submitted for review and approval by the Engineer prior to
reinforcing steel fabrication.
c. Only mechanical splices prequalified by the Transportation
Laboratory of the California Department of Transportation shall be
allowed.
d. Submittal of proposed mechanical splices shall include:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
1) The type or series identification of the splice material
including tracking information for traceability.
2) The bar grade and size number to be spliced.
3) A copy of the manufacturer's product literature giving
complete data on the splice material and installation
procedures.
4) A statement that the splicing systems and materials used in
conformance with the manufacturer's installation
procedures will develop the required tensile strengths,
based on the nominal bar area, and will conform to the total
slip requirements and the other requirements in the
California Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications.
5) A statement that the splice material conforms to the type of
mechanical splice in the California Department of
Transportation current prequalified list.
9. Butt Welded Splices:
a. Except for resistance butt welds, butt welded splices of reinforcing
bars shall be complete joint penetration butt welds conforming to
the requirements in AWS D 1.4, and these Specifications.
b. Welders and welding procedures shall be qualified in conformance
with the requirements in AWS D 1.4.
c. Only the joint details and dimensions as shown in Figure 3.2, "Direct
Butt Joints," of AWS D 1.4, shall be used for making complete joint
penetration butt welds of bar reinforcement.
1) Split pipe backing shall not be used.
d. Butt welds shall be made with multiple weld passes using a stringer
bead without an appreciable weaving motion.
1) The maximum stringer bead width shall be 2.5 times the
diameter of the electrode and slagging shall be performed
between each weld pass.
2) Weld reinforcement shall not exceed 0.16 inches in
convexity.
e. Electrodes used for welding shall meet the minimum
Charpy Vnotch impact requirement of 27°J at -4 degrees.
f. All bars to be welded shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM A706.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
g. In the event that any of the specified preheat, interpass, and post
weld cooling temperatures are not met, all weld and heat affected
zone metal shall be removed and the splice rewelded.
h. Welding shall be protected from air currents, drafts, and
precipitation to prevent loss of heat or loss of arc shielding.
1) The method of protecting the welding area from loss of heat
or loss of arc shielding shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer.
i. Reinforcing bars shall not be direct butt spliced by thermite welding.
j. Procedures to be used in making welded splices in reinforcing bars,
and welders employed to make splices in reinforcing bars, shall be
qualified by tests performed by the Contractor on sample splices of
the type to be used, before making splices to be used in the work.
10. Resistance Butt Welding:
a. Shop produced resistance butt welds shall be produced by a
fabricator who is approved by the Transportation Laboratory of the
California Department of Transportation.
b. Before manufacturing hoops using resistance butt welding, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the manufacturer's Quality
Control (QC) manual for the fabrication of hoops.
1) As a minimum, the QC manual shall include the following:
a) The preproduction procedures for the qualification of
material and equipment.
b) The methods and frequencies for performing QC
procedures during production.
c) The calibration procedures and calibration
frequency for all equipment.
d) The Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) for
resistance welding.
e) The method for identifying and tracking lots.
11. Service Splice and Ultimate Butt Splice Testing Requirement:
a. Testing and reporting of test results for Service and Ultimate Butt
Splices shall conform to the California Department of
Transportation Standard Specification, Section 52 Reinforcement.
E. Placing Rebars:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
1. Assure that reinforcement at time concrete is placed is free of mud, oil or
other materials that may affect or reduce bond.
2. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or a combination of both will be
accepted as being satisfactory without cleaning or brushing provided
dimensions and weights including heights of deformations on a cleaned
sample is not less than required by applicable ASTM Specification that
governs for the rebar supplied.
3. Rebar support:
a. Uncoated rebar:
1) Support rebars and fasten together to prevent displacement
by construction loads or placing of concrete.
a) Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports
to maintain minimum concrete cover.
b) Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not
toward exposed concrete surfaces.
2) On ground, provide supporting concrete blocks to support
reinforcing steel.
3) Over formwork, provide plastic-coated metal chairs,
runners, bolsters, spacers, hangers and other rebar
support.
a) Only tips in contact with the forms need to be plastic
coated.
b. Coated rebar:
1) Support coated rebars and fasten together to prevent
displacement.
2) Use plastic or nylon ties to hold rebars rigidly in place.
3) Support rebars by use of plastic or plastic-coated chairs,
runners, bolsters, spacers, hangers and rebar supports as
required.
4. Support rebars over cardboard void forms by means of concrete supports
which will not puncture or damage the void forms during construction nor
impair the strength of the concrete members in any way.
5. Where parallel horizontal reinforcement in beams is indicated to be placed
in two or more layers, rebars in the upper layers shall be placed directly
above rebars in the bottom layer with clear distance between layers to be
1 inch.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
a. Place spacer rebars at 3 feet maximum centers to maintain the
required 1 inch clear distance between layers.
6. Extend reinforcement to within 2 inches of concrete perimeter edges.
a. If perimeter edge is formed by earth, extend reinforcement to within
3 inches of the edge.
7. To assure proper placement, furnish templates for all column/pier vertical
bars and dowels.
8. Do not bend reinforcement after embedding in hardened concrete unless
approved by Engineer.
a. Do not bend reinforcing by means of heat.
9. Do not tack weld reinforcing.
10. Embed rebars into hardened concrete utilizing adhesive anchor system
specifically manufactured for such installation:
a. Drill hole in concrete with diameter and depth as required to develop
125 percent of the yield strength of the bar according to
manufacturer's requirements.
b. Clean holes per manufacturer's recommendations.
c. Place adhesive in drilled hole.
d. Insert rebar into hole and adhesive in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Reinforcement Congestion and Interferences:
1. Notify Engineer whenever the specified clearances between rebars cannot
be met.
2. Do not place any concrete until the Engineer submits a solution to rebar
congestion problem.
3. Rebars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other
reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items.
4. If rebars are moved more than one bar diameter, obtain Engineer's
approval of resulting arrangement of rebars.
5. No cutting of rebars shall be done without written approval of Engineer.
B. Inspection of Epoxy-Coated Rebars:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
1. Coated rebars will be inspected on the jobsite for handling defects, coating
abrasion, coating thickness and continuity of coating.
2. Engineer may defer final inspection of rebar coating integrity and repairs
until the rebars have been erected and all handling is completed.
3. Repair coated areas as directed by Engineer.
a. Do not place concrete until all repairs to coatings have been
completed.
C. Patching of Epoxy-Coated Rebar:
1. Patching and repair to be performed in accordance with the instructions of
patching material manufacturer.
2. Patching material to provide a minimum film thickness of 5 mils over the
bare area.
a. Thickness of area adjacent to patched area not to exceed 15 mils.
3. Areas to be patched to be clean and free of surface contaminants.
a. Treat areas in accordance with patching material manufacturer's
instructions before oxidation occurs.
4. Total surface area covered by patching material not to exceed 2 percent of
total surface area of the rebar.
5. Rebar welds and adjacent bare rebar areas to also be patched after
welding is completed.
D. Employ a testing laboratory to perform and report following:
1. Review and approve Contractor proposed welding procedures and
processes for conformance with AWS D1.4.
2. Qualify welders in accord with AWS D1.4.
3. Test three (3) samples of each bar size and each type of weld in accord
with AWS D1.4.
a. The tensile strength of each test shall be not less than 125 percent
of the required yield strength of the rebar tested.
4. Conduct nondestructive field tests (radiographic or magnetic particle) on
not less than one (1) random sample for each 10 welds.
a. In addition, if any welds are found defective, test five (5) previous
welds performed by same welder.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel
5. Visually inspect each weld for presence of cracks, undercuts, inadequate
size and other visible defects.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.1 MEASUREMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. If a nominal weight is not available, steel will be assumed to have a unit weight of
490 lbs per cu ft of volume.
4.2 PAYMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Full compensation for furnishing all tie wires, blocks, chairs and other supporting
devices shall be considered as included in the contract Unit Price by the unit and
no separate payment will be made therefore.
C. Full compensation for furnishing and testing sample splices, for radiographic
examinations performed by the Contractor and for furnishing access facilities for
inspection and non-destructive testing by the Engineer shall be considered as
included in the Contract Unit Price by the unit and no additional compensation will
be allowed therefore.
END OF SECTION 03 21 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 21 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 03 31 00
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast-in-place concrete and grout.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA)
1. Chapter 8 – Concrete Structures and Foundations
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 116R, Cement and Concrete Terminology.
2. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight and Mass Concrete.
3. 212.3R, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
4. 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.
5. 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.
6. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting.
7. 306R, Cold Weather Concreting.
8. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
9. 347R, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
1. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Field.
2. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
3. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.
4. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
5. C138, Standard Method of Test for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air
Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete.
6. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
7. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
8. C157, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-
Cement, Mortar, and Concrete.
9. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
10. C173, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Volumetric Method.
11. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Pressure Method.
12. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
13. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete.
14. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
15. C578, standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation.
16. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
17. C1077, Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete
Aggregates for use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency
Evaluation.
18. C1240, Standard Specification for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Hydraulic-
Cement Concrete, Mortar, and Grout.
19. C1260, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of
Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
20. D994, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete (Bituminous Type).
21. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or
Expanded Rubber.
22. D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types).
23. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
Inspection and/or Testing.
D. Corps of Engineers (COE):
1. CRD-C621, Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic-Cement
Grout (Nonshrink).
E. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, SSPWC Latest or Current
Edition.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Per ACI 116R except as modified herein:
1. Concrete fill: Non-structural concrete.
2. Concrete Testing Agency: Testing agency employed to perform materials
evaluation, design of concrete mixes or testing of concrete placed during
construction.
3. Exposed concrete: Exposed to view after construction is complete.
4. Indicated: Indicated by Contract Documents.
5. Nonexposed concrete: Not exposed to view after construction is complete.
6. Required: Required by Contract Documents.
7. Specified strength: Specified compressive strength at 28 days.
8. Submitted: Submitted to Engineer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and
administration of the submittal process.
2. Concrete mix designs proposed for use.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
a. Concrete mix design submittal to include the following information:
1) Location of use
2) Plan sheets showing work
3) Target strength
4) Sieve analysis and source of fine and coarse aggregates.
5) Test for aggregate organic impurities.
6) Test for deleterious aggregate per ASTM C289.
7) Proportioning of all materials.
8) Type of cement with mill certificate for cement.
9) Type of fly ash with certificate of conformance to
Specification requirements.
10) Slump.
11) Air content.
12) Brand, type, ACI or ASTM designation, and quantity of each
admixture proposed for use.
13) 28-day cylinder compressive test results of trial mixes per
ACI 318 and as indicated herein.
14) Shrinkage test results.
15) Standard deviation value for concrete production facility.
3. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Manufacturers and types:
1) Joint fillers.
2) Curing agents.
3) Bonding and patching mortar.
4) Construction joint bonding adhesive.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
5) Non-shrink grout with cure/seal compound.
6) Color if used and type.
4. Reinforcing steel:
a. Per Specification Section 03 21 00.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Assurance:
1. Concrete testing agency:
a. Contractor must employ at its own expense the services of a testing
laboratory to:
1) Perform materials evaluation.
2) Design concrete mixes.
b. Concrete testing agency to meet requirements of ASTM E329.
2. Do not begin concrete production until proposed concrete mix design has
been approved by Engineer.
a. Approval of concrete mix design by Engineer does not relieve
Contractor of his responsibility to provide concrete that meets the
requirements of this Specification.
3. Adjust concrete mix designs when material characteristics, job conditions,
weather, strength test results or other circumstances warrant.
a. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and approved
by Engineer.
4. Perform structural calculations as required to prove that all portions of the
structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has
sufficient strength to safely support its own weight plus the loads placed
thereon.
B. Qualifications:
1. Ready mixed concrete batch plant certified by National Ready Mixed
Concrete Association (NRMCA).
2. Formwork, shoring and reshoring for slabs and beams except where cast
on ground to be designed by a professional engineer currently registered
in the state where the Project is located.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage of Material:
1. Cement and fly ash:
a. Store in moisture-proof, weather-tight enclosures.
b. Do not use if caked or lumpy.
2. Aggregate:
a. Store to prevent segregation and contamination with other sizes or
foreign materials.
b. Obtain samples for testing from aggregates at point of batching.
c. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates.
d. Do not use bottom 6 inches of stockpiles in contact with ground.
e. Allow sand to drain until moisture content is uniform prior to use.
3. Admixtures:
a. Protect from contamination, evaporation, freezing, or damage.
b. Maintain within temperature range recommended by manufacturer.
c. Completely mix solutions and suspensions prior to use.
4. Reinforcing steel: Support and store all rebars above ground.
B. Delivery:
1. Concrete:
a. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load for ready-mixed concrete.
b. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Engineer at the time of delivery.
c. Ticket to show:
1) Mix identification mark.
2) Quantity delivered.
3) Amount of each material in batch.
4) Outdoor temp in the shade.
5) Time at which cement was added.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
6) Numerical sequence of the delivery.
7) Amount of water added.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following products and
manufacturers are acceptable, or approved equivalent as a comparable product:
1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout:
a. Sika "SikaGrout 212."
b. Euclid Chemial "NS Grout."
c. Master Builders Solutions. "Masterflow 713."
2. Epoxy grout:
a. BASF Admixtures, Inc. "Brutem MPG."
b. Euclid Chemical Company, "E3-G."
c. Fosroc, "Conbextra HF".
3. Expansion joint fillers:
a. .
b. Rubatex Corp.
c. Williams Products, Inc.
4. Form coating:
a. Richmond "Rich Cote."
b. Industrial Lubricants "Nox-Crete Form Coating."
c. Euclid Chemical "Eucoslip VOX."
5. Prefabricated forms:
a. Simplex "Industrial Steel Frame Forms."
b. Symons "Steel Ply."
c. Universal "Uniform."
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
6. Bonding agent:
a. Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Master Builders Solutions Admixtures US LLC
c. L & M Construction Chemicals Inc.
7. Calcium nitrate:
a. gcp applied technologies
1) DCI.
2) DCI'S.
b. Euclid Chemical Company.
1) Eucon BCN.
2) Eucon CIA.
8. Microsilica (Silica Fume):
a. gcp applied technologies "Force 10,000 D".
b. Euclid Chemical Company "Eucon MSA".
B. Submit request for substitutions in accordance with Section 01 25 00.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C150 Type II, III or V.
B. Fly Ash:
1. ASTM C618, Class F or Class C.
2. Non-Staining.
a. Hardened concrete containing fly ash to be uniform light gray color.
3. Maximum loss on ignition: 4 percent.
4. Compatible with other concrete ingredients.
5. Obtain proposed fly ash from a source approved by the State Highway
Department in the State of California for use in concrete for bridges. A list
of pre-approved products may be obtained from the following website:
http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/esc/approved_products_list/
C. Admixtures:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
1. Air entraining admixtures: ASTM C260.
2. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures:
a. ASTM C494 Type A through E.
b. Conform to provisions of ACI 212.3R.
c. Do not use retarding or accelerating admixtures unless specifically
approved in writing by Engineer and at no cost to SCRRA.
d. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
e. Use chloride free admixtures only.
3. Maximum total water soluble chloride ion content contributed from all
ingredients of concrete including water, aggregates, cementitious materials
and admixtures by weight percent of cement:
a. 0.10 all concrete.
4. Do not use calcium chloride.
5. Pozzolanic admixtures: ASTM C618.
6. Calcium nitrate: ASTM C494 Type C.
7. Microsilica: ASTM C1240.
8. Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer and quantity as used in
establishing required concrete proportions in the mix design.
D. Water: Potable, clean, free of oils, acids and organic matter.
E. Aggregates:
1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C33, except as modified below.
2. Fine aggregate:
a. Clean natural sand.
b. No manufactured or artificial sand.
3. Coarse aggregate:
a. Crushed rock, natural gravel, or other inert granular material.
b. Maximum amount of clay or shale particles: 1 percent.
4. Gradation of coarse aggregate:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
a. Lean concrete and concrete topping: Size #7 or #8.
b. All other concrete: Size #57 or #67.
F. Concrete Grout:
1. Nonshrink nonmetallic grout:
a. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining, premixed with only water to
be added.
b. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion.
c. Mass expansion not to be created by gas liberation.
d. Minimum compressive strength of non-shrink grout at 28 days:
6500 psi.
e. In accordance with COE CRD-C621.
2. Epoxy grout:
a. 3-component epoxy resin system.
1) Two liquid epoxy components.
2) One inert aggregate filler component.
b. Each component packaged separately for mixing at jobsite.
c. Minimum compressive strength of epoxy grout shall be as specified
in the Plans.
G. Forms:
1. Prefabricated or job built.
2. Wood forms:
a. New 5/8 or 3/4 inches 5-ply structural plywood of concrete form
grade.
b. Built-in-place or prefabricated type panel.
c. 4 feet by 8 feet sheets for built-in-place type except where smaller
pieces will cover entire area.
d. When approved, plywood may be reused.
3. Metal forms:
a. Metal forms excluding aluminum may be used.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
b. Forms to be tight to prevent leakage, free of rust and straight
without dents to provide members of uniform thickness.
4. Chamfer strips: Clear white pine, surface against concrete planed.
5. Form ties:
a. Removable end, permanently embedded body type with cones on
outer ends not requiring auxiliary spreaders.
b. Cone diameter: 3/4 inches minimum to 1 inch maximum.
c. Embedded portion 1-1/2 inches minimum back from concrete face.
d. If not provided with threaded ends, constructed for breaking off
ends without damage to concrete.
e. Provide ties with built-in waterstops at all walls that will be in contact
with process liquid during plant operation.
6. Form release: Nonstaining and shall not prevent bonding of future finishes
to concrete surface.
H. Membrane Curing Compound:
1. ASTM C309, Type I-D.
2. Resin based, dissipates upon exposure to UV light.
3. Curing compound shall not prevent bonding of any future coverings,
coatings or finishes.
4. Curing compounds used in water treatment plant construction to be
nontoxic and taste and odor free.
I. Bonding Agent:
1. High solids acrylic latex base liquid for interior or exterior application as a
bonding agent to improve adhesion and mechanical properties of concrete
patching mortars.
2. Euclid Chemical Co. "Flex-Con."
3. L & M Construction Chemicals "Everbond."
4. Master Builders Solutions “MasterEmaco A660”
J. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. In contact with water or sewage:
a. Closed cell neoprene.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
b. ASTM D1056, Class SC (oil resistant and medium swell) of 2 to 5
psi compression deflection (Grade SCE41).
2. Exterior walking surfaces:
a. Asphalt expansion joint filler.
b. ASTM D994.
3. Other use:
a. Fiber expansion joint filler.
b. ASTM D1751.
K. Bead Board
1. The bead board panels shall be a minimum of two (2) inch thick, four (4)
feet wide, and 8 feet long and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C578.
2. Bead board coat: A suitable and compatible bonding material for
permanently adhering.
2.03 CONCRETE MIXES
A. General:
1. All concrete to be ready mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94.
2. Provide concrete of specified quality capable of being placed without
segregation and, when cured, of developing all properties required.
3. All concrete to be normal weight concrete.
B. Strength:
1. Provide specified strength and type of concrete for each use in structure(s)
as follows:
Type of Construction Concrete Maximum
Class* Slump
(Inches)
Street Surface Improvements
Concrete Pavement (not integral with curb) 565-C-3250 4”
Curb, Integral Curb and Pavement, Gutter, Walk, Alley 565-C-3250 4”
Aprons, Extruded Curb & Gutter
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
Sewer and Storm Drainage Facilities
Pipe Collars, Beam Support for Pipe, Pre-Cast Manhole 565-C-3250 4”
Components, Catch Basins, Sidewalk Culverts
Pipe Bedding and Encasement, Anchors and Thrust 520-C-2500 4”
Blocks, Wall Support for Pipe
Tunnel and Trench Backfill 520-C-2500 4”
Reinforced Structures
Bridges, Buildings, Retaining Walls 650-CW-4000 4”
Cast-In-Place Piles 650-CW-4000 4”
Channel and Boxes 650-CW-4000 4”
Walls and Deck 650-CW-4000 4”
Miscellaneous
Street Light and Traffic Signal Foundations, Survey 565-C-3250 4”
Monuments
Fence and Guard Post Foundations 565-C-3250 4”
Coarse Masonry Grout 610-E-2000G 10”
*Refer to SSPWC Section 201 for designation.
C. Air Entrainment:
1. Provide air entrainment in all concrete resulting in a total air content percent
by volume as follows:
MAX AGGREGATE TOTAL AIR CONTENT
SIZE PERCENT
1 inch or 3/4 inches 5 to 7
2. Air content to be measured in accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173,
or ASTM C138.
D. Slump - 4 inches maximum, 1 inch minimum:
1. Measured at point of discharge of the concrete into the concrete
construction member.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
2. Concrete of lower than minimum slump may be used provided it can be
properly placed and consolidated.
3. Pumped concrete:
a. Provide additional water at batch plant to allow for slump loss due
to pumping.
b. Provide only enough additional water so that slump of concrete at
discharge end of pump hose does not exceed maximum slump
specified above.
4. Determine slump per ASTM C143.
E. Selection of Proportions:
1. General:
a. Proportion ingredients to:
1) Produce proper workability, durability, strength, and other
required properties.
2) Prevent segregation and collection of excessive free water
on surface.
2. Minimum cement contents and maximum water cement ratios for concrete
to be as follows:
MINIMUM CEMENT, LB/CY MAXIMUM
MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE WATER CEMENT
SPECIFIED 1/2” 3/4” 1” RATIO BY
STRENGTH WEIGHT
4000 650 650 650 0.45
3. Substitution of fly ash: Maximum of 25 percent by weight of cement at rate
of 1 lb fly ash for 1 lb of cement.
4. Sand cement grout:
a. Three parts sand.
b. One part Portland cement.
c. Entrained air: Six percent plus or minus one percent air.
d. Sufficient water for required workability.
e. Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 3,000 psi.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
5. Normal weight concrete:
a. Proportion mixture to provide desired characteristics using one of
methods described below:
1) Method 1 (Trial Mix): Per ACI 318, Chapter 5, except as
modified herein.
a) Air content within range specified above.
b) Record and report temperature of trial mixes.
c) Proportion trial mixes per ACI 211.1.
2) Method 2 (Field Experience): Per ACI 318, Chapter 5,
except as modified herein:
a) Field test records must be acceptable to Engineer to
use this method.
b) Test records shall represent materials, proportions
and conditions similar to those specified.
6. Required average strength to exceed the specified 28-day compressive
strength by the amount determined or calculated in accordance with the
requirements of Paragraph 5.3 of ACI 318 using the standard deviation of
the proposed concrete production facility as described in Paragraph 5.3.1
of ACI 318.
F. Allowable Shrinkage: 0.048 percent per ASTM C157.
G. For Brackish or Saltwater Locations:
1. Calcium nitrate shall be added at a quantity of 5 gal per cubic yard.
a. Calcium nitrite solution shall contain 30 percent solids and shall
provide 15 lbs. per cubic yard chloride protection.
b. Mix shall also include 7 percent, by weight of cement microsilica.
2. Proposed admixture alternates must be approved by the SCRRA prior to
their use.
a. Any proposed substitution shall include:
1) Documentation as to the corrosion protection mechanism.
2) Test data documenting the stated level of protection offered.
3) Documentation that the proposed alternate meets a service
life of 100 years as calculated using Fick's Second Law of
Physics.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
b. All models shall use a reference diffusion coefficient of 2.81.
3. The Contractor may perform trial mixes prior to the delivery in order to
adjust the desired air content, set time, and slump.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FORMING AND PLACING CONCRETE
A. Formwork:
1. Contractor is responsible for design and erection of formwork.
2. Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct
size, shape, alignment, elevation and position.
a. Allowable tolerances: As recommended in ACI 347R.
3. Chamfer strips: Place ¾” chamfer strips in forms to produce ¾” wide
beveled edges on permanently exposed corners of members.
4. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement.
5. Tighten forms to prevent mortar leakage.
6. Coat form surfaces with form release agents prior to placing reinforcing
bars in forms.
B. Construction, Expansion, and Contraction Joints:
1. Provide at locations indicated.
2. Locate construction joints in beams and girders as shown in the Plans.
3. Install construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement with all
reinforcement continued across construction joints.
4. At least 48 hours shall elapse between placing of adjoining concrete
construction.
5. Thoroughly clean and remove all laitance and loose and foreign particles
from construction joints.
6. Before new concrete is placed, existing concrete surfaces must be
roughened to ¼” amplitude and coat all construction joints with an
approved bonding adhesive used and applied in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Embedments:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
1. Set and build in anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
other work that is attached to, or supported by concrete.
2. Use setting diagrams, templates and instructions for locating and setting.
3. Secure waterstops in correct position using hog rings or grommets spaced
along the length of the waterstop and wire tie to adjacent reinforcing steel.
D. Placing Concrete:
1. Place concrete in compliance with ACI 304R and ACI 304.2R.
2. Place in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections.
3. Begin placement when work of other trades affecting concrete is
completed.
4. Place concrete by methods which prevent aggregate segregation.
5. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 feet.
6. Where free fall of concrete will exceed 4 feet, place concrete by means of
tremie pipe or chute.
E. Consolidation: Consolidate all concrete using mechanical vibrators supplemented
with hand rodding and tamping, so that concrete is worked around reinforcement
and embedded items into all parts of forms.
F. Protection:
1. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather
extremes.
2. In cold weather comply with ACI 306R except as modified herein.
a. Do not place concrete on frozen ground or in contact with forms or
reinforcing bars coated with frost, ice or snow.
b. Minimum concrete temperature at the time of mixing:
OUTDOOR CONCRETE
TEMPERATURE AT TEMPERATURE AT
PLACEMENT (IN SHADE) MIXING
Below 30˚ F 70˚ F
Between 30˚-45˚ F 60˚ F
Above 45˚ F 50˚ F
c. Do not place heated concrete that is warmer than 80° F.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
d. If freezing temperatures are expected during curing, maintain the
concrete temperature at or above 50˚ F for 7 days or 70˚ F for 3
days.
e. Do not allow concrete to cool suddenly.
3. In hot weather comply with ACI 305R except as modified herein.
a. At air temperature of 90˚ F and above, keep concrete as cool as
possible during placement and curing.
b. Do not allow concrete temperature to exceed 90˚ F at placement.
c. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking due to rapid evaporation of
moisture.
d. Do not place concrete when the actual or anticipated evaporation
rate equals or exceeds 0.2 lbs/sf/hr as determined from ACI 305R,
Figure 2.1.5.
G. Curing:
1. Begin curing concrete as soon as free water has disappeared from
exposed surfaces.
2. Cure concrete by use of moisture retaining cover, burlap kept continuously
wet or by membrane curing compound.
3. Provide protection as required to prevent damage to concrete and to
prevent moisture loss from concrete during curing period.
4. Provide curing for minimum of 7 days.
5. Form materials left in place may be considered as curing materials for
surfaces in contact with the form materials except in periods of hot weather.
6. In hot weather follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 305R.
7. In cold weather follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 306R.
8. If forms are removed before 7 days have elapsed, finish curing of formed
surfaces by one of above methods for the remainder of the curing period.
9. Curing vertical surfaces with a curing compound:
a. Cover vertical surfaces with a minimum of two coats of the curing
compound.
b. Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the next
coat.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
c. Apply the first coat of curing compound immediately after form
removal.
d. Vertical surface at the time of receiving the first coat shall be damp
with no free water on the surface.
e. A vertical surface is defined as any surface steeper than 1 vertical
to 4 horizontal.
H. Form Removal:
1. Remove forms after concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage
from removal operations or lack of support but no sooner than 3 days after
placement of concrete.
3.02 CONCRETE FINISHES
A. Surfaces Exposed to View:
1. Provide a smooth finish for exposed concrete surfaces.
2. Remove fins and projections, and patch voids, air pockets, and honeycomb
areas with cement grout.
3. Fill tie holes with nonshrink nonmetallic grout.
B. Surfaces Not Exposed to View:
1. Patch voids, air pockets and honeycomb areas with cement grout.
2. Fill tie holes with nonshrink nonmetallic grout.
C. Troweled Finish:
1. Float finish surface.
D. Broom Finish: Immediately after concrete has received a float finish as specified,
give it a transverse scored texture by drawing a broom across surface.
3.03 GROUT
A. Preparation:
1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout:
a. Clean concrete surface to receive grout.
b. Saturate concrete with water for 24 hours prior to grouting.
2. Epoxy grout: Apply only to clean, dry, roughened, sound surface.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
B. Application:
1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout:
a. Mix in a mechanical mixer.
b. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout.
c. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
d. Completely fill all spaces and cavities below the bottom of
baseplates.
e. Provide forms where baseplates and bedplates do not confine
grout.
f. Where exposed to view, finish grout edges smooth.
g. Except where a slope is indicated on Plans, finish edges flush at
the baseplate, bedplate, member, or piece of equipment.
h. Protect against rapid moisture loss by covering with wet rags or
polyethylene sheets.
i. Wet cure grout for seven (7) days, minimum.
2. Epoxy grout:
a. Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b. Completely fill all cavities and spaces around dowels and anchors
without voids.
c. Obtain manufacturer's field technical assistance as required to
ensure proper placement.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. SCRRA will select a concrete testing agency that meets ASTM C1077-12 criteria
and requirements. The Contractor will pay for services of a concrete testing
agency to perform testing of concrete placed during construction.
1. Contractor to cooperate with SCRRA in obtaining and testing samples.
B. Tests During Construction:
1. Strength test - procedure:
a. Three cylinders, 6 inches diameter x 12 inches high, will be taken
from each sample per ASTM C172 and ASTM C31.
b. Cylinders will be tested per ASTM C39:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 20 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
1) One at 7 days.
2) Two at 28 days.
2. Strength test - frequency:
a. Not less than one test each day concrete placed.
b. Not less than one test for each 50 cy or major fraction thereof placed
in one day.
c. Not less than one test for each type of concrete poured.
d. Not less than one test for each concrete structure exceeding 2 cy
volume.
3. Slump test:
a. Per ASTM C143.
b. Determined for each strength test sample.
c. Additional slump tests may be taken.
4. Air content:
a. Per ASTM C231, ASTM C173, and ASTM C138.
b. Determined for each strength test sample.
5. Temperature: Determined for each strength test sample.
C. Evaluation of Tests:
1. Strength test results:
a. Average of 28-day strength of two cylinders from each sample.
1) If one cylinder manifests evidence of improper sampling,
molding, handling, curing or testings, strength of remaining
cylinder will be test result.
2) If both cylinders show any of above defects, test will be
discarded.
D. Acceptance of Concrete:
1. Strength level of each type of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if
both of the following requirements are met:
a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equals or
exceeds the required specified 28-day compressive strength.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 21 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
b. No individual strength test falls below the required specified 28-day
compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
2. If tests fail to indicate satisfactory strength level, perform additional tests
and/or corrective measures as directed by Engineer.
a. Perform additional tests and corrective measures at no additional
cost to SCRRA.
3.05 SCHEDULES
A. Form Types:
1. Surfaces exposed to view:
a. Prefabricated or job-built wood forms.
b. Laid out in a regular and uniform pattern with long dimensions
vertical and joints aligned.
c. Produce finished surfaces free from offsets, ridges, waves, and
concave or convex areas.
d. Construct forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar.
2. Surfaces normally submerged or not normally exposed to view: Wood or
steel forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar.
3. Other types of forms may be used:
a. For surfaces not restricted to plywood or lined forms.
b. As backing for form lining.
B. Grout:
1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout: General use.
2. Epoxy grout:
a. Grouting of dowels and anchor bolts into existing concrete.
b. Other uses indicated on Plans.
C. Concrete Finishes:
1. Unformed surfaces:
a. Use following finishes as applicable, unless otherwise indicated:
1) Troweled finish: All unformed surfaces.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 22 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
2) Broom finish: All walking surfaces.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Concrete Structures will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Precast Concrete Members will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
C. Concrete Pavement will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
D. Concrete in structures will be measured by the neat line dimensions shown on the
Plans or such other dimensions as may be ordered by the Engineer. No deduction
will be made for the volume occupied by bar reinforcing steel or other embedded
steel items.
E. Precast Concrete Members will be measured by the various types and lengths
shown in Contract Documents and for erecting the members as shown in the
Contract Documents.
F. Concrete Pavement area to be paid for will be calculated on the basis of the
dimensions shown on the Plans adjusted by the amount of any change ordered by
the Engineer. No allowance will be made for concrete pavement placed outside
those dimensions unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer.
G. Concrete and Concrete Aggregate Testing for field quality control conducted by
the testing agency selected by SCRRA is considered incidental to work under other
payment items under this Section and no separate measurement and payment will
be made to the Contractor.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 23 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Concrete Structures furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Precast Concrete Members furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
C. Concrete Pavement furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
D. The Contract Unit Price for concrete structures shall include full compensation for
all work involved in constructing the concrete work, complete-in-place, as shown
on the Plans, as specified in these Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.
E. The Contract Unit Price for concrete structures shall include full compensation for
all forming and shoring, joints, joint filler, joint seals and waterstops necessary for
constructing the concrete work complete-in-place.
F. The Contract Unit Price for concrete in reinforced concrete box and culverts, and
in headwalls, endwalls, and wingwallls for culverts shall also include the payment
for the earthwork involved with such structures.
G. The Contract Unit Price paid for furnishing precast concrete members shall include
full compensation for including reinforcing and prestressing steel as required, and
for doing all work involved in constructing and furnishing precast members at the
site of the work complete and ready for erection, as shown on Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
H. Concrete pavement shall be constructed in accordance with the thickness
requirements of the Plans and Specifications. Tolerances allowed for subgrade
construction and other provisions of these Specifications which may affect the
thickness shall not be construed to modify those thickness requirements.
I. All holes remaining in the concrete pavement after the thickness measurements,
if required, shall be completely filled by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s
expense.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 24 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
J. No additional compensation will be allowed the Contractor for any pavement
constructed in excess of the thickness requirements of the Plans and
Specifications.
K. Concrete and Concrete Aggregate Testing shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 03 31 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 03 31 00 - 25 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 04 22 00
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Furnish and lay concrete masonry units.
2. Furnish and place reinforcing steel.
3. Provide mortar, grout and grouting.
4. Place bolts, anchors, hardware, metal frames and other insert items.
5. Cure, Protect and clean finish work.
B. Related Specification Sections include but not are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel
2. Section 03 31 00, Structural Concrete
3. Section 05 55 00, Miscellaneous Metal
1.02 REFERENCES
A. All Work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements
of the referenced portions of the following publications to the extent that the
provisions thereof are not in conflict with other provisions of these Specifications.
B. CBC, California Building Code 2010.
C. CRSI, Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
D. IBC, International Building Code 2009.
E. UBC, Uniform Building Code.
F. ASTM C90, Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
1. ASTM C140, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete
Masonry Units and Related Units.
2. ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
3. ASTM C207, Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry
Purposes.
4. ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
5. ASTM C404, Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
6. ASTM C476, Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.
7. ASTM C780, Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction
Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
G. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Current or Latest Edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures.
1. Samples: Submit 3 samples each of each type of masonry unit required for
work to SCRRA for review prior to ordering, receiving or installing units in
field.
2. Submit coursing lay-up pattern of all wall corners, intersections, and
pilaster to SCRRA for approval.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Concrete Masonry units: Sample and test in accordance with ASTM C140.
1. Contractor shall notify the Testing Laboratory a minimum of 45 days in
advance of laying concrete unit masonry, to allow for testing of the units for
compression, shrinkage and absorption (absorption test requires 40 days).
2. The assigned Material Testing Laboratory shall receive 5 concrete masonry
units per test from masonry unit manufacturer (units as designed or
specified by SCRRA), performs and sends required test results to:
a. The SCRRA Construction Inspector
3. Contractor shall reflect time required for testing in Construction Schedule.
B. Portland Cement: Sample and test in accordance with ASTM C150.
C. Mortar: Sample and test in accordance with ASTM C 780
D. Grout: Sample and test in accordance with ASTM C 404.
E. Compressive Tests:
1. Mortar: Not less than 900 psi at 7 days and 2,800 psi at 28 days.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
2. Grout: Not less than 1,000 psi at 7 days and 2,000 psi at 28 days.
3. Do not test 28 day specimen when 7 day tests exceed 28 day requirements.
F. Inspection during Laying: A SCRRA Inspector will be constantly present during
laying of reinforced masonry.
G. All costs incurred for retests and re-inspections required because of failure of
original tests will be charged to Contractor, and deducted from Contract price by
Change Order.
H. Should core testing be required by the Engineer, all masonry cut or damaged by
coring operation shall be removed and replaced with new masonry to match
adjoining work. All costs of removal and replacement shall be borne by Contractor.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Store units above ground on level platforms which allow air circulation under
stacked unit.
B. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use.
C. Handle units on pallets or flat bed barrows. Free discharge from conveyor units or
transportation in mortar trays not permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Unit Masonry: Modular medium weight conforming to ASTM C90, grade
N-1 (Hollow load-bearing concrete unit masonry). Angelus Block Co. (818) 767-
8576
1. Provide open-end units at walls to be grouted.
2. Provide closed-end units at walls and at openings where ends will be
exposed in finish work; provide bond beam blocks where horizontal
reinforcing is indicated.
3. Provide special shapes and accessory units at locations indicated on
Drawings.
4. Except as otherwise specified, provide units in standard gray color.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, from one source.
C. Mortar: ASTM C161.
D. Grout: ASTM C476.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
E. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
1. Kel-Crete may be substituted for lime, when approved by SCRRA.
F. Admixture for Grout: Grout Air No. 2 use, as manufactured by Sika Chemical
Corporation, must be approved by SCRRA, see Section 01 40 00 - Quality
Requirements.
G. Water: Potable and fresh.
H. Cleaning Materials: Shure Klean No. 600 Detergent by Process Solvent Co. Inc.
I. Miscellaneous Materials: As required to complete work.
J. Sampling and testing of mortar, see Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING
A. Mortar
1. Mortar shall be pre-blended SPEC MIX Masonry Mortar, Type S as
manufactured by E-Z MIX INC., Sun Valley, CA., conforming to the
proportion & Property specification of ASTM C-270.
2. Colored Mortars: Colored Mortar shall be pre-blended SPEC MIX Masonry
Mortar Type S, Color to match concrete masonry unit as manufactured by
E-Z MIX Inc., Sun Valley, CA., conforming to the proportion & property
specification of ASTM C-270.
B. Colored Mortar custom match samples shall be submitted for approval prior to
construction.
C. Grout: Dry, loose volumes. Mix proportions shall be verified by Material Testing
Laboratory.
1. Portland cement 1 part
2. Grout sand 2 ¼ parts to 3 parts
3. Pea gravel 1 to 2 parts
4. Water to produce required consistency
D. Measurements: Proportion by accurate volume measurements. Measure in
suitable calibrated devices that can be easily and accurately checked at any time.
1. Add water for workable consistency.
2. Shovel measurements shall not be permitted.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
E. Mixing: Place, sand, cement, and water in mixer in that order, while mixer is
running; mix for 3 minutes, add lime, and admixture (for grout), and continue mixing
until a uniform mass is secured, but in no case less than 10 minutes.
1. 1. Equipment for mixing and handling mortar and grout shall be
acceptable to SCRRA.
2. 2. Batches of less than one sack of cement, and fractional sack
batches will not be permitted.
F. Retempering Time Limit; Retemper on mortar boards, for not less than 3 minutes
not more than 10 minutes when required, by adding water into a basin formed by
mortar, and working mortar into it. Dashing, or pouring of water over mortar will not
be permitted.
1. 1. Do not retemper mortar which has become hard or non-plastic.
2. 2. Discard mortar which has not been used within one-hour after
original mixing.
G. Ready-Mix Grout: Grout batched off-site and delivered by mixer truck shall be
subject to same procedures and controls as prescribed in UBC. See Section 01
40 00 - Quality Requirements.
3.02 LAYING CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
A. Workmanship: Erect masonry plumb and truc to line; with straight, level joints of
uniform thickness. Maintain proper equipment, skilled masons, and adequate
supervision. Keep masonry clean during and after laying.
1. Lay-out and incorporate all embedded hardware items.
2. Assist other trades with built-in items which require cutting and fitting of
masonry.
3. Cut block units with a steel saw or carborundum wheel. Trowel or chisel
cutting will not be permitted.
B. Reinforcing Steel: Place as indicated on Drawings. Except as indicated otherwise,
place reinforcement in accordance with Standards of Concrete Reinforcing Steel
Institute (CRSI): Conform also to requirements specified in Section 03 21 00 -
Reinforcing Steel.
C. Shoring: Provide, in place, temporary shoring for lintels, strong enough to carry
load without deflecting. Remove temporary shoring after masonry has been in
place 28 days.
D. Laying Block: Clean all dirt and dust from surfaces before laying.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
1. Foundation preparation: Sandblast tops of concrete starting surfaces,
wash-off by high pressure water jet, and slurry coat surfaces with neat
cement grout and bond to masonry as if it were masonry.
2. After bond bed has hardened slightly, spread mortar to required joint
thickness. Lay blocks with 3/8” mortar bed on entire horizontal surface. Fill
head joint solid, shove tightly to adjoining units. All joints shall be 3/8”.
a. Hold racking to a minimum.
b. No toothing allowed.
c. If it becomes necessary to move a unit after it has been set in place,
remove the unit, discard the mortar, and re-set the unit in fresh
mortar.
3. Anchor Bolts: Provide 1” minimum grout space around all protruding bolts.
4. Bond: Unless otherwise indicated, noted, or specified, lay all units in
common running bond.
5. Finish joint Treatment: Unless otherwise indicated, noted, r specified, cut
both interior and exterior joints flush, and tool slightly concave to a dense,
uniform surface.
6. Grouting: Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, completely fill all cells with
grout.
3.03 LOW-LIFT GROUTING (FOR HOLLOW UNIT MASONRY)
A. After mortar in joints has firmly set, cores are cleaned of mortar and debris,
reinforcing is properly in place and checked, grout cells in 2’-0”. Maximum lifts,
using specified pea gravel grout mix.
B. Grout walls sold, without voids.
C. Grout may be placed by pump, tremie or bucket, using hoppers to avoid spilling on
exposed surfaces.
D. Place an initial 2’-0” high lift all around thoroughly compact, then place balance of
each lift, compacting again through total lift, using hardwood spading sticks or
pencil vibrators.
E. Stop grout pours 1-1/2” below top of each lift.
F. Remove and discard spilled grout from upper units before grout can harden.
G. Bracing: Adequately brace walls against wind and other forces during construction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
3.04 HIGH-LIFT GROUTING OPTION (FOR HOLLOW UNIT MASONRY)
A. Contractor may utilize high-lift grouting method, provided following qualifications
and requirements are met. High-lift grouting shall apply only to cell sizes available
with 8” and wider block units and shall conform to uniform Building Code, Section
2104.6.1.
B. Contractor shall be responsible for any blowouts or displacement of masonry units
due to hydrostatic pressures, voids, or ungrouted areas due to bridging of grout or
blocking of cells from any cause.
C. Use bond beam units, inverted for start course, and omit alternate blocks or cut
openings in alternate face shell on bottom course for cleanouts.
D. Use a hardwood stick to knock off projecting mortar fins. Wash out every cell
thoroughly using a water jet which has sufficient force to remove all mortar from
the interior of the cells and from reinforcing steel.
E. Plug each cleanout by setting a “soap” in mortar into opening and securely bracing
it in place to prevent displacement. If masonry is not exposed in finish work,
cleanouts may be formed.
F. Grouting:
1. Grout masonry cells slid, without voids.
2. Do not place grout until masonry has set a minimum of 3 days in warm 50˚
to 85˚ F. weather or 5 days in cool 35˚ to 50˚ F. damp weather.
3. Pump grout from mixer into grout cell space as rapidly as practical. Discard
grout not in place within one hour after water was first added to batch.
4. Place grout with maximum slump without segregation. Place in continuous
pour, in maximum lifts of 4’-0”, with approximately 20 minutes elapsed time
between any 2 successive lifts.
G. Compacting:
1. Compact and re-compact grout using ¾” light-weight flexible calbe
vibrators.
2. First compaction shall be completely to bottom of lift immediately after
placement, and in case of subsequent lifts, through previously placed lift.
3. Top lift shall be re-compacted not sooner than 30 minutes after grout has
been placed.
4. Vibrating of reinforcing steel is not permitted.
H. Bracing: Adequately brace walls against wind and other forces during construction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
3.05 CURING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove all efflorescence and grout stains.
B. Do not saturate masonry with water for curing or any other purposes.
C. Where atmosphere is dry, dampen the wall surface with a very light fog spray for
3 days to help cure mortar in joints.
D. At completion of masonry work, remove all misplaced mortar, grout or other foreign
substances, and clean surfaces which will be exposed in finish work with specified
cleaner, or with clean water and stiff fiber brushes.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Concrete Unit Masonry will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by
the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans
will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Concrete Unit Masonry furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Concrete Unit masonry including concrete foundation, concrete slab, concrete
curb, concrete masonry unit walls, reinforcing steel, grout, wood gate doors,
flashing, structural steel and preformed metal roof, anchor bolts, hinges, hardware,
fasteners, locks, roof drains and incidentals shall be paid for at the Contract Unit
Price as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, fees, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals necessary for construction of concrete masonry trash
enclosure described by the Contract Documents
END OF SECTION 04 22 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 04 22 10
ENVIRONMENTAL PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The work specified in this Section includes providing labor, materials, tools and
equipment to furnish and install a permeable concrete paving stone system
(Environmental Paving Section) as indicated on the plans and as specified herein.
B. The Environmental Paving Section supplier shall be selected by the Contractor,
but shall comply with the intent to provide a structural section that will absorb and
detain surface water (Rainfall) that is collected by the track underdrain system,
clean water from the oil/water separator system, and runoff from the AC paving
section, holding the majority of the water for absorption into the subgrade.
C. The Environmental Paving Section was derived from the “Permeable Interlocking
Concrete Pavements” publication by the Interlocking Concrete Pavement Institute
(ICPI), and from systems similar to the “Bio-Aquifer Storm System (BASS) supplied
by Orco Pavingstones of Riverside, California, located at www.orco.com. This
system or an approved equal permeable paving system with nominal ½ inch
spacer bars to provide permeability, may be proposed by the Contractor.
In addition to the sample section provided by the representative “BASS” system, the
structural section will include an additional sand filter base course composed of 6” of
clean concrete sand.
1.02 RELATED WORK
Coordinate the Work of this Section with all other Contract Documents and in particular:
A. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete
B. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork
C. Section 34 11 27 – Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 10 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 10 Environmental Paving
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Base Course: Layer of open-graded aggregate beneath the bedding course layer,
comprised of small- to medium-particle-sized crushed stone (typically 1/2” to 1”).
Recommended depth of the base layer shall be four inches (4”), but shall not
exceed six inches (6”).
B. Bedding Course: Layer of open-graded aggregate directly beneath the unit pavers,
comprised of small particle-sized crushed stone chips (typically 1/4” to 3/8” rock).
Also commonly called the “setting bed”. Recommended depth of the bedding
course layer shall be two inches (2”).
C. Bundle: Several layers of paver clusters stacked vertically, packaged, and tagged
for shipment. Also commonly called a “cube”.
D. Chamfer: A 45-degree beveled edge around the top of a paver unit, usually 1/8” to
¼” wide. It helps prevent edge chipping and delineates the individual paver units.
E. Cluster: The group of pavers forming a single layer taken from a bundle of pavers
or the group of pavers held by the clamp of a paver laying machine.
F. Flats: The portion of the vertical side faces of a paver other than the spacer bars.
G. Laying Face: The working edge of the pavement where the laying of pavers is
occurring.
H. Mechanical Installation: The use of specialized machines to lift clusters of pavers
from the bundles and place them on the prepared bedding course. These
specialized machines are designed specifically for this application.
I. Method Statement: The paver installer’s and manufacturer’s plan for construction
and quality control of the pavers.
J. Spacer Bars: Small protrusions on each side of pavers which are used have spacer
bars.
K. Sub-base Course: Layer of open-graded aggregate beneath the base course layer,
comprised of large particle-sized (typically 2-1/2” to 3”) crushed stone. Depth shall
vary depending upon site conditions and specific requirements. Minimum depth of
the sub-base course shall be twelve inches (12”).
L. Void Filler: Open-graded aggregate used to fill the openings in the paver units. The
bedding course aggregate may be used as the void filler. Smaller particle-sized
stone chips (1/8” to 1/4”) are preferable, if available.
M. Wearing Course: The top surface of the paver surrounded by a chamfer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 10 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 10 Environmental Paving
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The dimensions of the manufacturer’s proposed mold assembly including pattern,
dimensions of all cavities including radii, spacer bars and the top portion of the
mold known as the head or shoe.
B. Installation plan, including grading methods, placement of structural section
courses, compaction methods, and edge treatments.
C. Material samples of pavers showing the range of variation within the selected
color(s) for approval by SCRRA, void filler aggregate, bedding course aggregate,
base and sub-base course aggregate including a current sieve analysis of each
showing conformance to the specifications.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Control Plan
1. The installer and manufacturer shall establish, provide and maintain a
quality control plan. The quality control plan shall provide reasonable
assurance that the materials and completed construction submitted for
acceptance will conform to the contract requirements. Although guidelines
are established and certain requirements are specified, they are minimal
and the installer and manufacturer shall assume full responsibility for
meeting all requirements.
2. The installer and manufacturer shall agree upon a method for measuring
the clusters at the factory and in the field. That method shall be submitted
in writing to the owner for approval.
3. The Quality Control Plan shall contain at a minimum, but not limited to, the
following elements:
a. The manufacturer’s quality control procedures.
b. The manufacturer’s production records showing at a minimum the
date of manufacture, a mix design designation, mold number, mold
cycles, and sequential pallet numbers. Copies of such records shall
be made available to the owner upon request.
c. The installer’s quality control procedures, including but not limited
to, dimensional control methods, paving machine(s) head
adjustment, typical daily work schedule to insure that all pavers
placed on the bedding course on any given day are adjusted as
required and vibrated, and installation of void filler completed at the
end of that work day. (Exception: The installation of the void filler
may not be installed for the first and second day due to start-up
procedures.)
B. Sampling and Testing
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 10 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 10 Environmental Paving
The manufacturer shall employ an independent testing company, qualified to
undertake tests in accordance with the applicable standards specified herein. Test
results shall be provided to the installer and the owner, upon request.
Pavers shall be tested for density and dimensional variation, compressive strength
(ASTM C140), density and absorption (ASTM C140) and abrasion resistance (ASTM
C418).
The initial testing frequency shall be one set of tests for each 100,000 full-sized
pavers delivered to the site or at any time a change in the manufacturing process,
mix design, cement, aggregate or other material occurs.
1. The following number of full-sized pavers shall be randomly sampled for
each test: five (5) for dimensional variation; three (3) for density and
absorption; three (3) for compressive strength; and three (3) for abrasion
resistance.
2. If all pavers tested pass all requirements for a sequence of 400,000 pavers
then the testing frequency may be relaxed to one set of tests for each
500,000 full-sized pavers. If any pavers fail any of the required tests then
the testing frequency shall revert to the initial testing frequency.
3. When any of the individual test results fail to meet the specified
requirements, the cube of pavers represented by that test sample shall be
rejected. The manufacturer shall provide additional testing of paver
samples taken from both before and after the rejected test sample to
determine the sequence of the paver production run that should be
rejected. In addition, the testing frequency shall revert to the initial testing
frequency specified in Item B.1 for the balance of the project.
4. Additional testing, as described above, shall be carried out at no additional
expense to the owner. The sequence of pavers found to be defective shall,
if they have been delivered to the site, be removed from the site promptly
at no expense to the owner or installer.
5. Pavers shall be sound and free from defects that would interfere with the
proper placing of the pavers or impair the strength or performance of the
construction.
C. Site Specific Work Plan (SSWP)
The installer and manufacturer shall each prepare a SSWP describing the overall
plan to complete the work. This plan shall include at a minimum:
1. The quality control plan.
2. A description of the anticipated mold life, rate and effect of mold wear on
pavers produced, individual mold runs, and a mold rotation plan.
3. Clear diagrams of the site showing the proposed starting point of the
installation and the proposed direction of installation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 10 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 10 Environmental Paving
4. A method of measuring the clusters at the factory and in the field.
5. A description of the anticipated growth in cluster size due to mold wear and
a plan for dealing with that growth or other dimensional variances.
6. A description of the personnel and equipment to be employed for each
portion of the work including manufacture, installation and quality control.
7. The manufacturer’s proposed daily production rate and mold life for this
project and supply data demonstrating experience on similar past projects.
Installer shall state the proposed daily installation rate.
8. The installer’s intention to machine-lay or hand-lay the pavers and provide
qualifying experience to date for the appropriate method of proposed
installation for the ecological system.
D. Qualifications
Every manufacturer and installer shall demonstrate that they have supplied and/or
installed Environmental pavers for projects of a similar nature. Qualifications of
installers shall be submitted at the time of bid, without exception.
E. Paver Manufacturer’s Qualifications
1. The manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five (5) years successful
experience in the manufacture of interlocking concrete block pavers.
2. The manufacturer shall have sufficient production capacity and established
quality control procedures to produce, transport, and deliver the required
number of pavers with the quality specified, without causing a delay to the
work.
3. The manufacturer shall have suitably experienced personnel and a
management capability sufficient to produce the number of quality pavers
as depicted on the contract Plans and as specified herein.
F. Paver Installer’s Qualifications
1. Installer shall provide installation history, including references in writing
with contact information, demonstrating to the satisfaction of the owner
their ability to perform the paver installation and related work indicated in
the plans and specifications.
2. The installer shall have suitably experienced personnel and a management
capability sufficient to execute the work shown on the contract Plans and
specified herein.
3. The installer’s foreman shall demonstrate, including references, a minimum
of 5 years experience in the installation of unit paver systems similar in size
and nature to this project.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 10 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 10 Environmental Paving
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Concrete paving stones shall be delivered to the site, with or without pallets, in
such a way that no damage occurs to the product during hauling and unloading.
B. All pavers shall be delivered to the site in approximately the chronological order in
which they were manufactured. They shall be staged on the site as per the SSWP.
C. Each bundle of pavers shall be marked with a weather-proof tag identifying at a
minimum the manufacturer, the date of manufacture, the mold number, the project
name and phase for which the pavers were manufactured and the sequential
bundle number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ENVIRONMENTAL PAVERS
A. All interlocking paving stones shall comply with the quality specifications for solid
concrete interlocking paving units as required per ASTM C936.
1. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C150.
2. Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C33 for normal weight concrete aggregate
(no expanded shale or lightweight aggregate) except that grading
requirements shall not necessarily apply.
3. Water: Clean and free from any deleterious matter.
4. Other Constituents: Air-entraining admixtures, integral water repellents and
finely ground silica shall have a proven record of performance and shall
conform to the relevant ASTM standards.
5. Compressive Strength: At the time of delivery to the work site, the average
compressive strength of the pavers shall not be less than 8,000 psi, with
no individual unit less than 7,200 psi. Testing procedures shall be in
accordance with ASTM C140.
6. Absorption: The average absorption shall not be greater than five percent
(5%) with no individual unit result greater than seven percent (7%) per
ASTM C140.
7. Resistance to Freezing and Thawing: The manufacturer shall satisfy the
purchaser by laboratory testing that the paving units have adequate
resistance to freezing and thawing per ASTM C67. The specimens shall
have no breakage and not greater than 1% loss in dry weight of any
individual unit when subjected to 50 cycles of freezing and thawing.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 10 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 10 Environmental Paving
8. Dimensional Tolerances: Pavers shall be prismatic in plan and formed with
straight, uniform edges. The tolerance for the flat portions of the sides shall
not exceed 1/32” as measured with a steel straight edge. “Slumped” pavers
exceeding this tolerance will be rejected. The length, width and thickness
of the paving stones shall meet the allowable tolerances specified in ASTM
C936.
9. Pigment: Conforming to ASTM C979.
10. Color: Monochromatic colors [specify] or natural gray (no pigment).
11. The measurement across a cluster from any cube shall not vary by more
than the allowable tolerance of the individual paver units (1/16” per paver
times the number of pavers across the cluster).
2.02 VISUAL INSPECTION
A. All units shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper
placing of the unit or impair the strength or permanence of the construction. Minor
cracks incidental to the usual methods of manufacture, or minor chipping resulting
from customary methods of handling in shipment, delivery and installation, shall
not be deemed grounds for rejection.
2.03 AGGREGATE MATERIALS
A. Bedding Course and Void Filler Aggregate
The bedding course and void filler aggregate shall be washed, crusher run, free of
organics and soluble salts, or other contaminants likely to cause efflorescence. The
grading requirement shall be in compliance with the following gradation chart.
ASTM Sieve Size Percent Passing (by weight)
1/2 inch 100 – 100
3/8 inch 94 – 100
¼ inch 39 – 94
No. 4 23 – 39
No. 8 8 – 23
No. 16 0 - 8
B. Base Course Aggregate
The base course aggregate shall consist of washed, crusher run, open-graded stone
and meet the following gradation chart:
ASTM Sieve Size Percent Passing (by weight)
1-1/2 inch 100 – 100
1 inch 90 – 100
3/4 inch 48 – 90
½ inch 27 – 48
¼ inch 12 – 27
No. 4 0 - 12
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 10 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 10 Environmental Paving
C. Sub-Base Course Aggregate
The sub-base course aggregate shall consist of washed, crusher run, open-graded
stone and meet the following gradation chart:
ASTM Sieve Size Percent Passing (by weight)
4 inch 100 – 100
3 inch 80 – 100
2-1/2 inch 50 – 80
2 inch 20 – 50
1-1/2 inch 5 - 20
1 inch 0 – 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SUBGRADE
A. The Engineer shall verify that the subgrade has been shaped and compacted in
conformance to the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the plans, to
provide for the construction of the Environmental Paving System pavement
structure.
B. Site grades can be raised to the design subgrade elevation using clean native
earth fill (free of deleterious material). This fill should be placed in lifts not
exceeding six inches (6”) and compacted to a minimum of ninety-five percent
(95%) Standard Proctor density. The final subgrade profile should be uniformly
compacted to a minimum of ninety-five percent (95%) Standard Proctor density
and proof-rolled using a vibratory steel drum roller to delineate soft areas.
Removing the unstable soil and replacing with clean, dry compacted earth fill shall
be performed to repair these areas.
3.02 SUB-BASE COURSE
A. The thickness of the sub-base course layer will depend upon the subgrade soil
conditions and the anticipated traffic loadings. It is recommended that a site
assessment be carried out by an experienced qualified geotechnical engineer to
determine the required thickness of the sub-base course.
B. The sub-base course shall consist of a minimum thickness of twelve inches (12”)
and be compacted using a vibratory smooth-drum roller. It shall be installed in lifts
not to exceed six inches (6”). Upon completion of the sub-base course installation,
the area shall be proof-rolled using a heavy rubber-tired vehicle (such as a loaded
tandem truck) to identify any areas requiring additional compaction. The sub-base
course shall be installed to the elevation and cross-section per the plan
documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 10 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 10 Environmental Paving
3.03 EDGE RESTRAINTS
A. All edge restraints shall be constructed as shown on the plans and in place prior
to the installation of the base course, bedding course and pavers. Poured-in-place
concrete curbs are recommended for the Bio-Aquifer Storm System.
3.04 BASE COURSE
A. The base course shall consist of a thickness of four inches (4”), placed in one lift,
and be compacted using a vibratory smooth-drum roller until there is no visible
movement of aggregate under static rolling. The base course shall be installed to
the elevation and cross-section per the plan documents.
3.05 BEDDING COURSE
A. The bedding course shall be spread loose in a uniform layer to give a depth after
compaction of the paving units of two inches (2”), plus or minus 1/2”. The contractor
shall screed the bedding course using either a mechanical screed beam apparatus
or by the use of screed guides and boards.
B. The screeded bedding aggregate shall not be subjected to any traffic by either
mechanical equipment or pedestrian use prior to the installation of the paver units.
The voids left after the removal of the screed rails shall be filled with loose
aggregate as the paver bedding course proceeds.
3.06 ECOLOGICAL PAVERS
A. Lay pavers in the pattern as shown on the Plans. Lay pavers away from the existing
laying face or edge restraint in such a manner as to ensure that the pattern remains
square. Chalk lines shall be used upon the bedding course to maintain straight
joint lines. Joint spacing between pavers shall be between 1/8” and 1/4”; however,
the joint width may need to be increased to 3/8” (if necessary) to maintain straight
joint lines. Lines and grades shown on the plans shall be established and
maintained during the installation of the wearing course.
B. Pavers shall be cut using a table-mounted masonry saw. Block splitting shall not
be permitted. All cut faces shall be vertical. Dry cutting of the pavers shall be
performed utilizing a dust collection system.
C. Once the pavers have been placed upon the bedding course and all cut pavers
have been inserted to provide a full and complete surface, inspect the pavers for
damaged units and remove and replace those units. Once all pattern lines have
been straightened, the void filler shall then be placed into the paver openings to
the top of the chamfer on the pavers and the surface swept broom clean.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 10 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 04 22 10 Environmental Paving
D. The pavement surface shall be compacted to achieve consolidation of the bedding
course and paving stones and brought to design levels and profiles by two passes
of a suitable plate compactor. Compaction of the pavers shall be accomplished by
the use of a vibratory plate compactor capable of a minimum of 4,500 pounds of
compaction force. No compaction shall be permitted within three feet (3’) of
unrestrained edges of the pavement. After compaction, inspect the pavers for
damaged units and remove and replace those units.
E. On completion of vibration after void filling, the surface tolerances shall be plus or
minus ½” from finish levels. The pavers shall be flush to ½” above edge restraints.
Additional void filler material shall be swept in the paver voids, as required, to within
½” from the bottom of the chamfer on the paving stones. Upon completion, the
wearing course surface shall be swept clean of all excess materials. Remove from
the site all surplus materials, equipment and debris resulting from these
operations.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Environmental Paving will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by
the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans
will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Environmental Paving furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 04 22 10
SCRRA Standard Specifications 04 22 10 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 05 12 23
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Principal work in this Section:
1. Canopy including structural steel framing, beams embedded in concrete,
columns, corrugated metal, gutter, column caps, cladding and trim
complete with all shop and field connections.
2. Furnish anchor bolts, loose bearing plates, wedges, guying and bracing as
required for this work.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete
2. Section 05 55 00 – Miscellaneous Metals
3. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coatings
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with all applicable local, State and Federal Codes Standards,
Specifications and Recommended Practices, latest edition thereof and in
particular:
1. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code
2. AWS A2.4: Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Non-Destructive
Examination
3. AISC Steel Construction Manual ASD – 9th Edition
4. AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings
5. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges
6. Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the
Engineering Foundation - Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM
A325 Bolts.
7. ASTM A36: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
8. Uniform Building Code – current or latest Edition
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 12 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 12 23 Structural Steel
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals:
1. Shop drawings: Complete shop drawings and erection diagrams for this
work. Make submittals as complete as possible on their first submittal.
a. Should more than one submittal be required, later submittals shall
clearly identify material added or revised subsequent to previous
submittal.
b. Indicate all shop and erection details, including cuts, copes,
connections, holes, threaded fasteners, rivets and welds.
2. Current qualifications and certifications for welders used for this Work.
3. Proposed welding sequence and welding qualifications to indicate the
method of all welded connections. Identify all welds, both shop and field,
in accordance with AWS A2.4.
B. Mill test reports for structural steel as specified.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator's qualifications: All structural steel fabrication shall be performed in the
shop of a fabricator with a current valid AISC Major Building Certificate.
B. Tests to be made and paid for by the Contractor:
1. Foreign-supplied steel or steel that cannot be identified: Make one tension
and one bend test for each 50 tons or fractional part thereof, of each shape,
heat or melt of stock used.
2. Tests: Take test specimens under the direction of an approved Testing
Laboratory and machine to dimensions required by the applicable ASTM
Specifications.
3. Develop test procedure to assure that steel conduit penetrations of canopy
gutter for canopy lights has been welded watertight and that water does not
leak through penetrations. Submit test procedure for approval. Conduct
test at each penetration.
4. Fabricate and set up temporary silhouette of 10-foot section of canopy
replicating canopy outline, height and location so clearance measurements
can be verified with train positioned on Track 13 prior to Track 13 removal
during construction. SCRRA will arrange for train to be positioned on Track
13 during test. Conduct clearance measurement between simulated
canopy and rail car.
C. Tests will not be required for the following:
1. Mill order steel:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 12 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 12 23 Structural Steel
a. Steel ordered from the mill, cut to lengths, identified by heat
numbers, and accompanied by mill test reports, may be used
without testing provided it conforms to these Specifications.
b. In case of controversy, make tension and bend tests of the steel in
accordance with applicable ASTM standards, either locally or at the
mill, as specified hereafter for local stock.
2. Local stock steel: Local stock structural steel that can be identified by heat
number and is accompanied by mill test reports may be used without
testing provided it conforms to these Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structural steel: ASTM A 36.
B. Steel tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Standard, Schedule 40
D. Fastening materials:
1. High-strength steel bolts, nuts and washers:
a. Bolts: ASTM A 325, Slip Critical.
b. Nuts: ASTM A563
c. Washers: ASTM F436
2. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM F1554.
E. Paint primer: Specified in 09 90 00 Painting and Coatings.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication shall be equal to that produced in modern structural steel shops, and
shall conform to the applicable provisions contained in the AISC Code of Standard
Practice, except where the drawings or these specifications differ, they shall take
precedence.
B. Wire-brush structural steel before its fabrication to remove all loose mill scale and
heavy rust that would prohibit primer from satisfactorily bonding to it. Straighten
structural steel members that do not conform to AISC tolerances by non-injurious
methods.
C. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with the referenced AISC specifications
and the following tolerances:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 12 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 12 23 Structural Steel
1. After punching or working the component parts of a member, remove twists
or bends before the parts are assembled.
2. A variation of 1/32 inch will be permissible in the overall length of members
with both ends finished for contact bearing, as defined in the AISC
Handbook.
3. Members without ends finished for contact bearing, which are to be framed
to other steel parts of the structure, may have a variation from the detailed
length not more than 1/16 inch for members 30 feet or shorter, and not
more than 1/8 inch for members over 30 feet long.
4. Unless otherwise specified, structural members, whether of a single rolled
shape or built-up, may vary from straightness within the tolerances allowed
for wide flange shapes by ASTM A 6, except that the permissible tolerance
for deviation from straightness of compression members shall be 1/1000 of
the axial length between points which are to be laterally supported. Sharp
kinks and/or bends will be cause for material rejection.
5. Any permissible deviation of depths of girders may result in abrupt changes
in depth at splices. Take up all such differences at bolted joints, within the
prescribed tolerances, with fill plates. The weld profile may be adjusted at
welded joints to conform to the variation in depth provided the minimum
cross section of required weld is furnished, and the slope of the weld
surface meets AWS requirements.
D. Make all holes by punching or drilling; burned holes will not be acceptable.
E. Prepare and prime all structural steel as follows:
1. Prepare steel in accordance with SSPC-SP10, White Metal. Paint the
same day with zinc-rich primer specified applied in accordance with the
primer manufacturer’s printed instructions, including minimum dry film
thickness.
2. Protect painted work until paint is thoroughly dry. Do not load material for
shipment until shop coat is fully dry. Touch-up damaged primer
immediately after delivery to site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
Inspect adjacent construction and make sure that all conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely execution of this work have been corrected before proceeding.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 12 23 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 12 23 Structural Steel
3.02 ERECTION
A. Erect all structural steel in accordance with the Drawings and the referenced AISC
Specifications, except provide washers on bolted connections using ASTM A 325
bolts regardless of the tightening method used. Use hardened washers with high
strength bolts as required by ASTM A 325.
B. Field assembly:
1. Members and section shall be of sizes, weights, shapes and arrangements
indicated, closely fitted and finished true to line and in precise position
necessary to allow accurate erection and proper joining of parts in the field.
2. Drifting to enlarge unfair holes will not be allowed.
3. Rolled sections, except for minor details, shall not be heated without prior
approval.
C. Contact:
1. Component parts of built-up members shall be well pinned and rigidly
maintained in close contact using clamps or temporary bolting during
welding.
2. Compression joints depending upon contact bearing shall have bearing
surfaces accurately milled perpendicular to their axis, or as detailed.
D. Gas Cutting:
1. Use of a cutting torch is allowed where the metal being cut is not carrying
stress during the operation, and provided stresses will not be transmitted
through a flame-cut surface.
2. Make gas cuts smooth and regular in contour.
3. To determine the effective width of members to cut, deduct 1/8 inch from
the width of the gas cut edges.
4. Make the radius of re-entrant gas cut fillets as large as practicable, but no
less than 1 inch.
E. Punching, drilling and reaming:
1. Material may be punched 1/16 inch larger than the nominal diameter of the
bolt, wherever the thickness of the metal is equal to or less than the
diameter of the bolt plus 1/8 inch.
2. Where the metal is thicker than the diameter of the bolt plus 1/8 inch, the
holes shall be drilled or sub-punched and reamed.
3. The die for sub-punched holes, and the drill for sub-drilled holes, shall be
1/16 inch larger than the nominal diameter of the bolt to be accommodated.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 12 23 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 12 23 Structural Steel
4. Finished holes shall be precisely located to insure passage of bolts through
assembled materials without drifting.
5. Enlargement of holes necessary to receive bolts shall be done by reaming.
6. Poor matching of holes will be sufficient cause for rejection.
F. Bolting: Use high-strength steel bolts (A 325, slip-critical, Class A) hot dipped
galvanized. Conform to the latest edition of Specifications for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts as approved by the Research Council on
Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation.
G. Structural steel shall be erected by professional riggers and shall be carefully
planned and laid out.
1. Erect this work plumb, square and true to line and level, and in precise
positions as indicated.
2. Provide temporary bracing and guys wherever necessary to provide for
loads and stresses to which the structure may be subjected, including those
due to erection equipment and its operation, and leave in place as long as
it may be necessary for safeguarding all parts of the work.
H. Temporary connections:
1. As erection progresses, this work shall be securely bolted up as necessary
to maintain the steel in proper position while field bolting and welding is
being done, and as necessary to take care of dead loads, wind, seismic,
and erection stresses.
2. No field welding or high-strength bolting shall be done until this work has
been properly aligned, plumbed and leveled.
I. Set column base plates in exact position, both as to alignment, level and elevation
and support on steel wedges, or equivalent, until the grout thereunder has
thoroughly set.
1. The center of each base shall be true to the column center within 1/16 inch.
2. Plates shall be exactly level on both axes.
J. Sequence: The erection of structural steel shall be carried out in proper sequence
with the work of other trades, and shall be framed, bedded, and anchored to related
work in strict accordance with the Drawings.
3.03 WELDING
A. Welding and welded joints: Detail and execute welds in accordance with the
requirements of the American Welding Society Standards D1.1, unless otherwise
modified by the referenced AISC Specifications or as otherwise noted on the
Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 12 23 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 12 23 Structural Steel
1. In the event of conflicts, the Drawings shall take precedence.
2. Structural welding shall be done by one of the following processes:
a. Shielded Metal Arch Welding Process
b. Gas-Metal Arc and Flux-Cored Arc Welding
c. Submerged Arc Welding
B. Operators qualifications: Thoroughly trained and experienced in arc welding of
structures, capable of making uniformly reliable butt and fillet welds in flat, vertical
and overhead positions, and producing neat, consistent work in actual operation.
1. Operators shall be certified in accordance with AWS requirements and
shall have a valid local certification.
2. If welder's re-certification is required, it shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to obtain it.
C. Storage and care of electrodes: Comply with the combined recommendations of
the AWS and the electrode manufacturer's recommendations. When in conflict,
comply with the more stringent requirements.
1. The coatings of low-hydrogen type electrodes shall be thoroughly dry when
used. Electrodes of any classification that have been wet shall not be used
under any conditions.
D. Preparation: Thoroughly clean surfaces to be welded of all paint, grease, scale
and foreign matter.
1. Clean welds each time the electrode is changed and chip entire area of
hand-guided and controlled flame cut edges before welds are deposited.
2. In general, surfaces made by automatic or mechanically guided and
controlled equipment need not be ground or chipped before being welded.
E. Characteristics of welds: After being deposited, welds shall be wire brushed and
shall exhibit uniform section, smoothness of welded metal, feather edges without
undercuts of overlays and freedom from porosity and clinkers. Visual inspection at
edges and ends of fillet welds shall indicate good fusion and penetration into base
metal.
F. In assembling and during welding, hold components with sufficient clamps or other
adequate means to keep parts straight and in close contact.
1. Take precautions when welding to minimize stress and distortion due to
heat.
2. Do not weld in windy weather until adequate wind protection has been
provided and set up.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 12 23 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 12 23 Structural Steel
3. Welds or parts of welds found defective may be removed using the air-arc
process or power chisels and replaced with satisfactory welds.
G. Tack welds shall be subject to the same quality requirements as the final welds
except that:
1. Pre-heat is not mandatory for single pass welds which are re-melted and
incorporated into continuous submerged arc welds.
2. Defects such as undercut, unfilled craters and porosity need not be
removed before the final submerged arc welding.
3. Tack welds not incorporated into the final weld shall be removed. Tack
welds incorporated into the final weld shall be cleaned thoroughly and
multiple pass tack welds shall have cascaded ends.
H. Peening, in accordance with AWS Article 309, is allowed at the fabricator's option.
3.04 ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Furnish all anchor bolts and connection material to be embedded in the concrete
when and as required to maintain job progress.
B. Provide the necessary drawings and templates for the setting of such anchor bolts
and connection material in the concrete forms.
C. Perform setting anchor bolts in hardened concrete, necessitated through error or
oversight, and in existing concrete work, under the Engineer's direction in suitable
drilled holes solidly grouted in place, or embedded in an approved structural epoxy.
3.05 GROUTING BEARING PLATES
A. Be responsible for maintaining bearing plates in proper location and in proper level
while they are being grouted. Note that all grouting is specified to be performed by
Section 03 31 00, Structural Concrete.
3.06 TOUCH-UP
A. Clean abraded areas of shop primer to bright metal, and touch-up with same
primer used for shop priming. Extend touch-up at least 2 inches onto sound,
undamaged primer.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The registered Deputy Building Inspector employed by SCRRA will inspect field
welding and high-strength bolting of structural steel framing in accordance with
Building Code Requirements. Coordinate with the registered Deputy Building
Inspector and afford him full and safe access to the work as required for the
performance of his duties.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 12 23 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 12 23 Structural Steel
B. The registered Deputy Building Inspector will be required to certify in writing upon
completion of this work that all welding and high-strength bolting has been
performed in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and Building Code
Requirements.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Structural Steel will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Embedded Beams at Double Column/Staircase Structure, Canopy Gutter, Gutter
Waterproofing, Gutter Trim, Corrugated Metal Deck and End Closure, Galvanized
Steel Trim at End Closure, Columns, Column Cladding, Fabricated Column Caps,
Column Steel Trim, Concrete Canopy Column Foundations at Single Columns will
be included in this Section and are considered incidental to work under this Section
and will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Structural Steel furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 05 12 23
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 12 23 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 05 52 00
HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section addresses the products, materials and work for the installation of
metal hand railing, stainless steel hand railing, Right-of-Way (ROW) Security
Gates, and pedestrian barricade as shown on the Contract Plans and as specified
in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
2. Section 05 12 23 - Structural Steel
3. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code-Steel
B. SSPWC: Standard specifications for Public Works Construction, Current Version
C. CALTRANS: State of California Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications Current Version
D. American Iron and Steel Institute: Type 302 and 304 Steel
E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ANSI A12.1 Safety Requirements
for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings and Toeboards
F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
2. D4956 Standard Specifications for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic
Control
G. FF-S-92B: Federal Specification Screw, Machine, Slotted, Cross Recessed or
Hexagon Head
H. State of California, Department of Industrial Relations, Division of Occupational
Safety and Health (CAL/OSHA): As applicable to railing
I. Use finishes for stainless steel complying with “Metal Finishes Manual” by
NAAMM.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 52 00 Handrails and Railing
J. The sheet Work, except as otherwise indicated or specified, shall comply with
“Architectural Sheet Metal Specifications” and “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”
by SMACNA.
K. SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4005, Pedestrian Barricade and Metal Hand
Railing Details. Use sleeve post detail from Pedestrian Barricade Detail for
Removable Metal Hand Railing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures:
1. Shop Drawings: In accordance with the Contract Plans, showing the details
and dimensions of all removable metal hand railing and metal hand railings,
sleeve post, and posts and fences. Note dimensions which have been field
verified.
B. Welding procedures and welder qualifications and welder registration as required
by the American Welding Society.
1. Manufacturer's product data for non-shrink, non-ferrous cement grout.
C. Shop Drawings showing layout, locations, Sections, elevations, details,
dimensions, finishes and installation details.
D. Certified test reports, as required, for materials specified in Part 2 - Products.
E. Submit Shop Drawings for the fabrication and erection of stainless steel
assemblies and proprietary products which are not otherwise completely shown by
manufacturer’s data sheets. Include plans and elevations at not less than one-inch
to one-foot scale, and include details of sections and connections at not less than
three inches to one foot scale. Show anchorage and accessory items, and finishes.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All uncoated spots or damaged coating shall be repaired by hot-dip process. Small
areas as determined by the Engineer may be repaired by recoating them with
“Galvicon” or “Gavalloy” or approved equivalent.
B. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
C. Set handrails and posts true to location, alignment and grade as indicated in the
Contract Plans. The railings shall present a smooth, uniform appearance in their
final positions.
D. Painting of Rails: In accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating,
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 52 00 Handrails and Railing
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL PIPES
A. Pipe for post, sleeve post, rail and pickets shall be seamless steel pipe, conforming
to ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces – For the fabrication of Work which will be exposed to view, use
materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes. Do not use materials
which have stains and discolorations, including welds which do not match the
materials in color and grain characteristics.
B. Surface Flatness and Edges – For exposed Work provide materials which have
been cold-rolled, cold-finished, cold-drawn, extruded, stretcher leveled, machine
cut or otherwise produced to the highest commercial standard for flatness with
edges and corners sharp and true to angle or curvature as required.
2.03 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Use AISI Type 302 or Type 304 (at fabricator’s option), except as otherwise
indicated. Comply with the following general standards, with specific type, alloy,
heat treatment and finish as required to produce the specific Work. Finish products
to a No. 4 directional satin unless otherwise shown or specified. Protect with
adhesive paper covering.
1. Sheet – ASTM A167, ASTM A480, and AISI Type 302 or 304
2. Plate – ASTM A167
3. Bar Stock – ASTM A276
4. Tubing – ASTM A269
5. Castings – ASTM A296, iron-chromium, nickel
6. Extruded Shapes – Manufacturer’s standards
2.04 FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGE MATERIALS
A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal – Provide the alloy and type required for
strength, workability, compatibility, and color match after grinding smooth and
finishing the fabricated product.
B. Fasteners – Some basic metal or alloy as the metal fastened, and finished to match
in color and texture. Comply with FS FF-S-92 for machine screws. Provide the type
of fasteners indicated and provide Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 52 00 Handrails and Railing
C. Anchors and Inserts – Either furnish inserts to be set in concrete and masonry
Work, or provide other anchoring devices as required for the installation of
stainless steel Work. Furnish stainless steel or epoxy-coated inserts (See
Concrete and Masonry Sections for installation); provide toothed stainless steel
expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.05 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Fabricate from the thicknesses, sizes and shapes indicated, or if not indicated, as
required to produce Work of adequate strength and durability, without
objectionable deflections or “oil canning.”
B. Form exposed Work true to line and level, with flush surfaces and accurate angles.
Ease exposed edges to a 1/32-inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Miter
exposed corner joints and machine fit to a hairline joint.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously, grind smooth and flush on exposed
surfaces. For exposed metal finishes, use metals which will blend and match with
sheet metals being joined; discolorations or stains will not be acceptable for
exposed portions of natural finish metals. Comply with recommendations of AWS
for welding.
D. Provide brackets, plates and straps with each assembly, as may be required for
proper support and anchorage to other Work.
E. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap Work as may be required to receive finish hardware
and similar items of Work.
F. Preassemble Work at shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize
mechanical joints, splicing and assembly of units at the site.
2.06 RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS
A. Comply with ANSI A12.1 and CAL OSHA requirements for railings around floor
openings and exposed edges of floors, stairs, ramps, and similar locations. Install
railings and supports able to withstand a horizontal force of 150 pounds per linear
foot and vertical force of 100 pounds per linear foot at the top or 50 pounds per
foot along the top rail, whichever is greater.
B. In tubular members, where mechanical joints are necessary, use bar stock inserts
with flat-head screws located on the least visible surfaces. Where bends are
shown, form members to a smooth, uniform radius without distortion of the cross-
sectional shape.
C. Miter and cope members at corners and intersections. Bevel, weld and grind
smooth, without fillets, to form smooth transitions and maintain sharp lines.
D. Post-mounted railings – Use base plates as indicated.
E. Provide dissimilar metals isolation pads where required.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 52 00 Handrails and Railing
F. Comply with ASTM D4956 Standard Specifications for Retroreflective Sheeting for
Traffic Control for yellow sheeting on railing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION
Fabrication of metal hand railings and fencing shall be in accordance with SSPWC Current
Version Sub-Section 304-2.1.2.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Set stainless steel Work accurately as measured from established building lines
and levels, plumb and in true alignment with previously completed Work.
Temporarily brace or anchor securely in formwork where Work is to be built into
concrete, masonry or similar construction.
B. Securely anchor in place using concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Accurately fit mechanical joints together to form tight joints and uniform reveals
and shapes for joint fillers and sealants. Restore finishes that have been damaged
by shipment and installation.
D. Do not cut or abrade finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field.
Return units with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by
complete refinishing.
E. Remove protective coverings when there is no longer danger of damage to the
stainless steel Work from other Work yet to be performed. Restore protective
coverings which have been removed or damaged during shipment or installation
of the Work, if other Work is yet to be performed.
F. Form bends and simple and compound curves in tubing by bending members in
jigs to produce uniform curvature, maintain profile of member throughout bend
without buckling, twisting or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and
railing components.
G. Railing splices performed in field - Use epoxy structural adhesive or other
equivalent means standard with railing manufacturer. Field welding - Not
permitted. Railing splices - Butted to flush hairline joint and reinforced using
manufacturer's standard concealed fittings with concealed fasteners. Lay out Work
to position splices in inconspicuous locations.
H. Provide weep holes or other means for evacuation of entrapped water in hollow
Sections of railing members.
I. Provide wall returns at ends of wall mounted handrails, except where otherwise
indicated.
J. Close exposed ends of handrail and tubular rail members by use of plates welded
and ground smooth.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 52 00 Handrails and Railing
K. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings
to concrete or masonry Work. Fabricate and space anchorage devices as indicated
and as required providing adequate support. Coordinate anchorage devices with
supporting structure.
L. The galvanized bolt thread for removable metal hand railing shall not be deformed
after installation.
M. Removal of Existing Pavement - Remove the existing pavement by core drilling
pavement to the full depth of the existing pavement thickness in clean, straight
lines with neat edges. Haul all removed material off the work site daily and dispose
of in a legal manner.
N. Excavation - Remove material to the width and depth required for construction of
the pedestrian gate foundation. Take care not to disturb the bottom of the
excavation before the concrete for the foundation is placed. Replace excavation
below the required grade or more than the required width with the same class of
concrete specified for the foundation, at no additional cost to the Authority.
O. Foundation and Installation of Gate Posts
1. Inspection Required Before Placing Concrete - Do not deposit concrete
until the excavation, placing of the reinforcing steel, and placing of the gate
posts has been inspected and approved. Provide at least one working day's
advance notice that the excavation is ready for inspection and the
procedure is approved for installation of the gates.
2. Concrete - Class 520-C-3250 - Portland Cement Concrete shall be used
for the foundation.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Railings, Hand Railing, and ROW Security Gates will be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable,
as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Pedestrian Barricade will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 52 00 Handrails and Railing
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Railings, Hand Railing, and ROW security Gates will be paid for at the Contract
Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall
include full compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment,
supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans,
and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Pedestrian Barricade will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
C. Full compensation for furnishing and placing concrete footings, and connecting
new railing to structures and existing cross railing shall be considered as included
as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
END OF SECTION 05 52 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 05 52 10
PEDESTRIAN SWING GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work involves furnishing and installing self-closing pedestrian swing gates at the
highway-rail and pedestrian-rail grade crossings on the Metrolink commuter rail
system. Install gates on the locations shown on the Contract Plans.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
2. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel
3. Section 03 31 00 Structural Concrete
4. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating
5. Section 09 96 23 – Graffiti-Resistant Coating
1.02 REFERENCES
A. SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4002, Pedestrian Swing Gate Details.
1. SSPWC: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Current
or Latest Edition, Sections 201-1, Portland Cement Concrete, and 201-3,
Expansion Joint Filler and Joint Sealants.
2. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SWING GATES FABRICATION
Fabricate the swing gates as indicated in the Contract Plans.
A. Submittals Requirements - Submit Shop Drawings indicating bill of materials, and
details for fabrication and assembly for approval prior to commencing fabrication.
B. Demonstration of Swing Gate Operation
1. Shop-assemble and test the swing gates for proper operation before
installation at the worksite.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 10 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 52 10 Pedestrian Swing Gates
2. Assemble one gate section to demonstrate its opening and closing
operation, for approval, at the shop. Provide at least five (5) working days
advance notice for the gate operation demonstration before any further
gate fabrication work is done and before any installation work commences.
If the gate operation demonstration is not approved, make modifications to
the gate section and repeat the gate operation demonstration until approval
is obtained.
C. Gate Material - Fabricate the gate from steel tubing conforming to ASTM A500,
Grade B. Provide gate post caps fabricated from flat steel plate conforming to
ASTM A6, continuously welded in place, welded watertight, and made flush and
smooth with the gate posts.
D. Gate Hinges and Stop Plates
1. Fabricate the gate hinges and stop plates, except for the hinge sleeves,
from steel material conforming to ASTM A36. Neatly miter and cope all
intersections, weld continuously in place and finish so that adjoining surfaces
are flush and smooth.
2. Fabricate the gravity gate hinge top and bottom sleeves from hardened steel
conforming to ASTM A4140 heat treated and borided. Precision machine
to the nearest 0.001 of an inch. Polish the rotating curved contract surfaces
of the top and bottom hinge sleeves.
E. Galvanizing - After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize the swing gates including the gate
posts, gate frames, hinges (except the rotating curved contact surfaces of the top
and bottom hinge sleeves), and stop plates, in accordance with ASTM Al23 or
ASTM A153. Provide minimum weight of the galvanizing coating of 2.0 ounces per
square feet. Repair and re-coat any coating which has been shop or field cut,
burned by welding, or otherwise damaged so that the base metal is not exposed.
F. Gate Signs - Provide signs as indicated in the Contract Plans. Use reflective
sheeting on 0.080-inch aluminum sign panel. Provide anti-graffiti coating per Section
09 96 23
G. Welding - Welding shall conform to the requirements of American Welding Society
AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SWING GATE INSTALLATION
A. Existing Underground Utilities and Facilities - Identify existing underground utilities,
conduits, foundations, and other facilities which could be affected by the
construction, including railroad signal conduits. Hand dig to uncover these
underground facilities and implement the necessary measures to protect these
facilities during construction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 10 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 52 10 Pedestrian Swing Gates
B. Removal of Existing Pavement - Remove the existing pavement by core drilling
pavement to the full depth of the existing pavement thickness in clean, straight
lines with neat edges. Haul all removed material off the work site daily and dispose
of in a legal manner.
C. Excavation - Remove material to the width and depth required for construction of
the pedestrian gate foundation. Take care not to disturb the bottom of the
excavation before the concrete for the foundation is placed. Replace excavation
below the required grade or more than the required width with the same class of
concrete specified for the foundation, at no additional cost to the Authority.
D. Foundation and Installation of Gate Posts
1. Inspection Required Before Placing Concrete - Do not deposit concrete
until the excavation, placing of the reinforcing steel, and placing of the gate
posts has been inspected and approved by the Authority. Provide at least
one working day's advance notice that the excavation is ready for
inspection and the procedure is approved for installation of the gates.
2. Concrete - Class 560-C-3250 - Portland Cement Concrete shall be used
for the foundation.
E. Swing Gates Installation - Install swing gates on gate posts. Adjust gate operation,
as necessary, to ensure proper operation.
F. Replacement of Portland Cement Concrete Pavement – Match existing or the
following, whichever is greater. Use four inches of Class 520-A-2500 Portland
Cement Concrete pavement, placed over at least four inches of crushed aggregate
base material compacted to 95 percent relative compaction, to replace removed
Portland cement concrete pavement. Install paving tiles which match the size and
color of the existing paving tiles on the concrete. Submit a sample paving tile for
approval at least two (2) weeks before installation of paving tiles commences.
Carefully cut paving tiles in clean, straight lines with neatly sawed edges to match
existing tiles.
G. Pedestrian Traffic Control During Construction - Maintain pedestrian traffic flow at
all times during construction.
H. Bicycle Traffic Control During Construction – Maintain bicycle traffic flow at all
times during construction.
I. Submittal Requirements - Submit a pedestrian and bicycle traffic control plan for
approval before commencing construction work at the pedestrian crossing.
Describe in detail how pedestrian traffic will be maintained during construction,
including temporary pedestrian crossing requirements, measures to be
implemented for pedestrian safety in the vicinity of open excavation and other work
areas during construction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 10 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 52 10 Pedestrian Swing Gates
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Pedestrian Swing Gates will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by
the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans
will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Pedestrian Swing Gates furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Full compensation for furnishing and placing concrete footings, and connecting to
structures and existing railing shall be considered as included as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
END OF SECTION 05 52 10
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 52 10 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 05 53 00
METAL GRATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Heavy duty metal bar gratings
2. Metal frames and supports for gratings
3. Accessories required for a complete installation
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. Section 03 21 00, Reinforcing Steel
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide gratings capable of withstanding imposed
structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the
materials involved, including anchors and connections:
1. Sidewalks, Vehicular Driveways, Other Exterior At-Grade Locations:
Capable of withstanding HS20 traffic loads. At tracks, must support 8000
axle loads.
2. Personnel Platforms and Walkways: Capable of withstanding a uniform live
load of 250 lbf/sq. ft., plus dead load or a concentrated load of 3000 lbf,
whichever produces the greater stress.
3. Greater Loads: As required to support equipment or where indicated.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data including:
1. Clips and anchorage devices for gratings
2. Paint products
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for gratings. Include
plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Provide
templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 53 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 53 00 Metal Grating
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified Professional
Engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with applicable requirements of the
following:
1. NAAMM MBG 532, Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A Professional Engineer, legally qualified to
practice in the State of California, and experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of gratings that are similar to those indicated in material,
design, and extent.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing gratings similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in service performance,
as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, Structural
Welding Code-Steel and AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of other construction contiguous with
gratings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to
avoid delaying the Work.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for gratings, grating frames, and supports.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,
including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors,
that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to site in time for
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Obtain steel grating and products from a manufacturer specializing in fabrication
of the types of units required, which has tested its units for load bearing strength
and deflection, and has currently published load tables based on recognized
testing procedures.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 53 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 53 00 Metal Grating
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following, or equivalent approved as a comparable product:
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp.
2. All American Grating, Inc.
3. Harris Steel Ltd.; Fisher & Ludlow Div.
4. Ohio Gratings, Inc.
C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36 (A36M)
D. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510 (A510M)
E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011 (A1011M), structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade
205)
F. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653 (A653M), structural quality, Grade 33 (Grade
230), with G90 (Z275) coating
2.02 FASTENERS
A. Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and zincplated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.
Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below
with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed
when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E488, conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
metal alloy to be welded.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re-galvanizing welds in
steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: Fabricate grating sections in shop to greatest extent possible to
minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value
of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 53 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 53 00 Metal Grating
B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than
that needed to support indicated loads.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and sharp or
rough areas on exposed surfaces.
1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon steel components zinc
plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1) or 2 (A4)
stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F593 (ASTM F738M) and nuts
complying with ASTM F594 (ASTM F836M).
D. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Form from materials of size, thicknesses, and shapes indicated, but not less than
that needed to support indicated loads.
F. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
G. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately. See Section 05 55 00, Miscellaneous
Metals.
H. Unless otherwise specified, gratings shall be welded to their supports as indicated.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure.
Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure gratings, frames, and supports
rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
I. Traffic Surface: Plain.
J. Shop Finish: Hot-dip galvanized with a coating weight of not less than 1.8 oz./sq.
ft. (550 g/sq. m) of coated surface.
2.05 METAL BAR GRATINGS
A. Removable Grating Sections: Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to
entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated
or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.
1. Heavy Duty Grating: Minimum four weld lugs for each heavy-duty grating
section, with each lug shop welded to two bearing bars.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 53 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 53 00 Metal Grating
2. Furnish threaded bolts with nuts and washers for securing grating to
supports.
3. Furnish galvanized malleable iron flange clamp with galvanized bolt for
securing grating to supports. Furnish as a system designed to be installed
from above grating by one person.
B. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to
permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating gratings.
1. Edge band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with
bars of the same size and material as bearing bars.
C. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.
2.06 GRATING FRAMES AND SUPPORTS
A. Steel Frames and Supports: Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and
bars of welded construction to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as
necessary to receive gratings. Miter and weld connections for perimeter angle
frames. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.
B. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into
masonry.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. and
provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel straps 1-1/4 inches wide
by 1/4 inch thick by 8 inches long (32 mm by 6 mm by 200 mm).
C. Galvanize exterior and interior frames and supports.
2.07 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish gratings, frames, and supports after assembly.
C. Galvanizing: Apply zinc coating by the hot dip process complying with ASTM A123.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners
where necessary for securing gratings to in-place construction. Include threaded
fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through bolts, lag bolts, and other
connectors.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 53 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 53 00 Metal Grating
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
measured from established lines and levels and free from rack.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete or masonry.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld
connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted
or screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
3.02 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS
A. Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating
standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation
clearances and standard anchoring details.
B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and
fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer
for type of installation conditions shown.
C. Attach non-removable units to supporting members by welding where both
materials are the same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items and
no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of
this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on
the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 05 53 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 53 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 05 55 00
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Pull irons, inserts, channels and other items required by utility companies.
2. Miscellaneous metal angles, plates, bars, rods, studs, etc. shown or
required to complete the work.
3. Coated Woven wire mesh (metal mesh)
4. Shop-primed finish for all miscellaneous metal fabrications not receiving
galvanized finish, except for gratings.
5. Painted steel ship’s ladders and brackets
B. Coordinate work of this Section with all other Sections of this Specification and in
particular:
1. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcing Steel.
2. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coatings
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with all applicable local, State and Federal codes, specifications,
standards and recommend practices, and in particular:
1. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction: “Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings”.
2. AISI - American Institute of Steel and Iron: “Specifications for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.
B. AWS - American Welding Society: D-1.1, “Code for Welding in Construction”
C. ASTM
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 55 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 55 00 Miscellaneous Metals
1. Shop Drawings: Large scale, clearly indicating all methods of fabrication
and assembly, applicable field measurements, dimensions, weights,
materials, finishes and all other pertinent data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All steel fabrications shall be done by a licensed fabrication shop with a minimum
of five (5) years experience in this type of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel plates, bars and studs (including ship’s ladder):
1. Rolled shapes and plates: ASTM A36
2. Bars: ASTM A36
3. Studs: ASTM A1044 / A1044M
B. Steel tubing:
1. Cold-drawn tubing: ASTM A512, sunk drawn, butt welded, cold-finished
and stress relieved
2. Hot-formed tubing: ASTM A501, butt welded, cold-finished and stress
relieved
C. Iron castings:
1. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48, Class 30B
2. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47
D. Polyvinyl chloride coated and zinc coated woven steel wire with 11 GA core, 8GA
finish with custom color to be selected by Authority.
1. ASTM F668 2A
2. AASHTO M181
3. Type IV Class
E. Anchors: Expansion anchors by Hilti, Rawlplug Company, Inc., or equal. Provide
anchors of the types shown and required for the various conditions of use, installed
in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
F. Fasteners: Galvanized steel fasteners of the type, grade and class required for the
installation of miscellaneous metal items.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 55 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 55 00 Miscellaneous Metals
G. Welding electrodes: Low hydrogen type conforming to AWS D1.4, E70 XX Series.
H. Shop primer: Fabricator's standard thermosetting or air-drying shop primer
compatible with alkyd enamel finish paint specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting
and Coatings, applied in a uniform dry film not less than 1-1/2 mils thick.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Metal Work Exposed to View - Use materials that are smooth and free of surface
blemishes including pitting, seam marks, and roller and grinding marks, before
cleaning, treating and applying finishes including zinc coatings.
B. Use materials of size and thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, of required size
and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability in finished product for
intended use. Work to dimensions shown on reviewed and accepted Shop
Drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use types of materials
indicated for various components of Work.
C. Form exposed Work true to line and level, with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight, sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch
unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible
without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing Work.
D. Verify dimensions by accurate field measurement before fabrication where Work
of this Section adjoins preceding Work. Do not delay job progress; allow for
trimming and fitting metalwork where taking field measurements before fabrication
might delay the Work. Note on Shop Drawings dimensions verified by field
measurement.
E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners wherever possible. Exposed fasteners - f type indicated or, if not
indicated, use Phillips flat-head countersunk screws or bolts.
F. Pre-drill bolt and screw holes as indicated and required for attachment of
metalwork and adjacent materials.
G. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices to be set in concrete for installation of
metalwork. Coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid delay
H. Provide anchorage of type indicated. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as
indicated and required to provide adequate support for intended use of Work.
I. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metalwork as required to receive finish hardware and
similar items of Work.
J. Use hot-rolled steel bar for Work fabricated from bar stock, unless Work is
indicated to be fabricated from cold-finished or cold-rolled stock.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 55 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 55 00 Miscellaneous Metals
K. Pre-assemble Work in shop to greatest extent practicable; minimize field splicing
and assembly of units at Worksite. Disassemble units to extent necessary to
comply with shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and proper installation.
L. Where indicated as galvanized, complete shop fabrication before applying coating.
Remove mill scale and rust, clean and pickle units as required for coating. Apply
hot-dip zinc coating, two ounces per square foot, in accordance with ASTM A123.
M. Fabricate complete with anchors, inserts and hardware.
N. Form and finish to shape and size with sharp angles and lines.
O. Countersink metalwork to receive required hardware and to provide bevels and
clearances.
P. Weld on hardware mounting plates. Drill or punch holes for bolts and screws.
Conceal fastenings wherever possible.
Q. Grind exposed edges smooth. Construct joints exposed to weather to exclude
water and provide weep holes indicated.
R. Brackets, lugs and similar accessories required for installation - Include as part of
fabrication.
S. Welding:
1. Weld all shop and field connections continuously in accordance with the
referenced AWS specifications, unless bolted connections are specifically
shown.
2. Grind all exposed welds flush and smooth with parent metal surfaces.
3. All welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS requirements.
T. Form bent metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain
separation or otherwise impairing the work.
U. Bend pipe without collapsing or deforming the walls, to produce a smooth, uniform
curved sections and maintain uniform sectional shape.
V. Fabricate items in the largest sections practical to minimize field jointing.
2.03 FINISHING
A. Galvanizing: Galvanize plates and angles, after fabrication, to obtain a minimum
zinc coating of 1.25 ounces per square foot when tested in accordance with ASTM
A123.
B. Shop priming: After galvanizing shop prime steel surfaces as follows.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 55 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 55 00 Miscellaneous Metals
1. Clean steel surfaces of all oil and other foreign substances that would
interfere with paint bond in accordance with applicable SSPWC
specifications.
2. Apply pretreatment to cleaned steel surfaces using solution recommended
by SSPWC.
3. Apply the shop primer within the time limits recommended for the
pretreatment system used. The shop primer shall be a smooth and even
coating with a dry film thickness of not less than 1-1/2 mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspect adjacent construction and make sure that all conditions detrimental to the
timely and proper execution of this work have been corrected before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform all cutting, drilling and fitting required for the installation of this work. Install
all items accurately in their proper location, alignment and elevations, plumb and
level, free of rack as measured from established lines and levels. Provide
temporary bracing or anchors for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry
or similar construction.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of
shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and flush with parent metal
and touch-up shop paint coat.
C. Comply with AWS recommendations for welding procedures, appearance and
quality of welds made, and methods used to correct faulty welds.
3.03 TOUCH-UP OF DAMAGED SHOP PRIMER
A. Clean the damaged shop primer, sand smooth, re-clean and spot-prime with the
same paint used for shop priming.
3.04 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. Protect fabrications from construction damage.
B. Promptly replace work damaged beyond satisfactory field repair before its
acceptance, with new materials at no additional cost to Authority.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 55 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 05 55 00 Miscellaneous Metals
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 05 55 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 05 55 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 09 61 50
DETECTABLE WARNING PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes specifications for Detectable Warning Panels for pedestrian
grade crossings, curb ramps, and platforms at Metrolink stations.
B. Also included in this section are specifications for Directional Bar Tiles for platforms
at Metrolink Stations
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. B117 Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
2. C501 Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic
Tile by the Taber Abraser
3. D570 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
4. D638 Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
5. D695 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics
6. D790 Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced
Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
7. D1308 Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and
Pigmented Coating Systems.
8. D5420 Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen
by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact)
9. G155 Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of
Non-Metallic Materials
B. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards issued by U.S. Department of
Transportation
C. FTA ADA Circular C4710.0-3.5 C Staggered Dome Pattern
D. Caltrans, Permanent Pedestrian Facilities ADA Compliance Handbook
E. California Building Code
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 61 50 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 61 50 Detectable Warning Panels
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Submit Shop Drawings showing fabrication details; panel surface profile;
fastener locations; plans of panel placement including joints, and material
to be used as well as outlining installation materials and procedure.
a. Include procedures for containment and disposal of milling and saw
cutting waste water if the cut in method is to be used for installation.
2. The Shop Drawings do not need to feature a full dimensional layout of the
platform edges.
3. Platform Shop drawings shall depict the platform edge and end treatments.
4. Platform Shop drawings shall depict the placement and spacing of
directional bars.
5. Pedestrian crossing shop drawings shall depict the area of crossing,
showing dimension to handrail, edge of paving, or adjacent obstructions.
B. Product Data
1. Submit manufacturer's literature describing products and installation
procedures. Include product data for adhesives and sealants.
C. Samples
1. Submit the following samples:
a. Samples of panels measuring at least 12 inches x 12 inches.
b. Truncated Dome Panel sample shall include longitudinal edge with
integral flange and transverse ship-lap edge.
c. Directional Bar sample shall be a full size sample.
d. Samples of panels and sealant for verification of color match,
samples shall be clearly labeled.
e. Upon approval sample(s) may be full sized and if undamaged,
installed as part of the work.
D. Samples for Verification Purposes
1. Submit panels of the kind proposed for use.
E. Maintenance Instructions
1. Submit manufacturer's specified maintenance practices for each type of
panel and accessory as required.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 61 50 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 61 50 Detectable Warning Panels
F. Quality Assurance Submittals
1. Material Test Reports: Submit test reports from qualified independent
testing laboratory indicating that materials proposed for use are in
compliance with requirements and meet the properties indicated in this
Section. Tests which indicate performance for the panels shall have been
performed within three (3) years of the Invitation to Bid.
2. Submit list of projects in California that successfully demonstrate the
proposed products' durability and weatherability.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Panels and accessories, including panel adhesive, fasteners, and sealants, shall
be from a single source. Products shall have been in successful service for a period
of five (5) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications
1. Engage an experienced Installer certified in writing by panel manufacturer
as qualified for installation, who has successfully completed panel
installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
Project. Only persons who are thoroughly trained and experience in the
installation of the panels shall perform the work.
C. Contractor to demonstrate method of cutting groove to assure smooth, clean, and
neat cut for panel flange.
D. Detectable Warning Panel and Directional Bar Tile must be compliant with
ADAAG, PROWAG, and California Title 24 Requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Panel type shall be identified by part number on packages.
B. Packages shall be stored in a manner that preserves the new condition of the
panels.
1.06 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions and Protection
1. Conduct field operations only when environmental conditions fall within
those recommended by manufacturers of the products.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Panels shall be covered by a written warranty for a period of five (5) years from
date of final completion. The warranty includes defective work, breakage,
deformation, holes, delamination, fading and chalking of finishes, and loosening of
panels. Warranty shall include furnishing new materials, removal of existing
panels, and installation of new panels.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 61 50 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 61 50 Detectable Warning Panels
1.08 SPARES
A. Furnish a minimum of five (5) percent additional panels of the total amount installed
of each panel type, and corresponding fasteners or required adhesive. Deliver
spares to location (within 50 mile radius of work site) designated by the Engineer.
Furnish spare materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed and
enclose in protective packaging with appropriate identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELS
A. Subject to conformance with the requirements of this Section, use products
fabricated by the following manufacturers or approved equal:
1. Armor-Tile by Engineered Plastics, Inc. of Williamsville, NY
2. ADA Solutions, Inc., a division of SureWerx Inc., of Wilmington, MA
3. Access Products of Buffalo, NY
B. Panels shall be manufactured from a fiber reinforced polymer composite.
C. Panel color shall be Federal Yellow conforming to Federal Color No. 33538. Color
shall be homogeneous throughout the panel.
D. Truncated Dome Geometry
1. Truncated dome surface shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) Standards and California Building Code, and Caltrans A88A.
2. Truncated Dome Description:
a. Pedestrian Grade Crossings and Curb Ramps:
1) Square grid (in-line) pattern of raised truncated domes of
0.2-inch nominal height, base diameter of 0.9-inch and top
diameter of 0.45-inch
2) Truncated domes shall have a center-to-center (horizontally
and vertically) spacing of 2.35-inch as measured side by
side in-line(2.3 to 2.4 inches is acceptable).
b. Platforms:
1) Staggered pattern of raised truncated domes of 0.2-inch
nominal height, base diameter of 0.9-inch and top diameter
of 0.45-inch. , per FTA ADA Circular C4710.0-3.5 C
Staggered Dome Pattern.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 61 50 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 61 50 Detectable Warning Panels
2) Truncated domes shall have a center-to-center spacing of
1.67-inch diagonally, and center-to-center (horizontally and
vertically) spacing of 2.35-inch as measured side by side in-
line, (2.3 to 2.4 inches is acceptable).
c. In order to ensure a uniform appearance of the detectable warning
surface throughout the transit system, equivalent or equal products
with alternate patterns, colors or textrues will not be acceptable.
3. Truncated dome pattern shall align properly from panel to panel.
E. Directional Bar Geometry
1. See item D 1 above
2. Panel shall be 4 feet long by 3 feet wide, and consist of 3 rows of bars,
containing 16 bars per row. See ES 3203.
3. Directional bars shall be perpendicular to adjacent rail.
4. Surface applied Directional Bar tile is preferred.
5. Raised directional bars shall have the following measurements:
a. 0.20” height, plus or minus 0.01”
b. 11.0” length, plus or minus 0.3”
c. 1.3” base width, plus or minus 0.03”
d. 0.9” top width, plus or minus 0.02”
e. 3” on center bar spacing plus or minus 0.3”
F. Panel Configuration
1. Panel Thickness
a. At a minimum, the thickness of the body of Detectable Warning
Panel shall measure 3/16-inch (0.1875-inch) nominal.
2. Panel Size
a. Pedestrian Grade Crossings and Curb Ramps (In-Line Pattern):
1) Nominal Width 36-inch
2) Length to match gate opening
3) Minimum 7/16-inch thick deep flange along one long side.
4) Panels with full perimeter flange are also acceptable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 61 50 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 61 50 Detectable Warning Panels
b. Platforms (Staggered Pattern):
1) Nominal 24-inch x 48-inch
2) Minimum 7/16-inch thick deep flange along one long side
3) Upon approval panels with no flange may be used. Provide
method of installation to align edge.
3. Butt Joints
a. The detectable warning panel shall feature a butt joint detail from
panel to panel. Alternatively a ship lap detail may also be furnished.
G. Fastener Holes in Panel
1. Holes for fasteners shall be formed in the factory. Holes for fasteners,
whether made in the factory or in the field, shall be located only at the
centers of the truncated domes.
H. Performance
1. Panels shall comply with the following performance characteristics:
ASTM Test
Property Nominal Value
Method
Salt Spray (200 Hours) B117 No Change
Wear Resistance C501 500 (Min.)
Slip Resistance C1028 0.80 (Min.)
Water Absorption D570 0.05% (Max.)
Tensile Strength D638 19,000 psi (Min.)
Compressive Strength D695 28,000 psi (Min.)
Flexural Strength D790 25,000 psi (Min.)
Chemical Resistance D1308 No Stain or Discoloration
Gardner Impact Test D5420 550 in. lbf/in (Min.)
Accelerated Weathering (3000 Hours) G155 Delta E: 4.5 (Max.)
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners for Concrete
1. Color matched nylon expansion sleeves with 1/4 inch diameter by 1-1/2
inches long stainless steel drive pins, or as recommended by panel
manufacturer for specific job conditions and accepted by the Engineer.
B. Adhesive
1. Type approved by panel manufacturer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 61 50 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 61 50 Detectable Warning Panels
C. Sealant
1. Urethane sealant of type approved by panel manufacturer.
D. Backer Rod
1. Acceptable to sealant manufacturer. Where required, such as, at platform
expansion joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Apply adhesives, sealants and mechanical fasteners in strict accordance with the
guidelines set by their respective manufacturers.
B. Utilize manufacturer-provided template to lay out area to receive panels.
C. Form recess for panels by either milling with diamond blade head or casting recess
in place (at new paving) so that installed panel will still flush relative to adjacent
surface. Grind or form to the depth and width required by the approved shop
drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Finish cast-in-place recess with
equivalent of a light broom finish. When milled, substrate shall have a light ribbed
finish.
D. Contain and remove slurry resulting from concrete milling and saw cutting. Do not
wash slurry into track bed area.
E. For Panels with Flanges:
1. Utilize diamond bladed double headed wet saw to achieve parallel grooves
to receive panels. Both saw cuts shall be made simultaneously from the
same machine. Saw cut parallel to platform edge.
2. After saw cutting, vacuum and power wash surface with clean clear water,
free from all dirt and debris. Visually inspect surface for obtrusions or
foreign matter. If obtrusions are present, remove by grinding. Remove
foreign matter by grinding or further washing, as appropriate.
3. Immediately prior to application of the setting adhesive, inspect surfaces to
receive panel to ensure that they are clean, dry, free of voids, curing
compounds, projections, loose material, dust, oils, grease, sealers, and
other contaminants. Verify that surfaces are structurally sound and that
concrete has cured a minimum of 30 days. Obtain panel manufacturer's
representatives and Engineer's approval of surface preparation before
installing panels.
F. Set panels and install fasteners in accordance with panel manufacturer's
instructions and as follows:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 61 50 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 61 50 Detectable Warning Panels
1. Wherever possible, install full size (uncut) panels. Do not install panel
sections measuring less than 24 inches in length. Only cut panels where
absolutely necessary.
2. Maintain gap between panels for expansion and contraction in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
3. At platform expansion joints, cut panels on their short sides, finish cut
edges smoothly, and lay panels with cut edges aligned with the edges of
the substrate along the joints. Install fasteners on either side of the
expansion joint at the time of initial installation. After a minimum of 4 hours,
make a saw cut measuring 5/16 inch wide across the composite detectable
warning panel and fill with sealant. Make saw cut in the zone between
truncated domes.
a. Where there is platform curvature, composite detectable warning
panels shall be treated in a similar manner so that the joints remain
uniform across the width of the joint between successive panels.
However, in areas of platform curvature, the joint shall take on
somewhat of a triangular configuration.
4. Cutting through panel domes shall be kept to a minimum. Where less than
half of the truncated dome remains, grind off balance of dome; where over
half of the truncated dome remains, feather dome so as not to present a
tripping hazard.
G. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. After the area has been fully paneled and sealant system applied, clean panel
surface, following the manufacturer recommended maintenance and cleaning
procedures.
B. Protect sealant and panels against damage during construction period. Comply
with panel and sealant manufacturers' recommendations.
C. Protect panels against damage from rolling loads following installation by covering
with plywood or hardwood.
D. Clean panel by method specified by manufacturer.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Detectable Warning Panels will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 61 50 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 61 50 Detectable Warning Panels
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Detectable Warning Panels furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 09 61 50
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 61 50 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary and incidental to the
painting, and finishing the surfaces as indicated on the Contract Drawings, as
specified herein and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Painting shall include shop coat and field finish painting of all metal surfaces,
including the complete canopy, railings, handrails, base plates, covers, connecting
hardware, mounting brackets; field painting of railings and guardrails, fences,
flashings, pipe bollards, and exposed mechanical or electrical equipment including
housing; and the finish painting over shop coated exposed equipment.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcing Steel
2. Section 05 52 00 - Handrails and Railings
3. Division 05 - Metals
4. Division 26 - Electrical
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with all applicable local, State and Federal Codes, regulations,
specifications, standards and recommended practices, and in particular:
1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
2. Federal Specification
3. SSPWC: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Current
or Latest Edition
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures:
1. List of products: A complete list of products proposed for use on the
project; include manufacturers' product descriptions of all materials; obtain
approval before proceeding. Use the same manufacturers' products for all
coats of each individual finish unless otherwise approved in writing by the
Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 90 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coatings
2. Product data: Alternate manufacturers' published literature for specified
products and accessories as applicable, including manufacturers'
specifications, physical characteristics and performance data. Submit as a
supplement, manufacturers' instructions and directions for application if not
included in the manufacturers' published literature.
3. Samples: Of all paints and finishes proposed for use on the project,
minimum size 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. No painting or coating will be
accepted prior to approval of the color sample.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Application: Shall be by an experienced painter or a painting firm employing
experienced personnel.
B. Conform to manufacturers' specifications, directions and recommendations for
best results in the use of each of their products for each condition. If results are at
variance with Specifications, report the discrepancy to the Engineer for decision.
1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Delivery and storage: Deliver paint materials in unbroken, unopened containers
bearing the manufacturers' labels; do not open containers or remove labels until
the Engineer inspects and approves. Store materials in a dry location where the
indicated ambient temperature of storage is not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit.
B. Precautions: Take extraordinary care to prevent fire; open containers or
inflammable materials only as needed; keep rubbing cloths and oily rags in tightly
closed metal containers, or remove from the site daily. Benzine, gasoline, and
distillate will not be permitted on the job site.
C. Protection: Care shall be exercised in the handling of painting materials to ensure
that this work and the work of other trades are not damaged before, during, or after
the installation.
D. Replacements: Repair or replace damaged work, if any, as necessary to the
approval of the Engineer at no additional cost to SCRRA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. For metal surfaces paint materials shall be the products of Tnemec Co., Inc., or
equal products by Ameron Protective Coatings Group, Rust-Oleum Industrial
Coatings, Sherwin Williams, Porter International, or Pittsburgh Paints.
B. For gypsum board surfaces paint and stain materials shall be the products of
Dunn-Edwards or equal products by Frazee Paint Co. or Sherwin Williams.
C. Materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the product
of a single manufacturer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 90 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coatings
D. All paint materials shall be the respective equivalent, in the opinion of the Engineer,
to the several types of materials specified. Deliver all materials to the job site in
the original, unbroken containers, bearing the manufacturers' labels indicating the
contents and directions for use, storage, and handling.
E. Materials not specifically noted but required for the work, such as linseed oil,
shellac, thinners, etc., shall be the product of the approved paint manufacturer.
2.02 MIXING
A. Mix paint products according to the manufacturers' painted directions. Do not
adulterate in any manner except upon specific approval of, and in the presence of
the Engineer.
2.03 COLOR SELECTION
A. The color selection will be made by the Engineer from submitted manufacture’s
standard colors.
B. Submit color samples, allowing minimum two weeks for consideration before the
material to be painted is to be ordered and delivered or ready for painting.
2.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. The manufacturers' identification numbers and specifications listed are for the
purpose of indicating the type and quality of paint product desired for the purpose
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Apply paints in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations as to the
application, weather, and temperature conditions. Provide "highest" quality
workmanship performed to the Engineer's satisfaction. Use clean equipment and
brushes when applying paint; spread paint materials evenly, without runs, sags,
laps, or brush marks, without variations in color, texture, or sheen, and without
voids in the paint or coating coverage of any size.
B. Vary colors or sheen between coats and apply all coats to uniform thicknesses.
C. Cut sharp lines against glass, other materials, and different colors. Recoat suction
spots in the first coat as necessary to produce uniformity of color and gloss.
D. Refinish any work judged defective at no additional cost to SCRRA; repair all work
damaged during the progress of the construction.
E. Leave finished surfaces clean, completely covered, uniform in appearance, and
satisfactory to the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 90 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coatings
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Clean all surfaces thoroughly, removing all rust, mill scale, fabrication
films, dust, dirt, and other foreign matter from surfaces. Grind smooth all welds
flush with adjacent surfaces. Apply film to completely dry surfaces.
B. Galvanized metal: Thoroughly clean surfaces, wiping with mineral spirits or xylol.
If silicone surface treatments have been applied in the fabrication shop, use xylol;
remove silicates or similar surface treatments and deposits of "white rust" by
sanding or other approved abrasive methods. Thoroughly clean and rinse
contaminants from surfaces.
C. Ferrous metal surfaces: Thoroughly clean using mineral spirits, xylol, or toluol in
accordance with SSPWC-SP No. 1. Take care to ensure that adequate ventilation
is provided at all times when using solvents. Carefully rinse and clean surfaces
before applying paint.
D. Gypsum Board:
1. Remove dust, loose particles or other matter that would prevent proper
paint adhesion.
2. Check to see that joints and screw heads are properly covered with joint
compound and sanded smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
E. Condition of surfaces: Inspect and approve conditions of substrate surfaces
scheduled to receive paint; notify the Engineer of any surfaces unsuitable for
application as specified. The application of a Paint finish constitutes an
acceptance of the surface as suitable, unless directed to proceed in writing by the
Engineer. The work shall not be performed during wet or freezing weather, or until
surfaces have thoroughly dried from the effect of such weather.
F. Mixing and thinning: Mix and thin paint products in strict accordance with the
manufacturers' directions; mix and thin other materials in accordance with the
"best" trade practices as approved.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Number of coats: As specified for each type of finish.
B. Thickness of coats: Use ample undiluted materials; apply in a uniform thickness
over entire areas; do not exceed the manufacturers' recommended spreading rate
per gallon. Comply with DFT specified.
C. Color of coats: Tint prime coats if necessary to obtain uniform finish coats. Vary
color between coats; the final coat shall exactly match approved samples.
D. Approval of successive coats: Obtain the Engineer's approval of each coat before
the succeeding coat is applied; if this approval is not obtained, the Engineer
reserves the right to require an additional coat.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 90 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coatings
3.04 MECHANICAL OR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Apply primer and 2 finish coats as specified for the appropriate metal surface
according to the finish schedule.
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Use tarpaulins or drop cloths when working above or adjacent to completed work.
Clean all paint splatters and stains from finished surfaces. Protect all work from
dust and insects.
B. Protect all work until handover of the Work to SCRRA.
3.06 METAL SURFACES
A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as
indicated.
B. Surface preparation not performed under other Sections: SSPWC-SP11 Power
Tool Cleaning to bare metal all welds and damaged prime coat.
C. Paint system:
1. Spot prime for galvanized surfaces and surfaces primed with zinc-rich
primer: 90-97 Tneme-Zinc applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT.
2. First coat: Tnemec 60 Epoxoline applied at 4 to 6 mils DFT.
3. Top coat: Tnemec 75 Endura-Shield applied at 2 to 3 mils DFT.
3.07 GYPSUM BOARD
A. First coat: PVA sealer
B. Second coat: 100% acrylic
C. Third coat: 100% acrylic
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items and no
separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in
these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 09 90 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 09 90 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 09 96 23
GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Contractor furnishing all materials, labor and equipment
necessary and incidental to surface preparation, furnishing and application of a
clear graffiti-resistant coating to all accessible concrete, masonry, and porous
surfaces from finish grade or floor to 15 feet above finish grade or floor.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 03 31 00
2. Section 04 22 00
3. Section 09 90 00
1.02 REFERENCES
Comply with all applicable local, State and Federal Codes, regulations, specifications, standards
and recommended practices, and in particular:
1. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
A. Materials: Copies of a manufacturer's data.
B. Samples: 8.5 x 11 in. samples of coating applied to same substrates as the
Project. Coat one half of each sample and identify the coated side.
C. Certification: Duplicate copies of manufacturer's affidavit with each shipment of
materials delivered to the jobsite certifying that material furnished complies with
specified requirements.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Copies of the manufacturer’s instructions for graffiti
removal and maintenance.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sample panel:
SCRRA Standard Specification 09 96 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 96 23 Graffiti-Resistant Coating
1. Apply sample finish, approximately 10 ft. square, to wall areas, as directed
by the Engineer.
2. Obtain Engineer's approval of sample panel before proceeding further.
Approved sample panel will be used as a standard for the Project, and if
properly identified may remain a part of the Work.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Take all necessary precautions to prevent fire. Remove soiled rags and other waste items from
premises at end of each day's work, or store in metal containers with tightly fitting metal covers.
1.06 CONDITIONS
Environmental requirements:
A. Compliance with air quality regulations: VOC of coatings used for this work shall
not exceed limits prescribed by law.
B. Comply with coating manufacturer's recommendations for environmental
conditions regarding coating application.
C. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated.
D. Provide drop cloths, shields, barricades and other protection necessary to
safeguard adjacent surfaces not to be coated. Post signs immediately after
coating.
E. Provide and maintain protection as required to protect finished work from damage
until its acceptance.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. With closeout submittals, deliver one identified unopened gallon container of
graffiti-resistant coating, and a 5-gallon container of cleaner to be used for graffiti
removal, to Engineer. Label container with material type and area where used for
future identification.
B. Provide Engineer a copy of instructions for graffiti removal and maintenance
recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COATING
A. Sacrificial: SC-1 or SC-1X by ProSoCo, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
B. Color: Standard Color as selected by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specification 09 96 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 09 96 23 Graffiti-Resistant Coating
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
Examine surfaces to be coated for conditions that would adversely affect the permanence and
quality of this work. Make sure that unsuitable conditions are corrected before proceeding with
painting.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
Prepare surfaces to receive the coating in compliance with the coating manufacturer's printed
instructions.
3.03 COATING PREPARATION
A. Open containers only as required for use. Mix coating in designated areas.
B. Thoroughly stir and agitate coating to uniformly smooth consistency suitable for
proper application.
C. Do not reduce, change or use any materials except in compliance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
D. In all cases, prepare and handle coating to prevent deterioration and inclusion of
foreign matter.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Test coating on each type of substrate for compatibility and desired results before
proceeding further.
B. Apply coating only under conditions that will insure finishes free from blemishes
and defects.
C. Remove spillage and spatters on adjacent surfaces so as not to damage the
surface being cleaned.
D. Completed work shall match approved samples, as determined by the Engineer.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items and no
separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in
these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 09 96 23
SCRRA Standard Specification 09 96 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 10 14 53
ROADWAY SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Section Includes:
1. Traffic signs.
2. Accessories including but not limited to frames, brackets, supports, sign
posts, cabinets, connectors, fasteners, and anchors.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 – General Requirements.
2. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
3. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,
Section 10, Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel.
B. ASTM International (formerly American Society for Testing and Materials):
1. A36 (A36M) – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. A53 (A53M) – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot
Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
3. A123 (A123M) – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
4. A153 (A153M) – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron
and Steel Hardware.
5. A240 (A240M) – Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-
Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for
General Applications.
6. A307 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
PSI Tensile Strength.
SCRRA Standard Specification 10 14 53 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 53 Roadway Signage
7. A500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
8. A501 – Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
9. A666 – Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
10. A780 – Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
11. B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet
and Plate.
12. B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
13. B429 (B429M) – Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy Extruded
Structural Pipe and Tube.
14. B633 – Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on
Iron and Steel.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D1.1 – Structural Welding Code – Steel.
D. CE – U.S. Army Corps of Engineers:
1. CE CRD-C621 – Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Hydraulic-
Cement Grout (Non-shrink).
E. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. Paint 20 – Specification for Zinc Rich Primers (Type I, Inorganic, and Type
II, Organic)
2. SP 6 – Commercial Blast Cleaning
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00: Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Technical product specifications, anchor details and installation
instructions for products used in metal fabrication, including paint products, hinges,
locks, fasteners, light fixtures, and other components of work.
C. Coating Systems:
1. Include finish manufacturer’s technical information such as basic materials
analysis and installation instructions.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 53 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 53 Roadway Signage
2. List each material and cross-reference to the specific coating, finish system
and application.
3. Identify by manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection indicating all materials,
sizes, configurations and required location of connections, junction boxes,
and equipment provided under other Sections.
a. Include plans, elevations, details, sections, and connections.
b. Show anchorage and accessory items.
c. For structural elements, show fabrication and erection tolerances.
2. For structural elements, include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes,
and other pertinent data.
a. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length,
and type of each weld.
3. Provide setting Plans, templates, and directions for the installation of
anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others.
4. For connections designed by the fabricator as a part of fabricator’s
preparation of Shop Drawings, show stamp and signature of a structural
engineer registered in California.
5. Show approval of lighting supplier for all illuminated signs.
6. Include porcelain enameled steel panels, indicating method and
sequencing of attachment.
7. Equipment Provided by Others: Show all equipment and accessory items
provided by AUTHORITY or provided under other contracts.
E. Samples: Representative samples of materials and finished products.
F. Layout Drawings: Show sign layout at each location to assure all signs are
readable and do not block and are not blocked by other safety lights, signs, or
railroad or roadway equipment.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide work required under this section from sign
manufacturers regularly engaged in work of this magnitude and scope for minimum
of five years.
B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators
in accordance with the AWS Standard Qualification Procedure.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 53 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 53 Roadway Signage
C. Uniformity of Manufacture: For each component and process indicated, furnish
products of a single manufacturer.
D. Notify Engineer 15 days prior to 90 percent completion of the shop fabrication, so
that the work may be observed prior to delivery to job site.
1. Where fabrication is done more than 100 miles (160 kilometers) from job
site, allow 14 days for observation and review before fabrication and
installation of additional units.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication,
where possible.
B. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect sign units during transportation to AUTHORITY by wrapping all sign units
individually in soft, nonabrasive material.
B. Pay special attention to protection of sign faces with artwork and to porcelain
enamel finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where products or manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed
comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00,
Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Provide metal work composed of metals of the forms and types which comply with
requirements of referenced standards and which are free from surface blemishes
where exposed to view in the finished unit.
1. Exposed to view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, “oil
canning,” stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are
not acceptable.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A666, Type 304.
C. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer or finisher for
type of use and finish indicated, and with minimum strength and durability
properties of alloy and temper designated for each aluminum form required:
1. Sheets: ASTM B209, 5052-H32, panel quality, thickness as indicated on
Plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 53 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 53 Roadway Signage
2. Extruded Pipe and Tube: ASTM B429 (B429M), 6063-T6.
3. Extruded Bar and Shapes: ASTM B221, 6063-T6.
4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209, 6061-T6.
D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36 (A36M).
E. Galvanizing: G60 (Z180) zinc coating for steel fabrications; where zinc coating is
reduced below average thickness required by applicable standard referenced
above, apply galvanizing repair paint as specified.
1. Preparation for Shop Finishing: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
ornamental metalwork of grease, dirt, oil, flux and other foreign matter, and
treat with metallic phosphate process.
F. Fasteners: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless steel fasteners for exterior use and
zinc plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5,
where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Do not use metals which are corrosive or otherwise incompatible with
metals joined.
2. Provide tamper resistant fasteners where exposed to view or easily
accessible.
3. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of metal work components
and for attachment to other work except where exposed fasteners are
visable or are unavoidable.
G. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes
as recommended by producer of metal to be welded, complying with applicable
AWS Specifications, and as required for color match, strength and compatibility in
the fabricated items.
H. Anchors and Inserts: Provide anchors of type, size, and material required for type
of loading and installation condition shown, as recommended by manufacturer,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use nonferrous metal or hot dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior locations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.
2. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
I. Very High Bond (VHB) Adhesive: VHB adhesives recommended by manufacturer.
J. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory packaged, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous, gypsum free grout complying with CE CRD-C621.
1. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and
exterior applications as indicated on Plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 53 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 53 Roadway Signage
K. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in
steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20; two-component, moisture-cured urethane,
zinc-rich.
1. Material: Tnemec-Zinc 90-97.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
indicated product, a comparable product by one of the following, or
equivalent approved as a substitution:
a. Tnemec Company, Inc.
b. Keeler & Long, div. PPG Industries.
c. International Protective Coatings, Div. International Paint.
L. Traffic Signs: Minimum 0.067 inch thick (aka 14 gauge) sheet steel and
reflectorized porcelain white beaded background and black lettering; size required
by sign type and Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 56-2.
1. Post Mounted: 2 inch by 2 inch by 1/8 inch (50 mm by 50 mm by 3 mm)
galvanized steel pipe complying with ASTM A53; theft proof fasteners; set
in concrete footing.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Use materials of size and thickness indicated or as required to produce strength
and durability in finished product for use intended.
1. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on Shop Drawings, using proven
details of fabrication and support.
2. Use types of materials shown or specified for various components of work.
3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners wherever possible.
a. Use exposed fasteners of type shown.
4. Provide anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure.
Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for
intended use.
5. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to
receive finish hardware and similar items.
6. Fabricate units to configurations indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings.
7. Properly mark and match mark materials for field assembly.
a. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and
minimize field handling of materials.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 53 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 53 Roadway Signage
8. Cut, fit, and assemble units with exposed surfaces smooth and square, free
of cutting marks, shear distortion, burrs and nicks.
9. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles, surfaces,
and edges.
a. Ease exposed edges to radius of approximately 1/32 inch (0.8 mm)
unless otherwise shown.
b. Form bent metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing
grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
10. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs or other
system to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration
required.
a. Maintain profile of member throughout entire bend without buckling,
twisting, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.
B. Steel Fabrication: Fabricate with special care using material selected for best
appearance, in accordance with AISC specifications and as indicated on final Shop
Drawings.
1. Apply necessary fabricating techniques to produce and maintain the quality
of work within required tolerances.
2. Fabrication Tolerances: As specified in AISC Code, Section 10,
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel, unless more stringent
requirements are indicated.
3. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication.
C. Aluminum Fabrication: Allow for thermal movement in the design, fabrication, and
installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints
and over stressing of welds and fasteners.
1. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to
both solar heat gain and night time sky heat loss.
2. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets for assembly of units.
a. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.
3. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints.
a. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration.
4. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arises.
D. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 53 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 53 Roadway Signage
1. Select weld sizes, sequence and equipment to limit distortions to allowable
tolerances.
a. Surface bleed of back side welding on exposed surfaces will not be
acceptable.
2. Assemble and weld by methods that produce true alignment of axes
without warp.
a. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds; grind butt welds flush and
smooth; dress all exposed welds, feather edges onto base material
and polish as required for smooth painted surfaces.
3. Provide shapes and sizes as required for profiles shown.
a. Fabricate units from structural steel or aluminum shapes, plates,
and bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed
edges.
b. Use concealed field splices wherever possible.
c. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for
coordination of assembly and installation with other work.
4. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors,
hangers, dowels, and miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for
supporting of signs.
5. Fabricate items of sizes, shapes, and dimensions required.
6. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS
recommendations.
a. All exposed welds to be clean, consistent and uniform in
appearance.
b. Grind exposed welds to match adjacent contours and finish to
match adjacent finish.
E. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to sign
supports, brackets and frames, and for passage of other work through metal
members as shown on approved Shop Drawings.
1. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as
shown to receive other work.
2. Drill holes 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) oversize for field alignment and fitting.
3. Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
4. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 53 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 53 Roadway Signage
F. Bearing Plates: Provide bearing plates for steel items bearing on concrete
construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and
bearing area.
1. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required.
G. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete for installation
of metal work. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
H. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before finishing, remove loose rust, mill
scale, and deposits of spatter, slag, or flux.
1. Clean steel and aluminum by wheel abrader process or other method to
achieve results defined by SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that mounting surfaces are properly prepared.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory.
B. Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication,
where possible.
1. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting Plans, diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts,
sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are
to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction.
1. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
3.03 FINAL ASSEMBLY
A. Porcelain Panels: Assemble all porcelain enamel sign components flush, true and
accurately straight as indicated on approved Shop Drawings for each type of sign.
B. Hardware:
1. Furnish and install all hardware for the attachment of porcelain panels to
other sign components.
2. In addition, furnish any other hardware item not specified which would
normally be furnished or required for proper functioning of signs as
indicated on the Plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 53 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 53 Roadway Signage
C. Anchor Bolts:
1. Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing sign
supports to in-place work.
2. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for pre-setting bolts and
other anchors to accurate locations.
3.04 ROADWAY SIGNS
A. Install roadway signs in accordance with the Contract Documents, Caltrans
Standard Specifications Section 56-2 or as directed by the Engineer. Set height
of pole mounted signs and other way finding signs as specified by local agencies
having jurisdiction or Authority for the indicated application.
B. All signs shall be of high intensity grade (Diamond Grade Reflective) with
protective overlay film.
C. Existing signs and poles as shown on the plans shall be relocated to a new location
(Protected) and reinstalled.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Roadway Signs will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Roadway Signs on posts will be measured by the unit from actual count. One or
more sign panels mounted on a single post installation will be counted as a
roadway sign-one post.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Roadway Signs furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. This price shall be full compensation for including multiple sign faces, sign post,
anchors, hardware, concrete post foundation, galvanizing, and fasteners
described by the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 10 14 53
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 53 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 10 14 55
RAILROAD SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary
and incidental to maintaining existing railroad signage and constructing new
railroad signage at the locations indicated in the reference Specifications, on the
contract plans, and/or as directed by the Engineer.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
C. Work Included:
1. All Work associated with constructing new and maintaining existing railroad
signage along the right-of-way, including excavation for signposts.
2. If the Contractor cannot construct the signage at the locations indicated in
the plans or standards due to obstructions, clearance limitations or
topography, request direction from Engineer.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit, under the provisions of Division 1 the following information:
1. Compliance: Manufacturer or Supplier’s certifications stating that the
Materials delivered to the site are in compliance with these Specifications.
2. Shop Drawings: Details of sign lettering, manufacturer’s information for
materials, posts, foundations, anchor details (including anchorage) detail.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall use materials and methods, which comply with the SCRRA
Engineering Standards (ES). Railroad signage shall conform to the following
Standard Drawings:
1. Sign lettering shall conform to SCRRA ES1212, Arial Bold Lettering or to
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 55 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 55 Railroad Signage
the SCRRA Engineering Standards drawing for a specific sign.
2. Derail switch target signage shall conform to SCRRA ES2610, Derailing
Switch Target and ES2611, Derail Signs.
3. Derail switch notice signage shall conform to SCRRA ES2612, Derailing
Switch Notice.
4. Safety lock indication signage shall be at the option of the Contractor, and
approved by the Engineer.
5. Switch stand target colors shall conform to SCRRA ES2703, Color
Indications of Targets and Lenses on Switch Stands.
6. Station train and locomotive position spot signs shall conform to SCRRA
ES3330-01 through ES3330-06.
7. Other station signs shall conform to SCRRA ES3301 through ES3329.
8. Highway-railroad crossing crossbuck signs for public crossings shall
conform to SCRRA ES4101, Highway-Railroad Crossing Crossbuck Signs.
9. Private, pedestrian and bicycle railroad grade crossing signs shall conform
to SCRRA ES4102, Private, Pedestrian and Bicycle Railroad Grade
Crossing Signs.
10. Private crossing closure notification sign shall conform to SCRRA ES4312,
Private Crossing Closure Notification Signs.
11. Construction project funding identification signs shall conform to SCRRA
ES5201, Construction Project Funding Identification Sign for locally and
federally funded projects.
12. Sign post, anchors and fasteners shall conform to SCRRA ES5210, Details
for Installing Signs at Grade.
13. Milepost signs shall conform to SCRRA ES5211, Milepost. Tenth mile post
signs shall conform to SCRRA ES5214, No Trespassing and Tenth Mile
Post Sign.
14. Permanent speed restriction signs shall conform to SCRRA ES5213,
Permanent Speed Restriction Signs.
15. No trespassing signs shall conform to SCRRA ES5214, No Trespassing
and Tenth Mile Post Sign.
16. Stop, slow and resume speed flags and signs shall conform to SCRRA
ES5215, Stop, Slow and Resume Speed Flags and Signs.
17. Whistling Point/Quiet zone signs shall conform to SCRRA ES5216,
Whistling Point/Quiet Zone Sign.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 55 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 55 Railroad Signage
18. Yard limit signs for terminal tracks shall conform to SCRRA ES5217, Yard
Limit Sign for Terminal Tracks.
19. Control Point (CP) limit signs and markings shall conform to ES5218,
Control Point (CP) Limit Sign and Markings.
20. Flag stanchions shall conform to ES5219, Flag Stanchion.
21. Station signs for other than CTC territory shall conform to SCRRA ES5222,
Station Signs for Other Than CTC Territory.
22. Mechanical Limit and No Ride Zone signs shall conform to SCRRA
ES5223, Mechanical Limit and No Ride Zone Signs.
23. Warning paddles shall conform to ES5225, Warning Paddle.
24. Warning Signs for Underground Cables shall conform to SCRRA ES5229.
25. Bridge, trestle and culvert number signs shall conform to SCRRA ES6101,
Bridge, Trestle and Culvert Numbers.
26. Radio channel sign shall conform to ES6103, Radio Channel Sign.
27. Tunnel exit sign shall conform to SCRRA ES6104, Tunnel Exit Sign.
28. Tunnel numbers shall conform to SCRRA ES6102, Tunnel Numbers.
29. Radio channel signs shall conform to SCRRA ES6103, Begin Channel
Sign.
30. ATS sign shall conform to SCRRA ES8260, ATS Sign.
31. Emergency Notification Sign for Highway-Rail Crossing shall conform to
SCRRA ES8270, Emergency Notification Sign for Highway-Rail Crossing.
32. Begin CTC/End CTC sings shall conform to SCRRA ES8291, Begin
CTC/End CTC Sign.
33. Stop sign shall conform to SCRRA ES8292, Stop Sign.
34. Block signal with “P” Plate signs shall conform to SCRRA ES8545, Block
Signal With “P” Plate.
35. Other signs shall be as referenced or as shown on the Contract Plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 55 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 10 14 55 Railroad Signage
3.01 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF EXISTING SIGNAGE
A. Maintain and protect in place the existing railroad signage until such time as it can
be replaced with new signage, or relocated at a permanent location, as shown on
the Contract Drawings. Signs may be temporarily relocated to prevent their
damage. Contractor must confer with the Engineer for proper location and
orientation of relocated signs.
B. No existing signage shall be removed unless approved by the Engineer.
C. Any existing railroad Milepost, whistling Post/Quiet Zone, Permanent Speed
Restriction, Yard Limit, Control Point, Radio Channel, ATS, Block Signal With “P”
Plate, or Derail signs damaged by the Contractor’s operations must be replaced
within 36 HRS at the Contractor’s sole expense. Any other signage damaged by
the Contractor’s operations must be replaced within 8 days, at the Contractor’s
expense. Signage not replaced or repaired within these time periods will be
replaced by the Authority at the Contractor’s expense; the cost of such
replacement will be deducted from any payment due the Contractor.
D. Placement of temporarily relocated and permanent signs shall comply with current
editions of CPUC General Order 26 and 118.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Railroad Signs will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Railroad Signs on posts will be measured by the unit from actual count. One or
more sign panels mounted on a single post installation will be counted as a railway
sign-one post.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Railroad Signs furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. This price shall be full compensation for including multiple sign faces, sign post,
anchors, hardware, concrete post foundation, galvanizing, and fasteners
described by the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 10 14 55
SCRRA Standard Specifications 10 14 55 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 12 67 23
BENCHES AND TRASH CONTAINERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section consists of the Contractor furnishing all labor, materials, tools and
equipment necessary and incidental to the provision and installation of benches
and trash containers as indicated on the Contract Drawings, as specified herein
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 05 12 23 - Structural Steel
2. Section 05 55 00 - Miscellaneous Metals
1.02 REFERENCES
Comply with all local, State and Federal codes, regulations, specifications, standards and
recommended practices and in particular:
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
A. Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications giving sizes, materials,
finishes, installation instructions.
B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's color chips for standard colors. The Engineer will
select the color from the colors submitted.
1.04 DELIVERY
A. Delivery: Do not deliver benches or trash containers until the platform construction
is ready for their installation.
B. Store benches and trash containers in a manner to protect from harm, vandalism,
or damage.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 12 67 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 12 67 23 Benches and Trash Containers
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Trash Containers: Manufacturer indicated in plans or equal approved by the
Engineer.
B. Benches: Manufacturer indicated in plans or equal approved by the Engineer
2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Trash Containers shall be blast resistant construction with high strength steel outer
shell and compressive inner layer designed to absorb major blast energy with
remaining blast energy vented upwards away from public. Trash Container will
have interior removable plastic trash bag.
B. Benches to be steel construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
Verify conditions and measurements affecting the work of this Section at site. Make sure
that detrimental conditions are corrected before proceeding with installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment plumb, level and secure in compliance with their manufacturer's
recommendations. Trash containers and benches are to be securely bolted to the
concrete where they are installed.
B. Touch-up minor damage, or replace damaged parts. Replace, at no cost to
SCRRA, materials that are damaged beyond satisfactory field repair.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Benches will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the
basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 12 67 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 12 67 23 Benches and Trash Containers
B. Trash Containers will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Benches furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents will
be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials,
tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as
shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by
the Engineer.
B. Trash Containers furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 12 67 23
SCRRA Standard Specifications 12 67 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 05 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic requirements for electrical systems, including lighting for
all platforms, parking lots and landscape area, wayside power.
1. Site electrical.
2. Service Pedestals.
3. Building wire and connectors.
4. Outdoor Switchboard with Utility Metering Section/Electricity metering
components.
5. Sleeves for electrical penetrations.
6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
7. Accessories required for a complete installation.
8. Training requirements.
B. Requirements of this Section apply to all Sections in Division 26, Electrical.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V maximum).
D. IEEE C2, National Electric Safety Code.
E. UL 508A, Industrial Control Panels.
F. ASTM A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip galvanized) Coating on Iron
and Steel products.
G. ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Product Types:
1. EMT: Electrical metal tubing, ANSI C80.3.
2. FMC: Flexible metallic conduit.
3. IMC: Intermediate metallic conduit, ANSI C80.
4. LFMC: Liquid tight flexible metal conduit.
5. RMC: Rigid metallic conduit, specifically rigid galvanized steel.
6. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit, NEMA PC-2.
7. PVC-coated RMC: PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel.
B. For the purpose of providing material and installing electrical work the following
definitions shall be used:
1. Outdoor area: Exterior locations where the equipment is normally exposed
to the weather and including below grade structures, such as vaults,
manholes, handholes and in-ground pump stations.
2. Architecturally finished interior area; offices, laboratories, conference rooms,
restrooms, corridors and other similar occupied spaces.
3. Non-architectural finished interior area: mechanical, electrical, pump rooms
and other similar process type rooms.
4. Highly corrosive and corrosive area: areas identified in the drawings where
there is a varying degree of spillage or splashing of corrosive materials such
as water, wastewater or chemical solutions; or chronic exposure to corrosive,
caustic or acidic agents, chemicals, chemical fumes or chemical mixtures.
5. Hazardous areas: Class I, II or III areas as defined in NFPA 70 (NEC).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawing Transmittal:
1. General Requirements:
a. Provide manufacturer’s technical information on products and
product model descriptive bulletin.
b. Include data sheets with manufacturer’s name and product model
number, clearly identify all optional accessories.
c. Acknowledgement that products are UL listed or are constructed
utilizing UL recognized components.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
d. Manufacturer’s delivery, storage, handling and installation
instructions.
e. Product installation details.
f. See individual specification sections for additional requirements.
g. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and single line
diagram of electricity metering component assemblies.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Provide functioning electrical systems in compliance with National Electrical Code
(NEC), manufacturer’s instructions, performance requirements in Contract
Documents, and modifications resulting from reviewed shop drawings and field
coordinated Drawings.
B. Provide complete power and control raceway and wiring for all mechanical
equipment electrical loads.
C. Provide 480Y/277 V, 208Y/120 V three phase and 120/240 V single phase
electrical distribution system including raceways and boxes, wires, grounding and
bonding, wiring devices as necessary for a complete, operative, functional electric
system.
D. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports,
raceways, and cable with general construction work.
E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment
for efficient flow of the Work.
1. Coordinate installation of large equipment that requires positioning before
closing in the building.
F. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility
companies.
G. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead
utilities and services, including provision for service entrances and electricity
metering components.
H. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items concealed by
finished surfaces.
I. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field finished surfaces,
coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
J. Coordinate underground conduit installation with other trades.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all components of a similar type by one (1) manufacturer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Electrical Equipment Support Pedestals and /or Racks:
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Modular Strut:
1) Unistrut Building Systems.
2) B-Line.
3) Globe Strut.
2. Material requirements:
a. Modular strut:
1) Galvanized steel: ASTM A123 or ASTM 153.
2) Stainless Steel: AISI Type 316.
b. Mounting hardware:
1) Galvanized steel.
2) Stainless steel.
c. Anchorage as per Division 5.
2.03 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A. Steel Pipe Sleeve: ASTM A53 Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel,
plain ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install and wire all equipment, including pre-purchased equipment, and perform all
tests necessary to assure conformance to the Plans and Specification Sections
and ensure that equipment is ready for operation and safe for energization.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
C. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to
center of unit for wall-mounting items.
D. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not
indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum
possible headroom and meet the minimum code requirements.
E. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to
other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components.
1. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations.
G. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Raceways:
1. Outdoor Installations:
a. Exposed: IMC, RMC.
b. Concealed: IMC, RMC.
c. Underground, Single Run: Concrete encased RNC with
reinforcement as indicated on Plans.
d. Underground, Grouped: Concrete encased RNC with
reinforcement as indicated on Plans.
e. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.
f. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Indoor Installations:
a. Exposed: EMT except in wet or damp locations, use IMC.
b. Concealed in Walls or Ceilings: EMT.
c. In Concrete Slab: RNC, RMC.
d. Below Slab on Grade or in Crawlspace: IMC, RMC.
e. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp
locations: LFMC.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
f. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.03 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls,
ceilings, and floors.
B. Keep legs of raceway bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets
parallel.
C. Use RMC elbows where RNC turns out of slab.
D. Use PVC-coated RMC for transition from underground to aboveground.
E. Install pull wires in empty raceways.
1. Use oven polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200
LB tensile strength.
2. Leave at least 12 IN of slack at each end of pull wires.
F. Install interior telephone and signal system raceways, 2 IN trade size and smaller,
in maximum lengths of 150 FT and with a maximum of two 90 degree bends or
equivalent.
1. Add pull boxes where necessary to accomplish this.
G. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement with a maximum of 72 IN flexible conduit.
1. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations.
2. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
H. Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface.
3.04 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
A. Use wiring methods specified below to the extent permitted by applicable codes
as interpreted by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Exposed Feeders: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
C. Concealed Feeders in Ceilings, Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions: Insulated single
conductors in raceway.
D. Concealed Feeders in Concrete, Below Floors on Grade: Insulated single
conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits: Insulated single conductors in raceway.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
F. Concealed Branch Circuits in Ceilings, Walls and Gypsum Board Partitions:
Insulated single conductors in raceway.
G. Concealed Branch Circuits in Concrete, below Floors on Grade: Insulated single
conductors in raceway.
H. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Insulated single conductors in
raceway.
I. Remote Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits, Classes 1, 2, and 3:
Insulated conductors in raceway unless otherwise indicated.
3.05 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than
unspliced conductors.
3.06 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves where electrical raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or
busways penetrate concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies.
B. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall
assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated
during construction of floor or wall.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 IN above finished floor level.
F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4 IN annular clear space between sleeve and
raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.
G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete or masonry.
1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain.
a. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Where sleeves are
indicated, seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint
sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls,
partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
1. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with
firestop materials.
J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables
with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
3.07 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire
rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire resistance
ratings of assemblies.
3.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces
required to permit electrical installations.
1. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair, refinish, and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to
match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.
3.09 TRAINING PROGRAM
A. General Requirements:
1. The Contractor is responsible for training as outlined in this Section.
a. Maintenance management classes shall take place prior to the
occupancy of the facility, as required and approved by the SCRRA.
b. Mechanics training will commence only after installation of
equipment is complete at the facility.
c. Training shall be conducted at location determined by SCRRA.
d. Hours for training shall be between 7:00 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. unless
specifically permitted otherwise.
B. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that training instructors are not only
familiar with technical information, but also able to utilize proper methods of
instruction, training aids, audiovisuals, etc., to ensure effective presentations.
C. The Contractor is responsible for providing all training aids, audiovisual equipment,
and visual aids for the conduct of these courses.
D. Training materials are to become the property of the SCRRA at the conclusion of
training.
E. Submission and Approval of Training Plans:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
1. The Contractor shall meet with SCRRA's quality assurance manager not
later than three weeks prior to the start of formal training.
a. At that time, Contractor will submit lesson plans and an outline of
the training program and will demonstrate any training aids
involved.
b. Handouts are also to be presented for approval and provided later
in a ratio of one per student.
c. Each location shall receive a complete set of prints and schematics.
2. The Contractor will submit in writing his plans for meeting the Specification
training requirements.
a. The SCRRA's quality assurance manager will approve and then
coordinate and schedule all training involved.
F. The Contractor will outline specific objectives for each of the courses that he is
required to present.
1. The course should include sessions in safety and machine operation, as well
as a comprehensive seminar teaching basic skills and knowledge of each
operation.
a. The course should include both classroom and practical exercise
sessions and shall provide the mechanic with the basic knowledge
necessary to utilize all training materials.
b. The Contractor will provide a detailed schedule outlining the length
and content of each of these sessions in accordance with the
guidelines established.
2. The training program shall include familiarization with equipment operation
and performance and detailed instruction in operation, maintenance, and test
procedures.
a. Training duration shall be as specified in Specification Sections.
G. Training related to electrical systems shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. A written test, as well as a hands-on demonstration of competence by the
student.
2. Troubleshooting instruction.
3. Troubleshooting guides and protocols.
4. Maintainability demonstration for each system.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods will be measured by the unit or fraction
thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and
as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. All material, work and services included in Sections 26 05 50, Overcurrent
Protection Devices; 26 06 00, Grounding and Bonding; 26 7 10, Seismic Controls
for Electric Works; 26 07 50, Electrical Identification; 26 08 00, Electrical Testing;
26 14 00, Wiring Devices; 26 28 00, Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective
Devices; 26 28 16, Safety Switches; 26 28 90, Transient Voltage Suppression; 26
41 00, Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers; 26 42 00, Enclosed Controllers;
26 44 10, Switchboards; 26 44 20, Service Pedestals and Panelboards; 26 46 00;
and Dry Type Transformers (600 V and Less) will be included in this Section and
are considered incidental to work under this Section and will be measured by the
unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed
on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 05 43
ELECTRICAL: EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Specifier: Keep this description brief. The SUMMARY Article is intended to only
outline the contents of topics in this Specification Section. Do not stipulate
specification requirements in this Article.
B. Section Includes:
1. Material and installation requirements for:
a. Manholes.
b. Handhole.
c. Underground conduits and ductbanks.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Division 03 - Concrete.
3. Section 26 07 50 - Electrical Identification.
4. Section 26 06 00 - Grounding and Bonding.
5. Section 26 13 00 – Conduits, Raceways and Boxes.
6. Section 33 05 23 – Steel Casing.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO):
a. HB, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
4. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE):
a. 77, Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Direct-buried conduit(s):
1. Individual (single) underground conduit.
2. Multiple underground conduits, arranged in one or more planes, in a
common trench.
B. Concrete encased ductbank: An individual (single) or multiple conduit(s), arranged
in one or more planes, encased in a common concrete envelope.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and
administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data:
a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this
Specification Section.
3. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:
a. Provide dimensional drawings of each manhole indicating all
specified accessories and conduit entry locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Prefabricated composite handholes:
a. Quazite Composolite.
b. Armorcast Products Company.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
c. Synertech.
2. Precast manholes and handholes:
a. Utility Vault Co.
b. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.
c. Lister Industries.
3. Manhole and handhole and ductbank accessories:
a. Neenah.
b. Unistrut.
c. Condux International, Inc.
d. Underground Devices, Inc.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
2.02 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
A. Prefabricated Composite Material Handholes:
1. Handhole body and cover: Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete
conforming to all test provisions of SCTE 77.
2. Minimum load ratings: SCTE 77 Tier 8.
3. Open bottom.
4. Stackable design as required for specified depth.
5. Cover:
a. Engraved legend of "ELECTRIC" or "COMMUNICATIONS".
b. Non-gasketed bolt down with stainless steel penta head bolts.
c. Lay-in non-bolt down, when cover is over 100 LBS.
d. One or multiple sections so the maximum weight of a section is 125
LBS.
6. Cover lifting hook: 24 IN minimum in length.
B. Precast Manholes and Handholes:
1. Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete or steel reinforced cement concrete
structures:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
2. AASHTO live load rating: H-20 for full deliberate vehicle traffic.
3. Mating edges: Tongue and groove type.
4. Solid bottom with a 12 IN x 12 IN or 12 IN DIA french drain in the bottom of
each manhole.
5. Gasketed removable top slab with lifting eyes and cast in frame for cover.
6. Cover extension rings as required.
7. Cable pulling eyes opposite all conduit entrances.
a. Coordinate exact location with installation contractor.
2.03 CONCRETE MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE ACCESSORIES
A. Cover and Frame:
1. Cast ductile iron: ASTM A536.
2. AASHTO live load rating: H-20.
3. Diameter: 30 IN.
4. Cast the legend "ELECTRICAL" or "COMMUNICATIONS" into manhole
and handhole covers.
B. Cable Racks and Hooks:
1. Material: Heavy-duty non-metallic (glass reinforced nylon).
2. Hook loading capacity: 400 LBS minimum.
3. Rack loading capacity: Four (4) hooks maximum.
4. Hook deflection: 0.25 IN maximum.
5. Hooks: Length, as required, with positive locking device to prevent upward
movement.
6. Mounding hardware: Stainless steel.
C. Cable Pulling Irons:
1. 7/8 IN DIA hot-dipped galvanized steel.
2. 6000 LB minimum pulling load.
D. Ground Rods and Grounding Equipment: See Specification Section 26 06 00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
2.04 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete: Comply with Division 03 Specifications.
B. Conduit: See Specification Section 26 13 00.
C. Duct Spacers/Supports:
1. High density polyethylene or high impact polystyrene.
2. Interlocking.
3. Provide 2 IN minimum spacing between conduits.
4. Accessories, as required:
a. Hold down bars.
b. Ductbank strapping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Drawings indicate the intended location of manholes and handholes and routing of
ductbanks and direct buried conduit.
1. Field conditions may affect actual routing.
B. Manhole and Handhole Locations:
1. Approximately where shown on the Drawings.
2. As required for pulling distances.
3. As required to keep pulling tensions under allowable cable tensions.
4. As required for number of bends in ductbank routing.
5. Shall not be installed in a swale or ditch.
6. Determine the exact locations after careful consideration has been given
to the location of other utilities, grading, and paving.
7. Locations are to be approved by the Engineer prior to excavation and
placement or construction of manholes and handholes.
C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
D. Install manholes and handholes in conduit runs where indicated or as required to
facilitate pulling of wires or making connections.
E. Comply with Specification Section 33 05 24 for trenching, backfilling and
compacting.
3.02 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
A. Prefabricated Composite Material Handholes:
1. For use in areas subjected to occasional non-deliberate vehicular traffic.
2. Place handhole on a foundation of compacted 1/4 to 1/2 IN crushed rock
or gravel a minimum of 8 IN thick and 6 IN larger than handholes footprint
on all sides.
3. Provide concrete encasement ring around handhole per manufacturers
installation instructions (minimum of 10 IN wide x 12 IN deep).
4. Install so that the surrounding grade is 1 IN lower than the top of the
handhole.
5. Size: As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the number and size
of conduits.
6. Provide cable rails and pulling eyes as needed.
B. Precast Manholes and Handholes:
1. For use in vehicular and non-vehicular traffic areas.
2. Construction:
a. Grout or seal all joints, per manufacturer's instructions.
b. Support cables on walls by cable racks:
1) Provide a minimum of two (2) racks, install symmetrically on
each wall of manholes and handholes.
a) Provide additional cable racks, as required, so that
both ends of cable splices will be supported
horizontally.
2) Equip cable racks with adjustable hooks: Quantity of cable
hooks as required by the number of conductors to be
supported.
c. In each manhole and handhole, drive 3/4 IN x 10 FT long copper
clad ground rod into the earth with approximately 6 IN exposed
above finished floor.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
1) Drill opening in floor for ground rod.
2) Connect all metallic components to ground rod by means of
#8 AWG minimum copper wire and approved grounding
clamps.
3) Utilize a ground bar in the manhole or handhole if the
quantity of ground wires exceeds three (3).
a) Connect ground bar to ground rod with a #2/0 AWG
minimum copper wire.
3. Place manhole or handhole on a foundation of compacted 1/4 to 1/2 IN
crushed rock or gravel a minimum of 8 IN thick and 6 IN larger than
manholes or handholes footprint on all sides.
4. Install so that the top of cover is 1 IN above finished grade.
a. Where existing grades are higher than finished grades, install
sufficient number of courses of curved segmented concrete block
between top of handhole and manhole frame to temporarily elevate
manhole cover to existing grade level.
5. After installation is complete, backfill and compact soil around manholes
and handholes.
6. Handhole size:
a. As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the number and
size of conduits entering or as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Minimum floor dimension of 4 FT x 4 FT and minimum depth of 4
FT.
7. Manhole size:
a. As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the number and
size of conduits entering or as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Minimum floor dimension of 6 FT x 6 FT and a minimum depth of 6
FT.
3.03 UNDERGROUND CONDUITS
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Ductbank types per location:
a. Reinforced concrete ductbank:
1) Under aircraft pavement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
2) Under railroads.
3) As indicated in the Ductbank Schedule.
b. Concrete encased ductbank:
1) Under roads.
2) Conduits containing medium voltage cables.
3) Pad mounted transformer secondaries.
4) Plant process equipment feeders and controls.
5) As indicated in the Ductbank Schedule.
c. Direct-buried conduit(s):
1) Area/Roadway lighting.
2) As indicated in the Ductbank Schedule.
2. Do not place concrete or soil until conduits have been observed by the
Engineer.
3. Ductbanks shall be sloped a minimum of 4 IN per 100 FT or as detailed on
the Drawings.
a. Low points shall be at manholes or handholes.
4. During construction and after conduit installation is complete, plug the ends
of all conduits.
5. Provide conduit supports and spacers.
a. Place supports and spacers for rigid nonmetallic conduit on
maximum centers as indicated for the following trade sizes:
1) 1 IN and less: 3 FT.
2) 1-1/4 to 3 IN: 5 FT.
3) 3-1/2 to 6 IN: 7 FT.
b. Place supports and spacers for rigid steel conduit on maximum
centers as indicated for the following trade sizes:
1) 1 IN and less: 10 FT.
2) 1-1/4 to 2-1/2 IN: 14 FT.
3) 3 IN and larger: 20 FT.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
c. Securely anchor conduits to supports and spacers to prevent
movement during placement of concrete or soil.
6. Stagger conduit joints at intervals of 6 IN vertically.
7. Make conduit joints watertight and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
8. Accomplish changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 15 degrees by
long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 FT.
a. Sweep bends may be made up of one or more curved or straight
sections or combinations thereof.
9. Furnish manufactured bends at end of runs.
a. Minimum radius of 18 IN for conduits less than 3 IN trade size and
36 IN for conduits 3 IN trade size and larger.
10. Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with the proper tools and shall
match factory tapers.
11. After the conduit run has been completed:
a. Prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct by pulling a test
mandrel through each conduit.
1) Test mandrel:
a) Length: Not less than 12 IN
b) Diameter: Approximately 1/4 IN less than the inside
diameter of the conduit.
b. Clean the conduit by pulling a heavy duty wire brush mandrel
followed by a rubber duct swab through each conduit.
12. Pneumatic rodding may be used to draw in lead wire.
a. Install a heavy nylon cord free of kinks and splices in all unused
new ducts.
b. Extend cord 3 FT beyond ends of conduit.
13. Transition from rigid non-metallic conduit to rigid metallic conduit, per
Specification Section 26 13 00, prior to entering a structure or going above
ground.
a. Except rigid non-metallic conduit may be extended directly to
manholes, handholes, pad mounted transformer boxes and other
exterior pad mounted electrical equipment where the conduit is
concealed within the enclosure.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
b. Terminate rigid PVC conduits with end bells.
c. Terminate steel conduits with insulated bushings.
14. Place warning tape in trench directly over ductbanks, direct-buried conduit,
and direct-buried wire and cable in accordance with Specification Section
26 07 50.
15. Placement of conduits stubbing into handholes and manholes shall be
located to allow for proper bending radiuses of the cables.
B. Concrete Encased Ductbank:
1. Ductbank system consists of conduits completely encased in minimum 2
IN of concrete and with separations between different cabling types as
required in Specification Section 26 05 33 or as detailed on the Drawings.
2. Install so that top of concrete encased duct, at any point:
a. Is not less than 24 IN below grade.
b. Is below pavement sub-grading.
3. Where identified and for a distance 10 FT either side of the area, the
concrete shall be reinforced.
a. The reinforcement shall consist of #4 bars and #4 ties placed 12 IN
on center, in accordance with Division 3 Specification Sections or
as detailed on the Drawings.
4. Conduit supports shall provide a uniform minimum clearance of 2 IN
between the bottom of the trench and the bottom row of conduit.
5. Conduit separators shall provide a uniform minimum clearance of 2 IN
between conduits or as required in Specification Section 26 13 00 for
different cabling types.
C. Direct-Buried Conduit(s):
1. Install so that the top of the uppermost conduit, at any point:
a. Is not less than 30 IN below grade.
b. Is below pavement sub-grading.
2. Provide a uniform minimum clearance of 2 IN between conduits or as
required in Specification Section 26 05 33 for different cabling types.
a. Maintain the separation of multiple planes of conduits by one of the
following methods:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
1) Install multilevel conduits with the use of conduit supports
and separators to maintain the required separations, and
backfill with flowable fill (100 PSI) or concrete per
Specification Section 03 31 00.
2) Install the multilevel conduits one level at a time.
a) Each level is backfilled with the appropriate amount
of soil and compaction, per Specification Section 31
20 00, to maintain the required separations.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Manholes will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the
basis for this measurement.
B. Handholes will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the
basis for this measurement.
C. Measurement for Underground Conduits and Ductbanks will be included as an
incidental to the work associated with Items in Section 26 13 00, Conduits,
Raceways and Boxes and no separate measurement will be made to the
Contractor for Work under this Section.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Manhole furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents will
be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials,
tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as
shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by
the Engineer.
B. Handholes furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents
will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 43 Electrical: Exterior Underground
C. Payment for Underground Conduits and Ductbanks will be included as an
incidental to the work associated with Items in Section 26 13 00, Conduits,
Raceways and Boxes and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 05 43
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 43 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 05 50
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Computer-based, fault-current, overcurrent protective device coordination
studies, the setting of these devices and arc flash hazard report.
a. Series-rated devices are prohibited.
b. Fused circuit breakers are prohibited.
1) Use breakers with adequate IC to interrupt worst case fault
current they will encounter.
B. The Contractor shall furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination
studies as prepared by the electrical equipment manufacturer or an approved
engineering firm.
C. The Contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per the
requirements set forth in NFPA 70E-Standard for Electrical Safety in the
Workplace. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the
IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E, Annex D.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. IEEE 141 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and
Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
B. IEEE 242 – Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial
and Commercial Power Systems.
C. IEEE 399 – Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System
Analysis.
D. IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial
Buildings.
E. IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers
Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
F. IEEE 1584 - Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations.
G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 50 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 50 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
H. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 70, National Electrical Code, latest edition.
2. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
I. Comply with IEEE 399 latest revision for general study procedures.
J. Comply with IEEE 242 latest revision for short-circuit currents and coordination
time intervals.
1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
A. Product Data: The short-circuit and protective device coordination studies shall be
submitted to the Design Engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution
equipment Shop Drawings and/or prior to release of equipment Drawings for
manufacturing. If formal completion of the studies may cause delay in equipment
manufacturing, approval from the Engineer may be obtained for preliminary
submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of device and
characteristics will be satisfactory.
B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer
software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.
D. Other Action Submittals:
1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input
data sheets.
2. Coordination study report.
3. Arc Flash Hazard report.
4. Equipment evaluation report.
5. Setting report.
6. Arc Flash Hazard Labels.
1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR CONSTRUCTION
A. The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard
analysis studies shall be summarized in a final report.
B. The Report shall include the following sections:
1. Executive Summary.
2. Descriptions, purpose, basis and scope of the study.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 50 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 50 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
3. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device ratings
versus calculated short circuit duties.
4. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of
relay and circuit breaker trip unit settings, fuse selection.
5. Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for
interpretation of the computer printout.
6. Details of the incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations.
7. Recommendations for system improvements, where needed.
8. One line diagram.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Studies shall use computer programs developed as listed in Part 2.01 in this
Section.
1. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and
guides specified in this Section.
2. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications:
1. The short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard
analysis studies shall be conducted under the supervision and approval of
a Registered Professional Electrical Engineer skilled in performing and
interpreting the power system studies.
2. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall be a full-time
employee of the equipment manufacturer or an approved engineering firm.
3. The Registered Professional Electrical Engineer shall have a minimum of
five (5) years of experience in performing power system studies.
4. The equipment manufacturer or approved engineering firm shall
demonstrate experience with Arc Flash Hazard Analysis by submitting
names of at least ten actual arc flash hazard analysis it has performed in
the past year.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications:
1. Member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association.
a. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the
InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise testing
specified in Part 3.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 50 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 50 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
D. Fault levels indicated on Drawings are for guidance only; device IC's shall be
determined from study results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A. Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
computer software programs developed by one of the following, or equal approved
as a substitution:
1. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
2. EDSA Micro Corporation.
3. ESA, Inc.
4. CYME International.
2.02 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with IEEE 399.
B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include
"mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399, Table
7-4.
C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-
current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program
shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices.
1. Optional Features:
a. Arcing faults.
b. Simultaneous faults.
c. Explicit negative sequence.
d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with
electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions
affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 50 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 50 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
B. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have
been assembled.
1. Overcurrent protective devices not submitted for approval with coordination
study may not be used in study.
3.02 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
A. Source Impedance:
1. Utility company's fault-current contribution as indicated on Drawings.
2. Downstream values indicated on Drawings are for guidance only.
B. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available
fault current.
C. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall
comply with the following:
1. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.50.
2. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
3. Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.13.
D. Study Report: Enter calculated X/R ratios and interrupting (5-cycle) fault currents
on electrical distribution system diagram of the report.
1. List other output values from computer analysis, including momentary (1/2-
cycle), interrupting (5-cycle), and 30-cyclefault-current values for 3 PH, 2
PH, and phase-to-ground faults.
E. Equipment Evaluation Report: Prepare a report on the adequacy of overcurrent
protective devices and conductors by comparing fault-current ratings of these
devices with calculated fault-current momentary and interrupting duties.
3.03 COORDINATION STUDY
A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 16
Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies.
a. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical
distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device
submittals, input and output data, and recommended device
settings.
2. Impedance of utility service entrance.
3. Electrical distribution system diagram showing the following:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 50 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 50 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
a. Load current that is the basis for sizing continuous ratings of circuits
for cables and equipment.
b. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.
c. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and
ratios.
d. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages,
connection type, impedance, and X/R ratios.
e. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
f. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor
insulation, and length.
g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to
NEMA MG 1.
4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-
referenced with tag numbers on diagram:
a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and
frequent starting and stopping.
b. Magnetic inrush current overload capabilities of transformers.
c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting
time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.
d. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent
protective devices.
e. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by
utility company.
f. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be
coordinated.
g. Manufacturer: Frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms
symmetrical, ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment
range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment
range for circuit breakers.
h. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay
adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and
current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.
i. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and
interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 50 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 50 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
B. Perform coordination study and prepare a written report using the results of fault-
current study and approved computer software program. Comply with IEEE 399.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 for overcurrent protection of circuit elements and devices.
D. Comply with IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.
E. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current,
whichever is specified for that transformer.
b. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if
required by unusual loading or emergency conditions.
2. Device shall protect transformer according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault
currents.
F. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents
according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in
IEEE 242.
1. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three- phase bolted fault
currents, equipment grounding conductors, and grounding electrode
conductors at maximum ground-fault currents.
G. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following
results of coordination study:
1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:
a. Device tag.
b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and
instantaneous-pickup values.
c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and
instantaneous settings.
d. Fuse-current rating and type.
e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.
2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent
protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate
that adequate time separation exists between series devices, including
power utility company's upstream devices. Show the following specific
information:
a. Device tag.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 50 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 50 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c. 3 PH and single-phase damage points for each transformer.
d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
e. Cable damage curves.
f. Transformer inrush points.
g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
3. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
3.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative,
of electrical distribution equipment being set and adjusted, to assist in setting of
overcurrent protective devices within equipment.
B. Testing: SCRRA will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following
device setting and to prepare test reports.
1. After installing overcurrent protective devices and during energizing process
of electrical distribution system, perform the following:
a. Verify that overcurrent protective devices meet parameters used in
studies.
b. Adjust devices to values listed in study results.
2. Adjust devices according to recommendations in Chapter 7, "Inspection and
Test Procedures," and Tables 10.7 and 10.8 in NETA ATS.
C. All equipment provided shall meet or exceed the fault current level provided in the
study.
3.05 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584
equations that are presented in NFPA70E, Annex D.
B. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all
significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear,
motor-control centers, panelboards, busway and splitters) where work could be
performed on energized parts.
C. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all significant locations in 240 V and
208 V systems fed from transformers equal to or greater than 125 kVA where work
could be performed on energized parts.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 50 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 50 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
D. Safe working distances shall be based upon the calculated arc flash boundary
considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.
E. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase
overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study
model. Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken into consideration when
determining the clearing time when performing incident energy calculations.
F. For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where there
is adequate separation between the line side terminals of the main protective
device and the work location), calculations for incident energy and flash protection
boundary shall include both the line and load side of the main breaker.
G. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker
(as required per above), the line side and load side contributions must be included
in the fault calculation.
H. Mis-coordination should be checked amongst all devices within the branch
containing the immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location
and the calculation should utilize the fastest device to compute the incident energy
for the corresponding location.
I. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device
clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE
1584-2002 section B.1.2. Where it is not physically possible to move outside of
the flash protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event, a
maximum clearing time based on the specific location shall be utilized.
3.06 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS
A. The Contractor of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall provide a 3.5 x 5 IN thermal
transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed.
B. ll labels will be based on recommended overcurrent device settings and will be
provided after the results of the analysis have been presented to the Owner and
after any system changes, upgrades or modifications have been incorporated in
the system.
C. The label shall include the following information, at a minimum:
1. Location designation.
2. Nominal voltage.
3. Flash protection boundary.
4. Hazard risk category.
5. Incident energy.
6. Working distance.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 50 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 05 50 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
7. Engineering report number, revision number and issue date.
D. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings.
E. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be
based on recommended overcurrent device settings.
1. For each 600, 480 and applicable 208 V panelboard, one arc flash label shall
be provided.
2. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be provided.
3. For each low voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided.
4. For each switchgear, one flash label shall be provided.
5. For medium voltage switches one arc flash label shall be provided.
3.07 ARC FLASH TRAINING
A. The Contractor of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall train the Owner’s qualified
electrical personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated with working on
energized equipment (minimum of 4 HRS).
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 05 50
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 05 50 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 06 00
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Grounding and bonding of electrical and communications system and
equipment.
2. Accessories required for a complete installation.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
2. Section 29 00 00 – Summary of Customer Information System (CIS) Work
3. Section 29 20 20 – Communications Services
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
1. 837, Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation
Grounding.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
a. Article 230, Services.
b. Article 250, Grounding and Bonding.
c. Article 408, Switchboard and Panelboards.
d. Article 409, Industrial Control Panels.
e. Article 610, Cranes and Hoists.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 06 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 06 00 Grounding and Bonding
f. Article 620, Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, Moving Walks,
Platform Lifts, and Stairway Chairlifts.
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Assure ground continuity is continuous throughout the entire Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled
under UL 467 as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the
InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the
InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for
Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing
specified in Part 3.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Technical data for ground rods and grounding conductors.
B. Reports: Field quality control test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed
comparable products and substitutions in accordance with:
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
Section 01 25 00 - Substitution Procedures
Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 06 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 06 00 Grounding and Bonding
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Ground rods and bars and grounding clamps, connectors and terminals:
a. Erico Products Inc., Cadweld.
b. Burndy.
c. Harger Lightning Protection.
d. Heary Brothers.
e. Joslyn.
f. Robbins Lightning Protection.
g. Thomas & Betts (Blackburn).
h. Thompson.
2. Exothermic weld connections:
a. Erico Products Inc., Cadweld.
b. Harger Lightning Protection.
c. Thermoweld.
3. Prefabricated composite test stations:
a. Quazite Composolite.
b. Armorcast Products Company.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Wire and Cable:
1. Bare conductors: Soft drawn stranded copper meeting ASTM B8.
2. Insulated conductors: Color coded green, per Specification
Section 26 12 00.
3. For insulated conductors, comply with Section 26 12 00 - Conductors and
Cables – Low Voltage.
4. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green colored insulation.
5. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 06 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 06 00 Grounding and Bonding
6. Underground Conductors: Bare, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Copper Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper
conductor.
8. Copper Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper
conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 IN wide and 1/16 IN thick.
9. Tinned Copper Bonding Jumper: Tinned copper tape, braided copper
conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 IN wide and 1/16 IN thick.
10. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section,
with insulated spacer.
11. Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific
types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. Use
compression type where exposed and exothermic-welded type, in kit form,
selected per manufacturer's written instructions where concealed or buried
in earth.
B. Conduit: As specified in Specification Section 26 13 00.
C. Ground Bars:
1. Solid copper:
a. 1/4 IN thick.
b. 2 or 4 IN wide.
c. 24 IN long minimum in main service entrance electrical rooms, 12 IN
long elsewhere.
2. Predrilled grounding lug mounting holes.
3. Stainless steel or galvanized steel mounting brackets.
4. Insulated standoffs.
D. Ground Rods:
1. Provide grounding electrodes as many as necessary to maintain maximum
resistance as indicated in Section 3.02-4.
2. 3/4 IN x 10 FT.
3. Copperclad: Copper clad steel.
a. Heavy uniform coating of electrolytic copper molecularly bonded to
a rigid steel core.
b. Corrosion resistant bond between the copper and steel.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 06 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 06 00 Grounding and Bonding
c. Hard drawn for a scar-resistant surface.
E. Grounding Clamps, Connectors and Terminals:
1. Mechanical type:
a. Standards: UL 467.
b. High copper alloy content.
2. Compression type for interior locations:
a. Standards: UL 467.
b. High copper alloy content.
c. Non-reversible.
d. Terminals for connection to bus bars shall have two bolt holes.
3. Compression type suitable for direct burial in earth or concrete:
a. Standards: UL 467, IEEE 837.
b. High copper alloy content.
c. Non-reversible.
F. Exothermic Weld Connections:
1. Copper oxide reduction by aluminum process.
2. Molds properly sized for each application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Size grounding conductors and bonding jumpers in accordance with
NFPA 70, Article 250, except where larger sizes are indicated on the
Drawings.
3. Remove paint, rust, or other non-conducting material from contact surfaces
before making ground connections.
4. Where ground conductors pass through floor slabs or building walls provide
non-metallic sleeves and install per Specification Section 01 73 20.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 06 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 06 00 Grounding and Bonding
5. Do not splice grounding conductors except at ground rods.
6. Install ground rods and grounding conductors in undisturbed, firm soil.
a. Provide excavation required for installation of ground rods and
ground conductors.
b. Use driving studs or other suitable means to prevent damage to
threaded ends of sectional rods.
c. Unless otherwise specified, connect conductors to ground rods with
compressor type connectors or exothermic weld.
d. Provide sufficient slack in grounding conductor to prevent conductor
breakage during backfill or due to ground movement.
e. Backfill excavation completely, thoroughly tamping to provide good
contact between backfill materials and ground rods and conductors.
7. Do not use exothermic welding if it will damage the structure the grounding
conductor is being welded to.
B. Use copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct
contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
C. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
D. Exothermic Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for
underground connections.
E. Grounding Bus: Install 24 IN long ground bus in electrical and telephone
equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as
indicated.
1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 IN from wall and support from wall 18 IN
above finished floor.
F. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG
minimum. Bury at least 24 IN below grade or bury directly below duct bank when
installed as part of the duct bank.
G. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types,
sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types,
larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.
1. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch
circuits.
2. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor
in branch circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-
distribution units.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 06 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 06 00 Grounding and Bonding
3. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in
nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data
cables.
4. Air Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding
conductor to duct mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more,
including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air
duct.
5. Water Heater, Heat Tracing, and Anti-frost Heating Cables: Install an
insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater,
heat tracing, and anti-frost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units,
piping, connected equipment, and components.
6. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data,
and other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated
grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each
service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment
location.
7. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding
electrode in addition to installing an insulated equipment grounding
conductor with supply branch-circuit conductors.
H. Metal Frame Grounding for Buildings: Drive a ground rod at the base of every
corner column and at each intermediate exterior column. Connect rod to column
with an underground grounding conductor. Interconnect ground rods with a
continuous underground conductor (counterpoise), extending around the
perimeter of the building, 24 IN minimum from building foundation. Use tinned
copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for underground conductor, and bury
18 IN below grade, minimum.
I. Ground Rods: Drive ground rods until tops are 12 IN below finished floor or final
grade, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use
exothermic welds, except as otherwise indicated. Make connections
without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.
J. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible.
Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where subjected to strain, impact,
or damage.
K. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so that vibration by equipment mounted on
vibration isolation hangers or supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted
equipment. Use exothermic welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless
disconnect type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps
directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 06 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 06 00 Grounding and Bonding
L. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in
conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal
water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal
water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water
fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal
grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
M. Water Meter Piping: Use braided type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass
water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
N. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding
conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners.
Use braided type bonding straps.
O. Bond each above ground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
P. Connections: Make connections so that galvanic action or electrolysis possibility
is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and
connection methods so that metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot tin coated materials to ensure high conductivity
and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum to steel connections with stainless steel separators and
mechanical clamps.
4. Make aluminum to galvanized steel connections with tin plated copper
jumpers and mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to
prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
6. Exothermic Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces
indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
7. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger,
use pressure type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding
conductors may be terminated with winged pressure type connectors.
8. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate
at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing,
terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding
bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in
housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits
with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise
indicated.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 06 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 06 00 Grounding and Bonding
9. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and
terminals according to manufacturer's published torque tightening values.
If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL
486A.
10. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to
provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use
tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide
embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication
that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding
conductor.
11. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to
ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and
seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.
Q. Duct Banks: Install a No. 4/0 grounding conductor below each duct bank in direct
contact with the earth.
R. Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod
depth so that 4 IN will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod
before manhole is placed and provide a No. 1/0 AWG bare, copper conductor from
ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect
ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-
sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 IN above to 6 IN below
concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, non-shrink grout.
S. Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as
inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole
or handhole to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4
AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper conductor. Train conductors level
or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor
and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination
kits.
T. Pad Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and
counterpoise circling pad. Ground pad mounted equipment and noncurrent
carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to
underground cable and grounding electrodes. Use copper conductor not less than
No. 4/0 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground pad. Bury
counterpoise not less than 18 IN below grade and 6 IN from the foundation.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Leave grounding system uncovered until observed by Engineer.
B. Testing: AUTHORITY will engage independent agency to perform field quality
control testing:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 06 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 06 00 Grounding and Bonding
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum
ground resistance level is indicated and at service disconnect enclosure
grounding terminal. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days
after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by
any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical
treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
Perform tests, by the fall of potential method according to IEEE 81.
3. Provide Drawings locating each ground rod, ground rod assembly, and
other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and
key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods
driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather
and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures
taken to improve test results.
4. Nominal maximum values are as follows:
a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.
c. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.
d. Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms.
e. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 06 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 06 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 07 10
SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Seismic restraints and earthquake damage reduction measures for
electrical components.
2. Accessories required for a complete installation.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. A307, Standard Specification Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi
Tensile Strength.
3. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi
Yield Strength.
B. State of California Earthquake Regulations:
1. Title 24, Section T22-94215. International Building Code (IBC) - 2006
Edition including all State of California amendments.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Seismic Restraint: A fixed device (a seismic brace, an anchor bolt or stud, or a
fastening assembly) used to prevent vertical or horizontal movement, or both
vertical and horizontal movement, of an electrical system component during an
earthquake.
B. Mobile Structural Element: A part of the building structure such as a slab, floor
structure, roof structure, or wall that may move independently of other structural
elements during an earthquake.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Technical data illustrating and indicate types, styles, materials,
strength, fastening provisions, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint
component used. Include documentation of evaluation and approval of
components by agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 10 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 07 10 Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
B. Shop Drawings: For components, physical arrangements, and installation details
not defined by Drawings. Indicate materials and show calculations, design
analysis, details, and layouts, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer.
C. Field quality control test reports.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in California Building Code unless
requirements in this Section are more stringent.
B. Comply with MFMA-4 of the Metal Framing Manufacturers Association unless
requirements of CBC or this Section are more stringent.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing and inspection agency,
acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to
conduct the inspection indicated.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Project Seismic Zone and Zone Factor as Defined in CBC: 4.
B. Occupancy Category as Defined in CBC: Refer to Drawings.
C. Acceleration Factor as Defined in CBC: Refer to Drawings.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structure,
architectural features, and mechanical, fire-protection, electrical, and other
building systems.
B. Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system.
C. Coordination of Bracing Systems:
1. Transverse and longitudinal bracing for seismic forces on suspended
electrical systems including conduit, cable tray, bus duct, and equipment.
2. Anchorage of floor and roof mounted electrical equipment.
D. Seismic Design Requirements:
1. Seismic design criteria: Provide bracing and anchoring for equipment,
conduit, cable tray, bust duct, designed, constructed, and installed to
resist stresses produced by lateral forces.
E. Design and install seismic anchorage and bracing for all floor or roof mounted
equipment weighing 400 LBS or more and all suspended or wall mounted
equipment weighing 20 LBS or more.
F. The following components are exempt from the requirements of this Section:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 10 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 07 10 Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
1. Electrical components in structures assigned to Seismic Design Category
C provided that the importance factor (Ip) is equal to 1.0.
2. Electrical components in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F where
Ip = 1.0 and flexible connections between the components and associated
ductwork, piping, and conduit are provided and that are mounted at 4 FT
(1.22 m) or less above a floor level and weigh 400 LBS (1780 N)or less.
3. Electrical components in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F weighing
20 LBS (95 N) or less where Ip = 1.0 and flexible connections between
the components and conduit are provided, or for distribution systems,
weighing 5 LBS/FT (7 N/m) or less.
G. Seismic forces shall be presumed to act through the center of mass of the
equipment in a direction that will produce the largest single anchor force.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed
comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00 -
Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. Amber/Booth, a VMC Group company.
2. Cooper B-Line Systems, div. Cooper Industries.
3. Erico, Inc.
4. GS Metals Corp.
5. Loos & Co., Inc.
6. Mason Industries, Inc.
7. Powerstrut brand, Power Engineering Co., Inc.
8. Thomas & Betts Corp.
9. Unistrut, div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
B. Restraints:
1. Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 10 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 07 10 Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
2. Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel.
3. Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.
2.03 ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Strength: Defined in reports by ICBO Evaluation Service or another agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components
shall be at least twice the maximum seismic forces for which they are
required to be designed.
B. Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel expansion wedge type.
C. Concrete Inserts: Steel channel type.
D. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A325.
E. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.
F. Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single sided type is not
acceptable.
G. Bushings for Floor Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for
seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of
anchor bolts and studs used.
H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of
neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of attachment devices
used.
2.04 SEISMIC BRACING COMPONENTS
A. Slotted Steel Channel: 1-5/8 IN by 1-5/8 IN cross section, formed from 0.1046 IN
thick steel, with 9/16 IN by 7/8 IN slots at a maximum of 2 IN OC in webs, and
flange edges turned toward web.
1. Materials for Channel: ASTM A1011.
2. Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A575, ASTM A576, or
ASTM A36.
3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as
channels and designed for use with that product.
4. Finish: Baked, rust-inhibiting, acrylic-enamel paint applied after cleaning
and phosphate treatment, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Channel Type Bracing Assemblies: Slotted steel channel, with adjustable hinged
steel brackets and bolts.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 10 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 07 10 Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
C. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels, installed vertically, with internally
bolted connections to hanger rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install seismic restraints according to applicable codes and regulations and as
approved by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, unless more stringent requirements
are indicated.
B. Install structural attachments as follows:
1. Use bolted connections with steel brackets, slotted channel, and slotted-
channel fittings to spread structural loads and reduce stresses.
2. Attachments to New Concrete: Bolt to channel type concrete inserts or
use expansion anchors.
3. Attachments to Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors.
4. Holes for Expansion Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths
that avoid reinforcing bars.
5. Attachments to Solid Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Use expansion
anchors.
6. Attachments to Hollow Walls: Bolt to slotted steel channels fastened to
wall with expansion anchors.
7. Attachments to Wood Structural Members: Install bolts through
members.
8. Attachments to Steel: Bolt to clamps on flanges of beams or on upper
truss chords of bar joists.
C. Install electrical equipment anchorage as follows:
1. Anchor panelboards, motor-control centers, motor controls,
switchboards, switchgear, transformers, unit substations, fused power
circuit devices, transfer switches, busway, battery racks, static
uninterruptible power units, power conditioners, capacitor units,
communication system components, and electronic signal processing,
control, and distribution units as follows:
a. Anchor equipment rigidly to a single mobile structural element or to
a concrete base that is structurally tied to a single mobile structural
element.
b. Size concrete bases so that expansion anchors will be a minimum
of 10 bolt diameters from the edge of the concrete base.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 10 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 07 10 Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
c. Concrete Bases for Floor Mounted Equipment: Use female
expansion anchors and install studs and nuts after equipment is
positioned.
d. Bushings for Floor Mounted Equipment Anchors: Install to allow for
resilient media between anchor bolt or stud and mounting hole in
concrete.
e. Anchor Bolt Bushing Assemblies for Wall Mounted Equipment:
Install to allow for resilient media where equipment or equipment
mounting channels are attached to wall.
f. Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by
equipment manufacturer.
D. Install Seismic Bracing:
1. Install bracing according to spacings and strengths indicated by approved
analysis.
2. Expansion and Contraction: Install to allow for thermal movement of
braced components.
3. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor
bracing to the structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar
joists, or at concrete members.
E. Accommodation of Differential Seismic Motion: Make flexible connections in
raceways, cables, wireway, cable trays, and busway where they cross expansion
and seismic control joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by
different structural elements, and where they terminate at electrical equipment
anchored to a different mobile structural element from the one supporting them.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: SCRRA will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to
inspect seismic-control installation for compliance with indicated requirements.
B. Re-inspection: Correct deficiencies and verify by re-inspection that work complies
with requirements.
C. Provide written report of tests and inspections.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 10 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 07 10 Seismic Controls for Electrical Work
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 07 10
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 10 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 07 50
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Electrical identification.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and Sections or elevation layouts of electrical
equipment.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces,
coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.
B. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by
acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before
ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application
category. Use colors prescribed by ASME A13.1, NFPA 70, and these
Specifications.
B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ASME A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size
of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable
size.
1. Type: Pretensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves. Flexible, preprinted, color-
coded, acrylic band sized to suit the diameter of the item it identifies.
2. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is over- laminated
with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.
3. Color: Black letters on orange background.
4. Legend: Indicates voltage.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 50 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 07 50 Electrical Identification
5. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-
adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 IN wide by 3 mils thick.
C. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous- printed, vinyl
tape with the following features:
1. Minimum 6 IN wide by 4 mils thick.
2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.
D. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self adhesive, wraparound type with
preprinted numbers and letters.
1. Color Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self locking type. Colors to suit
coding scheme.
E. Engraved Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock,
melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16 IN
minimum thickness for signs up to 20 SQ IN and 1/8 IN minimum thickness for
larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background.
F. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
G. Preprinted, aluminum, baked enamel finish signs, punched or drilled for
mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application.
H. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
I. Weather resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose acetate butyrate signs with
0.0396 IN galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to
the application. 1/4 IN grommets in corners for mounting.
J. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self tapping, stainless steel screws or
No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION
A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation
and maintenance of equipment.
B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for
electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract
Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations
throughout Project.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 50 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 07 50 Electrical Identification
C. Self Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding.
E. Bands: Pretensioned, snap around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive
marking tape. Make each color band 2 IN wide, completely encircling conduit, and
place adjacent bands of two color markings in contact, side by side.
1. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,
at 50 FT maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 FT maximum intervals
in congested areas.
2. Colors:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red.
b. Security System: Blue and yellow.
c. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
F. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and
circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color coding
may be used for voltage and phase identification.
G. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for
exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located
directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 IN below finished
grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope
does not exceed 16 IN overall, use a single line marker.
1. Color code 208Y/120-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit
conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
2. Color code 480Y/277-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-
circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:
a. Phase A: Yellow.
b. Phase B: Brown.
c. Phase C: Orange.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 50 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 07 50 Electrical Identification
H. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with
29 CFR 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance
of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic
laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed
for system or equipment operation. Install metal backed butyrate signs for outdoor
items.
I. Install engraved laminated emergency operating signs with white letters on red
background with minimum 3/8 IN high lettering for emergency instructions on
power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 07 50
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 07 50 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 08 00
ELECTRICAL TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General requirements for electrical field testing and inspecting.
2. Detailed requirements are specified in each Section containing
components that require testing. General requirements include:
a. Qualifications of testing agencies and their personnel.
b. Suitability of test equipment.
c. Calibration of test instruments.
d. Coordination requirements for testing and inspecting.
e. Reporting requirements for testing and inspecting.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA):
1. ATS, Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power
Equipment and Systems.
B. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance/American
National Standards Institute (TIA/EIA/ANSI):
1. 455-78-B, Optical Fibers - PART 1-40: Measurement Methods and Test
Procedures - Attenuation.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications:
1. An independent firm performing, as the sole or principal part of its business
for a minimum of 10 years, the inspection, testing, calibration, and adjusting
of systems.
2. Testing firm that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 will be brought in by AUTHORITY to
perform testing; Contractor will coordinate and cooperate with this group.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 08 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 08 00 Electrical Testing
B. Must have an established monitoring and testing equipment calibration program
with accuracy traceable in an unbroken chain, according to NIST.
1. Field personnel:
a. Minimum of one (1) year field experience covering all phases of
electrical equipment inspection, testing, and calibration.
b. Relay test technician having previous experience with testing and
calibration of relays of the same manufacturer and type used on
project and proficient in setting and testing the types of protection
elements used.
2. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET.
3. Analysis personnel:
a. Minimum three (3) years combined field testing and data analysis
experience.
b. Supervisor certified by NETA or NICET.
C. Test Equipment Suitability: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.2.
D. Test Equipment Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, Section 5.3.
PART 2 - MATERIALS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. If a group of tests are specified to be performed by an independent testing agency,
prepare systems, equipment, and components for tests and inspections, and
perform preliminary tests to ensure that systems, equipment, and components are
ready for independent agency testing. Include the following minimum preparations
as appropriate:
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests.
2. Perform continuity tests.
3. Perform rotation test (for motors to be tested).
4. Provide a stable source of single-phase electrical power for test
instrumentation at each test location.
B. Test and Inspection Reports: In addition to requirements specified elsewhere,
report the following:
1. Manufacturer's written testing and inspecting instructions.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 08 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 08 00 Electrical Testing
2. Calibration and adjustment settings of adjustable and interchangeable
devices involved in tests.
3. Tabulation of expected measurement results made before measurements.
4. Tabulation of "as-found" and "as-left" measurement and observation
results.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 08 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 08 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 12 00
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES - LOW VOLTAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Material and installation requirements for:
a. Building wire.
b. Power cable.
c. Control cable.
d. Shielded VFD cable.
e. Instrumentation cable.
f. Fiber optic cable.
g. Wire connectors.
h. Insulating tape.
i. Pulling lubricant.
2. Accessories required for a complete installation.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
3. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
4. Section 26 08 00 - Electrical Testing
5. Section 2613 00 – Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
1. 1202, Standard for Flame-Propagation Testing of Wire and Cable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
B. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
1. S-58-679, Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification.
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. ICS 4, Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks.
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/Insulated Cable Engineers
Association (NEMA/ICEA):
1. WC 57/S-73-532, Standard for Control Cables.
2. WC 70/S-95-658, Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less
for the Distribution of Electrical Energy.
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and
Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
F. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (TIA/EIA):
1. 598-C, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.
G. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance/American
National Standards Institute (TIA/EIA/ANSI):
1. 568, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. 44, Standard for Safety Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.
2. 83, Standard for Safety Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.
3. 467, Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
4. 486A, Standard for Safety Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for use
with Copper Conductors.
5. 486C, Standard for Safety Splicing Wire Connections.
6. 510, Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber
Insulating Tape.
7. 1277, Standard for Safety Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with
Optional Optical-Fiber Members.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
8. 1581, Standard for Safety Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables,
and Flexible Cords.
9. 2250, Standard for Safety Instrumentation Tray Cable.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing either building wire
or instrumentation wire.
B. Instrumentation Cable:
1. Multiple conductor, insulated, twisted or untwisted, with outer sheath.
2. The following are specific types of instrumentation cables:
a. Analog signal cable:
1) Used for the transmission of low current (e.g., 4-20mA DC)
or low voltage (e.g., 0-10 Vdc) signals, using No. 16 AWG
and smaller conductors.
2) Commonly used types are defined in the following:
a) TSP: Twisted shielded pair.
b) TST: Twisted shielded triad.
b. Digital signal cable: Used for the transmission of digital signals
between computers, PLC's, RTU's, etc.
C. Power Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing building
wire, No. 8 AWG and larger.
D. Control Cable: Multi-conductor, insulated, with outer sheath containing building
wires, No. 14, No. 12 or No. 10 AWG.
E. Building Wire: Single conductor, insulated, with or without outer jacket depending
upon type.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and
administration of the submittal process.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
2. Product technical data:
a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this
Specification Section except:
1) Wire connectors.
2) Insulating tape.
3) Cable lubricant.
b. See Specification Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Building wire, power and control cable and multiplex cable:
a. Aetna Insulated Wire.
b. Alphawire.
c. Cerrowire.
d. Encore Wire Corporation.
e. General Cable.
f. Okonite Company.
g. Southwire Company.
h. American Insulated Wire Corp., a Leviton Company.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
2. Instrumentation cable:
a. Analog cable:
1) Alphawire.
2) Belden Inc.
3) General Cable.
3. Wire connectors:
a. AFC Cable Systems, Inc., div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
b. Anderson Electrical Products, Inc., subsidiary Hubbell Incorporated
c. Burndy Corporation.
d. AMP brand, Tyco Electronics.
e. Buchanan.
f. Ideal.
g. Ilsco.
h. 3M Co.
i. Teledyne Penn Union.
j. Thomas and Betts.
k. Phoenix Contact.
l. O-Z/Gedney brand, EGS Electrical Group.
4. Insulating and color coding tape:
a. 3M Co.
b. Plymouth Bishop Tapes.
c. Red Seal Electric Co.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Building Wire:
1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation.
2. Conductors shall be stranded, except for conductors used in lighting and
receptacle circuits which may be stranded or solid.
3. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size,
insulation type and UL label.
4. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 83 for type THHN/THWN
and THHN/THWN-2 insulation.
5. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 44 for type XHHW-2
insulation.
B. Power Cable:
1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation. 75 DegC
temperature rated insulation. Where installed in raceway exposed to direct
sunlight outside of the buildings, provide minimum 90 DegC temperature
rated insulation.
2. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size,
insulation type and UL label.
3. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 70/S-95-658 and UL 83 and UL 1277 for type
THHN/THWN insulation with an overall PVC jacket.
4. Number of conductors as required, including a bare ground conductor.
5. Individual conductor color coding:
a. ICEA S-58-679, Method 4.
b. See PART 3 of this Specification Section for additional
requirements.
6. Conform to NFPA 70 Type TC.
C. Control Cable:
1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation.
2. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size,
insulation type and UL label.
3. Conform to NEMA/ICEA WC 57/S-73-532 and UL 83 and UL 1277 for type
THHN/THWN insulation with an overall PVC jacket.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
4. Number of conductors as required, provided with or without bare ground
conductor of the same AWG size.
a. When a bare ground conductor is not provided, an additional
insulated conductor shall be provided and used as the ground
conductor (e.g., 6/c No. 14 w/g and 7/c No. 14 are equal).
5. Individual conductor color coding:
a. ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table E-2.
b. See PART 3 of this Specification Section for additional
requirements.
6. Conform to NFPA 70 Type TC.
D. Electrical Equipment Control Wire:
1. Conductor shall be copper with 600 V rated insulation.
2. Conductors shall be stranded.
3. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size,
insulation type and UL label.
4. Conform to UL 44 for Type SIS insulation.
5. Conform to UL 83 for Type MTW insulation.
E. Instrumentation Cable:
1. Surface mark with manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size,
insulation type and UL label.
2. Analog cable:
a. Tinned copper conductors.
b. 300 V or 600 V PVC insulation with PVC jacket.
c. Twisted with 100 percent foil shield coverage with drain wire.
d. Six (6) twists per foot minimum.
e. Individual conductor color coding: ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table
E-2.
f. Conform to UL 2250, UL 1581 and NFPA 70 Type ITC.
3. Digital cable:
a. As recommended by equipment (e.g., PLC, RTU) manufacturer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
b. Horizontal voice and data cable:
1) Category 6 per TIA/EIA/ANSI 568.
2) Cable shall be label-verified.
3) Cable jacket shall be factory marked at regular intervals
indicating verifying organization and performance level.
4) Conductors: No. 24 AWG solid untinned copper.
5) Rated CMP per NFPA 70.
c. Conform to NFPA 262 and NFPA 70 Type ITC.
F. Fiber Optic Cables:
1. All multimode fiber optic cable, patch cords and connectors shall be colored
orange. SC type connectors shall be used for all fiber optic cable
connections. The fiber optic cable shall be multimode 850 nm, supplied by
Corning Cable Systems or Approved equal and shall meet or exceed the
following minimum specifications:
a. Each optical fiber shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections
and inclusions to meet the optical and mechanical requirements of
the Work and environmental conditions encountered in Greater Los
Angeles region.
b. Each optical fiber shall consist of a germania-doped silica core
surrounded by a concentric glass cladding. The fiber shall be
matched clad design.
c. Each optical fiber shall be proof tested by the manufacturer at a
minimum of 100 KPSI.
d. Attenuation shall be ≤ 3.4 dB/Km.
e. Point discontinuity shall be ≤ 0.2 dB.
f. Effective modal bandwidth shall be ≥ 220 MHz-Km.
g. Cladding diameter shall be 125.0 + or – 2.0 µm with a core diameter
of 62.5 + or – 3.0 µm, and the coating diameter of 245 + or – 5 µm.
G. Wire Connectors:
1. Twist/screw on type:
a. Insulated pressure or spring type solderless connector.
b. 600 V rated.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
c. Ground conductors: Conform to UL 486C and/or UL 467 when
required by local codes.
d. Phase and neutral conductors: Conform to UL 486C.
2. Compression and mechanical screw type:
a. 600 V rated.
b. Ground conductors: Conform to UL 467.
c. Phase and neutral conductors: Conform to UL 486A.
3. Terminal block type:
a. High density, screw-post barrier-type with white center marker strip.
b. 600 V and ampere rating as required, for power circuits.
c. 600 V, 20 ampere rated for control circuits.
d. 300 V, 15 ampere rated for instrumentation circuits.
e. Conform to NEMA ICS 4 and UL 486A.
H. Insulating and Color Coding Tape:
1. Pressure sensitive vinyl.
2. Premium grade.
3. Heat, cold, moisture, and sunlight resistant.
4. Thickness, depending on use conditions: 7, 8.5, or 10 mil.
5. For cold weather or outdoor location, tape must also be all-weather.
6. Color:
a. Insulating tape: Black.
b. Color coding tape: Fade-resistant color as specified herein.
7. Comply with UL 510.
I. Pulling Lubricant: Cable manufacturer's standard containing no petroleum or other
products which will deteriorate insulation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A. Installation:
1. Permitted Usage of Insulation Types:
a. Building wire and power and control cable in architectural and non-
architectural finished areas.
b. Building wire and power and control cable in conduit below grade.
2. Type THHN/THWN and THHN/THWN-2:
a. Building wire and power and control cable No. 8 AWG and smaller
in architectural and non-architectural finished areas.
3. Type SIS and MTW:
a. For the wiring of control equipment within control panels and field
wiring of control equipment within switchgear, switchboards, motor
control centers.
B. Conductor Size Limitations:
1. Feeder and branch power conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12
AWG unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
a. Solid copper type conductors for No. 12 AWG and No. 10 AWG.
2. Control conductors shall not be smaller than No. 14 AWG unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
3. Instrumentation conductors shall not be smaller than No. 18 AWG unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
C. Color Code All Wiring as Follows:
1. Building wire:
240 V, 208 V, 480 V,
240/120 V, 208/120 V 480/277 V
Phase 1 Black Brown
Phase 2 Red * Orange
Phase 3 Blue Yellow
Neutral White White or
Gray
Ground Green Green
* Orange when it is a high leg of a 120/240 V Delta
system.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
a. Conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller: Insulated phase, neutral and
ground conductors shall be identified by a continuous colored outer
finish along its entire length.
b. Conductors larger than No. 6 AWG:
1) Insulated phase and neutral conductors shall be identified
by one (1) of the following methods:
a) Continuous colored outer finish along its entire
length.
b) 3 IN of colored tape applied at the termination.
2) Insulated grounding conductor shall be identified by one (1)
of the following methods:
a) Continuous green outer finish along its entire length.
b) Stripping the insulation from the entire exposed
length.
c) Using green tape to cover the entire exposed length.
3) The color coding shall be applied at all accessible locations,
including but not limited to: Junction and pull boxes,
wireways, manholes and handholes.
2. Power cables ICEA S-58-679, Method 4 with:
a. Phase and neutral conductors identified with 3 IN of colored tape,
per the Table herein, applied at the terminations.
b. Ground conductor: Bare.
3. Control cables ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table E-2:
a. When a bare ground is not provided, one (1) of the colored insulated
conductors shall be re-identified by stripping the insulation from the
entire exposed length or using green tape to cover the entire
exposed length.
b. When used in power applications the colored insulated conductors
used as phase and neutral conductors may have to be re-identified
with 3 IN of colored tape, per the Table herein, applied at the
terminations.
D. Install all wiring in raceway unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
E. Feeder, branch, control and instrumentation circuits shall not be combined in a
raceway, cable tray, junction or pull box, except as permitted in the following:
1. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings.
2. Where field conditions dictate and written permission is obtained from the
Engineer.
3. Control circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch power and
instrumentation circuits but combining of control circuits is permitted.
a. The combinations shall comply with the following:
1) 12 Vdc, 24 Vdc and 48 Vdc may be combined.
2) 125 Vdc shall be isolated from all other AC and DC circuits.
3) AC control circuits shall be isolated from all DC circuits.
4. Instrumentation circuits shall be isolated from feeder and branch power and
control circuits but combining of instrumentation circuits is permitted.
a. The combinations shall comply with the following:
1) Analog signal circuits may be combined.
2) Digital signal circuits may be combined but isolated from
analog signal circuits.
5. Multiple branch circuits for lighting, receptacle and other 120 Vac circuits
are allowed to be combined into a common raceway.
a. Contractor is responsible for making the required adjustments in
conductor and raceway size, in accordance with all requirements of
the NFPA 70, including but not limited to:
1) Up sizing conductor size for required ampacity de-ratings for
the number of current carrying conductors in the raceway.
2) The neutral conductors may not be shared.
3) Up sizing raceway size for the size and quantity of
conductors.
F. Ground the drain wire of shielded instrumentation cables at one (1) end only.
1. The preferred grounding location is at the load (e.g., control panel), not at
the source (e.g., field mounted instrument).
G. Splices and terminations for the following circuit types shall be made in the
indicated enclosure type using the indicated method.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
1. Feeder and branch power circuits:
a. Device outlet boxes:
1) Twist/screw on type connectors.
b. Junction and pull boxes and wireways:
1) Twist/screw on type connectors for use on No. 8 and smaller
wire.
2) Compression, mechanical screw or terminal block or
terminal strip type connectors for use on No. 6 AWG and
larger wire.
c. Motor terminal boxes:
1) Twist/screw on type connectors for use on No. 10 AWG and
smaller wire.
2) Insulated mechanical screw type connectors for use on No.
8 AWG and larger wire.
d. Manholes or handholes:
1) Twist/screw on type connectors pre-filled with epoxy for use
on No. 8 AWG and smaller wire.
2) Watertight compression or mechanical screw type
connectors for use on No. 6 AWG and larger wire.
2. Control circuits:
a. Junction and pull boxes: Terminal block type connector.
b. Manholes or handholes: Twist/screw on type connectors pre-filled
with epoxy.
c. Control panels and motor control centers: Terminal block or strips
provided within the equipment or field installed within the equipment
by the Contractor.
3. Instrumentation circuits can be spliced where field conditions dictate and
written permission is obtained from the Engineer.
a. Maintain electrical continuity of the shield when splicing twisted
shielded conductors.
b. Junction and pull boxes: Terminal block type connector.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
c. Control panels and motor control centers: Terminal block or strip
provided within the equipment or field installed within the equipment
by the Contractor.
4. Non-insulated compression and mechanical screw type connectors shall
be insulated with tape or hot or cold shrink type insulation to the insulation
level of the conductors.
H. Insulating Tape Usage:
1. For insulating connections of No. 8 AWG wire and smaller: 7 mil vinyl tape.
2. For insulating splices and taps of No. 6 AWG wire or larger: 10 mil vinyl
tape.
3. For insulating connections made in cold weather or in outdoor locations:
8.5 mil, all weather vinyl tape.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated
in NETA ATS (Acceptance Testing Specifications), Section 7.3.1. Certify
compliance with test parameters. See Specification Section 26 08 00.
B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action
taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Conductors and Cables for electrical and communications systems will be
measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as
contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of
values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 12 00 Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Conductors and Cables electrical and communications systems furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the
Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price
shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment,
supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans,
and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 12 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 12 00 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 13 00
CONDUITS, RACEWAYS, AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical and
Customer Information System (CIS) communication wiring.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 1 - General Requirements.
2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal procedures.
3. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, for supports
and anchors.
4. Section 26 06 00 – Grounding and Bonding
5. Section 26 07 10 - Seismic Controls for Electrical Work, for seismic
restraints and bracing of raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
6. Section 26 14 00 - Wiring Devices, for devices installed in boxes and for
floor-box service fittings.
7. Section 29 00 00 – Summary of Work (CIS)
8. Section 29 20 20 – Communications Services
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
F. RGS: Rigid Galvanized Steel conduit. Also listed as RMC: Rigid Metallic Conduit.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-
cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for
raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
C. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified Professional Engineer.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic
restraints.
2. Detail assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.
D. Coordination Plans: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating
penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
E. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that
enclosures, cabinets, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in 26 07 10 - Seismic Controls for Electrical Work. Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the
seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Plans of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and
suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported
by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and
partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed
comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00 -
Product Requirements.
2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one
of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc., Div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
2. Anaconda Sealtite brand, Anamet Electrical Inc.
3. Electri-Flex Co.
4. Allied Tube and Conduit, Div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
5. O-Z/Gedney, div. EGS Electrical Group.
6. Wheatland Tube Co., Div. Carlyle Group.
B. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: NEMA/ANSI C80.1.
C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: NEMA/ANSI C80.5.
D. IMC: NEMA/ANSI C80.6.
E. Plastic-Coated Galvanized Steel (PVC-coated RGS) Conduit and Fittings:
NEMA RN 1.
F. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
G. EMT and Fittings: NEMA/ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Compression type.
H. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
J. Fittings: NEMA/ANSI FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
2.03 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one
of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. Anaconda Sealtite brand, Anamet Electrical Inc.
2. Arnco Corp.
3. Cantex Inc.
4. CertainTeed Corp, Pipe & Plastics Group.
5. Condux International.
6. Elecsys Corporation.
7. Electri-Flex Co.
8. Carlon brand, Lamson & Sessions.
9. RACO brand, Hubbell Inc.
10. AFC Cable Systems, Div. Tyco Electrical and Metal Products.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.
C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.
D. ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
2.04 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one
of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. Hoffman Enclosures, div. CHS Controls AB.
2. Square D brand, Schneider Electric.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
3. Wiremold / Legrand.
B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1 or
3R as required to suit installation situation.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with
wireways as required for complete system.
D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system
and to comply with NFPA 70.
E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.05 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one
of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. Hoffman Enclosures, div. CHS Controls AB.
2. Carlon brand, Lamson & Sessions.
3. Wiremold / Legrand – French.
B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape
indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil- resistant gasket
material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance.
Connections are flanged, with stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.
C. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with
snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.
D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with
wireways as required for complete system.
E. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system
and to comply with NFPA 70.
2.06 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with
manufacturer's standard prime coating.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one
of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
2. Wiremold / Legrand.
C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC
compound with matte texture and manufacturer's standard color.
D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one
of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. Enduro Systems Inc.
2. Hubbell, Inc., Wiring Device Division.
3. Carlon brand, Lamson & Sessions.
4. Panduit Corp.
5. Wiremold / Legrand.
E. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with
fittings that match and mate with raceways.
2.07 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one
of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2. Appleton Electric, brand of EGS Electrical Group, joint venture of Emerson
and SPX Corporation.
3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
4. Hoffman Enclosures, div. CHS Controls AB.
5. Killark brand, Hubbell Inc.
6. O-Z/Gedney, div. EGS Electrical Group.
7. RACO brand, Hubbell Inc.
8. Robroy Industries.
9. Adalet Enclosure Systems, div. Scott Fetzer Co.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12. Wiremold / Legrand.
13. Daniel Woodhead brand, Woodhead Industries, div. Molex Inc.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA/ANSI OS 1.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA/ANSI FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed
cover.
D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA/ANSI OS 2.
E. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
F. Floor Boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, round.
G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA/ANSI OS 1.
H. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA/ANSI FB 1, cast aluminum with
gasketed cover.
I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and
flush latch.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's
standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-
resistant paint.
J. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel
and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match
panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and
voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.08 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's
standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's
standard gray paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and
cabinets before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors:
1. Exposed: Rigid galvanized steel or IMC.
2. Concealed: Rigid galvanized steel or IMC.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
3. Underground, Single Run: Concrete encased RNC with reinforcement as
indicated on Plans.
4. Underground, Grouped: Concrete encased RNC with reinforcement as
indicated on Plans.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors:
1. Exposed: Rigid steel below 8 feet AFF; EMT more than 8 FT AFF.
2. Concealed: EMT.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except
use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:
a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 IN trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved
for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after
installing conduits.
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz.
F. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete,
install in nonmetallic sleeve.
G. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall conduct field investigations to ensure the locations of existing
and new conduits, pull boxes, junction boxes, and equipment prior to developing
shop plans.
B. All conduits shall be adequately separated from crossing other utilities per
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
requirements in these specifications and per SCRRA Design Criteria. Per the
Design Criteria, outside plant conduits shall be spaced at least 12 inches from
other parallel utilities, and at least 6 inch when crossing with other utilities
perpendicularly.
C. All outside conduits shall be placed in a trench or buried to a minimum 48 IN below
grade to the top of the conduits. Wherever this depth cannot be met, the conduits
shall be concrete encased. All conduits shall be installed per requirements in the
SCRRA Design Criteria and SCRRA Signaling and Communications Standards,
D. Outside fiber optic cable and conduits, where installed, shall be protected using
detectable marking tape placed 6 inch below grade for a length of at least 1,000
feet over the cable installed area to be protected.
E. All required interfaces for connection to the LCD Monitor and FOPP, to the LED
Message sign and FOPP, to the EMP, and to speakers shall be installed as per
requirements of these Specifications.
F. The Contractor shall install two (2), 1 inch conduits from the nearest electrical
pullbox and communications pullbox, respectively, to the location of LCD
monitor(s) installation. One conduit shall be used for communications
transmission/data transmission to LCD and the requirements for that conduit
including pulling cables are described in the CIS section. The other conduit shall
carry power to the monitor(s). The fiber shall be interfaced to the monitor through
the FOPP as shown in the contract plans.
G. The contractor shall provide electrical and communications cables and conduits
for LED message signs as shown in contract documents. The Contractor shall
install two (2), 1 inch conduits from the nearest electrical pullbox and
communications pullbox, respectively, to the location of LED message sign(s)
installation.
H. The Contractor shall extend power from Communications Shelter to the LCD
monitor(s). Within each monitor enclosure(s) the Contractor shall provide and
install power strip to connect/disconnect power to the Network Media Player (NMP)
and the monitor(s). The Contractor shall provide a duplex receptacle; one for the
AC and other for the power strip.
I. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
J. Support raceways as specified in Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods.
K. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
L. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs.
M. Arrange so that curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
N. Make bends and offsets so that ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same
plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
O. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest
practical distance, considering type of building construction and
obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
P. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical
and leave at least 2 IN of concrete cover.
1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during
concrete placement.
2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3. Run conduit larger than 1 IN trade size parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close
to slab support.
4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to rigid steel conduit before rising above
the floor.
Q. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural
members and follow surface contours as much as possible.
1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.
2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only
where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for
parallel raceways.
R. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints
tight.
1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
S. Terminations:
1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align
raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against
box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.
2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or
fittings tightly into hub so that end bears against wire protection shoulder.
Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so that coupling is square
to box; tighten chase nipple so that no threads are exposed.
T. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line
with not less than 200 LB tensile strength. Leave at least 12 IN of slack at each end
of pull wire.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
U. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2 IN Trade Size and Smaller: In addition
to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 FT and with a
maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or
junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.
V. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and
fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each
fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of
adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of
refrigerated spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
W. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to
freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside
for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid
steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 IN above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated,
threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.
X. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 IN of flexible conduit for recessed and
semi recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise
transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
Y. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from
junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.
Z. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
AA. Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
BB. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and
cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
3.04 CLEANING
A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes,
inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 13 00 Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes for electrical and communications systems will
be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as
contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of
values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
B. Enclosures will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
C. Cabinets will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the
basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes; Enclosures; and Cabinets for electrical and
communications systems furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 13 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 13 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 14 00
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground fault circuit interrupters, and
integral surge suppression units.
2. Single and double pole snap switches and dimmer switches.
3. Device wall plates.
4. Floor service outlets, poke through assemblies, service poles, and multi
outlet assemblies.
5. Accessories required for a complete installation.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
4. Section 26 12 00 - Conductors and Cables – Low Voltage.
5. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
6. Section 26 08 00 – Electrical Testing.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used
for pre-marking wall plates.
C. Samples: For each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color
specified.
D. Field quality control test reports.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 14 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 14 00 Wiring Devices
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed
comparable products and substitutions in accordance with:
1. Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.
2. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
3. Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements,
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following, or equal approved as a substitution:
1. Wiring Devices:
a. Bryant Electric, div. Hubbell Inc.
b. Cooper Wiring Devices.
c. Hubbell Wiring Device-Kellems, div. Hubbell Incorporated.
d. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
e. Pass & Seymour/Legrand.
2. Multioutlet Assemblies:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
b. Wiremold / Legrand.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 14 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 14 00 Wiring Devices
B. Receptacles:
1. Straight Blade Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA/ANSI
WD 6, DSCC W-C-596G, and UL 498.
2. Straight Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade.
3. Straight Blade Receptacles: Hospital grade.
4. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, non-feed through type, Hospital grade,
with integral NEMA/ANSI WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle;
complying with UL 498 and UL 943. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4
IN deep outlet box without an adapter.
C. Switches:
1. Single and Double Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-S-896F and
UL 20.
2. Snap Switches: Heavy Duty grade, quiet type.
3. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full wave, solid state units with integral, quiet
on/off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.
a. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-
way switching to suit connections.
b. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with
continuously adjustable rotary knob, toggle switch, or slider; single
pole with soft tap or other quiet switch; EMI/RFI filter to eliminate
interference; and 5 IN wire connecting leads.
c. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with
dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming;
dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low
end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
D. Wall Plates: Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high impact thermoplastic 0.04 IN.
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.
4. Material for Wet Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover,
and listed and labeled for use in wet locations.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Color:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 14 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 14 00 Wiring Devices
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by
Engineer unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines.
B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging.
C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers.
D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long
dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group
adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.
E. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of
partitions and furnishings.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 26 07 50 - Electrical Identification.
1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served.
Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black filled lettering
on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 06 00 - Grounding and Bonding.
B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 12 00 - Conductors and Cables: Low
Voltage.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with
requirements.
2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified
above.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 14 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 14 00 Wiring Devices
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 14 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 14 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 28 00
OVERCURRENT AND SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Low voltage circuit breakers.
2. Motor Circuit Protector.
3. Fuses.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
3. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
4. Section 26 05 50 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination.
5. Section 26 08 00 – Electrical Testing.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
1. C37.13, Standard for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in
Enclosures.
2. C37.16, Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power Circuit
Protectors - Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and Application
Recommendations.
3. C37.17, Trip Devices for AC and General Purpose DC Low Voltage Power
Circuit Breakers.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. AB 1, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit-
Breaker Enclosures. (Equivalent to UL 489)
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 00 Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices
1. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. 489, Standard for Safety Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case
Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures.
2. 943, Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
3. 1066, Standard for Low-Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used
in Enclosures.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Product technical data including:
a. Outline Drawings with dimensions.
b. Ratings for voltage, amperage and maximum interrupting ratings.
c. Trip unit functions and adjustments
d. Accessories.
e. Wiring diagrams.
f. Manufacturer shall provide hard copy time/current characteristic trip
curves (and Ip & I²t let through curves for current limiting circuit
breakers) for each type of circuit breaker.
2. Submit with associated switchboard, panelboard or other assembly.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manual.
a. Include instructions for circuit breaker mounting, trip unit functions
and adjustments, trouble shooting, accessories and wiring
diagrams.
C. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Reports:
a. As-left condition of all circuit breakers that have adjustable settings.
b. Short circuit study report.
c. Protective coordination study report.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 00 Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Provide Owner with 10 percent, but not less than 3, each type
and rating installed fuses at completion of Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Circuit breakers:
a. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
b. Schneider Electric/Square D.
c. Siemens.
d. General Electric.
2. Fuses:
a. Bussman Manufacturing Division.
b. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
c. Siemans.
d. General Electric.
2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded Case Type:
1. General:
a. Standards: NEMA AB 1, UL 489.
b. Unit construction.
c. Over-center, toggle handle operated.
d. Quick-make, quick-break, independent of toggle handle operation.
e. Manual and automatic operation.
f. All poles open and close simultaneously.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 00 Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices
g. Three (3) position handle: On, off and tripped.
h. Molded-in ON and OFF markings on breaker cover.
i. One-, two- or three-pole as indicated on the Drawings.
j. Current and interrupting ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
k. Bolt on type.
2. Thermal magnetic type:
a. Inverse time overload and instantaneous short circuit protection by
means of a thermal magnetic element.
b. Frame size 150 amp and below:
1) Non-interchangeable, non-adjustable thermal magnetic trip
units.
c. Frame sizes 225 to 400 amp (trip settings less than 400A):
1) Interchangeable and adjustable instantaneous thermal
magnetic trip units.
d. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Listed:
1) Standard: UL 943.
2) One- or two-pole as indicated on the Drawings.
3) Class A ground fault circuit.
4) Trip on 5 mA ground fault (4-6 mA range).
3. Solid state trip type:
a. Inverse time overload, instantaneous short circuit and ground fault
protection by means of a solid state trip element, associated current
monitors and flux shunt trip mechanism.
b. Frame size 400 amp to 1200 amp (trip settings between 400 and
1200A):
1) Standard rating. Provide 100 percent rated where
indicated.
2) Interchangeable current sensor or rating plug.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 00 Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices
3) Adjustable long time pick-up setting.
a) Adjustable from 50 to 100 percent of the current
sensor or rating plug.
4) Adjustable short time pick-up setting.
5) Adjustable instantaneous pick-up.
6) Fixed ground fault pick-up, when indicated on the Drawings.
c. Frame size 1600 amp and above:
1) 100 percent rated.
2) Interchangeable current sensor or rating plug.
3) Adjustable long time pick-up setting.
a) Adjustable from 50 to 100 percent of the current
sensor or rating plug.
4) Adjustable long time delay setting.
5) Adjustable short time pick-up setting.
6) Adjustable instantaneous pick-up setting.
7) Adjustable ground fault pick-up setting, when indicated on
the Drawings.
8) Adjustable ground fault delay setting, when indicated on the
Drawings.
2.03 MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR
A. Adjustable instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a magnetic or solid
state trip element.
B. Sized for the connected motor.
2.04 FUSES
A. Provide at locations indicated and as required for supplemental protection.
1. Fuses: Product of single manufacturer. Trade names and catalog
numbers indicated are Bussman.
2. Fuse Type: Dual-element time-delay.
3. Voltage: 600 V.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 00 Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices
4. Ratings: As indicated.
5. Short-circuit interrupting rating: 200,000 Amps RMS symmetrical.
6. Typical: Current limiting.
7. UL Class:
a. Main, feeder and branch circuits, circuit breaker protection, and
motor protection: RK1.
b. Motor, welder and transformer protection: RK5.
8. Main and Feeder Protection:
a. Where rating of protective device is 600A, provide Bussman KRP-
C SP, Class L, current limiting fuses, having interrupting rating of
200,000A RMS.
b. Where rating of protective device is 600A or less, provide Bussman
LIMITRON LPN-RK SP current limiting fuses, having interrupting
rating of 200,000A RMS.
9. Motor Protection: Coordinate fuse size with motor to provide motor running
protection.
10. Instruction Label: When standard holder type fuses are specified, Class
K1 or K5, provide each enclosure where fuses are installed with instruction
label fastened at obvious location in enclosure.
a. Label: Clearly describe type of fuse, voltage rating, and interrupting
rating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Current and interrupting ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Series rated systems not acceptable.
C. Devices shall be ambient temperature compensated.
D. Field settings:
1. Perform field adjustments of protective devices as required to place
equipment in final operating condition. Settings shall be in accordance with
approved power system study.
2. Provide certified calibration report for each protective device.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 00 Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices
E. Arc Flash Labels:
1. Provide Arc flash hazard warning label on each piece of electrical
equipment as per Arc Flash Hazard Report refer to Section 26 05 50.
F. Circuit Breakers:
1. Molded case circuit breakers shall incorporate the following, unless
indicated otherwise on the Drawings:
a. Frame sizes 400 amp and less with trip setting less than 400A shall
be thermal magnetic type.
b. Frame sizes 400 amp and larger shall be solid state trip type.
c. Frame sizes 1000 amp and above shall include integral ground fault
protection.
G. Motor circuit protectors sized for the connected motor.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Adjustable Circuit Breakers:
1. Set all circuit breaker adjustable taps as per Protective Device Coordination
Study recommended trip settings, refer to Specification Section 26 05 50
except adjust motor circuit protectors per the motor nameplate and NFPA
70 requirements.
B. Ground Fault Protection System:
1. Single source system:
a. Coordinated with individual feeder breakers using the residual
sensing method.
b. Main and feeder breakers: Utilize four (4) individual current
sensors; the phase sensors are integral to the circuit breaker and
the neutral sensor is external to the circuit breaker.
C. Testing:
1. Acceptance testing: See Specification Section 26 08 00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 00 Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 28 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 28 16
SAFETY SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Safety switches.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
3. Section 26 05 00 - Electrical: Basic Requirements.
4. Section 26 28 00 - Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
2. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600
Volts Maximum).
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. 98, Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and
administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data:
a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this
Specification Section.
b. Provide a table that associates safety switch model number with
connected equipment tag number.
c. See Specification Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 16 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 16 Safety Switches
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for:
a. The mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
b. The content of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following safety switch
manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Cutler-Hammer.
2. General Electric Company.
3. Square D Company.
4. Siemens.
5. Appleton Electric Company.
6. Crouse-Hinds.
7. Killark.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
2.02 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. General:
1. Non-fusible or fusible as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Suitable for service entrance when required.
3. NEMA Type HD heavy-duty construction.
4. Switch blades will be fully visible in the OFF position with the enclosure
door open.
5. Quick-make/quick-break operating mechanism.
6. Deionizating arc chutes.
7. Manufacture double-break rotary action shaft and switchblade as one (1)
common component.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 16 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 16 Safety Switches
8. Clear line shields to prevent accidental contact with line terminals.
9. Operating handle (except NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 rated enclosures):
a. Red and easily recognizable.
b. Padlockable in the OFF position
c. Interlocked to prevent door from opening when the switch is in the
ON position with a defeater mechanism.
B. Ratings:
1. Horsepower rated of connected motor.
2. Voltage and amperage: As indicated on the Drawings.
3. Short circuit withstand:
a. Non-fused: 10,000A.
b. Fused: 200,000A.
C. Accessories, when indicated in PART 3 of this Specification Section or on the
Drawings:
1. Neutral kits.
2. Ground lug kits.
3. Auxiliary contact kits with 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact.
D. Enclosures:
1. NEMA 1 rated:
a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and
manufacturers standard paint inside and out.
b. With or without knockouts, hinged and lockable door.
2. NEMA 3R rated:
a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and
manufacturers standard paint inside and out.
b. With or without knockouts, hinged and lockable door.
3. NEMA 4 rated:
a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and
manufacturers standard paint inside and out.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 16 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 16 Safety Switches
b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged, gasketed and
lockable door.
4. NEMA 4X rated (metallic):
a. Body and cover: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed
door.
5. NEMA 4X rated (non-metallic):
a. Body and cover: Ultraviolet light protected fiberglass-reinforced
polyester boxes.
b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged, gasketed and
lockable door.
6. NEMA 7 and NEMA 9 rated:
a. Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free aluminum with manufacturers
standard finish.
b. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub.
c. Gasketed cover bolted-down with stainless steel bolts.
d. External mounting flanges.
e. Operating handle padlockable in the OFF position.
7. NEMA 12 rated:
a. Body and cover: Sheet steel finished with rust inhibiting primer and
manufacturers standard paint inside and out.
b. No knockouts, external mounting flanges, hinged and gasketed
door.
E. Overcurrent and short circuit protective devices:
1. Fuses.
2. See Specification Section 26 28 00 for overcurrent and short circuit
protective device requirements.
F. Standards: NEMA KS 1, UL 98.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 16 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 16 Safety Switches
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
B. Install switches adjacent to the equipment they are intended to serve unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
C. Provide auxiliary contact kit on local safety switches for motors being controlled by
a variable frequency drive.
1. The VFD is to be disabled with the switch is in the open position.
D. Permitted uses of NEMA 1 enclosure:
1. Surface or flush mounted in areas designated dry in architecturally finished
areas.
E. Permitted uses of NEMA 3R enclosure:
1. Surface mounted in exterior location for HVAC equipment only.
F. Permitted uses of NEMA 4 enclosure:
1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet.
G. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X metallic enclosure:
1. Surface mounted in areas designated as wet and/or corrosive.
H. Permitted uses of NEMA 4X non-metallic enclosure:
1. Surface mounted in areas designated as corrosive.
2. Surface mounted in areas designated as highly corrosive.
I. Permitted uses of NEMA 7 enclosure:
1. Surface mounted in areas designated as Class I hazardous.
2. Provide PVC coating in corrosive and highly corrosive areas when PVC
coated conduit is used.
J. Permitted uses of NEMA 9 enclosure:
1. Surface mounted in areas designated as Class II hazardous.
2. Provide PVC coating in corrosive and highly corrosive areas when PVC
coated conduit is used.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 16 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 16 Safety Switches
K. Permitted uses of NEMA 12 enclosure:
1. Surface mounted in areas designated as dry in non-architecturally finished
areas.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 28 16
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 16 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 28 90
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Transient voltage surge suppressors for low-voltage power, control, and
communication equipment.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2. Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents.
3. Section 26 14 00 - Wiring Devices, for devices with integral transient
voltage surge suppressors.
4. Section 26 44 20 - Service Pedestals and Panelboards, for factory-installed
transient voltage surge suppressors.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transient voltage suppression
devices, certifying that products furnished comply with the following testing and
labeling requirements:
1. UL 1283 certification.
2. UL 1449 listing and classification.
C. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.
Include the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For transient voltage suppression devices to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 01.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 90 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 90 Transient Voltage Suppression
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR
1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the
International Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for
Certification in Engineering Technologies, to supervise on-site testing
specified in Part 3.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one
source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical
performance of suppressors and are based on the specific system indicated.
Other manufacturers' products complying with requirements may be considered.
Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. IEEE Compliance: Comply with IEEE C62.41, IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in
Low Voltage AC Power Circuits, and test devices according to IEEE C62.45, IEEE
Guide for Surge Suppressor Testing.
F. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA LS 1, Low Voltage Surge Protective
Devices.
G. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters, and
UL 1449, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Placing into Service: Do not energize or connect panelboards, control terminals
or data terminals to their sources until the surge protective devices are installed
and connected.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by
AUTHORITY or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then
only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements
indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written
permission.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 90 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 90 Transient Voltage Suppression
C. Service Conditions: Rate surge protective devices for continuous operation under
the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of
nominal system operating voltage.
2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 Deg F.
3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, non-condensing.
4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 FT above sea level.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate
clearances for maintenance.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive
Authority of other rights Authority may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair
or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship
within five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Warranty for Plug-in Cord-Connected Surge Suppressors: Written
warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace electronic
equipment connected to circuits protected by surge suppressors.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed
comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00 -
Product Requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 90 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 90 Transient Voltage Suppression
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. Manufacturers of a Broad Line of Suppressors:
a. Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc.
b. Atlantic Scientific Corp.
c. Current Technology, brand of Danaher Power Solutions, subsidiary
of Danaher Corp.
d. Cutler-Hammer brand, Eaton Electrical Inc.
e. Innovative Technology brand, Eaton Electrical Inc.
f. Intermatic, Inc.
g. LEA International, a Smiths Group company.
h. Leviton Manufacturing Co. Inc.
i. Liebert Corp., an Emerson Network Power company, div Emerson.
j. Northern Technologies Corp.
k. Siemens Energy & Automation.
l. Square D, brand of Schneider Electric.
m. Transtector Systems, Inc., a Smiths Group company. n. Zero Surge
Inc.
2. Manufacturers of Category A and Telephone/Data Line Suppressors:
a. MCG Surge Protection.
b. Telebyte, Inc.
2.03 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type with the following features
and accessories:
1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has
failed.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 90 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 90 Transient Voltage Suppression
3. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A, 250 Vac, for remote monitoring of
protection status.
B. Surge Protective Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable
modules and the following features and accessories:
1. Fuses, rated at 200 kA interrupting capacity.
2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
3. Integral disconnect switch.
4. Redundant suppression circuits.
5. Redundant replaceable modules.
6. Arrangement with copper busbars and for bolted connections to phase
buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
7. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and
ground bus.
8. Red and green LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
9. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has
failed.
10. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250 Vac, for remote monitoring
of protection status. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control
system.
11. Surge-event operations counter.
C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 240kA per phase.
D. Connection Means: Permanently wired.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits with
voltages of 480Y/277; 208Y/120; 3 PH, four-wire circuits, shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120.
2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120.
3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120.
F. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for 240/120 V, single phase,
three-wire circuits, shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 90 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 90 Transient Voltage Suppression
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
G. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for 240/120 V, 3 PH, four-wire
circuits, with high leg shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
2.04 PANELBOARD SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protective Device Description: Non-modular type with the following features
and accessories:
1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has
failed.
3. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A, 250 Vac, for remote monitoring of
protection status.
B. Surge Protective Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable
modules and the following features and accessories:
1. Fuses, rated at 200 kA interrupting capacity.
2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
3. Integral disconnect switch.
4. Redundant suppression circuits.
5. Redundant replaceable modules.
6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and
ground bus.
7. Red and green LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has
failed.
9. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A, 250 Vac, for remote monitoring of
protection status. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control
system.
10. Surge-event operations counter.
C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per phase.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 90 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 90 Transient Voltage Suppression
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits with
voltages of 480Y/277 or 208Y/120; 3-phase, 4-wire circuits, shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120.
2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120.
3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/27; 400 V for 208Y/120.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for 240/120 V, single phase,
three-wire circuits, shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
F. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for 240/120 V, 3 PH, four-wire
circuits, with high leg shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
2.05 AUXILIARY PANEL SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protective Device Description: Unit type, panel-mounted design with the
following features and accessories:
1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has
failed.
3. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A, 250 Vac, for remote monitoring of
protection status.
4. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and
ground bus.
5. Red and green LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
6. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has
failed.
B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 80 kA per phase.
C. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for grounded wye circuits with
voltages of 480Y/277; 208Y/120; 3 PH, four-wire circuits, shall be as follows:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 90 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 90 Transient Voltage Suppression
1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120.
2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120.
3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277; 400 V for 208Y/120.
D. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for 240/120 V, single phase,
three-wire circuits, shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage for 240/120 V, 3 PH, four-wire
circuits, with high leg shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg.
2. Line to Ground: 400 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
2.06 PLUG-IN SURGE SUPPRESSORS
A. Description: Non-modular, plug-in suppressors with at least four 15 A, 120 Vac,
NEMA WD 6, Configuration 15-15R receptacles, suitable to plug into a NEMA WD
6, Configuration 15-15R receptacle; with the following features and accessories:
1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
2. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground.
3. Circuit breaker and thermal fusing. When protection is lost, circuit opens
and cannot be reset.
4. Circuit breaker and thermal fusing. Unit continues to supply power if
protection is lost.
5. Close-coupled direct plug-in line cord.
6. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in the on position.
7. One RJ11/12C telephone line protector, suitable for modem connection.
Maximum clamping voltage 220 peak on pins No. 3 and 4.
B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 26 kA per phase.
C. Protection modes and UL 1449 clamping voltage shall be as follows:
1. Line to Neutral: 475 V.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 90 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 90 Transient Voltage Suppression
2. Line to Ground: 475 V.
3. Neutral to Ground: 475 V.
2.07 CONTROL AND DATA TERMINALS
A. Protectors for copper control and data conductors entering the building from the
outside shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the type of line being
protected.
2.08 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA 250, with type matching the enclosure of panel or device being protected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service
entrance ground.
B. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors between
suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not
exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and
ground.
1. Provide multipole, 15-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for the
suppressor, unless otherwise indicated.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: SCRRA will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following
field quality-control testing:
1. After installing surge protective devices, but before electrical circuitry has
been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.19. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest after repairs or replacements are
made.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 90 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 28 90 Transient Voltage Suppression
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative
to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's
installation requirements.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train AUTHORITY's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain surge protective devices.
1. Train Authority's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules
for maintaining suppressors.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Section 01 78 39 - Project
Record Documents.
3. Schedule training with Authority, through Engineer, with at least seven
days' advance notice.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 28 90
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 28 90 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 41 00
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers, rated 600 V
and less, used for disconnecting and protection functions.
2. Accessories required for a complete installation.
3. Device Short Circuit withstand capability as recommended by Short Circuit
Study and device trip setting as per Protective Device Coordination Study
recommended settings specified in Section 26 05 50.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
4. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
5. Section 26 08 00 – Electrical Testing.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Technical data for each type of switch and circuit breaker
indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include wiring diagrams for shunt-tripped circuit breakers.
C. Field quality control test reports.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. Comply with NFPA 70.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 41 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 41 00 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
B. Source Limitations: Obtain switches and circuit breakers through one source from
a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed
comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00 -
Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. ABB Group.
2. Cutler Hammer brand, Eaton Corporation.
3. GE, Electrical Distribution div.
4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
5. Square D brand, Schneider Electric.
B. Enclosed Switches:
1. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable
handle, interlocked with cover.
2. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with
clips to accommodate specified fuses, and lockable handle, interlocked
with cover.
C. Enclosed Circuit Breakers:
1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents.
a. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time current element
for low level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element
for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit breaker
frame sizes 250 A and larger.
b. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip
element with front-mounted, field adjustable trip setting.
c. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller;
let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 41 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 41 00 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
d. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single and two pole configurations with
5 mA trip sensitivity.
2. Molded Case Circuit Breaker Features and Accessories:Standard
frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
a. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of
conductors.
b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for
switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air
conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
c. Ground Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit
with adjustable pickup and time delay settings, push to test feature,
and ground-fault indicator.
d. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, capable
of tripping at 75 percent of rated voltage.
D. Enclosures:
1. Listed for environmental conditions of installed locations, including:
a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
b. Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Provisions: Remove temporary lifting provisions and blocking of
moving parts.
B. Identify components; provide warning signs as specified in Section 26 07 50 -
Electrical Identification.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after
electrical circuits have been energized, demonstrate product capability and
compliance with requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 41 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 41 00 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
B. Inspections and Tests for Switches and Circuit Breakers: Make internal and
external inspections and perform tests, including the following:
1. Inspect for freedom from physical damage, proper unit rating, mechanical
condition, enclosure integrity, cover operation, unit anchorage, clearances,
and tightness of electrical connections. If a loose electrical connection is
observed on any unit, check each electrical connection for each switch
and circuit breaker with a torque wrench for compliance with
manufacturer's torquing instructions.
2. Test insulation resistance of each pole, phase to phase, and phase to
ground, following manufacturer's written instructions. Test insulation
resistance of shunt trip circuits. Use 500-V minimum test voltage for
units and circuits rated up to 250 V, 1000-V minimum test voltage for
units rated more than 250 V. Measured insulation resistance must be
25 megohms, minimum, for switches rated up to 250 V, and 100 megohms,
minimum, for switches rated more than 250 V.
3. Test cover and other interlocks and interlock release devices for proper
operation.
C. Additional Inspections and Tests for Switches. Include the following:
1. Inspect for proper rating and fuse provisions.
2. Check adequacy and integrity of fuse holders by removing and installing
fuses.
3. Check integrity of phase barriers.
4. Inspect blade alignment visually while operating switch to observe
adequacy of blade pressure.
D. Additional Inspections and Tests for Circuit Breakers:
1. Inspect for proper frame, trip, and fault current interrupting rating.
2. Test shunt trip devices, circuits, and actuating components for proper
operation.
E. Correct defective and malfunctioning units on site, where possible, and re-
inspect and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace
with new units and retest.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 41 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 41 00 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 41 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 41 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 42 00
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. AC general-purpose controllers rated 600 V and less that are supplied as
enclosed units.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
3. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
4. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
5. Section 26 07 10 – Seismic Controls for Electrical Work.
6. Section 26 08 00 – Electrical Testing.
7. Section 26 28 00 - Overcurrent Protective Devices.
8. Section 26 28 15 - Safety Switches.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include dimensions and
manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, Sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details.
b. Nameplate legends.
c. Short-circuit withstand rating of integrated unit.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 42 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 42 00 Enclosed Controllers
d. UL listing for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in
combination controllers.
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices in combination controllers.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required
working clearances, and required area above and around enclosed controllers
where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show enclosed controller layout and
relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and
mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on
each support. Indicate field measurements.
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Certification that enclosed
controllers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Section 26 07 10 - Seismic Controls for Electrical Work. Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the
seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers and components to
include in operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all
installed components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent
protective devices.
G. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been
installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor
nameplate full-load currents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 42 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 42 00 Enclosed Controllers
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain, within 100 miles of Project site, a service
center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and
repairs.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicted, that is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed controllers of a single type through one
source from a single manufacturer.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled, as defined
in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions
for enclosed controllers, including clearances between enclosed controllers, and
for adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum
dimensions.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to
prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes,
water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
B. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect from
weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose
packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of
sufficient wattage to prevent condensation.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction
including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and
panels.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Division 7.
C. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot
devices and control circuits to which they connect.
D. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with
ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and
duty cycle of motor and load.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 42 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 42 00 Enclosed Controllers
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every three installed, but not less than
one set of three of each type and rating.
2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed
comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00 -
Product Requirements.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. Manual and Magnetic Enclosed Controllers:
a. ABB.
b. Cutler-Hammer brand, Eaton Electrical.
c. GE, Electrical Distribution div.
d. Allen-Bradley brand, Rockwell Automation.
e. Furnas brand, Siemens Energy and Automation.
f. Square D brand, Schneider Electric.
2.03 MANUAL ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A, with toggle action and
overload element.
2.04 MAGNETIC ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, non-reversing, across the line,
unless otherwise indicated.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 42 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 42 00 Enclosed Controllers
B. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer of
sufficient capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus
100 percent spare capacity.
C. Combination Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and
disconnect switch.
1. Fusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with
rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide
Type 2 protection according to IEC 947-4-1, as certified by a nationally
recognized testing laboratory.
2. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible
switch.
3. Circuit-Breaker Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector
with field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor
amperes.
D. Overload Relay: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current
characteristic and NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristic. Provide with
heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of
specific motor to which they connect and with appropriate adjustment for duty
cycle.
2.05 ENCLOSURES
A. Description: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1,
unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed
location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
3. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, as indicated on Drawings.
B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-
duty type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station
with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button
in depressed position with control circuit open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
E. Other Control devices as indicated on Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 42 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 42 00 Enclosed Controllers
2.07 FACTORY FINISH
A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey paint applied to factory-assembled and -
tested enclosed controllers before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with
requirements, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and
characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle
of motor, drive, and load; and configuration of pilot device and control circuit
affecting controller functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. See Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, for general
installation requirements.
B. For control equipment on walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-
steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding
racks complying with Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
C. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases complying with Section 03 30 00
- Cast-in-Place Concrete.
D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 20 07 10,
- Seismic Controls for Electrical Work.
E. Enclosed Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify enclosed controller components and control wiring according to Section 26
05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3.05 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Section 26 12 00 -
Conductors and Cables – Low Voltage.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 42 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 42 00 Enclosed Controllers
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where
applicable.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic- control
devices that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.
3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections.
B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.
C. Ground equipment.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller bus component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Testing: AUTHORITY will engage an independent testing agency to perform the
following field quality-control testing:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection indicated
in NETA ATS, Sections 7.5, 7.6, and 7.16.
2. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action
taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 42 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 42 00 Enclosed Controllers
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Clean enclosed controllers internally, on completion of installation, according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use
compressed air to assist in cleaning.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 42 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 42 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 44 10
SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
2. Accessories required for a complete installation.
B. Section applies to service entrance rated outdoor distribution switchboard “DTPB”.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 26 05 50 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination.
4. Section 26 06 00 - Grounding and Bonding.
5. Section 26 07 10 - Seismic Controls for Electrical Work.
6. Section 26 07 50 - Electrical Identification.
7. Section 26 08 00 - Electrical Testing.
8. Section 26 12 00 - Conductors and Cables: Low Voltage.
9. Section 26 28 00 - Overcurrent Protective Devices.
10. Section 26 28 90 - Transient Voltage Suppression.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
2. PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. 891, Standard for Safety Dead-Front Switchboards.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 10 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 10 Swtichboards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, and switchboard component
indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment. Include the
following:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
2. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
3. Short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective
devices.
4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
Overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Field quality control testing reports.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Verify the space required for the switchboard is equal to or less than the space
allocated
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. Comply with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.
3. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the
International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable
to SANBAG.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 10 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 10 Swtichboards
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for comparable
products and substitutions in accordance with Section 26 60 00 - Product
Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. ABB Group.
2. Cutler-Hammer brand, Eaton Electrical.
3. General Electric Company.
4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
5. Square D brand, Schneider Electric.
B. Manufactured Units:
1. NEMA 3R rated weatherproof enclosure:
2. Non-walk-in type with sloping roof downward toward rear.
3. Thermostatically controlled space heaters to minimize internal
condensation.
4. Rodent barrier.
5. Seismic qualified.
6. Power for heater derived internal to the switchboard.
7. Switchboard Configuration: Front, side and rear accessible, with fixed,
individually mounted main device, panel mounted branches, and adjacent
vertical sections front aligned.
8. Suitable for use as service entrance when not more than 6 main
disconnecting means are provided.
9. EUSERC terminals per Southern California Edison California.
10. Provide Incoming Utility Metering Compartment as per utility requirements.
11. Means to padlock all main and feeder devices in the open position.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 10 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 10 Swtichboards
12. Buses and Bus Connections: Service entrance rated three phase, four
wire, and copper ground bus unless otherwise indicated. Materials and
Features as follows:
13. Main-Bus Continuous Rating: As indicated on Drawings.
14. Material for Main Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity.
15. Connections to Main and Feeder Protective Devices:
16. Use copper for protective device line and load connections.
17. Enclosure Finish: Factory applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray
color over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
18. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.
19. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Match and align with basic
switchboard.
20. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard: Provide adequate ventilation to maintain
temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard.
21. Cable Supports: Arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support
cables indicated, including those for future installation.
22. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, silver plated, copper runback
bus extensions equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit
conductors.
23. Ground Bus: 1/4 IN x 2 IN minimum size, drawn temper copper of 98
percent conductivity, continuous over length of switchboard and solidly
grounded to each vertical section structure. Bus joints connected using
through bolts and conical spring-type washers for maximum conductivity.
24. Equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch circuit ground
conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding
cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in
vertical run.
25. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated.
26. Main Phase Buses, Neutral Buses, and Equipment Ground Buses:
Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution
sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.
27. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of the phase buses, unless
otherwise indicated, equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing
circuit neutral cables.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 10 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 10 Swtichboards
28. Future Devices: Equip positions with mounting brackets, supports, bus
connections, load terminals, and appurtenances rated at maximum
capacity available for future unit.
29. Bus Bar Insulation: Flame retardant, 105 DegC minimum tape wrapping,
or flame retardant, sprayed on insulation of same temperature rating,
factory applied to individual bus bars.
30. Surge Protective Device: Integrally mounted, see Specification Section 26
28 90
C. Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, with standard frame sizes,
trip ratings, and number of poles, and interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
2. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time current element for low
level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 250 A and
larger.
3. Adjustable Instantaneous Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with
front-mounted, field adjustable trip setting.
4. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: Required for circuit breaker frame
size 400 A and larger. RMS sensing; field replaceable rating plug; with field
adjustable settings:
5. Instantaneous trip.
6. Long and short term pickup levels.
7. Long and short term time adjustments.
8. Ground fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
9. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let
through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
10. Molded Case Circuit Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame
sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
11. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air conditioning, and
refrigerating equipment.
12. Ground Fault Protection: Integrally mounted sensor, relay, and trip unit
with adjustable pickup and time delay settings, push to test feature, and
ground fault indicator.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 10 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 10 Swtichboards
13. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, capable of
tripping at 75 percent of rated voltage.
14. Auxiliary Switch: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a"
contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of
circuit breaker contacts.
15. Key Interlock Kit: Furnish where indicated on Drawings. Externally
mounted to prohibit circuit breaker operation; key shall be removable only
when circuit breaker is in off position.
D. Instrumentation:
1. Instrument Transformers: NEMA EI 21.1, IEEE C57.13, and the following:
2. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA
accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
3. Current Transformers: Provide ratios as indicated with accuracy class and
burden suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.
4. Multifunction Digital Metering Monitor: Microprocessor based unit suitable
for three or four wire systems and with features:
5. Switch selectable digital display of the following values with maximum
accuracy tolerances as indicated:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: ±1 percent.
b. Phase to Phase Voltages, Three Phase: ±1 percent.
c. Phase to Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: ±1 percent.
d. Megawatts: ±2 percent.
e. Megavars: ±2 percent.
f. Power Factor: ±2 percent.
g. Frequency: ±0.5 percent.
h. Megawatt Demand: ±2 percent; demand interval programmable
from 5 to 60 minutes.
i. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: ±2 percent. Accumulated
values unaffected by power outages up to 72 HRS.
6. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in
instrument compartment door.
E. Control Power:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 10 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 10 Swtichboards
1. Control Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments
for units larger than 3 kVA.
2. Control Circuits: 120 V, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices
from control power transformer.
3. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and
overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control
circuits.
4. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection
included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for
conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections
between shipping units.
F. Accessory Components:
1. Accessory Set: Tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent
protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
2. Portable Test Set: To test functions of solid state trip devices without
removal from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for
testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA/ANSI PB 2.1.
B. Outdoor location:
1. NEMA 3R enclosure.
2. Install on concrete pad 4 IN nominal thickness, align front of switchboard
with top edge of pad chamfer and securely fasten to pad.
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and
brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and
components.
D. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions
for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency
procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions
with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs as specified.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 10 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 10 Swtichboards
B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with engraved
metal or laminated plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion resistant screws.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests:
1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. SANBAG will engage an independent agency to conduct field quality control
tests.
C. When indicated in the plans provide Ground Fault Protection System:
1. Single source system:
2. Main breaker using the residual sensing method system.
D. Main and feeder breakers: Utilize four (4) individual current sensors; the phase
sensors are integral to the circuit breaker and the neutral sensor is external to the
circuit breaker Testing: After installing switchboards and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical
inspection indicated in NETA ATS, Sections 7.1, 7.5, 7.6, 7.9, 7.10, 7.11,
and 7.14 as appropriate. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front
and rear panels so that joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies
switchboards checked and that describes scanning results. Include
notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations
after remedial action.
F. Report test results in writing.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 10 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 10 Swtichboards
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Set field adjustable switches and circuit breaker trip ranges as per
Section 26 05 50 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
END OF SECTION 26 44 10
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 10 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 44 20
SERVICE PEDESTALS AND PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical Service Cabinet:
a. Pulling Section.
b. Metering Compartment.
c. Utility Underground Termination.
d. Customer Main Disconnect and Distribution Equipment.
2. Service Pedestal at the Station:
a. Section 1 – Distribution Switchboard “DTPB”. Refer to Section 26
44 10 Switchboards.
b. Section 2 – “TPH” for panelboard TPH and lighting controls.
c. Section 3 – “TXB1” for step down transformer TXB1.
d. Section 4 – “TPL” for panelboard TPL and lighting controls.
3. Distribution and branch circuit panelboards.
4. Accessories required for a complete installation.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 26 06 00 - Grounding and Bonding.
4. Section 26 07 10 - Seismic Controls for Electrical Work.
5. Section 26 07 50 - Electrical Identification
6. Section 26 08 00 - Electrical Testing.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 20 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 20 Service Pedestals and Panelboards
7. Section 26 12 00 - Conductors and Cables – Low Voltage.
8. Section 26 28 16 – Safety Switches
9. Section 26 46 00 - Dry-Type Transformers.
10. Section 26 28 00 - Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protective Devices.
11. Section 26 28 90 - Transient Voltage Suppression.
12. Section 26 50 00 - Interior and Exterior Lighting.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for each type of panelboard,
overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include
dimensions and technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each electric cabinet, lighting control cabinet and
panelboard:
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following
data:
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250,
Type 1.
b. Bus configuration, and current, and voltage ratings.
c. Short circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent
protective devices.
d. Listing for series rating of installed devices.
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices.
f. Withstand rating per short circuit and coordination study.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after
load balancing.
D. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Definitions:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 20 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 20 Service Pedestals and Panelboards
1. Industrial Control Panel: An assembly of two or more components
consisting of one of the following:
a. Power components only, such as circuit breakers, fused disconnect
switches, overload relays, motor controllers and contactors.
b. Control circuit components only, such as pushbuttons, pilot lights,
selector switches, timer switches, control relays
c. A combination of power and control circuit components.
d. These components, with associated wiring and terminals, are
mounted on or contained within an enclosure or mounted on a
subpanel. The industrial control panel does not include the
controlled equipment.
B. Regulatory Requirements for Service Pedestal listed:
1. Comply with UL 508A – Standard for Industrial Control Panels.
C. Regulatory Requirements for Panelboards:
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
3. Comply with NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
4. Comply with NFPA 79.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. ABB Group.
2. Cutler-Hammer brand, Eaton Corporation.
3. General Electric Company.
4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
5. Square D brand, Schneider Electric.
B. For electric service pedestal and lighting control cabinets custom engineered,
approved manufacturers:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 20 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 20 Service Pedestals and Panelboards
1. Electrical Services Limited (ESL).
2. Tesco Electric.
3. Skyline Electric & Co.
4. Meyers Power Products.
C. Components:
1. Enclosures: Flush and surface mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1,
suitable for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
b. Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface mounted
fronts, match box dimensions; for flush mounted fronts, overlap box.
3. Finish: Enamel finish over corrosion resistant treatment or primer coat.
4. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal
frame, inside panelboard door.
5. Bus: Hard drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
6. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch circuit equipment
ground conductors; bonded to box.
7. Panelboard Short Circuit Rating: Per study; refer to Section 26 05 50 -
Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination.
8. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short circuit current available at
terminals, as indicated on Drawings.
9. Spaces for Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and
necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
10. Skirt for Surface Mounted Panelboards: Same thickness and finish as
panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and
ceiling or floor.
11. Feed through Lugs: Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or
main device.
D. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards:
1. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt on circuit breakers,
replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 20 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 20 Service Pedestals and Panelboards
2. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch
with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
E. Distribution Panelboards:
1. Doors: Front mounted, and secured with vault type latch with tumbler
lock; keyed alike.
2. Provide branch overcurrent protective of one of the following:
a. For Circuit Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt on circuit
breakers.
b. For Circuit Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt on
circuit breakers; plug in circuit breakers where individual positive-
locking device requires mechanical release for removal.
F. Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. Molded Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to
meet available fault currents without use of fuses.
a. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time current element
for low level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element
for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit breaker
frame sizes 250 A and larger.
b. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single and two pole configurations with
5 mA trip sensitivity.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for
switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air
conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
d. Shunt Trip (Where indicated on Drawings): 120-V trip coil
energized from separate circuit, capable of tripping at 75 percent of
rated voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. Install flush
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 IN above finished floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards
with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 20 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 20 Service Pedestals and Panelboards
D. Install filler plates in unused protective device spaces.
E. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1 IN empty conduits
from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling
space in the future. Stub four 1 IN empty conduits into raised floor space or below
slab not on grade.
F. Wiring in Panelboard Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and
wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs as specified.
B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or
laminated plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion resistant screws.
C. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after
balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer
or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical
inspection indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.6 for molded case circuit
breakers.
2. Test insulation resistance of panelboard bus with a megohmmeter, and
ground continuity of cabinet and ground bus. Reject buses with insulation
resistance less than 2 megohms.
3. Correct defective and malfunctioning units on site, where possible, and
retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and
retest.
B. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows:
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working
schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24
HR services such as fax machines and on line data-processing,
computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 20 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 44 20 Service Pedestals and Panelboards
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record
load readings before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within
a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary
to meet this minimum requirement.
C. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after
Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each electrical cabinet, service
pedestal and panelboard. Remove panel fronts so joints and connections are
accessible to portable scanner.
1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure
temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values.
Provide calibration record for device.
D. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare certified report identifying electrical
cabinets, service pedestals and panelboards checked and describing scanning
results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and
observations after remedial action.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 44 20
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 44 20 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 46 00
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (600V AND LESS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Dry type transformers rated 600V and less, with capacities up to
1000 kVA.
2. Distribution transformers.
3. Control and signal transformers.
4. Accessories required for a complete installation.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
3. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
4. Section 26 06 00 - Grounding and Bonding
5. Section 26 08 00 - Electrical Testing
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Wiring and connection diagrams.
C. Output Settings Reports: Record of tap adjustments.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
2. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91.
SCRA Standard Specifications 26 46 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 46 00 Dry Type Transformers (600V and Less)
3. Energy Efficient Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Certified as
meeting NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels when tested according to
NEMA TP 2.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written
instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods
during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space
that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Where products and manufacturers are listed, make submittals for proposed
comparable products and substitutions in accordance with Section 01 60 00 -
Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
1. Acme Electric Corporation, Power Distribution Products Division;
subsidiary of Actuant Corporation.
2. Cutler-Hammer brand, Eaton Electrical.
3. GE, Electrical Distribution division.
4. Magnetek, Inc.
5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
6. Sola/Hevi-Duty, member EGS Electrical Group.
7. Square D brand, Schneider Electric.
B. Factory assembled and tested, air cooled units for 60-Hz service.
C. Cores: Grain oriented, nonaging silicon steel.
D. Coils: Continuous windings without splices, except for taps.
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
2. Coil Material: Copper.
SCRRA Standards Specifications 26 46 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 46 00 Dry Type Transformers (600V and Less)
2.03 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Provide transformers that are internally braced to withstand seismic forces
specified.
C. Cores: One leg per phase.
D. Enclosure: Ventilated, drip proof, NEMA 250, Type 2.
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out
moisture and air.
2. Finish: Comply with NEMA 250 for Indoor Corrosion Protection.
3. Finish Color: ANSI 61 gray.
E. Insulation Class: 220 DegC, UL component recognized insulation system with
a maximum of 150 DegC rise above 40 DegC ambient temperature.
F. Taps for Transformers Smaller than 3 kVA: None.
G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One (1), 5 percent tap above and one (1),
5 percent tap below normal full capacity.
H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two (2), 2.5 percent taps above and
two (2), 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.
I. K Factor Rating: For transformers indicated to be K factor rated, comply with
UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current handling capability to degree
defined by designated K-factor.
1. Construct unit to not overheat when carrying full load current with
harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K factor.
2. Indicate value of K factor on transformer nameplate.
J. Wall Brackets: Standard brackets.
2.04 CONTROL AND SIGNAL TRANSFORMERS
A. Transformer: Self cooled, two winding dry type, rated for continuous duty,
complying with NEMA ST 1, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 506.
B. Ratings: Continuous duty. If rating is not indicated, provide at least 50 percent
spare capacity above connected peak load.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.
SCRRA Standards Specifications 26 46 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 46 00 Dry Type Transformers (600V and Less)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated
by transformer manufacturer.
B. Install floor mounting transformers level on concrete bases. Construct concrete
bases not less than 4 I N larger in both directions than supported unit and 4 IN
high.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 06 00 - Grounding and Bonding.
B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 12 00 - Conductors and Cables – Low
Voltage.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 HRS of typical
occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions
at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage
plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage -5 percent. Submit
recording and tap settings as test results.
B. Adjust buck boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being
served, ±5 percent, at secondary terminals.
C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and
tap settings.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 46 00
SCRRA Standards Specifications 26 46 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 26 50 00
INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Material and installation requirements for:
a. Interior building lighting fixtures.
b. Exterior building and site lighting fixtures.
c. Lamps.
d. Ballasts.
e. Light poles.
f. Lighting control.
g. Control Equipment Accessories.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete.
3. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.
4. Section 26 12 00 - Conductors and Cables – Low Voltage.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
B. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM).
C. Federal Communications Commission (FCC):
1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), 47 CFR 18, Industrial, Scientific and
Medical Equipment.
D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
1. C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC
Power Circuits.
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000Volts Maximum).
2. LE 4, Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility.
F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association/American National Standards
Institute (NEMA/ANSI):
1. C82.1, Lamp Ballasts - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast.
2. C82.4, Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium
(LPS) Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type).
3. C82.11, High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Supplements.
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
2. 101, Life Safety Code.
H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. 248-4, Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 4: Class CC Fuses.
2. 508, Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment.
3. 924, Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.
4. 935, Standard for Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts.
5. 1029, Standard for High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts.
6. 1598, Luminaires.
I. United States Department of Energy (USDOE):
1. EPAct, the National Energy Policy Act.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 for requirements for the mechanics and
administration of the submittal process.
2. Product technical data:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
a. Provide submittal data for all products specified in PART 2 of this
Specification Section.
b. Identify fixtures by Fixture Schedule number.
c. Fixture data sheet including:
1) Photometric performance data including candlepower
distribution and coefficient of utilization (CU) table.
2) Fixture effective projected areas for pole mounted fixtures.
d. Pole data shall include:
1) Pole wind loading.
2) Anchor bolt template.
e. UL nameplate data for fixtures used in Class 1 Division 1 and 2
areas.
f. See Specification Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE REQUIREMENTS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Lighting fixtures: See Fixture Schedule.
2. Lamps:
a. Osram/Sylvania.
b. General Electric.
c. Philips.
d. Venture.
3. Ballasts: Fixture manufacturer's standard.
4. Emergency ballasts: Bodine.
5. Emergency transfer devices: Bodine.
6. Poles: Fixture manufacturer's standard.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01 25 13.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All lighting fixtures and electrical components:
1. UL labeled.
2. Fixtures complete with lamps and ballasts.
3. Rated for area classification as indicated on the Drawings.
a. In Class I, Division 1 and 2 areas, the temperature rating of the
luminaires and lamp combination shall not exceed the auto-ignition
temperature of the atmosphere in which the fixture is used.
B. Provide all recessed fixtures with gaskets of rubber, fiberglass, or equivalent
material to prevent light leaks around flush trim.
1. Provide recessed fixtures with trim gaskets cemented in proper position.
C. Provide standard plaster frame for all recessed lighting fixtures installed in plaster
walls or ceilings.
1. Design, finish and fabricate material to preclude possibility of rust stain in
plaster.
D. No live parts normally exposed to contact.
E. When intended for use in wet areas: Mark fixtures "Suitable for wet locations."
F. When intended for use in damp areas: Mark fixtures "Suitable for damp locations"
or "Suitable for wet locations."
2.03 LIGHT FIXTURES
A. Fluorescent:
1. UL 1598.
2. NEMA LE 4 for recessed locations.
3. Lenses: As indicated in Fixture Schedule, with the following minimums:
a. Troffer: 100 percent virgin acrylic, conical shaped, female
0.1875 IN, square based prisms, aligned 45 degrees to the length
and width, 0.125 IN nominal thickness.
4. Finish:
a. Manufacturer's standard polyester, acrylic enamel or epoxy powder
coating applied after fabrication.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
b. Manufacturer's standard color or special color specified in Fixture
Schedule.
5. Prewired and provided with lamps that are properly mated to the ballast
operating characteristics.
B. High Intensity Discharge:
1. UL 1598.
2. Finish:
a. Manufacturer's standard polyester, acrylic enamel or epoxy powder
coating applied after fabrication.
b. Manufacturer's standard color or special color specified in Fixture
Schedule.
3. Prewired and provided with lamps that are properly mated to the ballast
operating characteristics.
4. Provided with safety chain.
C. Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units:
1. UL 924, NFPA 101.
2.04 LAMPS
A. Fluorescent:
1. T8 (265 mA) instant or rapid-start medium bipin lamps.
a. Correlated color temperature of 3200 degrees Kelvin.
b. Minimum color rendering index (CRI) of 70.
c. Minimum initial lumen ratings for each lamp type shall be:
1) 2025 lumens for 36 IN, 25 watt F25T8 lamp.
2) 2800 lumens for 48 IN, 32 watt F32T8 lamp.
B. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps:
1. Metal halide lamps:
a. Metal halide lamps shall be pulse-start type.
1) If used in an open luminaire, the lamp shall be rated for use
in an open fixture and incorporate a protective arc tube
shroud design.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
b. Clear lamps:
1) Correlated color temperature of 4000 degrees Kelvin.
2) Minimum color rendering index (CRI) of 65.
c. Minimum initial lumen ratings for metal halide lamps with a medium
base in a vertical position shall be:
1) 14250 lumens for 150 watt, ED-17 (ANSI M102) clear lamp.
d. Minimum initial lumen ratings for metal halide lamps with a mogul
base in a vertical position shall be:
1) 14250 lumens for 150 watt, ED-28 (ANSI M102) clear lamp.
2) 25000 lumens for 250 watt, ED-28 (ANSI M138) clear lamp.
3) 42000 lumens for 400 watt, ED-28 or ED-37 (ANSI M135)
clear lamp.
2. Uncoated (clear) unless identified as coated in the fixture schedule.
3. The specified fixture in the fixture schedule shall dictate the required lamp
operating position and base type.
4. Provide lamps that have the correct bulb shape for the fixture specified.
2.05 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Electromagnetic Ballasts:
1. UL 935.
2. High-efficiency energy saving electromagnetic core and coil design.
3. CBM certification for full light output.
4. Operate lamps at a frequency of 60 Hz.
5. Power factor: Greater than 90 percent.
6. Input current with Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 32 percent.
7. Lamp current crest factor: Less than 1.7, in accordance with lamp
manufacturer's recommendations and NEMA/ANSI C82.1.
8. Ballast factor: Greater than the following per NEMA/ANSI C82.1:
a. 0.925 for rapid start 265 mA (T8) and 430 mA (T12) ballasts.
9. Audible noise rating: Greater than or equal to the following:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
a. Class A for rapid start 265 mA (T8) and 430 mA (T12) ballasts.
10. Coil temperature not to exceed 150 DegF temperature rise over 40 105
DegF ambient.
a. Maximum case temperature not to exceed 195 DegF.
11. Meet the requirements of the FCC 47 CFR 18, for non-consumer
equipment for EMI and RFI.
12. Meet all applicable ANSI and IEEE standards regarding harmonic distortion
and transient protection such as IEEE C62.41, Cat. A, for transient
protection.
13. UL listed, Class P.
14. Fully encapsulated (potted) to ensure maximum thermal and structural
integrity.
15. Contain no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's).
B. Fluorescent High Frequency Electronic Ballasts:
1. UL 935.
2. "High Frequency" electronic operating lamps at a frequency of 20 KHz or
higher without visible flicker.
3. Power factor: Greater than 90 percent.
4. Input current total harmonic distortion (THD) of less than 20 percent.
5. Lamp current crest factor: Less than 1.7, in accordance with lamp
manufacturer's recommendations and NEMA/ANSI C82.11.
6. Instant start with lamps wired in parallel.
7. Support a sustained short to ground or open circuit of any output leads
without damage to the ballast.
8. Ballast Factor: Greater than 0.85 per NEMA/ANSI C82.11.
9. Audible noise rating: Class A or better.
10. Operation in ambient temperatures up to 105 DegF without damage.
11. Light output to remain constant for a line voltage fluctuation of +5 percent.
12. Meet the requirements of the FCC 47 CFR 18, for non-consumer
equipment for EMI and RFI.
13. Meet NEMA/ANSI C82.11 standards regarding harmonic distortion.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
14. Meet IEEE C62.41 Cat. A for transient protection.
15. Comply with all applicable state and federal efficiency standards.
16. UL listed, Class P.
17. Contain no Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's).
C. Fluorescent Emergency Ballasts:
1. UL 924, NFPA 101.
2. High temperature, 24 Watt-hour, maintenance-free nickel cadmium battery
with charger.
3. Charging indicator light (LED) to monitor the charger and battery.
4. Double-pole test switch.
5. Light one (1) lamp for 90 minutes in 1, 2 and 3-lamp fixtures.
a. Light two (2) lamps for 90 minutes in 4-lamp fixtures.
6. Dual input voltage (120/277V), 4 Watts input.
7. Compatible with the install lamp type.
8. Initial lumen output: 975 to 1400.
9. Contain no Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's).
D. High Intensity Discharge Ballasts:
1. NEMA/ANSI C82.4, UL 1029.
2. Metal halide:
a. Input voltage variation: +10 percent.
b. Maximum lamp regulation spread: 20 percent.
c. Minimum power factor: 90 percent.
d. Starting current: Not greater than operating current.
e. Maximum input voltage dip: 40 percent.
f. Crest factor: 1.5 to 1.8.
g. Types:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
1) Lead-type regulators: Constant wattage autotransformer
(CWA) and pulse start.
2) Lag-type regulators: Magnetic regulator and pulse start.
h. Contain no Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's).
3. Ballasts for interior use:
a. Encased and potted type.
b. Audible noise rating of B or better.
c. Built-in automatic resetting thermal protection switch.
4. Ballasts for exterior use:
a. Starting temperature: -20 DegF.
2.06 POLES
A. As scheduled or noted on the Drawings.
2.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish a minimum of 2 or 10 percent of total of each type and wattage of lamps,
whichever is greater.
B. Furnish a minimum of 10 percent of total of each type and amperage of fuses for
fixtures indicated to be fused.
C. Spare parts are to be stored in a box clearly labeled as to its contents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate fixture types with ceiling construction.
1. Provide mounting hardware for the ceiling system in which the fixture is to
be installed.
B. Fasten lighting fixtures supported by suspended ceiling systems to ceiling framing
system with hold down clips.
C. Provide mounting brackets and/or structural mounting support for wall-mounted
fixtures.
1. Do not support fixture from conduit system.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
2. When fixtures are supported from outlet boxes, install per NFPA 70.
3. Supports for fixtures mounted on exterior walls shall not be attached to
exterior face of the wall.
D. Provide pendant incandescent, compact fluorescent, and/or HID fixtures with
swivel hangers which will allow fixture to swing in any direction but will not permit
stem to rotate.
1. Provide hangers with enclosure rating (NEMA 1, 4, or 7) equal to enclosure
requirements of area in which they are installed.
2. Swivel hangers for fixtures in mechanical equipment areas: Shock
absorbing type.
3. Secure HID fixtures with safety chain.
E. Pendant mounted, open, industrial fluorescent fixtures:
1. Not in continuous rows, shall be supported by conduit or by approved
chains:
a. Hardwired to ceiling mounted junction box.
2. In continuous rows, shall be rigidly supported with conduit and fasten
fixtures to each other or mount on continuous metal channel per
Specification Section 26 05 00.
a. Hardwired to ceiling mounted junction box.
b. Provide reflector alignment clips.
F. Locate fixtures in accordance with reflected ceiling plans.
G. Locate in exact center of tile when indicated.
1. Relocate misplaced fixtures and replace damaged ceiling materials.
H. Mount lighting fixtures at heights indicated in Specification Section 26 05 00 or per
fixture schedule or as indicted on the Drawings.
I. Install exterior fixtures so that water can not enter or accumulate in the wiring
compartment.
J. Where indicated provide two-level control of three (3) and/or four (4) lamp
fluorescent fixtures.
1. Provide two (2) ballasts per fixture and control inside lamp(s) in each fixture
by one (1) switch or set of switches and the outside two (2) lamps by a
second switch or group of switches.
K. Ground fixtures and ballasts.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
3.02 POLE INSTALLATION
A. Drawings indicate the intended location of light pole.
1. Field conditions may affect actual location.
2. Coordinate location with all existing or new utilities and pavement.
B. Steel and Aluminum Poles:
1. Mounted on cast-in-place foundations, as detailed on the Drawings.
a. Concrete and reinforcing steel, in accordance with
Division 3 Specification Sections.
2. Protect pole finish during installation.
a. Repair damage to pole finish with manufacturer approved repair kit.
C. Ground poles as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Conductors:
1. See Specification Section 26 05 19 for required underground conductors.
2. Use interior building wire, as specified in Specification Section 26 05 19,
from pole base to fixture, #12 AWG minimum.
E. Overcurrent and Short Circuit Protection:
1. Protect each phase with a UL Class CC fuse:
a. Size: Three (3) times load current.
b. Standard: UL 248-4.
2. Fuseholder:
a. Watertight, in-line and break-a-way style.
b. Accept up to a 30 A, 600 V fuse.
c. Neutral conductor shall utilize a fuseholder with a solid copper rod.
d. Conductor terminal: Adequate size for the installed conductors.
3.03 LIGHTING CONTROL
A. See 26 44 20 for lighting control equipment located in service pedestals.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 26 50 00 Interior and Exterior Lighting
B. Exterior wall mounted and pole mounted fixtures controlled as detailed on the
Drawings.
3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. See Specification Section 01 74 13.
B. Replace all inoperable lamps with new lamps prior to final acceptance.
C. Aim all emergency lighting units, so that, the path of egress is illuminated.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Light Fixtures including lamps and ballast will be measured by the unit or fraction
thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and
as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Light Poles will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Light Fixtures including lamps and ballast furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed
on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Light Poles furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents
will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 26 50 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 26 50 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 28 13 00
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (ACS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the minimum requirements for the SCRRA Access Control
System (ACS).
B. The system shall consist of access-control software that enables communication
between IBM®-compatible personal computers and microprocessor-equipped
smart controllers with distributed databases. The smart controllers make access-
control decisions at doors, exits, entrances, etc., and communicate to PCs for
programming instructions, event monitoring and record keeping. The controller(s)
shall be designed specifically for access-control system applications.
C. The controller(s) shall receive data input from other hardware components of the
system, such as readers and relays. All system controllers shall be connected to
the system server(s) where event history, cardholder data and system
programming data shall reside. The controller(s) shall receive data input from, and
provide system data to, the controlling system server(s).
D. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all equipment, materials, labor,
documentation and services necessary to furnish and install a complete and
operational system to include, but not be limited to, the following functions:
1. Enabling valid access and preventing unauthorized access at facility
portals.
2. Enabling alarm/alert notification of access breaches at facility portals and
other points as desired.
3. Enabling data collection and management for a cardholder database at
facilities.
E. The standard Access Control System used by SCRRA is Identicard PremiSys Pro
by Identicard Systems.
F. Contractor is responsible for providing and coordinating final equipment
arrangements, locations, phased activities and construction methods that minimize
disruption to operations and provide complete and operational systems.
G. Contractor shall coordinate interfaces to existing systems and components in order
to minimize disruption to existing systems operations. Any system outages shall
be coordinated with SCRRA prior to work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Specification Sections include, but are not limited to:
1. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
2. Section 01 78 36 - Warranties and Guarantees
3. Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements
4. Section 26 12 00 - Conductors and Cables – Low Voltage
5. Section 26 13 00 - Raceways and Boxes
6. Section 26 14 00 - Wiring Devices
7. Section 26 41 00 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
8. Section 28 23 00 - Video Surveillance System
9. Section 29 20 20 - Communications Services
1.03 DEFINITIONS
Abbreviation Description
#A Ampere
ACO Alarm Company Operator
ACS Access Control System
CSLB Contractors State License Board (California)
DIP Dual In-Line Package
EOL End of Line
FIPS Federal Information Processing Standards
HID HID Corporation
Hz Hertz
ID Identification
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
IT Information Technology
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light-Emitting Diode
MB Megabyte
MUX Multiplexer
OSDP Open Supervised Device Protocol
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
PC Personal Computer
SCRRA Southern California Regional Rail Authority
SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory
SRAM Static Random-Access Memory
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
V Volts
VAC Volts Alternating Current
VDC Volts Direct Current
YMCKO Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black, Clear Overlay
1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable SCRRA, Federal, State, local
and/or municipal codes and regulations governing the installation. If there is a
conflict between this specification and the referenced standards, federal, state,
local and/or municipal codes, it is the bidder's responsibility to immediately bring
the conflict to the attention of SCRRA for resolution. National standards shall
prevail unless local codes are more stringent. Contractor shall not attempt to
resolve conflicts directly with the local authorities unless specifically authorized by
SCRRA.
B. The controllers, reader boards and input/output boards proposed in this
specification shall be compliant with UL 294. Contractor shall be responsible for
filing of all applicable documents, paying all fees (including, but not limited to plan
checking and permit) and securing all permits, inspections and approvals. Proof of
approval shall be submitted to SCRRA.
C. All controllers and connected boards, readers and the like shall be tested to ensure
that a fully functioning system is designed and installed. The system supplied
under this specification shall be a microprocessor-based system. The system shall
utilize independently addressed, microprocessor-based controllers as described in
this specification.
D. Contractor shall submit a detailed project plan that will describe in detail how they
will approach the project, from inception to finalization. The plans must include the
following information (at a minimum):
1. Equipment Schedules
2. Installation Time Lines
3. Other Trade Requirements
4. Final Acceptance Testing
5. Progress Report Sample
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures:
1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Indicated in the
documentation shall be the type, size, rating, style, and catalog number for
all items proposed to meet the system performance detailed in this
specification.
2. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings that are applicable and pertain to
ACS provisions.
a. Controller wiring and interconnection schematics
b. Complete point-to-point wiring diagrams
c. Riser diagrams
d. Complete floor plan drawing locating all system devices and scaled
plan and elevation of all equipment in the access-control system,
showing the placement of each individual item of access-control
equipment as well as raceway size and routing, junction boxes, and
conductor size, quantity, and color in each raceway
e. Detailed system operational description, with any specification
differences and deviations clearly noted and marked
f. Complete system bill of material
3. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
4. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manuals including operation and
maintenance instructions, and other descriptive material as received from
the manufacturers that will enable SCRRA personnel to operate, maintain,
test and troubleshoot equipment.
5. Project Record Documentation: Final As-Built documentation and
drawings. Details shall include (but not limited to): camera and equipment
layout plans; block diagrams; wiring diagrams, paths and schedules;
system (power and data) connection details; equipment mounting details;
conduit, pull box, junction box and pole details; camera coverage areas;
rack/cabinet/enclosure layout elevations and details.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall be an experienced installer and integrator of access control
systems and electrified door hardware who can demonstrate a minimum of three
(3) years of continuous experience and technical expertise in performing work
comparable in size and complexity, and whose installation and integration work
was performed skillfully in a satisfactory manner and on time.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
B. The Contractor shall be qualified (as appropriate) by the manufacturers of the
proposed equipment to install, service and maintain each manufacturer’s
equipment.
C. The Contractor must be an authorized Identicard Partner.
D. The Contractor shall have an office and service department located within the
Metrolink service area.
E. Required Contractor licenses:
1. Issued by the State of California CSLB:
a. C-7 - Low Voltage Systems Contractor
b. C10 - Electrical Contractor
c. C16 - Fire Protection Contractor
2. Alarm Company Operator (ACO) License
F. The Contractor shall serve as the single point of responsibility for the work
described in this section.
G. Products shall be manufactured by firms regularly engaged in manufacturing
products described in this Section.
H. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with each
manufacturer's recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals
for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before
beginning system installation. Refer to the manufacturer's riser/connection
diagram and details for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data.
I. Contractor shall provide personnel certified by the equipment manufacturer to:
1. Assist in the installation of the equipment
2. Check the installation before the equipment is placed into operation
3. Assist in the performance of field tests
4. Assist in the hardware configuration and system integration
5. Train the Authority operations and maintenance staff in the care, operation,
troubleshooting and maintenance of the equipment.
J. Proof of qualifications shall be readily available.
1.07 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Approval of alternate or substitute equipment or material in no way voids
specification requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
B. Under no circumstances shall SCRRA be required to prove that an item proposed
for substitution is not equal to the specified item. It shall be mandatory that the
Contractor submits to SCRRA all evidence to support the contention that the item
proposed for substitution is equal to the specified item. SCRRA’s decision as to
the equality of substitution shall be final and without further recourse.
C. In the event that SCRRA is required to provide additional engineering services as
a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or
changes by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the
equipment and accessories furnished, or if SCRRA is required to examine and
evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the
Contractor, then the expenses in connection with such additional services shall be
paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the
Contractor.
D. If the deviation is not approved by SCRRA, it remains the Contractor’s
responsibility to provide what is required in the Contract Documents.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all receiving, handling and storage of all
equipment and materials for the project.
B. Coordinate with SCRRA if storage space is required on the project site.
1.09 FIELD/SITE CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the job site and becoming
familiar with the conditions under which the work will be performed. Inspection of
the facility may be made by appointment with SCRRA. Contractors are requested
to inspect the building prior to submitting any technical data for approval or
commencement of work.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for prior coordination of all work and demolition
with SCRRA.
C. The Contractor shall verify that the proposed equipment and methods of
installation are compatible with the existing conditions.
D. Notify SCRRA in writing if modifications of the existing facility are required in order
to accommodate the new equipment. These modifications shall be reviewed and
approved by SCRRA.
E. The Contractor shall protect all facility property (buildings, walls, floors, etc.) from
damage resulting from installation work. Any and all damage to facility property
caused by installation work shall be repaired by the Contractor at its own expense.
F. The Contractor shall clean up areas in which it has been working following each
day’s work. Dispose of all trash and waste in the appropriate designated areas.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
G. Upon project completion, return project site to a condition equal to or better than
original.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warranty all materials, installation and workmanship for one
(1) year from final acceptance.
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for and make good, without any
expense to SCRRA, any and all defects arising during this warranty period
that are due to imperfect materials, equipment, improper installation or poor
workmanship.
B. Submit a copy of all manufacturer warranty information.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified, products for the ACS shall be consistent with and
compatible with the established standards for SCRRA ACS.
B. The specified hardware to be used with the ACS management software shall be
hardware designed for use with Identicard PremiSys Pro software by Identicard
Systems.
C. Any existing legacy hardware (e.g. Identicard Series 9000 Panels) shall be
replaced with hardware listed in this section, and designed for use with the
Identicard PremiSys Access Control System.
D. Latest technology available: Products shall be provided as specified. In the event
the manufacturers of specified products and materials have upgraded or replaced
the specified products and materials with newer or improved technologies at the
time of purchase, the newer or improved products or materials shall be provided
unless they are incompatible with the rest of the SCRRA ACS or so directed by
SCRRA (submit Request For Information if in doubt). Latest technology products
and materials shall be operationally and functionally equivalent or superior to the
specified products and materials. Products and materials shall be purchased by
the Contractor in a timely manner to meet construction schedules, but shall not be
purchased so far advanced of the date(s) of installation that they become
technologically obsolete or replaced with newer technologies.
E. Provide and install required cabling, connectors, patch cords, resistor packs,
terminators, and all other miscellaneous items required for a fully functional
system.
F. Access control panels and all supporting system power supplies shall typically be
located in temperature controlled telecommunications rooms (e.g. server room,
data center, etc.), unless otherwise specified.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
G. In addition to any acceptance testing requirements specified elsewhere, the ACS
shall be fully tested and accepted. All ACS equipment shall be tested. Test results
shall be recorded and submitted in a formal report to SCRRA for review and
acceptance.
2.02 ACCESS CONTROL MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. The standard ACS management software used by SCRRA is Identicard PremiSys
Pro by Identicard Systems. No exceptions.
B. Contractor to provide Identicard PremiSys Pro software upgrade or new installation
to replace any non-PremiSys Pro management software, as required by SCRRA.
C. SCRRA utilizes the ID badging (PremiSys Pro) and mobile app features of the
PremiSys Pro software.
D. Provide additional software client licenses as required by SCRRA. This shall
include, but not limited to:
1. PremiSys Pro Client License
a. License type dependent on number of concurrent client
connections
2. PremiSys Pro ExpressionsID Client License
a. License type dependent on number of concurrent client
connections
3. PremiSys ID Mobile License
2.03 ACCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. Two-Reader Controller
1. The Two-Reader Controller shall be of a distributed database design and
provide access control, alarm monitoring and time zone control for both
access to and egress from selected areas. The Two-Reader Controller
shall process all data transmitted to and from the I/O boards connected to
it. The controller shall use 12 VDC for power and be intended for use in low
voltage, Class 2 circuits only.
2. Incorporated on the Two-Reader Controller shall be memory as follows:
a. 1 MB SRAM for transactions and new card information
b. 16 MB non-volatile flash memory for card and system information
c. 16 MB SDRAM for system firmware and database storage for the
application
d. A 3-volt lithium coin cell shall provide SRAM and clock backup.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
3. Two-way communications between the controller and the host
computer/server shall be via a primary Ethernet 10/100Base-T interface or
optional serial RS-232 port. The Ethernet port and serial port for RS-232
connections shall be built into the controller. When Ethernet is the
connection means, the number of controllers possible in a system shall be
limited only by the network capacity and bandwidth. When using RS-232
connections the system shall allow one controller per computer port.
Communication between the controller and host shall be selectable from
among the baud rates 2400, 9600, 19,200, 38,400 and 115,200.
4. The Two-Reader Controller shall provide two reader ports built into the
controller. Such reader ports shall support up to two (2) reading devices of
the same or different technologies.
5. The Two-Reader Controller shall be connectable to a variety of system I/O
boards that act as interfaces between the controller and auxiliary access-
control and door hardware such as locks, input devices and switches.
These I/O boards shall include reader boards, input boards and output
boards, as well as multiplexer boards. All communications lines to I/O
boards shall be supervised in the system, and transactions shall be
provided in the system to alert the operator of offline or disconnect
statuses. Communications between any controller and its I/O boards shall
be via serial RS-485 and/or TCP/IP over Ethernet. It shall be possible to
connect up to 32 I/O boards to a single Two-Reader Controller. It shall also
be possible for each Two-Reader Controller to receive input from a
maximum of 64 readers, including readers connected to the two reader
ports built into the controller. Communication between the controller and
I/O boards shall be selectable from among the baud rates 2400, 9600,
19,200 and 38,400.
6. The Two-Reader Controller shall be capable of providing redundant
communications to the host computer/server for use in the event that the
primary Ethernet connection to the host is lost. The serial RS-232 interface
serves as the means for redundant communication.
7. Any controller within the network of controllers shall have an address that
is different from any other on the same port of the PC. The Two-Reader
Controller's address shall be selected by means of a configuration Web
page stored on the Two-Reader Controller and accessed through a Web
browser using a default IP address.
8. The Two-Reader Controller shall provide eight (8) supervised inputs for use
as door-position inputs, request-to-exit inputs etc. The states of the inputs
shall be as follows: normally open; normally closed; 1 K normal, 2 K active;
and 2 K normal, 1 K active. It additionally shall be possible to set the
debounce and hold times for each input on the board. It shall be possible
to set all input configuration via the system software.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
9. Held-open times (the time during which a door may be held open without
generating a system alarm) for inputs on the board assigned as door-
position points shall be software-selectable in two-second increments
between 2 and 65,534 seconds.
10. All input points shall have a corresponding LED on the board that indicates
the state of the point.
11. The Two-Reader Controller shall include two (2) Form-C, noninductive
relay outputs for door-lock control or alarm signaling. Control of the relays
shall be software-assignable to be triggered by card presentations, time
zones and/or other system actions. The contact ratings shall be 5A at 30
VDC. The relays shall be configurable for normal (relay energized when
“on”) or inverted (relay de-energized when “on”) action. Pulse time of a
relay used as a door-lock relay shall be software-selectable between 1 and
255 seconds.
12. It shall be possible via the system software to link an input or relay on the
Two-Reader Controller to cause an action on any other relay in the system
and to select the action that a linked relay will take when the triggering input
or relay is activated.
13. The Two-Reader Controller shall have a dedicated input point for optional
connection to a controller enclosure tamper switch and another dedicated
input point for optional connection to a power-loss monitoring device.
Systems requiring use of one of the available system input points for this
monitoring shall be unacceptable.
14. The system shall allow the incorporation of a rechargeable battery as part
of the power supply to provide full functionality for the controller, system
communications and board-powered readers in the event of a power
failure.
15. Two-Reader Controllers shall be housed in heavy-gauge steel enclosures
with hinged front doors. Conduit knockouts shall be available on sides and
backs of the enclosures. Each enclosure shall be lockable with its own set
of keys.
16. Identicard PremiSys Two-Reader Controller, model PREM-CTLR2RDR, or
approved equal.
B. Two-Reader Board
1. The Two-Reader board shall be connected to a system controller and act
as an interface between this controller and any of a variety of readers that
can read ABA-formatted data or Wiegand®-formatted data from smart
cards, proximity cards, magnetic-stripe cards, bar-coded cards or cards
possessing a combination of these technologies. The board shall also be
capable of supporting tri-stated LED control and buzzer control.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
2. The Two-Reader board shall support up to two (2) reading devices of the
same or different technologies, the type being selectable through the
application software. Systems that are unable to use readers of different
technologies on the same board or require a change in software, firmware
or "other" interface devices shall be unacceptable.
3. The Two-Reader board shall use quick-disconnect terminal blocks for all
interconnections to the interface. The Two-Reader board shall be intended
for use in low voltage, Class 2 circuits only.
4. The Two-Reader board shall communicate to a controller via a two-wire
RS-485 interface, which shall allow multi-drop communication on a single
bus of up to 4,000 feet (1,200 m). It shall be possible to connect up to 64
I/O boards, of which any number can be Two-Reader boards, to a single
IP Controller described in this specification, or up to 32 I/O boards, of which
any number can be Two-Reader boards, to a single Two-Reader Controller
described in this specification. All communications lines shall be supervised
in the system, and transactions shall be provided in the system to alert the
operator of offline or disconnect statuses. Provision to set end-of-line (EOL)
resistance for the board itself shall be built into the board should this
resistance be needed.
5. Each Two-Reader board shall be uniquely addressable by the user through
the settings of a dual in-line package (DIP) switch on the board. In addition,
this DIP switch shall be used to select the baud rate of communication with
the controller.
6. All two-reader boards shall be housed in heavy-gauge steel enclosures
with hinged front doors. Conduit knockouts shall be available on sides and
backs of the enclosures. Each enclosure shall be lockable with its own set
of keys.
7. The Two-Reader board shall provide sensor monitoring via eight (8)
supervised inputs, which can be used as door-position inputs, request-to-
exit inputs and for other purposes. The states of the inputs shall be as
follows: normally open; normally closed; 1 K normal, 2 K active; and 2 K
normal, 1 K active. It additionally shall be possible to set the debounce and
hold times for each input on the board. It shall be possible to set all input
configuration via the system software.
8. Held-open times (the time during which a door may be held open without
generating a system alarm) for inputs on the board assigned as door-
position points shall be software-selectable in two-second increments
between 2 and 65,534 seconds.
9. Each input point shall have a corresponding LED on the board that
indicates the state of the point.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
10. It shall be possible via the system software to link any input or relay on the
Two-Reader board to cause an action on any other relay in the system and
to select the action that the linked relay will take when the triggering input
or relay is activated.
11. When using the two readers on the same door, for example, to provide
antipassback capability, it shall be possible to assign a single input point
on the board as the door-position point shunted by either reader connected
to the board. It shall also be possible to assign a single relay on the board
as the door-lock relay controlled by either reader.
12. The Two-Reader board shall also include six (6) Form-C, non-inductive
contact relays with ratings of 5A at 28 VDC for optional use in controlling
door locks, alarm signals or other devices. Control of the relays shall be
software-assignable to be triggered by a reading device, cardholder, time
zone and/or other system actions. The relays shall be configurable for
normal (relay energized when “on”) or inverted (relay de-energized when
“on”) action. Pulse time of a relay used as a door-lock relay shall be
software-selectable between 1 and 255 seconds.
13. It shall also be possible to define the response desired for each relay when
communications go offline between the Two-Reader board and the
controller: The relay shall be active, the relay shall be inactive, or the relay
shall maintain its status at the moment communications are lost. Each relay
shall have a corresponding LED on the board that indicates when the relay
is energized.
14. The Two-Reader board shall also provide two digital inputs for optional use
to indicate tamper and power fault status.
15. It shall be possible via the system software to link any relay on the Two-
Reader board to cause an action on any other relay on the same board or
on any other board wired to the same controller and to select the action
that the linked relay will take when the triggering relay is activated.
16. The Two-Reader board shall accept 12 VDC for power. It shall be possible
to select the input voltage to be passed through the board to the reader,
with a maximum of 125mA available per reader port. The power selection
shall be made via a jumper on the board and shall apply to both reader
ports.
17. The Two-Reader board shall have a dedicated input point for optional
connection to an enclosure tamper switch and another dedicated input
point for optional connection to a power-loss monitoring device. Systems
requiring use of one of the available input points on the Two-Reader board
for this monitoring shall be unacceptable.
18. Identicard PremiSys Two-Reader Board, model PREM-BRD2RDR, or
approved equal.
C. Input Board
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
1. The Input Board shall be connected to a system controller and provide
sensor monitoring and output control via 16 supervised inputs. The states
of the inputs shall be as follows: normally open; normally closed; 1 K
normal, 2 K active; and 2 K normal, 1 K active. It additionally shall be
possible to set the debounce and hold times for each input on the board.
Each input point shall have a corresponding LED on the board that
indicates the state of the point.
2. The Input Board shall also include two (2) Form-C contact relays for
optional use in controlling door strikes or other devices. Control of the
relays shall be software-assignable to be triggered by system actions.
Pulse time of the relays shall be software-selectable between 1 and 255
seconds, inclusive.
3. It shall be possible via the system software to link any input or relay on the
Input Board to cause an action on any other relay in the system and to
select the action that a linked relay will take when the triggering input or
relay is activated.
4. All interconnections to the interface shall be via quick-disconnect terminal
blocks. The Input Board shall be intended for use in low voltage, Class 2
circuits only.
5. The Input Board shall communicate to a controller via a two-wire RS-485
interface, which shall allow multi-drop communication on a single bus of up
to 4,000 feet (1,200 m). It shall be possible to connect up to 64 I/O boards,
all or some of which can be input boards, to a single IP controller described
in the specification, or up to 32 I/O boards, all or some of which can be
input boards, to a single Two-Reader controller described in the
specification. All communications lines shall be supervised in the system,
and transactions shall be provided in the system to alert the operator of
offline or disconnect statuses. Provision to set end-of-line (EOL) resistance
for the inputs 1 through 16 and for the board itself shall be built into the
board should this resistance be needed.
6. Each input board shall be uniquely addressable by the user through the
settings of a dual in-line package (DIP) switch on the board. In addition,
this DIP switch shall be used to select the baud rate of communication with
the controller.
7. All input boards shall be housed in heavy-gauge steel enclosures with
hinged front doors. Conduit knockouts shall be available on sides and
backs of the enclosures. Each enclosure shall be lockable with its own set
of keys.
8. The Input Board shall accept 12 VDC for power.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
9. The Input Board shall have a dedicated input point for optional connection
to an enclosure tamper switch and another dedicated input point for
optional connection to a power-loss monitoring device. Systems requiring
use of one of the available input points on the Input Board for this
monitoring shall be unacceptable.
10. Identicard PremiSys Input Board, model PREM-BRDIN, or approved equal.
D. Output Board
1. The Output Board shall be connected to a system controller and provide
output control via 16 Form-C, noninductive relays with ratings of 5A at 28
VDC. The relays shall be configurable for normal (relay energized when
“on”) or inverted (relay de-energized when “on”) action. It shall also be
possible to define the response desired for each relay when
communications go offline between the Output Board and the controller:
The relay shall be active, the relay shall be inactive, or the relay shall
maintain its status at the moment communications go offline. Each relay
shall have a corresponding LED on the board that indicates when the relay
is energized.
2. Control of the relays shall be software-assignable to be triggered by a
reading device, cardholder, time zone and/or other system actions. The
relays shall be configurable for normal (relay energized when “on”) or
inverted (relay de-energized when “on”) action. Pulse time of the relays
shall be software-selectable between 1 and 255 seconds, inclusive.
3. It shall be possible via the system software to link any relay on the Output
Board to cause an action on any other relay in the system and to select the
action that a linked relay will take when the triggering input or relay is
activated.
4. All interconnections to the Output Board shall be via quick-disconnect
terminal blocks. The Output Board shall be intended for use in low voltage,
Class 2 circuits only.
5. The Output Board shall communicate to a controller via a two-wire RS-485
interface, which shall allow multi-drop communication on a single bus of up
to 4,000 feet (1,200 m). It shall be possible to connect up to 64 I/O boards,
all or some of which can be output boards, to a single IP Controller
described in the specification, or up to 32 I/O boards, all or some of which
can be output boards, to a single Two-Reader Controller described in the
specification. All communications shall be supervised in the system, and
transactions shall be provided in the system to alert the operator of offline
or disconnect statuses.
6. Each Output Board shall be uniquely addressable by the user through the
settings of a dual in-line package (DIP) switch on the board. In addition,
this DIP switch shall be used to select the baud rate of communication with
the controller.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
7. All output boards shall be housed in heavy-gauge steel enclosures with
hinged front doors. Conduit knockouts shall be available on sides and
backs of the enclosures. Each enclosure shall be lockable with its own set
of keys.
8. The Output Board shall accept 12 VDC for power.
9. The Output Board shall have a dedicated input point for optional connection
to an enclosure tamper switch and another dedicated input point for
optional connection to a power-loss monitoring device. Systems requiring
use of one of the available input points on the Output Board for this
monitoring shall be unacceptable.
10. Provision to set end-of-line (EOL) resistance for the board itself shall be
built into the board should this resistance be needed.
11. Identicard PremiSys Output Board, model PREM-BRDOUT, or approved
equal.
E. Eight-Channel Multiplexer (MUX) Board
1. The eight-channel MUX board shall allow a single communication port to
be expanded to eight two-wire RS-485 channels, thus facilitating star wiring
topology when needed. The two-wire RS-485 interface shall allow multi-
drop communication on a single bus of up to 4,000 feet (1,200 m). The
channels on the multiplexer shall be universal with regard to connected
devices. The eight-channel MUX board shall be intended for use in low
voltage, Class 2 circuits only.
2. The communications interface for the primary port on the board shall be
jumper-selectable as RS-232 or RS-485. It shall be possible to connect the
eight-channel MUX board between an IP or Two-Reader controller and
“downstream” I/O boards.
3. The eight-channel MUX board shall use quick-disconnect terminal blocks
for all interconnections.
4. The eight-channel MUX board shall be “invisible” to the system as an I/O
board, and so its use shall not affect the number of I/O boards connectable
to a controller.
5. Turn around delay (the time a device must wait before it can begin a new
transmission) shall be user-configurable by DIP switches.
6. All eight-channel MUX boards shall be housed in heavy-gauge steel
enclosures with hinged front doors. Conduit knockouts shall be available
on sides and backs of the enclosures. Each enclosure shall be lockable
with its own set of keys.
7. The eight-channel MUX board shall accept 12 VDC ± 15% at 250 mA for
power.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
8. Identicard PremiSys Eight-Channel MUX Board, model PREM-BRD8MUX,
or approved equal.
F. Power Supply
1. 12 VDC Power
a. Provide and install as required for 12 VDC components in the ACS
(not powered by other sources).
b. Power supply shall be rated for use in low voltage, Class 2 circuits.
c. Input:
1) 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 3.5 amp
2) Fuse rated @ 3.5 amp / 250 V
d. Output:
1) 12 VDC or 24 VDC selectable output
2) 2.5 amp total supply current
3) Filtered and electronically regulated output
4) Short circuit and thermal overload protection
e. Battery backup:
1) Built-in charger for sealed batteries
2) Automatic switch over to stand-by battery in the event of
power failure
3) Zero voltage drop when switched over to battery backup
f. Maintenance free batteries shall be provided with all power
supplies. Batteries shall be sized to allow at least four (4) hours of
power backup.
g. Power supply shall be housed in a dedicated heavy-gauge steel
enclosure with a hinged front door and conduit knockouts available
on the sides of the enclosure. Each enclosure shall be lockable with
its own set of keys.
h. Power supply shall be located next to the access control panels.
i. Altronix AL300ULX with compatible batteries (for battery backup),
or approved equal.
2. 24 VDC Power
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
a. Provide and install as required for 24 VDC components in the ACS
(not powered by other sources).
b. Power supply shall be rated for use in low voltage, Class 2 circuits.
c. Input:
1) 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 4.2 amp
2) Fuse rated @ 3.5 amp / 250 V
d. Output:
1) 24 VDC output
2) Up to 10 amp of continuous supply current
3) Minimum of 16 Class 2 Rated PTC protected power-limited
outputs
4) Filtered and electronically regulated output
5) Short circuit and thermal overload protection
e. Battery backup:
1) Built-in charger for sealed batteries
2) Automatic switch over to stand-by battery in the event of
power failure
3) Zero voltage drop when switched over to battery backup
f. Maintenance free batteries shall be provided with all power
supplies. Batteries shall be sized to allow at least four (4) hours of
power backup.
g. Power supply shall be housed in a dedicated heavy-gauge steel
enclosure with a hinged front door and conduit knockouts available
on the sides of the enclosure. Each enclosure shall be lockable with
its own set of keys.
h. Power supply shall be located next to the access control panels.
i. Altronix AL1024ULXPD16CB with compatible batteries (for battery
backup), or approved equal.
G. Surge Protection
1. All ACS components installed outdoors or exposed to lightning shall be
provided with surge and lightning protection. Provide and install UL listed
multi-stage protection on all low voltage and signal transmission lines.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
2. 120 VAC surge suppression devices:
a. Edco HSP121BT-1RU, or approved equal.
3. Low voltage connections:
a. Edco FAS-1 series surge suppressor, or approved equal.
4. RS-485 or RS-422 connections:
a. Edco PC642C-008LC & PCB1B-WKEY, or approved equal.
H. Electrified Door Hardware
1. Electrified door hardware shall consist of components typically required for
access control. This includes (but not limited to):
a. Card reader
b. Electrified lock
c. Door position switch
d. Request to exit device
2. Contractor shall coordinate, furnish and install all required electrified door
hardware and associated power supplies. Contractor shall complete all
required connections and terminations for intended operation, and shall
interface this equipment with the ACS.
3. Electrified door hardware shall be compatible with associated door
configuration. SCRRA shall review and approve all proposed electrified
door hardware configurations prior to installation.
4. Contractor shall be responsible for preparing or retrofitting any door for
access control, if required.
I. Card Reader
1. Card readers shall be compatible with SCRRA issued proximity access
cards.
2. The readers shall operate at 13.56 MHz at 13.56 MHz and 125 KHz in the
same reader device, and shall operate across a voltage range of 5 VDC to
16 VDC. The readers shall be manufactured with at least 10.5% of recycled
content.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
3. The readers shall support multiple technologies (iCLASS® Seos™ and
iCLASS SE® credential platforms, standard iCLASS, MIFARE®, and
MIFARE DESFire® EV1) and shall utilize Open Supervised Device
Protocol (OSDP) for secure, bidirectional communication. The readers
shall provide simultaneous support for 125kHz HID Prox®, Indala®, AWID
and EM4102, and shall be FIPS 201 compliant.
4. The readers shall provide an operating reading distance from .5 inches (1.3
centimeters) to 3.5 inches (8.6 centimeters) depending on reader model
and credential used.
5. Card reader shall be the appropriate model for the associated door
application and configuration, or as required by SCRRA.
6. Card Reader: HID multiCLASS SE models RP10, RP15, RP30, RP40 (no
substitutions)
7. Card Reader with Keypad: HID multiCLASS SE model RPK40 (no
substitutions)
J. Cable and Wire
1. Low voltage cable and wire shall be furnished and installed as required
2. Cable and wire shall be selected, sized and used as appropriate for the
device application in accordance with the device manufacturer’s
specifications, power requirements, and length of cable/wire run
3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
of one of the following, or equal approved as a comparable product:
a. Belden
b. West Penn Wire
c. Alpha Wire Company
d. General Cable
K. Proximity Access Card
1. The standard proximity access card used by SCRRA is HID model 1386-
LGGMN ISOProx II. No exceptions.
L. Card Printer
1. The standard proximity access card printer used by SCRRA is HID model
Fargo DTC4500e, single-sided card printer with Ethernet. No exceptions.
2. Printer Cartridge
a. Compatible with Fargo DTC4500e card printer
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
b. YMCKO color ribbon
c. Includes cleaning roller and overlay panel
d. Produces a minimum of 250 images
e. HID Fargo 45200, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide, install and make fully operational all components required for a fully
functional system.
B. Install all system components, including furnished equipment, and appurtenances
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and as shown, and shall furnish
all necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete
and operable system as specified and shown. Control signal, communications, and
data transmission line grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude
ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation.
C. System installation and construction methods shall be installed in accordance with
this specification, applicable SCRRA engineering standards, manufacturer’s
instructions, requirements of the State of California and all applicable building and
fire codes.
D. Contractor shall install equipment to meet Seismic Zone 4 requirements of the
State of California and as stated herein. Where undefined by codes and standards,
Contractor shall apply a safety factor of at least two (2) times the rated load to all
fastenings and supports of system components.
E. Coordinate work with SCRRA, existing conditions and applicable trades to verify
exact routing of cable, wires, conduits, raceways, etc. prior to installation. Verify
final location and mounting height of all equipment with SCRRA prior to installation.
F. Contractor shall use existing conduit and surface raceway where possible and
practicable. All work shall be concealed using existing facility infrastructure
throughout project site. If concealment is impossible or impractical, SCRRA shall
be notified before starting that part of the work.
G. Where required, Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, patching, coring and
associated work for the system at no additional cost to SCRRA.
H. All conduit and sleeve openings used for the installation of the ACS shall be
waterproofed or fireproofed in compliance with State and Local Building and Fire
Codes.
I. All building conduits and sleeves installed or used for the installation of ACS shall
be fire stopped, or re-fire stopped, upon cable placement through such pathways.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 20 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
J. Contractor shall patch all openings remaining around and inside all conduit,
sleeves and cable penetrations devices to maintain integrity of any fire rated wall,
floor, ceiling, etc.
K. All cables and patch cables shall have a label attached at both ends. All equipment
components shall have a label specifying pertinent information and shall be clearly
visible on the exterior of equipment. Contractor shall confirm specific labeling
requirements with SCRRA prior to cable installation or termination, and equipment
installation.
L. Calibrate all equipment.
M. Inspect each component, determine obvious defects, and correct.
N. All electrical work shall be done in accordance with Division 26 of the SCRRA
Standard Specifications.
O. Coordinate with SCRRA IT department for interface with LAN system.
P. Coordinate with SCRRA to interface with all electric locks.
Q. All communications cables shall be kept away from power circuits.
3.02 PROGRAMMING AND SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A. Contractor shall assist SCRRA with implementing all new ACS equipment into the
current SCRRA access control management system deployed agency-wide.
B. Contractor shall provide qualified personnel in the Identicard PremiSys Access
Control System to program, configure and integrate new ACS equipment into
SCRRA’s existing access control system.
C. Coordinate with applicable SCRRA departments and personnel, when required.
3.03 TESTING
A. Perform tests as recommended by the manufacturer or as required to ensure that
all ACS equipment is operating properly and meets specified requirements.
Correct all deficiencies detected and retest affected components.
B. Types of applicable tests shall include, but not limited to:
1. Card reader controlled doors
a. Valid card read
b. Invalid card read
c. Valid request-to-exit
d. Door forced open
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 21 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
e. Door held open
f. Door shunt
g. Local alarm
2. Alarm and monitor points
3. ACS input and out interfaces
C. Upon successful completion of tests, Contractor shall submit test results in a formal
report. The report shall include the following information (at a minimum):
1. Complete listing of all new ACS equipment installed
2. Name(s) of personnel conducting test
3. Date & time of test
4. Test description
5. Results of test
6. Any deficiencies found, corrective measures and results of retest
D. Certify that all new ACS equipment has been tested and is ready for
commissioning.
3.04 COMMISSIONING
A. Commissioning is the process by which the Contractor will demonstrate to SCRRA
that it has completed the project in conformance with the contract documents and
that the project will perform as specified in the contract documents.
B. The Contractor shall be Manufacturer certified and solely responsible for providing
all test and commissioning equipment, tools, software, programming,
programming support and incidentals and qualified technicians to start–up,
calibrate, debug and verify proper function of the systems and subsystems.
C. The responsibilities of the Contractor during commissioning shall be to assign
representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf, and shall schedule
them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in
collaboration with the entity responsible for system and equipment
installation, recommend and perform corrective action.
2. Resolve issues recorded in the test reports.
3. Organize and lead the commissioning team and coordinate commissioning
process activities with the construction schedule.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 22 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 13 00 Access Control System (ACS)
4. Review and accept checklists provided by the construction manager or
SCRRA. Complete checklists as work is completed, and provide them to
the construction manager or SCRRA.
5. Complete commissioning process test procedures including specific
construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures.
6. Conduct an operational demonstration in which the new equipment shall
function in normal operation mode, and shall operate completely error-free
in terms of hardware, software and overall system performance. Any
equipment failure during the demonstration will terminate the
demonstration. Correct failure and restart demonstration. Demonstration
shall run for a specified period of time as designated by SCRRA.
Commissioning will be considered complete demonstration is completely
error-free.
7. Contractor shall witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component
start-up. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include
them in the printed systems manual and commissioning process report.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTVITIES AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Completion of successful installation, final tests and commissioning, receipt of test
reports and as-built documentation, and successful performance of the installed
equipment and system for a thirty (30) day period will constitute Final Acceptance.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Access Control System (ACS) will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Access Control System (ACS) furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for as at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision and
incidentals necessary for the ACS, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and
as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 28 13 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 13 00 - 23 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 28 23 00
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (VSS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section describes the general requirements for Video Surveillance System
(VSS) equipment. The VSS to be installed at stations and various SCRRA facilities
shall consist of the following major equipment:
1. Network (IP) camera
2. Local Area Network (LAN) Ethernet switch distribution
3. Network Video Recorder (NVR) with Video Management Software (VMS)
4. Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)
5. Power supplies
6. Cables, wires and connectors
7. Miscellaneous equipment such as mounting poles, brackets, enclosures,
racks, conduits, pull boxes, etc.
B. Contractor is responsible for providing and coordinating final equipment
arrangements, locations, phased activities and construction methods that minimize
disruption to operations and provide complete and operational systems.
C. All network video products proposed shall conform to ONVIF (Open Network Video
Interface Forum) Profile S.
D. The standard VSS cameras to be installed throughout stations and various SCRRA
facilities will communicate with the localized NVR via Internet Protocol (IP) over a
dedicated VSS LAN.
E. The installation of VSS cameras and related equipment shall include the use of
Pan-Tilt-Zoom (PTZ), 180-dgree and 360-degree color cameras only. Fixed
cameras require SCRRA approval for use prior to installation.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
Related Specification Sections include, but are not limited to:
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 78 36 - Warranties and Guarantees
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
C. Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements
D. Section 26 12 00 - Conductors and Cables – Low Voltage
E. Section 26 13 00 - Raceways and Boxes
F. Section 26 14 00 - Wiring Devices
G. Section 26 41 00 - Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
H. Section 29 20 20 - Communications Services
I. Section 34 44 12 - Customer Information System (CIS)
1.03 DEFINITIONS
Abbreviation Description
CAT-6 Category 6
CIS Customer Information System
EIA Energy Information Administration
EIS Electronic Image Stabilization
FOPP Fiber Optic Patch Panel
FOV Field of View
GB Gigabyte
Gbps Gigabits per Second
GHz Gigahertz
HD High Definition
HDD Hard Disk Drive
HDTV High Definition Television
Hz Hertz
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IP Internet Protocol
JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group
KVM Keyboard-Video-Mouse
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
Mbps Megabits per Second
MIMO Multiple-Input and Multiple-Output
MMFO Multimode Fiber Optic
MP Megapixel
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group
NAS Network-Attached Storage
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NVR Network Video Recorder
ONVIF Open Network Video Interface Forum
OS Operating System
PC Personal Computer
PoE Power-over-Ethernet
PSE Power Sourcing Equipment
PTZ Pan-Tilt-Zoom
RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks
RJ45 Registered Jack 45
SCRRA Southern California Regional Rail Authority
SFP Small form-factor pluggable
SSD Solid State Driver
TB Terabyte
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
UL Underwriters Laboratories
UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply
USB Universal Serial Bus
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
VAC Volts Alternating Current
VDC Volts Direct Current
VGA Video Graphics Array
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VMS Video Management Software
VOIP Voice over Internet Protocol
VSS Video Surveillance System
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures:
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and data on
features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings and finishes.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
B. Shop Drawings: For video surveillance. Include plans, elevations, sections, details
and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location
and size of each field connection.
2. Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between
components for signal transmission and control. Show cable types and
sizes.
3. Dimensioned plan and elevations of equipment racks, control panels and
consoles.
4. UPS: Sizing calculations.
5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal and control wiring.
C. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer,
serial number, location and date of original installation. Add pretesting record of
each piece of equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test and
description of tests performed on bench prior to installation.
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manuals including operation and maintenance
instructions, and other descriptive material as received from the manufacturers that
will enable SCRRA personnel to operate, maintain, test and troubleshoot
equipment.
F. Project Record Documentation: Final As-Built documentation and drawings.
Details shall include (but not limited to): camera and equipment layout plans; block
diagrams; wiring diagrams, paths and schedules; system (power and data)
connection details; equipment mounting details; conduit, pull box, junction box and
pole details; camera coverage areas; rack/cabinet/enclosure layout elevations and
details.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor shall be an experienced Systems Integrator and Installer who can
demonstrate a minimum of four (4) years of continuous experience and technical
expertise in performing work comparable in size and complexity, and whose
installation and integration work was performed skillfully in a satisfactory manner
and on time.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
1. The Contractor shall furnish all specified components, shall be of
established reputation and experience in the field of Video Surveillance
Systems, shall be an Axis Communications, Inc. Silver level Channel
Partner, and qualified (as appropriate) by the manufacturers of the
proposed equipment to install, service and maintain each manufacturer’s
equipment. Contractor shall offer proof of qualifications or certifications by
submitting a copy of qualifications or certifications with the Bid.
2. The Contractor shall provide professionally trained fiber technicians to
handle fiber optic cable installation. Technicians shall install and supervise
installation during the project. All installation personnel shall be licensed as
required by local and/or state jurisdictions.
3. The Contractor shall serve as the single point of responsibility for the work
described in this section.
B. Products shall be manufactured by firms regularly engaged in manufacturing
products described in this Section.
C. Contractor shall provide personnel certified by the equipment manufacturer to:
assist in the installation of the equipment; check the installation before the
equipment is placed into operation; assist in the performance of field tests; assist
in the hardware configuration; and train the Authority operations and maintenance
staff in the care, operation, troubleshooting and maintenance of the equipment.
1.06 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Approval of alternate or substitute equipment or material in no way voids
specification requirements.
B. Under no circumstances shall SCRRA be required to prove that an item proposed
for substitution is not equal to the specified item. It shall be mandatory that the
Contractor submits to SCRRA all evidence to support the contention that the item
proposed for substitution is equal to the specified item. SCRRA’s decision as to
the equality of substitution shall be final and without further recourse.
C. In the event that SCRRA is required to provide additional engineering services as
a result of substitution of equivalent materials or equipment by the Contractor, or
changes by the Contractor in dimension, weight, power requirements, etc., of the
equipment and accessories furnished, or if SCRRA is required to examine and
evaluate any changes proposed by the Contractor for the convenience of the
Contractor, then the expenses in connection with such additional services shall be
paid by the Contractor and may be deducted from any moneys owed to the
Contractor.
D. If the deviation is not approved by SCRRA, it remains the Contractor’s
responsibility to provide what is required in the Contract Documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
1.07 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install a fully-functional VSS as specified in the Contract Documents
and as approved by SCRRA personnel in accordance with established SCRRA
standards.
B. Drawings and layouts will depict the location of VSS equipment throughout the
project site. Block and wiring diagrams shall show how VSS equipment should be
interconnected. Information provided by the Authority may be general or
conceptual, and may require the Contractor to undertake system design and
functionality prior to installation.
C. All cameras in the VSS shall use TCP/IP protocol and be of the IP/network type.
All cameras shall operate via PoE. Any existing analog cameras shall be removed,
replaced with an IP/network camera, or connected to a video encoder for analog
to digital signal conversion per SCRRA approval.
D. IP/network cameras at each location shall communicate with a local NVR
embedded with Milestone XProtect VMS for recording, local and remote
management. Cameras shall connect to the NVR through its own dedicated VSS
LAN consisting primarily of Ethernet switches and CAT-6 network cabling.
E. All video captured by the IP/Network cameras shall be recorded by the NVR. Per
California Government Code Section 34090.8, recorded images shall be stored for
at least one (1) year or 365 days prior to being written over.
F. Audit Trail: The VSS shall provide an audit trail of the recorded video to enable
verification that the video has not been altered from date and time of recording.
Video recordings must have the capability to be exported into a desirable media
format that can easily be viewed using a standard PC with standard codec/media
installed (e.g. Windows Media Player).
G. Other than the IP/network camera, all supporting VSS equipment shall be housed
in a temperature controlled telecommunications room (e.g. station
communications shelter, data center, server room, etc.), weatherproof enclosure,
or air conditioned equipment cabinet (for locations without an existing
telecommunications room).
H. All equipment in the VSS shall have surge protection and be connected to a UPS
when available.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified, products for the VSS shall be consistent with and
compatible with the established standards for SCRRA VSS.
B. All network video products proposed shall conform to ONVIF Profile S.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
C. When applicable, all products proposed for the VSS shall conform to ‘Buy America’
provisions.
D. The standard operating VMS for SCRRA is Milestone XProtect Professional
(minimum). No exceptions.
E. All cameras shall be network (IP) cameras and will connect to an Ethernet switch
as indicated in the Contract Documents.
F. SCRRA VSS camera types include the following: PTZ, 180-degree and 360-
degree. Fixed cameras require SCRRA approval prior to installation.
G. See SCRRA Engineering Standard ES3604 for general camera mounting
configurations.
H. All cameras shall have PoE functionality. PoE power for cameras shall originate
from an IEEE 802.3at compliant, backwards compatible, PoE network switch or
PoE mid-span injector.
I. All cameras shall have PoE surge protection. PoE surge protection shall typically
be placed between the PoE network switch/mid-span injector and PoE network
camera.
J. All cameras and VSS network cabling shall use outdoor-rated or plenum-rated
CAT-6 UTP cable for signal transport, terminated with RJ45 connectors. Cable
jacket color shall be white. Camera power and video signal shall be transported on
the same cable.
K. PoE extenders can be used to extend a PoE connection beyond the 328 ft. (100
m) distance limitation. Up to one (1) PoE extender can be used to extend the PoE
connection another 328 ft. (100 m), for a total cable length (from switch to camera)
of 656 ft. (200 m).
L. Unless otherwise specified, all CAT-6 network cabling shall be installed from each
camera back to a telecommunications room (e.g. station communications shelter,
data center, server room, etc.), weatherproof enclosure, or air conditioned
equipment cabinet (for locations without an existing telecommunications room).
M. For camera locations which cannot be supported by long distance PoE network
connectivity, fiber optic cable and wireless Ethernet radio systems can be used as
an alternative for camera data signal transport within the VSS LAN. These
locations will be considered as “remote” camera locations within the VSS LAN.
Use of these communication mediums requires SCRRA approval prior to
installation.
N. Use of a NAS is permitted to fulfill the one (1) year or 365 days recorded image
retention requirements per California Government Code Section 34090.8
O. All VSS equipment at the telecommunications room requiring building power shall
connect to a UPS, dedicated to the VSS only.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
P. Use camera mounting hardware as required from the product manufacturer.
Q. Programming, configuration, integration, start-up and commissioning of the VSS
and associated elements shall be done in conjunction with SCRRA personnel.
R. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with this specification, applicable
SCRRA engineering standards and manufacturer’s instructions. Provide, install
and connect any and all equipment necessary to ensure a complete and working
VSS as intended in the design. Any equipment such as consumables, terminators
or any other materials or equipment needed to install this system shall be
considered ancillary and be provided as part of this project. Contractor shall
provide cable for all components of the VSS and integration of sub-systems. Cable
shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer specification for the equipment
it is terminating to.
2.02 CAMERA EQUIPMENT
A. Camera Compatibility: Cameras shall be compatible with SCRRA’s Video
Surveillance System.
B. PTZ Dome Network Camera, Outdoor
1. Mounting Options (but not limited to):
a. Pole mount
b. Wall mount
c. Corner mount
d. Parapet mount
e. Pendent mount
2. Automatic Day/Night Functionality
3. Minimum Illumination:
a. Color: 0.2 lux at 30 IRE F1.4
b. Black & White: 0.04 lux at 30 IRE F1.4
4. Digital Video Compression methods:
a. H.264 Main and Baseline Profiles (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC)
b. Motion JPEG
5. Video Resolutions: 1280x720 (HDTV 720p) to 320x180
6. Frame Rate: no less than 30 frames per second for all required Digital
Video Compression methods and Video Resolutions.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
7. Video Streams: A minimum of three (3) simultaneous video streams shall
be supported in all required Digital Video Compression methods.
8. Preset Positions: A minimum of 256 PTZ preset positions shall be
supported, with a minimum accuracy of 0.5°.
9. Pan Movement:
a. 360° continuous pan rotation
b. 0.05° to 450° per second, minimum
10. Tilt Movement:
a. 220°, minimum
b. 0.05° to 450° per second, minimum
c. Image shall auto-flip 180° at the bottom of the tilt travel
11. Zoom Capability:
a. 30x optical zoom and 12x digital zoom for a total of 360x zoom,
minimum
b. Iris Control: Automatic with manual override
c. Auto Focus shall be supported
d. Electronic Image Stabilization (EIS) shall be supported
e. Automatic defog filtering shall be supported
12. Dome cover color shall be “smoked”.
13. Camera shall be equipped with environmental housing suited for outdoor
weather conditions and equipped with sunshield, fan and heater.
14. Axis Communications camera model Q6044-E, or approved equal.
C. Mini PTZ Dome Network Camera, Outdoor
1. Mounting Options (but not limited to):
a. Wall surface mount
b. Ceiling surface mount
2. IP66 rated enclosure and IK10 vandal resistance rating.
3. Minimum Illumination: 1.4 lux, F1.8
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
4. Digital Video Compression methods:
a. H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC)
b. Motion JPEG
5. Video Resolutions: 1280x720 (HDTV 720p) to 320x180
6. Frame Rate: no less than 30 frames per second for all required Digital
Video Compression methods and Video Resolutions.
7. Video Streams: Multiple and individually configurable streams in all
required Digital Video Compression methods.
8. Preset Positions: A minimum of 25 PTZ preset positions shall be supported.
9. Pan Movement:
a. 360° continuous pan rotation
b. 100° per second, minimum
10. Tilt Movement:
a. 90°, minimum
b. 100° per second, minimum
11. Zoom Capability: 3x digital zoom, total 216x zoom
12. Dome cover shall be clear.
13. Axis Communications camera model M5014-V, or approved equal.
D. 180° and 360° Dome Network Camera, Outdoor
1. Mounting Options (but not limited to):
a. Pole mount
b. Wall surface mount
c. Wall surface mount
d. Ceiling surface mount
e. Corner mount
f. Parapet mount
g. Pendent mount
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
2. Automatic Day/Night Functionality
3. Minimum Illumination:
a. Color: 0.3-200000 lux, F2.0
b. Black & White: 0.06 lux, F2.0
4. Digital Video Compression methods:
a. H.264 Main and Baseline Profiles (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC)
b. Motion JPEG
5. Video Resolutions: 2592x1944 (5 MP) to 160x120
6. Frame Rate: no less than 12 frames per second with power line frequency
(50/60 Hz) for all required Digital Video Compression methods and Video
Resolutions.
7. Video Streams: A minimum of three (3) simultaneous video streams shall
be supported in all required Digital Video Compression methods.
8. Angle of View: no less than 187° horizontal and 168° vertical
9. Camera Angle Adjustment: rotation +/-180°
10. Dome cover color shall be clear.
11. Camera shall be equipped with environmental housing suited for outdoor
weather conditions and equipped with sunshield, fan and heater.
12. Axis Communications camera model M3027-PVE, or approved equal.
E. Fixed Dome Network Camera, Outdoor
1. Mounting Options (but not limited to):
a. Pole mount
b. Wall surface mount
c. Wall surface Mount
d. Ceiling surface mount
e. Ceiling flush mount
f. Corner mount
g. Parapet mount
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
h. Pendent mount
2. Automatic Day/Night Functionality
3. Minimum Illumination:
a. Color: 0.25 lux, F1.4
b. Black & White: 0.05 lux, F1.4
4. Digital Video Compression methods:
a. H.264 Main and Baseline Profiles (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC)
b. Motion JPEG
5. Video Resolutions: 1920x1080 to 160x90
6. Frame Rate: no less than 30 frames per second with power line frequency
(50/60 Hz) for all required Digital Video Compression methods and Video
Resolutions.
7. Video Streams: A minimum of three (3) simultaneous video streams shall
be supported in all required Digital Video Compression methods.
8. Digital PTZ
9. Shutter Time: 1/142850 s to 2 s
10. Camera Angle Adjustment: Pan ±180°, tilt -5 to +75°, rotation ±95°
11. Dome cover color shall be clear.
12. Camera shall be equipped with environmental housing suited for outdoor
weather conditions and equipped with sunshield, fan and heater.
13. Axis Communications camera model P3225-LVE, or approved equal.
F. Fixed Network Camera, Outdoor
1. Mounting Options (but not limited to):
a. Pole mount
b. Wall mount
c. Corner mount
d. Ceiling mount
2. Automatic Day/Night Functionality
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
3. Minimum Illumination:
a. Color: 0.18 lux, F1.3
b. Black & White: 0.04 lux, F1.3
4. Digital Video Compression methods:
a. H.264 Main and Baseline Profiles (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC)
b. Motion JPEG
5. Video Resolutions: 1920x1200 to 160x90
6. Frame Rate: 60 fps maximum
7. Video Streams: A minimum of three (3) simultaneous video streams shall
be supported in all required Digital Video Compression methods.
8. Digital PTZ
9. Shutter Time: 1/143000 s to 2 s
10. Horizontal Angle of View: 90° to 40°
11. Camera shall be equipped with environmental housing suited for outdoor
weather conditions and equipped with sunshield, fan and heater.
12. Axis Communications camera model Q1615-E, or approved equal.
G. Fixed Thermal Network Camera, Outdoor
1. Mounting Options (but not limited to):
a. Pole mount
b. Wall mount
c. Corner mount
d. Ceiling mount
2. Automatic Day/Night Functionality
3. Sensitivity: Noise Equivalent Temperature Difference (NETD) less than 75
mK
4. Digital Video Compression methods:
a. H.264 Main and Baseline Profiles (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC)
b. Motion JPEG
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
5. Video Resolutions: Up to 640x480
6. Frame Rate: Up to 30 fps
7. Detection Range: Up to 3500 yards for a vehicle in ideal weather conditions
8. Video Streams: A minimum of three (3) simultaneous video streams shall
be supported in all required Digital Video Compression methods.
9. Horizontal Angle of View: 57° to 18°
10. Camera shall be equipped with environmental housing suited for outdoor
weather conditions.
11. Axis Communications camera model Q1932-E, or approved equal.
2.03 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER (NVR)
A. High performance NVR with built-in Windows Embedded Standard 7 (minimum),
and pre-installed and licensed version of Milestone XProtect VMS that supports
Milestone Mobile functionality.
B. Allows a minimum of 20 camera connections at the same time for live-viewing and
recording via 1Gbps Ethernet port with included camera license, and can be
extended to allow additional camera connections by adopting an “additional
camera license” that can be purchased separately.
C. A second, or additional, 1 Gbps Ethernet port for video distribution to client PCs.
D. General:
1. Suitable for standalone configuration for basic surveillance system
2. Suitable for master/slave configuration for larger surveillance system
3. Suitable for 24/7 surveillance based on 49,000 hour MTBF
4. Suitable to be rack-mounted or mounted in an equipment rack utilizing a
customizable mounting solution.
E. Recorder Hardware:
1. CPU: Intel Core i5 minimum
2. RAM: 4GB minimum
F. Supported Video CODECs:
1. H.264
2. Motion JPEG (MJPEG)
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
3. MPEG-4
G. Storage Components:
1. SSD and/or HDD
2. 2TB total storage minimum
H. Recorded Data Export:
1. Export Media: USB memory, CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW (via USB external)
2. Export Format: AVI (video), JPEG (still image), Milestone XProtect
Enterprise Database format (internal format)
I. Playback Function:
1. Normal playback
2. Slow playback
3. Fast playback
4. Fast forward and reverse
5. Frame-by-frame playback
J. Database Search Key:
1. Time/data search
2. Alarm search
3. Smart Search (motion detection on playback video)
K. Client Workstation Requirements: The VMS client software, or remote-viewing PC,
shall operate on the following minimum required hardware:
1. OS: Microsoft Windows 7 Professional SP1 (32-bit or 64-bit) minimum
2. CPU: Intel Core2 Duo, 2.4GHz or higher
3. RAM: 1GB (minimum)
4. Network: 100Mbps or higher
5. Graphics Card: AGP or PCI-Express, minimum 1280 x 1024, 16-bit colors
6. HDD: Minimum 1GB free space for installation
7. Software: DirectX 9.0 or newer required to run Playback Viewer application;
Microsoft.Net 4.5.1 Framework
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
L. Electrical:
1. Input voltage: 200W / 100~240V
M. Environmental:
1. Operation Temperature: 0~40°C
2. Storage Temperature: -20°C~70°C
N. Mechanical:
1. One (1) – 1 Gbps dual network interface card with RJ45 ports (auto
negotiation)
2. Four (4) – USB 2.0 ports (minimum)
3. One (1) – DVI / VGA port
4. One (1) – HDMI port
5. One (1) – Audio in mini jack
6. One (1) – Audio out mini jack
7. Three (3) – COM ports
O. Milestone Husky M30 or M50, or approved equal.
2.04 RUGGEDIZED NVR
A. Rugged, high performance NVR with built-in Windows Embedded Standard 7
(minimum) and preloaded with Milestone XProtect VMS that supports Milestone
Mobile functionality.
B. NVR shall be built to operate reliably in harsh usage environments and conditions
such as strong vibrations, extreme temperatures and dusty conditions.
C. NVR shall employ a compact, hardened, fully fanless and ventless chassis design
for protection against dirt dust, tampering, strong vibrations and extreme
temperatures.
D. NVR shall allow a minimum of 25 camera connections at the same time for live-
viewing and recording via 1Gbps Ethernet port.
E. NVR shall include a second 1Gbps Ethernet port for video distribution to client
PCs.
F. General:
1. Suitable for standalone configuration for basic surveillance system
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
2. Suitable for master/slave configuration for larger surveillance system
3. Suitable for 24/7 surveillance
4. Suitable for wall-mounting and placement in small spaces
G. Recorder Hardware:
1. CPU: 2.3GHz Intel Core i7-4770TE minimum
2. RAM: 8GB, DDR3 minimum
H. Supported Video CODECs:
1. H.264
2. Motion JPEG (MJPEG)
3. MPEG-4
I. Storage Components:
1. SSD only
2. 2TB total storage minimum
3. 0~70°C operating temperature
J. Recorded Data Export:
1. Export Media: USB memory, CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW (via USB external)
2. Export Format: AVI (video), JPEG (still image), Milestone XProtect
Enterprise Database format (internal format)
K. Playback Function:
1. Normal playback
2. Slow playback
3. Fast playback
4. Fast forward and reverse
5. Frame-by-frame playback
L. Database Search Key:
1. Time/data search
2. Alarm search
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
3. Smart Search (motion detection on playback video)
M. Client Workstation Requirements: The VMS client software, or remote-viewing PC,
shall operate on the following minimum required hardware:
1. OS: Microsoft Windows 7 Professional SP1 (32-bit or 64-bit) minimum
2. CPU: Intel Core2 Duo, 2.4GHz or higher
3. RAM: 1GB (minimum)
4. Network: 100Mbps or higher
5. Graphics Card: AGP or PCI-Express, minimum 1280 x 1024, 16-bit colors
6. HDD: Minimum 1GB free space for installation
7. Software: DirectX 9.0 or newer required to run Playback Viewer application;
Microsoft.Net 4.5.1 Framework
N. Electrical:
1. Input voltage: 9~48V
2. Power Input: 3-Pin Terminal Block Connector
O. Environmental:
1. Operation Temperature: 0~60°C
P. Mechanical:
1. Two (2) – 1Gbps LAN port (auto negotiation; minimum)
2. Four (4) - 802.3af PoE port (minimum)
3. Four (4) – USB 2.0 port (minimum)
4. Four (4) – USB 3.0 port (minimum)
5. Two (2) – DisplayPort (minimum)
6. One (1) – DVI-I port (minimum)
7. Two (2) – Audio jack: One (1) line-in, One (1) mic-out (minimum)
8. Six (6) – RS-232/422/485 COM port (minimum)
9. One (1) – 4 Input / 4 Output Isolated DIO port (minimum)
10. One (1) – PS/2 port for keyboard/mouse (minimum)
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
11. One (1) – 2.5” Hot-Swap HDD/SDD bay (minimum)
12. One (1) – SIM Card slot
13. NVR dimensions shall not exceed 10.2-in W x 4.2-in H x 10.3-in D
Q. Milestone MX1000 Rugged In-Vehicle NVR by Logic Supply, or approved equal.
2.05 NETWORK ATTACHED STORAGE (NAS)
A. Processor: Quad-core Intel Celeron 2.0GHz (up to 2.41GHz)
B. Memory:
1. Preinstalled with one (1) 4GB DDR3L SDRAM
2. Minimum of two (2) SODIMM slots that can support up to 8GB
C. Flash Memory: 512MB
D. Internal Drive:
1. Minimum of four (4) hard drive bays that can support 3.5” or 2.5” SATA
6Gb/s HDDs
2. HDD: 4TB minimum (each), minimum of four (4) HDD required
E. Form Factor: 1U, rack mountable
F. Network Interface: four (4) RJ45 Gigabit Ethernet ports
G. Ports:
1. Five (5) USB 3.0, minimum
2. One (1) HDMI, minimum
3. One (1) Console (for system maintenance)
H. Electrical:
1. Input voltage: AC 120V – AC 240V (50 Hz / 60 Hz)
2. Output voltage: 250W
I. Operating Temperature Range: 32°F (0°C) - 104°F (40°C)
J. Relative humidity of up to 95%, non-condensing
K. Operating System: embedded Linux
L. Dimensions shall not exceed 1.75-in H x 17.3-in W x 19.7-in D
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
M. QNAP Systems, Inc. TS-453U with compatible HDDs, or approved equal.
2.06 CABLES, CONNECTORS AND PATHWAYS
A. Category 6 (CAT-6) Cable:
1. The ANSI/TIA/EIA standard for Category 6 cable is TIA/EIA 568-5-B.2-10.
2. The maximum length for a cable segment is 328 feet (100 meters). If longer
runs are required, the use of active hardware (e.g. extender, repeater,
switch) is required.
3. Cable jacket color shall be white.
4. Belden 2412, or approved equal.
B. RJ45 Connector (for CAT-6 Cable):
1. Registered Jack-45, an eight-wire connector used commonly to connect
computers onto networks.
2. Contractor shall use EZ-RJ style connectors with strain relief (p/n: PLAT-
202015J or equivalent).
C. Pathways and Raceways:
1. Pathways and raceways are shown in the Electrical drawings to provide
cable and power conduit pathways for equipment included for the Video
Surveillance system.
2. Contractor to verify pathways and raceways, and calculate lengths for
cable runs.
3. Conduit shall be supplied as a system from a single manufacturer providing
all specified conduit types; all required fittings, terminations and other
installation accessories; all in accordance with applicable SCRRA
Engineering Standards, manufacturer’s instructions and Contract
Documents.
4. All new conduit shall be free from defects, including non-circularity, foreign
inclusions, etc. It shall be uniform in color, density and physical properties.
It shall be straight and the ends shall be cut square to the inside diameter.
5. All new conduit shall display the Underwriters Laboratory certification (UL
Listed).
6. All new conduit shall meet the requirements of Section 26 13 00 -
Raceways and Boxes.
2.07 POWER-OVER-ETHERNET (POE) EQUIPMENT
A. PoE Midspan:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 20 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
1. For cameras requiring IEEE 802.3af or IEEE 802.3at PoE power, furnish
and install new rack-mount PoE midspan power injectors in equipment
racks, as required. Camera manufacturer provided single-port PoE
midspan power injector can be used in lieu of rack-mount injector per
SCRRA approval. Contractor responsible for mounting configuration of
single-port PoE midspan power injector in telecommunications room.
2. Port Configuration: no less than eight (8) ports of IEEE 802.3af and IEEE
802.3at compliant PoE for 10/100/1000 Base-T networks
3. Output power: 52VDC, 37W Max per Port
4. Status indicating LEDs for output and power.
5. Comnet CopperLine model CLFE8IPS, or approved equal.
B. PoE Extender:
1. Furnish and install new PoE extenders, as required. Up to one (1) PoE
extender can be used to extend a PoE connection another 328 ft. (100 m),
for a total cable length (from switch to camera) of 656 ft. (200 m).
2. Environmental:
a. IP66 rated enclosure for external installation
b. Operating temperature range of -40°F to 140°F
c. Relative humidity of up to 85%, non-condensing
3. Power Consumption: 1.3W via PoE
4. PoE Standards: IEEE 802.3af, IEEE 802.3at and custom PoE up to 60W
5. Ethernet Interface: two (2) independently auto-configuring 10/100 ports
(10BASE-T/1000BASE-TX, half/full duplex) with patch or crossover cables
supported
6. Status indicating LEDs for PoE power and Ethernet link/activity
7. Veracity Outreach Max XT model VOR-ORM-XT, or approved equal.
C. PoE Surge Protector:
1. Furnish and install new PoE surge protectors, as required. PoE surge
protectors can be rack mount (for multiple ports) or surface mount (for
single port).
2. Rack Mount (Multiple-Port) PoE Surge Protector:
a. Port Configuration: no less then twelve (12) RJ45 in/out ports
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 21 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
b. Supports gigabit Ethernet data speed
c. PoE Standards: IEEE 802.3af, IEEE 802.3at and high wattage PoE
Plus
d. Operating temperature range of -40°F to 158°F
e. Relative humidity of up to 95%, non-condensing
f. Housing: galvanneal sheet metal
g. One (1) rack unit (U) high
h. Ditek Corporation model DTK-RM12POE, or approved equal.
3. Single-Port PoE Surge Protector:
a. Port Configuration: one (1) RJ45 in/out port
b. Supports gigabit Ethernet data speed
c. PoE Standards: IEEE 802.3af, IEEE 802.3at and high wattage PoE
Plus
d. Operating temperature range of -40°F to 158°F
e. Relative humidity of up to 95%, non-condensing
f. Housing: ABS
g. Ditek Corporation model DTK-MRJPOE, or approved equal.
2.08 ETHERNET SWITCH
A. Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) Aggregation Switch:
1. PoE switch shall have 24 RJ45 auto-negotiating 10/100/100 PoE Ports + 4
SFP 1000 Mbps ports.
2. Two (2) 1000 Mbps (1 Gigabit) multimode SFP transceivers required.
3. Switch shall be rack-mountable.
4. Switch shall support jumbo frames and have a switching capacity of 56
Gbps and forwarding performance of up to 41.7 Mpps (64-byte packets).
5. Other requirements shall include; flow control, full duplex, and layer 3
switching, auto-sensing per device and VLAN support.
6. Electrical: switch shall have 120-240 VAC internal power supply.
7. Environmental: Operating temperature range of 32°F to 113°F.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 22 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
8. HP 1910-24G-PoE (365 W) with compatible SFP transceivers, or approved
equal.
B. 7-Port PoE Switch:
1. The 7-port PoE switch shall be a PoE PSE (Power Sourcing Equipment)
that powers remote PoE cameras.
2. The 7-port PoE switch shall be unmanaged.
3. The switch housing shall be metal with an IP30 protection rating.
4. The 7-port PoE switch shall have five (5) 10/100Tx RJ45 ports.
5. The 7-port PoE switch shall include two (2) 100/1000 SFP slots.
6. Two (2) 1000 Mbps (1 Gigabit) multimode SFP transceivers required.
7. The switch shall have four (4) RJ45 ports that support 802.3at PoE+.
8. The switch shall have the capability to extend network connectivity up to
1.2 miles (2 kilometers) over multimode fiber.
9. Electrical:
a. 7-port PoE switch shall accept an input voltage in the range of
48VDC and 55VDC.
b. Contractor to determine power requirements for switch. If
necessary, furnish and install separate power supply for switch.
Separate power supply to be DIN rail mounted.
10. Environmental: Standard operating temperature range of -10°C to 70°C;
extended operating temperature range of -40°C to 75°C.
11. Antaira LNP-0702C-SFP-T with compatible SFP transceivers, or approved
equal.
2.09 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM EQUIPMENT
A. Keyboard-Video-Mouse (KVM) Rack Console & Cable Assembly
1. General:
a. Rack-mountable
b. Built-in KVM switch with a minimum of eight (8) ports
c. Laptop style keyboard and touch pad style mouse with PS/2 and
USB connections available
d. Viewing angle: 170° vertical, 178° horizontal
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 23 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
2. Display:
a. 19” LCD widescreen
b. Maximum resolution of 1440 x 900
c. Analog and VGA display connections available
d. Color depth of 16.7M
e. Aspect ratio of 16:9
f. Pixel pitch of 0.2835
3. Environmental:
a. Operating temperature range of 32°F to 104°F
b. Relative humidity of up to 80%, non-condensing
c. Storage temperature range of -4°F to 140°F
4. Built-in power supply with auto-switching 100 to 240VAC, 50 to 60Hz, 48
Watt power rating
5. KVM cable assembly shall be from the same manufacturer as the KVM
rack console provided. Contractor to verify that manufacturer provided
cable matches KVM port configuration of NVR. If not, contractor to furnish
and install new KVM cable assembly to match KVM port configuration of
NVR. Consult manufacturer for cable assembly selection type.
6. Belkin F1DC108H, or approved equal.
B. Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)
1. The UPS shall be rack mountable. The UPS shall provide temporary
electrical backup for PoE cameras, servers and switches associated with
the VSS.
2. Minimum requirements for the UPS:
a. Capacity: 1440VA / 1440 Watts
b. Input: 120V
c. Output: 240V
d. Two (2) rack unit (U) high
3. Connection requirements for the UPS:
a. Input connection: one (1) NEMA 5-15P input plug
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 24 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
b. Output connections: eight (8) NEMA 5-15R output receptacles
4. Extended battery modules shall be provided.
a. Output: 48V
b. Minimum of two (2) extended battery modules required per UPS
c. Extended battery modules shall be rack mountable
d. Two (2) rack unit (U) high
5. UPS: Eaton 5PX1500RT, or approved equal.
6. Extended Battery Module: Eaton 5PXEBM48RT, or approved equal.
C. Equipment Rack
1. The width of the equipment mounting-frame in the equipment rack shall be
19-inches (unless otherwise specified).
2. Floor Mounted:
a. Floor mounted equipment racks in the specified
telecommunications room shall be EIA compliant.
b. Fully welded construction shall provide a static capacity of 10,000
lbs. and a UL Listed load capacity of 2,500 lbs.
c. Rack shall be constructed of the following materials: top and bottom
shall be 14-gauge steel, horizontal braces shall be 16-gauge steel
and all structural elements shall be finished in a durable black
powder coat.
d. Racks shall have ventilated locking front and rear doors.
e. Middle Atlantic Products MRK-4436, or approved equal.
3. Wall Mounted:
a. Wall mounted equipment racks in the specified telecommunications
room shall be EIA compliant.
b. Rack construction shall provide a minimum UL Listed capacity of
250 lbs.
c. Rack shall be constructed of 16-gauge steel, phosphate pre-treated
and finished in a black textured powder coat.
d. Rackrail shall be constructed of 11-gauge steel with tapped 12-24
mounting holes in universal EIA spacing with black powder coat
finish.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 25 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
e. Rack shall feature a locking swing open center section for front and
rear access.
f. Rack shall include a locking/latching plexi front door for added
security.
g. Middle Atlantic Products CWR-12-22PD, or approved equal.
2.10 WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE
A. Mounting Options:
1. Pole mount
2. Wall mount
B. The weatherproof enclosure shall be a molded fiberglass reinforced polyester
(FRP) industrial enclosure.
C. The cases shall have quick release latches with padlock hasps.
D. NEMA Type 3R, 3RX with an IP24 protection rating.
E. The weatherproof enclosure shall include mounting plate, duplex 120 VAC outlet
and thermostat controlled cooling system.
F. The weatherproof enclosure shall have one (1) ½-inch conduit connector for power
and two (2) 1-inch conduit connectors for data/signal.
G. The weatherproof enclosure exterior dimensions shall not exceed: 19.5-in. x 17.5-
in. x 10-in.
H. L-Com NB181608-40FSAF, or approved equal.
2.11 OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONED EQUIPMENT CABINET
A. Outdoor air conditioned equipment cabinet shall consist of the cabinet assembly,
rack-mounted air conditioner, cabinet foundation and all materials, components,
appropriate connectors, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary for a fully-
functional air conditioned equipment cabinet.
B. Cabinet shall meet the requirements of the model 334 traffic controller cabinet
standard used by the State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans).
C. Cabinet outside dimensions shall not exceed 67-in H x 25-in W x 38-in D.
D. Cabinet shall be constructed with 5052-H32 aluminum, 0.125-in thick.
E. Cabinet interior shall be entirely insulated with airtight seals.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 26 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
F. Cabinet shall have two full size (2) doors for access: one (1) for front and one (1)
for rear of cabinet. Both doors shall be louvered for air conditioning ventilation and
include door stops.
G. Cabinet door handles shall be stainless steel, ¾-in round, with provisions for a
padlock.
H. Cabinet shall include an electrical service panel assembly, and a minimum of one
(1) 30-amp circuit breaker and one (1) 20-amp NEMA 5-20 receptacle.
I. Cabinet shall include a removable 19-in EIA rack assembly.
J. Cabinet foundation per Caltrans 2010 Standard Plan ES-3C, Detail D.
K. Rack-mounted air conditioner:
1. Cooling capacity: 3500 BTU/H
2. 95/95 Rating: 2700 BTU/H
3. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 125°F
4. Minimum Ambient Temperature: 50°F
5. Power: 115/100 VAC, 60/50 Hz; 3-wire power cord
6. Thermostatically controlled
7. Refrigerant: CFC-free R134a
8. EIA-notched flanges for mounting in a 19-in EIA rack.
9. Compatible with cabinet assembly.
L. Cabinet Assembly: McCain, Inc. Air Conditioned Equipment Cabinet, 332/334
Style, or approved equal.
M. Rack-Mounted Air Conditioner: Kooltronic, Inc. KA4C3.5H9R, or approved equal.
2.12 FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A. See Section 26 12 00 - Conductors and Cables - Low Voltage, for fiber optic cable
requirements.
B. See Section 29 20 20 - Communications Services and Section 34 44 12 - Customer
Information System (CIS), for all fiber optic communication system components
and requirements.
C. Fiber Optic Patch Panel (FOPP)
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 27 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
1. Inside the telecommunications room, fiber optic cable shall be terminated
onto a fully-functional, 19-inch rack mounted FOPP (aka fiber distribution
unit) that shall include connector housing, brackets, connectors and splice
trays as specified and as shown on the Contract Documents.
2. For remote camera locations, fiber optic cable shall be terminated onto a
FOPP that shall include a single-panel connector housing, brackets,
connectors and splice trays as specified and as shown on the Contract
Documents. FOPP must be securely mounted inside weatherproof
enclosure and must fit inside enclosure with other applicable VSS
equipment and components.
D. Subject to conformance with the requirements of this Section, use products
manufactured by Corning, Inc.
2.13 WIRELESS ETHERNET RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
A. The wireless Ethernet radio system shall consist of all materials, components,
appropriate connectors, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to establish a
wireless link to camera locations (beyond PoE distance limits) within the VSS LAN.
B. The wireless Ethernet radio system shall meet the minimum requirements:
1. 5.8 GHz broadband Ethernet radio
2. Dynamic frequency selection
3. 802.11 b/g compliant with up to 54 Mbps data throughput
4. Minimum of 2x2 MIMO operation
5. Each radio must be capable of operating in Point-to-Point and Point-to-
Multipoint modes
6. Server-less architecture with web-based interface for remote management,
troubleshooting, monitoring, and configuring the wireless network in real
time, without additional hardware or software.
7. Multiple Ethernet Ports
8. VOIP and PTZ control traffic prioritized over other traffic (for better latency)
9. Multicast route and forward support
10. Built-in spectrum analyzer
11. Built-in real-time bandwidth monitoring tools
12. Environmentally hardened outdoor units
13. Low profile design
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 28 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
C. Subject to conformance with the requirements of this Section, use products
manufactured by Ubiquiti Networks, Inc. or approved equal.
2.14 POLE MOUNTED SOLAR POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
A. The pole mounted solar power supply system shall consist of all materials,
components, appropriate connectors, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary
to establish an “off-grid” power source to camera locations.
B. All materials furnished, assembled, fabricated or installed shall new, corrosion
resistant and rated for outdoor use.
C. Pole mounted solar power supply system shall be side-pole mounted unless
otherwise specified.
D. The pole mounted solar power supply system shall generally consist of the
following components:
1. Solar panel(s) and mounting hardware
2. Weatherproof enclosure and mounting hardware
3. Battery bank
4. Battery charge controller
5. Internal and external wiring cables and conductors
E. The pole mounted solar power system shall meet the minimum requirements:
1. Solar Panel:
a. Provide 12VDC
b. Wattage Output: 100 watts (minimum acceptable)
c. Dimensions shall not exceed 61-in x 54-in
2. Weatherproof Enclosure:
a. Shall be of powder coated steel construction
b. Space available inside enclosure for placement of additional
electronic hardware
c. Include DIN mounting rails inside of enclosure
d. Dimensions shall not exceed 25-in x 15-in x 15-in
3. Battery (for Battery Bank):
a. Battery nominal voltage: 12VDC
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 29 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
b. Battery capacity: 100 amp-hour
c. Battery type: Valve Regulated Sealed Lead Acid / GEL
d. Battery Life: 5 Years
e. Sized to allow one (1) day of autonomy
4. Battery Charge Controller:
a. Provide fully operational control of the battery charging process and
solar panel effects.
b. Controller type: Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
c. Solid state construction
d. Support 12VDC
e. Provide protection against over-charging and over-discharging of
battery bank
f. Load inputs for solar and PoE power sources
g. Load outputs via PoE and auxiliary wire terminal
h. Power consumption: 0.5 watts maximum
5. Operating temperature of -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to 140°F)
6. Wind speed rating of 90 miles per hour
F. Subject to conformance with the requirements of this Section, use products
manufactured by Tycon Systems, Inc. or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Cameras shall be mounted in locations as shown in the Contract Documents
and/or approved by SCRRA.
B. Install all system components, including furnished equipment, and appurtenances
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and as shown, and shall furnish
all necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete
and operable system as specified and shown. Control signal, communications, and
data transmission line grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude
ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 30 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
C. Cameras accessible to the public shall be concealed or placed in protective,
tamper-proof environmental enclosures and surface mounted beyond a person’s
normal reach at a minimum of 10 feet above ground level (unless otherwise
indicated).
D. Cameras shall be located so that their Field of View (FOV) is not restricted by other
station installations such as walls, ceilings, columns, signs, and luminaries. Plans
demonstrating the unobstructed FOV of each camera shall be submitted for
SCRRA review.
E. Cameras shall be located so that they never directly view the sun. The FOV of
cameras shall be adequately illuminated either by natural light or by luminaries.
Within the FOV, particular care shall be taken to avoid extremes of light and
shadow.
F. Equipment enclosures and other video surveillance equipment installed at
locations accessible to the public shall be mounted using tamper-proof mounting
hardware and beyond a person’s normal reach at a minimum of 10 feet above
ground level (unless otherwise indicated).
G. Mounts for camera shall be designed to support loads of 25 pounds minimum.
H. Pole Mounts used for outside cameras shall use custom mounts. Coordination with
architect and SCRRA for style and color may be required. All parts shall be
protected from corrosion, including insulation against dissimilar metals.
I. Contractor shall use existing conduit and surface raceway where possible and
practicable. All work shall be concealed using existing facility infrastructure
throughout project site. If concealment is impossible or impractical, SCRRA shall
be notified before starting that part of the work.
J. Where required, Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, patching, coring and
associated work for the system at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. Provide easy, safe, and mandated clearances at equipment racks and enclosures,
and other equipment requiring maintenance and operation. All telecommunications
room equipment racks shall be mounted a minimum of 36-inches from the wall or
other cabinets, equipment or power panels. SCRRA to review and approve all
equipment mounting locations and configurations inside telecommunications room
prior to installation.
L. All cables and patch cables shall have a label attached at both ends. All equipment
components shall have a label specifying pertinent information and shall be clearly
visible on the exterior of equipment. Contractor shall confirm specific labeling
requirements with SCRRA prior to cable installation or termination, and equipment
installation.
M. For remote camera locations requiring electrical power, splice into existing power
circuit wherever possible. Splice points to occur in the nearest pull box at each
remote camera location. Consult with existing power circuit owner prior to splicing.
Splices into existing CIS power circuit require SCRRA approval.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 31 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
3.02 TESTING
A. Factory and field testing shall be performed in accordance with SCRRA Standard
Specification 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements.
B. Factory Tests: Perform factory test of each camera type to demonstrate correct
operation as defined in these Specifications.
C. Field Tests: Perform cable tests as indicated in the approved test plan. Furnish all
equipment, appliances, and labor necessary to test the installed cable mediums
throughout the VSS.
1. Perform continuity tests on CAT-6 camera cables using a meter having a
minimum input resistance of 20,000 ohms per volt. Show that each
conductor has a resistance of not more than 16 ohms per 1000 FT of
conductor run.
2. Perform continuity test on fiber cables. Fiber cables need to be tested three
(3) times:
a. A continuity test of the fiber shall be performed before installation.
Fiber cable shall be tested on the cable reel for continuity prior to
installation.
b. Next continuity test shall be performed after installation and before
termination for insertion loss of each installed segment.
c. The final continuity test shall be a complete end to end test using
LED sources and documenting each fiber cables result.
3. Perform all continuity testing after final termination (except fiber cable) and
cable installation, but prior to connection of any electronics or field devices.
4. Replace any cable that fails to meet the parameters, or if any testing
reveals defects in the cable. Retest new cable as specified above.
5. Contractor to furnish their own test equipment.
6. Furnish all test results to SCRRA.
D. Perform the following local field operations tests on site in accordance with an
SCRRA approved field test plan. Demonstrate the following after the camera
controller assemblies, other camera hardware, power supplies and connecting
cabling have been installed:
1. Verify physical construction has been completed in accordance with the
contract plans and specifications.
2. Inspect quality and tightness of all connections (power and data)
throughout the VSS.
3. Check power supply voltages and output.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 32 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
4. Connect devices to power sources.
5. Verify installation of all cables and connections to ensure intended
operations.
3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. Commissioning is the process by which the Contractor will demonstrate to SCRRA
that it has completed the project in conformance with the contract documents and
that the project will perform as specified in the contract documents.
B. The Contractor shall be Manufacturer certified and solely responsible for providing
all test and commissioning equipment, tools, software, programming,
programming support and incidentals and qualified technicians to start–up,
calibrate, debug and verify proper function of the systems and subsystems as
required by the Commissioning Plan.
C. The responsibilities of the Contractor during commissioning shall be to assign
representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf, and shall schedule
them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but
not limited to, the following:
1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in
collaboration with the entity responsible for system and equipment
installation, recommend corrective action.
2. Resolve issues recorded in the test reports.
3. Organize and lead the commissioning team and coordinate commissioning
process activities with the construction schedule.
4. Review and accept checklists provided by the construction manager or
SCRRA. Complete checklists as work is completed, and provide them to
the construction manager or SCRRA on a daily basis.
5. Complete commissioning process test procedures including specific
construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures.
6. Contractor shall witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component
start-up. Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include
them in the printed systems manual and commissioning process report.
3.04 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Completion of successful installation, final tests and commissioning, receipt of the
test reports and as-built documentation, and successful performance of the
installed equipment and system for a thirty (30) day period will constitute Final
Acceptance.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 33 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 28 23 00 Video Surveillance System (VSS)
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Video Surveillance System (VSS) will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Video Surveillance System furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for as a lump sum. This price shall be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision and incidentals necessary for the Video Surveillance system including
multiple types of cameras, camera mounts and housings, cabling/connectors,
intermediate connectivity devices, Network Video Recorders, and furnishings
described by the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 28 23 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 28 23 00 - 34 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 29 00 00
SUMMARY OF CUSTOMER INFORMATION SYSTEM (CIS) WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The Customer Information System (CIS) will include: PA, LED message signs,
Personal Computer (PC), Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Monitor(s), Strobe lights on
each LED message sign, power supplies, cables, wires, connectors,
miscellaneous equipment such as mounting posts, brackets, enclosures, media
converters, and switches. The CIS will interface with the SCRRA network through
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) router.
B. Detailed requirements and detailed Statement of Work including the equipment
requirements for CIS are identified in Section 29 20 20, Communications Services.
C. This SOW includes Work to be performed by the Contractor. The Work includes
furnishing, installing, testing and upgrading the PA/CMS system on existing
stations to CIS and installing CIS on the new stations. The Work shall be performed
as specified in this document and in the station specific Specifications, materials
list, and Plans. A general summary of the SOW is included in this section, with
details included in Section 29 20 20, Communications Services. This document
and accompanying materials form the Standard Plans, Standard Materials List,
and Standard Specifications.
1. The Contractor shall provide final Shop Drawings and shall submit them to
SCRRA for review and Approval. The Plans shall include all details of
equipment installation, wiring, cabling, equipment interconnection, and
rack mounting of equipment, materials list, and cut sheets of the equipment
to be installed. Upon review, SCRRA may Approve, Conditionally Approve,
or may Disapprove the Plans. If Conditionally Approved or Disapproved,
the Contractor shall correct the deficiencies within a reasonable time and
shall submit the Plans to SCRRA for final Approval.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 00 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 00 00 Summary of Customer Information System (CIS) Work
2. Upon Approval of final Shop Drawings the Contractor shall seek Approval
from SCRRA for equipment procurement in writing. The SCRRA may
request different equipment or Approved equal from those listed in the
materials list prior to ordering the equipment. Upon Approval from the
SCRRA, for equipment procurement the Contractor shall develop final
Shop Drawings which shall include but shall not be limited to wiring
diagrams, equipment assembly and installation, cable routing, and all
equipment interfaces including rack layout. The Contractor shall submit
these Plans to SCRRA for review and Approval prior to installing any
equipment. All comments by SCRRA on the previous revisions and the
preliminary Plans shall be resolved in the final shop drawings. Upon review,
SCRRA may Approve, Conditionally Approve, or Disapprove the Plans. If
Conditionally Approved or Disapproved, the Contractor shall correct any
deficiencies until the Plans are Approved. Only after Approval of Plans and
Approval from SCRRA to procure equipment the Contractor shall proceed
to procure the necessary equipment. The Contractor shall seek Approval
from SCRRA to install the indicated equipment. Upon completion of
installation the Contractor shall seek Approval from SCRRA to test all
equipment specified in this SOW. Installation shall comply with these
Standard Specifications, associated Standard Plans, and Standard
Materials List. The Contractor shall also comply with all other SCRRA
documents such as site-specific Station CIS Installation Design, Design
Criteria, Communications and Signaling Design, and other Standard Plans.
The Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor for this Work with no
additional cost to SCRRA. At any stage, if the Plans, installations, or test
process or test results are disapproved by SCRRA, the Contractor shall
correct all deficiencies within reasonable time at no additional cost to
SCRRA and if necessary re-install the equipment. If necessary, the
Contractor shall re-test the equipment. These activities shall be completed
with no additional cost to SCRRA
3. CIS shall include, but not limited to: ethernet switch, rack mounted media
converters, rack mounted fiber patch panel, amplifier(s), audio decoder,
priority controller, Emergency Management Panel (EMP), LED message
signs, strobe lights, cables, and connectors. 42-inch LCD monitor(s) with
an embedded Network Media Player (NMP) shall be also installed in
area(s) indicated on the Plans to display train schedule.
4. As indicated in this document and the Plans, the Contractor shall use the
existing cables where appropriate or pull additional cables as required,
remove existing equipment as indicated herein and install the new
equipment. If the Contractor proposes any change including but not limited
to change in equipment; installing additional equipment; adding conduits,
pull boxes, junction boxes, the Contractor shall submit a change request in
writing to SCRRA. The change request shall include the following as a
minimum:
a. Base arrangement or configuration
b. Details of proposed change and reason for change request
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 00 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 00 00 Summary of Customer Information System (CIS) Work
c. Impact of change on other equipment and/or systems
d. Impact of change on architecture or structure
e. Other impacts due to the change
D. The Contractor shall not proceed with any changes without written Approval by
SCRRA.
1. LCD monitor(s) shall be installed either on stand-alone posts or on existing
structures. For installing the LCD monitor(s) on stand-alone post(s), the
Contractor shall prepare site including required conduit stubups, pour
concrete and install posts as specified here and shown in the Plans. The
LCD monitor(s) shall be mounted either on the post(s) or on the canopy
structure.
2. Upon completion of installation and testing, the Contractor shall provide
SCRRA five (5) sets of as-built Plans in hard copies and three (3) sets of
electronic copies on Compact Discs (CDs). The as-built Plans shall reflect
the actual conditions of equipment installations in the field. If the supplied
set of Plans does not show all the equipment and/or the necessary
configurations, SCRRA may request additional as-built Plans from the
Contractor.
E. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Material and Methods
2. Section 26 05 43 – Electric: Exterior Underground
3. Section 26 06 00 – Grounding and Bonding
4. Section 26 12 00 – Conductors and Cables – Low Voltage
5. Section 26 13 00 – Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
6. Section 29 00 20 – Standards, Abbreviations, and Definitions (CIS)
7. Section 29 10 60 – Power Distribution Testing and Commissioning
8. Section 29 20 20 - Communications Services
9. Section 29 20 60 - System Testing And Commissioning
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 00 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 00 00 Summary of Customer Information System (CIS) Work
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. SCRRA will provide a Materials List of equipment to the Contractor for major CIS
equipment. Based on the Materials List the Contractor shall procure equipment in
quantities identified. The Materials List may vary from station to station. The
Contractor shall furnish, install, and test all miscellaneous material that is required
for a complete and functional system.
2.02 SCHEDULE
A. As part of this Contract, the Contractor shall submit a schedule to SCRRA for
review and Approval. This schedule shall include details including developing
Plans, procurement of equipment, site preparation, installation, and testing. The
Contractor shall update this schedule every two weeks and shall submit it to
SCRRA for review and Approval. The schedule shall be in bar chart or Gantt chart
format and shall also show planned activities for next two weeks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Upon Authorization, the Contractor shall install all equipment per requirements in
this Specifications and Plans and per the Contractor developed Plans. The
Contractor shall seamlessly interface the new equipment with the existing
equipment to deliver a fully functional system.
B. Removal of the existing equipment as specified in the CIS related contract
documents is included in this work.
C. Upon completing the installation, the Contractor shall test all equipment and verify
that the equipment functions as intended.
D. All equipment and installations shall meet the Los Angeles region zone 4
earthquake requirements.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Customer Information System (CIS) will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 00 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 00 00 Summary of Customer Information System (CIS) Work
B. Constructing pads, supports, foundations, conduits, replacement and installation
of Speaker Cables, replacement and installation of Ambient Noise Sensor/2 Wire
Handset/Microphone Cables, replacement and installation of Audio Cables,
replacement and installation of HDMI Cables, replacement and installation of fiber
optic cables, and replacement and installation of conduits and wiring for power are
considered incidental to work under other payment items and no separate
measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
C. All materials, work and services included in Sections 29 00 20, Standards,
Abbreviations and Definitions (CIS); 29 10 60, Power Distribution Testing and
Commissioning; and 29 20 60, System Testing and Commissioning will be
included in this Section and are considered incidental to work under this Section
and will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
D. All material, work, and services for Conductors and Cables for communications
system is considered incidental to work associated with project item in Section 26
12 00, Conductors and Cables – Low Voltage and no separate measurement and
payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
E. All material, work, and services for Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes for
communications system is considered incidental to work associated with project
item in Section 26 13 00, Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes and no separate
measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Customer Information System (CIS) furnished and completed in accordance with
the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 29 00 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 00 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 29 00 20
STANDARDS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND DEFINITIONS FOR CUSTOMER INFORMATION
SYSTEM (CIS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section defines the standards, abbreviations, and definitions used throughout
these CIS specifications.
B. The Contractor shall use the most current versions of standards, codes,
regulations at the time of contract award. The Contractor shall comply with all
applicable standards, codes, and regulatory requirements even if those standards,
codes, and regulations are not specifically identified herein.
1.02 REFERENCES
Agency Standard Description
ASTM A53 Standard Specifications for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped,
ASTM
Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless
CIS Customer information system
DOT Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Requirements
EIA-232 Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-
EIA
Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange
EIA EIA-310 Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
EIA-485 Standard for Electrical Characteristics of Generators and
EIA
Receivers for Use in Balanced Digital Multipoint Systems
EIA/TIA-530-A High Speed 25-Position Interface for Data Terminal
EIA Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment, Including Alternative
26-Position Connector
EIA/TIA EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Buildings Telecommunications Wiring Standard
EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
EIA/TIA
Pathways and Spaces
EIA/TIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
EIA/TIA
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
EIA/TIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements
EIA/TIA
for Telecommunications
FCC FCC Class A Part 15 Emissions Requirements
IEEE 42 Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power
IEEE
Systems (IEEE Green Book)
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 00 20 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 00 20 Standards, Abbreviations, and Definitions for CIS
Agency Standard Description
IEEE 1100 Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding
IEEE
Sensitive Electronic Equipment (IEEE Emrald Book)
NEMA AB1 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and
NEMA
Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
NEMA NEMA ICS6 Industrial Controls and Systems Enclosures
NEMA NEMA TC2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit
NEMA NEMA TC3 PVC Fittings for use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
NEMA NEMA VE1 Metallic Cable Tray Systems
NEMA NEMA WC-70 Non Shielded Power Cable 2000V or less
NEMA NEMA WD1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices
NFPA NFPA-70 National Electrical Code
NFPA 75-Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data
NFPA
Processing Equipment
NFPA NFPA-258 Test for Determining Smoke Generation of Solid Materials
NTCIP NTCIP-1203 Object Definitions for Dynamic Message Signs
NTCIP NTCIP-2201 Transportation Transport Profile
UL UL 6 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel
UL UL 13 Power Limited Circuit Cables
UL UL 48 Electric Signs
UL UL 96 Lighting Protection Components
UL UL 360 Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduits
UL UL 444 Communications Cables
UL UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL UL 497 Protectors for Paired Conductor Communications Circuits
UL UL 497A Secondary Protectors for Communications Circuits
UL UL 514 Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
UL 1433 Standard for Control Centers for Changing Message Type
UL
Electric Signs
UL UL 1449 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
UL UL 1581 Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 00 20 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 00 20 Standards, Abbreviations, and Definitions for CIS
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation Description
A Amperes
AC Alternating Current
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
A-D/D-A Analog to Digital/Digital to Analog
ANS Ambient Noise Sensor
BNC Bayonet Neill-Concelman
BTU British Thermal Units
C&S Communications and Signaling
CMS Changeable Message Sign
CIS Customer Information System
CVBS Composite Video Baseband Signal
EMP Emergency Management Panel
FO Fiber Optic
FOPP Fiber Optic Patch Panel
GRS Galvanized Rigid Steel
Hz Hertz
HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface
IC Interface Converter
I/O Input/Output
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
MC Media Converter
MCI Building SCRRA Headquarters in Downtown Los Angeles
MOC Metrolink Operations Center
MPLS Multi Protocol Label Switching
NMP Network Media Player
NTCIP National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol
PA Public Address
PC Personal Computer
PIP Picture-in-Picture
SCRRA Southern California Regional Rail Authority
SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 00 20 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 00 20 Standards, Abbreviations, and Definitions for CIS
Abbreviation Description
SOW Statement Of Work
TCIP Transit Communications Interface Profile
TFT Thin Film Transistor
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
UL Underwriters Laboratories
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
USB Universal Serial Bus
V Volts
VGA Video Graphics Array
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USE)
Not applicable to this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USE)
Not applicable to this Section.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 29 00 20
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 00 20 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 29 10 60
POWER DISTRIBUTION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section identifies the requirements for testing and commissioning the power
distribution to all the installed equipment. Power to the following equipment shall
be tested for both existing and new stations:
1. Ethernet switch
2. Amplifiers
3. Ambient Noise Sensor (ANS) and priority controller
4. Audio Decoder
5. Interface converters
6. Media converters
7. Network Media Player (NMP)
8. LCD monitor(s)
9. LED message signs and strobe light
10. Transient voltage suppressor system
11. UPS and UPS batteries
B. Related Specification Section but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 26 06 00 – Grounding and Bonding
2. Section 26 12 00 – Conductors and Cables – Low Voltage
3. Section 26 13 00 – Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
4. Section 29 00 00 - Summary of Work CIS Work
5. Section 29 00 20 - Standards, Abbreviations, and Definitions for CIS
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 10 60 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 10 60 Power Distribution Testing and Commissioning
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Applicable to this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 POWER DISTRIBUTION TESTING
A. The Contractor shall develop a test procedure and shall submit it for SCRRA’s
review and Approval. SCRRA may Approve, Conditionally Approve, or Disapprove
the procedure and shall provide appropriate comments. If Conditionally Approved,
the Contractor shall correct the deficiencies prior to testing at no additional cost to
SCRRA. If Disapproved the Contractor shall correct the deficiencies and resubmit
the procedure to SCRRA for Approval at no additional cost to SCRRA. The
procedure shall include the following as a minimum:
1. Test objective.
2. List of equipment required to setup and conduct the test and calibration
dates, calibration due dates. With proof of certifications.
3. Support needed from SCRRA for site access and access to SCRRA’s
locked communications shelters and cabinets.
4. Step-by-step description of the equipment setup, and step-by-step
instructions for conducting testing.
5. Provisions for recording test results and test data forms to record test
results.
B. The Contractor shall obtain Approval for testing and shall test all enclosures,
conduits, raceways, exposed expansion joints, for continuity to the ground. The
test results shall be submitted to SCRRA for review and Approval.
C. The Contractor shall obtain Approval for testing, test, and record ground resistance
of all grounded equipment and shall ensure that they are adequately grounded.
The test results shall be submitted to SCRRA for review and Approval.
D. The Contractor shall obtain Approval for testing, test and verify insulation
resistance. The test results shall be submitted to SCRRA for review and Approval.
E. The Contractor shall give at least two weeks notice to SCRRA prior to the testing
date. SCRRA at its discretion may witness any tests or may not witness the tests.
The test results shall be signed by the person or persons conducting the test,
engineering manager, and quality control staff of the Contractor. The Contractor
shall submit four (4) copies and an original of the test results to the SCRRA for
review and Approval.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 10 60 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 10 60 Power Distribution Testing and Commissioning
F. If any of the above tests fail and results are Disapproved by SCRRA, the
Contractor, at no additional expense to SCRRA shall re-test the equipment,
assembly, enclosures, conduits, raceways, expansion joints, and any other
elements as necessary. The Contractor shall ensure that the cause of test failures
is corrected in a reasonable time and that all tests pass.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 29 10 60
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 10 60 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 29 20 20
COMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CUSTOMER INFORMATION SYSTEM
A. This section describes the general requirements for the CIS equipment
procurement and installation. The CIS to be installed in stations shall consist of
the following major equipment:
1. Ethernet Switch.
2. Public address including speakers, ambient noise sensor, priority
controller, amplifier(s), emergency management panel(s), and audio
decoder.
3. Media converter(s).
4. LED message signs with strobe lights.
5. LCD Monitor(s) with NMP, enclosure(s) and accessories.
6. Power supplies.
7. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), Batteries, with transient voltage
suppression.
8. Miscellaneous equipment such as mounting poles, brackets, enclosures,
and sign sunshields.
9. Fiber optic patch panels, cables, and connectors.
10. Audio cables and connectors.
11. Power cables and connectors
B. Functional Requirements are described below:
1. Fiber optic cables shall be routed from the Communications Shelter based
Ethernet Switch to the message signs via the FOPPs as shown in the
contract plans. Fiber strands shall be dropped at each message sign in a
drop-and-continue topology as shown in contract documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
2. The LCD monitors shall be installed as shown in contract plans. The LCD
monitors shall be installed at a location convenient for passengers to view
train schedules and it may be mounted on a stand-alone post or may be
mounted on a structure such as a canopy. The Contractor shall submit the
shop plans showing the installation and mounting detail for each LCD
Monitor for Engineer’s approval.
3. The Contractor shall procure equipment as indicated in the materials list in
the plans and the tables below. Equipment shall include, Ethernet
Switches, amplifiers, NMP, media and interface converters, LCD
monitor(s), LED message signs, EMP(s), strobe lights, ambient noise
sensing controllers, audio decoder, fiber optic patch panels, UPS, transient
voltage suppressor, power supplies, and other related equipment as stated
in these specifications and shown in the contract plans. The Contractor
shall install all the equipment for CIS within the Communications Shelter
and station platform locations and interface the equipment per
requirements in these specifications and plans.
4. The stations shall interface with the SCRRA’s Network with MPLS Router
installed in the station communications shelter/Room.
5. The SCRRA will provide all CIS related software interface between the
SCRRA and Amtrak at the DOC/MOC. The Contractor shall coordinate
with the SCRRA to ensure that proper messages are displayed on the LED
message signs, LCD monitors, and PA system for Amtrak and SCRRA
trains at each station.
C. Related Specifications include but are not limited to:
1. Section 26 06 00 – Grounding and Bonding
2. Section 26 12 00 – Conductors and Cables – Low Voltage
3. Section 26 13 00 – Conduits, Raceways, and Boxes
4. Section 29 00 00 – Summary of Work CIS Work.
5. Section 29 00 20 - Standards, Abbreviations, and Definitions for CIS
6. Section 29 20 60 - System Testing And Commissioning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall provide the Equipment/Product or approved equivalent for
each listed item in Table 1 - Materials List:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
Table 1 - Material List
Item Description Manufacturer Model
No.
1. Ethernet Switch Cisco SRW2048
2. Audio Amplifier Crown CTs 4200
3. Priority Controller BSS Audio BLU-16
4. 42” Commercial LCD Viewsonic CD4220
Display
5. Network Media Player Viewsonic NMP-530, VS11681
6. Strobe Light Federal Signal 131DST
7. Audio Decoder MDOUK Audio TX STL-IP-1
8. Environmental Distribution Corning EDC-02P-NH
Center
9. LED Message Display Daktronics Signs AF-6300, See Section 3.02
10. EMP AT&T PI 305
11. Rack Mount Connector Corning PCH-04U
Housing
12. Transient Voltage Eaton Innovative PT Series
Suppression Technology
13. UPS Eaton Innovative 9130
Technology
14. Closet Connector Housing – Corning CCH-CP-12-G7
Pigtail Modules
15. Splice Trays Corning M67-048
16. Bracket Inside Connector Corning PC4-SPLC-12SR
Housing
16. LCD Enclosure (Including ITS Enclosures Various, See Section 3.05
42” monitor enclosure,
insulation, enclosure post,
brackets, mounts, T20
2000 BTU Air
Conditioner/Heater),
Stainless Steel mounting
post and brackets
17. Speakers University Sound PA430T
18. Modular Media Converter Opterna 12000C
19. Speaker Cable Belden 1311 A
20. Ambient Noise Sensor/2 Belden 1776
Wire Handset/Microphone
Cable
21. Audio Cable Belden 6300FE
22. HDMI Cable Belden HD2003
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
B. The materials list only describes the major equipment. The Contractor shall
procure brackets for mounting LED message signs, brackets and posts for
mounting LCD monitor, wires, cables, connectors and heat shrink fusion splice
protector. If the Contractor chooses to propose equipment other than that identified
above, the Contractor shall submit all cut sheets, data sheets, reports, and other
necessary documentation to SCRRA for review and seek Approval for utilizing the
equipment. Based on the review of documents and discussion with the Contractor,
SCRRA may or may not approve such request. SCRRA shall have the right to
request Approved equivalent of any and all the equipment prior to ordering the
equipment.
C. Cables and Connectors:
1. Category 6 cable and patch cords procured by the Contractor, shall have
attenuation of less than or equivalent to 23.6 dB at 100 MHz; and 39.1 dB
at 250 MHz.
a. The conductors shall be 24 AWG gauge.
b. Impedance shall be 100 ohms, + or – 15 ohms at 100 MHz, 100
ohms, + or – 22 ohms at 100-550 MHz.
c. Maximum mutual capacitance shall be 56 pF/m.
d. Near End Cross Talk (NEXT) shall be 45 dB at 100 MHz and 39 dB
at 250 MHz.
e. The cable shall comply with requirements of TIA/EIA 568 for
Category 6 cables.
f. Maximum length of the Cat 6 cable shall be 328 feet including all
patch and cross-connect cables.
g. The Connector used shall be RJ 45.
2. The fiber optic cable and fiber optic patch cords shall be multimode 850 nm
(minimum OM2), supplied by Corning Cable Systems or Approved
equivalent and shall meet or exceed the following minimum Specifications:
a. Each optical fiber shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections
and inclusions to meet the optical and mechanical requirements of
the Work identified herein and environmental conditions
encountered in Greater Los Angeles region.
b. Each optical fiber shall consist of a germania-doped silica core
surrounded by a concentric glass cladding. The fiber shall be
matched clad design.
c. Each optical fiber shall be proof tested by the manufacturer at a
minimum of 100 KPSI.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
1) Attenuation shall be ≤ 3.4 dB/Km.
2) Point discontinuity shall be ≤ 0.2 dB.
3) Effective modal bandwidth shall be ≥ 220 MHz-Km.
4) Cladding diameter shall be 125.0 + or – 2.0 µm with a core
diameter of 62.5 + or – 3.0 µm, and the coating diameter of
245 + or – 5 µm.
d. All multimode fiber optic patch cords and connectors shall be
colored orange. SC type connectors shall be used for all fiber optic
cable connections. In addition, the Contractor shall also procure all
miscellaneous equipment needed to ensure that the system is
complete and functions as intended.
3. The Contractor shall get an approval from the Engineer if the conductor
size of the speakers/microphone/2 wire handset/audio cable (s) needs to
be changed due to distance, current, or voltage limitation. The Audio
Connector shall be selected such that they are compatible to the
Equipment port they are connected to.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
A. This section describes the detailed requirements for the PA System. The speakers’
cable continuity test shall be based on audio announcement tests from the DOC,
MOC, and Gateway Building, and the EMP conducted by the Contractor with
AUTHORITY and SCRRA’s oversight. The following describe the requirements for
PA part of the CIS.
1. The PA system shall include two amplifiers and shall be connected as
shown in contract plans. An alternative design may be proposed for
Engineer’s approval by the contractor where one amplifier shall function as
primary and the second shall be hot standby. The stations shall also include
audio decoder, priority controller, interface and media converters, power
supplies, connectors, wires, and cables.
2. The Contractor shall seamlessly interface the PA system equipment with
power in Communications Shelter/Room and speakers to deliver a fully
functional PA system. The PA system shall be capable of providing routine
and special announcements at specific stations, groups of stations, or
systemwide. All announcements shall be generated either live locally from
the EMP, DOC, MOC, Gateway building, or via pre-recorded messages
stored, activated, and transmitted from the DOC/MOC.
3. The Communications Shelter/Room shall house the PA system as
specified in Contract Documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
4. An acoustical modeling and test measurements shall be performed to verify
conformance of the PA system design as indicated in ANSI S3.2 for
intelligibility of speech and voice announcement requirements for a
minimum Articulation Index of 0.80.
5. The Modeling shall include recommended locations and number of
additional speakers necessary for a PA system to achieve an average of
80 dBA plus or minus 3 Db at 5 feet above floor levels in accordance with
ANSI S1.8 and S1.13. The background ambient noise level of 60 dBA shall
be used to calculate the nominal sound pressure level in accordance with
S1.13.
6. The Contractor shall interface the ambient noise sensor at each platform
with the priority controller. The contractor shall terminate the existing
ambient noise sensor and handset to the priority controller in the
communication shelter/room as shown on the contract plans. The amplifier
and associated electronics shall adjust the PA output based on the ambient
noise levels. If the ambient noise levels exceed acceptable levels the
System shall delay non-EMP originated announcements until the ambient
noise subsides to acceptable levels.
7. As a minimum, the amplifier shall meet the following requirements:
a. All active components shall be solid state devices.
b. Overall frequency response shall be 20 Hz to 20 KHz at 1 Watt.
c. The THD shall not be greater than 0.1% at maximum average
power.
d. Signal to noise ratio below the rated power shall be 100 dB
unweighted.
e. Amplifier shall be equipped with protection from shorted, open and
mismatched loads, overheating, high frequency overloads,
under/over voltage protection, and internal faults.
f. The amplifier shall detect and isolate channel specific faults. Fault
or failure in one channel shall not affect other channels.
g. Ability to select either 4 Ohms or 8 Ohms per channel, dual 70V.
h. Indicators on the front panel for ON/OFF, failures/faults, and AC
power available.
i. Durable industrial or transit use with forced air ventilation from the
front to the side panels.
j. Standard 19 inch EIA rack mounting ability weighing less than 30
LBS.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
8. Half the speakers on each platform shall be part of a loop known as a zone
1 and remainder of the speakers shall be on the second loop also known
as zone 2 as shown in contract plans. Each platform shall be equipped with
two (2) zones. In case of failure in one loop, the other loop shall function
without interruption. Dual platform stations shall be equipped with four
zones. Triple platform stations shall be equipped with six zones. These
shall be connected to separate outputs from the amplifier(s) and each
alternate speaker shall be connected to one loop. Failure in one loop shall
not cause failure in the other loops.
9. All equipment shall be able to withstand the weather conditions normally
encountered in San Bernardino region. All enclosures shall be water
resistant and shall comply with NEMA 4X requirements. All equipment
installed within the Communications Shelter/Room shall be mounted on
standard equipment racks with standard EIA mounting positions. All
equipment and installations shall meet the San Bernardino region zone 4
and other earthquake requirements.
10. The PA part of the CIS System shall be equipped with priority control. The
System shall be able to detect the input source and shall be able to assign
priority to each input as shown below.
Priority
Input
Level
First From the EMP
From Microphone in AUTHORITY Security
Second
Room
Third From DOC, MOC, and Gateway
Fourth Pre-recorded announcements
11. If a higher level priority message is in progress, and a lower priority level
message attempts to make an announcement, the system shall permit the
high level priority message and shall hold the lower level priority message.
After the completion of the higher level priority message the lower level
priority message shall be permitted to play automatically. If a lower level
priority message is in progress and a message with higher level priority is
transmitted, the lower level priority message shall be interrupted and the
message with the higher priority shall be broadcasted.
3.02 LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) MESSAGE SIGNS
A. The Contractor shall procure and install LED message signs and associated
equipment as part of the CIS per requirements in these specifications and Contract
plans. The equipment shall include signs and associated electronics, enclosures,
strobe lights, patch panels, wires, cables, connectors, media/interface converters,
and interfaces with the Communications Shelter/Room. The following describe
requirements for the LED message signs.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
1. The LED message signs shall be able to display messages transmitted
from the MCI building (SCRRA headquarters) in downtown Los Angeles
and the DOC/MOC. All signs shall be single-faced.
B. The Contractor shall install the LED message signs at their original locations and
shall interface them as shown in the contract plans, per LED message sign
manufacturer’s installation guidelines, and per requirements in the specifications.
The LED message signs shall be protected by a 120 VAC, 1P, 20 A circuit breaker.
1. The LED message signs shall be individually IP addressable with fiber optic
interface as shown in the plans and required by Specifications.
2. The LED message signs including the enclosure shall have following
characteristics:
a. Not more than seventeen (17) IN high x fifty five (55) inch wide x
eleven (11) inch deep.
b. The character height shall comply with all ADA requirements.
c. All LEDs shall be amber colored.
d. Character height shall not be less than three (3) inch and shall have
the ability to display a minimum of four (4) font styles.
e. Display width shall not be less than forty (40) inch.
f. The LED message signs shall be capable of displaying at least two
rows of three (3) inch characters each simultaneously, or one row
of at least four (4) inch characters, or one row of at least six (6) inch
characters.
g. The enclosures shall be either powder coated black or dark brown
and shall be compliant with NEMA 4X requirements.
3. The LED message signs shall be equipped with automatic brightness
control. Based on ambient light level the LED brightness shall automatically
adjust. All LEDs shall have the same light output intensity. The LEDs shall
not fluctuate during variable light conditions. A tinted lens shall reduce the
glare and improve readability under bright sunlight conditions.
4. The signs and their installation shall comply with Section 49 CFR parts 27,
37, and 38; California Building Code, Section 414, and shall comply with
all local jurisdictions.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that all the signs shall be able to accept the
data in XML format and display the messages correctly as intended.
6. The Contractor shall coordinate closely with SCRRA’s staff for proper
message format, letter heights, fonts, message display methods and other
characteristics.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
7. Each LED message sign shall have capability to store at least sixty (60)
messages. The signs shall be able to flash, scroll, and roll messages.
Service life of the LEDs shall not be less than 100,000 hours.
8. The viewing angles shall be minimum seventy (70) degrees horizontally
and thirty (30) degrees vertically. Upon installation of the LED message
signs the Contractor shall demonstrate that these angles are met. The LED
message sign shall have a minimum six (6) dimming levels. The Contractor
shall provide a Shop Drawing for LED Message Sign mounting detail for
Engineer’s approval.
9. The LED message sign lens shall be at least 1/8 IN shatterproof, UV coated
polycarbonate with structural aluminum and the enclosures shall be vandal
resistant and tamper-proof.
10. The message sign with the enclosure shall be mounted with the mounting
bracket as shown in the contract plans. Mounting bracket shall be powder
coated to match the sign.
11. The total weight of the LED message sign including the media/interface
converters, enclosures, mounting hardware, sunshield, strobe, and all
associated assembly and equipment shall not be more than 70 LBS.
12. LED message signs shall be hinged at the top of the enclosure to provide
front access for easy maintenance. It shall not be necessary to remove the
sign from the mounted position for either resetting the processor within the
sign and to maintain it.
13. LED message signs shall be equipped with high security tamper proof
fasteners and screws.
14. The contractor shall provide mounting hardware and sunshield of
appropriate size as shown on the plans. Mounting hardware shall include
sign mounting bracket, sunshield supports, mounting plates, bolts and all
necessary hardware for securing the sign.
15. The signs shall be mounted at a height of twelve (12) FT nominal from the
top of the platform to the bottom of the sign enclosure. Deviations from this
mounting height, based on site specific conditions shall be requested in
writing by the Contractor. The mounting height specified herein shall
remain unless a deviation is approved by SCRRA. The signs shall be
clearly visible and shall not be obstructed by structures or other objects on
the stations.
16. All installations shall meet all the requirements of Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
3.03 STROBE LIGHTS
A. The Contractor shall procure and supply strobe lights with double flash strobe, with
a flash rate of 80 flashes/minute. The strobe shall be powered by 120 VAC, 60
Hz. and shall be equipped with clear dome.
1. The strobes shall be less than nine (9) inch high and less than six (6) inch
in diameter. The strobes shall contain their own strobe power supply in the
base of the light.
2. The strobe flash tube is mounted in an eight (8) pin octal socket base. The
tube shall be able to withstand the weather typically encountered in Los
Angeles region.
3. Strobes shall be UL and listed and CSA certified.
4. The Strobe light shall have a minimum life of at least 10,000 hours. The
total weight shall not exceed 3.4 lbs.
5. The Strobe lights shall be interfaced with the LED sign enclosure and shall
function as one single unit. All interfaces to the Strobe light shall be
included within the LED message sign enclosure.
a. The Contract Documents provide the general location of the strobe
light on top of the LED message sign. The Contractor may have to
mount the strobe light either on the center or on the side based on
the visibility. The Contractor shall submit the strobe light mounting
details for Engineer’s approval making sure that the strobe lights
are clearly visible to the passengers on the platform.
b. The Strobe lights shall be activated upon transmission of
emergency messages to the LED message signs. Upon receiving
an emergency message, the Strobe light shall begin to flash.
3.04 LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) MONITOR
A. The Contractor shall install LCD monitors at each station, near the TVMs, on its
own stand alone stainless steel post or on steel columns inside canopy. The
Contractor shall develop and submit the installation and mounting detail for each
LCD monitor for Engineer’s approval.
B. One 1 IN conduit shall be installed as shown in the plans from the nearest
communications pullbox to the LCD to transmit signals.
C. The Contractor shall follow the power conduit requirements for the LCD Monitors
as indicated in these contract documents.
D. The LCD monitor shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X compliant enclosure and shall
have the screen visible through a, vandal-resistant, laminated glass. The enclosure
shall be able to house a MC and a NMP which shall be interfaced with the LCD
monitor with HDMI cable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
E. The LCD monitor shall interface with the MPLS switch via 850 nm multimode
(minimum OM2) fiber optic cable as shown in the plans.
F. The LCD monitor, the NMP, MC, and the enclosure shall comply with the following
requirements:
1. The LCD shall be Viewsonic, forty-two (42) inch commercial display, model
CD4220 or approved equivalent. TFT active matrix display with minimum
display area of 36.6 inch horizontal x 20.6 inch vertical. Minimum resolution
shall be 1366 x 768 pixels. The contrast ratio shall be 1500:1 typical.
2. The monitor shall support all viewing angles from 178 degrees horizontal
to 178 degrees vertical. The light source shall have typical life of 50,000
HRS. The aspect ratio shall be 16:9 and the panel shall be coated with
anti-glare coating.
3. The monitor shall accept HDMI, S-video, component, composite, and RCA
type video inputs. The video outputs shall permit images to be displayed
in VGA, BNC, and RCA formats.
4. The monitor shall be equipped with RS-232 input and output.
5. The monitor shall be able to display high-definition video in 480i, 480p,
720p, and 1080i formats.
6. The monitor shall be equipped with two (2) 10-Watt speakers, an analog
15-pin mini D-sub (VGA), digital HDMI.
7. The monitor shall function on standard 120 VAC, 60 Hz and shall consume
less than 250 Watts, typical.
8. The monitor shall be equipped with the following controls: Power (On/Off),
mute, input, volume control, channel up/down, brightness, contrast,
sharpness, black level, noise reduction, and tint, color, color temperature,
and color control. The monitor shall have PIP capability.
9. The monitor shall operate in environments typically encountered in Los
Angeles region. The dimensions shall not be more than 40.2 x 24.1 x 5.0
inch. The gross weight shall not exceed 76.5 lbs. Monitor shall comply
with UL, FCC, UCIEE, ICES 003.
10. The LCD monitor shall be mounted at a height of 8 feet, to the bottom of
LCD enclosure with 20 degrees tilt to the monitor for clear visibility. The
mounting shall avoid glare and reflected light. The final mounting and angle
may differ for each station.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
3.05 LCD MONITOR ENCLOSURE
A. As part of this Contract, the Contractor shall supply an enclosure for the LCD
monitor from ITS Enclosures which includes 42 inch universal view station, arm
support assembly, 4 inch drop pipe, T20 outdoor 2000 BTU AC unit, T20
suspension assembly and interior support bracket:
1. 42 inch View Station:
a. Model Numbers: VS-U-42-NC-BL or VS-U-42-NC-SLV or
approved equivalent.
2. Arm Support Assembly:
a. Model number VS-X7004-00 or approved equivalent.
3. 4 inch Drop Pipe:
a. Part number VS-X7002-7-4 or approved equivalent.
4. T20 outdoor 2000 BTU air conditioner and heater.
a. Model number MC-T20-0216-G150 or Approved equivalent.
5. Suspension Assembly:
a. Part number VS-X7003-1 or approved equivalent.
6. Bracket:
a. Part numbers VS-PEE-201-0171-SLC, VS-T20-WALLMOUNT-SS
or Approved equivalents.
7. Tilt assembly and stainless steel post assembly:
a. Part number VS-POST-SS or Approved equivalent.
8. This list includes only major items. The Contractor shall include all
brackets, assemblies, and additional equipment required to complete the
installation as required either for a post or wall mount installation.
9. At Contractor shall submit the shop plans for Engineer’s approval showing
the installation type at each location based on the best visibility and
available means and methods for installation.
10. The enclosure shall also be able to house the NMP and the media
converter with sufficient room for power strip.
11. The enclosure shall be aluminum body, with painted finish and shall be
water resistant. It shall be equipped with anti-reflective tamper-resistant,
laminated glass window with anti-reflective coating on the glass.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
12. The enclosure shall be industrial quality for outdoor LCD installations. It
shall be equipped with locks, 3 or 4 tubular keyed compression latches
located in the rear of the enclosure. The struts, latches, or other
mechanism associated with the enclosure shall not interfere with opening
and closing of the enclosure.
13. The enclosure shall be equipped with a 6-outlet 115VAC, 15 amp power
strip. The front cover shall be easily opened for maintenance and
replacement using gas struts.
14. The enclosure shall also be equipped with slip hinges for cover removal.
The enclosure shall be equipped with a built-in air conditioner and heater
of sufficient capacity to maintain the LCD monitor, up to two NMPs, and up
to two media converters.
15. The enclosure shall meet all the temperature requirements per SCRRA’s
Design Criteria.
B. The display size of the enclosure shall allow space for air circulation near the front
window.
C. The enclosure shall be able to accommodate monitors of dimensions 49.5 x 27 x
5.5 inch.
D. The enclosure shall not weigh more than 210 lbs. including the air conditioner and
heater unit.
E. The enclosure shall be installed to face either North or South direction whenever
possible to avoid direct sunlight.
3.06 NETWORK MEDIA PLAYER (NMP)
A. This NMP shall be installed within the LCD monitor enclosure. The NMP shall be
interfaced with the monitor as shown in the Plans. The NMP shall meet or exceed
the requirements identified below.
1. The NMP shall be able to interface with a PC with any Windows or Linux
operating system capable of running a web server with a 100 Base-Tx
interface. The NMP shall be network ready and shall include integrated
web browser with Flash plug-in, standalone Flash player, HD player.
2. The NMP shall use IP and shall comply with MPEG4 formats and
Macromedia Flash platform. NMP shall also support the multicast and
unicast digital broadcast applications. The NMP shall be equipped with
multiple video outputs and shall be controllable remotely from a network or
internet connections.
3. The NMP shall be equipped with at least one USB port, at least one HDMI
interface, S-Video/YPbPr interface, CVBS interface, audio interfaces, at
least one RS232 port, at least one Ethernet 10/100 port, and shall function
on 5VDC power.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
4. The NMP shall manageable and controllable from any commercially
available browser via a network. The user shall be able to manage
operating mode, brightness, contrast, audio volume, and security remotely
over the network.
3.07 AMBIENT NOISE SENSOR (ANS) AND PRIORITY CONTROLLER
A. The ANS and priority controller shall be interfaced with the EMP as shown in the
Contract Plans.
B. The ANS and priority controller shall be a stand-alone unit with one rack space. It
shall be capable of providing full functional inputs and outputs with at least 16
analog inputs and outputs configurable by input cards and output cards, without
the need of on-line dedicated computer.
C. Combination of microphone and line inputs shall be provided together with channel
selectable 48 volt phantom power per input. The unit shall be equipped with a
tamper-resistant front panel with no user-adjustable controls. The front panel
LEDs shall provide the monitoring of communications presence, clip and network
status.
D. Analog to digital conversion shall be by 24-bit A-D/D-A converters to provide
maximum operating headroom and performance. The ANS and priority controller
shall be equipped to be interfaced with Ethernet and CobraNet. Interface shall be
over Category 6 cable with RJ-45 connector.
E. The ANS and priority controller shall be equipped to be interfaced with a
commercially available user supplied personal computer (not part of this Contract)
for system configuration. After configuration the computer may be disconnected
without loss of the system configuration. The user shall be able to recall the system
configuration at any time and shall be able to change them via vendor supplied
software.
F. An RS-232 port shall be provided to allow control of the ANS and priority controller.
The ANS and priority controller shall be supplied with software to aid in system
management. The software shall provide methods of event logging and
diagnostics. The event log shall include failures, warnings and information notices.
Each event shall be stamped with time and date.
3.08 MEDIA AND INTERFACE CONVERTERS
A. The media converter shall support 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-TX
for distances up to 2 Km and shall support SC type connectors. The Contractor
shall get Engineer’s approval if other Connector types such as LC, ST, or MTRJ
are proposed due to compatibility issue.
B. The media converter shall have the capability of hot-swappable converter cards. It
shall support half and full duplex transparently.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
3.09 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
A. The Contractor shall supply a UPS with surge protection and internal battery. Upon
power failure, the battery shall support the LED signs and CIS Equipment in
Communications Shelter/Room. If the internal battery is unable to support the
required time, then the Contractor shall supply external batteries to support the
equipment.
B. The battery shall support one third of the LED message signs on the station for
one (1) HR. Alternatively, the battery shall be able to support all the LED message
signs on the station for at least 20 minutes with all signs functioning. To meet UPS
and Battery requirements, the Contractor may choose to select a UPS and
transient voltage suppression system of a different make and model than those
identified in these Specifications. If the Contractor chooses to identify and install
a different UPS and transient voltage suppression system, the Contractor submit
all data sheets, cut sheets and other information for Engineer’s review and
Approval.
1. The surge protector shall be manufactured by Eaton Innovative
Technologies or Approved equivalent. It shall be equipped with surge path
technology for high fault current capacity, and shall be low impedance, high
frequency design.
2. The unit shall be adequately encapsulated and shall provide a high
dielectric and shall protect the unit from adverse environmental conditions.
The enclosure shall be rugged NEMA 4 compliant minimum.
3. The surge protector shall be equipped with Metal Oxide Varistors, dry Form
C contacts for remote status monitoring, LEDs to monitor each phase.
4. The unit shall comply with ANSI IEEE Cat A1, C3, B3/C1, and UL1449 (3rd
Edition) requirements.
5. The UPS shall be rated for the connected load plus a minimum of 25
percent spare capacity but not less than 2000 VA. It shall function on 120
VAC, 60 Hz and shall be rack mountable. It shall be equipped with two
individually controlled load segments, communications bay, and at least
one USB port. It shall include hot swappable batteries.
6. The UPS shall be equipped with graphical LCD with backlight and status
indicating LEDs. It shall be capable of self-test and indicate failures on the
LEDs.
7. It shall comply with UL, CUL, VCCI, FCC Class A, B requirements.
3.10 ETHERNET SWITCH
A. The Ethernet switch shall be equipped with 48, RJ-45 connectors for 10Base-T,
100Base-Tx, and 1000Base-T with four (4) shared Small Form-Factor Pluggable
(SFP) slots.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
B. The Contractor shall use UTP Category 6 cable for interfaces. The switching
capacity shall be 96 Gbps, nonblocking and shall have at least 256 Virtual Local
Area Networks (VLANs).
C. The Ethernet switch shall be equipped with Built-in web user interface for easy
browser-based configuration.
D. The Ethernet switch shall support port based, 802.1p VLAN priority based, Internet
Protocol (IP) to ToS/DSCP based, and IPv6 traffic-class-based class of services.
E. The Ethernet switch shall comply with all applicable Ethernet standards. It shall
function in the environment encountered in Los Angeles region.
3.11 SPEAKERS
A. Speakers frequency response shall be 400 to 6,500 Hz, + or – 5 dB.
B. Power handling capacity shall be 30 watts and impedance shall be 8 ohms
minimum.
C. Speakers shall be at least one (1) feet above the top of the LED message signs
and shall be installed as specified and as shown in contract documents.
3.12 EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PANEL (EMP)
A. The EMP contains ambient noise sensor and telephone set. The priority controller
shall interface with the ambient noise sensor and the telephone set within the
Emergency Management Panel (EMP). The Contractor shall submit the shop
plans showing the installation detail for a typical EMP for Engineer’s approval.
B. The PA system shall be able to adjust the speaker output level based on the noise
level sensed by the Ambient Noise Sensor located in the EMP.
C. The telephone set inside the EMP shall be interfaced such that the intelligible
paging can be done from the telephone set to the platform speakers.
3.13 AUDIO DECODER
A. The Audio Decoder also known as Voice Gateway shall provide live audio over the
IP network. The audio decoder shall convert live messages on IP network to
interface with the analog speakers.
B. The Audio Decoder shall provide one (1) 10/100BaseTnetwork port and one (1)
analog audio channel.
3.14 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPRESSOR
A. The voltage suppressor shall be able to perform the intended function in the
environment typically encountered in Los Angeles Area.
B. The suppressor shall have:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
1. Nominal discharge current of 20Ka.
2. Dry form C contacts for remote monitoring.
3. LED monitoring of each phase.
4. Monitoring of suppressor functions.
a. Audible and visual reporting of status.
b. Phase loss.
c. Transients.
C. The suppressor shall comply with applicable UL, ANSI, NEMA, and IEEE
requirements.
3.15 FOPP (RACK MOUNT)
A. The Contractor shall provide a fully functional rack mounted fiber optic patch panel
(FOPP) inside the Communications Shelter/Room including Connector housing,
brackets, connectors, and splice tray as specified and as shown in these Contract
Documents.
B. The contractor shall provide appropriate number of brackets, connector panels and
Splice trays as specified and as shown in these Contract Documents.
3.16 FOPP
A. The Contractor shall provide a fully functional fiber optic patch panel (FOPP) which
comes in form of an environmental distribution center and shall be capable of
mounted on the following:
1. Light Pole.
2. Wall.
3. Inside a Cabinet.
B. The fiber optic patch panel (FOPP) shall include environmental distribution center,
brackets, connectors, and splice tray as specified and as shown in these Contract
Documents.
C. The Contractor shall provide appropriate number of connector panels and Splice
trays as specified and as shown in these Contract Documents.
3.17 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Adequate space shall be provided for termination of cables and in the area
surrounding racks.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
B. All equipment shall be installed on standard 19 inch racks unless specified
otherwise.
C. Passive equipment such as patch panels shall be located on the top of the
equipment rack.
D. Active equipment such as routers shall be located at the lower section.
E. Equipment rack space shall be managed and the installation shall be neat and
clean.
F. Patch cables shall be arranged in a manner that will cause minimal disruption for
maintenance and modifications. All bends in the fiber patch cables, audio patch
cables, and CAT 6 patch cables shall abide by the manufacture specified minimum
bending radius. Use cable management equipment such as cable ties where
possible.
G. All copper cables shall use shielding, isolating, balancing, and grounding
techniques in compliance with SCRRA’s Design Criteria and Signaling and
Communications Standards to minimize EMI.
H. Adequate cable slack shall be provided to prevent taut cables.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Ethernet Switches, Audio Amplifiers, Priority Controllers, 42” Commercial LCD
Display, Network Media Player, Strobe Lights, Audio Decoder, Environmental
Distribution Center, LED Message Display, EMP, Rack Mount Connector Housing,
Transient Voltage Suppression, UPS, Closet Connector Housing-Pigtail Modules,
Splice Trays, Bracket Inside Connector Housing, LCD Enclosure, Speakers, and
Modular Media Convertor, will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by
the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans
will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Replacement of the LED message signs, strobe lights and PA equipment are
considered incidental to work under other payment items and no separate
measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 20 Communication Services
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Ethernet Switches, Audio Amplifiers, Priority Controllers, 42” Commercial LCD
Display, Network Media Player, Strobe Lights, Audio Decoder, Environmental
Distribution Center, LED Message Display, EMP, Rack Mount Connector Housing,
Transient Voltage Suppression, UPS, Closet Connector Housing-Pigtail Modules,
Splice Trays, Bracket Inside Connector Housing, LCD Enclosure, Speakers, and
Modular Media Convertor furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 29 20 20
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 20 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 29 20 60
SYSTEM TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work specified in this section includes testing and commissioning the CIS. The
Contractor shall provide staff and all necessary equipment for testing,
commissioning, and delivering a fully functional CIS.
B. Related Specifications include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 26 06 00 – Grounding and Bonding
2. 29 00 00 – Summary of CIS Work
3. Section 29 20 20 - Communications Services
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
Not Applicable to this Section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. SCRRA may choose to witness any or all the tests. The Contractor shall furnish a
written notice at least two (2) weeks in advance to SCRRA before the testing is
scheduled to begin. SCRRA at its discretion may witness some, all, or none of the
testing.
B. The Contractor shall develop a test procedure and shall submit it for SCRRA’s
review and Approval. The procedure shall include the following as a minimum:
1. Test objective.
2. List of equipment required to setup and conduct the test including
calibration dates and calibration due dates.
3. Equipment and site access support needed from SCRRA.
4. Step-by-step description of the equipment setup, and step-by-step
instructions for conducting testing.
5. Provisions for recording test results and test data form to record test
results.
6. Provisions for recording the manufacturer, model number, part number and
serial number for each equipment installed in each station area.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 60 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 29 20 60 System Testing and Commissioning
C. The test results shall be signed by the person(s) conducting the test, engineering
manager, and quality control staff of the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit
four (4) copies and one (1) original of the test results for SCRRA’s review and
Approval. Upon review the SCRRA may Approve, Conditionally Approve, or
Disapprove the test results. If Conditionally Approved or Disapproved, the
Contractor shall remove all deficiencies including but not limited to conducting
repairs, retesting, reinstalling, and rewiring at no additional costs to SCRRA within
a reasonable time. The Contractor shall ensure that after the deficiencies are
removed and corrective actions are taken AND the test(s) is/are repeated and that
they/it pass/passes.
D. As part of the testing process, the Contractor shall test the PA function, the LED
message sign function, LCD train arrival/departure function, and finally the
integrated CIS function.
1. After the equipment is installed in its entirety, the Contractor shall schedule
and conduct the PA function test. The testing shall include broadcasting
audio messages from MOC, EMP, and stored or canned messages. The
test shall verify the message priority and broadcast of audio from all
speakers on the platform.
2. The LED message sign function test shall include transmission of
messages from the MOC and verification that the signs display correct
messages. The test shall also verify that the strobe lights are activated
upon transmission of emergency messages.
3. The Contractor shall confirm that the LCD monitor displays web pages
correctly.
4. The Contractor shall ensure and confirm that all installations meet
SCRRA’s safety and security requirements.
E. As a result of failure during the test, or if the test does not complete successfully,
the Contractor shall take corrective action and shall retest at no additional cost to
SCRRA. The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to successfully complete
the tests and provide a fully functional CIS as specified herein.
F. All test results, equipment list, and documents become the property of SCRRA.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 29 20 60
SCRRA Standard Specifications 29 20 60 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 31 11 00
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Site clearing and grubbing of trees, stumps, undergrowth, brush, trash,
grass, weeds, roots, rubbish, refuse, or other debris, modifying irrigation
systems, stripping of topsoil and protecting trees within the limits of
excavation, embankment, borrow, and other areas as shown on the
Contract Plans or required to perform the Work of this Contract.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
2. Section 01 74 19 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal
3. Section 31 11 50 – Demolition, Cutting, and Patching
4. Section 32 91 00 – Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Topsoiling and Seeding
1.02 REFERNCES
A. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, SSPWC: Current Version
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00
requirements.
B. Site Clearing Plan:
1. A site clearing plan shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to
the Engineer for acceptance prior to commencing work. The site clearing
plan shall include:
a. Location and limits of clearing and grubbing.
b. Methods for protection of areas of vegetation designated as “no
construction zones” and trees noted in plans to be saved.
c. Methods to be employed and equipment to be used.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 00 Site Clearing
d. Safety measures including signs, barriers, temporary walkways and
hand railing.
e. Haul routes and disposal sites.
f. Permits for transport of materials off the worksite where applicable
and other permits as required by local agencies, project
environmental documents and the project Plans.
g. Schedule of site clearing activities including anticipated railroad
flagging needs.
C. Permits, Notices, Certifications and Authorizations:
1. The following permits, notices, certifications and authorizations shall be
obtained with copies submitted by the Contractor to SCRRA:
a. Delivery manifests for disposed materials in accordance with site
clearing plan and permit conditions in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
b. Private property owner’s release for material removed and
deposited on private property in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
1) Releases shall absolve SCRRA and its member agencies
from any responsibility in connection with the disposal of
materials on private property.
2) Releases shall be signed by the owner(s) of the property on
which the material will be deposited.
3) Two copies of the releases must be submitted to the
Engineer for approval not more than 15 days before the start
of material being deposited on private property.
c. Disposal Certification for materials removed from Job Site
indicating they have been disposed of in accordance with applicable
laws and regulations in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. On site burning or burial of site clearing materials will not be allowed.
B. The Contractor must take possession of material and debris collected from site
clearing procedures and be responsible for disposing of them in accordance with
these Specifications, any project permits, and applicable laws and regulations in
accordance with Division 01 requirements.
C. Contractor shall provide noise abatement in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 00 Site Clearing
D. Site cleanliness, sweeping and dust control shall be in accordance with Division
01 requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing trees, other vegetation, and existing site improvements on SCRRA
or adjacent property that are to remain.
1. Do not smother trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated
materials within drip line.
2. Avoid foot or vehicular traffic or parking of vehicles within drip line of trees
or shrubs.
3. Provide barricades, coverings, temporary fencing, or other types of
temporary protection as required by the Project environmental documents
or the Engineer in accordance with the Plans and these Specifications.
B. Repair or replace trees, vegetation, and existing site improvements including
modifying irrigation systems that are to remain that are damaged by construction
operations.
1. Repair of damaged trees and shrubs to be performed by a certified arborist
or tree surgeon.
2. Remove trees that are damaged to the extent that a certified arborist or
tree surgeon determines they cannot be repaired and restored to full-
growth status.
a. Replace with new trees of minimum 4 inches trunk diameter
measured by caliper.
3. Damaged vegetation shall be replaced in-kind as approved by the
Engineer.
4. Existing site improvements will be repaired or replaced as approved by the
Engineer.
5. Irrigation systems shall be modified to accommodate the work shown in the
Plans.
C. SCRRA will obtain authority for removal and alteration work, as required by the
Plans, on adjoining property prior to Contractor starting work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 00 Site Clearing
3.02 SITE CLEARING
A. Topsoil, fertile, friable soil of a loamy character with organic matter normal to the
area, Removal:
1. Strip topsoil to depths encountered.
a. Remove heavy growths of grass before stripping.
b. Stop topsoil stripping sufficient distance from such trees to prevent
damage to main root system.
c. Separate from underlying subsoil or objectionable material.
2. Stockpile topsoil to a designated area directed by the Engineer.
a. Construct stockpiles to freely drain surface water.
b. Provide temporary cover or seeding of stockpiles to prevent erosion
in accordance with Section 32 90 00.
3. Do not strip topsoil in wooded areas where no change in grade occurs.
4. Topsoil from borrow sources shall be free of subsoil, objects over 2 inches
diameter, weeds and roots.
5. Clearing: Clear from within limits of construction all trees except those
marked to remain. Maintain worksite in this cleared condition.
a. Include shrubs, brush, downed timber, rotten wood, heavy growth
of grass and weeds, vines, rubbish, structures and debris.
b. Rubbish shall be removed from cleared areas and disposed of in
accordance with project environmental documents and federal,
state and local laws in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
c. Clearing shall be level with the ground surface so that no
obstruction will interfere with close machine or hand mowing of
cleared areas.
d. Cleared areas shall be left smooth and free of obstructions or
depressions that will impound water.
B. Removed materials shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
disposed of outside the public right of way in conformance with the provisions in
Section 01 74 19 and reference Section 300-1.3 “Removal and Disposal of
Materials” of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Current
Edition. Within the limits of clearing, all stumps, roots, root mats, logs, debris and
other objectionable material shall be removed as follows:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 00 Site Clearing
1. Grubbing shall extend to the outside excavation and fill slope lines except
where tops of slopes are to be rounded. In these locations, the areas shall
extend to the outside limits of slope rounding.
2. Grub where subdrainage trenches will be dug, unsuitable material removed
or structures built.
3. Grub areas in which hillsides or existing embankments will be terraced.
4. Grub areas upon which embankments, foundations or other structures will
be placed.
a. Areas beneath embankments greater than 3 feet in depth shall be
free from all vegetation and roots to a depth of 6 inches below the
ground surface (after topsoil has been removed).
b. For embankments 3 feet in depth or less, roots that are over 2
inches diameter shall be removed to a depth of 1 foot below ground
surface.
3.03 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove and dispose of barricades, coverings or other protections used to prevent
damage to existing vegetation or improvements upon clean-up of the Work.
3.04 SCHEDULE
A. Contractor must complete clearing and grubbing work far enough in advance of
other operations to permit the placement of construction stakes. Construction
schedule shall be adjusted so cleared areas are not left susceptible to erosion or
sediment runoff due to weather.
3.05 ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon completion of the site clearing, obtain Engineer's written acceptance of the
extent of clearing, depth of stripping, and removal of deleterious material.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Site Clearing will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 00 Site Clearing
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Site Clearing furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents
will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 31 11 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 31 11 50
DEMOLITION, CUTTING, AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition, removal and disposal, salvage, cutting and patching of existing
construction, surface or subsurface, where shown on Plans, or as required
to accommodate new work shown or specified including backfilling of
excavations and depressions to restore Worksite to final grade.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 31 11 00 – Site Clearing
2. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork
3. Section 31 50 00 - Excavation Support
4. Section 32 91 00 - Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Topsoiling and Seeding
5. Section 34 72 00 – Trackwork
6. Section 34 72 30 – Field Welding Rail
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00
requirements.
B. Contractor shall provide a Site Demolition Plan:
1. The Site Demolition Plan shall include the following items:
a. Location and limits of demolition.
b. Methods and equipment to be utilized including backfilling of
excavations and depressions.
c. Shoring or other structures necessary to complete the demolition in
accordance with Section 31 50 00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 50 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 50 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching
d. Proposed materials and methods to be used for cutting and
patching, or matching and repairing existing construction to remain.
e. Safety measures including signs, barriers, temporary walkways and
hand railing.
f. Schedule for performing site demolition, cutting and patching
including railroad flagging needs.
g. Haul routes and disposal sites.
h. Utility coordination plan for Contractor demolished utilities as well
as utilities being demolished by others as shown in the Plans.
i. Traffic control measures or traffic plan where required by
Contractor’s proposed methods in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
j. Identification of permits as required by the project environmental
documents, federal, state or local agency in accordance with
Division 01 requirements.
C. Contractor shall provide copies of notices, permits, certifications and
authorizations:
1. Copies of demolition authorization permits and other permits as required
by project environmental documents, federal, state or local agency in
accordance with Division 01 requirements.
2. Delivery manifests for materials hauled and disposed by Contractor.
3. Private property owner’s release for material removed from the Authority’s
project site and deposited on private property.
a. Releases shall absolve SCRRA and its member agencies from any
responsibility in connection with the disposal of materials on private
property.
b. Releases shall be signed by the owner(s) of the property on which
the material will be deposited.
c. Two copies of the releases shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval not more than 15 days before the start of material being
deposited on private property.
4. Disposal certification for materials removed from job site indicating they
have been disposed of in accordance with applicable laws and regulations.
D. Contractor shall provide material certification:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 50 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 50 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching
1. Indicating manufacturer and type of proposed nonshrink grout and epoxy
bonding adhesive for patching or repairs to existing concrete structure to
remain.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General:
1. Contractor to salvage items, designated for owner's salvage, as a
functional unit.
2. Clean, list and tag each item in a manner acceptable to the Engineer for
storage.
3. Protect salvage items from damage and deliver to location designated in
the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
4. Salvage each item with auxiliary or associated equipment required for
operation.
B. Demolished Materials:
1. On-site burning or burial of demolished materials will not be permitted.
2. Contractor shall take possession of all demolished materials except as
noted in the Contract Documents to be salvaged.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of demolished materials in
accordance with applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations in
accordance with Division 01 requirements.
C. Environmental Requirements:
1. Cleanliness, Sweeping and Dust Control shall be maintained in accordance
with Division 01 requirements.
2. Contractor shall provide noise abatement as required by environmental
permits or local agency requirements in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
1.04 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Perform preliminary investigations as required in Section 31 20 00, Earthwork and
in accordance with Division 01 requirements to ascertain extent of work.
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate and reschedule work as required to avoid interference with other
operations of SCRRA, as identified in the Construction Documents or in accepted
schedule of site demolition, cutting and patching.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 50 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 50 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following products and
manufacturers are acceptable for nonshrink grout and epoxy bonding adhesive to
be used for patching of concrete to remain after demolition:
1. Nonshrink grout:
a. Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill.
b. Masterflow 713 Plus by BASF Building Systems.
c. Sika Grout 212 by Sika.
2. Epoxy bonding adhesive:
a. Euco No.452 MV by Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod by Sika Corporation.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Nonshrink Grout:
1. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive and nonstaining.
2. Premixed with only water to be added in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions at jobsite.
3. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. Mass expansion not
to be created by gas liberation or by other means.
4. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days to be 6500 psi.
5. Coat exposed edges of grout with a cure/seal compound recommended by
grout manufacturer.
B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive:
1. Two component, moisture insensitive adhesive manufactured for the
purpose of bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete.
C. Other Temporary or Permanent Material:
1. Other temporary or permanent material shall be provided by the Contractor
for proper execution of work in this Section.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 50 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 50 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching
D. Backfill Material:
1. Material used for backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 20
00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. No party other than the Contactor shall remove demolished material from the
Authority’s property.
B. Contractor shall perform the demolition, removal, salvage, cutting and patching
including handling of demolished debris in accordance with the Contract Plans,
Project Specifications and the submitted approved site demolition plan.
C. Any shoring, if required to accomplish demolition work, shall be designed and
constructed in accordance with Section 31 50 00.
3.02 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND RELATED FACILITIES
A. Where demolition is indicated, remove and dispose of:
1. Existing fences as identified in the Plans.
a. Coordinate fence removal with maintaining temporary and
permanent site security.
2. Temporary fences when no longer required to protect and secure the
construction site.
3. Structures in their entirety or portions to be demolished as indicated in the
Plans.
a. Exposed remaining concrete faces shall be saw cut to neat lines or
finished with epoxy binder and non-shrink grout.
b. Concrete shall be removed as required and any remaining concrete
to be utilized in the finished work or left as an existing structure shall
be protected from damage and finished with epoxy binder and non-
shrink grout or as indicated in the Plans.
4. Obstructions in their entirety or portions of obstructions as indicated in the
Plans including abandoned concrete signal foundations, footings and
bases located within the right-of-way shall be demolished.
5. Removal and disposal shall be in accordance with these Specifications and
the submitted and approved site demolition plan.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 50 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 50 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching
B. Where salvage of material or portions of structures and related facilities is
indicated, material shall be carefully removed as shown in the plans for installation
of new work and neatly stacked at a location approved in advance to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and in accordance with the approved site demolition
plan. The materials shall be left in a satisfactory condition for use by the Authority
as identified in the Plans.
C. The Contractor shall replace or repair, at no expense to the Authority, any existing
structure or portion of existing structure or related facility designated to remain that
are damaged during removal of the portions designated for demolition.
3.03 PAVEMENT
A. Pavement shall be demolished as indicated in the Plans and removed in
accordance with the submitted and approved site demolition plan.
B. Pavement shall be removed to clean straight lines. Saw cutting of edges to be
joined is required. Saw cuts shall be a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches.
1. Portland cement concrete pavement removal shall have a second full depth
relief saw cut offset 12 to 18 inches parallel to the initial saw cut unless
approved otherwise.
2. If a saw cut in concrete falls within three feet of a construction joint, cold
joint, expansion joint, or edge, the concrete shall be removed to the joint or
edge.
C. The Contractor shall provide surface drainage of resulting surfaces following
pavement removal in accordance with Section 32 91 00.
D. The Contractor shall replace at no expense to the Authority any existing pavement
designated to remain that is damaged as a result of Contactor activities.
3.04 WIRING AND POLES
A. Wiring and Poles designated to be removed by the Contractor shall be removed in
accordance with the Plans and the approved site demolition plan. Signal/Utility
poles shall be saw cut a minimum of 2 feet below the ground line. No work shall
be performed until clearance to proceed has been provided by the Engineer.
3.05 UTILITIES
A. Demolition of existing utilities removed by others as shown in the Plans shall be
coordinated by the Contractor with the utility companies and agencies in
accordance with Division 01 in accordance with the approved site demolition plan.
B. The Contractor shall cap and plug storm drain, sanitary sewer, and underdrain in
accordance with the utility owner’s standard details and instructions. Cap and plug
pipe and other conduits abandoned due to demolition, with approved type caps
and plugs as required by the utility owners.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 50 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 50 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching
C. Abandoned utilities under railroad tracks shall be removed and backfilled or filled
in accordance with these specifications and the project plans and technical
Specifications.
3.06 BACKFILL OF DEMOLITION EXCAVATIONS
A. Any shoring used for support of demolition excavations shall be removed in
accordance with Section 31 50 00 and the submitted and approved site demolition
plan.
B. Excavations created by demolition activities shall be backfilled and compacted in
the same manner as backfilling excavations in Section 31 20 00.
3.07 CULVERT AND HEADWALLS
A. Stormdrain culverts under track and concrete headwalls shall be demolished as
indicated on the plans and removed in accordance with the submitted and
approved site demolition plan. The Contractor shall replace at no expense to the
Authority any existing pipe designated to remain in place damaged by the
Contractor.
3.08 TRACKWORK AND TURNOUTS
A. Remove trackwork for track reconstruction as described in Section 34 72 00
Trackwork and this Specification
B. Cut track to limits shown on the Plans or as called for in this Specification. Rail
shall be cut with rail saw to a tolerance of 1/32 inch from square. All burrs shall be
removed and ends made smooth. Torch cut rails will be rejected.
C. Remove trackwork, including rail, ties, ballast, subballast, and other track materials
in accordance with this Section.
D. Removal and salvage of turnouts or crossovers includes removal of all special
trackwork components and delivery to the Authority as directed by the Engineer or
per the Plans.
E. Remove insulated joints as described in Section 34 72 30 Field Welding Rail and
this Specification.
F. Removal of insulated joints to be coordinated with the Signal Contractor and
SCRRA.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 50 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 50 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Existing facilities to be reconstructed, re-laid, relocated or reset is considered
incidental to work under other payment items and no separate measurement and
payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section. Work of this
section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. When existing facilities are to be salvaged, no separate measurement and
payment will be made for removing the facilities.
C. Removal of traffic lines and marking will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
D. Removing, salvaging, reconstructing, relocating or resetting the various types of
fence will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The
quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the
basis for this measurement.
E. Removing, salvaging, reconstructing the various types of asphalt or concrete curb,
curb and gutter will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
F. Removing, salvaging, reconstructing, relocating or resetting of signs will be
measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as
contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of
values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement. Each individual sign installation will be considered one unit
regardless of the number of posts or sign panels involved.
G. Removing, salvaging, reconstructing, relocating or resetting drainage facilities will
be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as
contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of
values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 50 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 11 50 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching
H. Adjusting manholes and inlets to grade, reconstructing, remodeling, or abandoning
will be determined as units from actual counts. will be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable,
as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
I. Removing, salvaging, reconstruction, relocating, or resetting the various types of
track demolition, turnouts, crossover and special trackwork will be measured by
the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as
contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of
values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. When the Contract Documents include separate items, and units or lump sum
prices for removing, salvaging, adjusting, modifying, remodeling, abandoning,
obliterating, relaying, reconstructing, relocating or resetting any of the facilities, the
quantities will be paid for at the Contract unit, or lump sum price for the item of
work involved.
B. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, supplies, supervision, incidentals, and for doing all the Work involved
in completing the operations as shown or depicted on the Plans, and as specified
in these Specifications, or as directed by the Engineer.
C. Full compensation for all excavation and backfill required to remove, dispose of,
salvage, relay, reset, relocate, and/or reconstruct facilities, for which payment is
not otherwise provided, shall be considered as included in the Contract unit or lump
sum price paid for the items of work involved and no separate payment will be
made.
D. When the Contract does not include separate items for removing any of the
existing facilities encountered within the area to be cleared and grubbed or the
removal is not included in another item, then payment for removing the facilities
shall be considered incidental to work under other payment items and no separate
measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
E. Payment requests for Demolition, Cutting and Patching shall include certificates
showing legal disposal of Materials from SCRRA’s right-of-way. No payment will
be considered without such certificates.
END OF SECTION 31 11 50
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 11 50 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 31 20 00
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavation, embankment fill, structural excavation and backfill, borrow,
sub-grade preparation, and removal of unsuitable material.
2. Structural excavation shall consist of excavation for the construction of
foundations for structures, excavation for trenches for the construction of
culverts, pipes and other facilities. Structural backfill shall consists of
furnishing, installing, and compacting backfill material around structures.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete
2. Section 31 11 00 - Site Clearing.
3. Section 31 11 50 - Demolition, Cutting And Patching.
4. Section 31 50 00 - Excavation Support.
5. Section 34 11 27 - Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base.
6. Section 34 71 50 – Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C131, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
2. D1556, Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In Place
by the Sand Cone Method.
3. D1557, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft (2,700 kN-m/m)).
4. D2419, Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
5. D4254, Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight
of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density.
6. D4318, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
7. D4829, Standard test Methods for Expansion Index of Soils.
8. D6938, Standard Test Methods for IN-Place Density and Water Content of
Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depths).
B. California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders.
C. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Current or Latest Edition,
Section 300 – Earthwork.
D. Caltrans Section 19 - Earthwork
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submittals must be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00
requirements.
B. Plans and Procedures:
1. Submittals of plans and procedures to the Engineer must be made and
approval obtained prior to commencing work for the work of this section.
(on-SCRRA property and off SCRRA property).
2. Plans shall include, as necessary, haul routes, public streets to be used,
traffic control and other incidental work necessary to complete the work of
this section (on-SCRRA property and off SCRRA property).
3. Contractor must submit a Grading Plan, permit application and approved
permits as required by project technical Specifications:
a. Phasing of the work shall be shown.
b. Demolition and proposed temporary erosion and sedimentation
control measures shall be included.
c. Extent and depth of subgrade preparation based on project specific
geotechnical report or existing site conditions.
4. Contractor must submit an Excavation and Embankment Fill Plan:
a. Proposed excavation methods, procedure and equipment to be
utilized.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
b. Information provided the Engineer does not relieve Contractor of
responsibility for the successful excavation performance.
c. Proposed temporary erosion and sediment control measures
should be included.
d. Extent and depth of subgrade preparation based on project specific
geotechnical report or existing site conditions.
5. Contractor must submit a Structure Excavation and Backfill Plan.
a. Proposed excavation methods, procedure and equipment to be
utilized for structural work.
b. Proposed backfill methods, procedure and equipment to be utilized
for structural work.
c. Information provided the Engineer does not relieve Contractor of
responsibility for the successful structure excavation and backfill
performance.
d. Proposed temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures
should be included.
e. Extend and depth of subgrade preparation based on project specific
geotechnical report or existing site conditions.
C. Certificates:
1. Material Test Reports for products purchased and used in the project.
2. Certification of proper disposal of demolition materials.
3. Tickets or certification from material suppliers demonstrating compliance
with Materials Tests or Specifications.
4. Certified laboratory test reports for fill material, imported or obtained from
SCRRA property, documenting:
a. ASTM D422, Sieve Analysis.
b. ASTM D1557 or ASTM D4254, Moisture Density Results.
c. ASTM D4318, liquid limit, plastic limit and plasticity index.
5. The Engineer will determine adequacy of the test reports or certifications
in accordance with the Contract Documents and may require additional
testing to confirm requirements with the Specifications.
D. Product Data and Shop Plans:
1. Product technical data including:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Samples:
1. Submit samples, soils test results, and sources of fill, backfill and borrow
materials proposed for use.
2. Submit material samples when requested by the Engineer for use as
confirmation of Contractor test results.
F. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Submit test results for density and compaction tests performed by certified
test laboratory hired by the Contactor and approved by the Engineer to
perform and report testing.
a. Test results submittal shall be on a form approved in advance by
the Engineer.
2. Verification documentation, in accordance with Division 01 requirements,
that Contractor requested DigAlert field location of underground utilities
and SCRRA Signal and Communications field location of underground
railroad lines prior to starting any excavation work.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prior to commencing Work, the Contractor shall examine the Contract Plans and
Specifications, inspect the site, consult all available record Plans of existing Work
and utilities, and note all conditions and limitations, which may influence Work
required by this Section.
B. Materials not meeting the requirements of this specification shall not be used in
the Work.
1.05 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Contractor shall execute Work under this Specification in such a manner as to
minimize impact to the daily operation of SCRRA, vehicular, bicycle, and
pedestrian traffic.
B. The Contractor must barricade open excavations and post with warning lights
those excavations occurring on property adjacent to or within public access areas
and along the SCRRA tracks in accordance with requirements of Section 31 50
00. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as
otherwise required. Warning lights shall be located to avoid shining directly into
Locomotive Engineer’s eyes in oncoming trains.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
C. The Contractor must protect utilities, structures and facilities designated as protect
in place from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining,
washout, and other hazards created by excavation and backfill operations.
D. The Work shall allow rainfall to drain freely at all times in accordance with project
environmental requirements and permit conditions in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor must protect against erosion and uncontrolled run-off within and
adjacent to right-of-way in accordance with the Project’s Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan and the approved NPDES Permit in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
B. The Contractor must obtain all required permits for dewatering and legally dispose
of water from dewatering operations.
1. Comply with requirements of permits and agencies having jurisdiction over
the project site in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
C. Cleanliness, Sweeping and Dust Control shall be in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
D. Contractor must provide noise abatement as required by environmental permits or
local agency requirements in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
E. The Contractor shall maintain in good working order all erosion and sedimentation
controls throughout the duration of the work.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish required excavation Plans to jurisdictional authorities and obtain permits
there from. Refer to Division 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Structure Excavation:
1. Excavation for the construction of foundations for structures; excavation of
trenches for the construction of culverts, pipes, rods, deadmen, and cutoff
walls; other excavation designated on the plans or in these specifications
or in the technical provisions as structure excavation.
B. Fill and Backfill:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
Embankment fill and backfill shall consist of suitable material from project site
excavation, from other SCRRA property or off site borrow as shown in the Plans
and approved by the Engineer.
1. Suitable fill materials may be obtained from on-site excavation and rough
grading operations provided the Contractor submits laboratory test results
demonstrating that the materials meet or exceed the criteria established in
this Section. If sufficient suitable materials are not available to meet
requirements, the material shall be obtained from outside sources.
2. Materials from on-site excavations, which may otherwise be suitable for
use as fill, may contain excess moisture in their natural state, or may take
on excess moisture during handling and stockpiling that would render them
unsuitable for use as fill. The Contractor shall dry the material as necessary
as specified in the Section entitled “Moisture Control” herein to attain the
required minimum standard, at no additional expense to SCRRA.
3. Nesting of rock pieces that will create voids will not be permitted.
4. Fill and backfill material shall be free from organic matter, excessive fines,
or unsuitable products of demolition. Fill and backfill shall contain no rocks
or lumps over 3 inches in greatest dimension within 1 foot of the top of
subgrade.
5. Fill and backfill material shall have plasticity index of 15 or less and a liquid
limit of 30 or less and expansion index of 30 or less, except where
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
6. Suitable materials from structure excavation not used as structure backfill
shall be deposited as fill or backfill material.
7. Materials not meeting these requirements will be classified as unsuitable
and shall be removed and legally disposed off-site by the Contractor, or as
directed by the Engineer.
C. Structural Backfill:
1. Various items of work involved in furnishing, placing and compacting
backfill material around structures to the lines designated on the plans or
specified by the Engineer.
2. Material shall have a Sand Equivalent value of not less than 20 and shall
conform to the following grading in Table 1:
Table 1, Structural Backfill
Sieve Sizes Percentage Passing
3” 100
No. 4 35-100
No. 30 20-100
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
3. Material shall be free of stones or lumps exceeding 3 inches in greatest
dimension, organic, or other unsatisfactory material.
4. At locations where directed by the Engineer, the material used to backfill
the outer 2 feet portion of structure backfill adjacent to pipe and culvert
inlets and outlets, and structure backfill placed within the top 2 feet of
finished grade at abutments, abutment wing walls, retaining walls, and
other portions of structures shall be compacted impervious material.
a. The impervious backfill shall meet the material requirements in
Table 1 except there shall be 15 percent plus or minus 2 percent
minus 200 sieve material present and as determined by the
Engineer to be suitable for such purpose. The Sand Equivalent
requirement shall not apply to the impervious material used for
structure backfill.
5. When material from Structure Excavation is unsuitable for use as structure
backfill, the Contractor shall either:
a. Use other material covered by the Contract if such substitution
involves Work that does not differ materially from what would
otherwise be required. No additional compensation will be allowed.
b. Substitute selected material available from the project site that
meets the requirements for structural backfill. No additional
compensation will be allowed.
c. Treat the unsuitable material to meet the requirements for structural
backfill. No additional compensation will be allowed.
d. Use Controlled Density Fill (CDF). No additional compensation will
be allowed.
e. Obtain material elsewhere from Contractor sources. No additional
compensation will be allowed.
The Contractor shall submit in writing to the Engineer for approval of the
substitution that is being requested.
6. When required by the Plans or submitted as an option and approved by the
Engineer in advance, controlled density fill (CDF) or slurry cement backfill,
a self compacting, cementitious flowable material requiring no vibration or
tamping to achieve consolidation, may be used. The Contractor shall
submit a mix design in writing to the Engineer for approval. The design
shall provide:
a. A minimum 28-day strength of 50 psi and a maximum 28-day
strength not to exceed 300-psi.
b. Consistency shall be flowable (3 inches to 10 inches slump).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
c. The CDF materials shall meet material properties and testing
contained in Section 03 31 00.
D. Pervious Backfill Material:
1. Pervious Backfill Material shall be placed behind bridge abutments, wing
walls and retaining walls as shown on the plans and in accordance with
these Specifications.
a. Material shall consist of gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock,
natural sands, manufactured sand or combinations thereof.
b. Pervious backfill material shall be placed in layers along with and
by the same methods specified for structural backfill. Pervious
backfill material at any one location shall be approximately the
same grading, and at locations where the material would otherwise
be exposed to erosion shall be covered with at least a one foot layer
of earthy material approved by the Engineer.
c. Pervious backfill material, except for sacked material at wall drain
outlets, shall conform to the following grading requirements:
Table 2, Pervious Backfill Material
Sieve Sizes Percentage Passing
2 inches 100
No. 50 0 - 100
No. 100 0-8
No. 200 0-4
E. Aggregate Base and Crushed Miscellaneous Base:
1. Aggregate Base material shall conform to the requirements set forth in
Section 34 11 27.
2. Crushed Miscellaneous Base, CMB, shall consist of broken and crushed
asphalt concrete or Portland cement concrete and may contain crushed
aggregate base or other rock materials. The material shall be free of any
detrimental quantity of deleterious material and contain no more than 15
percent material retained on the No. 4 sieve. Material shall not contain
more than 3 percent brick by weight of dry sample.
3. Crushed Miscellaneous Base shall conform to the following grading
requirements:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
Table 3, Crushed Miscellaneous Base
Sieve Size Percentage Passing
Sieve
Coarse Fine
2 inches 100
1-1/2” 90 - 100 100
3/4” 50 – 85 85 - 100
3/8” 55 - 75
No. 4 25 - 45 25 - 60
No. 30 10 – 25 10 - 30
No. 200 2-9 2-9
ASTM C 131 Test Grading A B
4. Crushed Miscellaneous Base shall only be used in paving areas.
F. Geotextile Filter Fabric:
1. Geotextile Filter Fabric shall be as specified in the Project Specific
Technical Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION
A. Protect existing surface and subsurface features on-site and adjacent to site as
follows:
1. Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of protection necessary to
prevent damage to existing items indicated to remain in place.
2. Protect and maintain bench marks, monuments or other established
reference points and property corners.
a. If disturbed or destroyed, replace at own expense to full satisfaction
of Owner and controlling agency.
b. Property corners, if disturbed or destroyed, shall be reset in
accordance with applicable surveying law for the State of California
after completion of rough grading and prior to commencing final
excavation or grading operations.
3. Verify location and protection of existing utilities.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
a. Omission or inclusion of utility items does not constitute non-
existence or definite location. Locations of utilities shown on the
Plans are provided for the Contractor’s information only and the
Contractor is responsible for verifying the location of all utilities to
his own satisfaction.
b. Secure and examine local utility records for location data. In
accordance with Division 01, the Contractor must make all attempts
to locate utilities including potholing if necessary prior to
commencing excavations. If utilities cannot be located, the
Contractor must first pothole anticipated location(s) by hand
methods. When located, complete excavation with caution to
prevent damage.
1) When utility lines not known or indicated on the Plans are
encountered within the area of operations, the Contractor
must notify the Engineer and utility owner immediately.
Measures shall be taken to protect the utility and prevent
damage to the utility.
c. Take necessary precautions to protect existing utilities from
damage due to any construction activity.
d. Repair damages to utility items at own expense.
e. In case of damage, notify Engineer at once so required protective
measures may be taken.
f. SCRRA’S underground signal lines will be located by the SCRRA
in accordance with Division 01.
g. Excavations created for location of underground utilities shall be
backfilled in accordance with the following:
1) Backfill material shall meet the criteria established for
embankment fill material. The upper 12 inches of the
embankment fill shall be compacted to 95 percent relative
density per ASTM D1557 and the layer below 12 inches
from the top of the compacted fill shall be compacted to 90
percent relative density per ASTM D1557 and shall contain
no materials greater than 3 inches in maximum dimension.
2) Place the uppermost 12 inches of compacted fill in two lifts
of 6 inches (compacted). Each lift shall be compacted to 95
percent relative density per ASTM D1557 and shall contain
no materials greater than 1 inch in maximum dimension.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
h. Any excavation that exposes or potentially could expose an existing
underground utility or structure indicated as “protect in place,” “to
remain” or similar indication, or any unknown utility or structure
found and deemed requiring special methods by the Engineer, shall
be classified as a structural excavation and backfill for purposes of
replacing and compacting fill. This shall be at no additional cost to
SCRRA.
1) The Contractor shall not disrupt any service until utility
owner and the Engineer has determined the required action
on such lines.
4. Maintain free of damage, existing sidewalks, structures, and pavement, not
indicated to be removed in the Plans.
a. Any item known or unknown or not properly located that is
inadvertently damaged shall be repaired to original condition at no
expense to SCRRA.
5. Provide full access to public and private premises, fire hydrants, street
crossings, sidewalks and other points as designated by Owner to prevent
serious interruption of travel and emergency services.
6. The Contractor must take precautions to prevent damage to existing
foundations and structures protecting them in place without undermining or
causing movement.
7. Maintain stockpiles and excavations in such a manner to prevent
movement or damage to structures on-site or on adjoining property that are
not noted in plans as being demolished.
8. At all times during the execution of this Work, the Contractor must maintain
safe and stable excavations. Where required by California Construction
Safety Orders, the Contractor must employ side slope layback, benching,
or shoring. Required excavation support methods shall be in accordance
with Section 31 50 00.
B. Water and Storm Drainage Removal:
1. The Contractor must provide, operate, and maintain an adequate system
to remove water throughout the excavation and construction operation as
necessary.
2. Obtain all permits for and legally dispose of water dewatering operations to
facilitate construction. Comply with requirements of the permits, project
environmental conditions and agencies having jurisdiction.
3. Elements of the system shall be located to allow continuous water removal
without interfering with other construction activities.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
C. Salvageable Items: Carefully remove items to be salvaged, and store as directed
by the Engineer in accordance with Section 31 11 50.
D. Dispose of waste materials, legally, off site.
1. Burning, as a means of waste disposal, is not permitted.
3.02 SITE EXCAVATION AND GRADING
A. The work includes all operations in connection with excavation, borrow,
construction of fills and embankments and structures, rough grading, subgrade
preparation, and disposal of excess materials in connection with the preparation
of the site(s) for construction of the railroad roadbed or other facilities.
B. Excavation and Grading: Perform as required by the Contract Plans.
1. Prior to rough grading, the Contractor must complete clearing and grubbing
in accordance with Section 31 11 00.
2. Contract Plans may indicate both existing grade and finished grade
required for construction of Project.
a. Stake all units, structures, piping, fills and cuts, roads, parking areas
and walks and establish their elevations upon completion of site
clearing in accordance with SCRRA Standard Specification 31 11
00.
b. Perform other construction staking work required.
3. The Contractor must not place any embankment fill or sub-ballast onto the
ground surface for embankment fills or base of excavations without prior
acceptance of the excavated and rough graded areas by the Engineer.
4. The Contractor must perform rough grading as indicated to achieve the
bottom elevation for the embankment. This work shall be considered
incidental to construction of embankment cuts and fills.
5. Subgrade preparation of ground surface, rough grading, for embankment
cuts or fills:
a. Before embankment fill is started or subballast placed, scarify to a
minimum depth of at least 6 inches and up to 18 inches (if
necessary to reach the specified density) in all proposed
embankment cut and fill areas.
1) Moisture content shall be brought to 2.0 percent above
optimum and relative compaction of 90 percent relative
density per ASTM D1557 reached prior to placing any
embankment fill if more than 12 inches of fill required.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
2) Moisture content shall be brought to 2.0 percent above
optimum and relative compaction of 95 percent relative
density per ASTM D1557 reached prior to placing any
embankment fill if 12 inches or less of fill is required or sub-
ballast is to be placed directly on the prepared base.
b. Where embankment fill is to be constructed against an existing
ground surface that is steeper than one vertical to four horizontal,
plow surface in a manner to bench and break up surface so that fill
material will key into the existing surface.
1) Benches shall have a horizontal dimension of not more that
6 feet and a vertical rise of not more than 2 feet.
2) Benches cut into the slope shall not be allowed to remain
unsupported overnight.
3) Benches cut within 12 feet of the track centerline shall only
be created during train free periods and shall be
immediately backfilled and compacted unless shoring
designed in accordance with SCRRA’s Design Criteria
Manual, Chapter 15, Excavation Support Criteria,
constructed in accordance with Section 31 50 00, and these
Specifications is installed.
6. Subgrade Preparation of ground surface for foundations or footings.
a. Before constructions of the foundation or footing are started, scarify
a minimum of 6-inches.
1) Moisture content shall be brought to 2.0 percent above
optimum and relative compaction of 95 percent relative
density per ASTM D1557 reached prior to placing
reinforcing steel for any foundation or footing.
7. In areas where unsuitable materials are encountered in the embankment
cut or fill footprint, the Engineer may direct removal and replacement with
suitable materials placed and compacted in accordance with these
Specifications in accordance with Section 4, Measurement and Payment.
8. Fill and backfill shall be placed as promptly as work permits but not until
completion of the following:
a. Approval by the Engineer of the embankment cut or embankment
fill base preparation.
b. Recording of final location, elevation, and limits of any structure,
utility or other underground feature that will remain in place and be
covered by the embankment.
c. Removal of any trash and debris.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
d. Removal of shoring and bracing where applicable and as directed
by the Engineer.
9. Protection of finished grade:
a. During construction, shape and drain embankment and
excavations.
b. Maintain ditches and drains to provide drainage at all times. Protect
newly graded areas from erosion.
c. Protect graded areas against action of elements prior to acceptance
of work.
d. Contractor must keep graded areas free of trash and debris until
final inspection and acceptance by the Engineer.
e. Reestablish grade where settlement or erosion occurs.
f. Contractor must not operate equipment supported directly on the
roadbed unless it can be demonstrated through compaction testing
to the Engineer’s approval that the equipment selected can be
supported without creating softening, rutting or degradation of the
roadbed.
g. Contractor must remove any excess material that was delivered
and not used for the Project at its own expense.
C. Borrow:
1. Provide necessary amount of approved fill, from material obtained from
SCRRA property or imported, compacted to density equal to that indicated
in this Specification.
2. Fill material to be approved by Engineer prior to placement.
D. Construct embankment and structure cuts and fills as required by the Contract
Plans:
1. Construct embankment cuts and fills at locations and to lines of grade
indicated.
a. Completed embankment fill and cut shall correspond to shape of
typical cross section or contour indicated regardless of method
used to show shape, size, and extent of line and grade of completed
work.
2. Provide approved fill material for embankment fill or backfill which is free
from roots, organic matter, trash, frozen material as follows:
a. Ensure that stones larger than 3 inches are not placed in upper 12
inches of fill or embankment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
b. Do not place material in layers greater than 8-inches loose
thickness.
c. Place layers horizontally and compact each layer prior to placing
additional fill to a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction per
ASTM D1557.
3. Provide approved fill material for structural fill or backfill which is free from
roots, organic matter, trash, frozen material, and stones as follows:
a. Ensure that stones larger than 3 inches are not placed against any
concrete or other foundation material or used as structural fill or
backfill.
b. Do not place material in layers greater than 8 inches loose
thickness.
c. Place layers horizontally and compact each layer prior to placing
additional fill to a minimum of 95 percent relative density per ASTM
D1557.
4. Compaction shall be by equipment approved by the Engineer to obtain
specified density.
a. Control moisture for each layer as necessary to meet requirements
of compaction.
b. Before compaction, each layer shall be moistened or aerated as
necessary to provide the optimum moisture content.
c. Compaction shall not result in significant rutting under the action of
the compactor on the final passes on a lift.
d. The compaction process must extend the full width of the
embankment fill or cut section for the layer being worked.
5. Contractor must properly place and compact all embankment fill or
structural fill or backfill materials. Deficiencies resulting from insufficient or
improper compaction of such material shall be corrected by the Contractor
throughout the Contract period at no additional cost to the Authority. When
specified compaction density is not being obtained or subgrade surface
damaged by equipment, Contractor must:
a. Stop placing additional fill.
1) Material in place may be scarified, water content adjusted
and area rerolled until required compaction is obtained.
2) Alternatively, Contractor may remove not fully compacted
material and replace with different material at no additional
cost to SCRRA.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
3) Contractor may proposed other means and methods to the
Engineer for approval.
b. If softening of the subgrade surface takes place under construction
traffic to a degree unsatisfactory to the Engineer, Contractor must
rework or remove and replace the material, recompacting and
grading as required at no additional cost to SCRRA.
c. If a fill material is too wet:
1) It may be scarified or disked and aerated until the proper
water content is attained.
2) With approval of the Engineer, Contractor may blend drier
soil with the wet fill to achieve a water content suitable for
compaction.
3) Contractor may propose other means and methods to the
Engineer for approval.
3.03 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT
A. Contractor must determine the type, size and weight of the compaction equipment
best suited to perform the work at hand. Select and control the lift (layer) thickness
within the Specifications with approval of the Engineer. Proper control over the
moisture content of the material shall be maintained to obtain required compaction
results.
B. In areas inaccessible to conventional compactors, or where maneuvering space is
limited, approved impact rammers, small drum vibrators, vibratory plate, or
pneumatic button head compaction equipment may be used with layer thickness
not to exceed 6 inches before compaction.
C. Compaction by jetting or flooding with water is not allowed.
3.04 ROCK EXCAVATION
A. Rock excavation shall be as specified in the Project Specific Specifications.
3.05 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
A. Blasting with any type of explosive is prohibited.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL/QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Include in bid price for earthwork the cost of inspection services indicated herein
as being performed by the Contractor’s Soils Engineer.
1. The Contractor must use a certified testing laboratory that is approved in
advance by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
2. Included are all retests required by the Engineer to confirm successful
compaction at failed test locations.
B. Moisture density relations, to be established by the Contractor’s Soils Engineer,
are required for all materials to be compacted. Samples of soils shall be provided
at no additional cost for verification testing by SCRRA when required by the
Engineer.
C. Extent of compaction testing will be as necessary to assure compliance with
Specifications.
1. On-site density tests in accordance with ASTM D6938 shall be used to
demonstrate that proper compaction has been obtained.
2. Visual observation may be used to augment on-site density tests. Visual
inspection in no way relieves Contractor of responsibility to perform on site
density testing.
3. Density testing must be performed in the following frequency:
a. At least one density test must be performed for each 200 cubic
yards of embankment compacted fill.
b. At least one density test must be performed in the prepared
subgrade in embankment cuts every 500 feet.
c. At least one density test is to be performed for each 30 cubic yards
of compacted structural backfill.
d. Density tests shall be taken in areas representative of compactive
efforts and not in areas of equipment traffic.
4. SCRRA will perform Quality Assurance (verification) testing for on-site
density as determined by the Engineer.
a. Testing will be by an independent certified soils testing laboratory.
b. Retests required due to Contractor not complying with the density
requirements must be paid for by the Contractor as a deduction
from payment.
D. Give minimum of 24 hours advance notice to the Engineer when ready for
compaction or subgrade testing observation and inspection.
E. Should any compaction density test or subgrade inspection fail to meet
Specification requirements, perform corrective work as necessary including but not
limited to rerolling and manipulation of moisture. Additional compaction testing will
be required to determine that corrective work provides compaction in the failed
area meeting requirements of these Specifications.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
F. Contractor must provide a record of compaction testing results including corrective
actions taken if necessary on the approved form to the Engineer.
G. Contractor’s corrective work to meet compaction requirements and retesting
resulting from failing compaction density tests shall be at no additional cost to
SCRRA.
3.07 EXCAVATION, FILLING, AND BACKFILLING FOR STRUCTURES
A. General:
1. The backfilling of openings dug for Structures shall be a necessary part of
and incidental to the excavation for the Structure.
2. The Engineer may require the Contractor to selectively remove and
stockpile any usable material excavated for a Structure.
a. If material meets the requirements for Pervious Backfill Material,
Table 2, for walls it may replace gravel as wall or abutment backfill.
3. Stockpiled material shall be protected with plastic sheeting or by some
other method as approved by the Engineer from contamination and
weather damage.
a. Too wet or contaminated material caused by failure of the protection
method shall be disposed of by the Contractor and replaced with an
equal amount of suitable material at no expense to SCRRA unless
the project construction schedule allows for Contractor to propose
a different method for Engineer’s approval.
4. All costs for supplying, if necessary, storing, protecting, rehandling and
placing stockpiled material shall be included in the unit Contract price for
Structure Excavation.
5. In this Section of the Specifications, the word "foundations" includes
footings, base slabs, foundation walls, mat foundations, grade beams,
piers and any other support element placed directly on soil or deep
structural foundations such as piling or drilled shafts.
6. In the paragraphs of this Section of the Specifications, the word "soil" also
includes any type of rock subgrade that may be present at or below existing
subgrade levels.
B. Excavation Requirements for Structures:
1. General:
a. Do not commence excavation for foundations for structures until
Engineer approves Contractor’s submittals of tests or information
indicating one of the following as applicable:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
1) Density and moisture content of compacted fill material at
structure site meets requirements of specifications.
2) Site surcharge or mass fill material can be removed due to
meeting requirements in the Construction Documents from
entire construction site or portion thereof.
3) Surcharge or mass fill material has been removed
previously from construction area or portions thereof.
b. Engineer grants approval to begin excavations.
2. Dimensions:
a. Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated or specified.
b. Allow additional space as required for construction operations,
working space, formwork, damproofing, waterproofing and
inspection of foundations.
3. Removal of obstructions and undesirable materials in excavation includes,
but is not necessarily limited to, removal of old foundations, existing
construction, unsuitable subgrade soils, expansive type soils, and any
other materials which may be concealed beneath present grade, as
required to execute work indicated on Contract Plans.
a. If undesirable material and obstructions are encountered during
excavation remove material to a depth where suitable materials are
found or compacted material meeting requirements of Table 1
Structural Backfill provides a stable subgrade and meets
compaction requirements.
b. Unsuitable material removed below foundation elevations shall be
replaced with material meeting requirements of Table 1, Structural
Backfill and compacted in layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth to
95 percent of relative density per ASTM D1557.
c. Engineer will approve additional excavation for unsuitable materials
below the foundation. Additional work will be paid for in accordance
with Part 4, Measurement and Payment of these Specifications.
4. Do not carry excavations lower than shown for foundations except as
directed by the Engineer.
a. If any part of excavations is carried below required depth without
authorization, maintain excavation and start foundation from
excavated level with concrete of same strength as required for
superimposed foundation, and no extra compensation will be made
to Contractor therefore.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
5. Notify Engineer as soon as excavation is completed in order that excavated
structure subgrades may be inspected.
a. Do not commence further construction until subgrade under
compacted fill material, under foundations, under floor slabs-on-
grade, under equipment support pads, and under retaining wall
footings as applicable has been inspected and approved by the
Engineer as being free of undesirable material, being of compaction
density required by this Specification as shown by the compaction
tests, and being capable of supporting the allowable foundation
design bearing pressures and superimposed foundation, fill, and
building loads to be placed thereon.
b. The Engineer must be given the opportunity to inspect subgrade
below fill material both prior to and after subgrade compaction.
c. Place concrete for foundations, retaining wall footings, floor slabs-
on-grade, and equipment support pads as soon as weather
conditions permit after excavation is completed, inspected, and
approved and after forms and reinforcing are inspected and
approved.
d. Place fill material after removal of forms in accordance with time
frame provisions of Section 34 80 41.
e. Before concrete or fill material is placed, protect approved subgrade
from becoming loose, wet, frozen, or soft due to weather,
construction operations, or other reasons.
6. Dewatering:
a. Where groundwater is, or is expected, to be encountered during
excavation, install a dewatering system to prevent softening and
disturbance of subgrade below foundations and fill material. The
dewatering system shall be designed to allow foundations and fill
material to be placed in the dry, and to maintain a stable excavation
side slope.
b. Groundwater levels shall be maintained at least 3 feet below the
bottom of any excavation.
c. Review soils investigation before beginning excavation and
determine where groundwater is likely to be encountered during
excavation.
d. Employ a hydrologist for selecting and designing the dewatering
system.
1) Such design shall include field maintenance instructions for
Contractor’s personnel.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 20 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
e. Keep dewatering system in operation until dead load of structure
exceeds possible buoyant uplift force on structure.
f. Dispose of groundwater to an area which will not interfere with
construction operations or damage existing construction.
1) Install groundwater monitoring wells as necessary.
2) Obtain dewatering permits in accordance with Project
Environmental requirements.
g. Upon completion of excavation and structure foundation work, do
not turn off dewatering system in a manner that the upsurge in water
weakens the subgrade.
7. Subgrade stabilization:
a. If subgrade under foundations, fill material, floor slabs-on-grade, or
equipment support pads is in a frozen, loose, wet, or soft condition
before construction is placed thereon, remove frozen, loose, wet, or
soft material and replace with approved compacted material as
directed by the Engineer. Such additional work will be measured
and paid for in accordance with Section 4.0, Measurement and
Payment.
b. Provide compaction density of replacement material as stated in
this Specification Section.
c. Loose, wet, or soft materials, when approved by the Engineer, may
be stabilized by a compacted working mat of well graded crushed
stone meeting requirements for Table 1, Structural Backfill.
1) Compact stone mat thoroughly into subgrade to avoid future
migration of fines into the stone voids.
d. Method of stabilization shall be as approved by the Engineer.
e. Do not place further construction on the repaired subgrades, until
the subgrades have been approved by the Engineer.
8. Protection of structures:
a. Contractor must take precautions to protect new and existing
structures from becoming damaged due to construction operations
or other reasons.
b. Contractor must take precautions to protect subgrade under new
and existing foundations from becoming wet and undermined
during construction due to presence of surface or subsurface water
or due to construction operations.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 21 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
9. Shoring:
a. Shore, sheet pile, slope, or brace excavations as required to
prevent them from collapsing in accordance with Section 31 50 00.
b. Remove shoring as backfilling progresses but only when the area
where shoring is being removed is stable and safe from caving or
collapse.
10. Drainage:
a. Control grading around structures so that ground is pitched to
prevent water from running into excavated areas or damaging
structures.
b. Maintain excavations where foundations, floor slabs, equipment
support pads or fill material are to be placed free of water.
c. Provide pumping required to keep excavated spaces clear of water
during construction in accordance with Subsection 3.07.B.6,
Dewatering, of these Specifications.
d. Should any groundwater, not noted in the Construction Documents
be encountered in the excavation, notify Engineer.
e. Provide free discharge of water by trenches, pumps, wells, well
points, or other means as necessary and drain to point of disposal
that will not damage existing or new construction or interfere with
construction operations in accordance with Paragraph 3.07.B.6,
Dewatering, of this Section.
11. Frost protection:
a. Do not place foundations, slabs-on-grade, equipment support pads,
or fill material on frozen ground.
b. When freezing temperatures may be expected, do not excavate to
full depth indicated, unless foundations, floor slabs, equipment
support pads, or fill material can be placed immediately after
excavation has been completed and approved.
c. Protect excavation from frost if placing of concrete or fill is delayed.
d. Where a concrete slab is a base slab-on-grade located under and
within a structure that will not be heated, protect subgrade under
the slab from becoming frozen until final acceptance of the Project
by the Owner.
e. Protect subgrade under foundations of a structure from becoming
frozen until structure is completed and heated to a temperature of
at least 50 deg. F.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 22 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
C. Structural Fill and Backfill below Foundations, Base Slabs, Floor Slabs, Equipment
Support Pads and Piping:
1. General:
a. Subgrade to receive fill or backfill shall be free of undesirable
material as determined by the Engineer and scarified to a depth of
6 inches and compacted to density specified herein.
b. Surface may be stepped by not more than 12 inches per step or
may be sloped at not more than 2 percent.
c. Do not place any fill or backfill material until subgrade under fill or
backfill has been inspected and approved by the Engineer as being
free of undesirable material and compacted to specified density.
2. Obtain approval of fill and backfill material and source from the Engineer
prior to placing the material.
3. Granular fill under floor slabs-on-grade: Place all floor slabs-on-grade on
a minimum of 6 inches of material meeting the requirements of Table 1,
Structural Backfill, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Vapor barrier: Install a continuous vapor barrier under floor slabs-on-grade
as required by Section 07 11 19 and shown on Contract Plans.
5. Fill and backfill placement:
a. Prior to placing fill and backfill material, optimum moisture and
maximum density properties for proposed material shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval.
b. Place fill and backfill material in 6 inches lifts as necessary to obtain
required compaction density.
c. Compact material by means of equipment of sufficient size and
proper type to obtain specified density.
d. Use hand operated equipment for filling and backfilling immediately
next to walls.
e. Do not place fill and backfill when the temperature is less than 40
deg. F and when subgrade to receive fill and backfill material is
frozen, wet, loose, or soft.
f. Use vibratory equipment to compact granular material; do not use
water.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 23 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
6. Where fill material is required below foundations, place fill material,
conforming to the required density and moisture content, outside the
exterior limits of foundations located around perimeter of structure the
following horizontal distance whichever is greater:
a. As required to provide fill material to indicated finished grade.
b. 5 feet.
c. Distance equal to depth of compacted fill below bottom of
foundations.
Or
d. As directed by the Engineer.
D. Filling and Backfilling Outside of Structures.
1. This paragraph of this Specification applies to fill and backfill placed outside
of structures above bottom level of both foundations and piping but not
under paving.
2. Provide material, in accordance with Table 1, Structural Backfill as
approved by the Engineer for filling and backfilling outside of structures.
3. Fill and backfill placement:
a. Prior to placing fill and backfill material, determine optimum
moisture and maximum density properties for the proposed material
and submit to the Engineer for approval.
b. Place fill and backfill material in 6-inch lifts as necessary to obtain
required compaction density.
c. Compact material with equipment of proper type and size to obtain
density specified.
d. Use only hand operated equipment for filling and backfilling within
a distance of 5 feet from walls, retaining walls and other concrete
structures.
e. Do not place fill or backfill material when temperature is less than
40 deg. F and when subgrade to receive material is frozen, wet,
loose, or soft.
f. Use vibratory equipment for compacting granular material; do not
use water except as a means to reach optimum moisture.
4. Backfilling against walls or other concrete structures:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 24 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
a. Do not backfill around any part of structures until each part has
reached specified 28-day compressive strength and backfill
material has been approved by the Engineer.
b. Do not start backfilling until concrete forms have been removed,
trash removed from excavations, pointing of masonry work,
concrete finishing, dampproofing and waterproofing have been
completed.
c. Bring backfill and fill up uniformly around the structures and
individual walls, piers, or columns.
E. Backfilling Outside of Structures Under Piping or Paving:
1. When backfilling outside of structures requires placing backfill material
under piping or paving, the material shall be placed from bottom of
excavation to underside of piping or paving at the density required for fill
under piping or paving as indicated in this Section.
2. This compacted material shall extend transversely to the centerline of
piping or paving a horizontal distance each side of the exterior edges of
piping or paving equal to the depth of backfill measured from bottom of
excavation to underside of piping or paving.
3. Provide special compacted bedding or compacted subgrade material under
piping or paving as required by other Sections of these Specifications.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Excavation and backfill will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by
the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans
will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Excavation and backfill will be acceptably excavated or filled within the limits of
lines and slope described in typical sections and cross sections in the plans and
contract documents. Measurement will be by type of excavation or backfill:
1. Excavation.
2. Embankment fill and borrow used as embankment fill.
3. Structural Excavation and Structural Backfill.
4. Removal of unsuitable material and backfill with approved suitable material.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 25 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
C. Materials excavated outside of the designated sections or from borrow pits will not
be measured. When the project is constructed essentially to the dimensions
shown on the plans no further measurement will be required, and payment will be
made for the quantities shown in the contract for the various bid items involved. If
disagreement exists between the Contractor and the Engineer as to the accuracy
of the plan quantities, either party shall, before any work is started which would
affect the measurement, have the right to request in writing and thereby cause the
quantities involved to be measured. If measured quantities do not reveal a
discrepancy when compared to plan quantities, the Contractor must pay for the
cost of the Engineer to perform measurements and calculations of quantities.
D. Embankment of the various types, as specified, will be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable,
as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
Embankment will be measured in the space occupied within the limits of lines and
slopes described in the typical sections and cross sections as defined in the plans
and contract documents. No payment will be made for the volume of material
bladed off the top of roadway embankments outside of the roadbed limits. No
allowance for shrinkage or compaction will be made. If disagreement exists
between the Contractor and the Engineer as to the accuracy of the plan quantities,
either party shall, before any work is started which would affect the measurement
have the right to request in writing and thereby cause the quantities to be
measured. If measured quantities requested by the Contractor do not differ from
plan quantities, then the Contractor must pay the Engineer’s costs to verify
measurements of quantities.
E. When, in the judgment of the Engineer, it is impracticable, because of mixture of
materials, to measure the actual unit content of each kind of material the
Contractor and the Engineer shall agree upon payment provisions prior to
proceeding with work. The Engineer will, from time to time, make such
measurements as will best aid him in arriving at a just and equitable conclusion as
to the proper percentage of the materials of the different classifications in the entire
excavation, and he will so separate and classify the different materials.
F. Structural Excavation, Structure Backfill and Pervious Backfill material will be
measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as
contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of
values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 26 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Excavation will be paid for at the contract unit price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, of excavation of proper classification within the limits of lines
and slopes described in the typical sections and cross sections as defined in the
plans and Contract Documents. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals
necessary for excavating, loading, transporting, and depositing materials in
embankment, spoil bank, stockpile, or other designated location by whatever
method is adopted, including all permission/permitting for haul operations.
B. Embankments will be paid for at the contract unit price, as listed on the Schedule
of Quantities and Prices, of embankment of proper type within the limits of lines
and slopes described in the typical sections and cross sections as defined in the
plans and Contract Documents. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, water for compaction, supervision,
and incidentals necessary for excavating, loading, transporting, and depositing
borrow material when required; loading, transporting, and depositing select
material from stockpile when required; loading, transporting, and distributing water;
spreading, aerating if necessary, and compacting the embankment material; and
finishing the embankment sections to the designated line and grades.
C. Structural backfill and pervious backfill material will be paid for at the contract unit
price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, of material within the
limits of lines and slopes described in the typical section and cross sections as
defined in the Plans and Contract Documents. This priced shall be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, material, tools, equipment, supplies water for
compaction, supervision and tools necessary for backfilling structures in
accordance with these Specifications and the designated lines and grades in the
Plans.
D. Removal of unsuitable material and backfill with approved suitable material will be
paid for at the contract unit price per unit of material within the limits of lines and
slopes agreed upon by the Contractor and Engineer and measured as applicable.
This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, material, tools,
equipment, supplies water for compaction, supervision and tools necessary for
excavating and backfilling areas of unsuitable material in accordance with these
Specifications.
END OF SECTION 31 20 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 00 - 27 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 31 20 50
REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED SOILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
General: Soil on Project Worksite shall be managed per Contractor’s approved Soil
Management Plan within confines of Project Worksite including chemically-impacted
soil that is encountered which exceeds thresholds for hazardous waste per these
specifications.
1. Soil for export must undergo sampling and chemical analyses.
Section Includes:
1. Methods and procedures to be used for stockpiling,
characterization, disposal of excess soil (export soil)
2. Methods and procedures to be used for handling and disposal of
unanticipated chemically-impacted soil (including hazardous waste)
encountered during excavation activities anywhere on Worksite.
Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions
2. Section 01 35 44 – Environmental Safety and Health Program
3. Section 01 57 19 – Temporary Environmental Controls
4. Section 31 11 00 – Site Clearing
5. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork
6. Section 32 91 00 – Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling and
Seeding
1.02 DEFINITIONS
SOIL CATEGORIES
Category 1: Non-Impacted Soil – Soil exhibiting no signs of visible staining, odor,
discoloration, free product or with a portable photoionization detector (PID) reading
less than 50 parts per million by volume (ppmv) when calibrated to hexane and held
no more than 3 inches from the soil surface.
Category 2: Potentially Chemically-Impacted Soil – In-place soil exhibiting visible
staining, odor, discoloration, free product or with a portable photoionization detector
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 1 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
(PID) reading equal to or exceeding 50 ppmv when calibrated to hexane and held no
more than 3 inches from the soil surface. This is a temporary soil category.
Potentially-contaminated soil is sampled and subjected to laboratory analysis after
which it will be categorized as non-impacted soil, chemically-impacted soil or
hazardous waste soil depending upon the laboratory analytical results and the
established regulatory concentration limits that distinguish between the categories.
Category 3: Chemically-Impacted Soil – Excavated soil that is sampled and analyzed
by a laboratory where the results show concentrations of chemicals of concern
(COCs) exceeding the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA)
Regional Screening Levels (RSLs), with the exception of arsenic, for which the RSL
shall be modified from 1.6 mg/kg to 12 mg/kg, but below concentrations that meet or
exceed the criteria of hazardous waste soil as defined in 22 CCR section 66261.3
Category 4: Hazardous Waste Soil – Excavated soil that is sampled and analyzed by
a laboratory where the results show concentrations of COCs meeting the criteria of
hazardous waste as defined in 22 CCR section 66261.3. The hazardous waste soil
is classified as either being subject to RCRA, found in 40 CFR, or it is subject to HSC
and 22 CCR. The hazardous waste categories include acutely hazardous waste,
extremely hazardous waste, non-RCRA hazardous waste, RCRA hazardous waste,
special waste and universal waste (further described in Article 3.05 D).
DEFINITIONS (OTHER)
Characterization of Soil – Soil identified as as potentially chemically-impacted soil
(temporary soil category) shall be sampled and analyzed by a NELAP-certified
environmental laboratory to determine which of the three final soil categories (non-
impacted, chemically-impacted or hazardous waste soil) the soil belongs to in order
to determine the proper handling, stockpiling, storage, and off-site disposal
requirements described in this section.
Volatile organic compounds, or VOCs - organic chemical compounds whose
composition makes it possible for them to evaporate under normal atmospheric
conditions of temperature and pressure. Since the volatility of a compound is
generally higher the lower its boiling point temperature, the volatility of organic
compounds are sometimes defined and classified by their boiling points.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS – PROCESS RELATIVE TO DISCOVERY OF
POTENTIALLY CHEMICALLY– IMPACTED SOIL
Due to the potential for encountering chemically-impacted soil anywhere on Worksite,
Contractor's excavation work shall be modified as follows:
1. Comply with requirements outlined in this Section.
2. Use reference documents and data provided by the Authority to
anticipate the location and extent of chemically-impacted soil within
the work area.
3. When required, characterize soil in-place to determine which of the
four categories the soil belongs to.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 2 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
4. Notify the Authority upon discovery of chemically-impacted soil or
hazardous waste soil.
5. Contractor shall perform sample collection from potentially
chemically- impacted soil in-place or in stockpiles for transport and
disposal, as required. Refer to Article 3.05.
6. If so directed, based on observation(s) and initial analysis(es),
segregate and stockpile soil based on category: 1. non-impacted
soil; 2. potentially chemically-impacted soil (until final soil category
is determined); 3. chemically-impacted soil; and 4. hazardous waste
soil. Separating stockpiles based on soil categories prevents cross-
contamination and prevents stormwater discharge from soil
categories 2, 3 and 4 stockpiles, in accordance with the Project
Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).
7. If soils are documented as a result of sampling and analyses as
category 3 – chemically-impacted soil, then Contractor shall
propose appropriate procedures for loading, transport, and disposal
of chemically-impacted soil at an appropriately permitted disposal
facility. Contractor to submit proposed procedures per Article 1.04
below, for review and approval by the Authority.
8. If soils are documented as result of sampling and analyses as
category 4 – hazardous waste soil, as set forth by regulatory
agencies, then Contractor shall propose appropriate procedures for
loading, transport, and disposal of hazardous waste soil at an
appropriately permitted disposal facility. Contractor to submit
proposed procedures per Article 1.04 below, for review and
approval by the Authority.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submit under Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
Before starting soil grading, excavating, and handling, Contractor shall submit:
1. Contractor's qualifications for handling and disposing of chemically-
impacted soil as well as qualifications for handling and disposing of
soil defined as hazardous waste.
2. Soil Management Plan, which shall include:
Worksite plan showing proposed locations on Project Worksite of
temporary storage stockpiles. Indicate distances to existing storm
drain catch basins. Show location of storage tanks for leachate and
stormwater pumping.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 3 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
Details of stockpile design, including liner material and thickness,
foundation material with method of protecting liner against
equipment damage, berm materials and height, spacing of toe of
stockpile to berm, cover material and thickness, and sandbag
layout.
Soil category stockpile segregation and separation approach shall
be part of the stockpile design. The stockpile design shall recognize
and provide for the four soil categories: 1. non-impacted soil; 2.
potentially chemically-impacted soil; 3. chemically-impacted soil;
and 4. hazardous waste soil.
Means and methods for characterization sampling, laboratory
analysis, and waste profiling.
Details for handling material that is potentially-contaminated or has
previously been categorized as chemically-impacted soil or
hazardous waste soil.
Method for equipment decontamination after completion of
chemically-impacted soil and hazardous waste soil work. Material
temporarily categorized as potentially chemically-impacted that has
been in contact with equipment should be treated as chemically-
impacted unless and until laboratory results indicated it is non-
contaminated material. Include decontamination structural best
management practices (BMPs) such as rumble plates, tire
brooming, and bermed washdown area.
Sampling procedure and characterization plan for leachate liquids
and name of independent analytical laboratory.
BMPs for containing chemically-impacted soil, hazardous waste
soil and wash water within staging area, as discussed in Section 32
91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling and Seeding.
BMPs for containing runoff from Project grading areas, as
discussed in Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top
Soiling and Seeding.
3. Submit Credentials of supervising personnel holding State of
California registered professional geologist or professional engineer
license.
Before starting soil grading, excavating, and handling, provide for the Authority’s file
copy of Contractor’s site-specific Health and Safety Plan (HASP), complying with 29
CFR 1910.120.
40-hour Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER)
training certificates (Code of Federal Regulations [CFR] Standard 29 Part 1910.120)
and current 8-hour refresher training certificates for workers planned to be involved
in excavation and handling of potentially chemically-impacted soil, chemically-
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 4 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
impacted soil and/or hazardous waste soil. HAZWOPER trained workers may also
be required if chemically-impacted soil or hazardous wates soil is to be considered
an exposure hazard to workers, in accordance with Contractors site-specific HASP.
Before starting soil grading, excavating, and handling, submit for the Authority’s
approval Contractor's plan for sequencing of excavation, hauling routes, and soil
stockpile management.
During excavation, handling and stockpiling work, submit:
1. Daily documentation of soil quantities excavated, classification of
soil, the procedures used for the handling of different soil categories
during the work, and quantities of each soil category exported.
After sample analysis, export of non-impacted soil shall comply with specifications
set out in Section 31 20 00 Earthwork.
The Authority, as the Generator of Waste, shall provide the following to the contractor:
1. EPA identification (ID) Number for this project, if applicable.
2. Generator name.
3. Generator address.
4. Site address.
5. Contact name and phone number of the Authority representative
who will be signing the bills of lading (for soil categories of non-
impacted and chemically-impacted) and manifests (for the
hazardous waste soil category).
Submit for the Authority approval letters of commitment from waste transporters
agreeing to handle soil that shall be disposed of off-site as as chemically-impacted
soil or hazardous waste soil. Commitment letters shall include:
1. EPA ID number.
2. California Department of Transportation (DOT) license.
3. Equipment and methods for loading and hauling.
Submit for the Authority’s files, copies of waste profile documentation that Contractor
submitted to proposed disposal facilities for chemically-impacted soil.
Submit for the Authority’s files, copies of hazardous waste profile documentation that
Contractor submitted to proposed hazardous waste soil disposal facilities.
Before soil loading for disposal as chemically-impacted soil, submit to the Authority
for review and signature completed copies of bills of lading for each load of
chemically-impacted soil that has been properly characterized as chemically-
impacted soil based on laboratory analysis results.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 5 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
Before soil loading for disposal as hazardous waste soil, submit to the Authority for
review and signature completed copies of waste manifests for each load of
hazardous waste soil that has been properly characterized as hazardous waste soil
based on laboratory analysis results.
Within two business days after notification of receipt at disposal facility, submit for the
Authority’s files completed bill of lading and waste manifest records.
Submit for the Authority’s files Contractor's log for tracking disposal information for
chemically-impacted soil and hazardous waste soil removed from Worksite. Disposal
log shall include:
1. Name and location of disposal facility.
2. Bills of lading/Waste manifests numbers.
3. Date transported from Worksite.
4. Date received at disposal facility.
5. Hazardous waste type (for hazardous waste soil).
6. Estimated load weight at departure from Worksite.
7. Load weight as measured at disposal facility.
Submit for the Authority’s files, copies of weight records obtained from disposal
facilities.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Contractor Licensing – Excavation and handling of hazardous waste soil shall be
performed by Contractor appropriately licensed in the State of California and with
Hazardous Substance Removal Certification (CCR, Division 9, Title 16, Article 3.
Classification). This same Contractor shall have a valid South Coast Air Quality
Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1166 Various Locations Permit to be used at
Project Worksite. If the material being excavated and handled has not yet been
categorized, for the purposes of contractor licensing the hazardous waste soil
requirements shall apply.
Training – Personnel working with hazardous waste soil shall be 40-hour trained
under HAZPOWER requirements (29 CFR 1910.120) and have current 8-hour
HAZPOWER refresher within the past year. If the material being excavated and
handled has not yet been categorized, for the purposes of contractor training the
hazardous waste soil requirements shall apply.
Contractor shall comply with HAZWOPER requirements including:
1. Training.
2. Training refreshers.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 6 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
3. Medical surveillance.
4. Safety and health program implementation.
Contractor shall also prepare site-specific HASP complying with HAZWOPER
requirements for excavation and other work related to excavating, handling or
otherwise coming in contact with potentially chemically-impacted soil, chemically-
impacted soil and hazardous waste soil.
Contractor licensing and training for personnel working with soil identified as
chemically-impacted soil or hazardous waste soil shall be determined by Contractor’s
site-specific HASP.
Personnel lacking HAZWOPER training shall not excavate, handle or otherwise
come into contact with potentially chemically-impacted soil, chemically-impacted soil,
or hazardous waste soil. Contractor shall designate, mark, and enforce an exclusion
zone in accordance with Contractor’s site-specific HASP to prevent unauthorized
contact with potentially chemically-impacted soil, chemically-impacted soil and
hazardous waste soil. Contractor shall also supply, construct, and maintain a
decontamination area for personnel and equipment at the perimeter of the exclusion
zone.
Emissions Control – Contractor must comply with requirements of SCAQMD,
including:
1. Rule 401, Visible Emissions.
2. Rule 402, Nuisance.
3. Rule 403, Fugitive Dust.
4. Rule 1166, Volatile Organic Compound Emissions.
Stormwater Pollution Prevention – Contractor must comply with requirements of the
SWPPP, and as described in Section 01 5719, Temporary Environmental Controls.
Soil Profiling and Disposal – Chemically-impacted soil, hazardous waste soil, or
regulated waste generated from being in contact with these soil categories (such as
decon water) shall be profiled for transport and disposal at facilities permitted to
accept such material. Contractor shall conduct soil profiling in accordance with
procedures outlined in Article 3.06.
Off-Site Soil Transportation – Chemically-impacted soil and hazardous waste soil
shall only be transported off-site by DOT-licensed waste haulers permitted to
transport chemically-impacted soil, hazardous waste soil or both. Shipping
documents acceptable to receiving facility and in compliance with state and federal
requirements shall be used for all soil designated for off-site disposal. Each load must
be accompanied by a signed bill of lading or waste manifest as applicable. Each load
must be completely covered with a secured tarp or container lid prior to departure.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 7 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
1.06 REQUIREMENTS FOR SOIL CATEGORIES TO BE EXPORTED
Non-impacted soil, if it is excess and has no use on the work site, can remain in
stockpiles stored onsite indefinitely (and if space available) until such time a beneficial
use is identified. If non-impacted soil is to be exported, the final destination(s) should
be identified in the Contractor’s Soil Management Plan. The receiving location(s) shall
be described in sufficient detail to confirm that offsite re-use of the non-impacted soil
at the receiving location(s) is compliant with all regulatory requirements.
Potentially chemically-impacted soil shall not be exported until such time it is
categorized via laboratory analysis as non-impacted, chemically-impacted or
hazardous waste soil. Because the final category of potentially chemically-impacted
soil is unknown, stockpiles shall not remain stored onsite longer than 90 days unless
sampling and subsequent categorization occurs within this timeframe.
Chemically-impacted soil shall not be exported until sufficient laboratory analysis has
been conducted to meet the characterization requirements of the receiving facility(s).
The receiving facility(s) soil characterization sampling requirements shall be included
in the Contractor’s Soil Management Plan. Stockpiles of chemically-impacted soil
shall not remain stored onsite longer than 120 days from the accumulation start date.
Hazardous waste soil shall not be exported until sufficient laboratory analysis has
been conducted to meet the characterization requirements of the receiving facility(s).
The receiving facility(s) soil characterization sampling requirements shall be included
in the Contractor’s Soil Management Plan. Stockpiles of hazardous waste soil shall
not remain stored onsite longer than 90 days from the accumulation start date..
All soil categories shall be handled and stockpiled separately from other categories
and stockpiles labeled as to which category each belongs. Handling, separate
category soil stockpiles, and stockpile labeling shall be maintained until any or all soil
categories are prepared to be exported offsite. Preparation for export means all
required laboratory analyses, signed bills of lading, signed manifests, properly
permitted transporters, and receiving facilities pre-approval are in place.
1.07 PERMITS AND FEES
Obtain and pay for permits and fees required for off-site disposal of the three
categories of soil. 1. Non-impacted soil (“clean” excess soil); 2. Chemically- impacted
soil; and 3. Hazardous waste soil (see 4.02 for incremental cost reimbursement).
1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Pre-construction Conference: Contractor shall conduct an on-site pre-construction
conference to review requirements of this Section before beginning earthwork.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS – ENVIRONMENTAL FINDINGS
The findings of any previous environmental site assessments and soil sampling will
be provided by the Authority as an attachment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 8 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR PROPER SOIL STOCKPILING
Stockpile Sandbags: Fabricate from woven, ultraviolet-resistant materials that are
sufficiently close-knit to prevent fines from migrating out through bag with bags tied
tightly closed.
1. Burlap bags, if used, shall be lined with plastic.
2. Tires and lined paper bags shall not be used.
3. Sand shall be clean, with 100 percent passing No. 8 sieve.
4. Each bag shall weigh 40 to 60 pounds when filled.
Stockpile Foundation:
1. Existing intact asphalt concrete or concrete pavement.
2. Bare dirt grade condition: Protection to liner shall be at minimum 2
inches of sand on 8 ounce per square yard geotextile over liner.
Stockpile Liners: 60 mil high density polyethylene (HDPE) plastic sheeting, minimum.
Stockpile Covers: 18 mil polyolefin plastic sheeting, minimum.
2.02 STORAGE TANKS FOR WATER CONTAINMENT
Leachate and Stormwater Collection Storage Tanks: Minimum storage tank capacity
shall be 20,000 gallons.
Tanks shall have sample ports and drain valves to facilitate characterization and
disposal of accumulated liquid.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 NOTIFICATION
Contractor shall notify the Authority in conformance with this Section, of discovery of
potentially chemically-impacted soil, which has been identified by staining,
discoloration, odor, free product or a PID reading of 50 ppmv or greater.
3.02 SOIL HANDLING
When working anywhere on the Project Worksite, Contractor shall observe
excavated soil for visual signs of staining, discoloration, free product and odors. the
Authority, at their own discretion, may also field screen excavated soil by observation
as well as screen for the presence of petroleum or other VOCs using a PID calibrated
to appropriate standard(s), such as SCAQMD Rule 1166 specifications for VOC
screening. Soil exhibiting signs of staining, odor, discoloration or free product or
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 9 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
having a PID reading equal to or greater than 50 ppmv shall be identified as
potentially chemically-impacted soil. Contractor shall stop excavation until properly
trained personnel are mobilized to Worksite, or continue to segregate and stockpile
soil separately from non-impacted soil. As approved by the Authority, Contractor shall
continue excavation in this area or shall proceed to stockpile potentially chemically-
impacted soil to allow sampling and analysis for soil characterization and to determine
the final soil category.
Contractor shall maintain field notes of visual observations, odor detections, PID
readings, and locations of these observations and readings.
Contractor shall sample and analyze excess soil that will be exported from Project
Worksite for characterization prior to export. Analytical results will be used to
determine appropriate re-use or disposal of export material per Article 3.05.
3.03 SOIL SEGREGATION AND STOCKPILING
All soil categories: Soil stockpiling activities must conform to sedimentation and
erosion control measure requirements as described in Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion,
Sediment Control, Top Soiling and Seeding.
All soil categories: Plastic sheeting shall be secured with sand bags while in storage
on the Project Worksite and while being used to cover stockpiles to prevent plastic
from blowing into other areas of the Project Worksite.
All soil categories: Due to limitations of the Project Worksite, stockpiling storage
space will be limited, and materials shall be exported immediately where possible.
Stockpile information and storage durations must be submitted to the Authority and
approved by the Engineer.
Non-impacted soil category: Contractor shall separately stockpile and protect in like
manner as other soil categories described in Section 3.03, except that stockpile liner,
stockpile cover, and special labeling will not be required except to mitigate other
conditions, such as fugitive dust or stormwater runoff.
Potentially chemically-impacted soil and chemically-impacted soil categories:
Contractor shall stockpile and segregate these two soil categories as follows:
1. Stockpiles shall be placed at locations such that they are protective
of surface water bodies and storm drain locations.
2. Potentially chemically-impacted and chemically-impacted
stockpiled soil shall be placed on stockpile liner.
3. Potentially chemically-impacted and chemically-impacted soil shall
be placed on stockpile liner such that there is a minimum of two feet
of excess stockpile liner around sides of stockpile.
4. Seams in stockpile liner shall have a minimum 12-inch overlap.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 10 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
5. Upon completion of stockpile and at the end of each day, stockpiles
shall be covered with stockpile cover.
6. During the workday only the working surface of stockpile shall be
uncovered.
7. Each stockpile of potentially chemically-impacted soil shall be
labeled with stake or paddle containing an identification number,
date stockpile was generated, and words “Potentially Chemically-
Impacted Soil.” Soil confirmed via laboratory analysis to be
contaminated soil, but not hazardous waste soil, shall be labeled to
include the words “Chemically-Impacted Soil”.
8. At end of each day, document locations of potentially chemically-
impacted soil and chemically-impacted soil stockpiles on a site
map.
9. Potentially chemically-impacted soil and chemically-impacted soil
shall be stored in stockpiles for not longer than 120 days.
Hazardous waste soil category: Contractor shall stockpile and segregate this soil
category as follows:
1. Stockpiles shall be placed at locations such that they are protective
of surface water bodies or storm drain locations.
2. Hazardous waste soil storage onsite shall not exceed 90 days from
the date that accumulation started.
3. Hazardous waste stockpiled soil shall be placed on stockpile liner.
4. Hazardous waste soil shall be placed on stockpile liner such that
there is a minimum of two feet of excess stockpile liner around sides
of stockpile.
5. Seams in stockpile liner shall have minimum 12-inch overlap.
6. Upon completion of stockpile and at end of each day, stockpiles
shall be covered with stockpile cover.
7. During the workday only working surface of stockpile shall be
uncovered.
8. Each stockpile of hazardous waste soil shall be labeled with stake
or paddle containing EPA ID number, date stockpile was generated,
and words “Hazardous Waste Soil.”
9. At end of each day, document locations of hazardous waste soil
stockpiles on a site map.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 11 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
3.04 MONITORING AND CONTROLS
Monitor air quality continuously during excavation operations at potentially
chemically-impacted soil locations, to ensure worker safety and compliance with air
monitoring permit requirements.
Implement best available control measures to comply with SCAQMD PM10 emission
limits. If necessary, place miniature real-time aerosol monitor (MiniRam) on the
prevailing downwind side of the soil excavation area to monitor for airborne
particulate emissions during excavation or soil handling activities.
Prevent stormwater runoff from flowing into or out of excavated areas or stockpile
areas as described in SWPPP.
Remove, store, sample, characterize, and recycle or dispose of accumulated
stormwater and leachate in excavations or stockpile areas. Construct collection
sumps at low points and pump to temporary storage tanks at intervals as required to
prevent overflow, but not less than weekly.
3.05 SOIL PROFILING FOR DISPOSAL
Excess soil for export shall be sampled for proper profiling prior to off-site disposal.
Laboratory analysis shall include, at a minimum:
1. Total petroleum hydrocarbons by EPA Method 8015.
2. Volatile organic compounds by EPA method 8260.
3. California Title 22 metals by EPA methods 6010 and 7471.
4. Any additional analytical parameters required by the receiving
facility.
Contractor shall sample, analyze, and receive analytical results for soil to establish
profile prior to export and disposal.
Contractor’s soil samples shall be transported in cooler with ice to a State of California
certified environmental laboratory within the laboratory specified holding time.
Samples shall remain in cooler with ice. Completed chain-of-custody documentation
shall accompany these samples.
Soil identified as hazardous waste soil shall be transported by Contractor off-site for
appropriate disposal at an appropriately-permitted facility that is approved by the
Authority. Basis for off-site disposal of soil as hazardous waste includes results of soil
sample analyses equaling or exceeding California Title 22 Total Threshold Limit
Concentrations (TTLC) or Soluble Threshold Limit Concentrations (STLC) or US EPA
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) maximum concentrations, where
applicable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 12 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
In the event additional soil sampling and analyses are required by Contractor’s
proposed disposal facility for soil profiling and acceptance by disposal facility,
Contractor shall perform those additional sampling and analyses as part of disposal.
3.06 OFF-SITE DISPOSAL
Hazardous waste materials shall be classified and manifested pursuant to 40 CFR
and 22 CCR.
Use transporter(s) identified in letters of commitment and approved by the Authority
for off-site transport of hazardous waste. Use of substitute or additional transporters
must have previous written approval by the Authority.
Use state-approved manifest system so that hazardous waste hauled from Worksite
can be tracked from point of generation to ultimate disposal. Manifests must comply
with provisions of state and federal DOT regulations. Use Department of Toxic
Substances Control (DTSC) Form 8022A/Environmental Protection Agency Form
8700-22 (Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest). If receiving disposal site is outside of
California, Contractor shall comply also with regulations of the state or states in which
materials are being transported to and disposed of. Contractor shall be responsible
for providing completed manifests and supporting documentation to the Authority for
each load prior to shipment.
Contractor shall be responsible for accurate and timely completion of final waste
manifests. Transporters must sign appropriate portions of manifest and must comply
with provisions established in state and federal DOT regulations. Disposal facility
must sign appropriate portions of manifest and return it to Contractor on day of
disposal.
Transport chemically-impacted soil only to off-site disposal/recycling facility approved
by the Authority or in the case of hazardous waste soil, only to off-site disposal facility
approved by the Authority.
Use appropriate vehicles and operating practices to prevent spillage or leakage of
waste materials from vehicles during transport.
Trucks shall be properly lined with material compatible with wastes to be hauled.
Upon completion of truck loading, waste shall be covered with a tarp or container lid
prior to departure.
Thoroughly decontaminate and inspect transport vehicles before leaving work area.
Each vehicle leaving work area shall be inspected by Contractor to ensure that no
soil adheres to wheels or undercarriage. Remove soil at the work area or
decontamination pad before allowing the truck to leave the Worksite.
Remedy situations involving materials spilled in transit or mud and dust tracked off-
site. Cost of remedy, including fines, shall be sole responsibility of Contractor.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 13 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
Coordinate schedule for transport vehicle arrival at Worksite and disposal/recycling
facility to meet project schedule. Schedule shall be compatible with soil stockpiling
limitations and availability of equipment and personnel for material handling
operations.
Contractor is responsible for all permits required for transport of chemically-impacted
soil and hazardous waste soil.
3.07 NON-IMPACTED EXCESS SOIL DISPOSAL OFF-SITE
Contractor shall transport non-impacted excess soil to an appropriately licensed off-
site disposal/recycling/receiving facility approved by the Authority. Unlicensed
facilities, for which Contractor intends to provide non-impacted soil, must be approved
by the Authority prior to transporting soil.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
ALLOWANCE – Removal and Disposal of each category of soil, Allowance for [TBD
by Project] CY, will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Contractor and
verified by the Authority or their designee. Each category of soil will be measured in-
situ in cubic yards.
1. UNIT COST – Contractor shall provide unit costs per cubic yard that
represent the incremental costs of handling and disposing of the
three final soil categories over and above the base cost of earthwork
under bid item 31 20 00.01.
The total Allowance shall be for [TBD by Project] CY multiplied by:
2. Incremental Unit Cost per CY for non-impacted soil
3. Incremental Unit Cost per CY for chemically-impacted soil
4. Incremental Unit Cost per CY for hazardous waste soil
4.02 PAYMENT
ALLOWANCE – Removal and Disposal of the three final soil categtories will be paid
from an allowance included on the approved Schedule of Quantities based on the
incremental labor, equipment, and handling costs incurred to dispose of each
category of soil over and above normal earthwork. These incremental costs will be
measured based on the total volume of each category of soil vs total volume of
earthwork.
For example, for 5000 cubic yards of earthwork, if based on laboratory analysis, 20%
of the soil was categorized as chemically-impacted, the Authority would pay for 5000
cubic yards of earthwork (paid under bid item 31 20 00.01) and the incremental costs
incurred to handle and dispose of 1000 cubic yards of chemically-impacted soil under
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 14 ISSUED: May 2022
Section 31 20 50 CONTAMINATED SOILS
this allowance. The incremental costs will be paid based on the Unit Cost provided
by the Contractor and will require additional invoicing backup. Contractor will be
required to submit documentation of their additional incurred costs of handling and
disposing of each category of soil above and beyond the earthwork costs.
END OF SECTION 31 20 50
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 20 50 - 15 ISSUED: May 2022
SECTION 31 50 00
EXCAVATION SUPPORT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Minimum requirements for excavation and temporary excavation support
adjacent to railroad tracks.
a. Limitations on construction activities.
b. Installation, monitoring and removal requirements for temporary
excavation support systems.
c. Design, submittal and review requirements for excavations and
temporary excavation support.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
3. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel.
4. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Steel.
5. Section 31 11 00 - Site Clearing.
6. Section 31 11 50 - Demolition, Cutting and Patching.
7. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.
8. Section 32 90 00 - Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Topsoiling and Seeding.
9. Section 34 80 21 - Piling.
10. Section 32 12 00 - Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA).
11. Section 34 80 43 - Precast & Prestressed Concrete for Railroad Bridges.
12. Section 34 80 51 - Structural Steel for Railroad Bridges.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 50 00 Excavation Support
1.2 REFERENCES
A. SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submittals must be made in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
B. Contractor’s Superintendent:
1. The Contractor shall submit the company, contact information (address,
telephone and email), qualifications and record of relevant experience for
the Superintendent in charge of the excavation support work to SCRRA for
review and acceptance at least 30 days prior to construction.
C. Contractor’s Engineer:
1. Submit the name, company, contact information (address, telephone and
email), qualifications and record of relevant experience for the proposed
Contractor’s Engineer to SCRRA for review and acceptance at least 30
days prior to construction.
D. Design:
1. Unless otherwise approved by SCRRA, all projects will include detailed
design of excavations and temporary excavation support within the
Contract Documents (Plans, Specifications and Estimates).
2. Where detailed design of excavations and temporary excavation support is
included in the Contract Documents, design validation by the Contractor
and submittal of design calculations will not be required for excavations and
temporary excavation support constructed in conformance with the
Contract Documents. The Contractor must submit a written affidavit stating
that all aspects of the excavation and shoring will be constructed in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
3. Any deviation or modification to the design, details or construction phasing
of excavations and temporary excavation support from that shown in the
Contract Documents shall require pre-approval prior to construction.
Perform and submit design calculations in accordance with the SCRRA
Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria for any
proposed deviation or modification to the Contract Documents.
4. For alternate design of excavations and temporary excavation support by
the Contractor, perform design and provide all required submittals in
conformance with the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0,
Excavation Support Criteria, including the SCRRA Shoring Submittal
Design Checklist and the Design Exception Form, as applicable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 50 00 Excavation Support
5. Where detailed design of excavations and temporary excavation support is
not included in the Contract Documents, perform and submit design
calculations in accordance with the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual,
Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria.
E. Plans:
1. Prepare and submit detailed Plans of excavation limits, temporary
excavation support system(s) and all construction phasing and structural
details required for the Work. Clearly show any deviations or modifications
of excavations and temporary excavation support from that shown in the
Contract Documents. Plans must be provided in accordance with the
SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support
Criteria.
F. Site Specific Work Plan (SSWP):
1. At least 30 days prior to construction, submit a complete SSWP in
accordance with the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0,
Excavation Support Criteria and Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions,
including, but not necessarily limited to:
a. Required Work Windows.
b. Construction procedures, materials, equipment and crews).
c. Construction schedule.
d. Contingency plans.
G. Construction Verification:
1. The Contractor shall submit a letter to SCRRA confirming that the
excavation and temporary shoring system has been inspected and verified
to conform with the Contract Documents, approved working Plans and
accepted field modifications and design variances in accordance with the
SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support
Criteria. The letter must be signed and sealed by the Contractor's Engineer
who is a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of California.
H. Track Monitoring Plan:
1. The Contractor shall submit a detailed monitoring plan, including Plans and
procedures for inspection and surveying. The monitoring plan shall comply
with the Contract Documents, approved working Plans and the SCRRA
Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engineer in Responsible Charge:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 50 00 Excavation Support
1. Excavations and temporary excavation support shall be designed by a
licensed Professional Engineer in the State of California, civil or structural,
with the requisite qualifications described in the SCRRA Design Criteria
Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria.
2. Review and acceptance of submittals by SCRRA will not relieve the
Engineer in Responsible Charge of responsibility for the safe design of the
temporary shoring system, including responsibility for errors and omissions
in submittals.
B. Contractor:
1. Qualifications of the Contractor’s Superintendent who will be responsible
for excavation support system installation and removal must exceed the
minimum experience record described in the SCRRA Design Criteria
Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria. The Superintendent's
qualifications will be subject to review and acceptance by SCRRA.
2. Excavation or construction of excavation support systems shall not proceed
until the Contractor meets SCRRA safety training requirements, obtains a
Right-of-Entry agreement (for construction by third parties), and gains
acceptance of a SSWP from SCRRA.
3. The Contractor must retain a Contractor’s Engineer to verify construction
of excavations and temporary excavation support in conformance with the
Contract Documents and approved Working Plans. The Contractor’s
Engineer must be a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of
California, civil or structural, and meet the same qualifications described in
the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support
Criteria as the Engineer in Responsible Charge for design of the excavation
support system.
4. Review and acceptance of submittals by SCRRA will not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for the safe design and construction of the
temporary shoring system, including responsibility for errors and omissions
in submittals and construction deviations from accepted design plans.
Excavation safety shall be the responsibility of the Contractor performing
the shoring installation and excavation.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Contractor must execute Work under this Specification in such a manner as to
minimize impact to the daily operation of the rail, vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
B. The Contractor must barricade open excavations and post with warning lights
those excavations occurring on property adjacent to or within public access areas
and along the tracks in accordance with the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual,
Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria. Operate warning lights during hours
from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. Warning lights shall be
located to avoid shining directly into Locomotive Engineer’s eyes in oncoming
trains.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 50 00 Excavation Support
C. The Contractor must protect utilities, structures and facilities designated to be
protected in place from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement,
undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation and backfill
operations.
D. The Work shall allow rainfall to drain freely at all times in accordance with project
environmental requirements, permit conditions, and with Division 01 requirements.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor must protect against erosion and uncontrolled run-off within and
adjacent to right-of-way in accordance with the Project’s Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan, the approved National Pollution Discharge Elimination System
(NPDES) Permit, and in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
B. The Contractor must obtain all required permits for dewatering and legally dispose
of water from dewatering operations.
1. Comply with requirements of permits and agencies having jurisdiction over
the project site in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
C. Cleanliness, Sweeping and Dust Control shall be in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
D. Contractor must provide noise abatement as required by environmental permits or
local agency requirements in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish required excavation Plans to jurisdictional authorities and obtain permits
as required. Refer to Division 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Soil and rock materials for fill, backfill or subgrade preparation shall be in
accordance with Section 31 20 00 or as specified by the Engineer in Responsible
Charge.
B. Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) pavement shall meet the requirements of Section 32 12
00.
C. Protective Dividers: See Contract Documents and SCRRA Design Criteria
Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria.
D. Handrails and Walkways: See Contract Documents and SCRRA Design Criteria
Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 50 00 Excavation Support
E. Materials used in the excavation support system shall be new unless otherwise
approved by SCRRA. Structural materials that compose the excavation support
system shall meet the requirements for the applicable material type as listed,
unless specified otherwise by the Engineer in Responsible Charge in the Contract
Documents or approved Working Plans:
1. Structural steel: Section 05 12 23 for steel soldier piling and steel sheet
piling and Section 34 80 51 for all other structural steel members.
2. Structural metals other than steel: See Contract Documents.
3. Precast and prestressed concrete, including prestressing steel strand:
Section 34 80 43.
4. Structural concrete: Section 03 31 00.
5. Reinforcing steel: Section 03 21 00.
6. Soilcrete: See Contract Documents.
7. Timber lagging: See Contract Documents and SCRRA Design Criteria
Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria.
8. Ground anchors and rock anchors: See Contract Documents and SCRRA
Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Prior to ordering materials or commencing any work:
1. Examine the Contract Documents, inspect the site, obtain all available
Record Plans of existing structures and utilities and note all conditions and
limitations that may influence excavation and temporary excavation
support at the site.
2. Verify dimensions, elevations, extent of excavations and limits of
excavation support required for construction and notify SCRRA of any
discrepancies or omissions.
3. Assess the constructability of temporary excavation support systems
specified in the Contract Documents and the applicability of any proposed
method of support for the intended purpose.
B. Provide safe and stable excavations and maintain the integrity of excavations
throughout the duration of construction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 50 00 Excavation Support
C. Perform excavation and provide excavation support as required for construction in
conformance with applicable laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of federal,
state and local authorities, including furnishing any required excavation Plans and
obtaining any required permits.
3.2 ALTERNATE DESIGN
A. The Contractor will be allowed to propose and submit alternate methods, designs
and details for excavations and temporary excavation support. Only alternates
that comply with the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation
Support Criteria and satisfy the contract requirements will be considered for
acceptance. Acceptance of alternates will be at SCRRA’s sole discretion.
B. For alternate design submittal requirements, see 1.03 Submittals.
C. For alternate designs, the Contractor must retain a Contractor’s Design Engineer
who will be the Engineer in Responsible Charge for the excavation and will act as
the Contractor’s Engineer to verify construction in accordance with the design and
approved working Plans and specifications prepared by said Engineer.
D. Review time by SCRRA as indicated in the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual,
Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria must be considered in the construction
schedule. Impacts to the construction schedule stemming from review time or
rejection of modifications, substitutions or alternate designs shall not be cause for
additional compensation for delay time or extension of contract time for
performance.
E. The Contractor agrees, upon and at such a time that an alternate design is
submitted to SCRRA, to compensate SCRRA for the full cost of reviewing the
alternate design. This compensation shall include the initial review and any
subsequent review of additional submittals or re-submittals to address previous
SCRRA comments and must be paid regardless of the final disposition
(acceptance or rejection) of the alternate design.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation:
1. Initiate track monitoring program according to the approved Track
Monitoring Plan.
2. Protect existing surface and subsurface features on-site and adjacent to
site as required in Section 31 20 00 before excavating or installing
temporary excavation support systems.
3. Install protective divider and/or fencing adjacent to active tracks as required
in the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support
Criteria.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 50 00 Excavation Support
4. Provide HMA track underlay for active tracks adjacent to proposed
excavations as required in the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter
15.0, Excavation Support Criteria.
a. Install HMA in accordance with Section 32 12 00.
5. Perform site clearing in accordance with Section 31 11 00.
6. Perform demolition and removals in accordance with Section 31 11 50.
B. Operational Constraints:
1. Excavations and temporary excavation support systems shall be installed,
maintained, removed and backfilled without interference to rail operations
unless otherwise approved in advance by SCRRA.
2. Contractor operations will be constrained according to the approved SSWP
and as needed to avoid interference with railroad operations.
3. Contractor must complete installation and removal of excavation support
systems that require Work Windows within the approved time limits in the
SSWP and as directed by the SCRRA RWIC.
4. Reference the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation
Support Criteria for limitations to Contractor’s operations.
C. Excavations and Temporary Excavation Support:
1. Follow all requirements of the Contract Documents, approved working
Plans, and SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation
Support Criteria for excavations and temporary excavation support.
2. Install temporary excavation support systems in a manner that maintains
stability and integrity of the existing track, embankment and structures.
3. Perform excavation in accordance with Section 31 20 00 and in a manner
that maintains stability and integrity of any temporary excavation support
and the existing track, embankment and structures.
4. Temporary excavation support systems shall allow for permanent
construction without movement or settlement of adjacent track,
embankment or structures under all conditions and imposed loads for the
duration of construction.
5. Dewater excavations as required and maintain water levels that prevent
heave or piping.
6. Direct surface drainage away from existing tracks, structures, excavation
support systems and open excavations, slope base of excavation away
from support systems, and protect excavations and soil slopes from
erosion.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 50 00 Excavation Support
7. Remove temporary excavation support systems in a manner that maintains
stability and integrity of any remaining temporary excavation support and
the existing track, embankment and structures.
8. Perform backfilling in accordance with Section 31 20 00.
9. Remove rubbish and spoil piles and return the area to a condition equal to
or better than original and in accordance with Section 32 90 00.
D. Excavation Safety:
1. Perform excavation work in accordance with all applicable safety
regulations including, but not limited to, SCRRA, Federal OSHA,
Cal/OSHA, FRA and CPUC. See the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual,
Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria for complete references.
2. Excavation safety shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3. Contractor must immediately comply with orders from SCRRA to stop work
or perform immediate backfilling of open excavations or other emergency
remedial work when SCRRA, at its sole discretion, determines that the
safety of trains, passengers and SCRRA employees may be in peril.
E. Schedule:
1. Include excavation and temporary excavation support installation, use and
removal in the overall construction schedule and perform all work within the
schedule presented in the approved construction plan. See Division 01.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL/QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Construction Verification:
1. The Contractor's Engineer must inspect the as-built excavation support
system to verify that the system is constructed in accordance with the
Contract Documents and working Plans that have been reviewed and
accepted by SCRRA.
a. The number of site visits and the stage or stages of construction at
which an inspection shall be performed will be determined as a
condition of acceptance of the temporary shoring design to provide
oversight by the Contractor’s Engineer at critical construction
stages.
2. The Contractor must prepare a letter and submit to SCRRA confirming that
the shoring system has been inspected and verified. The letter must be
signed and sealed by the Contractor's Engineer who is a licensed
Professional Engineer in the State of California.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 50 00 Excavation Support
a. Any field changes must be noted and the effect of those changes
must be evaluated and reported by the Contractor’s Engineer. Any
deficiencies noted must be corrected by the Contractor.
Deficiencies and corrections must be noted in the letter with
verification of adequate correction by the Contractor’s Engineer.
B. Track Monitoring:
1. Monitor the excavation and the supported track in accordance with the
approved Track Monitoring Plan, as described in the SCRRA Design
Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0, Excavation Support Criteria, and as directed
by SCRRA.
2. Track monitoring data shall be delivered to SCRRA in a format similar to
that shown in the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, Chapter 15.0,
Excavation Support Criteria no later than one working day after survey
readings are taken.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE
A. Inspections:
1. Request, schedule and provide the means and access for inspection of the
installed excavation support system and finished excavation by SCRRA
before proceeding with construction.
2. Once the excavation is no longer required for construction activities,
request, schedule, and provide the means and access for inspection of the
excavation support system by SCRRA before proceeding with removal and
backfilling operations.
B. Final Acceptance:
1. Apply for and obtain final acceptance from SCRRA, with or without
inspection at the sole discretion of SCRRA, upon submittal of the final track
monitoring data.
a. Final track monitoring data shall be collected at the specified
number of days following the completion of removal and backfilling
operations per the approved Track Monitoring Plan.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.1 MEASUREMENT
A. No separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work
of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials,
tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as
shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by
the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 31 50 00 Excavation Support
B. Measurement and Payment for excavation support will be incidental items to
Section 31 20 00, Earthwork.
C. Submittals, working Plans, design modifications, structural detail changes,
alternate design, review of alternate design, SSWP, inspections, verifications and
track monitoring are incidental to Section 31 20 00 and no additional payment will
be made therefore.
D. Any required testing and sacrificial test elements are incidental to Section 31 20
00 and no additional payment will be made therefore.
END OF SECTION 31 50 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 31 50 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 12 00
HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
Work covered by this Section includes preparation, placement and compaction of all hot-mix
asphalt for roadways, highway-rail grade crossing paving, yards, access roads, miscellaneous
surface improvements in RR R/W, temporary improvements, dikes, asphalt overlays, and slurry
sealing the existing pavement. Section also includes the prime coat, tack coat, base course and
wearing course.
For HMA for Track and Bridges, see Section 34 80 33 – Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) for Track and
Bridges.
A. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork
3. Section 32 16 00 – Curbs, Gutters, and Sidewalks
4. Section 34 11 27 - Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base.
5. Section 34 71 50 – Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
6. Section 34 80 33 - Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) for Track and Bridges
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with the following Specifications, standards and recommended practices,
except as otherwise indicated:
1. SSPWC: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction current
edition, Section 200 Rock Materials, Section 203 Bituminous Materials, and
Section 302 Roadway Surfacing
2. SSPWC: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction current
edition, Section 203-5.4 Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry, and Section 302-4.6,
Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry.
B. Caltrans: State of California Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications, Section 39
C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 12 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 12 00 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
1. D2950, Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place
by Nuclear Methods
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Make all the following submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal
Procedures.
1. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2. Asphalt design mix
3. Emulsion – Aggregate Slurry Design Mix.
4. Test reports from an independent laboratory for materials and mix designs
or proof that mix designs and all Materials are currently approved for use
as asphaltic concrete pavement by Caltrans.
5. Tests reports for field density tests performed after placement and
compaction of each course of asphaltic concrete.
6. List of equipment to be used for the placing, spreading and compaction of
the Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement. Only equipment approved by the Engineer
shall be used. See also Section 01 43 23.
1.04 DELIVERABLES
A. Submit records of delivery of asphalt materials, identifying shipment numbers,
dates and quantities, material designations and temperature at the time of
placement.
B. Submit copies of aggregate tests, penetrations of asphalt cement, and
percentages by weight and number of pounds of each of the materials making up
the batch.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Asphalts:
1. Asphalt binder to be mixed with aggregate shall be steam-refined paving
asphalt of the grade designated in the special provisions.
a. The asphalt binder shall be in conformance with the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 92 and SSPWC Section 203.
b. Asphalt binder shall be selected based on project location using the
Caltrans Pavement Climate Regions Map.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 12 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 12 00 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
c. Asphalt binder for Miscellaneous Areas and Dikes shall be PG 70-
10 per Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 92
2. The amount of asphalt binder to be mixed with aggregate for asphalt
concrete shall be in conformance with the requirements of the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 92.
3. Liquid asphalt for the prime coat shall be of the grade designated by the
contract item or specified in the special provisions.
a. The liquid asphalt shall be in conformance with the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 94 and SSPWC Section 203-2.
4. Asphaltic emulsion for the tack coat shall be of the grade designated by the
Engineer.
a. The asphaltic emulsion shall be in conformance with the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 94 and SSPWC Section 203-1.
5. Paving asphalt to be used as a binder for pavement reinforcing fabric shall
be a steam-refined Pavement asphalt in conformance with the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 92.
a. The Pavement asphalt shall be PG 70-10.
B. Aggregate:
1. Aggregate shall be clean and free from decomposed materials, organic
material and other deleterious substances.
a. Coarse aggregate shall be material that is retained on the No. 4
sieve.
b. Fine aggregate shall be material that is passing the No. 4 sieve.
c. Supplemental fine aggregate is added fine material passing the No.
30 sieve, including, but not limited to, cement and stored fines from
dust collectors.
2. Aggregate grading shall be in conformance with the Caltrans Standard
Specifications, Section 39.
a. HMA Pavement – Base Course: Type A with ¾” maximum, coarse
aggregate gradation.
b. HMA Pavement – Wearing Course: Type A with ½” maximum,
coarse aggregate gradation.
c. Aggregate for Miscellaneous Areas and Dikes:
1) Type A HMA with 3/8” aggregate gradation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 12 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 12 00 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
2) Type A HMA with ½” aggregate gradation
C. Prime Coat:
1. Prime coat shall be an emulsified asphalt Type RS-2, conforming to
Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 94.
D. Tack Coat:
1. Tack coat shall be a liquid asphalt Type SS-1, conforming to Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 94.
E. Emulsion – Aggregate Slurry
1. Emulsion – Aggregate slurry shall be of a slow-set or quick set type,
conforming to SSPWC, current edition, Section 203-5.4.
F. Miscellaneous Areas and Dikes: HMA for miscellaneous areas and dikes shall
conform to Caltrans Standard Specifications, current edition, Section 39.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Take the following aggregate samples in the presence of the Engineer and, if
requested, transport samples to Authority-hired testing laboratory. Samples will
be used by the Authority-hired testing laboratory to test aggregate quality:
1. A 75-pound sample of representative aggregate retained on the #4 sieve
and
2. A 3-pound sample of the representative aggregate passing the #4 sieve for
testing of aggregate quality.
B. Provide Engineer access for sampling stockpiles, hot bin analyses, and other tests
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Subgrade, aggregate base, curbs, gutters and drains shall be approved by the
Engineer before asphalt-Pavement operations are started.
B. Emulsion – Aggregate Slurry shall conform to the SSPWC, current edition, Section
302-4.
C. Mixing plants shall conform to the requirements of the Caltrans Standard
Specifications, current edition, Section 39-3.04 Mixing.
D. Verify utility locations prior to driving stakes or pins.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 12 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 12 00 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
E. Construction procedures and requirements shall conform to Caltrans Standard
Specifications, current edition, Section 39-2 Hot Mix Asphalt and SSPWC, current
edition, Section 302-5.
F. Legally dispose of all waste material produced as a result of Contractor’s
operations. All waste Materials shall be removed from the Authority’s property
within 2 weeks of it being made waste. If necessary, to protect the existing soils
from contamination, install an impermeable barrier to protect the existing subgrade
and runoff.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Density of asphaltic concrete shall be measured using nuclear density methods in
accordance with ASTM D 2950 at the time of placement.
B. Density tests shall be performed by the Contractor’s independent laboratory. The
Engineer may also perform testing at random selected locations. Number of cores
shall be one core per 500 square yards of bituminous pavements or two cores per
shift, whichever is greater. Repair core holes promptly using the same mix that
was cored; where cores are taken through both base course and surface course
simultaneously, use surface course mix for repair work. Wherever deficient
pavement is discovered, take such additional cores as directed.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. When placing HMA for access road paving, provide an aggregate base course in
accordance with Section 34 11 27.
B. Schedule placement of asphalt pavement material when the precipitation
probability, within three (3) hours prior to the start of such operations, is less than
50 percent.
C. Laying of HMA shall not be permitted in wet weather.
D. Spreading of HMA shall not be permitted when the mixing temperature of HMA is
below 250˚ F.
E. HMA shall only be placed when the atmospheric temperature is above 50˚ F.
F. When HMA is to be placed on an existing asphalt concrete, concrete, or brick
surface, broom the existing surface clean prior to the application of the tack coat.
G. Repair holes and depressions in existing surfaces by removal to sound material
and replace with an asphalt-aggregate patching material.
H. Compact patch to produce a tight surface conforming to the adjacent paving area.
I. Stabilize rocking Portland cement concrete slabs by undersealing or cracking and
seating.
J. Fill wide joints and cracks with asphalt concrete/sand mix material and compact.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 12 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 12 00 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
3.04 SPREADING
A. The depositing, distributing, and spreading of the HMA shall be accomplished in a
single, continuous operation by means of a mechanical spreader or a grader.
B. The prime coat shall be applied at a rate of 0.25 gal/sq yd and shall be in
conformance with the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
C. The tack coat shall be applied in one application at a rate of 0.02 gal to 0.10 gal/sq
yd of surface covered and shall be in conformance with the Caltrans Standard
Specifications, Section 39.
D. Following application of the tack coat, the HMA shall be spread in conformance
with the Caltrans Standard Specifications, current edition, Section 39.
1. Successive lifts may be laid upon previously laid lifts as soon as the
previous lift has cooled sufficiently to show no displacement under
equipment or loaded material delivery trucks.
3.05 COMPACTION
A. Rollers:
1. Steel-wheeled, tandem type power driven rollers shall provide a pressure
of not less than 225 lbs/in width of main roll.
a. Rolls shall be smooth and without flat spots or other imperfections.
2. Pneumatic rubber-tired rollers shall be self-propelled with wheels mounted,
grouped and spaced to provide uniform coverage with each pass.
a. Rear group wheels shall not follow the tracks of forward group
wheels.
b. Maximum wheel load shall be 5,600 lbs.
c. Tire compression on pavement, where the area of contact is
measured on a hard, unyielding surface, shall be 80 psi plus five (5)
psi for each wheel.
d. The total maximum load per axle, whether single axle or a group of
axles in the same alignment, shall be 22,400 lbs.
e. Wheel loads and tire pressures shall be controlled to produce the
required degree of compaction without rutting of the surface to be
rolled.
B. Rolling:
1. Proceed continuously at the following rates:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 12 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 12 00 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
a. For HMA Pavement, when spread by hand, not in excess of 300 sq
yd/hr, per roller.
b. For HMA Pavement, when spread by machine, not in excess of 400
sq yd/hr, per roller.
2. Immediately after spreading, thoroughly compact by rolling with approved
rollers continuously from commencement to final completion at a speed not
exceeding three (3) miles per hours.
3. Make initial rolling, using tandem type rollers, parallel to the center line of
the paved surface beginning at the curbs or edges of the paved surface
and working toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by one-half
the rear wheel roller.
a. Immediately following the initial rolling, further compact by
pneumatic rubber-tired rollers or steel wheel vibratory tandem type
rollers a minimum of eight (8) passes.
b. Smooth shallow ruts and ridges with tandem rollers immediately
following the rubber-tired rolling.
4. First make final roll longitudinally with the paved surface and then
diagonally or at right angles.
a. Continue until further compression results; the mixture has cooled;
no marks show under the roller, and the surface is smooth and free
from depressions, waves, bunches, and unevenness.
5. Test after the mixture has been rolled with approved straight edge and
surface testing machine laid parallel to the centerline of the paved surface.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Prime Coat and Tack Coat will not be measured for payment. Costs associated
with the prime or tack coats will be considered as incidental to the Hot Mix Asphalt
Pavement.
B. Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof Installed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
Schedule of Values as derived from the Contract Drawings will be used as the
basis for this measurement. Separate measurements will be made for each
specified thickness of asphaltic concrete material as included on the approved
Schedule of Values.
C. The mass of the material will be determined as provided in Section 9-1.01,
“Measurement of Quantities”, of the current Caltrans Standard Specifications.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 12 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 12 00 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement constructed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price of the specified type and
thickness as included on the approved Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This
price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment,
supplies, supervision, and incidentals necessary for Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement
described by the Contract Documents.
B. When there is no item for place Hot Mix Asphalt Dike and the work is shown on
the Plans, full compensation therefore, including any necessary excavation,
backfill, and preparation of the area, shall be considered as included in the
Contract Unit Price paid for the Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement.
END OF SECTION 32 12 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 12 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 16 00
CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section consists of furnishing all labor, Materials and equipment necessary,
and incidental to the manufacture, transport and placement of the curbs and
gutters, related Material, and providing all associated items.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel.
2. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with the following Specifications, standards and recommended practices,
except as otherwise indicated:
1. SSPWC: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction 2012,
Sections 201-1, Portland Cement Concrete, 201-3, Expansion Joint Filler
and Joint Sealants, and 303-5, Concrete Curbs, Walks, Gutters, Cross
Gutters, Alley Intersections, Access Ramps, BUS PADS, LOCAL
DEPRESSION, CONCRETE APRON, and Driveways.
2. Caltrans: State of California Department of Transportation, Standard Plans
Current or Latest Edition.
3. CPUC: General Orders 26D and 118.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit, under provisions of Section 01 33 00, the following information:
1. Compliance: Concrete mix and Materials, test reports, Manufacturer or
Supplier's certification that Materials delivered to site are in compliance
with Specifications.
2. Samples: Sampling and testing for compliance with the contract provisions
shall be in accordance with SSPWC 2012 Section 201-1.1.
3. Product Data: Submit to the Engineer the manufacturer's Standard Plans
or catalog cuts, and Certificate of Conformance for joint filler or other
Materials, which are specified to conform to publications referenced under
"Products" in this Section.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 16 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 16 00 Curbs, Gutters, and Sidewalks
4. Shop Drawings: Provide scaled drawings of all paving areas indicating
proposed types and locations for all joints and pattern of concrete
placement. Drawings to include locations of drain inlets, surface utilities
and structures. Show proposed sequence for installation of work. Drawings
are to be approved by Engineer prior to installation of work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
A. Portland cement concrete for the construction of curbs and gutters shall conform
to SSPWC 2012 Section 201-1.
B. The minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 3250 psi (560-C-3250 –
SSPWC) unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. All reinforcement for this portion of the Work shall conform to the provisions of
Section 03 21 00. Reinforcing chairs shall be plastic or concrete.
2.03 JOINT FILLER
A. Pre-molded joint fillers shall conform to SSPWC Current or Latest Edition, Section
201-3.2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. Make gradual and smooth
transitions to pavements.
3.02 ZERO FACE CURBS
A. Curb face shall be tapered to zero height within 10 feet of track centerline in order
to comply with walkway requirements provision of CPUC General Order 118.
3.03 EXTRUDED PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE CURBS
A. Concrete curbs and gutters shall be constructed of Portland cement concrete of
the class and other requirements specified in Section 303-5 of the SSPWC.
B. For curbs constructed on existing paving, refer to the Contract Documents for
specific details and requirements for attaching curbs to existing paving.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 16 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 16 00 Curbs, Gutters, and Sidewalks
C. Space joints in extruded curbs to match joints in adjacent paving. When the
adjacent paving is not jointed, locate joints at angles, corners, points of curvature,
and points of tangency at intervals of not more than 15 feet.
D. Joints shall be 1/8 inches minimum thickness and constructed to a minimum depth
of 1 inch by scoring with a tool which will leave the corners rounded and destroy
aggregate interlock to a depth of 1 inch.
E. Place expansion joints filler to full cross-section with 1/4 inches thick filler in the
curb at abutting structures and at 100-foot intervals.
F. Cure the extruded concrete for not less than 72 hours by the methods specified in
Section 03 31 00.
3.04 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE CURB, AND COMBINED CURB AND GUTTER
A. Construction of cast-in-place curb, and combined curb and gutter shall meet the
requirements of Section 03 31 00.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Concrete curbs, curb and gutters, sidewalks, and driveways will be measured by
the unit or fraction thereof constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents
and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule
of Quantities and Prices, or approved Schedule of Values as derived from the
plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Concrete curbs, curb and gutters, sidewalks, and driveways constructed in
accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the contract unit price
as listed in the Schedule of Quantities. This price shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals necessary for concrete curbs, gutters and sidewalks described by the
Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 32 16 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 16 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 17 23
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Work involves furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and
incidental to applying pavement and platform striping, markings, markers, and
painting of curbs.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with the following Specifications, standards and recommended practices,
except as otherwise indicated:
1. Caltrans: State of California Department of Transportation, Standard
Specifications Current or Latest Edition, Section 84.
2. Caltrans: State of California Department of Transportation, Standard
Specifications Current or Latest Edition, Section 85.
3. Caltrans: State of California Department of Transportation, Traffic Manual;
California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, latest edition, Part 3,
Chapter 3A and 3B.
4. CCR, Title 24: California Code of Regulations: California State Building
Code.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 01: Manufacturer's or supplier's
certification that the materials delivered to the site are in compliance with the
Specifications as specified in this Section.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pavement striping, markings, and markers shall be applied by workers with proven
skills required to perform the work in accordance with the correct location,
alignment, and dimensions of the striping and markings as shown in the Contract
Plans or as modified by the Engineer.
B. At no additional cost to SCRRA, the Contractor shall repair or replace pavement
markings, which fail to present a uniform appearance and those, which are marred
and damaged by traffic and by other causes.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 17 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 17 23 Pavement Markings
C. Until accepted by the Engineer, the Contractor must be responsible for the
maintenance of all pavement striping, markings, and markers until the roadway is
open to vehicular traffic.
D. All pavement striping and marking for roadways, whether temporary or permanent
shall be completed before the roadway is opened for vehicular traffic.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Paint for traffic striping and markings shall comply with Caltrans Standard
Specifications Current or Latest Edition Section 84-3. Type of paint shall either
be Fast Dry or Rapid Dry solvent borne. Thermoplastic traffic stripes and
pavement markings shall comply with Caltrans Standard Specifications Section
84-2. Markers shall comply with Standard Specifications Section 85-1.02.
2.02 COLOR
A. Color for roadways shall be Caltrans Standard Specifications "white" and “yellow”
unless otherwise indicated in the plans.
B. Painting of curbs shall use the color indicated in the Contract Plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Apply paint by using a striping machine, except for special areas and markings,
which are inaccessible or not adaptable to machine application, in which case hand
application will be permitted with approved masking or stencil use.
B. The striping machine shall be an approved spray-type marking machine capable
of producing the specified dimensions of the markings and stripings with clear-cut
edges and uniform smooth film thickness.
C. The minimum wet film thickness of the paint shall be 15 mils or in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendation and approved by the Engineer.
D. Application of the paint shall be made only on a dry and clean surface free from
grease, oils, dirt, curing compound or any other foreign matter, when the weather
is not windy and humid, and the ambient air temperature is not less than 40 DegF.
Contractor must not apply paint to uncured concrete.
E. Placement of pavement markers shall comply with Caltrans Standard
Specifications Section 85-1.03.
F. Contractor must clean up all overspray with approved Materials and leave a clean
and complete project.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 17 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 17 23 Pavement Markings
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Pavement Markings will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
placed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved Schedule of Values as derived from the plans will be used as the basis
for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Pavement Markings completed in accordance with the Contract Documents will be
paid for at the contract unit price, as listed in the Schedule of Quantities and
Pricing. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials,
tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals necessary for Pavement
Markings described by the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 32 17 23
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 17 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 31 13
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Chain link fencing and gates including the chain-link fence fabric and posts,
concrete for post bases, rails, ties, bands, bars, rods and other fittings and
hardware designed to support the fabric in a vertical, taut position.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 03 31 00 - Structural Concrete.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
2. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
3. A392, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence
Fabric.
4. A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
5. A501 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
6. A824, Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension
Wire for use with Chain-Link Fence.
7. F552, Standard Terminology Relating to Chain-Link Fencing.
8. F567, Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence.
9. F626, Standard Specification for Fence Fittings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 13 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 13 Chain Link Fencing and Gates
10. F900, Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Steel Swing
Gates.
11. F1043, Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on
Steel Industrial Fence Framework.
12. F1083, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures.
B. American Welding Society (AWS).
C. Chain Link Manufacturer's Institute for "Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric
and Accessories."
D. SCRRA Engineering Standards ES5106, Right of Way Fencing, Chain Link Fence.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. See ASTM F552.
B. NPS: Nominal pipe size, in inches.
C. Installer or Applicator:
1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the
product in the field at the Project site.
2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with provisions contained in
Division 01.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Scaled plan layout showing spacing of components, accessories, fittings,
and post anchorage.
4. Details of fence materials, foundations, anchorage details and gate details.
5. Source quality control test results.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 13 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 13 Chain Link Fencing and Gates
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer shall have a minimum two (2) years experience installing similar
fencing.
2. Utilize only AWS certified welders.
B. Construct fence within reasonable close conformity to lines and grades shown on
the Plans and at the locations as directed by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPONENTS
A. Components for Chain Link Fencing shall conform to SCRRA Engineering
Standards ES5106, Right of Way Fencing, Chain Link Fence and these
Specifications.
B. Chain Link Fabric:
1. Fabric type:
a. ASTM A392 zinc-coated steel:
1) Coated before weaving, 2.0 oz/sf.
2. Wire gage shall be 11-gage for fences 6 feet-0 inches and less and 9-gage
for fences over 6 feet-0 inches in accordance with the Project Plans or as
determined by the Engineer based on field conditions in accordance with
SCRRA Engineering Standards ES5106.
3. Mesh size shall be 1 inch.
4. Selvage treatment:
a. Top: Knuckled.
b. Bottom: Knuckled.
C. Concrete:
1. Minimum cement content shall be 560 lbs./cu. yd.
2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 3,250 psi.
3. Concrete shall be supplied and tested in accordance with Section 03 31
00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 13 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 13 Chain Link Fencing and Gates
D. Line Post:
1. ASTM F1083 pipe:
a. Table 1, Schedule 40, regular grade, in sizes as specified on
SCRRA Engineering Standards ES5106.
E. Corner or Terminal Posts:
1. ASTM F1083 pipe:
a. Table 1, Schedule 40, regular grade, in sizes as specified on
SCRRA Engineering Standards ES5106.
F. Brace and Rails:
1. ASTM F1083 pipe:
a. Table 1, Schedule 40, regular grade, in sizes as specified on
SCRRA Engineering Standards ES5106.
G. Tension Wire and bars:
1. Top and bottom of fabric:
a. ASTM A824, galvanized steel, Class 3.
b. Minimum 7-gage galvanized coil spring steel wire.
2. Tension bars used in fastening fabric to end and corner posts and gate
frames:
a. ASTM A500 or A501, minimum 3/16 inches x 3/4 inches galvanized
high carbon steel bars.
H. Fence Fittings (Post and Line Caps, Rail and Brace Ends, Sleeves-Top Rail, Tie
Wires and Clips, Tension and Brace Bands, Tension Bars, Truss Rods):
1. ASTM F626.
2. Tie wires shall not be smaller than 11 gage galvanized steel, 6 gage
aluminum wire or approved noncorrosive bands.
3. Truss or tension rods shall be adjustable 3/8 inches dia. galvanized steel
rod.
a. Adjustable galvanized turnbuckles or other suitable tightening
devices shall be provided as necessary.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 13 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 13 Chain Link Fencing and Gates
I. Security Gate:
1. ASTM F900.
a. Gate posts in sizes as shown in SCRRA Engineering Standards
ES5106.
2. Materials as specified for fence framework and fabric.
3. Hardware:
a. Galvanized per ASTM A153.
b. Hinges to permit gate opening as shown in the plans.
4. Hang gates on at least two (2) steel or malleable iron hinges not less than
3-inches in width, designed to clamp to the gate post and permit the gate
to be swung as indicated in the plans. The bottom hinge shall have a
socket to take the ball end of the gate frame.
5. Gates shall be provided with a combination steel or malleable iron catch
and locking attachment system of approved design which will not rotate
around the latch post.
6. Stops to hold gates open and a center rest with catch shall be provided
where required.
J. Security Extension:
1. Extension arms for barbed wire shall be a type that can be attached to the
tops of posts and carry three wire at approximately 5-1/2 inches centers.
2. Barbed wire shall be four-point pattern, composed of:
a. Two strand, 12-1/2 gage galvanized steel wire.
b. Barbs spaced at 5 inches centers.
c. Conform to ASTM A121.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test related fence construction materials to meet the following standards:
1. Posts and rails:
a. ASTM F1043, Heavy Industrial.
2. Results of tests to be submitted with material certification submittals.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 13 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 13 Chain Link Fencing and Gates
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with:
1. Manufacturer's instructions.
2. Lines and grades shown on approved Plans.
3. In accordance with ASTM F567.
4. In accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standards ES5106.
B. In case of conflict between four above mentioned installation procedures, SCRRA
Engineering Standards ES5106 takes precedence; use in lieu of conflicting
portions.
C. Work shall be performed by workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the skills required to install the products of this Section.
D. Do not start fence installation before final grading is complete and finish elevations
are established.
E. Drill holes for posts in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil.
F. Posts shall be placed in a vertical position, except as directed by the Engineer
where they may be set perpendicular to the ground surface.
G. Posts shall be set in concrete footings conforming to the details shown on the plans
or SCRRA Engineering Standards ES5106 and crowned at the top to shed water.
H. Place fence with bottom edge of fabric at maximum clearance above grade, as
shown on Plans.
1. Correct minor irregularities in earth to maintain maximum clearance.
I. Space line posts at equal intervals not exceeding 10 feet on center.
J. Provide post braces for each gate, corner, pull and terminal post and first adjacent
line post.
K. Install tension bars full height of fabric.
1. Rails: Fit rails with expansion couplings of outside sleeve type when called
for in plans.
2. Install rails continuous for outside sleeve type for full length of fence
3. Provide expansion couplings in top rails at not more than 20 feet intervals.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 13 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 13 Chain Link Fencing and Gates
4. Anchor top rails to main posts with appropriate wrought or malleable
fittings.
L. Install bracing assemblies at all end and gate posts, as well as side, corner, and
pull posts.
1. Locate compression members at mid-height of fabric.
2. Extend diagonal tension members from compression members to bases of
posts.
3. Install so that posts are plumb when under correct tension.
M. Pull fabric taut and secure to posts and rails.
1. Secure so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released.
2. Secure to posts at not over 15 inches o.c., and to rails at not over 24-inches
o.c., and to tension wire at not over 24-inches o.c.
3. Use U-shaped wire conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached,
clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least two (2) full turns.
4. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazards to persons or clothing.
5. Fabric shall be placed on the outside of poles away from the track or as
directed by the Engineer.
N. Install post top at each post.
O. Gates:
1. Construct with fittings or by welding.
2. Provide rigid, weatherproof joints.
3. Assure right, non-sagging, non-twisting gate.
4. Coat welds with rust preventive paint, color to match pipe.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Chain Link Fencing will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 13 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 13 Chain Link Fencing and Gates
B. Chain Link Gates will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
C. Quantities of gates will be determined from actual count. When more than one
gate is placed in an opening, each single unit placed will be counted as a gate. A
gate unit complete shall include one gate with necessary fittings, hardware and
gate posts with braces.
D. Chain Link Fencing and gates shall consist of a fabric, including posts, horizontal
members, post anchorages, stretcher bars, tension wires and other required
hardware and fittings, as shown on the Contract Documents.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Chain Link Fencing furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Chain Link Gates furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
C. Full compensation for furnishing and installing connections on Fencing and Gates,
drilling anchor bolt holes and bolts shall be considered as included in the prices
and no additional compensation will be allowed.
D. Full compensation for furnishing and installing fabric, posts, post tops, tension
wires, post clips, wire ties and hog rings shall be considered as included in the
prices and no additional compensation will be allowed.
E. Full compensation for clearing the line of the fence and disposing of the material,
excavating high points in the existing ground, excavating and backfilling holes,
disposing of surplus excavated material, and furnishing and placing concrete
footings and connecting new fences to structures and existing cross fencing, and
constructing temporary fences for protection of stock, shall be considered as
included as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
END OF SECTION 32 31 13
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 13 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 31 16
WELDED WIRE FENCING AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work involves furnishing all materials, labor and equipment necessary and
incidental to the installation of wire mesh fence at the locations shown on the
Contract Plans.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 – General Requirements
2. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
3. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with all local, State and Federal codes, regulations, Specifications,
standards and recommended practices.
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
1. A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless
2. A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products
3. A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
4. A501 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
5. A1064 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
6. B117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
7. B633 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
and Steel
8. D1654 Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated
Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 16 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 16 Welded Wire Fencing and Gates
9. D2248 Standard Practice for Detergent Resistance of Organic Finishes
10. D2794 Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the
Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact)
11. F2408 Standard Specification for Ornamental Fences Employing
Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets
C. SSPWC: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Current or Latest
Edition Section 304
D. SCRRA Engineering Standard ES5105, Right-of-Way Fencing, Welded Wire Mesh
Fencing
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures:
1. Compliance: Manufacturer's or supplier's certification that the materials
delivered to the site are in compliance with the Specification.
2. Product data in form of manufacturer’s technical data, and installation
instructions for the fence.
3. Shop Drawings: Details of fence materials, post spacing, foundations, and
anchorage details.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work shall be performed by workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the skills required to install the products of this Section.
B. Construct fence to lines and grades shown on the Contract Plans and at other
locations as directed by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Fence: SuperMeshG Fencing manufactured by Secure Technology, Inc. of 23016
Del Lago Drive, Suite A, Laguna Hills, CA 92653. Telephone 949-707-4270. Fence
materials to be galvanized. An equal product may be used provided it is approved
by the Engineer.
B. Fence: Fencing manufactured by Betafence USA, Ennis, Texas 75118. Telephone
888-650-4766. Fence materials to be galvanized. An equal product may be used
provided it is approved by the Engineer.
C. Clamps: Welded Wire Clamps with tamper proof bolts designed to attached welded
wire panels to the post for support and security.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 16 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 16 Welded Wire Fencing and Gates
D. Concrete: Class 500-C-2500 per SSPWC Section 201
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Unless otherwise specified or directed construct fence in accordance with
materials and methods to conform to the Contract Plans and installation
instructions provided by the supplier.
B. Triangular shaped stiffening beam shall be placed horizontally and face away from
track, or from the public side of sidewalks.
C. Posts shall be installed at 10 feet intervals in accordance with ES5105 for
installation of posts.
D. Galvanizing damaged during installation shall be repaired in accordance with
SSPWC Section 210-3.5, Repair of Damaged Zinc Coatings.
E. Use tamper resistant bolts to secure welded wire mesh panels to posts via line
wrap around brackets.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Welded Wire Fencing will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and Installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved Schedule of Values as derived from the Plans will be used as the
basis for this measurement.
A. Welded Wire Gates will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Quantities of gates will be determined from actual count. When more than one
gate is placed in an opening, each single unit placed will be counted as a gate. A
gate unit complete shall include one gate with necessary fittings, hardware and
gate posts with braces.
C. Welded Wire Fencing and gates shall consist of a fabric, including posts, horizontal
members, post anchorages, stretcher bars, tension wires and other required
hardware and fittings, as shown on the Contract Documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 16 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 16 Welded Wire Fencing and Gates
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Welded Wire Fencing and Gates constructed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price as included on the approved
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals necessary for Welded Wire Fencing and Gates described by the
Contract Documents.
B. Gates installed in accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for by
actual count at the Contract Unit Price as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices.
C. Full compensation for furnishing and installing connections on Welded Wire
Fencing and Gates, drilling anchor bolt holes and bolts shall be considered as
included in the prices and no additional compensation will be allowed.
D. Full compensation for furnishing and installing fabric, posts, post tops, tension
wires, post clips, shall be considered as included in the prices and no additional
compensation will be allowed.
E. Full compensation for clearing the line of the fence and disposing of the material,
excavating high points in the existing ground, excavating and backfilling holes,
disposing of surplus excavated material, and furnishing and placing concrete
footings and connecting new fences to structures and existing cross fencing, and
constructing temporary fences for protection of stock, shall be considered as
included as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
END OF SECTION 32 31 16
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 16 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 31 19
TUBULAR STEEL FENCING AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This Work involves furnishing all materials, labor and equipment necessary and
incidental to the installation of tubular steel fencing, inter-track fence, edge fencing,
and gates, including station platform center and edge, as shown on the Contract
Plans. This work also includes providing locks, keys and emergency access
system.
B. Coordinate the work of this Section with all other Sections of this Specification and,
in particular:
1. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with all local, State and Federal codes, regulations, specifications,
standards and recommended practices.
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
1. A36 Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
2. A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products
3. A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
4. A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
5. A787 Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Metallic
Coated Carbon Steel Mechanical Tubing
C. SCRRA Engineering Standard ES5102, Right-of-Way Fencing, Welded Wire Mesh
Fencing and ES5104, Right-of-Way Fencing, Tube Steel Fencing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings showing plan layout, grid, spacing of components,
accessories, fittings and hardware.
B. Submit manufacturer’s product data.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 19 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 19 Tubular Steel Fencing and Gates
C. Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.
D. Submit manufacturer’s color palette to the Engineer for approval.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain the services of fencing manufacturer’s field representative to provide the
following services:
1. Supervise the entire installation of the fence.
2. Render advice and assistance on the installation of the fence panels,
fasteners, and bracing.
B. Construct fence to lines and grades shown on the Contract Plans and at other
locations as directed by Engineer.
1.05 DELIVERABLES
A. Submit manufacturer’s certificates of compliance for fence materials.
B. Qualifications: Submit name, business address and telephone number of
manufacturer’s field representative. Include certification by the manufacturer that
proposed field representative is qualified to provide specified services.
C. Furnish certificate of inspection stating that the material has been sampled, tested
and inspected per ASTM A525.
D. Certification of Installation: Subject affidavit by the manufacturer’s field
representative certifying that the installation of the fence meets the Contract
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FENCE AND GATES
A. Pickets: Pickets shall be galvanized, 1-inch square tubular steel members, 11
gauge minimum, conforming to ASTM A787, 45,000 psi yield strength, and G90
zinc coating. Picket spacing shall be 4 inches maximum center to center.
B. Panel height: Finished fence height shall be 6 feet for Inter-Track fence and 3’-2”
feet at platform edge fence. Panel width shall be as per SCRRA Engineering
Standards ES 5102 and 5104.
C. Posts:
1. Galvanized, square steel tubular members conforming to ASTM A653,
50,000 psi yield strength and G90 zinc coating.
2. Posts shall be 2-1/2 inches x 2-1/2 inches minimum, with a wall thickness
of 12 gauge.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 19 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 19 Tubular Steel Fencing and Gates
3. Base Plates and Miscellaneous Hardware for Center Fence: ASTM
A36/A36M.
D. Horizontal Rails:
1. Galvanized, square steel tubular members conforming to ASTM A653,
50,000 psi yield strength and G90 zinc coating.
2. Rails shall be 1 inch by 2 inches minimum, with a wall thickness of 1/8 inch.
3. Attach rails to posts with tamper resistant fasteners.
E. Gate Hardware: Hinges, latches, drop rods, as needed, shall be hot dipped
galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A153 and sized to assure proper gate
operation.
2.02 CONCRETE
A. Concrete: Concrete shall conform to Section 03 31 00, Structural Concrete.
2.03 SHOP FINISHES
A. Zinc: Hot dipped galvanize pickets, rings, rails, and posts after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123.
B. Powder Coat: Powder coat all parts of fence including hardware after galvanizing
and in accordance with coating manufacturer’s instructions. Powder coat: O’Brien
TGIC-Polyster or approved equal. Color: Black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Concrete Footings: Drill or dig holes for post footings in firm, undisturbed or
compacted soil. Size footings in accordance with Contract Plans or approved
Shop Drawings. Trowel tops of footings and slope or dome to direct water away
from posts. Slope, do not dome, in pedestrian paving.
B. Posts: Spaced at 10 feet or less on center and set in concrete footings, plumbed
vertical. Post depth as specified on the Contract Plans. Space posts at lesser
distance between centers to compensate for terrain variation such as sharp
variations in incline or decline. Any high points that interfere with placing the fence
shall be excavated to provide the clearance shown on the Contract Plans.
C. Field Joints: Field joints shall be kept to a minimum and concealed to the greatest
extent possible. Field joints shall be strong, rigid, watertight and flush with hairline
fit. Ease sharp corners.
D. Adjust fence for uninterrupted visual continuity and tight, non-rattling connections.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 19 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 19 Tubular Steel Fencing and Gates
3.02 REPAIR
A. Welded and abraded areas of galvanized surfaces shall be wire brushed and
repaired with two (2) coats of cold galvanized compound.
B. Repair abraded or damaged powder-coated per manufacturer's instructions and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Unless otherwise specified or directed construct fence in accordance with
materials and methods to conform to the Contract Plans and installation
instructions provided by the supplier.
D. Fence top extension shall face away from the track.
E. Posts shall be installed at 10 feet intervals in accordance with SSPWC 2009
Section 304-3 for installation of posts.
F. Galvanizing damaged during installation shall be repaired in accordance with
SSPWC 2009 Section 210-3.5, Repair of Damaged Zinc Coatings.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Tubular Steel Fencing will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof Installed in
accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The
quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
Schedule of Values as derived from the plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
B. Tubular Steel Gates will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof Installed in
accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The
quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
Schedule of Values as derived from the plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
C. Quantities of gates will be determined from actual count. When more than one
gate is placed in an opening, each single unit placed will be counted as a gate. A
gate unit complete shall include one gate with necessary fittings, hardware and
gate posts with braces.
D. Tubular Steel Fencing and Gates shall consist of a pickets and rings, including
posts, horizontal members, post anchorages, rails and other required hardware
and fittings, as shown on the Contract Documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 19 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 19 Tubular Steel Fencing and Gates
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Tubular Steel Fencing constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents will
be paid for at the Contract Unit Price as included on the approved Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals necessary for
Tubular Steel Fencing described by the Contract Documents.
B. Gates installed in accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for by
actual count at the Contract Unit Price as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices.
C. Full compensation for furnishing and installing connections on Tubular Steel
Fencing and Gates, drilling anchor bolt holes and bolts shall be considered as
included in the prices and no additional compensation will be allowed.
D. Full compensation for furnishing and installing pickets and rings, posts, and post
tops, shall be considered as included in the prices and no additional compensation
will be allowed.
E. Full compensation for clearing the line of the fence and disposing of the material,
excavating high points in the existing ground, excavating and backfilling holes,
disposing of surplus excavated material, and furnishing and placing concrete
footings and connecting new fences to structures and existing cross fencing, and
constructing temporary fences for protection of stock, shall be considered as
included as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
END OF SECTION 32 31 19
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 19 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 31 32
VEHICULAR GATE OPERATOR SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install a complete microprocessor based vehicular swing gate or slide
gate operator system, with a solid-state board to control all functions of the gate
operator, as described herein and shown on the plans. Include all necessary
control boards, power supplies, loop detectors, connectors, and accessories for a
complete operational system.
1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. All equipment and work specified in this section shall comply, with all the General
Conditions of the specifications, contract documents, and drawings as indicated.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Gate operator systems contractor shall coordinate all work with other contractors
and trades where necessary.
B. All necessary conduit, raceways and pull boxes shall be installed by the electrical
contractor.
C. Installation of the vehicular gate operator system shall be coordinated with the
installation of other applicable systems and components (e.g. access control
system, fire department key access box, etc.)
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installation shall comply with all applicable codes.
B. All equipment shall be new, in current production, and the standard products of a
manufacturer of vehicular gate operator equipment.
C. Manufacturer shall guarantee availability of parts, for a minimum of seven (7) years
from date of shipment.
D. If required, manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate features, functions and
operating characteristics to the Owner.
E. System shall be installed by a factory authorized contractor, with technicians
specifically trained in this system.
F. On-site maintenance and repair service shall be available locally and within four
(4) hours of notification for emergency condition.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 32 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 32 Vehicular Gate Operator System
1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Vehicular swing gate and slide gate operator shall be in compliance with
Underwriter Laboratories Inc. (UL) Standard for Safety - Door, Drapery, Gate,
Louver and Window Operators and Systems, UL 325 Fourth Edition; and
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Standard for Safety - Tests for Safety-Related
Controls Employing Solid-State Devices, UL 991 Second Edition.
B. Vehicular Swing Gate Operator shall be tested for compliance to UL 325 and UL
991 and shall be LISTED by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).
C. Vehicular swing gate fabrication, construction and installation shall conform to
ASTM F2200; Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Provisions: Comply with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS.
B. Equipment list, data sheet(s), system description, block diagrams on equipment to
be furnished and electrical wiring diagrams for installation.
C. All data necessary to evaluate design, quality and configuration of proposed
equipment and system(s).
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Products shall include a factory warranty that equipment is free from defects in
design, material, manufacturing and operation. Factory warranty period shall be
for five (5) years parts and workmanship; 60-months from date of shipment.
B. Manufacturer shall not be responsible for improper use, handling, or installation of
the product.
C. Installing contractor shall guarantee the equipment, wire and installation for 12-
months from date of acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. For vehicular swing gate operator, equipment and materials shall be as
manufactured by Doorking, Inc., Model 6550, or approved equivalent.
B. For vehicular slide gate operator, equipment and materials shall be as
manufactured by Doorking, Inc., Model 9150 (1 HP), or approved equivalent.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 32 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 32 Vehicular Gate Operator System
C. Substitutions must meet requirements of Prior Approval, as outlined in the contract
documents. Substitutions that meet Prior Approval requirements must be listed as
alternates by addendum, and shall be shown separately on the bid forms.
Consideration will be based on ability to comply with all aspects of the
specifications, the desired functional operation, quality, reliability, design, size, and
appearance of the equipment, and the support capabilities of the manufacturer.
2.02 VEHICULAR SWING GATE OPERATOR
A. Swing Gate Operator:
1. The swing gate operator shall use a microprocessor based solid-state
control board that controls all functions of the swing gate operator. Operator
shall be rated minimum for commercial and industrial applications.
2. Primary reduction system shall be provided by single cog belt drive train
and 60:1 worm gear reduction running in a continuous oil bath.
3. Operator shall employ magnetic sensing to set open and close limit
adjustment. Mechanical type limit switches shall not be allowed.
4. Operator system shall be capable of bi-parting (dual) gate operation without
the need of any add-on circuit boards. Primary operator shall control all
functions of both gate operators. Secondary operator shall not require a
control board.
5. Operator shall be designed for either left or right-hand mount and shall be
designed for pad mounting.
6. Operator frame shall be welded steel anodized black. Control box shall be
constructed from 16-gauge G90 galvanized steel, painted black, to avoid
rusting. Operator cover shall use polyethylene finished in charcoal gray,
suede texture.
7. Operator shall have three 115 VAC convenience outlets available for
accessory transformer power and shall have a built-in lockable power
disconnect and reset switch.
B. Control Circuit:
1. Control board shall have connections for optional board to record operator
cycles (x100), input errors, loop detector errors, obstruction hits, and power
up events. Record shall be time and date stamped.
2. Control board shall be capable of controlling two (2) vehicular swing gate
operators in a true bi-parting gate operation.
3. Control board shall have a gate overlap feature for bi-parting gate
operation.
4. Control board shall have ports for plug in of vehicular loop detectors.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 32 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 32 Vehicular Gate Operator System
5. Control board shall have separate inputs for external contact and non-
contact entrapment protection devices.
6. Control board functions will be user programmable by DIP-switches located
on the control board.
7. A dry set of relay contacts shall be available for external use, and have four
programmable functions.
8. The control board shall have terminals for direct connection of a magnetic
lock.
C. Manual Operation
1. Operator shall be equipped with a built-in manual release mechanism.
Release mechanism shall be lockable and an integral part of the operator.
D. Primary Electronic Reverse
1. The vehicular gate operator shall be equipped with an inherent electronic
obstruction sensing system. The electronic sensing system shall
automatically cause the gate operator to stop and reverse if an obstruction
is sensed during the open or close cycle.
E. Secondary Entrapment Prevention
1. Non-contact sensors, or contact sensors, or combination thereof, shall be
utilized to prevent persons from becoming entrapped in the gate system.
2. Warning signs shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation instructions and UL 325 guidelines.
F. Technical Features
1. 2000-lb. maximum gate weight
2. 25-ft maximum gate length
3. Motor: 1 HP, Continuous duty AC motor
4. Power: 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 9.7A
5. UL Class of Operation: I, II, III, IV
6. Single cog belt driving a 60:1 worm gear reduction system running in a
continuous oil bath
7. Magnetic limit adjustment system
8. Solid-state control circuit and motor control
9. Gate swing time (from 0° to 90°) of approximately 12-17 seconds
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 32 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 32 Vehicular Gate Operator System
10. Minimum of three (3) 115 VAC convenience outlets
11. Operating temperature: 10°F to 115°F
12. Auto close timer of no more than 23 seconds
13. Dimensions: No greater than 39 inches high, 21 inches wide, 30 inches
deep
2.03 VEHICULAR SLIDE GATE OPERATOR
A. Slide Gate Operator:
1. The slide gate operator shall use a microprocessor based solid-state
control board that controls all functions of the slide gate operator. Operator
shall be rated minimum for continuous duty in commercial and industrial
applications.
2. Primary reduction system shall employ an adjustable clutch and power
transfer shall be provided by single cog belt drive train.
3. Operator shall employ magnetic sensing to set open and close limit
adjustment. Mechanical type limit switches shall not be allowed.
4. Operator shall automatically set both open and close limit adjustments
upon power-up and activation in the open direction. Operator shall
automatically sense for any gate coasting to insure true limit settings.
5. Pulling medium shall provide a positive mechanical connection to the gate
system. Friction driven rail type pulling mediums shall not be allowed.
Roller chain pulling medium shall be minimum size #40.
6. A positive dead bolt shall activate only when the gate is forced open, to
reduce solenoid lock wear and failure.
7. Operator shall be capable of being mounted at the front, center or rear of
the gate system, shall be designed for either left or right-hand mount and
shall be designed for pad or post mounting.
8. Operator frame shall use 12-gauge G90 galvanized steel to avoid rusting
and shall be painted charcoal gray.
9. Operator shall have two 115 VAC convenience outlets available for
accessory transformer power and shall have a built-in lockable power
disconnect and reset switch.
B. Control Circuit:
1. Control board shall have connections for optional board to record operator
cycles (x100), input errors, loop detector errors, obstruction hits, and power
up events. Record shall be time and date stamped.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 32 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 32 Vehicular Gate Operator System
2. Control board shall allow a stop or a stop and reverse function (settable)
from a safety related input.
3. Control board shall have ports for plug in of vehicular loop detectors.
4. A dry set of relay contacts shall be available for external use, and shall
have four programmable functions.
5. A special input shall allow the gate to be partially opened.
6. A timer override function shall cause an opening gate to stop and then
reverse direction when the reverse loop(s) or reverse input is clear even if
the gate has not reached the full open position, to help reduce tailgating.
7. Control board shall have separate inputs for external contact and non-
contact entrapment protection devices.
8. Functions will be user programmable by DIP-switches located on the
control board.
C. Fail-Safe Operation
1. To prioritize safety over security, operator shall assume a fail-safe mode in
the event of a power loss or if an entrapment is sensed (entrapment alarm
activated).
a. Operator shall revert to a fail-safe mode allowing the gate to be
pushed open without any special knowledge or use of any special
cranks, keys or other devices.
D. Primary Electronic Reverse
1. The vehicular gate operator shall be equipped with an inherent electronic
obstruction sensing system. The electronic sensing system shall
automatically cause the gate operator to stop and reverse if an obstruction
is sensed during the open or close cycle.
2. For enhanced safety, the control circuit shall check the obstruction sensing
system circuit prior to the start of each cycle of operation. Should the control
circuit detect a fault in the obstruction sensing system, the motor shall not
be allowed to start.
E. Secondary Entrapment Prevention
1. Non-contact sensors, or contact sensors, or combination thereof, shall be
utilized to prevent persons from becoming entrapped in the gate system.
2. Warning signs shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation instructions and UL 325 guidelines.
F. Technical Features
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 32 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 32 Vehicular Gate Operator System
1. 1500-lb maximum gate weight
2. 45-ft maximum gate length
3. Motor: 1 HP, continuous duty AC motor
4. Power: 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 9.7A
5. Single cog belt drive train with adjustable clutch
6. Automatic limit / coast magnetic adjustment system
7. Solid-state control circuit and motor control
8. Partial open limit feature
9. Anti-Tailgate feature
10. UL Class of Operation: I, II, III, IV
11. #40 roller chain.
12. Minimum gate speed of 10 in/sec
13. Minimum of two (2) 115 VAC convenience outlets
14. Operating temperature: 10°F to 140°F
15. Auto close timer of no more than 23 seconds
16. Dimensions: No greater than 25 inches high, 16 inches wide, 17 inches
deep
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. It is preferred, but not required, that this product be installed by a qualified
technician who is certified by the Institute of Door Dealer Education and
Accreditation (IDEA) as a Certified Automatic Gate Operator Installer (CAGOI).
B. Swing gate operator shall only be pad mounted, as required. Slide gate operator
shall either be pad or post mounted, as required.
1. Pad mount: Mounted directly to a concrete pad, firmly secured, plumb and
level.
2. Post mount: Mounting posts shall be welded to base plate and mounted in
concrete, firmly secured, plumb and level.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 32 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 32 Vehicular Gate Operator System
C. Wiring shall be uniform and in accordance with national electric codes and
manufacturer’s instructions.
D. All splices shall be in easily accessible junction boxes or on terminal boards.
E. All cable runs in all junction boxes shall be tagged and identified.
F. Coordinate all work with other affected trades and contractors.
3.02 SYSTEM INITIALIZING AND PROGRAMMING
A. System shall be turned on and adjustment made to meet requirements of
specifications and on-site conditions.
B. System shall function as specified.
3.03 SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES
A. System shall be completely tested to assure that all components and accessories
are hooked-up and in working order.
B. System shall be pre-tested by contractor and certified to function in accordance
with plans and specifications.
C. System shall be tested in presence of owner's representative.
3.04 OWNER INSTRUCTIONS
A. Installation contractor shall conduct up to (1) hour of instruction in use and
operation of the system to designated owner representatives, within (30) days of
acceptance.
B. Installation contractor shall conduct up to (1) hour of technical training, in
troubleshooting and service of the system, to designated owner representatives
within (90) days of system acceptance.
3.05 MANUALS AND DRAWINGS
A. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) copies of standard factory prepared
operation, installation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall include typical
wiring diagrams.
B. Contractor shall provide owner with (2) copies of any risers, layouts, and special
wiring diagrams showing any changes to standard drawings, if required on project.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. The manufacturer recommends periodic maintenance at three-month intervals as
described in the installation and maintenance manual.
B. External reversing devices should be checked at least once a month.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 32 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 32 Vehicular Gate Operator System
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Automated vehicular swing gate operator system will be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable,
as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Swing Gates will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
C. Automated vehicular swing gate operator system shall consist of automatic exit
gate detectors, safety/reverse loop detectors, swing gate operators, underground
conduits and cables, power conduit and line, communications conduit and line, fire
department key access box and other required hardware and fittings, as shown on
the Contract Documents.
D. Quantities of swing gates will be determined from actual count. When more than
one swing gate is placed in an opening, each single unit placed will be counted as
a swing gate. A swing gate unit complete shall include one gate with necessary
fittings, hardware and gate posts with braces.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Automated vehicular swing gate operator system furnished and completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price,
as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Swing Gates furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents
will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
C. Full compensation for furnishing and installing connections on swing gates,
welding, drilling anchor bolt holes and bolts shall be considered as included in the
prices and no additional compensation will be allowed.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 32 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 31 32 Vehicular Gate Operator System
D. Full compensation for clearing the line of the swing gate and disposing of the
material, excavating high points in the existing ground, excavating and backfilling
holes, disposing of surplus excavated material, and furnishing and placing
concrete footings and connecting gate to structures shall be considered as
included as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
END OF SECTION 32 31 32
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 31 32 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 32 16
GRAVITY BLOCK RETAINING WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work involves furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and
incidental to constructing gravity block retaining walls to the limits and at the
locations shown on the Contract Drawings and as modified by the Engineer. This
work consists of furnishing and constructing gravity block retaining walls of
prefabricated modular units at locations shown or as directed by the engineer, and
in close conformity to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown or established.
B. Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcing Steel
2. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete
3. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork
4. Section 32 31 13 - Chain Link Fencing and Gates
5. Section 33 46 00 – Underdrains
6. Section 34 11 27 – Sub-ballast and Aggregate Base
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawing showing wall materials and construction details as provided by the
supplier of the wall system. Drawings are to be certified by a qualified Engineer
licensed in the State of California, and shall be suitable for obtaining City permits,
as necessary.
B. Contractor shall prepare and submit a wall layout drawing that depicts the wall
layout and section developed with input from manufacturer recommendation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Approved retaining wall systems, meeting these specifications are:
1. Enviro-Block by inter-Block Retaining Systems, Valley Center, CA.
Telephone: 800-406-2066
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 16 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 16 Gravity Block Retaining Walls
2. Keystone Retaining Wall Systems, 4444 West 78th Street, Minneapolis,
MN 55435 - Telephone 952-897-1040 or [email protected]
3. Approved equal gravity retaining wall systems providing a pinned or
interlocked type construction.
B. Blocks are to be standard grade, gray color with smooth face finish, unless noted
otherwise.
C. Blocks shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that would interfere with
the proper placement of the block or significantly impair construction of the wall.
D. Block face exposed to view shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections
when viewed from a distance of 10 feet under diffused light.
E. Tolerance - Molded dimensions are not to differ more than 1/4 inch from the
manufacturer’s published dimensions, except height, which is not to differ more
than 1/8 inch.
F. Geotextile fabric shall be Mirafi “Filterweave 404” or approved equivalent.
2.02 ACCEPTANCE OF BLOCKS
A. Acceptability will be determined based on tolerances specified in 2.01 of this
section and visual inspection. Any one of the following defects will be cause for
rejection:
1. Concrete not suitable for common structural applications, Imperfect
molding, misshapen, or deformed blocks
2. Honeycombed or open texture concrete
3. Broken, cracked or chipped blocks
4. Extreme color variation on visible face of block
2.03 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A. Contractor shall check all materials upon delivery to assure that the proper type,
grade, color, and certification have been received.
B. Contractor shall protect all materials from damage due to jobsite conditions in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Damaged materials shall not be incorporated into the work.
SCRRA Standard Specification 32 32 16 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 16 Gravity Block Retaining Walls
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Excavate existing material in accordance with Section 31 20 00 as needed to
construct the wall as detailed on the plans.
B. Prepare the subgrade in accordance with Section 31 20 00 and suppliers
recommendations.
3.02 GRAVITY BLOCK RETAINING WALL CONSTRUCTION
A. Preparation
1. Place geotextile fabric over the full width and sides of the zone of unsuitable
subgrade over excavation. Geotextile shall be laid smooth without wrinkles
or folds in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions. Joints or overlaps
are not allowed along the width of the excavation. Adjacent rolls of
geotextile shall have a minimum overlap of 40 inches in the longitudinal
direction. There shall be no wheeled or tracked equipment permitted on the
unprotected geotextile fabric.
2. The zone of over excavation shall be backfilled with Class 2 Crushed
Aggregate Base conforming to Section 34 11 27. An initial 6 to 12 inches
of CAB shall be uniformly placed over the geotextile fabric as a protective
covering. This initial protective layer shall not be compacted. Once the
Engineer has determined that a stable condition has been achieved, the
remaining CAB shall be placed in 8 to 10 inch lifts and compacted to 95%
relative compaction at optimum moisture content (ASTM D 1557). Wheeled
or tracked compaction equipment shall not be used until 24 inches of CAP
has been placed on top of the geotextile fabric. The geotextile fabric at the
sides of the excavation shall be protected from damage throughout the
placement and compaction of the CAB. Damaged geotextile shall be
repaired at the direction of the Engineer at no cost to SCRRA.
3. The top of the backfill shall be shaped to a slope to match the base of the
lowest block. Each block shall be placed with full contact with the
compacted base at the angle indicated on the approved submittal.
B. Block Installation and Backfill Placement
1. Blocks shall typically be placed in a running bond pattern unless placed
perpendicular to the face of the wall. Place blocks so the final position is
battered as shown.
2. Place the first course of blocks on top of and in full contact with the
prepared base pad surface.
C. Install drain pipe filter fabric and pervious rock in accordance with the plans and
Section 33 46 00.
SCRRA Standard Specification 32 32 16 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 16 Gravity Block Retaining Walls
D. Closely follow erection of each course of blocks with placement of Embankment
Fill (face opposite track) and drainage/subballast material (face on trackside).
Remove excess backfill from the top of the blocks prior to installing the next course
of blocks. Clean, free draining backfill and structural backfill to be as specified on
the approved shop drawing.
E. During construction of the wall and placement of blocks maintain a vertical
tolerance and tangent horizontal alignment tolerance not in excess of 1-1/8 inch
when measured with a 10 foot straightedge. Check the batter and tolerances of
each course of blocks before erecting the next course.
F. Maximum horizontal gap shall be plus or minus 1 inch.
G. Grade embankment at top of wall in accordance with the plans.
H. Install fencing as indicated on the plans.
3.03 GRAVITY BLOCK WALL CONSTRUCTION (SMALL BLOCKS)
A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, at
minimum over excavate and compact 6 inches below leveling pad.
B. Place leveling pad as indicated on manufacturer’s drawings or as called for in plans
or specifications.
C. Walls shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s shop drawings and
standard details, with the addition of geotextile fabric as described above
D. Grade embankment at top of wall in accordance with the plans.
E. Install fencing as indicated on the plans.
F. Maximum horizontal gap shall be plus or minus ½ inch.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Gravity Block Retaining Wall will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Gravity Block Retaining Wall shall include excavation, shoring, subgrade
preparation, aggregate base geotextile fabric, precast blocks, forms, reinforcing
steel (including drilling and bonding of dowels), cast-in-place concrete; structural
backfill and other appurtenances for the retaining wall.
SCRRA Standard Specification 32 32 16 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 16 Gravity Block Retaining Walls
C. Perforated underdrain, filter fabric, permeable rock, subballast and fence are not
included in payment for gravity block retaining wall.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Gravity Block Retaining Wall furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals necessary for Gravity Block Retaining Wall described by the Contract
Documents.
END OF SECTION 32 32 16
SCRRA Standard Specification 32 32 16 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 32 20
MECHANICALLY STABILIZED EARTH (MSE) RETAINING WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
This work shall consist of furnishing materials and placement of mechanically stabilized
earth walls constructed in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably
conformity with the lines, grades, design, and dimensions shown on the plans or otherwise
established, including gutters and cable railing and/or chain link fencing.
The mechanically stabilized earth wall shall consist of a leveling pad, concrete facing
panels, and soil reinforcement elements mechanically connected to each facing panel.
Soil reinforcement shall have sufficient length, strength, and frictional resistance as
required by the design outlined in these specifications.
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete retaining wall units
2. Reinforcement
3. Joint Material
4. Galvanizing
5. Inspection Elements
6. Soil Reinforcement
7. Drainage aggregate
8. Reinforced Backfill
9. Drainage System
B. Related Sections including but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 – General Requirements
2. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel
3. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete
4. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork
5. Section 034 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete for Bridges
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Comply with local, State, and Federal codes, regulations, specifications, standards
and recommended practices.
B. American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1. M288 Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications
2. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
3. T-22 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
4. T-23 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
5. T-24 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
6. T-141 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
7. M-85 Standard Specifications for Portland Cement (Chemical and
Physical)
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. C140 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units and Related Units
2. C1262 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Freeze-Thaw Durability of
Manufactured Concrete Masonry Units and Related Concrete Units
3. C1372 Standard Specification for Segmental Retaining Wall Units
4. D448 Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge
Construction
5. D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/f3)(600 kN-m/m3)
6. D1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In Place
by the Sand Cone Method
7. D1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/f3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
8. D2487 Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System)
9. D2922 Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In
Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
10. D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Sewer pipe and Fittings
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
11. D4318 Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils
12. D4491 Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by the
Permittivity Method
13. D4595 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the
Wide-Width Strip Method
14. D4873 Standard Guide for Identification, Storage and Handling of
Geosynthetics
15. D5084 Standard Test Method for Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity
of Saturated Porous Materials Using a Flexible Wall Permeameter.
16. D5262 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Unconfined Tension
Creep Behavior of Geosynthetics
17. D5321 Standard Test Method for Determining the Coefficient of Soil and
Geosynthetic or Geosynthetic and Geosynthetic Friction by the Direct
Shear Method
18. D5818 Standard Practice for Obtaining Samples of Geosynthetics from a
Test Section for Assessment of Installation Damage
19. D6637 Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Properties of
Geogrids by the Single or Multi-Rib Tensile Method
20. D6638 Standard Test Method for Determining Connection Strength
Between Geosynthetic Reinforcement and Segmental Concrete Units
21. D6706 Standard Test Method for Measuring Geosynthetic Pullout
Resistance in Soil
22. F405 Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Tubings
and Fittings
23. G51 Standard Test Method for Measuring pH of Soil for Use in Corrosion
Testing
24. D2000 Standard Classification System for Rubber products in Automotive
Applications
25. A82/A82M Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement
26. A185/A185M Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Plain, for Concrete
27. A496/A496M Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for
Concrete Reinforcement
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
28. A497/A497M Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Deformed, for Concrete
29. A370 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of
Steel Products
D. Federal Highway Administration
1. Elias, V., Christopher, B., and Berg, R., “Mechanically Stabilized Earth
Walls and Reinforced Soil Slopes Design and Construction Guidelines”,
Federal Highway Administration Report No. FHWA-NHI-00-043, March
2001.
2. Elias, V., Christopher, B., and Berg, R., “Corrosion/Degradation of Soil
Reinforcements for Mechanically Stabilized Earth Walls and Reinforced
Soil Slopes”, Federal Highway Administration Report No. FHWA-NHI-00-
044, March 2001.
E. State of California, Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications
(Caltrans)
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Mechanically Stabilized Embankment Retaining Wall (MSE) Units: Dry-stacked
concrete units used as the retaining wall fascia.
B. Reinforced Backfill: Soil which is used as fill behind the MSE unit, and within the
reinforced soil mass (if applicable).
C. Drainage Aggregate: Material used (if applicable) within, between, and directly
behind the concrete retaining wall units.
D. Geotextile Filter: Material used for separation and filtration of dissimilar soil types.
E. Foundation Soil: Soil mass supporting the leveling pad and reinforced soil zone of
the retaining wall system.
F. Geosynthetic Reinforcement: Polymeric material designed specifically to reinforce
the soil mass.
G. Pre-fabricated Drainage Composite: three-dimensional geosynthetic drainage
medium encapsulated in a geotextile filter, used to transport water.
H. Impervious Materials: Clay soil or low permeability geosynthetic used to prevent
water percolation into the drainage zone and reinforced backfill behind the wall.
I. Global Stability: The general mass movement of a soil reinforced segmental
retaining wall structure and adjacent soil mass.
J. Project Geotechnical Engineer: A registered engineer who provides site
observations, recommendations for foundation support, and verifies soil shear
strength parameters.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor may use a proprietary earth retaining system or an acceptable
alternative, the Contractor shall submit complete working drawings for each
installation of the system in conformance with the provisions in Division 01 for
requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process.
Design drawings shall be submitted to the SCRRA for acceptance and approval.
B. Design drawings shall be 11" x 17" in size, and each drawing and calculation sheet
shall include the State assigned designations for the contract number, bridge
number, full name of the structure as shown on the contract plans, and District-
County-Route-Post Mile. The design firm's name, address, and phone number
shall be shown on the working drawings. Each sheet shall be numbered in the
lower right hand corner and shall contain a blank space in the upper right hand
corner for future contract sheet numbers.
C. The design drawing shall include all details, dimensions, quantities and cross-
sections necessary to construct the wall and shall include but shall not be limited
to the following:
D. An elevation view for each wall shall include the top of wall elevation at all
horizontal and vertical break points and at least every 50 feet along the face of
wall, the elevation of all steps in the leveling pads, the designation as to the type
of panel, the length of soil reinforcing elements, the distance along the face of the
wall to where changes in length of the soil reinforcing elements occur; and an
indication of the final ground line and maximum calculated bearing pressures.
E. A typical cross section or cross sections showing the elevation relationship
between ground conditions and proposed grades.
F. General notes pertaining to design criteria and wall construction
G. A listing of the summary of quantities for each wall
H. All panel details shall show all dimensions necessary to construct the element, all
reinforcing steel in the element, and the location of soil reinforcing connection
devices embedded in the panels
I. Clearly indicated details for construction of walls around drainage facilities
J. Details of the architectural treatment
K. The details for diverting soil reinforcements around obstructions such as piles,
catch basins and other utilities.
L. The details for connections between the concrete panel and the reinforcements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
M. The Contractor shall verify the existing ground elevations at the site before
preparing the working drawings. The working drawings shall contain all
information required for the proper construction of the system at each location
including existing ground line at face of wall as verified at the site and any required
revisions or additions to drainage systems or other facilities. The working drawings
shall include "General Notes" that contain design parameters, material notes, and
wall construction procedures and shall be accompanied with calculations. The
working drawings and calculations shall be stamped and signed by an engineer
who is registered as a Civil Engineer in the State of California. The Contractor
shall allow the Engineer 30 days to review the drawings after a complete set has
been received.
N. Unless otherwise specified, at the completion of each structure for which working
drawings were submitted and if the work detailed in these working drawings is
permanent, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer one set of corrected as-
built prints 11" x 17" in size and on 20-pound (minimum) bond paper, showing as-
built conditions. As-built drawings that are common to more than one structure
shall be submitted for each structure.
O. Due to the nature of MSE Retaining Wall Systems, contractors shall provide a
system specific submittal package to the Civil Engineer at least thirty (30) days
prior to construction for approval. Incomplete submittal packages will not be
reviewed.
Submit the following at least thirty (30) days prior to construction for approval:
1. Product Data
a. Material description and installation instructions for each
manufactured product specified including Mechanically Stabilized
Embankment (MSE) and soil reinforcement.
b. Name and address of the production facility where the proposed
MSE units will be manufactured. All units to be manufactured at the
same facility.
c. Notarized letter from the MSE manufacturer stating that the units
supplied for this project are manufactured in complete compliance
with Section 2.01 of this specification. The letter shall state that the
MSE units shown in the attached test reports are representative
samples of the plants normal mix design and regular production
runs.
2. Test Reports:
a. Independent laboratory reports indicating compressive strength,
moisture absorption and freeze-thaw durability of the concrete
retaining wall units from the proposed production facility. Only test
performed within the past 12 months will be considered current and
valid.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
b. Independent test reports verifying the long-term design strength
properties (creep, installation damage, and durability) and soil
interaction properties of the geosynthetic reinforcement.
c. Independent test reports verifying the connection capacity between
the geosynthetic reinforcement and the concrete retaining wall
units.
3. Retaining Wall Final Design Submittals
a. Shop Drawings: For initial review, Five (5) sets of the retaining wall
system design, including wall elevation views, geosynthetic
reinforcement layout, pertinent details, and drainage provisions. A
registered professional engineer licensed in the State of California
shall sign and certify that the shop drawings are designed in
accordance with the project civil plans and specifications. After
review, between six (6) to twelve (12) sets of the retaining wall
system design, including wall elevation views, soil reinforcement
layout, pertinent details, and drainage provisions shall be submitted
for final approval and use during construction. A registered
professional engineer licensed in the State of California shall sign
and certify that the shop drawings are designed in accordance with
the project civil plans and specifications.
b. Design Calculations: Four (4) sets of engineering design
calculations prepared in accordance with SCRRA Design Criteria
Manual. Analysis shall include Internal, External, Global Stability,
and Bearing Capacity Calculations.
1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Designs for MSE’s using extensible soil reinforcement shall be prepared according
to design methodology presented in the SCRRA Design Criteria Manual. Design
submittals not meeting this design criteria or technical/administrative criteria as
specified will be rejected in their entirety until complete compliance is achieved.
The Authority reserves all rights in determining compliance for plan approval and
may reject any submittals.
B. Design of the MSE shall be based on the soil parameters as determined during the
geotechnical investigation as provided in the Contract Documents.
C. The Design Engineer of Record shall be responsible for selecting and specifying
reinforced fill material. The General Contractor is responsible for ensuring and
documenting the reinforced fill meets the specified parameters for both strength
and compaction. Compacted retained soil shall meet the minimum requirements
specified.
D. The minimum factors of safety shall be as follows:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
1. 1.5 against pullout of the reinforcements based on pullout resistance at 0.5
inch deformation for a representative backfill. (i.e. the resulting deformation
should not exceed 0.5 inch times the design load)
2. 1.5 against sliding of the mass
3. 2.0 against overturning of the mass
4. 2.0 against panel connection pullout or rupture, and 1.5 against a panel
connection deformation of 0.5 inch under the maximum allowable
reinforcement tension. (i.e. the resulting deformation should not exceed
0.5 inch at 1.5 times the design load).
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Concrete Retaining Wall Units and Accessories: Deliver, store, and handle
materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, in such a manner
as to prevent damage. Check the materials upon delivery to assure that proper
material has been received. Store above ground on wood pallets or blocking.
Remove and replace damaged or otherwise unsuitable material, when so
determined, from the site.
B. Exposed faces of concrete wall units shall be free of chips, cracks, stains, and
other imperfections detracting from their appearance, when viewed from a distance
of 10 feet.
C. Prevent mud, wet cement, adhesives and similar materials that may harm
appearance of units, from coming in contact with system components.
D. Panels shall be stored and shipped in stacks, front face down. Firm blocking, of
sufficient thickness to prevent the attachment devices from contacting the panel
above, shall be located immediately adjacent to the attachment devices. Lifting
inserts shall be installed on the top edge of the precast panels to permit lifting at
the project site. Reinforcement connection inserts (tie strips or loop inserts) shall
not be used for lifting or handling the panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Retaining Wall Units
1. Concrete used in precast and cast-in-place reinforced concrete members
of earth retaining structures shall conform to the details shown on the plans,
the provisions in Section 03 30 00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
2. Concrete facing panels shall have a minimum thickness of 5 ½ inches and
a minimum concrete cover on reinforcing steel of 1-1/2 inches. Cement
shall be Type I, II or III and shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M-85. Additives containing chloride shall not be used without the approval
of the Engineer. Attachment devices and lifting devices shall be set in
place to the dimensions and tolerances shown on the plans and called out
in these specifications prior to casting.
3. Acceptability of the precast units shall be determined on the basis of
compressive strength tests and visual inspection. The precast units shall
be considered acceptable regardless of curing age when compressive
strength test results indicate that the compressive strength will conform to
the 28-day requirement. The Contractor, or his supplier, shall furnish
facilities and perform all necessary sampling and testing in an expeditious
and satisfactory manner. Panels utilizing Type I or II cement shall be
considered acceptable for placement in the wall when the seven-day initial
strength equals or exceeds 85 percent of the 28-day requirement.
4. The panels shall be cast face down in level forms supported on a flat
working surface. Guides shall be used to locate and support attachment
devices set in the back face of the panel. The concrete in each panel unit
shall be placed without interruption and shall be consolidated by the use of
an approved vibrator, supplemented by such hand tamping as may be
necessary to force the concrete into the corners of the forms and to prevent
the formation of stone pockets or cleavage planes. Clear form oil or release
agent shall be used throughout the casting operation.
5. The units shall be cured for a sufficient length of time so that the concrete
will develop the specified compressive strength. Any production lot which
does not conform to the strength requirements shall be rejected
6. The forms shall remain in place until they can be removed without damage
to the unit.
7. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans or elsewhere in the specifications,
the concrete surface for the front face shall have an ordinary steel form
finish, and for the rear face an unformed finish. The rear face of the panel
shall be free of open pockets of aggregate and surface distortions in excess
of ¼ inch.
8. All units shall be manufactured within the following tolerances with respect
to the dimensions shown on the shop drawings.
a. Attachment Devise Locations and Alignment- Lateral position of
reinforcing strip attachment devices shall be within one inch.
Embedment measured from the back face of the panel shall be
within + ¼ inch, - ½ inch. Bearing surfaces of multiple attachment
points for a single soil reinforcing element shall align within 1/16
inch.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
b. Panel Dimensions - All panel dimension shall be within ¼ inch. All
hardware embedded in the panel with the exception of attachment
devices shall be within ¼ inch.
c. Panel Squareness - Squareness, as determined by the difference
between the two diagonals, shall not exceed ½ inch.
d. Panel Surface Finish - Surface defects on smooth-formed surfaces,
measured on a length of 5 feet, shall not exceed ¼ inch. Surface
defects on textured-finished surfaces, measured on a length of 5
feet, shall not exceed 5/16 inch.
9. Acceptance of the concrete panels, with respect to compressive strength,
shall be determined on the basis of production lots. A production lot is
defined as a group of panels that shall be represented by a single set of
compressive strength samples and shall consist of not more than 80 panels
or a single day's production, whichever is less.
a. Compressive strength tests shall be performed on 6-inch diameter
by 12-inch cylinders prepared in accordance with AASHTO T-23.
During the production of the concrete panels, the manufacturer
shall randomly sample the concrete in accordance with AASHTO
T-141. A single set of compressive strength samples, consisting of
a minimum of four (4) cylinders, shall be made for every production
lot.
b. For every compressive strength sample, a minimum of two
cylinders shall be cured in the same manner as the panels and
tested at seven (7) days or less. The average compressive strength
of these cylinders, when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-22,
will determine the initial strength of the concrete. In addition, a
minimum of two cylinders shall be cured in accordance with
AASHTO T-23 and tested at 28 days. The average compressive
strength of these cylinders, when tested in accordance with
AASHTO T-22, will determine the compressive strength of the
production lot.
c. If the initial strength test result indicates a compressive strength
greater than or equal to 4,000 pounds per square inch, then this
test result will be utilized as the compressive strength test result for
that production lot, and the requirement for testing at 28 days will
be waived for that particular production lot.
d. Acceptance of a production lot will be made if the compressive
strength test result is greater than or equal to 4,000 pounds per
square inch. If the compressive strength test result is less than
4,000 pounds per square inch, the acceptance of the production lot
will be based on its meeting the following acceptance criteria in its
entirety:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
1) Ninety (90) percent of the compressive strength test results
for the overall production shall exceed 4,150 pounds per
square inch.
2) The average of any six (6) consecutive compressive
strength test results, including the one in question, shall
exceed 4,250 pounds per square inch.
3) No individual compressive strength test result shall fall
below 3,600 pounds per square inch.
e. In the event that a production lot fails to meet the specified
compressive strength requirements, the production lot shall be
rejected. Such rejection shall prevail unless the manufacturer, at
his own expense, obtains and submits evidence of a type
acceptable to the Engineer that the strength and quality of the
concrete placed within the panels of the production lot is
acceptable. If such evidence consists of tests made on cores taken
from the panels within the production lot, the cores shall be obtained
and tested in accordance with AASHTO T-24.
10. Precast panels shall be accepted for use in wall construction provided the
concrete strength meets or exceeds the minimum compressive strength
requirement, the soil reinforcement connection devices and the panel
dimensions are within tolerances and any chipping, cracks, honeycomb or
other defects are within acceptable standards for precast concrete as
determined by the Engineer.
11. It is recognized that certain cracks and surface defects are not detrimental
to the structural integrity of the panel if properly repaired. The Engineer
shall determine the need for and proper method of such repair. All repairs
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to acceptance of the panel for use
in wall construction.
12. The date of manufacture, the production lot number, and the piece-mark
shall be clearly marked on the side of each panel.
13. The concrete leveling pads for the Mechanically Stabilized Embankment
(MSE) system shall conform to the provisions in the Caltrans Standard
Specifications, Section 90-10, "Minor Concrete."
B. Reinforcement
1. Reinforcement shall conform to the provisions in Section 03 21 00.
C. Joint Material
Installed to the dimensions and thicknesses in accordance with the plans or
approved shop drawings.
1. Bearing Pads
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
a. Bearing pads shall be EPDM rubber pads conforming to ASTM D-
2000 M2AA 807, having a durometer hardness of 80 +/- 5.
2. Joint Cover
a. Where required, as shown on the plans, horizontal and vertical
joints between panels shall be covered by a geotextile. The
geotextile may be either a non-woven needle punched polyester
geotextile or a woven monofilament polypropylene geotextile as
approved by the wall supplier. Adhesive used to hold the geotextile
filter fabric material to the rear of the facing panels prior to backfill
placement shall be approved by the wall supplier.
D. Galvanizing
1. Soil reinforcement, connecting elements, and other steel components that
are in contact with the earth shall be galvanized in conformance with the
provisions in the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 75-1.05,
"Galvanizing."
E. Inspection Elements
1. If a proprietary alternative system is selected, inspection elements
representative of the particular soil reinforcement shall be furnished in the
same number and approximate location as shown on the plans for the MSE
system.
2. When metallic soil reinforcement is used, the threaded end of the
inspection wire may be formed before or after galvanizing. The end 4
inches of the wire shall be coated with two applications of an approved
unthinned commercial quality zinc-rich primer (organic vehicle type). The
threaded end of the wire shall be encapsulated with corrosion inhibiting,
mastic filled, round vinyl enclosure secured with a nylon tie as shown on
the plans. If the threaded end is galvanized after threading, the threads
shall be cleaned before painting. There shall be no damage to the
unthreaded portion of the galvanized inspection wire.
F. Soil Reinforcement
1. Soil reinforcement shall conform to the details shown on the contract plans,
the approved working drawings, the preapproved proprietary system
details, and these special provisions.
2. W11 and W20 steel wire shall conform to the requirements in ASTM
Designation: A 82/A 82M. The welded wire mat shall conform to the
requirements in ASTM Designation: A 185/A 185M. D11 and D20
deformed steel wire may be substituted for W11 and W20 steel wire,
respectively. The welded wire mat utilizing deformed steel wire shall
conform to the requirements in ASTM Designation: A 496/A 496M and
ASTM Designation: A 497/A 497M.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
3. The button on button-head wires shall conform to the provisions in the
Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 50-1.05, "Prestressing Steel."
4. The coupler at the wire mat connection shall be a seamless steel sleeve.
The coupler shall be applied over the button-head wires and swaged by
means of a hydraulic press. The coupler shall develop the minimum tensile
strength of the wire without exceeding a total slip of the wires of 3/16 inch.
5. Sample button-head wire and coupler connectors shall develop the
minimum tensile requirements for W11 and W20 steel wire in ASTM
Designation: A 82/A 82M without exceeding a total slip of the wires of 3/16
inch when tested in conformance with the provisions for tension testing of
round wire samples in ASTM Designation: A 370. When D11 and D20
deformed steel wire are substituted, samples shall develop the minimum
tensile requirements contained in ASTM Designation: A 496/A 496M. An
independent testing laboratory shall perform button-head wire and coupler
connection testing. Samples shall consist of 2 button-head wires each 24
inches long connected by a swaged coupler.
6. Prior to the start of wall construction, the Contractor shall furnish test results
to the Engineer from tension and slip tests conducted on 6 proposed
button-head wire and coupler connections. Failure of any of the proposed
button-head wire and coupler connector samples to meet the slip and
tensile strength requirements herein shall require the connection be
redesigned by the Contractor.
7. No installation of face panels shall be allowed until the Contractor has
successfully completed tension and slip testing for proposed button-head
wire and coupler connectors.
8. During wall construction, the Contractor shall furnish test results to the
Engineer from tension and slip testing of 4 samples of production button-
head wire and coupler connections for each lot of 500 individual mat wire
connections incorporated into the work. Production testing shall consist of
testing each of the 4 sample connections for both slip and tensile
requirements herein. If 2 or more of the production samples fail to meet
slip or tensile test requirements, the entire lot represented by these
samples shall be rejected. If one of the production samples fails to meet
slip or tensile test requirements, an additional 4 samples shall be tested.
Should any of the additional samples fail to meet the slip or tensile
requirements, the entire lot represented by these samples shall be rejected.
9. Splicing of the welded wire mat along its length shall be by mechanical
coupler that shall develop the minimum tensile strength of the wire. The
mechanical coupler shall be approved by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
10. Geogrid soil reinforcement roll identification, storage, and handling shall be
in accordance with ASTM Designation: D 4873, and as specified in the
preapproved proprietary details. The geogrid shall be shipped and stored
such that the material is not placed directly on the ground. The geogrid
shall be covered and protected at all times during shipment and storage
such that it is fully protected from UV radiation including sunlight, site
construction damage, precipitation, chemicals, flames including welding
sparks, temperatures less than 20 F or greater than 140 F, or other
conditions that may damage the physical property values of the geogrid.
The Contractor shall prevent foreign materials from coming into contact
with or affixing to the geogrid.
G. Reinforced Backfill:
1. Excavation and backfill shall conform to the details shown on the plans, the
provisions in Section 31 20 00.
2. Structure backfill for earth retaining structures with soil reinforcement shall
be free of organic material and debris and substantially free of shale or
other soft materials of poor durability. Structure backfill shall not contain
slag aggregate or recycled materials such as glass, shredded tires,
portland cement concrete rubble, asphaltic concrete rubble, or other
unsuitable material as determined by the Engineer.
a. GP, GW, SP, SW, or SM soil types, classified in accordance with
ASTM D2487 and the USCS classification system, may be used for
all design heights
b. SC, ML and CL soil types, classified in accordance with ASTM
D2487 and the USCS classification system, are considered suitable
soils with a total height of 10 feet or less.
c. CH, OH, MH, OL, or PT soil types, classified in accordance with
ASTM D2487 and the USCS classification system, shall not be
used.
d. Draining System
3. Structure backfill for earth retaining structures with soil reinforcement other
than geosynthetic shall conform to the following requirements or the
requirements of the proprietary wall system, if more restrictive:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
Gradation Requirements
Sieve Size Percentage California Test
Passing
6" 100 202
3" 78-100 202
No. 4 ---- 202
No. 30 0-60 202
No. 200 0-15 202
Property Requirements
Test Requirement California Test
Sand Equivalent 12 minimum 217
Plasticity Index 6 maximum 204
Minimum 2000 ohm-cm 643
Resistivity
Chlorides < 250 ppm 422
Sulfates < 500 ppm 417
pH 5.5 to 10.0 643
If 12 percent or less passes the No. 200 sieve and 50
percent or less passes the No. 4, the Sand Equivalent and
Plasticity Index requirements shall not apply.
4. Structure backfill for earth retaining structures with geosynthetic soil
reinforcement shall conform to the following requirements:
Gradation Requirements
Sieve Size Percentage California Test
Passing
2" 100 202
No. 4 50-80 202
No. 40 0-30 202
No. 200 0-15 202
Property Requirements
Test Requirement California Test
Sand Equivalent 30 minimum 217
Plasticity Index 6 maximum 204
Durability Index 35 minimum 229
pH 4.5 to 9.0 643
5. Permeable material shall be used for the portion of the structure backfill for
earth retaining structures with soil reinforcement within the limits shown on
the plans. Permeable material shall be Class 1, Type B, conforming to the
provisions in the Caltrans Standard Specification, Section 68-1.025,
"Permeable Material."
6. Permeable material for earth retaining structures with metallic soil
reinforcement shall conform to the following requirements:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
Property Requirements
Test Requirement California Test
Minimum 2000 ohm-cm 643
Resistivity
Chlorides < 250 ppm 422
Sulfates < 500 ppm 417
pH 5.5 to 10.0 643
7. Permeable material for earth retaining structures with geosynthetic soil
reinforcement shall conform to the following requirements:
Property Requirements
Test Requirement California Test
pH 4.5 to 9.0 643
8. Water used for earthwork or dust control within 500 feet of earth retaining
structures with metallic soil reinforcement shall conform to the provisions
for water in the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 90-2.03, "Water."
9. The drainage system shall conform to the details shown on the plans and
these special provisions.
10. Corrugated steel pipe shall conform to the provisions in the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 66, "Corrugated Metal Pipe.”
11. Perforated steel pipe underdrains and underdrain outlets and risers shall
conform to the provisions in the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section
68-1, "Underdrains,"
12. The class of rock used for rock slope protection at drain pipe outlets shall
be No. 3 Backing and shall conform to the provisions in the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 72-2, "Rock Slope Protection.”
13. Filter fabric shall conform to the provisions in the Caltrans Standard
Specifications, Section 88-1.02, "Filtration." Filter fabric shall be Class A.
14. Adhesive for bonding filter fabric to concrete panels shall be commercial
grade.
H. Miscellaneous
1. Resin bonded cork for horizontal joints shall conform to the requirements
in ASTM Designation: D 1752, Type II, with a compressive load of not less
than 100 psi.
2. Pipe for the pipe pin shall conform to the requirements in ASTM
Designation: A 53/A 53M, Standard weight, except the amount of the zinc
coating per square foot of actual surface shall average not less than 2.0
ounces and no individual specimen shall be less than 1.8 ounces.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Earth retaining structures shall be constructed to the lines, grades, and details shown on
the plans, and shall conform to these special provisions.
3.01 EARTHWORK
A. The foundation for the structure shall be graded level for a width equal to the length
of soil reinforcement elements plus 12 inches or as shown on the contract plans.
The foundation material shall be compacted to a relative compaction of not less
than 95 percent. The Engineer shall approve the compacted foundation area prior
to commencement of wall construction.
B. The Contractor shall remove unsuitable material as determined and directed by
the Engineer. This work shall be paid for as extra work as provided in the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 4-l.03D, "Extra Work."
C. Structure backfill material shall be placed and compacted simultaneously with the
erection of the facing panels. Placement and compaction shall be accomplished
without distortion of the soil reinforcement or displacement of facing panels.
Structure backfill at the front of the wall shall be completed prior to backfilling more
than 15 feet above the bottom of the lowermost face element.
D. Vertical and horizontal alignment tolerances of panels shall not exceed 3/4 inch
when measured along a 10-foot straightedge. The maximum allowable offset in
any panel joint shall not exceed 3/4 inch.
E. Structure backfill for earth retaining structures with soil reinforcement shall be
compacted to a relative compaction of not less than 95 percent.
F. A relative compaction of not less than 95 percent shall be obtained for
embankment under earth retaining structures with soil reinforcement within the
limits established by inclined planes sloping 1.5:1 (horizontal:vertical) out and
down from lines one foot outside the bottom limits of the structure, including
permeable material when required.
G. Soil reinforcement shall be tensioned in the direction perpendicular to the wall face
with enough force to remove any slack in the connection or in the soil reinforcement
itself. Soil reinforcement shall be secured in place to prevent movement during
placement of additional soil reinforcement and structure backfill until the initial lift
of structure backfill is compacted.
H. Geogrid soil reinforcement shall be placed in full-length sections.
I. Soil reinforcement shall be covered with structure backfill during the same work
shift that it is placed.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
J. Placement and compaction of structure backfill shall begin one foot from the back
face of wall panels and progress towards the free end of the soil reinforcement.
Compaction equipment shall be operated parallel to the wall facing. The remaining
width of backfill behind the wall panels shall be placed and compacted after soil
reinforcement has been covered to a depth of 6 inches.
K. Sheepsfoot or grid-type rollers shall not be used for compacting material within the
limits of the soil reinforcement. Hand-held or hand-guided compacting equipment
shall be used to compact structure backfill material within 3 feet of the facing
panels.
L. Construction equipment shall not be operated directly on the soil reinforcement. A
layer of structure backfill material not less than 6 inches in thickness shall be
maintained between the soil reinforcement and construction equipment of any
type.
M. Structure backfill material for earth retaining structures with geogrid soil
reinforcement shall be placed in lifts not to exceed 6 inches where hand-operated
compacting equipment is used and 8 inches where heavy compaction equipment
is used.
N. At each level of the soil reinforcement the structure backfill shall be constructed to
a plane 2 inches above the elevation of the soil reinforcement connection and shall
start 3 feet from the back of the face panel and extend for at least the remaining
length of soil reinforcement. This grading shall be complete before placing the
next layer of soil reinforcement.
O. Permeable material and filter fabric shall be placed along with structure backfill as
shown on the plans. Permeable material shall be placed in layers not exceeding
2 feet in thickness. Compaction of the permeable material for the drainage system
outside the limits of the soil reinforcement is not required, and equipment shall not
be operated directly on the permeable material or filter fabric. If a sloped layer of
permeable material is placed to facilitate the work or to satisfy safety
considerations, the vertical limits of permeable material shall remain unchanged
and the thickness of the layer of permeable material shall be measured normal to
the slope.
P. The Contractor shall grade the reinforced backfill to rapidly drain away from the
wall face at the end of each work shift. Berms or ditches shall be provided to direct
runoff away from the wall site. The Contractor shall not allow surface runoff from
adjacent areas to enter the wall construction site.
3.02 FILTER FABRIC
A. Filter fabric shall be placed at the locations and in conformance with the details
shown on the plans and these special provisions.
B. Immediately prior to placing filter fabric, the subgrade to receive the filter fabric
shall conform to the compaction and elevation tolerance specified for the material
involved and shall be free of loose or extraneous material and sharp objects that
may damage the filter fabric during installation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
C. Concrete panel surfaces to receive filter fabric shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned
of dust and deleterious materials.
D. Filter fabric shall be handled and placed in conformance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Filter fabric shall be stretched, aligned, and placed in a wrinkle-free manner.
F. Adjacent borders of filter fabric shall be stitched or overlapped from 12 inches to
18 inches. The preceding roll shall overlap the following roll in the direction the
material is being spread or shall be stitched. When filter fabric is joined by stitching
it shall be stitched with yarn of a contrasting color. The size and composition of
the yarn shall be as recommended by the filter fabric manufacturer. The stitches
shall number 5 to 7 per inch of seam.
G. If the filter fabric is damaged during installation, it shall be repaired by placing a
piece of filter fabric that is large enough to cover the damaged area and that meets
the overlap requirement.
H. During spreading of the permeable material, a minimum of 6 inches of the material
shall be maintained between the filter fabric and the Contractor's equipment.
Where structure backfill material is to be placed on filter fabric, a minimum of 18
inches of structure backfill material shall be maintained between the filter fabric
and the Contractor's equipment. Equipment or vehicles shall not be operated or
driven directly on filter fabric.
3.03 CONCRETE
A. Concrete for the leveling pads shall be placed at least 24 hours prior to erecting
face panels.
B. After placement of an inspection element and placement of backfill to a level at
least 2 feet above the inspection element, the void in the face panel shall be dry
packed with mortar as shown on the plans. Dry pack shall conform to the
provisions in the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 51-1.135, "Mortar,"
except that the proportion of cementitious material to sand shall be that required
to achieve a 28-day mortar compressive strength of 1000 psi to 1500 psi.
3.04 PROPRIETARY EARTH RETAINING SYSTEMS
A. If the Contractor elects to construct one of any acceptable proprietary alternative
earth retaining systems, the structure shall be constructed to the lines and grades
shown on the plans. Vertical and horizontal alignment shall be checked at every
course throughout the erection process. The construction shall include a drainage
system where shown on the plans, and shall conform to the details shown on the
approved working drawings, approved proprietary system details, and these
special provisions.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
B. The Contractor shall supply a Certificate of Compliance conforming to the
provisions in the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 6-1.07, "Certificates of
Compliance," stating the supplied material meets the respective index criteria set
forth when the proprietary alternative earth retaining system was prequalified by
the Department, as measured in accordance with all test methods and standards
specified in the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, and the
approved working drawings.
C. A qualified representative of the proprietary earth retaining system manufacturer
shall be present during erection and backfill of the first 10 feet of height of the entire
length of the wall(s) and shall be available during any remaining installations. The
manufacturer's representative shall not be an employee of the Contractor.
D. Alternative earth retaining structures shall be constructed to accommodate the
wall-mounted lighting, the wall mounted drainpipe, and the panels for future
drainage inlets, as shown on the plans. The top of wall profile of alternative earth
retaining systems shall conform to the profile shown on the plans. The bottom of
wall elevations or face panels shall be at or below the elevations shown on the
plans. The height and length to be used for any system shall be the minimums for
that system that will effectively retain the earth behind the structure for the loading
conditions and the contours, profile, or slope lines shown on the plans. The length
of soil reinforcement for any system shall be not less than that shown on the plans.
In addition, if the plans or special provisions indicate limiting parameters for
alternative systems, the system shall conform to those parameters.
E. The top of face panels, assuming no leveling pad settlement, shall be covered by
the coping lip or concrete barrier slab lip at a minimum of 9 inches.
F. The top level of soil reinforcement shall be placed parallel to the top of the concrete
panel at a distance below the top of the wall as shown on the plans. The top level
of soil reinforcement shall also be (1) placed a minimum of 3 inches below the
bottom of the barrier slab lip or the bottom of the concrete gutter behind coping
and (2) placed a minimum of 5 inches below the top edge of the concrete panel.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. MSE Retaining Walls will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Regardless of the type of earth retaining structure actually constructed, the
payment will be based on the length and vertical height of each section of system
shown on the plans that was or would have been constructed. The vertical height
of each section will be taken as the difference in elevation on the outer face from
the bottom of the lowermost face element or top of footing to the top of wall profile.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 20 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 32 20 MSE Retaining Walls
4.02 PAYMENT
A. MSE Retaining Walls furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. The contract price paid for MSE Retaining Walls at each location shown on the
plans shall include earthwork, leveling pad, coping, bearing pads, and drainage
systems, Caltrans concrete gutters, handrails, complete in place, as shown on the
plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions,
and as directed by the Engineer.
C. Full compensation for furnishing and testing sample mechanical connectors shall
be considered as included in the contract price paid per square foot for earth
retaining structure, and no separate payment will be made.
D. Full compensation for revisions to the drainage system, or other facilities made
necessary by the use of an alternative earth retaining system shall be considered
as included in the contract price paid per square foot for earth retaining structure,
and no separate payment will be made.
END OF SECTION 32 32 20
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 32 20 - 21 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 80 00
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide all work necessary to design, install and make
functional in place, all irrigation systems shown on the Submittal Drawings and/or
specified herein.
1. Complete installation of irrigation pipes and accessories for a complete
sprinkler system including trenching, backfilling, valves, controllers, valve
boxes, connections to existing electrical supply, water supply, cutting and
patching as necessary.
2. All hose bibs and quick couplers necessary.
3. Protect all existing utilities and repair any damage to existing utilities with
matching new materials, at no increase in contract price.
4. As-built drawings showing the piping schematic and layout.
5. Clean-up.
6. Final Inspection.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 26 05 00 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
2. Section 32 90 00 – Landscaping
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a landscaping and landscape Irrigation Sprinkler system design meeting
the requirements of the local agency requirements.
B. Submit complete materials list of all manufactured products to be installed on the
site. Provide manufacturer's name, model number, quantity and size. Note clearly
all products which are not as specified and are submitted for approval as equal
products.
1.03 CONDUCT OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall maintain continuously, a competent superintendent or
foreman, satisfactory to Engineer, on the work during progress, with authority to
act for him in all matters pertaining to the work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 80 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 80 00 Irrigation System
B. Work shall be coordinated with other trades so as to provide a complete, functional
system.
1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Before proceeding with any work, the Contractor shall carefully check and verify
all dimensions. Spacing of sprinkler heads and locations of valves and backflow
preventer shall be as indicated on the Contractor submittal.
B. Grading: Before starting work on the irrigation system, the Contractor shall inspect
the site and check all grades to satisfy that the work may proceed safely.
C. Water Supply: The sources of water supply shall be from the potable water
pipeline shown on the Submittal Drawings. Contractor to verify existing static
pressure as indicated on the plans prior to beginning irrigation construction.
Contractor to notify Engineer immediately should there be any discrepancy
between the required pressure and the actual pressure on site.
D. Permits and Fees: The Contractor shall apply for all necessary permits required
in the pursuit of his work as required by governing codes.
E. Record and As-Built Drawings:
1. The Contractor shall provide, keep up to date and complete "as-built"
drawings which shall show the exact "as-built" locations, sizes, and kinds
of equipment. This set of drawings shall be kept up to date until
construction is complete.
2. The Contractor shall dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference,
building corners, sidewalk, or road intersections, etc., the location of the
following items:
a. Connection to existing water lines
b. Connection to existing electrical power
c. Gate valves
d. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimension max. 100' along
routing)
e. Sprinkler control valves
f. Routing of control wiring
g. Quick coupling valves
h. Other related equipment
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 80 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 80 00 Irrigation System
3. On or before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver the
corrected and completed sepias to the Engineer. Delivery of the sepias will
not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing required
information that may be omitted from the prints.
F. Controller Charts:
1. As-built drawings shall be approved by the Engineer before controller
charts are prepared.
2. Provide two controller charts for each controller supplied.
3. The chart shall show the area controlled by the automatic controller and
shall be the maximum size which the controller door will allow.
4. The chart is to be a reduced drawing of the actual as-built system.
However, in the event the controller sequence is not legible when the
drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a size that will be legible when
reduced. Controller chart size shall be approved by the Engineer.
5. The chart shall be a black line or blue line print, and a different color shall
be used to indicate the area of coverage for each station.
6. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed
between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 10 mils.
7. These charts shall be completed and approved prior to final inspection of
the irrigation system.
G. Irrigation Contractor shall be responsible for full coverage of irrigation system.
H. Operation and maintenance Manuals:
1. Prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten calendar days prior to
completion of construction, two hard cover binders with three rings
containing the following information.
a. Index sheet stating contractor's address and telephone number, list
of equipment with name and addresses of local manufacturer's
representatives.
b. Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed
under this contract.
c. Guarantee statement.
d. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major
equipment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 80 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 80 00 Irrigation System
2. In addition to the above mentioned maintenance manuals, provide the
Owner's maintenance personnel with instructions for major equipment and
show evidence in writing to the Architect at the conclusion of the project
that this service has been rendered.
I. Equipment to be Furnished:
1. Supply as a part of this contract the following tools:
a. Two (2) sets of special tools required for removing, disassembling
and adjusting each type of sprinkler and valve supplied on this
project.
b. Two (2) keys for each automatic controller.
c. Two (2) quick coupler keys and matching hose swivels for each type
of quick coupling valve installed.
2. The above mentioned equipment shall be turned over to the Engineer at
the conclusion of the project. Before final inspection can occur, evidence
that the Owner has received material must be shown to the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All material shall be new stock and best grade of its kind. It shall be as specified
unless otherwise specifically approved, in writing, by the Engineer. Materials not
named shall be subject to approval or rejection by the Engineer.
2.02 PIPING
A. Plastic Pipe:
1. Plastic pipe and fittings shall be virgin hi-impact poly-vinyl chloride Type 2
conforming to commercial standards of National Sanitation foundation.
2. All plastic pipe shall be continuously and permanently marked with the
following information: Manufacturer's name, kind of pipe, material size, IPS,
NSF approval and schedule and type.
3. Plastic pipe shall be as manufactured by Lasco, Baldwin, GSR, Pacific
Wester, Johns Manville, or approved equal.
B. Main Lines:
1. All piping and fittings under constant pressure between backflow preventer
and control valves, quick couplers and hose bibs shall be as indicated per
Approved Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 80 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 80 00 Irrigation System
2. All main line piping and fittings under tracks and up to 10 feet beyond
centerline of tracks shall be PVC Schedule 80.
C. Lateral Lines:
1. All piping and fittings under intermittent pressure, down stream of control
valves shall be rigid PVC 1120, Schedule 40, Type I, Grade I or II and shall
meet ASTM-D 1785-86 standards.
2.03 FITTINGS
A. Fittings, Nipples and Risers:
1. Plastic fittings shall be rigid poly-vinyl chloride, standard weight, schedule
of pipe being fitted.
2. Fittings for quick coupler shall be as specified on Submittal Drawings.
3. Risers shall be PVC Schedule 80 or as specified on Submittal Drawings.
4. Street Elbows, Bushings, Close Nipples, Long Screw, Bullhead Tees or
Crosses will not be allowed and shall not be installed except as otherwise
specified or detailed herein.
B. Brass Pipe and Fittings:
1. Where indicated on the Submittal Drawings, use red brass screwed pipe
conforming to Federal Specification #WW-P-351
2. Fittings shall be red brass conforming to Federal Specifications #WW-P-
460.
2.04 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
Controller shall be as specified on approved Submittal Drawings. Controllers shall be
installed as per manufacturer's specifications. Verify location of electrical service of
Controllers. Controllers to be compatible with Rainbird Maxicom Cluster Control Units
(ESP.MC).
2.05 VALVES
A. Remote Control Valves:
1. Remote control valves shall be as specified on Submittal Drawings and
installed in accordance with the details thereof.
B. Ball Valves:
1. Ball valves shall be as specified on Submittal Drawings.
C. Control wire for remote control valve operation:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 80 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 80 00 Irrigation System
1. Connection between the automatic irrigation sprinkler controller and the
remote control valves shall be made with #14 UF direct burial wire.
2. Color code each wire with a different color for each valve station. Common
to be black.
2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Backflow preventer shall be as specified on Submittal Drawings.
2.07 CONTROL VALVE BOXES
A. Ball Valve: Use 10"x10-1/4" round box for all gate valves, Carson Industries #910-
12B with green bolt down cover or approved equal. Extension sleeve shall be
PVC-6" minimum size.
B. Remote Control Valve: Use 9-1/2"x16"x11" rectangular box for all electrical control
valves, Carson Industries 1419-12B with green bolt down cover or approved equal.
2.08 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. All sprinkler heads shall be as specified on Submittal Drawings.
2.09 COMMUNICATION CABLE
A. Shall be as specified in the Electrical Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Excavations:
1. Depths of minimum cover unless otherwise specified.
a. Pressure main lines - 18" deep.
b. Pressure main line under paving - 24" deep run in a Schedule 40
PVC sleeve; under train tracks - 5'-6" below base of rail per
Engineering Standard ES5001, run in a Schedule 40 PVC sleeve.
c. Non pressure lateral sprinkler lines - 12" deep.
d. Control wires - Below main lines when installed with main line pipe,
18" minimum. Run in a Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeve under paving.
(May share pipe sleeve with main line pipe.)
e. Lateral line under paving - 18" deep.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 80 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 80 00 Irrigation System
2. Wherever possible, the main and lateral line may occupy the same trench.
Main and lateral lines in the same trench must be spaced a minimum of 6"
horizontally apart.
B. Trenching:
1. Trenches shall be dug straight.
2. Trench bottoms shall be at a true gradient providing support to pipe through
its entire length and shall be free from rocks, clods, debris and sharp edged
objects.
C. Cathodic Protection:
1. Cathodic protection shall be provided in piping systems by installing
insulating couplings, flanges, or unions between copper or brass and steel
or cast iron pipe. (Any dissimilar metals)
D. Plastic Pipe and Fitting:
1. Sprinkler head and installation shall be as detailed on Submittal Drawings.
2. Due to the nature of plastic pipe and fittings, the Contractor shall exercise
care in handling, loading, unloading and storage to avoid damage. The
pipe and fittings shall be stored under cover, and shall be transported in
vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the length of pipe to lie flat, so as
not be subject to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point.
Any pipe that has been dented or damaged shall be discarded until such
damage has been cut and pipe is rejoined with a coupling.
3. The bottom of the trench in which plastic pipe is installed shall be free from
rocks or other sharp edged objects.
4. Welded joint shall be given at least 15 minutes setup curing time before
moving or handling. Pipe shall be partially center loaded to prevent arching
and slipping under pressure. No water shall be permitted in pipe until a
period of at least 24 hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing.
5. Backfilling shall be done when pipe is not in an expanded condition due to
heat. Cooling of the pipe can be accomplished by operating the system for
a short time before the heat of the day.
6. Long runs of PVC pipe shall be snaked in the trench to allow for contraction.
E. Backflow Preventer
1. All installation shall be per manufacturer's recommendation and per state
and local code.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 80 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 80 00 Irrigation System
2. Backflow preventer to be located in a planting area in a location to be
screened by plant material. Precise location as directed or approved by
Engineer.
F. Automatic Controller:
1. Controller shall be mounted securely as per manufacturer's
recommendations in an accessible location as directed by the Engineer.
Controller wires shall be installed in electrical conduit from controller to below
finish grade. Controller to be located as indicated on the Submittal Drawings.
2. Electrical wiring shall be installed according to local code. The cost of this
electrical connection shall be a part of this Contract.
G. Controller Wire:
1. The control wire shall be buried alongside other pipe in trenches a minimum
of 18" deep and bundled and taped at 10' on center.
2. No controller wire splices will be allowed between automatic controller and
remote control valve without approval by the Engineer.
3. Control wire splices and connections shall be made with Pen Tite
connectors or approved equal.
4. If allowed, all controller wire splices between automatic controller and
remote control valves shall be made in a 10"x10-1/4" round box, Carson
Industries #910-12B with green bolt down cover or approved equal.
H. Remote Control Valves:
1. Remote control valves shall be installed at sufficient depth to provide not
more than 10", nor less than 6", cover from the very top of the valve to finish
grade, per Submittal Drawings.
2. Before backfill of automatic valves, packing nuts shall be checked and
tightened to prevent leakage.
3. All remote control valves shall be housed in Carson boxes or approved
equal.
I. Backfill of Trenches:
1. Trenches shall be backfilled with excavated dirt after pipe has been
installed. Backfill shall be placed in layers; the thickness of the layer shall
depend on the nature of the material and the method of compaction used.
2. Compaction shall be such that there will be no settling within the one-year
guarantee period. The Contractor shall not place detrimental subsoil in the
top 5" of backfill.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 80 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 80 00 Irrigation System
3. Water compaction will be permitted.
J. Testing of Irrigation System:
1. The Contractor shall request the presence of the Engineer, at least 48
hours in advance of testing.
2. Test all pressure lines under hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per
square inch, and prove watertight.
3. Testing of pressure mainlines shall occur prior to installation of electrical
control valves.
4. All piping under paved areas shall be tested under hydrostatic pressure of
150 pounds per square inch, and proved watertight, prior to paving.
5. Sustain pressure in lines for not less than two (2) hours. If leaks develop,
replace joints and repeat test until entire system is proven watertight.
6. All hydrostatic tests shall be made only in the presence of the Engineer.
No pipe shall be backfilled until it has been inspected, tested and approved
in writing.
7. Furnish necessary force pump and all other test equipment.
8. When the sprinkler irrigation system is completed, perform a coverage test
in the presence of the Engineer, to determine if the water coverage for
planting areas is complete and adequate. Furnish all materials and perform
all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations
from Submittal Drawings, or where the system has been willfully installed
as indicated on the Submittal Drawings when it is obviously inadequate,
without bringing this to the attention of the Engineer. This test shall be
accomplished before any ground cover is planted.
9. Upon completion of each phase of work, entire system shall be tested and
adjusted to meet site requirements.
K. Guarantee:
1. The entire irrigation system shall be guaranteed by the Contractor to give
complete and satisfactory service as to material and workmanship for a
period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work by the
Engineer.
2. Should any trouble develop within the specified guarantee period which in
the opinion of the Engineer, is due to inferior or faulty material and/or
workmanship, the trouble shall be corrected, without delay, by the
Contractor to the satisfaction of, and at no expense to the Engineer, as part
of this Contract.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 80 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 80 00 Irrigation System
3. Any and all damage to rain water drains, water supply lines, gas lines
and/or other service lines shall be repaired and made good by the
Contractor at no extra cost to the Engineer.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Irrigation System will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Irrigation System furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 32 80 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 80 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 90 00
LANDSCAPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Work Include:
Furnish all labor, materials and equipment for installing landscape planting complete
as directed and indicated, including but not limited to the following:
1. Site Preparation
2. Fine grading and soil preparation
3. Furnish and planting of plant material as required by the Contractor’s
design submittal.
4. Staking and protecting trees and plantings
5. Maintenance of plants and planting for a minimum of 90 calendar days after
completion and acceptance of the work
6. Disposal of surplus material, excess dirt and debris off-site, and site clean.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 32 80 00 – Irrigation System
1.02 REFERENCES
A. SCRRA Design Criteria Manual Chapter 26, Landscaping Design Criteria
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide Landscaping design and shop drawings, products data and samples in
accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
1. Submit a landscaping and landscape Irrigation Sprinkler system design
meeting the requirements of the affected city or county Municipal Code. A
sample listing of acceptable plants, landscape irrigation equipment, and
plant sizes is attached for reference.
2. Submit delivery slips for all soil amendments including but not limited to
fertilizer, organic amendments and top mulch.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 90 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 90 00 Landscaping
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section
before, during and after installation.
B. Replacement: In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and
replacements necessary to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no additional
cost to the Authority.
1.05 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT
A. Guarantee plant material, including flatted materials, but less than 15-gallon size,
for a period of three months, and plant material 15-gallon size and over for a period
of one year from the date of final acceptance of the Project, this date to be
established by the inspection and written acceptance at the conclusion of the
maintenance period.
B. Replace any plant materials that die-back and lose their form and size as originally
specified, even though they have taken root and are growing after the die-back.
C. Within ten days of written notice by the Authority, remove and replace guaranteed
plant materials which have failed to meet the requirements of the guarantee. Make
replacements to the same specifications as required for the original plants and
guarantee as specified for the original guaranteed material.
D. Be responsible for any damage to other work as a result of replacement operations
and repair as before at no additional expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TREES
A. General: Quality of all plants shall conform to the State of California Grading Code
of Nursery Stock #1 Grade, and full sized. They shall be vigorous, of normal
growth, free of disease, insects and latent defects.
Pruning shall not be done prior to delivery except by the specific written direction of
the Engineer.
Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval or rejection at place of growth and
on the project site at any time before or during progress of work for size, variety,
conditions, latent defects or injuries. Rejected plants shall be removed from the
project site immediately.
Quantities shall be furnished as needed to complete work on Contract Documents.
B. Trees: See plant list on Drawings.
C. Tree Stakes: Shall be 2" diameter x 10' long new lodge pole pine treated with
copper napthenate.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 90 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 90 00 Landscaping
D. Tie: Shall be as detailed per plan, three (3) per double tree stake.
E. Organic Amendment's: Nitrolized wood shavings, Kellogg or approved equal.
F. Commercial Fertilizer Tablets: Agriform 21 gram 20-10-5 Planting Tablets.
G. Commercial Fertilizer: Gro Power as manufactured by Southern California
Organic Fertilizer Co., Glendale, CA, (818) 295-6849
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Plants shall be subject to inspection and acceptance at place of growth or upon
delivery to the site, for quality, size and variety. Such acceptance shall not impair
the right of inspection and rejection at a later time or during progress of work for
size, conditions of ball and roots, and latent defects or injuries. Remove rejected
plants from the site immediately. Trees 15-gallon size or larger shall be accepted
by the Engineer prior to delivery. Inspections and approvals are also required for
the landscape work noted there.
B. Inspection herein specified shall be made by the Engineer. Request inspection in
writing, at least two working days in advance of time inspection is required.
Inspections and approvals are also required for the landscape work noted there.
C. Inspections and written approvals by the Engineer will be required for the following
landscape parts of the work:
1. Verification of all soil conditioning products stockpiled on site prior to
installation.
2. Upon completion of grading and soil conditioning prior to planting.
3. When trees are spotted for planting, but before planting, holes are
excavated.
4. When planting and other indicated or specified work except the
maintenance period has been completed. Acceptance in writing shall
establish beginning of the maintenance period.
5. Final inspection at the completion of the maintenance period.
D. Contractor or his authorized representative shall be on the site at the time of each
inspection.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Sequence of Work: Refer to provisions in Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions.
B. Soil Preparation and Fertilization:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 90 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 90 00 Landscaping
1. All areas to be planted or seeded shall be cultivated to a uniform depth of
at least six inches and for this entire depth the soil shall be made loose and
friable.
2. At time of planting, the top two inches (2") of all areas to be planted shall
be free of stones, stumps, roots or other deleterious matter one inch (1")_
in diameter or larger and shall be free from all wire, plaster or similar objects
that would be a hindrance to planting or maintenance.
3. Deliver the fertilizer to the site in sealed bags with the manufacturer's
analysis printed on or attached to each bag. Do not apply fertilizer until the
total quantity needed for the entire job has been delivered to the site,
recorded and accepted by the SCRRA.
4. Rototill the following amendments uniformly to a depth of 6": 3 cubic yards
nitrolized shavings per 1,000 square feet and 150 lbs. of Gro-Power per
1,000 square feet. Quantities for bid purposes only. Contractor to install
soil preparation per Agronomic Soils Analysis recommendations.
5. Contractor to obtain and submit to SCRRA an Agronomic Soils Analysis of
on site soil after final grade is established.
C. Planting:
1. Protect plants from sun, wind and rain at all times before planting.
2. Do not plant trees until construction work in the area has been completed,
final grades established, the planting areas properly graded and prepared
as herein specified, and the work accepted by the Engineer.
3. Set plants so that when settled they bear the same relation to the finish
grade as they bore to the natural grade in the container before being
planted.
4. Upon the completion of planting operations and as a requirement just prior
to the final inspection, lightly cultivate and neatly rake soil between the
plants. Leave basins around the plants unless otherwise directed.
D. Trees:
1. Planting - Stake plant locations and obtain approval from the Engineer
before excavating pits, making necessary adjustments as directed.
2. Plants not dimensioned as to precise locations on the drawings shall be
scaled from the drawings and the plant placed in the appropriate
relationship.
3. Backfill - Shall be 6 parts rock free on site soil, 4 parts nitrolized wood
shaving, and 15 lbs. of Gro-Power per cu. yd. of mix.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 90 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 90 00 Landscaping
4. Backfill shall be "machine mixed" at each plant, planter, or container, and
consistency of mix must be reviewed by the SCRRA before planting begins.
5. Agriform 21-gram planting tablets shall be placed 6-8" deep at the side of
root ball at the following rates:
1 gallon can plants 1 tablet
5 gallon can plants 3 tablets
Plants in large tubs 2 tablet for each 1/2" of tree trunk
or boxes diameter (6" above soil level) or for
each foot of height or spread of
shrubs.
6. For planting, a hole two (2) times the diameter and 6" deeper than the root
ball shall be dug for each plant. All materials resulting from excavation of
plant holes, other than the existing topsoil, shall be disposed of at the
Contractor's expense. Backfill shall be placed in the bottom of each hole
to a growing depth at which the plant, when planted, will be 1" above normal
growing depth. Backfill is half-way up the root ball, when the hole shall be
watered sufficiently to settle the backfill around the root ball. More backfill
shall be firmed sufficiently to force air pockets from each hole.
7. No boxed, balled or canned plants shall be planted if the ball is broken or
cracked, whether before or during the process of planting. Any trees
transplanted by the Contractor that die or have bark, branch or die-back
injury shall be replaced with equal trees approved by the Engineer at the
Contractor's expense.
3.03 MAINTENANCE
A. Apply water, weed, fertilize, care for plants and perform the following plant
establishment work:
B. Maintain the entire project for a minimum period of 90 days or until acceptance of
Contract, whichever is later, commencing from the time all items of irrigation and
landscaping work have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Start
of plant establishment work shall begin only after written review by the Engineer.
Periods which the site is not adequately maintained and the Contractor has been
notified in writing as such will not be counted as maintenance days and the
maintenance period will be extended for a matching number of days.
C. During the entire maintenance period, keep all plants and planted areas well
watered and weed free at all times. Remove weeds and undesirable grasses.
Care for the entire project so that a neat and clean condition will be presented at
all times to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
D. In order to expedite the plant establishment work, maintain a sufficient number of
men and adequate equipment to perform the work herein specified, from the time
any planting is done until the end of the final maintenance period.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 90 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 90 00 Landscaping
E. The Contractor may be relieved from maintenance work when the maintenance
period or plant establishment work has been completed to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
F. Replace damage to planting areas immediately.
1. Depressions caused by vehicles, bicycles or foot traffic, shall be filled with
topsoil and leveled. Replant damaged areas.
2. Exterminate gophers and moles and repair damage as noted above.
3. Apply commercial fertilizer 5-3-3 at 30-day intervals (minimum 3
applications) at a rate of 25 lbs. per 1000 square feet. Final applications to
be applied 10 days prior to acceptance by the Engineer.
4. Submit written notice requesting final inspection a minimum of seven days
prior to anticipated date.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of planting work and before final acceptance, remove material,
equipment and debris resulting from this work. Broom clean paved areas and
leave the site in a neat condition and acceptable to the Engineer.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Landscaping will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Landscaping furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents
will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 32 90 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 90 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 32 91 00
SOIL EROSION, SEDIMENT CONTROL, TOPSOILING, AND SEEDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Soil erosion and sediment control.
2. Topsoiling and finish grading.
3. Seeding.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 31 11 00 - Site Clearing.
3. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.
4. Section 33 42 00 - Culvert and Drainage Pipe.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Erosion Control Standards: "Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and
Sediment Control in Developing Areas" by the United Sates Department of
Agriculture (USDA), Soil Conservation Service, College Park, Maryland.
B. California Stormwater Quality Association (CASQA), “BMP (Best Management
Practice) Handbook Portal (www.casqa.org) – Construction”.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. D586, Standard Test Method of Ash in Paper.
D. Caltrans Standard Specifications 2010.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certifications:
1. Association of Official Seed Analysts – Seed Laboratory Certification.
2. Society of Commercial Seed Technologists – Seed Technologist
Certification.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
B. Certificates:
1. Material test reports or certifications for all seed mixtures and products
intended to be purchased and used for the Project shall be furnished to the
Engineer for approval prior to commencing Work under this Specification.
C. Straw Bales: Twine tied.
D. Pipe Riser and Barrel: 16 gage corrugated metal pipe (CMP) of size indicated.
Coating and fabrication shall be in accordance with Section 33 42 00.
E. Stone for Stone Filter: 2 inches graded gravel or crushed stone in accordance with
Section 32 11 00.
F. Commercial Fertilizer:
1. Conform to requirements of the California Food and Agricultural Code.
2. Shall be in pelleted or granular form.
3. Shall have a guaranteed chemical analysis of 16 percent nitrogen, 20
percent phosphoric acid and 0 percent water soluble potash and shall
contain a minimum of 12 percent sulfur or a chemical analysis as required
in the plans.
G. Straw shall be derived from wheat, rice or barley.
1. Contractor must furnish evidence that clearance has been obtained from
the County Agricultural Commissioner, as required by law, before straw
obtained from outside the county in which it is to be used is delivered to the
site of the work.
H. Mulch Fiber shall be produced from natural or recycled (pulp) fiber, such as wood
chips or similar wood materials or from newsprint, chipboard, corrugated
cardboard or combination of the processed materials, and shall be free of synthetic
or plastic materials.
1. Fiber shall not contain more than 7 percent ash as determined by ASTM
D586.
2. Fiber shall have a water-holding capacity by weight of not less than 100
percent.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
3. Fiber shall be of such character that the material will disperse into a uniform
slurry when mixed with water.
4. Fiber shall be colored to contrast with the area on which the fiber is to be
applied and shall not stain concrete or painted surfaces.
5. pH between 4.3 and 6.0.
I. Grass Seed:
1. Shall be the type as specified in the plans.
2. When not specified in the Plans, Coastal Sage Scrub Mix shall be used per
the following table:
Pounds/ Purity /
Botanical Name Common Name
Acre Germination
Artemisia California California Sage Brush 4 50/15
Encelia California Bush Sunflower 3 60/40
Eschscholzia California California Poppy 2 75/98
Lotus Scoparius Deerweed 8 60/90
Eriogonum fasciculatum California Buckwheat 8 65/10
Lasthenia glabrata Goldfields 2 85/90
Lupinus Succulentus Arroyo Lupine 4 85/90
Eriophyllum confertiflorum Golden Yarrow 3 60/30
Salvia apiana White Sage 4 50/70
Sisyrinchium bellum Blue-Eyed Grass 1 75/95
Diplacus longiflorus Monkey Flower 2 55/2
Salvia mellifera Black Sage 4 50/70
Stipa pulchra Purple Needlegrass 2 70/60
Bromus arizonicus Cucamonga Brome 5 95/80
Melica california California Melic 3 90/60
TOTAL POUNDS PER ACRE 55
Slurry Mix
Fiber 2000
Organic Soil Stabilant
140
(Tackifier)
3. Seed (per seed type) shall be a minimum of 50 percent Pure Live Seed
(PLS) content. PLS content is defined as the product of 1) the percentage
of tested purity and 2) the percentage of tested germination of the specified
seed (PLS content - % purity x % germination = 50%) unless otherwise
stated. The Engineer may reduce the PLS content if the specified minimum
is not available.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
4. All legumes shall be inoculated with viable bacteria compatible for use with
that species of seed. Contractor must furnish written statement of
inoculation. The application rate for seed shall be the weight exclusive of
inoculating Materials.
5. Inoculated seed shall be sown within 20 days of inoculation or shall be
reinoculated. The inoculant shall be added at the rate of five times the
amount recommended in the inoculant package.
6. Signed copies of vendor’s statement for the seed mixture shall be supplied
the Engineer for approval prior to using the seed.
a. State botanical and common name.
b. Place of Origin.
c. Strain.
d. Percentage of purity, germination.
e. Amount of PLS per bag.
7. Each container of seed will be labeled in accordance with Federal and
State Seed Laws with certification that the seed equals or exceeds
requirements in these Specifications or as shown on the Plans.
J. Stabilizing Emulsion:
1. Organic Soil Stabilant shall be registered with and licensed by the State of
California, Department of Food and Agriculture, as an “auxiliary soil
chemical.”
2. Shall be a concentrated liquid chemical that forms a plastic film upon drying
and allows water and air to penetrate.
K. Water shall be free of substances harmful to growth. Provide water from a source
approved prior to use.
L. Erosion Control Blanket:
1. General:
a. Plans shall specify if the erosion control blanket will have seeds
mixed with material and the type and rate of seeds to be placed in
the mat.
2. Straw Mat/Blanket:
a. The blanket shall be machine-produced mat consisting of 70
percent agricultural straw and 30 percent coconut fiber
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
b. The straw and coconut fiber shall be uniformly distributed
throughout the mat to a loose thickness of about 1/2 inches, plus or
minus 1/8 inches.
c. The blanket shall be of consistent thickness with its straw and
coconut fiber evenly distributed over the entire area of the mat. The
blanket shall be covered on the top side with polypropylene netting
having an approximate 3/4 inches x 3/4 inches mesh containing
ultraviolet additives to resist breakdown for at least 90-days, and on
the bottom with a polypropylene netting with an approximate 1/2
inches by 1/2 inches mesh. The blanket shall be sewn together
with biodegradable thread.
d. Average dry weight shall be at least 0.70 lbs/sq. yd.
e. Minimum width shall be 6 feet.
3. Jute Matting:
a. Uniform open plain weave of unbleached, single jute yarn treated
with a fire retardant chemical.
b. Yarn shall be of loosely twisted construction and not vary in
thickness by more than 1/2 of its nominal diameter.
c. Furnished in rolled strips about 150 feet long, average width about
48 inches, plus or minus one (1) inch.
d. Average weight about 0.92 lbs/sq. yd., plus or minus 5 percent.
4. Excelsior Blanket:
a. Machine produced mat of wood excelsior with 80 percent of fibers
being at least 6 IN long
b. Wood from which excelsior is cut shall be properly cured to achieve
adequately curled and barbed fibers.
c. Blanket shall be of consistent thickness, with even distribution of
fibers.
d. The blanket shall be covered on the top side with a 90-day
biodegradable extruded plastic mesh netting, entwined with the
blanket.
e. Minimum weight of blanket shall be 0.8 lbs/sq. yd., plus or minus 5
percent.
f. Minimum width of blanket shall be 24 inches, with rolls being about
150 feet long.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
g. Blanket shall not flame or smolder for more than a distance of 12
inches from a spot where a lighted cigarette is placed on the surface
of the blanket.
5. Erosion control anchors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
M. Wattles and Coir Logs:
1. Wattles shall consist of cylinders of biodegradable plant material such as
straw, coir, compost, or wood shavings encased within biodegradable or
photodegradable netting.
a. Minimum 5 inches dia.
b. Encasing material clean, evenly woven, free of encrusted concrete
or other contaminating materials.
c. Encasing material shall be free from cuts, tears, or weak places and
shall have a life-span greater than 6 months.
d. Fill shall be coarse compost material.
2. Coir Logs shall be 100 percent durable coconut (coir) fiber uniformly
compacted with an outer netting.
a. Log Segments shall have a maximum length of 20 feet and a
diameter as shown in the plans.
b. Logs shall have a density of 7 lbs/cu. feet or greater
c. Logs shall be manufactured with a woven wrapping netting made of
bristle coir twine with minimum strength of 80 lbs tensile strength.
Netting shall have nominal 2 inches x 2 inches openings.
d. Wood stakes as shown in the plans, shall have a notch to secure
rope ties of 1/4 inches dia. commercially available hemp rope.
N. Topsoil:
1. Original surface soil typical of the area.
2. Existing topsoil stockpiled under Section 31 11 00.
3. Capable of supporting native plant growth.
O. Tolerances:
1. Finish Grading Tolerance: 0.1 feet plus/minus from required elevations
P. Silt Fence:
1. Posts:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
a. Posts must be wood or metal.
b. Wood posts must be:
1) At least 2 X 2 inches in size and four (4) feet long.
2) Untreated fir, redwood, cedar, or pine, cut from sound
timber.
3) Straight and free of loose or unsound knots and other
defects that could render the posts unfit for use.
4) Pointed on the end to be driven into the ground.
c. Metal posts must:
1) Be at least 4 FT long.
2) Be made of steel.
3) Have a U-shaped, T-shaped, L-shaped, or other cross-
sectional shape that can resist failure from lateral loads.
4) Be pointed on the end to be driven into the ground.
5) Weigh at least 0.75 lbs/ft.
6) Have a safety cap attached to the exposed end. The safety
cap must be orange or red plastic and must fit snugly onto
the metal post.
d. Do not use metal posts for a temporary large sediment barrier.
e. Posts for a temporary reinforced silt fence must be at least six (6)
feet in length for a Type 1 installation and five (5) feet in length for
a Type 2 installation.
f. Posts used as stakes for a temporary straw-bale barrier must be
wood or metal.
2. Silt Fence Fabric:
a. When tested under the referenced ASTMs, the properties of silt
fence fabric must have the values shown in the following table:
Value
Property Test Woven Nonwoven
Grab breaking load, 1-inch grip, lb
min, in each direction ASTM D 4632 120 120
Apparent elongation, percent min,
in each direction ASTM D 4632 15 50
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
Water flow rate, gal per minute/sq ft
ASTM D 4491 10–100 100–150
min and max average roll value
Permittivity, sec-1min
ASTM D 4491 0.1 1.1
Apparent opening size, inches max
average roll value ASTM D 4751 0.023 0.023
Ultraviolet resistance, percent min
retained grab breaking load, 500 hours ASTM D 4355 70 70
3. Fasteners:
a. Steel staples must be a minimum of 11 gage, 6 inches, U-shaped
staples with a one (1) inch crown. Provide heavier gage and greater
length if required by the site conditions. You may use an alternative
attachment device such as a 100 percent biodegradable fastener to
install RECP instead of staples.
Q. Inlet Protection:
1. Gravel bag berm:
a. Gravel-filled bags must:
1) Be made of geosynthetic gravel-filled bag.
2) Have inside dimensions from 24 to 32 inches long and from
16 to 20 inches wide.
3) Have a bound opening to keep gravel. The opening must
be sewn with yarn, bound with wire, or secured with a
closure device.
4) Weigh from 30 to 50 lbs when filled with gravel.
b. Gravel for gravel-filled bags must be from 3/8 to 3/4 inch DIA and
must be clean and free of clay balls, organic matter, and other
deleterious materials.
2. Fiber Rolls:
a. Fiber roll must have a minimum functional longevity of 1 year and
comply with the following requirements:
1) Type A fiber roll must be fabricated from an erosion control
blanket rolled along its width. Secure with natural fiber twine
at 6 feet intervals, and 6 inch from each end. Fiber roll size
must comply with either one of the following:
a) 8 to 10 inch DIA, 10 to 20 feet long, and at least
0.5 lbs./ft.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
b) 10 to 12 inch DIA, at least 10 feet long, and at least
2 lbs./ft.
2) Type B fiber roll must be a premanufactured roll filled with
rice or wheat straw, wood excelsior, or coconut fiber. Rolls
must be covered with biodegradable jute, sisal, or coir fiber
netting secured tightly at each end. Fiber roll size must
comply with either one of the following:
a) 8 to 10 inch DIA, 10 to 20 feet long, and at least
1.1 lbs./ft.
b) 10 to 12 inch DIA, at least 10 feet long, and at least
3 lbs./ft.
3. Check Dams:
a. Gravel bag berm:
1) Gravel-filled bags must:
a) Be made of geosynthetic gravel-filled bag.
b) Have inside dimensions from 24 to 32 inch long and
from 16 to 20 inch wide.
c) Have a bound opening to keep gravel. The opening
must be sewn with yarn, bound with wire, or secured
with a closure device.
d) Weigh from 30 to 50 lbs. when filled with gravel.
2) Gravel for gravel-filled bags must be from 3/8 to 3/4 inch in
diameter and must be clean and free of clay balls, organic
matter, and other deleterious materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prior to General Stripping Topsoil and Excavating:
1. Install perimeter dikes and swales.
2. Excavate and shape sediment basins and traps.
3. Construct pipe spillways and install stone filter where required.
4. Machine compact all berms, dikes and embankments for basins and traps.
5. Install straw bales where indicated.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
a. Provide two stakes per bale.
b. First stake angled toward previously installed bale to keep ends
tight against each other.
6. Install wattles and coir logs where indicated or as Engineer directs, staking
as required by the Plans
B. Construct sediment traps where indicated on Plans during rough grading as
grading progresses.
C. Temporarily seed basin slopes and topsoil stockpiles:
1. Rate: 1/2 lb/1000 sf.
2. Reseed as required until good stand of grass is achieved.
3.02 DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
A. Maintain Basins, Dikes, Traps, Stone Filters, Straw Bales:
1. Inspect regularly especially after rainstorms.
2. Repair or replace damaged or missing items.
B. After rough grading, sow or hydroseed temporary grass cover over all exposed
earth areas not draining into sediment basin or trap.
C. Construct inlets as soon as possible.
1. Excavate and tightly secure straw bales completely around inlets as
detailed on Plans.
D. Provide necessary swales and dikes to direct all water towards and into sediment
basins and traps.
E. Do not disturb existing vegetation (grass and trees).
F. Excavate sediment out of basins and traps when capacity has been reduced by 50
percent.
1. Remove sediment from behind bales to prevent overtopping.
G. Topsoil and Fine Grade Slopes and Swales or other project areas:
1. Seed and mulch as soon as areas become ready.
3.03 NEAR COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Verify rough grading, finish grading and compaction are complete and accepted
by Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
B. Eliminate basins, dikes, traps, and other features that may cause ponding water.
C. Loosen top surface to a depth of 2 inches, removing all stones and debris over 2
inches in any dimension.
D. Spread topsoil from stockpiles or approved sources to compacted depth of 4
inches or as indicated in the Plans.
E. Provide finished surface free of stones, sticks and other material 1 inch or more in
any dimension.
1. Provide finished surface smooth and true to required grades.
2. Remove all rivulets and gullies.
F. Fine grade all remaining earth areas, loosen top surface as preparation for seeding
and mulching.
G. Spread and mix mulch and fertilizer in accordance with these Specifications or as
required in the plans during top surface preparation for seeding and mulching.
H. Do not seed until prepared topsoil has been approved by the Engineer
1. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours before beginning any seeding operations.
3.04 SEEDING
A. General:
1. Do not seed during windy weather or excessively wet or frozen ground
conditions.
2. When drought or other unsatisfactory conditions prevail, work shall be
stopped when directed.
3. Upon completion of Project, a final check of total quantities of seed used
will be made against total area seeded. If minimum rates of application
have not been met, Contractor must be required to distribute additional
quantities to make up minimum application specified.
B. Hydro Seeding:
1. Prior to seeding, areas to be planted by this method shall be moistened to
a depth of 6 IN but shall not be surface wet at the time of application.
2. Proportion and seed mix may be changed by the Engineer to meet field
conditions.
3. Mixing of hydro seeding Materials shall be performed in a thoroughly clean
tank with a built-in, continuous agitation system, which will apply the slurry
to the slopes at a continuous and uniform rate.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
4. A dispensing agent may be added provided the Contractor furnishes
evidence that the additive is not harmful to the mixture.
5. The seed shall be the last item added to the slurry. Slurry shall be applied
within 30 minutes after seed has been added.
a. Mixture shall be such that an absorbent, porous mat will be formed.
6. The slurry planted areas shall be kept moist during the germination period,
but puddling shall be avoided.
7. Any Materials considered harmful, as determined by the Engineer, shall not
be used.
C. Power-Drawn Drills or Seeders:
1. Equipment must be certified by Contractor to place seed at the required
rates in these Specifications or as shown on the Plans.
2. Method may be used for slopes flatter than 3 horizontal to 1 vertical.
3. Drills or seeders shall be run at right angles to the direction of slope.
4. Engineer will approve use of method.
D. Hand Methods:
1. Use where above methods are not practical as determined by the Engineer.
2. Method must show ability to spread seeds evenly at rates required by these
Specifications or the Plans in the areas other methods not practical.
3.05 STRAW MAT/BLANKET
A. Prior to seeding and until placing the blanket, the area to be covered shall be
relatively free of all rocks or clods over 1 inch in diameter and all sticks or other
foreign material that will prevent the close contact of the blanket with the soil. The
area shall be smooth and free of ruts or other depressions.
B. The blanket shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. The straw mat/blanket shall be placed within 24 hours after seeding operations
have been completed.
1. If straw mat/blanket contains the seeds, install as soon as practicable after
final topsoil preparation has been completed and accepted by the
Engineer.
D. Installing Mat or Blanket:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
1. The blanket shall be laid out flat, even, and smooth without stretching or
crimping the material.
2. The blanket shall be applied with the length running parallel to the flow of
water.
3. The blanket edges shall be tightly butted together.
4. Staples shall be spaced not more than three feet apart in 3 rows for each
strip, with a row along each edge and one row alternately spaced in the
middle. All ends of the mesh shall be secured by staples spaced six inches
apart across the width.
5. Immediately after the straw mat/blanket has been placed and stapled, the
area covered shall be sprinkled and rolled with a light roller of sufficient
weight to press the blanket into the surface of the soil.
E. Silt Fence:
1. Construct a temporary silt fence with silt fence fabric, posts, and fasteners
assembled at the job site or with prefabricated silt fence.
2. If prefabricated silt fence is used, attach the fabric to the posts by inserting
the posts into the sewn pockets. If assembled at the job site:
a. Fasten the fabric to the posts with staples or nails if wood posts are
used.
b. Fasten the fabric to the posts with tie wires or locking plastic
fasteners if steel posts are used.
c. Space the fasteners not more than eight (8) inch apart.
3. Place temporary silt fence parallel with the slope contour. For any 50 feet
section of temporary silt fence, do not allow the base elevation of the fence
to vary by more than 1/3 of the height of the fence above the ground.
4. Install a temporary silt fence as follows:
a. Place the bottom of the fabric in a six (6) inch deep trench.
b. Secure it with the posts placed on the downhill side of the fabric.
c. Backfill the trench with soil and compact by hand or mechanical
methods to secure the fabric in the trench.
5. Connect sections of a temporary silt fence as follows:
a. Join separate sections of the silt fence to form reaches not more
than 500 feet long. Each section must be a continuous run from
end-to-end or from an end to an opening, including joined panels.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
b. Secure the end posts of each section by wrapping the tops of the
posts with at least 2 wraps of 16 gage tie wire.
6. You may install the silt fence by mechanically pushing the silt fence fabric
vertically into the soil. Mechanically installed fabric must not slip out of the
soil or allow sediment to pass under the fabric.
F. Inlet Protection:
1. Provide temporary drainage inlet protection around drainage inlets as
changing conditions require. Drainage inlet protection must be Type 1,
Type 2, Type 3A. Type 3B, Type 4A, Type 4B, Type 5, Type 6A, Type 6B,
or a combination, as appropriate for conditions around the drainage inlet.
2. For drainage inlet protection at drainage inlets in paved and unpaved areas:
a. Prevent runoff ponds from encroaching onto the traveled way or
overtopping the curb or dike. Use a linear sediment barrier to
redirect runoff and control ponding.
b. Clear the area around each drainage inlet of obstructions, including
rocks, clods, and debris greater than one (1) inch DIA, before
installing the drainage inlet protection.
c. Install the linear sediment barrier upslope of the existing drainage
inlet and parallel with the curb, dike, or flow line to prevent sediment
from entering the drainage inlet.
3. If gravel-filled bags are used for Type 3A and Type 3B temporary drainage
inlet protection, place the gravel-filled bags end-to-end to eliminate gaps.
Stack the bags so that the upper row overlaps joints in the lower row.
Arrange the bags to create a spillway by removing 1 or more gravel-filled
bags from the upper layer.
4. Place fiber rolls over the erosion control blanket for Type 4A temporary
drainage inlet protection.
5. If a foam barrier is used for Type 4B temporary drainage inlet protection,
secure the barrier to the pavement at the angle and spacing shown. Place
the barrier to provide a tight joint with the curb or dike. Cut the cover fabric
or jacket to ensure a tight fit.
6. If a rigid sediment barrier is used for Type 6A or Type 6B temporary
drainage inlet protection at a grated catch basin without a curb inlet, place
the barrier using a gasket to prevent runoff from flowing under the barrier.
Secure the barrier to the pavement with nails and adhesive, gravel-filled
bags, or a combination.
7. Install a sediment filter bag for Type 5 temporary drainage inlet protection
as follows:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
a. Remove the drainage inlet grate.
b. Place the sediment filter bag in the opening.
c. Replace the grate to secure the sediment filter bag in place.
8. AUTHORITY does not pay for relocation of temporary drainage inlet
protection during the course of work.
G. Fiber Rolls:
1. Before installing fiber roll remove obstructions from the ground, including
rocks, clods, and debris greater than one (1) inch DIA.
2. Install fiber roll approximately parallel to the slope contour. For any 20 feet
section of fiber roll, prevent the fiber roll from varying more than five (5)
percent from level. Install fiber roll on slopes at the following spacing unless
shown otherwise:
a. 10 feet apart for slopes steeper than 2:1 (horizontal:vertical).
b. 15 feet apart for slopes from 2:1 to 4:1 (horizontal:vertical).
c. 20 feet apart for slopes from 4:1 to 10:1 (horizontal:vertical).
d. 50 feet apart for slopes flatter than 10:1 (horizontal:vertical).
3. Type 1 fiber roll installation consists of placing and fastening as follows:
a. Place in a furrow that is from two (2) to four (4) inch deep.
b. Fasten with wood stakes every 4 feet along the length of the fiber
roll.
c. Fasten the ends of the fiber roll by placing a stake 6 IN from the end
of the roll.
d. Drive the stakes into the soil so that the top of the stake is less than
two (2) inch above the top of the fiber roll.
4. Type 2 fiber roll installation consists of placing and fastening as follows:
a. Fasten with notched wood stakes and rope.
b. Drive stakes into the soil until the notch is even with the top of the
fiber roll.
c. Lace the rope between stakes and over the fiber roll. Knot the rope
at each stake.
d. Tighten the fiber roll to the surface of the slope by driving the stakes
further into the soil.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
5. Maintain fiber roll in a manner that provides sediment holding capacity and
reduces runoff velocities as follows:
a. Remove sediment from behind the fiber roll when sediment is 1/3
of fiber roll height above ground.
b. Repair or adjust the fiber roll when rills or other evidence of
concentrated runoff occur beneath the fiber roll.
c. Repair or replace the fiber roll when they become split, torn, or
unraveled.
d. Add stakes when the fiber roll slumps or sags.
e. Replace broken or split wood stakes.
f. Remove sediment deposits, trash, and debris from fiber roll as
needed or when ordered. If removed sediment is deposited within
project limits, it must be stabilized and not exposed to erosion by
wind or water.
H. Check Dams:
1. Before placing a temporary check dam, remove obstructions, including
rocks, clods, and debris greater than one (1) inch DIA from the ground.
2. If a temporary check dam is to be placed in the same area as an erosion
control blanket, install the blanket before placing the dam.
3. A temporary check dam must be:
a. Placed approximately perpendicular to the centerline of the ditch or
drainage line.
b. Installed with sufficient spillway depth to prevent flanking of
concentrated flow around the ends of the check dam.
c. Type 2 if the ditch is lined with concrete or HMA.
d. Type 1 or Type 2 if the ditch is unlined.
4. For a Type 1 temporary check dam:
a. Secure the fiber rolls with rope and notched wood stakes as shown.
b. Drive the stakes into the soil until the notch is even with the top of
the fiber roll.
c. Lace rope between the stakes and over the fiber roll. Knot the rope
at each stake.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
d. Tighten by driving the stakes further into the soil and forcing the
fiber roll against the surface of the ditch or drainage line.
5. Place a Type 2 temporary check dam as a single layer of gravel-filled bags,
placed end-to-end to eliminate gaps. If you need to increase the height of
the dam, add more layers of gravel-filled bags. Stack the bags in the upper
row to overlap the joints in the lower row. Stabilize the rows by adding
more rows of bags in the lower layers.
3.06 ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon completion of the soil erosion and sediment control obtain Engineer’s written
acceptance of the work.
B. Upon completion of the topsoil and finish grading, obtain Engineer’s written
acceptance of the work.
C. Upon completion of the seeding, obtain Engineer’s written acceptance of the work.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Soil Erosion and Sediment Control will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Topsoil and Finish Grading will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
C. Seeding will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the
basis for this measurement.
D. The required areas of soil erosion and sediment control topsoil and finish grading,
and seeding as measured by the Engineer and shown on the Contract Plans shall
be used for information purposes only.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 32 91 00 Soil Erosion, Sediment Control, Top Soiling, and Seeding
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Soil Erosion and Sediment Control furnished and completed in accordance with
the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Topsoil and Finish Grading furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
C. Seeding furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents will
be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials,
tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as
shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by
the Engineer.
D. Full compensation for temporarily placing topsoil along the top of the slopes and
later spreading the topsoil over the prepared slopes shall be considered as
included in the Contract price.
E. Full compensation for removing and disposing of rocks and debris from
embankments constructed as part of the work shall be considered as included in
the Contract prices and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.
END OF SECTION 32 19 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 32 91 00 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 33 05 23
STEEL CASING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Work involves furnishing all labor, materials, transportation, and equipment
necessary and incidental to installing steel casing up to six (6) feet diameter.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.
2. Section 31 50 00 - Excavation Support.
3. Section 33 05 23 – Steel Casing (material requirements)
4. Section 34 11 26 - Ballast.
5. Section 34 72 00 - Trackwork.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
Manual for Railway Engineering.
B. SCRRA Engineering Standard Drawings: Particularly, but not limited to ES5001
and ES5002.
C. SCRRA Standard Specifications Section 33 05 23 for material requirements.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents or as approved in advance by
the Engineer, the Contractor must use the following design criteria:
1. The depth of cover from base of rail to top of casing shall be 5 feet – 6
inches minimum or equal to the outer diameter of the casing, whichever is
greater.
2. The depth of cover from the flow line of the right-of-way ditch to the top of
casing shall be at least four feet for non-flammable substances in the
carrier pipe and five feet for flammable or hazardous substances in the
carrier pipe.
3. Jacking and receiving pits shall be at least 25 feet clear from the nearest
track centerline.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 05 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 05 23 Steel Casing
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00, and the following information:
1. Jacking and Boring Plan and Procedures:
a. Indicate locations of jacking and receiving pits relative to the track.
b. Refer to Section 01 33 00 and 31 50 00 for related submittals for
support of pit excavations.
c. Describe method of jacking and boring including method of grouting
annular space between casing and excavated soil.
d. For directional boring/drilling, submit complete specifications for the
machine to be used including:
1) Operating and maximum pressures of liquid at the drilling
head.
2) Water volume.
3) Type of reamer or cutting tool, size of holes/nozzles on the
head, and method of head control.
B. Fourteen (14) days prior to initiating jacking or boring operations, submit an
emergency remediation plan for approval by the Engineer.
1. This plan shall identify methods to cut and remove rock, concrete or timber
encountered at the boring face and methods to temporarily bulkhead the
face.
2. Contractor must have the resources to execute this plan immediately
available before this Work is started.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL CASING
A. The steel casing shall be new and conform to SCRRA Engineering Standard
ES5001 and ES5002.
B. Specified minimum yield strength (SMYS) of steel shall be at least 35,000 psi.
C. Casing under track shall be designed for Cooper E-80 loading in accordance with
AREMA.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 05 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 05 23 Steel Casing
1. Minimum thickness shall be in accordance with SCRRA ES5001 or ES5002
as applicable. For those diameters not specified in SCRRA Engineering
Standards use AREMA Volume 1, Chapter 1, Part 5; Table 1-5-1 for carrier
pipes conveying liquid flammable or highly volatile substances and Table
1-5-5 for other applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Refer to Section 31 20 00 for general excavation requirements including locating
utilities.
1. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify the actual locations
(horizontal and vertical) of all utilities prior to beginning Work.
2. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during
construction operations.
3.02 HANDLING OF MATERIAL
A. Casing and ancillary items shall be handled in such a manner as not to damage
the Material.
1. Damage to the casing, lining, or coating, if any, shall be repaired to the
satisfaction of the Authority or replaced at no additional cost to the
Authority.
B. Casing shall not be dropped to or dragged over the ground, but shall be handled
with rolling slings on skids or with cranes.
C. Bent or otherwise damaged casing or ancillary items shall not be used.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation for jacking and receiving pits shall be in accordance with Section 31 20
00 and Section 31 50 00.
3.04 JACKING AND BORING; JACKING AND TUNNELING
A. The jacking and boring method consists of pushing the casing into the earth with
a boring auger rotating inside the casing, which removes the spoil.
B. The jacking and tunneling method consists of pushing the casing into the earth
with jacks and excavation being performed by worker(s) using handheld tools from
within the jacking shield at the head of the casing.
C. Neither Jacking and boring nor jacking and tunneling shall be used in sandy, loose,
or otherwise unstable soils or where boulders are anticipated.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 05 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 05 23 Steel Casing
D. Jacking and boring:
1. The front of the pipe shall be provided with mechanical arrangements or
devices that prevent the auger from leading the casing so that no
unsupported excavation is ahead of the casing.
E. The use of water or slurry under pressure (jetting) or puddling shall not be
permitted to facilitate boring, pushing, or jacking operations.
1. Water or slurry used to lubricate the cutter and pipe is acceptable.
F. The annular space between the casing and the soil shall be grouted.
1. Such grout shall contain at least 8 sacks of cement per cubic yard of
material.
G. Should the operation be abandoned before completion, the annular space between
the casing and excavated soil shall be grouted as specified above.
1. In addition, the complete inside of the casing shall be grouted.
2. Such grout shall contain at least 2 sacks of cement per cubic yard of
material.
H. The hole diameter resulting from bored or tunneled installations shall not exceed
the outside diameter of the casing by more than 1.5 inches for casings of less than
12 inches in outside diameter and by 2 inches for casings of greater than 12 inches
in outside diameter.
I. Operations shall be stopped for the passage of trains.
1. The Contractor must employ methods to prevent loss of the excavation
face as approved in advance by the Authority.
J. Operations shall be stopped if ground displacement is detected.
1. The Contractor must employ the emergency remediation plan approved by
the Authority before resuming operations.
2. The Contractor is liable for all damage resulting from ground displacement.
3. Should the track displace, corrective action will be taken by SCRRA forces
or shall be taken by the Contractor as approved by the Authority.
4. SCRRA costs for such corrective action shall be deducted from the
payment due to the Contractor under this Contract.
K. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents or, as approved in advance
by the Authority, casing installation under track shall be progressed on a
continuous basis without stoppage (except for adding casing sections) until the
leading edge of the pipe has reached the receiving pit.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 05 23 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 05 23 Steel Casing
L. For casings with drainage culvert carrier pipes, the annular space between the
casing and the carrier pipe shall be grouted.
1. Such grout shall contain at least 8 sacks of cement per cubic yard of
Material.
M. For casings with carrier pipes that are other than drain culvert pipes, the annular
space between the casing and carrier pipe at the casing ends shall be sealed with
a concrete bulkhead with a thickness equal to annular space or 6 IN whichever is
greater.
N. Provide vents if so indicated in ES5002 or the Contract Documents.
3.05 DIRECTIONAL BORING/DRILLING
A. This method consists of utilizing specialized drilling equipment and boring a small
diameter pilot hole along the desired horizontal and vertical alignment, using a
mechanical cutting head with high-pressure bentonite slurry to remove the
cuttings.
1. Bore pits at either end of the Installation are not necessarily required with
this method.
2. The drill string is advanced with the bentonite slurry pumped through the
drill string to the cutting head and then forced back along the drill string,
carrying the cuttings back to the surface for removal.
3. After the cutting head reaches the far side of the crossing, it is removed
and a reamer (with a diameter wider than the cutting head) is attached to
the lead end of the drill string.
4. The casing is attached to the reamer and the casing is then pulled back
into its final position.
B. Methods that excavate the soil by means of jetting of fluid or slurry are not allowed.
C. Directional boring/drilling may be used for casings 12 inches or less in diameter.
D. Slurry shall be bentonite slurry.
E. Slurry use shall be kept to a minimum and shall only be used for head lubrication
or spoils return.
1. The Contractor must calculate anticipated slurry use and shall monitor
actual slurry use during the boring operation in order to determine the slurry
loss into the surrounding soil.
F. The bentonite slurry shall seal the annular space between the casing and the
excavated soil with a minimum return of 95 percent.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 05 23 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 05 23 Steel Casing
G. Bore stems or cutting tools that become immovable under the track shall be
abandoned in place.
H. Should the operation be abandoned before completion, the complete inside of the
casing shall be grouted.
1. Such grout shall contain at least 2 sacks of cement per cubic yard of
Material.
I. Operations shall be stopped if ground displacement is detected.
1. The Contractor must develop a remediation plan that is approved by the
Engineer before resuming operations.
2. The Contractor is liable for all damage resulting from ground displacement.
3. Should the track displace, corrective action will be taken by SCRRA forces
or shall be taken by the Contractor as approved by the Authority.
4. The SCRRA costs for such corrective action shall be deducted from the
payment due to the Contractor under this contract.
J. Operations shall be stopped if slurry is observed to be escaping into the track
ballast or right of way ditches.
1. Track ballast contaminated by slurry shall be removed, replaced with new
ballast and tamped per Section 34 72 00 and Section 34 11 26 at the
expense of the Contractor.
3.06 CASING JOINTS
A. Casing joints shall be watertight.
3.07 STEEL CASING BULKHEAD
A. Steel casing bulkhead as called out in the Contract Documents shall be installed
in locations as identified in the Contract Documents and as per the details as
shown in the Contract Documents.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Steel casing will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 05 23 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 05 23 Steel Casing
B. Steel casing bulkhead is incidental to the steel casing work and no separate
measurement will be made.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Steel casing furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents
will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 33 05 23
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 05 23 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 33 42 00
CULVERT AND DRAINAGE PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Culverts.
a. Headwalls
b. Flumes
c. End sections
2. Storm drainage systems.
a. Headwalls
b. Storm drain pipe
c. Cleanouts
d. Connections
e. Risers
3. Storm Drain Appurtenances
a. Concrete collars
b. Brick and mortar plugs
c. Concrete Caps
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 31 11 50 - Demolition, Cutting and Patching.
2. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.
3. Section 31 50 00 – Excavation Support
4. Section 33 05 23 - Steel Casing.
5. Section 34 11 27 - Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
6. Section 03 31 00 - Structural Concrete.
7. Section 34 80 43 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete for Railroad Bridges.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
1. M274, Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated (Type 2), for corrugated steel pipe.
2. M252, Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe.
3. M294, Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe 1 to 5 feet Diameter.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A31, Standard Specifications for Steel, Rivets and Bars for Rivets,
Pressure Vessels.
2. A48, Standard Specifications for Gray Iron Castings.
3. A760, Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic Coated for Sewers and Drains.
4. A761, Corrugated Steel Structural Plate, Zinc-Coated, for Field –Bolted
Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches.
5. A780, Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized
Coatings.
6. B633, Coating.
7. C76, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain,
and Sewer Pipe.
8. C150, Standard Specifications for Portland Cement.
9. C361, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Low-Head Pressure
Pipe.
10. C1784, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe.
11. D2729, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings.
12. D3350, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings
Material.
C. AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering
1. Chapter 1, Part 4, Section 4.3 Specifications for Prefabricated Corrugated
Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches for Culverts, Strom Drains, and Underdrains.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
2. Chapter 1, Part 4, Section 4.5, Standard Specification for Corrugated
Aluminum Alloy Pipe.
3. Chapter 1 Part 4, Section 4.6, Specifications for Corrugated Structural
Steel Plate Pipe, Pipe-Arches and Arches.
4. Chapter 8, Part 10, Reinforced Concrete Culvert Pipe.
5. Chapter 8, Part 16, Design and Construction of Reinforced Concrete Box
Culverts.
D. Standard Plans for Public Works Construction (SSPWC) “Green Book”, Current or
Latest Edition.
E. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC) “Green Book”,
Current or Latest Edition.
F. State of California Department of Transportation “Caltrans” Standard Plans and
Specifications, Current or Latest Edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00
requirements.
B. Plans and Procedures:
1. Piping Layout Plans for approval by the Authority.
2. Schedules of work.
3. Design calculations for culverts not constructed in accordance with SCRRA
Engineering Standard Plans.
a. Calculations to be performed by a Professional Engineer licensed
to practice in California.
4. Details for culverts and drainage structures and joints including Shop
Drawings and installation procedures.
5. Proposed bedding test procedures.
C. Certificates:
1. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
2. Certifications:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
a. Crushed Stone Bedding Material meeting gradation requirements
of Section 34 11 27.
3. Test reports:
a. Culvert and Drainage Pipe test reports from the fabricator.
4. Compaction testing in accordance with Section 31 20 00. Submit test
results for density and compaction tests of culvert bedding and backfill
performed by certified test laboratory hired by the Contactor and approved
by the Engineer to perform and report testing.
a. Test results submittal shall be on a form approved in advance by
the Engineer.
b. Test results shall be organized by culvert or drainage structure.
c. Other tests as required for cast-in-place concrete and precast
concrete in accordance with Section 03 31 00 and Section 34 80 43
respectively.
5. Submit all tests and certification in a single coordinated submittal. Partial
submittals will not be accepted.
D. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Verification documentation that Contractor requested DigAlert and SCRRA
field location of underground utilities prior to starting any excavation work.
1.04 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall barricade open excavations and post with warning lights
those excavations occurring on property adjacent to or within public access areas
and along tracks in accordance with Section 31 50 00. Operate warning lights
during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required. Warning
lights shall not shine into the eyes of locomotive engineers on oncoming trains.
B. The Contractor shall protect utilities, structures and facilities designated as protect
in place from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining,
washout, and other hazards created by excavation and backfill operations in
accordance with Section 31 50 00 and Division 01. Damage to utilities designed
to remain must be repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Authority in
accordance with these Specifications or replaced at no cost to the Authority.
C. Contractor shall dewater excavations as necessary to allow placement and
compaction of bedding material, placement of culvert or drainage structure and
placement and compaction of backfill in accordance with Section 31 20 00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall protect against erosion and uncontrolled run-off within and
adjacent to right-of-way in accordance with Division 01.
B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits for and legally dispose of all water from
water removal operations in accordance with Division 01.
C. Cleanliness, Sweeping and Dust Control:
1. Contractor shall maintain the construction site and those areas impacted
by construction in accordance with Division 01.
D. Contractor must provide continuous noise abatement as required.
1. Prevent disturbances and nuisances to the public, workers and occupants
of adjacent premises and surrounding areas in accordance with Division
01.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish any required Excavation Plans to jurisdictional
authorities and obtain permits from the jurisdictional authorities as required. Refer
to requirements contained in Division 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS OF JOINT SEALING MATERIAL
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable for joint sealing material between sections of precast reinforced
concrete pipe or precast reinforce concrete box culverts when water tightness is
not specified:
1. Preformed flexible pipe joint sealing compound:
a. RAM-NEK.
b. BIDCO C-56.
c. Or equal.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP):
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
1. RCP shall not be used, unless approved by the Authority, when crossing
below tracks and within the typical track section with 2:1 side slopes. If
placed under the track, the pipe shall be able to withstand railroad loading.
2. Reinforced concrete culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe: RCP Joint
Sealer:
a. Rubber gasket: ASTM C361 when water tight joints indicated in the
Plans.
b. Joint sealing material per Article 2.01 above for other joints of
concrete pipe.
3. Flared End Sections:
a. Shall be as shown in the Plans.
4. Jointing: Same as pipe.
B. Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP) and Structural Plate Pipe (SPP):
1. CMP and Structural Plate Pipe may be used in all culvert or storm drainage
applications.
2. CMP shall be either Class 1, annular rings with riveted seams or Class 2,
helical rings with lock seams or welded seams per the AREMA Manual
Chapter 1, Part 4, Section 4.3 Specifications for Prefabricated Corrugated
Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Underdrains.
In addition to these requirements, CMP culverts shall meet the following:
a. Minimum cover and gage shall be per the SCRRA Engineering
Standards.
b. CMP shall be coated in accordance with AASHTO M274, Steel
Sheet, Aluminum Coated (Type 2), for corrugated metal pipe.
c. CMP over 48 inches diameter shall be fabricated with a 5 percent
elongation in the vertical direction.
d. CMP Class 1 Culvert Riveted Seams:
1) CMP Class 1 culverts shall have riveted longitudinal seams
with one rivet in each corrugation valley for all pipes 24
inches in diameter and smaller. Longitudinal seams shall
be riveted with two rivets in each corrugation valley for all
pipes larger than 24 inches. Circumferential seams shall be
riveted with two rivets in each corrugation valley for all pipes
larger than 24 inches. Circumferential seams shall be
riveted with a maximum rivet spacing of 2 inches.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
2) CMP Class I culverts shall have all 14 gage pipe with at least
5/16 IN DIA rivets. CMP Class I culverts shall have all 12
gage and thicker pipe with at least 7/16” dia. rivets.
3) All rivets shall be cold driven in a workmanlike manner to
completely fill the hole without bending.
4) Rivets shall conform to ASTM A31, Grade A and shall be
electroplated in accordance with the Specifications of ASTM
A164, Type RS.
e. CMP Class 2 Culvert Seams:
1) Lock Seams shall be either continuous welded in
accordance with ASTM A 760 or lock seams in accordance
with ASTM A 760 and the AREMA Manual for Railway
Engineering, Chapter 1, Part 4.5.3.6.
3. Structural Plate Pipe:
a. Structural Plate Pipe shall meet the requirements of AREMA
Manual for Railway Engineering Chapter 1, Part 4.6.
1) Base metal shall be in accordance with ASTM A761.
2) Structural Steel Plates shall be coated in accordance with
AASHTO M274, Aluminum Coated (Type 2) for corrugated
steel pipe with thickness of coating in accordance with
ASTM A761.
3) Thickness shall conform to gage shown in table contained
in the SCRRA Engineering Standards.
4. Jointing and End Finish:
a. Corrugated connecting bands of same base metal, corrugations
and finish coating as pipe.
b. Connection bands shall conform to Section 66-1.02D of the
Caltrans Standard Specifications.
c. Thickness shall conform to gage shown in Table 2 – Round
Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP) contained on the SCRRA Engineering
Standards.
d. CMP Class 2, Helical, Culvert Joints shall be made by rerolling the
ends of individual pipe sections at least four corrugations from the
pipe end or 14 inches to meet the connection band requirements.
5. CMP Joint Sealer when culvert is under pressure or is used in an irrigation
application:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
a. Cold applied asphalt joint compound.
b. Preformed flexible pipe joint sealing compound.
6. Perforated CMP shall have perforations meeting requirements of ASTM
A760 for Class 1 Perforations.
7. Concrete and Reinforcement for Inlets, Headwalls, Flumes and End
Sections:
a. Comply with Section 34 80 32.
b. Concrete and Reinforcement for Inlets, Headwalls, Flumes and End
Sections shall conform to SCRRA Engineering Standards ES6301
through ES6310.
C. Corrugated High-Density Polyethylene Drainage Pipe:
1. Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Drainage Pipe may be used for
under drains or other storm drainage not subject to railroad live loading.
a. It must be installed in a steel casing meeting requirements of
Specification Section 33 05 23 and SCRRA ES5001 if placed under
the track.
2. Pipe and fittings shall be a high-density polyethylene meeting ASTM D3350
minimum cell classification 325420C.
3. Sizes less than 1 foot diameter shall meet requirements of AASHTO M252,
Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe.
4. Sizes 1 foot up to 5 feet in diameter shall meet requirements of AASHTO
M294, Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe 1 to 5 feet diameter..
D. Smooth Steel Pipe:
1. Smooth Steel Pipe may be used for all culvert or storm drainage
applications.
2. Smooth Steel Pipe shall meet the requirements contained in Specification
Section 33 05 23.
E. PVC Pipe:
1. PVC may be used for under drains and storm drainage applications. When
subjected to railroad live loading, Schedule 80 PVC pipe shall be used.
2. PVC Pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1784, Standard
Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and
80. All fittings shall meet ASTM D2729.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
3. Perforated PVC pipe shall have perforations meeting the requirements of
ASTM D1784. Perforations shall be 3/8” dia.
F. Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert (Cast-in-Place or Precast) (RCB):
1. RCB may be used in all culvert or storm drainage applications.
2. Design shall be per AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 8,
Part 16, Design and Construction of Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts.
3. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel shall meet the requirements of Section 03
31 00 for Structural Concrete, Section 34 80 43 for precast concrete and
Section 03 21 00 for reinforcing Steel.
4. Concrete Strength, reinforcing steel quantities and other culvert details
shall be per SCRRA Engineering Standards ES6003 sheets 1-4.
G. Crushed Stone Bedding Material:
1. Crushed Stone Bedding Material shall meet the requirements of Sub-
ballast contained in Section 34 11 27.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. The site including the drainage facilities shall be prepared in accordance with
Section 31 11 00 and Section 31 11 50.
B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify the actual locations (horizontal
and vertical) of all utilities prior to beginning trench excavation. If utilities are to
remain in place, provide protection from damage during construction operations.
3.02 HANDLING OF MATERIAL
A. Pipe, fittings and supplementary items shall be handled in such a manner as not
to damage the Material. All dirt and trash shall be removed from the pipe prior to
installation. Damage to the pipe, pipe lining or coating, if any, shall be repaired to
the satisfaction of the Authority in accordance with these Specifications or replaced
at no additional cost to SCRRA.
1. Repairs to damaged coating on CMP shall be made in accordance with
ASTM A780 except the repaired area coating shall be modified for
aluminum-zinc coated material.
B. Pipes or structural steel plate materials shall not be dropped to or dragged over
the ground, but shall be handled with rolling slings on skids or with cranes.
C. Bent or otherwise damaged pipe Materials shall not be used.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
D. Distribute pipe and other Materials along the line of Work and outside the trench
as near as practical to the point of placement. Do not deposit site Materials on or
against pipe.
E. Protect pipe ends until the pipe is placed in its final position.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Foundation Preparation
1. Excavate as necessary, prepare pipe bed pre-rolling and removing any
unacceptable soil, place and compact Crushed Stone Bedding Material in
accordance with the SCRRA Engineering Standards for CMP, SPP and
Smooth Steel Pipe when not using jacking and boring installation methods,
and SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4700 for Reinforced Concrete Box
Culverts.
a. Other drainage pipes use bedding material as shown in the Plans
or as detailed in these specifications.
b. Refer to SCRRA Standard Specification Section 31 20 00 for
additional general excavation requirements.
2. The foundation shall be a smoothed and compacted surface conforming to
bottom of pipe grade or camber and will hereafter be referred to as the
foundation line. The foundation bed shall be free of boulders, tree stumps,
cut-off piling, and other projections. Suitable camber to allow for settlement
of pipe due to consolidation of embankment material will be provided when
required in accordance with the SCRRA Engineering Standards. Shaping
to pipe contour is not required.
3. When acceptable foundation material is present, the width of the foundation
line shall be a minimum of 4 feet plus the pipe diameter or pipe-arch span.
For multiple pipes the above width shall be increased by the sum of the
distances between pipe or pipe-arch centers.
4. Where there is solid rock or other unsuitable material, such as boulders, or
unstable material that may deform the pipe during minor settlement, at the
foundation line, it will be necessary to provide suitable bedding for pipes.
Such work will only be undertaken at the specified direction of the Engineer.
5. The width of excavation and bedding backfill shall be the pipe diameter or
pipe-arch span in solid rock and boulders, and in other unsuitable material,
the width shall be three pipe diameters or pipe-arch spans for single pipes,
and for multiple pipes, this width shall be increased by the distances
between pipe or pipe-arch centers.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
6. Soft, spongy or otherwise unsuitable material encountered at the
established and approved grade shall be removed and backfilled with
granular material as directed by the Engineer in accordance with Section
31 20 00. Excavation of unsuitable soils will be made in accordance with
the unit price for excavation. Payment for backfilling and compacting with
suitable soils will be made at the contract unit price for embankment.
7. The Contractor must by diversion ditches, dikes, or other means, keep the
foundations free of water at all times after the work is started, and until the
embankment is placed over the pipe. Any channel work necessary to allow
free flow through the pipe shall be completed before the embankment is
placed. This work is incidental to installation of the culvert or drainage pipe.
B. Install Smooth Steel Pipe, if using jacking and boring method, in accordance with
Section 33 05 23.
C. Placing Culvert or Drain Pipe:
1. General:
a. No pipe shall be laid until it has been inspected and approved. All
pipes shall be laid upgrade beginning at the lower end of the line.
Pipe shall be laid accurately to line and grade. Ensure that the pipe
has a full solid bearing along its entire length. When pipe has been
checked for line and grade, the body of the pipe shall be sufficiently
backfilled and compacted in accordance with Section 31 20 00 on
both sides to hold the pipe firmly in position.
b. All adjustments to line and grade of the pipe laid on earth foundation
shall be done by removal or filling of the bedding under the pipe and
not by blocking or wedging.
c. Where two or more pipes are used, there shall be a minimum of 3
feet, or 1/2 pipe diameter or pipe-arch span, clear distance apart,
whichever is greater. Where practicable, in the opinion of the
Engineer, a space of 10 feet may be provided between pipes to
facilitate the compaction of fill material around the pipes with heavy
equipment.
2. Placing CMP:
a. Pipe having riveted seams shall be laid with outside laps of
circumferential joints pointing upstream, longitudinal laps on the
sides and, when shown in the Project Plans, asphalt paving on the
flow line.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
b. Pipe sections shall be firmly joined together with connecting bands.
All dirt or other foreign materials must be kept out from between
pipe and band. Outside connecting bands should be slipped over
the end of one section, and the adjoining section brought within 1
inch of the first. Band shall be made to fit snugly and equally on
each pipe section and bolted to produce a tight joint. The lower half
of two-piece connecting bands for pipe having riveted seams may
be furnished already connected to one of the pipe sections, and in
such cases the end having the fixed half band shall be placed
downstream. Band couplers and ends of pipe under the bands may
be lubricated with oil or solvent, which has been approved by the
Engineer. Excess asphalt at joints may be removed by an
application of heat, if necessary. Where corrugated pipe is to be
placed in an irrigation ditch, continuous waterway or spring area,
rubber gaskets shall be placed around the first re-rolled corrugation
at each end of the pipe before the band is placed to keep the joint
watertight.
c. At locations where the existing corrugated pipe is to be extended
with new pipe, the joining end of the existing pipe shall be free of
breaks, cracks or other defects. If in the judgment of the Engineer
the end of the existing corrugated pipe is not suitable for making a
proper joint, the Contractor must, as directed by the Engineer,
remove or trim the amount of pipe necessary to allow making of an
approved joint. Such removal and trimming will be considered
incidental to the cost of the pipe and no direct payment will be made
therefore.
d. Pipe-arches shall not be strutted.
e. Identification tag, supplied by manufacturer, shall be attached near
top of and inside of pipe at upstream end.
f. Field strutting of corrugated pipe:
1) When the distance from base of rail to the top of pipe will be
less than the dimensions given in Table 1, corrugated pipes
must be field strutted by the Contractor using Contractor
supplied material.
TABLE 1
CMP Pipe Diameter - Inches Base of Tie to Top of Pipe - Feet
48 3.5
54 to 66, incl. 4.0
72 to 96, incl. 4.5
102 to 108, incl. 5.0
114 to 120, incl. 5.5
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
g. Struts shall be placed after embankment is compacted to top of
corrugated pipe but before any embankment is placed over the
pipe. No equipment shall pass over the corrugated pipe until struts
are in place and 3 feet of embankment is in place over the pipe.
h. Struts shall consist of 6 by 6 inches longitudinal timbers at the invert
and top of corrugated pipe separated by 6 by 6 inches timber posts
at 3 feet centers. Struts shall be shimmed tight using hard wood
wedges nailed securely in position. Placement of struts shall be
limited to the portion of corrugated pipe located within 12 feet of
centerline of tracks.
i. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, struts shall be left in
place until track laying is completed after which the struts shall be
removed.
j. The furnishing and placing of field strutting material shall be
considered incidental to pipe placement.
3. Reinforced Concrete Pipe.
a. Installation shall be in accordance with AREMA Manual For Railway
Engineering Chapter 8, Part 10.4, Installation.
b. Gaskets out of position or loaded with dirt or other foreign material
shall be removed, cleaned, and replaced before the joint is made.
4. Polyethylene and PVC Pipe:
a. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s written
recommendations and as shown in the Plans.
5. Structural Plate Pipe:
a. Structural plate pipe shall be erected at the site, in accordance with
detailed plans or instructions of the Engineer.
b. Where two or more structural plate pipes are used, they shall be a
minimum of 1/2 pipe diameter or one-third of pipe-arch span apart.
Where practicable, in the opinion of the Engineer, a space of 10 feet
may be provided between pipes to facilitate compacting fill material
around the pipe with heavy equipment.
c. Structural plate pipes may be made up of corrugated plates of
variable gages. The invert plate may be two gages heavier than
the plates for the sides and top of the pipe section, and heavier
gage plates may be used in the center sections than at the end
sections of the pipe. An erection diagram will be provided and must
be followed without exception.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
d. Strutting of structural plate pipe, if required, shall be as shown in
the Installation Procedures or Erection Diagram.
e. Structural plate pipes are to be assembled at the site with as few
bolts as possible until all plates are in place. Three or four
untightened bolts near the center of each plate along the
longitudinal and circumferential seams are sufficient, and after
several rings have been assembled the remaining bolts can be
inserted, the corner bolts being the last. Bolts are to be tightened
progressively from one end of the structure to the other after
assembly has been completed, and shall be check-tightened in the
same manner to be sure none is left loose. All bolts shall be
tightened with proper tools, either hand or power wrenches, initially
to a minimum of 100 ft-lbs. and a maximum of 300 ft-lbs of torque.
After backfilling is complete, bolts are to be checked for tightness
and re-tightened if no longer torqued within these parameters.
f. Where heavy camber is necessary, erection procedures may be
modified, but only as specifically approved by the Engineer for each
such case.
g. At locations where the existing structural plate pipe is to be
extended with new plates, the joining end of the existing pipe shall
be free of breaks, cracks or other defects. The Contractor must
remove any existing damaged and beveled plates so that extension
can be made using standard plates. Such removal will be
considered incidental to the cost of the pipe, and no direct payment
will be made therefore.
h. Identification tag, supplied by manufacturer, shall be attached near
top of and inside of pipe at upstream end.
i. End plates must be removed and remaining plates and bolts
inspected for reuse by the contractor prior to ordering the extension
culvert material. Existing bolt holes shall be reused for the
extension connection.
j. In stock and vehicular underpasses which are to receive concrete
invert paving, the area to be covered by concrete shall be clean and
dry. Wire mesh reinforcement may be tack welded to bolts.
D. Backfill and Embankment:
1. General:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
a. When the pipe foundation line is below natural ground, compacted
backfill, placed in accordance with SCRRA Standard Specification
31 20 00 shall be placed around the pipe in the area within the limits
of the embankment section which was removed as channel
excavation. The upper limit of this backfill shall be the top of pipe
elevation or the elevation of natural ground surface as it existed
before any excavation was made, whichever is lower.
b. Embankment above natural ground shall be placed in accordance
with SCRRA Standard Specification 31 20 00. When the upper limit
of backfill is the top of pipe elevation, three (3) feet depth of material
shall be placed above the pipe without compaction. This material
shall be compacted in accordance with Section 31 20 00 at the time
the roadbed receives its final finish.
2. Placing and Compacting Backfill and Embankment:
a. The placing of embankment around pipes is to be started with the
approval of the Engineer only after assembly and erection work has
been completed in every detail. Embankment material to be placed
around pipe must be approved by the Engineer in accordance with
Section 31 20 00.
b. Embankment under the haunches, along each side for a minimum
width equal to the pipe diameter, and over the pipe is to receive
special handling both as to placing and as to compaction. Except
as modified by the provisions of Section 31 20 00, embankment
shall be hand tamped directly under the haunches throughout the
width beyond the reach of machine compacting equipment.
c. All material, except that noted to be left non-compacted until the
roadbed is completed on top of the culvert, shall be compacted to
the full amount required by Section 31 20 00. Compaction methods
and equipment shall be approved in advance by SCRRA.
d. If the Engineer permits the clear distance between multiple pipes,
or the clear distance between pipe and cut face, to be less than 3
feet, lean concrete slurry shall be used to fill under the haunches
and to a minimum depth of the spring lines of the pipe installation.
The concrete slurry mix shall be approved by the Engineer. Care
shall be taken to ensure that the concrete slurry does not float the
pipes above their intended elevation.
e. The embankment directly above the pipe for a distance of one-third
pipe diameter, but not less than 3 feet is to be placed without
compaction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
f. Where the distance from subgrade to top of pipe is less than 3 feet,
the excess material shall be left in place until the roadbed receives
its final finish. At this time the material over the pipe to a depth of 1
foot below subgrade elevation shall be compacted to the full amount
required by Section 31 20 00.
g. Care must be taken to prevent water form leaking through the fill or
along the side of the pipe. When granular materials have been used
for bedding or backfill, the ends of such material must be sealed
against infiltration. This can be done by using impervious
embankment material for 3 feet at both ends of the pipe.
E. Headwalls and Connection Structures:
1. Reinforced concrete headwalls and connection structures shall be
constructed in accordance with the details indicated on the Contract Plans
and the appropriate SCRRA Engineering Standards, ES6301 through
ES6310 for the type of culvert or drain pipe placed and Section 03 31 00 or
Section 34 80 43.
2. Prefabricated concrete or steel headwalls shall be constructed in
accordance with the details indicated on the Contract Plans and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the products called out
thereon.
3. Seal all joints at headwalls and connection structures to ensure water
tightness.
F. Installation Finalization:
1. The Contractor must remove all waste materials, including unacceptable
excavated material, trash, and debris from the worksite and legally dispose
of it off site at no additional cost to SCRRA.
2. At the conclusion of the Work, the Contractor must thoroughly clean the
entire length of all the installed, extended or modified culvert by flushing
with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood, or
other material, which may have entered the culvert during the construction
period. Debris cleaned from the lines shall be removed from the Worksite.
If there are any remaining obstructions after such cleaning, such
obstructions must be physically removed by the Contractor.
3. Contractor must provide Engineer 48 hours advance notice to perform final
inspection and acceptance of culvert installation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 42 00 Culvert and Drainage Pipe
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Culvert Pipe will be measured by the type and size of the pipe, and the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and installed in accordance with the Contract Documents
and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule
of Quantities and Prices, or approved Schedule of Values, as applicable, as
derived from the plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. All material, work and services furnished for excavation and backfill, structural fill,
crushed aggregate bedding material, structural concrete, Concrete for connection
structures between existing and new culverts and headwalls and precast concrete
will be included in this Section and are considered incidental to work under this
Section and will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Culvert and drain pipe furnished and installed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the contract unit price for each type and size of pipe,
as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall be full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals necessary for culvert and drain pipe described by the
Contract Documents.
B. Full compensation for excavation and backfill, structural fill, crushed aggregate
bedding material, structural concrete, Concrete for connection structures between
existing and new culverts and headwalls and precast concrete shall be considered
as included as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
END OF SECTION 33 42 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 42 00 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 33 46 00
UNDERDRAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Work in this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment
necessary and incidental to providing underdrains, and subsurface drainage
Materials behind foundations, piers, retaining walls and along track bed. The Work
includes connecting system to existing or new storm drains as indicated on the
Contract Plans.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.
2. Section 31 50 00 - Excavation Support and Protection.
3. Section 34 80 23 - Subdrainage System for Railroad Bridges and
Retaining Walls.
4. Section 33 42 00 - Culvert and Drainage Pipe
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA) –
Manual for Railway Engineering.
B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)
1. M294 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe
C. ASTM International (ASTM)
1. D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic
Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
D. Caltrans: State of California Department of Transportation Standard Plans and
Specifications, 2018 Sections 19, 68, and 96.
E. Standard Plans for public Works Construction (SSPWC) “Green Book”, 2012.
F. SCRRA: Engineering Standards.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 46 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 46 00 Underdrains
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The term “underdrain” pipe is in reference to any perforated plastic underdrain pipe
as indicated in the Contract Plans.
B. The term “plastic” as it relates to pipe and fittings is in reverence to high-density
polyethylene (HDPE), or to Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) as noted in the Contract
Plans.
C. The term “permeable rock” as it relates to bedding is in reference to Aggregate
Base Material as indicated in the Materials section of this Specification.
D. The term “ballast” rock as it relates to bedding of underdrain pipe is in reference to
bassist material as indicated in Part 2 of Section 31 11 26 of the Standard
Specifications.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Underdrain: Underdrain shall consist of furnishing and placing under-drain pipe
adjacent to the tracks as detailed on the Contract Plans.
B. Permeable Backfill Material: Permeable backfill Material shall consist of furnishing
and placing permeable backfill material around underdrains in accordance with
details shown on the Contract Plans and this Section.
C. Trenching and Backfilling for the underdrain as shown on the Contract Plans or
other Referenced Standard.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit, under the provisions of Division 01 the following information:
1. Submit Product Data, certifications and samples for each Material used in
this Section. Samples of permeable rock shall be no less than 150 lbs and
shall be accompanied with Supplier’s certified test data.
2. Perforated pipe sample shall show full pattern of perforations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BEDDING MATERIALS
A. Sand bedding shall conform to Caltrans Section 19-3.02F(2).
2.2 PERMEABLE BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Permeable backfill material shall conform to Caltrans Section 68-2.02F(4), Class
3.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 46 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 46 00 Underdrains
2.3 PERFORATED AND SOLID DRAIN PIPE
A. Plastic, corrugated, smooth interior to conform to AASHTO Designation M252
(HDPE), OR M294 (HDPE) Type S with Class1 perforations or M304 (PVC). same
material and from the same manufacturer as the plastic pipe.
B. Corrugated metal pipe: Polymeric Coated Corrugated Galvanized Steel Pipe
conforming to AREMA Manual, Volume 1, Chapter 1, Section 4.4.2. Perforations,
where indicated, shall be per Volume 1. Chapter 1, Section 4.3.3.2 of the AREMA
manual.
2.4 OUTLETS RISERS AND CLEANOUTS
A. Outlets, risers and cleanouts shall be of the same materials as the perforated pipe
and shall be supplied from the same manufacturer. Riser cover shall be as detailed
on the Contract Drawing.
B. Elements in rail loading zone shall be specified to withstand rail loading.
2.5 GEOTEXTILE
A. Geotextile shall conform to Caltrans Standard Specifications Section
96-1.02.
2.6 UNDERDRAIN GRANULAR BACKFILL
A. Underdrain Granular Backfill Material: Backfill material for underdrains located
within ballasted track areas shall be ¾-inch round river rocks. Backfill for
underdrains located outside ballasted track areas shall conform to the pervious
backfill requirements of Caltrans Standard Specification 19-3.065.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Preparation of site for the installation of underdrains shall be in accordance to Part
3.01 of Section 33 42 00 of these Specifications.
3.2 HANDLING OF MATERIAL
A. Handling of underdrain materials shall be in accordance to Part 3.02 of Section 33
42 00 of these Specifications.
3.3 EXCAVATION AND EXCAVATION SUPPORT
A. Excavation and excavation support shall be in accordance with Section 31 50 00
and Section 31 20 00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 46 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 46 00 Underdrains
B. Subgrade for drainage installation shall be free of rock, rubble, debris, or stones
larger than 1.5 inches. If this condition is present, excavate an additional 4 inches,
and place 4 inches of sand bedding material at no additional cost to the Authority.
C. Subgrade shall not be compacted below Underdrain.
3.4 UNDERDRAIN INSTALLATION
A. Preparation of Trench Bottom
1. Excavate trench bottom to an elevation 6 inches below bottom of pipe.
2. Fill trench bottom to the bottom of pipe grade with underdrain granular
backfill material to ensure complete and continuous support for the barrel
of the pipe.
3. Excavate bell holes to size necessary to accommodate joint.
B. Place the filter fabric as indicated. Place the long axis of the fabric parallel with
long axis of the pipe. Filter fabric sections shall be overlapped a minimum of 12
inches.
C. Place 6 inches of permeable rock on the filter fabric. Grade the rock to the line
and grade indicated for the perforated drainpipe.
D. Install aggregate filter material above the bottom of the trench and below the pipe
to the depths as indicated on the Contract Plans. The depth aggregate filter
material above and around the pipe shall also be as indicated on the Contract
plans.
E. Installation of ballast material as for bedding material should be per the limits as
shown in the Contract Plans.
F. Lay pipes in the upstream direction to the lines and grades shown, with the bell
pointing upgrade.
G. Place the perforated or slotted drain pipe with the perforations or slots facing down
in a semi-circular seat prepared in the permeable rock. Connect sections of pipe
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
H. Continue placing permeable rock in 4 inches layers under the sides and to the
spring line of the pipe. Tamp material to provide thorough compaction under and
on each side of the pipe. Successive layers of permeable rock may be placed in
8 inches layers and thoroughly compacted to the indicated depth shown on the
Contract Plans. Exercise caution not to damage the filter fabric. Torn or punctured
areas of filter fabric shall be repaired by placing a piece of fabric that is large
enough to cover the damaged area plus 12 inches of overlap on all sides.
I. Complete permeable rock backfill as indicated and close the filter fabric at the top
of this backfill with 12 inches lap.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 46 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 33 46 00 Underdrains
J. Place and compact structural backfill in accordance with Section 31 20 00.
Exercise caution not to damage the filter fabric and sheet drain material.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After pipe is laid and joined, notify and obtain Engineer’s approval prior to
backfilling. Take up and re-lay or replace, any pipe found to be out of alignment,
unduly settled, or damaged.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.1 MEASUREMENT
A. Underdrains will be measured by the type and size of the pipe, and the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and installed in accordance with the Contract Documents
and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities for each item included in the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices or approved Schedule of Values as derived from
the Contract Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Underdrain connections are incidental to the items listed above and will not be
measured separately for payment.
C. Trench excavation and export, trench preparation, underdrain installation and
compaction are incidental to the work and will not be measured separately for
payment.
D. Filter fabric including overlap, permeable rock and fill material are incidental to the
work and will not be measured separately for payment.
4.2 PAYMENT
A. Underdrains constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be paid
for at the contract unit price as listed in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This
price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
supplies, supervision, and incidentals necessary for all underdrains described by
the Contract Documents.
B. Underdrain connections are incidental to the items listed above and will be
included in prices of the underdrain pipe listed above.
C. Trench excavation and export, trench preparation, underdrain installation and
compaction are incidental to the underdrain pipe and will not be a pay item.
D. Filter fabric, including overlap, permeable rock and fill material are incidental to the
work and will not be a pay item.
END OF SECTION 33 46 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 33 46 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 11 10
CONTINUOUS WELDED RAIL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the material requirements and performance criteria for the
Continuous Welded Rail (CWR) to be furnished in accordance with Contract
Documents or required by the Engineer.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering
2. Portfolio of Trackwork Plans
3. Specifications for Special Trackwork
B. Association of American Railroads (AAR)
1. AAR: Manual of Standards and Rec. Practices
2. AAR Section J: Quality Assurance M-1003
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM E10: Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials
2. ASTM E94: Recommended Practice for Radiographic Testing
3. ASTM E164: Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of
Weldments
B. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. AWS B2.1: Standards for Welding Procedures and Performance
Qualifications
2. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code
C. SCRRA: Engineering Standards.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Detail Fractures – A progressive fracture originating near the rail surface from a
shell or head check
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 10 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
B. Rail Wear – The change in shape of the cross-sectional area of the rail head due
to the passage of rail traffic and grinding
C. Shelling – A rail condition consisting of one or more horizontal separation that may
originate in the rail head and may crack out at the gage side of the rail. Shelling
normally originates towards the gage side of the rail head and extends
longitudinally
D. Spalling – A rail surface condition that is the direct result of micro-cracking, often
with material separating from the surface of the rail head.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The CWR Vendor shall submit supporting information within 60 days of award
documenting the past successful performance in furnishing the materials included
in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. Provide references and contact numbers
at the railroads where the CWR have been placed in service.
B. The Vendor shall submit data documenting past performance and projects within
the last ten (10) years furnishing CWR to Class 1 Freight, passenger or commuter
railroads.
C. The Vendor shall submit for SCRRA’s review and approval quality control and
quality assurance plans and related certifications such as ISO 9001, “six sigma” or
equivalent demonstrating that the Vendor has the processes, personnel and
systems to produce high quality CWR included in the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices.
D. The Vendor shall submit certification that materials delivered to site are in
conformance with specifications. For CWR, include weld test results. Include all
material testing results and submittals stipulated in the AREMA Manual.
E. The Vendor shall submit procedure for transportation of CWR to site, unloading
and handling.
F. Prior to the start of welding, submit a schedule of lengths of CWR strings to be
fabricated and the location of each string in the delivery train. Rail is to be delivered
by train, if other delivery is intended submit such to the Authority for approval.
G. The Vendor shall submit drawings and specifications of the proposed equipment,
materials, methods and procedures to be used for the electric flash butt welding
process for joining of rail. Include layouts of the welding line showing locations of
welding components.
H. The Vendor shall submit qualifications of welding supervisor demonstrating flash
butt welding experience of no less than three years.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Vendor’s Quality Control Program (QCP) shall be in accordance with the AAR M-
1003 or SCRRA approved equivalent quality control program. Comply with
AREMA Portfolio of Trackwork Plans.
B. Equipment used for the manufacturing materials shall be in good operating
condition, of adequate capacity and range, and accurately calibrated. Testing
equipment shall be certified and traceable to national standards such as the
National Institute of Standards and Technology.
C. Testing and inspection of CWR manufacture shall be performed by CWR Vendor
in conformance with AREMA Manual.
D. Material not meeting the requirements of this Specification shall not be used.
E. SCRRA shall have access to CWR Vendor’s plant during normal working hours
and all Project related procurement and production records for inspection any time
during the Contract period of performance.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The CWR Vendor shall load, transport, and deliver CWR in a manner which will
prevent damage to the CWR. Vendor shall submit to SCRRA the procedures and
equipment information for loading, unloading, handling, and storing rail.
B. SCRRA will review the Vendor's methods and procedures for unloading and
handling continuous welded rail.
C. The material will be supplied to the SCRRA in accordance with the delivery
requirements. Quantity of each supply will be as requested by the SCRRA release
document. The material when purchased is to be delivered to the Los Angeles
area at a place designated by the SCRRA. The delivery must be coordinated with
SCRRA prior to shipping and loading. Orders can be combined and shipped on
or before the delivery scheduled with approval by SCRRA. Delivery time and
minimum quantities shall be as follows:
D. Delivery delays due to Rail Train (carrier) unavailability are excusable when the
Vendor has made a best efforts attempt to schedule a carrier, and these best
efforts, at minimum included 14 days advance communication with at least three
carriers. Documentation of these best efforts and approval is required by SCRRA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CWR
A. Rail shall be new 136 RE CWR Head Hardened rail conforming to AREMA Volume
1, Chapter 4, Section 2.1, Specifications for Steel Rails. The rail shall be controlled
cooled low alloy high strength rail, Grade HH (Head Hardened) or LH (Low Alloy
Head Hardened) and shall meet or exceed 370 HB (Brinell Hardness).
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
B. If the Vendor furnished CWR are in sections of strings, CWR shall be
manufactured on-site by welding rail sections in nominal 80 feet length into 1,400
feet strings, or into such lengths as are suitable to the project and as approved by
the Authority.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Rail and welds shall be ultrasonically tested as per AREMA Section 2.1 8.
B. Surface and internal hardness shall be determined as per AREMA Section 2.1.3.
C. Perform ultrasonic testing on all welds in accordance with ASTM E164.
D. For fabrication of CWR, flash butt production welds shall be tested by an inspection
agency approved by the SCRRA during the fabrication process using the dry
powder method of magnetic particle inspection (or ultrasonic method) in
accordance with ASTM E709 and the AREMA Manual of Railway Engineering,
Chapter 4.
2.03 SPECIFICATIONS, SECTION, AND STANDARDS
A. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings or listed in the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices, rail shall conform to the 136 RE section shown on SCRRA Engineering
Standard ES 2301.
2.04 MANUFACTURE
A. Melting and Casting:
1. The steel for rails shall be made by purifying molten iron from the blast
furnace (plus any added scrap steel) using the Basic Oxygen Steelmaking
process, or by melting scrap steel using the Electric Arc Furnace
Steelmaking process. The resulting molten steel from either process shall
be cast into strands by a continuous casting process. Strands shall be cut
into blooms of an appropriate length for further processing and rolling.
B. Hydrogen Elimination:
1. The rail shall be free from shatter cracks and other inclusions caused by
hydrogen. Hydrogen elimination shall be accomplished by at least one of
the following processes:
a. Control Cooling of Rails (CC)
b. Control Cooling of Blooms (BC)
c. Vacuum Treated (VT)
2. Other processes (OP) for hydrogen and inclusion elimination in steel shall
be accepted in the production of steel rail, and be approved by SCRRA.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
3. When controlled cooling of rails is used for elimination of hydrogen, all rails
shall be cooled on the hot beds or runways until full transformation is
accomplished and then charged immediately into insulated cooling
containers. In no case should the rail be charged into the containers at a
temperature below 725 degrees F. The temperature of the rails before
charging shall be determined at the head of the rail at least 12 inches from
the end of the rail.
4. A cover shall be placed on the container immediately after completion of
the charge and shall remain in place for at least 10 hours. The container
shall be so protected and insulated that the control temperature shall not
drop below 300 degrees F in 7 hours for rails 100 lbs. per yd. in weight or
heavier from the time the bottom tier is placed in the container and 5 hours
for rails of less than 100 lbs. per yd. in weight. The control temperature
shall be established by measuring and recording the temperature of an
outside rail or between an outside rail and the adjacent rail in the bottom
tier of the container, at a location not less than 12 inches but not more than
36 inches from the rail end.
5. If the above cooling requirement is not met, the rails may be considered
control-cooled, provided that the temperature at a location not less than 12
inches from the end of a rail at approximately the center of the middle tier
does not drop below 300 degrees F in less than 15 hours.
6. After removal or raising of the lid of the container, no rail shall be removed
until the temperature of the top layer of rails has fallen to 300 degrees F or
lower. The manufacturer shall maintain a complete record of the cooling
process for each container of rails.
2.05 CHEMICAL AND MATERIAL PROPERTIES
A. Chemical Composition:
The chemical composition of a rail steel grade must be within the limits given in
Table 1 for standard chemistry rail steel. Rail steel with a high carbon content in
a range from 0.9 to 1.1 percent by weight and chemistry similar to that disclosed
in United States Patent No. 7,288,159 is also acceptable provided that rail rolled
this specification has been in successful use for more than five years by a Class I
railroad operating in North America.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
Table 1: Product and Chemical Analysis Table for Standard Chemistry Rail Steel
Elements Notes Chemical Analysis Product Analysis,
Weight Percent Weight Percent
Allowance Beyond
Limits of Specified
Chemical Analysis
Minimum Maximum Under Under
Minimum Maximum
Carbon 1 0.740 0.8600.040 0.040
Manganese 0.750 1.2500.060 0.060
Phosphorus 2 0.020 0.008
Sulfur 3 0.020 0.008
Silicon 0.100 0.6000.020 0.050
Nickel 0.250
Chromium 1 0.300
Molybdenum 1 0.060
Vanadium 0.010
Aluminum 0.010
Other 4
Note 1: The chemical composition of head-hardened rails will be subject to the
requirements of standard strength rails Any alteration of the chemical composition
may require modification of welding procedures.
Note 2: Up to 5% of the order may exceed 0.020, but in no case may the phosphorus
exceed 0.025
Note 3: Up to 5% of the order may exceed 0.020, but in no case may the sulfur
exceed 0.025.
Note 4: Additional elements may be included in the chemistry and the chemical
analysis when agreed upon by the purchaser and supplier.
B. Surface Hardness:
Rails furnished shall be high strength or high carbon pearlite. The minimum Brinell
hardness of the surface shall be within the limits found in Table 2.
Table 2 – Rail Hardness Table for Standard Chemistry Rail Steel
Type of Rail Minimum Surface Brinell Hardness, HB
High Strength Rail 370
High Carbon Pearlite (Patent No. 390
7,288,159)
Note 3: If 410 HB is exceeded, the microstructure through the head shall be examined
at 100X or higher for confirmation of a fully pearlitic microstructure in the head.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
Note 4: No untampered martensite shall be present within the rail.
A fully pearlitic microstructure shall be maintained in the head of the rail for all
ranges of rail chemistry and no un-tempered martensite may be present within the
rail at any point of the rail section.
C. Tensile Properties:
The tensile properties of rails shall be produced within the limits found in Table 3
for a particular grade of rail steel.
Table 3 – Tensile Properties Table for Standard Chemistry Rail Steel
High Carbon Pearlite
Description High-Strength (United States Patent
No. 7,288,159
Minimum Yield Strength 120,000 psi 120,000 psi.
Minimum Tensile Strength 171,000 psi 174,000 psi
Minimum Elongation in 2 in. 10% 1 10%
Note 1: Up to 5% of the order may be less than 10% elongation for high-
strength rail, but in no case may the elongation be less than 9%
2.06 ROLLING, CUTTING, AND PREPARING RAIL ENDS
A. Rolling:
The length of rails for welding into CWR strings shall be not less than 80 feet when
corrected to a temperature of 60 degrees F. Not more than 10 percent of standard
length rail of the total tonnage accepted from each individual rolling may be
comprised of shorter lengths corresponding to 78, 74, 70, 66, 60, or 39 feet.
Individual rails not welded into CWR strings as part of the purchase shall be
furnished to the length shown on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. The
allowance for 10 percent shorter lengths will not apply to individual rails ordered to
a specific length.
B. Straightening:
Rails shall be straightened cold in a press or roller machine to remove twists,
waves and kinks until they meet the surface and line requirements within the
tolerances specified.
C. Drilling:
Rails to be welded into CWR strings shall be furnished undrilled (blank). Individual
rails not welded into CWR strings shall be furnished to SCRRA undrilled but
chamfered and finished on both ends in accordance with SCRRA Engineering
Standard No. ES 2301.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
2.07 IDENTIFYING RAIL LENGTH AND TYPE
A. Rails shall be marked to identify the length and grade with colored paint or other
identifying markings. Individual rails shall be paint-marked only one color
according to grade or length. High-strength rails shall be marked by either a metal
plate permanently attached to the neutral axis, hot stamped in the web, or rolled in
the brand. The marking shall give the manufacturer, type, and method of
treatment.
B. Heat treated rail shall be paint-marked orange. Alloy rail shall be paint-marked
aluminum color. Short rails (less than 80) feet) shall be paint-marked green. Rails
meeting the tolerances for Special Trackwork shall be paint-marked white. The
length of each rail shall be painted at the end of the rails in accordance with the
standard practices of the manufacturer.
C. Rails not meeting the requirements of this specification but acceptable under
another specification for use in low speed industry tracks shall be paint-marked
yellow. Industrial quality rails shall also be permanently identified by cutting
diagonally through every “RE” or other designation within the rolled branding of the
rail. Each designation brand shall be ground or milled diagonally from the top right-
hand corner to the bottom left-hand corner, a minimum of 1/4” in width and to within
0.010” of the parent rail web surface.
D. Rail Branding: Branding shall be rolled in raised characters on the side of the web
of each rail at a minimum of every 16 feet. The design of the letters and numerals
shall be determined by the manufacturer. The data and order of arrangement of
the branding shall be as shown in the following typical brand:
136 RE Manufacturer 2003 III or 3
(Weight) (Section) (Mill Brand) (Year Rolled) (Month Rolled)
The method of Hydrogen Elimination shall be located in the brand when a Hydrogen
Elimination method other than Vacuum Treated (VT) is used.
E. Rail Stamping:
1. The web of each rail shall be hot stamped a minimum of 3 times per rail
(short rails must contain a minimum of one full stamp) on the side opposite
the brand, except that stamping shall not occur within 2 feet of either end
of rails.
2. Rails from continuous cast blooms shall be identified by a designation for
heat number, strand number, and bloom number. The rail shall be identified
by an alphabetical designation beginning with “P”, and succeeding “S”, “T”,
“U”, etc., consecutively, or any other identification of the position of the rail
within the cast, as agreed between the purchaser and manufacturer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
3. The data shall be shown in the following typical stamping, except that
strand and bloom numbers may be joined or may be coded at the
manufacturer’s option. The height of the letters and numerals shall be 5/8
inch.
Table 4 – Example Stamping Markings
Stamping Markings
SS, HH, LA, IH or LH 297165 PSTU 12 BC
Rail Type Heat Rail Strand Method of
Number Letter and Hydrogen
Bloom Elimination,
Number if indicated
SS = Standard Strength in stamping
HH = Head Hardened
Description
LA = Low Alloy Standard Strength
IH = Low Alloy Intermediate
LH = Low Alloy Head Hardened
4. The 5/8 inch stamped characters shall have a flat or radius face (0.040 inch
to 0.060 inch wide) with bevels on each side so as not to produce
metallurgical stress risers. The letters and numbers shall be rotated to a 10
degree angle from vertical and shall have rounded corners. No sharp
corners are permitted. The stamping shall be between 0.020 inch and
0.060 inch in depth along the center of the web. The design shall be as
shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1 – Design of Special Letters and Numbers for Rail Stamps
2.08 RAIL MANUFACTURE TESTING
A. Chemistry Testing:
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
1. Steel from each heat must be tested to ensure that the chemistry of the
finished rail conforms to the limits shown in Table 1, or the limits for any
permitted alternative chemistry rail steel. Separate analyses shall be made
from test samples representing the front, middle (optional), and back of the
heat taken during pouring of the heat. Determination of the chemical
composition may be made chemically or spectrographically. Any portion of
the heat meeting the chemical analysis requirements of Table 1 (below)
may be applied.
2. Upon request by the purchaser, samples shall be furnished to verify the
analysis. The analysis, most representative of the heat (clear of the
transition zone for continuous cast steel), shall be recorded as the official
heat analysis, but the purchaser shall have access to all chemical analysis
determinations.
3. Rail heats shall be tested for hydrogen content using a sampling/analytical
method or a direct measurement method. The testing shall be performed
during the continuous casting process. Hydrogen content shall be recorded
and available for review or reporting at the request of the purchaser. The
producer shall define the method used to determine hydrogen content,
which of the following methods are used for hydrogen removal, and present
evidence of applicable procedures used to control the final rail hydrogen.
a. Vacuum Degassing.
b. Bloom Controlled Cooling.
c. Rail Controlled Cooling.
4. Product analysis limits may be applied only in testing for chemical
composition after the rail manufacturing process is completed and will not
supersede chemical composition limits done for the same heats when the
steel is in the molten state.
B. Tensile Strength Testing:
1. One longitudinal tension test specimen shall be taken from the gage corner
of the rail head, centered ½ inch from the gage side and ½ inch from the
running surface. The specimen shall be 0.5 inch diameter and shall be
tested per ASTM A370, “Standard Test Methods and Definitions for
Mechanical Testing of Steel Products.”
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
2. If any test specimen fails because of a malfunction of the test equipment or
a flaw in the specimen, it shall be discarded and another one taken. If a
test specimen fails to meet the required tensile properties, two additional
test specimens shall be cut from rails from the same lot and tested. If both
meet the requirements, the lot shall be accepted. If one of the tests fails to
meet the requirements, two additional rails from the lot shall be sampled
and tested. Both of the tests must be satisfactory for the lot to be accepted.
If one of these tests is unsatisfactory, each individual rail may be sampled
and tested for acceptance. If the results for off-line head hardened rail fail
to meet the requirements, the rails represented by the test may be re-
treated and re-tested.
3. Except for high-strength rail, the test frequency shall be one test for each
heat for the first one hundred heats, one test for every fifth heat for the
second hundred heats and one test for every tenth heat thereafter for heats
furnished to the same manufacturing practice. In addition, a minimum of
one tensile test per order shall be furnished at the request of SCRRA, from
a heat supplied on the order. For high-strength rail of all steel grades, the
testing frequency shall be one test for each heat or 10,000 feet of rail,
whichever represents the smaller amount of rail.
C. Ultrasonic Testing:
1. Rails shall be ultrasonically tested for internal imperfections. The full length
of the rail shall be tested using in line ultrasonic testing equipment at the
rolling mill. The rail shall be free from rough surfaces, loose scale or foreign
matter which would interfere with the ultrasonic detection of defects.
Testing shall be done when the rail temperature is below 150 degrees F.
2. The calibration test rail shall be a full section rail of the same section as
that being tested. The test rail shall be long enough to allow a calibration
at the same rate of speed as the production rail. The size, shape, location
and orientation of calibration references to be placed in the test rail shall
be agreed upon by the purchaser and manufacturer. At least one reference
shall be put into the test rail to represent each search unit in the system.
3. The in-line testing system sensitivity level, using the calibration rail, shall
be adjusted to detect a minimum 1/16 inch diameter defect anywhere in the
sound path in the head, a minimum of 3/32 inch diameter in the web, and
longitudinal imperfections exceeding ½ inch length and greater than 1/16
inch depth occurring in the base. Any indication equal to or greater than
the above defect sizes when scanning the rail at the production speed shall
be cause for initial rejection. A record shall be made of each suspect rail.
This record shall be made available to SCRRA upon request.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
4. The calibration rail shall be run through the ultrasonic testing equipment at
the start of each shift or at least once each 8 hour operating turn and
additionally at any section change or at any indication of equipment
malfunction. A record shall be maintained by the manufacturer of each time
the calibration test rail is run through the test system. This record shall be
made available to SCRRA upon request. In the event of a calibration
failure, all rails processed since the last successful calibration shall be
retested.
5. Rejected rails may be cut back to sound metal as indicated by the ultrasonic
testing. Rails shall be cut to one of the specified non-standard short
lengths. The cut shall be a minimum of 12 inches from any indication.
D. Brinell Hardness:
1. The Brinell hardness test shall be performed, using a tungsten carbide
indentor, on a piece of rail not less than 6 inches long. The test piece shall
be cut from a rail taken from each heat of steel or heat-treatment lot, or
from a ground/milled transverse sample cut from the 6 inch sample rail. A
copy of the report of each test shall be furnished to SCRRA.
2. The test shall be conducted in accordance with the current version ASTM
E 10, “Standard Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials.”
The test shall be made on the side or top of the rail head after decarburized
material has been removed to permit an accurate determination of
hardness. Alternately, the test may be made on the prepared transverse
ground/milled sample no less than 3/8 inch inward from all rail surfaces.
3. If any test result fails to meet the specifications, two additional checks shall
be made on the same piece. If both checks meet the specified hardness,
the heat or heat treatment lot meets the hardness requirement. If either of
the additional checks fails, two additional rails in the heat or lot shall be
checked. Both of these checks must be satisfactory for the heat or lot to be
accepted. If any one of these two checks fails, individual rails may be tested
for acceptance.
4. If the results for off-line head hardened rails fail to meet the requirements
shown in Table 5 (below), the rails may be retreated at the option of the
manufacturer, and the retreated rails shall be re-tested.
E. Internal Hardness of High-Strength Rail:
1. The internal hardness of high-strength rail of any rail steel grade shall be
determined on a transverse specimen cut from the head and at least 6
inches from the end of the rail. The specimen shall be ground or milled so
that the transverse surfaces are parallel. The hardness test shall be
conducted in accordance with ASTM E-18, “Standard Test Methods for
Rockwell Hardness of Metallic Materials.” The results shall be reported in
Brinell using the conversions in Table 5.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
2. The hardness shall be determined at intervals of not greater than 1/8 inch
along traverses 1, 2, and 3 and at positions 4 and 5 as shown in Figure 2.
Hardness gradient of head hardened rail along lines 1, 2, and 3 shall be
gradual towards the center of the rail, with no sharp drop or discontinuity.
Traverse 2 can extend into the web of the rail (X + 1.6 inch).
115# 119# 132# 133# 136# 140# 141#
X ¾” 27/32” 25/32” 7/8” 7/8” 15/16” 1”
0.750” 0.844” 0.781” 0.875” 0.875” 0.938” 1.000”
Figure 2 – Determining Internal Hardness of High Strength Rail
Table 5 – AREMA HRC TO HB Conversion for Rail Steels (Developed by AREMA
Committee 4 specifically for rail steel)
HRC HB HRC HB HRC HB
20 244 30 306 41.8 400
21 250 31 314 42 402
22 255 32 321 43 411
23 261 33 328 44 420
24 267 34 336 45 429
25 273 35 344 46 439
26 280 36 351 47 448
27 286 37 359 48 458
28 293 38 368 49 468
29 300 39 376 50 478
40 384
HB = 165.77 + 2.3597HRC + 0.0777HRC2
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
3. The hardness at a depth of 0.6 inch on lines 1, 2 and 3 and at points 4 and
5 of (depth of 3/8 inch) Figure 2 shall be 352 HB or higher for high strength
rail. For the low alloy head hardened rail steel grade (LH) the hardness at
a depth of 7/8 inch on lines 1, 2, and 3 shall be 341 HB or higher. The
testing frequency shall be one test per heat or 10,000 feet of rail, whichever
is the smaller amount of rail.
4. If any test specimen fails to meet the required hardness, two additional test
specimens shall be obtained from the same lot and tested. If both meet the
requirements, the lot shall be accepted. If one of the specimens fails to
meet the requirements, two additional rails from the lot shall be sampled
and tested. Both of these tests must be satisfactory for the lot to be
accepted. If one of the tests is unsatisfactory, individual rails may be
sampled and tested for acceptance. If the results for off-line head
hardened rail fail to meet the requirements for internal hard, the rails
represented by the test may be re-treated and re-tested.
F. Interior Condition and Macroetch Standard Tests:
1. Sample Location and Frequency
a. A test piece representing a rail from each strand from the beginning
of each sequence and whenever a new ladle is begun shall be shall
be macroetched which is the point representative of the lowest level
in the tundish (i.e. the point of the lowest ferrostatic pressure.) One
additional sample from the end of each strand of the last heat in the
sequence shall also be tested. A new tundish is considered to be
the beginning of a new sequence.
b. SCRRA may, upon receipt, examine and test any rail from any part
of a heat at its option, and if the determines that the rail sample
selected in rejectable, the entire heat shall be reevaluated
according to Section 2.06, Part F, Paragraph D, below.
2. Sample Preparation
a. A full transverse section of the rail can be cut by abrasive or
mechanical means as long as care is maintained in preventing
metallurgical damage. The face to be etched shall have at least a
125 microinch finish. The sample shall be degreased and totally
immersed in a hot (160 degrees to 180 degrees F) one to one
mixture, by volume, of concentrated hydrochloric acid (38 volume
percent) and water to sufficiently etch the specimen.
b. Etching time shall be between ten and twenty minutes. The solution
surface shall be at least one inch above the etched surface. Upon
removal from the bath, the sample shall be rinsed and brushed
under hot water and dried. The sample shall not be blotted dry. A
rust inhibitor may be applied to the etched face at the option of the
manufacturer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
3. Macroetch Evaluation and Rejectable Conditions
The areas of cross section shall be defined as head, web, and base in
accordance with Figure 4-2-9 of Chapter 4 of the AREMA Manual for
Railway Engineering. A description of each of the rejectable conditions and
corresponding figure in Chapter 4 of the AREMA Manual for Railway
Engineering are given in Table 6.
Table 6 –Macroetch Evaluations and Rejectable Conditions
AREMA Figure
Rejectable Condition
Number
4-2-9 Definition of rail cross sectional areas for macroetch evaluation
4-2-10 and 4-2-11 Hydrogen flakes
4-2-12 and 4-2-13 Pipe; any size.
4-2-14 and 4-2-15 Central web streaking extending into the head or base
4-2-16 and 4-2-17 Streaking greater than 2-1/2 inches in length
4-2-18 Scattered central web streaking from the web into the head and base.
Scattered segregation extending more than one inch into the head or
4-2-19
base.
4-2-20 Subsurface porosity
Inverse or negative segregation having a width greater than 3 inches
4-2-21
and extending more than ½ inches into the head or base
Streaking greater than 1/8 inches in the head from radial streaks,
4-2-22
radial cracks, halfway cracks, or hinged cracks
Other defects that could cause premature failure (i.e. slag, refractory,
4-2-23
etc.)
4-2-24 and 4-2-25 Segregation extending into the head or base
4-2-26 Segregation greater than 1/8 inches wide in the head or base.
4-2-27 Scattered central web segregation extending into the head and base.
4. Retesting
a. If any specimen fails to meet the macroetch standard for interior
quality, two additional samples of rail representative of the same
strand shall be obtained. These retests shall be taken from
positions selected by the manufacturer and the material from
between the two retest positions shall be rejected. If any retest fails,
testing shall continue until acceptable internal quality is exhibited.
b. All rails represented by failed tests shall be rejected. If finished rail
from the beginning of a strand shows defects, successive rails from
that strand shall be tested until sound metal is identified. Those
portions of rails exhibiting sound metal may be cut from longer rails
and accepted as short rail, subject to the limitations of length.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
c. In the event that there is a question of the seriousness of the
indication, further examination may be performed with a stereo
microscope up to 5X. A polished sample may be inspected at 100X
for metallographic interpretation.
G. Interior Condition and Microcleanliness Standard Tests:
1. Sampling
a. The metallurgical cleanliness of the rail steel shall be determined
from samples taken from the finished rail section. A minimum of
every tenth heat must be tested. A minimum of three one-inch long
full section samples per heat tested shall be taken, one from the
end of the first acceptable rail, one from the end of a rail
representing the approximate middle of the heat, and one from the
end of the last acceptable rail. Test specimens will be sectioned and
surface analyzed as shown in Figure 3.
b. Each ¾” by ¾” section (Sample A in Figure 3) shall be carefully
prepared and evaluated according to Method A of ASTM Standard
E45, “Standard Test Methods for Determining the Inclusion Content
of Steel.” Each individual metallographic sample shall have a
maximum average rating of 2 and a maximum individual rating of 3
for inclusions type, thin or heavy. Results shall be furnished to
SCRRA purchaser upon request.
Figure 3 – Sample “A” location in rail head – Shaded area denotes area to be
analyzed
H. Tolerances:
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
1. Section and Length
Rail shall be rolled to the standard section shown on the drawings or listed
in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices within the section tolerances given
in Table 5, and to the specified length within the tolerances given in Table
4. Gauges for checking basic rail dimensions shall conform to those
illustrated in Figure 4-2-28 through and including Figure 4-2-40 of
Chapter 4 of the AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering.
Table 4 – Tolerance in Length
End Condition Length > 40 ft. Length ≤ 40 ft.
Undrilled -0, +6 inch -0, +4 inch
Drilled one end -0, +6 inch -0, +4 inch
Drilled both ends ±7/8 inch ±7/16 inch
Table 5 – Section Tolerances
Description Tolerance, Inches
Rail Trackwork Rail
Plus Minus Plus Minus
Height of rail (measured within one foot from 0.030 0.015 0.030 0.015
end)
Width of rail head (measured within one foot 0.025 0.025 0.015 0.015
from end)
Thickness of web 0.040 0.020 0.040 0.020
Fishing template standout 0.060 0.000 0.030 0.000
Asymmetry of head with respect to base 0.050 0.050 0.030 0.030
Width of base 0.040 0.040 0.030 0.030
Flange height 0.025 0.015 0.015 0.015
Note 1: Base concavity shall not exceed 0.010 inch. Convexity is not permitted.
Note 2: No variation will be allowed in dimensions affecting the fit of the joint bars,
except that the fishing template may stand out not to exceed 0.060 inch laterally.
Note 3: All four corners of the rail base shall have the radii according to the drawing
± 1/32 inch. Any disputes shall be analyzed on an Optical Comparator.
Note 4: The section of the rails to be used in AREMA trackwork shall conform to the
design specified by the purchaser subject to the tolerances listed under trackwork
rail above.
Note 5: Head radius to be within (±) 2 inches per Figure 4-2-40.
Note 6: On up to 5% of the order, the height of the rail plus tolerance can be
between 0.030 and 0.040 inches. This exception does not apply to trackwork rail.
2. Rail Straightness
a. When placed head up on a horizontal support, rails that have ends
higher than the middle will be accepted, if they have a uniform
upsweep, the maximum ordinate of which does not exceed ¾ inch
in any 80 feet as illustrated in Figure 4.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
Figure 4 – Side Elevation of Rail Uniform Upsweep Tolerance
a. The uniform surface upsweep at the rail ends shall not exceed a
maximum ordinate of 0.020 inch in 3 feet and the 0.020 inch
maximum ordinate shall not occur at a point closer than 18 inches
from the rail end as illustrated in Figure 5. Surface down-sweep
and droop must not be accepted.
Figure 5 – Side Elevation of Rail Uniform Upsweep Tolerance at Rail Ends
b. Deviations of the lateral (horizontal) line in either direction at the rail
ends shall not exceed: 1) a maximum mid-ordinate of 0.020 inch in
3 feet using a straight edge and of 0.010 inch at the end quarter
point as illustrated in Figure 6a.; 2) a maximum of 0.040 inch
measured by the tangent offset method at the end of the rail as
illustrated in Figure 6b.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
Figure 6a – Top View of Rail Lateral (Horizontal) Line Tolerance at Rail Ends
Figure 6b – Top View of Rail Lateral (Horizontal) Line Tolerance at Rail Ends
c. Uniform lateral sidesweep in any 80 feet shall not exceed ¾ inch as
illustrated in Figure 7. When required, proof of compliance with,
“Side Uniform Upsweep” tolerance shall be determined by string
(wire) lining, and a straight edge and taper gage shall be used to
determine rail end surface and line characteristics specified in
“Uniform Surface Upsweep” tolerance and “Rail Lateral Line”
tolerance. Surface downsweep and droop shall not be accepted.
Figure 7 – Top View of Uniform Lateral Sidesweep Tolerance
d. Rails shall be hot sawed, cold sawed, milled abrasive wheel cut, or
ground to length. Rail ends shall be square with a variation of not
more than 1/32 inch allowed. The method of finishing the ends of
rails shall not cause metallurgical or mechanical damage to the rail.
e. If the rail shows evidence of twist while being laid head up on the
final inspection bed, it will be checked by inserting a taper or feeler
gage between the base and the rail skid nearest the end. If the gap
exceeds 0.060 inch the rail will be rejected. Alternatively, a twist
gage may be used and if the rail exceeds 1.5 degrees in 80 feet the
rail will be rejected. Rejected rails may be subject to straightening.
I. Evaluation of Residual Stresses in Rail by Web Saw Cut:
1. Preparation and Test
a. Finished rail shall meet the requirements of a web saw cut test
conducted of a fully roller-straightened rail sample of a regular
production rail. The rail ends not affected by the roller straightening
process shall not be used for the test. For those production rails
that are not roller-straightened, the rail shall also meet the following
requirements of a web saw cut test.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
b. The test sample shall be 24” in length and cut from a production
rail. The sample end face furthest from the end of the rail from which
the sample is cut shall be punch marked with two central, vertically
aligned sharp cone pointed marks, one on each side of the neutral
axis a sufficient distance apart such that the marks are not affected
or obliterated by the subsequent saw cut. The caliper measurement
shall be taken at a distance no more than 0.25” (6mm) from the rail
end at the vertical centerline of the rail. The caliper point locations
shall be marked and this measurement shall be recorded.
c. The initial vertical distance between the two punch marks shall be
measured with a calibrated vernier or digital caliper and recorded.
Alternatively, a calibrated vernier or digital caliper may be used to
measure the initial height of the de-burred end of the rail to be saw-
cut.
Figure 8 – Rail-Web Saw Cut Test
d. The web of the test sample shall then be saw cut on a straight line
along the neutral axis of the web for a distance (L) of 16”. If the rail
closes during the saw cut, sufficient material shall be removed from
the mouth of the saw cut to prevent the top portion of the rail from
touching the bottom portion of the rail. The sawing process shall
employ a procedure and sufficient precautions such that there is no
induced distortion or heating of the rail.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 20 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
e. Immediately after cutting, the distance between the two vertical
punch marks shall again be measured with the vernier caliper and
recorded. For the alternate method the rail height shall be re-
measured by placing the caliper points at the same position on the
top and base of the rail as initially measured. This value shall be
recorded.
f. For either procedure, the value after subtracting the final
measurement from the initial measurement is called the vertical
displacement (d). The vertical displacement may be a positive or
negative value depending upon whether the longitudinal and
vertical residual tensile stresses of the rail sample are in tension (+)
or compression (-). The web saw cut test shall be the primary
method used to evaluate the magnitude of the residual stresses in
rail.
2. Rail Acceptance Criteria
Any rail demonstrating a vertical displacement (+ or -) of greater than
0.148” (3.75 mm) shall be rejected. For fully-hardened rails, that have
significantly higher fracture toughness properties in the web of the rail, an
alternate acceptance criteria based on stress intensity and fracture
toughness measurements may be used if it is the standard practice of the
mill to use such a test. If the stress intensity level is less than the fracture
toughness level the rail may be considered acceptable.
3. Re-Test and Acceptance Criteria
Any rail that does not meet the acceptance criteria of the primary saw cut
test, may be accepted if a steel wedge forced into the mouth of the saw
cut generates crack propagation and completed fracture through either the
base or head of the rail.
Alternately, any rail that does not meet the acceptance criteria in may be
accepted if two additional rails from the same week’s production are
secured, saw cut tested and pass the primary acceptance criteria.
4. Testing Frequency
A rail manufacturer that has developed a continuous statistical control
process and monitoring tests for control of their critical processing steps
during production of rail may test a rail not less than a frequency of once
each week. If a changes occur in the critical rail manufacturing processes
in the course of production, tests must be taken at a frequency of one rail
per 24 hours for a one week period of that change.
These monitoring tests shall demonstrate to SCRRA that there exists a
positive correlation between the continuous process monitoring and the
saw cut test measurements performed on the finished rail. During
development of a statistical control and monitoring process, a saw cut test
shall be taken at a frequency of one rail per 24 hours for a two week period.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 21 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Flash butt welding and testing of rail shall conform to the current AREMA Manual,
Chapter 4, Part 2, Section, "Specification for Fabrication of Continuous Welded
Rail" unless otherwise specified herein.
B. Vendor must fabricate CWR off site.
C. Lengths of CWR strings delivered to site shall be not less than 1,200 feet unless
otherwise approved by SCRRA.
D. Fabrication shall be in accordance with this specification.
E. Rejected welds shall be cut out and rewelded with a minimum of 19'-6” plugs at
Vendor's expense.
F. Bolt holes for the end of CWR strings are acceptable and must be approved (size,
location and number) with the SCRRA prior to shipment.
3.02 EQUIPMENT
A. The welding machine shall be capable of automatically recording pertinent data
including pre-heating impulses, flashing time, upset current, time and platen travel
during flashing and shall be capable of testing the welds during production using
the ultrasonic testing method or the dry powder method of magnetic particle
inspection.
B. The Vendor shall maintain welding equipment in good working order at all times.
3.03 RAIL BENDING AND STRAIGHTENING
A. Straightened rail sections shall achieve the alignment tolerance as specified in
AREMA Manual, Chapter 4.
B. Any rail sections that cannot be straightened shall be cut back a sufficient distance
to achieve the specified tolerances.
C. If straightened rail does not meet specification tolerance in two passes through the
straightener, it will be cut out of the string.
3.04 RAIL CUTTING AND END PREPARATION
A. Rails used for electric-flash butt welds shall have their ends saw-cut or abrasive
disc-cut clean and square by means of accepted equipment.
B. Torch cutting of rail is prohibited.
C. The head and base of the rail for a length of approximately six inches from welding
end shall have mill scale removed down to bright metal.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 22 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
D. All burrs shall be removed from the area where the welding current carrying
electrodes contact on the head and base of the rail.
E. Holes will not be permitted in the rail, except as approved by SCRRA.
3.05 ELECTRIC FLASH BUTT WELDING
A. CWR strings shall be fabricated so that all of the branding appears on one side of
the string.
B. Alignment of rail in the welding machine shall:
1. Be done on the head of the rail.
2. Vertical alignment shall provide for a flat running surface. Any difference
in height of the rails shall be in the base.
C. Horizontal alignment shall be done in such a manner that any difference in the
widths of heads of rails shall be divided equally on both sides of the head.
D. All electric flash butt welds shall be forged to point of refusal to further plastic
deformation and have a minimum upset of 0.5 inches with 0.625 inches as
standard.
E. The upset cylinder shall not bottom out during the upset portion of the weld cycle.
F. Post weld straightening may be permitted if performed before the surface
temperature of the weld falls below 500 degrees Fahrenheit.
G. Quenching the weld metal shall not be permitted on standard rail. Quenching of
premium rail weld is permitted and shall be per the standard industry practice as
accepted by class I railroad.
3.06 FINISHING AND ALIGNMENT
A. Jagged, notched or badly mismatched end faces shall be pre-flashed to an even
or mated condition before setting up rails for preheating and final flashing to assure
that the entire surfaces of rail ends are uniformly flashing immediately preceding
upsetting.
B. All heavy grinding used in the finishing process shall be performed on the hot metal
immediately following welding, to prevent metallurgical damage.
C. Finishing shall eliminate cracks visible to the unaided eye. Notches created by
offset conditions shall be eliminated by grinding to blend variations.
D. All notches created by offset conditions or twisted rails shall be eliminated by
grinding to blend the variations.
E. All fins on the weld due to grinding drag shall be removed prior to final inspection.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 23 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
3.07 TOLERANCES IN ELECTRIC FLASH BUTT WELDS
A. Trimming and grinding of rail welds shall result in the weld being within the
tolerances set forth in the AREMA Manual, Chapter 4, Part 2, Section
"Specifications for Fabrication of Continuous Welded Rail."
3.08 RECORDS FOR ELECTRIC FLASH BUTT WELDING
A. On a bi-weekly basis a record shall be submitted to SCRRA documenting the
production of each string of CWR. Included shall be the following:
1. The CWR string designation number and station location in the field.
2. The heat numbers of the first and last pieces of rail in the string.
3. The heat numbers on each side of any weld which has been cut out and
rewelded.
4. A small sketch or graph indicating the current flow during the production of
each weld.
3.09 CWR STRING MARKINGS
A. Mark each completed string with the appropriate CWR string designation indicated
in the schedule of CWR strings.
3.10 CWR STRING HANDLING
A. Handling of CWR shall be in accordance with submitted procedures for transport
and handling.
B. As welding is completed on each CWR string, the string shall be transported from
the welding line by the Vendor to the track location or a suitable stockpile location.
C. The stockpile location shall be approved by SCRRA if it lies within the right-of-way.
3.11 VISUAL INSPECTION
A. Production welds shall be visually inspected for surface cracks.
B. Welds with surface cracks visible to the eye will not be accepted.
3.12 REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE WELDS
A. Flash butt production welds giving fault indication in magnetic particle inspection
during production shall be cut, rewelded and retested and shall not be left for field
welding.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 24 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 10 Continuous Welded Rail
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work associated with project item
in Section 34 72 00, Trackwork or Section 34 72 20, Track Shifting, Relocation,
and Resurfacing and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the
Contractor for Work of this Section.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 11 10
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 10 - 25 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 11 15
OTHER TRACK MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the material requirements and performance criteria for Other
Track Materials (OTM) to be furnished in accordance with Contract Documents or
required by the Engineer.
B. OTM materials shall include rail fastening systems, screw spikes, track bolts, nuts,
spring washers, tie plates, tie plugs, rail anchors, standard toeless joint bars,
compromise joint bars, and insulated joints.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering
2. Portfolio of Trackwork Plans
3. Specifications for Special Trackwork
B. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. AWS B2.1: Standards for Welding Procedures and Performance
Qualifications
2. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code
C. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
1. ANSI B1.1: Unified Inch Screw Threads
2. ANSI B1.3M: Screw Threads Gaging System for Dimensional Acceptability
3. ANSI B18.22.1: Plain Washers
D. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A36: Standard Specifications for Carbon Structural Steel
2. ASTM A123: Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip-Galvanized) Coating
on Iron and Steel Products
3. ASTM D257: Test Methods for D-C Resistance or Conductance of
Insulated Materials
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 15 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 15 Other Track Materials
4. ASTM D1002: Test Methods for Apparent Shear Strength of Single-Lap-
Joint Adhesive Bonded Metal Specimens by Tension Loading (Metal to
Metal)
5. ASTM F3125: Standard Specifications for High Strength Structural Bolts
and Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120
ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
E. Association of American Railroads (AAR)
1. AAR: Manual of Standards and Rec. Practices
2. AAR Section J: Quality Assurance M-1003
3. AAR: Assembly and Test of Insulated Track Part 16, Signal Section
4. AAR: Signal Manual Assembly and Testing of Insulated Fittings, Part
14.5.1
F. SCRRA: Engineering Standards.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Compromise Rail – A relatively short rail, the two ends of which are different
sections, corresponding with the sections of the rail to which they are to be joined
B. The word “Vendor” used in this Specification shall mean the Contractor.
C. Fasteners – Joint bars, bolts, clips and spikes
D. Joint Bar – A steel member used in pairs for the purpose of joining rail ends
together, and holding them accurately, evenly and firmly in position
E. Insulated Joint – A rail joint designed to arrest the flow of electric current from rail
to rail by means of insulation placed so as to separate the rail ends and other metal
parts connecting them
F. OTM – A general term referring to all miscellaneous materials other than rail and
ties
G. Tie Plug – Rectangular sections of wood for filling unused spike holes in wood ties
H. Switch – A track structure to divert rolling stock from one track to another
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Vendor shall submit supporting information within 60 days of award
documenting the past successful performance in furnishing the materials included
in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. Provide references and contact numbers
at the railroads where the OTM have been placed in service.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 15 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 15 Other Track Materials
B. The Vendor shall submit certificate of compliance that the material delivered is in
compliance with the specification within 60 days of approval of payment.
C. The Vendor shall submit OTM packaging, loading, shipping, and handling method.
D. The Vendor shall submit for SCRRA’s review and approval quality control and
quality assurance plans and related certifications such as ISO 9001, “six sigma” or
equivalent demonstrating that the Vendor has the processes, personnel and
systems to produce high quality OTM included in the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices.
E. The Vendor shall submit data documenting past performance and projects within
the last ten (10) years furnishing OTM to Class 1 Freight, passenger or commuter
railroads.
F. The Vendor shall include installation instructions. The Vendor shall Include, at a
minimum, the Care and storage of materials; Date of glue manufacture; Glue shelf
life; Rail end preparation; Weather and temperature restrictions; Mixing and
application of glue; Installation of insulated joint bar and pin bolts; Curing
restrictions; Detection of glue bond failures
G. Submit Certificates of Compliance for all OTM. Include material qualification test
reports for materials, components, and assemblies.
H. Administrative and procedural requirements for proposed changes in product and
materials from those required by these specifications shall be as per SCRRA’s
Standard Specifications Section 01 25 00, “Substitution Procedures”. The
specifications are available on SCRRA’s website at www.metrolinktrains.com.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Vendor’s Quality Control Program (QCP) shall be in accordance with the AAR M-
1003 or SCRRA approved equivalent quality control program. Comply with
AREMA Portfolio of Trackwork Plans.
B. Materials or partially or fully assembled products not meeting the specifications
shall be rejected. OTM delivered to SCRRA shall be either promptly modified to
meet specifications or removed from SCRRA’s delivery and storage locations
within 30 calendar days.
C. Equipment used for the manufacturing materials shall be in good operating
condition, of adequate capacity and range, and accurately calibrated. Testing
equipment shall be certified and traceable to national standards such as the
National Institute of Standards and Technology.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Vendor shall load, transport, and handle the material in a manner which will
prevent damage to the material.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 15 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 15 Other Track Materials
B. The material will be supplied to the SCRRA in accordance with the delivery
requirements, FOB Destination. Quantity of each supply will be as requested by
the SCRRA release document. The material when purchased is to be delivered to
the Los Angeles area at a place designated by the SCRRA representative. A
complete Bill of Material for each order will be submitted with modes, dates,
contents, and destinations of shipments clearly indicated. A complete shipping list
with reference to blanket purchase agreement, if applicable, will accompany all
deliveries of materials.
C. All materials delivered will be colored coded and have bar coded control tags using
bar code # 128 system or as approved by SCRRA on all parts/hardware for easy
assembly by field personnel.
D. Steel tie plates shall be palletized, with each standard non-returnable pallet holding
not more than 6,000 pounds. Binding for the palletized tie plates shall be of
sufficient strength to facilitate multiple loading, unloading and handling with cranes
and/or forklifts.
E. Resilient fasteners shall be packaged in burlap bags or other suitable container,
with the weight of each package not exceeding 125 pounds. The bag or container
shall be of sufficient strength to facilitate multiple loading, unloading and handling
and storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. OTM shall be new and conform to SCRRA Engineering Standards.
B. OTM ordered to the Engineering Standards shall be produced in conformance to
these specifications and AREMA Specifications for Special Trackwork.
2.02 TIE PLATES
A. Tie plates shall conform to AREMA Volume 1, Chapter 5, Section 1.1, Tie Plates -
“Specifications for Steel Tie Plates” and appropriate SCRRA Engineering
Standard.
B. Tie plate dimensions for resilient fastening systems for 5½” base shall conform to
SCRRA Engineering Standard ES2453, “Rolled Steel Tie Plate to Suit 5½” Base
AREMA Rail and Pandrol Rail Clips E2055”. Tie plate dimensions for resilient
fastening systems shall conform to SCRRA Engineering Standard ES2454,
“Rolled Steel Tie Plate to Suit 132 LB. RE – 141 LB. RE Rail and Pandrol Rail Clips
E2055”.
C. Tie plate dimensions for standard fastening systems for 5½” base shall conform to
SCRRA Engineering Standard ES2451, “Standard 13” Tie Plate for 5½” Base
Rail”. Tie plate dimensions for standard fastening systems for 6” base shall
conform to SCRRA Engineering Standard ES2452, “14” Tie Plate for 6” Base Rail”.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 15 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 15 Other Track Materials
2.03 TRACK SPIKES
A. Cut spikes shall be new and conform to the requirements of the AREMA Manual,
Chapter 5, Part 2, Section 2.1, “Specifications for Soft-Steel Track Spikes”, and
SCRRA Engineering Standard ES2355.
B. Cut spikes shall be 5/8 inches by 6 11/16 inches and conform to all other
dimensions specified in the AREMA Manual, Chapter 5, Part 2, Section 2.2,
“Design of Cut Track Spike”.
C. Screw spikes shall be 15/16 inch by 6 inches straight shank screw spikes with a
minimum tensile strength of 73,000 psi. Head shall be hot forged and centered
relative to the shank in accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standards ES2355.
D. Screw spikes for grade crossing panels shall be “Evergrip” or equal and shall be
as per ES2355.
E. Stamp screw spikes with manufacturer’s identification and date of manufacture
(month and year) in accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standard ES2355.
2.04 RAIL ANCHORS
A. Rail anchors shall be Channeloc-type rail anchors manufactured by Chemtron
True Temper or equal.
B. Material for rail anchors to be high carbon steel. Material to be heat treated to Rc
34-47.
C. Rail anchors shall be sized to conform to the rail section used. Rail anchors shall
have sufficient bearing area and depth to minimize the possibility of the anchor
damaging or becoming embedded in the tie.
D. Rail anchors shall conform to the AREMA Manual, Chapter 5, Part 7, Section 7.1,
“Specifications for Rail Anchors”. Rail Anchors shall be one-piece conforming to
the requirements of AREMA Manual and of standard weight.
E. Rail anchor applications shall be in accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standard
ES2351.
2.05 TRACK BOLTS, NUTS AND SPRING WASHERS
A. Track bolts and nuts shall conform to the dimensions specified in the AREMA
Manual, Chapter 4, Part 3, Section 3.3, “Rail Drilling, Bar Punching, and Track
Bolts”. Track bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the requirements of the
AREMA Manual, Chapter 4, Part 3, Section 3.5, Specifications for Heat-Treated
Carbon-Steel Track Bolts, and Carbon-Steel Nuts.
B. Spring Washers shall conform to the requirements of the AREMA Manual, Chapter
4, Part 3, Section 3.6, Specifications for Spring Washers.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 15 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 15 Other Track Materials
2.06 RESILIENT FASTENING SYSTEM
A. Resilient fastening system for wood ties shall be a Pandrol rail fastening system
per relevant SCRRA Engineering Standards, “Pandrol Rail Clip – Type “e” 2055”,
consisting of elastic fastener ”E-Clip” galvanized, type elastic clips, screw spikes,
and elastic fastener tie plates or approved equal or as otherwise indicated in the
Contract Drawings. Pandrol “E-Clip” shall be galvanized as required per ES2362.
B. Resilient fastening system for concrete ties shall be a Pandrol Rail fastening
system per relevant SCRRA Engineering Standards consisting of “Fast-Clip” type
elastic fasteners pre-installed in the “off” position on concrete ties, or approved
equal, unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings.
C. Rail seat pads shall be “3-part” with steel interior plate.
D. Resilient fasteners for Insulated Joints shall be type specified in SCRRA
Engineering Standards for the type of resilient fasteners to be used.
1. The Contractor must provide suitable fasteners in accordance Relevant
Engineering Standards requirements.
2.07 JOINT BARS
A. Joint bars shall conform to AREMA Volume 1, Chapter 4, Part 3, Section 3.2, “Joint
Bars and Assemblies”; Section 3.3, “Rail Drillings, Bar Punchings and Bolts”; and
Section 3.4, “Specifications for Quenched Carbon-Steel Joint Bars, Micro-alloyed
Joint Bars and Forged Compromise Joint Bars”.
B. Bar dimension and details shall conform to SCRRA ES2502, “Rail and Joint
Assembly for 136 lbs. RE Rail”.
C. Joint bars used to temporarily connect rails that will be field welded in the final
configuration shall be bolted with the rails ends drilled in the outer four holes only.
2.08 COMPROMISE JOINT BARS
A. Compromise Joints or connections to other rail weights on SCRRA mainline track
(track used in passenger revenue service will be considered mainline track for
purposes of this section) will be made through the use of transition rails as
specified in SCRRA ES2372 or ES2373 as appropriate.
B. Other rail weight connections or those connections necessary for “Industry Track”
or “Other than main line” will be made using Compromise Bars.
C. Compromise Bars shall be 6-hole conforming to AREMA Volume 1, Chapter 4,
Part 3, Section 3.4, “Specifications for Quenched Carbon-Steel Joint Bars, Micro-
alloyed Joint Bars and Forged Compromise Joint Bars” and conform to the
requirements of SCRRA ES2503, “Compromise Joints for Various Weights of
Rail”.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 15 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 15 Other Track Materials
D. Final configuration of the track shall utilize field welds to join transition rails
wherever applicable in mainline track.
E. Compromise joint bars may be used for interim phases of construction on mainline
track provided interim phase duration is expected to be six (6) months or less.
F. Temporary Compromise joint bars as noted above shall use track bolts in the outer
four holes only.
2.09 INSULATED RAIL JOINTS
A. Bonded insulated rail joints shall conform to the current requirements of the
SCRRA Engineering Standards ES2504 and AREMA Manual, Chapter 4, Part 3,
Section 3.8, “Specifications for Bonded Insulation Rail Joints”.
B. Insulated rail joints shall be of the epoxy-bonded type as manufactured by
Allegheny Rail Products, Co., or equal.
C. Insulated rail joints shall be complete with bars, end posts, bushing, washers, pin
bolts, collars, washers and adhesives.
D. Straight bars shall be new and smooth and will be providing full face contact,
conforming to the applicable rail section, and fabricated from material which meets
or exceeds the mechanical properties and workmanship requirements of the
current AREMA Volume 1, Chapter 4, Part 3, Section 3.4, “Specifications for
Quenched Carbon-Steel Joint Bars, Micro-alloyed Joint Bars and Forged
Compromise Joint Bars”. The toe of the joint bar shall properly fit against the web
of the rail. When elastically fastened, the joint bar shall provide adequate
clearance to maintain electrical isolation.
E. Pin bolts shall be of ASTM A325 structural steel furnished with the appropriate
collar.
F. Flat circular shall be hardened steel washers in accordance with ASTM F436.
G. Bolt hole size shall be in accordance with the bonded insulated joint Vendor's
recommendation. If bolt hole diameter is larger than 1-3/16 inches, place ASTM
A325 hardened washers between the joint bars and the nut. Refer to SCRRA
ES2370 for details.
H. The bolt hole locations shall be as specified in AREMA, Chapter 4, Part 3, Section
3.3, Rail for a 36-inch joint bar. Insulated joint bar lengths for main track
installations shall be 36 inches.
I. Insulated material shall be high pressure, laminated design, impervious to oil,
grease, and water, and having electrical characteristics equal to or greater than
fiber insulation meeting requirements of the AAR Manual, Part 14.5.1, and
electrical resistance tested as specified.
J. Each plug shall be Megohmmeter electrical resistance tested as per AREMA
Manual.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 15 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 15 Other Track Materials
2.10 TIE PLUGS
A. Tie hole plugging material shall be SpikeFast as supplied by Willamette Valley
Company of Eugene, Oregon, or equal.
2.11 SUPERELEVATION TAGS
A. Furnish metal superelevation tags manufactured from 16-gauge aluminum in
accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standard ES2206. Stamp tags in 1/4-inch
increments from zero to maximum superelevation.
1. Nails for Securing Tags to Timber Crossties: Galvanized No 10.
2. Adhesive for Securing Tags to Concrete Ties must be approved by
SCRRA.
2.12 DERAILS
A. Derails shall be as per SCRRA Engineering Standard ES2604. The sliding and
hinged derails shall be painted yellow.
B. Crowder derail shall be as per SCRRA Engineering Standard ES2613 and
ES2614.
2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. During OTM fabrication, perform the tests and inspections specified in the AREMA
Specifications.
B. The bonded insulated rail joints shall meet electrical resistance test as specified in
AREMA Chapter 4, Section 3.8.7.3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the SCRRA Engineering Standards Standard Specifications unless
specifically noted or excepted within these specifications. Promptly notify SCRRA
of any conflicts, omissions or needed clarifications arising from the use of the
designated drawings, standards or specifications.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A. The Vendor providing the materials shall contact SCRRA’s Material Management
Supervisor at phone number 909-468-9729, 48 hours prior to the date of delivery.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 15 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 15 Other Track Materials
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work associated with project item
in Section 34 72 00, Trackwork or Section 34 72 20, Track Shifting, Relocation,
and Resurfacing and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the
Contractor for Work of this Section.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 11 15
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 15 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 11 23
SPECIAL TRACKWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the material requirements and performance criteria for the
Special Trackwork to be furnished in accordance with Contract Documents or
required by the Engineer.
B. Special Trackwork materials furnished under this IFB shall include rail, switches,
frogs, insulated joints, derails, compromise/transition rail, stick rail, and bumping
posts and individual turnout components to be used as replacement parts. All
materials furnished shall be entirely new materials.
C. Special Trackwork materials furnished under this IFB shall be utilized in the
“general railroad system of transportation” within the meaning of 49 CFR 213.1
(Track Safety Standards) and will be used in dense traffic mixed
passenger/commuter and freight railroad service.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering
2. Portfolio of Trackwork Plans
3. Specifications for Special Trackwork
B. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. AWS B2.1: Standards for Welding Procedures and Performance
Qualifications
2. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code
C. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
1. ANSI B1.1: Unified Inch Screw Threads
2. ANSI B1.3M: Screw Threads Gaging System for Dimensional Acceptability
3. ANSI B18.22.1: Plain Washers
D. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A307: Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 23 Special Trackwork
2. ASTM D257: Test Methods for D-C Resistance or Conductance of
Insulating Materials
3. ASTM E325: Requirements for a Testing and Inspection Laboratory
E. Association of American Railroads (AAR)
1. AAR: Manual of Standards and Rec. Practices
2. AAR Section J: Quality Assurance M-1003
F. SCRRA: Engineering Standards.
G. BNSF: BNSF Railway applicable specifications and standards
H. UPRR: Union Pacific Railroad applicable specifications and standards
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Closure Rails – The rails between the parts of any Special Trackwork layout, such
as the rails between the switch and the frog in a turnout
B. The word “Vendor” used in this Specification shall mean the Contractor.
C. Fasteners – Joint bars, bolts, clips and spikes
D. Frog – A track structure used at the intersection of two running rails to provide
support for wheels and passageways for the flanges, thus permitting wheels on
either rail to cross the other
E. Guard Rail – A rail or other structure laid parallel with the running rails of a track –
used to hold wheels in correct alignment to prevent their flanges from striking the
end of switch points of frog points
F. Point Rail – Switch rail or switch point – the tapered rail of a switch used to divert
traffic along either route of a turnout
G. Railbound Manganese Steel Frog- A frog consisting essentially of a manganese
steel body casting fitted into and between rolled rails and held together with bolts,
known as RBM
H. Running Rail – The rail that carries a wheel as differentiated from a guard rail or
flange rail which carry no weight
I. Spring Frog – A frog having a movable wing rail which is normally held against the
point rail by springs thus making an unbroken sunning surface for wheels using
the track. The flanges of wheels on the other track force the movable wing rail
away from the point rail to provide a passageway
J. Stock Rail – A running rail against which the switch points operate
K. Switch – A track structure to divert rolling stock from one track to another
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 23 Special Trackwork
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Vendor shall submit supporting information within 60 days of award
documenting the past successful performance in furnishing the materials included
in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. Provide references and contact numbers
at the railroads where the turnouts have been placed in service.
B. The Vendor shall submit certificate of compliance that the material delivered is in
compliance with the specification within 60 days of approval of payment.
C. The Vendor shall submit Special Trackwork packaging, loading, shipping, and
handling method.
D. The Vendor shall submit for SCRRA’s review and approval quality control and
quality assurance plans and related certifications such as ISO 9001, “six sigma” or
equivalent demonstrating that the Vendor has the processes, personnel and
systems to produce high quality Special Trackwork Materials included in the list of
Special Trackwork items as provided in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
E. The Vendor shall submit data documenting past performance and projects within
the last ten (10) years furnishing Special Trackwork material to Class 1 Freight,
passenger or commuter railroads.
F. Administrative and procedural requirements for proposed changes in product and
materials from those required by these specifications shall be as per SCRRA’s
Standard Specifications Section 01 25 00, “Substitution Procedures”. The
specifications are available on SCRRA’s website at www.metrolinktrains.com.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Vendor’s Quality Control Program (QCP) shall be in accordance with the AAR M-
1003 or SCRRA approved equivalent quality control program. Comply with
AREMA Portfolio of Trackwork Plans.
B. Materials or partially or fully assembled products not meeting the specifications
shall be rejected. Special Trackwork materials delivered to SCRRA shall be either
promptly modified to meet specifications or removed from SCRRA’s delivery and
storage locations within 30 calendar days.
C. Equipment used for the manufacturing materials shall be in good operating
condition, of adequate capacity and range, and accurately calibrated. Testing
equipment shall be certified and traceable to national standards such as the
National Institute of Standards and Technology.
D. Insulated gauge plates and switch rods shall be tested in accordance with AAR
Manual, Part 116, Signal Section, Assembly and Test of Insulated Track Fittings.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Vendor shall load, transport, and handle the material in a manner which will
prevent damage to the material.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 23 Special Trackwork
B. Band all switch points and stock rails together in one package for each turnout unit.
C. Package all frog as a single unit per turnout, and identify to indicate the turnout
number.
D. Band guard rails together, and identify as to which turnout it is to accompany.
E. The material will be supplied to the SCRRA in accordance with the delivery
requirements, FOB Destination. Quantity of each supply will be as requested by
the SCRRA release document. The material when purchased is to be delivered to
the Los Angeles area at a place designated by the SCRRA. A complete Bill of
Material for each order will be submitted with modes, dates, contents, and
destinations of shipments clearly indicated. A complete shipping list with reference
to blanket purchase agreement, if applicable, will accompany all deliveries of
materials.
F. All materials delivered will be colored coded and have bar coded control tags using
bar code # 128 system or as approved by SCRRA on all parts/hardware for easy
assembly by field personnel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Use SCRRA Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards for all turnouts
and crossovers and related replacement and spare parts.
B. Rails, castings, forging, rolled shapes, washers, and fastening used in Special
Trackwork ordered to the Engineering Standards shall be produced in
conformance to these Specifications and AREMA Specifications for Special
Trackwork.
2.02 RAIL
A. All steel rail used in the manufacturing of switches, turnouts and crossovers shall
be new Low Alloy, Head Hardened, High Strength Grade HH or LH 136 RE (10-
inch radius) conforming to AREMA Chapter 4, Part 2, Section 2.1, “Specifications
for Steel Rail” and shall meet or exceed 370 HB or new BNSF Specification HH
370 Rail or an equivalent “Premium Type Head Hardened” Rail. If the Bidder is
providing rail from a BNSF or UP specification that meets or exceeds these
specifications and the AREMA standard – the Special Trackwork Manufacturer
shall supply a copy of the applicable UPRR or BNSF standard for the rail being
furnished.
2.03 SWITCHES
A. All switch point rails and stock rails shall be Samson type construction in
accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standards.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 23 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 23 Special Trackwork
B. Switch rails shall be fully heat-treated per specifications for heat-treated rails for
Special Trackwork, Plan No. 100-92 Specifications in the AREMA Portfolio of
Trackwork Plans.
C. Switch rod assemblies shall conform to AREMA Specifications for Special
Trackwork, rolled mild steel.
2.04 FROGS
A. Spring frogs shall conform to SCRRA Engineering Standards or approved equal.
Castings shall be 3-shot explosion-hardened. Rail shall be deep head hardened
rail. Furnish frogs without plates for turnouts and crossovers on concrete ties.
Bolts shall be 1-3/8-inch Grade 8 square head with 1/4 inch hardened flat washers
and hexagon security locknuts. Lubricate frog bolts and torque to 2,500-foot
pounds.
B. Railbound Manganese (RBM) frogs with elastic fastening system shall conform to
SCRRA Engineering Standards or approved equal. Manganese castings shall be
3-shot explosion-hardened in accordance with AREMA Specifications. Heel of the
frog shall incorporate a 30-degree cut. Frog plates shall be with one inch round
holes except as otherwise indicated on the SCRRA Engineering Standards. Bolts
shall be 1-3/8-inch Grade 8 square head with 1/4 inch hardened flat washers and
hexagon security locknuts. Lubricate frog bolts and torque to 2,500-foot pounds.
C. Heavy Point Railbound Manganese (RBM) frogs shall conform to AREMA
Standards. Manganese castings shall conform to AREMA Specifications. Insert
shall be explosive depth hardened to Brinell 352 per AREMA Specifications. Frogs
shall be constructed to tolerances given on AREMA Plan 1021-03, Permissible
Variations in Completed RBM Steel Frogs. Bolts shall be 1-3/8 inch Grade 8
square head with 1/4 inch hardened flat washers and hexagon security locknuts.
All bolt holes in rail are to be chamfered 1/16 inch. Lubricate frog bolts and torque
to 2,500 foot pounds.
D. Casting for frog inserts manganese steel shall be in accordance with AREMA
Specifications for Special Trackwork, Article M2.
E. Frog guard rails may be machined initially and subsequently heat treated to
achieve the requirements of high strength rail as specified n AREMA
Specifications.
F. Tie plates shall conform to AREMA Volume 1, Chapter 5, Section 1.1, Tie Plates -
“Specifications for Steel Tie Plates” and appropriate SCRRA Engineering
Standard.
2.05 INSULATED JOINTS
A. Bonded insulated rail joints shall conform to the current requirements of the
SCRRA Engineering Standards ES2504 and AREMA Manual, Chapter 4, Part 3,
Section 3.8, “Specifications for Bonded Insulation Rail Joints”.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 23 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 23 Special Trackwork
B. Insulated rail joints shall be of the epoxy-bonded type as manufactured by
Allegheny Rail Products, Co., or equal.
C. Insulated rail joints shall be complete with bars, end posts, bushing, washers, pin
bolts, collars, washers and adhesives.
D. Straight bars shall be new and smooth and will be providing full face contact,
conforming to the applicable rail section, and fabricated from material which meets
or exceeds the mechanical properties and workmanship requirements of the
current AREMA Volume 1, Chapter 4, Part 3, Section 3.4, “Specifications for
Quenched Carbon-Steel Joint Bars, Micro-alloyed Joint Bars and Forged
Compromise Joint Bars”. The toe of the joint bar shall properly fit against the web
of the rail. When elastically fastened, the joint bar shall provide adequate
clearance to maintain electrical isolation.
E. Pin bolts shall be of ASTM A325 structural steel furnished with the appropriate
collar.
F. Flat circular shall be hardened steel washers in accordance with ASTM F436.
G. Bolt hole size shall be in accordance with the bonded insulated joint Manufacturer's
recommendation. If bolt hole diameter is larger than 1-3/16 inches, place ASTM
A325 hardened washers between the joint bars and the nut.
H. The bolt hole locations shall be as specified in AREMA, Chapter 4, Part 3, Section
3.3, Rail Drillings, Bar Punchings and Bolts, for a 36-inch joint bar. Insulated joint
bar lengths for main track installations shall be 36 inches.
I. Insulated material shall be high pressure, laminated design, impervious to oil,
grease, and water, and having electrical characteristics equal to or greater than
fiber insulation meeting requirements of the AAR Manual, Part 14.5.1, and
electrical resistance tested as specified.
J. Each plug shall be Megohmmeter electrical resistance tested as per AREMA
Manual.
2.06 DERAILS
A. Bi-directional Power Sliding Derail 136RE shall be Hayes model HBXS or
approved equal. Derail package shall include all rods, hardware and wood switch
timbers, dual powered Electric/Hand operated machine, target and fasteners.
Derail to be compatible with 136 lb. rail.
B. Bi-directional Sliding Derail 136RE shall be Hayes model HBXS or approved equal.
Derail package shall include all rods, hardware and wood switch timbers, low
profile switch stand, target and fasteners. Derail shall be compatible for use with
or without electric lock. Derail to be compatible with 136 lb. rail.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 23 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 23 Special Trackwork
C. Switch Point Derail 136RE or Double Switch Point Derail with wood switch timbers
shall meet the requirements of SCRRA Engineering Standard drawing ES2601,
ES2602 and ES2604. 16’-6” switch points, Pandrol plates, and galvanized e-clip
fasteners with all rods, connection hardware, and target shall be included for use
with Union Switch and Signal M23E USS model machine. Derail to be compatible
with 136 lb. rail.
D. Rail Mounted Flop-over Derail shall be bi-directional with flag, 136RE or 115RE as
listed in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, all hardware and mounting kit
included.
2.07 COMPROMISE/TRANSITION RAIL
A. Forged transition rail shall be manufactured in accordance to SCRRA Engineer
Standards: 141RE/136RE to 115RE according to ES2372, or 141RE/136RE to
132RE according to ES2373.
2.08 STICK RAIL
A. Furnish 80’-0” long rail with blank ends. All stick rail to comply with the
requirements in Section 2.02 Rail.
2.09 BUMPING POST
A. Bumping Post shall be as manufactured by Western Cullen Hayes Model “WAC”
Bumping Post or equal. Western Cullen Hayes “Hayco Cushion Head” or
equivalent that matches with the WAC bumping Post. Bumping post to be
compatible for stopping Passenger Cars.
B. Bumping post shall be as per SCRRA Engineering Standard ES2616.
2.10 SWITCH STANDS
A. Hand throw switch stands shall be Racor 36-EH switch stand or approved equal
furnished with a 14-inch red target with reflective material such as Scotchlite or
equal on both sides.
B. Hand throw switch stand for crossovers shall be Racor 36-E switch stand, or
approved equal, furnished with a 40 1/2 inch straight handle providing maximum
clearance between tracks and an 8-inch red target with reflective material such as
Scotchlite or equal on both sides.
C. Hand throw switch stand for double point split switch derail shall be Racor 36-EH
switch stand, or approved equal, in accordance with SCRRA Engineering
Standards furnished with a 14-inch round “D” target with yellow reflective material
such as Scotchlite or equal on both sides.
2.11 CROSS TIES
A. Furnish wood switch ties as required for turnout complete packages. All wood ties
furnished with this IFB will be pre-plated and conform to the requirement in SCRRA
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 23 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 23 Special Trackwork
spec Section 34 11 34.
B. Furnish concrete switch ties as required for turnout complete packages. All
concrete ties furnished with this IFB will conform to the requirement in SCRRA
spec Section 34 11 33 and will need to conform to the dimensions as shown in the
standard drawings.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. During Special Trackwork fabrication, perform the tests and inspections specified
in the AREMA Specifications.
B. Examine each forging and weld by the dry powder method of magnetic particle
inspection in accordance with ASTM E709.
C. Perform ultrasonic testing on all forging and welds in accordance with ASTM E164.
D. All frog points shall be Brinell hardness tested on the head and along the side
wearing surface in accordance with ASTM E10.
E. The bonded insulated rail joints shall meet electrical resistance test as specified in
AREMA Chapter 4, Section 3.8.7.3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the SCRRA Engineering Standards Standard Specifications unless
specifically noted or excepted within these specifications. Promptly notify SCRRA
of any conflicts, omissions or needed clarifications arising from the use of the
designated drawings, standards or specifications.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A. The Vendor providing the materials shall contact SCRRA’s Material Management
Supervisor, 48 hours prior to the date of delivery.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Special Trackwork will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof supplied in
accordance with the IFB. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices will be used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 23 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 23 Special Trackwork
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Special Trackwork supplied in accordance with the IFB will be paid for at the
contract unit price as listed in the Schedule of Quantities. This price shall be full
compensation for furnishing labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals necessary for Special Trackwork described by the
Contracts Documents.
END OF SECTION 34 11 23
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 23 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 11 26
BALLAST
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the material requirements and performance criteria for
ballast to be furnished in accordance with Contract Documents or required by the
Engineer.
B. Ballast shall consist of crushed stone which is angular fragments resulting from
crushing by mechanical means the following types of rocks quarried from
undisturbed, consolidated deposits: granite and similar phanero-crystalline
igneous rocks, extrusive igneous rocks, or massive metamorphic quartzite or
similar rocks. No crushed gravel shall be allowed.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering
2. Portfolio of Trackwork Plans
3. Specifications for Special Trackwork
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C88: Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of
Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.
2. C117: Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-μm (No. 200)
Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.
3. C127: Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate.
4. C131: Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
5. C136: Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
6. C142: Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates.
7. C535: Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 26 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 26 Ballast
8. D4791: Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or
Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate.
9. D3744: Standard Test Method for Aggregate Durability Index.
10. D3042: Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
11. E11: Standard Specification for Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing
Purposes.
C. CALTRANS: Standard Specifications – State of California Department of
Transportation – Current Edition
1. SCRRA: Engineering Standards, and Metrolink Track Maintenance
Manual, particularly but not limited to SCRRA ES2007-02.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Fine Graded Aggregates – Mineral aggregates which will pass a No. 4 mesh
screen and be retained on No. 200 screen
B. The word “Vendor” used in this Specification shall mean the Contractor.
C. Fine Screening – Material below No. 4 mesh screen
D. Gravel – A rock fragment whose diameter range from 2 to 64 mm
E. Hardness of Minerals – A scale of hardness used as an aid in identifying minerals
and based on a scale of one to ten with talc having a value of one and diamond a
value often
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Vendor shall submit supporting information within 60 days of award
documenting the past successful performance in furnishing the materials included
in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. Provide references and contact numbers
at the railroads where the turnouts have been placed in service.
B. The Vendor shall submit certificate of compliance that the material delivered is in
compliance with the specification within 60 days of approval of payment.
C. Representative samples of ballast, of not less than 150 pounds for gradation and
other required tests shall be taken from each source of ballast and tested as
specified herein. Samples will be delivered to Authority within 20 days of award.
Each shipment of ballast shall be accompanied by a certification as specified.
D. The Vendor shall submit for SCRRA’s review and approval quality control and
quality assurance plans and related certifications such as ISO 9001, “six sigma” or
equivalent demonstrating that the Vendor has the processes, personnel and
systems to produce high quality ballast included in the list of ballast items as
provided in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 16 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 26 Ballast
E. The Vendor shall submit data documenting past performance and projects within
the last ten (10) years furnishing Special Trackwork material to Class 1 Freight,
passenger or commuter railroads.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing shall be performed by Vendor’s independent certified testing laboratory
approved by SCRRA.
B. The Vendor shall provide laboratory certification that ballast Material meets the
Specifications of this Section.
C. If the Vendor observes ballast material not suitable for work, or not in compliance
with this part, SCRRA must be notified within three (3) hours of discovery of
condition.
D. The product delivered shall be from the same source from which samples were
tested and found to conform to the Specification and shall be of the same type and
quality of that which was tested.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prepared ballast shall be handled in such a manner that it is kept clean and free
from segregation, and when delivered, the ballast shall be clean and free from
rubbish or any substance, which might foul the ballast.
B. Blending, stockpiling, and other production and handling operations must be
managed by the Vendor to minimize segregation of finished product.
C. Stockpiling operations shall minimize breakage or excessive fall in stockpiling
operations.
D. The movement of wheeled or tracked machines over stockpiled or installed
Materials shall be limited.
E. The material will be supplied in accordance with the delivery requirements, FOB
Destination. Quantity of each supply will be as requested by the SCRRA release
document. The material is to be delivered to the six-county Los Angeles area at a
place designated by the SCRRA representative. The delivery must be coordinated
with SCRRA representative prior to shipping and loading.
F. In the event of an emergency, the Vendor shall use its best efforts to provide 200
tons of products within 6 hours of notice, 400 tons within 24 hours’ notice, and 800
tons within 48 hours. The emergency status shall be determined by the Engineer.
The Vendor is entitled to a surcharge to the unit price for emergency deliveries. If
an emergency delivery occurs outside regular operating hours (The Vendor will be
required to advise Authority, in writing, of operating hours or changes thereof) the
Vendor will be entitled to a 10% surcharge to the unit price. Vendor must identify
on each invoice which delivery is subject to the surcharge and identify the Authority
representative who ordered the product under the emergency status.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 16 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 26 Ballast
G. Vendor shall be responsible for unloading ballast under the direction of the
Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Use SCRRA Engineering Standards ES2007 for all ballast and sub-ballast supply.
2.02 MATERIAL GRADING REQUIREMENTS
A. Ballast gradation shall conform to SCRRA ES2007-02 and AREMA Volume 1,
Chapter 1, Section 2.4.4, Table 1-2-2, Standard No. 4A ballast unless otherwise
noted. Gradation test shall be determined in accordance to ASTM C136, utilizing
square opening sieves conforming to ASTM E11.
B. Sub-Ballast or aggregate base gradation shall conform to SCRRA ES2007-02 and
the quality requirement outlined in the most current Caltrans Standard
Specifications Section 26-1.02A Class 2 Aggregate Base and or aggregate base
gradation shall conform to SCRRA ES2007-02 and the quality requirements
outlined in the most current Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 26-1.02A
Class 2 Aggregate Base.
C. Walkway rock or yard ballast gradation shall conform to SCRRA ES2007-02 and
AREMA Volume 1, Chapter 1, Section 2.4.4, Table 1-2-2, Standard No. 5 ballast
unless otherwise noted.
2.03 MATERIAL QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Ballast shall consist of crushed stone which is comprised of angular fragments
resulting from crushing, by mechanical means, the following types of rocks
quarried from undisturbed, consolidated deposits:
1. Granite and similar, phanero-crystalline igneous rock, extrusive igneous
rock, or massive metamorphic quartzite or similar rock.
2. No crushed limestone, dolomites, or gravels shall be allowed.
3. Furnish prepared ballast that is hard, strong, angular, durable particles of
crushed rock containing no carbonates or slag and free from injurious
amounts of deleterious substances and conforming to the following
requirements of these Specifications.
B. Material qualities shall be as follows:
PROPERTY MINIMUM MAXIMUM TEST METHOD
Percent material -- 1.0 percent ASTM C 136
passing No. 200
ASTM C 117
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 16 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 26 Ballast
Bulk specific Gravity – 2.60 -- ASTM C 127
Rock
Absorption - Rock -- 1.0 percent ASTM C 127
Clay lumps and friable -- 0.5 percent ASTM C 142
particles
Degradation -- As Noted for Material ASTM C 535 or
Type ASTM C 131
--
(Note 1)
Granite -- 35 percent
Traprock -- 25 percent
Quartzite -- 30 percent
Soundness – (Sodium -- 2.5 percent ASTM C 88
Sulfate) – 5 cycles
Flat or elongated -- 5 percent ASTM D 4791
particles (length is
equal to or greater than
three times the
average thickness)
Durability Test – 65 -- ASTM D 3744
Procedure A
Magnesium Carbonate -- 0 ASTM D 3042
Sand Equivalent 50 __ California
217/ASTM D2419
Note 1: Materials having gradations containing particles on the 1 inch sieve shall be tested by ASTM C 535.
Materials having gradations with 100% passing the 1 inch sieve shall be tested by ASTM C131. Use ASTM C 535 for
Ballast Standard Type 4A and ASTM C131 for Ballast Standard Type 5.
C. All particles of the ballast shall have been broken by the crusher and must have at
least two fractured surfaces.
D. The aggregate base shall consist entirely of crushed rock with a minimum of 75
percent of the material having at least two fractured faces. No reclaimed asphalt
or concrete (Crushed Miscellaneous Base) shall be included in this material.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 16 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 26 Ballast
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Vendor’s testing laboratory shall take and perform gradation and other tests on
representative samples of ballast, of not less than 150 lbs, from each source of
ballast.
1. Perform tests to ensure compliance with these Specifications.
2. Each shipment of ballast shall be accompanied by a certification as
specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the SCRRA Engineering Standards and Standard Specifications
unless specifically noted or excepted within these specifications. Promptly notify
SCRRA of any conflicts, omissions or needed clarifications arising from the use of
the designated drawings, standards or specifications.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A. The Vendor providing the materials shall contact SCRRA’s Material Management
Supervisor at phone number 909-468-9729, 48 hours prior to the date of delivery.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work associated with project item
in Section 34 72 00, Trackwork or Section 34 72 20, Track Shifting, Relocation,
and Resurfacing and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the
Contractor for Work of this Section.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 11 16
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 16 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 11 27
SUB-BALLAST AND AGGREGATE BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the material requirements and performance criteria for
roadway and pathway aggregate base to be furnished in accordance with Contract
Documents or required by the Engineer.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. SCRRA: Engineering Standards, and Track Maintenance Manual, particularly but
not limited to SCRRA ES2007-01 and ES2007-02.
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
Manual for Railway Engineering.
C. Caltrans Specifications: Section 26 – Aggregate Bases.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: As required by the Engineer samples of not less than 150 lbs. Samples
shall be furnished by the Vendor or may be obtained independently by the
Engineer's representative for testing to determine whether the material delivered
to the site is in compliance with the Specifications.
B. The Vendor shall submit certificate of compliance that the material delivered is in
compliance with the specification within 60 days of approval of payment.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing shall be performed by Vendor’s independent certified testing laboratory
approved by SCRRA.
B. The Vendor shall provide laboratory certification that ballast Material meets the
Specifications of this Section.
C. If the Vendor observes material not suitable for work, or not in compliance with this
part, SCRRA must be notified within three (3) hours of discovery of condition.
D. The product delivered shall be from the same source from which samples were
tested and found to conform to the Specification and shall be of the same type and
quality of that which was tested.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 27 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 27 Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Prepared sub-ballast and aggregate base shall be handled in such a manner that
it is kept clean and free from segregation, and when delivered, the sub-ballast and
aggregate base shall be clean and free from rubbish or any substance, which might
foul the ballast.
B. Blending, stockpiling, and other production and handling operations must be
managed by the Vendor to minimize segregation of finished product.
C. Stockpiling operations shall minimize breakage or excessive fall in stockpiling
operations.
D. The movement of wheeled or tracked machines over stockpiled or installed
Materials shall be limited.
E. The material will be supplied to the SCRRA in accordance with the delivery
requirements, FOB Destination. The material when purchased is to be delivered
to the six-county Los Angeles area at a place designated by the SCRRA
representative. The delivery must be coordinated with SCRRA representative prior
to shipping and loading. Orders can be combined and shipped on or before the
delivery scheduled with approval by SCRRA. A complete Bill of Material for each
order will be submitted with modes, dates, contents, and destinations of shipments
clearly indicated. A complete shipping list with reference to blanket purchase
agreement, if applicable, will accompany all deliveries of materials.
F. Vendor shall be responsible for unloading sub-ballast and aggregate base under
the direction of Authority or authorized representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Sub-ballast shall conform to the gradation and quality requirements for SCRRA
ES2007-02 and Caltrans Specifications Section 26-1.02A, Class 2 Crushed
Aggregate Base, 3/4” Maximum. In addition, the aggregate shall consist entirely
of crushed rock with a minimum of 75 percent of the material having at least two
fractured faces. No reclaimed asphalt or concrete (Crushed Miscellaneous Base)
shall be included in this material.
B. Aggregate base shall be the same material as sub-ballast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the SCRRA Engineering Standards and Standard Specifications
unless specifically noted or excepted within these specifications. Promptly notify
SCRRA of any conflicts, omissions or needed clarifications arising from the use of
the designated drawings, standards or specifications.
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 27 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 27 Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base
B. Placing, and spreading of sub-ballast and aggregate base shall meet the
requirements stated in Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 26-1.03,
Construction.
C. Compaction of sub-ballast shall be at minimum compacted to 95% relative
compaction.
D. Finished surface shall not vary from grade shown in plans by 0.05 foot.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A. The Vendor providing the materials shall contact SCRRA’s Material Management
Supervisor, 48 hours prior to the date of delivery.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work associated with project item
in Section 34 72 00, Trackwork or Section 34 72 20, Track Shifting, Relocation,
and Resurfacing and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the
Vendor for Work of this Section.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 11 27
SCRRA Standard Specifications SS 34 11 27 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 11 33
CONCRETE RAILROAD TIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the material requirements and performance criteria for
production and inspection of mono-block, pretensioned, prestressed concrete ties
for standard gage track (4’ – 8 1/2”) to be furnished in accordance with the
specifications and SCRRA Engineering Standards ES2402, ES2403, ES2406 or
ES2407 as appropriate.
B. Work included in this Section encompasses work necessary for the manufacturing
and production of concrete crossties and guardrail concrete cross ties both with or
without neoprene pads.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 34 72 00 - Trackwork.
4. Section 34 72 20 - Track Shifting, Relocation, and Resurfacing.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. SCRRA Engineering Standards:
1. ES2402, ES2403, ES2406 or ES2407 as appropriate.
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,
Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.
2. 214R, Standard Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of
Concrete.
3. 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete.
4. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
C. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering, Volume 1, Chapter 30, Part 4.2.3 Duggan
Concrete Expansion Test.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A421, Standard Specification for Uncoated Stress-Relieved Steel Wire for
Prestressed Concrete.
2. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
3. A881, Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, Stress-relieved or Low-
relaxation for Prestressed Concrete Railroad Ties.
4. A886, Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Indented, Seven-Wire
Stress-Relieved for Prestressed Concrete.
5. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Field.
6. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
7. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.
8. C109, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. Cube Specimens).
9. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.
10. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
11. C191, Standard Test Methods for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by
Vicat Needle.
12. C192, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Laboratory.
13. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
14. C295, Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for
Concrete.
15. C359, Standard Test Method for Early Stiffening of Hydraulic Cement
(Mortar Method).
16. C430, Standard Test Method for Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by the 45-
μm (No. 325) Sieve.
17. C457, Standard Test Method for Microscopical Determination of
Parameters of the Air-Void System in Hardened Concrete.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
18. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
19. C617, Standard Practice for Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
20. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
21. C666, Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing
and Thawing.
22. C403, Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by
Penetration Resistance.
23. C1017, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in
Producing Flowing Concrete.
24. C1293, Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change of
Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction.
25. C1567, Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica
Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate
(Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method).
E. Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI):
1. MNL 116, Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Precast
and Prestressed Concrete Products.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. The word "Inspector" in this Specification shall mean the duly authorized
representative of SCRRA.
B. The word “Vendor” used in this Specification shall mean the Contractor.
C. The word "manufacturer" in this Specification shall mean the manufacturer of
concrete ties.
D. The word "supplier" in this Specification shall mean a supplier of materials or
components for use in the concrete ties.
E. The word "source" in this Specification shall mean a plant where a material or
component used in the concrete ties, is produced. For aggregates, the word
"source" shall mean the strata or quarry face from which the aggregate is obtained.
F. The word "bed" in this Specification shall mean a prestressing bed with forms
placed end to end. Each bed is only one form wide.
G. The word "form" in this Specification shall mean a battery form, one tie long, with
5 to 8 cavities in which ties are cast upside down.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
H. The word "line" in this Specification shall mean a series of ties end to end on a
prestressing bed. Each line is only one tie wide.
I. The words "long line process" in this Specification shall mean ties being, made on
a bed with at least ten forms end to end and on which the prestressing wires are
tensioned between fixed abutments, independent of the forms, and prior to placing
concrete.
J. The words "outside testing laboratory" in this Specification shall mean a testing
laboratory, independent of the manufacturer, which conforms to ASTM E994 and
is approved by the Engineer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under the provisions of Section 01 33 00, Submittal Requirements:
1. Compliance: Manufacturer’s certification that the materials delivered are
in compliance with the specification.
a. Certification that the proposed concrete tie and shoulder inserts will
satisfy all test requirements as specified herein.
b. Certification shall include qualified laboratory test results,
calculations and performance reports from a proven fastener
design with five (5) years of operational service.
2. Tests:
a. Certified test results, as required to demonstrate compliance of
materials specified herein shall be submitted to the Engineer. The
test results for the following items shall be supplied:
1) Cement.
2) Aggregates.
3) Water.
4) Concrete.
5) Rail Seat Pads.
6) Fasteners.
7) Electrical Properties.
8) Tie Testing.
3. Design Analysis:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
a. A complete design analysis of the proposed tie and associated
hardware, verifying the tie's capability to pass the test requirements
contained in the Specifications and verifying the adequacy of the
materials for their intended use.
b. Design submission shall include:
1) Structural detail Drawing(s) of the proposed tie and
fastening assembly.
a) The Drawing shall include tie configuration,
prestressed strand size and location, and details of
the shoulders with their fabrication tolerances.
2) All structural calculations shall be based upon current
industry standards for prestressed concrete design and the
ACI standard requirements applied as follows:
a) Calculations shall include moment analysis for the
tie under no-cracking conditions and shall consider
all long-term permanent prestress losses.
3) Concrete batch compositions:
a) Submission shall include physical and chemical
composition of the batch; including, type and source
of cement admixtures used, source and gradation of
aggregates, source and quality assurance of water,
curing, procedure, including concrete strength at
prestress transfer, and separation of the tie from the
form.
b) It is the Vendors responsibility to ensure that the
concrete composition and quality is suitable for its
intended purpose.
4) Specifications for pretensioning tendons:
a) Documentation confirming the quality of material
used in these elements.
5) Cure time:
a) The length of cure time necessary for the tie to reach
7,000 psi strength prior to delivery for placement in
track.
4. Submit Shop Drawings prepared by the manufacturer for the standard
“Fastclip” concrete ties and the guardrail equipped “Fastclip” concrete ties
both with and without neoprene pads, if required.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
5. Submit to the Engineer Shop Drawings prepared by the manufacturer for
the forms and for the gages.
a. Forms and gages shall not be used until the Plans have been
approved by the Engineer.
6. Before production commences, submit a Quality Control Manual prepared
by the manufacturers for approval by the Engineer.
a. This Manual shall include the following details:
1) Management organization.
2) Responsibilities of production and quality control personnel.
3) Plant Standards.
4) Checks to be carried out by production personnel.
5) Inspection and testing to be carried out by quality control
personnel.
6) Procedures for approving sources of materials and for order
in materials.
7) Procedures to insure that only materials complying with
these Specifications are used.
8) Procedures to insure all measuring equipment is properly
calibrated.
9) Procedures to insure that ties are not shipped until
acceptance load testing is complete and that rejected ties
are clearly marked and segregated from good ties.
10) Quality Audit procedures.
b. The Manual shall be revised or amended whenever there are
changes in personnel, responsibilities, or other items contained in
it.
7. Submit the Quality Control Program and the Production Program specified
under “Quality Assurance and Quality Control” herein.
8. Submit written reports to the Engineer prepared by the manufacturer
documenting strict adherence to the Quality Control Program and the
Production Program.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of the Manufacturer:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
1. The manufacture shall have a minimum of 5 years experience, in a fixed
location, of the large-scale manufacture of pretensioned prestressed
concrete railroad crossties by the long line process.
a. The manufacturer's existing plants in the USA shall have been
certified under the PCI Plant Certification Program.
b. If the manufacturer's existing plants are outside the USA, they shall
have been certified by the equivalent National Certification
Organization for that country.
2. The manufacturer shall show to the satisfaction of the Engineer that he has,
or can obtain, the necessary and proper equipment, tools, facilities and
means, and that he has the experience, ability and financial resources to
perform the work within the time specified and to the quantity standards
required.
3. Ties shall be manufactured by the long line process with 5 to 8 lines per
bed.
4. If the manufacturer produces the ties in a new plant, that plant shall be
certified under the PCI Plant Certification Program within 6 months from
the start of production.
5. The requirements of ACI 301 and PCI MNL 116 shall apply except where
other requirements are stated in these Specifications.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Concrete ties shall be shipped in open-top cars or flat bed truck trailers.
1. Ties shall be securely braced for transportation to prevent any movement
that will cause damage.
2. Ties shall be shipped in a horizontal position and braced with spacer blocks
in such a manner that the top surface or cast-in-place hardware does not
contact ties loaded above.
3. Ties shall not be loaded higher than the top of the cars and not more than
six layers deep.
B. Ties must be delivered, unloaded, and neatly stockpiled as necessary on the
project site by the Vendor.
1. When handling ties in the plant, yard or at the delivery site, ties must not
be dropped or otherwise damaged.
2. Ties must be stacked on firm level ground, not more than 10 ties high and
supported on dunnage at the rail seats only.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL - MATERIALS
A. The manufacturer shall only use materials from sources approved by the Engineer.
1. For cement, the source of clinker and the source of the ground cement will
be approved by the Engineer.
2. All tests for cement and aggregate shall be completed in accordance with
this Specification before approval of materials is requested from the
Engineer.
B. Adequate time shall be allowed for the Engineer to approve new sources.
1. Trial concrete mixes shall be cast at least 90 days prior to approval being
requested.
C. For aggregates to be supplied from a new source that has not been previously
tested, a minimum period of 224 days shall be required for testing to ASTM C227
prior to approval being requested.
1. Alternatively, 70 days shall be allowed for the Osmotic Cell Test. SCRRA
will accept previous test results on these aggregates from a qualified
laboratory performing these tests as required to the standards of the
appropriate ASTM which has been supervised, signed and sealed by a
California Registered PE or Geologist.
2.02 CONCRETE
A. The minimum 28-day-design compressive strength of concrete used for concrete
ties shall be 7000 psi as determined in accordance with ASTM C39.
1. The test cylinders shall be made and stored as specified in ASTM C31.
B. Batching and Mixing:
1. Aggregates and cement shall be measured by weight.
a. The weight of aggregate shall be based on a saturated surface dry
condition corrected for free moisture.
2. Water shall be measured by weight or volume and admixtures shall be
measured by volume.
3. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed separately in a pan mixer or
approved horizontal drum mixer located at the site of the concrete tie
manufacturing, process.
4. No water shall be added to concrete after discharge from the mixer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
5. The quantity of each material used in each batch of concrete shall be
automatically recorded.
C. Proportioning:
1. Mix proportions shall be developed using the method in ACI 301,
Section 3.9. The cement content shall be not less than 600 lbs/cy.
D. Temperature: The temperature of freshly mixed concrete shall not exceed 90° F.
E. Curing:
1. Immediately after placing and consolidating, the concrete, the exposed
surface shall be protected from rapid evaporation.
2. Concrete shall not be placed in forms whose temperature is less than 40°
F and the concrete temperature shall not be allowed to fall below 50 ° F
between casting, and transfer of prestress.
3. If heat curing is used, the forms may be preheated to avoid cooling of the
concrete after placing but the temperature of concrete shall not exceed 90
° F during the first three (3) hours and 105 ° F during the first four (4) hours
(ASTM C403).
4. The rate of temperature rise in the concrete shall not exceed 35° F per hour
and the maximum concrete temperature shall not exceed 158° F.
a. Transfer of prestress shall not be carried out at a concrete
temperature above 135° F.
b. The heating method used shall be such that all ties in a bed are at
a similar temperature.
5. During curing, the temperature at the center of the rail seat cross section
of one tie in each bed shall be automatically recorded.
F. Testing Fresh Concrete:
1. The first batch on any bed shall be tested in accordance with this
Specification and if this requires no adjustment to the mix, a further test
shall be made after approximately 25 cubic yard has been poured.
a. If the first batch requires adjustment to the mix each subsequent
batch shall be tested until no further adjustment is necessary and
then a further batch shall be tested after approximately 25cubic yard
has been poured.
2. Slump:
a. When measured in accordance with ASTM C143, the slump shall
not exceed 2 inches when concrete is placed in the forms.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
b. A minimum of two measurements of slump shall be made, on
separate batches of concrete, for each bed cast or each 50 cubic
yard concrete whichever is less volume of concrete.
3. Air Content: Air entrainment of the concrete shall comply with the following
table in areas that are subject to freeze/thaw conditions:
PERCENT AIR ENTRAINMENT AIR
STAGE CONTENT
Plastic Concrete 4.5% ±0.7%
Cured Concrete 3.5% ±0.5%
G. Testing Hardened Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength:
a. When measured on 4” x 8” cylinders capped in accordance with
ASTM C617 and tested in accordance with ASTM C39, the
minimum compressive strength shall be:
1) At transfer of prestress: 4500 psi.
2) At 28 days: 7000 psi.
b. The minimum number of test cylinders per bed shall be:
1) For transfer strength: 4.
2) For 28 day strength: 3.
c. The cylinders shall all be made from one batch of concrete and the
slump and air content shall also be measured on the same batch.
d. The cylinders shall be cured with the ties until transfer of prestress,
in such a way that the temperature of the cylinders is with +0˚ -15°
F of the temperature of the ties.
e. After transfer of prestress, the 28-day cylinders shall be cured in
accordance with ASTM C192.
2. As an alternative to cylinders 4 inches cubes may be used to measure the
compressive strength at transfer of prestress.
3. Two cylinders shall be tested for transfer strength.
a. If either result is less than 4500 psi, curing shall be continued for at
least a further one (1) hour.
b. No bed shall be detensioned until at least two cylinders achieve a
strength of 4500 psi.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
c. If all transfer cylinders are tested without conforming to this
requirement the bed may be detensioned if at least one cylinder
achieves 4500 psi.
d. An additional set of ties from one form shall then be acceptance
load tested.
e. If no transfer cylinders achieve 4500 psi, the bed may be
detensioned providing, all ties are acceptance load tested.
4. The strength at 28 days shall be satisfactory if the average of three
cylinders is not less than 7000 psi and no individual result is less than 6500
psi.
H. Durability:
1. One tie shall be selected at the start of production and thereafter every
three months, for air void content and durability factor tests by an outside
testing laboratory.
2. The air void content shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C457 on
the top, center and bottom of a cross section slice cut from the rail seat of
a tie.
a. The measured air void content shall be not less than 3.0 percent
and the air void spacing factor shall not exceed 0.008 inch.
3. The durability factor shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C666 on
a minimum of 4 prisms of concrete taken adjacent to the samples used for
the durability tests as required by this Specification.
a. The durability factor shall not be less than 90 percent.
4. The frequency of testing, for durability shall be increased at the Engineer's
request if there is evidence that not all ties satisfy the requirements of this
Specification.
I. Chloride:
1. The water-soluble chloride content of the concrete shall not exceed
0.06 percent expressed as chloride ion by weight of cement.
a. This shall be measured by an outside testing laboratory on fresh
concrete or on individual materials in the mix when mix proportions
are developed in accordance with Paragraph entitled
“Proportioning” in the Article “Concrete” of this Specification and
thereafter, by tests at three monthly intervals which include
materials from all sources in use.
J. Alkali - Silica Reactivity:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
1. The composition of the cement, fine aggregate shall be analyzed and
tested in accordance with ASTM C33, ASTM C227, and the "Duggan"
Concrete Expansion Test so as to ensure that the resulting combination
does not produce a concrete subject to deleterious expansion resulting
from an alkali-silica reaction.
a. These tests are to be repeated every 6 months, from each source,
unless otherwise defined in this Specification.
b. In addition, whenever a component or source is changed, new tests
will be performed on these components or sources.
2.03 CEMENT
A. Cement shall conform to ASTM C150, and low alkali.
1. Cement alkali content of Na2O equivalent (Na2O + 0.658 K2O) shall be as
low as possible and not greater than 0.6 percent.
2. The false set penetration, when tested in accordance with ASTM C359,
shall be not less than 50 mm at intermediate times and 40 mm after remix.
B. Separate random samples of cement shall be taken each day to represent the
cement used on each bed.
1. Each sample shall be not less than 1 gallon and shall be clearly identified
with the date and bed number.
2. Each sample shall be kept in air- tight container until the corresponding 28-
day cylinder tests have been carried out and results accepted by the
Engineer.
C. Not more than two sources of clinker or ground cement shall be used by the
manufacturer during any one-month.
1. Cement from each source shall be clearly identified and stored in separate
weather tight silos.
2. If two sources of cement are used on one bed, the tests in Paragraph 2.02E
herein shall be performed on the first batch of concrete made with each
cement and if no adjustment to either mix is required, testing shall continue
as single design as required in Paragraph 2.02E. herein Strength tests as
required in Paragraph 2.02.F.1 herein shall also be conducted on concrete
made with each type of cement.
D. Cement mill certificates shall be provided weekly by each supplier and shall include
the results of the following tests on cement delivered during that week.
1. Under no circumstances shall substitution of cement be permitted unless it
has been pre-qualified through the tests listed in this Section.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
a. Fineness by air permeability (ASTM C204).
b. False Set (ASTM C359) - Penetration at 3, 5, 8, and 11 minutes and
remix.
c. Setting Time (ASTM C191).
d. Compressive Strength (ASTM C109) at 1 day, 3 days, and 7 days.
e. Chemical Analysis (ASTM C114) - INCLUDING SIO AI2023, Fe2O3,
CaO, MgO, SO3, K2O, Na2O and calculated alkalis as N2O
equivalent, C3S, C2S, C3S, C4AF.
f. Residue on 325-mesh sieve (ASTM C430).
E. At least once during every three months, a randomly chosen sample of cement
from each source used shall be analyzed for alkali content in accordance with
ASTM C114 by an outside testing laboratory.
2.04 AGGREGATES
A. Both fine and coarse aggregates shall meet the requirements of the AREMA
Specifications for Aggregates, Part 1, Section 1.3, Chapter 8 of the AREMA
Manual.
B. Aggregates shall be natural aggregates complying with ASTM C33 Class 4S. The
maximum combined coarse aggregate percentage wear shall not exceed
39 percent.
C. The manufacturer shall provide evidence that concrete containing aggregate from
the proposed source with a cement content and alkali burden similar to the job mix,
has a satisfactory service history of at least 5 years. This evidence shall include
structures requiring a Class 4S aggregate.
D. The maximum size of aggregate shall be ¾”. If the coarse or fine aggregate is
supplied in more than one size, each size shall be stored separately.
E. Washed aggregate shall be allowed to drain, in stockpiles, before use. All
aggregates shall be free from ice when used.
F. In additional to the requirements of ASTM C33, the following tests shall be
conducted by an outside testing laboratory.
1. Petrographic examination to ASTM C295. Examination shall be repeated
on aggregate from each new source.
2. Evaluation of potential alkali reactivity to ASTM C227 or ASTM C1293.
a. A separate test shall be conducted with each job cement and the
results shall conform with ASTM C33 at three and six months.
b. This shall be repeated every 6 months for each source.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
c. When there is insufficient time for testing, to ASTM C227 or
ASTM C1293, potential alkali reactivity may be evaluated by the
Osmotic Cell Test* developed by PCA.
1) The flow rate at 30 days shall not exceed 1.5 mm per day.
Proceedings 6th International Conference on Alkalis in
Cement, Danish in Concrete Institute, Copenhagen, 1983.
3. Evaluation of potential alkali carbonate reactivity:
a. Aggregates containing carbonate shall be tested in accordance with
ASTM C586.
2.05 WATER
A. Water in mixing concrete and washing aggregates shall be potable and free of
injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, inorganic matter, or other deleterious
substances, that may be harmful to concrete or steel as specified in
AASHTO T-26.
1. In addition, the mixing water, including that portion of the mixing water
contributed in the form of free moisture on the aggregates, shall not contain
a chloride ion content greater than 400 ppm.
2.06 ADMIXTURES
A. Chemical admixtures for concrete shall conform to ASTM C494.
1. Admixtures containing chlorides, fluorides, sulfides, or aluminum powder
shall not be used.
2. Only liquid admixtures shall be used.
3. Air-entraining, admixtures shall conform to ASTM C260 and contain
neutralized Vinsol Resin or other approved natural resins as the active
ingredient.
4. Water reducing admixtures shall only be used with the approval of the
Engineer. They shall conform to ASTM C494, Types A, B, D, or E.
a. Water-reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating
admixtures, water reducing and retarding admixtures, water-
reducing and accelerating admixtures, and high range water
reducing admixtures, when authorized by the Engineer, shall
conform to ASTM C494 or ASTM C1017 in the case of
superplasticizers.
5. Other mineral admixtures shall not be used, except for Class F Flyash as
noted below, unless mix and quality control program are specifically
approved by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
6. Class F Flyash, if used, shall conform to ASTM C618. The properties shall
not exceed the following:
a. 1.5 percent available alkalis and 6 percent loss on ignition.
b. Mill test certificates shall accompany each lot of Class F Flyash
used in tie production in order to ensure consistency.
c. The combined mix design with admixtures, if used, shall be tested
using ASTM C1567 on the proposed job mix to verify alkali-silica
reaction (ASR) potential.
2.07 PRESTRESSING TENDONS
A. General:
1. Prestressing shall be indented wire strand or stress relieved wire.
2. The wires shall comply with ASTM A881 or stress relieved wire complying
with ASTM A421.
3. The minimum tensile strength of the wire shall be 225,000 psi.
4. Strands for pretensioning tendons shall conform to ASTM A886.
5. All tendons shall be thoroughly cleaned of drawing lubricants before
shipment.
6. Tendons from one source only shall be used on each bed.
7. Tendons shall not be contaminated with mud, oil, grease, or chloride salts.
8. Loose rust shall be removed during stringing and tendons pitted due to
corrosion shall not be used.
B. Pretensioning:
1. During stringing, tendons shall not become contaminated with form release
agent.
2. Each tendon shall be individually tensioned with the same initial force of
between 5 percent and 20 percent of the final force using, a hydraulic jack.
a. The final force shall then be applied by multiple tensioning with
hydraulic jacks.
b. The force shall be measured by pressure cases located
immediately adjacent to each jack and be measured by elongation.
c. The forces measured by the two methods shall agree to within
5 percent.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
C. Detensioning:
1. Stress transfer shall be performed in a controlled manner with hydraulic
jacks.
a. The forms shall be free to move and the stress in all tendons shall
be transferred at the same time and the same rate.
b. No tendon shall be cut until it is completely detensioned.
2. If any tendons break during, curing, all ties shall be load tested in Rail Seat
Positive in accordance with Paragraph entitled “Acceptance Load Testing”
in Article “Testing of Ties”, starting with the ties from the form adjacent to
the abutment where the tendon broke and moving towards the other
abutment, when a point on the bed is reached at which all ties from one
form pass the test, the remaining ties shall be accepted without further load
testing.
2.08 RAIL FASTENING COMPONENTS
A. Rail fastening system shall be resilient, thread-less and adjustable in three steps
without dismantling the fastener. The three steps shall be:
1. Retracted: Permits installation or removal of rail.
2. Intermediate: Permits longitudinal rail movement.
3. Clamped: Provides full rail clamping force.
B. Fasteners shall be comprised of as few components as economically and
technically feasible for ease of assembly, disassembly, and maintenance. The rail
clips, rail seat pads, and insulators shall be furnished by rail clip manufacturer and
shall be compatible with concrete tie shoulders.
C. Configure fasteners so that the rail clip can be installed or replaced in the field by
one person using standard readily available track tools. Clips shall also be capable
of being installed by commercially available automated equipment.
D. Configure fasteners so that when the rail clips are retracted, the rail may be lifted
vertically until it is completely free of the fastener without disturbing the horizontal
or vertical alignment of the fastener.
E. Fasteners shall have, on both sides of the rail base, a positive means of preventing
more than 1/8 IN total lateral movement of the rail base relative to the fastener in
case of failure or loosening of one or both rail clips. The positive means shall
extend at least 3/8 IN above the base of rail in the installed position.
F. Fasteners shall be Pandrol “Fastclip” or approved equal. Rail clips, insulators and
tie pads shall be pre-assembled on cross tie at manufacturer’s plant.
G. Rail Clips:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
1. Rail clips shall not be dependent on elastomeric components in torsion.
The clips shall be reusable after removal through repeated applications
without any effect on the operating performance of the system.
2. The minimum vertical hold down force for spring clips shall be 2,500 LBS
with total minimum force of 5,000 LBS per rail fastener assembly.
H. Insulators:
1. An insulator shall be used between the rail clip, shoulder insert and the rail
to position rail to the proper gauge, provide electrical insulation, reduce
abrasion, and transfer the rail loading to the rail clip and shoulder insert.
2. The insulator shall be capable of withstanding degradation from oxidation,
water, alkali, petroleum oils, synthetic lubricants, and sunlight without
having detrimental effect on the performance of the insulator.
3. Insulator dimensions shall be appropriate to provide standard gauge
dimension.
4. Insulators for different uses (adaptive insulators) shall be of different colors
or different appearance for ease in identification.
I. Rail Seat Pads:
1. Provide rail seat pads compatible with the rail fastening system with a
shape which provides positive means of preventing movement of the pad
parallel to the rail. Pads must comply with SCRRA Engineering Standard
ES2363.
2. Alternate designs of rail seat pads shall be considered, provided they have
successful history of performance of at least three years service under
comparable service conditions.
a. Any alternate design must be specifically approved by the Engineer.
b. Submit results of industry standard tests concerning the above
properties.
J. Iron Shoulders:
1. Iron Shoulders shall be Pandrol cast shoulders for “fast clip” or approved
equal, sized for 136 lbs., 6” IN base rail dimension, with adaptive insulators,
pads, and clips
2. Ductile iron shoulders shall be obtained by the manufacturer and shall
conform to ASTM A536 Grade 60-40-18 or 65-45-12.
a. They shall be marked with the part number, supplier's identification
and pattern number.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
b. At least four Y block specimens shall be cast from each heat, or in
continuous casting, from each four-hour period.
c. All specimens shall be heat treated under the same conditions as
the shoulders they represent.
d. Tension test specimens with a cage length of 2 inch shall be
machined from the Y blocks and one tension test shall be made for
each heat or each four-hour pour period.
e. If the elongation and tension test results do not conform to
ASTM A536, a further specimen shall be tested and if this fails the
cast shall be reheated or rejected.
f. The shoulders and test specimens may not be reheated more than
once.
1) After reheating, two test specimens shall be tested.
2) If either of these fails to conform to ASTM A536, the cast
shall be rejected.
g. The shoulders shall be free from burned-on sand, cracks, cavities,
injurious blowholes and other defects.
1) All fins shall be removed from the vertical faces of the head
of each shoulder.
2) Fins across the top of the head shall not exceed 1/32 inch
and below the head, fins shall not exceed 1/16 inch.
3) At gates, there shall be no cavity in the shoulder more than
1/8” below the general surface level.
h. Go and No Go inspection gages shall be used to check that
tolerances conform to the Plans.
1) A sampling plan for Acceptable Quality Levels of 1 percent
for major dimensions and 4 percent for minor dimensions
shall be used.
2) The manufacturer shall decide which are major and minor
dimensions in consultation with the Engineer (through the
Vendor).
3. Iron shoulders shall be free of mud, oil, loose rust and other contamination
when cast into ties. They shall be rigidly secured in the forms during
casting and shall not move within the concrete when the securing device is
released.
4. Location within the ties shall comply with the tolerances on the tie Plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
5. Ductile iron shoulders shall conform to the dimensions on the Plans issued
by the fastening clip suppliers.
K. Guard Rail Inserts: Inserts for guardrail concrete ties shall be as shown on SCRRA
Engineering Standards ES2406 or ES2407 or approved equal.
L. Neoprene Pads: Neoprene Pads cast into the bottom of the tie for use on bridge
decks in certain applications as indicated in the Contract Documents shall be as
shown on SCRRA Engineering Standards ES2403 or ES2407.
2.09 TIE DIMENSIONS, CONFIGURATION AND WEIGHT
A. Dimensions, configuration and weight shall conform to the following:
1. Alternative designs of concrete ties will be considered if they have the same
general profile, and length.
2. Alternative designs must have a successful history of performance of at
least five years service under comparable service conditions.
3. Any alternative design must be specifically approved by the Engineer.
B. Dimensions:
1. General:
a. Weight: Maximum weight shall be 750 lbs..
b. Base Width: 10-3/8 inch (±1/4 inch).
c. Height, at rail seat: 8 inch (+3/16 inch -1/8 inch).
2. Cross Ties:
a. Length: 8 FT 3 inch (±1/8 inch).
b. Height, at center of tie: 6-1/4 inch (+3/16 inch -1/8 inch).
c. The rail seat shall provide for a cant of 1 in 40 toward centerline of
track.
3. Track Gauge shall be 4” – 8 1/2”.
2.10 FLEXURAL STRENGTH
A. Flexural strength performance and test requirements shall comply with
Section 4.4, Chapter 30 of AREMA Manual.
1. Results per Section 4.9, Chapter 30 of the AREMA Manual shall be
provided.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
2. The minimum flexural performance requirements for the concrete ties shall
be as follows:
a. Positive rail seat moment of 280 inch-kips static.
b. Negative rail seat moment of 146 inch-kips static
c. Static center positive moment of 110 inch-kips.
d. Static center negative moment of 162 inch-kips.
2.11 LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL RAIL RESTRAINT
A. The concrete tie and elastic fastener shall provide longitudinal and lateral rail
restraint as specified in Section 4.6 and Section 4.7, Chapter 30 of the AREMA
Manual.
2.12 ELECTRICAL PROPERTIES
A. Each concrete tie, together with its elastic fastening, shall comply with Section 4.8,
Chapter 30 of the AREMA Manual.
2.13 TESTING OF TIES
A. Prior to approval of the concrete tie design, tests specified in Section 4.9, Chapter
30 of the AREMA Manual, unless otherwise modified by this Section, shall be
performed at testing facility approved by the Engineer and results provided to the
Engineer.
1. Surface Finishes.
2. Every tie produced shall be visually inspected.
3. Two ties which, in the opinion of the Inspector, show the required bottom
surface finish and two ties which in the opinion of the Inspector show the
maximum allowable rail seat defects shall be set aside as comparison
standards for acceptance of ties.
4. The bottom surface of each tie shall have a rough struck, leveled surface.
a. Projections from and indentations into the general level of the
surface shall not exceed 3/16 inch.
b. The indent pattern shall be approved by the Engineer.
5. The surface of the rail seat shall have a smooth, formed finish not inferior
to the comparison standards.
a. No forms, seams or warpage in the rail seat will be allowed.
b. The rail seat flatness shall not exceed a 1/32 inch difference across
any part of the rail seat.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 20 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
1) When referring to voids and rail seat flatness in the rail seat
area, the rail seat will be defined as "area between adjacent
shoulders and edge of tie to edge of tie" and the area
adjacent to the shoulder and 3/8 IN beyond the face of the
front face of the shoulder.
2) Grinding or shaving with a jig is acceptable.
3) Freehand grinding is not acceptable, unless approved by
the Engineer.
4) Filling of rail seat voids with fillers is not acceptable.
5) No rubbing, brushing or other treatment shall be used on the
rail seat.
6. All ties will require a lateral resistance pattern to be placed on the side of
the tie.
a. The Engineer will review for approval the design, but not provide
the design of this pattern.
b. The tie shall provide a minimum lateral in a single tie push test of
5,000 pounds.
c. The tested tie must be in track on a major heavy haul railroad with
adequate ballast depth.
d. Proof of the lateral resistance design will be through multiple single
tie tests as performed by the AAR.
e. The tie manufacturer assumes all responsibility for maintenance
and design of these forms and patterns.
f. The Engineer will not accept a tie without a proven pattern.
7. Other formed surfaces shall be smooth and holes shall not exceed 1/4 inch
in depth and diameter.
a. Ties with a limited number of holes up to 3/8 inch diameter but not
exceeding 1/4 inch in depth will be accepted providing that holes
are filled with a mixture of 3 parts washed sand, 1 part cement and
1 part SBR latex measured by volume or other accepted material.
8. Holes in tie ends shall not exceed 3/8 inch diameter and 1/2 inch in depth
or 1/4 inch diameter and 1 inch in depth below the general surface level of
concrete.
9. Corner breakage at tie ends shall not exceed 1 inch in depth.
10. Ties with visible cracks shall be rejected.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 21 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
11. Prestressing wire shall not protrude more than 1/8 IN beyond the tie end
and shall not have ragged ends, which would be hazardous in handling.
12. The surfaces where fastening components bear on the iron shoulders shall
be 100 percent free from concrete or other foreign materials.
B. Tie Dimension Inspection:
1. Approved Go and No Go gages shall be used to check the following:
a. Out to out shoulder spacing.
b. Adjacent shoulder spacing.
c. Shoulder height.
d. Rail seat cant.
e. Rail seat flatness.
f. Rail seat wind or warpage.
g. Wire location.
2. A "Go and No Go" gage is the basis for acceptance and rejection. No
interpretation of a gage is acceptable.
3. The inspector may gage as often as is required or as the Engineer feels
necessary to QC confidence. If a problem is found then it is the
responsibility of the Manufacturer to provide inspection as directed by the
Engineer (100 percent if necessary) until the extent of the problem has
been determined or the rework has been properly confirmed.
4. When new forms, modified forms or repaired forms are used, the first tie
cast in each cavity shall be checked with Go and No Go gages and normal
measuring equipment to insure conformity with dimensional tolerances on
the tie Plans.
5. All ties selected for routine acceptance load testing shall be checked as
described in this Specification.
6. Wire pattern shall:
a. Ensure 3/4 inch minimum concrete cover of prestress tendons.
b. Be placed accurately to prevent electrical short between embedded
fasterners.
c. Achieve flexural bending strength in Section 2.10.
7. Wire pattern for all ties on both ends shall be visually inspected every day.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 22 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
C. Acceptance Load Testing:
1. All acceptance load testing shall be carried out on the day that detensioning
is performed. Vendor must provide sufficient notice to the Engineer so as
to allow for SCRRA Inspectors to be present during acceptance load
testing.
2. Production Start-up Testing: From the first bed cast under any contract, all
the ties from one form, selected at random, shall be load tested as follows:
a. Rail seat positive and bond development at one end.
b. Rail seat negative at the other end.
c. If the ties meet these test requirements, further beds may be cast.
d. If any tie fails to meet the test requirements, two further ties shall
be taken from the same line and, if either of these ties fails to meet
the test requirements, each tie in the line shall be individually tested,
excluding the bond development test.
1) One further bed shall then be cast and the test procedure
repeated.
2) When the test ties meet these requirements an additional
four (4) ties shall be randomly selected from the bed already
cast and tested as follows:
a) Two (2) ties tested for Tie Center Negative Moment
Test.
b) Two (2) ties tested for Tie Center Positive Moment
Test.
3) If any tie fails to meet test requirements, two further ties shall
be taken from the same line.
a) If either of the ties fail, then the batch is rejected.
b) When the test ties meet all of the production startup
testing requirements, further beds may be cast.
3. Routine Production Testing:
a. After initial production acceptance testing routine acceptance
testing shall be carried out on all beds cast.
b. All ties from one form, selected at random from each bed cast, shall
be load tested as follows:
1) Rail Seat Positive at one end.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 23 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
c. Every sixth (6th) tie selected for test shall additionally be tested as
follows:
1) Rail Seat Positive at one end to first crack.
2) Rail Seat Negative at other end to first crack.
d. If any tie fails to comply with the test requirements in
Paragraphs 2.13 C. 3 b. and c. above, two (2) additional ties shall
be taken from the same line and all tests repeated.
1) If either of these ties fails the test, each tie in the line shall
be tested.
e. One tie per day shall be selected at random from ties subject to Rail
Seat Positive test and additionally tested for bond development.
1) If the tie fails to conform to the requirements of this test, two
further ties from the same line shall be tested.
a) If either of these fails the test, one tie shall be tested
from each bed cast on the same day as the ties,
which failed the test.
b) No ties from beds with test failure shall be shipped
until a test program to identify ties with unsatisfactory
bond is agreed with the Engineer and the tests
completed.
f. One tie per day shall be selected at random from ties subject to Rail
Seat Positive Test and additionally tested for Tie Center Negative
Moment.
1) If the tie fails to conform to the requirements of this test, two
further ties from the same line shall be tested. If either of
these ties fails, each tie in the line shall be tested.
D. Rail Seat Positive Test:
1. The tie shall be supported in a hydraulic testing machine with loading points
so arranged that the load is applied at right angles to the base of the tie
midway between the supporting pads. Test configuration shall be in
accordance with Chapter 30 of the AREMA Manual.
2. A test load of 52 kips shall be applied at a rate not exceeding 10 kips per
minute and maintained for at least three minutes to permit proper
inspection. Both sides of the tie shall be inspected.
3. A tie will be considered to have failed the test if at the 52 kips test load, it
contains a structural crack when viewed under 5-power magnification. The
illumination at the surface shall be not less than 125 FT candles.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 24 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
4. When a tie is to be tested to first crack loading shall continue, after
inspection at the 52 kip load until a crack 1 IN in vertical length is observed.
The load shall then be recorded.
E. Rail Seat Negative Test:
1. The tie shall be supported in a hydraulic testing machine, in accordance
with the test configuration in AREMA Manual, Chapter 30.
2. The testing procedure shall be in accordance with Chapter 30 of the
AREMA Manual.
3. A test load of 29 kips shall be applied at a rate not exceeding 5 kips per
minute and maintained for at least three minutes to permit proper
inspection. Both sides of the tie shall be inspected.
F. Bond Development Test:
1. The tie shall be supported in a hydraulic testing machine, in accordance
with the test configuration in AREMA Manual.
2. Dial gages reading, to 0.001 inch shall be attached to the tie at the end
being tested, to measure any movement relative to the tie of the outermost
wire in each of the bottom corners of the tie.
3. A test load of 78 kips shall be applied at a rate not exceeding, 5 kips per
minute and maintained for a period of five minutes.
a. The wire movement shall not exceed 0.001 inch
b. If during this test, a structural crack more than 3 inch long occurs,
the test tie shall be rejected after completion.
G. Tie Center Negative Moment Test:
1. The tie shall be supported in a hydraulic testing, machine in accordance
with the test configuration in the AREMA Manual.
2. A test load of 12 kips shall be applied at a rate not to exceed 5 kips per
minute and maintained for at least 3 minutes to permit proper inspection.
Both sides of the tie should be inspected.
H. Tie Center Positive Moment Test:
1. The tie shall be supported in a hydraulic testing machine in accordance
with the test configuration in the AREMA Manual.
2. A test load of 8 kips shall be applied at a rate not to exceed 5 kips per
minute and maintained for at least three minutes to permit proper
inspection. Both sides of the tie shall be inspected.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 25 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
I. Electrical Short:
1. Each tie tested in accordance with Paragraph 2.13.C. herein shall be
checked for shoulder to shoulder direct electrical shorts under 10 Vdc using
an Ohm Meter.
a. The resistance shall not be less than 100 ohms.
2. If any tie fails this test, all ties from the same line shall be individually tested.
J. Test Reports:
1. The Vendor must submit a monthly manufacturer’s test report to the
Engineer. This shall include:
a. Number of good ties cast.
b. Number of reject ties cast and reasons for rejection.
c. Concrete compressive strength test results at transfer and at 28
days.
d. Average and standard deviation of the 28-day compressive
strength results.
e. Percentage probability of 28-day compressive strength results
failing to meet the minimum specified strength and the actual
number of failures.
f. Tie first structural crack loads, rail seat positive and rail seat
negative.
g. Average and standard deviation of the first crack loads.
h. Percentage probability of the first crack loads failing to meet the
minimum specified load and the number of failures.
i. The 28-day Compressive Strength results shall also be presented
as frequency histogram.
j. The Average 28-Day Strength results, Average first Crack Loads
and Percentage probability of failing figures shall also be plotted on
graphs showing, the corresponding results for the previous
12 months or since production started, whichever is the shorter
period.
2. The manufacturer shall retain for a period of 10 years all test certificates
provided by suppliers and outside testing laboratories.
a. Results of all inspection and testing carried out by the manufacturer
shall also be retained for 10 years.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 26 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
2.14 INSPECTION
A. Inspectors shall have access, during any and all working hours, to all parts of the
manufacturer’s plant involved in tie production and to those parts of suppliers
plants engaged in producing materials or components for use in the ties.
B. Inspectors shall access to the results of all tests carried out by the manufacturer,
suppliers and outside testing laboratories.
2.15 PLANT AND YARD HANDLING
A. When handling ties in the plant or yard, they shall not be dropped or otherwise
damaged.
1. Ties shall be stacked on firm level ground, not more than 20 ties high and
supported on dunnage at the rail seats only.
2.16 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each tie shall be marked with indented or raised letters or numerals to identify the
manufacturer, SCAX designation, form designation and date/month/year of
manufacture as detailed on the SCRRA Engineering Standard Plans ES2402,
ES2403, ES2406 or ES2407 as appropriate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control:
1. Testing and inspection shall conform to AREMA Manual, Volume 1,
Chapter 30, unless otherwise modified by these Specifications. The cost
for testing of materials to be performed by an outside agency shall be
provided by the manufacturers and will be included in unit price in the
schedule.
2. Ties may be inspected by the Engineer at suitable and convenient places
either at points of shipment or destination.
3. The Engineer reserves the right to examine any equipment used for any
manufacturing process at any stage of tie production.
4. Material not meeting the requirements of this Specification shall not be
used in the work.
5. Quality Control Program:
a. Vendor must comply with the following Quality Control Program
requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 27 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
1) A quality control program under which the manufacturer will
perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work,
including those by suppliers or subcontractors in order to
ensure conformance to applicable standards, Specifications
or Plans with respect to materials, workmanship, fabrication,
and identification.
2) The control plan shall specifically provide for:
a) Manufacturer’s surveillance (e.g. but not limited to
shoulder inserts, wire).
b) Drawing- control (changes).
c) Mold Certification.
d) Document control.
e) Inspection procedures - in process and final.
f) Production test requirements.
g) Segregation and disposition of defective material
and products.
h) Material and process control in plant identifying
critical control points.
i) Production equipment and instrumentation
calibration, maintenance, and data recording.
j) Work procedures and instruction.
k) Failure reporting analysis and corrective action.
l) Sample plans and quality levels shall conform to
Military Standard 105D, AQL Level H unless
otherwise stated or approved.
m) Raw materials standards and controls.
n) Records of test and inspections.
o) Time and temperature control.
p) Strength testing.
q) Storage handling and shipment controls.
r) Procedures or tests for determining within 24 HRS
that the conditions necessary to achieve the 28-day
strength have been met, with a margin of safety.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 28 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
s) Quality budget in percentage of contract price.
t) Assurance that the plant will meet and continue to
meet PCI certification.
u) Quality control organization chart showing all QC
personnel and their corresponding contact level at
SCRRA. QC organization must report
independently from Production to Project Manager
level or above.
v) The person responsible for quality control shall be
independent of production management and shall
report functionally to the manufacturing, company's
senior management.
6. Production Program:
a. Vendor must comply with the following Production Program
requirements. A complete production program shall include:
1) Plant layout.
2) Form design with tolerances.
3) Raw material requirements.
4) Primary and alternate sources.
5) Material handling.
6) Material placement with tolerances.
7) Curing method.
8) Bond release method.
9) Method of vibration.
10) Pretensioning and detensioning method for strand or wire.
11) Daily production capability.
12) Finished tie inventory plan.
13) Plan for handling ties from finished product to assigned rail
cars or alternate transportation arrangements.
14) Flow chart of production process indicating points of control
for all significant operations.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 29 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 33 Concrete Railroad Ties
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work associated with project item
in Section 34 72 00, Trackwork or Section 34 72 20, Track Shifting, Relocation,
and Resurfacing and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the
Vendor for Work of this Section.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 11 33
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 33 - 30 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 11 34
WOOD RAILROAD TIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the material requirements and performance criteria for the
Wood Railroad Ties to be furnished in accordance with Contract Documents or
required by the Engineer.
B. Work included in this Section encompasses work necessary for the manufacturing,
production and handling of wood switch ties, crossties, and grade crossing ties.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AWPA: American Wood Preserver’s Association:
1. M2 – Standard for Inspection of Wood Products Treated with
Preservatives.
2. M4 – Standard for the Care of Preservative – Treated Wood Products.
3. P2 – Standard for Creosote Solution.
4. P3 – Standard for Creosote – Petroleum Solution.
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering and Portfolio of Trackwork Plans.
C. RTA: Railway Tie Association – Specifications for Timber Crossties and Switch
Ties.
D. SCRRA: Southern California Regional Rail Authority (SCRRA) Engineering
Standards.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Anti-Splitting Device – Any device applied to the end or near the end of a tie or
timber such as anti-splitting iron, dowel or nail plate to reduce its splitting.
B. The word “Vendor” used in this Specification shall mean the Contractor.
C. Boulton Drying Process – A process for drying wood by removing moisture from it
by heating in preservatives under sufficient intensity of vacuum to evaporate water
from the material at the temperature of the preservative used.
D. Creep – The time-dependent deformation of a material under load.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
E. Empty Cell – A treatment in which the cell walls in the treated portion of the wood
remain coated with preservative, the cell being empty or only partially filled.
F. Hardwood – One group of trees (deciduous) which have broad leaves. The term
has no reference to the hardness of the wood.
G. Softwood – One of the group of trees (conifers) which have needle-like or scale-
like leaves. The term has no reference to the softness of the wood.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Vendor shall submit supporting information within 60 days of award
documenting the past successful performance in furnishing the materials included
in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. Provide references and contact numbers
at the railroads where the wood railroad ties have been placed in service.
B. The Vendor shall submit certificate of compliance that the material delivered is in
compliance with the specification within 60 days of approval of payment.
C. The Vendor shall submit wood railroad ties packaging, loading, shipping, and
handling method.
D. The Vendor shall submit for SCRRA’s review and approval quality control and
quality assurance plans and related certifications such as ISO 9001, “six sigma” or
equivalent demonstrating that the Vendor has the processes, personnel and
systems to produce high quality wood railroad ties included in the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices.
E. The Vendor shall submit data documenting past performance and projects within
the last ten (10) years furnishing wood railroad ties to Class 1 Freight, passenger
or commuter railroads.
F. Administrative and procedural requirements for proposed changes in product and
materials from those required by these specifications shall be as per SCRRA’s
Standard Specifications Section 01 25 00, “Substitution Procedures”. The
specifications are available on SCRRA’s website at www.metrolinktrains.com.
G. Tests: Certified test results, as required to demonstrate compliance of materials
specified herein shall be submitted to SCRRA before any wood ties are used.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Vendor’s Quality Control Program (QCP) shall be in accordance with the AAR M-
1003 or SCRRA approved equivalent quality control program.
B. Testing and inspection of tie manufacture shall be performed by Vendor in
conformance with AREMA Manual, RTA and AWPA.
C. Ties may be inspected by SCRRA, at suitable and convenient times and places
including points of manufacture, shipment, or destination.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
D. SCRRA reserves the right to examine any equipment used for any process or
method of treatment at any stage of tie production.
E. Material not meeting the requirements of this Specification shall not be used in the
Work.
F. SCRRA shall have access to Manufacturer’s plant during normal working hours
and all Project related procurement and production records for inspection any time
during the Contract period of performance.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Tie shall be delivered to any point along the lines of the SCRRA rail track, as
specified in each shipping release. Ties in truckload quantities will be unloaded
upon two working day’s notice by the Vendor. All unloading operations will take
place in active railroad corridors. SCRRA will assist the Vendor in unloading the
ties and will provide necessary equipment for the unloading. SCRRA will provide
an Roadway Worker-In-Charge (RWIC) for on-track safety for the unloading of the
ties in the right-of-way. The RWIC will provide job briefing and safety protection to
assure the Vendor a safe work environment and all Vendor personnel will be
required to attend the job briefing.
B. Banding of ties by length or grade for shipment shall be done by applying bands in
a tight manner (2,500 pounds of tension) to prevent warping, splitting, and slipping
during storage or shipment. Two steel bands per bundle (T = 5,450 pounds,
1¼”x0.029” or better) shall be applied within one foot of each end of cross ties or
switch ties. Three bands shall be applied to bundles of switch ties. No more than
9 switch ties shall be bundled together. No more than 25 cross ties shall be
bundled together.
C. No steel cables, steel rods, chains, or wooden strips, or any other sticker material
shall be shipped in any bundle to SCRRA.
D. All rejects shall be marked with an “X” on the end. This is to preclude the accidental
shipment of less than grade ties to SCRRA. Treated ties not handled directly from
tram to car shall be carefully and neatly stored. Different size classifications shall
be kept separate, and all bundles or stacks shall be marked with SCRRA, grade
or length, and treatment date. Ties shall be stacked to ensure that tie straightness
is not impaired during temporary storage. Treated stringers shall be placed
underneath all stacks of treated ties. No loose windrows of SCRRA treated ties
shall be allowed. Shipments shall be made from the oldest stacks first. If any ties
become excessively bleached during storage, they shall be retreated or replaced
by the supplier. Yard drainage conditions shall provide rapid drainage of water
from beneath stacks of treated ties. Storage areas shall be kept free of grass and
weeds to aid free flow of air and to minimize the possibility of fire. The Vendor
shall be liable for all fire damage. A minimum 10 foot weed-free zone shall be
maintained around SCRRA stored inventory at all times. Care shall be exercised
in handling of SCRRA ties for storage or shipment to prevent damage.
E. Ties shall be stored to avoid contamination of water and soil by the ties.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
F. Long-term tie storage shall not be located within 250 feet of an open road crossing
or residences.
G. Ties temporarily located within 250 feet of a public road crossing or residences
shall be covered by an impervious sheet material to control odor and vapor emitted
by the crossties by SCRRA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Wood railroad ties shall be new and conform to SCRRA Engineering Standards.
B. Wood railroad ties ordered to the Engineering Standards shall be produced in
conformance to these specifications and AREMA Specifications.
2.02 WOOD CROSS TIES AND SWITCHTIES
A. The following hardwood species can be used for cross ties, switch ties and grade
crossing ties:
1. Oak-Hickory Group: Red Oak, White Oak and Hickories.
2. Mixed Hardwoods Group: Gums, Ashes, Cherry, Walnuts, Birches,
Maples, Beech, Locusts, Sycamore, Elms and Cypress
B. The following species are not acceptable:
1. Oak-Hickory Group: Live Oak and Blackjack Oak.
2. Mixed Hardwoods & Softwoods: Douglas Fir, Hem-Fir, Ponderosa Pine,
Lodgepole, Pine, Larch, Cottonwood, Willow, Basswood, Hackberry and
Poplar.
C. Oak and elm ties shall be of compact wood throughout the top fourth of the tie.
D. All cross ties shall be the full length specified; double end trimmed, and should
have full body and full face.
1. Ties with greater than 1” of wane within the 20” and 40” rail-bearing
sections, when measured from the center of the tie, are not acceptable.
a. Thickness and width tolerance shall be not more than ¼” thinner or
narrower than the specified size.
E. Vendor shall provide a maximum of 50 percent of the ties from oak-hickory species
and the remaining 50 percent from mixed hardwoods from list of ties specified
under Attachment A, Part E, Section 1 through 4.
1. Oak ties must be air seasoned unless otherwise directed by SCRRA and
preapproved and specified in writing.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
2. Mixed Hardwoods must be air seasoned unless otherwise directed by
SCRRA and preapproved and specified in writing.
2.03 GENERALTIE REQUIREMENTS
A. All wooden ties shall be made from sound, straight, live timber and shall be free
from any defects that may impair their strength or durability, such as bark, splits,
shakes, large or numerous holes or knots, pitch seams, pitch rings, slanting grain
or other imperfections.
1. Decay and/or insect damage in any form is not acceptable.
B. All ties shall be well sawn on all four sides and cut square at the end to the full
dimensions specified.
1. All ties shall be straight and opposite faces shall be true and parallel, and
with all bark entirely removed.
C. All ties shall be straight.
1. A tie shall be considered straight when:
a. Timber Cross Tie: When a straight line from a point on one end to
a corresponding point on the other end is no more than 1-1/2” from
surface at all points.
b. Timber Switch Ties: When straight line from a point on one end to
a corresponding point on the other end is no more than 2” from the
surface at all points.
D. A tie is not well sawn when its surfaces are cut with score marks more than ½”
deep, or when its surfaces are not even.
E. The top and bottom of a tie shall be considered parallel, if any difference in the
thickness at the sides or ends does not exceed ½”.
F. For proper seating of nail plates, tie ends must be flat and will be considered
square with a sloped end of up to ½”, which equals a 1 in 20 cant.
2.04 ANTI-SPLITTING DEVICES
A. Anti-splitting devices are required.
1. Anti-splitting devices (endplates) shall be multi-nail plates as specified in
AREMA Manual, Volume1, Chapter30, Part3.1.6, Specifications for
Devices to Control the Splitting of Wood Ties.
a. Structural type, Grade “C”, 18 gauge galvanized steel, ASTM A653
or better with ultimate strength of 55,000 psi and yield strength of
40,000psi.
b. Galvanizing per ASTM A653, G60 coating.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
c. 4-5 teeth per square inch.
d. ½” to 9/16” length of tooth.
2. This application should enable the plate to hold both vertical and horizontal
splits.
3. End plates shall be applied by a mechanical device capable of squeezing
any splits; bringing the tie back to its original (cross section) dimensions
prior to application.
4. End plates for 7”x9” ties are to measure 6” x 7” or 6-1/4” x 7”.
5. No part of the end plate is to be within ¼” of any side
6. All anti-split end plates shall have rounded corners and a smooth perimeter.
B. Embossed on all end plates will be “SCRRA” and manufacturer name followed by
the year of manufacture and Treating Plant. End plates will be installed with the
letters “SCRRA” upright with the tie oriented with heartwood down.
2.05 DIMENSIONS
A. All cross ties shall have a 7”x 9” cross-section and shall be double end trimmed,
unless otherwise ordered.
B. Length of ties shall be as ordered in each shipping release.
1. Ties will be ordered as 8’-6”or in one (1) foot increments from 9’-0” to 24’-
0”.
C. The length, thickness, and width specified are minimum.
1. Ties with thickness and width more than ¼” thinner or narrower than
specified will be rejected. Ties over 1” longer shall be rejected.
2. Tie dimensions shall not be averaged.
2.06 PRESERVATIVE
A. The preservative shall consist of a mixture of 50 percent by volume of P-1 creosote
oil conforming to AWPA Specifications (AWPA P3 and AWPA P4), and 50 percent
by volume of an approved petroleum residuum oil.
1. The creosote and oil shall be thoroughly mixed in the working tank until the
mixture is of uniform composition. (Note: use of treatment with P-2, 7lbs /
cu ft is an approved equal).
B. The residuum oil shall be approved asphalt base petroleum residuum oil.
1. It shall be free from water and any foreign substance that might interfere
with its penetrating qualities.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
2. The flash point of the residuum oil shall not be less than 210˚F as
determined in the Cleveland Open Cup.
3. The viscosity of the residuum oil shall be such that a blend of 50 percent
residuum oil and 50 percent creosote shall have a viscosity exceeding 50
seconds Saybolt Universal 180˚F.
4. BS&W shall not exceed one (1) percent and the creosote oil mixture shall
show no sludge formation upon standing. (Note: AWPA P4 is acceptable
as an approved equal for residuum oil).
2.07 APPROVALS AND REJECTIONS
A. Ties with any type of decay will be rejected.
B. Rejection of ties for holes and knots. All such holes and knots as defined shall be
allowed if they occur outside the sections of the tie between 20” and 40” from its
middle.
1. A “large hole” is any hole more than ½” in diameter and 3” in depth within
the rail bearing area, or more than 1” in diameter and 3” deep outside the
sections of the tie between the 20” and 40” rail bearing area measured from
the center of the tie.
2. “Numerous holes” are any number of holes equaling a large hole in
damaging effect. Such holes, whether caused in manufacture or otherwise,
will because for rejection.
3. A “large knot” within the rail bearing area is one whose average diameter
is more than 1/3 the width of the surface on which it appears. “Numerous
knots” are any number, which, in total, equal a large knot in damaging
effect. A cluster of knots will be judged as if it were a large knot in damaging
effect.
C. Ties with shake more than 1/3 the width of the tie, and nearer than 1” to any
surface, will be rejected.
1. Fire scar will be considered as bark seam and graded accordingly.
D. Except in woods with interlocking grain, ties with a slant grain in excess of 1 in 15
will be rejected.
E. Ties with continuous checks whose depth in a fully seasoned and/or treated tie is
greater than ¼ the tie thickness and longer than ½ the length of tie will be rejected.
F. Any other imperfections that are within the limits of current AREMA and RTA
Specifications will be allowed.
G. A split is a separation of the wood extending from one surface to an opposite or
adjacent surface.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
1. A split 1/8” wide and 4” long in an unseasoned cross tie is acceptable.
2. A split more than ¼” wide and/or 9” long on the face on which it occurs in
a seasoned cross tie will be rejected.
3. Do not count the end as a surface.
H. Bark seam or pocket is a patch of bark partially or wholly enclosed in the wood.
1. Bark seams will be allowed outside the rail bearing area provided they are
not more than 2” below the surface, ¼” wide, and not more than 5” long.
I. Ties with heart – checks that go into the tie plate area will be rejected if the check
is more than a cumulative ½” wide or if the check causes the plate area to be
concave or convex.
J. Holes:
1. Ties having solid holes on any surface within the rail bearing areas greater
than ½” diameter and greater than 3” deep will be rejected.
2. Ties having solid holes on any surface outside the rail bearing areas
greater than 1” in diameter or greater than 3” deep will be rejected.
3. Stump pull will be graded the same as a split in the end of a tie.
4. A stump pull that goes into the interior of the tie more than 5” will be
rejected.
5. Numerous holes are defined as having any number equaling a large hole
in damaging effect. Such holes may be caused in manufacture or
otherwise.
6. Mechanically damaged ties shall be replaced by the party that damages
the tie.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the SCRRA Engineering Standards unless specifically noted or
excepted within these specifications. Promptly notify SCRRA of any conflicts,
omissions or needed clarifications arising from the use of the designated drawings,
standards or specifications.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A. The Vendor providing the materials shall contact SCRRA’s Material Management
Supervisor at phone number 909-468-9729, 48 hours prior to the date of delivery.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
3.03 PLANT EQUIPMENT
A. Treating plant shall be equipped with the thermometers and gauges necessary to
indicate and record accurately the condition of all stages of treatment, and all
equipment shall be maintained in acceptable, proper working condition.
B. All green ties should be checked periodically for moisture content prior to going in
the cylinder.
1. Twenty (20) borings per charge shall be taken from cross ties, so that the
moisture content level can be measured, to determine the amount of water
that is to be removed from the crossties.
C. Material shall be conditioned by air seasoning
D. All material, either under vacuum or at atmospheric pressure, should be handled
in such a manner that will not cause degrading, checking, splitting, warping or
render it unfit for the service intended.
3.04 AIR SEASONING
A. When air seasoning is used, material shall be treated before it begins to
deteriorate. Air seasoned material must be given a preliminary heating in the
preservative for not more than three (3) hours at a temperature of not more than
210˚F, just before the regular treating operation.
1. All Oak/Hickory ties will be seasoned for approximately 10 months to obtain
moisture content not to exceed 45 percent on 2” cores.
2. Mixed Hardwood ties will be seasoned for approximately five months to
obtain a moisture content not to exceed 40 percent on 2” cores.
3.05 BOULTONIZING
A. Ties shall only be Boultonized as directed by the SCRRA Director of Engineering
and Construction or a designated SCRRA representative. Cross ties and switch
ties scheduled for Boultonizing shall be separated by size and species, incised,
and forwarded to the tramming station for handling prior to initiation of the drying
process. Hickory ties must be Boultonized with oaks. Each layer of ties on the
tram shall be separated with one ¾” steel cable, steel rod, or ¼” Grade 30 steel
chain placed on alternate ends as the layers are built. Switch ties will require two
cables, rods, or chains per layer for 9’–12’, and three cables, rods, or chains per
layer for 13’–16’ + lengths. All steel or wooden stickers must be removed prior to
shipment to SCRRA.
B. When boultonizing, the oils shall cover the material in the cylinder.
1. The temperature of the oil during the conditioning period shall not exceed
210˚F.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
2. When a vacuum is then drawn, it shall be of sufficient intensity to evaporate
water from the material at the temperature of the oil.
3. The intensity of the vacuum or the temperature of the oil, or both, shall be
adjusted so as to regulate the evaporation of the waters.
4. The conditioning shall continue until the materials are sufficiently heated
and enough water removed from the cylinder before an empty-cell process
is applied for pressure treatment.
5. The Boultonized process used is to conform to AWPA section C1-00
Section 1.3.3, most recent version.
6. Maximum moisture content is to be 50 percent for oak-hickory and 40
percent in mixed Hardwoods before press cycle begins.
3.06 MANNER OF TREATMENT
A. Following the conditioning period, material shall be treated by an empty-cell
process to obtain as deep and uniform penetration as possible with the retention
of preservative stipulated.
1. The range of pressure, temperature and time duration shall be controlled
so as to get the maximum penetration by the quantity of preservative
injected.
3.07 EMPTY CELL PROCESS (LOWRY AND RUEPING)
A. Treatment shall be by the empty cell method with a creosote/coal tar solution or
creosote/petroleum (50percent-50 percent) solution in accordance with AWPA
Standard P-2, P-3, and P-4. The preservative solution shall be tested monthly
according to AWPA Standard A-1 with a copy of the results forwarded to the
SCRRA representative. In no case shall treatment be less than that required for
AWPA U1, UC4B.
B. Material shall be subjected to atmospheric air pressure or to higher initial air
pressure of the necessary intensity and duration.
1. The preservative shall be introduced until the cylinder is filled while the air
pressure is being maintained during the filling operation.
C. The Pressure shall be raised on not more than 210lbs/sq inch.
1. Material shall be held under pressure until there is adequate preservative
injected to meet specified retention.
D. The temperature of the preservative during the entire pressure period shall not be
more than 210˚F but shall average at least 180˚F.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
E. After pressure is completed, the cylinder shall be emptied speedily of preservative,
and a vacuum of not less than 22” at sea level created promptly and maintained
until the wood can be removed from the cylinder free of dripping preservative, or;
1. After pressure is completed, and before removal of preservative from tie
cylinder, the preservative surrounding the material may be preheated to a
maximum of 215˚F, either at an atmospheric pressure or under vacuum;
the steam to be turned off the heating coils and the leader lines opened
immediately after the minimum temperature is reached.
2. The cylinder shall then be emptied speedily of preservative and a vacuum
of not less than 22” at sea level created promptly and maintained until the
wood can be removed from the cylinder free of dripping preservative.
F. At the completion of treatment, material may be cleaned by final steaming (when
authorized) at a temperature not more than 240˚F for not more than 30 minutes.
3.08 RESULTS OF TREATMENT RETENTION
A. No charge shall contain less than 75 percent or more than 110 percent of the
quantity of preservative specified for the class of material except when the
character of the wood in any charge makes these requirements impracticable
despite treatment to refusal.
1. The amount of preservative retained shall be calculated from readings of
working tank gages or scales or weights before and after treatment of
loaded trams on suitable track scales, with the necessary corrections for
changes in moisture content.
B. The column of oil preservatives shall be calculated on the basis of 100˚F.
1. Calculations of volume or weight shall be made by the use of temperature
of specific gravity factor contained in the Volume of Specific Gravity
Correction Tables of the AWPA.
3.09 PENETRATION
A. Penetration of ties shall not be less than the following for at least 80 percent of the
pieces bored in each charge.
Thickness (inches) Depth (Inches) Percent of Sapwood
5 and over ½ 90
B. Penetration of ties shall be determined by boring not less than two (2) ties in each
tram in each charge or more than 20 ties per charge.
C. Penetration of timber and ties shall be determined by boring approximately midway
between ends and midway between top and bottom on 7” side of tie.
1. Only material meeting the penetration requirements shall be accepted.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
D. Any charge not conforming to stipulated minimum requirements may be retreated
and re-offered for acceptance.
E. Any holes, which may be bored, shall be filled with tight fitting treated plugs.
F. Process and preservative to be used on material and retention required shall be
as follows, unless otherwise specified, for all ties.
50 percent Oil 50 Percent Creosote
Process Process
Hardwood 7 ½ lbs or Ref. L&R
Oak 7 ½ lbs or Ref. L&R or Bethel
G. Retention will be determined by gauge. The amount of preservative solution
retained shall be determined from readings of working tank gauges or scales made
before and after treatment. The retention of preservative will be calculated after
correcting the volume of preservative solution to 100˚F.
3.10 CARE OF TREATED WOOD
A. In handling treated material, extreme care shall be used to avoid damage to the
edges of the timbers or breaking through the portions penetrated by the treatment
and exposing untreated wood.
B. The use of peaveys, timber dogs, picaroons, log hooks, or other pointed tools shall
be such as not to break through the treated portion of treated timber.
3.11 PLANT STORAGE
A. The storage yard for seasoning shall be in the open where the air current will
circulate freely; shall not be in a low humid situation if it can be avoided; shall have
good drainage; and shall be kept free from vegetation and debris, especially from
scrap wood already infected with decay.
B. Treated materials shall be stored in a similar manner to untreated, but must not be
piled in same area with untreated materials.
C. Unseasoned material must be stacked separately from seasoned or partly
seasoned material.
3.12 STACKING
A. Sawn ties shall be stacked either 1 x 9 or 2 x 9 standard stacking method.
B. Alternate: If necessary to retard evaporation of moisture from the ties, they may be
stacked parallel on edge, using cross ties as separators.
3.13 BARKING
A. Remove bark and inner skin before treatment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 34 Wood Railroad Ties
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work associated with project item
in Section 34 72 00, Trackwork or Section 34 72 20, Track Shifting, Relocation,
and Resurfacing and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the
Contractor for Work of this Section.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 11 34
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 34 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 11 36
ELASTIC RAIL FASTENERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the material requirements and performance criteria for
Elastic Rail Fasteners to be furnished in accordance with Contract Documents or
required by the Engineer.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 5, Part 9, Design Qualification
Specification for Elastic Fasteners on Timber Cross Ties
B. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM)
1. ASTM A123, Standard Specifications for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on iron and Steel Products
2. ASTM A689 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars for
Springs
3. ASTM E112 - 10 Standard Test Methods for Determining Average Grain
Size
4. ASTM E18 - 08b Standard Test Methods for Rockwell Hardness of Metallic
Materials
C. British Standards Institute
1. BS EN 10089 - Hot rolled steels for quenched and tempered springs, grade
56SiCr7
D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
1. ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems – Requirements
2. ISO 643:2003 Steels -- Micrographic Determination of the Apparent Grain
Size
E. SCRRA: Engineering Standards.
F. Shepherd Fracture Grain Size Standards
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 36 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 36 Elastic Rail Fasteners
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. The word “Vendor” used in this Specification shall mean the Contractor.
B. Closure Rails – The rails between the parts of any Elastic rail fasteners layout,
such as the rails between the switch and the frog in a turnout
C. Fasteners – Joint bars, bolts, clips and spikes
D. Shepherd Fracture Grain Size Standards:
1. Shepherd Fracture Grain Size Standards were developed by B.F.
Shepherd for use in conjunction with his paper titled "The P - F
Characteristic of Steel,” published in the Transactions of the American
Society for Metals 1934, Vol. 22, Page 979.
2. The set of Fracture Grain Size Standards consists of 10 fractured
specimens (each 3/4'' diameter) in an enclosed compact case. Each
specimen is numbered consecutively from 1 (coarse grain) to 10 (fine) and
are accurately spaced with equal increments of fracture differential through
this range.
3. Shepherd Fracture Grain Size Standards are available from MetLab
Corporation, Post Office Box 1075, 4011 Hyde Park Boulevard, Niagara
Falls, New York 14302-1075. Telephone (800) 828-6866.
4. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanizing per ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 with
minimum coating of 2.0 oz. of zinc per square foot of metal (average
specimens) unless noted otherwise or directed by the standard.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Vendor shall submit supporting information within 60 days of award
documenting the past successful performance in furnishing the materials included
in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. Provide references and contact numbers
at the railroads where the turnouts have been placed in service.
B. The Vendor shall submit certificate of compliance that the material delivered is in
compliance with the specification within 60 days of approval of payment.
C. The Vendor shall submit for SCRRA’s review and approval quality control and
quality assurance plans and related certifications such as ISO 9001, “six sigma” or
equivalent demonstrating that the Vendor has the processes, personnel and
systems to produce high quality Elastic rail fasteners Materials included in the list
of Elastic rail fasteners items as provided in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
D. The Vendor shall submit data documenting past performance and projects within
the last ten (10) years furnishing Elastic rail fasteners material to Class 1 Freight,
passenger or commuter railroads.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 36 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 36 Elastic Rail Fasteners
E. Administrative and procedural requirements for proposed changes in product and
materials from those required by these specifications shall be as per SCRRA’s
Standard Specifications Section 01 25 00, “Substitution Procedures”. The
specifications are available on SCRRA’s website at www.metrolinktrains.com.
F. Qualifying Tests: The Vendor or supplier must submit the results of the following
initial qualifying tests for equivalent fasteners:
1. AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 30, Part 2.6:
a. Test 5A – Fastener Uplift,
b. Test 5B – Fastener Longitudinal Restraint,
c. Test 5C – Fastener Repeated Load,
d. Test 5D – Fastener Lateral Load Restraint,
e. Test 5E – Fastener Assembly Rotation.
G. Fatigue Tests:
1. The Vendor or supplier must submit the results of the fatigue tests used to
determine final acceptance of the clips from each heat of steel.
H. Shepherd Fracture Grain Size Analysis: The Vendor must submit the results of
the Shepherd Fracture Grain Size analysis.
I. Samples:
1. The Vendor or supplier must submit samples of the raw material used in
the production of the clips for independent verification, by SCRRA, of the
chemical, physical, and mechanical properties steel used in the production
of the clips.
2. The Vendor or supplier must submit, upon request by SCRRA, up to 20
samples of finished clips without charge for fatigue testing by SCRRA
J. Mill Test Reports:
1. The Vendor or supplier must submit mill test reports for each heat of steel
used in the manufacture of the clips furnished on a given order.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Vendor’s Quality Control Program (QCP) shall be in accordance with the AAR M-
1003 or SCRRA approved equivalent quality control program.
B. Manufacture must be performed by companies certified to ISO 9001: 2000.
Certification must be held by the plant producing the clips. Certification of a
distributor for a manufacturer is not sufficient to satisfy this requirement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 36 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 36 Elastic Rail Fasteners
C. Materials or partially or fully assembled products not meeting the specifications
shall be rejected. Elastic rail fasteners materials delivered to SCRRA shall be
either promptly modified to meet specifications or removed from SCRRA’s delivery
and storage locations within 30 calendar days.
D. Equipment used for the manufacturing materials shall be in good operating
condition, of adequate capacity and range, and accurately calibrated. Testing
equipment shall be certified and traceable to national standards such as the
National Institute of Standards and Technology.
E. Final fatigue testing of the clips may be performed in the facility of a manufacturer,
or a distributor, or an independent testing laboratory. However, all fatigue testing
must be performed within the coterminous United States and subject to witness by
representatives of SCRRA. Notice of testing must be provided to SCRRA a
minimum of three weeks prior to the tests. A representative of SCRRA will select
the samples to be tested.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLIONG
A. The Vendor shall load, transport, and handle the material in a manner which will
prevent damage to the material.
B. The material will be supplied to the SCRRA in accordance with the delivery
requirements, FOB Destination. Quantity of each supply will be as requested by
the SCRRA release document. The material when purchased is to be delivered to
the Los Angeles area at a place designated by the SCRRA. A complete Bill of
Material for each order will be submitted with modes, dates, contents, and
destinations of shipments clearly indicated. A complete shipping list with reference
to blanket purchase agreement, if applicable, will accompany all deliveries of
materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN
A. Clips must be Pandrol® brand type e-2055 (e-2056 for left hand application) elastic
rail clips or an equivalent in shape, size, function, and performance as generally
described in United States Patent No. 4,413,777, and as shown on SCRRA
ES2361 and ES2362. The equivalence of any alternative design, including the
chemical and physical characteristics of the material, must be established through
qualification by successful performance the tests described in AREMA Manual for
Railway Engineering, Chapter 30, Part 2.6, Test 5A – Fastener Uplift, Test 5B –
Fastener Longitudinal Restraint, Test 5C – Fastener Repeated Load, Test 5D –
Fastener Lateral Load Restraint, and Test 5E – Fastener Assembly Rotation. For
the purpose of conducting Test 5A – Fastener Uplift, the load “P” must be not less
than 5500 pounds for each pair of fasteners.
B. 'Pandrol' Brand Rail Clips form part of a 'Pandrol' Brand Rail Fastening System
and hold the rail to the tie, baseplate or other track support.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 36 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 36 Elastic Rail Fasteners
C. A new qualification test must be performed for each change in dimension or shape
of the clip, or a change in the chemical, physical, and mechanical properties of the
raw material used in the manufacture of the clip.
D. In lieu of performing the acceptance tests SCRRA may, at its sole discretion, may
accept a clip offered as an equivalent to the specified clip upon evidence of
satisfactory in-track performance for 10 years or more on a North American main
line carrying 40 MGT or more each year.
E. The supplier shall have a minimum of five years’ experience in supplying rail clips
and other track materials.
2.02 PHYSICAL, CHEMICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
A. The raw material must be a fine-grained chromium allow spring steel with a
composition closely approximating SAE/AISI Grade 5160, or ASTM A689, or BS
EN 10089. Modifications to the basic alloy by the Vendor of the steel are required
to achieve the physical, mechanical, and performance requirements of this
specification.
B. Shepherd fracture grain size of the raw material must be seven (7) or greater.
C. Finished clips must possess a Rockwell C surface hardness not less than 44 or
more than 48 when tested in accordance with ASTM E18.
D. All pair of finished rail clips must produce a minimum resistance load of 5500
pounds before separation of the rail from the rail seat when tested in accordance
with AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 30, Part 2.6, Test 5A
Fastener Uplift.
2.03 MANUFACTURE
A. Rail clips must be formed from a round bar stock made from a fine-grained
chromium allow spring steel. The steel must be quenched and tempered during
manufacture to achieve the physical and mechanical characteristics specified, and
meet the requirements of the qualification tests.
2.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Five clips produced from each heat of raw steel material must be tested after
manufacture for fatigue failure. In performing the test, a single clip must be fixed
in the test machine and a 2750-pound load applied at the toe of the clip. The clip
must then be raised 1mm above the neutral (2750 pound load point) and relaxed
to a point 1 mm below the neutral (2750 pound load point) through three million
(3,000,000) cycles (one cycle = neutral to raised position to lowered position to
neutral position).
1. Rail fastening system shall be resilient, thread-less and adjustable in three
steps without dismantling the fasterner. The three steps shall be:
a. Retracted: Permits installation or removal of rail intermediate
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 36 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 36 Elastic Rail Fasteners
b. Permits longitudinal rail movement clamped
c. Provides full rail clamping force.
B. The Vendor may use a test procedure similar to that described in Chapter 30, Part
2.6, Test 5A, of the AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, or the Vendor may
the test described in Appendix I of Australian Standard 1085.19, or the Vendor
may use another test procedure provided that the clip moves through a distance
of 2mm, under a load of 2750 pounds at the mid-point of the range of flexure.
C. From the 5 clips selected, if two clips in a row break, all clips manufactured from
the heat of steel tested must be rejected. If two clips in a row pass, all clips from
the heat of steel tested, may be accepted.
D. A failure is recorded when a tested clip exhibits a loss of elasticity, breaks, or the
neutral position load drops below 2750 pounds during the test.
E. Table below lists the possible test combinations and the action to be taken:
Table
Test Number and Results Action
1 2 3 4 5
Heat of Steel Passes All Clips from Heat
Pass Pass
Accepted No Further Tests Required
Heat of Steel Passes All Clips from Heat
Pass Fail Pass Pass
Accepted No Further Tests Required
Heat Fails All Clips from Heat Rejected No
Pass Fail Fail
Further tests permitted
Heat Fails All Clips from Heat Rejected No
Pass Fail Pass Fail Fail
Further tests permitted
Heat Fails All Clips from Heat Rejected No
Pass Fail Pass Fail Pass
Further tests permitted
Heat Fails All Clips from Heat Rejected No
Fail Fail
Further tests permitted
Heat of Steel Passes All Clips from Heat
Fail Pass Pass
Accepted No Further Tests Required
Heat of Steel Passes All Clips from Heat
Fail Pass Fail Pass Pass
Accepted No Further Tests Required
Heat Fails All Clips from Heat Rejected No
Fail Pass Fail Pass Fail
Further tests permitted
F. At the conclusion of the fatigue test above, the pair of clips that have passed the
fatigue test must prevent separation of the rail from the rail seat when a minimum
uplift load “P” of 5500 pounds in accordance with AREMA Manual for Railway
Engineering, Chapter 30, Part 2.6, Test 5A - Fastener Uplift.
G. The clips must not break when applied or removed with a 8 lb to 12 lb sledge
hammer provided that the clips are not over-driven.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 36 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 36 Elastic Rail Fasteners
2.05 TOLERANCES
A. The clips shall conform to the dimensions on SCRRA drawing and shall fit the
relevant standard 'Pandrol' inspection gauges and/or direct measuring fixture.
B. Alternatively, a Vendor may provide its standard dimensional tolerances and the
means used to measure each clip for conformance to the standard to SCRRA for
review approval.
2.06 INSPECTION
A. All clips must be inspected for visual defects, incomplete formation, damage, or
dimensional non-conformance.
2.07 NUMBER OF TESTS AND RETESTS
A. A minimum of five clips from each heat of steel used for Vendor of the clips must
be tested. SCRRA may, at its expense, select additional clips from any order and
submit them to the fatigue test described in this specification. SCRRA will provide
the Vendor or supplier a minimum notice of three weeks in advance of the date on
which the test will be performed. The Vendor or supplier may, at its expense, send
a representative to witness the test.
B. The Vendor must replace without charge any unused portion of an order that does
not pass the fatigue test administered by SCRRA with clips that conform to the
requirements of this specification.
2.08 WORKMANSHIP, FINISH, AND APPEARANCE
A. The clips must be free from burrs which may be considered harmful when handled
or affect efficient assembly of the clip. Marks caused by the forming tools shall be
smooth and free from sharp indentations.
B. All clips must be Hot Dipped Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
2.09 PRODUCT MARKING
A. Each clip must be stamped with a code indicating the date of manufacture, the
manufacturer, and the plant in which the clips have been made. A mark indicating
the heat of steel used must also be included if the above information is not
sufficient to trace the clip to a specific heat of steel.
2.10 PACKAGING AND PACKAGE MARKING
A. Clips must be packaged in sacks containing 30 fasteners (approximately 50 lbs)
unless otherwise specified or approved by SCRRA.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Vendor must be performed by companies certified to ISO 9001: 2000. Certification
must be held by the plant producing the clips. Certification of a distributor for a
Vendor is not sufficient to satisfy this requirement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 36 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 36 Elastic Rail Fasteners
B. Final fatigue testing of the clips may be performed in the facility of a Vendor, or a
distributor, or an independent testing laboratory. However, all fatigue testing must
be performed within the coterminous United States and subject to witness by
representatives of SCRRA. Notice of testing must be provided to SCRRA a
minimum of three weeks prior to the tests. A representative of SCRRA will select
the samples to be tested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the SCRRA Engineering Standards Standard Specifications unless
specifically noted or excepted within these specifications. Promptly notify SCRRA
of any conflicts, omissions or needed clarifications arising from the use of the
designated drawings, standards or specifications.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A. The Vendor providing the materials shall contact SCRRA’s Material Management
Supervisor at phone number 909-468-9729, 48 hours prior to the date of delivery.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work associated with project item
in Section 34 72 00, Trackwork or Section 34 72 20, Track Shifting, Relocation,
and Resurfacing and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the
Contractor for Work of this Section.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 11 36
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 36 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 11 40
PRECAST CONCRETE GRADE CROSSING PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the material requirements and performance criteria for the
Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels to be furnished in accordance with
Contract Documents or required by the Engineer.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering
2. Specifications for Special Trackwork
B. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. AWS B2.1: Standards for Welding Procedures and Performance
Qualifications
2. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code
C. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM)
1. A36: Standard Specifications for Carbon Structural Steel
2. A123: Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products
3. A615: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
4. C666: Standard test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing
and Thawing
5. C1260: Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates
(Mortar-Bar Method)
6. D257: Standard Test Methods for DC Resistance of Conductance of
Insulating Materials
7. D395: Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property/Compression Test
8. D412: Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers Tension
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 40 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 40 Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels
9. D573: Standard Test Methods for Rubber Deterioration in an Air Oven
10. D624: Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized
Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers
11. D2137: Standard test Methods for Rubber Property- Brittleness Points of
Flexible Polymers and Coated Fabrics
12. D2240: Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness
13. D2628: Standard Specifications for Preformed Polychloroprene
Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements
D. Association of American Railroads (AAR)
1. M-1003: Manual, Specifications for Quality Assurance
E. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
1. 9000: An International Consensus on Good Quality Management
Practices
F. Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI)
1. MNL115: Fundamental of Prestressed Concrete Design
2. MNL124: Design and Typical Details of Connection for precast and
Prestressed Concrete
3. MNL138: PCI Connections Manual for Precast and Prestressed Concrete
Construction
G. SCRRA: Engineering Standards, especially ES2402.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. The word “Vendor” used in this Specification shall mean the Contractor.
B. Field Side – End of tie plate designed to be located on the opposite side of the rail
from the centerline of track
C. Gage Side – End of tie plate designed to be located closest to the centerline of
track
D. OTM – A general term referring to all miscellaneous materials other than rail and
ties
E. Shunt – A connection between two points in an electric circuit that forms an
alternative path for a portion of the current
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 40 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 40 Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The Vendor shall submit supporting information within 60 days of award
documenting the past successful performance in furnishing the materials included
in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. Provide references and contact numbers
at the railroads where the precast concrete grade crossing panels have been
placed in service.
B. The Vendor shall submit certificate of compliance that the material delivered is in
compliance with the specification within 60 days of approval of payment.
C. The Vendor shall submit for SCRRA’s review and approval quality control and
quality assurance plans and related certifications such as ISO 9001, “six sigma” or
equivalent demonstrating that the Vendor has the processes, personnel and
systems to produce high quality precast concrete grade crossing panels included
in the Schedule of Quantities and Prices.
D. The Vendor shall submit data documenting past performance and projects within
the last ten (10) years furnishing precast concrete grade crossing panels material
to Class 1 Freight, passenger or commuter railroads.
E. The Vendor shall include installation instructions.
F. Submit Certificates of Compliance for all precast concrete grade crossing panels.
Include material qualification test reports for materials, components, and
assemblies.
G. Administrative and procedural requirements for proposed changes in product and
materials from those required by these specifications shall be as per SCRRA’s
Standard Specifications Section 01 25 00, “Substitution Procedures”. The
specifications are available on SCRRA’s website at www.metrolinktrains.com.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Vendor’s Quality Control Program (QCP) shall be in accordance with the AAR M-
1003 or SCRRA approved equivalent quality control program.
B. Materials or partially or fully assembled products not meeting the specifications
shall be rejected. Precast concrete grade crossing panels delivered to SCRRA
shall be either promptly modified to meet specifications or removed from SCRRA’s
delivery and storage locations within 30 calendar days.
C. Equipment used for the manufacturing materials shall be in good operating
condition, of adequate capacity and range, and accurately calibrated. Testing
equipment shall be certified and traceable to national standards such as the
National Institute of Standards and Technology.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Vendor shall load, transport, and handle the material in a manner which will
prevent damage to the material.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 40 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 40 Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels
B. The material will be supplied to the SCRRA in accordance with the delivery
requirements, FOB Destination. Quantity of each supply will be as requested by
the SCRRA release document. The material when purchased is to be delivered to
the Southern California area at a place designated by the SCRRA. A complete
Bill of Material for each order will be submitted with modes, dates, contents, and
destinations of shipments clearly indicated. A complete shipping list with reference
to blanket purchase agreement, if applicable, will accompany all deliveries of
materials.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. The Vendor shall warranty the precast concrete grade crossing panels for a
minimum ten years against defects in materials and workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Precast concrete grade crossing panels shall be new and conform to SCRRA
Engineering Standards ES4201.
B. Precast concrete grade crossing panels ordered to the Engineering Standards
shall be produced in conformance to these specifications.
2.02 CONCRETE PANELS
A. Precast concrete grade crossing panels shall be lag-down heavy duty panels.
B. Precast concrete grade crossing panels shall be designed for use on 10 feet wood
track ties and ballast track.
C. Precast concrete grade crossing panels shall have flangeways not less than 2½”
in width and be electrically isolated to prevent shunt currents.
D. Precast concrete grade crossing panels shall be sized such that when installed,
the top of the panels is at the top of rail elevation.
E. Panels shall be of the type which fastens to the timber ties utilizing a lagging screw
system which fastens from the top down. The lagging screws shall be
mechanically galvanized with zinc coating in a room temperature process, without
electricity and without heat.
F. Rubber flangeway filler shall be designed to match the precast concrete crossing
panels and rail fastening system.
G. Grade crossing surface systems, including any flangeway (gage and field side)
filler material components, must be electrically non-conductive so as not to
interfere with train control or crossing signals.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 40 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 40 Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels
H. Each gage panel shall incorporate a 3” UHMW shunt break to assure electrical
isolation. End angle for gage panels shall have 3” minimum gap to improve shunt
resistance.
I. Concrete Crossing Panels shall be by Omega Industries or approved equal for use
on SCRRA.
2.03 CONCRETE
A. Concrete compressive strength shall be minimum 6000 psi. The compressive
strength shall be 2500 psi before panel is removed from forms and 5,000 psi at 21
days.
B. Minimum cement content shall be seven sacks per cubic yards.
C. Maximum water/cement ration shall be 0.44. Slump shall not exceed three inches.
D. Concrete sealant shall be used to prevent cracks and ion migration. Sealant shall
be applied to fresh concrete as an aid in curing, hardening, water proofing, acid
proofing and oil proofing each panel.
2.04 STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Reinforcing steel shall be grade 60.
B. Steel angles shall be ASTM grade 36. The exposed steel shall receive one primer
coat.
2.05 RUBBER FLANGEWAY FILLER
A. Rubber flangeway filler shall be permanently attached to the concrete panels.
B. Rubber flangeway filler shall meet the following:
1. Tensile strength – 850 psi
2. Ultimate elongation – 400% minimum
3. Tear strength at 25 degree Celsius – 150 pli minimum
4. Hardness – 75
5. Compression set 100 degrees Celsius for 70 hours
6. Accelerated aging test – 70 hours
7. Ozone resistance test – 5- PPHM for 96 hours
8. Electric resistance – 10 mega ohms minimum
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 40 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 40 Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels
C. The pre-attached flangeway filler shall allow for the removal of panels for
maintenance without damaging the flangeway filler or any other components
designed to hold the panel together.
2.06 FINISHES
A. All recess and minor concrete spalls are to be filled and finished to the panel
dimensions using the proper bonding agent and repair material. Surface of the
repaired area is to match the color and texture of the surrounding area.
B. The driving surface is to have a light broom finish or as approved by SCRRA. The
addition of water to the concrete surface finish during casting is not permitted.
2.07 MARKING
A. Each precast concrete grade crossing panel shall be marked with concrete imprint
for size of rail, weight of panel, Manufacturer’s ID, month/day/year of manufacture
and crossing type. End of each panel will be stenciled painted with size of rail,
weight of panel and crossing type.
2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. During precast concrete grade crossing panel fabrication, perform the tests and
inspections specified in these Specifications.
B. Vendor shall submit (via an independent testing laboratory to SCRRA), the
freeze/thaw, mortar bar method and total alkali burden (0.06%) tests on the mix
design.
C. A representative sample of panels shall be checked for bottom flatness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the SCRRA Engineering Standards Standard Specifications unless
specifically noted or excepted within these specifications. Promptly notify SCRRA
of any conflicts, omissions or needed clarifications arising from the use of the
designated drawings, standards or specifications.
3.02 SCHEDULE
A. The Vendor providing the materials shall contact SCRRA’s Material Management
Supervisor at phone number 909-468-9729, 48 hours prior to the date of delivery.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 40 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 11 40 Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work associated with project item
in Section 34 71 50, Highway-Rail Grade Crossings and no separate measurement
and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this Section.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 11 40
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 11 40 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 00
GENERAL SIGNAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, general procedures,
requirements, and incidental to the planning, manufacturing, installation, removal,
relocation, modification, testing, placing in service, and documentation of as-built
conditions of the various signal systems.
B. General:
1. Provisions of this Section apply to all Sections of Division 34,
Transportation, Subdivision 34 42, Railroad Signals.
2. Modify existing equipment and material as shown on the Contract Plans
to interface with the existing and proposed signal system.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 01 14 19 – Coordination with Utilities
2. Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values
3. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
4. Section 01 35 15 – Maintenance and Protection of Railroad Traffic
5. Section 01 43 23 – Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
6. Section 01 56 37 – Worksite Security Requirements
7. Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents
8. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coatings
9. Section 09 96 23 – Graffiti-Resistant Coating
10. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Electrical equipment, unless specifically excluded herein, shall conform to the
standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), The
Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., (UL), the Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL),
the National Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA), or the Electronic
Industries Association (EIA), wherever applicable. Unless specifically excluded
herein, materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements of the
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
National Electrical Code; California Administrative Code, Title 8, Chapter 4,
Subchapter 5, Electrical Safety Orders; SCRRA Design Criteria Manual, SCRRA
Engineering Standards, and any applicable local ordinances.
B. The following General Orders (G.O.) or the most current General Orders of the
State of California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) shall apply:
1. G.O. 26D Clearances on Railroads and Street Railroads as to Side
and Overhead Structures, Parallel Tracks, and Crossings
2. G.O. 52: Construction and Operation of Power and Communication
Lines for the Prevention or Mitigation of Inductive
Interference
3. G.O. 75D Regulations Governing Standards for Warning Devices for
At-Grade Highway-Rail Crossings
4. G.O. 88B Rules for Altering Public Highway-Rail Crossings
5. G.O. 118A Construction, Reconstruction and Maintenance of
Walkways and Control, of Vegetation Adjacent to Railroad
Tracks
6. G.O. 128 Construction of Underground Electric Supply and
Communication Systems
C. The following parts of the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Transportation,
shall apply:
1. Part 212 State Safety Participation Regulations
2. Part 219 Control of Alcohol and Drug Use
3. Part 218 Railroad Operating Practices
4. Part 228 Hours of Service of Railroad Employees
5. Part 234 Grade Crossing Safety
6. Part 235 Instructions Governing Application for Approval of a
Discontinuance or Material Modification of a Signal System
or Relief from the Requirements of Part 236
7. Part 236 Rules, Standards, and Instructions for Railroad Signal
System
8. Be responsible for adherence to all the above rules and reporting
requirements, including those regulations which require pre-employment
drug testing and random drug testing of employees engaged in the
installation and testing of signal facilities, and the reporting and tracking of
employees injured in the performance of work on a railroad.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
D. California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD), Part VIII,
Traffic Control for Railroad and Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings, shall apply.
E. In addition to the regulations and code requirements specified in this Section,
materials and equipment for the signaling systems shall conform to the standards
and recommendations of the Communication and Signals Manual of
Recommended Practices of the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance
of Way Association (AREMA), hereinafter referred to as the AREMA C&S
Manual, except that where the Manual uses the word “should”, it shall be
substituted with the word “shall”.
F. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals (C&S) Manual, Part 1.5.10, Recommended
Instructions for Painting and Protective Coatings.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide all materials and installation services required for a complete working
signal system, as described herein, and as shown on the Contract Plans,
including any equipment not designated as being relocated or designated as
Owner-furnished or in these specifications.
B. All materials and equipment for installation and for interconnection of the various
signaling systems shall be fabricated, furnished, and installed as indicated on the
Contract Plans and specified herein.
C. The Contract Plans represent a final design utilizing systems, components, and
materials that meet the Project Specifications. Contractor may provide
equivalent systems, components, and materials subject to the approval of the
Engineer. If equivalent systems, components and materials are provided, the
Contractor shall provide an alternate detailed final design as specified herein
under Design Submittals.
D. Provide systems that are compliant with applicable rules and regulations of CFR
49, parts 234 and 236, and CPUC GO 75D. Refer to Design Submittals herein
for Contractor’s responsibility to indicate any corrections or modifications to the
Contract Plan’s final design that the Contractor may determine are required to
conform to these rules and regulations.
E. Be present at all design meetings held with the Engineer by a signal engineer
qualified in the application and installation of the signaling equipment the
Contractor proposes for use on this project.
F. No circuit is considered to have met the requirement of these Specifications for
function and safety until it has been properly tested and verified in the field. Any
circuit changes made to meet the functional and safety requirements of these
Specifications shall be considered as included as part of the work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
G. Provide continuous train control and highway grade crossing warning during all
phases of rail construction. The work of the Contractor must not present a delay
to train operations, cause an unsafe signaling condition, or reduce the
effectiveness or quality of the existing or new grade crossing warning systems.
The Contractor shall submit, for approval by the Resident Engineer, its proposed
plan for providing alternate methods of crossing warning whenever the existing
automatic crossing warning devices are deactivated, altered, or modified to
accommodate construction work. Alternate methods shall conform to CFR 49,
Part 234, and all local ordinances.
1. Refer to Design Submittals herein for requirements for submittal of plans
for providing wayside signaling and highway crossing warning systems
protection during the work and plans for point protection and fouling when
crossovers are installed or removed. Alternate methods shall conform to
CFR 49, Part 234, Part 236 and all local ordinances.
H. Provide rail bonding for all new, temporary and relocated turnouts as shown on
the Contract Plans or as required by the Engineer. Provide rail bonding, as
necessary, to maintain existing systems during construction of all projects related
work, including the work of other disciplines.
I. Protect existing signal cabling and, where necessary, relocate existing cabling to
prevent damage during track installation and surfacing. If the Contractor
damages existing cabling, the Contractor shall be responsible for all repairs,
testing and replacement, if necessary, to existing cabling. Provide all new
signals, new foundations, new cabling, and other new equipment as shown on
Contract Plans. The Contractor shall remove and reuse existing signaling
equipment as indicated on the Contract Plans and in these Specifications.
J. Refer to Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents, and additional
requirements specified herein. Record the final As-Built conditions of the signal
systems for each system.
K. Perform and document all tests and inspections in accordance with CFR 49
regulations, the AREMA C&S Manual, the Metrolink Signal Maintenance
Manual, and these Specifications.
L. Refer to Section 01 43 23, Contractor Qualifications and Requirements, and
additional requirements specified herein. Provide at least one qualified signal
person to accompany any on-track equipment, and remove, relocate, or
disconnect and reconnect any signal equipment that could be damaged by on-
track equipment.
M. Coordinate installation, inspection, and testing of new Owner-furnished material
with the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing 30 days prior to any installation,
inspection, and testing as part of this coordination.
N. Perform acceptance testing and commissioning of the signal system as a normal
part of the work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
O. Contractor furnished software and components shall be new, manufacturer
certified, and the latest SCRRA approved version.
P. Remove, salvage, retire, relocate, furnish, and install project related devices as
indicated on the Contract Plans, as described within the Project Specifications,
and as required to complete the Work.
1. Before retiring a grade crossing or signal location, the Contractor shall
coordinate with the Resident Engineer to ensure all stakeholders have
been properly notified. These stakeholders include, but are not limited to,
City officials, Metrolink Operations, Metrolink Configuration Management
and related freight carriers. The Contractor shall take all temporary
measures necessary to ensure the removal does not interfere with the
safe operation of the railroad, railroad employees, and the public.
Q. Refer to Section 31 20 00, Earthwork, for provisions for excavation and
requirements for shoring of excavation as specified in Section 31 50 00,
Excavation Support.
R. Refer to Division 31, Earthwork and 01 14 49, Coordination with Utilities, for
requirements in locating and protecting existing utilities. Details of signal cable
runs, conduit runs, and pull box installations including number, size, and type of
cable are shown in the Contract Plans. Conduit runs and pull box locations, as
shown, are the preferred locations. In case of conflict between the systems
design plans and other Contract Plans, the systems design plans take
precedence as to detail, and in the event of conflict as to placement of
equipment, the Engineer will determine the correct placement.
1. Make any minor deviations in location, minor meaning within 10 feet of
the location as shown on the Contract Plans, as part of the Work.
Deviations exceeding 10 feet may be subject to the change provisions of
General Conditions.
S. All underground signal cables shall be in conduit, except for the final wire
connections made to the track.
T. Any components or equipment proposed by the Contractor as an equal to those
specified, which are not currently in use on the Metrolink system or that do not
have spare maintenance parts in SCRRA stocks, will require that the Contractor
furnish sufficient spare components equal to 10% of the quantity order or a
minimum of two (2) additional units, whichever is greater. The Contractor shall
also arrange for manufacturer provided training for all Metrolink maintenance
personnel. Spares and training are to be furnished by the Contractor at no
additional expense to SCRRA.
U. Provide construction signal support and coordination of all work with other
disciplines including, but not limited to, track installation and removal, bridge
construction or reconstruction, rail and track renewal within crossings, installation
or change of track switches, clearing and grubbing. Contractor shall coordinate
all work with other disciplines that may affect the safe operation of existing
crossings and track circuits to prevent train delays or inconvenience to the public.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
1.04 FAIL-SAFE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. As used in these Specifications, the fail-safe principle shall mean that whenever
an equipment failure, human error or failure to act, or adverse environmental
condition affects the specified operation of a system involved with the safety of
life or property, that system shall revert to a state known to be safe.
B. Failure of a circuit or equipment that results in an indication of a dangerous or
restrictive condition, whether there is in fact actual danger, shall have met the
fail-safe requirements. Conversely, a failure that results in an indication of safe
or nonrestrictive condition when, in fact, a dangerous condition may exist shall
not have met the fail-safe requirements.
C. Vital applications, such as detector locking of switches, shall be based on the
following principles that permit the attainment of fail-safe operation in all known
or discovered failure modes:
1. Closed Loops: Fail-safe circuits shall employ the closed loop principle
and shall protect against open circuits, shorts, or any combination thereof.
2. Vital Relays: Relays used in vital circuits.
3. Vital Circuits: All line circuits, which energize a vital relay, shall be two-
wire, double-break circuits and shall be energized from an ungrounded
direct current (dc) power supply.
4. Grounds: Components or wires becoming grounded shall not cause an
unsafe condition.
5. Spurious Oscillations: Any amplifier, generator, or device element, active
or passive, breaking into spurious oscillations shall not cause an unsafe
condition.
6. Filters: Filters used in fail-safe circuits shall be designed to prevent
undesired signals from appearing at the filter output at levels which could
cause an unsafe condition.
D. Equipment failures and conditions which shall be considered in producing a fail-
safe design shall include the following, at minimum:
1. Relays (non-vital): Open coil, fused contacts, high contact resistance,
shorted coil, armature sticking, contacts sticking, or broken spring.
2. Relay (vital as defined by the AREMA C&S Manual): Open coil, shorted
coil, or high contact resistance.
3. Transformers: Open primary, open secondary, shorted turns, primary-to-
secondary shorts, or combinations thereof.
4. Capacitors: Short, open, or leakage.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
5. Resistors: Increase or decrease in resistance.
6. Transistors: Short, open leakage, or loss of Beta.
7. Diodes: Short, open, or reverse leakage.
8. Coils: Open or shorted turns.
9. Loss or degradation of power sources.
10. Appearance of abnormal signal levels, electrical noise levels, frequencies,
and delays.
11. Effects of electrical interference.
12. Absent or abnormal input signals.
13. Opens or shorts in internal circuitry at inputs and at outputs.
14. Mechanical vibration or shock.
15. Drift or instability of amplifiers, receivers, transmitters, oscillators,
switching circuits, and power supplies.
16. Deterioration of contacts, connectors, terminals, solder connections,
printed circuits, circuit adjusting devices, and mechanical devices.
E. Fail-safe equipment proposed for vital signaling applications used on the
Metrolink system, shall have been proven with a minimum of five (5) years of
successful rail service operation in the United States of America. The successful
rail operation shall have been performed on a Class 1 Freight Railroad or major
commuter rail system similar to Metrolink.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS FOR EQUIPMENT
A. Contractor provided material and equipment shall be fully operable with no
impairment resulting from the effect of the environment throughout the range of
values indicated below. The general operating environment shall be considered
to be in salty atmosphere and in generally sunny weather.
B. Ambient outdoor temperature range: From minus 40 degrees F (minus 40
degrees C) to plus 160 degrees F (70 degrees C).
C. Relative humidity range: From zero to 100 percent.
D. Maximum rainfall: 4 inches in 24 hours and 1.5 inches in 1 hour.
E. Maximum wind velocity: 100 miles per hour.
F. Seismic Zone Location of Work Site: Seismic Zone 4 as defined in the Uniform
Building Code.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
G. Isokeraunic Level: Five per year.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Do not begin any work without the prior submittal to and approval by the
Resident Engineer of the relevant personnel, plans and procedures.
B. Submit résumés of the proposed Signal Engineer(s) and Signal Manager(s)
within 14 calendar days after receiving Notice to Proceed.
C. Submit to the Engineer for approval, proposed design changes, plans, test and
inspection procedures, data sheets of proposed material, installation details,
Shop Drawings, mechanical Drawings, proofs of compliance with applicable
standards, and any other pertinent data required to fully demonstrate the
Contractor's proposed plan for the manufacture, installation, testing, and
maintenance of the various signaling systems. The Contractor shall provide
submittals within 30 calendar days after receiving Notice to Proceed.
D. Submit to the Resident Engineer 4 sets of application, installation, operating, and
maintenance manuals of all new equipment and systems utilized under this
Contract a minimum of 30 calendar days prior to placing any system in service.
E. Submit a detailed test plan for all systems a minimum of 60 days in advance of
placing any system in service. These test plans shall reflect the latest revisions
and changes approved by the Resident Engineer and made because of field
checks and conditions. The Contractor shall not proceed with the cutover or in-
service testing until the Engineer approves the test plans. Plans shall include, but
are not limited to:
1. Proposed plan for providing alternate methods of wayside signaling and
highway crossing warning systems protection when signal components
are relocated, deactivated, altered, or modified to accommodate
construction work.
2. Plan for point protection and fouling when crossover or turnouts are
installed or removed.
F. Prepare and submit a Signaling Construction Phasing Plan for each location
where a signal system is to be modified, installed, or removed. The Plan, as a
minimum, shall contain the following:
1. A narrative description of the work to be undertaken at the designated
location.
2. A step-by-step phasing of work description which identifies those steps
during which the existing system will be disabled, and a description of
what steps will be taken to assure that the signal system will be tested
and returned to full operation without causing a delay to any train
movement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
3. An estimate of time to complete the critical steps in the phasing.
G. Manufacturers' warranties and guarantees furnished for materials used in the
work, instruction sheets, and part lists supplied with materials shall be delivered
to the Resident Engineer prior to acceptance of the project. All equipment,
material warranties, and guarantees shall cover parts and labor for two years
from the date of final acceptance.
H. After a location is placed in service and prior to final acceptance of the project,
the Contractor shall submit as-built documentation as follows:
1. Submit four copies of all as-built circuit plans and documents to the
Resident Engineer within 3 business days.
2. Final application logic documentation within 3 business days.
3. Civil Drawings which show the physical location of all signal apparatus
and conduits, both along the tracks and perpendicular to it, and heights of
all signal structures within 60 calendar days.
I. Resident Engineer or his/her representative may inspect the Contractor’s
furnished materials and work procedures during all phases of construction.
Materials and procedures that fail to meet the requirements of these
specifications, or regulations, shall not be installed or placed in operation.
J. Ensure that equipment used in the testing of wayside signal and grade crossing
warning systems and components shall be properly calibrated. Test meters and
other test apparatus shall have been inspected by a recognized facility that
performs calibrations a minimum of 6 months prior to performing required tests. A
sticker, or other documentation, must be made available for inspection at the
request of the Resident Engineer.
1.08 DELIVERABLES
A. Submit manufacturers' warranties, instruction sheets, and part lists supplied with
materials to the Resident Engineer prior to final acceptance.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Refer to Section 01 33 00, Submittal
Procedures, for Operations and Maintenance Data Manual requirements. A
minimum of 30 days prior to placing any system in-service, submit to the
Resident Engineer 10 sets of application, installation, operating, and
maintenance manuals of all new equipment and systems utilized under this
Contract which are provided by the Contractor. Include complete material
ordering reference numbers for each type of product.
1.09 QUALIFICATIONS AND DUTIES OF SIGNALING PERSONNEL
A. Refer to Section 01 43 23, Contractor Qualifications and Requirements. Key
employees of the Contractor engaged in the final adjustment and testing of the
various signaling systems shall be qualified and have had experience on an
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
operating railroad in the type and level of signal installation and testing work as
required herein.
B. Signal Engineer as used herein shall be understood to mean Contractor’s
railroad signal engineer or engineers approved by the Engineer. Signal Manager
as used herein shall be understood to mean Contractor’s railroad signal manager
or managers approved by the Engineer. Signal Electrician, as used herein, shall
be understood to mean Contractor’s electrician(s) used to perform wiring and
installation of railroad signal and grade crossing warning system circuits,
component, and control equipment and devices including their primary and
backup power supply systems.
C. Signal construction and installation personnel shall work under the authority of
the Signal Engineer. The Contractor’s signaling construction forces shall work
under the authority of a Signal Engineer.
1. Signal Engineer shall plan, direct, and oversee the adjustment,
installation, and testing of signal related work and shall coordinate signal
work with related track construction work and roadway work.
2. Signal Engineer shall be responsible for all work under his charge and
must have the authority to remove any personnel from the project who
are not performing the work in a satisfactory manner. The Signal
Engineer shall obtain, review, and maintain documentation of the required
minimum experience, a copy of the Electrician’s license(s), and a record
of wage rate paid for each Signal Electrician that performs Signal or
Crossing Warning System work prior to that Electrician starting any Signal
related work. This documentation shall be always available for review by
the Resident Engineer upon request.
3. Signal Engineer shall be on site whenever signal related work or track
construction work is in progress in the vicinity of existing wayside
signaling equipment, highway grade crossings, and/or cabling.
D. The Signal Managers shall report to and work under the direct authority of the
Signal Engineer and shall supervise and direct the work of all signal construction
and installation personnel.
E. Signal Engineer shall direct and organize the performance of all tests on
signaling equipment and systems, under direction of the Engineer, prior to
releasing the systems for service. The Signal Engineer shall be responsible to
ensure that all applicable test documentation other than that documentation
provided by the Engineer, is completed prior to, or immediately after, in-service
testing is completed.
F. The proposed Signal Engineer shall demonstrate experience in the philosophy,
application, installation, and testing requirements of the various signaling
systems. The proposed Signal Engineer shall have a minimum of 10 years
signal supervisory or management related experience on a Class I railroad, or
commuter railroad comparable to SCRRA. The proposed Signal Engineer shall
also demonstrate knowledge of the governing General Code of Operating Rules,
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
including CPUC and FRA regulations and procedures. This demonstration shall
be by interview of the proposed Signal Engineer by the Engineer prior to
commencement of any work that may affect the signal system. The work of this
project includes working within constrained work windows on a live railroad
consisting of freight trains, inter-city passenger trains, and Metrolink commuter
trains. Candidate shall have a similar level of experience. The Engineer's
decision concerning the candidate's qualifications will be final. Begin no
signaling related work prior to obtaining Engineer’s approval of the Signal
Engineer. In addition, obtain the Resident Engineer’s approval of each Signal
Engineer prior to beginning any work that may affect the signal system. Obtain
approval of additional Signal Engineers as required depending upon the level
and type of work being performed.
G. The proposed Signal Managers shall demonstrate experience in the philosophy,
application, installation, and testing requirements of the various signaling
systems. The proposed Signal Managers shall have a minimum of 3 years signal
supervisory or management related experience on a Class I railroad or commuter
railroad comparable to SCRRA. The proposed Signal Managers shall also
demonstrate knowledge of the governing General Code of Operating Rules,
including CPUC and FRA regulations and procedures. This demonstration shall
be by interview of the proposed Railroad Signal Managers by the Engineer prior
to commencement of any work that may affect the signal system. The work of
this project includes working within constrained work windows on a live railroad
consisting of freight trains, inter-city passenger trains, and Metrolink commuter
trains. Candidates shall have a similar level of experience. The Engineer's
decision concerning the candidate's qualifications will be final. Begin no
signaling related work prior to obtaining the Engineer’s approval Signal
Managers. Obtain Resident Engineer’s approval for additional Signal Managers
as required depending upon the level and type of work being performed.
H. Propose alternate personnel if the original candidate is found unacceptable.
Previous qualification as a Signal Engineer or Manager on other Metrolink
projects does not constitute qualification as a Signal Engineer or Manager for this
Contract.
I. The Resident Engineer reserves the right to disqualify any Signal Engineer,
Signal Manager, or Signal Electrician at any time during the Work. This right is at
the sole discretion of the Resident Engineer and is not subject to protest or
appeal.
J The Signal Electricians shall have a minimum 1,000 hours of experience in the
wiring and installation of railroad signal and grade crossing warning system
circuits, components, control equipment and associated devices including their
primary and backup power supply systems. Signal Electricians shall perform the
wiring, labeling and connection/continuity/resistance testing, as appropriate, of all
railroad signal and grade crossing warning system circuits, components, control
equipment and associated devices including their primary and backup power
supply systems. All Signal Electricians shall be licensed: Journeyman or Inside
Electricians or an approved equal. Signal Electricians shall be paid at the
prevailing wage rate for the locality of the construction.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
K. All Contractor field personnel shall receive safety training in accordance with
Section 01 43 23, Contractor Qualifications and Requirements, 01 35 23, SCRRA
Site Safety Requirements, and 01 56 37, Worksite Security Requirements.
1.10 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION
A. Refer to Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents, for requirements
preparation and submittal of Record Documents.
B. The following as-built documentation requirements augment requirements
specified in Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents. After a location is
placed in service, submit as-built documentation as follows:
1. Submit four copies of all as-built circuit plans and documents to the
Resident Engineer within 3 business days.
2. Civil Drawings which show the physical location of all signal apparatus
and conduits, both along the tracks and perpendicular to it, and heights of
all signal structures within 60 days.
C. Annotate the As-Built drawing sets to show all approved circuiting and wiring
changes made during installation and testing of the location prior to placing it in
service, and any approved changes made after placement in service. Clearly
identify all changes on the Drawings using the "Red In"/"Yellow Out" convention.
Changes shall be dated and initialed by the Contractor's responsible Signal
Engineer. Identify the date that the location was tested and placed in service in
the revision block of the Drawings.
D. In addition to the as-built Drawings provided to the Engineer, one set shall be
bound and shall be kept in the instrument enclosure at a location and manner
approved by the Engineer. As-built Drawings shall be clean and legible. The as-
built Drawings shall not be removed from the field location after the location is
placed in service without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
E. The final as-built Drawings shall be 11 inches by 17 inches, unless authorized by
the Engineer to substitute another size.
F. Each circuit that continues to another drawing shall be annotated with drawing
number and routing information for the continuation of the circuit.
G. The circuit Drawings shall show all individual circuits. Typical circuits will not be
accepted.
H. The location plans shall show all cables installed with the number of conductors,
the size of conductors, the type of cable, termination points of conductors, and
the circuit on each conductor. Separate cable plans shall be drawn if cable
information cannot be shown in a neat and organized manner on the location
plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
1.11 TRACK AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Refer to Sections 01 35 15, Maintenance and Protection of Railroad
Traffic for track access and related provisions. Metrolink Commuter Service and
any other passenger or freight service may not be interrupted by the Work of this
Contract, except as provided in the Contract Documents.
B. Signal cutovers may be required under traffic.
C. Signal cutovers will require coordination between the Contractor, Metrolink, other
railroads, as applicable, to keep train delays to a minimum.
1.12 BID ITEM LIST
A. Submit the Bid Item List for signal bid items as required under Section 01 29 73,
Schedule of Values, and in accordance with the following additional
requirements:
1. Bid Item List for the signal bid items shall include all interface circuits and
staging necessary to place the location in service at each stage, all
acceptance testing and transportation of materials, all equipment rental,
all pretesting and removal of old equipment.
2. Organize Bid Item List for signal bid items to assign a value to each signal
location. A location is defined as a grade crossing warning system, a
hazard detector system, an intermediate signal location, or a control
point.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties for all equipment and material covering parts and labor for
two years from the date equipment or material is accepted by the Owner.
B. All warranties shall comply with the requirements of Section 01 78 36, Warranties
and Guarantees, unless otherwise specified herein.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT – GENERAL
A. Signaling materials and equipment shall be the products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such material and equipment and shall be
the manufacturer's latest design. The materials and equipment shall have shown
proven performance in North America for a minimum of 5 years. Materials and
equipment shall be delivered to the job-site in unbroken packages, reels, or other
forms of containers.
B. All materials and equipment shall conform to the recommendations of AREMA
Signal Manual, except as modified in the Specifications and Contract Plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
C. Reference to specific equipment and manufacturers is intended to establish
quality, overall design, and fit, subject to compliance with all criteria
specifications. Equipment equal to, or exceeding, the specifications and
requirements may be used subject to Section 01 25 00, Substitution Procedures,
and the Resident Engineer's written approval. Should alternate equipment be
accepted, perform all necessary work to fit the alternate equipment to these
specifications and to revise the Contract Plans accordingly.
2.02 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
A. All Contractor provided electrical and electronic component materials furnished
under this contract shall be new.
Design and construct fusing of all DC power supplies and circuitry according to
the following requirements:
1. Circuit breakers and fuses shall be the correct side-band rating for circuit
current interruption and shall protect the electrical equipment and circuits
from short-term and long-term overloads.
2. Fuses shall be sized to protect the wire.
3. Fuses shall be in the positive leg of the power supply.
4. Fuses shall be of the nonrenewable indicating type.
5. All branch feeds for a circuit shall be from the same fuse to prevent fuse
cascading due to branch fusing carrying loads for other circuits.
6. Loads shall be divided so that no normal operating current is more than
75 percent of the fuse rating.
7. Fusing shall be functionally oriented to minimize the equipment affected
by a blown fuse (i.e., per track, switch control circuits, etc.)
8. Fuse clips shall be constructed to retain their resilience under all
installation and service conditions and to ensure a positive contact
between the clips and the fuse.
B. Printed Circuit (PC) Cards and Connectors:
1. The PC cards shall be mounted in 19-inch card files unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
2. The PC wiring shall be organized so that wires serving the same function
shall be connected to the same terminal of PC cards. PC cards containing
the same circuitry and programming, where applicable, shall be
interchangeable between subsystems.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
3. The design and construction of PC cards of the same subsystems shall
be the same. Cards of different subsystems shall be of the same design
and construction wherever practicable.
4. PC cards shall be of glass epoxy construction. Card material shall meet
the requirements of NEMA, Type FR-4. Cards shall have sufficient
thickness to permit easy insertion and removal and shall be physically
keyed to protect against incorrect interchange. Circuits shall be formed
by etching. Conductor material shall be copper and shall be protected
from exposure to air.
5. PC cards containing components that may be damaged if a plug
connector or plug-in unit is removed while the equipment is energized
shall be clearly identified in the equipment maintenance manual. PC
cards shall be marked or labeled with a warning note on the individual
board, be conspicuously located on the module, or by an alternate means
as approved by the Engineer. A means shall be provided to remove
power from the module or card file.
6. Components mounted on the PC card, weighing more than 1/2 ounce or
with a displacement of more than 1/2 cubic inch, shall have a mechanical
supporting attachment to the card separate from all electrical
connections.
7. Do no stacking or piggybacking of PC sections to accomplish changes or
modifications to wiring or components on printed circuit cards.
8. Connectors shall have plating with a minimum thickness of 0.00005 inch.
C. Printed Circuit Card Files:
1. There shall be not more than one type of card file for each size of PC
card. The card file plug boards shall be registered to agree with the
registry of the associated PC card. PC cards shall not project beyond the
front of the equipment rack when mounted in the card file.
2. Card files shall be installed in dust-proof cabinets and protected with dust
covers.
3. Insulated cable clamping devices shall be located on the back of the file
in such a way that wires terminating in the files shall be installed in a neat
and secure bundle, rigidly supported, and protected to prevent chafing of
insulation. Cabling provision on the file shall permit wires to enter or leave
the file from both the right and left sides. Such cabling shall not restrict
access to the card file when the rear covers of the card files are removed.
2.03 SHOP FINISHES
A. Factory finish signal equipment with the exception signal system parts which are
stipulated as field finished in AREMA C&S Manual, Part 1.5.10, and aluminum
alloy and galvanized metal components. If manufacturer typically provides
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
factory painted finish for aluminum alloy and galvanized components, include
such information in equipment submittals for Engineer’s acceptance.
B. Finishes shall comply with AREMA C&S Manual, Part 1.5.10, signal equipment
manufacturer’s standards, and provisions specified herein. It shall be understood
that where AREMA C&S Manual, Part 1.5.10, uses the word “should” that the
word “shall” shall be substituted except as accepted by the Engineer in writing.
1. Finish terminal boards and interior of shelters with white gloss fire
retardant paint.
2. Factory finish signal equipment with aluminum paint except as otherwise
specified herein and in the AREMA C&S Manual.
3. For signal system parts which the AREMA C&S Manual stipulates as
shop primed and field finish, shop prime in accordance with requirements
specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating and 09 96 23, Graffiti
Resistant Coating.
4. For signal system parts which the AREMA C&S Manual stipulates to
receive shop prime and finish coats followed by field finish coat,
coordinate shop finish coat with field finish specified in Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating and 09 96 23, Graffiti Resistant Coating.
2.04 FIELD PAINT MATERIALS
A. Field finish as specified in Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating and 09 96 23,
Graffiti-Resistant Coating and AREMA C&S Manual, Part 1.5.10. Exterior
surfaces shall receive a heavy duty finish system.
B. Touch-up Paint for Signal Manufacturer Finishes: Touch-up paints
recommended by signal manufacturer, including aluminum touch-up paint.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall make all necessary modifications to the existing signal system,
protect or relocate existing cabling, signals, switches, and signal shelters; and
modify associated signal and highway grade crossing systems to ensure the
existing signal system operates as intended during construction and installation
of the new signal system. Protect signal and highway grade crossing systems to
ensure train operations are not interrupted and safety is maintained.
B. Contractor shall take no action which will violate any rule or regulation as
specified by CFR 49, the General Code of Operating Rules, timetable
instructions, general order, bulletin, or special instruction; which will reduce the
integrity of the signal system; or endanger railroad personnel, the public, or
employees.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
C. All equipment installation as described herein or as shown in the Contract Plans
shall be in accordance with the SCRRA Engineering Standards.
D. Ensure that equipment within the instrument shelters and relay cases is securely
anchored or otherwise fastened in enclosure upon completion of enclosure
installation. Securing equipment shall not negate the requirements to maintain
isolation between ground systems as otherwise called for in these Specifications.
E. An updated, detailed set of the approved signal design Drawings shall be kept at
each field location for equipment as it is placed in-service as system changes are
made.
3.02 FIELD FINISHES AND TOUCH UP
A. For signal system parts which AREMA C&S Manual, Part 1.5.10, stipulates as
shop primed and field painted, field finish as specified in Section 09 90 00,
Painting and Coating and 09 96 23, Graffiti-Resistant Coating and AREMA C&S
Manual, Part 1.5.10, including requirement to apply one field coat prior to field
assembly and one field coat following field assembly.
B. Touch-up signal manufacturer’s finishes after installation.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. General Signal Requirements will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. All work and services included in Sections 34 42 10, Coordination with SCRRA
Procurement Contractor; 34 42 38, Interlocking Controls; 34 42 40, Solid State
Coded Track Circuits; and 34 42 56, Signal Grounding; will be included in this
Section and are considered incidental to work under this Section and will be
measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
C. Demolition and Removal of Existing Equipment including retiring of CPs, Grade
Crossings, Signals, Gates, and Cabling will be measured by the unit or fraction
thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and
as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
A. General Signal Requirements furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
C. Demolition and Removal of Existing Equipment including retiring of CPs, Grade
Crossings, Signals, Gates and Cabling completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 00 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 10
COORDINATION WITH SCRRA PROCUREMENT CONTRACTOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements coordinating installation, inspection, and
testing of new Owner furnished material with the Engineer and with the Owner’s
procurement contractor. Notify the Engineer in writing a minimum of 30 days
prior to any installation, inspection and testing of such material.
B. Refer to Section 01 64 00, SCRRA Furnished Material and Equipment, in the
paragraph “Materials furnished by the Authority”.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Acceptance Test Procedure documentation on all Owner Furnished
Equipment prior to transport of the equipment.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. Because the manufacturer’s warranty for materials begins when the material is
received, the Contractor shall supplement the manufacturer’s warranty for the
amount of time elapsed between its receipt of the material and the Owner’s final
acceptance, and as required under Section 01 78 36, Warranties and
Guarantees. The supplemental warranty shall include all costs to repair or
replace material which is damaged while in Contractor’s care or fails prematurely
and as required under Section 01 78 36, Warranties and Guarantees. Make
arrangements for and pay costs of such repairs performed by and replacements
provided from the original equipment manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test all Owner-furnished equipment before transporting it to the job site.
Conduct this acceptance testing for all equipment in accordance with the
Contractor's Acceptance Test Procedure. Prior to transportation, submit a copy
of the documentation of acceptance testing to the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION(NOT USED)
A. Not Applicable to this Section.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 10 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 10 Coordination with SCRRA Procurement Contractor
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 42 10
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 10 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 16
SIGNAL WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for all cable and wire required for signal and
signal power system wiring to wayside shelters, crossing shelters, junction boxes,
factory wired mechanisms and other signal equipment.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork
2. Section 34 42 58 – Signal System Testing
3. Section 34 42 60 – Signal System Miscellaneous Products
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
B. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
C. International Organization of Standardization (ISO):
1. 9001 - Quality Management Systems Requirements.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Material and workmanship shall be of the highest quality, assuring durability for
minimum life expectancy of 40 years. Cables shall be suitable for use in the
environment to be encountered on a railroad signal system, and shall be certified
for continuous operation, in wet or dry locations, with no conductor failing in
continuity or with loss of insulation to cross or ground less than one mega ohm.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts, material descriptions, and specifications
for each type of wire and cable the Contractor proposes to provide.
B. Product Sample: The Contractor shall submit one (1) foot of sample cable when
requested by the Resident Engineer. Resident Engineer shall make request in
writing prior to approval, if deemed necessary, to ensure the product data submittal
meets the specification.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 16 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 16 Signal Wire and Cable
C. Quality Assurance: Submit a list of cable manufacturer’s installations complying
with the past performance and experience requirements specified herein.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cable manufacturer's qualifications shall be as follows:
1. Past Performance and Experience: Demonstrated previous successful
experience in supplying cable to the railway or transit industry for use as
vital signal control cables. A list of such installations shall be provided for
each cable manufacturer to be considered.
2. Quality Assurance Program: The manufacture of cables in accordance with
the requirements of these specifications shall be accomplished in
compliance with a Quality Assurance Program that meets the intent of ISO
9001.
3. All signal wire and cable furnished under this Contract shall be provided as
new and shall not be installed under this Contract if the manufacture date of
the cable exceeds 24 months prior to the Notice-To-Proceed date.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Shipping, storage, and handling shall be in accordance with AREMA Signal Manual,
Part 10.4.1.
B. During storage and handling, prior to final conductor termination, cable ends shall
be sealed to prevent the entrance of moisture.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERNAL WIRE AND CABLE
A. Individual cable make-up and conductor sizes shall be as shown on the Contract
Plans.
B. Internal wire and cable shall conform to AREMA C&S Manual, Part 10.3.14, and the
following requirements:
1. Solid conductors shall be Type I in accordance with AREMA C&S Manual
Part 10.3.14.
2. Stranded conductors shall be Type II in accordance with AREMA C&S
Manual Part 10.3.14.
C. Internal wire and cable insulation shall conform to AREMA C&S Manual Part
10.3.24 and the following requirements:
1. The minimum insulation rating shall be 600 volts.
2.02 EXTERNAL WIRE AND CABLE
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 16 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 16 Signal Wire and Cable
A. General
1. Individual cable composition and conductor sizes shall be as shown on the
Contract Plans.
2. Conductors shall be soft or annealed copper, coated with tin in accordance
with Type I wire as shown in the applicable AREMA C&S Manual Part.
3. Stranded conductors shall be soft or annealed copper, coated with tin in
accordance with Type II wire as shown in the applicable AREMA C&S
Manual Part.
B. Track Wire
1. Twisted track wire shall be Okonite-Okolene (EP-PE) manufactured by
Okonite Co. or approved equal.
2. Track wire shall meet the requirements of AREMA C&S Manual, Part
10.3.15.
C. Signal, Switch, and Express Cable
1. Wire and cable used for signals, switches, and express cable shall be
Okonite (EP) Armored Underground Signal Cable manufactured by Okonite
Co. or approved equal.
2. Conductors number six (#6AWG) and smaller shall be solid. Conductors
number 4 (#4AWG) and larger shall be stranded.
3. Armored cable shall be furnished with a 10-mil flat bronze tape between the
conductors and the outer jacket, helically applied, and adequately
cushioned from the conductors.
4. Armored cable shall meet the requirements of AREMA C&S Manual, Part
10.3.17.
D. AC Power Cable
1. AC power shall be Okonite-FMR (EP) Okolon (CSPE) Type TC Cable
manufactured by Okonite Co., or an approved equal.
2. Cable shall meet the requirements of AREMA Signal Manual, Part 10.3.16.
E. Modem Cable
1. Modem cables shall be C-L-X Type SP-OS manufactured by Okonite Co. or
approved equal.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 16 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 16 Signal Wire and Cable
2. Modem cable shall be protected by a moisture impervious, continuously
welded, corrugated, aluminum sheath with an overall EFTE fluoropolymer
jacket.
3. Individual twisted pairs shall be separately shielded with an aluminum
polyester tape to provide shield isolation between pairs of 100 mega ohms
per 1000 ft. minimum.
4. Modem cable shall meet the requirements of AREMA Signal Manual, Part
10.3.17 except as specified herein.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Coordinate with the Engineer for Engineer’s inspections and tests at point of
production. The Engineer shall have the right to make inspections and tests, as
necessary, to determine if the wire or cable meets the requirements of this
Specification. The Engineer shall have the right to reject wire or cable that is
defective in any respect.
B. Provide, at the point of production, apparatus and labor for the following tests:
1. Conductor size and physical characteristics.
2. Insulation HV and IR tests.
3. Physical dimension tests.
4. Special tests on materials in coverings.
5. Final HV, IR, and conductor resistance tests on shipping reels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. The installation of wire and cable shall conform to AREMA C&S Manual
Parts 10.4.1, 10.4.30, except as specified herein.
2. All external cable runs shall be in conduit in accordance with the Metrolink
Engineering Standards, and as called for in the Contract Documents.
3. The signaling cables shall be separated from parallel run of ac feeder
cables, where adjacent locations are fed from one ac service location.
4. Give the Engineer 24 hour notice prior to installing cables.
5. Provide sufficient slack in cable conductors at all terminating posts to enable
a minimum of three re-terminations of the conductor, due to broken eyelets
without re-servicing or re-pot heading the cable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 16 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 16 Signal Wire and Cable
6. In certain types of installation, the cable cannot be constrained; therefore,
ample cable slack shall be provided for additional flexibility due to vibration
of such equipment.
7. Do not bend cables to a radius less than manufacturer's recommendation.
8. Distribution cable runs shall be continuous without splices between cable
terminating locations. Express cable runs longer than cable lengths shall be
spliced together in junction box, instrument case, or other acceptable
shelter. Prior to any cable or wire splicing, obtain the Engineer’s approval.
Approval will not be granted for cables damaged by the Contractor or
vandalized by others. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to protect all
cables until final installation acceptance.
9. Identify individual cable conductors at each cable termination with plastic
tags, as specified in Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous
Products. Identify and terminate all spare conductors in each cable.
10. Seal cable entrance openings in equipment enclosures and junction boxes
with either compression type fitting or pliable sealing compound after the
cable is in place. Use sealing compound to seal the area around cable
where the cable emerges from the end of a conduit or pipe. Seal and plug
all spare conduits. Seal around conduits where conduits enter enclosures to
prevent entry of vermin and insects.
11. Wherever multiple conductor cables are terminated, carefully remove the
outer sheath of the cable to a minimum point of 3 inches from the cable
entrance. At the end of the cable sheath or covering, apply two layers of
Scotch 88 plastic electrical tape or approved equal.
12. Terminate all cable conductors in number sequence from top to bottom.
13. Cable shields or sheaths shall be grounded at the entrance to signal
shelters and shall float when terminated in field apparatus.
B. Underground Buried Installation
1. When crossing beneath tracks, bury conduit(s) to a uniform minimum depth
of 36 inches as measured from bottom of tie to top of conduit(s). When
paralleling the tracks, bury conduit(s) a minimum depth of 36 inches as
measured from the finished grade to top of conduit(s). Provide backfill and
compaction as specified in these Specifications. Install cable within four-inch
PVC schedule 80 conduit when passing beneath tracks or crossing a
roadway. Install cable within four-inch PVC Schedule 40 conduit(s) when
paralleling the tracks.
2. Upon written request from the Contractor and only under extreme
circumstances because of installation hardship will installation of conduit(s)
be allowed to a depth of less than 36 inches and is subject to the Resident
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 16 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 16 Signal Wire and Cable
Engineer’s approval. The Contractor shall protect the conduit(s) and
cable(s) in a manner acceptable to the Resident Engineer.
3. Ensure that whenever any signal conduit(s) is to pass beneath pavement or
roadway, and if conduit is not provided by others, the Contractor shall
provide and install cable(s) in 4-inch PVC Schedule 80 conduit and extend
schedule 80 conduit(s) a minimum of 2 feet beyond the edge of the curb
and gutter and/or sidewalk, where applicable. Installation of conduit(s) and
pull box(es) shall be in accordance with Metrolink Engineering Standards.
Restore pavement and roadway to its original condition including striping
and markers, subject to local municipal requirements and the Resident
Engineer’s acceptance.
4. Whenever any signal cable is to pass under the hot-mix asphalt concrete
(HMAC) underlay installed on the project, provide and install cable(s) in
conduit(s) with pull boxes in accordance with the Metrolink Engineering
Standards.
5. Where cable leaves the ground at other than buildings or in foundations,
protect cable by a bootleg or other covering extending above the ground
line. Fill top of such protective coverings with a sealing compound.
6. Where underground cables enter a concrete foundation, junction box,
shelter or case, leave sufficient slack in each cable in the nearest pull box to
allow a minimum of an additional one foot of cable to be pulled into the
shelter or junction box.
7. Ensure that the pot heading of underground cables shall be applied
whenever cable is terminated in signal equipment, and such termination is
within two feet of the grade level. This neoprene and seal pothead shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8. The Contractor shall ensure that cable(s), track wire, and conduit(s) shall be
installed per Contract Plans and Section 31 20 00, Earthwork.
9. Cables shall not cross one another when they are pulled into a conduit or
pipe; the conductors shall not be pulled tight or kinked in conduit fittings or
boxes. All cables to be installed in a conduit or pipe shall be pulled and
installed simultaneously.
10. All cables, except final connection of flex wires to rail, shall be installed in a
conduit system as shown on the Contract Plans and as required within the
Metrolink Engineering Standards.
C. Special Protection: Provide appropriate special protection for cables in areas where
the cables are unavoidably exposed to hazardous conditions, such as vibration or
sharp corners on equipment. Replace any cable that is installed but subsequently
damaged prior to acceptance because of the Contractor's failure to provide such
special protection.
D. AC Power Cable
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 16 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 16 Signal Wire and Cable
1. Provide and install AC power cable dedicated conduit from the service
meters to the signal shelters and between signal shelters.
E. CABLE PULLING
1. Perform cable pulling into conduits in accordance with the cable
manufacturer’s requirements and with the requirements specified herein.
2. Do not use poly rope for any mechanical means of pulling cable. Poly rope
stretches when subjected to high tension and can create a hazard. Manual
pulling (by hand) using poly rope is allowed. When using a mechanical
means to complete a pull, a Samson rope or equivalent, flat line, shall be
used, as it does not stretch in the same way that poly rope does, and
presents less of a hazard.
3. Provide two-way voice communication and adequate resources at both
feeding and pulling ends of the run and at any interim location (e.g., 4 X 4
pull boxes). Apply cable pulling lubricant liberally during the cable pull. To
minimize back reel tension, accelerate slowly and smoothly from rest to a
constant pulling speed. Avoid stopping the pull midway through the
installation; the drag due to friction is greatly increased when pulling is
restarted.
4. The cable that cannot be pulled in manually shall be installed by means of a
cable puller, an electric winch or a winch on a radial boom derrick. In each
case, the machine operator shall have access to a means of determining
the pulling tensions on the cable (e.g., gauges which indicate direct line
pressure or gauges which indicate hydraulic pressure which can be
converted to line tension via a conversion table or a dynamometer). Do not
exceed the manufacture’s pulling tension for any cable installation. Cable
pulling with trucks, backhoes, crane/boom or any other method whereby the
amount of pulling tension is not measurable, is unacceptable.
5. Establish the direction of the pull based on safe pulling tensions, sidewall
bearing pressure calculations and minimum bending radius for a specific
cable to be installed. Do not exceed the minimum bending radius at any
time. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the safe pulling tension and
determine if the cable pull requires a basket grip or a pulling eye attached to
the conductor. Basket grips or pulling eyes shall be attached to the pulling
rope or cable by an appropriately sized swivel head. Rod each conduit with
an appropriate size brush and mandrel to ensure conduits are properly fitted
and they are clean and free of all dirt, stones, scale, water etc. For
installation in conduit, place cable guides wherever necessary to avoid
abrasion and/or damage to the cable e.g., when guiding the cable from the
reel to the conduit mouth or trench, when passing through or exiting
manholes, when exiting a conduit run. Cable guides shall be in the form of
large diameter, smooth-surfaced free turning sheaves or rollers. They shall
be designed to ensure that cable will not ride off the end of the roller or be
pinched into a sheave contour. Guide tubes or chutes shall be used
provided they have a smooth burr-free working surface, well flared
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 16 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 16 Signal Wire and Cable
entrances, largest possible bending radius and are securely fastened so
that the cable passes smoothly over them. In any case, equipment shall be
installed to ensure the minimum bending radius of the cable is not
exceeded. Using suitable reel mounting equipment, locate and position the
reels such that cable tension at the feeding end is minimized. Select pulling
equipment, which can provide smooth speed control at the anticipated
tensions. Ensure the pull rope or flat line has the required tensile rating.
Avoid the use of elastic materials.
6. Pre-lubricate conduit with cable manufacture’s recommended cable
lubricant. Setup lubrication points along the conduit run (e.g., feed in point,
4 X 4 etc. to reduce pulling tension and abrasion to the cable jacket). For
long heavy pulls, pre-lubrication of conduit and pull rope is essential to
prevent abrasion at the bends, particularly PVC conduit bends, which can
become softened due to frictional heating. In the case of long conduit
lengths or excessive curvatures in the conduit the cable may have to be
pulled in from two directions. Follow the recommendations of the cable
manufacturer as to the amount of lubricant to be applied, which is depended
on the size and length of the conduit system into which the cable is being
pulled.
3.02 REPAIR
A. Immediately call to the Engineer’s attention any instance of damaged cable
observed at any time, whether prior to installation, occurring during construction, or
discovered by test observation after installation. The method of correction shall be
in accordance with the Engineer's written instruction. Promptly perform repairs or
replace damaged cables.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test all installed external cable in accordance with the requirements of Section 34
42 58, Signal System Testing, and AREMA C&S Manual, Part 10.4.30.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Cables will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or
approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Case and house wiring will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by
the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans
will be used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 16 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 16 Signal Wire and Cable
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Cables and Wires furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule
of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Field Case and House Wiring furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
C. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall allow for 100 wiring changes, not shown on the Contract
Plans and requested by the Engineer, at no additional cost. A wiring change shall
consist of connecting or removing a wire. Thus, moving a wire from one contact
terminal to another contact terminal will consist of two wiring changes.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 16 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 18
CONDUIT AND PULL BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Furnishing conduit, pull boxes, handholes and associated materials as specified
herein.
B. Material and workmanship shall be of the highest quality, assuring durability for
minimum life expectancy of 40 years. All pull boxes, handholes, PVC conduits,
HDPE conduits, fittings, cement and other materials to be furnished shall be
suitable for use in the environment to be encountered on a railroad signal system.
Conduits shall be used in underground, encased or exposed applications in
accordance with National Electrical Code, Article 347.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Specification Sections include, but are not limited to:
1. Section 01 14 49 Coordination with Utilities
2. Section 31 20 00 Earthwork
3. Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
B. Applicable Local Ordinances
C. The following General Orders (most current) of the State of California Public Utilities
Commission (CPUC) shall apply:
1. General Order 118: Construction, Reconstruction, and Maintenance of
Walkways and Control of Vegetation
2. General Order 128: Construction of Underground Electric Supply and
Communication Systems
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures.
B. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s catalog cut sheets, material
descriptions, and specifications for each type of conduit, type of handhole, fittings,
type of pull box and other materials the Contractor proposes to provide.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 18 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 18 Conduit and Pull Boxes
C. The Contractor shall submit for review and approval its proposed plan for final
installation of conduits and pull boxes prior to constructing underground facilities.
The proposed plan shall be redlined onto Metrolink’s PTC Composite Map Plan and
Profile for the relevant project area, or another method approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not use the signal duct bank plan in the Contract Drawings for
this purpose.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conduit manufacturer’s qualifications shall be as follows:
1. Quality Assurance Program: the manufacturer of conduits, handholes and
pull boxes in accordance with the requirements of this Specification shall be
accomplished in compliance with a Quality Assurance Program that meets
the intent of the American Society for Quality (ASQC) Standard C1.
1.06 INSPECTION
A. The Commission shall have the right to make inspections and tests, as necessary,
to determine if the materials meet the requirements of the Specification. The
Resident Engineer shall have the right to reject material that is defective in any
respect.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Contractor shall immediately replace any conduit or pull box that is damaged at any
time, prior to final acceptance by the Resident Engineer without additional cost.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. 4” schedule 40 PVC conduit, in 20 ft. lengths.
B. 4” schedule 40 PVC elbows, varying from 22 ½ degree curve to 90 degree curve
and 24” in length
C. 4” rigid galvanized conduit, in 10 ft. lengths.
D. 2.375” schedule 40 HDPE conduit.
E. 12/10-mm HDPE mini duct and couplers
F. 6” burial caution tape
G. PVC Cement
H. 4’-0” x 4’-0” x 4’-0” Concrete Pull Box with Bolt Down Steel Cover
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 18 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 18 Conduit and Pull Boxes
2.02 SCHEDULE 40 PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit shall be rated for use with 90 degree C Conductors, shall be UL listed, and
shall comply with National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Specification
TC-2 (conduit) and TC-3 (fittings).
B. Conduit and fitting shall carry a UL label and shall be identified by type and
manufacturer and shall be traceable to location of plant and date manufactured.
Labels shall be legible and permanent.
C. The conduit shall be made from polyvinyl chloride compound which includes inter
modifiers to improve weatherability and heat distortion.
D. Conduit shall be free from visible cracks, holes or foreign inclusions. The conduit
bore shall be smooth and free of blisters, nicks or other imperfections which could
damage cables or conductors.
E. Conduit and fittings shall be solvent cemented in applications in accordance with
instructions from the manufacturer.
2.03 RIGID GALVANIZED CONDUIT
A. Conduit shall be rated for use with 90 degree C Conductors, shall be UL listed, and
shall comply with ANSI Specification C80.1.
B. Conduit shall carry a UL label and shall be identified by type and manufacturer and
shall be traceable to location of plant and date manufactured. Labels shall be
legible and permanent.
C. Conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized inside and out. Conduit shall be coated with
an organic layer to inhibit white rust and increase corrosion resistance.
D. Conduit shall be threaded on both ends, with a threaded coupler attached on one
end to allow joining of multiple conduits.
2.04 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONDUIT
Conduit shall be high density polyethylene (HDPE) suitable for direct burial and plowing
installation with the ballast portion of the track structural section. Corrugated innerduct is
not acceptable.
A. HDPE conduit supplied shall comply with ASTM D2447, schedule 80, 2.375” O.D.,
black with an orange stripe in color, ribbed interior and smooth exterior. Ribbed
interior wall shall be lubricated to reduce friction when installing fiber cable.
B. Equivalent material shall meet the minimum requirements of SDR 11 – ASTM D303
or SIDR 9 – ASTM D2239
C. HDPE conduit shall be an extruded coilable tube supplied on reels at a minimum of
5000 ft. lengths.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 18 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 18 Conduit and Pull Boxes
D. HDPE conduit shall be capped at both ends prevent any undesirable contaminates
from entering tubes.
E. HDPE conduit shall be supplied with factory installed pull lines.
2.05 HDPE MINI DUCT AND COUPLER
A. HDPE mini duct shall be Fiber-Guard/MD as manufactured by ARNCO Corporation
or approved equal.
B. HDPE mini duct conduit shall be supplied on reels of a minimum of 5000’ foot
lengths.
C. HDPE mini duct conduit shall be capped at both ends with air tight blank plugs to
prevent any undesirable contaminates from entering tubes.
D. HDPE mini duct conduit shall be 12/10-mm and shall be available in colors of blue,
orange, yellow and green.
E. HDPE mini duct shall be factory pressure tested per the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Mini duct shall hold 130 psi to ensure there are no leaks.
F. Coupler for mini duct shall be as manufactured by ARNCP Corporation P/N 1-
905694 or approved equal.
2.06 DETECTABLE UNDERGROUND TAPE
A. Detectable underground tape shall conform to the following specifications:
1. NTSB-PSS-73-1
2. American Gas Association 72-D-56
3. OSHA 1926-956 (c) (1)
4. DOT Office of Pipeline Safety USAS B31.8
5. API RP 1109
6. APWA Uniform Color Code
B. Tape shall be easily located with an industrial grade non-ferrous metal detector and
shall have highly visible colors to assist in location when digging.
C. The label on underground tape shall read:
CAUTION
METROLINK COMMUNICATIONS
CABLE BURIED BELOW
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 18 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 18 Conduit and Pull Boxes
2.07 PVC CEMENT
A. Contractor to provide medium-bodied, fast setting solvent cement that shall have a
strong, leak-tight seal.
B. PVC cement shall conform to NEMA and UL specifications.
2.08 PULL BOXES
A. Pull Boxes shall conform to SCRRA’s Engineering Standard ES8225.
B. Precast concrete vaults and access doors shall be designed for H-20 highway
vehicle loading.
C. All exposed portions of the vault shall be non-conductive to electricity.
D. The minimum inside dimensions measured just below the lid support shall be 4”"
wide x 48” long.
E. The depth of the vault, when measured from the top of the access doors, shall be
48”.
F. Covers shall be two individual galvanized diamond steel pieces with hex bolts to
fasten in place. Covers shall have a skid resistant surface and be equipped with
lifting eyes.
G. Pull boxes shall be manufactured by Jensen Precast, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. The installation of conduit and pull boxes shall conform to the AREMA C& S
Manual, except as specified herein.
2. The installation of conduits, vaults, and pull boxes shall conform to the
requirements of the Metrolink Engineering Standards, or as required in the
Contract Documents.
3. Separate conduits shall be afforded for power distribution cables.
4. The Contractor shall install conduits, vaults, and pull boxes according to the
approved plan for final installation of conduits and pull boxes. Deviation from
the approved final plan must be in writing from the Resident Engineer.
5. Total bend radius allowed for a single conduit run shall not exceed 360
degrees. A single conduit run is defined as the conduits extending between
pull boxes, vaults, or instrument enclosures without interruption. Bends
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 18 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 18 Conduit and Pull Boxes
afforded for conduit risers into instrument enclosures are to be considered
as part of the total bend radius calculation.
6. All vault openings and knockouts shall be sealed with mortar. All conduits
extending into the sides of vaults shall be cut flush with the pull box wall.
7. Ensure proper drainage is provided in in the bottom of pull boxes or vaults.
A layer of gravel shall be installed per Metrolink Engineering Standards
below the pull box or vault.
8. The Contractor shall maintain required CPUC walkways around pull boxes.
9. All pull boxes installed into dirt or parkway areas shall have a concrete cap
around the box.
10. Pull boxes shall not be installed in any part of a driveway, wheelchair ramp,
or other travelled way unless specified in the Contract Documents or
approved by the Resident Engineer.
11. Contractor shall protect all pull boxes from damage; damaged sections of
pull boxes shall be replaced with new at the Contractor’s expense.
12. All pull boxes to be abandoned shall be removed completely by the
Contractor and the existing sidewalk, parkway and landscaping shall be
repaired.
13. Any work performed by the Contractor that impacts or involves any
commercial utility facility shall be performed by a contractor approved by the
commercial utility and shall be governed by the utility’s standards.
Contractor accepts all liabilities and responsibilities when undertaking
repairs, modifications and additions involving commercial utility ducts,
handholes and cables.
B. Underground Buried Installation
1. Bury conduit to a uniform depth of 36 inches as measured from bottom of tie
to top of the conduit. When paralleling the tracks, bury conduit a minimum
depth of 36 inches as measured from the finished grade to top of cable. Lay
conduits loosely in trench with a sand bed and backfill as specified in theses
Specifications.
2. Upon request and only under extreme circumstances because of installation
hardship will installation of a conduit be allowed to a depth of less than 36
inches, subject to the Resident Engineer’s acceptance. Protect the conduit
in a manner acceptable to the Resident Engineer.
3. Whenever any conduit is to pass under pavement or a roadway, install 4-
inch PVC Schedule 80 conduit and extend conduit 2 feet beyond the edges
of the pavement or roadway. Installation of conduits and pull boxes shall be
in accordance with Metrolink Engineering Standards. Restore pavement or
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 18 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 18 Conduit and Pull Boxes
roadway to its original condition, subject to the Resident Engineer’s
acceptance.
4. Whenever any conduit is to pass under the hot-mix asphalt concrete
(HMAC) underlay installed at an interlocking, ensure the conduit is protected
against the damage from the heat of the HMAC.
5. All exposed conduits shall be Galvanized Rigid Steel (GRS).
6. Once the Contractor has finished conduit installation, and prior to installing
cables or wires, the Contractor shall mandrel the conduits and install a pull
rope into each conduit.
C. Special Protection: Provide appropriate special protection for conduits, vaults or
pull boxes in areas where they are unavoidably exposed to hazardous conditions,
such as vibration or other equipment. Replace any conduit, vault, or pull box that is
installed but subsequently damaged prior to acceptance because of the
Contractor’s failure to provide such special protection.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Conduit will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or
approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Pull Boxes will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Conduit or Pull Boxes furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule
of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 18 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 25
SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the material, equipment, installation, testing and
management of a closed network for signal and crossing vital communications,
using fiber optic cable as the physical medium.
B. Traditional communications for vital signal and crossing communications on
SCRRA property utilize a combination of railroad track and copper cable as the
physical medium.
C. Station and non-vital train control communications requirements can be found in
Section 34 44 25 - Fiber Optic Subsystem and Section 34 44 79 – Optical Wide
Area Networks. These requirements are separate and distinct from the
requirements of this Section.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedure
2. Section 34 42 00 General Signal Requirements
3. Section 34 44 25 Fiber Optic Subsystem
4. Section 34 42 38 Interlocking Controls
5. Section 34 42 56 Signal Grounding
6. Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
7. Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA);
Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S Manual).
B. ANSI/TIA-568.3-D Fiber Cabling and Components
C. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640-2006, Standard for Fiber Optic Outside Plant
Communications Cable
D. ASTM E-814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Fire Stop
Systems.
E. International Organization of Standardization (ISO); 9001 Quality Management
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
Services.
F. Railroad Administration (FRA), Code of Federal Regulations.
G. United States Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service (RUS) 7 CFR
1755.900 (PE-90), Specification for Filled Fiber Optic Cables
H. GR-20-CORE, Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber and Optical Fiber Cable
I. UL-969, Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedure.
B. The Contractor shall refer to Section 34 42 00, General Signal Requirements for
related and additional submittal requirements.
C. The Contractor shall submit complete technical information for all products
herein.
1. For the proposed fiber optic cable, the Contractor shall submit cable
manufacturer’s qualifications if proposing an equivalent product. The
Contractor shall include manufacturer’s ISO 9001 Certification Number.
D. The Contractor shall submit a list and quantity of spare equipment as detailed
herein. Contractor is responsible for delivery of spare equipment to the SCRRA
facility in Pomona, CA.
E. Prior to ordering any signal fiber optic cable, the Contractor shall submit a Fiber
Cable Order Plan that includes a complete listing of cable types, cable
manufacturer(s), quantities, reel sizes and targeted location of installation within
the project. The plan shall be inclusive of cable slack within the subsystem and
shall include additional cable reels (amounting to 25% of total fiber cable
required) to address any damage and repair that arises during construction.
F. The Contractor shall submit Optical Link Calculations for all network links (signal
and crossing) prior to procurement of SFP optics.
G. Prior to signal fiber cable installation, the Contractor shall submit a Cable
Installation Plan. The plan shall include a written cable installation procedure
and supporting butterfly vault diagrams. This procedure shall be prepared based
on Contractor’s review of the conduit plans, survey of conduit and pull box
locations in the field and shall include a cabling plan and installation information
for each cable pull. The installation plan shall include butterfly vault diagrams for
each pull box with detail for slack quantity, location of cable within the duct
bank/vault, GPS coordinates of the vault and cable labeling. The installation plan
shall include a spreadsheet of all cable labels proposed at each location (inside
pull boxes and instrument enclosures). The installation plan shall include proper
procedures for feeding cable into conduit to maintain proper bend radii, and to
minimize friction. A cut sheet shall be submitted for the wire pulling lubricant.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
H. The Contractor shall submit a Signal Fiber Cable Test Procedure. Both TIA-560-
C.0 Tier 1 (attenuation, link length and polarity) and TIA-560-C.0 Tier 2 (OTDR)
testing are required for final acceptance. The cable link type is backbone and
shall be tested at 1310nm and 1550nm wavelengths bi-directionally.
1. Included in the test procedure shall be test results summary sheet that
contains the following information:
a. Link locations (from and to)
b. Fiber number
c. Cable length (feet and km)
d. Reported fiber attenuation at 1310nm and 1550nm
e. Connector loss budget
f. Number of splices within link
g. Splice loss budget
h. Total link loss (calculated)
i. Total link loss (measured 1310nm)
j. Total link loss (measured 1550nm)
2. The test results summary will set the parameters for acceptance testing
prior to making measurements in the field. This will facilitate the
Contractor to understand the minimum acceptance criteria to allow for
cleaning, retest measurements in the field during one mobilization. Test
reports shall be submitted to the Engineer after installation and prior to
placing cable in service.
3. Additional test requirements are detailed herein.
I. The Contractor shall submit a Signal Fiber Network Test Procedure. Minimum
test requirements are detailed herein.
J. The Contractor shall submit a Crossing Fiber Network Test Procedure. Minimum
test requirements are detailed herein.
K. The Contractor shall submit a proposed RSL910 switch typical configuration file
for the signal and crossing networks. The Contractor shall hold four (4)
configuration development meetings at two (2) hours each with Metrolink to
determine the final switch configurations.
L. The Contractor shall submit a Signal Fiber Network Training Plan for approval.
Minimum training requirements are detailed herein.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
A. Cable Manufacturer Pre-Qualification Requirements:
1. The Contractor shall obtain Resident Engineer’s approval of cable
manufacturer(s) and installer(s). The Contractor shall provide all data
required and requested for Resident Engineer evaluation and shall make
the arrangements for any required demonstrations and tests requested
by the Resident Engineer at no additional cost to SCRRA.
2. Past Performance and Experience: The Contractor proposed cable
manufacturer(s) must demonstrate previous successful experience in
supplying cable specified herein. A list of such installations shall be
provided for each cable manufacturer to be considered.
3. Technical Data: The Contractor shall provide full technical data that
demonstrates compliance with the requirements of these Specifications
for each specified cable type the Contractor plans to provide.
a. The proposed manufacturer(s) of cables, in accordance with the
requirements of these technical specifications, shall have in place
or implement, an effective quality assurance program adhering to
the requirements of ISO 9001 to ensure purchase control
performance.
b. The cable manufacturer(s) shall be ISO 9001 certified.
4. Point of Origin: The cable shall be made in the United States of America.
5. Warranty: The Contractor proposed manufacturer(s) shall warrant that
the design, material, and workmanship incorporated in each item of cable
shall be of the highest grade and consistent with the established, and
generally accepted standards for railroad and transit applications; and
that each such item and every part and component thereof shall comply
with these Specifications. The fiber optic cable manufacturer shall
warrant the fiber optic cable for 25 years.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Cleaning of Fiber Optic Connections
1. Any contamination in the fiber connection can cause failure of the
component or of the system. Dust in the air can deposit on the
connector. Other types of contamination include oils from human hands,
film residues, powdery coatings left from evaporation.
2. Contractor shall have tools to inspect and clean the fiber optic connectors
every time a fiber connector is exposed to air:
a. Fiberscope for inspection, always while laser sources are off.
b. Dry cleaning by cartridge, pocket style cleaners, or lint free wipes
(clean room quality) or swabs.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
c. Wet cleaning by lint free wipes or swabs with 99% isopropyl
alcohol.
B. Fiber Optic Cable
1. Safety:
a. Never look directly into the end of a fiber that may be carrying
laser light. Laser light can be invisible (undetectable by the eye)
and can cause permanent eye damage.
b. Cleaved or broken glass fibers are sharp and can pierce the skin
easily, causing injury. Utilize tweezers to pick up cleave or broken
pieces of glass fibers and then on a loop of tape kept for disposal.
2. Packing:
a. The manufacturer(s) and/or vendor(s) shall ship cable on non-
returnable wooden reels. Cable shall be shipped on reels
substantial to withstand reasonable handling and shall be so
designed that the inner end of the cable be accessible but
protected from injury. All ends of the cable shall be sealed to
prevent entrance of moisture and securely fastened to prevent
them from becoming loose during transit. The top and bottom
ends of the cable shall be available for testing. Resident Engineer
or designate may inspect cable reels or storage area upon
request.
3. Required Cable Reel Characteristics and Information:
a. Weather resistance reel tag attached identifying the reel and
cable.
b. The manufacturer’s identification and cable type.
c. Part number of the cable.
d. Cable identification number, which is referenced to the test sheet.
e. Length of Cable.
f. Gross weight.
g. Contract name and number.
h. Date of manufacture.
i. Copy of the factory test attenuation results at 1310nm and
1550nm. Date cable was tested.
j. The reel shall contain an arrow showing the direction in which the
drum should be rolled to gain access to the cable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
k. All ends of the cable shall be sealed to prevent entrance of
moisture.
l. Test tails shall be at least two meters long.
4. Cables shall be inspected by Contractor at time of delivery to the
construction site to assure that no damage was done in shipping and that
the specified cable was received. Every reel shall be inspected by
Contractor for physical damage, such as nails driven into reels, to secure
shipping blocks, lagging, reel covering missing, or cable and seals
missing or damaged. Each reel shall be 100% attenuation tested at 1310
nm and 1550 nm at time of delivery and submitted to the Engineer. All
damaged or rejected cable shall be replaced promptly by Contractor at no
cost to SCRRA.
5. Cables shall be stored at the construction site on solid surfaces, which
shall adequately support the cable reels, but shall be well drained and not
allow accumulation of liquids, oils, or chemicals.
6. The cable reels shall be aligned, and protection provided so as not to
allow the reel flanges to damage other reels. Adequate aisles and
barricades shall provide accessibility but prevent construction equipment
from damaging the cable reels.
7. Cable ends shall be resealed promptly when a length is cut from the reel.
Cable reels shall be properly handled by following the manufacturer’s fork
lift handling illustration that comes with the reel.
8. Handling: Cable drums shall be complete with close fitting wooden
battens to prevent damage to the cable during transit and storage.
9. Acceptance at Site: Drums shall be examined at Contractor’s local site
depot for external damage. Damaged cables will not be accepted. All
test results shall be provided to the Resident Engineer. The Resident
Engineer retains the right to inspect Contractor’s storage facilities.
10. Storage and Protection: Drums shall be stored with flanges upright.
Cable on drums with batten in place will be stored indoors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGNAL FIBER OPTIC CABLE (ARMORED)
A. The application of the signal fiber optic cable shall be as follows:
1. One 24 strand signal fiber optic armored cable shall run continuously
along the right of way as designated within the main conduit duct bank.
This cable, defined as “FS24-1” on the Contract Drawings shall be
referenced as “Signal Fiber Main” throughout the system. This cable
shall be spliced in fiber pull boxes to lateral cables to enter the instrument
enclosures.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
2. One 24 strand signal loopback fiber optic armored cable shall run
continuously along the right of way as designated within the main conduit
duct bank. This cable defined as “FS24-2” on the Contract Drawings
shall be referenced as “Signal Fiber Loopback” throughout the system.
This cable purpose is for redundancy. This FS24-2 cable shall be spliced
only at reel-to-reel ends or spliced to lateral cables at the project ends for
termination/OTDR purposes.
3. Within the FS24-1 and FS24-2 signal fiber optic cable:
a. The blue buffer tube, fibers 1-12, shall be designated for signal
applications.
b. The orange buffer tube, fibers 13-24, shall be designated for
crossing applications.
4. One 24 strand fiber optic armored cable shall be used for lateral access
to instrument enclosures, splicing to FS24-1. These lateral access
cables shall be defined as “FS24LS” (lateral cable for signal application)
or “FS24LX” (lateral cable for crossing application).
5. Within the FS24LS and FS24LX signal fiber optic cable:
a. The blue buffer tube, fibers 1-12, shall be designated for railroad
west adjacent locations.
b. The orange buffer tube, fibers 13-24, shall be designated for
railroad east adjacent locations.
c. Refer to the Vital Fiber Network plans in the Contract Drawings to
determine railroad east and west locations. Contractor shall note
that railroad east and west are not necessarily the same as
geographic east and west.
B. The signal fiber optic armored cable shall be loose tube, gel-free, single jacket,
single armored and contain 24 fiber optic strands. The signal fiber optic armored
cable shall be Corning Altos Lite model number 024EUC-T4101D20 or approved
equivalent. The cable shall be an accepted product of the United States
Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service (RUS) 7 CFR 1755.900 (PE-90).
C. Outdoor Cable Construction:
1. Optical fibers shall be placed inside a loose buffer tube. The nominal
outer diameter of the loose buffer tube shall be 2.5mm. The buffer tube
shall be polyethylene.
2. Each buffer tube shall contain 12 fibers. Buffer tubes shall be resistant to
external forces and shall be meet the buffer tube cold bend and shrink
back requirements of 7 CFR 1755.900.
3. The fiber shall not adhere to the inside of the buffer tube.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
4. Each fiber and each buffer tube shall be distinguishable by means of
color coding in accordance with TIA-598 “Optical Fiber Cable Color
Coding”. The coloring material shall be stable over the temperature
range of the cable, shall not be susceptible to migration, and shall not
affect the transmission characteristics of the optical fibers. Color coded
buffered fibers shall not adhere to one another.
5. The fibers shall be colored with ultraviolet (UV) curable links.
6. Fillers may be included in the cable core to lend symmetry to the cable
cross section where needed. Fillers shall be placed so that they do not
interrupt the consecutive positioning of the buffer tubes. Fillers shall be
nominally 2.5mm in outer diameter.
7. The central member shall consist of a dielectric, glass reinforced plastic
(GRP) rod. The purpose of the central member is to provide tensile
strength and prevent buckling. The central member shall be overcoated
with a thermoplastic when required to achieve dimensional sizing to
accommodate buffer tubes/fillers.
8. Each buffer tube shall be gel-free. Each buffer tube shall contain water
blocking material embedded in the inside wall of the buffer tube for water
blocking protection. The water blocking material shall be non-nutritive to
fungus, electrically non-conductive, and homogenous. It shall also be
free from dirt or foreign matter. This material will preclude the need for
other water blocking materials such a gels, yarns, foams or tapes.
9. The optical fibers shall not require cleaning before placement into a splice
tray.
10. Buffer tubes shall be stranded around the dielectric central member using
the reverse oscillation, or “S-Z”, stranding process.
11. Water swellable yarn(s) shall be applied longitudinally along the central
member during stranding. Water blocking elements shall be applied
uniformly throughout the buffer tube.
12. Two polyester yarn binders shall be applied contra helically with sufficient
tension to secure the buffer tube layer to the dielectric central member
without crushing the buffer tubes. The binders shall be non-hygroscopic,
non-wicking, and dielectric with low shrinkage. A water swellable tape
shall be applied longitudinally around the outside of the stranded
tubes/fillers. A water swellable tape shall be non-nutritive to fungus,
electrically non-conductive, and homogenous. It shall also be free from
dirt and foreign matter.
13. Two ripcords shall be under the steel armor for easy sheath removal.
14. All tensile strength shall be provided by the central member.
15. An armor layer shall be applied directly over the cable core and water
swellable tape. The armor shall be a corrugated steel tape, plastic-
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
coated on both sides for corrosion resistance, and shall be applied
around the cable core and water swellable tape with an overlapping seam
with the corrugations in register. The outer jacket shall be applied over
the corrugated steel tape armor. The outer jacket shall be polyethylene
with a nominal jacket thickness of 1.3mm. The polyethylene shall contain
carbon black to provide ultraviolet light protection and shall promote the
growth of fungus.
16. The polyethylene jacket material shall be as defined by ASTM D1248,
Type II, Class C, Category 4 and Grades J4, E7 and E8.
17. The jacket or sheath shall be free of holes, splits and blisters.
18. The cable jacket shall contain no metal elements and shall be of a
consistent thickness.
19. The maximum pulling tension shall be 2700 N (600 lbf) during installation
and 890 N (200lbf) installed.
20. The minimum bend radius shall be 15 times the cable outside diameter
while under tension and 10 times the cable outside diameter installed.
21. The shipping, storage, and operating temperature range of the cable
shall be -40 degrees C to +70 degrees C. The installation temperature
range of the cable shall be -30 degrees C to +70 degrees C.
D. Cable Identification
1. The cable jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name, date of
manufacture, fiber count, fiber type, flame rating, listing symbol, and
sequential length markings every two feet. The marking shall be in
contrasting color to the cable jacket.
E. Cable Performance Specifications
1. When tested in accordance with FOTP-3, "Procedure to Measure
Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical Cable, and Other
Passive Fiber Optic Components," the change in attenuation at extreme
operational temperatures (-40 degrees C and +70 degrees C) shall not
exceed 0.15 dB/km at 1550 nm for single-mode fiber.
2. When tested in accordance with FOTP-82, "Fluid Penetration Test for
Fluid-Blocked Fiber Optic Cable," a one-meter length of unaged cable
shall withstand a one meter static head or equivalent continuous pressure
of water for one hour without leakage through the open cable end.
3. When tested in accordance with FOTP-81, "Compound Flow (Drip) Test
for Filled Fiber Optic Cable," the cable shall exhibit no flow (drip or leak)
of filling and/or flooding material at 70 degrees C.
4. When tested in accordance with FOTP-41, "Compressive Loading
Resistance of Fiber Optic Cables," the cable shall withstand a minimum
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
compressive load of 220 N/cm (125 lbf/in) applied uniformly over the
length of the sample. The 220 N/cm (125 lbf/in) load shall be applied at a
rate of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) per minute. The load shall be maintained for a
period of 1 minute. The load shall then be decreased to 110 N/cm (63
lbf/in). Alternatively, it is acceptable to remove the 220 N/cm (125 lbf/in)
load entirely and apply the 110 N/cm (63 lbf/in) load within five minutes at
a rate of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) per minute. The 110 N/cm (63 lbf/in) load shall
be maintained for a period of 10 minutes. Attenuation measurements
shall be performed before release of the 110 N/cm (63 lbf/in) load. The
change in attenuation shall not exceed 0.15 dB at 1550 nm for single-
mode fiber.
5. When tested in accordance with FOTP-104, "Fiber Optic Cable Cyclic
Flexing Test," the cable shall withstand 25 mechanical flexing cycles
around a sheave diameter not greater than 20 times the cable diameter.
The change in attenuation shall not exceed 0.15 dB at 1550 nm for
single-mode fiber.
6. When tested in accordance with FOTP-25, "Repeated Impact Testing of
Fiber Optic Cables and Cable Assemblies," except that the number of
cycles shall be two at three locations along a one meter cable length and
the impact energy shall be at least 4.4 Nm (in accordance with ICEA S-
87-640)”, the change in attenuation shall not exceed 0.15 dB at 1550 nm
for single-mode fiber.
7. When tested in accordance with FOTP-33, "Fiber Optic Cable Tensile
Loading and Bending Test," using a maximum mandrel and sheave
diameter of 560 mm, the cable shall withstand a rated tensile load of
2670N (601 lbf) and residual load of 30% of the rated installation load.
The axial fiber strain shall be <= 60% of the fiber proof level after
completion of 60 minute conditioning and while the cable is under the
rated installation load. The axial fiber strain shall be <= 20% of the fiber
proof level after completion of 10 minute conditioning and while the cable
is under the residual load. The change in attenuation at residual load and
after load removal shall not exceed 0.15 dB at 1550 nm for single mode
fiber.
8. When tested in accordance with FOTP-85, "Fiber Optic Cable Twist
Test," a length of cable no greater than 2 meters shall withstand 10
cycles of mechanical twisting. The change in attenuation shall not exceed
0.15 dB at 1550 nm for single-mode fiber.
9. When tested in accordance with FOTP-181, "Lightning Damage
Susceptibility Test for Optic Cables with Metallic Components," the cable
shall withstand a simulated lightning strike with a peak value of the
current pulse equal to 55 kA without loss of fiber continuity. A damped
oscillatory test current shall be used with a maximum time-to-peak value
of 15 μS (which corresponds to a minimum frequency of 16.7 kHz) and a
maximum frequency of 30 kHz. The time to half-value of the waveform
envelope shall be from 40 to 70 μS.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
10. When tested in accordance with FOTP-37, "Low or High Temperature
Bend Test for Fiber Optic Cable," the cable shall withstand four full turns
around a mandrel of <= 20 times the cable diameter after conditioning for
four hours at test temperatures of -30 degrees C and +60 degrees C.
Neither the inner or outer surfaces of the jacket shall exhibit visible
cracks, splits, tears, or other openings. The change in attenuation shall
not exceed 0.30 dB at 1550 nm for single mode fiber.
2.02 HARDWARE GROUNDING KIT FOR ARMORED CABLES
A. All armored fiber optic cable shall be bonded and grounded for the safe and
effective dissipation of unwanted electrical current and to promote personnel and
site safety in accordance with NEC Articles 770.93 and 770.100. The armored
fiber optic cable shall utilize the kits at point of access within the fiber splice
enclosure within the pull box, and within the fiber distribution panel within
instrument enclosures. These points shall be tied to the instrument enclosure
ground buss.
B. The hardware grounding kit utilized within fiber splice enclosure shall be Corning
HDWR-GRND-KIT or approved equivalent. Grounding shall use green #6 AWG
stranded copper.
C. The hardware grounding kit for the fiber distribution panel shall be Corning FDC-
CABLE-GRND or approved equivalent.
D. Bonding is the permanent connection of metallic parts to form an electrical path
that will be conductive and continuous. This is required for underground
tracing/location of fiber optic cable once installed.
E. Grounding is the act of connecting an electrical path to the earth of some
conducting body that serves as the earth. Effective ground is bonded to a
grounded neutral conductor or to a grounding system designed to minimize
hazard to personnel and having resistance to ground low enough to permit
prompt operation of circuit protection devices.
2.03 FIBER SPLICE ENCLOSURE (FSE)
A. The fiber splice enclosure utilized in pull boxes for the signal fiber and the signal
loopback fiber shall be Coyote Pup Closure, 8006661, by Preformed Line
Products or approved equivalent.
B. The fiber splice tray shall be compatible with the Coyote Pup Closure, 80806033,
by Preformed Products or approved equivalent. The splice tray shall support 12
fusion splices.
C. Additional accessories and installation materials include mounting brackets,
sealing materials, port plugs and fusion splice materials.
D. At all times, a separate fiber splice enclosure shall be used for each cable type
when splices are required. Cable types subject to this criterion include: signal
fiber main, signal fiber loopback, and communications fiber.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
E. The fiber splice enclosure shall have the following characteristics:
1. A six (6) port end plate
2. A size that does not exceed 20” L x 10” W x 8” H.
3. Suitable for loose tube fiber and below grade installation applications
4. Includes mounting hardware for pull box vertical (side) wall.
5. Contains a permanent neoprene gasket system requiring no re-entry kits.
6. Contains integrated air valve to confirm integrity of final assembly.
7. RDUP Listed (RUS)
8. Meets or exceeds the test requirements of Telecordia GR-771 CORE.
2.04 FIBER DISTRIBUTION PANEL (FDP)
A. The fiber distribution panel utilized in instrument enclosures shall be Wall
Mountable Connector Housing (WCH), Corning WCH-02P and WCH-04P, or
approved equivalent.
1. WCH-02P shall be utilized in instrument enclosures that require two (2)
cassettes per the Contract Drawings. This will terminate the lateral
cables for signal fiber main cable (FS24-1) only.
2. WCH-04P shall be utilized in instrument enclosures that require four (4)
cassettes per the Contract Drawings. This will terminate the lateral
cables for signal fiber main (FS24-1) and the signal fiber loopback (FS24-
2).
B. At all times, a separate FDP shall be used within the instrument enclosure for
each cable application when terminations are required. Cable applications
subject to this criterion include lateral fiber cables for signal (FS24LS), lateral
fiber cables for crossing (FS24LX), and communication fiber cables.
C. The fiber distribution panel shall have the following characteristics:
1. Wall mountable.
2. Capable of interconnect and cross-connect.
3. Accepts Closet Connector Housing (CCH) cassettes.
4. Lockable transparent jumper side door.
5. Removable strain relief bracket.
6. Segregated cable and fiber slack routing.
7. Preinstalled bubble level to assist installation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
8. Complaint with RoHS 2011/65/EU.
D. The fiber distribution panel shall utilize splice cassette Corning CCH-CS12-3C-
P00RE or approved equivalent.
1. The Splice cassette shall have the following characteristics:
a. Supports 12 fibers, single fiber splicing.
b. Contains factory terminated pigtails.
c. Utilizes single mode OS2 250um fiber, SC Simplex UPC
connectors, with a blue housing color.
d. Cassettes shall be preloaded and pre-routed for quick fusion
splicing.
2.05 OPTICAL FIBER PATCH CORDS FOR SIGNAL AND CROSSING NETWORKS
A. Patch cords shall be utilized to connect the FDP to the Ethernet Switch or to
bypass a location by making an FDP to FDP connection. This may be required
at various stages of commissioning.
1. SC to LC Duplex, Corning part number 045802R512000xM, or approved
equivalent. (replace x with desired length in meters)
2. SC to SC, Corning part number 585802G512000xM, or approved
equivalent. (replace x with desired length in meters)
B. Patch cords shall meet the following characteristics:
1. Zipcord tight-buffered cable colored yellow
2. Typical insertion loss 0.15dB
3. Suitable for general building applications
4. Ceramic ferrule and UPC polish
5. All patch cords shall be factory made and tested. Connectors shall not
be field assembled.
2.06 ETHERNET SWITCH FOR VITAL COMMUNICATIONS
A. The Contractor shall provide an industrially hardened Ethernet switch to interface
with the ElectrologIXS VLC VPM-3 for vital communications between signal or
crossing locations. The unit shall be Siemens supplied RUGGEDCOM RSL910,
Part number 6GK6491-0LB00-2AN1 or approved equivalent.
1. A distinct ring network shall include all locations that utilize a signal
application.
2. A distinct ring network shall include all locations that utilize a crossing
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
application.
3. The switch quantities for each location or installation shall be as shown in
the Contract Drawings.
B. The Ethernet switch shall have the following characteristics:
1. Fully managed with Ethernet over Very high bit rate Digital Subscriber
Line 2 (EoVDSL2) capabilities.
2. The switch shall be designed to operate reliably in electrically and
climatically harsh and demanding environments typically encountered in
Metrolink operations.
3. The switch shall be equipped with six (6) copper Fast Ethernet ports
(10/100Base-Tx); two (2) Gigabit Ethernet Small Form-factor Pluggable
(SFP) uplink ports (1000Base-Lx); and two (2) EoVDSL2 ports with
terminal blocks.
4. Operation at 12VDC, from -40 degrees C to +85 degrees C with no fans.
5. Conformal coated printed circuit boards.
6. 20 AWG galvanized steel enclosure.
7. IP40 ingress protection.
8. Panel mounting kit.
9. The user shall be able to configure the switch as either primary or
secondary (master or slave) when EoVDSL is utilized.
10. Power indication Light Emitting Diode (LED).
11. Alarm indication LED.
12. RS232 port (Universal Serial Bus or USB Type-B and serial).
13. Failsafe alarm relay.
14. Solid green LED to indicate established link.
15. Blinking LED to indicate data transmission activity.
C. The Ethernet switch shall utilize single mode SFP optics. The Contractor shall
determine optics at each location by performing fiber link calculations that
provide a minimum of 6dB system margin. As determined by the fiber link
calculations and system margin criteria, the SFP transceivers shall be selectable
from:
1. Siemens RUGGEDCOM SFP1132-1LX10, part number 6GK6000-
8FG52-0AA0 (with nominal distance of 10 km).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
2. Siemens RUGGEDCOM SFP1132-1LX25, part number 6GK6000-
8FG53-0AA0 (with nominal distance of 25 km).
2.07 OPTICAL TEST AND REPAIR EQUIPMENT
A. The Contactor shall deliver to SCRRA the following optical test and repair
equipment to support the signal fiber network.
B. OTDR and Inspection Meter
1. The OTDR, OTLS and Inspection Meter shall be Fluke OFP2-CFP-QI or
approved equivalent with the following features and elements:
a. Single mode fiber support
b. SC/LC adapters and launch cables
c. Cleaning kits
d. Fiber inspection video probe
e. Mainframe and remote units
f. OTDR module
g. OLTS module
h. Integrated Wi-Fi
i. AC charger
j. Statement of calibration
2. A hardened case, Fluke VERSIV-CASE3 or approved equivalent
C. Fusion Splicer
1. The fusion splicer shall be FiberFox America Mini 6S or approved
equivalent:
a. The fusion splicer shall be a single fiber fusion splicer with an
LCD monitor and touch screen.
b. The fusion splicer shall utilize a core alignment with 300 power
X/Y magnification.
c. The fusion splicer shall have a 16 second heating time and a 12
second splicing time.
d. The fusion splicer shall include a thermal stripper, precision
cleaver, and two (2) batteries.
e. The average splice loss for single mode shall be 0.02dB.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
2.08 SPARE EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall deliver to SCRRA the following spare equipment to support
the signal fiber network.
1. Six (6) Underground Fiber Splice Enclosures
2. Six (6) Ethernet Switches for Vital Communications
3. Twenty (20) SC-SC Optical Patch Cords (2m length)
4. Twenty (20) SC-LC Optical Patch Cords (2m length)
5. Six (6) SFP optics, 10km range
6. Two (2) SFP optics, 25km range
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Signal Fiber Cable
1. Cables shall be tested by the Contractor at time of delivery to the
construction site to assure that no damage was done in shipping and that
the specified cable was received. All damaged or rejected cable shall be
replaced promptly by the Contractor a no additional cost to SCRRA.
2. Cable installation shall be accomplished in accordance with the Resident
Engineer approved Site Specific Work Plan and Cable Installation Plan.
These plans shall incorporate manufacturer’s installation
recommendations and industry best practices. Contractor shall provide
any installation hardware necessary to route, support, terminate, or
protect any cable installation.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the required cable length for
each cable run prior to installation. Plans may be used for defining
locations and estimating cable lengths. However, no Plans shall be used
to determine final lengths and cuts. Actual lengths shall be determined
by the Contractor making on-site inspections and measurements.
4. Cable pulling locations shall be selected to protect the cable on the reel
and in slack loops. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting
cable after working hours where cable installation is not completed during
a single shift.
5. Any damage to the SCRRA signal fiber cable shall be reported to the
Resident Engineer immediately, whether prior to installation, during
installation, during other construction, or during test or observation after
installation. Cable damage due to Contractor negligence shall be
replaced and repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to SCRRA.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
a. If damage occurs, the method of repair or correction of the
damage shall be submitted for written approval from the Engineer.
The Contactor shall submit the proposed repair plan to make
repairs of proposed correction action promptly. OTDR testing of
existing damage shall be submitted as part of the repair proposal.
6. Wire Pulling Lubricant shall be used to reduce tension on the cable
during the installation process. The lubricant shall be compatible with the
cable sheath and not cause damage to the cable.
7. When a winch or pulling machine is used during installation, the
Contractor shall provide a dynamometer and the dynamometer shall be
used to monitor the tension on the cable. The dynamometer shall be
certified as calibrated and shall hold the peak value of the cable pull. The
peak value shall be recorded and forwarded to the Resident Engineer as
part of the installation test data submittals.
8. The Contractor shall provide appropriate special protection for cables in
areas where the cables are unavoidably exposed to hazardous conditions
such as movement, vibration or sharp corners on equipment. To prevent
water from entering the cable, protect bare cable ends by placing a cable
cap, followed by several wraps of tape around the cap.
9. The Contractor shall not exceed the cable's minimum bend radius for
cable under any condition, including but not limited to, under tension or
long-term installation/storage.
10. Continuity of cable shall be maintained between termination or splice
locations shown on the Plans. Additional splices shall not be allowed
without the prior written Resident Engineer approval.
11. All cable entrance openings in equipment enclosures, houses, rooms and
junction boxes shall be sealed with either a compression type fitting or
pliable sealing compound after the cable is in place. Sealing compounds
for rooms, houses, walls, or other partitions shall be fire retardant per
ASTM E814. Sealing compound shall be used to seal the area around
cable where the cable emerges from the end of a conduit, pipe, or duct
bank. All spare conduits shall be sealed.
B. Signal Fiber Cable Slack Storage
1. All pull boxes that contain the signal fiber cable and signal loopback fiber
cable shall be each coiled to provide a service loop (slack) of 150 feet.
2. In areas where the signal fiber cable or signal loopback fiber cable utilize
a fiber splice enclosure, the service loop (slack) shall provide 75 feet of
slack to support each side/direction of the fiber splice enclosure.
3. The signal and crossing lateral cable shall provide a service loop (slack)
of 75 feet.
4. Slack requirements are detailed in the Contract Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
C. Hardware Grounding Kit for Armored Cables
1. The Hardware Grounding Kit shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer recommendations.
2. The Ground Bus shall be installed in pull boxes to provide a close
disconnect for the ground wire when a FSE needs to be removed for
servicing and to prevent multiple FSEs from being physically tied together
by the ground wire. Additional detail is shown in the Contract Drawings.
D. Fiber Splice Enclosure (FSE)
1. The FSE shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations.
2. All fiber cables shall be clearly labeled for identification at the point
leaving the FSE and before entering the duct bank conduit. Refer to
labeling requirements herein for additional detail.
3. All fiber optic splices shall be fusion splices with a splicer equipped with
Local Injection and Detection (LID). The loss across each spliced fiber
shall be less than or equal to 0.10dB. Utilize proper fiber cleaning
procedures.
4. Clean shells and end plates to remove sand, dirt and other foreign
substances.
5. Lubricate the neoprene gasket in the shells with a uniform thin layer to
assure assembly and reentry.
6. Any shell that is damaged shall be replaced.
7. Using the air valve, complete a flash test with a soap and water solution
to a maximum of 10 PSI to determine that the enclosure is properly
sealed. Confirm the pressure with a pressure gauge. Apply the
soap/water solution to all sealed surfaces of the enclosure. Visually
inspect that bubbles are not present, which indicate that the enclosure is
not properly sealed. At the end of the flash test, release the pressure
and reinstall the valve cap.
8. Mount the FSE to the pull box vertical wall to keep the enclosure off the
ground.
E. Fiber Distribution Panel (FDP)
1. The FDP shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations.
2. All fiber cables shall be clearly labeled for identification at the point
entering the FDP and before leaving the signal enclosure conduit. Refer
to labeling requirements herein for details.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
3. Additional labels shall be applied to the FDP outside main door with
identification of “SIGNAL” or “CROSSING” in large font, reflecting the
FDP application. Labels shall also be placed on the panel door indicating
FDP Card Letter and the adjacent railroad west or railroad east location
within the network. An example of this convention for the Signal FDP at
location CP Stuart is “A: 7TH Street” and “B: Church Street”.
4. The central strength member of the cable shall be attached to the FDP
for strain relief. The outer jacket of the cable shall be attached to the
FDP with a cable clamp.
5. All fiber optic splices shall be fusion splices with a splicer equipped with
Local Injection and Detection (LID). The loss across each spliced fiber
shall be less than or equal to 0.10dB. Utilize proper fiber cleaning
procedures.
6. Utilize blank adapter panels to prevent dust entry for any unused slots.
F. Ethernet Switch for Vital Communications
1. The Ethernet Switch shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations.
2. The Ethernet Switch shall be panel mounted.
3. Utilize #16AWG copper wire for terminal block power.
4. Connect the failsafe alarm relay to the ElectrologIXS VLC. Utilize the
normally open wiring.
3.02 LABELS AND TAGGING
A. Install cable identification tags at both ends of each cable, at the entrance and
the exit of each pull box, housing, or fiber splice enclosure. All labels shall be
machine printed.
B. All signal fiber optic cable labels shall utilize an orange colored 2” x 3.5” self-
laminating fiber optic cable tag made of rigid PVC material and a polyester self-
sealing cover. The orange tag shall be resistance to moisture and grease. The
orange tag shall have slotted holes to accept the ties for a secure mounting
application. The orange tag shall be pre-printed “Caution Fiber Optic Cable”.
C. On the orange tag, under the cover, a white color industrial vinyl tape shall be
applied. The vinyl tape shall use a permanent acrylic adhesive and contain a
topcoat for thermal transfer printing. The following labels shall be printed on the
vinyl tape in accordance with the Contract Drawings:
1. Label “T1”
a. Application: Pull box, Signal Fiber Main Cable
b. Template: SIGNAL FIBER
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
SG<Signal Fiber Segment Number>
c. Example: SIGNAL FIBER
SG200
2. Label “T2”
a. Application: Pull box, Signal Fiber Loopback Cable
b. Template: SIGNAL LOOPBACK
SGL<Signal Loopback Fiber Segment Number>
c. Example: SIGNAL LOOPBACK
SGL200
3. Label “T3”
a. Application: Pull box, Signal Fiber Lateral Cable
b. Template: SGV<Vault Milepost>-FSE-FS24-SG<Segment
Number>-LS /
CP<CP Milepost>-FDPSIGNAL
c. Example: SGV66.45-FSE-FS24-SG202-LS /
CP66.45-FDPSIGNAL
4. Label “T4”
a. Application: Pull box, Crossing Fiber Lateral Cable
b. Template: SGV<Vault Milepost>-FSE-FS24-SG<Segment
Number>-LX /
CP<CP Milepost>-FDPXING
c. Example: SGV66.45-FSE-FS24-SG202-LX /
CP66.45-FDPXING
5. Label “T5”
a. Application: Instrument Enclosure, Signal Fiber Lateral Cable
b. Template: CP<CP Milepost>-FDPS-FS24-SG<Segment
Number>-LS /
SGV<Vault Milepost>-FSE-1
c. Example: CP66.45-FDPS-FS24-SG202-LS /
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 20 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
SGV66.45-FSE-1
6. Label “T6”
a. Application: Instrument Enclosure, Crossing Fiber Lateral Cable
b. Template: CP<CP Milepost>-FDPX-FS24-SG<Segment
Number>-LX /
SGV<Vault Milepost>-FSE-2
c. Example: CP66.45-FDPX-FS24-SG202-LX /
SGV66.45-FSE-2
D. The fiber installation plan shall include a spreadsheet of all cable labels
proposed at each location (inside pull boxes and instrument enclosures) for
Engineer approval.
3.03 FIBER TESTING
A. All cables shall be OTDR tested at 1310 nm and 1550 nm for single mode
operating wavelengths for anomalies and to ensure uniformity of cable
attenuation and connection insertion loss.
B. All dark fibers shall be OTDR tested. Dark fiber that is not terminated at an FDP
or spliced through but instead left coiled within the splice tray or splice case shall
be bare fiber OTDR tested. SCRRA shall have a complete test record of all fiber
installed, whether it is used in the design or not.
C. OTDR tests shall be performed utilizing a pulse suppressor such that the FDP
termination shall be shown.
D. All fibers shall be tested in both directions.
E. A launch cable shall be installed between the OTDR and first link connection. A
receive cable shall be installed after the last link connection.
F. Optical Return Loss (ORL) for each link shall be measured.
G. Test limits
1. Reflective events shall not exceed -40dB
2. Connections shall not exceed 0.15dB of attenuation
3. Non-reflective events (splices) shall not exceed 0.2dB
4. Point discontinuities shall not exceed 0.1dB
5. ORL shall be less than -30dB
H. Test Information Required
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 21 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
1. Site/link identification
2. Fiber Number identification
3. Pass/Fail evaluation (with correct test limits applied)
4. Name of the standard selected to execute the stored test results.
5. Cable type and value of the “index of refraction” used for length
calculations.
6. Date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester.
7. Brand name, model, serial number and calibration data of the tester.
8. Insertion loss measured at each wavelength, the test limit calculated for
the corresponding wavelength and the margin (difference between the
measured attenuation and the test limit value).
3.04 NETWORK TESTING
A. Contractor shall present to the Resident Engineer for approval a Signal Fiber
Network Test Plan showing the tests to be made, format and layout of test forms
and reports, and the limiting values to be used, at least 60 days in advance of
the testing.
B. Signal Network Test Requirements
1. The Contractor shall perform all manufacturer’s recommended local and
system equipment testing.
2. Each node and link of the Gigabit Ethernet Signal Network ring shall be
tested for connectivity, throughput and redundancy are part of the larger
network. This testing shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. Verification of 6dB link margin with maximum throughput (99%
packet transmission or better) across each optical link for a
minimum test duration of five (5) minutes.
b. Verification of transmission between copper ports with maximum
throughput (99% packet transmission or better) for a minimum
test duration of two (2) minutes. All copper ports shall be tested.
c. Record the optical link software values of all SFPs and produce a
spreadsheet comparing the link values to the link margin. Provide
explanation for any discrepancies.
d. Record failover time during a protective switch by disabling the
SFP transmitted via software during maximum throughput
transmission for a link.
3. When all testing is completed satisfactorily and prior to cutover,
verification is to be made to ensure the entire network is operational and
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 22 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
in good health.
4. Cutover testing shall be integrated into signal testing.
a. Verification shall be made to ensure that when each fiber patch
cord is disconnected, the failsafe alarm relay produces an
indication on the Local Control Panel Screen and Metrolink
Dispatcher’s Screen.
b. Verification shall be made to ensure that with the loopback portion
of the network operational, when each fiber patch cord is
disconnected on a network switch, all vital remote links remain
healthy, and the signal system remains active.
c. Verification shall be made to ensure that with the loopback
portion of the network disabled, when each fiber patch cord is
disconnected on a network switch, the appropriate vital remote
links fail.
C. Crossing Network Test Requirements
1. The Contractor shall perform all manufacturer’s recommended local and
system equipment testing.
2. Each node and link of the Gigabit Ethernet Crossing Network ring shall
be tested for connectivity, throughput and redundancy are part of the
larger network. This testing shall include but not be limited to the
following:
a. Verification of 6dB link margin with maximum throughput (99%
packet transmission or better) across each optical link for a
minimum test duration of five (5) minutes.
b. Verification of transmission between copper ports with maximum
throughput (99% packet transmission or better) for a minimum
test duration of two (2) minutes. All copper ports shall be tested.
c. Record the optical link software values of all SFPs and produce a
spreadsheet comparing the link values to the link margin. Provide
explanation for any discrepancies.
d. Record failover time during a protective switch by disabling the
SFP transmitted via software during maximum throughput
transmission for a link.
3. When all testing is completed satisfactorily and prior to cutover, the
Contractor shall disable all ports on the Ethernet switch that support local
area devices including unused ports. During cutover, each port shall be
remotely enabled, one port at a time to cutover services incrementally
and observe network health.
4. Cutover testing shall be integrated into crossing testing.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 23 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
a. Verification shall be made to ensure that when each fiber patch
cord is disconnected, the failsafe alarm relay produces an
indication on the Local Control Panel Screen.
b. Verification shall be made to ensure that with the loopback portion
of the network operational, when each fiber patch cord is
disconnected on a network switch, all vital remote links remain
healthy, and the Crossing system remains active.
c. Verification shall be made to ensure that with the loopback
portion of the network disabled, when each fiber patch cord is
disconnected on a network switch, the appropriate vital remote
links fail.
D. Contractor shall become familiar with and comply with SCRRA safety rules as to
safe operation of construction equipment and trains and the protection of
personnel. All safety precautions shall be observed, and any required safety
procedures shall be followed.
E. The Contractor shall provide all calibrated instruments, materials and labor
required for tests specified.
3.05 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK TRAINING
A. The contractor shall provide a comprehensive training program for the signal
fiber network including the following:
1. Passive elements (2 classes, 8 hours)
a. Physical fiber configuration, equipment layouts and labeling
b. Usage of fiber test and repair equipment
c. Maintenance best practices
d. Includes lab time with test and repair equipment
2. Site walk (2 classes, 4 hours)
a. View pull box, duct bank and equipment layouts
3. Active elements (2 classes, 8 hours)
a. Logical signal network configuration, switch configuration and
alarms
b. Logical crossing network configuration, switch configuration and
alarms
c. Maintenance best practices
d. Includes lab time using spare Ethernet switch equipment
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 24 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 25 SIGNAL FIBER NETWORK
B. Training plan
1. The Contractor shall submit a training plan that outlines the proposed
training. Coordination and flexibility with SCRRA availability shall be
required.
a. The passive and active element training shall be located at
SCRRA’s Pomona, CA location. The site walk will be held at a
proposed easily accessible location on the project property.
b. Each training class shall allow up to eight (8) SCRRA individuals
to attend. Contractor shall submit six (6) proposed training dates
that are not consecutive.
c. The resume of each trainer shall be submitted for approval. The
trainer shall be knowledgeable and qualified to teach each area of
training. Multiple trainer resumes shall be submitted if needed.
d. Each training class shall include paper handouts and all materials
on a thumb drive for each student.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Signal Fiber Network will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by
the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans
will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Signal Fiber Network furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule
of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing,
transportation, storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the
Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 25 - 25 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 38
INTERLOCKING CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes requirements for installing, testing, and documenting vital
microprocessor based interlocking controller racks, custom local control panels
(CLCP), and ATCS compliant data radio that provides the functionality shown on
the Contract Plans and described here in.
B. Final application logic programs, including EPROMS, will be furnished by the
Engineer.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 34 42 40 – Solid-State Coded Track Circuits
2. Section 34 42 58 – Signal Systems Testing
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 49, Transportation:
1. Part 236 - Rules, Standards, and Instructions for Railroad Signal System.
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
C. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a narrative explanation of the electrical and/or mechanical methods of
configuration control used to ensure that the application logic software installed is
the correct software for the specific location and that it is the latest version. It
shall explain Contractor’s procedures for handling components of the vital
interlocking controller.
B. Submit certified acceptance reports.
C. Submit five (5) copies of all test reports and verification of tests in accordance with
the approved testing plan.
D. Submit five (5) copies of Shop Drawings for each CLCP faceplate design being
provided for approval of the Resident Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 38 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 38 Interlocking Controls
E. Submit a narrative explanation of Interlocking Controls changes sixty (60) in
advance of any modifications, removals or additions. The narrative shall detail
critical feature changes and provide checksum and CRCs of any application
program changes. These changes include both vital application and Positive Train
Control (PTC) Map file changes.
F. Rack testing of the application software. Rack testing shall mean the software
has been thoroughly tested and all possible conditions simulated using the same
type of Interlocking Control equipment and executive software being provided
under this contract.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Install, configure, and test the interlocking controller and custom local control
panel (CLCP) to conform to the requirements of CFR 49, Part 236, AREMA C&S
Manual Parts 2.2.10 and 8.1.2 and the manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Perform operational testing of the equipment in accordance with the requirements
specified in 34 42 58, Signal System Testing.
C. All Interlocking Controls furnished under this Work shall be equipped with a PTC
Wayside Interface Unit (WIU) and be compatible with the existing Metrolink PTC
network. Interlocking Controls shall not require any additional interfacing
equipment beyond what Metrolink currently uses.
D. Contractor furnished software and components shall be new, manufacturer
certified, and the latest SCRRA approved version.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package plug in modules for shipment separately from their card cage units using
ESD safe packaging. Protect each item from damage or loss during handling and
shipment.
B. Clearly identify each controller unit, LCP, and their associated components on the
packing crate, referencing its intended location.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty from defects for two (2) years from the first date of final
acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Solid State Microprocessor Interlocking Controller.
1. Controller shall be an ElectrologIXS Vital Logic Controller (VLC)
manufactured by ALSTOM.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 38 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 38 Interlocking Controls
2. The interlocking controller shall be capable of operating 12 VDC vital and
non-vital relays. A minimum of 8 vital inputs and six (6) vital outputs shall
be grouped on a single I/O module.
3. The vital lamp driver module provided to operate wayside signal lamps
shall be capable of directly driving a minimum of 16 each 10 VDC, 18 watt
or 25 watt lamps through isolated lamp driver outputs for on, off, and
flashing. Flashing shall be at a nominal rate of 55 flashes per minute.
Controller shall provide tumble - down indications based upon light out
detection using both hot and cold filament checking.
4. Controller chassis shall be designed to house a minimum of nine (9)
modules. Three (3) slots shall be reserved for modules that control and
process vital and non-vital application logic and communications. The
remaining slots shall be designed to house any user defined configuration
of input/output, lamp driver, and operating modules.
5. Plug connectors shall be keyed for each module type to ensure only the
proper module can be connected.
6. The interlocking controller shall have the capacity to directly connect, via a
cable, to a chassis that will generate and receive Electro Code 4 and
Electro Code 5 track codes without use of relay interfacing.
7. The interlocking controller must be capable passing vital data, via a serial
connection, to existing VHLC units utilized on SCRRA properties.
8. The software associated with assuring the vitality of the system shall be an
inherent part of the basic controller system and shall not be accessible
for modification by the user. Changes to the application logic installed in
the system shall not require re-verification of the software associated with
assuring system vitality. The application logic shall be protected so that it
is user modifiable by authorized personnel only.
9. The program compiler used in developing the site-specific application logic
software shall be designed to allow the user to construct individual
equation logic equations utilizing “ladder-logic” display elements. Reports
generated by the compiler shall provide the user with a complete and
detailed description of the system configuration including, but not limited
to, module location assignments, internal timer settings, auxiliary
input/output assignments, vital lamp output assignments, CTC control and
indication bit assignments, electronic track code circuit assignments, data
recorder equation selection, remote input/output assignments, and module
plug-connector pin assignments.
10. The interlocking controller shall provide event recording. The event
recording shall be designed so that the correct time is maintained when
the vital logic and/or code system equipment is reset or powered down.
The event recording equipment shall have sufficient storage capacity to
store a minimum of seventy-two (72) hours of events, without overwrite, at
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 38 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 38 Interlocking Controls
the interlocking, recording user selected status changes along with
diagnostically important internal status changes.
11. The interlocking controller shall provide mitigation for "processor failure"
via a fall back relay.
12. The interlocking controller shall interface with the solid-state track circuit
detailed in Section 34 42 40, Solid -State Coded Track Circuits.
13. The failure of an output shall not cause loss of functions not associated
with those of the failed module.
14. The interlocking controller shall operate from a standard 12 VDC signal
battery supply. Any special power supply filtering devices required for
reliable operation shall be provided as part of the system.
15. The interlocking controller shall, at a minimum, enable a user to generate
the following reports:
a. Configuration report that, at a minimum, indicates controller
location, revision history, controller/software identification (chassis
identification), chassis slot assignments, application software
identification (EPROM CRC/checksum), each vital and non-vital
input/output assignment and nomenclature, each lamp driver vital
output assignment and nomenclature, track code input/output
assignment and nomenclature, serial and remote input/output
assignment and nomenclature, vital timer configuration and time
settings, and equation data recorder logging assignments.
b. Logic equation report that displays all application logic equations in
a ladder-logic format.
c. Cross-reference report that displays all status names used in each
logic equation.
d. Revision history report.
e. Real-time data logging that displays, on a user furnished computer
display, changes in logic equation status.
B. Custom Local Control Panel (CLCP)
1. Local Control Panel (LCP) shall be a Custom Local Control Panel (CLCP).
CLCP and shall be furnished as shown on the Contract Drawings.
2. The track display shall conform to the Contract Drawings.
3. The LCP shall be located on the equipment rack and shall permit
convenient use. The faceplate track, switch, and signal layout shall
conform to the Contract Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 38 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 38 Interlocking Controls
4. The LCP shall be mounted on a metallic enclosure. The faceplate shall be
hinge mounted to provide front access to rear of faceplate and terminals
mounted within metallic enclosure. The design and construction of the
enclosure shall be dust-tight.
5. The LCP faceplate shall be constructed of anodized aluminum. The panel
face shall be etched or silk-screened with a track diagram of the
interlocking along with a symbol for each interlocking signal. Lettering shall
be etched or silk-screened on the faceplate to identify switch and signal
numbers as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The track plan shall be
arranged to orient railroad east toward the right side of the panel.
6. Indication LED’s and control push-buttons shall be as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
7. A three-position, key-operated turn lever shall be provided on the face of
the panel as shown on the Contract Drawings.
8. The LCP control board shall have the ability to communicate via RS-232,
RS-485, 2000 Vrms isolated Current Loop and Ethernet, with support for
Ansaldo PEER protocol and Alstom LCP protocol.
9. The LCP shall operate from a standard 12 VDC signal battery supply. Any
special power supply filtering devices required for reliable operation shall
be integrated as part of the system and be compliant with AREMA
Wayside Class C requirements.
10. Contractor shall program and/or configure the LCP to provide manual
control, allow CTC control, or function as indication only.
11. The local control panel board shall be capable of being configured via a
USB port.
12. The local control panel board shall provide 128 physical inputs and 128
physical outputs, unless otherwise specified on the Contract Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ensure that test and specialized installation equipment recommended by the
manufacturer to make any readings or adjustments is in the Contractor’s
possession and within the project limits a minimum of 30 days prior to installation.
3.02 APPLICATION LOGIC
A. The Engineer shall furnish the application logic programs 90 days prior to
performing in-service tests. The Contractor’s Signal Engineer shall rack test the
application logic at the SCRRA office in Pomona, CA. The Engineer shall observe
the testing and shall make any modifications required to ensure the integrity and
functionality desired.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 38 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 38 Interlocking Controls
B. All time spent by the Contractor’s Signal Engineer in rack testing or making
modifications to the programs shall be at no additional cost to SCRRA. SCRRA
shall not be responsible for any work delays that may result from software
modifications made during final in-service testing and commissioning by the
Contractor.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Wire and install the microprocessor-interlocking controller and the LCP in
accordance with rack layout provided in the Contract Plans.
B. Load all programmable and configurable modules with application software and
perform any configuration necessary.
C. Conduct a complete breakdown and operating test on the units prior to shipment.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conduct tests as specified in AREMA C&S Manual Parts 2.4.1 and 7.4.1 to
ensure proper operation of the signal and grade crossing warning systems.
B. Conduct tests to ensure that the signal system conforms to CFR 49, Part 236.
C. Install and perform applicable tests in accordance with 34 42 58, Signal System
Testing, to ensure that the interlocking controller software and LCP has been
installed and made operational as part of the operating signal system. Verification
of such tests shall be provided to the Resident Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall conduct all tests as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Testing, including pre-testing, shall include operating all switch machines and
lighting all signals. The use of lamp simulators in lieu of, or in parallel with, signal
lamps will not be allowed in pre-testing. An exception may be authorized by the
Resident Engineer where a signal or switch machine is in service and will be
reconfigured for final cutover or cannot be installed or wired until final cutover.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 38 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 40
SOLID-STATE CODED TRACK CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for furnishing, installing, testing, and
documenting solid-state track circuit elements.
B. Final application logic programs, including EPROMS, will be furnished by the
Engineer.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. Section 34 42 38 – Interlocking Control
2. Section 34 42 58 – Signal Systems Testing
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 49, Transportation:
1. Part 236 - Rules, Standards, and Instructions for Railroad Signal System
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communication and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
C. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a narrative explanation of the electrical and/or mechanical methods of
configuration control used to ensure that the application logic software installed
is the correct software for the specific location and that it is the latest version. It
shall explain Contractor’s procedures for handling components of the solid-state
track circuit equipment.
B. Submit certified acceptance reports.
C. The Contractor shall submit to the Resident Engineer five (5) printed copies of
all test reports and certify that all applicable tests have been made in
accordance with Section 34 42 58, Signal Systems Testing.
D. Submit a narrative explanation of Solid-State Coded Track Circuits changes
sixty (60) in advance of any modifications, removals or additions. The narrative
shall detail critical feature changes and provide checksum and CRCs of any
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 40 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 40 Solid-State Coded Track Circuits
application program changes. These changes include both vital application and
Positive Train Control (PTC) Map file changes.
E. Rack test the application software. Rack testing shall mean that the software
has been thoroughly tested and all possible conditions simulated using the
same type of Solid-State Coded Track Circuits equipment and executive
software being provided under this contract.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Install, configure, and test the solid-state track circuit equipment in accordance with
all applicable requirements of CFR 49, Part 236,AREMA C&S Manual, Part 8.1.2
and the manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Perform operational testing of the equipment in accordance with the requirements
specified in Section 34 42 58, Signal System Testing.
C. All Solid-State Coded Track Circuits furnished under this Work shall be
equipped with a PTC Wayside Interface Unit (WIU) and be compatible with the
existing Metrolink PTC network. Solid-State Coded Track Circuits shall not
require any additional interfacing equipment beyond what Metrolink currently
uses.
D. Contractor furnished software and components shall be new, manufacturer
certified, and the latest SCRRA approved version.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package plug in modules for shipment separately from their card cage units
using ESD safe packaging. Protect each item from damage or loss during
handling and shipment.
B. Clearly identify each controller unit and their associated components on the
packing crate, referencing its intended location.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty from defects for two (2) years from the first date of final
acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Electronic track circuits shall be compatible with highway grade crossing constant
warning devices. Utilization of bi-directional, uni-directional, and auxiliary crossing
control functions shall be provided per Contract Plans and manufacturer's
specifications. Track filters shall be installed in track leads, as shown on the
Contract Plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 40 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 40 Solid-State Coded Track Circuits
B. Where new equipment is to be furnished and installed in existing locations, the
equipment furnished shall be the same make as called for in the Contract
Documents.
C. Track circuit shall function to provide continuous train detection throughout the
length of the circuit whenever a shunt of 0.06 ohms is applied to the rails, including
applicable fouled turnouts.
D. Furnish any specialized test or calibration instruments, equipment, or tools that
may be needed to test and place in-service the equipment installed under this
Section, as shown on the Contract Plans. Ensure all test and diagnostic
equipment is in the Contractor’s possession and within the project limits a
minimum of 30 days prior to installation.
E. Install Electro Code 5, with Alternating Code 5, manufactured by ALSTOM.
F. Provide a solid-state electronic coded track signal system to determine block
occupancy and to pass signal aspect information from one interlocking or signal
location to the next. The system referenced herein is Electro Code 5 (EC-5).
G. The electronic coded track circuit shall be user programmable to provide
application logic changes as needed. The application program shall be specified
on the release. The Contractor shall furnish executive programs specified with
each electronic coded track circuit system.
H. The electronic coded track circuit unit shall be configurable for
transmission/reception of the track circuit and signal codes over the track.
I. The coded track circuit unit shall have available a minimum of six (6) discrete
code rates for vital signaling indication in addition to a code rate used for train
detection. An additional code rate shall be available for reversal of the code
transmission/reception signal orientation. Track circuit shall have two (2) codes
used to convey non-vital block information. Electrocode IV code rates are
presently used on Metrolink with Alternating Code 5. Coded Track Circuit must
be able to communicate on the rails with existing Electrocode without requiring
any interface equipment.
J. Event recorder modules for electronic track circuits shall be provided as shown
on the Contract Plans.
K. Electronic coded track circuits shall conform to the requirements of the AREMA
Signal Manual, Section 8.1.2, where these instructions and requisites are
applicable and do not conflict with these Specifications.
L. Conduct acceptance testing of components before transporting from the
warehouse and installing. Provide certified acceptance reports at time of
delivery.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 40 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 40 Solid-State Coded Track Circuits
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ensure that test and specialized installation equipment recommended by the
manufacturer to make any readings or adjustments is in the Contractor’s
possession and within the project limits a minimum of 30 days prior to installation.
3.02 APPLICATION LOGIC
A. The Engineer shall furnish the application logic programs 90 days prior to
performing in-service tests. The Contractor’s Signal Engineer shall rack test the
application logic at the SCRRA office in Pomona, CA. The Engineer shall
observe the testing and shall make any modifications required to ensure the
integrity and functionality desired.
B. All time spent by the Contractor’s Signal Engineer in rack testing or making
modifications to the programs shall be at no additional cost to SCRRA. SCRRA
shall not be responsible for any work delays that may result from software
modifications made during final in-service testing and commissioning by the
Contractor.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install solid-state coded track circuits at locations indicated on the Contract Plans.
B. Install the solid-state track circuit equipment in signal instrument shelters or cases
as shown on Contract Plans.
C. The solid-state track circuit equipment layouts shall provide for easy access to test
points, indicators, and adjustments.
D. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's installation and
adjustment procedures.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conduct tests as specified in AREMA C&S Manual Parts 2.4.1, 3.3.1, and 7.4.1 to
ensure proper operation of the signal and grade crossing systems.
B. Conduct tests to ensure that the signal system conforms to CFR 49, Part 236.
C. Install and perform applicable tests in accordance with 34 42 58, Signal System
Testing, to ensure that the Solid-State Coded Track Circuits software has been
installed and made operational as part of the operating signal system.
Verification of such tests shall be provided to the Resident Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall conduct all tests as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Testing, including pre-testing, shall include operating all switches and lighting all
signals. The use of lamp simulators in lieu of, or in parallel with, signal lamps will
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 40 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 40 Solid-State Coded Track Circuits
not be allowed in pre-testing. An exception may be authorized by the Resident
Engineer where a signal or switch is in service and will be reconfigured for final
cutover or cannot be installed or wired until final cutover.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items
and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for
Work of this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 40 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 42
SIGNAL LAYOUTS, STRUCTURES, AND FOUNDATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work of this Section shall include disassembling, relocating and installing
existing or new signals.
B. Signal layouts, as specified herein, shall consist of foundations, signal heads and all
structures including cantilevers, bridges, ground mounted masts, ladders, platforms,
and all mounting hardware required to construct signals.
C. Contractor shall furnish and install signals as shown on the Contract Plans at
existing and new signal locations.
D. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete
2. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork
3. Section 34 42 58 – Signal System Testing
4. Section 34 42 60 – Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
1.02 REFERENCES
A. A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO):
1. LTS-4 Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,
Luminaries and Traffic Signals
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA)
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual)
C. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
D. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA)
1. Part 1910 Subpart D “Walking-Working Surfaces”
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 42 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 42 Signal Layout, Structures, and Foundations
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Custom Signal Foundation Structures: Provide for the foundation structure type
selection and its design. The design of the signal foundation’s structure and
stability shall be in accordance with the AASHTO LTS-4. Design calculations
shall be prepared by a licensed California professional civil engineer with a
minimum of 5 years experience in the design of similar foundation structures.
B. Signal aspect shall be distinct and unmistakable when viewed from a height of 7
to 12 feet above top of rail at a distance of 1,000 feet. Nominal sighting distance
shall be 2,000 feet. Where unobstructed sighting distance for a standard signal
arrangement is less than 2,000 feet, supply and install color light LED signal and
adjust the signal head for the maximum sighting range possible. Provide the
Engineer written notification of any sighting problems or obstructions of signals..
C. Signal foundations not requiring customization shall be in accordance with the
applicable Metrolink Engineering Standards.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings for each type of signal unit and each type of signal layout
to the Engineer for approval. Show all ladders, masts, bases, arms, signal heads
and required mounting hardware. Show location and method of mounting the
signals to the structure.
1. Provide necessary dimensions, hardware, method of mounting signal
structures, and material specifications for all items to be furnished.
B. Submit Shop Drawings for each type of structure foundation.
C. Submit Installation Procedure for approval by the Engineer. The procedure shall
include a detailed description of installation activity and sufficient detail to allow
the Engineer to determine the validity of the installation procedure.
D. Submit design calculations for signal cantilever or signal bridge foundations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Signals, structures, and related hardware shall meet the requirements of AREMA
C&S Manual, Section 7, and applicable portions of Manual Part 3.2.5 where they do
not conflict with any requirements specified herein.
B. Inspect each signal layout after it has been installed in the field. This inspection
shall conform to the Contractor's Installation Procedure as accepted by the
Engineer.
C. L.E.D. signal lamp units shall meet the requirements of the AREMA C&S Manual
Part 7.1.5.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 42 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 42 Signal Layout, Structures, and Foundations
D. Foundations shall meet all requirements of AREMA C&S Manual Parts 14.1.1
through 14.4.41, where requirements of the AREMA Specifications do not conflict
with any requirements specified herein.
E. The Engineer reserves the right to make inspections and tests, as necessary, to
determine if the equipment meets the requirements of this Specification.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package LED’s separately from the signal in which they will be used during
shipment.
B. Contractor shall ensure that all wayside signal assemblies and signal lamp units are
safely stored and protected from damage during storage, handling and transporting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Furnish LED color light signals, as indicated in the Contract Documents. Signals
shall be in accordance with the Metrolink Engineering Standards.
B. Color light signal units shall be capable of displaying three aspects: green, yellow
and red as shown on SCRRA ES8525-01.
C. Furnish signal masts, signal cantilevers and signal bridges, as applicable, in
accordance withthe Metrolink Engineering Standards.
D. Furnish mounting brackets for marker light assemblies, ladders, junction boxes,
housings, backgrounds, hoods and any other nuts, bolts, and associated hardware.
E. Furnish foundations for signal masts, signal cantilevers and signal bridges, as
applicable, in accordance withthe Metrolink Engineering Standards.
F. Install blank-out cover plates in all unused lamp units.
2.02 SIGNALS
A. Signal mounting shall conform to the Metrolink Engineering Standards.
B. Signal LEDs shall be products specified in the Contract Documents or an
approved equal.
C. Signal LEDs shall be GE Lighting Solutions RM4 Series 96 LED Wayside Color
Light units, or approved equal.
D. Signal LEDs shall function with 12 VDC relay logic or directly from lamp driver
modules within an ElectrologIXS, Vital Harmon Logic Controller, Electrocode 4,
or Electrocode 5 controller. The LEDs shall be capable of light-out detection
checks performed by solid state equipment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 42 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 42 Signal Layout, Structures, and Foundations
2.03 SIGNAL MASTS
A. Mast assemblies for ground mounting shall conform to the Contract Plans and
the Metrolink Engineering Standards.
2.04 SIGNAL BRIDGES AND CANTILEVERS
A. Refer to the Contract Drawings for signal bridge and signal cantilever
requirements.
B. The junction box shall have two terminals with insulated test links, as specified in
Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products, for each cable
conductor. Provide ten (10) percent spare terminals.
C. Cable entry to the junction box shall be direct from the signal structure. External
conduit construction is not acceptable. Provide an opening approximately four by
six inches near the base of the signal structure under each junction box location
to allow access for cable sealing at the foundation. Provide bolt-on access plate
which will cover the opening under normal conditions.
D. Locate junction box either at the base of a main support mast or on a main
support mast at a height of between 3 and 5 feet above the finished grade level
at the base.
E. The method of routing cables from the junction box to each signal mounted on
the structure shall be to route the cables within the tubular members of the
structure to the greatest extent possible. Pull cables entirely through the
structure members, mast, and signal mounting brackets, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer. To facilitate this, provide appropriate pull box
locations as needed, located a maximum of 5 feet from each signal. Edges shall
be smooth and rounded to accommodate cable installation. Provide a means to
prevent entry of rodents and insects at the bases of the vertical masts without
cable entrances.
1. Use galvanized rigid steel conduit where wire is to be run external to the
structural members, except as noted.
2. Use flexible armored conduit to make the connection from the pull box to
the individual signal heads.
3. Use 5C #10 signal color coded cable for mast and jct. box wiring, type TC
Okonite 202-10-35-05 or an approved equal.
2.05 SIGNAL FOUNDATIONS
A. Furnish galvanized steel foundations complete with galvanized bolts, washers,
nuts, and associated hardware. Galvanizing shall conform to Specifications
Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products, and AREMA Signal
Manual, Part 15.3.1.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 42 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 42 Signal Layout, Structures, and Foundations
B. Construct galvanized steel foundations of steel angle and plate welded together.
Foundations shall be constructed of 2-1/2 inch by 2-1/2 inch by 1/4-inch steel
angle and 1/4 inch steel plate.
C. Bolt spacing shall be to manufacturer's standards for the equipment to be
supported by the foundation.
D. Concrete Foundations: Cast-in-place in accordance with Section 03 31 00,
Structural Concrete, or precast concrete as manufactured by Dixie Precast or an
approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - SIGNALS
A. Contractor shall install signal layouts in locations as indicated on the Contract Plans
and as shown on the accepted Shop Drawings. No part of any signal layout shall
conflict with Metrolink Engineering Standards, Code of Federal Regulations, Part
49, or CPUC rules and regulations.
B. Locate signals centered between insulated joint, except where physically not
possible. In such instances, submit a recommendation to the Engineer for approval.
C. Center line of signal mast shall be 15 feet 0 inches from centerline of track unless a
deviation from this is approved by the Engineer, as shown on the Contract Plans or
required to meet CPUC clearance requirements.
D. Install signal units level and plumb on their foundations. Leveling nuts shall be used
as shown on the Metrolink Engineering Standards.
E. Install signal layouts in accordance with the applicable requirements of AREMA
Signal Manual, Part 7.4.1 and the Metrolink Engineering Standards.
F. Install platforms for each signal unit level.
G. Align signals for maximum viewing distance before placing in service.
H. Refer to Design Requirements herein regarding signal aspect and sighting
distances. Install signals and verify sighting distances. Provide the Engineer
written notification of any sighting problems or obstructions of signals.
I. Mount signal heads on an offset arm as shown in the Metrolink Engineering
Standards. Signal heads shall also be able to swivel on the offset arm and be
adjustable.
J. Signal nomenclature shall be as shown on the Contract Plans and in accordance
with Metrolink Engineering Standard 8130.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 42 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 42 Signal Layout, Structures, and Foundations
K. The underground cable shall be dressed, pot headed, tagged, and terminated in the
signal junction box in accordance with Metrolink Engineering Standard 8210. The
conductor size of the underground cables shall be at least as large as that shown in
the Contract Plans.
L. Wiring from the junction box base to the signal heads shall be minimum No. 10
AWG copper stranded wire or larger as shown on the Contract Plans.
M. Install identification tags on each wire. These tags shall bear the nomenclature
shown on the accepted Shop Drawings.
N. Set lamp voltage between 8.8 volts and 9.2 volts measured at the signal lamp.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SIGNAL BRIDGES AND CANTILEVERS
A. Signal bridges and cantilevers shall be installed as shown on Contract Plans.
3.03 INSTALLATION - FOUNDATIONS
A. Install each foundation in accordance with the approved Contractor’s Installation
Procedure for each type of foundation, as herein specified, and as shown on the
Contract Plans. The absence of a specific task listing herein does not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for providing a complete and functional installation.
B. Refer to Section 31 20 00, Earthwork, for requirements for locating and protecting
existing utilities. Advise the Engineer immediately if any utility or cable interferes
with the foundation work. After locating an interference, allow 72 hours for the
Engineer to relocate or mitigate the interference.
C. Prior to placing steel foundations in the excavations, place and compact a crushed
stone base in accordance with Section 31 20 00, Earthwork.
D. When placing foundations, exercise care and ensure that anchor bolts are not bent
or threads damaged. Protect anchor bolt threads, washers, and nuts by applying
friction tape or other accepted method satisfactory to the Engineer, until the unit to
be supported is installed.
E. After backfilling foundations, ensure that the foundation is plumb and level. Where
galvanized steel foundations are installed, top of final grade shall be no more than
24 inches below top of foundation.
F. Install foundations to the lines, grades and dimensions required. Mounting bolts
shall be of sufficient length to accommodate use of leveling nuts between the base
of the equipment to be supported and the top of the foundation.
3.04 PAINTING
A. Touch up any damaged painted finish.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 42 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 42 Signal Layout, Structures, and Foundations
3.05 FIELD TESTS
A. Make tests for proper operation and setting of lamp operating voltages in
accordance with Section 34 42 58, Signal System Testing.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Signal Layout, Structures and Foundations will be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on
the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as
applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Signal Layout, Structures and Foundations furnished and completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit
Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include
full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 42 42
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 42 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 43
ELECTRIC SWITCH LOCK LAYOUTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes requirements for Electric Switch Lock Layouts.
B. Refer to Division 34, Transportation, for track construction requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA)
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual)
B. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit installation drawings showing the tie straps and the mounting details of the
switch circuit controller, including the connections to the track switch points and
switch stand being used for the Work.
B. Submit copies of all field-test reports.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prior to installation, coat all parts of the Electric Switch Lock Layout that are not
painted or made of non-corroding material with approved grease to prevent
corrosion. Appropriately plug or cap unused threaded outlets.
B. During storage, lubricate and maintain Electric Switch Lock and switch circuit
controller layouts on a regular time program until installation. The Resident
Engineer shall have the right to monitor the Contractor’s compliance with this
maintenance required from time to time.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Furnish new Low Style Electric Lock Operating Mechanisms and layouts, such as G
& B Specialties Model 854 or Alstom Model 9B.
B. Furnish new High Style Electric Lock Mechanisms and layouts, such as Alstom
Model 9B or US&S Model SL6A.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 43 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 43 Electric Switch Lock Layouts
C. Rods and Hardware. Each Low Style Electric Switch Lock shall securely lock the
switch hand throw lever in the normal position only. Provide a single color LED with
the assembly to indicate switch lock release. Each High Style Electric Lock shall
have a separate lock rod attached to the vertical front rod.
D. Junction Boxes. Each Electric Switch Lock layout shall be installed with an
individual pedestal mounted junction box. These junction boxes shall be as
specified in Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products.
E. Electrical Fittings. All conduit, connectors, and electrical fittings, as required for
each electrical lock layout.
F. Switch Circuit Controller and Rod. Switch circuit controller layouts shall be installed
as specified in Section 34 42 50, Switch Circuit Controller
G. Stranded Wire. Furnish insulated No. 10 AWG stranded wire between the
pedestal-mounted junction box and the switch circuit controller. Insulated wire shall
be in accordance with Section 34 42 16, Signal Wires and Cables.
2.02 SECURITY
A. Provisions shall be made for the use of standard padlocks:
1. A switch padlock to restrict entry into the operating handle location of the
Electric Switch Lock.
2. Signal padlocks to restrict entry into the Electric Switch Lock operating
mechanism, the circuit controller, and the junction box.
B. Padlocks will be furnished by SCRRA.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform Contractor’s acceptance test of each Electric Switch Lock layout prior to
transporting the Electric Switch Lock layout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The circuits for Electric Switch Lock layouts shall be shown on the Contract
Drawings.
B. Mount and adjust the complete switch circuit controller layout as specified herein
and as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install two 16-foot long timber ties or concrete ties for mounting the Electric Switch
Lock where Alstom Model 9B or US&S Style SL-6A Electric Locks are used and
furnished by the Contractor, as shown on the Contract Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 43 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 43 Electric Switch Lock Layouts
B. Mount Electric Switch Lock and switch circuit controller on new and existing timber
or concrete ties in conformance to Metrolink Engineering Standards.
C. Dap and drill timber ties to meet requirements of these Specifications. Limit of
cutting or dapping shall not exceed 2 inches.
D. Secure the Electric Switch Lock and switch circuit controller to the switch ties, by
3/4 inch by 10 1/2 inch bolts.
E. Remove any ballast necessary for the installation of the Electric Switch Lock layout
and replace and tamp the ballast after the installation has been completed. Spread
excess ballast evenly between ties in the vicinity of the switch and lock movement
layout.
F. Make a preliminary adjustment of the Electric Switch Lock and switch circuit
controller layout at the time of installation, and a final adjustment when placing it in
service, which shall result in the adjusting nuts being centered on the threads plus
or minus 30 percent of the thread length. Make final adjustment at the time of
functional test. Make final adjustments in conformance with the requirements of
AREMA C&S Manual, Parts 12.5.5 and 2.4.1.
G. Underground cable terminating in the Electric Switch Lock and switch circuit
controller junction boxes shall be dressed and pot headed as specified in Section
34 42 16, Signal Wires and Cables. Fan the individual conductors in a neat
workmanlike manner, properly tagged and terminated. Wiring between switch
junction box and Electric Switch Lock and switch circuit controller shall be No. 10
AWG insulated stranded flex wire. These wires shall also be tagged and
terminated. Install the wires between the Electric Switch Lock and switch circuit
controller mechanisms in an approved flexible conduit with a minimum length of 10
inches and a maximum length of 21 inches. Fasten this flexible conduit to the
switch junction box and switch mechanism with appropriate connectors.
H. After installation, properly lubricate and maintain Electric Switch Lock and switch
circuit controller layouts on a regular timed program until accepted by the Resident
Engineer.
I. Exercise care and ensure that the Electric Switch Lock and switch circuit
controllers, including switch tie plates, are thoroughly lubricated at all lubricating
points, that all machined surfaces susceptible to rusting, both external and internal,
are thoroughly coated with grease as acceptable to the Resident Engineer, and that
threaded portions of switch rods and nuts are similarly coated and protected.
J. Lubricate the switch tie plates with graphite lubricant, as acceptable to the Resident
Engineer. Thoroughly steam clean the plates to remove all oil or grease prior to
application of the graphite. Periodically renew the protective coating until such time
as Metrolink assumes responsibility for maintenance of the equipment.
K. Connect electric switch lock rod and switch circuit controller rods to the normally
closed switch point.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 43 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 43 Electric Switch Lock Layouts
L. Any switch assembly which is connected to the open point side, or which has a
reverse switch indication shall be equipped with an insulated front rod in
accordance with Metrolink Engineering Standard 8650.
3.03 SECURITY
A. Install SCRRA furnished padlocks.
3.04 TOUCH-UP
A. Touch-up finish of all equipment described in this Section in accordance with the
AREMA C&S Manual, Part 1.5.10. Touch up shall match factory finish.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each Electric Switch Lock after it has been installed and correct any
deficiencies noted. Conduct this inspection in conformance with the requirements
of the Contractor’s Installation Procedure as accepted by the Resident Engineer.
B. Conduct the final operational tests of Electric Switch Lock Layouts and switch
circuit controllers as described in Section 34 42 58, Signal System Testing.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Electric Switch Lock Layout will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Electric Switch Lock Layout furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 43 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 44
RELAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for relays. Unless indicated as relocated on the
Contract Plans, relays shall be Contractor furnished and relays of each type shall
be uniform in design and contact assembly.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements
2. Section 34 42 58 – Signal System Testing
3. Section 34 42 60 – Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
B. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall provide acceptance testing and documentation for each relay when
it is transported from the warehouse to the job site.
B. Submit sample relay identification tag, including method of mounting proposed.
C. Complete Test Report Form provided by the Engineer for each vital relay installed
under this Contract. Use typewritten characters to fill in all information requested on
the form.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Vital relays shall meet the requirements of AREMA C&S Manual Part 6.2.1, where
they do not conflict with any requirements specified herein. Vital Relays shall be of
the type and quality as designated in the Metrolink Engineering Standards 8110
and 8120.
B. Factory testing of each relay shall be the manufacturer’s standard.
C. Provide relay specifications including drop away, pick up and working values, any
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 44 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 44 Relays
special mounting or supporting arrangements, and contact stacking arrangements,
for all relay types to be furnished under this Contract. Include any arc suppression
where arc suppression is required.
D. Before any relay is used, obtain the Engineer's written acceptance. Acceptance will
be based on the test results and the proper completion of the Test Report Form.
E. The Metrolink Engineering Standards depict acceptable relays in use. If the
Contractor proposes use of alternate relays not listed, and those alternate relays
have been approved by the Resident Engineer, the Contractor shall submit
manuals with comprehensive descriptions and illustrations of each type of alternate
relay provided. The Contractor shall provide four relay manuals, four copies of relay
specifications, and calibration sheets for each type of alternate relay furnished.
F. The Contractor shall provide field test reports indicating each relay furnished has
conformed to the manufacturer’s specifications and the relay conforms to CFR 49
Part 234 and Part 236 requirements. The use of type written characters shall be
used to fill in all information requested on the form.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship vital relays separately from the wired racks in which they are to be used.
Package relays individually; each in a sturdy corrugated cardboard carton with
the part number of the relay printed on the outside of the carton. Store relays in
a protected area until tested and installed.
B. Ensure that all vital relays are safely stored and protected from damage during
storage, handling and transporting.
1.06 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
A. The Contractor shall furnish one (1) e-post wrench for opening and closing the relay
test terminals with each shelter where relays are installed. E-post wrench must be
in each shelter for final acceptance.
B. The Contractor shall furnish two (2) insertion/extraction tools for each type of
contact at each shelter where relays are installed. Insertion/extraction tools must be
in each shelter for final acceptance.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall provide warranty from defects arising from defective parts and
workmanship for 2 years from the first date of final acceptance.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Relays shall be in dustproof enclosures; however, a provision shall be made for
ventilation where required for heat dissipation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 44 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 44 Relays
2.02 VITAL DC RELAYS
A. General:
1. Vital Relays shall be Alstom Type B, Siemens Type "ST", or an approved
equal. Contractor shall use the specific relays shown on the Contract Plans.
2. Vital DC relays, unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Plans, shall be
of the plug-in type and rack-mounted. Relays shall have a transparent dust
cover made of a nonflammable composition that will not support
combustion.
3. Vital Relays, with a nominal operating voltage of 10 to 16 volts, shall be
capable of operating continuously without resultant damage, with a
minimum voltage range of 7 to 21 volts inclusive, applied to their operating
circuits.
4. Vital relays shall have a test terminal to allow convenient measurement of
the coil voltage.
5. Design biased neutral vital relays so that gravity alone will prevent the
armature from picking up if the permanent magnet is de-energized or if no
current is applied to the coil, due to interruption of the normal magnetic
circuit.
6. All front contacts shall be silver-to-metal carbon, meeting the requirements
of the AREMA C&S Manual Part 6.2.1.
7. When three DC vital relays, suppressed as specified herein, are connected
in parallel and operated as a test load from normal working voltage, a vital
relay front or back contact that breaks this load shall be capable of at least
five million operations at this load without the contact resistance, measured
with ten milliamp currents, exceeding five ohms.
8. Arc suppression for vital relays shall be built into the relay or into its
plugboard.
9. Equip vital plug-in relays, except for vital time-element relays and special
application relays, with front current testing facilities. Where shown on the
Contract Plans, provide facilities to enable the testing of voltage from the
front of the relay, without having to remove the relay or remove adjacent
relays.
10. Equip vital relays with a registration plate to prevent relays of the wrong
style, contact arrangement, or operating characteristics, from being inserted
into the plug board.
2.03 SWITCH OPERATING RELAYS
A. Vital switch operating relays used for control of switch-and-lock movement shall
meet the same requirements as specified for vital biased neutral relays except that
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 44 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 44 Relays
a minimum of two front-back dependent contacts or two independent front contacts
and two independent back contacts shall be required.
B. Each contact shall be equipped with a magnetic blow-out feature to effectively
interrupt high currents and minimize contact wear. Switch operating relays to be
furnished under this Contract shall be identical: one normal and one reverse switch-
operating relay shall be provided for each switch-and-lock movement.
2.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Facilities shall be included for mounting an approved typed or printed relay nametag
for each relay, either on the relay cover or on the relay cabinet front plate, as
applicable. The nametag shall be easily replaceable but shall not come off during
normal service.
B. Identification shall be in accordance with Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems
Miscellaneous Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Ensure that the relay operating characteristics have not been altered during
shipping.
B. Ensure that all AC and DC power buses are open while installing relays. Do not
reconnect buses until all relays have been installed.
C. Install and wire the relays as shown on the Contract Plans. Contractor shall refer to
Metrolink Engineering Standards 8110 and 8120 for relay tab and coil wiring
information.
D. Identify each relay with nametag(s) as approved by the Resident Engineer.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. All DC vital relays shall be tested and inspected in accordance with AREMA C&S
Manual Part 6.4.1.
B. Perform tests in accordance with Section 34 42 58, Signal System Testing.
C. Record test measurements on Test Report Form provided by the Engineer.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Relays will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or
approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 44 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 44 Relays
used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Relays furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents will
be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 44 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 46
SIGNAL EQUIPMENT HOUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for new factory-wired signal equipment houses
and relocating existing signal equipment houses. The Contractor shall be
responsible for supplying new house(s).
B. Installation and field modification of the new factory-wired signal equipment houses
by the Contractor to meet the requirements of the Contract Plans shall meet or
exceed the requirements of this Section.
C. Signal Equipment Houses may be referred to as instrument enclosures, instrument
houses, crossing houses, signal shelters in these Specifications.
D. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 34 42 00 – General Signal Requirements
2. Section 34 42 16 – Signal Wires and Cables
3. Section 34 42 56 – Signal Grounding
4. Section 34 42 58 – Signal System Testing
5. Section 34 42 60 – Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
6. Section 34 42 62 – Service Meters
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 49, Transportation:
1. Part 234 Grade Crossing Signal System Safety
2. Part 236 Rules, Standards, and Instructions for Railroad Signal
System
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
C. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
A. Submit proposed Installation Test Procedures.
B. Submit load calculations, indicating sizes of load center panel, voltage drops, and
all other 240/120 Vac equipment.
C. Submit Contractor’s Inspection and Acceptance Procedure prior to transporting new
signal equipment houses to the job site.
D. Submit four (4) copies of Shop Drawings showing the proposed size and
equipment layout including rack, air conditioner, lighting, convenience outlet
arrangement, and exhaust fan mounting and location.
E. Submit four (4) copies of Shop Plans of each instrument and entrance rack,
showing the arrangement and description of the mounted equipment and wiring,
if different from those shown on Contract Plans.
F. Submit four (4) copies of Shop Drawings of the complete grounding
arrangement.
G. Submit proposed Factory Acceptance Test Procedures.
H. Shop Drawings shall be submitted within thirty (30) days of NTP.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The instrument enclosures shall be assembled and wired to conform to the
Contract Plans. Contractor shall ensure the enclosures are free from defects and
that workmanship is of the highest quality.
B. Each house will be inspected after it has been installed and the Contractor shall
correct any deficiencies. This inspection will be conducted in conformance with
the requirements of the Contractor's accepted Installation Inspection Procedure.
C. The Contractor shall provide documentation of acceptance “in good condition”
before removing and transporting existing houses to the job site.
D. The Contractor shall provide documentation of Factory Acceptance Testing
before transporting new houses to the job site.
E. Each house and case will be inspected after they have been installed and the
Contractor shall correct any deficiencies. This inspection will be conducted in
conformance with the requirements of the Contractor's accepted Inspection and
Acceptance Procedure.
F. Resident Engineer reserves the right to make inspections and tests at the facility
where the wiring services are to be performed to determine if the equipment and
workmanship meets the requirements of this Specification.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
A. Properly fasten and brace equipment shipped within houses and cases to prevent
damage during transit. Replace any equipment damaged during transit or prior to
in-service operation at no cost to the Owner.
B. Package all vital relays, batteries, and electronic plug-in modules in separate
containers for shipment and do not install until the house is set at its final location.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 HOUSE GENERAL
A. Furnish and install factory-wired signal equipment houses, as described herein and
as shown on the Contract Plans. These houses shall be complete with all the
equipment shown on the Contract Plans. Wiring shall conform to the requirements
of the AREMA C&S Manual, NEMA Standard ICS-70, or National Electrical Code
(NEC), as applicable.
B. Signal equipment houses shall be products manufactured by PTMW, Inc., Siemens
Mobility Solutions, TCR Rail Systems or an approved equal.
C. Signal equipment houses shall be the size and layout shown on the Contract Plans.
D. Signal equipment houses shall be rain-tight and dust-tight, National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 3R, ventilated, and have hinged doors with
three point catch and handle and have welded construction throughout. Welds
shall be 1-1/2 inch minimum in length with spacing not to exceed 6-inches where
panels meet floor and roof. Spacing on panel welds shall not exceed 18-inches.
E. Signal equipment houses shall be constructed of 12-gauge galvanneal steel for
floors, walls, and doors. Roofs shall be no less than 14-gauge galvanneal steel with
a minimum of 50 lb/ft2 loading or as shown on the Contract Plans.
F. The entire structure shall be powder coated on the outside with TGIC Polyester
Powder (or equal polyester powder) with a nominal thickness of four mils, but no
less than three mils at any point on the surface of the enclosure in accordance with
AREMA C&S Manual Part 1.5.10. The exterior color shall be light gray.
G. The instrument enclosures shall be complete with moveable shelves, wire chase,
and backboard.
H. The signal equipment houses shall provide access to underground and aerial cable
entrance behind the main terminal rack. The top and sides shall be lined with
temperature insulating material and constructed to prevent sweating. Provide
ventilation openings as required for the size of the house proposed. No ventilation
opening shall be made in the roof of the house. Provide lift rings to facilitate the
movement of the house.
I. Provide ventilation openings in each door. The exterior of the ventilation openings
shall be hooded to minimize the entrance of precipitation. Equip the interior of
ventilation opening with sliding plate to allow the adjustment of airflow and with a
replaceable dust filter. The doors shall be hinged and gasketed so that they will
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
provide a dustproof and weatherproof seal. Provide doors with exterior and interior
handles, (interior handles not required on cases) welded to a three-point locking
device to ensure that the door cannot be locked until it is in the fully closed position.
Provide doors with a two-position retaining device to secure the door when open.
J. House access doors shall be equipped with an additional locking mechanism such
as the Master Lock 770 Hidden Shackle Padlock Hasp, or approved equal.
K. Door openings shall be 32 inches wide by 86 inches tall unless otherwise specified
on the Contract Plans.
L. Provide thermostatically controlled exhaust fans, operated from 120 Vac and fused
separately, in each house, as shown on the Contract Plans. The thermostat that
activates the fan control shall be adjustable and operate in the range of 70 degrees
to 130 degrees Fahrenheit. Locate fans relative to the fresh air inlets to draw air
over the equipment and size to renew the air within the house every 3 minutes.
Exhaust fans shall have removable dust filters. Dust filters shall be either
replaceable or cleanable.
M. Hinges shall be separate castings, securely fastened to the house and door. The
hinges shall be equipped with bronze hinge pins, shall be lubricated by the
manufacturer before the case is shipped, and shall have grease fittings for future
lubrication.
N. Furnish signal equipment houses with interior lighting and duplex 120 VAC power
receptacles. Signal equipment houses and cases with double tube LED fluorescent
lights, energy efficient, as required to provide complete illumination for all passages
and sides, and operated from a switch conveniently placed near each entrance
door. Furnish convenience outlets as part of each switch.
O. House lighting and receptacle loads shall be fed from a ground fault interrupt circuit
breaker used exclusively for these loads. Signaling logic and signal appliance
power loads shall be fed from separate circuit breakers. The signal logic power and
signal appliance power shall be ungrounded. The Contractor shall size circuit
breakers and wiring.
P. Furnish Signal Equipment Houses complete with a 120/240 Vac power distribution
panel, circuit protective devices, and all appurtenances necessary to supply the AC
power required at each site.
Q. All access points in the enclosure shall be sealed for weather protection and against
entry of rodents and insects. All interior and exterior seams shall be caulked with
RTV silicone.
R. Enclosure foundations shall be the inner wall type and adjustable from the outside
of the enclosure. The range of adjustment shall be from 36-inches to 52-inches in
1/2-inch increments. Foundations shall be galvanized steel, a minimum of 60-
inches long, include all hardware, and a 12-inch x 12-inch x 1/4-inch footing pad. All
galvanizing shall conform to the AREMA Signal Manual, Part 15.3.1
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
S. Permanent vendor name plate, or equivalent, complete with vendor name, address,
model number, serial number, and date of manufacture or equivalent shall be
located on front the of house above the main entrance door.
2.02 CASE GENERAL
A. Case shall have welded construction throughout. Welds shall be 1-1/2 inch
minimum in length with spacing not to exceed 6-inches where panels meet floor
and roof. Spacing on panel welds shall not exceed 18-inches.
B. Interior surfaces including top, sides, and shelves shall be finished with primer coat
and two (2) coats of white latex enamel paint.
C. All paint shall be fire retardant.
D. Key slot channels shall be provided on each side and extend to the full inside
heights of the case. Keyhole spacing shall be 2-1/2 inch centers. Key slot
channels shall be flush with insulation.
E. Sides, top, and doors shall include 1-inch of fiberglass faced polyisocyanurate
insulation. Floor shall include 1/8-inch bi-directional pyramat rubber matting.
F. Permanent vendor name plate, or equivalent, complete with vendor name, address,
model number, serial number, and date of manufacture or equivalent shall be
located on front of the case.
G. Cases shall be equipped with a minimum of two (2) lifting/tie down lugs located at
roofline on each side.
H. Cases shall include four- (4) knockouts with cover plates and gaskets on sides ‘A’
and ‘C’ in the upper corners. Internal insulation at entry locations shall be precut for
ease of removal and equipment installation.
I. All access points in the case shall be sealed for weather protection and against
entry of rodents and insects. All interior and exterior seams shall be caulked with
RTV silicone.
J. Exterior shell shall be constructed of 12-gauge galvanized steel.
K. Exterior surfaces, including bottom of floor, shall be powder coated with TGIC
polyester, color light gray, nominal thickness of 4 mils but not less than 3 mils thick.
L. Shelving and backboard shall be constructed of 3/4-inch MDO two-sided plywood
and finished on all sides, with primer coat and two - (2) coats of fire retardant white
latex enamel paint, before mounting.
M. Shelving shall be adjustable vertically in 2-1/2 inch increments and conform to the
Contract Plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
N. Shelves shall be 12-inches wide and covered with 1/8-inch bi-directional pyramat
rubber matting. The shelf length will be determined by case size or as shown on the
Contract Plans.
O. All exposed edges on shelving, including rear edge, shall have a 1-inch facing
constructed of 14-gauge sheet metal, designed for this purpose. Facing shall be
aluminum or steel with rust preventive paint or plating. Facing shall be attached
with screws and be free of burrs or sharp edges.
P. Surface area of backboards and shelves shall be free of protrusions such as bolt
heads. The bottom of the backboards shall be cut level as shown on the Contract
Plans.
Q. The width of the backboard shall be determined by the size of the case or as shown
on the Contract Plans.
R. Door gasket shall be compressed 1/2-inch free height when door is closed and
locked. The gasket shall be coated with an approved lubricant to prevent sticking.
S. Three bolt on hinges, separate castings, with bronze hinge pins and lubrication
(3/16-inch zerk), fittings shall be installed with an anti-theft arrangement.
T. All doors shall be lubricated before shipment from the factory.
U. Heavy-duty three point locking system shall be furnished with each door. Latch and
locking system shall operate smoothly through complete opening and closing cycle.
The door handle must accept a large bail padlock. (Polar Hardware brand #7011) or
approved equivalent.
V. Case access doors shall be equipped with an additional locking mechanism such
as the Master Lock 770 Hidden Shackle Padlock Hasp, or approved equal.
W. Doors shall be provided with rods to hold door open at 90 degrees and near 180
degrees. Door insulation shall be covered by an interior sheeting to protect the
insulation and to add rigidity to door.
X. Louvers shall be provided in doors with adjustable cover plates for winter and
summer usage. The door shall accommodate an adjustable air intake sized to
accept a 1-inch x 10-inch x 20-inch replaceable filter.
Y. A drip channel (or roof design) shall be incorporated into the design to direct water
away from opening. Y.
Z. Case shall include six (6), 4-5/8” knockouts in the floor behind the backboard with
cover plates. Four (4) cable risers 36 inches long, complete with male adapters,
lock nuts, and bushings shall be included. The knockouts shall be equally spaced
behind the backboard.
2.03 HOUSE GENERAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
A. All vendor installed electrical products shall be UL listed. All electrical work shall
conform to the National Electrical Code (NEC) standards and accepted practices.
B. Conduit and device box sizes shall conform to NEC Article 370.
C. The typical Breaker box shall be Square ‘D’ 100 AMP; Model QO12M100. The
breaker box shall be furnished with the following breakers, one- (1) QO120 GFI,
one- (1) QO230, one- (1) QO130, and seven- (7) QO120.
D. Bushings shall be installed on all conduits entering or leaving the breaker or device
boxes. An SDSA-1175 surge arrestor shall be mounted on the top of the breaker
box.
E. The breaker box ground buss shall be bonded to the breaker box and the nearest
keyway using an ERICO ‘VS’ welded connection designed for this purpose. The
neutral buss shall not be bonded during manufacture. The field shall bond the
neutral at the remote (main) disconnect when used.
F. The neutral bonding screw shall be packaged and shipped in the breaker box for
installation in the field if necessary.
G. All conduits shall be installed above the wire chase and secured to enclosure
structure. Flex conduit shall not be used except when used as a drop or attached to
equipment that maybe removed. All circuits must be routed in separate conduits.
The fluorescent lamp fixtures shall not be used for a junction box, raceway or
conduit for any circuit other than the one intended for lamp operation.
H. One (1) separate 20 AMP plug circuit shall be provided on the ‘A’ and ‘C’ walls as
shown on the Contract Plans. The end plugs shall be 8-inches from the ‘D’ wall and
18-inches from the ‘B’ wall the remaining plug(s) shall be centered between them.
I. Separate 20 AMP circuits (equipment power drops) shall be provided on the ‘A’ and
‘C’ walls. The junction boxes shall be located, above the wire chase, as shown on
the Contract Plans. The wires from the panel shall be terminated (wire nut and
taped) in the junction box. One–(1) piece of aluminum flexible conduit, 48-inches
long shall be supplied for each junction box and installed by the wiring shop. The
conduit shall be coiled up and shipped along with other house material.
J. Bungalows to have provisions for connection of an auxiliary generator as shown on
the Contract Plans. Provisions for this arrangement to include the following: 1ea.
125/250V 3-pole 4 wire flange male inlet plug NEMA Type L14-30P with exterior
spring loaded weather proof outlet cover (Bryant #71430-MBWP). Main breakers to
be 100 AMP (Square ‘D’ #QO2100) for bungalows with 2-pole 30 AMP breaker
(Square ‘D’ #QO230) positioned adjacent to main breaker with mechanical interlock
(Square ‘D’ # QO2DTI). DO NOT SUBSTITUTE.
K. General color code and wire specifications for all AC wiring are as follows. All wiring
shall be THHN or THWN solid copper or as required by the NEC.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
GFI Breaker to Receptacle/Thermostat #10 Black
GFI Breaker to Receptacle #10 White
GFI Receptacle Ground #10 Green
Thermostat to Vent Fan #10 Red
Fan Neutral #14 White
Breaker to Light Switch #10 Black
Light Switch to Light #10 Red
Light Neutral #10 White
Breaker to Receptacle A & C walls #10 Black
Receptacle Neutral #10 White
Receptacle Ground #10 Green
L. The service entrance shall be a 2-inch EMT conduit, entering the bottom of the
breaker box. The conduit shall extend through the floor. Sufficient length shall be
left to allow easy coupling. The open end shall be capped and protected while in
transit.
M. One (1) 36-inch piece of 2-inch EMT conduit shall be included along with a
compression coupling. The conduit and coupling shall be secured and shipped
inside the enclosure.
N. A single or 3-way light circuit shall be provided based on house size and door
arrangement. One (1) 115/120V-20 AMP duplex receptacle shall be mounted with
each light switch, near the main enclosure entrance (D and/or B-wall). The fan
thermostat control unit shall be mounted to the light switch/duplex receptacle handy
box on ‘D’ wall.
O. A minimum of two (2) double tube, 4-foot LED energy efficient fluorescent fixtures,
and tube guards shall be installed in each enclosure. The actual quantity and
location of lights shall be based on the enclosure size or as shown on the Contract
Plans.
P. An air conditioner, sized for the structure, shall be supplied and located as shown
on the Contract Drawings. A 20 AMP circuit, with a single 20-amp receptacle,
configured for air conditioner unit provided shall be provided. All air conditioners
shall be commercial grade, 220/240Vac rated units with a minimum BTUh rating
of 12,000. Air conditioners shall be provided with a minimum warranty period of
five (5) years. Contractor shall furnish Kenmore Elite Model #76125, or approved
equal.
Q. Bushings shall be installed on all conduits entering or leaving the breaker or device
boxes. An SDSA-1175 surge arrestor shall be mounted on the top of the breaker
box.
2.04 CASE GENERAL ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. All vendor installed electrical products shall be UL listed. All electrical work shall
conform to the National Electrical Code (NEC) standards and accepted practices.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
B. The breaker box for cases shall typically be a Square ‘D’ 100 AMP; Model QO6-
12L100S mounted as shown on the Contract Drawings. Circuit breakers supplied
with the case shall be Square ‘D’ QO series as follows, one- (1) QO120 GFI, two-
(2) QO120.
C. Conduit and device box sizes shall conform to NEC Article 370.
D. Bushings shall be installed on all conduits entering or leaving the breaker or device
boxes. An SDSA-1175 surge arrestor shall be mounted on the top of the breaker
box.
E. The breaker box ground buss shall be bonded to the breaker box and the enclosure
frame using an ERICO ‘VS’ welded connection designed for this purpose. The
neutral buss shall not be bonded during manufacture. The field shall bond the
neutral at the remote (main) disconnect when used.
F. The neutral bonding screw shall be packaged and shipped in the breaker box for
installation in the field if necessary.
G. General color code and wire specifications for all AC wiring are as follows. All wiring
shall be THHN or THWN solid copper or as required by the NEC.
GFI Breaker to Receptacle #10 Black
GFI Breaker to Receptacle #10 White
GFI Receptacle Ground #10 Green
Breaker to Light Switch #10 Black
Light Switch to Light #10 Red
Light neutral #10 White
H. The service entrance shall be a 2-inch EMT conduit, entering the bottom of the
breaker box. The conduit shall extend through the floor. Sufficient length shall be
left to allow easy coupling. The open end shall be capped and protected while in
transit.
I. One (1) 36-inch piece of 2-inch EMT conduit shall be included along with a
compression coupling. The conduit and coupling shall be secured and shipped
inside the case.
J. Cases to have provisions for connection of an auxiliary generator as shown on the
Contract Plans. Provisions for this arrangement to include the following: 1ea.
125/250V 3-pole 4 wire flange male inlet plug NEMA Type L14-30P with exterior
spring loaded weather proof outlet cover (Bryant #71430-MBWP). Main breakers to
be 60 AMP (Square ‘D’ #QO260) for signal cases with 2-pole 30 AMP breaker
(Square ‘D’ #QO230) positioned adjacent to main breaker with mechanical interlock
(Square ‘D’ # QO2DTI). DO NOT SUBSTITUTE.
K. 6-9 cases shall include one (1) switched incandescent light circuit. The fixture shall
be complete with 100 watt equivalent lamp and metal lamp guard.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
L. A GFI protected duplex plug and light switch shall be mounted inside on the end (C)
wall as shown on the Contract Plans. The light with metal guard shall be mounted in
the front at the top-center of the case.
M. 6-9 case shall be equipped with an exhaust fan to afford proper air circulation
throughout the interior of the case.
2.05 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING
A. General:
1. Mount equipment as shown in the Contract Plans.
2. Mount all equipment in such a manner that a seismic event within the
parameters of Section 34 42 00, General Signal Requirements, will not cause
damage or excessive motion.
B. Relay Plugboards:
1. Design plugboards for insertion of removable type contacts. The method of
attaching the wires to the removable contacts shall be solderless
connections. Design plugboard so that the removable contact will have a
direct connection with the contact and coil prongs. The plugboards shall be
in accordance with the applicable sections of AREMA C&S Manual, Part
6.2.2.
2. All wires shall be of sufficient length to permit them to be moved to any
contact on the same relay.
3. Equip the plugboards for vital relays with a registration plate to prevent
relays of the wrong type, contact arrangement, or operating characteristics
from being inserted.
2.06 IDENTIFICATION
A. Stencil a white identification number at the top of the front and rear frames of each
rack or panel.
B. There shall be an identifying nameplate for each relay, or other instrument mounted
on the rack or panel.
C. Equip the back and front of the relay plugboards with a tag, as specified in Section
34 42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products. This tag shall indicate the
nomenclature of the relay.
D. Identify terminals and both ends of all wires with a wraparound tag printed with the
circuit nomenclatures and terminal designations as shown on the Contract Plans
and as specified in Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
E. Wire and cable conductor identification tags for terminal board mounting shall be as
specified in Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products.
2.07 CABLE ENTRANCE TERMINAL BOARDS
A. Cable entrance terminal boards shall be 3/4-inch Type AB exterior (five ply)
plywood, mounted on a rack and painted white with a fire retarding paint.
B. Cable entrance terminal boards shall be located as shown on the Contract Plans.
C. Multiple-unit terminal blocks for wire and cable conductors shall be in accordance
with AREMA C&S Drawing 14.1.6. Furnish each binding post with two binding nuts,
one clamp nut, and three washers.
D. Provide Siemens or equal test links on all terminal pairs where conductors enter
houses.
E. Equip binding posts and exposed terminals of other apparatus for circuits
exceeding 50 volts or greater (ac or dc) with insulating nuts and sleeves.
F. Cable entrance facilities shall be located as shown on the Contract Plans.
G. Lightning arresters shall be as specified in Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems
Miscellaneous Products.
2.08 CABLE ENTRANCE PIPES
A. Supply cable entrance pipes as specified in Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems
Miscellaneous Products.
2.09 GROUNDING
A. House shall be fitted with four 48-inch long No. 2 ground wires cadwelded to floor
frame of the house at each corner. Cadwelding shall take place prior to powder
coating the structure. The pigtails shall be coiled and secured in a manner that
prevents damage during construction and while in transit. Cases shall have two 48-
inch long No. 2 ground wires cadwelded to floor frame of the house at each end.
B. Supply and install grounding material as specified in Section 34 42 56, Signal
Grounding.
2.10 INTERNAL WIRING
A. Wiring shall be in accordance with Section 34 42 16, Signal Wires and Cables.
B. Minimum wire conductor sizes shall be as shown on the Contract Plans unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
C. Adhering to minimum wire size specifications does not relieve the Contractor’s
responsibility of using wire sized large enough to safely and effectively provide power
to the circuit it serves.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
D. Solderless terminals for stranded wire shall be in accordance with Section 34 42 60,
Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products.
E. Solid terminal connectors shall be used for all short terminal jumpers.
F. All WAGO connections, except No. 6 battery connections, shall use vinyl insulated pin
terminal connections such as Thomas and Betts Pin Terminal, part number 14RB-
47PT, or approved equal.
2.11 PAINTING - INSULATION
A. All instrument enclosures shall be furnished complete with a layer of rigid insulation
on the walls, doors, and ceiling. Instrument houses shall have a minimum 2-inch
thick layer of rigid closed cell foam insulation rated R13. Instrument cases shall have
a minimum 1/2-inch thick layer of rigid closed cell foam insulation rated R3.3.
Insulation shall be suitable for residential installation.
B. The interior including the ceiling, walls, terminal boards, and shelves shall be finished
with a primer and two coats of white latex enamel paint.
C. All paint shall be fire-retarding type.
D. Apply typical legend for control point houses, highway grade crossing houses and
cases as indicated on the Metrolink Engineering Standards. Consult with
manufacturer of house prior to paint application.
2.12 EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. Equipment racks shall be the manufacturer's standard for the type of equipment
furnished and shall be sized according to the Contract Plans.
B. Equipment racks shall include all necessary supports for wire and equipment.
C. Secure equipment racks by bolts attached to a threaded mounting plate structurally
secured to the floor of the house. Attach stabilizing straps to the top of the racks as
needed. Racks and mounting shall be secure enough to withstand a seismic event
as specified in Section 34 42 00, General Signal Requirements.
2.13 OTHER EQUIPMENT
A. Wiring Raceway (Wire Routing): Internal case wiring shall be contained within
surface-mounted plastic raceway. Raceway shall be of a polycarbonate, low smoke
type with a solid snap-on cover and flexible sidewalls. The sidewalls shall be of
"finger" type construction allowing for insertion and removal of wire runs with
terminations attached. The manufacturer shall determine sizes. Fill capacity shall
not exceed 60 percent.
B. Panel Board: Furnish a single-phase, three-wire 120/240 VAC, 60 Hz panel board
for each house furnished under this Contract. Size panel board as shown on the
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
Contract Plans. The capacity rating shall be in accordance with the Contractor's load
calculations and the Contract Plans.
C. Service meters shall conform to local codes.
2.14 GALVANIZED HOUSE FOUNDATIONS
A. All houses shall be equipped with telescoping foundations as described in Part 2.01
Q of this Section complete with galvanized bolts, washers, nuts, and associated
hardware. Galvanizing shall conform to Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems
Miscellaneous Products, and AREMA C&S Manual, Part 15.3.1.
B. Galvanized steel foundations for cases shall be constructed of steel angle and plate
welded together. Foundations shall be constructed of 2-1/2 inch by 2-1/2 inch by
1/4-inch steel angle and 1/4-inch steel plate.
C. Bolt spacing shall be to manufacturer's standards for the equipment to be supported
by the foundation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mount houses and cases level and plumb and secure thereon with the hardware
provided. Do not use shims, spacers, or other filler devices to level and plumb
houses or cases.
B. Install cable entrance pipes through the cable knockout holes provided in the floor of
the house behind the terminal board(s) as shown on Contract Plans. Fill pipes with a
substance designed for the purpose that prevents entrance of debris, rodents, and
other pests.
C. Ground houses as specified in Section 34 42 56, Signal Grounding.
D. Locate house as indicated on the Contract Plans. If conditions do not allow
placement as shown on the Contract Plans, submit alternate placement for
Engineer’s approval.
E. Install relays on the relay plugboards corresponding to the relay nomenclature and
identification plate, and securely fasten in place with the hardware provided by the
relay manufacturer.
F. Place batteries on rubber matting on the floor of the shelter or bottom shelf of the
case. Coat battery posts with approved grease and securely fasten battery connec-
tors to the battery posts. Strap batteries or otherwise secure using a method
approved by the manufacturer so that they will not tip or move in the event of an
earthquake.
G. Mark each grade crossing warning device case or shelter with the street name,
milepost location, emergency response number, and DOT inventory number per
Metrolink Engineering Standard 8270.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
H. Install pullboxes and conduits. Provide slotted pullbox covers to accommodate the
cable chute at new house locations. Place the house so the chute aligns with the
slotted cover.
I. Make any modifications to the cable chute required to fit the pullbox and
accommodate the cable installation. If it is necessary to cut the cable chute, ensure
no rough edges, sharp edges, burrs, or other surfaces exist which have the potential
to injure the cable.
J. Install foundations, including telescoping foundations, for houses including Owner-
furnished houses.
3.02 AC POWER
A. Wall mount load center as shown on the Contract Plans. Mounting height from floor,
wire terminations, and clearances shall be in accordance with the NEC.
B. Install service meters as described in Section 34 42 62, Service Meters.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test the functioning of the equipment contained within the instrument house in
accordance with the requirements of Section 34 42 58, Signal System Testing, CFR
Title 49, Parts 234 and 236, and AREMA C&S Manual Part 2.4.1.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Signal Equipment House with Contractor-Owner furnished foundation (Includes
ground rods and grounding) will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Signal Equipment House furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this Section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing,
transportation, storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the
Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 46 Signal Equipment Houses
C. Work of this Section shall include the cost of furnishing and installing foundations
for the house, ground rods and grounding, including the cost of excavation,
shoring where necessary, potholing, fill and any other equipment necessary to
install a foundation and a ground system including any mounting hardware.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 46 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 48
POWER SWITCH AND LOCK MOVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section includes requirements for dual control switch and lock movement for
each interlocked track switch at new, relocated and replaced switch locations as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. Refer to Division 34 72 00, Trackwork, for track construction requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices.
B. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit installation drawings showing the tie straps and the mounting details of
the switch and lock movement, including the connections to the track switch
points and target.
B. Submit Acceptance Test documentation on power switch and lock movement
prior to shipment of the movements.
C. Submit copies of all field test reports.
D. Submit temporary point protection plans to the Resident Engineer for review and
approval.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Power switch and Lock Movements shall meet the recommendations of AREMA
C&S Manual Part 12.2.1, where they do not conflict with any requirements
specified herein.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of Power Switch and Lock
Movements with the track panel procurement and installation to ensure
compatibility between the track panel and the switch machine. Incompatibility
deriving from orientation, rod connections, or switch machine mounting is the
responsibility of the Contractor and shall be corrected at no expense to the
Owner.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 48 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 48 Power Switch and Lock Movement
C. Switch machine orientation (left or right hand) shall be the same configuration as
provided by the manufacturer. The Contractor is prohibited from changing this
orientation without written authority from the Resident Engineer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect Switch and Lock Movements and their component layout parts against
damage during handling and shipment.
B. During storage, properly lubricate and maintain switch and lock movement
layouts on a regular timed program.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Install all new and complete dual control Power Switch and Lock Movement
layouts, including the switch targets where applicable. Power Switch and Lock
Movement shall lock the switch points in power and hand operation. Power
Switch and Lock Movement shall be 110VDC such as the Hitachi Rail STS
(formerly Ansaldo STS USA) M23A configuration. The gear ratio shall be 360:1.
B. Contractor furnished junction box shall be Model 1236-256 manufactured by
Western Cullen Hayes, or an approved equal.
C. Provide and install an insulated front rod per Metrolink Engineering Standards as
part of the power switch layout.
D. Miscellaneous Fittings: The Contractor shall provide all connectors such as
threaded nipples, cable clamps, flex wire, tags, terminals and electrical fittings as
required for each power switch and lock movement layout including 48-inch-long
2-inch-diameter liquid tight flexible conduit and connectors from movement to
junction box.
E. Switch targets shall be provided and installed by the Contractor within power
switch machines where freight operations will be using the switch as a hand
throw during construction of the project. Switch targets shall be removed when
the power switch machine is placed into service.
2.02 SECURITY
A. Install SCRRA furnished switch padlocks on trainman's access side of hand-
throw levers of power switch machine when the switch has been determined
necessary for freight operations to access. Power switch machine will be placed
in an inoperative mode (all power removed from machine) and hand throw levers
padlocked in hand throw position with SCRRA provided switch locks.
B. At power switches under construction and not to be used by the Freight Carrier,
the Contractor shall place the power switch and lock movement in an inoperative
mode (all power removed from machine and hand throw lever padlocked in hand
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 48 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 48 Power Switch and Lock Movement
position) and switch points secured using a padlock able switch point clamp with
Contractor provided padlock. All locks shall be Contractor provided.
C. Furnish padlocks, except for switches requiring Freight Carrier access, until all
systems have been accepted. At final acceptance, the Contractor will remove
their padlocks and SCRRA maintenance will furnish replacement padlocks.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test each switch and lock movement before shipping it to the job site. Conduct
this acceptance testing in accordance with the Contractor's Acceptance Test
Procedure for switch and lock movements. Submit a copy of documentation of
acceptance testing to the Engineer prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Mount and adjust the complete Switch and Lock Movement layout as specified
herein and as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B. Wire control and indication circuits for power-operated switches as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Prior to installation, coat all parts of the switch and lock movement that are not
painted, or made of non-corroding material with an approved grease to prevent
corrosion. Suitably plug or cap unused threaded outlets.
B. Where existing concrete ties are not used, install two 14 foot long timber ties for
mounting the switch mechanisms as shown on the Contract Drawings. If a helper
assembly is required, one of the switch mounting ties shall be 16 foot long.
C. Prior to mounting the switch mechanism on either concrete or timber ties, align
the switch headblock ties at right angles to the straight stock rail, and space the
ties in accordance with the Metrolink Engineering Standards, and condition the
switch points to move without binding.
D. Provide and install all required components needed including, but not limited to,
bolts, ties, gauge plates, universal plates, rods, switch point rollers and the
Power Switch and Lock Movements at the locations shown on the Contract
Drawings to produce a complete power switch installation.
1. Secure power switch and lock movement to the switch ties using
galvanized or cadmium plated bolts of the proper diameter. Bolts are
required to have a six sided or square head and a head bolt lock must be
used on the underside of the wood tie. All thread threaded rod is
unacceptable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 48 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 48 Power Switch and Lock Movement
E. Install the Switch and Lock Movements at the locations shown on the Contract
Drawings.
1. Secure Switch and Lock Movement to the switch ties using (8) eight 7/8-
inch bolts.
F. Remove any ballast necessary for the installation of each switch and lock
movement layout and replace and tamp ballast after the installation has been
completed. Spread excess ballast evenly between ties in the vicinity of the
Switch and Lock Movement layout. Remove ballast from between ties to allow
unrestricted movement of switch rods.
G. Make a preliminary adjustment of switch and lock layout at the time of installation
and a final adjustment when placing it in service, which shall result in the
adjusting nuts being centered on the threads plus or minus 30 percent of the
thread length. Make final adjustment at the time of the functional test. Make final
adjustments in conformance with the requirements of AREMA C&S Manual Parts
12.2.1 and 2.4.1, and the Metrolink Signal Maintenance Manual.
H. Do not apply power to the motor until the switch machine has been fully
lubricated, thrown, and adjusted in hand throw. There shall be no rubbing or
binding of switch rods or points on gauge plates, rails or ties. Follow
manufacturer’s adjustment and installation procedure.
I. During storage and after installation, properly lubricate and maintain switch and
lock movement layouts on a regular timed program until accepted by the
Engineer.
J. Exercise care and ensure that the switches, including switch tie plates, are
thoroughly lubricated at all lubricating points, that all machined surfaces
susceptible to rusting, both external and internal, are thoroughly coated with
grease, as acceptable to the Engineer, and that threaded portions of switch rods
and nuts are similarly coated and protected.
K. Lubricate the switch tie plates with graphite lubricant, as acceptable to the
Engineer. Thoroughly steam clean the plates to remove all oil or grease prior to
application of the graphite. Periodically renew the protective coating until such
time as the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance of the equipment.
L. Removal of switch targets, if applicable, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
after in-service testing has been completed and control point is placed in service.
3.03 SECURITY
A. Install Owner-furnished switch padlocks on trainman's access side of electric
locks, and power and hand throw levers of switch and lock movements.
3.04 TOUCH-UP
A. Touch-up the finish of equipment described in this Section in accordance with the
AREMA C&S Manual, Part 1.5.10. Color shall match factory finish.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 48 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 48 Power Switch and Lock Movement
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each switch and lock movement after it has been installed and correct
any deficiencies noted. Conduct this inspection in conformance with the
requirements of the Contractor's Installation Inspection Procedure as accepted
by the Engineer.
B. Conduct final operational tests of switch and lock movements as described in
Section 34 42 58, Signal System Testing.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Power Switch and Lock Movement furnished and completed in accordance with
the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on
the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation
for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, shall be determined from
the actual count in units as designated in the schedule of Quantities and Prices.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Power Switch and Lock Movement furnished and completed in accordance with
the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on
the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation
for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 48 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 50
SWITCH CIRCUIT CONTROLLER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for Switch Circuit Controllers.
B. Switch Circuit Controller and layout shall be all new and include the controller
unit, junction box, point lug, detector rod, shims, all required bolts, nuts, washers,
pins, grease fittings, cotter keys, vent elbows, plates, adjusting brackets, and all
hardware to mechanically couple the switch circuit controller to the track switch
points, as a stand-alone unit or in conjunction with an electric switch lock.
C. Refer to Section 34 72 00, Trackwork, for track construction requirements.
1.02 GENERAL
A. Switch Circuit Controller layouts shall include the controller unit, junction box,
point lug, detector rod, shims, all required bolts, nuts, washers, pins, grease
fittings, cotter keys, plates, adjusting brackets, and all hardware to mechanically
couple the switch circuit controller to the track switch points and mount it on the
ties.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
2. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering
Standards
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit installation drawings showing the tie straps and the mounting details of
the switch circuit controller, including the connections to the track switch points.
B. Submit Contractors Acceptance Test Documentation on Switch Circuit
Controllers prior to transport.
C. Submit copies of all field-test reports.
D. Submit temporary point protection plans to the Resident Engineer for review and
approval.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 50 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 50 Switch Circuit Controller
A. Switch Circuit Controllers shall meet the recommendations of AREMA C&S
Manual, Part 12.1.1, for a four front/back contact configuration where they do not
conflict with any requirements specified herein. Mounting details shall conform to
the Metrolink Engineering Standards.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect switch circuit controllers and their component layout parts against
damage during handling and shipment.
B. During storage, properly lubricate and maintain switch circuit controller layouts on
a regular timed program.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Furnish Switch Circuit Controller layout complete with rod, lug, and associated
hardware as designated as required for a fully functional system.
B. The Contractor provided Switch Circuit Controller and layout shall be Model U-5
with return spring, ventilators and wire outlet as manufactured by Hitachi Rail STS
(formerly Ansaldo STS USA) or approved equal. Switch Circuit Controller provided
by Contractor shall be complete with offset crank, operating rod, switch point lug
and associated hardware.
C. Contractor furnished Junction Box shall be Model 091 428-ABX manufactured by
Siemens Systems or an approved equal.
D. Furnish Insulated Vertical No. 1 Rod with Basket in accordance with Metrolink
Engineering Standard 8660.
E. Furnish Insulated Front Rod in accordance with Metrolink Engineering Standard
8650.
F. Miscellaneous Fittings: Furnish all connectors such as threaded nipples, cable
clamps, and electrical fittings as required for each Switch Circuit Controller layout
including 24-inch-long two-inch-diameter flexible conduit and connectors from
Switch Circuit Controller to junction box.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Stranded wire: Furnish insulated No. 10 AWG stranded wire between the
pedestal-mounted junction box and the switch circuit controller. Insulated wire
shall be in accordance with Section 34 42 16, Signal Wires and Cables.
B. Miscellaneous Fittings: Furnish all connectors such as threaded nipples, cable
clamps, and electrical fittings as required for each switch circuit controller layout.
2.03 SECURITY
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 50 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 50 Switch Circuit Controller
A. Padlocks will be furnished by the Contractor until final acceptance.
B. At new switches under construction that are not to be used by a freight farrier,
the Contractor shall ensure that the switch points are secured using a padlock
able switch point clamp with Contractor provided padlock. All locks shall be
Contractor provided.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test each switch circuit controller before transporting it to the job site. Conduct
this acceptance testing in accordance with the Contractor's Acceptance Test
Procedure for Switch Circuit Controllers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Mount and adjust the complete switch circuit controller layout as specified herein
and as indicated on the Contract Drawings and in accordance with the Metrolink
Engineering Standards.
B. Circuits for switch circuit controllers shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Prior to installation, coat all parts of the Switch Circuit Controller that are not
painted, or made of non-corroding material, with an approved grease to prevent
corrosion. Suitably plug or cap unused threaded outlets.
B. Install one 10-foot long timber tie or concrete tie for mounting the controllers as
shown on the Contract Drawings
C. Mount controllers on new and existing timber or concrete ties in conformance to
Metrolink Engineering Standards.
D. Dap and drill timber ties to meet the requirements of these Specifications. Limit
of cutting or dapping shall not exceed 2 inches.
E. Secure the Switch Circuit Controller to the wood switch ties, by 3/4 inch by 10 1/2
inch bolts. Secure switch circuit controller to the switch tie using galvanized or
cadmium plated bolts. Bolts are required to have a six sided or square head and
a head bolt lock must be used on the underside of the wood tie. All thread
threaded rod is unacceptable.
F. Remove any ballast necessary for the installation of each hand throw switch
layout and replace and tamp the ballast after the installation has been completed.
Spread excess ballast evenly between ties in the vicinity of the Switch Circuit
Controller layout.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 50 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 50 Switch Circuit Controller
G. Make a preliminary adjustment of the controller layout at the time of installation
and a final adjustment when placing it in service, which shall result in the
adjusting nuts being centered on the threads plus or minus 30 percent of the
thread length. Make final adjustment at the time of the functional test. Make final
adjustments in conformance with the requirements of AREMA C&S Manual,
Parts 12.1.1 and 2.4.1.
H. Underground cable terminating in the controller junction box shall be dressed and
pot headed as specified in Section 34 42 16, Signal Wires and Cables. Fan the
individual conductors in a neat workmanlike manner, properly tagged and
terminated. Wiring between switch junction box and switch circuit controller shall
be No. 10 AWG insulated stranded flex wire. These wires shall also be tagged
and terminated. Install the wires between the controller junction box and the
controller mechanism in an approved flexible conduit with a minimum length of
10 inches and a maximum length of 21 inches. Fasten this flexible conduit to the
switch junction box and switch mechanism with appropriate connectors.
I. After installation, properly lubricate and maintain Switch Circuit Controller layouts
on a regular timed program until accepted by the Engineer.
J. Exercise care and ensure that the controllers, including switch tie plates, are
thoroughly lubricated at all lubricating points, that all machined surfaces
susceptible to rusting, both external and internal, are thoroughly coated with
grease, as acceptable to the Engineer, and that threaded portions of switch rods
and nuts are similarly coated and protected.
K. Lubricate the switch tie plates with graphite lubricant, as acceptable to the
Engineer. Thoroughly steam cleaned the plates to remove all oil or grease prior
to application of the graphite. Periodically renew the protective coating until such
time as the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance of the equipment.
L. Connect switch circuit controller rods to the normally closed switch point. In
cases where the switch circuit controller is being used with a sliding derail with
wheel crowder (hand-throw derail application), connect switch circuit controller to
the lug provided with the derail.
M. Any switch assembly which is connected to the open point side, or which has a
reverse switch indication, shall be equipped with an insulated front rod.
3.03 SECURITY
A. Install Owner-furnished locks on trainman's access side of electric locks and
hand-throw levers of switch stands unless switch is being used for freight
operations.
3.04 TOUCH-UP
A. Touch-up the finish of all equipment described in this Section in accordance with
the AREMA C&S Manual, Part 1.5.10. Touch-up shall match factory finish.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 50 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 50 Switch Circuit Controller
A. Inspect each Switch Circuit Controller after it has been installed and correct any
deficiencies noted. Conduct this inspection in conformance with the
requirements of the Contractor's Installation Inspection Procedure as accepted
by the Engineer.
B. Conduct final operational tests of Switch Circuit Controllers as described in
Section 34 42 58, Signal System Testing.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Switch Circuit Controller will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by
the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans
will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Switch Circuit Controller furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 50 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 52
RECTIFIERS, BATTERIES AND BATTERY CHARGING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for Rectifiers, Batteries, and Battery
Charging Equipment.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 34 42 58 – Signal Systems Testing
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
B. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
C. Metrolink Signal Maintenance Manual
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Calculate the loads based upon the equipment proposed. Size all batteries to
provide a minimum 48-hours standby capacity for all systems based on normal
operating conditions. Verify the ampere-hour capacity shown on the Contract
Plans is adequate to provide a minimum of 48 hours standby capacity.
1. Size battery to provide a minimum of 48 hours of uninterrupted power to
the signal systems at the normal operating load.
B. Size batteries which provide power for crossing warning devices, such as gates
and flashing lights, to provide 12 hours of continuous operation with the gate
arms in the horizontal position and all lights flashing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Load calculations of each dc and ac load. Submit calculations identifying normal
and worst-case conditions for each load.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 52 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 52 Rectifiers, Batteries, and Battery Charging Equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS
A. Exide ELM IRONCLAD Single Wet Cell low maintenance Lead Acid Batteries
conforming to AREMA C & S manual parts 9.1.4 and 9.1.30 such as:
1. Model (ELM 240, 240AH)
2. Model (ELM 340, 340AH)
3. Model (ELM 425, 425AH)
B. Battery Charger: Charger conforming to the requirements specified herein as
manufactured by National Railway Supply, or approved equal.
1. Model HF-Max Battery Charger equipped with four (4) 12VDC, 20 amp
modules part no. 12-4-310-10-D.
2. Model HF-Max Industrial Switch Mode Battery Charger and Supply part no.
BBX0410DAGIX00.
C. Battery Charger – manufactured by NEWMAR.
1. Model SPS-12-20A, or approved equal.
D. VMI Battery Charger – shall be all new and as manufactured by Quality Marine,
or approved equal.
2.02 EQUIPMENT DETAILS
A. Battery charging equipment shall be designed for continuous operation.
B. Battery charging equipment shall be designed to deliver rated outputs with input
voltage of 100 Vac to 130 Vac at 60 Hz, single phase, two wire input.
C. Battery charging equipment shall have a reserve capacity of at least 25 percent
above the calculated high load requirements.
D. Each charger shall be provided with programmable output voltage adjustment.
E. Terminal markings for ac and dc terminals shall be permanent.
F. The charger shall provide a stabilized output voltage, temperature compensated
with output current limiting. The capacity of the battery charger shall be
determined by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The charger shall
adjust its output current automatically, according to the load and to the demand
on the battery.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 52 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 52 Rectifiers, Batteries, and Battery Charging Equipment
G. Battery charger shall conform to requirements in AREMA C&S Manual Part
9.2.1. The output of the charger shall be sufficiently filtered to be compatible
with the input voltage requirements of the solid-state interlocking units, and all
other electronic equipment for the signaling system.
H. Battery Cells shall be square tubular type design, flooded lead acid. Individual
battery cells shall have handles incorporated into their design to facilitate lifting.
I. Batteries shall not release any gas, fumes, or any toxic substances when
operated under normal conditions or when charged or discharged at a maximum
recommended rate. Each battery cell shall be equipped with a dual action
bayonet type flame-arresting vent plug, having an integral electrolyte level gage.
J. Batteries shall be capable of a minimum of 1,500 charge-discharge cycles to 80
percent discharge without loss of capacity. Totally discharged batteries, even if
polarity has reversed, shall be capable of being recharged to rated capacity with
charging voltage of no more than 2.30 volts per cell. Contractor shall warrant
that all batteries supplied shall be free from any defective workmanship or faulty
materials for a period equal to, or greater than, twenty (20) years, ten (10) full
years of coverage plus ten (10) full years of pro-rata coverage. The Engineer
reserves the right to reject any bid that fails to comply with these Specifications.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furnish all mounting hardware, terminals, and terminators, and similar items for
mounting chargers and batteries in wayside cases and signal instrument shelters.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install batteries and battery charging systems as shown on the Contract Plans.
3.02 TESTS
A. Perform tests specified in Section 34 42 58, Signal Systems Testing, ensuring
system operation.
B. Test batteries and battery chargers in accordance with the manufacturer's and the
Metrolink Signal Maintenance Manual’s instructions.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 52 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 52 Rectifiers, Batteries, and Battery Charging Equipment
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Rectifiers, Batteries, and Battery Charging Equipment will be measured by the
unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on
the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as
applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Rectifiers, Batteries, and Battery Charging Equipment furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit
Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include
full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing,
transportation, storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the
Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 42 52
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 52 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 54
RAIL BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for rail bonds, fouling bonds, frog bonds, track
circuit connections, and all other material required for bonding of track circuit joints,
track frog and switch bonding, and track circuit connections.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Rail Bonding and track connections shall be in accordance with the Metrolink
Engineering Standards.
B. Rail track joints shall be bonded with welded railhead bonds per the Metrolink
Engineering Standards.
C. Track switch, frog fouling bonds, and track connections shall be stranded bonds.
D. Crimped sleeves shall not be used for any fouling or frog bonding unless allowed
by the Engineer.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts, material specifications, installation and
maintenance instructions, and other data pertinent to the bonding material, staples,
and circuit connections, specified herein and as shown on the Contract Plans.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rail Head Bonds: Railhead bonds shall be 3/16-inch in diameter with steel
terminals welded to the conductors. They shall have a nominal length of 6 1/2
inches.
B. Web Bonds: Web Bonds shall be 3/16-inch, 12-inch long welded to the web.
C. Track Circuit Rail Connectors: Track circuit connectors shall be 3/16-inch stranded
bronze conductor, 1-inch tap for welded connection on one end and compression
sleeve on the other end for a direct crimp type connection to the track wire and
shall have a nominal length of 4 inches. Use no crimped connections on fouling
wires or frog bonding unless authorized by the Engineer.
D. Bond Strand: Bond strand for fouling wires shall be 3/16-inch single strand with
4/16-inch black PVC insulation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 54 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 54 Rail Bonding
E. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. All electrical connections to rail shall be welded with the CADWELD®
copper-based exothermic welding process as manufactured by ERICO
Products or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF WELDED BONDS
A. Install welded bonds at all non-insulated rail joints within the limits of this Contract
that are not equipped with a bond.
B. Grind clean with a vitrified grinding wheel the surfaces of the rails where the bond
is to be applied. After grinding, clean surface with an approved non-toxic solvent
to remove all traces of grease and dirt. After the surface has been ground and
cleaned, weld the bond wire to the rail in a manner that will ensure a thorough
mechanical and electrical connection.
C. Before beginning work on these bonds, weld in the field, under conditions like
those of the regular installation, not less than three complete bond connections,
and as many more as the Engineer considers necessary to determine that the
welds are being made satisfactorily. Such welds shall be subject to inspection and
testing by the Engineer, and acceptance as to the method and quality of
workmanship will depend on the results of these inspections and tests.
D. Ensure that each bond connection is thoroughly welded to the rail. The Engineer
reserves the right to require a test of each weld by hammer and striker, or in any
other manner, which in the opinion of the Engineer is reasonable.
E. Remove any welded bond installed by the Contractor that is found to be defective
prior to acceptance and install a new bond.
F. All welded bonds shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommended installation
procedure.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF TRACK CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS
A. The plug end of the track circuit connector shall be as specified herein, at a
maximum distance of 3 inches from the end of the insulated joint. When there are
multiple track connections to be applied at an insulated joint the wayside signal
track connection shall be the nearest connection to the insulated joint with crossing
detection circuits next and crossing shunts lastly installed in this order. The
Contractor shall ensure that the insulating quality of the materials used to protect
the splice meets FRA 234.241 requirements. The use of compression sleeves for
track circuit connections is only acceptable when making a bond strand connection
to underground cable inside of the trackside concrete pull box.
B. Strip back underground cable a sufficient distance for the exposed conductor to be
fully inserted into the compression sleeve. Then compress sleeve with the type of
compression tool designed for that purpose.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 54 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 54 Rail Bonding
C. Track wire installation shall conform to the SCRRA Engineering Standards.
D. Install all track circuit connections. Remove any found to be defective prior to
acceptance and install a new track circuit connection.
E. Provide and install bond strand retainer clips made of Electroplated Spring Steel
on the rail base to hold terminated bond strand in place as specified in the
Metrolink Engineering Standards and as recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Provide and secure the bond strand along the tie by use of PVC cable keeper for
wood ties or “Snap-On” Style Stainless Steel Concrete Tie Clips for concrete ties.
3.03 TESTING
A. Shunt test all track circuits for continuity of circuit and ensure main line track circuit
is de-energized with 0.06-ohm shunt at any point within the track block. Hardwire
shunt usage for inspection and certification of wayside track circuits and constant
warning devices is unacceptable.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Rail Bonding will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Rail Bonding furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule
of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 54 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 56
SIGNAL GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for a grounding system for the equipment
shelter and all other wayside equipment apparatus.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
B. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. B8 - Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Soft
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit drawings showing the design and detail of the proposed grounding system
for the signal and power equipment proposed to be furnished and installed.
B. Submit catalog cuts or drawings showing the type of components to be used for the
proposed grounding system(s).
C. Submit Installation and Test Procedure proposed for all equipment grounding.
D. Submit test reports to the Resident Engineer upon completion of testing of a
location.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials and equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall conform to
all applicable State and local ordinances pertaining to electrical power installations
and the National Electrical Code (NEC)
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 56-1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 56 Signal Grounding
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Ground rods shall be copper-clad stainless steel, in accordance with AREMA
C&S Manual Part 11.3.4. The rod shall be at least 10 feet in length and at least
3/4-inch diameter.
B. Ground rod clamps shall be made of a cast bronze clamp body, with non-ferrous
set-screws in accordance with AREMA C&S Manual Part 11.3.4.
C. Internal ground wire, from the equipment to the ground bus, shall be insulated No. 6
AWG standard copper wire in accordance with AREMA C&S Manual Part 11.4.1.
Insulated ground wire shall be colored green.
D. Provide a grounding bus of nickel-plated hard drawn pure copper in the equipment
shelters sized appropriately for the connections involved.
E. Bare Ground Wire: Soft drawn copper, Class A or Class B stranded, shall meet the
requirements of ASTM B8. Sizing of ground wire shall be in accordance with the
NEC, except where sizes specified herein or shown on the Contract Plans are
larger than those required by NEC; UL listed, Label A for lightning protection
conductors. Grounding cable shall be continuous without joints or splices
throughout its length.
F. Bolted Grounding Connectors: Use connectors made of high strength electrical
bronze, with silicon bronze clamping bolts and hardware in accordance with
AREMA C&S Manual Part 11.3.4; designed such that bolts, nuts, lock washers,
and similar hardware which might nick or otherwise damage the ground wire, shall
not make direct contact with the ground wire.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Ground rods: As manufactured by Copperweld Corp. or an approved equal.
B. Ground wire as specified herein.
C. Cadweld connections: As manufactured by Erico Corp. or an approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Ground the following as described herein and in accordance with the
applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local city
electrical codes: Service equipment, motor frames, switchgear and
equipment enclosures, lighting and power panelboards, transformers,
raceways, fences and gates, building or structure steel frames, lighting
standards, floodlight poles, and power/light pull boxes/maintenance holes.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 56 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 56 Signal Grounding
2. The grounding system shall preclude any closed loop grounding
arrangements.
3. Do not ground connection(s) to the track rails; do not use the neutral
conductors of the ac power supply.
4. Grounding under these specifications shall conform to AREMA C&S Manual
Part 11.4.1. In cases where these instructions differ, the Engineer will make
final determination.
5. Ground wire/cable runs shall be as short and straight as possible and shall
not be interrupted by any device, termination or splice.
B. Exterior: Equipment Shelter Grounding
1. At equipment shelters, drive four ground rods into the ground, one near
each corner of a structure. At equipment cases, drive two ground rods into
the ground, at opposite corners of the structure. The ground rods shall be a
minimum of 6 feet apart and shall be driven below ground level. Dig a 12
inch deep trench between the ground rods. Electrically connect each of the
ground rods connected to the others, using a No. 2 AWG bare stranded
copper cable, welded using Cadweld or an equivalent thermal process.
Coat Cadweld connections with epoxy resin. Place the ground wires in the
bottom of the trench. Backfill trench, returning the soils removed during
construction of the trench.
2. Cadweld shelter’s copper ground cables to the ground rods.
3. Ground resistance, as measured by the “Fall-Of Potential” method, shall not
exceed 15 ohms.
4. Where flexible conduit is used, provide a bonding jumper.
C. Interior: Equipment Grounding
1. Equip shelters with a prime ground terminal securely attached electrically to
the shelter structure and to the made ground network.
2. Run ground connections from lightning arresters and equipment chassis
separately to ground buses in the shelters, as shown on Contract Plans.
Connect ground buses to the prime ground with green insulated No. 2 AWG
stranded wire.
3. Properly ground equipment that is powered by or switches voltages greater
than 35 volts ac or dc.
4. Properly ground equipment that has conductors that leave the shelter.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 56 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 56 Signal Grounding
3.02 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Ground Resistance Testing: Verify that resistance between ground buses and
absolute earth, as measured by the “Fall-Of Potential” method, does not exceed 15
ohms without benefit of chemical treatment or other artificial means.
B. Test Reports: Provide test reports to the Engineer upon completion of ground tests
that completely describe ground resistance test procedures and test results. Test
reports shall be signed by a technician and witnessed by a representative of the
Engineer.
C. Prior to final acceptance by the Engineer, arrange to have the new ac power
service inspected by state and local jurisdictional authority(s) as required.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items and
no separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of
this Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on
the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Full compensation for all ground rods and grounding systems shall be considered as
included in the contract prices paid for the various items of work involved, such as
case and house installation, signal installation and AC meter service installation and
no additional payment will be made therefore.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 56 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 58
SIGNAL SYSTEM TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for tests and inspections to demonstrate that
systems, subsystems, assemblies, subassemblies, and components supplied and
installed under this Contract comply with these Specifications and with all applicable
regulatory and Owner requirements.
B. Related Specifications include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 34 42 – Railroad Signals
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 49, Transportation:
1. Part 234 Grade Crossing Signal System Safety
2. Part 236 Rules, Standards, and Instructions for Railroad Signal
System
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
C. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
D. Metrolink Signal Maintenance Manual
1.03 TEST SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. It shall be understood where this Section states “as authorized by the SCRRA
Signal Manager or SCRRA Signal Engineer” or “submit to the SCRRA Signal
Manager or SCRRA Signal Engineer” such authorization or submittal shall be
through the Resident Engineer or Project Manager.
B. Tests and inspections shall be made both during the progress of this Contract and
after completing installation of equipment and shall consist of factory tests of
contractor furnished equipment, circuit breakdown tests, wiring verification tests,
continuity tests, resistance tests, voltage and current tests, applicable locking tests,
operating tests, simulation tests, and other electrical and mechanical tests and
inspections.
C. The work shall include all tests required to ensure proper and safe operation of all
systems and subsystems, and to prove the adequacy and acceptability of the total
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
installation specified herein. Tests to be performed shall cause each system and
subsystem to be sequenced through its required operations, including imposition of
simulated conditions to prove that the installation complies with all specified fail-safe
requirements.
D. Each Contractor furnished component and unit of the wayside signal and highway
grade crossing system shall have an inspection performed at its point of
manufacture and evidence of this inspection and acceptability shall be indicated on
the item where practicable.
E. Conduct an acceptance test on all Owner furnished equipment prior to loading at
the warehouse. Provide certified acceptance reports with each unit at time of
delivery.
F. Work shall include costs of the Contractor's personnel and any special equipment
and assistance required to conduct all tests with complete documentation.
G. Supply test equipment of proper type, capacity, range, and accuracy to perform
required tests and inspections.
H. Test equipment used shall be in good working order and properly calibrated within 6
months of the date of the tests. This equipment shall display a sticker, indicating its
calibration date and the agency that performed the calibration.
1. Calibration of each instrument shall be certified by a recognized testing
facility. Instruments with out-of-date calibrations will be considered non-
certified. Tests conducted with non-certified instruments will be rejected.
I. If the system does not meet requirements, make necessary corrections and
retesting. Complete all tests and inspections prior to performing final in-service
tests.
J. Work shall include all necessary disconnecting and reconnecting to perform the
specified tests.
K. Signal systems test work described elsewhere in these Specifications shall be
construed as related to, and inclusive with, the testing described herein.
L. Field tests shall be coordinated with the Engineer. As many tests and inspections
as possible shall be completed prior to the final cutover to avoid train delay,
inconvenience to the travel public, and cost to the Owner. Place systems in-
service in phases where possible, thus reducing the actual cutover period.
M. Tests shall ensure conformance with CFR 49, Parts 234 and 236, and shall be
recorded on forms provided by the Engineer and signed by the Contractor’s
Signal Engineer directing each test and inspection.
N. Tests and inspections shall conform to the Metrolink Signal Maintenance Manual.
Owner will provide three (3) copies of this Manual at the Pre-Construction
meeting. Refer to Section 01 31 00, Project Management and Coordination,
Contract Meetings. Request guidance from the Engineer where the test and
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
inspection requirements written herein conflict with the Metrolink Signal
Maintenance Manual. If the test or inspection, to be provided by the Contractor is
not provided in the Metrolink Signal Maintenance Manual, the Contractor shall
request in writing to the Resident Engineer instructions of the testing required.
O. Testing, including pre-testing, shall include operating all switch machines and
lighting all signals. The use of lamp simulators in lieu of, or in parallel with signal
lamps will not be allowed in pre-testing. An exception may be authorized by the
Resident Engineer where a signal or switch machine is in service and will be
reconfigured for final cutover or cannot be installed or wired until final cutover.
P. An appropriate meter shall be used when testing circuits. Visual observation of a
relay is only valid when coil voltage or current or contact voltage, as applicable, is
also measured.
Q. Test and inspection procedures shall be subject to the Resident Engineer’s
acceptance and shall comply with all regulatory requirements and the
manufacturer’s recommended test procedure.
R. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 48 hours prior to each field test. No part of the
signal system shall be placed in service without an authorized representative of the
Engineer being present and witnessing the in-service tests.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following pre-test information to the Resident Engineer for acceptance:
1. Pre-testing authorization request 15 days in advance of proposed pre-
testing. Such request shall include:
a. Names of Contractor’s Signal Engineer in charge of pre-testing.
b. Other personnel assigned to the pre-test who will be performing the
tests or assisting with the tests.
c. List the assigned location(s) of the Contractor’s personnel and their
designated duties during the pre-test.
d. An outline of the tests to be performed on each type of component,
unit, or system, together with samples of the corresponding test
records. The outline shall be arranged to indicate the proper
sequence of each test to be performed on each component or unit.
In addition, the date and time will be shown for each test.
e. Detailed description of each test to be performed, including the
operating parameter to be tested. Test equipment to be used for the
test, including the model number, serial number, calibration period,
last calibration date and a brief description of the purpose of the test
equipment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
f. Description of equipment to be used for communication between the
various individuals involved in the testing.
2. Schedule of pre-testing Contractor proposes to perform which includes
beginning and ending dates, times, and locations in a time-line format.
3. Identify any test or operation that may disrupt or disarrange the existing
signal circuits or systems. Include description of proposed safety provisions
and back-up contingency plans.
B. Submit the following in-service testing information to the Engineer for acceptance:
1. Submit, 60 days in advance of any in-service testing, a detailed cutover and
in-service test procedure. This procedure shall indicate the Contractor’s
personnel involved, their assigned location, and responsibility during the in-
service testing. Include the following for Contractor-directed signal cutovers
(the following does not apply to Owner–directed signal cutovers): The test
procedure shall adequately reflect the test to be performed and the
sequence in which the tests shall be performed. A signal aspect chart
indicating the appropriate signal aspect to be displayed as train simulation
tests are made shall be included. The signal aspect chart shall indicate the
progressive down grading of signals and track codes and shall reflect the
resulting signal aspect displayed because of a light-out condition.
2. The test procedure shall include an outline of the tests to be performed on
each type of component, unit, or system, together with corresponding
samples of test record forms and cards. The outline shall be arranged to
indicate the proper sequence of each test to be performed on each
component or unit; the numbers of each type of component or unit to be
tested to demonstrate adequacy of design and quality control; and a line
diagram showing the grouping and sequencing of system and subsystem.
C. Contractor’s testing procedures and cut-over plan is subject to the Resident
Engineer’s review and approval. Allow 30 days for this approval process. In the
event the Contractor’s testing procedures and cutover plan is rejected in any
manner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for delay or compensation
from the Owner.
D. Record the results of each test, as herein specified, and submit copies of the field
test reports to the Engineer immediately at the completion of the cut-over testing.
Prepare final type-written test reports as indicated herein and submit to the
Engineer within five (5) days after the completion of each test. Final type-written
test reports shall include complete details of the test results and corrections, or
adjustments performed, or which remain to be completed. The type-written test
reports shall be signed and dated by the Contractor’s Signal Engineer. Furnish
certified test results for tests performed by any subcontractors when such tests are
required within these Specifications.
E. Where required in this Section, submit test results on completed SCRRA test record
forms.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
F. Submit test reports for any additional tests required by the Contractor to ensure the
safe operation of the system to the Engineer.
G. Upon completion of all tests, submit a letter certifying that all tests necessary to
comply with all current regulatory requirements of these Specifications have been
performed at listed locations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Work and testing shall comply with the following standards and regulatory
requirements: AREMA Communications and Signals Manual, Part 2.4.1. and CFR,
Title 49, Parts 234 and 236.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 SITE TEST INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Test instruments and equipment necessary to conduct the tests specified herein
shall be available, ready for use not less than one week in advance of test need.
“Ready for use” shall mean properly matched for test parameters, properly
calibrated, and sufficiently supplied with leads, probes, adapters, stands, and
similar items necessary to conduct the test in a completely professional manner.
2.02 TEMPORARY TEST MATERIALS
A. Temporary or interim test related materials, special tools, connections, jumpers, and
similar items shall be furnished and available not less than one week in advance of
the test need.
2.03 FACTORY TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. All wiring and equipment shall be checked to verify conformance to the Contract
Plans and the Specifications.
B. Each control point, intermediate signal, grade crossing warning system shelter or
any other signal equipment shelter shall be tested to verify that it functions properly
before it is shipped to the field for installation. These tests shall involve connecting
all control systems (excluding signals, switches, and similar equipment) that make
up a control point, intermediate signal, grade crossing warning system shelter, or
any other signal equipment shelter; applying power; and then exercising each
function of the system and verify proper result.
C. Provide confirmation that all required factory tests of systems, sub-systems,
assemblies, sub-assemblies and components supplied under this Contract have
been performed. Each component and unit shall be inspected at its point of
manufacture and evidence of this inspection and acceptability shall be indicated.
Certified test reports shall be furnished.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
3.01 FIELD TEST PROCEDURES
A. Perform as many pre-tests as possible in advance of in-service testing. Include, at
minimum, the adjustment of tunable joint couplers, microprocessor based coded
track circuits, verify signal aspects against received and transmitted codes. Verify
operation of, calibrate grade crossing prediction units, and adjust grade crossing
signal control equipment as required to assure proper operation. To have a
successful cut-over, it is essential that as much pre-testing and advance wiring be
completed before in-service testing begins.
1. Condition precedent for in-service testing and cut-over will be the completion of
pre-testing and the Resident Engineer’s acceptance of the results. Complete
pre-testing and submit the results to the Engineer not less than one (1) week
prior to the proposed cut-over date.
B. The field tests performed shall cause each installed system and subsystem to be
sequenced through its required operations, including the imposition of simulated
conditions, to demonstrate that the installation complies with all specified fail-safe
design requirements and operational functions.
C. Demonstrate the quality of installation by field tests for continuity, insulation
resistance, resistance of ground connections, circuit breakdown, visual inspection,
and any other tests required by these Specifications. Perform these tests prior to
any operational testing of systems or subsystems.
D. The Contractor's test procedures shall consist of preprinted data sheets or
inspection forms. Where applicable, results of test results shall be recorded on
SCRRA forms. These forms will be provided by the Engineer. When completed by
the field test personnel and checked for accuracy and completeness, submit the
sheet as the test report.
E. When tests require specific meter or test instrument readings, the preprinted data
sheet shall show the allowable range of values, for each part of the test. The test
report shall also contain a check off system for each action and a blank space
adjacent to the expected value in which to record the test readings.
F. All test reports shall be dated and signed by the Contractor’s Signal Engineer on the
day the test is performed. Space also shall be provided for the signature of the
witnessing inspector.
G. The report shall show the specific test instruments used on each test, with
instruments identified by name, type, serial number, calibration date, and calibration
due date.
H. Should an error be discovered during field testing due to field wiring and
connections that do not agree with the accepted circuit plans, the Contractor may
correct such errors without prior acceptance of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
notify the Engineer of the corrections as soon as practical.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
I. The Engineer will make all final determinations as to whether only a part, or the
whole test, shall be rerun when any specific field test does not meet the
requirements specified for the test.
J. Any changes made after completion of test procedure shall be re-tested in
accordance with the applicable test procedure and regulatory requirement.
3.02 GENERAL FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Perform general field tests including the tests listed herein.
B. Ground verification test.
C. Dielectric breakdown test of all vital circuitry.
D. Wiring verification of all non-vital circuitry.
E. Vital function tests.
F. Operating tests.
G. All applicable tests prescribed by AREMA C&S Manual Part 2.4.1, where the
AREMA inspections and tests do not conflict with the requirements of these
Specifications
H. All applicable tests as required to ensure systems comply with CFR 49, Parts 234
and 236.
I. Positive Train Control (PTC) verification and validation.
3.03 SPECIFIC FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Perform specific field tests listed herein.
B. Grounds:
1. Ground resistance shall be tested and reported as described in Section 34
42 56, Signal Grounding.
2. All low voltage DC circuits shall be tested for grounds in accordance with
the Metrolink Signal Maintenance Manual.
3. Contractor shall record test results on the appropriate SCRRA form and
submit this completed form to the Engineer to obtain acceptance of this test
requirement.
C. Insulation Resistance:
1. Insulation resistance tests shall be made between all conductors and
ground, and between conductors in each cable in accordance with FRA rule
236.108. The insulation resistance of wires and cables installed by the
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
Contractor shall provide an “infinite” reading when using a direct reading
instrument (megger) having a self-contained source of direct current test
voltage. The megger scale shall have a minimum range of zero to 20
megohms and be rated at 250 volts minimum and 650 volts maximum.
2. All insulation tests shall be performed after the equipment and cables are
installed and completely terminated in the field.
3. Contractor shall record test results on the appropriate SCRRA form and
submit this completed form to the Engineer to obtain acceptance of this test
requirement.
D. Vital Relays:
1. All DC vital relays shall be tested for pick-up and drop-away values. These
values shall be in accordance with field requirement values stated in Table
641-1 of AREMA C&S manual, Part 6.4.1.
2. Contractor shall perform all tests in accordance with the Metrolink Signal
Maintenance Manual. Results shall be recorded on the appropriate SCRRA
test form.
3. These tests shall be performed at the shelter locations after the shelter has
been set. Test result forms shall be submitted to the Resident Engineer.
E. Energy Distribution: Energy-Off Tests: With all power to the signal instrument
shelter or wayside case off, the following checks and tests shall be performed.
These tests shall include:
1. Removing all fuses.
2. Verifying that circuit breaker size compares to that of Contract Plans.
3. Comparing wire gages with those called for on the Contract Plans. All
discrepancies in wire sizes shall be replaced with the proper size wire.
4. During energy distribution breakdown, a wire count on each terminal, relay
contact, etc. shall be taken to ensure that only the number of wires called for
on the Contract Plans is present at each terminal, relay contact, etc. Any
discrepancies found shall be corrected and additional wires, if found, shall
be removed.
5. Verify proper system voltage for each power supply, AC and DC.
6. Verify all power supplies for correct settings.
7. Verify that no cross, shorts, or grounds exist.
8. Tags shall be verified for proper nomenclature and terminal location.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
F. Breakdown of Control Circuits:
1. All circuits shall be tested in their entirety for the correct operation of, and
response to, each contact on each circuit element, such as relays and
contactors. Where parallel paths exist, the tests shall validate each path,
and circuits shall be opened when required to ensure the proper test has
been made.
2. Each circuit shall be tested by simulating all operating conditions to verify
that the circuit operates in accordance with the Specifications and accepted
plans.
G. Electric Switch and Lock Movements (when applicable):
1. Continuity checks of field wires to switch-and-lock movements to verify all
nomenclature.
2. Adjust throw bar so that proper tension is placed on switch points in both
directions.
3. Manually operate switch machine normal and adjust lock rods and point
detector rods to allow switch machine to lock up with no obstruction.
Repeat above for switch machine in reverse position.
4. Turn on switch machine power, call switch machine normal and observe in
field that switch machine corresponds to position called, and observe in
wayside instrument shelter that proper switch correspondence relay is
energized.
5. With switch machine called normal, check gaps on circuit controller contacts
to see that they meet equipment specifications. Operate machine reverse
and repeat.
6. Break down each contact in switch circuit controller and observe that proper
switch correspondence relay drops. Repeat this procedure for both
positions of the switch.
7. Place ammeter in series with motor control energy and adjust clutch such
that it causes overload relay to pick up in less than ten seconds with
1/4-inch obstruction in switch point. Record current reading. Repeat for
opposite position.
8. Place switch and lock movement in "hand" operation and observe switch
mechanism cannot be operated by power. Place back in "motor" and verify
that switch mechanism can be powered from wayside instrument shelter.
9. Operate switch, then shunt detector track circuit and observe that switch
machine is stopped in middle of stroke and not allowed to complete
movement. Remove shunt and verify switch completes movement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
10. Contractor shall record test results on the appropriate SCRRA form and
submit this completed form the Engineer to obtain acceptance of this test
requirement.
H. Signal Layouts: Tests shall be performed on all signal layouts. These tests shall
include the following:
1. Continuity check of field wires and verification of all nomenclature.
2. Apply energy to signal lighting circuits and adjust all lamp voltages to 10
percent less than the lamp rating.
3. Sight signals for maximum visibility.
4. Check that light-out feature, where used, complies with FRA Rule 236.23(f).
5. Positive Train Control (PTC) verification and validation. Demonstrate that
signal aspects are tabled correctly into the Metrolink PTC system. Test shall
be performed in coordination with Metrolink assigned personnel. All possible
signal aspects shall be verified and confirmed against the applicable
Metrolink database.
I. Line Circuits: The purpose of this test procedure shall be to verify the integrity of
line circuits between wayside instrument locations. These tests shall include the
following:
1. All nomenclature shall be verified and line circuits tested for continuity.
2. Each repeater relay shall be tested to determine that it follows the primary
relay’s operation.
3. Each line circuit will have a breakdown test performed between wayside
instrument locations. Breakdown of the line circuit shall begin at the
origination point of the circuit. The positive side of the circuit shall be opened
to ensure appropriate relay or input is de-energized in the other instrument
shelter. Close circuit and verify that the proper relay returns to its normal
position. Repeat for the negative side of the circuit. If circuit breaks through
relays within the instrument shelter where circuit originates, drop each relay
one at a time, which breaks the circuit to verify that the appropriate relay or
input is de-energized in the other instrument shelter. Restore relay and
verify that the proper relay and/or input returns to its normal position in the
other shelter. Each relay and/or input shall be tested to ensure that it follows
all the proper breaks in the signal shelters.
J. Control Office to Wayside Interface (when applicable): Upon completion of the
wayside tests, a system test shall be performed to ensure continuity of operation of
wayside equipment by the supervisory control system. This test shall consist of
controlling all office wayside functions from the supervisory control console and the
transmission back to the control office of all indications from the field stations. The
functions to be tested shall include the following:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
1. Controls from Supervisory Control Console
a. Control of switch machines.
b. Lining of routes.
2. Indications to Supervisory Control Console
a. Switch machine positions normal, reverse and out-of-
correspondence.
b. Track circuit occupancy, all tracks.
c. Signal clear indications, each signal.
d. Power-off and alarm indications.
e. Auxiliary input indications if applicable.
f. Signal at stop indications, each signal.
g. Signal in time indication for each route.
3. All design changes found necessary to obtain proper operation shall be
submitted to the Resident Engineer for acceptance.
K. Local Panel Test (when applicable):
1. Verify proper operation of all controls and indications.
L. Switch Circuit Controllers (when applicable):
1. Each switch circuit controller shall be tested to verify wiring, mechanical
connectors, point obstruction, and point detection in accordance with
AREMA C&S Manual, Part 12.5.1.
2. Contractor shall record test results on the appropriate SCRRA form and
submit this completed form to the Engineer to obtain acceptance of this test
requirement.
M. Track Circuits:
1. Each track circuit shall be tested for shunting sensitivity and polarity in
accordance with the AREMA C&S Manual, Part 8.6.1.
N. Insulated joints:
1. Each insulated joint installed by the Contractor shall be tested with one of
the following insulated joint testers, the Harmon 1501A1JC, S&C Model 324
Track Circuit Short Finder, or accepted equal, and shall measure no less
than 100 ohms across the joint.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
O. Interlocking and Control Point Tests (when applicable):
1. A detailed list of the tests and complete test procedures shall be provided by
the Engineer to establish safe and proper operation of interlockings. The
Contractor shall provide the necessary personnel and equipment, along with
support functions, as part of the signal test crew. The test sequence shall be
designed to test each function for correct performance, in accordance with
these Specifications and the Contract Drawings. Furthermore, the test
sequence shall include simulated unusual conditions to determine that the
interlocking circuits will respond in a safe and desirable way.
2. The functions to be tested shall include the following:
a. Time locking.
b. Route locking.
c. Verification of time releases.
d. Indication locking.
e. Signal operation in accordance with route and aspect charts.
f. Positive Train Control (PTC) verification and validation.
g. Interconnection with existing block signal systems.
h. Interconnection with existing interlocking’s. With an established
direction of traffic, the controlled signal, governing entrance to that
route, shall be put to stop. Traffic in the opposite direction shall not
be established until a predetermined time has passed. This prede-
termined time shall be as indicated on the accepted plans. It shall
be ascertained that time locking is effective for this test.
3. Time tests shall be as follows:
a. Loss of shunt.
b. Time locking.
c. Flashing rate time.
4. Positive Train Control (PTC) verification and validation. Demonstrate that
signal aspects and power switch positions are tabled correctly into the
Metrolink PTC system. Test shall be performed in coordination with
Metrolink assigned personnel. All possible signal aspects and switch
positions shall be verified and confirmed against the applicable Metrolink
database.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 58 Signal System Testing
5. Record test results on the appropriate SCRRA forms. Submit these
completed forms to the Engineer to obtain acceptance of these test
requirements.
PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Signal System Testing will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by
the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans
will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Signal System Testing furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule
of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this Section shall include the cost of all associated equipment, including
meters, meggers, relay test units, shunt cords, communications equipment and
testing.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 58 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 60
SIGNAL SYSTEMS MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for miscellaneous components and products for
signal systems that the Contractor shall provide and install. All materials provided
by the Contractor shall be new, unless designated on the railroad plans or approved
by the Resident Engineer.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1. C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
C. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts, material descriptions,
Specifications, and other data pertinent to the miscellaneous products required.
B. Submit samples of solder-less crimp-on type terminals be used in this Contract as
well as samples of solder-less crimp-on type terminals from vendors performing
house wiring.
1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish two gallons or equivalent volume of corrosion preventive compound.
Compound shall be the same product as approved for use in the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All electrical components shall be rated to operate at power, voltage, current, and
temperature levels exceeding by 20 percent those which the components will be
subject to in service, unless otherwise specified herein.
B. Miscellaneous components and products shall be clearly and permanently labeled
with value or type identification.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 60 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 60 Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND FUSES
A. Circuit breakers and fuses shall be of suitable capacity to protect the various pieces
of signal apparatus from the effects of short circuits or overloads. All circuit
breakers and fuses required for the equipment and systems shall be in accordance
with these Specifications.
B. Circuit fuses shall be non-renewable, and shall be of the fiber-case, time lag, fusion
type.
C. The circuit breakers and fuses shall be the correct size and rating for circuit current
interruption and shall protect the electrical equipment and circuits from short-term
and long-term overloads.
D. All circuit breakers and fuses shall be centrally located on the power distribution
panel and power racks.
E. Fuse clips shall be constructed so that they shall retain their resilience under all
installation and service conditions, to ensure a positive contact between the clips
and the fuse.
2.03 DIODES
A. Diodes to be furnished under this Contract shall carry a JEDEC number or shall be
available from more than one manufacturer and shall be used within the published
Specifications for such number. All diodes shall be silicon type, unless otherwise
accepted by the Engineer.
2.04 RESISTORS
A. Resistors, other than those required for electronic circuits, shall be in accordance
with AREMA C&S Manual Part 14.2.15.
2.05 REACTORS
A. Reactors, other than those required for electronic circuits, shall be in accordance
with AREMA C&S Manual Part 14.2.20.
2.06 SIGNAL TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Signal system terminal blocks shall be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of AREMA C&S Manual Part 14.1.5.
2.07 TERMINAL BINDING POSTS
A. Signal system terminal binding posts shall be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of AREMA C&S Manual Part 14.1.10.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 60 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 60 Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
B. Terminal binding posts for interface with plug-coupled wires to rack mounted
electronic equipment shall be in accordance with the AREMA C&S Manual, Part
14.1.2.
2.08 TERMINAL POST INSULATORS
A. All terminal posts, located on terminal boards in the wayside cases and signal
instrument shelters, used to terminate 50V, or greater, ac or dc circuits, shall be
provided with a protective insulator.
B. The type of insulator shall be individual for each terminal post and shall be fire-
resistant.
2.09 INSULATED TEST LINK
A. Type 024620-1X as manufactured by Siemens., or an approved equal.
2.10 LIGHTNING ARRESTERS AND EQUALIZERS
A. Siemens Clearview No. 022485-28X, Equalizer No. 022700-1X, or an approved
equal. Lightning arresters and equalizers shall be mounted on accepted type base
and shall be in accordance with AREMA C&S Manual Part 11.3.1.
2.11 SURGE PROTECTORS
A. Siemens SP-17, SP-18, SP-19, SP-20, or an approved equal. Surge Protectors
shall be in accordance with AREMA C&S Manual Part 11.3.3.
2.12 TERMINALS FOR WIRES AND CABLES
A. Solderless terminals shall be in accordance with the AREMA C&S Manual, Part
14.1.1, unless otherwise specified herein.
B. Terminals shall be of the solderless crimp-on type. Samples of all solderless
terminals shall be submitted for approval.
C. Stranded copper wire shall be fitted with an approved type of terminal at all points
where the wires are to be terminated on terminal binding posts.
D. The terminating means shall be of four types:
1. A lug for terminating heavy wires or signal power wires.
2. A solderless type of terminal as manufactured by American Pamcor, Inc.,
under the trade name of “Pre-Insulated Flags” with translucent insulation
similar to Catalog No. 322313, or an approved equal, for terminating No. 16
and No. 14, American Wire Gauge (AWG) stranded wires.
3. An AMP Solistrand "Ring Tongue-Flat" terminal, similar to that shown on the
AMP Drawing P64044, together with slip-on nylon post insulator, similar to
that shown on AMP Drawing P64-0264, or an approved equal, for
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 60 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 60 Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
terminating wires larger than No. 14 AWG to a maximum diameter over the
insulation of 0.40 inch.
4. An AMP pre-insulated; diamond grip ring nylon insulated wire terminal shall
be used for terminating other stranded wires, No. 20 and No. 18 AWG,
having maximum diameter of 0.125 inch. AMP Catalog No. 320554, or an
approved equal, shall be furnished for No. 8 studs and AMP Catalog No.
320571, or an approved equal, shall be furnished for 1/4-inch studs.
E. Terminals shall be for attaching to the ends of the conductor in such a manner that
the flexibility of the conductor will not be destroyed and the possibility of breakage at
the terminal will be reduced to a minimum.
F. Terminals shall be for attaching to the wire with a tool made by the manufacturer of
the terminal and recommended by the manufacturer for the terminals being
furnished.
G. The tool shall be equipped with a ratchet device to ensure proper indentation of the
terminal, which will not release until proper indentation is complete.
2.13 TAGGING FOR CABLES, WIRES AND EQUIPMENT
A. Except as otherwise specified in this Section, permanently identify with a tag both
ends of each cable, each cable wire, and all single wires that terminate in the
junction boxes, switch mechanisms, signal instrument shelters, on equipment racks,
relay bases, shelter, and any equipment of the signal system outside of such
locations. Install tags so that they may be read with minimum disturbance of the
tags. Each conductor of the cable shall be rung out and identified before applying
the tag. Tagging shall follow the three-line convention with the termination in the first
line, nomenclature in the second line, and termination of the other end of the wire in
the third line. This three-line convention shall be in accordance with the Metrolink
Engineering Standard 8150.
B. Tags for wire and cable identification and for identification of transformers, resistors,
reactors and other components shall meet the following requirements and shall be
subject to Engineer’s acceptance:
1. Sleeve Type Tags:
a. Tags for identifying individual cable conductors and field-installed
wires within the signal instrument shelters, wayside cases, switch
mechanisms, switch layout junction boxes, base of signal junction
boxes, and similar applications, shall be the sleeve type as
manufactured by Raychem Corporation, Thermofit Marker System
(TMS), or an approved equal. The application of the conductor
nomenclature shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and shall result in a permanently bonded and legible
identification.
2. Flat Plastic Tags:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 60 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 60 Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
a. Tags for identification of vital relay plug boards, individual
transformers, resistors, reactors, terminals, and other miscellaneous
components within the signal instrument shelters, wayside cases,
and outside terminal cases, shall be the flat plastic laminated type.
b. These tags shall be 1-1/2 inches long by 1/2-inch-wide. The
untreated tag shall be milk white "vinylite", or an approved equal.
c. The identifying nomenclature space shall allow for two rows of
lettering, and the tag material shall be capable of receiving typed-on
characters by conventional means. The height of the lettering shall
not be less than 1/8 inch.
d. After lettering, both the face and backside of the tag shall be
covered with a clear plastic coating, "vinylite", or an approved equal.
2.14 HARDWARE
A. Mounting hardware exposed to the elements and used for signal equipment, cases,
conduit, hangers, brackets, clamps, and the like, shall be hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with AREMA C&S Manual Part 15.3.1, except as otherwise accepted
by the Engineer.
B. Galvanizing:
1. The hot-dip process of galvanizing shall be used. All parts shall be picked
so that all scale and adhering impurities are removed. The zinc coating
shall be of commercially pure zinc and shall be continuous and thorough. It
shall not scale, blister, or be removable by any of the processes of handling
or installation. The finished surface shall be free from fine line cracks,
holes, or other indications of faulty galvanizing. It shall be smooth and free
from adhering flux and other impurities. The edges and ends of parts shall
be free from lumps and globules. Parts shall be coated with at least two
ounces of zinc per square foot of galvanized surface, after all bending,
cutting, drilling, and final fabrication.
C. Cadmium Plating:
1. Nuts, bolts, and washers shall be cadmium plated or stainless.
2. Cadmium plating shall be an impervious, dense, hard, fine grained,
continuous, closely adhering coating of commercially pure cadmium, free
from capillaries and shall completely cover the surface of the part in a
smooth, bright layer. Plating on raised or prominent portions shall show no
evidence of blackness or loose crystalline structure. It shall have a
minimum thickness of six ten thousandths of an inch and shall withstand the
salt spray test for at least 1,000 hours or an equivalent test accepted by the
Engineer.
2.15 CONDUIT
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 60 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 60 Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
A. Flexible Conduit
1. Conduit for track circuit leads, switch-and-lock movements, and electric lock
layouts shall be Liquid-Tite flexible conduit or an approved equal. The
conduit shall be clamped at both ends with stainless steel clamps. Clamps
are not required for track wire risers.
2. Metallic Flexible Conduit: Where acceptable to the Engineer, metallic
flexible conduit, Type UA, or an approved equal may be used.
B. Fittings
1. Approved fittings for flexible conduit shall be used.
2.16 PADLOCKS
A. Switch padlocks will be Owner-furnished.
B. Signal padlocks will be Owner-furnished. The Contractor shall provide temporary
padlocks until such time the equipment is placed in-service.
C. Switch padlocks for the freight carrier’s use will be SCRRA furnished. Provide all
other padlocks to provide security of signal and electrical equipment until such time
as the equipment is placed in-service and approved through final acceptance.
D. Provide signal equipment padlocks until such time as the project is found to be
acceptable and the Owner relieves the Contractor of maintenance responsibility.
The Contractor and Owner or SCRRA will schedule a lock change out program
directly related to the final acceptance of the project. The schedule shall be
coordinated through the Resident Engineer. Present a list of equipment locks to be
changed out by equipment and locations and the total number of locks that will be
required to secure all the signal equipment.
2.17 SEALING COMPOUND
A. Sealing compound for use in sealing cable entrances shall be in accordance with
AREMA C&S Manual Part 15.2.15.
2.18 CABLE ENTRANCE PIPES
A. Cable entrance pipes for wayside signal shelters shall be 4-inch PVC, Schedule 40,
and 3 feet 6 inches long and extend 18 inches below the final grade.
B. Cable entrance for wayside signals shall be 4 inch Liquid-Tite flexible conduit or an
approved equal. Entrance pipe shall extend 18 inches below finished grade around
signal.
C. Cable entrance pipes are not required where a cable chute directly enters a pullbox.
2.19 JUNCTION BOXES
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 60 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 60 Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
A. All junction boxes shall be provided with gaskets to prevent the entrance of
moisture and dust, in accordance with AREMA C&S Manual Part 15.2.10.
B. Junction boxes shall be provided to terminate underground cables at all switch and
lock movements and all switch circuit controllers.
C. Junction boxes shall be provided with means for applying padlock.
2.20 LUBRICATION
A. Lubrication for switch tie plates for all switch and lock movement layouts installed by
the Contractor shall be an accepted graphite lubricant, similar to Dixon's Graphite
"Railroad 60".
2.21 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION (CORROSION PREVENTIVE COMPOUND)
A. Protection, as hereinafter specified for machine-finished surfaces, threaded rods,
nuts, and other parts that are susceptible to rusting or corroding, shall be a
corroding preventive compound, NO-OX-IDE No. 90918, or an approved equal.
The product shall have sufficient body to resist weather and rusting for at least 6
months.
2.22 DC TRACK CIRCUITS
A. Transmitters shall be a 2TC or 3TC manufactured by Alstom, or an approved equal.
2.23 STYLE C TRACK CIRCUITS
A. Transmitter shall be a TD-4 as manufactured by Alstom, or an approved equal.
2.24 AUDIO FREQUENCY ISLAND TRACK CIRCUITS
A. Audio frequency island track circuits shall be AFTAC-II manufactured by Alstom,
PSO manufactured by Siemens, or an approved equal.
2.25 OVERLAY TRACK CIRCUITS
A. Provide and install overlay track circuits EPIC III manufactured by Alstom, or an
approved equal.
2.26 AC TRACK CIRCUITS
A. AC Track Circuits shall be steady energy such as the SE-3 manufactured by
Siemens or an approved equal. Vane Relays shall not be used.
2.27 DATA RADIO
A. Data radio package shall be comprised of Siemens WCP II Radio, PN A53412;
DC/DC Converter, PN A53106; and Wayside Control Unit, PN A53105.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 60 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 60 Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
2.28 POWER OFF STROBE LIGHT
A. Power off strobe light and miscellaneous materials shall be packaged and shipped
with each shelter to be installed as shown on the Contract Plans. Power off strobe
light and miscellaneous materials shall be installed in the field by the installation
contractor.
B. Each shelter requiring a power off strobe light and Miscellaneous materials will
include the following:
1. 1 ea. Power Off Indication Light – S&C Distribution Company p/n 120-10, or
an approved equal.
2. 1 ea. Power Off Indication Light protective cage, metallic and powder
coated to match exterior surface of instrument enclosure.
2.29 ENCLOSURE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Intrusion alarm system to be supplied and installed inside of enclosure as depicted
on the Contract Plans. Intrusion alarm system supplied by “ADEMCO No. V20
Pack”, or equivalent system approved by the Engineer.
2.30 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish two gallons or equivalent volume of corrosion preventive compound, No-
Ox-ID A-Special or approved equal. Compound shall be the same product as
approved for use in the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Material and apparatus specified herein shall be installed in accordance with the
details of respective Sections of these Specifications, Metrolink Engineering
Standards, manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with the Contract
Drawings.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Furnishing, installing and testing Signal System Miscellaneous Products will be
measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities
as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of
values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 60 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 60 Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
A. Furnishing, installing and testing Signal System Miscellaneous Products in
accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit
Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include
full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 60 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 62
SERVICE METERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for 120/240, 100A three-wire, single-phase
meter service and upgrading existing meter service to 120/240, 100A, 3-wire,
single-phase meter service.
B. Provide all interface with, and in conformance to the standards of the Local Power
Company (LPC), to obtain the commercial metered power service at the locations
shown on the Contract Plans and as required by the Engineer.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 34 42 56 – Signal Grounding
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Meter Service Plans, indicating mounting pole, meter base, breaker box,
and grounding.
B. Submit Peak load calculation for each meter location. Submit load calculation
within 90 days of Notice to Proceed.
C. Submit letter certifying that the installation of the meter service has been approved
by the local electrical inspector.
D. Submit a copy of each service order to the Resident Engineer for approval and to
verify that each meter service planned falls within the Owners property.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical service shall conform to the provisions in NFPA 70 National Electrical
Code and these Specifications.
B. Materials and equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall conform to
all applicable State and local ordinances pertaining to electrical power installations,
and the National Electrical Code (NEC).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 62 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 62 Service Meters
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Circuit Breakers
1. Circuit breakers shall be sized by the Contractor for the projected loads.
Circuit breakers for 120 Vac power shall be 2-pole rated for 240 Vac.
Panels shall contain 25 percent spare circuit breaker space.
2. One double pole circuit breaker shall be provided for future use, in addition
to the 25 percent space circuit breaker space, specified herein.
B. Meter Bases: Shall meet the requirements of LPC.
C. Ground Rods and Ground Rod Clamps: Ground rods and ground rod clamps shall
meet the requirements of Section 34 42 56, Signal Grounding, and those of the
LPC.
D. Wood Poles: Shall meet the requirements of LPC.
E. Meter Pedestals and Bases: Shall provide and install meter pedestals and bases
which meet the requirements of LPC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Make the necessary arrangements with LPC and pay all fees in connection with
having the new meter service hooked up at least one month prior to placing signal
system in service.
B. Arrange to obtain the service connection from LPC. Pay LPC charges for this
service connection.
C. Where the Contract Documents specify that the Owner will coordinate with the LPC,
Contractor shall be responsible for installation and coordination with the LPC.
3.02 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the connection and interface of new cables and equipment with LPC
in accordance with its standards.
B. Shall be responsible for Local Power Company monthly charges from all new
meters installed until SCRRA accepts full and final maintenance of the project.
When final acceptance has been granted, the Contractor shall coordinate with
SCRRA and the Local Power Company to transfer all new meter address to
SCRRA at:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 62 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 62 Service Meters
Southern California Regional Rail Authority
ATTENTION: Pamela Hempsted
900 Wilshire Blvd. Ste. 1500
Los Angeles, California 90017
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. The installation of the various equipment and materials for the signal power
distribution system that are specified herein shall be in accordance with LPC’s
requirements and the NEC.
B. The requirements included within this Section shall cover all incidental installation
work necessary to affect an integrated, tested, and operable signal power system
for the Work as shown on the Contract Plans.
C. Arrange utility power service at all equipment shelter locations requiring such
services. Connections to equipment shelters from meter may be by underground or
aerial connection. Where aerial connection is used, maximum aerial length
between meter and shelter shall not exceed 125 feet without the Engineer’s prior
acceptance.
D. The Contractor, in cooperation with the Engineer, shall meet as necessary with LPC
representatives to negotiate for the upgrade, relocation, or addition of required
power services needed to complete system operation.
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Meter service grounding shall be in accordance with Section 34 42 56, Signal
Grounding, the NEC, and the LPC’s requirements. If there is a conflict between the
above specifications, LPC’s requirements shall govern.
3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Simulated load tests, in accordance with approved signal power system test
procedure, shall be satisfactorily completed prior to final connection of signal
facilities at each equipment location.
B. Prior to final acceptance by the Engineer, obtain inspection of the new AC power
service by state and local jurisdictional authority(s), as required.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Service Meters will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 62 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 62 Service Meters
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Service Meters furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule
of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing
all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 62 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 64
HIGHWAY-RAIL GRADE CROSSING WARNING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for highway-rail crossing warning systems.
These requirements shall also apply to pedestrian grade crossing warning
systems, as applicable.
B. As shown on the Contract Drawings, or as required to accommodate associated
other work of the Contract, make modifications to the existing highway-rail
crossing warning systems including such work as replacing, rewiring, or
relocating of existing equipment or providing new control equipment and
trackside equipment.
C. Provide continuous operation of the highway-rail crossing warning systems in
preparation for, and during, track installation and rehabilitation work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 49, Transportation:
1. Part 234 Grade Crossing Signal System Safety
2. Part 236 Rules, Standards, and Instructions for Railroad Signal
System
C. General Orders (G.O.) of the State of California Public Utilities Commission
(CPUC) shall apply:
1. G.O. 75D: Protection of Crossing at Grade of Roads, Highways, and
Streets with Railroads
D. Southern California Regional Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install new train detection equipment, wideband shunts, narrowband
shunts, tuned joint couplers, dummy loads, shunt housings, insulated joints, and
track connections for designated crossings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
B. Provide continuous highway-rail crossing warning during all phases of rail
construction. Refer to Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions. At no time shall the
work of the Contractor cause delay to train operation, cause an unsafe signaling
condition to exist, or reduce the effectiveness or quality of the existing or new
grade crossing warning systems.
C. Provide rail bonding for new or modified rail joints or turnouts, as shown on the
Contract Drawings. Provide rail bonding, as necessary, to maintain existing
systems during construction.
D. Protect existing signaling cabling and, where necessary, relocate existing cabling
to prevent damage to the cabling during track installation, profiling, or grade
crossing work.
E. Record the final as-built conditions of the crossing warning system for each
crossing.
F. Perform and document all tests and inspections in accordance with CFR 49
regulations and these specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals for highway grade crossing devices, equipment, systems,
assemblies, and detailed design in accordance with the requirements of Section
34 42 00, General Signaling Requirements.
1. Submit, for approval by the Engineer, proposed plan for providing
alternate methods of crossing warning during cutover and whenever the
existing automatic crossing warning devices are deactivated, altered, or
modified to accommodate construction work. Alternate methods shall
conform to applicable parts of CFR, Title 49, including Part 234, and local
ordinances.
2. Alternative Foundation Design: If the Contractor proposes foundations
different from those shown on the Contract Drawings, submit drawings of
the type of foundations, including size and details of the galvanized
anchor bolts, nuts, and washers, to the Engineer's approval. Include
structural calculations with loadings and wind shear parameters. The
Contractor’s alternate final design drawings and calculations shall be
approved and sealed by a professional engineer registered in California.
B. Detailed Work Plan: The following work plan shall be coordinated with and
integrated with submittals made under Section 01 14 00, Work Restrictions.
Submit a detailed work plan, for approval and coordination by the Engineer, prior
to making the changeover from the existing crossing warning system to the new
crossing warning system. The Contractor's proposed plan shall detail the
amount of time the warning system will be out-of-service and the substitute
warning which will be provided to allow normal railroad operations to be
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
maintained. Change over of control, testing, and temporary-warning procedures
shall be coordinated with the Engineer.
C. Submit for approval of the Engineer a procedure plan for conducting quality
assurance, component integrity, circuit continuity, circuit breakdown, and system
operation tests.
D. Submit product data for products furnished under this Section.
E. Submit documentation of acceptance testing.
F. Submit test reports within 3 days of testing.
1.05 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A. Package printed circuit cards separate from the constant warning time (CWT)
units and all other electronic components with removable cards for shipment to
the field. Protect each CWT unit and printed circuit card from damage or loss
during handling and shipment.
B. Protect precast concrete foundation units during handling to avoid damage in
transmit and at storage locations. Support, cushion, and stack to protect the
edges of the units. Replace chipped, cracked, or damaged units.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL
A. Furnish materials and equipment for installation and for interconnection of the
highway crossing warning as indicated on the Contract Drawings and specified
herein. Materials and equipment shall be the products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the production of such material and equipment and shall be
the manufacturer's latest design. Signaling materials and equipment shall be of
a type and model that are in standard operation on major railway systems.
B. Only those existing materials and equipment specifically identified on the
Contract Drawings for re-use, relocation, or modification shall be incorporated in
the highway-rail crossing warning systems. Materials and equipment shall
conform to the provisions of AREMA Signal Manual, except as modified in this
Section.
C. Furnish trackside equipment, such as tuned joint couplers, narrow band shunts,
and wideband shunts, as shown on the Contract Drawings. Furnish equipment
shelters, predictors, track filters, chokes, and other equipment as shown on the
Contract Drawings and as required for complete installation.
D. Refer to Section 01 64 00, SCRRA Furnished Material and Equipment, for lists of
Owner-furnished equipment. Conduct and document acceptance testing of all
components prior to transporting them from Owner-designated storage location.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
2.02 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS - GENERAL
A. Design fusing and furnish fuses and printed circuit cards, connectors, and files in
accordance with Section 34 42 00, General Signaling Requirements.
2.03 CROSSING WARNING TRAIN DETECTION EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish and install constant warning time (CWT) type crossing train detection
equipment, terminating shunts, surge panels, and arresters for the crossing
configurations shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. Furnish and install each CWT unit complete with the basic complement of
printed circuit cards and additional circuit card(s) for functions such as upstream
detection, downstream detection, preemption initiation, event recording, and all
other materials necessary to complete the Work, as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
C. Make CWT unit audio frequency assignments following manufacturers'
application guidelines with special attention being paid to frequency versus
approach length and placement of adjacent channel narrow band termination
shunts. Acceptable primary frequencies in Hz are 86, 114, 156, 211, 285, 348,
430, 525, 645, 790, and 970. Constant warning time systems shall include a
high frequency, AFO track circuit for the island circuit. Acceptable island
frequencies in kHz are 10.0, 11.5, 13.2, and 15.2 or the Alstom XP4 Random
Signature Island frequency.
D. Each highway-rail crossing unit shall consist of a primary grade crossing CWT
controller and a redundant standby grade crossing CWT controller. Provide an
automatic transfer unit to transfer the approach control function from the primary
CWT controller to the standby CWT controller in event of the failure of the
primary unit and back to the primary unit if the standby unit were to fail. House
the automatic transfer unit in the same cabinet as the CWT normal and standby
controller.
E. Furnish and install constant warning time controller capable of detecting train
movements on two separate track sections. Design CWT unit to allow selection
of a different frequency for each track.
F. Constant warning time crossing train detection equipment shall be Alstom XP4,
Siemens GCP 4000, or GCP 5000 as shown on the Contract Drawings, or
Approved Equal. Termination shunts shall be the CWT manufacturer’s
recommended type shunt for the frequency and application used. Furnish multi-
frequency selectable termination shunts.
G. Furnish and install termination shunts, adjustable inductors, filters, code isolation
units, and the like, as recommended by the CWT controller equipment
manufacturer, as shown on the Contract Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
H. Provide relays as shown on the Contract Drawings.
I. The placement of the crossing approach shunts, as shown on the Contract
Drawings, is determined by the maximum authorized train speed and a base
crossing warning time of 30 seconds. Additional seconds have been added to
account for equipment reaction time or other applicable considerations.
Additional time, if required to accommodate the individual crossings' unique
characteristics or as required for traffic signal preemption requirements, shall be
as specified in the Contract Documents. Take necessary field measurements at
the grade crossing and verify that the crossing warning time and shunt
placement are valid for site conditions. Bring any discrepancies to the attention
of the Engineer.
J. Furnish and install an internal data recorder with the CWT unit capable of
recording train speed, warning time, time and date, adjacent and auxiliary
crossing detection times, and equipment errors. The recorder shall be capable of
furnishing a report with only warning time, train speed, and time and date
information and a separate report that includes error data.
K. Furnish and install a separate solid state data recorder and crossing monitor
capable of remote interrogation. The Micro-Aide CWR-72B Data Recorder as
shown on the Contract Drawings or an approved equal, shall be used.
L. Furnish and install a data recorder antenna and associated cables on each
shelter as shown on the Contract Drawings.
2.04 CROSSING WARNING GATES AND FLASHING LIGHTS
A. Furnish and install each highway-rail crossing warning device assembly
complete with all associated hardware consisting of mast mounted gate
mechanism, mast, junction box base, gate arm, flashing light unit(s), bell, signs,
and miscellaneous hardware, as shown on the Contract Drawings, and as
specified herein.
B. The crossing gate warning device assembly shall conform to the requirements of
CPUC GO No. 75D; CFR, Title 49, Part 234; and the relevant sub-parts of the
AREMA C&S Manual Part 3.2.
C. The gate mechanism housing shall be cast aluminum for mounting on a 5-inch
diameter 16 feet aluminum pole and furnished complete with mounting brackets,
counter-weight assembly, and counter-weights. Provide either single sided
counter-weight brackets or double-sided counter-weight brackets as
recommended by the manufacturer. Fit gate arm bracket with a breakaway arm
adapter as shown in the AREMA C&S Manual, Part 3.2.21.
D. The gate mechanism shall be of the power-up, power-down electro-mechanical
type complete with internal relay and adjustable snubbing resistor.
E. Furnish gate arms lengths required per the Metrolink Engineering Standards and
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
site conditions. Arms shall be of the aluminum with fiberglass extensions and
fiberglass tip type. Gate arm lamps shall be LED conforming to the AREMA C&S
Manual, Part 3.2.40. Provide high intensity lamps when shown on the Contract
Drawings.
F. Provide gate arm wind guards conforming to AREMA C&S Manual Part 3.2.22
with each gate assembly.
G. Provide flashing light crossing signal units as shown on the Contract Drawings.
Light units shall have 12-inch roundels with LED’s and be complete with steel
backgrounds, steel hoods, junction box, and cross-arm brackets.
H. Provide a crossing warning bell conforming to the AREMA C&S Manual, Part
3.2.60 with each gate assembly, except that the bell shall be mounted on the
cantilever structure when a cantilever is shown.
I. Railroad crossing signs, multiple track signs, and the like, shall be extruded
aluminum, reflex-reflective sheet type as recommended in the AREMA C&S
Manual Parts, 3.2.70 and 3.2.75, respectively. Provide signs complete with all
hardware for mounting on 5-inch mast or on a cantilever mast. All highway-rail
crossings shall conform to CPUC signage requirements.
J. Exit Gates will default to the vertical position when energy is removed. At a grade
crossing, the entrance gates and the exit gates should be provided by the same
manufacturer. The Western Cullen Hayes (WCH) Model 3593 E and the WCH
Model 3597 EXIT gate mechanisms or approved equals are acceptable.
K. Exit Gate Systems incorporating dynamic vehicular detection utilizing preformed
inductive loops with a modular processor assembly shall provide a minimum of 8
inputs and 6 outputs per module. Operating parameters shall be accessible and
programmable from the front of the module such as the Reno A & E Model E-
1400 or approved equal. Modules shall be capable of synchronous loop
frequency scanning.
L. Exit Gate Systems incorporating dynamic vehicular detection utilizing radar
systems shall use SmartSensor Matrix Rail sensors controlled by VDR24
controllers. Sensors shall be mounted on dedicated mounting masts as required
by the manufacturer and as shown on the Contract Drawings. Radar based
vehicle detection systems shall be Dual Radar Vehicle Detection Systems
manufactured by Island Radar or approved equal.
M. Control of Exit Gate operation shall be by a solid-state processing system which
is user configurable with permission and password protection. The Exit Gate
System shall be configurable to process gate position information for up to eight
(8) individual gate mechanisms selectable to be either Entrance or Exit Gates.
The Exit Gate System shall be configurable to process vehicular detection
information for vehicle presence and detector loop health. User configuration and
event analysis must be by a front panel LCD touch screen panel. Exit Gate
controller shall have an event recording capability and the ability to serially
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
connect with another Exit gate controller of the same manufacturer. The Alstom
ElectrologIXS, Alstom XP4, Siemens Solid State Crossing Controller IV
(SSCCIV), or approved equal shall be used.
N. Control of Entrance Gates shall be by a solid-state microprocessor system which
contains a charging system and programmable gate delay. This controller may be
a separate unit such as the Safetran SSCCIV or approved equal, or it may be an
integrated modular component of the Constant Warning Time system such as the
GCP4000, GCP 5000, Alstom XP4, or approved equal.
2.05 FOUNDATIONS
A. Provide foundations for wayside equipment cases, highway-rail crossing gates,
flashers, and cantilevers as specified herein.
B. Precast or cast-in-place reinforced concrete foundations shall be monolithic or
sectional construction and shall conform to the requirements for concrete work
as specified in Section 03 31 00, Structural Concrete.
C. Provide precast concrete foundations complete with anchor bolts, nuts, and
washers in accordance with the AREMA C&S Manual, Part 14.4.
D. All galvanized steel foundations to be furnished and installed shall conform with
Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products, and AREMA C&S
Manual, Part 15.3.1.
E. Galvanized steel foundations shall be constructed of steel angle and plate welded
together. Foundations shall be constructed of 2-1/2 inch by 2-1/2 inch by 1/4-inch
steel angle and 1/4-inch steel plate.
F. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be galvanized. Nuts and threads shall be in
accordance with AREMA Specifications for Bolts, Nuts, and Threads, C&S
Manual, Part 14.6.20. Plain washers shall be in accordance with AREMA
Specifications for Plain and Spring Lock Washers, C&S Manual, Part 14.6.21.
Steel shall be in accordance with AREMA Specifications for Various Types of
Steel, C&S Manual, Part 15.1.4, Section 1. Bolts shall be of sufficient length to
provide for leveling of the device.
G. Place a conduit with a minimum 3-inch inside diameter in cast-in-place cantilever
structure foundations for routing of cables to the cantilever junction box. The
conduit shall protrude from the foundation sufficiently to enter cantilever structure
ensuring cable is not exposed.
2.06 HARDWARE
A. Furnish hardware in accordance with Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems
Miscellaneous Products.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
2.07 CONDUIT
A. Conduit shall conform to the specifications in Section 34 42 18, Conduits and
Pull Boxes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install and adjust equipment and materials in accordance with the appropriate
requirements and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, in
conformance with the recommendations of the applicable parts of the AREMA
C&S Manual; as required by CFR 49, Parts 234 and 236; applicable CPUC
regulations; or as otherwise specified herein.
B. Where existing grade crossing warning system shelters and gate assemblies are
indicated to be relocated, remove, protect, transport, store, disassemble, re-
configure where necessary, reassemble and reinstall as shown in the Contract
Drawings and as required within the Metrolink Engineering Standards.
3.02 INSULATED JOINTS
A. Install insulated joints as specified in Section 34 72 00, Trackwork
(Appurtenances and Other Track Materials). Test each insulated joint in
accordance with the requirements of the AREMA C&S Manual, Part 8.6.35, and
per bonded joint and insulated joint section.
3.03 RAIL BONDING
A. Install new, or maintain existing, and test rail bonding for electrical continuity as
required for continuous train detection within the approach limits of the
crossings.
B. Double bond frog assemblies, switch points, and rail joints as specified in
Section 34 42 54, Rail Bonding, with the type of bonds specified in Section 34 42
54, Rail Bonding.
C. Make signal connection to rails using weld type track circuit connectors per
Metrolink Engineering Standards.
3.04 CROSSING WARNING SYSTEM
A. Install, connect, and test new equipment and cabling to the greatest extent
practicable without disruption of the existing highway-rail crossing or signal
systems.
3.05 TRACK CIRCUITS
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
A. Install and adjust all track circuits in accordance with the requirements of
AREMA C&S Manual, Parts 8.6.1, CFR 49, Parts 234 and 236, and as specified
herein.
B. Make all track circuit rail connections using weld type connectors.
C. Adjust each track circuit for a detection sensitivity of 0.06 ohm throughout the
length of the track circuit, including within the shunt fouling limits of turnouts.
D. Record voltage and current measurements at both feed and receive ends of
each track circuit in a format approved by the Engineer.
3.06 HIGHWAY-RAIL CROSSING EQUIPMENT
A. Install grade crossing warning equipment in conformance with CFR, Title 49 Part
234; CPUC G.O. 75D; approved submittals; and as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
B. The final voltage adjustment and alignment of the flashing light units and final
balancing of the gate arms shall be made at the time of the functional test. Final
adjustments and alignments shall be made in conformance with the
requirements of the AREMA C&S Manual, Parts 3.3.1 and 3.3.5 and CFR 49
Part 234.
C. Provide new cabling between the wayside gate/flasher and the crossing control
shelter except where the Contract Drawings specifically specify the re-use of the
existing cabling.
D. Furnish and install pedestrian gates in accordance with the Contract Drawings
and installation instructions furnished by the Engineer.
3.07 FOUNDATIONS
A. Excavate, backfill, compact, and clean-up excavation as specified in Division 31-
Earthwork.
B. Install each foundation in accordance with the approved installation detail for
each type of foundation and as specified herein. The absence of a specific task
listing herein does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing a
complete and functional installation. The installation tasks that must be
completed by the Contractor are included herein.
C. Prior to placing precast foundation or constructing cast-in-place foundations,
excavate completely to the lines and grades required and install crushed stone
base in accordance with the requirements specified.
D. Install foundations to the lines, grades, and dimensions required as determined
by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Install mounting bolts of
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
sufficient length to accommodate use of leveling nuts between the base of the
mechanism and the top of the foundation.
E. When placing foundations, ensure that anchor bolts have not been bent and that
the threads are undamaged. Protect anchor bolt thread, washers, and nuts by
applying friction tape, or other method approved by the Engineer, until such time
as the wayside equipment is installed. Bring damaged anchor bolts to the
immediate attention of the Engineer. Do not use damaged anchor bolts.
Remove and replace damaged anchor bolts and completely or partially remove
and replace foundation as determined by the Engineer.
F. Exposed poured concrete foundations shall be rubbed to obtain a uniformly
smooth, clean surface of even texture and appearance.
G. Provide nonconductive material between the foundations and the mounted
apparatus to prevent direct contact between the concrete and metal surfaces.
3.08 CONDUIT
A. Install conduit as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
B. After conductors have been installed, seal ends of conduits terminating in
instrument shelters, junction boxes, and equipment cases with an approved type
of sealing compound.
C. Bore or jack conduit under the existing trackbed at any traverse, except that
conduit may be placed under the track prior to the track renewal.
D. Place conduit to a minimum depth of 36 inches below finished grade except
where specifically noted otherwise.
3.09 REMOVING, REINSTALLING AND SALVAGING EQUIPMENT
A. Relocate, reuse, modify, and salvage existing equipment as shown on the
Contract Drawings. Refer to Section 31 11 50, Demolition, Cutting and Patching,
for salvage requirements. Inventory existing relays and controlling equipment
prior to delivering to the Engineer’s designated storage location.
1. Newly re-wire any existing equipment designated to be reused except as
noted on the Contract Drawings.
B. Removed equipment and materials not designated for reuse or salvage shall
become the property of the Contractor and disposed of. Refer to Section 31 11
00, Site Clearing, for disposal requirements.
C. Change existing crossing warning systems over to the new systems as
expeditiously as practicable. Remove retired equipment immediately and keep
work site kept free of debris and packaging materials.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform testing in accordance with Section 34 42 58, Signal Systems Testing,
including documentation requirements.
B. Prepare test procedures and perform and document tests on the highway-rail
crossing components and systems as follows:
1. Include all tests herein specified, as specified in the appropriate sections
of the AREMA C&S Manual, and the FRA Rules, Standards, Instructions
for Railroad Signal Systems, CFR 49 Part 234 and 236.
2. Perform pretests on all procedures in advance of actual testing.
3. Perform applicable tests to each interim signal system, if any, before
placing in service.
4. Actual testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
C. Make measurements at each piece of wayside equipment and record on the as-
built record drawings verifying that the equipment is located where shown on the
Contract Drawings and as approved by the Engineer. Verify, by measurement,
that the equipment does not violate the train dynamic clearance envelope.
D. Test each grade crossing warning installation in accordance with Section 34 42
58, Signal Systems Testing, and the AREMA C&S Manual, Parts 3.3.1 and 3.3.5.
In addition, perform all applicable tests as described in the SCRRA Instructions
Governing Installation, Maintenance, Inspection and Testing of Signal Apparatus
and Signal Systems, all manufacturer’s recommended test and adjustment
procedures, and any tests required by regulation.
E. Disconnect and ground associated signal equipment not under test. Disconnect
or unplug electronic devices or signal equipment prior to any testing.
F. Follow manufacturer's instructions for testing of operation and electronic
equipment.
G. Submit test data and results to the Engineer's information and approval within 24
hours of placing the apparatus or system in operation.
PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Pedestrian or Vehicular gates and Flashing Light Assemblies will be measured
by the unit or fraction thereof furnished, assembled, and completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The
quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the
basis for this measurement.
B. Microprocessor based crossing equipment shall be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished, assembled, and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as
contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of
values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
C. Preformed inductive loops and radar equipment shall be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished, assembled, and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as
contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of
values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
D. Narrow Band Shunts, Wideband Shunts and Tuned Joint Couplers (NBS, WBS
& TJC’s) will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Pedestrian or Vehicular gates and Flashing Light Assemblies furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the
Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This
price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools,
equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown
on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the
Engineer.
B. Microprocessor based crossing equipment furnished and completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit
Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include
full compensation for programming, furnishing all labor, Materials, tools,
equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown
on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the
Engineer.
C. Preformed inductive loops and radar equipment shall be assemblies furnished
and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the
Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This
price shall include full compensation for programming, furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 64 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Systems
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
D. Narrow Band Shunts, Wideband Shunts and Tuned Joint Couplers (NBS, WBS
& TJC’s) furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents
will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
E. The Narrow Band Shunts, Wideband Shunts and Tuned Joint Couplers (NBS,
WBS & TJC’s) shall include the cost of related enclosures, track wires and
exothermic track connections and all associated equipment, conduits, mounting
hardware, trenching and filling, adjustments and testing as shown on the Plans,
and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
F. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing,
transportation, storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the
Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 64 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 66
DRAGGING EQUIPMENT DETECTOR SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work in this Section shall include providing detailed design, furnishing and
installing a complete Dragging Equipment Detector as specified herein and as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Dragging equipment detector and automatic equipment identification reader shall
be tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for Dragging Equipment Detector System to the Engineer for
approval. Shop drawings, at a minimum, shall show location and method of
installation for the instrument enclosure and track mounted detector
appurtenances.
B. Field Engineering Survey of the proposed installation site validating conformance to
manufacturer’s installation requirements, or detailing improvements required to the
track structure, which will be performed by others.
C. Manufacturer’s Installation, Maintenance and Training manuals for each of the
various systems composing the complete installation.
D. Manufacturer’s software for each of the detector and monitoring systems.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Signal bungalow and any equipment therein shall be shipped, stored and handled
as specified in Section 34 42 46, Signal Equipment Houses.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Double-track Dragging Equipment Detector system.
B. Bungalow to house detector monitoring devices.
C. Radio talker equipment.
D. Standby Battery sized sufficiently for the detector systems.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 66 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 66 Dragging Equipment Detector Systems
2.02 MATERIAL DETAILS
A. The Dragging Equipment Detector system shall utilize mechanical paddle detectors
like the Alstom Self Restoring Paddle that can be interconnected and output a
female voice or an approved equivalent system.
B. Defect Detectors shall conform to all applicable parts in Section 5 “Defect Detector
Systems” of the AREMA C&S Manual.
C. The Automatic Equipment Identification system shall consist of an antenna, a
reader and a processor utilizing a radio frequency transceiver reading system
capable of scanning standard AAR AT5110 equipment tags.
D. The defect detection system shall be an integrated system composed of all
subsystems and capable of future integration of typical railroad defect detection
systems such as hot bearing and hot wheel detectors.
E. All battery, communication, and detector monitoring equipment shall be housed in a
standard Metrolink bungalow as described in Section 34 42 46, Signal Equipment
Houses and shown on the Contract Drawings. Placement of equipment in
bungalow shall allow for the future installation of equipment for a double-track hot
bearing and hot wheel detector system.
F. A 5-watt radio system with a roof-mounted antenna shall be configurable to
broadcast the status of all trains, or to only broadcast alarms from the various
defect detection systems on the voice channel and to report health status to
Metrolink via a separate data path. The digitized radio voice shall announce
“Metrolink detector, milepost ##.#” on AAR channel ##/## when broadcasting.
G. The standby power and charging system shall be sized to provide 48 hours of
continuous operation in the event of an AC power failure and conform to the
requirements of Section 34 42 52, Rectifiers, Batteries and Battery Charging
Equipment.
H. The defect detection system shall be capable of communicating via a radio-based
Ethernet data communication link.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Design, Furnish and Install a complete Defect Detector System consisting of a
Dragging Equipment Detector system, including all transducers, audio frequency
overlay track circuits and all other trackside equipment.
3.02 TESTS
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 66 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 66 Dragging Equipment Detector Systems
A. Perform all tests to Manufacturer’s Standards and as specified in Section 34 42
58, Signal System Testing, ensuring system operation.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Dragging Equipment Detector Systems will be measured by the unit or fraction
thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents
and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities, as contained on the Schedule
of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as
derived from the Plans, will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Batteries and Chargers will not be measured and shall be considered incidental
to the installation of the Dragging Equipment Detector Systems.
C. Grading and site preparation required for the installation of Dragging Equipment
Detector will not be measured and shall be considered incidental to the
installation of the Dragging Equipment Detector Systems.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Dragging Equipment Detector Systems furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed
on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing,
transportation, storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the
Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
C. No separate payment shall be made for any grading or site preparation required
for the installation of Dragging Equipment Detector and shall be considered
incidental to the installation of the Dragging Equipment Detector Systems.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 66 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 70
WAYSIDE SIGNAL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The Section includes the requirements for furnishing and installing wayside
signal assemblies.
B. Wayside signal assemblies shall consist of ground-mounted masts, color-light
signal heads with LED lamps, backgrounds, visors, number plates (for automatic
signals), ladders, platforms, foundations, and all mounting hardware required to
construct absolute (interlocking) and automatic signals.
C. Contractor shall furnish and install signals as specified herein and as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
D. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete
2. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork
3. Section 34 42 58 – Signal System Testing
4. Section 34 42 60 – Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
1. LTS-4 Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs,
Luminaries and Traffic Signals
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA)
1. Communications and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual)
C. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (Metrolink) Engineering Standards
D. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA)
1. Part 1910 Subpart D “Walking-Working Surfaces”
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 70 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 70 Wayside Signal Assemblies
A. Wayside signal assemblies shall meet the requirements of AREMA C&S Manual
part 7 and applicable portions of Manual Part 3.2.5, where requirements of the
AREMA Specifications do not conflict with requirements specified herein.
B. Inspect each signal assembly after it has been installed in the field. This inspection
shall conform to the Contractor’s Installation Procedure as accepted by the
Engineer.
C. L.E.D. Lamp Units shall meet the requirements of AREMA C&S Manual Part 7.1.5.
D. Signal aspect shall be distinct and unmistakable when viewed from a height of 7 to
12 feet above top of rail at a distance of 1,000 feet. Nominal sighting distance shall
be 2000 feet. Where unobstructed sighting distance for a standard signal
arrangement is less than 2000 feet, provide to the Resident Engineer written
notifications of sighting problems and locations.
E. Foundations shall meet all requirements of AREMA Signal Manual Part 14.1.1
through 14.4.41 inclusive, where requirements of the AREMA Specifications do not
conflict with requirements specified herein.
F. Resident Engineer reserves the right to make inspections and tests, as necessary,
to determine if the equipment meets the requirements of these Specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings for each type of signal unit and each type of
signal layout to the Resident Engineer for approval. Show all ladders, masts,
bases, arms and required mounting hardware. Show location and method of
mounting the signals to the structure.
1. Provide necessary dimensions, hardware, method of mounting signals, and
material specifications for all items to be furnished.
B. Submit shop drawings for structure foundations.
C. Submit Installation procedure for approval by the Resident Engineer. The
procedure shall include a detailed description of installation activity and sufficient
detail to allow the Resident Engineer to determine the validity of the installation
procedure.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship lamp units separately from the signal head in which they will be used.
B. Contractor shall ensure that all wayside signal assemblies and signal lamp units are
safely stored and protected from damage during storage, handling and transporting.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide warranty from defects arising from defective parts,
workmanship, and lightning damage for 2 years from the first date of service.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 70 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 70 Wayside Signal Assemblies
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Contractor shall furnish color-light signal heads as specified herein, and as shown
on Metrolink Engineering Standard 8525
B. Contractor shall furnish ground signal assemblies in accordance with these
Specifications, and Metrolink Engineering Standard 8500 and 8505, as appropriate
for site-specific requirements.
2.02 SIGNAL HEADS
A. Signal head shall be furnished with L.E.D. lamp units, blank out cover plates (if
applicable), hoods, background, mounting brackets, and U-bolts to fit 5-inch mast
assemblies that Contractor proposes to furnish.
B. Signal head shall include mounting bracket for 5-inch mast and stainless steel
fasteners.
C. Color-light signal units shall be capable of displaying three aspects: green, yellow
and red as shown on Metrolink Engineering Standard 8525
D. Install blank-out cover plates in all unused lamp units.
E. Signal head shall be designed to allow removal of lamp units from the rear.
F. Dwarf signals shall be in accordance with Metrolink Engineering Standard 8520.
G. Signal access covers (doors) shall be provided with a means of securing in closed
position.
2.03 GROUND SIGNAL ASSEMBLIES
A. Contractor shall furnish ground signal assemblies in accordance with Metrolink
Engineering Standard 8500, as appropriate for site-specific requirements.
B. Ground signal assemblies shall consist of an aluminum five-inch mast structure,
junction box, liquid-tight flex conduit, platform(s), ladder, ladder foundation,
grounding pigtail welded to the mast structure, and shall be equipped with all
mounting hardware to accommodate the required arrangement of signal heads.
C. Each ground signal assembly must be fully compliant with the latest OSHA and
CAL-OSHA fall protection requirements in effect at the advertisement of this
Contract. Where a conflict exists between the requirements, the most stringent
shall apply.
2.04 SIGNAL MASTS
A. Signal masts shall be predrilled for the placement of signal unit(s) by the
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 70 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 70 Wayside Signal Assemblies
manufacturer at the factory. Nominal signal mast height is between 21’-0” and
21’7”. A 5-inch cap for top of mast shall also be provided with each mast unit.
B. The base section shall be designed to accommodate a 5-inch mast. The
dimensions of the foundation bolt hold centers in the base shall be as specified on
Metrolink Engineering Standards 8500 and 8505.
C. Signal mast shall be fitted with one (1) 48-inch long No. 2 ground wire cad-welded
to the mast as shown on Metrolink Engineering Standards 8500 and 8505. The
pigtail shall be coiled and secured in a manner that prevents during construction
and while in transit.
D. Grounding for signal mast shall be as specified in Section 34 42 56, Signal
Grounding.
2.05 LADDERS AND PLATFORMS
A. Platforms and ladder mounting brackets shall be constructed of galvanized steel
and shall be in accordance with AREMA Signal Manual Part 7.2 and Metrolink
Engineering Standards 8500 and 8505.
B. Ladders shall be constructed of aluminum having non-slip rungs and capable of
supporting the weight of two people. Two hinged flat plates shall be fitted to the
ladder to prevent unauthorized access to both sides of the ladder. The covers shall
be locked in place by a signal padlock and hasp arrangement intended for this
purpose.
C. Ladder platform cages shall extend a minimum of 42 inches above the top of
landing.
2.06 JUNCTION BOXES
A. Junction box shall be in accordance with Metrolink Engineering Standard 8530.
B. Junction box shall be mounted as shown in Metrolink Engineering Standards 8500
and 8505. Junction box shall be securely fastened to the mast using 5-inch U-bolts.
Junction box shall be furnished with a minimum of 28 AAR test (multi-unit) terminals
in accordance Metrolink Engineering Standard 8330, and a 4-inch liquid tight flex
conduit 8ft. length with liquid-tight flex conduit 8ft. in length with liquid-tight fitting.
2.07 FOUNDATIONS
A. Furnish foundations for ground signals in accordance with Metrolink Engineering
Standard 8255.
B. Furnish galvanized steel foundations complete with galvanized bolts, washers, nuts
and associated hardware. Galvanizing shall conform to Specifications Section 34
42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous Products, and AREMA Signal Manual, Part
15.3.1.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 70 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 70 Wayside Signal Assemblies
C. Construct galvanized steel foundations of steel angle and plate welded together.
Foundations shall be constructed of 2 1/2 inch by 2 1/2 inch by 1/4 inch steel angle
and 1/4 inch steel plate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - SIGNALS
A. Contractor shall furnish and install signal layouts in locations as indicated on the
Contract Drawings and as shown on the accepted shop drawings. No part of any
signal layout shall conflict with Metrolink Engineering Standards, Code of Federal
Regulations, Part 49, nor installed within the clearance envelope as defined in
CPUC G.O. 26-D.
B. Locate signals centered between insulated joint, except where physically not
possible. In such instances, submit a recommendation to the Resident Engineer for
approval.
C. Center line of signal mast shall be 15 feet 0 inches from centerline of track unless a
deviation from this is approved by the Resident Engineer, as shown on the Contract
Drawings or required to meet CPUC clearance requirements.
D. Install signal unit level and plumb on their foundations. Leveling nuts shall be used
as shown on Metrolink Engineering Standards.
E. Install signal layouts in accordance with the applicable requirements of AREMA
Signal Manual, Part 7.4.1 and Metrolink Engineering Standards.
F. Install platforms for each signal unit level.
G. Align signals for maximum viewing distance before placing in service.
H. Refer to Design Requirements herein regarding signal aspect and sighting
distances. Install signals and verify sighting distances. Provide the Resident
Engineer with written notification with any sighting problems.
I. Mount signal heads on an offset arm as shown in the Metrolink Engineering
Standards. Signal heads shall also be able to swivel on the offset arm and be
adjustable.
J. Signal nomenclature shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.
K. The underground cable shall be dressed, pot-headed, tagged and terminated in the
signal junction box as specified in Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous
Products. The number of conductors and conductor size of the underground cables
shall be as shown in the contract drawings.
L. Wiring from the junction box base to the signal heads shall be No. 10 AWG copper
stranded wire as shown on the Contract Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 70 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 70 Wayside Signal Assemblies
M. Install identification tags on each wire. These tags shall bear the nomenclature
shown on the accepted Shop Drawings.
N. Set lamp voltage between 8.8 volts and 9.2 volts measured at the signal lamp.
3.02 INSTALLATION – JUNCTION BOXES AND CABLING
A. The junction box shall have two terminals with insulated test links for each cable
conductor, as specified in Section 34 42 60, Signal Systems Miscellaneous
Products.
B. Junction box placement and cable entry to the junction box shall be as shown on
Metrolink Engineering Standards 8500 and 8505.
C. The method of routing #10 flex wire from the junction box to each signal mounted
on the structure shall be to route the wire within the tubular members of the
structure. Pull wires entirely through the structure members, mast and signal
mounting brackets, unless otherwise approved by the Resident Engineer.
D. Provide pull boxes located a maximum of 5 feet from each signal. Edges shall be
smooth and rounded to accommodate cable installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION - FOUNDATIONS
A. Install each foundation in accordance with the approved Contractor’s Installation
Procedure for each type of foundation, as herein specified, and as shown on the
Metrolink Engineering Standards. The absence of a specific task listing herein does
not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing a complete and
functional installation.
B. Refer to Section 01 14 49, Coordination with Utilities, for requirements for locating
and protecting existing utilities. Advise the Resident Engineer immediately if any
utility or cable interferes with foundation work. After locating interference, allow 72
hours for the Resident Engineer to relocate or mitigate the interference.
C. Prior to placing steel foundations in the excavations, place and compact a crushed
stone base in accordance with Section 31 20 00, Earthwork.
D. When placing foundations, exercise care and ensure that anchor bolts are not bent,
or threads damaged. Protect anchor bolt threads, washers, and nuts by applying
friction tape or other accepted method satisfactory to the Resident Engineer, until
the unit to be supported is installed.
E. After back filling excavation, the Contractor shall ensure that the foundation is
plumb and level. Where ground signal foundations are installed, the top of the
foundation shall be no higher than the nearest rail and no lower than the top of
nearest tie. Under no circumstance shall the top of the foundation be more than 24
inches above final grade.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 70 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 70 Wayside Signal Assemblies
F. Foundations shall be installed to the lines, grades and dimensions required as
determined by the Contractor and accepted by the Resident Engineer. Mounting
bolts shall be of sufficient length to accommodate use of leveling nuts between the
base of the equipment to be supported and the top of the foundation.
G. The Contractor shall provide a means to prevent entry of rodents and insects at the
bases of the vertical masts.
3.04 PAINTING
A. Touch up any damaged painted finish.
3.05 FIELD TESTS
A. Make tests for proper operation and setting of lamp operating voltages in
accordance with Section 34 42 58, Signal Systems Testing.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Wayside Signal Assemblies will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Wayside Signal Assemblies furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 70 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 42 75
POSITIVE TRAIN CONTROL WAYSIDE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for furnishing, installing, testing, and
documenting Positive Train Control (PTC) Wayside Equipment.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. Section 34 42 58 - Signal Systems Testing.
2. Section 34 44 98 – Positive Train Control Initialization Equipment.
3. Section 34 44 99 – Positive Train Control Base Station Equipment
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 49, Transportation:
1. Part 236: Rules, Standards, and Instructions for Railroad Signal System.
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communication and Signals Manual of Recommended Practices (C&S
Manual).
C. Association of American Railroads (AAR):
1. Manual of Standards and Recommended Practices, Section K–I, Railway
Electronics Systems Architecture and Concepts of Operations.
2. Manual of Standards and Recommended Practices, Section K–III,
Wayside Electronics and Mobile Communications Architecture.
3. Manual of Standards and Recommended Practices, Section K–IV, Office
Architecture and Railroad Electronics Messaging.
4. Manual of Standards and Recommended Practices, Section K–VI,
Railway Data Management and Communications.
D. Southern California Regional Rail Authority (SCRRA):
1. PTC Configuration Management (CM) Plan
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 75 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 75 Positive Train Control Wayside Equipment
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts, material descriptions, and
specifications for each type of PTC Wayside Equipment the Contractor proposes
to provide and install.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform operational testing of the equipment in accordance with the
requirements specified in Section 34 42 58 - Signal Systems Testing.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship the PTC Wayside Equipment separately. Package modules individually in
ESD safe packaging, in a sturdy carton with the type of module printed on the
outside of the carton.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty from defects arising from improper handling for 2 years from
the first date of service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Wayside Messaging Server
1. The Wayside Messaging Server (WMS) shall be a TransAir WMS-2000
manufactured by Lilee Systems or approved equivalent.
2. The WMS shall support an operating voltage of 12VDC.
3. The WMS shall have an internal module capable of cellular
communication.
B. PTC Radio
1. The PTC Radio shall be an ITC 220 Wayside Radio (Part Number
133980) manufactured by CalAmp or approved equivalent.
2. The PTC Radio shall be capable of operating between 217.6 and 222.0
MHz.
3. The PTC Radio shall support an operating voltage of 12VDC.
C. Surge Protection
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 75 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 75 Positive Train Control Wayside Equipment
1. PTC related surge protection shall be the 12R ICP (Part Number 1101-
624) manufactured by Transtector Systems or approved equivalent.
2. Surge protection unit shall be capable of mounting on a 35 mm DIN Rail
and support a maximum continuous operating voltage of 14VDC.
D. GPS/Cell Antenna
1. The GPS/Cell Antenna shall be the Mobile Mark GPS Antenna (Part
Number V5501-A) distributed by ARMS, Inc. or approved equivalent.
2. The GPS/Cell Antenna shall be composed of one GPS and two Cellular
Antennas.
3. The GPS/Cell Antenna shall mount to the signal shelter with the Antenna
Mount Kit (1.25” Pipe GPS with Bracket) manufactured by PTMW, Inc. or
approved equivalent.
E. PTC Antenna
1. The PTC Antenna shall be the Yagi Directional Antenna (Part Number
SY206-SF11SNM-U) manufactured by Sinclair or approved equivalent.
2. The PTC Antenna shall have a frequency range between 217 and 225
MHz and a nominal gain of 9.5 dBd.
F. PTC Antenna Tower
1. The PTC Antenna Tower shall be the 60 foot Tilt-Down Tower (Part
Number SQT60MXHD) manufactured by Western Towers or approved
equivalent.
G. Polyphasers
1. The GPS Polyphaser shall be the DGXZ+06NFNF-B 800 to 2500 MHz
Surge manufactured by PolyPhaser or approved equivalent.
2. The PTC Polyphaser shall be the 50-700 MHz Arrestor (Part Number IS-
B50HN-C1) manufactured by PolyPhaser or approved equivalent.
3. The Cell Polyphaser shall be the .700 – 2.7 GHz DSXL Arrestor (Part
Number DSXL) manufactured by PolyPhaser or approved equivalent.
H. Category 5 Cable
1. Category 5 Cable shall be the Category 5E Patch Cord manufactured by
HellermannTyton or approved equivalent.
2. Category 5 Cable shall be composed of four pair cable and assembled
with a snag less latch and strain relief boot.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 75 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 75 Positive Train Control Wayside Equipment
3. Category 5 Cable shall be factory made. Contractor shall determine
appropriate cable lengths for each connection and submit to the Resident
Engineer for review.
I. Coax Cable and Connectors
1. Cellular
a. Cellular coax cable shall be the 5/8” Flexible Low Loss
Communications Coax (Part Number LMR-240-MA) manufactured
by Times Microwave Systems or approved equivalent.
b. Cellular coax cable connectors shall be the 5/8” N Mate Straight
Plug type (Part Number EZ-240-NMH-D) and the Type TNC Male
Plug (Part Number TC-240-TM) manufactured by Times
Microwave Systems or approved equivalent.
c. Cellular coax cables and connectors shall be factory made.
Contractor shall determine appropriate cable lengths for each
connection and submit to the Resident Engineer for review.
2. PTC
a. PTC coax cable shall be the 1/2" Superflex Corrugated coax cable
(Part Number FSJ4-50B) and the 7/8” HELIAX Corrugated coax
cable (Part Number AVA5-50) manufactured by Andrew or
approved equivalent.
b. PTC coax cable connectors shall be the 1/2" Coax NM Connector
(Part Number F4PNMV2-HC), the 7/8” HELIAX Positive Stop
Coax N male Connector (Part Number AL5NM-PSA) and the 7/8”
HELIAX Positive Stop Coax N female Connector (Part Number
AL5NF-PSA) manufactured by Andrew or approved equivalent.
c. PTC coax cables and connectors shall be factory made.
Contractor shall determine appropriate cable lengths for each
connection and submit to the Resident Engineer for review.
3. GPS
a. GPS coax cable shall be the 1/2” HELIAX Superflex Corrugated
coax cable (Part Number FSJ4-50B) manufactured by Andrew or
approved equivalent.
b. GPS coax cable connector shall be the 1/2" Coax N male
Connector (Part Number F4PNMV2-HC) manufactured by Andrew
or approved equivalent.
c. GPS coax cables and connectors shall be factory made.
Contractor shall determine appropriate cable lengths for each
connection and submit to the Resident Engineer for review.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 75 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 75 Positive Train Control Wayside Equipment
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install PTC Wayside Equipment at locations indicated on the Contract Plans.
B. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's installation and
adjustment procedures.
C. All outdoor connectors, splices, antennas and ground kits shall be weather
sealed.
3.02 TESTING
A. Conduct all tests required under Section 34 42 58 - Signal Systems Testing.
B. All PTC Wayside Radios shall be tested by the Contractor for function and
performance.
1. Functional tests shall include:
a. DC supply voltage measurement
b. Forward and reflected transmit power. Voltage Standing Wave
Ratio (VSWR) shall be calculated from the forward and reflected
power measurements.
c. Frequency accuracy measurement
2. Performance tests shall determine whether messages are delivered to
their correct destination, (both base and locomotive), measuring
reliability, throughput, and latency. A Bit Error Rate (BER) test for a
minimum duration of 24 hours shall be performed to measure reliability.
3. Tests shall include interoperable tests for track areas where more than
one railroad operate. This shall include database verification and
operations testing for each railroad.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Positive Train Control Wayside Equipment will be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on
the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as
applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 75 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 42 75 Positive Train Control Wayside Equipment
A. Positive Train Control Wayside Equipment furnished and completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit
Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include
full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing,
transportation, storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the
Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 42 75 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 44 00
RAILROAD COMMUNICATIONS REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work in this Section includes, but is not limited to, general procedures and
requirements and incidental to the review, planning, manufacturing, assembly,
installation, removal, relocation, modification, testing, commissioning, and
documentation of as-built conditions of the various Railroad Communication
Systems.
B. Provisions of this Section apply to all Sections of Division 34, Transportation,
Subdivision 34 44, Railroad Wayside Communications.
C. Additional technical requirements specific to communications subsystems are
found in the corresponding subsystem Specification Sections.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
1. Section 01 14 19 – Coordination with Utilities
2. Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures
3. Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of Values
4. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
5. Section 01 25 23 – Site Safety Requirements
6. Section 01 35 15 – Maintenance and Protection of Railroad Traffic
7. Section 01 43 23 – Contractor Qualifications and Requirements
8. Section 01 56 37 – Worksite Security Requirements
9. Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents
10. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork
11. Section 31 23 50 - Excavation Support Systems
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Electrical equipment, unless specifically excluded herein, shall conform to the
standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriters Laboratories (UL), the National
Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA) wherever applicable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
B. Materials and workmanship, unless specifically excluded herein, shall conform to
the requirements of the National Electrical Code; California Administrative Code,
Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 5, Electrical Safety Orders; SCRRA Engineering
Standards, and any applicable local ordinances.
C. The following General Orders (GO) or the most current General Orders of the State
of California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) shall apply:
1. GO 52 Construction and Operation of Power and Communication
Lines for the Prevention or Mitigation of Inductive Interference
2. GO 118 Construction, Reconstruction and Maintenance of
Walkways and Control, of Vegetation Adjacent to Railroad Tracks
3. GO 128 Construction of Underground Electric Supply and
Communication Systems
D. The following parts of the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47,
Telecommunication, shall apply:
1. Part 17 Construction, Marking and Lighting of Antenna Structures
2. Part 90 Private Land Mobile Radio Services
3. Part 101 Fixed Microwave Services
E. The following parts of the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 49, Transportation,
shall apply:
1. Part 212 State Safety Participation Regulations
2. Part 219 Control of Alcohol and Drug Use
3. Part 218 Railroad Operating Practices
4. Part 234 Grade Crossing Signal System Safety
5. Part 236 Rules, Standards, and Instructions for Railroad Signal
System
6. Be responsible for adherence to all of the above rules and reporting
requirements, including those regulations which require pre-employment
drug testing and random drug testing of employees engaged in the
installation and testing of communication facilities, and the reporting and
tracking of employees injured in the performance of work on a railroad.
F. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Communications and Signals (C&S) Manual
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Reference ES9005 for high level overview of the SCRRA Communication System.
B. Provide all materials, software, licenses, installation services, testing and
certification required for complete working integrated communication systems and
subsystems, as described herein, and as shown on the Contract Plans, including
any equipment not designated as being relocated or designated as Owner-
furnished or in these specifications.
C. All materials and equipment for installation and for interconnection of the various
communications systems shall be fabricated, furnished, and installed as indicated
on the Contract Plans and specified herein.
D. The Contract Plans represent a final design utilizing systems, components, and
materials that meet the Contract Specifications. Contractor may provide
equivalent systems, components, and materials subject to the approval of the
Engineer. If equivalent systems, components, and materials are provided, the
Contractor shall provide an alternate detailed final design as specified herein under
Design Submittals.
E. All systems meetings held with the Engineer shall be attended by a
Communications Engineer qualified in the application of the systems equipment
the Contractor proposes for use on this project. Refer to Section 01 43 23,
Contractor Qualifications and Requirements, and additional requirements
specified herein.
F. No circuit is considered to have met the requirement of these Specifications for
function and safety until it has been properly tested and verified in the field. Any
circuit changes made to meet the functional and safety requirements of these
Specifications shall be considered as included as part of the work.
G. Provide continuous or parallel communications during all phases of construction,
testing and commissioning for existing systems. At no time shall the work cause
delay to train operation, cause an unsafe condition, or reduce the effectiveness or
quality of existing communication systems. Submit for approval by the Engineer
the proposed Construction Sequencing Plan for providing alternate method of
communications whenever the existing systems are deactivated, altered, or
modified to accommodate construction work.
H. Refer to Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents, and additional requirements
specified herein. Record the final As-Built conditions of the communication
systems for each system.
I. Coordinate installation, inspection, and testing of new Owner-furnished material
with the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing 30 days prior to any installation,
inspection, and testing as part of this coordination.
J. The Contractor may encounter equipment placement conflicts during installation.
In case of conflict, the Engineer will determine the correct placement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
K. Perform or support acceptance testing and commissioning of the commissioning
system as indicated in the Contract Plans.
L. Contractor furnished software and components shall be new and manufacturer
certified.
M. Remove, salvage, retire or relocate project related equipment as indicated in the
Contract Documents and as required to complete the Work. All equipment
designated for disposal shall be done in accordance with local and state
regulations.
N. Refer to Section 31 20 00, Earthwork, for provisions for excavation and
requirements for shoring of excavation as specified in Section 31 23 50,
Excavation Support Systems.
O. Protect existing communications cabling and, where necessary, relocate existing
cabling to prevent damage during track installation and surfacing. If the Contractor
damages existing cabling during construction, the Contractor shall be responsible
for all Engineer approved repairs, testing and replacement of existing cabling.
P. Refer to Section 01 14 49, Coordination with Utility Owners, for requirements in
locating and protecting existing utilities.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS FOR EQUIPMENT
A. Contractor provided material and equipment shall be fully operable with no
impairment resulting from the effect of the environment throughout the range of
worst values indicated below. The general operating environment shall be in salty
atmosphere and in generally sunny weather.
B. Ambient outdoor temperature range: -40 degrees C to +70 degrees C.
C. Relative humidity range: From zero to 100 percent.
D. Maximum rainfall: 4 inches in 24 hours and 1.5 inches in 1 hour.
E. Maximum wind velocity: 100 miles per hour.
F. Seismic Design Category F.
G. Isokeraunic Level: 5 strikes/km2 per year.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals required herein apply to all communications work shown within the
Contract Plans. Refer to the specific communications subsystem specification for
additional submittal requirements that are specific to the subsystem.
B. No related work can begin without the prior submittal and Engineer approval of the
personnel, material, plans and procedures.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
C. Submit resume(s) of the Communications Engineer(s) who will oversee the related
work.
D. Submit resume of all personnel who will perform splicing as a Fiber Splice
Technician(s).
E. Submit any proposed substitutions for equivalence evaluation by the Engineer
within 30 days of Notice to Proceed.
F. Submit a comprehensive Bill of Materials for all communications systems
equipment.
G. Submit a complete Network Device List for all Local Area Network (LAN) devices
that will be added or removed by the project 30 days prior to scheduled installation.
H. Submit a Construction Sequencing Plan to demonstrate how communication
systems will remain operable.
I. Submit a Test and Commissioning Plan for all communications systems that will
be impacted by the project 30 days prior to the scheduled installation.
J. Submit a Training Plan for all communications systems.
K. Submit Asbuilt Documentation 30 days after communications systems have been
commissioned.
1.07 QUALIFICATIONS OF COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEER(S)
A. The Communications Engineer(s) shall be engaged in the bill of material
generation, material inspection, installation, configuration, testing and
commissioning of the various systems shall be qualified and have had experience
in the type and level of work as required herein and by the Contract Plans. Once
accepted, any replacement of these key employees shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
B. The communications systems represented in the Contract Plans are broad and the
experience of a single Communications Engineer may not encompass all systems.
When this occurs, the Contractor shall submit more than one candidate to
collectively demonstrate experience in all systems being constructed. In this case
each Engineer shall coordinate under a designated Lead Engineer.
C. Detailed Qualifications
1. Networks
a. Bachelor degree preferred, in computer science, information
technology or related field of study with an engineering focus. In
lieu of degree, 5 years of additional working experience will be
considered.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
b. Demonstrated 5-year minimum experience working with mission
critical networks.
c. Strong understanding of Wide Area Network (WAN) and LAN
network infrastructure that supports wireless, video, data and voice.
d. Ability to configure hardware.
e. Ability to test, troubleshoot, diagnose and resolve problems within
the network.
f. Ability to produce systems documents required as Contract
submittals.
2. RF (Radio Frequency)
a. Bachelor degree preferred, in electrical engineering or related field
of study with an engineering focus. In lieu of degree, 5 years of
additional working experience will be considered.
b. Demonstrated 5-year minimum experience working with RF
systems.
c. Ability to simulate RF links or predicted area of coverage using
commercial off the shelf software.
d. Ability to complete and document RF site surveys.
e. Understands Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Regulatory Standards and can apply them in field deployments to
ensure compliance.
f. Ability to configure hardware.
g. Ability to test, troubleshoot, diagnose and resolve problems within
the RF links.
h. Ability to produce systems documents required as Contract
submittals.
D. Submittal Requirements
1. Resume(s) submitted shall demonstrate compliance with all systems being
constructed or impacted by construction. Each resume submitted shall
contain a cover page showing compliance with criteria herein.
2. The lead Communications Engineer shall be identified.
3. Engineer may request to interview individuals submitted.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
1.08 QUALIFICATIONS OF FIBER SPLICE TECHNICIAN(S)
A. The Fiber Splice Technician(s) shall be engaged in the fiber cable inspection,
installation, splicing, testing and commissioning and shall be qualified and have
had experience in the type and level of work as required herein and by the Contract
Plans. Once accepted, any replacement of these key employees shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
B. Detailed Qualifications
1. Postsecondary education in electronics, telecommunications, or computer
technology. In lieu of postsecondary education, 5 years of additional
working experience will be considered.
2. Demonstrated 5-year minimum experience splicing fiber.
3. Fiber Optic Association (FOA) Fiber Optic Technician or equivalent
certification.
4. Ability to install, test, resolve and repair fiber optic cables.
C. Submittal Requirements
1. Resume(s) submitted shall demonstrate compliance with fiber being
constructed, impacted by construction, or modified. Each resume
submitted shall contain a cover page showing compliance with criteria
herein.
2. Fiber Optic Association Fiber Optic Technician or equivalent certificate.
1.09 BILL OF MATERIALS
A. The lead Communications Engineer shall generate a master Bill of Materials for
the communications systems.
B. The Bill of Materials shall:
1. Be generated as a spreadsheet in Excel.
2. Be arranged by subsystem within the rows of the spreadsheet.
3. Columns within the spreadsheet shall contain the following information:
a. Equipment Description
b. Manufacturer
c. Manufacturer Part Number
d. Total Quantity
e. Installation location
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
f. Quantity by location
1.10 NETWORK DEVICE LIST
A. The lead Communications Engineer shall generate a Network Device List for the
communications systems. This will serve as the basis for obtaining IP address
assignments from SCRRA and other pertinent configuration information.
B. The Network Device List shall:
1. Be generated as a spreadsheet in Excel.
2. Be arranged by location within the rows of the spreadsheet. Within each
location, all equipment that requires an IP address assignment or other
unique configuration information shall be identified.
3. Blank columns within the spreadsheet shall contain the following minimum
information:
a. IP Address
b. Network Mask
c. Gateway
1.11 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PLAN
A. The lead Communications Engineer shall prepare and submit a Communications
Construction Sequencing Plan for each phase of construction where the
communications system is to be modified, installed, or removed.
B. The Communications Construction Sequencing Plan shall contain the following:
1. Construction Phase
a. Identify high level project pre-requisites that are necessary before
communications work within this phase can begin.
b. Provide a high level description of the objective for the
communications system. Identify the outcome (what state the
system will be in) once this phase is complete. If all original levels
of network redundancy will not be supported during this phase,
identify the risks and mitigating actions necessary.
c. Identify all locations that are impacted (added, modified, removed)
by this phase.
2. Location Specific Information
a. For each location that is to be added, modified, or removed provide:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
1) A step-by-step sequence of work description which
identifies those steps during which the existing system will
be disabled, and a description of what steps will be taken to
assure that the communications system will be tested and
returned to full operation without causing a delay to any train
movement.
2) An estimate of time to complete the critical steps in the
sequence specified in step-by-step sequence of work
description.
C. Should the construction phasing change during the project in a way that impacts
the communications systems, that Contractor shall submit an updated
Communications Construction Sequencing Plan.
1.12 INSPECTION, TEST AND COMMISSIONING PLAN
A. The lead Communications Engineer shall prepare an Inspection, Test and
Commissioning Plan that outlines the Contractor’s overall approach to testing and
schedule. The Inspection, Test and Commissioning Plan shall also identify the Test
Procedures that are necessary to be generated and submitted for approval.
Requirements for specific Test Procedures are found within the subsystem
specifications.
B. Depending on the scope of the communications work, all phases of testing may
not be applicable. The lead Communications Engineer shall evaluate the testing
required in context with the communications work defined in the Contract Plans.
C. The following definitions shall be used to communicate the phases of testing:
1. Factory Inspection
a. Contractor attends a factory inspection of the equipment prior to
shipment to the construction site.
2. Rack Testing
a. Contractor installs configured equipment into temporary racks at
their facility to demonstrate subsystem(s) and interoperation prior
to field deployment.
3. Field Installation Inspection
a. Contractor inspects equipment post installation for conformance
with installation standards and specifications.
4. Field LAN Subsystem Testing
a. Contractor completes all tests that can be performed at the
subsystem level without a WAN connection.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
5. Field WAN System Testing
a. Contractor integrates all subsystems and perform WAN tests, while
remaining network isolated from the Pomona DOC.
6. Commissioning into SCRRA system
a. Contractor supports SCRRA to incrementally add systems and
devices to their overall network, becoming visible from the Pomona
DOC.
D. The Inspection, Test and Commissioning Plan shall contain the following:
1. Summary Narrative
a. Provide a summary of the communications work and subsystems
impacted by the project.
2. Summary Table
a. A table summarizing each subsystem subject to inspection or
testing.
b. The rows of the Summary Table shall be organized by subsystem.
Possible subsystems that require testing include:
1) Communications Shelter
2) Power and Standby Power
3) Data Radio Network
4) Voice Radio Network
5) Positive Train Control (PTC)
6) Customer Information Systems
7) Video Surveillance Systems
8) Wide Area Networks
c. The columns of the Summary Table shall contain the following
information:
1) Factory Inspection
2) Rack Testing
3) Field Installation Inspection
4) Field LAN Subsystem Testing
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
5) Field WAN System Testing
6) Commissioning into SCRRA system
d. For each row/column intersection, list the following:
1) Inspection Report or Check Off List, as applicable.
2) Title(s) of the proposed Test Procedure(s) as applicable.
3. Integration Flow Chart
a. Include a flow chart that provides a visual representation of the
subsystems and their dependencies throughout the project. An
example of a dependency could be the ATCS Data Radio’s
dependency on the availability of power at a newly constructed site.
b. The Flow Chart shall conform with the following:
1) Flow Chart shall be from left to right or from top to bottom.
2) Use the correct symbol for each step:
a) Ovals for terminator (start/end steps).
b) Rectangles for subsystems.
c) Diamonds for decisions.
d) Arrows to represent flow and dependencies.
1.13 TRAINING PLAN
A. The lead Communications Engineer shall prepare a Training Plan that outlines the
Contractor’s overall approach to training and schedule.
B. Depending on the scope of the communications work, a Training Plan may not be
required. The lead Communications Engineer shall evaluate the training required
in context with the communications work defined in the Contract Plans.
C. Comprehensive training shall be provided for all equipment that is accepted as
equivalent, at no additional cost to SCRRA.
D. Training Requirements:
1. Training shall be held at SCRRA’s Pomona, CA location. The training
instructor(s) shall complete the training on site.
2. A minimum of 4 training sessions shall be held for each Training Course.
The training dates for each Training Course shall not be consecutive.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
3. Each training session shall allow up to 8 SCRRA individuals to attend.
Minimum training session durations shall be 8 hours for classroom time and
4 hours for lab time.
4. Four sets of lab equipment (1 equipment set per 2 students) shall be
provided during the training sessions. Upon completion of the training, the
lab equipment will be given to SCRRA as spare equipment.
5. Each training class shall include paper handouts and all materials provided
on a USB flash drive for each student.
E. Training Plan Requirements:
1. Identification of all required Training Courses.
2. Resume of the instructor(s). The trainer shall be knowledgeable and
qualified to teach each Training Course. Multiple trainer resumes shall be
submitted if necessary.
3. Proposed Training Course Schedule.
4. For each Training Course, all proposed training materials shall be
submitted including at a minimum:
a. Course Objective
b. Course Outline
c. Technical Theory
d. Installation Best Practices
e. Operation and Maintenance
f. SCRRA Application
1) Provide context that is specific to SCRRA’s use of the
equipment.
g. Hands on Laboratory Session
1.14 ASBUILT DOCUMENTATION
A. After a location is placed in service and prior to final acceptance of the project, the
Contractor shall submit the following as-built documentation within 3 business
days:
1. Drawing annotations
2. Configuration files
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
B. Annotate the As-Built drawing sets to show all approved circuiting and wiring
changes made during installation and testing of the location prior to placing it in
service, and any approved changes made after placement in service. Clearly
identify all changes on the Drawings using the "Red In"/"Yellow Out" convention.
Changes shall be dated and initialed by the Contractor's Communications
Engineer.
C. The final as-built Drawings shall be 11 inches by 17 inches.
1.15 BID ITEM LIST
A. Submit the Bid Item List for communications bid items as required under Section
01 29 73, Schedule of Values, and in accordance with the following additional
requirements:
1. Bid Item List for the communications bid items shall include all interface
circuits and staging necessary to place the location in service at each
stage, all acceptance testing and transportation of materials, all equipment
rental, all pretesting and removal of old equipment.
2. Organize Bid Item List for communications bid items to assign a value to
each communications location. A location is defined as a grade crossing
warning system, an intermediate signal location, a Control Point, or a
communications shelter.
1.16 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties for all equipment and material covering parts and labor for two
years from the date equipment or material is "placed in service".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Railroad Communications Requirements will be measured by the unit or fraction
thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and
as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
B. Demolition and Removal of Existing Equipment will be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable,
as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Railroad Communications Requirements furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed
on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
C. Demolition and Removal of Existing Equipment completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 44 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 44 05
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work in this Section describes the technical requirements for products and
miscellaneous components to be provided, installed, and tested to support the
organization of communications subsystems.
B. This Section also describes requirements for labeling all communications cable, wire
and equipment installed.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
2. 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
3. 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/TIA-606-B - Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure
(Note this label standard is modified herein to use equipment abbreviations as a
substitution for rack units. In the railroad wayside environment, not all enclosures
use EIA rack units, nor have identifying markings for rack units)
B. UL-497 - Primary Protector for Communications Circuits
C. UL-969 - Standard for Safety of Marking and Labeling Systems
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit cut sheets for all proposed products that meet the specifications of this
Section.
B. Submit and demonstrate product samples when requested by the Engineer.
C. Submit labeling for all Inside Plant cable and wire installed within the
communications shelter or enclosure.
D. Submit labeling for all installed Outside Plant communications cable.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 05 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials & Methods
1.05 INSIDE PLANT LABELING
A. Equipment, Cables and Wires
1. Equipment
a. Non-modular equipment and modular chassis shall have a label
applied with its Abbreviation Code.
b. Modular equipment shall have labels applied to all modules used.
Examples of this include:
1) Label voltage on split bus breaker panels. For example,
“24VDC” and “12VDC”.
2) At each breaker within a breaker panel, apply a label using
the equipment abbreviation above the breaker. For
example, the 15A breaker powering the Jumbo switch will
be labeled “JUMBO”.
3) At each Fiber Distribution Panel (FDP), apply labels on the
cover panel when rack mounted or the metal body when wall
mounts that define each card and identify the destination of
the fibers. For example, at CP Bake: Card A would be
labeled “CARD A – F5-8 Irvine STATION”; Card M would be
labeled “CARD M – F5-8 CP Crown”
2. Cable identification labels shall be installed on each end of the
communications cable, including wires, where they terminate on terminals,
punch down blocks and connectors. If simplex fiber patch cords are used,
or if the duplex clip is removed, label each end connection separately.
3. Cable identification labels shall be installed of each end of the electrical
wire providing power within communications facilities and equipment.
B. Labeling Convention
1. <Rack or Wall>-<Equipment Abbreviation>-<Card or Slot Number, If
Applicable>-<Port Number>/<Rack or Wall>-<Equipment Abbreviation>-
<Card or Slot Number, If Applicable>-<Port Number>
2. Convention begins at the originating end, where the cable is connected.
3. “/” is the separator used after the originating end detail and means “TO”.
4. Convention ends at the far end, where the cable is terminated.
5. An example is “R101-FDP-A-1.2/R101-JUMBO-1-1”
6. Refer to ES9530-02.
C. Communications Shelter Rack or Wall Assignments
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 05 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials & Methods
1. Beginning from the right side of the communications shelter (when facing
from the entrance door) and moving towards the left side, racks shall be
assigned numbers starting with “101”, “102”, “103”, etc. If there is space
designated for future racks to be installed, their assigned number shall be
reserved.
2. If the equipment is mounted on a wall, refer to ES9400-01 (Single Tenant
Shelter) or ES9405-01 (Dual Tenant Shelter) for wall assignments of A, B,
C, or D.
D. Typical Equipment Abbreviations
1. “12CHG”, 12V Charger
2. “24CHG”, 24V Charger
3. “48CHG”, 48V Charger
4. “48CHGA”, 48V Charger A
5. “48CHGB”, 48V Charger B
6. “12BAT+”, 12V Battery Plant Positive Terminal
7. “12BAT-“, 12V Battery Plant Negative Terminal
8. “GNDBAR”, Ground Bar
9. “SPM”, Site Power Monitor
10. “UPS”, Uninterruptible Power Supply
11. “BKRPNL”, Breaker Panel
12. “FDP#”, Fiber Distribution Panel
13. “JUMBO”, Jumboswitch
14. “ROUTR”, Router
15. “FR5000”, VHF Radio
16. “CNA”, ATCS Radio to Fiber Device
17. “BCM”, ATCS Base Communications Module
18. “MTR3000”, ATCS Base Radio
19. “PTC220”, PTC Base Radio
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 05 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials & Methods
20. Any equipment not defined within this list shall be assigned an abbreviation
not exceeding 6 characters. The abbreviation shall be recognizable as the
equipment described.
E. Card or Slot Number
1. This field is used when the equipment from which the cable originates from
or is destined for is modular. To determine card or slot numbers, the
equipment silkscreen identifiers shall be used. If there are no silkscreen
identifiers, the equipment manual shall define the card or slot number
assignments.
F. Port Number
1. This field is used when the equipment from which the cable originates from
or is destined for is modular. To determine card or slot numbers, the
equipment silkscreen identifiers shall be used. If there are no silkscreen
identifiers, the equipment manual shall define the card or slot number
assignments.
1.06 OUTSIDE PLANT LABELING
A. Backhaul Fiber Optic Cable, Outside Plant Label Convention
1. Labeling shall conform with the Fiber Route Diagram information for each
Subdivision, which provides cable segment and site codes.
2. In every pull box that contains the Backbone Cable, the following
convention shall be used:
a. FIBER BACKBONE <Cable Segment ID>
3. When a fiber cable lateral is in a pull box, the following convention shall be
used:
a. <Pull Box Site Code>-FSE-<Fiber Cable Strand Count>-<Cable
Segment ID>-L#<Lateral Number>/<Location Site Code>-<Fiber
Distribution Panel Number>
b. An example is “SGV56.11-FSE-FS72-SG100-L1/CP56.1-FDP”
4. When a fiber cable lateral is in an enclosure, the following convention shall
be used:
a. <Location Site Code>-<Fiber Distribution Panel Number>-<Fiber
Cable Strand Count>-<Cable Segment ID>-L#<Lateral
Number>/<Pull Box Site Code>-<Fiber Splice Enclosure Number>-
<Fiber Backbone Buffer Tube Number Spliced>
b. An example is “CP56.1-FDP-FS72-SG100-L1/SGV56.11-FSE-1”
5. Cable Segment ID
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 05 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials & Methods
a. Cable Segments shall identify the Subdivision (XX) in which they
are located:
1) Code “SG”, San Gabriel Subdivision
2) Code “PV”, Perris Valley Subdivision
3) Code “RI”, River Subdivision
4) Code “VY”, Valley Subdivision
5) Code “VN”, Ventura Subdivision
6) Code “OR”, Orange Subdivision
7) Code “OL”, Olive Subdivision
8) Code “SW”, Shortway Subdivision
b. A Segment ID (###) is a number assigned by the Fiber Route
Diagram.
c. The code format is XX###
6. Location Site Code
a. Site codes shall identify a Site Type (XX) at each location:
1) Code “CP”, Control Point
2) Code “CX”, Crossing
3) Code “LS”, Leaving Signal
4) Code “ES”, Electric Switch Lock
5) Code “IM”, Intermediate Signal
6) Code “CS”, Location with both Crossing and Signal
functionality
7) Code “CH”, Communications Shelter/House
b. The location site code shall utilize a milepost to the tenth of a mile
(MM.M) and the Site Type.
c. The code format is XXMM.M
7. Pull Box Site Codes
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 05 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials & Methods
a. The pull box site code (V) shall utilize a milepost to the nearest
hundredth of a mile (MM.MM) of the pull box location and the
Subdivision (XX). If there is more than one vault at the milepost
location, vaults shall be labeled A, B, C, etc, working from Railroad
West to Railroad East.
b. The code format is XXVMM.MM
B. RF Cables Using Waveguide Entrance
1. Labeling shall reference the system using the cable.
2. The following convention shall be used:
a. <System>-<Cable_Type>-/<Antenna Part Number>-<Antenna
Length
b. An example is “VHF_BASE-LDF4-50A/220-4N-20FT”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSIDE PLANT LABELS
A. Labels shall be a minimum of 0.75 inch in height and 1.5 inches wide.
B. Label material
1. Shall be UL listed.
2. Shall have a white vinyl pressure-sensitive film with a minimum thickness
3.4mil.
3. Shall utilize a permanent pressure-sensitive acrylic adhesive that bonds
well to a variety of surfaces.
C. Label printers
1. Shall utilize thermal transfer printing.
2. Shall utilize a UL approved ribbon.
2.02 OUTSIDE PLANT LABELS
A. Labels shall be suitable for the environmental conditions in which they are applied
(such as moisture, heat, or ultraviolet light).
B. Backhaul Fiber Cables
1. Pre-printed yellow labels that state “CAUTION: FIBER OPTIC CABLE”
shall be self-laminating made of rigid PVC material and a polyester self-
sealing cover.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 05 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials & Methods
2. Label shall be approximately 2 inches in height and 3.5 inches wide.
3. Under the cover of the yellow label, a white vinyl label meeting the
requirements of inside plant label material and printing shall be applied.
C. All other Outside Plant cables
1. Shall meet the requirements of Section 2.01 herein.
2.03 CABLE TIES AND VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORT
A. Zip ties
1. Shall made of Nylon 6/6 material.
2. Shall be self-locking.
3. For outdoor use shall be UV stabilized.
B. Mounting Head Cable Ties
1. Shall made of Nylon 6/6 material.
C. Rack Stand-Off Tie Bracket
1. Shall be made of high strength aluminum.
2. Shall be 1 inch wide by 6 inches in length.
D. Velcro Cable Ties
1. Shall be adjustable and reusable.
2. Shall be self-gripping.
2.04 PUNCH DOWN BLOCKS
A. 110 Punch Down Block
1. Shall be used for 22 to 26 AWG wire using a punch down tool.
2. Shall be capable of 500MHz (1 Gbps) or greater bandwidth.
3. Shall have color coded wire strips that assist in wire sorting.
4. Shall have jumper troughs sized to meet the cable minimum bend radius.
2.05 PROTECTED ENTRANCE TERMINALS
A. Outside Plant Entrance Cable Protected Entrance Terminals
1. Shall be made with 16 AWG power coated steel.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 05 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials & Methods
2. Shall have a cover and splice chamber.
3. Shall accept 6 to 14 AWG wire for external ground connectors.
4. Shall use an industry standard 5 pin design.
B. Protector Modules
1. Shall be a 5 pin solid state module.
2. Shall provide balanced protection, where an overvoltage on either side of
the circuit will trigger the protection.
3. Shall protect for voltages over 230 VDC.
2.06 HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGEMENT
A. 19 Inch Rack Mountable Horizontal Cable Managers
1. Shall be compatible with two post rack systems.
2. Shall come in rack units, minimum 1U.
3. Shall contain fingers to separate and organize patch cords for adds, drops
and modifications.
4. Shall use snap on covers to hide routing.
5. Covers and panel shall have a black power coat finish.
2.07 EXECUTION
2.08 INSTALLATION
A. Inside Plant Labels
1. Labeling shall be applied to all equipment, cables and wires installed by the
Contractor.
2. All labels shall be machine generated. No handwritten labels are allowed.
3. Character size shall not be less than 1/8th inch in height, and not exceed 3
rows.
4. Cables shall be labeled so that viewing shall not be obscured by cable
bundling or dressing.
5. At conduit entrance openings, labels shall be placed not less than 6 inches
from the opening.
B. Outside Plant Labels
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 05 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials & Methods
1. Labeling shall be applied to all cable installed by the Contractor.
2. All labels shall be machine generated. No handwritten labels are allowed.
3. Cables shall be labeled so that viewing shall not be obscured by cable
bundling or dressing.
4. At conduit openings and from underground splice enclosure grommets,
labels shall be placed not less than 6 inches from the opening or grommet.
5. At waveguide openings labels shall be placed on either side (outside and
inside shelter) of the waveguide. A label shall also be placed at the
terminating equipment. All labels shall be placed not less than 6 inches
from the waveguide or the terminating equipment.
C. Cable Ties and Vertical Cable Support
1. Install in accordance with ES9440.
2. Vertical cable support and standoffs shall be added to sufficiently support
the cable weight and provide strain relief.
D. Punch Down Blocks
1. Use Insulation Displacement Connection (punch down) termination.
2. Use the proper tool to avoid damaging the connector.
3. Punch down one single wire on each terminating clip. Do not punch down
more than one wire per post.
4. Leave enough slack for future removal and termination.
5. Label all terminations.
6. Test the connections/terminations.
E. Protected Entrance Terminals
1. Locate terminal on backboard surface inside building as close as possible
to cable entrance.
2. Connect the terminal grounding to the Main Ground Bus.
3. All protectors shall be fully inserted during testing.
F. Horizontal Cable Management
1. Maintain the cable bend radius during installation.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 05 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials & Methods
PART 3 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
3.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Communications Basic Equipment, Materials & Methods will be measured by the
unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable,
as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
3.02 PAYMENT
A. Communications Base Equipment, Materials & Methods furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit
Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include
full compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 44 05
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 05 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 44 10
PREFABRICATED COMMUNICATIONS SHELTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work in this Section describes the technical requirements for products and
miscellaneous components to be provided, installed and tested to support the
housing of communications subsystems.
B. After the shelter is installed at its final location, the Contractor shall install all
equipment racks, wall mounted cable termination protections and other
communications equipment where shown on the Plans.
C. The Shelter type will be designated on the Plans as:
1. Dual Tenant Shelter
a. This shelter type will house SCRRA and an identified third party.
b. The two areas shall be separated by a fence.
c. Each party shall have their own door for access.
d. The overall shelter dimensions shall be 10’ x 20’.
2. Single Tenant Shelter
a. This shelter type will house SCRRA only.
b. The overall shelter dimensions shall be 9’ x 14’.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
2. 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment, Materials and Methods
3. 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASCE 7-05, 7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
B. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 10 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
C. ASTM A615 Grade 60– Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
D. ASTM A1064 – Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed for Concrete
E. ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement
F. ASTM F3125 – Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and
Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120ksi and 150
ksi Minimum tensile Strength and Metric Dimensions 830 MPa and 1040 MPa
Minimum Tensile Strength
G. ANSI/TIA 607-D– Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing
for Customer Premises
H. NEC Article 242 – Overvoltage Protection
I. UL 437 – Standard for Safety Key Locks
J. UL 467 – Standard for Safety for Grounding and Bonding Equipment
K. UL 752 – Standard to Bullet-Resisting Equipment
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Geotechnical Report for the area where the shelter will be installed.
B. Submit Fabrication Drawings produced by the shelter manufacturer that show the
following information:
1. Floor Plan – overall dimensions and bill of materials.
2. Exterior Elevations – exterior equipment placement, dimensions and bill of
materials.
3. Roof Plans – roof slope, cast in bolt pattern for antenna tripod mount,
dimensions and bill of materials.
4. Reflected Ceiling Plan – placement of overhead lighting, smoke and head
detectors, electrical outlets, dimensions and bill of materials.
5. Interior Elevations – interior equipment placement, dimensions and bill of
materials.
6. Cable Ladder Layout – placement of overhead cable ladder, Unistrut and
dimensions.
7. Electrical Panel – schedule for each panel, single line diagram and alarm
wiring.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 10 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
8. Foundation – Foundation designed by shelter manufacturer and sealed by
a California Professional Structural Engineer.
C. Submit and demonstrate product samples when requested by the Engineer.
D. Submit the exterior finish paint color.
E. Submit scheduled date of factory inspection of the communications shelter prior to
shipping from the manufacturer to the final site. Submit verification report if the
Engineer does not attend the factory inspection in person.
F. Submit work plan for installation of shelter on its foundation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PREFABRICATED COMMUNICATION SHELTER
A. Structural
1. Structure shall be fabricated from reinforced concrete panels.
2. Walls and Roof
a. Concrete panels shall:
1) Have minimum 4-inch thickness
2) Have minimum 5000 psi compressive strength
3) Have a minimum 2-hour fire rating
4) Be reinforced with No. 4 rebar and No. 4 welded wire fabric
5) Be bullet resistant
b. Roof shall:
1) Have design loading (live load) of roof shall be minimum 80
pounds per square foot.
2) Have proper slope for drainage and loading. Nominal
drainage roof slop shall be 1/8 inch per foot.
3) Be watertight. If the roof is seamed, a drip cap must be
installed.
4) Be capable of support a steel tripod with 7/8-inch diameter
anchor bolts embedded into the roof structure to support a
Valmont “S” Tripod up to 20’ in height per ES9400-01.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 10 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
c. Wind design shall use a Basic Wind Speed of 110 mph, Exposure
Category C.
d. Earthquake design shall use:
1) Site Class D (or as modified by the Geotechnical Report)
2) Design Category F
3) Occupancy Category IV
4) Seismic Force Resisting Systems, Wall Bearing Systems,
Special Reinforced Concrete Shear Walls
3. Floor
a. Floor concrete panels shall be a minimum of 6-inch thickness and
shall be reinforced with No. 6 rebar and No. 4 welded wire fabric.
b. Shall have a design loading (live load) of a minimum 250 pounds
per square foot.
c. Shall be reinforced with transverse, longitudinal and lateral ribs.
B. Architectual
1. Exterior
a. Walls shall have a uniform exposed aggregate finish.
b. Wall shall be covered with an anti-graffiti sealer.
c. Walls shall be painted Desert Tan in color
d. All hardware and fasteners shall be tamper proof.
e. Roof shall have white elastomeric coating.
2. Interior Walls and Ceiling
a. Finish Flame Spread Index shall be Class C.
b. Shall have 1.5” R11 Insulation covered by ½ inch Corrugated
Plastic Core with a .030 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)
overlay.
3. Flooring
a. Floor finish shall be Critical Radiant Class I.
b. Shall use 12” x 12” Static Dissipative Tiles (SDT) with 1/8-inch
thickness. Tile color shall be Ashgray.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 10 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
c. A color integrated 4-inch vinyl wall base shall be applied. Color
shall be Midgray.
d. Adhesive shall be suitable for concrete.
C. Cable ingress and egress
1. Void(s) shall be placed in the floor of the shelter for entrance conduits as
indicated in the Plans.
2. Waveguide window shall be placed in line with the interior cable ladder and
support 4 cable entrance ports. Ports shall be 4-inch in diameter.
D. Doors and Openings
1. Doors shall be single 3-foot by 7-foot.
2. Door and frame shall be Level 4 rated Galvannealed Steel.
3. Doors shall use a piano hinge.
4. Lockset shall be mortise with changeable lock core.
5. Door hardware shall include stainless steel hinges, anti-pick plate,
hydraulic door closer with hold open arm, brush weather strip, aluminum
threshold and door sweep.
6. Doors shall have a drip cap with a minimum width of 2 inches.
7. Doors shall have a stainless steel security bar.
E. Electrical
1. Each tenant within the shelter shall be supplied with a minimum 100A 24
space integrated load center and Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor
(TVSS) Type 2.
2. The SCRRA tenant side shall incorporate and manual transfer switch and
external 30A (NEMA L14-30R) Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFI)
receptacle.
3. Duplex receptacles (20A) shall be installed at maximum intervals of
approximately 4 feet along walls.
4. Overhead twist-lock receptacles (NEMA L5-20R) shall be mounted on the
ceiling near the Power rack (2) and near the Video Surveillance Systems
rack (1).
5. A minimum of one overhead twist-lock receptacle (240V, 30A) shall be
mounted on the ceiling over the power rack.
6. A duplex receptacle shall be provided for Emergency Exit Light.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 10 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
7. A 240VAC, 30A circuit and fusible disconnect shall be provided for each
HVAC unit.
F. Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
1. Shall be 2-ton units, 20,000 BTU. Two units shall be provided.
2. Shall use a non-ozone depleting refrigerant.
3. Shall have wall mount adjustable supply and return grilles.
4. Shall use a lead lag controller.
5. Shall be protected with a heavy gauge, hot dipped, galvanized vandal-
resistant security mesh cage with a swing door and lock.
G. Alarms
1. The following dry contact alarms shall be monitored and wired:
a. Intrusion Detection
b. Smoke Detection
c. Power failure
d. High/Low temperature
e. AC failure
f. Humidity
g. Ionization
h. HVAC lockout
2. Alarms shall be terminated on a 66-punch block.
H. Lighting
1. Interior lighting shall be LED with acrylic lens cover. Light levels shall be
adequate for reading.
2. Exterior lighting shall be LED with motion detector.
3. Emergency lighting shall include green illuminated exit sign, dual flood
lights and battery backup of 90 minutes.
4. Interior light switches shall be provided adjacent to the door(s) for both
interior and exterior lighting.
I. Cable Ladder
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 10 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
1. Cable ladder shall be 18” wide with 1 ½” stringer, yellow Zinc with hardware
to anchor into concrete.
J. Grounding
1. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall be ¼” x 4” x
20” predrilled, electro-tin plated solid copper ground busbar with insulators
and standoffs.
K. Additional Items
1. A plywood board, minimum 4’ tall and ¾” thick, shall serve as the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF) for each tenant. The board shall be painted
white.
a. The SCRRA tenant board shall be a minimum of 8’ long.
b. The third-party tenant board shall be a minimum of 6’ long.
2. A fire extinguisher 10lb carbon dioxide Class B C.
3. Wall mounted Document Holder
4. Ionization smoke detector
5. Photoelectric smoke detector
6. 10-person first aid kit, ANSI A
7. Eye wash station
2.02 ADDRESS SIGNAGE
A. Each shelter shall be provided with address signage on the side of the exterior
door for identification.
1. The sign shall have a white reflective background with 3 inch black
lettering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Foundation
1. Complete soil sample and geotechnical work before determining final
foundation design.
2. Ensure foundation design includes voids to allow for entrance conduits into
the shelter floor as shown in the Plans. Entrance conduits shall be placed
near the vertical cable ladder and the MDF board.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 10 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
B. General
1. All penetrations through the concrete walls shall be sealed to prevent
water, insects and vermin from entering the shelter.
C. HVAC
1. Dual HVAC units shall be wired together to cycle (alternate) on-off during
normal operation, or all one unit to operate should the other unit fail.
D. Grounding
1. One Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall be
installed a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor and attached with
insulated brackets.
2. Equipment, cables, and racks shall be grounded to this busbar as shown
in the Plans.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Prefabricated Communications Shelter will be measured by the unit or fraction
thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and
as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Prefabricated Communications Shelter furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed
on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all factory acceptance testing,
transportation, storage, assembly, delivery, permits and incidentals as shown on
the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 44 10
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 10 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 44 20
COMMUNICATIONS WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work in this Section describes the technical requirements for products and
supporting components for communications wire and cable to be furnished,
installed, terminated and tested to support communications data transmission.
B. Requirements for various cabling utilized by SCRRA including fiber optic, coaxial,
waveguide, and twisted pair are detailed herein.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
2. 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment Materials and Methods
3. 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
4. 34 44 50 Customer Information System
5. 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
6. 34 44 95 Data Radio Network
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/TIA-568.3-D Fiber Cabling and Components
B. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640-2006, Standard for Fiber Optic Outside Plant
Communications Cable
C. ASTM E-814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Fire Stop
Systems.
D. International Organization of Standardization (ISO); 9001 Quality Management
Services.
E. United States Department of Agriculture Rural Utilities Service (RUS) 7 CFR
1755.900 (PE-90), Specification for Filled Fiber Optic Cables
F. GR-20-CORE, Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber and Optical Fiber
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit cut sheets for all proposed products that meet the specifications of this
Section.
B. Submit installation and maintenance manuals for all cable and supporting
equipment furnished.
C. Prior to ordering any backhaul fiber optic cable, submit a fiber cable order plan that
includes a complete listing of cable types, cable manufacturers, quantities, reel
sizes and targeted location of installation within the project. The reel sizes shall
include the required cable slack within the systems. An additional reel shall be
ordered to account for 25% of total cable. This reel shall serve as a guardband
and if not required by the contractor shall be submitted to SCRRA as spare
material.
D. For backhaul fiber optic cable, a detailed cable installation plan shall be submitted.
The installation plan shall designate pull points,
E. Submit Test Procedures for all newly installed or modified cable.
1. Fiber Optic Cable
a. Use TIA-526-7 Method A.1 for singlemode cable.
1) 1310nm
2) 1550nm
b. Use TIA-526-14 for multimode cable
1) 850nm
2) 1300nm
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FIBER OPTIC CABLE
A. Single Mode Fiber Optic Cable
1. SCRRA standard single mode fiber optic backhaul cable shall be a
minimum of 72 fiber optic strands and shall meet the following
characteristics.
a. Loose tube cable of 250 um coated fiber suitable for duct, aerial and
direct bury applications.
b. Dielectric central member that maintains bend radius.
c. Aramid yarn using SZ stranding to provide tensile strength.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
d. Gel-free, contains water swellable material.
e. Contains ripcord for accessing core.
f. Single corrugated steel armor used for toning cable.
g. Polyethylene outer jacket with chemical, UV and abrasion
resistance.
h. Uses TIA-598-C optical fiber cable color coding.
i. Optical fiber
1) Compliant with ITU G.652.D fiber category.
2) Exceed bend performance of ITU G.657.A1
3) 1310nm
a) Maximum attenuation of 0.34dB/km
b) Maximum point discontinuity of 0.05dB
c) Mode field diameter of 9.2 +/- 0.4
d) Effective group index of refraction Neff 1.4676
e) Rayleigh backscatter coefficient (1ns pulse width) -
77dB
4) 1550nm
a) Maximum attenuation of 0.22dB/km
b) Maximum point discontinuity of 0.05dB
c) Mode field diameter of 10.4 +/- 0.5
d) Dispersion maximum of 18 ps/(nm-km)
e) Effective group index of refraction Neff 1.4682
f) Rayleigh backscatter coefficient (1ns pulse width) -
82dB
5) Core diameter of 8.2um
6) Cladding diameter of 125 +/- 0.7um
7) Core-clad concentricity maximum of 0.5um
8) Coating-cladding concentricity maximum of 12um
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
2. Single mode patch cables shall utilize fiber that is compatible with the
backhaul cables.
a. Typical SCRRA patch cables are:
1) SC to SC connectors for fiber distribution panel cross
connections.
2) SC to LC connectors for connections to SFP lasers.
3) Duplex configuration preferred.
b. All patch cords shall be factory made and tested.
c. Maximum insertion loss shall be 0.2dB.
d. Polish shall be UPC.
e. Jacketing shall be low smoke zero halogen.
B. Multimode Fiber Optic Cable
1. SCRRA standard multimode fiber optic station cable shall meet the
following characteristics.
a. Loose tube cable of 250 um coated fiber suitable for duct, aerial and
direct bury applications.
b. Uses TIA-598-C optical fiber cable color coding.
c. Optical fiber
1) Compliant with TIA-568C
2) Core diameter of 50um
3) Cladding diameter of 125um
4) 850nm
a) Maximum attenuation of 3dB/km
b) Minimum effective modal bandwidth of 4700
MHz*km
5) 1300nm
a) Maximum attenuation of 1dB/km
2. Multimode patch cables shall use fiber that is compatible with the station
cables.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
a. Typical SCRRA patch cables are:
1) SC to SC connectors for fiber distribution panel to media
converter connections.
2) Duplex configuration preferred.
b. All patch cords shall be factory made and tested.
c. Maximum insertion loss shall be 0.5dB.
d. Polish shall be UPC.
2.02 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TERMINATION
A. Indoor fiber optic cable termination shall:
1. Be modular and support panel cards for SC and SC Duplex connectors.
2. Panel cards shall support a minimum of 12 fiber strand connections.
3. All panel cards shall have pigtails that are factory tested and fusion spliced
to the backhaul or station fiber cable.
4. Fiber cassette use is permissible only when all fibers are terminated within
a cable.
5. Fiber cassette use is not permissible if certain fiber strands within the cable
are designated to be fusion spliced (west to east) within the signal or
communications enclosure. These fibers cannot be physically spliced
within the same cassette.
6. Backhaul cable termination
a. Support 2 times the fiber strand count. For 72 strand fiber, fiber
optic termination shall support 144 terminations.
b. Backhaul fiber distribution panels shall support backhaul cables
only.
7. Station cable termination
a. All fibers shall be terminated on a single panel.
b. Station fiber distribution panels shall support station cables only.
B. Outdoor fiber optic cable termination shall:
1. Be stored in an underground splice enclosure.
2. Splice trays shall be sized to seat and store the maximum number of
possible splices.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
2.03 TWISTED PAIR CABLE
A. Twisted pair cable shall:
1. Meet the cable category rating as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Category 3, up to 10Mbps
1) 16MHz bandwidth
b. Category 5e, up to 1000Mbps
1) 24 AWG
2) 100MHz bandwidth
3) Return loss of 20.1dB
4) 100 ohm impedance
c. Category 6, up to 1000Mbps
1) 23 AWG
2) 250Mhz bandwidth
3) Return loss of 20.1dB
4) 100 ohm impedance
2. Utilize copper wire.
3. RS-422 cable
a. Sheilded
b. 22 AWG
c. 100 ohm impedance
d. Shunt capacitance of 16pF per foot
B. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable shall:
1. Meet ANSI/TIA-568 standards.
2. Support a minimum of 4 pairs for Ethernet applications.
3. Jacketing shall be low smoke zero halogen (LSZH).
4. Be compatible with RJ45 connectors and punch down blocks.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
5. All UTP patch cables shall be factory made and tested.
6. All outdoor cables shall be UV rated.
C. Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) cable shall:
1. Be confined in a foil or mesh shield that guards the cable against
electromagnetic interference.
2. Support a minimum of 4 pairs for Ethernet applications.
3. Jacketing shall be low smoke zero halogen (LSZH).
4. Be compatible with RJ45 connectors and punch down blocks.
5. All STP patch cables shall be factory made and tested.
6. All outdoor cables shall be UV rated.
2.04 70V SPEAKER CABLE
A. The 70V speaker cable shall:
1. Use stranded copper
2. Be a minimum of 16 AWG
3. Unsheilded
2.05 WAVEGUIDE
A. Elliptical waveguides shall:
1. Be compatible to the frequency licensed for the microwave link
a. EW63, 5.925Ghz to 7.125GHz
1) Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) 1.15
2) Return loss 23.13dB
b. EW90, 10.2GHz to 11.7GHz
1) Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) 1.15 (up to 300 ft)
2) Return loss 23.10dB
2. Be constructed of corrugated copper.
3. Have a polyethylene jacket.
B. Flexible waveguides shall:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
1. Be a helically winded silver coated brass strip for uniform construction.
2. Provide repeatable return loss and insertion loss performance during
flexing.
3. Have a neoprene jacket to provide environmental and mechanical
protection.
4. Be compatible to the frequency licensed for the microwave link.
a. WR137, 5.85GHz to 8.2GHz
b. WR90, 8.2GHz to 12.4GHz
2.06 COAXIAL CABLE
A. Coaxial cable shall:
1. Have attenuation and power information for the frequency of the radio
application.
2. Be constructed of a center copper-clad aluminum wire, with a low density
foam dielectric layer and a shield layer of corrugated copper.
3. Have a cable impedance of 50 ohm +/- 1 ohm.
4. Have a Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) of 1.13
5. Have a return loss of 24.3dB
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Visually inspect all equipment for possible damage upon receipt and prior
to installation. Do not install any damaged equipment.
2. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3. Route interface cables carefully to ensure cable bend radius is maintained
throughout the installation.
4. If intra enclosure cabling is required, shielded and grounded cables shall
be used. Cables shall be grounded at both ends.
B. Fiber Optic Cable
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
1. Use the proper eye protection when working on fiber optic cable. Never
look directly into the end of any optical fiber unless certain that no light is
present in the fiber.
2. Optical fiber is sensitive to dust and dirt. Maintain the highest standards of
cleanliness when working with fiber. Always keep dust caps on connectors,
mating adapters, patch panels, or test equipment. Use lint free wips and
pure reagent grade isopropyl alcohol to clean connectors.
3. Conduct on-reel testing to verify the cable was not damaged during
shipping.
4. Prior to installation, survey the conduit and pull box locations in the field for
creation of the pull plan. The pull plan shall include a copy of the
manufacturer’s installation recommendations.
5. Swivel pulling eyes shall be used to attach the pulling rope to prevent cable
twisting during the pull.
6. Do not exceed the maximum pulling tension rating. Use a tension
monitoring winch during installation and approved cable lubricants.
7. When laying loops of fiber on a surface during a pull, use figure eight loops
to prevent twisting the cable.
8. For backhaul fiber, ensure a minimum of 150 feet of slack is provided in
each pull box.
9. During termination, all splices shall be fusion splices.
10. Any metallic hardware used in fiber optic cable systems (such as the armor)
shall be grounded.
11. During OTDR testing, set the test pulse as short as possible for the range
needed to reach the end of the cable for best resolution.
12. During testing, measured losses shall not exceed:
a. 0.3dB for fusion splices
b. 0.5dB for mated connectors
C. Twisted pair cable
1. Support cabling to prevent undue stress from its own weight. The cable
shall be free of tension at both ends, as well as over the entire length of the
run.
2. Shielded cable shall be grounded and use surge protection.
D. Waveguide
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
1. Waveguide shall be pressure tested by the manufacturer before shipping.
Upon receipt, use a tire gauge to check pressure at the cable end.
2. Use a hoist line that supports the total weight of the waveguide. Use a
pulley high enough on the tower to allow the waveguide to be raised
sufficiently to make the antenna connection. A winch is recommended for
hoisting.
3. Maintain hoist line tension until anchoring is completed.
4. The top and bottom of the waveguide shall be grounded to the tower. The
antenna input connection shall not serve as top ground. Ground the
waveguide at the point where it enters the enclosure.
5. After all connections have been completed, pressurize the waveguide
using dry air. If moist air has entered the waveguide, it shall be purged.
After purging, repressurize the waveguide.
6. Check the final installation for leaks.
7. Measure the following:
a. Cable loss (1 port)
b. Insertion loss
c. VSWR
E. Coaxial Cable
1. The top and bottom of the coaxial cable shall be grounded to the tower.
Ground the coaxial cable at the point where it enters the enclosure.
2. Measure the following:
a. Cable loss (1 port)
b. Insertion loss
c. VSWR
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Communications Wire and Cable will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Communications Wire and Cable furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 44 20
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 20 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 44 50
CUSTOMER INFORMATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work in this Section describes the technical requirements for products and
supporting components to be furnished, installed and tested to support, extend or
modify the Customer Information System (CIS).
B. Requirements for various systems, methods and cabling utilized by SCRRA for
Public Address, Real Time Messaging, Schedule Information, Ticket Vending and
Emergency Management at Passenger Stations are detailed herein. The Pomona
DOC is the SCRRA Operations Center.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
2. 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment Materials and Methods
3. 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
4. 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
5. 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
1.03 REFERENCES
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit cut sheets for all proposed products that meet the specifications of this
Section.
B. Submit operation, installation, engineering and maintenance manuals for all
equipment furnished.
C. Submit Test Procedures for all new or modified systems.
D. Public Address
1. Submit Ambient Noise Baseline Measurement.
2. Submit proposed configuration files:
a. Audio Controller
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 50 Customer Information System
b. Audio Processor
3. Submit final commissioned configuration files for all locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CIS ETHERNET SWITCH
A. The CIS Ethernet Switch shall:
1. Support the following operating temperatures:
a. 0 degrees C to +45 degrees C at climate-controlled Station
locations.
2. Support Field Replaceable Units
a. Power, a minimum of two AC modules.
3. Support redundant fans for cooling. The switch shall be able to operate if
one of the fans fail.
4. Be capable of Gigabit Ethernet.
a. 24 10/100/1000 Copper ports with Power over Ethernet Plus
(PoE+) capability with a minimum power of 600W.
b. Capable of per port power policing.
c. 4 SFP ports 1G/10G
5. Support Perpetual PoE, which maintains power during a switch reboot.
6. Have 56 Gbps of switching capacity.
7. Shall support the following Standards:
a. 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
b. 802.1Q VLAN
c. 802.1p QoS
d. 802.1w RSTP
e. 802.1x Port Based Network Access Control
f. 802.3ad Link Aggregation
g. 802.3af PoE
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 50 Customer Information System
h. 802.3at PoE+
8. Have a minimum MTBF of 392,000 hours
9. Be capable of 19-inch rack mount.
2.02 CIS CONTROLLER
A. The CIS Controller shall:
1. Support the following operating temperatures:
a. 0 degrees C to +50 degrees C at climate-controlled Station
locations.
2. Be mountable on a 19-inch rack and occupy 1 rack unit.
3. Support a 1 GB LAN connection.
4. Have 6 USB 2.0 ports.
5. Have 4 USB 3.1 ports.
6. Have 4 GB DDR4 2666MHz memory.
7. Support Realtek ALC887 codec to drive the Public Address Audio.
2.03 FIBER TO ETHERNET MODULAR MEDIA CONVERTER
A. The Fiber to Ethernet Modular Media Converter shall:
1. Support the following operating temperatures:
a. 0 degrees C to +50 degrees C at climate-controlled Station
locations.
2. Be chassis based to mount in a 19-inch rack and utilize slide in media
converter cards.
3. Be powered with redundant power supplies.
4. Utilize remote management and feature control through a management
module within the chassis via:
a. Web Browser
b. Telnet
c. SNMP
5. Support multimode and singlemode fiber up to 100 Mbps.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 50 Customer Information System
6. Support Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Ethernet copper connections up to
100 Mbps.
7. Support hot-swappable, Small Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) optics.
2.04 AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESSOR
A. The Audio Signal Processor shall:
1. Support configurable inputs and outputs (I/O) via a minimum of 4 card slots.
2. Support the following types of I/O cards:
a. Analog Input Card
1) Software configurable gain in 6dB steps up to +48dB per
channel.
2) Selectable 48V Phantom Power per channel.
b. Analog Output Card
c. Digital Input Card
1) AES3 standard
d. Digital Output Card
1) AES3 standard
e. Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) Input Card
f. Telephone Hybrid Card
3. Support configurable signal processing.
4. Have a Dynamic Range of 105dB unweighted, 108dB A-weighted.
5. Have a Total Harmonic Distortion figure less than 0.01%.
6. Have control software supports audio processing objects to include:
a. Crossovers
b. Compressors
c. Gates
d. Duckers
e. Expanders
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 50 Customer Information System
f. Limiters
g. Gain blocks
h. Graphic Equalizers
i. Filters
j. Metering points
k. Delays
l. Mixers
m. Tone Generators
n. Source Selectors
7. Have password-based security with remote access via the Ethernet
network.
8. Be 19-inch rack mountable.
9. Support HiQnet control protocol.
2.05 AUDIO AMPLIFIER
A. The Audio Amplifier shall:
1. Support direct drive 70Vrms output.
2. Support 4 channels of audio output.
3. Support 300W of power to drive 70V speakers.
4. Have a voltage gain of up to 34dB.
5. Have Total Harmonic Distortion of 0.35%.
6. Have an Analog Input Signal to Noise Ratio greater than 104dB.
7. Have an Input Sensitivity of 1.4Vrms..
8. Be 19-inch rack mountable.
9. Have an Ethernet network port for remote monitoring and control.
2.06 AMBIENT NOISE SENSOR
A. The Ambient Noise Sensor shall:
1. Be suitable for outdoors and weather resistant.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 50 Customer Information System
2. Support Phantom Powering.
3. Have a microphone of electret condenser type.
4. Have a typical Frequency Response of 80Hz to 10,000Hz.
5. Have a signal to noise ratio of 68dB at 94dB Sound Pressure Level.
6. Have polarity where positive pressure on the diaphragm produces positive
voltage on the audio+ terminal with respect to the audio- terminal.
7. Support an operating temperature of -10 degrees C to +60 degrees C.
2.07 EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT PANEL
A. The Emergency Management Panel shall:
1. Be a dual access lockable free standing enclosure constructed of 12-gauge
316 stainless steel.
2. Have telephone cable wired from the communications shelter and
terminated on a 66 block.
3. Have a handset connected to the 66 block.
4. Have the ambient noise sensor connected to the 66 block.
2.08 LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) MESSAGE SIGNS
A. The LED Message Signs shall:
1. Support the following operating temperatures:
a. -40 degrees C to +50 degrees C at 100% humidity.
2. Have a minimum LED half-life of 100,000 hours and a minimum of 4000
cd/m2 amber intensity.
3. Automatically adjust to a minimum of 99 levels of brightness according to
lighting conditions.
4. Have a minimum 120 degree LED viewing angle.
5. Have 8mm pitch pixels, 1600 pixels per square foot. The failure of a single
pixel shall not cause failure of any other pixel in the display.
6. Have interchangeable LED display modules with a quick-disconnect
locking connector type.
7. Be available in single face or double face (single cabinet) configurations
controlled by a single controller.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 50 Customer Information System
8. Be powered by 120VAC with a main breaker.
9. Support RS422 and Ethernet (copper or fiber) communications.
10. Be rated NEMA 4X.
11. Have conformal coating on all electronic components.
12. Have front service access using a tamper resistant key entry system.
13. Support alphanumeric text in character sizes that meet ADA requirements.
14. Support presentation modes of steady, horizontal scroll, vertical scroll and
flash.
15. Support a sunshade to maximize contrast of the display.
16. Use a protocol compatible with SCRRA’s LED signage head end control
software.
a. The data link protocol will use a check summing technique to
guarantee packet integrity. Packets shall be discarded if the
packet’s check sum is not valid.
b. Displays shall not initiate communication on the network.
c. Each display shall be assigned a unique physical address and a
group address.
d. Broadcast addressing will allow multiple displays to receive one
packet.
2.09 TRAIN SCHEDULE DISPLAY MONITOR AND ENCLOSURE
A. The Train Schedule Display Monitor shall:
1. Support the following operating temperatures:
a. 0 degrees C to +45 degrees C.
2. Be a 49-inch display.
3. Have a native resolution of 1920x1080.
4. Support a minimum brightness of 3500 nits.
5. Have a minimum 178 degree viewing angle.
6. Have a minimum light lifetime of 100,000 hours.
7. Have a minimum contrast ratio of 3000:1.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 50 Customer Information System
8. Support a landscape orientation.
9. Support 400x400 VESA mounting.
10. Be fanless.
11. Support HDMI and DVI inputs.
B. The Train Schedule Display Monitor Enclosure shall:
1. Be a standalone enclosure with a post and arm extension that supports
concealed cable routing.
2. Contain a sunshield.
3. Place the bottom of the display at a minimum height of 7 feet to prevent
public access and vandalism.
4. Support a VESA standard display mount.
5. Support a 49-inch display.
6. Support a tilt angle of 15 degrees.
7. Provide an integrated 4000 BTU air conditioner.
8. Support 120VAC power for display.
9. Support storage of fiber patch panel, media converter and monitor
controller.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Visually inspect all equipment for possible damage upon receipt and prior
to installation. Do not install any damaged equipment.
2. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3. All equipment chassis shall be grounded to the main ground within the
enclosure. Use a separate ground cable for each equipment instance. If
equipment is grounded to the rack, verify that the rack is connected to the
main ground. Do not assume that an existing rack is correctly grounded.
4. Mount equipment with clearance to allow for proper ventilation and air flow.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 50 Customer Information System
5. Route interface cables carefully to ensure cable bend radius is maintained
throughout the installation.
6. If intra enclosure cabling is required, shielded and grounded cables shall
be used. Cables shall be grounded at both ends.
B. CIS Ethernet Switch
1. All device IP assigned under the CIS subnet shall be connected to the CIS
Ethernet switch.
C. Fiber to Ethernet Modular Media Converter
1. Install chassis slot covers on all unused slots.
2. Install cards in accordance with the assigned slots in the Contract
Drawings.
3. All patch cables shall be installed neatly using vertical or horizontal cable
management.
D. Audio Signal Processor
1. Use balanced wiring connections for the I/O card.
E. Audio Amplifier
1. When powering a fully configurate Public Address system, always turn the
amplifiers on last and off first.
2. Configure the amplifier for 70V output mode, Dual mode, High Z.
3. Use prebuilt balanced cables (2 conductor plus shield). Balanced wiring
provides better rejection of unwanted noise and hum.
4. Maintain proper polarity on output connectors.
F. Ambient Noise Sensor
1. Install Ambient Noise Sensor on platform pole or canopy near area where
trains stop. House in an electrical outlet box with 2-inch minimum depth.
2. Run a 2-conductor shielded mic cable from the Audio Signal Processor to
the area where the sensor will be installed. Enable phantom power at the
Audio Signal Processor.
G. LED Message Signs
1. Prior to installation, confirm the designated structure and mounting
hardware are adequate to support the display size and weight.
2. All mounted displays shall be inspected by a qualified structural engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 50 Customer Information System
3. Displays shall be grounded to earth ground.
4. For cable interconnections between signs shown in a back-to-back
configuration, use liquid tight flexible conduit.
H. Train Schedule Display Monitor and Enclosure
1. Power for the monitor enclosure shall be provided from the station electrical
distribution panel.
2. Ensure placement meets ADA requirements for protruding objects and
minimum ground space to navigate around the enclosure.
I. Testing
1. Utilize the CIS switch to perform local testing of each system.
a. LED Message Signs
1) Verify all signs can display test messages from local laptop.
b. Public Address & Emergency Management Panel (EMP)
1) Test audio and measure sound levels comparing to
Baseline Ambient Noise measurement.
2) Test EMP functionality
3) Test functionality of ambient noise sensor when a
locomotive is in the station.
c. Train Schedule Display Monitor
1) Verify monitor can display test messages from a local
laptop.
d. TVM
1) Verify connectivity (ping test) from a local laptop.
2. Coordinate with the CIS help desk to perform testing with the head end
systems located at the Pomona MOC/DOC.
a. LED Message Signs
1) Verify all signs can display remove messages from the head
end system.
b. Public Address & Emergency Management Panel (EMP)
1) Test remote audio and measure sound levels comparing to
Baseline Ambient Noise measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 50 Customer Information System
2) Test EMP functionality and priority selection over remote
audio.
3) Test functionality of ambient noise sensor when a
locomotive is in the station.
c. Train Schedule Display Monitor
1) Verify monitor can display messages from the head end
system.
d. TVM
1) Verify a ticket can be purchased using each machine.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Customer Information System will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Customer Information System furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 44 50
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 50 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 44 70
WIDE AREA NETWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work in this Section describes the technical requirements for products and
supporting components to be furnished, installed and tested to support, extend or
modify the Wide Area Network (WAN).
B. Requirements for various WAN technologies deployed and utilized by SCRRA
including Fiber, Microwave, and Cellular are detailed herein. The Pomona DOC is
the SCRRA Operations Center.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
2. 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment Materials and Methods
3. 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
4. 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
5. 34 44 95 Data Radio Networks
1.03 REFERENCES
A. IEEE 802.1D – MAC Bridges
B. IEEE 802.1p – Quality of Service (QoS)
C. IEEE 802.1Q – Virtual LAN (VLAN) Tagging
D. IEEE 802.1w – Rapid Reconfiguration of Spanning Tree
E. IEEE 802.1x – Port Based Network Access Control
F. IEEE 802.3 - Ethernet
G. IEEE 802.3u – Fast Ethernet
H. IEEE 802.3x – Flow Control, Full Duplex
I. IEEE 802.3z – Ethernet over fiber optic at 1 Gigabit (1000Base-X)
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
J. IEEE 802.3ab – Ethernet over twisted pair at 1 Gigabit (1000Base-T)
K. IEEE 802.3ad – Link Aggregation
L. IEEE 802.3ae – 10 Gigabit Ethernet over fiber
M. ITU-T X.200 – Information Technology – Open Systems Interconnection – Basic
Reference Model
N. ITU G.694.1 – Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
O. Telecordia Generic Requirements GR-63-CORE – NEBS Requirements: Physical
Protection
P. Telecordia Generic Requirements GR-1089-CORE – Electromagnetic
Compatibility and Electrical Safety – Generic Criteria for Network
Telecommunications Equipment
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit cut sheets for all proposed products that meet the specifications of this
Section.
B. Submit operation, installation, engineering and maintenance manuals for all
equipment furnished.
C. The Plans have been prepared using Vendor specific equipment. Should the
Contractor propose equivalent systems and they are approved by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall update all Plans where the equipment is used at no additional
cost.
D. Train Control Fiber Optic WAN
1. Submit Optical Link Budget calculations for all new and existing WAN
nodes impacted by the project.
2. Submit proposed configuration file for each type of location:
a. Station
b. Control Point
c. Intermediate
3. Submit final commissioned configuration files for all locations.
E. Microwave WAN
1. Submit Line of Sight survey for each new microwave link.
F. Security Data DWDM Fiber Optic WAN
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
1. Submit Optical Link Budget calculations for all new and existing WAN
nodes impacted by the project.
2. Submit final commissioned configuration files for all locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TRAIN CONTROL ETHERNET SWITCH
A. The Train Control Switch shall be TC Communications Model TC3840
JumboSwitch or Engineer approved equivalent.
1. Approved Equivalent Additional Requirements (At no additional cost)
a. Contractor shall provide a comprehensive Network Management
System (NMS) for the equivalent equipment that meets or exceeds
the existing NMS, TCView.
b. Contractor shall provide training for the equivalent equipment per
Section 34 44 00 Part 1.13.
c. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 10 spares of this equipment.
2. Train Control Switch shall:
a. Support the following operating temperatures:
1) -20 degrees C to +70 degrees C at climate-controlled
Station locations.
2) -40 degrees C to +70 degrees C at wayside signal locations.
b. Be hardened with no fans or other mechanical parts
c. Support the following network topologies:
1) Mesh
2) Ring
3) Point to Point
d. Be capable of Gigabit Ethernet
1) 1 Gbps (Layer 2 or Layer 3)
2) Optical or Copper ports
e. Shall support the following Standards:
1) 802.1Q VLAN
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
2) 802.1p QoS
3) 802.1w RSTP
4) 802.3ad Link Aggregation
5) 802.1x Port Base Network Access Control
6) Port Mirroring
7) IGMP Snooping
8) Port Rate Limiting
9) Broadcast Storm Limiting
10) NTP time synchronization
f. Have a modular design with hot-swappable cards and redundant
power supplies.
g. Be capable of 19-inch rack mount.
h. Support chassis flexibility and interface module slots for expansion:
1) 4U chassis
2) 2U chassis
i. Have dual load sharing power supplies:
1) AC 115/230V
2) DC 12V, 24V, -48V
j. Be capable of remote management with the following:
1) VLAN
2) SNMP
3) Serial Console
4) Telnet
k. Support the following Small Form-Factor Pluggable Transceiver
(SFP) Types with Digital Diagnostic and Monitoring
1) Single Mode
a) 100Base-FX
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
(1) 20km, 40km
(2) 1310nm
b) 1000Base-LX
(1) 10km, 20km, 40km; 1310nm
(2) 60km, 80km; 1550nm
2) Multimode
a) 100Base-FX
(1) 2km
(2) 1310nm
b) 1000Base-SX
(1) 550m, 850nm
(2) 2km, 1310nm
3) One Fiber Bidirectional
a) 1000Base-LX
(1) 40km; 1310nm/1550nm
(2) 60km; 1490nm/1550nm
4) Copper
a) 1000Base-T
2.02 TRAIN CONTROL MICROWAVE RADIO
A. The Train Control Microwave Radio equipment shall be Aviat Eclipse IRU 600,
Alcatel Lucent 9500 MPR, as indicated on the Drawings, or Engineer approved
equivalent.
1. Approved Equivalent Additional Requirements (At no additional cost)
a. Contractor shall provide a comprehensive Network Management
System (NMS) for the equivalent equipment that meets or exceeds
the existing NMS systems.
b. Contractor shall provide training for the equivalent equipment per
Section 34 44 00 Part 1.13.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
c. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 spares of all equipment
required for a microwave link.
B. Microwave Indoor Baseband Unit equipment shall:
1. Use native Ethernet connectivity and transport.
a. 802.1Q VLAN
b. 802.1p QoS
c. 802.3ad Link Aggregation
d. NTP time synchronization
2. Support Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU), RSTP, and path costs to
eliminate Ethernet loops, while supporting path redundancy. It shall be
possible to close Ethernet rings using alternate media such as fiber.
3. Support ring/mesh reconvergence times of not more than 200ms.
4. Support a 10/100/1000 redundant optical interface to the network switch.
5. Support integrated Monitored Hot-Standby (MHSB) to ensure no single
point of failure exists.
6. Support multiple links on a common platform comprising of a baseband unit
with one or more radio frequency units. Each link can be individually
configured for frequency, capacity, traffic type and protection type.
7. Support all indoor use.
8. Support Ethernet link capacities of up to 380 Mbps.
9. Support clock synchronization capability to align with a network master
clock.
10. Support Adaptive Coding and Modulation (ACM) steps of QPSK, 16 QAM,
64 QAM, and 256 QAM. Modulation switching shall be error-free.
11. Support co-channel dual polarized (CCDP) link operation with cross
channel interference cancellation (XPIC).
12. Support Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) for all frequency bands.
13. Support link aggregation on two or more co-path Ethernet links using Layer
1 or Layer 2.
14. Support interconnection of platforms to provide additional capacity at a site.
15. Have NEBS level 3 compliance.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
16. Support payload encryption.
17. Support 3 levels of access
a. Administration (access authorization and password setting)
b. Engineering (read/write)
c. Operator (read only)
18. Support operation from -48 VDC power supply and be 19-inch rack
mountable.
19. Support hot-swappable plug-in card to provide protection to the interface
modules.
20. Support a plug-in card for external alarms
a. Alarm outputs for internal alarm status via Form C relays
b. Alarm inputs for TTL interfaces. (2V high and 0.8V low)
c. Monitor transmission line dehydrator
d. Integrate alarms visibility with the NMS system.
C. Microwave all Indoor Radio Unit (IRU) shall:
1. Be 1+1 optimized and include an Antenna Coupling Unit (ACU) to support
paired and non-paired frequency assignments.
2. Support the following licensed frequency bands:
a. 6 GHz (L6/U6)
b. 11 GHz
3. Be of compact design and 19-inch rack mountable for colocation with its
baseband unit.
4. Have industry standard waveguide ports.
5. Support stackable transceivers, with one installed for 1+0 operation and
two for 1+1 or 2+0 operation.
6. Support 1+0 repeater configurations.
7. Support back-to-back 1+1 repeater configurations in conjunctions with a
second collocated IRU.
8. Have low power and high power RFU options. The high-power option shall
use the best energy efficiency.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
D. Maintenance Software Requirements:
1. Shall support software version management for software upgrades.
2. Shall support a craft tool to provide a means to source and save software
upgrades and download software to the platform. Craft tool shall support
the following options:
a. Transfer and activate new software.
b. Transfer only.
c. Activate transferred software.
d. Observe status of the download and activation process.
e. Ability to roll back to the prior build of the software.
f. Alarm status and event log access.
g. Select, view, and configure diagnostics on any platform within the
network.
h. Set controls for loopbacks, AIS, protection locks, transmission mute
and Bit Error Rate (BER) testing.
3. Shall support a network management system.
a. The platform shall support SNMPv2 and MIB II tables.
2.03 SECURITY DATA DENSE WAVELENGTH DIVISION MULTIPLEXING (DWDM)
SWITCH
A. The Security Data Network (SDN) DWDM switch equipment shall be Ciena Service
Delivery Switch (SDS) 3942, Ciena 5160 Service Aggregation Switch (SAS) as
indicated on the Drawings, or Engineer approved equivalent.
1. Approved Equivalent Additional Requirements (At no additional cost)
a. Contractor shall provide a comprehensive Network Management
System (NMS) for the equivalent equipment that meets or exceeds
the existing NMS, OneControl.
b. Contractor shall provide training for the equivalent equipment per
Section 34 44 00 Part 1.13.
c. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 4 spares of this equipment.
B. SDN DWDM SDS switch shall:
1. Operate in a temperature range of -5 degrees C to +65 degrees C at
climate-controlled Station or Facility locations.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
2. Support 10 Gigabit Ethernet SFP/SFP+ ports. (4 minimum)
3. Support 10/100/1000 Base TX copper ports. (20 minimum)
4. Support the following transport options for CE 2.0 compliant MEF Ethernet
Services:
a. G.8032 rings
b. 802.1Q VLANs
c. 802.1ad Provider Bridging
d. IP/MPLS
e. MPLS-TP
5. Support redundant 120V AC or -48V DC power.
6. Support Network Node Interface (NNI) and User Network Interface (UNI)
connections via the SFP ports.
7. Support 19-inch or 23-inch rack mount.
8. Capable of Zero Touch Provisioning (ZTP) and will auto configure a new
switch once connected to the network and powered up.
9. Support built in service activation testing using RFC2544 and Y.1564.
10. Support a remote management interface.
11. Support a quick reset (reboot) and a hard reset (factory defaults).
12. Support the following Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OAM)
features:
a. 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) with hardware
assisted performance.
b. 802.3ah Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM)
c. 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
d. Y.1731 performance monitoring for delay, jitter and loss with
hardware assisted performance.
e. MPLS/MPLS-TP OAM suite (LSP ping, traceroute)
C. SDN DWDM SAS switch shall:
1. Operate in a temperature range of -40 degrees C to +65 degrees C at
climate-controlled Station or Facility locations.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
2. Support 1 Gigabit Ethernet / 10 Gigabit Ethernet SFP+ ports. (24 minimum)
3. Support the following transport options for CE 2.0 compliant MEF Ethernet
Services:
a. G.8032 rings
b. 802.1Q VLANs
c. 802.1ad Provider Bridging
d. IP/MPLS
e. MPLS-TP
f. Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE)
4. Support redundant 120V AC, +24V DC, or -48V DC power.
5. Support Network Node Interface (NNI) and User Network Interface (UNI)
connections via the SFP ports.
6. Support 19-inch or 23-inch rack mount.
7. Capable of Zero Touch Provisioning (ZTP) and will auto configure a new
switch once connected to the network and powered up.
8. Support built in service activation testing using RFC2544 and Y.1564.
9. Support a remote management interface.
10. Support a quick reset (reboot) and a hard reset (factory defaults).
11. Support the following Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OAM)
features:
a. 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) with hardware
assisted performance.
b. 802.3ah Ethernet in the First Mile (EFM)
c. 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
d. Y.1731 performance monitoring for delay, jitter and loss with
hardware assisted performance.
12. Synchronization and Timing
a. Supports G.8262 Synchronous Ethernet for frequency distribution
and reference.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
b. Supports 1588v2 Precision Time Protocol (PTP), including Ordinary
Clock and Boundary Clock support for frequency, phase, and time
distribution.
c. Supports dedicated external ports for local frequency, phase, and
time references.
2.04 GIGABIT LTE CELLULAR
A. The Gigabit LTE Cellular equipment shall be Cradlepoint IBR900-1200M-B as
indicated on the Drawings, or Engineer approved equivalent.
1. Approved Equivalent Additional Requirements (At no additional cost)
a. Contractor shall provide a comprehensive Network Management
System (NMS) for the equivalent equipment that meets or exceeds
the existing NMS.
b. Contractor shall provide training for the equivalent equipment per
Section 34 44 00 Part 1.13.
c. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 4 spares of this equipment.
B. The Gigabit LTE Cellular equipment shall:
1. Support AT&T and Verizon
2. Be FirstNet Ready
3. Have a throughput of 940 Mbps
4. Support 802.11ac Wave 2 (Wi-Fi 5)
5. Operate in a temperature range of -30 degrees C to +70 degrees C.
6. Be ruggedized for vibration, shock, dust, splash and humidity.
7. Support GPS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Visually inspect all equipment for possible damage upon receipt and prior
to installation. Do not install any damaged equipment.
2. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
3. All equipment chassis shall be grounded to the main ground within the
enclosure. Use a separate ground cable for each equipment instance. If
equipment is grounded to the rack, verify that the rack is connected to the
main ground. Do not assume that an existing rack is correctly grounded.
4. Mount equipment with clearance to allow for proper ventilation and air flow.
5. Route interface cables carefully to ensure cable bend radius is maintained
throughout the installation.
6. If intra enclosure cabling is required, shielded and grounded cables shall
be used. Cables shall be grounded at both ends.
B. Train Control Ethernet Switch
1. All slots shall be filled with a module or a blanking panel.
C. Train Control Microwave Radio
1. Enter the factory measured insertion loss data labeled on the ACU.
2. The ACU shall be retuned if the frequency is changed outside its specified
pass band. ACUs shall be returned to the manufacturer for retuning.
3. Do not route interface cabling with any AC main power line.
4. For NEBS compliance, the fan air filter and power line filters shall be
installed.
5. All slots shall be filled with a plug-in or a blanking panel.
6. Never disconnect or reconnect an IRU without first turning power off.
D. Security Data DWDM Switch
1. Ensure that the installed SFP optic matches the capability of the port and
that the SFP optic is supported by the system.
2. All unused SFP ports shall contain dust covers.
3. For the DC power connections, use the manufacturer recommended fork
terminal spade lugs.
E. Gigabit LTE Cellular
1. Prior to installation, confirm the device has the latest version of firmware
that supports the device.
2. Mount the device out of reach. The surface of the device may become too
hot to safely touch.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
3. The SIM card shall be provisioned by the cellular carrier SCRRA has
selected for each location.
4. Connect the power adapter to the nearest AC receptacle.
5. Adjust antenna to optimize signal strength as indicated on the equipment.
F. Testing
1. All Ethernet networks:
a. Verification of transmission between copper ports with a maximum
throughput (99% packet transmission of better) for a minimum test
duration of two minutes. (SCRRA network paths only)
b. Verify and record failover time during a protective switch by
disabling the SFP transmitter via software during maximum
throughput transmission for a link.
2. Microwave
a. Bit Error Rate (BER) test shall be performed for each link for a
minimum time of 24 hours.
b. Record failover time during a protective switch.
3. Optical Ethernet
a. Verification of 6dB link margin with maximum throughput (99%
packet transmission or better) across each optical link for a
minimum test duration of five minutes.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Wide Area Network will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Wide Area Network furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 44 70
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 70 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 44 95
DATA RADIO NETWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The work in this Section describes the technical requirements for products and
supporting components to be furnished, installed and tested to support, extend or
modify the Data Radio Network.
B. Requirements for various Radio technologies deployed and utilized by SCRRA
including ATCS Radio and Ethernet Radio are detailed herein. The Pomona DOC is
the SCRRA Operations Center.
C. ATCS radio is a secondary redundant method for transport of Centralized Traffic
Control (CTC) information to the DOC. SCRRA, along with the industry, is presently
migrating away from ATCS radio for CTC communications to using the PTC radio
and spectrum. In the interim, Contractor shall continue to deploy ATCS at Control
Points unless otherwise directed by SCRRA.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Specification Sections include but are not limited to:
1. 34 42 60 Miscellaneous Materials
2. 34 44 00 Railroad Communications Requirements
3. 34 44 05 Communications Basic Equipment Materials and Methods
4. 34 44 10 Prefabricated Communications Shelter
5. 34 44 20 Communications Wire and Cable
6. 34 44 70 Wide Area Network
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AAR ATCS Specification 200
B. FCC 15.107 – Conducted Emissions Including AC Line
C. FCC 15.109 – Unintentional Radiated Emission Limits
D. FCC 15.205 – Restricted Bands of Operation
E. FCC 15.207 – Conducted Emissions From Intentional Radiators
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 95 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 95 Data Radio Network
F. FCC 15.209 – Radiated Emission Limits, General Requirements
G. FCC 15.247 – ISM Band Communications Equipment
H. FCC 90.210 – Emission Masks
I. FCC 101.101 – Frequency Availability
J. IEC International Protection Code - IP66 Protection
K. IEEE 802.3af – Power over Ethernet (PoE)
L. TIA-603 – Land Mobile FM or PM Communications Equipment Measurement and
Performance Standards
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit cut sheets for all proposed products that meet the specifications of this
Section.
B. Submit operation, installation, engineering and maintenance manuals for all
equipment furnished.
C. The Plans have been prepared using Vendor specific equipment. Should the
Contractor propose equivalent systems and they are approved by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall update all Plans where the equipment is used at no additional
cost.
D. ATCS Base Station
1. Submit simulated Predicted Area of Coverage and Line of Sight plots for
each Control Point from the 2 closest ATCS bases to establish the
expected test results.
2. Submit final commissioned configuration files (Code-Plug) for all locations,
base and wayside.
E. Ethernet Radio
1. Submit Line of Sight survey for each new link.
2. Submit simulated Line of Sight plots showing the link budget for each link
shown in the Drawings.
3. Submit final commissioned configuration files for all locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ATCS BASE STATION
A. ATCS Base Radio
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 95 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 95 Data Radio Network
1. The ATCS Base Station Radio shall be Motorola MOTOTRBO MTR3000
or Engineer approved equivalent.
a. Approved Equivalent Additional Requirements (At no additional
cost)
1) Contractor shall provide a comprehensive Network
Management System (NMS) for the equivalent equipment
that meets or exceeds the existing NMS, WCCMaint.
2) Contractor shall provide training for the equivalent
equipment per Section 34 44 00 Part 1.13.
3) Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 spares of this
equipment.
b. ATCS Base Station Radio shall:
1) Support the following UHF frequency pairs:
a) Base Station Tx, 935.9875 MHz
b) Control Point Tx, 896.9875 MHz
2) Support the following operating temperatures:
a) -30 degrees C to +60 degrees C
3) Be capable of continuous duty cycle operation with a power
output from 8W to 100W.
4) Be capable of electronic adjustments to output power and
deviation.
5) Be capable of 12.5kHz channel spacing and a maximum
deviation of +/- 2.5kHz.
6) Have 4FSK and FM data modulation.
7) Have Spurious and Harmonic Emissions Attenuation of
90dB
8) Have FM Hum and Noise of 50dB
9) Have Audio Response of +1, -3dB from 6dB per octave pre-
emphasis
10) Have Frequency Stability of 1.5 PPM
11) Be powered by 24VDC.
12) Have Analog Sensitivity (12dB SINAD) of 0.30uV
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 95 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 95 Data Radio Network
13) Have Intermodulation Rejection of 85dB
14) Have Spurious and Image Response Rejection of 85dB
15) Have Selectivity (TIA603) of 75dB
16) Be capable of 19-inch rack mount.
B. ATCS Base Control Module
1. The ATCS Base Control Module shall be Siemens 9000-53444-0001 or
Engineer approved equivalent.
a. ATCS Base Control Module shall:
1) Operate input voltage of 24VDC
2) Provide the interface between the ATCS RF network and
the Office Communications Gateway (OCG) located at the
DOC.
3) Be 19-inch rack mountable.
4) Provide 8 opto-isolated input connections and 2 opto-
isolated output connections.
5) Store the site configuration file. (code plug)
6) Contain boot code with a system self-test upon power up or
reset.
7) Have a debugger to provide low level diagnostics and direct
access to hardware and firmware for testing purposes.
a) Event log
b) Log Capture
C. ATCS Base RF Duplexer
1. The ATCS Base RF Duplexer shall be Sinclair Q4220E-2 or Engineer
approved equivalent.
a. ATCS Base RF Duplexer shall:
1) Enable simultaneous transmission and reception of ATCS
messages.
2) Be 19-inch rack mountable.
3) Support the following operating temperatures:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 95 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 95 Data Radio Network
a) -40 degrees C to +60 degrees C
4) Have 2 Tx cavities and 2 Rx cavities
5) Have an Input VSWR of 1.5:1
6) Use N-Female connectors
7) Have an Insertion Loss maximum of 1dB
8) Provide minimum Isolation of 80dB
9) Have 50-ohm Impedance
D. ATCS Communications Network Adapter
1. The ATCS Communications Network Adapter shall be Wabtec CNA2004
or Engineer approved equivalent.
a. ATCS Communications Network Adapter shall:
1) Enable the primary data communications connection to the
Control Point to support an Ethernet 10/100 Base-T LAN
connection.
2) Enable a secondary data communications connection to the
Control Point through the ATCS RF network.
3) Manage the normal/stand-by route connections between
primary Ethernet and ATCS RF.
4) Provide the physical interface and protocol conversion for
the ATCS/UDP/IP socket connection.
5) Be integrated into the ATCS network management system.
2.02 ETHERNET RADIO
A. The Train Control Ethernet Radio equipment shall be Afar AR-9010E or Engineer
approved equivalent.
1. Approved Equivalent Additional Requirements (At no additional cost)
a. Contractor shall provide a comprehensive Network Management
System (NMS) for the equivalent equipment that meets or exceeds
the existing NMS system.
b. Contractor shall provide training for the equivalent equipment per
Section 34 44 00 Part 1.13.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 95 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 95 Data Radio Network
c. Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 sets of all equipment
required for an Ethernet radio link, consisting of 1 access point and
2 subscribers.
B. Ethernet Radio equipment shall:
1. Use Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum and operate in the unlicensed ISM
band at 900MHz.
2. Support a maximum data rate of 1.1 Mbps.
3. Support an occupied bandwidth of 1.7 MHz.
4. Support the following topologies:
a. Point to Point
b. Point to Multipoint
5. Support remote management via:
a. Telnet
b. SNMP
6. Support the following encryption algorithms:
a. DES
b. Triple-DES
c. AES-128
d. ASE-256
7. Utilize PoE 802.3af for the source of power.
8. Utilize separate transmit and receive frequencies.
9. Incorporate spectrum analysis and timing analysis tools to survey the RF
environment.
10. Provide an antenna alignment aid providing audio feedback proportional to
the RSSI.
11. Route packets to reduce the minimum number of hops through a learning
algorithm.
12. Utilize N-female connectors for antenna connections.
13. Be housed in an IP-66 weatherproof enclosure.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 95 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 95 Data Radio Network
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Visually inspect all equipment for possible damage upon receipt and prior
to installation. Do not install any damaged equipment.
2. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3. All equipment chassis shall be grounded to the main ground within the
enclosure. Use a separate ground cable for each equipment instance. If
equipment is grounded to the rack, verify that the rack is connected to the
main ground. Do not assume that an existing rack is correctly grounded.
4. Mount equipment with clearance to allow for proper ventilation and air flow.
5. Route interface cables carefully to ensure cable bend radius is maintained
throughout the installation.
B. ATCS Base Station
1. All transmission lines shall be grounded with coax grounding kits at the top
of the tower near the antenna, at the bottom of the tower and prior to coax
entry into the shelter.
2. A surge arrestor such as a Polyphaser shall be placed in line with the
transmission line after it enters the shelter and the radio equipment.
3. The transmit and receive antenna RF connections shall be made using two
separate N-type connectors.
4. Upon power up, view the front bezel LEDs for the general status and
condition of the radio.
5. Base stations shall use Type 3 addressing.
6. Wayside equipment shall use Type 7 addressing.
C. Ethernet Radio
1. Verify that line of sight exists for each link. Report any obstructions to the
Engineer.
2. Perform an initial check of the radio using 2 units before field installation.
This will confirm the radios are working properly so other factors (RSSI,
interference) can be addressed in the field.
3. Select the appropriate bracket for pole mounting or on a flat surface.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 95 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 95 Data Radio Network
4. Ground the radio enclosure to Earth ground nearest the structure to
minimize static buildup or lightning damage. Ground wire shall be a straight
connection with no loops. Do not bundle the grounding cable with any other
cable used for data, power or RF.
5. Use anti oxidizing paste to apply to the ground lug blade, exposed cable,
grounding point surface, as well as the thread of the screw to secure the
lug.
6. Install a surge suppressor module at the point where the CAT5E cable
enters the enclosure to protect equipment against surges.
7. Do not exceed the CAT5E cable length as recommended by the
manufacturer. Use the radio software to measure the voltage at Port D to
validate a minimum voltage of 9.5 VDC.
8. Mounted antennas shall have the same polarization and directional
antennas shall be pointed to each other to maximize the RSSI. Ground the
antenna and verify the mast or tower is Earth grounded.
9. Weatherproof all external cable connections. Coax seal completely
covered by all weather electrical tape.
10. Use audible RSSI to align the antenna.
11. Configure the access radio with a WAN connection to the be hub. The
subscriber radios will automatically join the network.
12. Directional antennas may need to be used if there is interference from other
equipment. Use the radio to perform a spectrum analysis.
13. Do not exceed the Maximum Output Power required by the FCC as follows:
a. 5 dBi Antenna – 27 dBm
b. 15 dBi Antenna – 19 dBm
14. Once the deployment is complete, record the configuration of each radio
installed.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Data Radio Network will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 95 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 44 95 Data Radio Network
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Data Radio Network furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Work of this section shall include furnishing all acceptance testing, transportation,
storage, assembly, delivery and incidentals as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 44 95
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 44 95 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 71 50
HIGHWAY-RAIL GRADE CROSSINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Constructing new highway-rail grade crossings of SCRRA railroad tracks.
2. Removing and reconstructing existing highway-rail grade crossings.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete.
3. Section 26 05 43 – Electric: Exterior Underground.
4. Section 33 42 00 – Culvert and Drainage Pipe.
1. Section 32 12 00 – Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement
2. Section 34 11 10 – Continuous Welded Rail (CWR).
3. Section 34 11 23 - Other Track Materials (OTM).
4. Section 34 11 16 – Ballast.
5. Section 34 11 34 – Wood Railroad Tie
6. Section 34 11 40 – Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels
7. Section 34 72 00 - Trackwork.
8. Section 34 72 20 – Track Shifting, Relocation and Resurfacing.
9. Section 34 72 30 – Field Welding Rail.
10. Section 34 80 43 – Precast and Prestressed Concrete for Railroad Bridges.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. SCRRA: Engineering Standards, and SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 71 50-1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 71 50 Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
1. D3776 Standard Test Methods for Mass per Unit Area (Weight) of Fabric.
2. D4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of
Geotextiles.
3. D4751, Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of
a Geotextile.
C. SSPWC: Latest Edition, Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction,
“Greenbook”, Public Works Standards, Inc.
D. California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC): General Order(s) for road
crossing(s) being newly constructed, removed or reset under the Project.
E. State of California Department of Transportation: California Manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD), Latest Edition.
F. WATCH: Work Area Traffic Control Handbook, Latest Edition, WATCH BOOK,
APWA Southern California Chapter.
G. Federal Railroad Administration (FRA): 49 CFR Part 213, Track Safety Standards.
H. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
I. Materials not meeting the requirements of this Specification shall not be used in
the Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
B. Plans and Procedures:
1. Traffic Detour Plan signed by a Registered Professional Engineer using
SCRRA Design Criteria Manual Chapter 29, Temporary Traffic Control,
SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4301, and incorporating provisions of
the State of California MUTCD and the WATCH BOOK.
2. Site Specific Work Plan (SSWP) and Operating System Interface in
accordance with Division 01 requirements.
C. Certificates:
1. Material Test Reports for products purchased and used in the Project.
D. Product Data and Shop Drawings:
1. Product technical data including:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 71 50 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 71 50 Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Shop Drawings detailing dimensions, reinforcement and lifting
apparatus for precast crossing panels.
1) Precast concrete mix design in accordance with Section 34
80 43.
2) Structural calculations.
3) Manufacturing and curing procedures.
E. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Submit quality control test results for testing performed for precast concrete
panels and other material. Testing shall be performed by a certified test
laboratory hired by the Contactor or fabricator and approved by the
Engineer.
2. Verification documentation that Contractor requested DigAlert field location
of underground utilities and SCRRA clearance of underground railroad
utilities prior to starting any excavation work in accordance with Division 01
requirements and Section 6, Utilities, of SCRRA Form 37, Rules and
Requirements for Construction on SCRRA Right-of-Way.
3. Contractor must submit qualifications and experience of installers of
precast concrete grade crossings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Employ a skilled foreman for the Installation of grade crossings, having no less
than 3 years experience in installation of the type of grade crossing panels used.
B. Track work shall be performed under the supervision of an FRA Part 213 Track
Safety Qualified Foreman in accordance with requirements of Section 34 72 00.
C. The Engineer, will review test reports in accordance with the Specifications as
applicable for the material item and may require additional testing to confirm
requirements with the Specifications.
1.05 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Prior to commencing Work, Contractor must examine the Contract Documents,
inspect the site, obtain and review available Record Drawings of existing work and
utilities and note conditions and limitations which may influence work required by
this Section in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 71 50 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 71 50 Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
B. Contractor must execute Work under this Specification in such a manner as to
minimize impact to the daily operation of the railroad, vehicular and pedestrian
traffic in accordance with Division 01 requirements and the approved Traffic
Control Plans.
C. Contractor must maintain vehicular traffic and pedestrian walkways using
barricades, warning signs and warning lights in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
1. Warning lights shall be set so they do not shine into the eyes of locomotive
engineers in on-coming trains.
2. Temporary pedestrian walkways shall meet ADA standards.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor must protect against erosion and uncontrolled run-off within and
adjacent to right-of-way in accordance with the Project’s Storm Water Pollution
Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and the approved NPDES Permit in accordance with
Division 01 requirements.
B. The Contractor must obtain all required permits for dewatering and legally dispose
of water from dewatering operations in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
C. Contractor must provide for site cleanliness, sweeping and dust control in
accordance with Division 01 requirements.
D. Contractor must provide noise abatement as required by environmental permits or
local agency requirements in accordance with Division 01 requirements.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish any required excavation drawings or traffic control plans to Engineer for
review and approval by SCRRA and jurisdictional authorities.
1. Contractor to obtain permits for performing such work as required in
accordance with Division 01 requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Precast Concrete highway-rail grade crossing Panels shall be new and conform to
Section 34 11 40:
B. Wood Ties: Ties shall be new 10 feet long and conform to Section 34 11 34.
C. Ballast: Ballast shall be new and conform to Section 34 11 26.
D. Rail: Rail size shall be 136# CWR and shall conform to Section 34 72 00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 71 50 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 71 50 Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
E. Rail Fastening: Rail fastenings shall be new and shall conform to Section 34 72
00.
F. Geotextile:
1. Geotextile filter fabric used for grade crossings shall be nonwoven fabric.
The filaments shall be polypropylene, polyester, or polyethylene. The
filaments must be dimensionally stable (i.e., filaments must maintain their
relative position with respect to each other) and resistant to delaminating.
The filaments must be free from any chemical treatment or coating that
might significantly reduce porosity and permeability. Nonwoven fabric may
be needle-punched, heat-bonded, resin-bonded, or combinations thereof.
2. The physical properties for Geotextile shall conform to the following:
Test
Property Requirement
Method
ASTM
Minimum Weight (oz./sq. yd.) 3.5
D3776
ASTM Minimum Wet Grab Tensile Strength
100
D4632 (lbs.)
ASTM Minimum Grab Elongation at Break
20
D4632 (%)
ASTM
Apparent Opening Size(US Sieve) 30
D4751
G. Asphalt Concrete:
1. Asphalt concrete for crossing underlayment shall conform to Section 34 80
33, HMA for Bridges.
2. Asphalt concrete for roadway shall conform to Section 32 12 00, Hot Mix
Asphalt Concrete. Asphalt concrete for roadway approach paving shall
conform to Section 32 12 00, Hot-Mix Asphalt Concrete and the Greenbook
Section 203 – Bituminous Materials as noted in SCRRA Engineering
Standards ES4201 for permanent crossings or ES4302 for temporary
crossings or Agency requirements as specified in the Plans or Project
Special Provisions.
a. Contractor must submit the proposed pavement design to the
Engineer for review and acceptance. Roadway approach paving
will be reviewed and accepted by SCRRA and the local agency
governing the crossing.
H. Cast-in-Place Concrete
1. Cast-in-Place concrete for new or replacement sidewalks, curbs, gutters
and other concrete items shall conform to Section 03 31 00 or as shown in
the Plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 71 50 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 71 50 Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
a. Minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 3250 psi (560-C-
3250 –SSPWC) unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
I. Perforated Drain Pipe:
1. Perforated drain pipe shall be Schedule 80 PVC pipe in accordance with
Section 33 46 00.
J. Signal Conduit:
1. Signal conduits shall be Schedule 80 PVC electrical conduit in accordance
with Section 34 42 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Coordinate with SCRRA Signal Department forces in accordance with Division 01
requirements.
B. Demolish and dispose of existing grade crossing material including asphalt
concrete pavement, sidewalks, curbs and gutters and other items as required in
the Plans in accordance with Section 31 11 50.
C. Remove and salvage existing grade crossing panels or other crossing appliances
as required in the Plans in accordance with Section 31 11 50.
D. Track subgrade, asphalt underlayment, and ballast shall be constructed to extend
at each end, beyond the limits shown for each grade crossing in accordance with
SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4201 or as shown in the Plans, whichever is
greater.
3.02 SUBGRADE AND SITE PREPARATION
A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with the Contract Documents, Section 31 20 00
and SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4201.
B. Remove existing concrete foundations, curbs, sidewalks, storm drains, pavement
and traffic striping as shown in the plans in conformance with Section 31 11 50.
C. Cut lines for asphalt and concrete shall be straight and neat in accordance with
Section 31 11 50 and any damage to facilities to remain shall be repaired to the
approval of the Engineer at no additional cost to SCRRA.
3.03 DRAINAGE AND SUBDRAINAGE
A. Drainage and subdrainage work including placement of geotextile wrap of
perforated drainage pipe, shall be performed as specified in the Contract
Documents and in accordance with SCRRA Standard Plans ES4201.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 71 50 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 71 50 Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
3.04 HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) CROSSING UNDERLAYMENT
A. Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) pavement for crossing underlayment shall be placed as
indicated in the Contract Documents, according to Section 32 12 00 and as shown
in SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4201.
B. Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) pavement end ramps shall be provided at all concrete
grade crossing panel installations in accordance with SCRRA Engineering
Standards ES4201 if the preapproved crossing panel is used. End ramps shall be
per the manufacturer’s recommendation if a substitute is approved, but shall not
be less than 3 feet in length.
3.05 SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS AND OTHER ROADWAY ITEMS
A. Place new sidewalks, curbs, gutters and other roadway items as shown in the
Contract Documents, inclduing the identified standards of the public agency
identified in the Contract Documents responsible for the roadway and SCRRA
Engineering Standards ES4001 through ES4021.
B. Highway-Railroad Grade Crossing Crossbuck signs, when called for, shall be
installed in accordance with SCRRA Standard Drawing ES4310.
C. Private, Pedestrian and Bicycle Railroad Grade Crossing Sign, when called for,
shall be installed in accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4311.
D. Temporary construction crossing signs, when called for, shall be installed in
accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4302.
3.06 PRECAST CONCRETE HIGHWAY-RAIL GRADE CROSSING PANELS
A. Install precast concrete grade crossing panels to the position and location shown
in the Contract Documents in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations,
the approved procedures and SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4201.
1. Contractor must use SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4201 when using
the preapproved crossing panel.
B. Contractor must clean dirt and debris from the flangeways before releasing the
crossing for the passage of trains.
3.07 BALLAST
A. Place and spread ballast in accordance with the details indicated on the Contract
Documents, SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4201 and Section 34 72 00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 71 50 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 71 50 Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
3.08 TIES
A. Grade crossing ties shall be spaced per crossing manufacturer’s
recommendations, and spacing per SCRRA Engineering Standards ES4201.
Other tie location and layout distances shall be per the SCRRA Engineering
Standards ES4201.
B. Tops of all ties within the crossing limits shall lie in the same plane. Any tie with
an irregular surface dimension shall be adzed or replaced.
3.09 HIGHWAY-RAIL GRADE CROSSING TRACK CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction and fastening of track through grade crossings shall be performed in
accordance with details shown on the Contract Documents, SCRRA Engineering
Standards ES4201 and Section 34 72 00.
B. Rail joints or thermite welds are not permitted within the limits of the grade crossing
trackwork unless approved by the Engineer.
C. Rail joints consisting of field welds are permitted at the ends of rail strings placed
for crossings. Welds shall conform to Section 34 72 30.
D. Contractor must use a dynamic stabilizer after initial tamping and surfacing
followed by a second surfacing pass in accordance with Section 34 72 20, prior to
the final installation of the grade crossing panels.
E. Every attempt needs to be made to close the roadway for the crossing construction
so that the entire crossing can be completed continuously. If the roadway cannot
be closed, extra efforts shall be utilized to ensure track surface profile is maintained
during and after construction, including but not limited to an extra dynamic
stabilizer pass.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL/QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compaction testing for subgrade, trench backfill and sub-ballast shall conform to
Section 31 20 00.
B. Compaction testing for asphalt concrete crossing underlayment shall conform to
Section 34 80 33.
C. Contractor must coordinate with and provide 24 hours advance notice of crossing
work to SCRRA Signal Inspectors and verify that testing of all crossing signal work
has been completed and accepted by SCRRA prior to opening crossing to
vehicular traffic.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 71 50 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 71 50 Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Highway-rail grade crossings will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. All material, work and services included in Sections 34 11 10, Continuous Welded
Rail (CWR); 34 11 15, Other Track Materials (OTM); 34 11 16, Ballast; 34 11 27,
Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base; 34 11 34, Wood Railroad Ties; 34 11 36, Elastic
Rail Fasteners; and 34 11 40, Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels will be
included in this Section and are considered incidental to work under this Section
and will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
C. No separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for removal
of concrete panels.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Highway-rail grade crossings furnished and completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, fees, supplies, supervision, and incidentals within the limits of highway-
rail grade crossing work in accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standards
ES4201 necessary for any highway-rail grade crossings described by the Contract
Documents.
END OF SECTION 34 71 50
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 71 50 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 72 00
TRACKWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section consists of the Contractor, unless otherwise indicated, furnishing all
labor, materials, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to remove, repair,
modify, rehabilitate, or construct trackwork, turnouts, crossings and crossovers.
1. Work includes ballast, walkways, ties, rail, fastening systems, other track
material (OTM), turnouts and other special trackwork.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 34 11 10 – Continuous Welded Rail (CWR).
4. Section 34 11 15 - Other Track Materials (OTM).
5. Section 34 11 23 – Special Trackwork.
6. Section 34 11 16 - Ballast.
7. Section 34 11 27 - Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base.
8. Section 34 11 33 - Concrete Railroad Ties.
9. Section 34 11 34 - Wood Railroad Tie.
10. Section 34 71 50 – Highway-Rail Grade Crossings.
11. Section 34 72 30 – Field Welding Rail.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railroad Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering.
B. FRA: 49 CFR Part 213, Track Safety Standards, most current and addenda,
Federal Railroad Administration.
C. SCRRA: Engineering Standards.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
D. SCRRA: Current SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual.
E. SCRRA: Design Criteria Manual.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit, under the provisions of Division 01:
1. Materials: Submit individual certifications that all materials furnished by the
Contractor conform to the specified requirements.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit Shop Drawing and product data for trackwork items not
specifically defined by engineering standards.
b. Shop Drawings for each size and direction of Turnout will be
required.
c. Shop Drawings shall also be submitted in electronic media
Microstation V8i (or latest) format on removable media (compact
discs or DVD, or USB drives) and shall conform to SCRRA’s CADD
Manual.
3. Equipment: Provide submittal for all construction equipment proposed to
be used as identified in Division 01.
4. Procedure: Submit procedure for transporting, stockpiling and handling of
trackwork Materials.
a. Submit proposed construction and installation procedure for new
trackwork as part of the Site-Specific Work Plan (SSWP) submitted
under Division 01, Coordination with SCRRA.
b. Contractor may modify Installation procedure stated hereinafter, to
produce the most efficient method for track construction, subject to
approval by the Engineer.
5. Compliance Record: As-built compilation of actual track geometry
produced in construction including curvature, length of reversing tangent,
length of spirals, top of rail profile, and super elevation values.
6. Compliance Record: Rail temperature record taken during anchorage and
de-stressing procedures as described in the Articles entitled “Procedures
for Placement of CWR” and “Anchoring CWR” herein.
7. Compliance Record: Test results for insulated joints as described in Article
entitled “Insulated Joints” in Part 3 of this Section.
8. Procedure: Quality Control / Quality Assurance Program.
9. Procedure: Submit rail end hardening procedure.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
10. Procedure: Submit procedure and field welding material technical data for
field welding rail.
11. Procedure: De-stressing of Rail.
12. Procedure: Installation of insulated joints.
13. Procedure: Plan for the coordinating and scheduling of a signal track
support crew to protect and maintain the operating signal system.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Assurance:
1. Perform track construction under the supervision of Qualified personnel, as
defined in Division 01.
2. Corrections by Contractor: During the Installation and testing period,
Contractor must make available personnel, equipment, and Materials
necessary to make required corrections to the track including such work as
replacements, re-ballasting, resurfacing and realigning, or repair of
constructed items, as the Engineer may require ensuring completion of the
Work in accordance with the Contract.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ties shall be lifted and supported during storage, transportation, and placing in
such a manner as to prevent damage.
1. Ties shall not be dropped to the roadbed.
2. Wood ties shall be handled in accordance with AREMA Manual Volume 1,
Chapter 30, Section 3.5 and Concrete Ties shall be handled in accordance
with AREMA Manual Volume 1, Chapter 30, Section 4.11.
3. Refer to Sections 34 11 34 and Section 34 11 33 for on-site storage
requirements.
B. Rail shall be unloaded and distributed in a manner that prevents damage to ties,
rails and structures. Do not bump or strike rail.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
A. If the Engineer determines that Contractor's equipment is not in good working
condition or that the kind, size, capacity or quantity of equipment is incapable of
contributing to the Work progress or to the requirements of the Contract
Documents, Contractor must promptly replace the equipment with an improved
kind, type, size, capacity, or quantity. Rejection of equipment shall not be
considered justification for a delay Claim.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
B. Track surfacing and alignment equipment shall be laser guided.
1. Track surfacing equipment must have all tamping tools in good repair and
working order.
2. As a minimum at least 70 percent of the original surface area of the tamping
tool pad must be available and these tools must closely match adjacent
and opposite tamping tool pads in the amount of wear.
C. Equipment shall be compatible with and shall be operated within the clearances
indicated in SCRRA Engineering Standards.
D. Wheel contours of all rail-mounted equipment shall conform to the Association of
American Railroads (AAR) wheel standards or AREMA maintenance of way
equipment wheel standards.
E. All construction loads borne by equipment shall be applied between gage lines of
running rails on each track unless approved by the Engineer.
F. Vibratory compaction equipment for compaction of base ballast shall be
specifically manufactured for compaction purposes.
1. The self-propelled, pneumatic-tired roller shall have a gross weight of 10 to
15 tons, and the vibratory compactor shall have a weight of not less than
10 tons and shall be capable of applying a dynamic load of not less than
18,000 lbs. at 1300 to 1500 cycles per minute.
2. The proposed compaction equipment is subject to approval by the
Engineer.
G. Ballast Stabilizer for compacting ballast in crib and shoulder areas shall be
approved by the Engineer.
2.02 TRACK TOOLS
A. Furnish tools and equipment necessary to construct the track.
B. Track gages, track levels, and other tools shall conform to the AREMA Volume 1,
Chapter 5, Part 6, "Specifications and Plans for Tools."
C. Tools and equipment shall be maintained in such a condition as not to endanger
personnel nor damage the Work and shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer.
D. Tools not conforming to standard shall be repaired to AREMA standards or shall
be replaced.
1. Substitution of tools other than AREMA standard will be permitted only with
approval of the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
E. Track levels and gages shall be checked for accuracy at the start of every work
shift and at any time the tool is dropped or struck.
1. Adjustments shall be performed anytime it is found to have more than 0.050
inches deviation from the nominal measurement value.
2.03 SUB-BALLAST
A. Sub-Ballast shall conform to the requirements of Section 34 11 27.
2.04 BALLAST AND WALKWAY ROCK
A. Ballast shall conform to the requirements of Section 34 11 16.
B. Walkway rock shall conform to the requirements of Section 34 11 26.
2.05 TIES
A. Wood ties shall conform to the requirements of Section 34 11 34.
1. Cross ties and switch ties shall be of the lengths detailed on the Contract
Documents or the designated SCRRA Engineering Standard.
2. Ties shall be new unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents.
B. Concrete ties shall conform to the requirements of Section 34 11 33 and SCRRA
Engineering Standard Plan ES2402 for Pre-stressed Concrete Track Tie or
ES2403 and ES2407 (for bridge deck locations requiring a neoprene pad). Ties
shall be new unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents.
2.06 RAIL
A. Rail shall conform to the requirements of Section 34 11 10.
2.07 OTHER TRACK MATERIAL (OTM)
A. OTM shall be new and conform to requirements of Section 34 11 15 and SCRRA
Engineering Standards.
2.08 TURNOUTS
A. Special Trackwork shall conform to the requirements of Section 34 11 23.
B. Turnouts shall be as indicated on the Contract Plans, fabricated with all new
Material, and in conformance with SCRRA Engineering Standards.
C. Derails shall be of constructed using new Material and conform to SCRRA
Engineering Standards with type (double switch point derail or sliding derail with
crowder) as indicated in the Contract Documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
2.09 GRADE CROSSING PANELS
A. Road Crossings shall be of new Material and conform to Section 34 11 40 and
SCRRA ES4201 and as indicated on the Contract Plans.
2.10 LUBRICANTS
A. Lubricant for special trackwork shall be Whitmore’s Railmaster Curve grease
except that Dixon L-5550 graphite shall be used for switch plate lubricant.
Approved equals shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer.
2.11 INSULATED JOINTS
A. Insulated Joints shall be new and conform to requirements of Section 34 11 15
and SCRRA Engineering Standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Work shall be completed in accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standard Plans,
SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual, AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, and
as specified herein.
1. Each fully completed segment of track, as approved in the SSWP, that is
to be placed into operational service shall fully comply with the
requirements of FRA 49 CFR 213 for the specific classification of train
operation.
2. Track must have ballast section full to top of ties, have joints fully bolted or
welded, have all anchors or elastic fasteners applied, and the rail shall be
fully de-stressed.
B. Bottom of rail, fastener assemblies, and all bearing surfaces shall be broom
cleaned before laying rail.
C. The low rail (inside rail of curves) on all superelevated tracks shall be designated
as the profile rail.
D. Install track, OTM, turnouts, derails and road crossings in accordance with the
Contract Plans, SCRRA Engineering Standards, SCRRA Track Maintenance
Manual and California Public Utilities Commission requirements.
3.02 SUB-BALLAST
A. Sub-ballast construction shall conform to typical cross sections as depicted in
SCRRA Engineering Standards or as shown on Contract Plans and must also
comply with the requirements of Specification Section 34 11 27.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
3.03 CROSS TIES
A. Wood or concrete ties shall be used in special trackwork, grade crossings,
turnouts, and crossing diamonds as shown on the Contract Plans.
1. Use of wood ties or concrete cross ties shall be designated on the Contract
Plans for use in track construction as indicated.
B. Ties damaged as a result of improper handling or installation by Contractor and
rejected by the Engineer must be removed and replaced with new ties at no
additional cost to the Authority.
C. Installation and placement of wood ties shall be as follows:
1. Place wood Crossties on 19-1/2” centers for mainline track, except through
grade crossings.
2. Space cross ties for grade crossings in accordance with the applicable
SCRRA Engineering Standard.
3. Space Crossties for turnouts in accordance with the applicable SCRRA
Engineering Standard and the Contract Plans.
4. Obtain approval for any deviation in crossties spacing from the Engineer
prior to Installation of spikes or hold down devices.
5. Place wood ties with heartwood face down and square to the rail, except
as otherwise shown on the Contract Plans.
6. When handling or spacing ties, prevent damaging them with picks or
spiking hammers. Tie tongs, lining bars, other suitable tools or tie spacing
equipment shall be used.
7. Do not drive nails or spikes other than those called for into wood ties.
8. Do not re-spike new wood ties.
D. Place concrete Crossties as shown in the Contract Plans and SCRRA Engineering
Standards.
1. Ensure that the proper rail cant is established.
2. Concrete Crosstie spacing shall be 24 inches centers.
E. Transition ties shall be installed where concrete ties abut timber track in
accordance with SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual and SCRRA ES2351-03.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
F. Bridge decks with less than 12 inches of ballast under the tie will require use of a
concrete tie with embedded neoprene pad (SCRRA ES2403 or ES2407). When
calculating the depth of ballast under the tie, include any HMA underlayment as a
part of the ballast depth for determining the requirement for use of the concrete tie
with embedded neoprene pad. Bridge decks with 12 inches or more of ballast
under the ties will utilize standard concrete ties (SCRRA ES2402 or ES2406).
3.04 TIE PLATES
A. Plates shall be positioned so that the rail will cant inward towards track centerline
and the plate shall be centered on tie and applied as to obtain full proper bearing
on both the tie and rail.
B. Tie plates shall be installed as shown on the SCRRA Engineering Standards, in
SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual, and on approved Shop Plans.
3.05 RAIL FASTENING
A. OTM shall be installed in accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standards and
where applicable, manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Resilient fastening system shall be used for all new construction. Standard
fastening system shall be used only for maintenance of the existing track
constructed with cut spikes.
C. Installation of screw spikes and specified resilient fasteners shall be in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations, and SCRRA Engineering Standards and
SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual.
D. Spiking for standard cut spike fastening systems shall be performed using new cut
spikes unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Plans and as follows:
1. Spiking pattern shall conform to SCRRA ES2460.
2. Spikes shall be started vertically, square to the base of rail and driven
straight.
3. Shank of rail-holding spikes shall have full bearing against base of rail.
4. Do not strike rail or fastenings when driving spikes.
5. Bent spikes shall be removed and replaced with a new spike as approved
by the Engineer.
6. Spikes shall not be over-driven.
E. Holes for the screw spikes shall be pre-drilled and applied perpendicular to the
plane of the base of the tie plate.
1. Sufficient torque shall be applied to bring the bearing face of the screw
spike into flush bearing contact with the tie plate so no gap exists.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
2. Not more than 2 each cut spikes per plate may be used to hold the elastic
fastening system plates until the screw spikes are installed.
3. Cut spikes used in this manner as temporary fasteners may be salvaged
or used material.
4. Cut spikes used as temporary fasteners in this manner shall not be
removed; however four (4) screw spikes per plate shall be provided if cut
spikes are used in this manner.
3.06 RAIL ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Rail anchors shall be installed per SCRRA ES2351-01 through ES2351-04 and
SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual, as applicable.
1. In applying rail anchors, they shall be set with full bearing against the side
of the tie.
2. Anchors shall not be over-driven.
3. Fractured or spread rail anchors will be rejected.
4. Rail anchors shall be applied prior to operation of trains.
5. If, in accordance with the Engineer-approved SSWP, a slow order will be
required, the Contractor must submit proposed anchor pattern to the
Engineer for approval prior to commencement of the rail anchor work.
6. Anchors shall be removed and re-applied at the time CWR is de-stressed.
B. Rail anchors shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3.07 INSTALLING TRACK
A. Installation, laying, raising, lining, tamping and dressing of track over ballast shall
be performed as follows:
1. Ballast shall only be installed over sub-ballast, which has been prepared in
accordance with Section 34 11 27 and approved by the Engineer.
2. Place base ballast in lifts not more than 6 inches in thickness before
compaction.
a. Layers shall extend beyond the edge of the ties as shown on the
Contract Plans before compaction.
b. Compact ballast thoroughly to form a stable section able to support
the subsequent layers and loads.
3. Compaction of base ballast shall be by means of vibratory compaction
equipment specified in Division 01.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
a. Each lift of ballast within the initial layer shall be uniformly spread
and compacted with not less than four passes of either a self-
propelled, pneumatic-tired roller or vibratory compactor.
b. Ballast surface that exhibits ruts or crowns is not acceptable and
shall be re-graded and re-compacted prior to the placement of the
crossties.
4. Obtain the Engineer’s verification of the compacted ballast prior to the
installation of track and appurtenant Work over the ballast.
5. The track shall be assembled on the compacted ballast to permit placement
of additional ballast for subsequent raising and tamping and to provide the
full depth under the ties.
6. The ballast shall be tamped with a 16-tool vibrating squeeze-type
mechanical tamper specified in Division 01, making a minimum of one full
tamping insertion per tie for each inch of raise.
7. The final track raise shall not exceed 1 inch.
8. The ballast in the crib areas shall be mechanically stabilized by a dynamic
ballast stabilizer approved by the Engineer in accordance with Division 01.
9. The track shall be raised, aligned and tamped to within the specified
tolerances.
10. Ballast shall be thoroughly tamped within a space from 15 inches inside
either rail to the ends of the ties.
a. In tamping ties within the above-described limits, simultaneous
tamping shall be performed under each rail.
b. Tamping is not permitted at the center of the tie except within limits
of turnouts and crossings where the center of the ties shall be
tamped unless prevented by trackwork components.
11. Pneumatic or electric tamping tools, either handheld or machine mounted
shall be used to perform tamping at portions of turnouts not accessible to
a production tamper. Hand tamping with shovels or picks will not be
permitted unless authorized by the Engineer.
12. Two tamping tools shall always be used opposite each other on the same
tie.
a. Tampers shall be started from a nearly vertical position and worked
downward past the bottom of the tie, after which the tool should be
slanted downward to force ballast under the tie.
b. Double tamp every joint tie.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
13. Ballast shall be mechanically dressed to provide the section as shown on
the SCRRA Engineering Standards and the Contract Plans.
14. Excess ballast shall be removed.
a. With the Engineer’s permission, excess ballast may be placed as
directed by the Engineer.
b. Payment will not be made for ballast in excess of dimensions shown
on the Contract Plans.
15. Ballast damaged by overwork or excessive tamping or fouled by dirt or
other deleterious material as determined by the Engineer must be removed
and replaced at no additional cost to the Authority.
16. Where new track joins existing track, the existing track shall be surfaced
for a minimum distance of 500 feet on mainline or siding tracks, or 200 feet
on industrial tracks, from the point of connection.
a. Existing track surfacing may be longer as needed to meet FRA
requirements, or as shown of the Contract Plans.
17. After the track has been raised to its final elevation and super-elevation,
ballast consolidation of all tracks shall be performed before the track is
placed in service.
a. Each segment of track may be placed in full service, as approved
in the SSWP, if that segment fully complies with FRA 49 CFR 213
for specific classification of train operation, has ballast section full
to top of ties, has joints fully bolted or welded, has all anchors or
elastic fasteners applied, and has the rail fully de-stressed and
ballast compacted.
18. When raising track, a spot board or other approved device shall be used to
maintain grade, and a level shall be used to keep track to proper cross-
level.
a. Laser guided alignment is required, and horizontal alignment must
be maintained during the raising operation.
b. Use of automated controls on tampers will satisfy this requirement.
19. In addition to the other requirements specified herein, all newly constructed
mainline and mainline siding tracks, upon completion of final surfacing
operations, shall be mechanically stabilized using a Ballast Stabilizer as
specified in Division 01.
3.08 INSTALLING TURNOUTS
A. Installation of frog plates, switch plates, and plates under the closure rails shall
conform to SCRRA Engineering Standards and AREMA trackwork standards.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
1. Plates shall be secured by screw spikes except rehabilitation of existing
turnouts with cut spikes, which shall be fully spiked.
B. Following the installation of turnouts on the initial layer of ballast, the turnouts shall
be lifted, aligned and supported prior to placement of final ballast.
C. Ballast shall be uniformly placed and spread.
1. The turnout shall then be raised and the ballast tamped under both sides
of each tie for the full length of the tie.
2. Tamp ballast thoroughly throughout the length of all ties in the turnout or
other special trackwork.
3. Final top of ballast shall conform to the ballast section as indicated except
in cribs wherein switch operating rods, locking rods or connecting rods are
located and between point of switch and heel of switch where the crib
ballast shall be 3 IN below the base of the rail.
D. When installing the various components of the turnout, particular attention shall be
given to the following:
1. Check that alignment, gage, and surface meet Specifications.
2. Verify that bolts, nuts, cotter pins, and other fastenings are in place, in good
condition, and properly tightened.
3. Verify that switch points are properly aligned and fit tightly against rail when
switch is thrown in either position.
4. Verify that connecting rod and switch rod bolts are equipped with cotter
pins properly applied.
5. Test-operate the switches for lost motion, difficult throw, or loose
connections and adjust as necessary.
6. Examine the rod and fastenings that connect the switch point to the switch
stand to see that they are in place and in good condition.
E. Joints within turnouts shall be welded.
F. Switch stands shall be so installed as to hold the switch point tightly against the
stock rail when stand is in normal position, per the manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Switch rods shall be adjusted to hold the opposite point tightly against the
rail when stand is in reverse position.
2. Switch stands, for both switches and derails, shall be mounted on two
headblock ties. Headblock ties shall conform to the requirements of
SCRRA ES8740.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
G. Switch stands shall be kept securely fastened to the head block ties, use approved
screw spike fasteners.
1. The head block ties shall be set square with the track and kept firmly
tamped.
2. Correct any walkway deficiencies adjacent to the head block ties that would
impact SCRRA employee or operating personnel access to the operating
levers or controls for the switch stand.
H. Switch stand target colors shall conform to SCRRA ES2610 for Derail Switch
Target or to SCRRA ES2703 for Standard Switch Target.
I. At the time of Installation, sliding surfaces of special trackwork assemblies shall be
lubricated with a dry film graphite lubricant in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
J. Insulated joints for non-interlocked switches shall be installed as shown on the
Contract Plans and in accordance with AREMA (Former AAR) Signal Manual.
1. Install joint using manufacturer's recommended procedure.
K. Signal System Point Protection:
1. No switch point shall be installed in the main track unless it has the proper
signal system point protection in place and tested.
2. No switch protection shall be removed from any normally closed signaled
switch point unless the switch point is replaced by a straight rail and signal
circuits have been corrected and tested.
3. All rail bonding and fouling circuit protection must be intact at all times on
all signaled switches.
4. SCRRA, through their on-call signal and communications contractor, will
perform installation and testing of signal devices, unless otherwise
specified in Contract Documents.
5. Contractor must coordinate installation or removal of turnout with SCRRA
Engineer for required signal testing.
3.09 INSTALLING DERAILS
A. Install derails per manufacturer’s instructions at locations designated in Contract
Plans and in accordance with SCRRA Engineering Standards.
3.10 DRILLING
A. Rail ends for bolted joints shall be drilled in accordance with SCRRA Track
Maintenance Manual, 5.2.3.
1. Any additional holes in rail will be sufficient cause for rejection.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
B. A variation of 1/32” in size and location of bolt holes will be allowed.
C. Holes shall be located with the proper size rail-drilling template and marked with a
center punch prior to drilling.
D. Drilling through joint bars is prohibited.
3.11 RAIL ENDS
A. Rail shall be cut with rail saw to a tolerance of 1/32” from square.
1. All burrs shall be removed and ends made smooth.
2. Torch cut rails will be rejected.
B. Battered or mismatched ends shall be built up or ground off to conform to minimum
tolerance of 1/16” on top and gage side to adjoining rail.
3.12 RAIL END HARDENING
A. At all rail end locations not eliminated by field welding, rail ends shall be field end
hardened in accordance with the AREMA Manual, Volume 1, Chapter 4, Section
2.1.17.1, “Supplementary Requirements” including all insulated joints.
3.13 PROCEDURES FOR PLACEMENT OF CWR
A. SCRRA procedures for the installation, adjustment, maintenance, and inspection
for CWR as required by 49 CFR213.119 are included in Section 9.0 of SCRRA
Track Maintenance Manual. Procedures for tie installation, surfacing operations,
CWR installation procedures, rail anchoring requirements, track buckling
prevention, monitoring curve movement following track surfacing and lining,
placing temporary speed restrictions for trackwork, rail joint inspections, extreme
weather inspections, training, and record keeping are included in this Manual.
The Manual is available on SCRRA’s website at the following link:
https://metrolinktrains.com/globalassets/about/engineering/scrra-track-
maintenance-manual.pdf. The Contractor shall refer to this manual for all
procedures for placement of CWR.
B. ANCHORING CWR
Procedures shown in Section 9.7 of SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual shall be
used for anchoring CWR.
C. HEATING RAIL
Heating rail shall be as per procedures shown in Section 9.6.3.5 of SCRRA Track
Maintenance Manual.
D. THERMAL ADJUSTMENT
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
The preferred rail laying temperature, temperature differential, maintaining
Preferred Rail Laying Temperature (PRLT) in CWR track, methods for determining
PRLT adjustment, CWR movement chart, and instructions for taking rail
temperature, monitoring rail movement are included in Section 9.6 of SCRRA
Track Maintenance Manual. These procedures shall be used for thermal
adjustment of CWR.
E. RECORDKEEPING
Records necessary to provide an adequate history of installing and achieving CWR
shall be maintained as required in Section 9.14 of SCRRA Track Maintenance
Manual. Reports will be submitted to SCRRA and review and approval.
F. PROCEDURES FOR PLACEMENT OF JOINTED RAIL
1. Permanent construction and rehabilitation of jointed rail shall be carried out
as per SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual. The procedures for ties and
fasteners, rail handling and placement, rail joints, rail drilling, welding and
track inspection are covered in SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual. These
procedures shall be used for placement of jointed rail if included in the
contract documents.
2. Jointed rail used during CWR installation process shall be constructed as
per Sections 9.6.3 and 9.11 of the SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual.
3.14 TRACK CRITERIA AND TOLERANCES
A. Track shall be constructed to the alignment and grade prescribed.
1. Gage shall be 4’ - 8½”.
2. Deviation from established gage and cross- level shall not exceed 1/8”, and
profile grade and horizontal alignment variation shall not exceed 1/8”
measured at the center of a 62 feet chord.
B. Provide vertical and horizontal control stakes every 50 feet on curves and every
100 feet on tangents.
C. Tangent track shall be level and superelevation and runoff spirals shall be provided
on all curves in conformance with SCRRA ES2201 through ES2204 unless
otherwise indicated in the Contract Plans.
D. Contractor must not cut rail strings except as required to fit rail to turnouts,
crossings or limits of work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
E. A thermometer designed to measure rail temperature shall be used in accordance
with SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual during rail Installation to assure
compliance with the SCRRA Preferred Rail Laying Temperature. Refer to Section
9.6.1(Preferred Rail Laying Temperature) of SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual
for additional information.
3.15 WELDING OF CONTINUOUS WELDED RAIL
A. Rail welding shall be in accordance with the approved procedure and Section 34
72 30, Field Welding Rail.
3.16 WALKWAYS
A. CPUC walkways shall be provided within track work limits in accordance with the
Contract Plans, SCRRA ES2105 and ES2109, SCRRA Track Maintenance
Manual, and CPUC General Order No. 118.
B. Installation of walkways are incidental to installation of track.
3.17 INSULATED JOINTS
A. Each insulated joint installed by the Contractor must be tested with an insulated
joint tester, either the Harmon 1501A1JC or equal approved by the Engineer.
1. Test shall measure no less than 100 ohms across the joint.
2. Test results shall be uniquely identified with a specific joint and submitted
to the Engineer in Compliance Record.
B. The rail ends at each insulated joint shall be beveled and hardened in accordance
with the manufacturer’s procedures as approved by the Engineer.
1. Contractor must comply with rail end hardening and beveling requirements
specified in this Section.
3.18 INNER GUARD RAILS
A. Inner Guard Rails will be required:
1. For all bridge spans where exposed structural steel is present above the
top of rail.
2. Where individual spans are over 100 feet in length
3. Where entire structure is over 800 feet in length and at least one span
crosses over a waterway that normally contains water which is at least 15
feet deep.
4. On any bridge as directed by SCRRA or the Contract Documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
B. Inner Guard Rails shall extend 50 feet beyond the span or spans to be protected
as required above. SCRRA ES2302 and ES2304 indicate details for construction
of Inner Guard Rails. Inner Guard Rails require use of special Concrete Ties as
shown in ES2406 and ES2407.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Trackwork will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the
basis for this measurement.
B. All material, work and services included in Sections 34 11 10, Continuous Welded
Rail (CWR); 34 11 15, Other Track Materials (OTM); 34 11 23, Special Trackwork;
34 11 16, Ballast; 34 11 27, Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base; 34 11 33, Concrete
Railroad Ties; 34 11 34, Wood Railroad Ties; 34 11 36, Elastic Rail Fasteners; 34
11 40, Precast Concrete Grade Crossing Panels; and 34 72 30, Field Welding Rail
will be included in this Section and are considered incidental to work under this
Section and will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer.
C. Trackwork will be measured by the individual unit constructed in accordance with
the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
1. The quantities included in the approved Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or Schedule of Values as derived from the plans will be used as the basis
for this measurement for new track construction.
2. The quantities included in the approved Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or Schedule of Values as derived from the plans will be used as the basis
for this measurement for rehabilitation or repair of track.
3. Unless otherwise noted, the construction of special trackwork, from point
of switch to last switch tie, and track constructed at grade crossings will be
counted separately per complete unit as designated in the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices.
4. Measurement limits for various trackwork items will not overlap.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Trackwork furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents
will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all
work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications, and as
directed by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 00 Trackwork
B. Trackwork constructed, rehabilitated, or repaired in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the contract unit price(s) as listed in the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices.
1. Payment for Trackwork will be made only upon documentation of fully
completed trackwork and full restoration of track speed to the design speed
as shown in the Contract Plans.
2. All work must be complete prior to payment being made, including but not
limited to welding, distressing, final surfacing, and completion of punch list
items related to track work.
END OF SECTION 34 72 00
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 00 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 72 20
TRACK SHIFTING, RELOCATION, AND RESURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Furnish all supervision, labor, materials, equipment, transportation and incidentals
necessary to shift, relocate or resurface railroad track as shown on the Contract
Plans and specified herein. Railroad track as used herein is defined as” an
assembly of rails, ties and fastenings over which cars, locomotives and trains are
moved.” This “track” assembly includes, the rail, ties, special trackwork, other track
material (OTM), ballast, and walkways although not an exclusive listing.
B. Section 34 72 00 will govern track construction work associated with this Section.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 34 11 10 – Continuous Welded Rail (CWR).
4. Section 34 11 15 - Other Track Materials (OTM).
5. Section 34 11 23 – Special Trackwork.
6. Section 34 11 26 - Ballast.
7. Section 34 11 27 - Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base.
8. Section 34 11 33 - Concrete Railroad Ties.
9. Section 34 11 34 - Wood Railroad Tie.
10. Section 34 71 50 – Highway-Rail Grade Crossings.
11. Section 34 72 00 - Trackwork.
12. Section 34 72 30 – Field Welding Rail.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Full compliance with applicable rules, regulations, and General Orders of California
Public Utilities Commission is required. Representatives of that State agency will
inspect railroad related work for compliance with General Orders.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 20 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 20 Track Shifting, Relocation, and Resurfacing
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
Manual of Railway Engineering.
C. AREMA Portfolio, American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way
Association, Portfolio of Trackwork Plans.
D. FRA:
1. 49 CFR Part 213, Track Safety Standards, most current and addenda,
Federal Railroad Administration
2. 49 CFR Part 214, Railroad Workplace Safety, most current and addenda,
Federal Railroad Administration
E. CPUC, California Public Utilities Commission General Orders.
F. SCRRA, Southern California Regional Rail Authority
1. Engineering Standards.
2. Track Maintenance Manual (Current Edition).
3. Maintenance of Way Safety Rules.
4. Design Criteria Manual
G. GCOR, General Code of Operating Rules for Maintenance of Way employees.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Perform all track shifting, relocation and resurfacing work as shown on the Contract
Plans, and in accordance with this Section.
1. Prior to shifting or relocating track, all drainage structures and grading,
including placement of Sub-Ballast as per Section 34 11 27 shall be
completed and accepted by the Engineer.
2. In addition the other requirements specified herein, shifted, relocated, and
resurfaced track shall be stabilized using a dynamic Ballast Stabilizer in
accordance with Division 01.
3. Following shifting, relocating, resurfacing and stabilizing of track, rail shall
be distressed in accordance with SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual
Section 9.0.
4. Track shifting shall include all work to shift existing track more than 1 foot
and less than 10 feet and providing Ballast per Section 34 11 26,
resurfacing and regulating track in its new location.
5. Track relocation shall include all work to relocate existing track a distance
greater than 10 feet including installation of Ballast per Section 34 11 16,
resurfacing and regulating track in its new location.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 20 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 20 Track Shifting, Relocation, and Resurfacing
6. Resurfacing, shall include shifting of existing track up to 1 foot, and involves
resurfacing indicated track and all special trackwork, including lining,
raising, tamping, and regulating track in conformance with SCRRA
engineering standards, provisions of this specification, and to the lines and
grades shown on the Contract Plans. The Ballast per Section 34 11 16
required to fill cribs and provide adequate shoulders must be provided by
the Contractor.
7. Rough and final surfacing of the entire track section shall be performed as
required to provide minimal profile smoothing and adjustment. This
surfacing may include providing and placing Ballast per Section 34 11 16,
tamping, stabilizing and regulating ballast.
B. The Contractor, as with any Work within the SCRRA Right of Way, must submit a
SSWP for each track segment that requires shifting, relocating, or resurfacing the
active track in accordance with Division 01, Coordination with SCRRA.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures:
1. Refer to Division 01, Coordination with SCRRA, for submittal of applicable
SSWP.
2. Refer to Division 01 for submittal of personnel resumes and railroad
equipment list.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Assurance:
1. Contractor must perform track shifting, relocating, and surfacing under
supervision of a qualified Railroad Construction Project Manager, Railroad
Track Construction Manager, and Track Foreman. Work shall be
performed by personnel experienced in similar railroad track work, as
required under Division 01. The surfacing crew shall include a ground man,
with a minimum of six months experience, qualified to check profile and
alignment behind the tamper.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. This work may occur on an active railroad track.
B. The Contractor must coordinate all phases of the Work to prevent undue
interference with the SCRRA daily operations, or with other phases of the Project,
whether performed by SCRRA forces or another contractor’s forces.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 20 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 20 Track Shifting, Relocation, and Resurfacing
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Materials to be installed under this Contract must be provided by the Contractor
unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents.
B. Materials damaged or broken prior to or during installation must be replaced at the
Contractor’s expense with no additional cost to SCRRA.
C. Labor, material not furnished by SCRRA, or equipment required for track
resurfacing but not expressly shown on the Contract Plans shall be as if shown on
the Plans and included in the Contractor’s bid price.
D. Material must be new, except as otherwise indicated herein, and meet the
requirements stated herein and of the AREMA and SCRRA Standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Contractor personnel and equipment shall meet the requirements set forth in
Division 01.
B. Contractor must exercise care in his progression of work under this Contract to
avoid and prevent damage to the track being shifted, relocated, or resurfaced,
adjacent tracks, and structures and facilities, such as existing pavements,
pavement bases, drainage structures, light poles, fire hydrants, signal facilities
(track wires, bootlegs, signal masts, guy wires, signals, cables, conduits) utilities,
signage and buildings. Contractor must repair or replace damaged structures or
facilities to satisfaction of the owner at no cost to SCRRA, except that SCRRA will
repair and test signal facilities at the Contractor’s sole expense. The Contractor
must be responsible to coordinate his work with SCRRA to arrange for the timely
and orderly removals or relocations of this signal equipment and facilities. Failure
of the Contractor to provide reasonable and adequate coordination for timely
removal and relocation of signal facilities will not allow for an extension of time or
provide grounds for extra cost to SCRRA.
C. Contractor must perform Work under this Section in accordance with these
Specifications and consistent with track resurfacing standard industry practice.
D. Contractor must periodically review the supply of materials, labor and equipment
to ensure a uniform flow of work. Contractor must keep the Engineer informed
regarding material shortages or developing problems that require corrective action.
E. Shifted, relocated, and resurfaced track shall meet the following tolerances as well
as the standards for FRA 49CFR213 class 5 track.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 20 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 20 Track Shifting, Relocation, and Resurfacing
1. Except for pre-existing rail gage wear,
a. Deviation from correct gage of 56-1/2” shall not exceed + or - 1/4
inch at any point.
b. Deviation measured in any section of 20 consecutive crossties shall
not exceed 1/8 inches at 75 percent of the crossties, and 1/4” at the
remaining 25 percent.
c. Newly installed or re-installed ties will be spiked not to exceed + or
– 1/8” irrespective of pre-existing rail gage corner wear.
TRACK SURFACE TOLERANCE
Runoff in any 31 FT of rail at the end of a raise may
not be more than 1/4”
Deviation from uniform profile on either rail at the mid-
ordinate of a 62 feet chord may not be more than 3/8”
Deviation from designated elevation on spirals may not
be more than 1/4”
Variations in cross levels on spirals in any 31 feet may
not be more than 1/4”
Deviation from zero cross level at point on tangent or
from designated elevation on curves between spirals 3/16”
may not be more than
Difference in cross level between two points less than
62 feet apart on tangents and curves between spirals 3/8”
may not be more than
2. Alignment - maximum deviation from uniformity measured in conformance
FRA Safety Standards Section, 213.55.
a. Tangent Track 1/4” - at mid-ordinate on a 62 feet chord.
b. Curved Track 1/4” - from correct mid-ordinate on a 62 feet chord.
F. Elastic clips, rail anchors, and spikes shall be loosened prior to shifting track to
prevent skewed ties. Rail, fasteners, or crossties damaged during track shifting
must be replaced by the Contractor at Contractor’s expense. Rail anchors are not
to be slid longitudinally along the base of the rail. They must be removed prior to
shifting track and reapplied in the correct location after track is shifted to its final
location.
3.02 RESURFACING, ALIGNMENT AND DRESS
A. Contractor must perform shifting and resurfacing within the stated project limit
station areas as specified to bring the line and surface into compliance within the
track geometry tolerances specified.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 20 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 20 Track Shifting, Relocation, and Resurfacing
B. Contractor must resurface the track to zero crosslevel on tangent track and to the
proper crosslevel elevation, with spirals, for the curves as shown on Contract
Documents.
C. Ballast shall be spread and track raised in a series of lifts. No single lift shall be
higher than 2 inches except in crossings and turnouts. In raising the track, jacks
or equipment shall be regulated to avoid bending of angle bars or straining of joints.
When jacks are used they shall be simultaneously used and properly spaced at
not more than quarter points of the rail to avoid breaks or bends in the rail when
the track is raised. Both rails shall be raised simultaneously and to proper
crosslevel by utilizing automatic tampers or standard track level boards with each
set of track raising jacks. Each tie shall be tamped from 15 inches inside the rail
to the end of the tie. Tamping shall not be permitted at the middle of a tie. Both
ends of a tie shall be tamped simultaneously and tamping inside and outside the
rail shall be done at the same time.
D. Ties that become loose during track raise shall be placed in proper position, tie-
plates properly placed, holes plugged with “Tight Spike” or approved tie plugs and
spiked before tamping. During each track raise, track shall be uniformly tamped.
E. After ballasting is completed and the track is resurfaced and lined, according to the
tolerances, ballast shall be mechanically stabilized using a dynamic track stabilizer
and ballast shall be trimmed neatly and surplus material shall be spread evenly
along the ballast shoulder.
F. After stabilizing is completed, rail shall be distressed in accordance with SCRRA
Track Maintenance Manual Section 9.8.
G. Contractor must perform the necessary operations to ensure that all ties are at
right angles to the track as practical with standard railroad procedures. Cribs
between ties shall be fully ballasted and dressed.
H. Contractor must perform two tamping squeezes per tie up to two (2) inches of raise
with one additional insertion and squeeze for each additional one (1) inch of raise.
Joint ties shall be given one additional squeeze more than other ties. The
Contractor must not cause a center-bound track condition.
I. In locations where squeeze tampers cannot fill and compact ballast, such as but
not limited at frogs, guard rails, switch portions of turnouts and headblocks,
mechanically tamp with approved hand-held air tools or other power tamping tools.
Hand tamping shall be done simultaneously from both sides of the tie.
J. On curves, the high rail shall be used as the line rail and the low rail shall be used
as the grade rail.
K. When surfacing turnouts, the straight side of the turnout shall be used as the line
rail.
L. After ballast regulating in turnouts, cribs for switch points, switch rods, and
guardrails shall be pocketed 3 inches and cleared of ballast to permit free operation
of the switch and signal rods.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 20 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 20 Track Shifting, Relocation, and Resurfacing
M. After the ballast is regulated, dressed and consolidated using a track stabilizer,
Contractor must ensure that track bolts and rail anchors, or elastic track fasteners
are tight and in proper alignment.
N. For track resurfacing the total track raise will be the minimum amount necessary
to smooth the track profile. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide
smooth transitions that meet the required surfacing tolerances as listed above to
grade crossings and turnouts, using the ballast stockpiled near the worksite. In
addition, the Contractor must maintain vertical overhead clearances under
structures by limiting the amount of track raise. Adjustment of turnouts and
connecting tracks to match profile and alignment adjustments on adjacent track
must be provided by Contractor at no additional expense.
O. Any temporary surfacing runoffs made to accommodate interim rail traffic prior to
completion of track surfacing must meet FRA Track Class 5 Standards.
3.03 WALKWAYS
A. Walkways shall conform to SCRRA Engineering Standards ES2109 and General
Order No.118-Public Utilities Commission of the State of California.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Track shifting will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement. Surfacing, stabilizing and de-stressing of
shifted track is incidental to this item and will not be measured.
B. Track Relocation will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement. Surfacing, stabilizing and de-stressing of
shifted track is incidental to this item and will not be measured.
C. Track Surfacing will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement. Surfacing, stabilizing and de-stressing of
shifted track is incidental to this item and will not be measured.
D. All material, work and services included in Sections Other Track Materials (OTM);
34 11 16, Ballast; 34 11 17, and Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base; will be included
in this Section and are considered incidental to work under this Section and will be
measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 20 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 20 Track Shifting, Relocation, and Resurfacing
E. Work of shifting, relocating and resurfacing existing track will include furnishing all
labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, installation of Contractor
provided ballast and walkway rock, laser aligned tamping, resurfacing, regulating,
stabilizing and de-stressing to SCRRA standard cross section and any other
incidental work necessary for shifting, relocating and resurfacing existing track as
described in the Contract Documents.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Track shifting, relocating and resurfacing furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the contract unit price, as listed on
the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and
incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 72 20
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 20 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 72 30
FIELD WELDING RAIL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section consists of the Contractor performing field welding of continuous
welded rail (CWR) strings using the flash butt welding process or approved
thermite-welding method.
B. The Contractor must make assessment as to the number of welds, including the
method of welding for each weld, to be performed under this Contract.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 34 72 00 - Trackwork.
4. Section 34 72 20 - Track Shifting, Relocating and Resurfacing.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. SCRRA: Engineering Standards, and Track Maintenance Manual.
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance of Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering
C. FRA: 49 CFR Part 213, Track Safety Standards, most current and addenda,
Federal Railroad Administration.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM E164 Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of
Weldments.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under the provisions of Division 01:
1. Procedure: Submit proposed materials, methods and procedures to be
used for mobile flash butt field welding of CWR, including:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 30 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 30 Field Welding Rail
a. Manufacturer's trade name and technical data for the welding
process, including welding machine performance standards.
b. Method of welding high strength rail if different from requirements
for standard rail.
c. Methods of transporting material and mobile equipment to the site
and duration of welding operations.
d. Method used for cutting and cleaning to parent metal of the rail
ends.
e. Minimum and maximum spacing between rail ends.
f. Method used for maintaining the rails in alignment during welding.
g. Method used for grinding and contouring rail removing weld upset
following the welding process.
2. Procedure: Submit proposed methods and procedures to be used for
thermite welding of CWR, including:
a. Manufacturer’s trade name and technical data for the welding
process.
b. Method used for cutting and cleaning of the rail ends.
c. Minimum and maximum spacing between rail ends.
d. Method used for maintaining the rails in alignment during welding.
e. Method used for preheating the rail ends including time and
temperature.
f. Tapping procedure including the minimum time required to cool the
weld under the mold insulation.
g. Method used, including a description of special tools and equipment
for removing the gates and risers and finishing the weld to the final
contour.
3. Refer to Division 01 for submittal of resumes for individual(s) directly
supervising, inspecting, and performing field welding of rail.
4. Procedure: Submit rail end hardening procedure.
5. Testing: Submit testing company qualified in use of the Ultrasonic testing
method in accordance with ASTM E164.
6. Field Weld Record: Submit as specified herein.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 30 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 30 Field Welding Rail
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide qualified personnel for supervision and performance of work in accordance
with Division 01.
B. Perform certification testing of all welds to ensure that Work is performed in
accordance with the Contract Documents, and within the tolerances provided
herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. For electric flash butt welding, materials, equipment and process shall be as
provided by Holland L.P. or other approved equivalent.
B. For thermite welding, Materials and equipment shall be as manufactured by
"Boutet," "Orgotherm," "Elektro-Thermite," or other approved equivalent for
standard or high strength (alloy or heat treated) rail, as appropriate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Electric flash butt welding, methods and procedures shall comply with the AREMA
Manual, Volume 1, Chapter 4, Section 2.3, Specifications for the Quality
Assurance of Electric-Flash Butt Welding of Rail.
B. Thermite welding, methods and procedures shall comply with the AREMA Manual,
Volume 1, Chapter 4, Section 2.5 Specification for the Quality Assurance of
Thermite Welding Rail, with the welding kit manufacturer's recommendations, and
as specified herein.
C. Rail ends for thermite welding shall be prepared in accordance with the
recommendations of the welding kit manufacturer.
D. For thermite welding, the rail ends shall be preheated prior to welding to a sufficient
temperature and for sufficient time to ensure full fusion of the weld metal to the rail
ends without cracking of the rail or weld.
E. The completed weld shall be finished by mechanically controlled grinding to
conform to the same requirements specified for shop welding.
F. Thermite welds shall not be made at the following locations:
1. Within 6 inches of the edge of any bolt hole in the rail.
2. Within 6 inches of a Cadweld or copper bond wire (If this type of bond
exists, remove any presence of copper by grinding. The rail ends must be
inspected and cleaned after grinding is complete).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 30 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 30 Field Welding Rail
3. Closer than 3 feet from an existing plant weld.
4. Closer than 19.5 feet to an existing thermite weld.
5. On both ends of a rail plug simultaneously unless the rail is 15 feet or longer
on tangent track and 24 feet long or longer on curved track.
G. Follow Manufacturer recommendations for compromise welds.
H. Follow recommendations of rail manufacturer for welding high strength (alloy or
heat-treated) rails.
I. Thermite welds shall be located in cribs between ties. The edge of the weld must
be no closer than 3 inches from the edge of the nearest tie.
J. Electric Flash Butt welds with the base of the rail smoothly ground may be located
anywhere.
3.02 FIELD WELDING RECORD AND RAIL MARKINGS
A. Field welding record shall be continuously maintained and furnished to the
Engineer within seven (7) workdays of completing the weld. The record shall
include the following minimum details, noting that a different recording and marking
procedure will be required for free end welds or for destress welds used to close
up openings in rail:
1. Date and time of weld(s).
2. Location by station, specifying track and rail.
3. Contractor foreman initials.
4. Weather, air and rail temperature for destress welds (welds made to close
up rail).
5. Track condition, anchorage and rail stress for destress welds, or the word
“FREE” for free end welds.
B. Rail shall be permanently marked on the web of rail in legible characters at least
1-1/2 inches high at each field weld with the above information in accordance with
Section 5.16, Marking Thermite Welds of the SCRRA Track Maintenance Manual.
If an existing destress weld is located within 400 feet of a new destress weld, lines
shall be marked through the old weld’s marking and an arrow marked indicating
the direction towards the new destressed weld.
3.03 TOLERANCES OF FIELD WELDS
A. A straight edge 36 inches in length, applied to finished welded joint area shall be
used to check for the following maximum variations (measurements shall be taken
with a 6 inches steel taper gauge):
1. Rail Head:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 30 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 30 Field Welding Rail
a. Vertical Offset: 0.020 inches.
b. Horizontal Offset: 0.040 inches.
c. Vertical Crown: 0.40 inches ofr Thermite and 0.60 inches for In-
Track.
d. Horizontal Kink: 0.025 inches.
2. Rail Base:
a. Horizontal Offset: 0.060 inches.
b. Vertical Offset: 0.25 - 0.125 inches.
3.04 FINISHING OF FIELD WELDS
A. Sharp edges and burrs shall be removed, including chimneys from thermite welds.
Top of base of rail shall be ground smooth at chimney locations.
B. Weld joints shall be smooth on top and sides of head and straight in line. No over
grinding is permitted. Web of rail at thermite welds shall not be ground. All mold
residues shall be removed from the weld area and properly discarded.
C. Finishing of welds shall be sufficient to allow testing using the Ultrasonic test
method as described below. Welds rejected because of insufficient or
unsatisfactory finishing of welds shall be refinished, repaired, or replaced at the
Contractor’s expense until the weld meets the testing criteria.
3.05 FIELD WELD TESTING
A. Fabricate CWR strings so that the branding of all individual rail section appears on
the field side of installed track.
B. Rail welds must be tested by the Contractor through the use of an SCRRA
approved testing agency using the Ultrasonic testing method in accordance with
ASTM E164 Technique 4 for use with thick weldments.
C. Each completed weld shall have full penetration and complete fusion and be
entirely free of cracks. Total area of internal defects such as porosity and slag
inclusions shall not exceed 0.060 sq in and the largest single porosity or slag defect
permitted shall not exceed 1/8 inches dia.
D. Other causes for rejection of welds shall be:
1. Cracks that show in the finished weld.
2. Pit holes that show in web and base of weld after finish grinding. Pit holes
in head not exceeding 1/4 inches in depth may, if approved by the
Engineer, be repaired by gas welding.
3. Over-grinding of weld.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 30 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 30 Field Welding Rail
E. Welded joints not meeting these Specifications and tolerances will be replaced at
no additional cost to the Authority. The defective weld shall be cut out, and a new
section of rail of a length described in Article 3.06 herein shall be inserted, welded
into place as described in this Section, and retested.
3.06 CUTTING IN SHORT SECTION RAIL AND THERMITE WELDING THE ENDS
A. A short section of rail shall be cut in the CWR, when required by the Engineer, for
the following reasons:
1. To repair defective rail(s).
2. To repair defective weld(s).
3. To destress rail.
4. To make a connection between rail strings or adjust rail to meet a specific
point (i.e. to connect CWR to stock rail or frog).
B. The short section of rail to be cut in shall be at least 19 feet-6 inches long on
tangents and curves less than 2 degrees; and 30 feet long on curves 2 degrees or
greater and rail to be cut in shall be of the same weight, size, section, and class of
rail being replaced or joined.
C. Before cutting out rail in CWR and inadvertently losing all thermal control, prevent
remaining CWR from further movement by applying full box anchors for at least
200 feet each way from the proposed cut. After cutting CWR, a rail expander/puller
or other means shall be used to prevent rail movement until a weld or temporary
joint is installed.
D. The ends of the short rail section and the CWR shall be saw cut.
E. Follow manufacturer’s recommended procedures specified for completing field
welding by thermite process.
F. Repair of rail due to damage by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense.
G. When repairing a defective rail or weld, the new rail shall be the same length as
rail being replaced, or as required to achieve thermal adjustment.
H. When performing field welding, rail temperature adjustments shall be made in
accordance with Section 34 72 00 using either heating of rail or mechanical rail
pullers. The first weld of a replacement plug may be at ambient temperature, but
the second (destress weld or rail closure weld) shall be installed in accordance
with Section 34 72 00.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items and no
separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 30 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 30 Field Welding Rail
Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
supplies, supervision, and incidentals necessary for Field Welding Rail as described by
the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 34 72 30
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 30 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 72 40
TRACK COLLECTOR PAN SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: The work of this Section includes the furnishing and installation of
a Track Collector Pan System at locations shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.02 CERTIFICATION
A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall submit for each of the materials
furnished, certification by each manufacturer or producer that the material is in
compliance with these specifications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures
shall include the following:
1. Shop drawing, catalogue cuts and other data indicating proposed
materials, details, layouts and construction information to the Engineer for
review.
2. Manufacturer's certification for all materials furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER’S REFERENCE
A. HDPE Enviropan®, as manufactured by Century Group, Inc. -- Sulpher, LA 1-800-
527-5232
B. Other manufacturers’ product having equal characteristics and quality when
approved by the engineer.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. The Track Collector Pan System shall be constructed from a series of pre-formed
HDPE panels. The total assembly of panels shall form a 12-foot wide (cross track
direction) and 90 feet long (down track direction) drip pan. Each 30-foot length of
pan assembly shall consist of three panels: two are field side panels, with one gage
panel between rails. Refer to diagrams at the end of this section.
B. Physical Specifications:
1. Temperature Range -100°F to +200°F
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 40 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 40 Track Collector Pan System
2. Volume Capacity 474 Gallons per 30`Section
3. Weight ¼" Material Thickness Field Pan 68 lbs.
4. Gauge Pan 93 lbs.
5. Cross Drain 60 lbs.
6. Tensile Strength at Yield 3600 psi
7. Elongation at Break 600%
8. Flexural Modulus 165,000 psi
9. Tensile Impact 170 ft. lbs/in2
C. B. The collector pans shall be connected by cross drains to a collector header
pipe.
D. The concrete mix is the proprietary information of the manufacturer. However,
concrete compressive strength shall be no less than 4500 psi. If alternate
manufacturer is proposed, material physical data shall be submitted with
substitution request.
2.03 DESIGN & FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Collector pans shall be fabricated from molds that provide a continuous, monolithic
pan section.
ISOMETRIC VIEW DETAIL OF PAN ASSEMBLY ACROSS TRACK
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 40 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 40 Track Collector Pan System
SECTION VIEW OF PAN ASSEMBLY ACROSS TRACK
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 40 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 72 40 Track Collector Pan System
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SITE STORAGE
A. Panels shall be stored on level, dry ground evenly supported every four feet using
wood shoring.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise specified, collector pans shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Refer to Addendum 1 for complete installation details.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Track Collector Pan System work shall be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and placed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities contained on the Schedule of Quantities
and Prices, or approved Schedule of Values as derived from the plans, will be used
as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Track Collector Pan System work completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit price, as listed in the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor,
materials, and equipment to install track collector pans as recommended by the
manufacturer including but not limited to center pans, side pans, end pans, and all
other work necessary and incidental to construction of the track collector pan
system.
END OF SECTION 34 72 40
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 72 40 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 11
STONE REVETMENT (RIPRAP)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stone revetment (riprap) for protection of slopes against erosion.
a. Drainage outflow area.
b. Slope riprap.
c. Geotextile and sand cushion base.
d. Other areas indicated and shown on the Drawings.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO):
a. M228, Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for
Highway Applications.
b. T103, Soundness of Aggregates by Freezing and Thawing.
2. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. C88, Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use
of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.
b. C127, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific
Gravity), and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 11 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 11 Stone Revetment (Riprap)
c. C1116, Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and
Shotcrete.
3. Corps of Engineers (COE):
a. CRD-C100, Method of Sampling Concrete Aggregate and
Aggregate Sources, and Selection of Material for Testing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
3. Certifications.
4. Test reports.
5. Submit all tests and certification in a single coordinated submittal. Partial
submittals will not be accepted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Stone:
1. Durable broken quarry run stone Apparent Specific Gravity minimum 2.50
ASTM C127.
2. Does not disintegrate on exposure to water or weathering.
3. Free from structural fractures and defects.
4. Not containing shale, unsound sandstone, or other material which will
disintegrate.
5. Graded within limits specified.
6. Breadth and thickness of any stone: Not less than one-third of its length.
7. Ensure that dirt and fines accumulated from interledge layers or from
blasting or handling operation is less than 2 percent by weight.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 11 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 11 Stone Revetment (Riprap)
8. Gradation of the material:
a. Ungrouted riprap to be loaded and quarried shall conform to the
following limitations unless otherwise specified:
RIPRAP AVERAGE WEIGHT DIMENSION MINIMUM LAYER
CLASS PER STONE (LBS) (IN) THICKNESS
I 50 to 200 9 to 14 1' - 6 "
II 200 to 1000 14 to 24 2' - 0"
III 1000 to 4000 24 to 38 3' - 0"
IV > 4000 > 38 4' - 0"
b. Grouted riprap shall have the following gradation:
NOMINAL STONE SIZE % OF MIX SMALLER THAN GIVEN SIZE
(INCHES) (BY WEIGHT)
21 70 to 100
18 50 to 70
12 0 to 5
9. The following allowances shall be acceptable to produce the required
ungrouted riprap protection:
a. Riprap Class I - No allowances permitted.
b. Riprap Class II - 15 percent of riprap Class I.
c. Riprap Class III - 15 percent of riprap Class I and 15 percent of
Class II.
d. Riprap Class IV - 15 percent of riprap Class I, 15 percent of Class
II, and 15 percent of Class III.
10. Grouted riprap:
a. Riprap shall be angular (not rounded), each rock having its greatest
dimension not greater than 3 times its least dimension. Elongated
rocks shall be hand adjusted to a vertical verses horizontal position.
b. The specific gravity of the riprap rock shall be 2.5 or greater.
c. Broken concrete or asphalt pavement shall not be acceptable for
use in the work.
d. Riprap and grout colors may be limited by local flood control districts
or other regulatory entities. Contractor is responsible for
ascertaining and complying with any such requirements.
B. Geotextile:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 11 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 11 Stone Revetment (Riprap)
1. Geotextile shall be Class 2 Non-Woven in accordance with AASHTO M288
with an AOS of 70.
C. Sand Cushion:
1. Sand cushion shall be clean sand, free of angular gravel.
D. Grout:
1. Concrete for the grout shall be an approved batch meeting the following
requirements:
a. All concrete shall develop 3,000 psi compressive strength within 28
days, the cement shall be Type II modified or Type V, the stone
aggregate shall have a maximum diameter of ½”, and the slump
shall be within a range of 3 to 6 inches.
b. The water/cement ratio shall not exceed 0.48.
c. Add 1.5 lbs of synthetic fiber-reinforcing per cy of grout per
manufacturer's instructions.
E. Synthetic Fiber-Reinforcing:
1. 100 percent virgin polypropylene, fibrillated fibers containing no
reprocessed olefin materials and specifically manufactured for use in
concrete.
2. Physical characteristics:
a. Specific gravity: 0.91.
b. Fiber length: ¾”.
c. Provide in accordance with ASTM C1116.
d. Acceptable manufacturers:
1) Fibermesh.
2) Grace Construction Products.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform all tests at an approved independent laboratory.
B. Obtain samples in conformance with COE CRD-C100.
C. Source Tests:
1. Supply certified tests and service records to determine acceptability and
application of stone materials.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 11 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 11 Stone Revetment (Riprap)
2. In event suitable test reports or a service record that is satisfactory are not
available, as in case of newly operated sources, subject material to tests
necessary to determine its acceptability for use.
3. Tests to which materials to be subjected include:
a. Specific gravity.
b. Soundness in magnesium sulfate.
c. Soundness in freezing and thawing.
D. Material Acceptability Tests:
1. Initial test: On material from each ledge sampled prior to start of
construction.
a. Specific gravity.
b. Soundness in magnesium sulfate.
c. Soundness in freezing and thawing.
2. Control tests:
a. Perform control tests including one specific gravity, one soundness
in magnesium sulfate, and one soundness in freezing and thawing
for each type of stone revetment material for every 100 tons of
material.
E. Specific Gravity Test:
1. Conform with ASTM C127.
2. Not less than 2.40 minimum.
F. Soundness in Magnesium Sulfate:
1. Conform with ASTM C88, except maintain samples immersed in solution
at a temperature of 80˚ F (26˚ C) +2˚ F.
2. Not more than 12 percent loss at five cycles.
G. Soundness of Aggregates in Freezing and Thawing:
1. Conform with AASHTO T103 method as modified herein.
2. Ensure loss at 12 cycles of not more than 10 percent.
3. Maintain temperature of cold liquid in range of -5 to 0 deg. F (-20 to -18
deg. C).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 11 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 11 Stone Revetment (Riprap)
4. Maintain thaw fluid temperature in range of 45 to 50 deg. F (7 to 10 deg.
C).
5. Permit length of freezing and of thawing cycles of 2 hours with 1 hour of
freezing following by 1 hour of thawing.
6. Perform thawing by circulating thaw fluid around pan containing stone
immersed in a depth of ¼” rather than by total immersion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Trim and dress all areas to required cross sections.
B. Bring areas that are below allowable minus tolerance limit to grade by filling with
material similar to adjacent material.
C. Compact base to density specified for backfill in accordance with Section 31 20
00.
D. Do not place any stone material on prepared base prior to inspection by Engineer.
3.02 PLACING
A. Ungrouted Riprap:
1. Where indicated on Drawings, place geotextile on prepared foundation
within limits indicated.
a. Geotextile overlaps shall be a minimum of 1’ – 0”.
b. Geotextile shall be secured to slope per the manufacturer's
recommendation.
2. Where indicated on Drawings, place sand cushion on geotextile within
limits indicated.
a. Sand cushion shall have a minimum thickness of 4 inches.
3. Place stone revetment material on prepared base within limits indicated.
4. Place on prepared base to produce a well-graded mass of stone with
minimum percentage of voids.
5. Place to required thickness and grades.
6. Place to full thickness in a single operation to avoid displacing the
underlying material.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 11 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 11 Stone Revetment (Riprap)
7. Distribute entire mass to conform to gradation specified.
a. Do not place stone by dumping into chutes or by similar method
likely to cause segregation.
8. Keep finished stone revetment free from objectionable pockets of small
stones or clusters of larger stone.
a. Hand place as necessary to obtain a well-graded distribution.
9. Ensure a final tolerance of within 3 inches from indicated slope and grade
lines.
10. Place stone revetment in conjunction with embankment construction to
prevent mixture of embankment and stone revetment materials.
11. Maintain stone revetment until accepted.
12. Replace any displaced material to lines and grades shown.
B. Grouted Riprap:
1. The Contractor must notify the SCRRA a minimum of two working days of
his intent to perform any grouting activities prior to placement of any grout
to allow scheduling of inspection activities. Grout operation shall not
proceed without the approval of the SCRRA.
2. Contractor must clean with a water blast operation faces and edges of any
existing to-remain structural elements such as wingwalls or abutments to
which the grouted riprap will come in contact.
3. Riprap shall be placed prior to grouting. It is desirable that elongated
stones along the top layer of riprap have a vertical orientation.
4. Dewatering shall be implemented to guarantee that the grout will not be
placed in water or be exposed to stream flows for a period of 24 hours after
the grout has been placed.
5. Contractor must keep riprap, boulders and concrete walls that are to
receive grout wet at all times prior to injecting grout.
6. The concrete grout shall be placed by injection methods by pumping under
low pressure, positive displacement methods, through a 2 inches maximum
diameter hose to ensure complete penetration of the grout into the rock
layer.
7. The voids at the surface of the riprap will not be grouted. The depth of
grout measured from the prepared subgrade bed shall be 18 inches.
Operator shall be able to stop the flow of grout when required, and will
place grout in the voids and not on the surface of the riprap.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 11 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 11 Stone Revetment (Riprap)
8. A "pencil" vibrator will be used to make sure all voids are filled between and
under the riprap. The intent is to fill all voids from the subgrade level around
the riprap for a minimum depth of 18 inches. In all cases, grout must
penetrate to the subgrade of the riprap. The pencil vibrator may be used to
smooth the appearance of the surface, but the Contractor must use a wood
float to smooth and grade the grout to drain. When placing grout, it shall
be placed between the riprap and against earth, rock, or concrete
excavated sidewalls.
9. Contractor must clean and wash any spillage before the grout sets. The
visible surfaces of the riprap will be free of grout to provide a clean natural
appearance.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Ungrouted Riprap:
1. Ungrouted riprap of the various classifications will be measured by the unit
or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained
on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values,
as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
B. Grouted Riprap:
1. Grouted riprap of the various gradations will be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained
on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values,
as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this
measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Ungrouted Riprap:
1. Ungrouted riprap furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans,
and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 11 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 11 Stone Revetment (Riprap)
2. The contract price paid unit of ungrouted riprap for each classification shall
include compensation to the Contractor for furnishing riprap, all labor,
materials, equipment and any other incidentals to place riprap complete-in-
place, including haul from the suppliers source, necessary stockpiling at
the job site, reloading for placement, placement, overestimates of
salvageable boulders, disposing of any rejected riprap, excavation and
removal of material, over-excavation for construction, backfilling, and any
other miscellaneous items and work shown or reasonable implied on the
Plans, in the Specifications for this work, and elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
3. Geotextile and sand base and other associated materials and incidentals
and installation thereof shall be considered part of the riprap and full
compensation therefore shall be considered as included in the contract unit
price paid for ungrouted riprap.
B. Grouted Riprap:
1. Grouted riprap furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans,
and as specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
2. The contract price paid per unit of grouted riprap for each classification
shall include compensation to the Contractor for furnishing riprap, all labor,
materials, equipment and any other incidentals to place riprap complete-in-
place, including haul from the suppliers source, necessary stockpiling at
the job site, reloading for placement, placement, overestimates of
salvageable boulders, disposing of any rejected riprap, excavation and
removal of material, over-excavation for construction, backfilling, and any
other miscellaneous items and work shown or reasonable implied on the
Plans, in the Specifications for this work, and elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
3. Geotextile and sand base and other associated materials and incidentals
and installation thereof shall be considered part of the riprap and full
compensation therefore shall be considered as included in the contract unit
price paid for grouted riprap.
END OF SECTION 34 80 11
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 11 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 21
PILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Driven piling indicated in the Contract Documents.
B. Description:
1. Piles:
a. These Specifications shall govern the furnishing, driving, building
up and cutting off of steel pipe piles and sheet piles in accordance
with the lines, grades, and locations shown on the plans or as
directed by the Engineer.
2. Settlement of embankment fill shall be substantially complete prior to the
driving of piling unless otherwise shown on the plans.
3. Foundation piling shall not be driven until the excavation is complete.
C. Related Specifications Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel.
4. Section 03 31 00 - Structural Concrete.
5. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.
6. Section 34 80 43 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete for Railroad
Bridges.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. Manual of Steel Construction.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
1. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structure Steel.
2. A252, Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles.
3. A328, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Piling.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D1.5, Bridge Welding Code.
D. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA):
1. AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering.
E. Southern California Railroad Authority (SCRRA) Standards.
F. In case of conflict between SCRRA Standards and AREMA , SCRRA Standards
takes precedence; use in lieu of conflicting portions.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Certified Welder: Meeting the qualification requirements of AWS D1.5.
B. Welding Procedure Specification: AWS D1.5.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Steel pile type, size, dimensions and grade of steel.
b. Pile tip protection/closure device.
c. Manufacturer and type of pile splicing device.
d. Load test equipment description with calibration charts.
B. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a description of all pile driving
equipment to be employed in the work, prior to commencement of pile installation.
This shall include details including weights of pile hammer, power plant, leads, pile
cushion, cap block and helmet.
C. The Contractor shall visit the site and review the Geotechnical Report and test
borings prior to selecting the pile driving hammer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
D. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer Plans demonstrating compliance of
driving equipment and steel casing with Contract Documents. Plans shall include
shop and erection details, casing details, and enclosures, splices, driving helmets,
and reinforcement.
E. The Contractor shall perform and submit the results of wave equation analysis for
proposed installation equipment and piling material.
1. Calculations shall be performed and sealed by a Professional Civil
Engineer licensed in the State of California.
2. Pile compressive stresses must be limited to allowable values during
installation in accordance with the AREMA Manual for Railway
Engineering, Chapter 8, Part 4.
3. The results of the wave equation analysis shall demonstrate that the pile
stresses are higher at the top of the pile compared to the tip, that the piles
can achieve the required penetration into the hard strata without damaging
the pile, and that an excessive number of blows per foot are not needed to
achieve the required penetration and capacities.
4. The recommended pile driving criteria for the driving of piles (chart with
bearing as a function of ram fall and blow count) shall be submitted for
review.
F. Welder's certification and Welding Procedure Specification (WPS).
G. Pile reports shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer within 3 days of
completion of driving. The pile record shall be completed per Article 3.11 of these
specifications.
H. As-built pile location Drawing(s):
1. Sealed by licensed land surveyor registered in the State of California.
2. Include deviations beyond acceptable tolerances from specified locations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Welders and welding processes to be qualified in accordance with AWS
D1.5 requirements.
a. Welders to have been qualified during the 12 month period prior to
commencement of welding.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not begin pile installation until the earthwork in the area where piles are to be
driven has been completed, to the extent possible, as shown in the Contract
Documents.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
B. Jetting or predrilling of piling will not be permitted unless shown on the plans.
C. The use of followers shall only be permissible if driving pile through the existing
bridge deck.
1. If followers are used, their use shall be incorporated into the Contractor’s
wave equation analysis.
D. All work shall comply with these Specifications, the AREMA Manual for Railway
Engineering, and the SCRAA standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Submit pile manufacturer information to the Engineer for review and approval prior
to ordering and fabricating material.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Timber Piles:
1. Timber piles shall be in accordance with Chapter 7, Part I, Article 1.9 of the
AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering for first-class piles with a
minimum tip circumference of 25 inches.
2. If preservative treatment is specified in the special provisions or on the
plans, it shall be in accordance with Chapter 3, Part 6 of the AREMA
Manual for Railway Engineering.
3. The method of storing and handling timber piles shall be such as to avoid
damage to the piles. Piles shall be handled with hemp or synthetic fiber
slings or wire rope encased in rubber hose, taking care to avoid dropping,
bruising, breaking or penetrating the outer fibers.
B. Steel Piles:
1. Steel Bearing Piles: Steel bearing piles shall be of the section shown on
the plans and shall be structural steel, containing no less than 0.2 percent
copper, conforming to ASTM A572, Grade 50, or ASTM A588. Piles shall
not be painted before driving.
2. Steel Sheet Piles: Steel sheet piles shall be of the section and length
shown on the plans and shall conform to ASTM A328 unless otherwise
shown on the plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
C. Steel Pipe Piles:
1. Steel pipe piles shall be of the outside diameter and wall thickness shown
on the plans and shall conform to ASTM A252, Grade 2 or 3 for piles less
than 14 inches in diameter and shall conform to ASTM A252 Grade 3 for
piles 14 inches and greater in diameter unless other material is specified
on the plans. Piles shall have an end treatment as shown on the plans.
Piles shall not be painted before driving.
2. All concrete materials and reinforcing steel and their preparation and
placement, used in filling steel pipe piles, shall be in accordance with
Section 03 31 00 and Section 03 21 00. All concrete shall have a minimum
compressive strength equal to that shown on the plans.
D. Storing and Handling:
1. Piles to be stored shall be placed on skids above ground and a sufficient
number used to prevent visible deflection in the stored piles. Piles shall be
kept clean and fully drained at all times. The method of handling shall be
such that no damage will result to the piles.
2.03 CONCRETE PILES
A. Precast:
1. Precast concrete piles shall be of the type, size and length shown on the
plans.
2. All concrete materials and steel reinforcing and their preparation and
placement shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 00 and Section 03 21
00. All concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength equal to that
shown on the plans.
B. Prestressed:
1. Prestressed concrete piles shall meet the requirements, and shall be of the
type, size, and length shown on the plans, manufactured in accordance
with Section 03 31 00 and Section 03 21 00.
C. Defects and Breakage:
1. Piles cracked in the process of curing, handling or driving, which in the
opinion of the Engineer can be satisfactorily repaired, shall be repaired at
the Contractor's expense and under the direction of the Engineer. If repair
is not possible in the opinion of the Engineer, the piles shall be replaced at
the Contractor's expense.
D. Storing and Handling:
1. The method of storing and handling piles shall be such as to minimize the
danger of fracture by impact or undue bending stresses. Unless otherwise
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
provided, piles shall be handled by means of a suitable bridle or sling
attached to the pile at the pick-up points marked on the pile. Use of
rubberized cables is also acceptable. The use of chain slings will not be
permitted.
2. Piles shall be stored above ground on adequate blocking located within 1
foot of the pick-up points marked on the pile that will prevent undue
stresses in the piles. When piles are only partially supported during
hauling, the overhang shall not exceed the lengths permitted for pick-up. If
piles are stacked for storage, blocking for all layers shall be in the same
vertical plane.
2.04 PILE CAPACITY
A. The driven compressive capacity of piles shall be equal or greater than the
allowable working compressive load capacity, if provided and as stated on the
Contract Plans.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Ends of piles to be machine cut and square making an angle of 90 degrees with
the longitudinal axis of the pile.
B. Tolerances:
1. HP piles: Conform to requirements for "HP" shapes as indicated in AISC
Manual of Steel Construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Such services shall be arranged and contracted by the Contractor.
B. Payment to be included in the lump sum price.
3.02 LINES AND LEVELS
A. Complete necessary excavation and furnish lines and levels as required to install
piles at their indicated locations.
3.03 DRIVING PILES
A. Driving Equipment:
1. Piles shall be driven with air, hydraulic or diesel powered hammers
approved by the Engineer prior to use. The use of drop hammers will not
be permitted. The use of steam hammers are not permitted unless
approved by the SCRRA. The weight of the ram of the hammer shall not
exceed 7000 lbs unless approved in writing by the Engineer. The hammer
to be used shall have the approval of the Engineer. Steel sheet piles and
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
steel H piles may be driven with vibratory hammers if approved by the
Engineer.
2. The hammer shall be operated at all times at pressures and speeds
recommended by the manufacturer. If steam or air hammers are used, air
compressor capacity shall be adequate to maintain full rated pressure
throughout the driving period of any pile. The air compressor shall be
equipped with an accurate pressure gage at all times.
3. Pile drivers shall be equipped with leads which are constructed in such a
manner as to afford freedom of movement of the hammer and to provide
adequate support of the pile during driving. The longitudinal axis of the
leads and hammer shall coincide with the longitudinal axis of the pile.
Except where piles are driven through water, the leads shall be long
enough so that a follower will not be necessary. Where a follower is
required for driving piles underwater, one pile in each group of ten shall be
long enough to permit driving without a follower. This pile shall be used as
a test pile for proper correlation of the follower-driven piles bearing
capacity. This pile shall be paid for as a permanent pile and not as a "test
pile."
B. Driving Tolerances:
1. Piles for bent construction shall be driven with a degree of accuracy that
will permit framing into bents with a minimum of pulling or jacking. Under
ordinary conditions, pipe piles, after driving and before framing, shall not
vary from the vertical or from the required batter by more than 1/8 inches
per foot of pile above finished ground, except that under ordinary
conditions, the maximum deviation of the top of the pile from the plan
location shall be 2 inches in the direction of the structure centerline and 4
inches in the direction along the centerline of the bend.
2. Foundation piles shall be driven to the vertical or batter line shown on the
plans and the top of the completed pile shall not be more than 4 inches in
any direction from the position shown on the plans. The center of gravity
of the completed pile group shall not vary by more than 3 inches from the
center of gravity determined from plan location.
3. If necessary to meet the required tolerances, pilot holes or guide templates
may be used. Generally, the diameter of pilot hole shall be as specified in
Article 3.03.F.1.
C. Protection of Pile Heads:
1. A steel driving head suitable for the type and size of piles being driven shall
be used. Steel bearing piles and steel sheet piles shall be driven with a
driving head compatible with the specific pile shape driven.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
2. For concrete piles, a cushion block shall be provided between the driving
head and the top of the pile. Wood cushion blocks, wire rope mat, belting,
or other suitable material shall be used, subject to the approval of the
Engineer, to prevent damage to the pile. Cushion blocks shall be changed
as necessary to maintain an effective cushion.
D. Pile Damage and Misalignment:
1. Care shall be exercised to avoid damage to piles from overdriving. Any
pile that is damaged to the extent that it will not perform its design function;
any pile that is driven off location or alignment beyond the allowable
tolerances; or cut off below ground line. The Contractor shall cease driving
and as directed by the Engineer. If the defective pile condition is due to
Contractor's negligence, the cost of replacement and redriving shall be
borne by the Contractor.
E. Pile Penetration:
1. All piles shall be driven to a penetration as required by these specifications.
The length of the piles shown on the plans is the length which is estimated
to give the minimum required penetration and bearing.
2. When test piles are required by the contract, the pile lengths and
penetration required will be established by the Engineer on the basis of the
test pile data. These lengths and elevation of pile tips shall supersede
requirements shown on the plans.
3. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed in writing by the Engineer
for cases where piles penetrate into competent rock, foundation piles shall
be driven to a penetration of a minimum 10 feet below bottom of footing,
and other piles to a penetration of at least 15 feet below natural or finished
ground line, whichever is lower.
4. When the specified penetration cannot be obtained without overdriving the
piles, the Contractor shall provide either pilot holes or jetting equipment or
a combination of both.
F. Pilot Holes:
1. If piles cannot be driven to the required penetration and the material is not
suitable for jetting, the Engineer may permit pilot holes to be drilled to
facilitate driving. The Engineer will designate the diameter and depth of
the drilled hole. Ordinarily, a drill diameter of 12 inches will be satisfactory
for timber piles and typically a drill diameter 4 inches less than the diagonal
of square piles, 2 inches less than the diagonal of octagonal piles, and 1
inch less than the diameter of round piles will be satisfactory for steel pipe
and concrete piles.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
2. Where pilot holes are required in granular material which cannot be sealed
off by ordinary "mudding" drilling methods, a casing pipe of sufficient
diameter shall be placed around the boring device. The casing shall be of
sufficient length to extend through the loose materials and shall be held in
position until the pilot hole is completed and the pile placed ready for
driving.
3. If the hard material extends below the desired penetration, the drilling shall
be stopped 1 foot above that level and the pile driven the remaining
distance if it is possible to do so without damaging the pile. If the pile does
not completely fill the pilot hole, the space between the pile and the wall of
the hole shall be filled with dry granular material prior to driving as directed
by the Engineer.
4. Pilot holes shall be considered as incidental to piles and no direct payment
will be made for this work.
G. Jetting:
1. If piles cannot be driven to the required penetration and the material is not
suitable for pilot holes, the Engineer may permit jetting to facilitate drilling.
2. For jetting operations sufficient power shall be provided, in addition to that
used for operating the hammer, to supply water volume and pressure
sufficient to freely erode the material adjacent to the pile.
3. Jetting shall be stopped a minimum of 2 feet above the desired tip elevation
and the final penetration obtained by driving without jetting. In silty soils it
is possible that jetting may loosen the soil around piles already driven. If
such a condition is considered possible, piles shall be redriven after all
jetting within 25 feet has been completed.
4. Jetting shall be considered as incidental to piles, and no direct payment will
be made for this work.
H. Shooting Pilot Holes:
1. The use of explosives for drilling of pilot holes will not be permitted.
I. Bearing Capacity:
1. All piles shall be driven to the allowable working compressive load specified
on the plans, in the special provisions, or by the Engineer. The bearing
values shall be determined using the following formula unless otherwise
shown on the plans:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
3𝑒𝐸 𝑊𝑟 + 𝑛2𝑊
𝑃= x
𝑠 + 𝑐 𝑊𝑟 + 𝑊𝑝
P = Allowable working compressive load (lbs) (based on factor of safety of 4.0)
e = Hammer efficiency =0.6 to 0.9 (varies with hammer type and condition)
E = Hammer energy per blow = Wr × h for single acting steam or air hammer or
open cylinder Diesel hammer
s = Penetration of pile per hammer blow (inches/blow)
c = Average temporary compression (inches) = 0.1
Wr = Weight of ram of hammer (lbs)
h = Hammer ram stroke (feet) average during I inch of pile penetration
n = Coefficient of restitution = 0.65 to 0.9 (varies with material and hammer)
Wp = Weight being driven (pounds) includes pile and pile follower, anvil, drive cap
and adapter as applicable
2. When measuring penetration per blow to determine if adequate bearing
capacity has been obtained, the hammer shall be running freely and at the
speed specified by the manufacturer for full rated energy output.
3. If, for some unavoidable reason, driving must be interrupted before final
penetration is reached, the penetration per blow to determine bearing
capacity shall not be measured until 12 inches of penetration or refusal has
been obtained after driving has been resumed.
J. Pile Driving Near Fresh Concrete:
1. Piles shall not be driven within 150 feet of concrete that was placed within
the previous 24 hours. If piling are driven within 150 feet of concrete that
has not attained its specified 28-day strength, the following distances,
based on the concrete strength and pile hammer rated energy, shall be
maintained between the concrete and the nearest pile.
3.04 TEST PILES
A. The furnished length of test piles shall be a minimum of 10 feet longer than the
estimated length of the permanent piles shown on the plans or as directed by the
Engineer.
B. Wherever possible, test piles shall be driven in a location as shown on the plans.
If not so used in the permanent structure, test piles shall be cut off at least 3 feet
below final grate or extracted as directed by the Engineer. Extraction of test piles
shall be considered incidental to the test pile item, and no separate compensation
will be made for this work.
C. Ground elevations shall be brought to finished grade wherever possible prior to
driving test piles, so that the test pile will be comparable to the piles used in the
permanent structure.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
D. Equipment used for driving test piles shall be adequate for handling the lengths
provided without splicing. The hammer and all accessories used shall be the same
make and model as that to be used in driving the permanent piles.
E. Driving of a test pile shall continue until a penetration and bearing capacity is
obtained as indicated by these specifications. Typically, test piles shall be driven
to not less than 125 percent of the ultimate pile capacity required for permanent
piles in the bridge structure.
3.05 TIMBER PILES
A. Pile Preparation:
1. When the furnished length is much longer than the required length, the
Engineer may permit shortening the tip end before driving so as to have
the desired diameter at the cut-off.
2. Pile tips shall be cut perpendicular to the axis of the pile.
3. The piles for bents shall be matched as much as possible in diameter to
facilitate framing and bracing.
B. Cut-offs:
1. Piles which are to be encased in concrete shall be cut-off square with a
saw to the elevation shown on the plan or established by the Engineer.
The pile heads shall then be swabbed with preservative as specified on the
contract documents.
2. Piles which are to support steel or timber caps shall be brought into final
position and held while cut-off is made. Any chains or jacks used in
positioning the piles shall be arranged so that the surface of the pile below
cut-off will not be damaged. Cut-off shall be made with a saw to a true
plane and to the exact elevation shown on the plans so that the cap will
bear on the entire cross section of each pile in the bent. No shims will be
permitted between the pile and the cap. Piles must show a solid head at
the plane of cutting, and after cut-off, the pile caps shall be protected with
preservative, fabric, and plastic cement as specified on the contract
documents.
3. Cut-off portions of piles furnished by SCRRA remain the property of
SCRRA, and shall be hauled to and loaded into rail cars by the Contractor.
In the event rail cars are not available, the cut-offs will be stockpiled at a
location designated by the Engineer. Stubs under 5 feet in length shall be
disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with all applicable
environmental laws and regulations. No extra payment will be allowed for
this work.
C. Treatment of Damaged Surfaces:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
1. Any pile surface below cut-off that has been scuffed, torn or otherwise
damaged shall be treated in accordance with the requirements of the
applicable plans.
3.06 STEEL BEARING PILES AND STEEL SHEET PILES
A. Splices and Build-ups:
1. The length of steel bearing piles and steel sheet piles shown on the plans
may be built up in sections either before or during driving operations. The
sections, unless otherwise shown on the plans, shall be of identical cross-
section. Pile splices shall be made by full penetration butt welding the
entire cross-section or as otherwise shown on the plans. All welding shall
be in accordance with AWS D1.5. Care shall be taken to properly align the
sections connected so that the axis of the pile will be straight. Pile splices
above a point 15 feet below finished ground line shall be reinforced as
shown on the plans, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Field
splices shall be avoided for lengths under 60 feet. No more than two (2)
splices will be permitted on each pile.
B. Cut-Offs:
1. Piles shall be cut off, with a cutting torch, or by other acceptable methods,
to the elevation shown on the plans. Where caps are required, piles shall
be brought into final position and held while cut off is made and the end
surface of the piles shall be made as smooth as practicable with maximum
gap of 1/8 inches between pile and pile cap.
3.07 STEEL PIPE PILES
A. Splices and Build-ups:
1. The length of a steel pipe pile may be built up in sections either before or
during the driving operation. The minimum length of a section measured
between welded splices shall be 5 feet, and between drive splices shall be
30 feet. Only one welded splice and no drive splices will be permitted in
that portion of the pile exposed above ground line or normal water line.
Drive splices shall be 15 feet below the ground line, unless directed by the
Engineer.
2. Care shall be taken to properly align the sections to be spliced to insure a
straight axis. The sections shall be spliced together in accordance with
details shown on the plans. All welding shall be in accordance with the
AWS D1.5.
B. Cut-Offs:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
1. Piles shall be cut off, with a cutting torch, or by other acceptable methods,
to the elevation shown on the plans or established by the Engineer. Where
caps are required, piles shall be brought into final position and held while
cut off is made and the end surface of the piles shall be made as smooth
as practicable with maximum gap of 1/8 inches between pile and pile cap.
C. Placement of Concrete:
1. After all driving, splicing, and positioning of pile is completed, the pile shall
be free from buckles, splits, distortions, water or other foreign matter. The
Contractor shall provide equipment, lighting, and facilities necessary for the
proper inspection of the piles. Any damaged, improperly driven, or
otherwise defective pile shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's
expense.
2. The tops of piles shall be kept covered after driving until the concrete is
placed. No concrete shall be placed in the piles in any unit until the driving
of all piles in that unit has been completed. No concrete shall be placed
until the Engineer has inspected the completed pile and reinforcing steel,
when required, and given his approval to proceed. Unit is defined as a pier,
bent or abutment.
3. Concrete shall be placed in a continuous operation taking care to prevent
segregation. Special placing devices shall be used if necessary.
3.08 PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES
A. Splices:
1. Splices for precast and prestressed concrete piles will not be permitted.
B. Build-ups:
1. Build-ups shall be made in accordance with the details shown on the plans.
The concrete used for the build-up shall be of the same quality as that used
originally in the pile. Just prior to placing the concrete, the top of the pile
shall be coated with an epoxy bonding compound approved by the
Engineer.
2. When additional driving of precast non-prestressed piles is required, the
built-up portion shall obtain a compressive strength equal to the design
compressive strength of the original pile prior to redriving.
C. Cut-Offs:
1. Concrete at the end of a pile terminating in cast-in-place concrete shall be
cut back the required amount leaving the reinforcing steel or prestressing
steel exposed. The final cut of the concrete shall be normal to the axis of
the pile. Any damage to the pile below the plan cut-off elevation shall be
remedied by further cut-back and built-up.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
3.09 OBSTRUCTIONS
A. Should any obstruction including but not limited to boulders, rocks, rubble, fill,
existing foundations or timbers be encountered which prevent driving of pile to its
required tip elevation or final driving resistance, threaten pile damage or cause pile
to drift from required location horizontally or vertically, cease driving and take
corrective action as directed by Engineer.
3.10 DAMAGED PILES
A. Replace damaged piles as directed by the Engineer at no additional expense to
the SCRRA.
B. Each pile to be free from defects and damage due to construction, fabrication,
delivery, installation or other causes.
C. Damaged piles include but not necessarily limited to piles bent, buckled, cracked,
with fabrication tolerances beyond those indicated, or with any other defect as
determined by the Engineer that would weaken the pile.
D. Should any pile as determined by the Engineer be damaged, be too short to
develop required final driving resistance or to reach required tip elevation or
otherwise not conform to this Specification Section, withdraw pile and drive another
pile in its place.
1. If it is impossible to withdraw damaged or rejected pile, install another pile
at location indicated by the Engineer.
2. Revise foundation as directed by the Engineer as required by new location
of pile.
3. Additional pile and foundation to be at the Contractor's expense.
E. Correct to satisfaction of Engineer at no additional cost to the SCRRA any pile or
other construction that has been damaged by pile installation.
3.11 PILE REPORT
A. Provide Engineer with a copy of a pile report for all driven pile providing the
following information:
1. Pile location and number.
2. Date and time driven.
3. Weather.
4. Hammer (manufacturer, model, and serial number).
5. Hammer cushion and cap block.
6. Pile type.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
7. Batter.
8. Length of pile (tip to cut off).
9. Description of piles that were rejected (pile number, location, reason for
rejection).
10. Cut off elevation.
11. Pile tip elevation.
12. Ground elevation.
13. Length spliced on.
14. Length furnished.
15. Length cut off.
16. Hammer blow count and ram fall for each foot along full length of pile.
a. Penetration of last foot of driving in blows per inch.
17. Final driving resistance and calculated bearing.
18. Stroke or hammer speed at final resistance.
19. Name of person recording information
20. Pile driving record (shown at the end of the specifications).
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Piles
1. General:
a. Piles delivered of the various kinds, sizes, types, and weights will
be measured by the lineal foot, except steel sheet piles will be
measured by the square foot, of acceptable pile delivered at the site
of work and furnished in accordance with the lengths specified on
the plans.
b. Piles driven of the various kinds, sizes, types, and weights will be
measured to the nearest 1/10 lineal foot of net length of pile in place,
except steel sheet piles will be measured by the square foot of
acceptable pile in place, after all cut-offs and build-ups have been
made.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
c. That portion of piles driven below the elevation required by the
plans and piles driven below the elevation at which the minimum
penetration and bearing requirements were first obtained will not be
measured for payment.
d. Determination of installed pile lengths:
1) Estimated lengths of steel piling shown on the Contract
Plans shall be considered as approximate only and as
having been determined for design and estimating purposes
from the test borings taken at the site.
2) The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for furnishing
piles of sufficient lengths to obtain the required penetration
and specified bearing for each pile.
2. Timber Piles:
a. Piles supplied by the SCRRA which fail during driving, due to an
inherent weakness in the pile and not due to negligence on the part
of the Contractor, and which are extracted or cut-off at the direction
of the Engineer, will be measured for payment by the lineal foot of
pile in the leads. Piles supplied by the SCRRA and broken during
driving due to Contractor's negligence will not be measured for
payment. Piles supplied by the Contractor and broken during
driving will not be measured for payment.
b. Cut-off portions of piles will not be measured for payment.
3. Steel Piles: Cut-off portions of piles will not be measured for payment.
4. Concrete Piles, Precast and Prestressed:
a. 2 feet will be added to the length of piles, measured for payment in
accordance with Paragraph 1.07.A.1. for each authorized build-up
made, other than those made necessary by improper casting,
handling or driving of piles.
b. Cut-off portions of piles, when piles are supplied by the Contractor
in the lengths shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer, will
be measured by the lineal foot of cut-off above design elevation.
Cutbacks made below design elevation for the purpose of making
build-ups will be considered incidental to the work and will not be
measured.
c. When piles of extra length are furnished to eliminate protrusion of
reinforcing steel required for splicing, such extra length will not be
measured for payment as either piles or cut-off portion of piles.
B. Test Piles
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
1. Test piles of the various kinds, sizes, types and weights, when the piles do
not become a part of the permanent structure, will be measured by the
lineal foot of pile in the leads and driven in accordance with these
specifications and in the location specified on the plans or by the Engineer.
When test piles becomes a part of the permanent structure, they will be
measured by the lineal foot of acceptable pile in place after all cut-offs and
build-ups have been made in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph
1.07.A covering the various kinds of piles.
C. Reinforced Pile Tips
1. Reinforced pile tips will be measured by the number of reinforced tips
installed on steel bearing piles and driven in place.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Piles
1. Piles Delivered:
a. Piles delivered will be paid for at the contract unit price per lineal
foot or square foot, as designated in Article 4.01, of the various
kinds, sizes, types, and weights.
1) The contract unit price shall include full compensation for all
work and costs involved for furnishing the piles, unless
otherwise specified; unloading, storing, and transporting the
piles. This price shall not include compensation for concrete
or reinforcing steel in steel pipe piles which will be paid for
under Section 34 80 41 and Section 34 80 42.
2. Piles Driven:
a. Piles driven will be paid for at the contract unit price per lineal foot
or square foot, as designated in Article 4.01, of the various kinds,
sizes, types, and weights.
1) The contract unit price shall include full compensation for
furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, jetting, pilot
holes, and incidentals necessary to drive and cut-off the
piles and complete the work. The Contractor shall accept
the contingencies of driving greater or lesser length of piles
or other changes of features in construction which this may
involve, all without modification of the unit price fixed by the
Contract.
3. Timber Piles:
a. The contract price per lineal foot of acceptable timber pile shall also
include full compensation for preparing the piles, disposing of the
pile heads, treating the pile tops as specified in Paragraph 3.05.B.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
and the treating of damaged surfaces, splits, and checks as
specified in Paragraph 3.05.B.
4. Splices for Steel Bearing Piles and Steel Pipe Piles:
a. Payment for the work and materials, exclusive of additional length
of pile, required in making each pile splice shall be made at a unit
price per splice equal to two times the unit price bid for "Steel
Bearing Piles Driven" or "Steel Pipe Piles Driven," as applies, of the
size and weight on which the splice is made except that no payment
will be made for any splice on any pile whose actual length left in
place, after all cut-offs, splices, or build-ups have been made, is not
greater than the length shown on the plans or specified by the
Engineer, nor will payment be made for more than one splice on
anyone pile less than 120 feet long.
5. Steel Sheet Piles:
a. No direct payment will be made for cut-off portions of piles.
6. Concrete Piles, Precast and Prestressed:
a. Cut-off portions of piles, measured in accordance with Paragraph
4.01.A.4.b., will be paid for at one half the unit price bid per lineal
foot for concrete piles.
B. Test Piles
1. Test piles will be paid for at the contract unit price per lineal foot of test pile
of the various kinds, sizes, types, and weights.
a. The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing
the piles, unless otherwise specified; unloading, storing, and
transporting the piles; and for furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, jetting, pilot holes, and incidentals necessary to drive
the piles and complete the work. Payment will be made for splices
authorized by the Engineer at the rate specified in Paragraph
4.02.A.4.
C. Reinforced Pile Tips
1. Payment for reinforced pile tips on steel bearing piles, if required, shall be
made at the contract unit price per each.
a. The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing
all material, labor and equipment required to install the tips.
Payment will be made only for reinforced tips required as shown on
the plans or as requested by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 21 Piling
PILE DRIVING RECORD
PROJECT ________________________________________________ DATE __________________________________________
PILE NO. ________________________________________________ LOCATION _____________________________________
CONTRACTOR ___________________________________________
FOREMAN _______________________________________________ GROUND ELEVATION ___________________________
OBSERVER ______________________________________________ PILE TIP ELEVATION ____________________________
CUTOFF ELEVATION ____________________________
HAMMER TYPE/SIZE _____________________________________ PILE TYPE/SIZE _________________________________
CAP/HELMET/CUSION ____________________________________ LENGTH _______________________________________
RAM WEIGHT ____________________________________________ BATTER ________________________________________
THROTTLE SETTING _____________________________________
Depth Blows Depth Blows Depth Blows Depth Blows
Stroke Stroke Stroke Stroke
ft foot ft foot ft foot ft foot
0-1 25-26 50-51 75-76
1-2 26-27 51-52 76-77
2-3 27-28 52-53 77-78
3-4 28-29 53-54 78-79
4-5 29-30 54-55 79-80
5-6 30-31 55-56 80-81
6-7 31-32 56-57 81-82
7-8 32-33 57-58 82-83
8-9 33-34 58-59 83-84
9-10 34-35 59-60 84-85
10-11 35-36 60-61 85-86
11-12 36-37 61-62 86-87
12-13 37-38 62-63 87-88
13-14 38-39 63-64 88-89
14-15 39-40 64-65 89-90
15-16 40-41 65-66 90-91
16-17 41-42 66-67 91-92
17-18 42-43 67-68 92-93
18-19 43-44 68-69 93-94
19-20 44-45 69-70 94-95
20-21 45-46 70-71 95-96
21-22 46-47 71-72 96-97
22-23 47-48 72-73 97-98
23-24 48-49 73-74 98-99
24-25 49-50 74-75 99-100
REMARKS: ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TIME OF START ____________________________________ TIME OF STOP _________________________________
END OF SECTION 34 80 21
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 21 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 22
CAST-IN-DRILLED HOLE (CIDH) PILES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Construction of CIDH pile foundations.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel
4. Section 03 31 00 - Structural Concrete.
C. CIDH Pile construction shall be in accordance with the most current edition of The
American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA)
Manual of Railway Engineering, Chapter 8: Concrete Structures and Foundations,
Part 24: Drilled Shaft Foundations.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ADSC West Coast Chapter, Standard CIDH Pile Anomaly Mitigation Plan “A” and
Plan “B”.
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA).
1. Manual for Railway Engineering.
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. A135.4 – Basic Hardboard Standards
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
3. A252, Standard Specification for welded and Seamless Steal Pipe Piles.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
4. A283, Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength
Carbon Steel Plates.
5. A929, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-
Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe.
6. C203, Standard Test Method for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of
Block-Type Thermal Insulation.
7. D1751, Standard Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient
Bituminous Types).
8. D4380, Standard Test Method for Density of Bentonitic Slurries.
9. D4381, Standard Test Method for Sand Content by Volume of Bentonitic
Slurries.
10. D4972, Standard Test Method for pH of Soils.
E. American Petroleum Institute (API):
1. RP 138-1, Standard Procedure for Field Testing Water-Based Drilling
Fluids.
F. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
G. California Department of Transportation (Caltrans):
1. Soil and Rock Logging, Classification, and Presentation Manula (2010
Edition).
2. California Test 233, Method of Ascertaining the Homogeneity of Concrete
in Cast-In-Drilled-Hole (CIDH) Piles Using the Gamma-Gamma Test
Method.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the
submittal process.
B. Log of installation of all CIDH Piles.
C. Shop Drawings of all reinforcing and accessories required for the CIDH Piles.
D. Product Technical Data including:
1. Acknowledgement that products meet the requirements of the standards
referenced.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
2. Proposed concrete mix design for the CIDH Piles:
a. See Section 03 31 00 for information to be included in the mix
design submittal.
E. Test Reports:
1. Copies of concrete strength tests for concrete placed in the CIDH Piles.
F. Contractors qualifications as specified in Article 1.02.B. in this Specification
Section.
G. CIDH Pile installation plan as specified in Article 3.02.A. in this Specification
Section.
H. Slurry test results as specified in Article 2.01.A. in this Specification Section.
I. AWS Welder Certification.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Contractor Qualifications:
a. Two (2) weeks prior to the pre-construction conference, the
Contractor must submit the contractor’s qualification as specified in
the following to Engineer.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum Contractor’s experience
shall consist of successful installation of at least 5 CIDH Pile
Projects of similar or greater size, and similar geotechnical
conditions installed within the past 3 years.
1) The mentioned documentation shall reference and detail the
size of the CIDH piles, methods used during installation,
methods used for stabilizing the CIDH pile wall excavations,
local soil conditions, actual construction time, contract time,
names and phone numbers of owner's representatives who
can verify the Contractor's participation on those projects.
2) The Contractor must provide documentation of their
superintendent’s qualifications, record experience, and prior
project references demonstrating that they can handle
unusual site conditions and equipment breakdowns.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
c. The CIDH pile work shall be performed under the supervision of the
Contractor’s superintendent, who shall be fully knowledgeable and
experienced in construction of CIDH pile foundations of similar size
and geotechnical conditions as those shown on the plans.
1) In addition, the Contractor’s superintendent performing the
work shall have at least 5 years of experience installing
similar size CIDH piles within the last 8 years.
2) The Engineer may accept or reject the Contractor’s CIDH
Pile Subcontractor and its superintendent based on their
qualifications and previous field performance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Slurry:
1. Only mineral or polymer slurries shall be used in the drilling process unless
other drilling fluids are approved in writing by the Engineer.
2. The percentage and specific gravity of the material used to make the
suspension shall be sufficient to maintain the stability of the excavation and
to allow proper concrete placement.
3. In the event of a sudden significant loss of slurry to the excavation, the
construction of the foundation shall be stopped until either methods to stop
slurry loss or an alternate construction procedure has been approved by
the Engineer.
4. All tests specified below shall be performed when the slurry temperature is
above 40˚ F.
5. Mineral slurry or polymer slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clean,
fresh water, and adequate time (as prescribed by the manufacturer) allotted
for hydration in slurry tanks.
a. Slurry tanks of adequate capacity will be required for slurry
circulation, storage, treatment, and disposal.
b. No excavated slurry pits will be allowed.
c. The Contractor must draw sample sets from the slurry tanks and
test the samples for conformance with the specified material
properties prior to introduction into the shaft excavation.
d. A sample set shall be composed of samples taken at mid-height
and within 2 feet of the bottom of the slurry tanks.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
6. The Contractor must sample and test all slurry in the presence of the
Engineer, unless otherwise directed.
a. The date, time, names of the persons sampling and testing the
slurry, and the results of the tests shall be recorded.
b. A copy of the recorded slurry test results shall be submitted to the
Engineer at the completion of each pile, and during construction of
each pile when requested by the Engineer.
7. Sample sets of all slurry, composed of samples taken at mid-height and
within 2 feet of the bottom of the pile, shall be taken and tested during shaft
excavation as necessary to verify the control of the properties of the slurry.
a. As a minimum, sample sets shall be taken and tested at least once
every 2 hours after beginning slurry use.
b. When the test results show consistent specified properties, sample
sets shall be taken and tested at least once every 4 hours of slurry
use.
c. Slurry shall be recirculated, or agitated with the drilling equipment,
when tests show that the sample sets do not have consistent
specified properties.
8. When samples are found to be unacceptable, the Contractor must clean,
recirculate, desand, or replace the slurry to maintain the required slurry
properties.
a. Cleaning of the bottom of the excavation and placement of the
concrete shall not begin until tests show that the sample sets have
consistent specified properties.
9. The Contractor must demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that
stable conditions are being maintained.
a. If the Engineer determines that stable conditions are not being
maintained, the Contractor must immediately take action to stabilize
the shaft.
b. The Contractor must submit a revised installation plan, which
corrects the problem and prevents future instability.
c. The Contractor shall not continue with pile construction until
receiving the Engineer’s approval of the revised pile installation
plan.
10. Controlled Slurry:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
a. Slurry shall consist of a stable colloidal suspension of various
pulverized clays or polymers thoroughly mixed with water with the
properties given in the Required Slurry Property Table below.
b. Water used to mix slurry shall be potable.
REQUIRED SLURRY PROPERTIES TABLE
Items to be measured Range of results Test Methods
at 60˚ F
1. Density before concrete (Mud Balance)
placement, lb/ft3 for ASTM D4380
slurry 1 foot from shaft
bottom
Mineral slurries
(bentonite/attopulgite)
a. No end bearing 85 maximum
b. With end bearing 70 maximum
Polymer slurry
a. No end bearing 64 maximum
b. With end bearing 64 maximum
2. Marsh funnel viscosity, (Marsh funnel and CUP American
sec/qt, for entry Petroleum Institute (API - RP138-1),
Section 2.2.
a. Mineral slurries 26 to 50
(bentonite/attopulgite)
b. Polymer slurry 40 to 90* Standard Procedure for Field Testing
Water-Based Drilling Fluids
* or as
recommended by
manufacturer and
approved by
SCRRA
3. Sand content be volume, (Sand screen set)
percent, before concrete ASTM D4381
placement for slurry 1 foot
from shaft bottom
Mineral slurries
(bentonite/attopulgite)
a. No end bearing 4 maximum
b. With end bearing 20 maximum
Polymer slurry
a. No end bearing 1 maximum
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
REQUIRED SLURRY PROPERTIES TABLE
b. With end bearing 1 maximum
4. pH, during excavation 7 to 12 ASTM D4972
c. The Contractor must wait 30 minutes, after the last drilling and
scouring, to allow contaminants to settle out before taking and
testing a sample set of slurry.
1) After the reinforcing steel cage is placed in the excavation,
a sample set of slurry shall be taken and tested immediately
prior to concrete placement.
B. Concrete:
1. All materials, proportioning, air entraining, mixing, slump, and transporting
of PCC shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 00 except as modified
herein.
2. The water/cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45.
3. The concrete for construction of drilled shafts shall have a slump of 8 inches
±1.5 inches.
4. Concrete admixtures:
a. Comply with Section 03 31 00.
C. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Provide reinforcing steel conforming to requirements of Section 03 21 00.
a. Reinforcing sizes, number, configuration, spacing and lengths to be
as indicated on Plans.
D. Steel Casing (Permanent and Temporary):
1. Permanent steel casing shall have sufficient strength to withstand handling
stresses, drilling and installation stresses, concrete pressures, and
surrounding earth and water pressures, if required.
a. Steel for permanent casing shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM A283: Grade C, ASTM A36, or ASTM A929.
b. Submit size, wall thickness, type of steel, and length of permanent
casing to the SCRRA for acceptance.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
2. Temporary steel casing shall have sufficient strength to withstand handling
stresses, drilling and installation stresses, concrete pressures, and
surrounding earth and water pressures, or if required, for protection of
personnel or to permit advancement of shaft through caving ground.
a. Submit size, wall thickness, type of steel, and length of permanent
casing to the SCRRA for acceptance.
3. Furnish full-penetration welds meeting the requirements of "Structural
Welding Code - Steel" (ANSI/AWS D1.1) of the American Welding Society
requirements for joints in non-corrugated permanent steel casings.
a. Welders shall be AWS certified.
4. Deliver casing to site in undamaged condition.
a. Handle and protect casing to maintain diameter within 2 percent.
E. Expanded Polystyrene:
1. Expanded polystyrene must be commercially available polystyrene board
with (1) a flexural strength of at least 35 psi when tested under ASTM C203
and (2) a compressive yield strength from 16 to 40 psi at 5 percent
compression. Face the surfaces of expanded polystyrene that concrete is
placed against with 1/8 IN thick hardboard complying with ANSI A135.4.
Other facing materials may be used that provide equivalent protection.
Secure the hardboard using nails, waterproof adhesive, or other authorized
means.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONSTRUCTION AND TOLERANCES:
A. The CIDH Pile shall be within 3 inches of plan position at the top of shaft.
B. The vertical alignment of pile excavation shall not vary from the plan alignment by
more than 1/4 inches/feet.
C. Full depth reinforcing steel cages shall be set at no less than 6 inches above the
bottom of the excavated shaft prior to placement of concrete.
D. After all the concrete is placed, the top of the reinforcing steel cage shall be no
more than six (6) Inch above and no more than 2-3/4 inches below plan position.
E. The top elevation of the shaft may have a tolerance of up to +1 inches or -3 inches
from the plan top of pile elevation.
1. Sufficient reinforcement bar splice length for splices above the shaft shall
be attained.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
F. Excavation equipment and methods shall be designed so that the completed shaft
excavation will have a planar bottom.
1. The cutting edges of excavation equipment shall be normal to the vertical
axis of the equipment within a tolerance of 3/8 in/ft of diameter.
G. CIDH Pile excavations and completed shafts not constructed within the required
tolerances are unacceptable.
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting all unacceptable pile
excavations and completed shafts to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2. Materials and work necessary, including engineering analysis and
redesign, to complete corrections for out of tolerance CIDH pile
excavations shall be furnished without either cost to the Contracting
Authority or an extension of the completion dates of the project.
H. The elevations, dimensions, and depth of the CIDH Piles shall be as specified on
the Plans.
I. The dimensions of casings are subject to American Pipe Institute tolerances
applicable to regular steel pipe.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. The installation of the CIDH pile must be done in a continuous operation with no
unplanned interruptions. If an unplanned interruption cannot be avoided, the
engineer shall be notified immediately and the contractor must submit remedial
measures for approval.
B. CIDH Pile Installation Plan:
1. The Contractor must submit a signed statement that they have inspected
the project site and all the subsurface information made available in the
contract documents.
2. No later than 1 month prior to constructing CIDH Piles, the Contractor must
submit a CIDH Pile installation plan for review by the Engineer.
a. This plan shall provide information on the following:
1) Name and experience record of firm(s) and associated
personnel for the following:
a) Driller.
b) Drilled shaft superintendent.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
2) List of proposed equipment to be used including cranes,
drills, augers, bailing buckets, grooving equipment, scouring
equipment, final cleaning equipment, core sampling
equipment, confirmation boring equipment, tremies or
concrete pumps, casing, slurry equipment, airlift pumps, etc.
3) Details of overall construction operation sequence, the
sequence of pile construction in bents or groups and pile
construction.
4) Details of pile excavation methods.
5) Details of steel casing and forms, including installation and
extraction methods.
6) Details of the type and methods to mix, circulate, desand,
test, and dispose of slurry (if applicable).
a) If polymer slurry is proposed, submit data on load
transfer and manufacturers requirements for slurry
control.
7) Details of methods to clean the pile excavation, including air
lift methods and spin bucket methods as applicable.
8) Details of reinforcement placement including support and
cage centering methods.
9) Reinforcing steel cage splicing method, if proposed,
including details of dimensions, installation, splice location,
support and cage centering methods, and estimated time
required for splicing.
10) Details of concrete placement including procedures for
tremie or pumping methods and method to prevent slurry
intrusion at the discharge end.
11) Details of methods to control cuttings, water and slurry. with
adjacent traffic conditions (vehicular or railroad if
applicable).
12) Details of final discharge of concrete at top of pile, of
removing contaminated concrete, and verifying concrete
uniformity for site specific conditions.
13) Details on casing to be used, including specific length/depth
of all casing proposed, and specific evaluation and
determination of casing (size, depth, etc.) required to
prevent any shaft installation procedure from having an
effect or impact on adjacent structures, railroads, etc.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
14) Details of casing being seated into rock to seal groundwater
from entering the drill hole.
3. The Engineer will evaluate the CIDH pile installation plan for conformance
with the Contract Documents.
a. Within 14 calendar days after receipt of the plan, the Engineer will
notify the Contractor of additional information required and changes
necessary to meet the Contract requirements.
b. All procedural approvals given by the Engineer shall be subject to
trial in the field and shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility to satisfactorily complete the work as detailed in the
Contract Documents.
4. A pre-drilling conference will be required for this work prior to the start of
pile excavation. The Engineer and SCRRA will set up the conference.
a. The Engineer, Contractor, and drilling staff shall discuss the
anticipated pile installation process.
C. Pile Excavation:
1. Protection of Existing Structures:
a. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to existing structures
and utilities.
b. These measures shall include but are not limited to vibration
monitoring, or subsidence control during driving of casings, sheets,
or drilling.
2. Construction Method:
a. If the concrete is to be placed under the wet condition as defined in
this Specification, the Contractor must construct CIDH piles in such
a manner that the elevation of the water or slurry inside the pile will
be equal to or higher than the ground water elevation at the time of
concrete placement.
b. The CIDH Piles may be constructed by casing method to produce
sound, durable concrete foundation shafts free of defects.
1) Wet method may be combined with casing method with
approval from the Engineer only if the excavation can not be
dewatered and concrete placed in the dry, as defined
elsewhere in this Specification Section.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
2) Wet Method:
a) The wet method consists of keeping the shaft filled
with slurry a minimum of 4 feet above the highest
expected water table during drilling and excavation,
desanding of the slurry when required, final cleaning
of the excavation by means of a bailing bucket, air
lift, pump or other approved device and placing shaft
concrete which displaces the slurry.
3) Casing Method:
a) The casing method is used to advance the hole
through unstable material.
(1) Undercutting to the outside diameter of the
casing may be required.
b) The purpose of the steel casing is to stabilize the
side walls during drilling to prevent cave-ins from
unstable material and vibrations. The purpose of the
casing is also to prevent any pile installation
procedure from having an impact on adjacent
structures and railroads.
c) If voids exist between the permanent casing and the
drill hole, lean grout or a sand/gravel mix shall be
placed as directed by the Engineer.
c. Surface and subsurface obstructions shall be removed by the
Contractor.
1) Special tools and/or procedures may be required.
2) No separate payment will be made for removing
obstructions.
d. Excavations required for the CIDH Piles shall be performed through
whatever materials encountered, of the dimensions, and to the
elevations shown in the Plans.
1) The excavation and installation method shall be suitable for
the intended results and materials are encountered.
2) Blasting is not permitted.
3. Excavation in rock is defined as the excavation that cannot be drilled or
accomplished with conventional augers designated to excavate hard soil
or soft rock and that requires special tools and procedures to make the
excavation advance.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
a. Rock drilling tools such as augers with fitted rock teeth, core barrel,
buckets with significant down crowding, or roller bits combined with
extra drilling pressure by a hydraulic or percussion system are used
for the rock drilling excavation.
4. The Contractor shall anticipate and make available at the job site all
equipment necessary and essential to penetrate soft and hard rock during
the construction of the drilled shafts.
a. The equipment for excavation, drilling, and cleaning operations
shall have adequate capacity; including power, torque, and down
thrust to excavate a hole to an elevation equal to the lowest tip
elevation of the production drilled shafts installed from the
equipment operation elevation at the time of drilled shaft
construction, plus 25 feet or plus 25 percent of the maximum length
of the production drilled shafts, whichever is greater.
1) The Contractor must have drilling tools available to increase
diameter of shaft should initial drilled hole be out of vertical
tolerances stated in this Specification.
5. CIDH piles shall be installed in such a manner that no voids shall exist
between the overburden and the casings.
6. The drilling sequence shall be such that for every pile drilled, at least two
piles are skipped. The piles adjacent to the freshly poured pile may only
be drilled a minimum of 24 hours after placement of concrete.
7. The Contractor must extend CIDH pile tip elevations if the Engineer
determines that the material encountered during excavation or present at
tip elevation is unsuitable and/or differs from that anticipated in the design
of the CIDH pile.
8. After the pile excavation has been completed, the Contractor shall
immediately proceed with shaft construction.
9. Safety:
a. The Contractor shall not permit any worker to enter the CIDH pile
excavation for any reason unless; a suitable casing has been
installed, the water level has been lowered and stabilized below the
level to be occupied, and an adequate safety equipment and
procedures have been provided to the personnel entering the
excavation which includes OSHA certification for confined-entry-
space.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
10. Record Information:
a. For each CIDH pile construction, the Contractor must provide the
Engineer with an excavation record including but not limited to the
following: the location; dimensions; verticality; description of the
materials encountered at all elevations; drilling time in each of the
various strata; elevation of the water table during excavation;
description of any change in excavated material; elevation of top
and bottom of the finished pile; depth to the steel casing; condition
of the bottom of the excavation and deviation from plan location.
1) All unusual observations shall be reported to the Engineer
within 8 hours of discovery.
2) Two (2) copies of the excavation records, signed by a
responsible representative of the Contractor and cosigned
by a representative of the Engineer, shall be furnished to the
Engineer within one (1) day after the pile excavation is
completed.
b. The Contractor must retain additional CIDH pile installation records
including, but not limited to the following: Concrete volume,
concrete pouring rate, and other pertinent data to the CIDH pile
operations.
1) Copies of these installation records shall be submitted to the
Engineer within one (1) day after the finish of the installation.
D. Steel Casing (Temporary and Permanent):
1. The procedure and methods to install and seal the steel casings shall not
produce stresses in excess of 25 percent over the design allowable for the
type of steel used.
a. The Contractor must submit computations of critical stresses
imposed on the steel casing during installation.
b. The casing shall not be more than one inch out of round before and
after installation.
2. Welding of steel casings shall be by a semi-automatic or automatic welding
process to fully develop the casing.
a. All welding shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1.
3. Nondestructive testing of the welds will not be required; however, the
Contractor shall be responsible for placing a sound, watertight casing.
4. After installation but prior to excavation of the rock socket, the casings shall
be inspected for location, alignment and condition.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
a. Any casing that shows bends or kinks or other deformations that
would impair the strength or efficiency of the complete shaft shall
be either removed and replaced or repaired by the Contractor in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
b. Repairing or replacing casing when ordered by the Engineer shall
be done at no additional cost to the Contracting Authority.
E. Dewatering and Rock Socket:
1. The Contractor shall determine the elevation of the top of the rock and at
the bottom of the casing at each drilled shaft location.
a. The method shall be approved by the Engineer, and the elevation
determined during the presence of Engineer or the Engineer’s
representative.
2. Prior to excavation of the rock socket, the Contractor shall seat the casing
in the sound rock for a minimum depth of 1 foot and attempt to dewater the
shaft.
a. If the shaft cannot be dewatered to the dry condition or the
satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall attempt to seal the
shaft by carrying the casing further into the rock.
b. This procedure shall be followed for each drilled shaft.
c. The Contractor will not be required to carry the casing more than
an additional 3 feet (a total of 4 feet) into the sound rock. The casing
may be advanced four feet into the sound rock during initial
placement.
d. The preliminary tip elevations of the casings are shown in the plans
based on available borings.
e. The actual elevation shall be determined based on actual rock
elevation and conditions encountered during excavation as
determined by the Contractor using the method(s) approved by and
in the presence of the Engineer.
f. After the casing has been seated sufficiently to allow dewatering to
achieve the dry condition or the satisfaction of the Engineer or to
the maximum depth specified above, the Contractor shall excavate
the rock socket.
1) The aforementioned dry condition is defined as less than 12
inches of water accumulation above the base over a 1 hour
period.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
g. Additionally, less than 3 inches of water will be permitted in the
bottom of the excavation at the time of concrete placement in dry
condition.
3. The method of excavating the rock socket shall be capable of providing a
cylindrical opening of the specified diameter and to the full depth shown on
the plans or to the depth directed by the Engineer.
a. Excavation shall be along the axis of the shaft and over breakage
at the rock surface shall be avoided so as not to destroy the seal of
the bottom of the steel casing.
b. The methods of excavating the rock socket shall have proper
control to prevent undercutting of the steel casing.
4. No rock projections shall extend inside the rock socket diameter.
a. All overburden, loose rock fragments, and other debris shall be
removed from the rock socket and shaft prior to placing the shaft
concrete.
b. The inside surface of the casing shall be clean and free of
extraneous material prior to placing of concrete.
F. Final Cleaning:
1. If a slurry cake builds up on the sidewalls of the drill hole, the Contractor
shall remove it prior to concrete placement at no additional cost.
a. If mineral slurry is used, the sidewalls shall be reamed prior to
placement of reinforcement.
b. The Contractor must adjust operations so that the maximum time
that the slurry is allowed to remain in the shaft is 24 hours.
2. The Contractor must clean the base of each pile so that a minimum of 50
percent of the base will have less than ½” of sediment at the time of
concrete placement.
a. The maximum depth of sediment or debris at the base of the pile
shall not exceed 1 inch.
3. For dry piles, visual inspection will be performed by the Engineer.
4. For slurry piles, the Contractor must use an air lift to clean the bottom of
the pile.
a. After a wait period equal to the time to set the reinforcing steel cage
and concrete placement setup, the Contractor shall measure the
amount of sediment in the bottom of the pile.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
b. If the amount of sediment meets the above requirements, the
Contractor shall clean the base of the pile a second time with the
air lift and immediately proceed with shaft construction.
c. If after the described wait period the amount of sediment exceeds
the requirements, the Contractor shall clean the pile by air lift and
repeat the above procedure until the sediment accumulation meets
the requirements.
d. The Engineer may approve, at no additional cost to the SCRRA, an
alternate method to clean the bottom of the pile.
G. Inspection of Shaft and Rock Socket
1. The Contractor must provide suitable means of access and lighting facilities
for the Engineer to check locations, dimensions, and alignment of the
casings, inspect conditions of the casings, and inspect and determine that
the rock sockets are satisfactory.
a. Final shaft depths will be measured with a suitable weighted tape
or other approved methods after final cleaning.
2. At all times when a person is in a dewatered casing, provision shall be
made for pumping fresh air to said person; and any required lighting shall
be by electric lights.
a. Any mechanical equipment used inside the casing shall be
operated by air or electricity.
b. The use of gasoline engines or other types of equipment producing
fumes placed in the excavation for pumping or drilling are not
permitted.
3. If the shaft cannot be dewatered, the Contractor must provide a method for
visual inspection to confirm that the shaft is in an acceptable condition and
that rock socket cleanliness requirements are met.
H. Reinforcing Steel Cage Construction and Placement:
1. The reinforcing steel cage consisting of longitudinal bars, ties, cage
stiffener bars, spacers, cage centering devices, and other necessary
appurtenances, shall be completely assembled and placed immediately
after the pile excavation is inspected and accepted, and prior to concrete
placement.
2. The reinforcing steel in the pile shall be tied and supported so that the
reinforcing steel will remain within allowable tolerances given in this
Specification Section.
a. Reinforcing added to stiffen a reinforcing cage will be at the
Contractor's expense and as approved by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
b. Concrete spacers or other approved non-corrosive spacing devices
shall be used at sufficient intervals, near the top and bottom and at
intervals not exceeding 10 feet along the shaft, to ensure concentric
spacing for the entire cage length.
c. Spacers shall be constructed of approved material equal in quality
and durability to the concrete specified for the pile.
d. The spacers shall be of adequate dimension to ensure a minimum
distance of 3 inches or as shown in the plan which ever is greater
between the cage and the excavated hole.
e. When a full depth reinforcing steel cage is used, it shall be
supported at the bottom by approved cylindrical feet to ensure that
the bottom of the cage is maintained at the proper distance above
the base.
3. The elevation of the top of the steel cage shall be checked before and after
the concrete is placed.
a. If the reinforcing cage is not maintained within the specified
tolerances, corrections shall be made by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
b. No additional piles shall be constructed until the Contractor has
modified the reinforcing cage support in a manner satisfactory to
the Engineer.
4. At no time shall the reinforcing cage be allowed to rest at the bottom of the
drill hole.
I. Concrete Placement:
1. Placement of concrete pile:
a. Concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after reinforcing steel
placement.
b. The Contractor shall coordinate batching and delivery of the
concrete with the batch plant so that the time limits, as stated in the
Standard Specifications, between batching and delivery are not
exceeded.
c. Concrete placement shall be continuous.
d. Concrete placement shall continue after the pile excavation is full
until good quality concrete is evident at the top of shaft.
e. Remove a sufficient volume of concrete to ensure elimination of all
contaminated concrete at the top of shaft using small pumps.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
f. Concrete shall be placed either through a tremie or concrete pump.
2. Placement of Concrete by Tremie:
a. The tremie used to deposit concrete shall be constructed so that it
is watertight and will readily discharge concrete.
b. The tremie shall not be less than 10 in dia., and there shall be no
aluminum parts in contact with concrete.
c. The discharge end of the tremie shall be constructed to prevent
water or slurry intrusion and permit the free flow of concrete during
placement operations.
d. The tremie shall have sufficient mass that it will rest on the pile
bottom before start of concrete placement.
e. The length of the tremie shall be sufficient to extend to the bottom
of the pile.
f. The discharge orifice shall be maintained between 5 feet and 10
feet below the surface of the fluid concrete.
g. The tremie shall be supported so that it can be raised to increase
the discharge of concrete and lowered to reduce the discharge of
concrete.
h. The flow of the concrete shall be continuous and the concrete in the
tremie shall maintain a positive pressure differential at all times to
prevent introduction of air pockets or contaminants into the
concrete.
3. Placement of Concrete by Pump:
a. Concrete pumps and lines may be used for concrete placement.
b. All pump lines shall have a minimum 4 inches dia. and be
constructed with watertight joints.
1) Concrete placement shall not begin until the pump line
discharge orifice is at the pile base elevation.
c. A plug or similar device shall be used to separate the concrete from
the fluid in the hole until pumping begins.
1) The plug shall either be removed from the excavation or be
of a material, approved by the Engineer, which will not be a
detriment to the pile if not removed.
d. The discharge orifice shall be maintained between 5 feet and 10
feet below the surface of the fluid concrete.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
1) When lifting the pump line during concreting, the Contractor
shall temporarily reduce the line pressure until the orifice
has been repositioned at a higher level in the excavation.
e. The pumping operation shall be performed in a manner that
prevents introduction of air pockets into the concrete.
1) If breaking of the pump line is required, the discharge orifice
shall be temporarily positioned 3 feet to 5 feet below the
surface of the fluid concrete in the hole.
2) Additional methods to eliminate introduction of air into the
concrete may be proposed by the Contractor.
4. The elapsed time from the beginning of concrete placement in the pile to
the completion of the placement shall not exceed 3 hours.
a. All admixtures, when approved for use, shall be adjusted for the
conditions encountered on the job so the concrete remains in a
workable plastic state throughout the 3 hours placement limit.
b. The Contractor may propose placement time over 3 hours provided
the Contractor submits trial mix documentation that all concrete in
the pile will retain a minimum 4 inches slump for the entire
placement period.
J. The concrete in the rock socket shall be, if at all possible, placed in the dry.
1. The Contractor will be required to make a diligent effort to dewater the rock
socket.
2. If, after making such effort, it is determined by the Engineer that it is not
possible to dewater the socket sufficiently to allow the concrete to be
placed in the dry; the Contractor, with the Engineer's written approval, shall
proceed with the placement of the concrete under water.
K. The casing segment above the top elevation of the drilled shaft shall be left empty.
L. Installation of Expanded Polystyrene
1. Place expanded polystyrene in position before placing concrete.
3.03 TEMPORARY CASING WITHDRAWAL
A. Provide means and opportunity for the Engineer to inspect the operation during
the withdrawal of casing and placing of concrete.
B. Coordinate casing withdrawal carefully with concrete placement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 20 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
1. Maintain head of concrete to exceed the anticipated outside soil and water
pressure above the bottom of the casing at all times during casing
withdrawal.
C. Check concrete level prior to, during, and after withdrawing casing to confirm that
separation of shaft concrete has not occurred.
1. Do not vibrate concrete internally before the casing is withdrawn.
2. A casing vibratory extractor is permitted.
3. Do not withdraw casing after concrete has attained initial set as determined
by the Engineer.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection of Pile:
1. For piles that have been dewatered, or constructed in the “Dry”, the
Contractor shall provide a method for visual inspection to confirm that the
pile is acceptable.
B. Acceptance Testing of Pile:
1. For piles constructed by the “wet” or “slurry-displacement” method, the
contractor shall provide acceptance testing by a qualified independent
testing firm.
a. Contractor must submit qualifications of proposed testing firm for
review and approval by the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the
planned start of construction.
b. Testing firm shall have conducted acceptance testing of CIDH piles
in similar circumstances and using the same test methods on at
least 5 projects in the last 3 years.
2. Vertical inspection pipes for acceptance testing shall be provided in all
CIDH concrete piling constructed by the “wet” or “slurry displacement”
methods.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 21 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
3. The furnishing and placing of inspection pipes shall conform to the
following:
a. Inspection pipes shall be Schedule 40 PVC pipe with a nominal
inside diameter of 2 IN. Watertight PVC couplers are permitted to
facilitate pipe lengths in excess of those which are commercially
available. The Contractor shall log the location of the inspection
pipe couplers with respect to the plane of pile cut off, and these logs
shall be delivered to the Engineer upon completion of the placement
of concrete in the drilled hole.
b. Each inspection pipe shall be capped at the bottom and shall extend
from 3 FT above the pile cutoff down to the bottom of the reinforcing
cage. A temporary top cap or similar means shall be provided to
keep the pipes clean before testing. If pile cutoff is below the
ground surface or working platform, inspection pipes shall be
extended to 3 FT above the ground surface or working platform.
Approved covers or railings shall be provided and inspection pipes
shall be located as necessary to minimize exposure of testing
personnel to potential falling hazards.
c. Inspection pipes shall be completely clean, dry, and unobstructed
at the time of testing providing a 2 IN DIA clear opening.
d. The inspection pipes shall be installed in straight vertical alignment,
parallel to the main reinforcement, and securely fastened in place
to prevent misalignment during installation of the reinforcement and
placing of concrete in the hole. The CIDH concrete piling shall be
constructed so that the relative distance of inspection pipes to
vertical steel reinforcement shall remain constant.
e. When any changes are made to the tip of CIDH concrete piling, the
Contractor shall also extend the inspection pipes to the bottom of
the reinforcing cage.
f. Inspection pipes shall be placed radially around the pile, inside the
outermost spiral or hoop reinforcement and no more than 1 IN clear
of the outermost spiral or hoop reinforcement.
g. Inspection pipes shall be placed around the pile at a uniform
spacing not exceeding 33 IN measured along the circle passing
through the centers of inspection pipes. A minimum of four (4)
inspection pipes per pile shall be used. Inspection pipes shall be
placed to provide the maximum diameter circle that passes through
the centers of the inspection pipes while maintaining the spacing
required herein.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 22 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
h. Inspection pipes shall be placed a minimum of 1-1/2 inch clear of
the vertical reinforcement. When the vertical reinforcement
configuration does not permit this clearance while achieving radial
location requirements, distance to vertical rebar shall be maximized
while still maintaining the requirement for radial location.
i. Where the dimensions of the pile reinforcement do not permit
inspection pipes to be placed per these requirements, a plan for
tube placement shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval in
the CIDH Pile Installation Plan with a request for deviation before
fabricating pile reinforcement.
4. After placing concrete and before requesting acceptance tests, each
inspection pipe shall be tested by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer by passing a 1-1/4 inch diameter rigid cylinder 4.5 feet long
through the length of pipe. If an inspection pipe fails to pass the 1-1/4 inch
diameter cylinder, the Contractor shall immediately fill all inspection pipes
in the pile with water.
5. For each inspection pipe that does not pass the 1-1/4 IN DIA cylinder, the
Contractor shall core a nominal 2 inch diameter hole through the concrete
for the entire length of the pile. Cored holes shall be located as close as
possible to the inspection pipes they are replacing and shall be no more
than 5 IN clear from the reinforcement.
a. Coring shall not damage the pile reinforcement. Cored holes shall
be made with a double wall core barrel system utilizing a split tube
type inner barrel. Coring with a solid type inner barrel will not be
allowed. Coring methods and equipment shall provide intact cores
for the entire length of the pile. The coring operation shall be logged
by an Engineering Geologist or Civil Engineer licensed in the State
of California and experienced in core logging. Coring logs shall be
in conformance with the Caltrans "Soil and Rock Logging,
Classification, and Presentation Manual." Coring logs shall include
Core Recovery (REC), Rock Quality Designation (RQD), locations
of breaks, and complete descriptions of inclusions and voids
encountered during coring, and shall be delivered to the Engineer
upon completion. Concrete cores shall be preserved, identified with
the exact location the core was recovered from within the pile, and
delivered to the Engineer upon completion. The Engineer will
evaluate the portion of the pile represented by the cored hole based
on the submitted core logs.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 23 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
6. Acceptance tests of the concrete shall be made by a qualified technician
employed by the approved testing firm. Acceptance tests will evaluate the
homogeneity of the placed concrete. Tests will include gamma-gamma
logging (GGL) conducted in conformance with California Test 233. The
Contractor shall not conduct operations within 25 FT of the gamma-gamma
logging operations. The Contractor shall separate reinforcing steel as
necessary to allow the technician access to the inspection pipes to perform
gamma-gamma logging or other acceptance testing. After requesting
acceptance tests and providing access to the piles, the Contractor shall
allow 7 days for the technician to conduct these tests. The testing firm shall
submit acceptance test results and interpretations to the Engineer no later
than 7 days after completion of testing for each shaft.
7. The Engineer will make determination of acceptance after receiving test
results. No superimposed construction shall proceed without acceptance
of the CIDH pile by the Engineer.
8. The Engineer may elect to require additional tests to further evaluate a pile.
These tests may include cross-hole sonic logging (CSL) and other means
of inspection selected by the Engineer. When the Engineer elects to
require additional tests to further evaluate anomalies for a rejected pile, no
time requirement exists for performing these tests. The Contractor may
progress with the mitigation plan process without waiting for these
supplemental results.
9. Inspection pipes and cored holes shall be dewatered and filled with grout
after notification by the Engineer that the pile is acceptable. Inspection
pipes and holes shall be filled using grout tubes that extend to the bottom
of the pipe or hole or into the grout already placed.
10. If the Engineer determines that a pile does not meet the requirements of
the specifications and California Test 233, Part 5C, then that pile will be
rejected and all depositing of concrete under slurry or concrete placed
using temporary casing for the purpose of controlling groundwater shall be
suspended until written changes to the methods of pile construction are
approved in writing by the Engineer.
C. Mitigation of Rejected Pile:
1. The Engineer will determine whether the rejected pile requires mitigation
due to structural, geotechnical, or corrosion concerns. The Engineer will
consider the estimated size and location of the anomaly and potential
effects upon the design. The Engineer will provide the conclusions of this
analysis to the Contractor for development of a mitigation plan, if required.
The Contractor shall allow 35 days for the Engineer to determine whether
the pile requires mitigation and provide information to the Contractor. Day
1 of the 35 days shall be the 1st day after results of acceptance testing
have been provided to the Engineer. If additional information is submitted
to the Engineer that modifies the size, shape, or nature of the anomaly, the
Contractor shall allow 15 additional days for the subsequent analysis.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 24 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
2. If the Engineer determines that a rejected pile requires mitigation, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a mitigation plan for
repair, supplementation, or replacement for each rejected CIDH concrete
pile. If the Engineer determines that it is not feasible to repair the rejected
pile, the Contractor shall not include repair as a means of mitigation and
shall proceed with the submittal of a mitigation plan for replacement or
supplementation of the rejected pile.
3. Pile mitigation plans shall include the following:
a. The designation and location of the pile addressed by the mitigation
plan.
b. A review of the structural, geotechnical, and corrosion design
requirements of the rejected pile.
c. A step by step description of the mitigation work to be performed,
including plans if necessary.
d. An assessment of how the proposed mitigation work will address
the structural, geotechnical, and corrosion design requirements of
the rejected pile.
e. Methods for preservation or restoration of existing earthen
materials.
f. A list of affected facilities, if any, with methods and equipment for
protection of these facilities during mitigation.
g. The assigned contract number, full name of the structure as shown
on the contract plans, and the Contractor's (and Subcontractor's if
applicable) name on each sheet.
h. A list of materials, with quantity estimates, and personnel, with
qualifications, to be used to perform the mitigation work.
i. The seal and signature of an engineer who is licensed as a Civil
Engineer by the State of California. This requirement is waived for
approved mitigation plans when either of the following conditions
are present:
1) The proposed mitigation will be performed in conformance
with the most recent version of "ADSC Standard Mitigation
Plan 'A' - Basic Repair" without exception or modification.
2) The Engineer has determined that the rejected pile does not
require mitigation due to structural, geotechnical, or
corrosion concerns, and the Contractor elects to repair the
pile using the most recent version of the "ADSC Standard
Mitigation Plan 'B' - Grouting Repair" without exception or
modification.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 25 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
D. The most recent version of the "ADSC Standard Mitigation Plan" is available at:
http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/esc/geotech/ft/adscmitplan.htm
1. For rejected piles to be repaired, the Contractor shall submit a pile
mitigation plan that contains the following additional information:
a. An assessment of the nature and size of the anomalies in the
rejected pile.
b. Provisions for additional pile testing if required by the Engineer.
2. For rejected piles to be replaced or supplemented, the Contractor shall
submit a pile mitigation plan that contains the following additional
information:
a. The proposed location and size of additional piles.
b. Structural details and calculations for any modification to the
structure to accommodate the replacement or supplemental piles.
3. All provisions for CIDH concrete piling shall apply to replacement piles.
4. The Contractor shall allow the Engineer 20 days to review the mitigation
plan after a complete submittal has been received.
5. When repairs are performed, the Contractor shall submit a mitigation report
to the Engineer within 10 days of completion of the repair. This report shall
state exactly what repair work was performed and quantify the success of
the repairs relative to the submitted mitigation plan. The mitigation report
shall be stamped and signed by an engineer that is licensed as a Civil
Engineer by the State of California. The mitigation report shall show the
assigned contract number, full name of the structure as shown on the
contract plans, and the Contractor (and subcontractor if applicable) name
on each sheet. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to whether a
mitigation proposal is acceptable, the mitigation efforts are successful, and
to whether additional repairs, removal and replacement, or construction of
a supplemental foundation is required.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Control and Disposal of Materials:
1. Disposal of excavated material, as well as slurry and/or water removed
from the shaft excavation, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
2. All slurry and water, displaced during final cleaning and concrete
placement, shall be collected and properly disposed off site.
3. Open pits for collection of materials will not be allowed.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 26 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 22 Cast-In-Drilled Hole (CIDH) Piles
4. All excavated material, slurry, water, and other matter shall be controlled
by the Contractor so that at no time it enters or encroaches upon the
adjacent travel lanes, railroad and water ways.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. CIDH Piles will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. The length of each CIDH Piles to be paid for shall be the length, measured along
the longest side, from the tip elevation shown on the plans, or the tip elevation
ordered by the Engineer for the diameter of the pile shown on the plans, to the
plane of the pile cut-off. No reduction in the length for payment will be made for
any CIDH pile where the tip elevation is revised in conjunction with a request by
the Contractor to increase the pile diameter.
C. Reinforcing Steel of this Section is considered incidental to work under other
payment items and no separate measurement and payment will be made to the
Contractor for Reinforcing Steel.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. CIDH Piles will be paid the contract unit price, as listed in the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices.
B. The contract unit price shall include full compensation for all equipment, labor and
materials necessary to satisfactorily construct the shafts; including drilling and
excavation of shaft and rock socket, furnishing, installing and removing temporary
casing, furnishing and placing concrete, confirmation boring and lab testing,
reporting boring logs and lab test results, CSL (steel pipe) or gamma-gamma (PVC
pipe) non-destructive testing and reporting, shaft inspection, disposal of excavated
materials and water, and all other materials.
C. Full compensation for furnishing all reinforcing steel in piles and pile extensions,
including reinforcement required to extend beyond the pile or extension as shown
on the Plans, shall be considered as included in the Contract price per unit for
furnishing piling of the type or class shown in the Schedule of Quantities and
Prices, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor.
END OF SECTION 34 80 22
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 22 - 27 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 23
SUBDRAINAGE SYSTEM FOR RAILROAD BRIDGES AND RETAINING WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes Foundation Drainage System.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. D3034, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
2. D3212, Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
3. F405, Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Tubing and Fittings.
4. F667, Large Diameter Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings.
5. F758, Smooth-Wall Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Underdrain Systems
for Highway, Airport, and Similar Drainage.
6. F949, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth
Interior and Fittings.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Extent: Furnish and install foundation drainage as a complete system as shown.
B. Outlet Connections: Foundation pipe shall be terminated as shown on the
Drawings.
C. Drainage Lines: Construct drainage lines of perforated pipe.
D. Outlet Line: Construct outlet lines of closed-joint non-perforated pipe.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 23 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 23 Subdrainage System for Railroad Bridges and Retaining Walls
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the
submittal process.
B. Samples:
1. Materials:
a. Two randomly selected samples of each type of pipe and fitting,
prior to delivery of materials to the site.
C. Certificates:
1. Materials:
a. Certifications from the manufacturers attesting that materials meet
Specification requirements.
b. Certifications are required for drain pipe, drain tile, fittings and filter
fabric.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage:
1. Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; unload, and store with
minimum handling.
2. Do not store materials directly on the ground.
3. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be free of dirt and debris.
4. Install plastic pipe within 6 months from the date of manufacture unless
otherwise approved.
B. Handling:
1. Handle materials in such a manner as to deliver to the trench in sound
undamaged condition.
2. Pipe shall be carried and not dragged to the trench.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Pipe: Plastic pipe shall contain ultraviolet inhibitor to provide protection
from exposure to direct sunlight.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 23 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 23 Subdrainage System for Railroad Bridges and Retaining Walls
B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: ASTM F758, Type PS 46, ASTM D3034, or ASTM
F949 with a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi.
C. Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings:
1. Use ASTM F405 for pipes 3 to 6 inches in diameter inclusive, ASTM F667
for pipes 8 to 24 inches in diameter.
a. Fittings shall be manufacturer's standard pipe and shall conform to
the indicated Specification.
D. Pipe Perforations:
1. Water inlet area shall be a minimum of 0.5 SQ in/lf.
2. Manufacturer's standard perforated pipe which essentially meets these
requirements may be substituted with prior approval of the Engineer.
a. Circular Perforations in Plastic Pipe:
1) Circular holes shall be cleanly cut not more than 3/8 inches
or less than 3/16 inches in diameter and arranged in rows
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the pipe.
2) Perforations shall be approximately 3 inches OC along
rows.
3) The rows shall be approximately 1-1/2 inches apart and
arranged in a staggered pattern so that all perforations lie at
the midpoint between perforations in adjacent rows.
4) The rows shall be spaced over not more than 155˚ of
circumference.
5) The spigot or tongue end of the pipe shall not be perforated
for a length equal to the depth of the socket, and
perforations shall continue at uniform spacing over the
entire length of the pipe.
b. Slotted Perforations in Plastic Pipe:
1) Circumferential slots shall be cleanly cut so as not to restrict
the inflow of water and uniformly spaced along the length
and circumference of the tubing.
2) Width of slots shall not exceed 1/8 inches nor be less than
1/32 inches.
3) The length of individual slots shall not exceed 1-1/4 inches
on 3 inches dia. tubing, 10 percent of the tubing inside
nominal circumference on 4 to 8 inches dia. tubing, and 2-
1/2 inches on 10 inches dia. tubing.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 23 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 23 Subdrainage System for Railroad Bridges and Retaining Walls
4) Rows of slots shall be symmetrically spaced so that they are
fully contained in 2 quadrants of the pipe.
5) Slots shall be centered in the valleys of the corrugations of
profile wall pipe.
E. Fittings:
1. Fittings shall be of compatible materials for pipe, of corresponding weight
and quality, and as specified herein.
F. Bedding and Pervious Backfill for Foundation Drains:
1. Bedding and pervious backfill shall be in accordance with Section 31 20
00.
G. Protective Covering for Pervious Backfill:
1. Protective covering shall be building paper.
H. Filter Fabric:
1. Nonwoven polypropylene fabric.
2. Not less than 4 oz/sy.
3. Resistant to the chemical actions of the soil and water and non-
biodegradable.
4. Fabric to prevent the migration of soil particles into the subdrain while
allowing the free flow of water from the subsoil to the subdrain pipe.
I. Geocomposite Wall Drain:
1. Geocomposite wall drain shall consist of a manufactured core not less than
0.25 inches thick nor more than 2 inches thick with one or both sides
covered with a layer of filter fabric.
a. The drain shall produce a flow rate of at least 2.0 gal per minute per
foot of width at a hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and a minimum externally
applied pressure of 3,500 psf.
2. Filter Fabric for the geocomposite drain shall conform to the provisions for
Filter Fabric in this Specification.
3. The manufactured core shall be either a preformed grid of embossed
plastic, a mat of random shapes of plastic fibers, a drainage net consisting
of a uniform pattern of polymeric strands forming 2 sets of continuous flow
channels, or a system of plastic pillars and interconnections forming a
semirigid mat.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 23 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 23 Subdrainage System for Railroad Bridges and Retaining Walls
4. The core material and filter fabric shall be capable of maintaining a
drainage void for the entire height of the geocomposite drain.
a. The filter fabric shall be integrally bonded to the core material.
b. Core material manufactured from impermeable plastic sheeting
having non-connecting corrugations shall be placed with the
corrugations approximately perpendicular to the drainage collection
system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Trenching and Excavation:
1. Perform required trenching and excavation in accordance with Section 31
20 00.
a. Keep trenches dry during installation of drainage system.
b. Changes in direction of drain lines shall be made with 1/8 bends.
c. Use wye fittings at intersections.
B. Bedding:
1. Place graded bedding, minimum 6 inches in depth, in the bottom of trench
for its full width and length compacted as specified prior to laying of
foundation drain pipe.
2. Each section shall rest firmly upon the bedding, through the entire length,
with recesses formed for bell joints.
3. Except for recesses for bell joints, the bedding shall fully support the lower
quadrant of the pipe.
C. Pipe Laying:
1. Lay drain lines to true grades and alignment with a continuous fall in the
direction of flow.
2. Bells and grooves of pipe sections shall face upgrade.
3. Clean interior of pipe thoroughly before being laid.
4. When drain lines are left open for connection to discharge lines, the open
ends shall be temporarily closed and the location marked with wooden
stakes.
5. Perforated pipe shall be laid with perforations facing down.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 23 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 23 Subdrainage System for Railroad Bridges and Retaining Walls
6. Any length that has had its grade or joints disturbed shall be removed and
relaid at no additional cost to the SCRRA.
7. Perforated corrugated polyethylene drainage tubing and plastic piping shall
be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's Specifications and as
specified herein.
8. Tubing and piping with physical imperfections shall not be installed.
D. Jointing:
1. Perforated pipe:
a. Perforated types of drain pipes shall be laid with closed joints.
2. Non-perforated Drain Tile:
a. Non-perforated and plain-end drain tile shall be laid with 1/8” to ¼”
open joints.
b. Open joints shall be covered or wrapped.
c. Covered joints shall have one thickness of the cover material placed
over the joint.
d. Material shall overlap the joint not less than 4 inches on each side
and cover the tile for not less than the upper half or more than the
upper two-thirds of the circumference of the tile.
e. Strips of wire cloth wrapping material 3 inches wide shall be used
for wrapped joints, with ends fastened together.
3. PVC pipe:
a. PVC pipe joints shall be in accordance with ASTM D3034, ASTM
D3212, or ASTM F949.
4. Perforated Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe:
a. Perforated corrugated polyethylene pipe shall be installed in
accordance with Manufacturer's Specifications and specified
herein.
b. No more than 5 percent stretch in a section will be permitted.
E. Outlet Lines:
1. The outlet end of drain lines connecting with an open gutter or outfall shall
be covered with a removable wire basket of 16-mesh copper or bronze wire
cloth fastened with brass or wire straps.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 23 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 23 Subdrainage System for Railroad Bridges and Retaining Walls
3.02 BACKFILLING
A. After joints and connections have been inspected and approved, place the
specified pervious backfill material a minimum width of 6 inches on each side of
the pipe and 12 inches above the top of the pipe.
1. Place the backfill preventing displacement of or injury to the pipe or tile.
2. Place a protective covering, as specified in Section 31 20 00, over the
pervious backfill for the full width of the trench before regular backfill is
placed.
3. Compact backfill as specified in Section 31 20 00.
3.03 TESTS
A. Pipe Tests:
1. Strength tests of pipe shall conform to field service test requirements of the
ASTM Specification or AASHTO Specification covering the product (See
paragraph 2.1. in this Specification Section).
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Subdrainage System for Railroad Bridges, Retaining Walls, Concrete Masonry
Wall, Concrete Retaining Wall, and Platforms will be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable,
as derived from the plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Subdrainage system for will be paid at the Contract lump sum price.
1. The contract lump sum price paid for subdrainage system for Railroad
Bridges, Retaining Walls, Concrete Masonry Wall, Concrete Retaining
Wall, and Platforms shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor,
materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for doing all work involved
in constructing the subdrainage system, complete in place, as shown on
the Drawings, as specified in this Specification Section, and as directed by
the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 23 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 23 Subdrainage System for Railroad Bridges and Retaining Walls
2. Perforated drain pipe, non-perforated drain pipes, all connections and
closures, joints, elbows, cleanouts and outlet hardware, concrete drainage
swale or gutter, utility excavation and backfill and other associated material
and incidentals and installation thereof will be considered part of the
subdrainage system and full compensation therefore will be considered as
included in the contract unit price paid for subdrainage system.
END OF SECTION 34 80 23
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 23 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 24
AUGERCAST PILE HEADWALL AND WINGWALL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Augercast pile headwall and wingwall.
B. Description:
1. This work shall consist of shaft excavation, backfilling shaft with lean
concrete backfill, installing steel piling, installing steel brackets and steel
support angles, installing precast concrete headwall and wingwall panels,
connecting the culvert pipe to the headwall with end anchors, and
backfilling the headwall and wingwall panels.
C. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of
the Contract.
2. Division 01 – General Requirements.
3. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Concrete.
4. Section 31 20 00 – Earthwork.
5. Section 31 50 00 – Excavation Support.
6. Section 33 42 00 – Culvert and Drainage Pipe.
7. Section 34 80 43 – Precast and Prestressed Concrete for Railroad
Bridges.
8. Section 34 80 52 – Metal Fabrication for Railroad Bridges.
9. Section 34 80 53 – Steel Handrails for Railroad Bridges.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. Manual of Steel Construction.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 24 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 24 AUGERCAST PILE HEADWALL AND WINGWALL
1. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structure Steel.
2. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for
High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose
Applications.
3. A194, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless
Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or
Both.
4. A572, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
Vanadium Structural Steel.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D1.1, Structural Welding Code, Steel.
D. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA):
1. AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, 2020.
E. Southern California Railroad Authority (SCRRA) Standards, including:
1. Engineering Standard 6320:
a. Sheet 1 – Headwall and Wingwall Layout
b. Sheet 2 – Precast Concrete Headwall Details
c. Sheet 3 – Precast Concrete Wingwall Details
F. State of California Department of Transportation Standard Specifications, 2018.
G. In case of conflict between SCRRA Standards, AREMA, and State of California
Department of Transportation SCRRA Standards takes precedence; use in lieu
of conflicting portions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Shop drawings for the miscellaneous steel, in accordance with Section
34 80 52.
3. Shop drawings for the precast concrete headwall and wingwall panels, in
accordance with Section 34 80 43.
4. Product technical data including:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 24 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 24 AUGERCAST PILE HEADWALL AND WINGWALL
a. Steel pile type, size, dimensions and grade of steel.
b. Mix design for lean concrete backfill and socket concrete backfill.
c. End anchors.
d. Epoxy adhesive.
e. Grout.
B. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a description of the augercast pile
headwall and wingwall installation equipment to be employed in the work and
sequence of installation, prior to commencement of the work.
C. The Contractor shall provide details of shaft excavation methods including
proposed drilling methods, methods for cleanout of the shafts, disposal plan for
excavated material, temporary casing, if needed, and drilling slurry, if needed.
D. The Contractor shall provide details of the method(s) to be used to ensure shaft
stability (i.e., prevention of caving, bottom heave, etc. using temporary casing,
slurry, or other means, or if soils are self-supporting) during excavation and
concrete placement. If temporary casings are proposed, casing dimensions and
detailed procedures for casing installation and removal shall be provided. If slurry
is proposed, detailed procedures for mixing, using, maintaining, and disposing of
the slurry shall be provided.
E. If competent rock is expected, the Contractor shall provide details of temporary
casing, rock boring equipment and pile socket installation.
F. The Contractor shall provide details of soldier pile placement including internal
support bracing and centralization methods.
G. The Contractor shall provide details of lean concrete backfill or socket concrete
backfill placement including proposed operational procedures for pumping and/or
tremie methods.
H. The Contractor shall provide its plan for shoring or sloping earth behind the
augercast pile headwall and wingwall as necessary for construction in
accordance with Section 31 50 00.
I. Welder's certification and Welding Procedure Specification (WPS).
J. Augercast pile installation reports shall be submitted by the Contractor to the
Engineer within 3 days of completion of installation.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Welders and welding processes to be qualified in accordance with AWS
D1.1 requirements.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 24 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 24 AUGERCAST PILE HEADWALL AND WINGWALL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Piles:
1. Steel piles for the augercast pile headwall and wingwall shall be of the
section shown on the Contract Documents, containing no less than 0.2
percent copper, conforming to ASTM A572, Grade 50. Piles shall not be
painted before installation.
B. Miscellaneous Steel:
1. Miscellaneous steel for use in the augercast pile headwall and wingwall
shall be of the section shown on the Contract Documents, conforming to
ASTM A36, including but not limited to the steel support brackets.
Miscellaneous steel shall be painted as noted herein.
C. Lean Concrete Backfill:
1. Lean concrete backfill shall meet the requirements of Section 19-03.2I of
the 2018 Caltrans Standard Specifications.
D. Socket Concrete Backfill:
1. Socket concrete backfill shall meet the requirements of Section 03 31 00
and Engineering Standard 6320, with a minimum compressive strength of
4,000 psi at 28 days.
E. Precast Concrete Headwall and Wingwall Panels:
1. Materials for the precast concrete headwall and wingwall panels shall meet
the requirements of Section 34 80 43 and Engineering Standard 6320.
F. Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP) Culvert:
1. Materials for corrugated metal pipe (CMP) culvert shall meet the
requirements of Section 33 42 00.
G. End Anchors:
1. Threaded rods shall be galvanized and meet ASTM A193 Grade B7.
2. Connecting nuts shall be galvanized and meet ASTM A194 Grade 2H.
H. Epoxy Adhesive:
1. Epoxy adhesive material shall be Hilti HIT-RE 500 V3 or approved equal.
I. Grout:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 24 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 24 AUGERCAST PILE HEADWALL AND WINGWALL
1. Grout shall be cementitious and non-shrink, with a minimum compressive
strength of 5,000 psi.
J. Handrailing:
1. Handrailing and connecting materials shall meet the requirements of
Section 34 80 53 and Engineering Standard 6320.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Steel Piles:
1. Ends of piles to be machine cut and square making an angle of 90 degrees
with the longitudinal axis of the pile.
2. Tolerances:
a. HP piles: Conform to requirements for "HP" shapes as indicated in
AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
B. Steel Support Brackets:
1. Steel support brackets shall be fabricated from angle sections, as noted
on Engineering Standard 6320.
C. Precast Concrete Wingwall Panels:
1. Fabrication of the precast concrete headwall and wingwall panels shall
meet the requirements of Section 34 80 43.
D. Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP) Culvert:
1. Fabrication of the corrugated metal pipe (CMP) culvert shall meet the
requirements of Section 33 42 00.
E. Handrailing:
1. Fabrication of handrailing shall meet the requirements of Section 34 80 53.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Shaft Excavation:
1. Shafts shall be excavated to the required depth as shown in the Contract
Documents. The minimum diameter of the shaft shall be as shown in the
Contract Documents. The excavation shall be completed in a continuous
operation using adequate equipment.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 24 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 24 AUGERCAST PILE HEADWALL AND WINGWALL
2. If rock, hard material or an obstruction is encountered prior to reaching the
specified shaft tip elevation, the Contractor shall socket the shaft into the
rock, hard material or through the obstruction in accordance with
Engineering Standard 6320 and the Contract Documents.
3. Temporary casing, slurry, or other methods specified in the shaft
installation plan as approved by the Engineer shall be used if necessary to
ensure safety and stability.
4. No more than 12 inches of loose or disturbed material shall be present at
the bottom of the shaft just prior to beginning concrete placement. The
excavated shaft shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to
proceeding with construction.
B. Backfilling Shaft:
1. The excavated shaft shall be backfilled with lean concrete backfill, as
shown in the Engineering Standard 6320 and the Contract Documents. If
water is present, the shaft shall be dewatered prior to placement of lean
concrete backfill.
2. Placement of the lean concrete backfill shall commence immediately after
completing the shaft excavation and receiving the Engineer’s approval of
the excavation. Vibration of shaft backfill is not required.
3. The lean concrete backfill shall be deposited by a method that prevents
segregation of aggregates and include adequate head.
4. If a pile socket is required, the excavated shaft shall be backfill with socket
concrete backfill, as shown in the Engineering Standard 6320 and the
Contract Documents.
C. Installing Pile:
1. The steel piles shall be immediately lowered into the shafts after lean
concrete backfill or socket concrete is placed and secured in position.
Concrete cover over the steel pile shall be 2 inches minimum.
2. The steel piles shall be placed so that the centerline of the pile at the top is
within 1/2 inch of the Plan location. The steel pile shall be plumb, to within
0.3 percent of the length based on the total length of the pile.
3. Exposed portions of the steel piles and attachments shall be field-painted
after installation with one coat of Carboline Carboguard 890 VOC (or
approved equal), applied to a dry film thickness of 8 mils, corresponding to
a wet film thickness of 10 mils. Field-paint steel piles to at least one foot
below finished groundline.
D. Installing Steel Support Bracket:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 24 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 24 AUGERCAST PILE HEADWALL AND WINGWALL
1. The steel support bracket shall be field-welded to the steel pile, as
applicable per the Engineering Standard 6320 and the Contract
Documents.
2. Each steel support bracket shall be field-painted, after welding to the steel
pile. Field-paint with one coat of Carboline Carboguard 890 VOC (or
approved equal), applied to a dry film thickness of 8 mils, corresponding to
a wet film thickness of 10 mils.
E. Installing Precast Concrete Headwall Panel:
1. The precast concrete headwall panels shall be installed from the top of the
steel pile proceeding downward. The headwall panel shall make direct
contact with the soil. When and where headwall panel is not in full contact
with the soil being retained, either the headwall panel shall be wedged back
to create contact or the void shall be filled with a free-draining material, as
approved by the Engineer.
2. When utilizing headwall panels in fill situations, the backfill layers shall be
placed in accordance with Section 31 20 00.
F. Installing End Anchors:
1. Connect culvert into the precast concrete headwall panel opening with end
anchors and grout in accordance with Engineering Standard 6320 and the
Contract Documents.
2. Using pre-drilled holes in the CMP culvert as a template, drill holes into
precast concrete headwall panel and clean in accordance with epoxy
adhesive manufacturer instructions.
3. Each end anchor shall be placed within 1/4" of the specified location prior
to setting and bonding with epoxy adhesive, with nut tightened.
4. Fill annular space between headwall and CMP culvert with grout.
5. The connecting culvert shall be installed per the requirements of Section
33 42 00.
G. Installing Precast Concrete Wingwall Panel:
1. The precast concrete wingwall panels shall be installed from the top of the
steel pile proceeding downward. The wingwall panels shall make direct
contact with the soil. When and where wingwall panel is not in full contact
with the soil being retained, either the wingwall panel shall be wedged back
to create contact or the void shall be filled with a free-draining material, as
approved by the Engineer.
2. When utilizing wingwall panels in fill situations, the backfill layers shall be
placed in accordance with Section 31 20 00.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 24 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 24 AUGERCAST PILE HEADWALL AND WINGWALL
H. Installing Handrailing:
1. Install handrailing along top of headwall and wingwall in accordance with
Section 34 80 53, Engineering Standard 6320 and the Contract
Documents.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Steel Piling will be measured by the linear foot as specified in the Contract
Documents.
B. Shaft construction will be measured by the linear foot of shaft excavated and only
that portion filled with lean concrete or socket concrete, as defined in the
Contract Documents, within the specified shaft diameter.
C. End Anchor will be measured by each unit installed in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
D. Miscellaneous Steel shall be measured as shown in the Contract Documents and
as defined in Section 34 80 52.
E. Precast Concrete Headwall and Wingwall Panels shall be measured as shown in
the Contract Documents and as defined in Section 34 80 43.
F. Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP) Culvert shall be measured as shown in the
Contract Documents and as defined in Section 33 42 00.
G. Handrailing shall be measured as shown in the Contract Documents and as
defined in Section 34 80 53.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Steel Piling shall be paid per linear foot, which includes fabricating the pile
assemblies, field splicing and field trimming the steel piles, welding attachments
to the steel piles and painting the exposed portions of the steel piles and
attachments.
B. Shafts shall be paid per linear foot, which includes shaft excavation, rock
socketing if needed, temporary casing if used, slurry if used, dewatering if
needed, lean concrete backfill, socket concrete backfill, and installing the steel
pile as detailed in the Contract Documents.
C. End Anchor shall be paid per each unit, which shall include full compensation for
furnishing labor, drilling, materials, threaded rods, nuts, epoxy adhesive, grout
between headwall and culvert, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision and
incidentals as detailed in the Contract Documents.
D. Miscellaneous Steel shall be paid as defined in Section 34 80 52.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 24 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 24 AUGERCAST PILE HEADWALL AND WINGWALL
E. Precast Concrete Headwall and Wingwall Panels shall be paid as defined in
Section 34 80 43.
F. Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP) Culvert shall be paid as defined in Section
33 42 00.
G. Handrailing shall be paid as defined in Section 34 80 53.
END OF SECTION
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 24 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 31
BRIDGE DECK DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Deck drainage system.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 31 20 00 - Earthwork.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA):
1. AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 8, Part 29,
Waterproofing.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A760, Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated
for Sewers and Drains.
2. A798, Standard Practice for Installing Factory-Made Corrugated Steel
Pipes for Sewers and Other Applications.
3. A929, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-
Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Installer or Applicator:
1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the
product in the field at the Project site.
2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 31 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 31 Bridge Deck Drainage System
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Outlet/Downspout Fabrication and/or Layout Drawings:
a. Bridge drainage piping Drawings (minimum scale 1 IN equals 10
FT) with information including:
1) Dimension of piping lengths.
2) Invert or centerline elevations of piping crossings.
3) Acknowledgement of bury depth requirements.
4) Line slopes and vents.
3. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Copies of manufacturer's written directions regarding material
handling, delivery, storage and installation.
4. Deck drain layout including:
a. Elbows.
b. Couplings.
c. Lap details.
d. End treatments.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prevent damage to pipe during transit.
1. Repair abrasions, scars, and blemishes.
2. If repair of satisfactory quality cannot be achieved, replace damaged
material immediately.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 31 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 31 Bridge Deck Drainage System
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Deck Drains:
a. Contech Construction Products Inc.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Deck Drain:
1. Corrugated steel pipe for deck drains shall be galvanized steel pipes with
1-1/2” x 1/4” corrugation manufactured from galvanized steel coils
conforming to applicable requirements of ASTM A929 and manufactured
in accordance with the applicable requirements of ASTM A760.
B. Drainage Piping:
1. Drainage piping shall be as shown on the Drawings.
2.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Materials shall be sampled and tested by the current methods recommended by
ASTM.
B. The acceptance of any material by the inspector shall not be a bar to their
subsequent rejection if found defective.
1. Rejected material must be promptly removed from the job and replaced
with acceptable material.
C. No material shall be used until it has been accepted by the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Deck Drain:
1. Install corrugated steel pipe deck drain system as shown in the Drawings
and in accordance with ASTM A798.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 31 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 31 Bridge Deck Drainage System
B. Buried Piping Installation:
1. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion and contraction
movement.
2. Laying Pipe In Trench:
a. Excavate and backfill trench in accordance with Section 31 20 00.
b. Clean each pipe length thoroughly and inspect for compliance to
Specifications.
c. Grade trench bottom and excavate for pipe bell and lay pipe on
trench bottom.
d. Install gasket or joint material according to manufacturer's
directions after joints have been thoroughly cleaned and examined.
e. Except for first two (2) joints, before making final connections of
joints, install two (2) full sections of pipe with earth tamped along
side of pipe or final with bedding material placed.
f. Lay pipe in only suitable weather with good trench conditions.
1) Never lay pipe in water except where approved by Engineer.
g. Seal open end of line with watertight plug if pipe laying stopped.
h. Remove water in trench before removal of plug.
3. Lining Up Push-On Joint Piping:
a. Lay piping on route lines shown on Drawings.
b. Deflect from straight alignments or grades by vertical or horizontal
curves or offsets.
c. Observe maximum deflection values stated in manufacturer's
written literature.
d. Provide special bends when specified or where required alignment
exceeds allowable deflections stipulated.
e. Install shorter lengths of pipe in such length and number that
angular deflection of any joint, as represented by specified
maximum deflection, is not exceeded.
4. Anchorage and Blocking:
a. Provide reaction blocking, anchors, joint harnesses, or other
acceptable means for preventing movement of piping caused by
forces in or on buried piping tees, wye branches, plugs, or bends.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 31 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 31 Bridge Deck Drainage System
b. Place concrete blocking so that it extends from fitting into solid
undisturbed earth wall.
1) Concrete blocks shall not cover pipe joints.
c. Provide bearing area of concrete in accordance with drawing detail.
5. Install insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Bridge Deck Drainage system will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof
furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as
measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Bridge Deck Drainage system will be paid at the contract lump sum price.
1. The contract unit price paid for drainage system shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and
incidentals, and for doing all work involved in constructing the drainage
system, complete in place, as shown on the Drawings, as specified in this
Specification Section, and as directed by the Engineer.
2. Half-round perforated corrugated steel drain pipe, steel pipe, bottom pans,
non-perforated round corrugated steel drain pipes, all connections and
closures, joints, elbows, cleanouts and outlet hardware, concrete drainage
swale or gutter, utility excavation and backfill and other associated material
and incidentals and installation thereof will be considered part of the
drainage system and full compensation therefore will be considered as
included in the contract unit price paid for drainage system.
END OF SECTION 34 80 31
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 31 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 32
ADHERED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING FOR RAILROAD BRIDGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Waterproofing membrane.
2. Membrane protection.
3. Flashing.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 34 11 26 - Ballast.
4. Section 34 80 33 - Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) for Bridges.
5. Section 34 80 52 - Metal Fabrications.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Referenced Standards:
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA):
1. AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 8, Part 29,
Waterproofing.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A924, Standard Specifications for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
2. D2824, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Pigmented Asphalt Roof
Coatings, Nonfibered, Asbestos Fibered, and Fibered without Asbestos.
3. D6134, Standard Specification for Vulcanized Rubber Sheets Used in
Waterproofing Systems.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 32 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 32 Adhered Elastomeric Waterproofing For Railroad Bridges
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Installer or Applicator:
1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the
product in the field at the Project site.
2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Certification of applicator qualifications.
3. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
4. Waterproofing layout:
a. Waterproofing membrane sheet layout and details including:
1) Splice locations.
2) Edge details.
3) Joint details.
b. Membrane protection:
1) Asphaltic panel or asphalt plank layout.
a) Edge details.
b) Joint details.
5. Manufacturer's authorized representative written acceptance of substrate.
6. Ponded water test report with results and all remedial measures taken as
a result of a failing test.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer licensed or approved in writing by system manufacturer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 32 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 32 Adhered Elastomeric Waterproofing For Railroad Bridges
2. Installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the installation
of products specified.
3. Installer shall have completed a minimum of three (3) projects in the last
three (3) years on similar bridges.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Warranty, signed by material manufacturer, stating membrane material will be free
of manufacturing defects for a minimum period of 20 years.
B. Watertightness warranty signed by installer stating completed installation will
remain water tight for a minimum period of 10 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Waterproofing membrane:
a. Carlisle Coating and Waterproofing, Inc.
2. Membrane protection:
a. Asphalt planks:
1) Elsro, Inc.
b. Asphaltic panels:
1) W.R. Meadows, Inc.
3. Bonding adhesive:
a. Carlisle Coating and Waterproofing, Inc.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Waterproofing Membrane: Meet requirements of ASTM D6134, Type 1, EPDM or
Type 2, Butyl.
B. Membrane Protection:
1. Meet requirements of AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 8,
Part 29.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 32 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 32 Adhered Elastomeric Waterproofing For Railroad Bridges
a. Provide either asphaltic panels or asphalt planks, Type 1b.
2. Total thickness: 1 inch consisting of two (2) ½” layers.
C. Adhesive for Securing Membrane and Membrane Protection: In accordance with
the recommendations of the membrane manufacturer.
D. Cement:
1. Self-vulcanizing butyl rubber compound conforming.
2. Viscosity at 77˚ F Brookfield Viscometer (#3 Spindle at 10 rpm) 1,700-3,400
cps.
3. Total solids (minimum): 30 percent.
E. Butyl Gum Tape for Splicing Either Membrane:
1. Black, vulcanizable butyl rubber with an 8 mil polyethylene film backing.
2. Tape thickness: 30 (+4) mils, including the backing.
F. Anti-bonding Paper:
1. Tough paper with a weight not less than 5 lbs per 100 sf.
2. In accordance with the recommendations of the membrane and membrane
protection manufacturers.
G. Galvanized Sheet Metal: Meet the requirements of ASTM A924.
H. Steel Flashing, Flashing Anchors and Armor Plate: In accordance with Section 34
80 52.
I. Ballast: In accordance with Section 34 11 26.
2.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Sample and test materials by the current methods recommended by ASTM.
B. Acceptance of any material by the inspector shall not be a bar to its subsequent
rejection if found defective.
1. Promptly remove rejected material from the job and replaced with
acceptable material.
C. Do not use any material until it has been accepted by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 32 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 32 Adhered Elastomeric Waterproofing For Railroad Bridges
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Waterproofing Membrane:
1. Apply adhesive to ballast retainers and entire surface to be waterproofed.
a. Apply in a thin layer (by using a roller or brush as recommended by
the manufacturer) at a minimum rate of one (1) gal per 60 sf based
on both mating surfaces.
2. Membrane sheets:
a. Position and draw tight without stretching.
b. Uniformly roll up half of the membrane in a direction away from the
starting edge or subsequent splice.
c. Apply adhesive to the exposed area.
d. Allow adhesive to dry so as to not stick to a dry finger touch and all
solvent is evaporated.
e. Unroll the membrane and press firmly and uniformly in place, using
care to avoid trapping of air.
f. Repeat the same procedure for the remaining half of the membrane
sheets.
g. Avoid wrinkles and buckles.
h. Position each succeeding sheet to fit the previously installed sheet
and splice.
3. Splices:
a. Lap type as shown on the Drawings.
b. Clean all seam, lap and splice areas with heptane, hexane, toluene,
trichloroethylene or white gasoline, using a clean cloth, mop or
similar synthetic cleaning device.
c. Spread cement continuously on seam, lap and splice areas at a
uniform rate of not less than 2 gal per 150 sf based on both mating
surfaces.
d. After cement is allowed to dry until it will not stick to a dry finger
touch, apply butyl gum tape to cemented area of membrane, press
firmly into place, obtain full contact.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 32 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 32 Adhered Elastomeric Waterproofing For Railroad Bridges
e. Avoid bridging and wrinkles.
f. Reinforce corner splices with two (2) continuous layers of rubber
membrane over one (1) layer of butyl tape.
4. Flash all projecting elements passing through membrane waterproofing
with prefabricated or field-fabricated boots or fitted coverings, as necessary
to provide watertight construction.
a. Use Butyl gum tape between layers of rubber membrane.
5. Construct waterproofing at expansion joints of bridge decks, as shown on
the Drawings.
6. Patch any holes in the membrane sheeting with a minimum overlap of 4
inches and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Exercise care to prevent damage to the waterproofing membrane by men
or equipment during construction.
B. Membrane Protection:
1. Asphaltic panels:
a. Apply in two (2) layers with the joints staggered.
1) Lay panels tightly jointed.
2) Adhesive: Same as specified for the Butyl rubber or EPDM
membrane.
3) Fill any voids between the panels with a material compatible
to both the membrane and the panel.
b. Where edges or protrusions of asphaltic panels are exposed to
prolonged sunlight exposure, coat exposed areas with Fiber
Aluminum Roof Coating meeting ASTM D2824, Type II at a rate of
12 sf per gallon, for a 1/8 inches thickness.
2. Asphalt planks:
a. Lay in a coating of bonding adhesive.
b. Adhesive: Same as specified for the Butyl rubber or EPDM
membrane.
c. Adhesive: Apply at a rate of not less than 1 gal per 100 sf.
d. Fill any voids between the panels with a material compatible to both
the membrane and the panel.
C. Steel Flashing:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 32 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 32 Adhered Elastomeric Waterproofing For Railroad Bridges
1. Attach with bolts per the Drawings.
2. Refer to Specification Section 34 80 52 for expansion bolt requirements.
D. Waterproofing Protection:
1. As soon as the membrane protection has been completed, cover the
waterproofing with HMA on concrete bridge decks or with a 6 inches layer
of ballast on steel bridge decks to protect the waterproofing from sunlight.
2. Do not place any equipment on the waterproofing prior to placement of the
Waterproofing Protection.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Employ and pay for services of material manufacturer's field service
representative(s) to:
1. Supervise installation.
2. Sign and provide SCRRA with a written warranty.
B. Ponded water testing: On bridges with entire deck waterproofed with membrane
waterproofing:
1. Pond 2 inches of water for 24 hours on all horizontal surfaces:
a. Plug all openings as required.
b. Protect adjacent areas from water damage.
c. Remove all water after test.
d. Repair all leaks and other discrepancies as identified by
manufacturer's authorized representative.
e. Retest repaired areas until satisfactory test results are obtained.
f. Furnish written report.
PART 4 - MEASURE AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Adhered Elastomeric Waterproofing for Railroad Bridges will be measured by the
unit or fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable,
as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 32 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 32 Adhered Elastomeric Waterproofing For Railroad Bridges
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Adhered Elastomeric Waterproofing for Railroad Bridges furnished and completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit
Price, as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include
full compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Adhesive, asphalt planks or sheets, steel sheeting, steel flashing, bolts and
connectors for flashing, armor plates, adhesive anchors, butyl rubber or EPDM
waterproofing membrane and other associated materials and incidentals and
installation thereof shall be considered part of the waterproofing and full
compensation therefore shall be considered as included in the contract unit price
paid for waterproofing.
END OF SECTION 34 80 32
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 32 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 33
HOT MIX ASPHALT (HMA) FOR TRACK AND BRIDGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hot mix asphalt (HMA) for track underlayment, bridge decks, and bridge
approaches.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 32 12 00 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) Pavement
4. Section 34 11 27 - Sub-Ballast and Aggregate Base.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. State of California, Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications
(Caltrans), current edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Asphalt design mix.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 33 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 33 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) For Track and Bridges
1.04 DELIVERABLES
A. Submit records of delivery of asphalt materials, identifying shipment numbers,
dates and quantities, material designations and temperature at the time of
placement.
B. Submit copies of aggregate tests, penetrations of asphalt cement, and
percentages by weight and number of pounds of each of the materials making up
the batch.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Asphalts:
1. Asphalt binder to be mixed with aggregate shall be steam-refined paving
asphalt of the grade designated in the special provisions.
a. The asphalt binder shall be in conformance with the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 92.
2. The amount of asphalt binder to be mixed with aggregate for asphalt
concrete shall be in conformance with the requirements of the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 92.
3. Liquid asphalt for the prime coat shall be of the grade designated by the
contract item or specified in the special provisions.
a. The liquid asphalt shall be in conformance with the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 94.
4. Asphaltic emulsion for the tack coat shall be of the grade designated by the
Engineer.
a. The asphaltic emulsion shall be in conformance with the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 94.
5. Paving asphalt to be used as a binder for pavement reinforcing fabric shall
be a steam-refined paving asphalt in conformance with the Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 92.
a. The paving asphalt shall be PG 70-10.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 33 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 33 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) For Track and Bridges
B. Aggregate:
1. Aggregate shall be clean and free from decomposed materials, organic
material and other deleterious substances.
a. Coarse aggregate shall be material that is retained on the No. 4
sieve.
b. Fine aggregate shall be material that is passing the No. 4 sieve.
c. Supplemental fine aggregate is added fine material passing the No.
30 sieve, including, but not limited to, cement and stored fines from
dust collectors.
2. Aggregate grading shall be in conformance with the Caltrans Standard
Specifications, Section 39.
C. HMA for track underlayment: Type A with ¾” maximum, coarse aggregate
gradation.
D. Prime Coat:
1. Prime coat shall be an emulsified asphalt Grade RS-2, conforming to
Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 94.
E. Tack Coat:
1. Tack coat shall be a liquid asphalt Type SS-1, conforming to Caltrans
Standard Specifications, Section 94.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. When placing HMA for track underlay, prepare subgrade in accordance with
Section 31 20 00.
B. Schedule placement of asphalt paving material when the precipitation probability,
within 3 hours prior to the start of such operations, is less than 50 percent.
C. Laying of HMA shall not be permitted in wet weather.
D. Spreading of HMA shall not be permitted when the mixing temperature of HMA is
below 250˚ F.
E. HMA shall only be placed when the atmospheric temperature is above 50˚ F.
F. When HMA is to be placed on an existing asphalt concrete, concrete, or brick
surface, broom the existing surface clean prior to the application of the prime coat.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 33 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 33 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) For Track and Bridges
1. Repair holes and depressions in existing surfaces by removal to sound
material and replace with an asphalt-aggregate patching material.
2. Compact patch to produce a tight surface conforming to the adjacent
paving area.
3. Stabilize rocking Portland cement concrete slabs by undersealing or
cracking and seating.
4. Fill wide joints and cracks with asphaltic concrete/sand mix material and
compact.
3.02 SPREADING
A. The depositing, distributing, and spreading of the HMA shall be accomplished in a
single, continuous operation by means of a mechanical spreader or a grader.
1. When laying HMA for track underlay and the use of a mechanical spreader
or a grader is impractical, the Contractor must submit a request for the use
of alternate equipment to the Engineer for review.
B. HMA for bridge and bridge approaches shall conform to the following thickness
requirements:
1. The track underlay for the bridge approaches shall be permitted to be
placed in one 8 inches lift.
2. The traffic surface shall be permitted to be placed in one 4 inches thick lift.
C. The prime coat shall be applied at a rate of 0.25 gal/sq yd and shall be in
conformance with the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
D. The tack coat shall be applied in one application at a rate of 0.02 gal to 0.10 gal/sq
yd of surface covered and shall be in conformance with the Caltrans Standard
Specifications, Section 39.
E. Following application of the tack coat, the HMA shall be spread in conformance
with the Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 39.
1. Successive lifts may be laid upon previously laid lifts as soon as the
previous lift has cooled sufficiently to show no displacement under
equipment or loaded material delivery trucks.
3.03 COMPACTION
A. Rollers:
1. Steel-wheeled, tandem type power driven rollers shall provide a pressure
of not less than 225 lbs/in width of main roll.
a. Rolls shall be smooth and without flat spots or other imperfections.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 33 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 33 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) For Track and Bridges
2. Pneumatic rubber-tired rollers shall be self-propelled with wheels mounted,
grouped and spaced to provide uniform coverage with each pass.
a. Rear group wheels shall not follow the tracks of forward group
wheels.
b. Maximum wheel load shall be 5,600 lbs.
c. Tire compression on pavement, where the area of contact is
measured on a hard, unyielding surface, shall be 80 psi plus five (5)
psi for each wheel.
d. The total maximum load per axle, whether single axle or a group of
axles in the same alignment, shall be 22,400 lbs.
e. Wheel loads and tire pressures shall be controlled to produce the
required degree of compaction without rutting of the surface to be
rolled.
B. Rolling:
1. Proceed continuously at the following rates:
a. For track underlay mixture, when spread by hand, not in excess of
400 sq yd/hr, per roller.
b. For track underlay, when spread by machine, not in excess of 600
sq yd/hr, per roller.
2. Immediately after spreading, thoroughly compact by rolling with approved
rollers continuously from commencement to final completion at a speed not
exceeding three (3) miles per hours.
3. Make initial rolling, using tandem type rollers, parallel to the center line of
the paved surface beginning at the edges of the paved surface and working
toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by one-half the rear
wheel roller.
a. Immediately following the initial rolling, further compact by
pneumatic rubber-tired rollers or steel wheel vibratory tandem type
rollers making four (4) passes.
b. Smooth shallow ruts and ridges with tandem rollers immediately
following the rubber-tired rolling.
4. First make final roll longitudinally with the paved surface and then
diagonally or at right angles.
a. Continue until further compression results; the mixture has cooled;
no marks show under the roller, and the surface is smooth and free
from depressions, waves, bunches, and unevenness.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 33 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 33 Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) For Track and Bridges
5. Test after the mixture has been rolled with approved straight edge and
surface testing machine laid parallel to the centerline of the paved surface.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Prime Coat and Tack Coat will not be measured for payment. Costs associated
with the prime or tack coats will be considered as incidental to the Hot Mix Asphalt
Pavement.
B. Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof Installed
in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the Engineer.
The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved
Schedule of Values as derived from the Contract Drawings will be used as the
basis for this measurement. Separate measurements will be made for each
specified thickness of asphaltic concrete Material as included on the approved
Schedule of Values.
C. The mass of the material will be determined as provided in Section 9-1.01,
“Measurement of Quantities”, of the current Caltrans Standard Specifications.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement constructed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price of the specified type and
thickness as included on the approved Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This
price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment,
supplies, supervision, and incidentals necessary for Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement
described by the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 34 80 33
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 33 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 43
PRECAST AND PRESTRESSED CONCRETE FOR RAILROAD BRIDGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Precast and prestressed concrete.
B. Related Specifications Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel.
4. Section 03 31 00 – Structural Steel.
5. Section 34 80 61 - Painting and Protective Coatings for Railroad Bridges.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA).
1. Chapter 8 - Concrete Structures and Foundations.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished,
Standard Quality.
3. A416, Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for
Prestressed Concrete.
4. A496, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
5. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
6. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
7. C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete For Railroad Bridges
8. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
9. C949, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
10. C1260, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates
(Mortar-Bar Method).
11. D412, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic
Elastomers—Tension.
12. D573, Standard Test Method for Rubber—Deterioration in an Air Oven.
13. D1149, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Deterioration-Cracking in an
Ozone Controlled Environment.
14. D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness.
15. D4711, Standard Test Method for Sulfonic and Sulfuric Acids in
Alkylbenzene Sulfonic Acids.
16. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
Inspection and/or Testing.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. A5.1, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc
Welding.
2. A5.5, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc
Welding.
3. D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel.
4. D1.4, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
D. Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI):
1. PCI MNL-116-Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of
Structural Precast Concrete Products.
2. PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Product technical data including:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete For Railroad Bridges
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Sizes, types and manufacturer of neoprene bearing pads.
d. Hardware to be utilized to support suspended appurtenances.
3. Shop Drawings and erection plans for precast units, their connections and
supports showing:
a. Member size and location.
b. Size, configuration, location and quantity of reinforcing bars and
prestressing strands.
c. Initial prestress forces.
d. Size and location of openings verified by Contractor.
e. Size, number, and locations of embedded metal items and
connections.
f. Required concrete strengths.
g. Identification of each unit using same standard marking numbers
as used to mark actual units.
4. Concrete mix design(s) including submittal information defined in
Section 03 31 00.
5. Copies of source quality control tests.
6. Certification of manufacturer's testing facility qualifications.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Provide precast and prestressed concrete units produced by a certified
manufacturer by the Prestressed Concrete Institute Plant Certification
Program.
a. Manufacturer shall be certified in Product Group and Category B1
for non-prestressed precast concrete.
b. Manufacturer shall be certified in Product Group and Category B4
for prestressed precast concrete.
2. Provide units manufactured by plant which has regularly and continuously
engaged in manufacture of units of same type as those required for a
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete For Railroad Bridges
minimum of three (3) years.
3. Assure manufacturer's testing facilities meet requirements of ASTM E329.
4. Welding operators and processes to be qualified in accordance with:
a. AWS D1.1 for welding steel shapes and plates.
b. AWS D1.4 for welding reinforcing bars.
5. Welding operators to have passed qualification tests for type of welding
required during the previous 12 months prior to commencement of welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors:
a. Nelson Stud Welding Div., TRW, Inc.
b. KSM Division, Omark Industries.
2. Bearing pads:
a. Voss Engineering, Inc. 'Fiberlast'
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Embedded Steel Plates and Shapes: ASTM A36.
B. Elastomeric Bearing Pads:
1. AREMA Chapter 15, Article 10.6.2.
C. Random Oriented Fiber Elastomeric Pads: Made of high-quality ozone resistant
virgin elastomer combined with synthetic fibers. Pads shall conform to the
following minimum material properties:
1. Hardness (Shore A, ASTM D2240): 80 ±5.
2. Compression:
a. Minimum Ultimate Strength: 8000 psi.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete For Railroad Bridges
3. Shear Modulus (G): 230 ±30 psi Based on tests conducted according to
70˚ to 80˚ F under uniform compressive stresses of 500, 1000 and 1500
psi and at an applied horizontal shear plus slip strain of 50 percent. This
value is applicable to both concrete-to-concrete and steel-to-concrete
surfaces. G is constant in all directions parallel to the bearing plane.
4. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412, Die C): 1000 ±100 psi
5. Elongation:
a. Ultimate Elongation, %: 40 percent minimum.
b. Ozone Resistance (per ASTM D1149) Exposed 50 hours @
100 pphm @ 100˚ F Elongation: 40 percent minimum.
c. Heat Aging (per ASTM D573) 70 hrs @ 212˚ F in forced air oven
Elongation, % Change: —25 percent max. 6.
d. Oil Imersion Oil Immersion per ASTM D4711 70 HRS @ 212˚ F in
ASTM #3 oil Volume Change, %: 125 percent max.
D. Cement:
1. Comply with ASTM C150, Type I or III.
E. Aggregates for Normal Weight Concrete:
1. ASTM C33 with coarse aggregate meeting the gradation for size 67 as
stated in ASTM C33.
2. All fine aggregate to be natural not manufactured.
F. Admixtures:
1. Only liquid admixtures may be used.
2. All admixtures must be from same manufacturer.
3. Air entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM C260 and shall be used
to produce 7 percent ±1 percent entrained air in the concrete after all
admixtures have been incorporated.
4. Water reducing admixtures shall be used only with the approval of the
Engineer and shall conform to ASTM C949, Types A, B, D, or E.
5. High-range water reducers (superplasticizers) and retarding admixtures, in
quantities appropriate for the ambient temperatures, may be permitted,
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
6. The use of calcium chloride or any admixture containing chloride ions will
not be permitted.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete For Railroad Bridges
G. Flyash:
1. Flyash, Type C, meeting the requirements of ASTM C618 may be used as
a cement replacement with the approval of the Engineer.
a. Type F may be used to modify potentially reactive aggregates.
b. This mix shall be subject to the requirements of ASTM C1260.
c. Flyash may replace up to 15 percent, by weight, of the cement.
H. Water:
1. Potable, clean.
2. Free of oils, acids, and organic matter.
I. Maximum total chloride ion content contributed from all ingredients of concrete
including water, aggregates, cement and admixtures measured as a weight
percent of cement to not exceed 0.06 for prestressed concrete and 0.10 for all
other precast concrete.
J. Prestressing Strands:
1. 270K high tensile strength uncoated seven (7) wire strand.
2. Manufacture and test strands in accordance with ASTM A416.
K. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: See Section 03 21 00.
L. Headed Studs:
1. ASTM A108.
2. Minimum yield strength: 50,000 psi.
3. Minimum tensile strength: 60,000 psi.
M. Deformed Bar Anchors:
1. ASTM A496.
2. Minimum tensile strength: 80,000 psi.
3. Minimum yield strength: 70,000 psi.
N. Electrodes:
1. E70 series conforming to AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5 for welding steel shapes
and plates.
2. E90 series conforming to AWS A5.5 for welding rebar.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete For Railroad Bridges
O. Grout:
1. Grout shall consist of one part Type III Portland Cement to three parts of
fine aggregate, by weight, mixed with a gaging solution made of one part
Sika Set to five parts by volume.
2. The following mix proportions will yield one cubic foot of grout:
a. 35 lbs cement.
b. 105 lbs fine aggregate.
c. 1.25 gal water.
d. 1 qt Sika Set.
3. At temperatures above 50˚ F grout will take initial set in approximately 3
hours and reach design strength in approximately 24 hours.
2.03 MIXES
A. See Section 03 31 00.
B. Do not begin fabrication of units until concrete mix design(s) have been approved
by Engineer.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Do not fabricate units until Shop Drawings and Mix Design(s) have been approved
by Engineer and returned to Contractor and support locations have been field
verified by Contractor.
B. Manufacture, quality, dimensional and erection tolerances of all units to be in
accordance with AREMA Chapter 8 and PCI MNL-116.
C. Cast all members in smooth rigid forms which will provide straight, true members
of uniform thickness and uniform color and finish.
D. Use sand cement grout mixture to fill all air pockets and voids, and to repair
chipped edges.
E. Finish all repairs smooth and to match adjacent surface texture and color.
F. Incorporate embedded plates, angles, lifting devices, and other inserts into
members at time of manufacture.
1. Provide embedded items as shown on the Plans unless prior approval is
received from Engineer to do otherwise.
2. Cast lifting devices into units as shown on Plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete For Railroad Bridges
a. Remove or fill lifting devices after units are erected.
G. Automatically weld headed studs and deformed bar anchors to members to
provide full penetration weld between studs, bar anchors and members they are
attached to.
H. Weld steel shapes and plates per AWS D1.1 and reinforcing steel per AWS D1.4.
I. Mark each unit as indicated on the erection plans.
1. Place mark on non-exposed-to-view surface.
J. Coat or finish ends of exposed prestressing strands to prevent rusting.
K. Fabricate the following types of precast and prestressed units:
1. Precast slab beams.
a. Reinforce as indicated.
2. Precast, prestressed slab beams.
a. Reinforce as indicated.
3. Precast, prestressed double-box beams.
a. Reinforce as indicated.
4. Precast concrete members as shown on Plans:
a. Reinforce as indicated.
2.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Units shall be stored in such a way as to permit the Inspector's access to all sides
at all times, and the Fabricator's access for shipment without additional moving.
B. Transportation of prestressed units shall not be undertaken until the full 28 day
concrete strength has been achieved, or by order of the Engineer.
C. Units shall be handled such that the points of the support and direction of the
reactions with respect to the unit are approximately the same during transportation
and storage as when the unit is in its final position.
1. Care shall be taken during storage, hoisting, and handling of the precast
units to prevent cracking or damage.
2. Units damaged by improper storage or handling shall be replaced or
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer by the Contractor at his
expense.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete For Railroad Bridges
D. Units shall be stored above ground on skids or other supports to keep items free
of dirt and other foreign debris.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. During production of precast concrete units, conduct strength tests of concrete
placed in units as required in Specification Section 03 31 00 for concrete placed
during fabrication.
1. 4 inches dia. x 8 inches cylinders will be allowed for testing.
2. Results of strength tests to be sent to The Engineer, Contractor and
SCRRA within 24 hours.
3. Test reports to indicate units they represent.
B. When approved by Engineer, strength tests may be made by precast manufacturer
after he has submitted certification that his testing facilities meet the requirements
of ASTM E329.
C. The SCRRA must be allowed to inspect all Contract work at his own discretion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify acceptability and location of supports to receive units.
1. Check bearing surfaces to determine that they are level and uniform.
B. Do not place design live load on structure until supports have reached their 28 day
required compressive strengths.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Give consideration to possible lack of stability or capacity of partially completed
structure.
B. Contractor to be responsible for guying, shoring, and bracing individual members
as necessary to resist forces due to wind, erection, or any other source that may
occur before structure is completed.
C. Use only erection equipment adequate for placing units at lines and elevations
indicated on Plans.
1. Do not damage units or existing construction during erection.
2. Erect units using lifting devices cast into the units.
D. Weld steel shapes and plates per AWS D1.1 and reinforcing steel per AWS D1.4.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete For Railroad Bridges
E. Coat adjoining surfaces of wingwalls and end caps with grout prior to wingwall
installation.
F. After all precast units are erected and all precast unit connections have been
made, coat all exposed surfaces of the connections as indicated on Plans.
1. See Section 34 80 61.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Causes for rejection of units include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Cracked units.
2. Chipped, broken, or spalled edges.
3. Units not within allowable casting tolerances.
4. Voids or air pockets which, in opinion of Engineer, are too numerous or too
large.
5. Non-uniform finish or appearance.
6. Low concrete strength.
7. Improperly placed embedded items and/or openings.
8. Exposed wire mesh, reinforcing or prestressing strands.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Precast and prestressed concrete members will be measured by the unit or fraction
thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and
as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Precast and prestressed concrete members furnished and completed in
accordance with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price,
as listed on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 43 Precast and Prestressed Concrete For Railroad Bridges
B. Connection rods and associated hardware and other materials, bearing pads and
embedded steel items shall be considered part of the member and full
compensation therefore shall be considered as included in the contract unit price
paid for furnishing and erecting the precast and prestressed unit in-place.
END OF SECTION 34 80 43
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 43 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 51
STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR RAILROAD BRIDGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural steel, including the fabrication and erection of framing and
bracing members, including connections.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 03 31 00 - Structural Concrete.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. 303, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges dated
March, 2005.
2. Quality Certification Program for Fabricators.
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA).
1. Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 15.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A6, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural
Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling.
2. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
3. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
4. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
5. A307, Standard Specifications for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
psi Tensile Strength.
6. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
7. A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
8. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
9. A588, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
with 50 ksi Minimum Yield Point to 4 inches Thick1.
10. A709, Standard Specification for Carbon and High-Strength Low-Alloy
Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars and Quenched-and-Tempered
Alloy Structural Steel Plates for Bridges.
11. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
12. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi
Yield Strength.
D. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. A5.1, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc
Welding.
2. A5.5, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc
Welding.
3. A5.17, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for
Submerged Arc Welding.
4. A5.18, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas
Shielded Arc Welding.
5. A5.23, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for
Submerged Arc Welding.
6. A5.28, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas
Shielded Arc Welding.
7. D1.5, Bridge Welding Code - Steel (referred herein as AWS Code).
8. Steel stud connectors and their installation to comply with requirements of
AWS Code.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Fabrication and/or layout Plans:
a. Prepare Shop Drawings under National Institute of Steel Detailing
Quality Procedures Program certification.
b. Complete Shop Drawings for all of the work showing clearly all
pieces, sizes, dimensions, details, connections materials and shop
coatings.
1) All Shop Drawings must be checked and signed "approved"
before submittal.
2) Show all cuts, copes, and holes.
3) Indicate all shop and field bolts.
4) Indicate all shop and field welds using AWS symbols.
5) Be reviewed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
retained by Contractor to verify conformance with design
criteria stipulated in the Contract Documents.
c. Prepare complete erection Plans showing the location and marks
of all pieces.
1) Copies of up-to-date erection Plans shall accompany the
Shop Drawings.
a) Use match marks on the erection Plans to indicate
the sheet number on which each particular member
is detailed.
3. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
c. Detailed supplemental specification relating to load indicator
washers or high-strength bolts - alternate design for approval of
Engineer (submitted at Contractor's option if desired by Contractor
for use).
d. Source and certification of quality for high-strength bolts, nuts and
washers.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
4. Certifications:
a. Certificates of compliance with standards specified for all major
components and fasteners incorporated into work.
b. Copies of current welding certificates for each welder assigned to
perform welding indicating compliance with testing specified by
AWS.
c. Welder qualification data and prequalified procedures.
5. Test reports:
a. Certified copies of mill tests.
b. Manufacturer's load test and temperature sensitivity data for
expansion anchor bolts and adhesive anchor bolts.
c. Testing agency inspection and test reports for structural steel work
in the shop and in the field.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Steel fabricator:
a. Minimum of 10 years experience in fabrication of structural steel
and shall be certified under AISC Quality Certification Program
Category III.
b. Use a Professional Engineer on fabrication staff.
2. Steel erector:
a. Minimum of 10 years of experience in erection of structural steel.
3. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with
AWS.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store steel members above ground on skids or other supports.
1. Keep free of dirt and other foreign material and protect against corrosion.
1.06 DEFINITION
A. Code: AISC 303, Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
B. SCRRA: May mean the SCRRA's Designated Representative for Construction as
defined by the Building Code.
C. Galvanizing: Hot-dipped galvanizing per ASTM A153 with minimum coating of 2.0
oz of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless noted otherwise
or dictated by standard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. High-strength bolts:
a. Bethlehem Steel Corporation.
b. Lewis Bolt & Nut Company.
c. Nucor Fasteners.
d. St. Louis Screw and Bolt Company.
2. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors:
a. Nelson Stud Welding Division, TRW, Inc.
b. Stud Welding Products, Inc.
3. Expansion anchor bolts:
a. Kwik Bolts by Hilti, Inc.
b. Trubolt by ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Powerbolt by Powers Rawl.
4. Adhesive anchors bolts:
a. HVA Adhesive Anchor System by Hilti.
b. HIT HY 150 Adhesive Anchor by Hilti.
c. HSE 2411 Epoxy Adhesive Anchor by Hilti.
d. EPCON Ceramic 6 Epoxy by ITW Ramset/Red Head.
e. Power Fast by Powers Rawl.
f. Needle Capsule Anchor Systems by Powers Rawl.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Steel, Structural Shapes and Plate (unless noted otherwise on Plans):
1. All main load-carrying members: ASTM A709, Grade to be noted on Plans.
B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36.
C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B (Type E or S) (Fy=35).
D. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS):
1. Round: ASTM A500 Grade B or C.
2. Square or rectangular: ASTM A500 Grade B or C.
E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts and Washers, ASTM A325 with ASTM A563 nuts:
1. High-strength bolts:
a. Provide two (2) ASTM F436 washers for all bolts.
b. Provide beveled washers at connections of sloped/tapered
sections.
c. Type to match.
F. Welding Electrodes (AWS):
1. Shielded metal arc: AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5, E70XX or E801X-X.
2. Submerged arc: AWS A5.17 or AWS A5.23, F7XX-EXXX or F8XX-EXXX-
XX.
3. Gas metal arc: AWS A5.18, E70S-X or E70U-1 or AWS A5.28, ER805-XX,
E80C-XXX.
G. Anchor Rods and Bolts:
1. ASTM F1554, Grade 55 with weldability supplement S1 for threaded rods.
H. Deformed Anchor Rods:
1. Deformed anchor rods:
a. ASTM F1554, Grade 36.
b. Minimum yield strength: 36,000 psi.
c. Minimum tensile strength: 58,000 psi.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
d. Straight, unless indicated otherwise.
I. Nonshrink Grout: See Section 34 80 41.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Comply with requirements of AREMA Chapter 15 and AISC Specification with
modifications and additional requirements specified herein.
1. Identify high-strength steel material in fabricated members in accordance
with ASTM A6.
B. Minimize the amount of field welding.
1. Shop assemble components into largest size possible commensurate with
transportation and handling limitations.
2. Shop connections: Bolted with high-strength bolts or welded.
C. One-sided or other types of eccentric connections not indicated will not be
permitted without prior approval.
D. Field Connections: Provide bolts for all field connections except where shown
otherwise on the Plans.
1. Use high-strength bolts unless shown or specified otherwise.
2. If structural steel details shown on design Plans are not compatible with
selected erection procedures, submit proposed modifications for review.
3. Connections to structural steel provided by others: Provide all connectors
and coordinate location of bolt holes to match connection holes in steel
provided by others.
E. Cut, drill, or punch holes in accordance with AREMA Section 15.3.2.6 and AREMA
Section 15.3.2.7.
F. Make splices only where indicated or where approved.
G. Cope at 45 degrees, corners of stiffener plates at junction of member flanges with
webs.
H. Flame cut bevels for welds, provided such cutting is done automatically.
1. Leave free of burrs and slag by grinding or planing the cut edges.
I. Grind smooth all rough welds and sharp steel edges shall be ground to
approximately 1/8” radius.
J. Tolerances (unless noted otherwise on Plans):
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
1. ASTM A6: When material received from the mill does not satisfy ASTM A6
tolerances for camber, profile, flatness or sweep, the Contractor is
permitted to perform corrective work by the use of controlled heating, and
mechanical straightening, subject to the limitations of the AISC
Specification.
2. Fabrication tolerance:
a. Member length:
1) Framed members 30 feet or less: 1/16”.
a) Over 30 feet: 1/8”.
b. Member straightness:
1) 10 percent of the unbraced length multiplied by 1/16” or ¼”,
whichever is greater.
c. Specified member camber (except compression members):
1) 10 percent of the unbraced length multiplied by 1/16” or ¼”,
whichever is greater.
2) Beams/trusses without specified camber shall be fabricated
so after erection, camber is upward.
3) Camber shall be measured in fabrication shop in unstressed
condition.
d. At bolted splices, depth deviation shall be taken up by filler plates.
1) At welded joints, adjust weld profile to conform to variation
in depth.
2) Slope weld surface per AWS requirements.
e. Finished members shall be free from twists, bends and open joints.
1) Sharp kinks, bends and deviation from the above tolerances
are cause for rejection of material.
2.04 WELDING
A. Comply with AREMA Chapter 15, AWS Code, and other requirements indicated
herein, for all welding, techniques of welding employed, appearance and quality of
welds, and methods used to correct defective work.
1. Qualify joint welding procedures or test in accordance with AWS
qualification procedures.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
B. Test and qualify welders, welding operators and tackers in compliance with AWS
Code for position and type of welding to which they will be assigned.
1. Conduct tests in presence of approved testing agency.
2. Certification within previous 12 months will be acceptable, provided
samples of the welder's work are satisfactory.
C. Welding of Fracture Critical Members shall be in accordance with the requirements
of AREMA Section 15.1.14.
D. Before Starting Welding:
1. Carefully plumb and align members in compliance with specified
requirements.
2. Fully tighten bolts.
3. Comply with Section 3 of AWS Code for assembly and surface preparation.
4. Preheat base metal to temperature stated in AWS Code.
a. When no preheat temperature is given in AWS Code and base
metal is below 50˚ F, preheat base metal to at least 70˚ F.
b. Maintain temperature during welding.
c. Preheat surface of all base metal within distance from point of
welding equal to thickness of thicker part being welded or 3 inches,
whichever is greater, to specified preheat temperature.
d. Maintain this temperature during welding.
5. Each welder shall use identifying mark at welds.
E. Make flange welds before making web welds.
F. Where groove welds have back-up plates, make first three (3) passes with 1/8”
round electrodes.
1. Use backup plates in accordance with AWS Code, extending minimum of
1 inch either side of joint.
G. Flame cut edges of stiffener plates at shop or field butt weld.
1. Do not shear.
H. Grind flush web fillets at webs notched to receive backup plates for flange groove
welds.
I. Low Hydrogen Electrodes: Dry and store electrodes in compliance with AWS
Code.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
J. Do not perform welding when ambient temperature is lower than 0˚ F or where
surfaces are wet or exposed to rain, snow, or high wind, or when welders are
exposed to inclement conditions.
K. Deformed Anchors Rods:
1. Automatically end welded in accordance with the AWS Code and
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Fillet welding of deformed bar anchors is not allowed unless approved by
Engineer.
2.05 SHOP COATING
A. Provide suitable methods of handling and transporting pained steel to avoid
damage to coating.
B. Do not coat following surfaces:
1. Machined surfaces, surfaces adjacent to field welds, and surfaces fully
embedded in concrete.
2. All other members for which no coating is specified.
C. Clean thoroughly all surfaces not coated before shipping.
1. Remove loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil and grease.
2. Protect machined surfaces.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor must pay for all inspection and testing:
1. Testing:
a. Employ and pay for the services of a qualified independent testing
agency to inspect and test all structural steel work for compliance
with Contract Documents.
b. Independent testing agency shall have a minimum of five (5) years
performing similar work and shall be subject to SCRRA's approval.
B. Responsibilities of Testing Agency:
1. Inspect shop and field welding in accordance with AREMA Section 15.3.5.5
including the following non-destructive testing:
a. All full-penetration welds in girder webs and flanges shall be
inspected by the radiographic method.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
b. All flange to web welds shall be inspected by the ultrasound
method.
c. All fillet welds on bearing stiffeners shall be inspected by the
ultrasound method.
d. At least 25 percent of all other welds shall be inspected by the
ultrasonic or magnetic particle method.
1) If any defects are found, 100 percent inspection by the
ultrasonic or magnetic particle shall be required.
e. Inspection of welded work for Fracture Critical Members shall be in
accordance with AREMA Chapter 15.
f. Time delay prior to NDT of weld repairs to groove welds of
ASTM A588 or ASTM A709 material over 2 inches in thickness
subject to tensile stress, shall be 16 hours minimum.
2. Inspect high-strength bolting in accordance with AREMA Section 15.3.5.4.
3. Inspect structural steel which has been erected.
4. Prepare and submit inspection and test reports to Engineer.
a. Assist Engineer to determine corrective measures necessary for
defective work.
C. All spans shall be shop-assembled and piece marked. During assembly and
reaming, all bolts shall be placed in holes as work progresses to assure proper fit.
Spans may be disassembled prior to shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Contractor is solely responsible for safety.
1. Construction means and methods and sequencing of work is the
prerogative of the Contractor.
2. Partially complete structural members shall not be loaded without an
investigation by the Contractor.
3. Until all elements of the permanent structure and lateral bracing system are
complete, provide temporary bracing designed, furnished, and installed by
the Contractor for the partially complete structure.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
B. Adequate temporary bracing to provide safety, stability and to resist all loads to
which the partially complete structure may be subjected, including wind,
construction activities, and operation of equipment is the responsibility of the
Contractor.
1. Use temporary bracing to maintain the structural framing plumb and in
proper alignment until permanent connections are made, the succeeding
work is in place, and temporary work is no longer necessary.
2. Use temporary guys, bracing, shoring, and other work to prevent injury or
damage to adjacent work or construction from stresses due to erection
procedures and operation of erection equipment, construction loads, and
wind.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the temporary bracing
system and must consider the sequence and schedule of placement of
such elements and effects of loads imposed on the structural steel
members by partially or completely installed work, including work of all
other trades.
a. If not obvious from experience or from the Plans, the Contractor
shall confer with the Engineer to identify those structural steel
elements that must be complete before the temporary bracing
system is removed.
4. Remove and dispose of all temporary work and facilities off-site.
C. Examine work-in-place on which specified work is in any way dependent to ensure
that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of the work.
1. Report defects in work-in-place which may influence satisfactory
completion of the work.
2. Absence of such notification will be construed as acceptance of work-in-
place.
D. Field Measurement:
1. Take field measurements as necessary to verify or supplement dimensions
indicated on the Plans.
2. Contractor responsible for the accurate fit of the work.
E. Check the elevations of all finished pier caps and the location and alignment of all
anchor bolts and bolt holes before starting erection.
1. Notify Engineer of any errors or deviations found by such checking.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Use light drifting necessary to draw holes together.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
1. Drifting to match unfair holes is not allowed.
B. Welding:
1. Conform to AWS D1.5 and requirements of this Specification.
2. When joining two (2) sections of steel of different ASTM designations,
welding techniques shall be in accordance with a qualified AWS D1.5
procedure.
C. Shore existing members when unbolting of common connections is required.
1. Use new bolts for rebolting connections.
D. Clean stored material of all foreign matter accumulated during erection period.
E. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly.
F. Anchor Bolts:
1. Cast-in-place anchor bolts:
a. Anchor bolt location tolerance: 1/8”.
b. Tie anchor bolts in position to embedded reinforcing steel using
wire.
c. Welding or tack welding is prohibited.
d. Provide steel templates for location anchor bolts.
2. Anchor bolts installed in precast holes:
a. If anchor bolts are to be grouted into the holes prior to the placement
of the span, location tolerance of the anchor bolts shall be 1/8”.
1) If anchor bolts are to be installed after the span is placed,
the hole location tolerance shall be 1/2”.
b. Grout anchor bolts into place with non-shrink grout.
c. Used supplied bearing pads or sole plates as template.
d. Refer to Section 34 80 41 for non-shrink grout requirements.
3. Anchor bolts installed in drilled holes:
a. If anchor bolts are to be grouted into the holes prior to the placement
of the span, location tolerance of the anchor bolts shall be 1/8”.
1) If anchor bolts are to be installed after the span is placed,
the hole location tolerance shall be 1/2”.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
b. Grout anchor bolts into place with non-shrink grout.
c. Used supplied bearing pads or sole plates as template.
d. Refer to Section 34 80 41 for non-shrink grout requirements.
G. Install high strength bolts with hardened washers.
1. Install and tighten in accordance with AREMA Chapter 15.
2. Coordinate installation with inspection.
a. Do not start installation until coordination with Testing Agency is
complete.
3. Slip-critical connections: Perform calibration testing for all methods of
installation of high-strength bolts in accordance with AREMA Chapter 15.
a. Turn-of-nut tightening: Torque wrenches shall be used only by
laboratory personnel.
b. Calibrated wrench tightening: Calibrate on a daily basis.
c. Direct tension indicator tightening: If previously approved by
Engineer.
4. In the event any bolt in a connection is found to be defective, check and
retighten all bolts in the connection.
H. Do not use gas cutting to correct fabrication errors.
1. Make no such corrections without prior approval of the Engineer.
2. Burning of holes: Not permitted.
I. Prior to making field connections to existing structural steel, remove completely all
paint from existing steel which will be in contact with new steel and new welds.
J. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in welded construction.
K. Provide beveled washers to give full bearing to bolt head or nut where bolts are to
be used on surfaces having slopes greater than 1 in 20 with a plane normal to bolt
axis.
L. After bolts are tightened, upset threads of A307 unfinished bolts and anchor bolts
to prevent nuts from backing off.
M. After erection, grind smooth all sharp surface irregularities resulting from field
cutting or welding; power tool clean welds, bolts, washers and abrasions to shop
coat removing all rust and foreign matter.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
3.03 CLEANING AND REPAIR OF SHOP PRIMER PAINT
A. After erection, clean all steel of mud or other foreign materials, and repair any
damage.
1. Touchup coatings to comply with Section 34 80 61.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Structural Steel will be measured by the unit or fraction thereof furnished and
completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and as measured by the
Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices,
or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived from the Plans will be
used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Structural steel for use in bridge structures will be measured by the unit computed
by the Engineer from the nominal weight and dimensions shown on the Plans.
1. The weight of rolled shapes and structural plates will be computed on the
basis of their nominal weight and dimensions, without deductions for copes,
cuts, and holes.
2. The computed weight of the completed members will not include
allowances for bolt holes or account for the weight of bolts, washers, nuts,
and welds, whether installed in the shop or in the field.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Structural Steel furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Structural steel for use in bridge structures will be paid for furnishing structural
steel and erecting structural steel complete in-place.
1. The contract price paid for structural steel shall include full compensation
for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for
all work involved in constructing, furnishing, transporting, handling, and
erecting units in-place as shown on the Plans, as specified in these
Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 51 Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges
2. The contract price paid structural steel shall include, but shall not be limited
to, furnishing all bolts, nuts and washers, stud connectors, welding
materials, bearing plates and pads, or other materials required for the
erection and connection or splicing of the structural steel, finishing the
structural steel as required by these Specifications and the Plans, and
conforming to the qualification and testing requirements associated with
member fabrication.
3. The contract price paid for structural steel shall include, but shall not be
limited to, connecting and splicing the structural steel, installing stud
connectors, installing bearing plates and pads, furnishing and applying
caulk, sealants and fillers, furnishing and placing mortar or grout for
masonry or bearing plates and anchor bolts, checking bolt tension, and
conforming to qualification and testing requirements associated with
member erection, connection or splicing.
4. The contract price paid for structural steel shall include, but shall not be
limited to, full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in cleaning
and applying paint and protective coatings (non-metallic) and metallic
coatings to structural steel as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications and as specified by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 80 51
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 51 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 52
METAL FABRICATIONS FOR RAILROAD BRIDGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Custom fabricated metal items and certain manufactured units not
otherwise indicated to be supplied under work of other Specification
Sections.
2. Design of all temporary bracing not indicated on Plans.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 34 80 51 - Structural Steel For Railroad Bridges.
4. Section 34 80 61 - Painting and Protective Coatings for Railroad Bridges.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design (ASD).
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A6, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural
Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling.
2. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
3. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
4. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
5. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
6. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
7. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
8. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
9. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
10. A588, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
with 50 ksi Minimum Yield Point to 4 inches Thick1.
11. A666, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
12. A668, Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for
General Industrial Use.
13. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
14. A786, Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-
Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates.
15. A992, Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes.
16. B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited
on Iron and Steel.
17. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.
18. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi
Yield Strength.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. A5.1, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded
Metal Arc Welding.
2. D1.1, Structural Welding Code Steel.
D. Military Specifications:
1. MIL-N-25027, Nut, Self Locking, Heavy hex, (Non-Metallic Insert) 250º and
450º F, UNJC-3B, ¼” Through 2-1/2” Nominal Diameters, Nickel-Copper
Alloy.
E. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA)
1. Chapter 15 – Steel Structures
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Installer or Applicator:
1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the
product in the field at the Project site.
2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
B. Hardware: As defined in ASTM A153.
C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanizing per ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 with minimum
coating of 2.0 oz of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless
noted otherwise or dictated by standard.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Fabrication and/or layout Plans and details:
a. Submit Plans for all fabrications and assemblies.
1) Include erection Plans, Plans, Sections, details and
connection details.
B. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Certification of welders and welding processes.
a. Indicate compliance with AWS.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with
AWS.
2. Fabricator shall have minimum of 10 years experience in fabrication of
metal items specified.
3. Engineer for contractor-designed systems and components: Professional
Civil Engineer licensed in the State of California.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and handle fabrications to avoid damage.
B. Store above ground on skids or other supports to keep items free of dirt and other
foreign debris and to protect against corrosion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors:
a. Nelson Stud Welding Div., TRW Inc.
b. Stud Welding Products, Inc.
2. Expansion anchor bolts:
a. Hilti Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Simpson Strongtie.
3. Epoxy adhesive anchor bolts:
a. Hilti Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c. Simpson Strongtie.
4. Galvanizing repair paint:
a. ZRC Products.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Steel:
1. Structural:
a. W-shapes and WT-shapes: ASTM A992.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
b. Plates and other rolled sections not specified above: ASTM A36.
2. Pipe: ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B.
3. Structural tubing:
a. ASTM A588.
4. Bolts, nuts and washers, high strength:
a. ASTM A325 with ASTM A563 nuts.
b. Provide two (2) washers with all bolts.
5. Machine bolts, nuts and washers:
a. ASTM A307 with ASTM A563 nuts.
b. Provide one (1) spring lock washer and two (2) plain washers with
all bolts.
6. Welding electrodes: AWS D1.1, E70 Series.
7. Steel forgings: ASTM A668.
B. Stainless Steel:
1. Minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi and minimum tensile strength of
75,000 psi.
a. Bars, shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304.
b. Tubing and pipe: ASTM A276, Type 304 or 316.
c. Strip, plate and flat bars: ASTM A666, Type 304 or 316, Grade A.
d. Bolts and nuts: ASTM F594, Type 303 or 304.
2. Minimum yield strength of 25,000 psi and minimum tensile strength of
70,000 psi.
a. Strip, plate and flat bar for welded connections, ASTM A666, Type
304L.
3. Welding electrodes: In accordance with AWS for metal alloy being welded.
C. Washers: Same material and alloy as found in accompanying bolts and nuts.
D. Embedded Anchor Bolts:
1. Type 304 or 316 stainless steel with two (2) matching nuts and matching
washer.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
2. Machine bolts with two (2) matching nuts and matching washer.
E. Expansion Anchor Bolts and Adhesive Anchor Bolts:
1. Stainless steel, Type 304, 314 or 316.
2. Provide minimum edge distance cover and spacing as recommended by
manufacturer, or as indicated on Plans whichever is larger.
a. Minimum embedment as recommended by manufacturer or eight
(8) diameters of bolt, whichever is larger.
b. Notify Engineer if required depth of embedment cannot be achieved
at a particular anchor bolt location.
c. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation and torque.
3. Provide elastic locknuts meeting the requirements of MIL-N-25027.
F. Deformed Anchors Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 with a minimum yield strength
of 36,000 psi and a minimum tensile strength of 58,000 psi.
G. Saddle Clips:
1. Meet steel grating manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.
H. Steel:
1. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 when required to be
galvanized.
I. Steel Hardware: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 or ASTM B695 when
required to be galvanized.
J. Galvanizing Repair Paint:
1. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds and abrasions.
2. Dried film shall contain not less than 93 percent zinc dust by weight.
3. Similar to ZRC by ZRC Products.
4. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): 0 lbs per gal.
2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Steel Checkered Plate:
1. Conform to ASTM A786.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
a. Diamond pattern: No.3 (large) or No.4 (medium).
b. Use one (1) pattern throughout Project.
c. Material: 36 ksi minimum yield strength.
B. Steel Grating:
1. Bearing bars:
a. Rectangular 1-1/2” x 3/16” unless shown otherwise on Plans.
b. Maximum 1-3/16” OC spacing.
2. Cross bars:
a. Welded to bearing bars.
b. Maximum 4 IN OC spacing.
3. Top edges of bars: Serrated or grooved.
4. Removable grating sections: Not wider than 3 feet and not more than
100 lbs unless shown otherwise on Plans.
5. Finish:
a. Galvanized.
b. Clips and bolts: Galvanized.
c. Seat angles: Galvanized steel.
6. Ends and perimeter edges: Banded.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication.
B. Form materials to shapes indicated with straight lines, true angles, and smooth
curves.
1. Grind smooth all rough welds and sharp edges.
a. Round all corners to approximately 1/32” - 1/16” nominal radius.
C. Provide drilled or punched holes with smooth edges.
1. Punch or drill for field connections and for attachment of work by other
trades.
D. Weld Permanent Shop Connections:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
1. Welds to be continuous fillet type unless indicated otherwise.
2. Weld structural steel in accordance with AWS D1.1 using Series E70
electrodes conforming to AWS A5.1.
3. Grind smooth welds that will be exposed.
E. Fabricate work in shop in as large assemblies as is practicable.
F. Tolerances:
1. Rolling:
a. ASTM A6.
b. When material received from the mill does not satisfy ASTM A6
tolerances for camber, profile, flatness, or sweep, the Contractor is
permitted to perform corrective work by the use of controlled
heating and mechanical straightening, subject to the limitations of
the AISC Specifications.
2. Fabrication tolerance:
a. Member length:
1) Both ends finished for contact bearing: 1/32”.
2) Framed members:
a) 30 feet or less: 1/16”.
b) Over 30 feet: 1/8”.
b. Member straightness:
1) ASTM A6 tolerance for wide flange shapes.
c. At bolted splices, depth deviation shall be taken up by filler plates.
1) At welded joints, adjust weld profile to conform to variation
in depth.
2) Slope weld surface per AWS requirements.
d. Finished members shall be free from twists, bends and open joints.
1) Sharp kinks, bends and deviation from above tolerances are
cause for rejection of material.
G. Fabricate grating, checkered plate, and accessories using galvanized steel unless
shown otherwise on Plans.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Refer to Specification Section 34 80 61 for surface preparation
requirements.
B. Shop Applied Paint Coating Application:
C. Meet structural requirements of Specification Section 34 80 51 for inspection and
testing items of structural nature.
D. Responsibilities of Testing Agency:
1. Inspect shop and field welding in accordance with AWS Code, Section 6
including the following non-destructive testing:
a. Visually inspect all welds.
b. In addition to visual inspection, test 50 percent of full penetration
welds and 20 percent of fillet welds with liquid dye penetrant.
c. Test 20 percent of liquid dye penetrant tested full penetration welds
with ultrasonic or radiographic testing.
2. Inspect high-strength bolting in accordance with the AREMA Section
15.3.5.4.
3. Inspect structural steel which has been erected.
4. Inspect stud welding in accordance with AWS Code, Article 7.8.
5. Prepare and submit inspection and test reports to Engineer.
a. Propose corrective measures necessary for defective work for
approval by the Engineer.
E. All items to be assembled in the field are to be shop-assembled prior to shipping.
1. During assembly and reaming, all bolts shall be placed in holes as work
progresses to assure proper fit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide items to be built into other construction in time to allow their installation.
1. If such items are not provided in time for installation, cut in and install.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
B. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate.
1. Installation of product constitutes installer's acceptance of substrate
condition for product compatibility.
C. Correct surface defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a
satisfactory installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Set metal work level, true to line, plumb.
1. Shim and grout as necessary.
B. Adequate temporary bracing to provide safety, stability and to resist all loads to
which the partially complete structure may be subjected, including construction
activities and operation of equipment is the responsibility of the Contractor.
1. Plumb, align, and set structural steel members to specified tolerances.
2. Use temporary guys, braces, shoring, connections, etc., necessary to
maintain the structural framing plumb and in proper alignment until
permanent connections are made, the succeeding work is in place, and
temporary work is no longer necessary.
3. Use temporary guys, bracing, shoring, and other work to prevent injury or
damage to adjacent work or construction from stresses due to erection
procedures and operation of erection equipment, construction loads, and
wind.
4. Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the temporary bracing
system and must consider the sequence and schedule of placement of
such elements and effects of loads imposed on the structural steel
members by partially or completely installed work, including work of all
other trades.
a. If not obvious from experience or from the Plans, the Contractor
shall confer with the Engineer to identify those structural steel
elements that must be complete before the temporary bracing
system is removed.
5. Remove and dispose of all temporary work and facilities off-site.
C. Examine work-in-place on which specified work is in any way dependent to ensure
that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of the work.
1. Report defects in work-in-place which may influence satisfactory
completion of the work.
2. Absence of such notification will be construed as acceptance of work-in-
place.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
D. Field Measurement:
1. Take field measurements as necessary to verify or supplement dimensions
indicated on the Plans.
2. Contractor responsible for the accurate fit of the work.
E. Check the elevations of all finished pier caps and the location and alignment of all
anchor bolts and bolt holes before starting erection.
1. Notify Engineer of any errors or deviations found by such checking.
F. Use light drifting necessary to draw holes together.
1. Drifting to match unfair holes is not allowed.
G. Welding:
1. Conform to AWS D1.1 and requirements of Article 2.4.
2. When joining two (2) sections of steel of different ASTM designations,
welding techniques shall be in accordance with a qualified AWS D1.1
procedure.
H. Shore existing members when unbolting of common connections is required.
1. Use new bolts for rebolting connections.
I. Clean stored material of all foreign matter accumulated during erection period.
J. Bolt Field Connections: Where practicable, conceal fastenings.
K. Grind welds smooth where field welding is required.
L. Remove all burrs and radius all sharp edges and corners of miscellaneous plates,
angles, framing system elements, etc.
M. Unless noted or specified otherwise:
1. Connect steel members to concrete and masonry using stainless steel
expansion anchor bolts.
2. Provide washers for all bolted connections.
3. Where exposed, bolts shall extend a maximum of ¾” and a minimum of
½”above the top nut.
N. Install and tighten ASTM A325 high-strength bolts in accordance with the AISC
Manual of Steel Construction.
1. Provide hardened washers for all ASTM A325 bolts.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
a. Provide the hardened washer under the element (nut or bolt head)
turned in tightening.
O. After bolts are tightened, upset threads of ASTM A307 unfinished bolts or anchor
bolts to prevent nuts from backing off.
P. Secure metal to wood with lag screws of adequate size with appropriate washers.
Q. Do not field splice fabricated items unless said items exceed standard shipping
length or change of direction requires splicing.
1. Provide full penetration welded splices where continuity is required.
R. Provide each fabricated item complete with attachment devices as indicated or
required to install.
S. Anchor such that work will not be distorted nor fasteners overstressed from
expansion and contraction.
1. Maximum spacing: 2 feet OC with minimum of two (2) per side.
T. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780.
1. Prepare damaged surfaces by abrasive blasting or power sanding.
2. Apply galvanizing repair paint to minimum 6 mils DFT in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 CLEANING
A. After erection, installation or application, clean all miscellaneous metal fabrication
surfaces of all dirt, weld slag and other foreign matter.
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Metal fabrications for use in bridge structures will be measured by the unit or
fraction thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents and as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the
Schedule of Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable,
as derived from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full compensation for furnishing all
labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 52 Metal Fabrication For Railroad Bridges
doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these Specifications,
and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Metal fabrications for use in bridge structures will be paid at the Contract Unit Price
for furnishing metal fabrications and erecting metal fabrications complete in-place.
1. The contract price paid for metal fabrications shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and
incidentals, and for all work involved in constructing, furnishing,
transporting, handling, and erecting units in-place as shown on the Plans,
as specified in these Specifications and as directed by the Engineer.
2. The contract price paid for metal fabrications shall include, but shall not be
limited to, furnishing all bolts, nuts and washers, stud connectors, welding
materials, or other materials required for the erection and connection or
splicing of the metal fabrications, finishing the metal fabrications as
required by these Specifications and the Plans, and conforming to the
qualification and testing requirements associated with member fabrication.
3. The contract price paid for metal fabrications shall include, but shall not be
limited to, connecting and splicing the metal fabrications, installing stud
connectors, furnishing and applying caulk, sealants and fillers, furnishing
and placing mortar or grout for masonry or bearing plates and anchor bolts,
checking bolt tension, and conforming to qualification and testing
requirements associated with member erection, connection or splicing.
4. The contract price paid for metal fabrications shall include, but shall not be
limited to, full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in cleaning
and applying paint and protective coatings (non-metallic) and metallic
coatings to metal fabrications as shown on the Plans, and as specified in
these Specifications and as specified by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 80 52
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 52 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 53
STEEL HANDRAILS FOR RAILROAD BRIDGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel handrail and guardrail.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 34 80 61 - Painting and Protective Coatings for Bridges.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
3. A123, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
4. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
5. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
6. A466, Standard Specification for Weldless Chain.
7. A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.
8. A489, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes.
9. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
10. A992, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 53 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 53 Steel Handrails For Railroad Bridges
11. A1023, Standard Specification for Stranded Carbon Steel Wire Ropes for
General Purpose.
12. B695, Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited
on Iron and Steel.
13. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
B. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA):
1. Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 15.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D1.1, Structural Welding Code Steel.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Hardware: As defined in ASTM A153.
B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanizing per ASTM A123 or ASTM A153 with minimum
coating of 2.0 oz of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless
noted otherwise or dictated by standard.
C. Handrail: A railing as defined by AREMA Chapter 15.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Fabrication and/or layout Plans.
a. Plan showing profile, location, section and details of each railing,
and type and details of anchorage system.
b. Location and type of expansion joints.
c. Materials of construction including shop-applied coatings.
3. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Miscellaneous Submittals:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 53 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 53 Steel Handrails For Railroad Bridges
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Certification of welders and welding procedures indicating compliance with
AWS.
3. Certification that railings have been designed and fabricated to meet the
loading requirements specified.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and handle railings to preclude damage.
B. Store railings on skids, keep free of dirt and other foreign matter which will damage
railings or finish and protect from corrosion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. Welded railing systems:
a. Any manufacturer meeting this Specification Section.
2. Galvanizing repair paint:
a. ZRC Products.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Pipe: ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B.
B. Steel Angle, Sheet, Bar (Pickets) and Plate: ASTM A36.
C. Steel W and WT shapes: ASTM A992.
D. Machine Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
1. ASTM A307 with ASTM A563 nuts.
2. Provide one (1) spring lock washer and two (2) plain washers with all bolts.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 53 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 53 Steel Handrails For Railroad Bridges
E. Safety Chain and Quick Links: ASTM A466.
F. Eyebolts: ASTM A489.
G. Aircraft Cable: ASTM A1023.
H. Steel: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 when required to be galvanized.
I. Steel Hardware: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 or ASTM B695 when
required to be galvanized.
J. Galvanizing Repair Paint:
1. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds and abrasions.
2. Dried film shall contain not less than 95 percent zinc dust by weight.
3. Similar to ZRC by ZRC Products.
K. Welding Electrodes: AWS D1.1, E70 Series.
L. Temporary Handrails:
1. Material shall be either steel or timber, selected at the Contractor's
discretion.
a. Material shall be sturdy and slip-resistant.
2. Material shall be supplied by the Contractor.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication.
2. For fabrication of items which will be exposed to view, use only materials
which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.
a. Remove blemishes by grinding and buffing or by welding and
grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface
finishes.
3. Form exposed work with smooth, short radius bends, accurate angles and
straight edges.
a. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32”.
b. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without
causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 53 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 53 Steel Handrails For Railroad Bridges
4. Form exposed connections by welding.
5. Provide for anchorage of type indicated on the Plans.
a. Drill or punch holes with smooth edges.
6. Custom fabricate pipe railings to dimensions and profiles indicated.
a. Fabricate guardrail vertical posts using 1-1/2” nominal diameter
Schedule 40 pipe.
b. Fabricate all guardrail top rails using 1-1/2” nominal diameter
Schedule 40 pipe.
c. All intermediate rails shall be fabricated using minimum 1-1/2”
nominal diameter Schedule 40 pipe.
7. Fit exposed ends of handrails with solid terminations.
8. The ends of handrails shall not overhand terminal posts except where such
overhang does not constitute a projection hazard.
9. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly of units at project site.
B. Finish: Galvanized after fabrication, unless shown otherwise in the Plans.
C. Welded Railing Fabrication:
1. All welding to be continuous in accordance with AWS D1.1.
a. All welded railing joints shall have full penetration welds.
2. All exposed welds to be ground and buffed smooth and flush to match and
blend with adjoining surfaces.
3. No ragged edges, surface defects, or undercutting of adjoining surfaces
will be accepted.
D. Install weeps to drain moisture from hollow sections of railing at exterior locations
and in high humidity areas.
1. Drill 3/8” vent in railings at each end of horizontal pipes.
E. Expansion Joints:
1. Joints to be designed to allow expansion and contraction of railing and still
meet design loads required.
a. Top rail splices and expansion joints shall be located within 8 IN of
post or other support.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 53 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 53 Steel Handrails For Railroad Bridges
b. Where railings span structure expansion joints; provide a railing
expansion joint in the span crossing the structure expansion joint.
2. Provide expansion joints in any continuous run exceeding 20 feet in length.
a. Space expansion joints at not more than 40 feet OC.
3. Provide minimum 0.10 inches of expansion joint for each 20 feet length of
top rail for each 25˚ F differential between installation temperature and
maximum design temperature.
a. Maximum expansion joint width at time of installation shall not
exceed 3/8”.
1) Provide additional expansion joints as required to limit
expansion joint width.
4. Provide slip-joint with internal sleeve.
a. Extend slip joint min 2 inches beyond joint at maximum design
width.
b. Fasten internal sleeve securely to one side
1) Provide allen-head set screw located in bottom of rail.
2) Rivets or exposed screw heads are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate.
1. Installation of product constitutes installer's acceptance of substrate
condition for product compatibility.
B. Correct surface defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a
satisfactory installation.
3.02 TEMPORARY HANDRAILS
A. Temporary handrails shall be installed where necessary to provide fall protection
during construction.
B. The top edge height of the top rail shall be 42 inches ±3 inches above the
walking/working surface.
C. At least two midrails shall be provided, evenly spaced between the walking/working
surface and the top rail.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 53 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 53 Steel Handrails For Railroad Bridges
D. Temporary handrail posts shall be placed at a maximum of 10 feet intervals.
E. Entire handrail system, including anchorages, shall be capable of withstanding
without failure, a force of 200 lbs applied in any outward or downward direction at
any point.
F. Handrail system shall be surfaced to prevent injuries from punctures or laceration
and prevent snagging of clothing. The ends of top rails and midrails shall not
extend past the posts.
G. If conditions warrant, additional protection shall be provided such as screens or
mesh to prevent slipping between the midrails and the walking/working surface.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with Plans.
B. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation; plumb, level, and true.
C. Align railings prior to securing in place to assure proper matching at butting and
expansion joints and correct alignment throughout their length.
1. Provide shims as required.
D. Install proper sized expansion joints based on temperature at time of installation
and differential coefficient of expansion of materials in all railings as recommended
by manufacturer.
1. Lubricate expansion joint splice bar for smooth movement of railing
sections.
E. Attach handrails to walls or guardrails with brackets designed for condition.
1. Anchor handrail to concrete with ¾” heavy hex ASTM A307 bolt with
washer and heavy weight elastic locknut.
F. Anchor railings to metal structure with minimum 5/8” high strength steel bolts, nuts
and washers.
G. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780.
1. Properly prepare surface in accordance with galvanizing repair paint
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Apply minimum 6 mils DFT of galvanizing repair paint in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
H. Prepare and paint railings in accordance with Specification Section 34 80 61.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 53 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 53 Steel Handrails For Railroad Bridges
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
A. Steel handrails for use in bridge structures will be measured by the unit or fraction
thereof furnished and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and
as measured by the Engineer. The quantities as contained on the Schedule of
Quantities and Prices, or approved schedule of values, as applicable, as derived
from the Plans will be used as the basis for this measurement.
B. Steel handrails for use in bridge structures will be measured from end to end along
the face of the railing, including end and intermediate posts, and with no
deductions for gaps in railing for lighting and sign supports. The measurement
shall be made along the face of the rail elements without allowance for overlap at
rail splices.
4.02 PAYMENT
A. Steel handrails for use in bridge structures furnished and completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents will be paid for at the Contract Unit Price, as listed
on the Schedule of Quantities and Prices. This price shall include full
compensation for furnishing all labor, Materials, tools, equipment, supplies,
supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
B. Steel handrails for use in bridge structures will be paid at the Contract Unit Price
for furnishing steel handrails and erecting steel handrails complete in-place.
1. The contract price paid for steel handrails shall include, but shall not be
limited to, furnishing all bolts, nuts and washers, welding materials, or other
materials required for the erection and connection or splicing of the steel
handrails, finishing the steel handrails as required by these Specifications
and the Plans, and conforming to the qualification and testing requirements
associated with member fabrication.
2. The contract price paid for steel handrails shall include, but shall not be
limited to, connecting and splicing the steel handrails, installing end
treatments, anchor assemblies, and return and end caps, furnishing and
placing mortar or grout anchor bolts, checking bolt tension, and conforming
to qualification and testing requirements associated with member erection,
connection or splicing.
3. The contract price paid for steel handrails shall include, but shall not be
limited to, full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in cleaning
and applying paint and protective coatings (non-metallic) and metallic
coatings to steel handrails as shown on the Plans, and as specified in these
Specifications and as specified by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 80 53
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 53 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
SECTION 34 80 61
PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR RAILROAD BRIDGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. High performance industrial coatings (HPIC).
2. Any other coating, thinner, accelerator, inhibitor, and any other material,
specified or required as part of a complete System specified in this
Specification Section.
3. Minimum surface preparation requirements.
B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 00 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Division 01 - General Requirements.
3. Section 03 21 00 – Reinforcing Steel.
4. Section 03 31 00 - Structural Concrete.
5. Section 34 80 52 - Metal Fabrications For Railroad Bridges.
6. Section 34 80 53 - Steel Handrails For Railroad Bridges.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. D4258, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for
Coating.
b. D4259, Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete.
c. D4261, Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit
Masonry for Coating.
d. D4262, Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or
Etched Concrete Surfaces.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 1 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
e. D4263, Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete
by the Plastic Sheet Method.
2. National Bureau of Standards (NBS):
a. Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards.
3. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
a. PA 2, Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
b. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning.
4. The Society for Protective Coatings/NACE International (SSPC/NACE):
a. SP 5/NACE No. 1, White Metal Blast Cleaning.
b. SP 6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
c. SP 7/NACE No. 4, Brush-off Blast Cleaning.
d. SP 10/NACE No. 2, Near-White Blast Cleaning.
e. SP 12/NACE No. 5, Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and
Other Hard Materials by High and Ultrahigh Pressure Water Jetting
Prior to Recoating.
f. SP 13/NACE No. 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete.
B. Miscellaneous:
1. Furnish coating material through one (1) manufacturer unless noted
otherwise.
C. Deviation from specified mil thickness or product type is not allowed without written
authorization of Engineer.
D. Material shall not be thinned unless approved, in writing, by coating material
manufacturer's authorized representative.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Installer or Applicator:
1. Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the
product in the field at the Project site.
2. Installer and applicator are synonymous.
B. Approved Factory Finish: Finish on a product in compliance with the finish
specified in the Specification Section where the product is specified.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 2 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
C. Corrosive Environment: Immersion in, or not more than 6 inches above, or subject
to condensation, spillage or splash of a corrosive material such as water,
wastewater, or chemical solution; or exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic agent,
chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical mixture, or solutions with pH range of 5 to 9.
D. Highly Corrosive Environment: Immersion in, or not more than 6 inches above, or
subject to condensation, spillage or splash of a highly corrosive material such as
water, wastewater, or chemical solution; or exposure to highly corrosive, caustic
or acidic agent, chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical mixture, or solutions with pH
range below five (5) or above nine (9).
E. Exposed Exterior Surface:
1. Surface which is exposed to weather but not necessarily exposed to view
as well as surface exposed to view.
2. Exterior surfaces are considered corrosive environment.
a. The following areas are considered highly corrosive:
1) All chemical unloading stations and areas within 10 feet-
0 inches of containment areas.
2) All chemical unloading station containment areas.
3) All areas within a 6 feet radius of chemical tank vents.
4) All areas within 1 mile of coast.
F. Finished Area: An area that is indicated on Drawings to be painted.
G. Immersion Surface:
1. Any surface immersed in water or some other liquid.
2. Surface of any pipe, valve, or any other component of the piping system
subject to condensation including the pipe support system.
H. Paint includes the following:
1. High performance industrial coatings (HPIC) include: Epoxies, urethanes,
vinyl ester, waterborne vinyl acrylic emulsions, acrylates, silicones, alkyds,
acrylic emulsions and any other coating listed as a HPIC.
I. Surface Hidden from View: Surfaces such as those within pipe chases and
surfaces under overhanging walkways if over 5 feet above adjacent walking
surfaces
J. HPIC: High performance industrial coatings.
K. Water level for purposes of painting: See Drawings.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 3 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Applicator experience qualifications.
a. No submittal information will be reviewed until Engineer has
received and approved applicator qualifications.
3. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer's application instructions.
c. Manufacturer's surface preparation instructions.
d. If products being used are manufactured by Company other than
listed in Article 2.02 - MATERIALS, provide complete individual data
sheet comparison of proposed products with specified products
including application procedure, coverage rates and verification that
product is designed for intended use.
e. Contractor's written plan of action for containing airborne particles
created by blasting operation and location of disposal of spent
contaminated blasting media.
f. Coating manufacturer's recommendation on abrasive blasting.
g. Manufacturer's recommendation for universal barrier coat.
h. Manufacturer's recommendation for providing temporary or
supplemental heat or dehumidification or other environmental
control measures.
4. Manufacturer's statement regarding applicator instruction on product use.
5. Certification that High Performance Coating Systems proposed for use
have been reviewed and approved by Senior Corrosion Specification
Specialist employed by the coating manufacturer.
B. Samples:
1. Manufacturer's full line of colors for Engineer's preliminary color selection.
2. After preliminary color selection by Engineer provide two (2) 3 x 5 inches
samples of each final color selected.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 4 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
C. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of
the submittal process.
2. Approval of application equipment.
3. Applicator's daily records:
a. Submit daily records at end of each week in which painting work is
performed unless requested otherwise by Engineer's on-site
representative.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Coating manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide written
statement attesting that applicator has been instructed on proper
preparation, mixing and application procedures for coatings specified.
2. Applicators shall have minimum of 10 years experience in application of
similar products on similar project.
a. Provide references for minimum of three (3) different projects
completed in last five (5) years with similar scope of work.
b. Include name and address of project, size of project in value
(painting) and contact person.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in original containers, labeled as follows:
1. Name or type number of material.
2. Manufacturer's name and item stock number.
3. Contents, by volume, of major constituents.
4. Warning labels.
5. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 5 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers
are acceptable:
1. High performance industrial coatings:
a. Tnemec.
b. Tiger DrylaC.
c. Sherwin Williams.
d. Diamond Vogel/Perdium.
e. International.
2. Graffiti-resistant coating:
a. Pro SoLo.
B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01.
1. Product VOC content will be an important factor when determining
acceptability of substitution.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. For unspecified materials such as thinner, provide manufacturer's recommended
products.
B. Paint Systems - General:
1. P = prime coat.
2. F1, F2 . . . Fn = first finish coat, second finish coat . . . . nth finish coat, color
as selected by Engineer.
3. If two (2) finish coats of same material are required, Contractor may, at his
option and by written approval from paint manufacturer, apply one (1) coat
equal to mil thickness of two (2) coats specified.
C. HPIC products listed in Article 2.02 - MATERIALS, Paragraph E. Paint Systems
are manufactured by Tnemec.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 6 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
1. Products of other listed manufacturers are acceptable for use providing the
product is of the same generic resin, requires comparable surface
preparation, has comparable application requirements, meets the same
VOC levels or better, provides the same finish and color options and will
withstand the atmospheric conditions of the location where it is to be
applied.
D. Paint Systems (Systems not shown are not used):
1. HPIC SYSTEM #1 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Polyamidoamine
Epoxy or Waterborne Acrylic Polyurethane Finish Coat(s).
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 3 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine
Epoxy).
b. Finish coat(s):
1) Interior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 3 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline
(Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
b) F2 = 1 coat, 3 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline
(Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
2) Exterior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 3 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline
(Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
b) F2 = 1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 1080 Endura-Shield.
W.B.(Waterborne Acrylic Polyurethane).
2. HPIC SYSTEM #2 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Polyamidoamine
Epoxy or Waterborne Acrylic Polyurethane Top Coat(s).
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 5 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine
Epoxy).
b. Finish coat(s):
1) Interior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 5 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline
(Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
2) Exterior:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 7 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
a) F1 = 1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 1080 Endura-Shield
W.B. (Waterborne Acrylic Polyurethane).
3. HPIC SYSTEM #3 - Zinc-Rich Urethane Primer with Polyamidoamine
Epoxy or Waterborne Acrylic Polyurethane Top Coat(s).
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc (Zinc-Rich
Urethane).
b. Finish coat(s):
1) Interior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 3 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline
(Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
2) Exterior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 1080 Endura-Shield
W.B. (Waterborne Acrylic Polyurethane).
4. HPIC SYSTEM #4 - Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with
Polyamidoamine Epoxy or Waterborne Acrylic Polyurethane Top Coat(s).
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 3 mils, Series 135 Chembuild (Modified
Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
b. Finish coat(s):
1) Interior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 4 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline
(Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
2) Exterior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 3 mils, Series 1080 Endura-Shield W.B.
(Waterborne Acrylic Polyurethane).
5. HPIC SYSTEM #5 - Zinc-Rich Urethane Primer with Polyamidoamine
Epoxy or Waterborne Acrylic Polyurethane Top Coat(s).
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 90-97 Tneme-Zinc (Zinc-Rich
Urethane).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 8 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
b. Finish coat(s):
1) Interior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 5 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline
(Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
2) Exterior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 3.0 mils, Series 1080 Endura-Shield
W.B. (Waterborne Acrylic Polyurethane).
6. HPIC SYSTEM #6 - Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy.
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 3 mils, Series 135 Chembuild (Modified
Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
7. HPIC SYSTEM #7 - Zinc-Rich Aromatic Urethane Primer.
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 3.0 mils, 90-97 Tneme-Zinc (Zinc-Rich
Urethane).
8. HPIC SYSTEM #8 - Modified-Acrylate Elastomer Primer and Top Coat.
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 8 mils, Series 156 Enviro-Crete (Modified-
Acrylate Elastomer).
b. Finish coat:
1) Exterior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 8 mils, Series 156 Enviro-Crete
(Modified-Acrylate Elastomer).
9. HPIC SYSTEM #9 - Acrylic Emulsion Primer with Acrylic Emulsion Top
Coat(s).
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 60 to 90 SF/GAL/coat, Series 180 W.B. Tneme-
Crete (Acrylic Emulsion).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 9 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
b. Finish coat(s):
1) Exterior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 125 to 150 SF/GAL/coat, Series 180
W.B. Tneme-Crete (Acrylic Emulsion).
10. HPIC SYSTEM #10 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Coating.
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 5 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine
Epoxy).
11. HPIC SYSTEM #11 - Modified Polyamidoamine Epoxy.
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 5 mils, 135-1243 Chembuild (Modified
Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
12. HPIC SYSTEM #12 - Waterborne Acrylic Emulsion Prime and Top Coats.
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 80 to 110 SF/GAL/coat, Series 180, W.B.
Tneme-Crete (Acrylic Emulsion).
b. Finish coat:
1) Exterior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 175 to 200 SF/GAL/coat, Series 180,
W.B. Tneme-Crete (Acrylic Emulsion).
13. HPIC SYSTEM #13 - Waterborne Cementitious Acrylic Patching
Compound/Filler with Polyamidoamine Epoxy Top Coat.
a. Patching/filling coat:
1) P/F1 = 1 coat, 60 to 80 SF/GAL/coat, Series 130 Envirofill
(Waterborne Cementitious Acrylic).
b. Finish coat:
1) Interior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 175 to 200 SF/GAL/coat, Series L69
Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
b) F2 = 1 coat, 175 to 200 SF/GAL/coat, Series L69
Epoxoline (Polyamidoamine Epoxy).
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 10 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
14. HPIC SYSTEM #14 - Waterborne Vinyl Acrylic Primer with Water-base
Acrylic-Emulsion Top Coat.
a. Prime coat(s):
1) P1 = 1 coat, 2.0 mils, Series 51-792 PVA Sealer.
b. Finish coat(s):
1) Interior and exterior:
a) F1 = 1 coat, 2.5 mils, Series 6 Tneme-Cryl.
15. HPIC SYSTEM #15 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy Primer with Polyamidoamine
Epoxy Top Coat (with silica sand broadcast for slip resistance).
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 = 1 coat, 5 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline II.
b. Slip resistance:
1) Blend dry, washed 30 to 50 mesh silica sand into first finish
coat (F1) at rate required to provide a heavy slip resistant
finish.
c. Finish coat:
1) F1 = 1 coat, 4 mils, Series L69 Epoxoline II.
2) F2 = 1 coat, Series L69 Epoxoline II.
a) F2 coat mil thickness is to be as required to achieve
non-slip texture specified.
16. HPIC SYSTEM #16 - Polyamine Novolac Epoxy Primer with Polyamine
Novolac Epoxy Top Coat.
a. Prime coat:
1) P1 (horizontal surface) = 1 coat, 10 to 12 mils, Series 282
Tneme-Glaze.
2) P1 (vertical surface) = 1 coat, 8 to 10 mils, Series 282
Tneme-Glaze.
b. Finish coat:
1) F1 (horizontal surface) = 1 coat, 10 to 12 mils, Series 282
Tneme-Glaze.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 11 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
2) F1 (vertical surface) = 1 coat, 8 to 10 mils, Series 282
Tneme-Glaze.
17. HPIC SYSTEM #17 - Epoxy Modified Surfacer/Filler with Polyamine
Novolac Epoxy Top Coats.
a. Filler/surfacer coat:
1) Filler = 1 coat, 0.0625 IN thick, Series 218 Mortar Clad.
b. Prime coat:
1) P1 (horizontal surface) = 1 coat, 10 to 12 mils, Series 282
Tneme-Glaze.
2) P1 (vertical surface) = 1 coat, 6 to 8 mils, Series 282 Tneme-
Glaze.
c. Finish coat:
1) F1 (horizontal surface) = 1 coat, 10 to 12 mils, Series 282
Tneme-Glaze.
2) F1 (vertical surface) = 1 coat, 6 to 8 mils, Series 282 Tneme-
Glaze.
18. SYSTEM #18 - Touch-up of galvanized surfaces not requiring a top coat.
a. Refer to Specification Section 34 80 52.
19. SYSTEM # 19 - Epoxy Paint.
a. Finish coat:
1) F1 = 1 coat, 10 mils dry film thickness, International
Interzone 954, color to be selected by SCRRA.
F2 = 1 coat, 10 mils dry film thickness, International
interzone 954, color to be selected by SCRRA.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ITEMS TO BE PAINTED
A. Exposed Surfaces indicated on Drawings.
1. Conduit, device boxes, junction boxes and covers, pull boxes and covers
and supports when attached to a surface required to be painted or to a
prefinished surface.
2. Miscellaneous ferrous metal surfaces.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 12 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
3. Structural steel.
3.02 ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED
A. General: Do not paint items listed in this Article unless specifically noted in the
Contract Documents to be painted.
B. Items with Approved Factory Finish: These items may require repair of damaged
painted areas or painting of welded connections.
C. Electrical Equipment:
1. Do not field paint electrical equipment except where painting is specifically
stated elsewhere in these Contract Documents, or where the equipment is
subject to a corrosive environment and is specifically noted to be painted.
D. When not in a corrosive or highly corrosive area, do not paint the following hidden
surfaces:
1. Concrete and/or concrete masonry units.
2. Conduit.
3. Galvanized metal surfaces.
4. Note: Manufacturer's standard coatings, if any, may remain.
E. Other Items:
1. Stainless steel surfaces except:
a. Piping where specifically noted to be painted.
b. Banding as required to identify piping.
2. Code labels and equipment identification and rating plates.
3. Concealed surfaces of precolored masonry.
4. Steel deck, unless specifically noted to be painted in the Contract
Documents.
5. Contact surfaces of friction-type connections.
6. Metal soffit.
7. Galvanized steel items, unless specifically noted to be painted.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 13 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
3.03 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS TO BE PAINTED AND PAINTING SYSTEMS
A. Concrete:
1. Cast-in-place and precast surfaces (other than prefinished panels):
SYSTEM #8.
B. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Exterior smooth faced standard (heavy) weight: SYSTEM #12.
2. Exterior rough faced standard (heavy) weight: SYSTEM #9.
C. Steel:
1. Structural:
a. Exposed portion of pile plate, piling between the pile plates and
concrete collars or ground line, angle bracing and any other non-
galvanized exposed steel: SYSTEM #19.
b. Immersion or non-immersion surfaces subject to highly corrosive
environment: SYSTEM #19.
c. Non-immersion surfaces subject to corrosive environment:
SYSTEM #1.
d. All other surfaces (non-corrosive dry environment): SYSTEM #5.
D. Miscellaneous ferrous metals (non-corrosive dry environment): SYSTEM #1.
1. Not for coating galvanized steel and products with approved factory
finishes.
E. Galvanized Metals:
1. Field touch-up where top coat is required: SYSTEM #2, prime and first
finish coat only.
a. Prime paint only the damaged area.
2. Assembled galvanized steel items: SYSTEM #2.
3. Field touch-up of galvanized surfaces not requiring a finish top coat:
SYSTEM #18.
a. Paint only damaged areas.
F. Non-ferrous metals (except galvanized): SYSTEM #2.
1. Includes copper, brass, aluminum and aluminum flashing specifically
indicated on the Drawings to be painted.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 14 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
G. Electrical Conduit:
1. Galvanized: SYSTEM #2.
2. PVC coated: SYSTEM #2.
H. Aluminum buried in concrete, between dissimilar metals and dissimilar materials:
SYSTEM #10.
I. Aluminum colored pipe thread touch-up, and aluminum colored finish where top
coat is not required: SYSTEM #11.
1. Not for coating aluminum material.
3.04 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Verify that atmosphere in area where painting is to take place is within paint
manufacturer's acceptable temperature, humidity and sun exposure limits.
a. Provide temporary heating, shade and/or dehumidification as
required to bring area within acceptable limits.
1) Provide temporary dehumidification equipment properly
sized to maintain humidity levels required by paint
manufacturer.
2) Provide clean heat with heat exchanger type equipment
sufficient in size to maintain temperature on a 24 hours
basis.
3) No exhaust gases (no direct fired heating equipment) shall
be allowed to vent into the space being painted or any
adjacent space.
2. Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with coating manufacturer's
instructions and this Specification Section unless noted otherwise in this
Specification Section.
a. Where discrepancy between coating manufacturer's instructions
and this Specification Section exists, the more stringent preparation
shall be provided unless approved otherwise, in writing, by the
Engineer.
3. Remove all dust, grease, oil, compounds, dirt and other foreign matter
which would prevent bonding of coating to surface.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 15 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
4. Adhere to manufacturer's recoat time surface preparation requirements.
a. Paint manufacturer's recommended recoat time surface
preparation requirements will be strictly enforced.
B. Protection:
1. Protect surrounding surfaces not to be coated.
2. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, finished work,
and similar items; or provide ample in-place protection.
C. Prepare and paint before assembly all surfaces which are inaccessible after
assembly.
D. Ferrous Metal:
1. Prepare ductile iron pipe in accordance with pipe manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Complete fabrication, welding or burning before beginning surface
preparation.
a. Chip or grind off flux, spatter, slag or other laminations left from
welding.
b. Remove mill scale.
c. Grind smooth rough welds and other sharp projections.
3. Solvent or water jet and detergent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 or
SSPC SP 12/NACE No. 5 all surfaces scheduled to receive additional
SSPC surface preparation.
4. Surfaces subject to corrosive or highly corrosive environment and all
surfaces subject to immersion service:
a. Near-white blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP 10/NACE No.
2.
5. All interior and exterior structural steel not included in corrosive, highly
corrosive or immersion service surfaces:
a. Minimum commercial blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP
6/NACE No. 3.
6. Steel surfaces scheduled to receive SYSTEM #16:
a. White metal blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP 5/NACE No.
1.
b. Provide 2-1/2 to 3 mil anchor profile.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 16 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
7. All fusion bonded epoxy coated surfaces identified to be field painted:
a. Remove all traces of gloss finish by sanding or by abrasive brush
blasting.
b. Clean surface after removing gloss finish to remove sanding or
blasting residue.
8. Restore surface of field welds and adjacent areas to original surface
preparation.
E. Hollow Metal:
1. Clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 or SSPC SP 12/NACE No. 5 and in
accordance with hollow metal manufacturer.
F. Galvanized Metal:
1. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 followed by brush-off blast
clean in accordance with SSPC SP 7/NACE No. 4 to uniform profiled
surface removing zinc oxide and other foreign contaminants.
a. Provide 1 mil profile.
G. Concrete:
1. Cure for minimum of 28 days.
2. Verify that concrete surfaces have been cleaned and that voids have been
patched in accordance with Specification Section 34 80 41 or Section 34
80 43.
a. Concrete surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with
ASTM D4258.
3. Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4259
as recommended by coating manufacturer.
4. Abrasive blast concrete surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 13/NACE
No. 6 to provide profile recommended by coatings manufacturer.
5. Test pH of surface to be painted in accordance with ASTM D4262.
a. If surface pH is not within coating manufacturer's required
acceptable range, use methods acceptable to coating manufacturer
as required to bring pH within acceptable range.
b. Retest pH until acceptable results are obtained.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 17 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
6. Verify that moisture content of surface to be painted is within coating
manufacturer's recommended acceptable limits.
a. Test moisture content of surface to be coated in accordance with
ASTM D4263.
b. After remedial measures have been taken to lower or raise moisture
content, retest surface until acceptable results are obtained.
H. Concrete Masonry Unit:
1. Cure for minimum of 28 days.
2. Remove all mortar spatters and protrusions.
3. Verify that concrete unit masonry surfaces have been cleaned in
accordance with ASTM D4261.
4. Test pH of surface to be painted in accordance with ASTM D4262.
a. If surface pH is not within coating manufacturer's required
acceptable range, use methods acceptable to coating manufacturer
as required to bring pH within acceptable limits.
b. Retest pH until acceptable results are obtained.
5. Verify that moisture content of surface to be painted is within coating
manufacturer's recommended acceptable limits.
a. Test moisture content of surface to be coated in accordance with
ASTM D4263.
b. After remedial measures have been taken to lower or raise moisture
content, retest surface until acceptable range is obtained.
I. Preparation by Abrasive Blasting:
1. All abrasive-blasted ferrous metal surfaces shall be inspected immediately
prior to application of paint coatings.
a. Inspection shall be performed to determine cleanliness and profile
depth of blasted surfaces and to certify that surface has been
prepared in accordance with these Specifications.
2. Schedule the abrasive blasting operation so blasted surfaces will not be
wet after blasting and before painting.
3. Perform additional blasting and cleaning as required to achieve surface
preparation required.
a. Prior to painting, reblast surfaces allowed to set overnight and
surfaces that show rust bloom.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 18 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
b. Surfaces allowed to set overnight or surfaces which show rust
bloom prior to painting shall be reinspected prior to paint
application.
4. Profile depth of blasted surface: Not less than 1 mil or greater than 2 mils
unless required otherwise by coating manufacturer.
5. Provide compressed air for blasting that is free of water and oil.
a. Provide accessible separators and traps.
6. Confine blast abrasives to area being blasted.
a. Provide shields of polyethylene sheeting or other such barriers to
confine blast material.
b. Plug pipes, holes, or openings before blasting and keep plugged
until blast operation is complete and residue is removed.
7. Protect nameplates and other items that may be damaged from blasting.
8. Reblast surfaces not meeting requirements of these Specifications.
9. Abrasive blasting media may be recovered, cleaned and reused providing
Contractor submits, for Engineer's review, a comprehensive recovery plan
outlining all procedures and equipment proposed in reclamation process.
10. Properly dispose of blasting material contaminated with debris from
blasting operation not scheduled to be reused.
J. All Non-Ferrous Surfaces Except Galvanized Steel:
1. Sand using 80-100 grit sandpaper to scarify surfaces.
3.05 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Thin, mix and apply coatings by brush, roller, or spray in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
a. Application equipment must be inspected and approved in writing
by coating manufacturer.
b. Hollow metal shall be spray applied only.
2. Temperature and weather conditions:
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 19 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
a. Do not paint surfaces when surface temperature is below 50˚ F
unless product has been formulated specifically for low temperature
application and application is approved in writing by Engineer and
paint manufacturer's authorized representative.
b. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun.
c. Do not paint on damp surfaces.
3. Immediately after surface has been inspected apply structural steel and
miscellaneous steel prime coat in the factory.
a. Finish coats shall be applied in the field.
b. Prime coat referred to here is prime coat as indicated in this
Specification.
1) Structural steel and miscellaneous steel prime coating
applied in factory (shop) as part of Fabricator's standard rust
inhibiting and protection coating is not acceptable as
replacement for specified prime coating.
4. Provide complete coverage to mil thickness specified.
a. Thickness specified is dry mil thickness.
b. All paint systems are "to cover." In situations of discrepancy
between manufacturer's square footage coverage rates and mil
thickness, mil thickness requirements govern.
c. When color or undercoats show through, apply additional coats until
paint film is of uniform finish and color.
5. If so directed by Engineer, do not apply consecutive coats until Engineer
has had an opportunity to observe and approve previous coats.
6. Apply materials under adequate illumination.
7. Evenly spread to provide full, smooth coverage.
8. Work each application of material into corners, crevices, joints, and other
difficult to work areas.
9. Avoid degradation and contamination of blasted surfaces and avoid
intercoat contamination.
a. Clean contaminated surfaces before applying next coat.
10. Smooth out runs or sags immediately, or remove and recoat entire surface.
11. Allow preceding coats to dry before recoating.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 20 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
a. Recoat within time limits specified by coating manufacturer.
b. If recoat time limits have expired re-prepare surface in accordance
with coating manufacturer's printed recommendations.
12. Allow coated surfaces to cure prior to allowing traffic or other work to
proceed.
13. When coating rough surfaces which cannot be backrolled sufficiently, hand
brush coating to work into all recesses.
14. Backroll concrete and masonry surfaces with a roller if paint coatings are
spray applied.
B. Prime Coat Application:
1. Prime all surfaces indicated to be painted.
a. Apply prime coat in accordance with coating manufacturer's written
instructions and as written in this Specification Section.
2. Ensure field-applied coatings are compatible with factory-applied coatings.
a. Employ services of coating manufacturer's qualified technical
representative.
1) Certify through material data sheets.
2) Perform test patch.
b. If field-applied coating is found to be not compatible, require the
coating manufacturer's technical representative to recommend, in
writing, product to be used as barrier coat, thickness to be applied,
surface preparation and method of application.
c. At Contractor's option, coatings may be removed, surface re-
prepared, and new coating applied using appropriate paint system
listed in Article 2.02 - MATERIALS, Paragraph D. Paint Systems.
1) All damage to surface as result of coating removal shall be
repaired to original condition or better by Contractor at no
additional cost to SCRRA.
3. Prime ferrous metals embedded in concrete to minimum of 1 IN below
exposed surfaces.
4. Apply zinc-rich primers while under continuous agitation.
5. Ensure abrasive blasting operation does not result in embedment of
abrasive particles in paint film.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 21 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
6. Brush or spray bolts, welds, edges and difficult access areas with primer
prior to primer application over entire surface.
7. Touch up damaged primer coats prior to applying finish coats.
a. Restore primed surface equal to surface before damage.
C. Finish Coat Application:
1. Apply finish coats in accordance with coating manufacturer's written
instructions and in accordance with this Specification Section;
manufacturer instructions take precedent over these Specifications.
2. Touch up damaged finish coats using same application method and same
material specified for finish coat.
a. Prepare damaged area in accordance with Article 3.04 -
PREPARATION.
3.06 GRAFFTI-RESITANT COATING
A. All accessible concrete, masonry, and porous surfaces from finish grade to 10 feet
above finish grade shall be painted with clear graffiti-resistant coating.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces to receive the coating in compliance with the coating
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Coating Preparations:
1. Only open containers required for use.
a. Mix coating in designated areas.
b. If mixing areas are not designated, Contractor must propose mix
area to the Engineer for Engineer's acceptance.
2. Thoroughly stir and agitate coating to uniformly smooth consistency
suitable for proper application.
3. Do not reduce, change or use materials except in compliance with
manufacturers written instructions.
4. In all cases, prepare and handle coating to prevent deterioration and
inclusion of foreign matter.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 22 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
D. Application:
1. Test coating on each type of substrate for compatibility and desired results
before proceeding further.
2. Apply coating only under conditions that will ensure finishes free from
blemishes and defects.
3. Remove spillage and splatters on adjacent surfaces so as not to damage
the surface being cleaned.
4. Completed work shall match approved samples, as determined by the
Engineer.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor to provide protection for surfaces painted with epoxy coatings to
prevent chalking.
1. Surfaces showing chalking will not be accepted regardless of condition of
paint film.
B. Maintain Daily Records:
1. Provide the following information during application of each coat of paint
applied:
a. Date, starting time, end time, and all breaks taken by painters.
b. For exterior painting:
1) Sky condition.
2) Wind speed and direction.
c. Air temperature.
d. Relative humidity.
e. Moisture content of substrate prior to each coat.
f. Provisions utilized to maintain work area within manufacturer's
recommended application parameters including temporary heating,
ventilation, cooling, dehumidification and provisions utilized to
mitigate wind blown dust and debris from contaminating the wet
paint film.
g. Surface temperature of substrate to which paint is being applied.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 23 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
2. Provide the following information daily for the paint manufacturer's
recommended curing period:
a. Start date of cure period for each item or area.
b. For exterior painting:
1) Sky conditions.
2) Wind speed and direction.
c. Air temperature, each day.
d. Relative humidity, each day.
e. Dew point temperature, each day.
f. Provisions utilized to protect each item or area and to maintain
areas within manufacturer's recommended curing parameters.
3. Format for daily record to be computer generated.
C. Measure wet coating with wet film thickness gages.
D. Measure coating dry film thickness in accordance with SSPC PA 2 using Mikrotest
gage calibrated against NBS "Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards."
1. Engineer may measure coating thickness at any time during project to
assure conformance with these Specifications.
E. Measure surface temperature of items to be painted with surface temperature gage
specifically designed for such.
F. Measure substrate humidity with humidity gage specifically designed for such.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Clean paint spattered surfaces.
1. Use care not to damage finished surfaces.
B. Upon completion of painting, replace hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures, and
similar items.
C. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding, and debris.
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 24 ISSUED: February 2022
Section 34 80 61 Painting and Protective Coatings For Railroad Bridges
PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.01 MEASUREMENT
Work of this Section is considered incidental to work under other payment items and no
separate measurement and payment will be made to the Contractor for Work of this
Section. Work of this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
supplies, supervision, and incidentals, and doing all work, as shown on the Plans, and as
specified in these Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 34 80 61
SCRRA Standard Specifications 34 80 61 - 25 ISSUED: February 2022
You might also like
- CTMM Standard Specification (Third Edition) 2005 PrintNo ratings yetCTMM Standard Specification (Third Edition) 2005 Print322 pages
- CSX Industrial Sidetrack Manual 063003 PDFNo ratings yetCSX Industrial Sidetrack Manual 063003 PDF57 pages
- California - SCRRA Design - Criteria - Manual - 10.24.14 PDFNo ratings yetCalifornia - SCRRA Design - Criteria - Manual - 10.24.14 PDF219 pages
- Caltrans Design Specis 2022_StdSpecs-A11yNo ratings yetCaltrans Design Specis 2022_StdSpecs-A11y1,338 pages
- 270533 - Raceway and Boxes for Communication Systems for KindergartenNo ratings yet270533 - Raceway and Boxes for Communication Systems for Kindergarten15 pages
- Infrastructure & Pathway Design: 3.1 General ConsiderationsNo ratings yetInfrastructure & Pathway Design: 3.1 General Considerations58 pages
- 2 - Tender No. W.43 - EPC Contract... N at Msigani - PDF Technical & BOQNo ratings yet2 - Tender No. W.43 - EPC Contract... N at Msigani - PDF Technical & BOQ102 pages
- Implementation OF ": Smart Street Lighting"No ratings yetImplementation OF ": Smart Street Lighting"75 pages
- Trafo Differential & Distance Prot. RelaysNo ratings yetTrafo Differential & Distance Prot. Relays16 pages
- General Technical Specification (GTS) FOR Overhead Transmission LinesNo ratings yetGeneral Technical Specification (GTS) FOR Overhead Transmission Lines8 pages
- 2024 Standard Specifications for Roads and StructuresNo ratings yet2024 Standard Specifications for Roads and Structures857 pages
- Underground Power Distribution Systems Design and Construction Standards July 1, 2018No ratings yetUnderground Power Distribution Systems Design and Construction Standards July 1, 2018179 pages
- OmegaFence Omega-Architectural SpecificationsNo ratings yetOmegaFence Omega-Architectural Specifications24 pages
- OCTO-DC-Net Standards and Practices for Comms Environments v1.4_0No ratings yetOCTO-DC-Net Standards and Practices for Comms Environments v1.4_087 pages
- AIA CLF Embodied Carbon Toolkit for Architects Part1No ratings yetAIA CLF Embodied Carbon Toolkit for Architects Part18 pages
- Best Practices to Enhance Drawings and Specifications White PaperNo ratings yetBest Practices to Enhance Drawings and Specifications White Paper3 pages
- Shadow of The Demon Lord - Terrible Beauty Spell CardsNo ratings yetShadow of The Demon Lord - Terrible Beauty Spell Cards56 pages
- The Routledge Companion to Media Sex and Sexuality 1st Edition Clarissa Smith all chapter instant download100% (1)The Routledge Companion to Media Sex and Sexuality 1st Edition Clarissa Smith all chapter instant download55 pages
- Mechanics of Breathing: Human PhysiologyNo ratings yetMechanics of Breathing: Human Physiology50 pages
- An Interactive Approach To Teaching L2 Reading: From The Bottom-UpNo ratings yetAn Interactive Approach To Teaching L2 Reading: From The Bottom-Up65 pages
- iTM/CPS Plus Feature User Guide: November 2021No ratings yetiTM/CPS Plus Feature User Guide: November 202137 pages
- Post-Mining Land Use For The Function of GeotourisNo ratings yetPost-Mining Land Use For The Function of Geotouris7 pages
- Siruseri, Tamil Nadu Case Study: Office Design Semester Vi, Measi80% (5)Siruseri, Tamil Nadu Case Study: Office Design Semester Vi, Measi25 pages
- GPS and Galileo Satellite Coordinates Computation - NavipediaNo ratings yetGPS and Galileo Satellite Coordinates Computation - Navipedia3 pages
